JP2021186144A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: means for displaying an unexecuted reservation display area capable of displaying pieces of unexecuted reservation display information of the number corresponding to the number of pieces of special information acquired by entry of game balls into ball entry means; and means for displaying an already executed reservation display area capable of displaying a predetermined number of pieces of reservation display information corresponding to a game round after execution of game round operation as already executed reservation display information. Display modes of unexecuted reservation display information at least include a first display mode, and a second display mode as a stage over the first display mode. All of the pieces of already executed reservation display information displayed in a predetermined number of already executed reservation display areas are in a second display mode, and can display game operation in a predetermined mode as game round operation when all of the pieces of unexecuted reservation display information displayed in the unexecuted reservation display area are in a first display mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 601

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, the structure, control, etc. are used for the purpose of improving the interest of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, and simplifying the structure. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as production (for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as finding and deterring illegal acts by the player and unauthorized modification of the gaming machine.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-172988

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further for the purpose of improving the interest of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, simplifying the structure, providing a sounder game, and the like. Improvement of technology is desired.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following forms.

[Form] (This form is mainly based on the following twelfth embodiment and its modified example 15).
A means of entering a ball that allows a game ball to enter,
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means,
An acquisition information storage means that can store up to a specific upper limit number of the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means.
The unexecuted hold display means for displaying the unexecuted hold display area capable of displaying the number of unexecuted hold display information corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and the unexecuted hold display means.
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition for each game.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is terminated as one of the game rotation operations, the game rotation control means for controlling the game rotation operation is used. ,
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player after the end of the gaming rotation operation, and the special gaming state generating means.
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition is set from high to low according to the high or low of the possibility. The pending change means suggested by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages, and
A means for limiting the direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in one direction from the lower side to the upper side.
A pre-execution hold display means that displays a pre-execution hold display area capable of displaying a predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game replay operation by the game replay control means as pre-execution hold display information, and a pre-execution hold display means.
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information, at least a first display mode on the lowermost side among the plurality of stages and a second display mode which is a stage higher than the first display mode are at least. Have and
All the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the second display mode, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first. A gaming machine characterized in that, in the case of the display mode of 1, the game motion of a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion.

According to the above form, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as a 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and the display surface which are variable-displayed in a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the pass / fail table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the fall lottery winning / failing table used when executing the fall lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the winning / failing table used when executing the electric accessory opening lottery. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of the voice emission control device and the display control device. It is a timing chart explaining an example of the process when the fall lottery is won in the game times before reaching the guaranteed number of games. It is a timing chart explaining an example of the processing when the big hit is won in the winning lottery in the game times before reaching the guaranteed number of games. In the timing chart explaining an example of processing when it is determined that a reach will occur in the reach determination without winning the fall lottery and not winning the big hit in the winning lottery in the game times before the guaranteed number of games is reached. be. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display surface of the symbol display device at the time of performing a battle effect or result announcement effect. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the battle production. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the result announcement production executed after the battle production. It is a timing chart explaining an example of the process when the fall lottery is won in the game times after reaching the guaranteed number of games. It is a timing chart explaining the processing when the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 did not win the fall lottery in the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games, and won the big hit in the winning lottery. It is a timing chart explaining the processing when the pachinko machine of the comparative example 2 did not win the fall lottery in the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games, and won the big hit in the winning lottery. In the timing chart that explains an example of the processing when the fall lottery is not won in the game times after reaching the guaranteed number of games, the big hit is won in the winning lottery, and the first-fall mode is won in the mode selection lottery. be. In the timing chart that explains an example of the processing when the fall lottery is not won in the game times after reaching the guaranteed number of games, the big hit is won in the winning lottery, and the late falling mode is won in the mode selection lottery. be. A timing chart for explaining an example of processing when it is determined that a reach is generated in the reach determination without winning the fall lottery and not winning the big hit in the winning lottery in the game times after reaching the guaranteed number of games. Is. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a start opening. It is a flowchart which shows the advance determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for thru. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hold information shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows the game state determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the fall determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time setting process before the guaranteed number of games. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time setting process after the guaranteed number of games. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric service support. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service opening / closing control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for game times production. It is a flowchart which shows the game time production setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games. It is a flowchart which shows the process for execution of a game time production. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the hit / fail table for the high probability mode provided in the pachinko machine of the modification 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the mode selection table provided in the pachinko machine of the modification 2. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the decorative symbol which is variable-displayed in the symbol display apparatus, and the display surface of the symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of various counters used for a special drawing lottery, a general drawing lottery, and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the special figure hit / fail determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the special figure type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the special electric opening / closing scenario selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the normal figure hit / fail judgment table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the ordinary figure type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the normal electric opening / closing scenario selection table. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of the voice emission control device and the display control device. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the flow of the process executed in the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a normal drawing start gate. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a special figure start port. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a V winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure fluctuation time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command interrupt processing which is executed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing which is executed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine of the modification of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine of the modification of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine as the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. It is a front view of the game board 30. It is explanatory drawing explaining the delay mechanism 202 and V winning mechanism 210. It is explanatory drawing which shows the liquid crystal display symbol and the display surface 41a which are variable-displayed in a symbol display apparatus 41. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine 10. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the hit / fail table for the 1st start port. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the hit / fail table for the 2nd start port. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the distribution table for the 1st start port. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the distribution table for the 2nd start port. It is explanatory drawing explaining the jackpot type which is decided by the game ball entering the V winning opening (1st V winning opening V1 2nd V winning opening V2). It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the winning / failing table used when executing the electric accessory opening lottery. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. It is explanatory drawing explaining the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the specific suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the process which sets the effect in a game time (also called a game time effect setting process). It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a start opening. It is a flowchart which shows the advance determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for thru. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a V winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hold information shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / closing scenario setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric service support. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed in the sound light side MPU 92. It is a flowchart which shows the process for game times production. It is a flowchart which shows the game time effect pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the game ball distribution mode detection processing. It is explanatory drawing explaining the game ball number count memory area. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in MPU 102 of a display control apparatus 100. It is a flowchart which shows the command interrupt process which is executed in MPU 102 of a display control apparatus 100. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing which is executed in MPU 102 of a display control apparatus 100. It is explanatory drawing explaining the specific suggestion effect which drives a driving accessory. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the arrangement position of the detection sensor. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the modification 5. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the modification 6. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the modification 7. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as a 4th Embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and the display surface which are variable-displayed in a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the pass / fail table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the winning / failing table used when executing the electric accessory opening lottery. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of the voice emission control device and the display control device. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the change of the 1st start opening holding area and the holding digestion area. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the change of the 2nd start opening holding area and the holding digestion area. It is explanatory drawing explaining the display mode of the hold display icon. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state when the petals are displayed on the display surface of a design display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display method of the 1st to 4th kind petals. It is explanatory drawing which shows the behavior of the type 3 petal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the 1st hold display icon when the petals for special 1 and hold 1 move along the target hold arrival trajectory. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mode that the 4th kind petals act on the symbol displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a start opening. It is a flowchart which shows the advance determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for thru. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hold information shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric service support. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service opening / closing control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of entering a ball. It is explanatory drawing explaining the storage area for hold effect. It is a flowchart which shows the parameter setting process for hold effect. It is a flowchart which shows the display level upper limit value setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the upper limit value table. It is a flowchart which shows the game time production setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of change start. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd kind petal effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd kind petal effect setting process for the 1st start opening hold. It is a flowchart which shows the petal effect setting process for special 1 and hold 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for petal orbit lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the petal effect setting process for special 1 and hold 2. It is a flowchart which shows the petal effect setting process for special 1 and hold 3. It is a flowchart which shows the petal effect setting process for special 1 and hold 4. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd kind petal effect setting process for the 2nd start opening hold. It is a flowchart which shows the hold display change setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port hold display change setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start port hold display change setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port hold display change setting process in modification 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the petal display change process. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as a fifth embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display surface of the symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol which is variable display in the symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the pass / fail table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit / fail table for reach determination. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the winning / failing table used when executing the electric accessory opening lottery. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of a voice emission control device and a display control device. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the character system stage. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the non-character stage. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a battle production and a result announcement production. It is a timing chart which shows the pattern which fluctuates / stops, the special reach screen effect, and the display mode of the background image. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the transition of the stage performed in a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mode of a stage transition in a character system stage. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mode of a stage transition in a non-character stage. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a start opening. It is a flowchart which shows the advance determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for thru. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hold information shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric service support. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service opening / closing control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of entering a ball. It is a flowchart which shows the game time production setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern setting process for a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the reach distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern setting process at the time of reach occurrence / disconnection. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern table reference process for super reach / disengagement. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the warrior character lottery table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the warrior character judgment value correspondence table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern table reference process for special reach / disengagement. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern setting process at the time of reach non-occurrence / disengagement. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of change start. It is a flowchart which shows the process for stage production. It is a flowchart which shows the stage transition process in a character system stage. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the stage lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the stage transition process in a non-character stage. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of the voice light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the music data as a background technique, and the performance form thereof. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the data structure of the data stored in the voice data ROM. It is explanatory drawing which shows each structure of the music A first data A1 and music A second data A2. It is explanatory drawing which shows each structure of the music B first data B1 and music B second data B2. It is a timing chart which shows the reproduction procedure about the music A in a sound output LSI 97. It is a timing chart which shows the reproduction procedure about the music B in a sound output LSI 97. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the data about the music A in the reference example, and the performance form. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed in MPU 92 of a voice light emission control apparatus 90. It is a flowchart which shows the process for BGM. It is a flowchart which shows the BGM reproduction start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the BGM continuous reproduction processing. It is a flowchart which shows the reproduction start execution process which is executed in the sound output LSI 97. It is a timing chart which shows the reproduction procedure about the music A by the sound output LSI 97 in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the BGM continuous reproduction processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st time 2nd data reproduction processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd data reproduction processing from the 2nd time onward. It is a flowchart which shows the reproduction start execution process which is executed in the sound output LSI 97. It is explanatory drawing which shows the predetermined period which defines the transmission timing in the modification 5. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in the 7th Embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and the display surface which are variable-displayed in a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the pass / fail table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the winning / failing table for electric accessory opening lottery. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of the voice emission control device and the display control device of the 7th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the power switch of 7th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of a power switch schematically. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of a power switch schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the main MPU of 7th Embodiment executes at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process which the main MPU of 7th Embodiment executes. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process which the main MPU of 7th Embodiment executes. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power-source monitoring process which the main MPU of 7th Embodiment executes. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for the start opening which the main MPU of 7th Embodiment executes. It is a flowchart which shows the destination determination process which the main MPU of 7th Embodiment executes. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a through gate executed by the main MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control process which the main MPU of 7th Embodiment executes. It is a flowchart which shows the hold information shift process which the main MPU of 7th Embodiment executes. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing executed by the main MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit determination process which the main MPU of 7th Embodiment executes. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the fluctuation time executed by the main MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process executed by the main MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening opening / closing process which the main MPU of 7th Embodiment executes. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of the ending period executed by the main MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service support process which the main MPU of 7th Embodiment executes. It is a flowchart which shows the electric combination opening / closing control process which the main MPU of 7th Embodiment executes. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which performs the sound light side MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the activation date / time information storage process which the sound light side MPU of 7th Embodiment executes. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure type determination process which the sound light side MPU of the 7th Embodiment executes. It is a flowchart which shows the activation type determination process which the sound light side MPU of 7th Embodiment executes. It is a flowchart which shows the process which corresponds to the abnormal power failure flag of the sound light side executed by the sound light side MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which the sound light side MPU of the 7th Embodiment executes. It is a flowchart which shows the sound-light side electric power failure processing which the sound-light side MPU of the 7th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the RTC effect processing performed by the sound light side MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the RTC effect execution determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for deferred suggestion effect performed by the sound light side MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the movable object for production provided in the pachinko machine of the modification 1 of the 7th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the movable object for production provided in the pachinko machine of the modification 1 of the 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the main MPU of the modification 12 of 7th Embodiment executes. It is a flowchart which shows the power-source monitoring process which the main MPU of the modification 12 of 7th Embodiment executes. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure type determination process which the sound light side MPU of the modification 12 of 7th Embodiment executes. It is a flowchart which shows the sound-light side electric interruption processing which the sound-light side MPU of the modification 12 of 7th Embodiment performs. 6 is a flowchart showing a power supply monitoring process executed by the main MPU of the modified example 13 of the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure type determination process which the sound light side MPU of the modification 13 of the 7th Embodiment executes. It is a flowchart which shows the sound-light side electric interruption processing which the sound-light side MPU of the modification 13 of the 7th Embodiment performs. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as the 8th Embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the start port unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball when the distribution piece part is in the 1st position Q1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball when the distribution piece part is in the 2nd position Q2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 1st route in a start port unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 2nd route in a start opening unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 3rd route in a start opening unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and the display surface which are variable-displayed in a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the hit / fail table for the 1st start port. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the hit / fail table for the 2nd start port. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit / fail table for reach determination. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the winning / failing table used when executing the electric accessory opening lottery. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of the voice emission control device and the display control device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10. It is explanatory drawing which shows various modes in each of the low probability low support state, the low probability high support state, the high probability high support state, and the high probability low support state. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a start opening. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a fall opening. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing for the 1st start port. It is a flowchart which shows the hold information shift process for the 1st start port. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process for the 1st start port. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the fluctuation time for the 1st start port. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time information acquisition process at the time of a low probability low support state for a 1st start port. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time information acquisition process at the time of a low accuracy high support state for a 1st start port. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time information acquisition processing at the time of a high accuracy high support state for a 1st start port. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time information acquisition process at the time of a high accuracy low support state for a 1st start port. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing for the 2nd start port. It is a flowchart which shows the hold information shift process for the 2nd start port. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process for the 2nd start port. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the fluctuation time for the 2nd start port. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time information acquisition process at the time of a low probability low support state for a 2nd start port. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time information acquisition processing at the time of a low accuracy high support state for a 2nd start port. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time information acquisition process at the time of a high accuracy high support state for a 2nd start port. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time information acquisition process at the time of a high accuracy low support state for a 2nd start port. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / closing scenario setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of opening period flag ON. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of opening / closing processing period flag ON. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of ending period flag ON. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric service support. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the game ball distribution control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of entering a ball. It is a flowchart which shows the game time production setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the display mode switching process. It is a flowchart which shows the game time effect setting process for special 1. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st effect pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern setting process at the time of a low probability low support state for a 1st start port. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern setting process at the time of a low accuracy high support state for a 1st start port. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern setting process at the time of a high accuracy high support state for a 1st start port. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern setting process at the time of a high accuracy low support state for a 1st start port. It is a flowchart which shows the game time effect setting process for special 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd effect pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern setting process at the time of a low probability low support state for a 2nd start port. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern setting process at the time of a low accuracy high support state for a 2nd start port. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern setting process at the time of a high accuracy high support state for a 2nd start port. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern setting process at the time of a high accuracy low support state for a 2nd start port. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command interrupt processing which is executed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing which is executed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the start port unit in the modification. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as a 9th Embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and the display surface which are variable-displayed in a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the hit / fail table for the 1st start port. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the hit / fail table for the 2nd start port. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the winning / failing table for a fall lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the winning / failing table used when executing the electric accessory opening lottery. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of the voice emission control device and the display control device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game in a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a start opening. It is a flowchart which shows the advance determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for thru. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hold information shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fall determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for giving a time saving. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the shutter opening and closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the V prize determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric service support. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service opening / closing control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the game time production setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of change start. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as a tenth embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and the display surface which are variable-displayed in a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the hit / fail table for the 1st start port. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the hit / fail table for the 2nd start port. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the winning / failing table for a fall lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the winning / failing table used when executing the electric accessory opening lottery. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of the voice emission control device and the display control device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a start opening. It is a flowchart which shows the advance determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for thru. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hold information shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fall determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for giving a time saving. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the shutter opening and closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the V prize determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric service support. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service opening / closing control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the game time production setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of change start. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game in the pachinko machine of the modification 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the distribution table for the 1st start port provided in the pachinko machine of the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game in the pachinko machine of the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the hit / fail table (for low probability mode) for the 2nd start port in the modification 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game in the pachinko machine of the modification 3. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the control at the time of transitioning from a high-accuracy high support state to a high-accuracy low support state in the modification 13. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the control at the time of transitioning from a high-accuracy high support state to a high-accuracy low support state in the modification 14. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the control at the time of transitioning from a high-accuracy high support state to a high-accuracy low support state in the modification 15. It is a front view of the game board in the modification 18. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as the eleventh embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and the display surface which are variable-displayed in a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the pass / fail table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the winning / failing table used when executing the electric accessory opening lottery. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of a voice emission control device and a display control device. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the change of the 1st start opening holding area and the holding digestion area. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the change of the 2nd start opening holding area and the holding digestion area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the case where a big hit is included in the special 1 hold in a normal time. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation display and the omen notice effect (the first time) about the special 1 hold 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation display and the omen notice effect (the second time) about the special 1 hold 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation display and the omen notice effect (third time) about the special 1 hold 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the appearance number of the precursor notice effect and the execution schedule effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation display, the reach effect, and the stop display about the special 1 hold 4. It is a time chart which shows a series of productions about special 1 hold 1 to special 1 hold 4 on a time axis. It is explanatory drawing which shows the basic concept of the hold continuous production adopted in the pachinko machine 10 of 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which conceptually shows the state of the special 1 hold in case 1. FIG. It is a time chart explaining the effect about the special 1 hold executed by the special 1 hold continuous effect process in case 1, and the effect about the special 2 hold executed by the special 2 hold effect process. It is explanatory drawing which conceptually shows the state of the special 1 hold in case 2. It is a time chart explaining the effect about the special 1 hold executed by the special 1 hold continuous effect process in case 2, and the effect about the special 2 hold executed by the special 2 hold effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the color of the same color as a design, and the effect to be executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the series of productions executed in the game times about special 2 hold 1. It is a time chart which shows the comparative example 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which conceptually shows the state of the special 1 hold in case 3. It is a time chart explaining the effect about the special 1 hold executed by the special 1 hold continuous effect process, and the effect about the special 2 hold executed by the special 2 hold effect process in Case 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of charge production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the series of productions executed in the game times about special 2 hold 1. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a start opening. It is a flowchart which shows the advance determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for thru. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hold information shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric service support. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service opening / closing control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the game time production setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of change start. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing. It is explanatory drawing which conceptually shows the state of the special 1 hold in the modification 10. It is a time chart explaining the effect about the special 1 hold executed by the special 1 hold continuous effect process and the effect about the special 2 hold executed by the special 2 hold effect process in the modification 10. 11 is a time chart for explaining the effect of the special 1 hold executed by the special 1 hold continuous effect process and the effect of the special 2 hold executed by the special 2 hold effect process in the modification 11. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as a twelfth embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and the display surface which are variable-displayed in a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the pass / fail table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the winning / failing table used when executing the electric accessory opening lottery. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of the voice emission control device and the display control device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display surface which the 1st hold relation information is displayed in the sub area. It is explanatory drawing which shows how the unexecuted hold display area, the variable execution hold display area, and the already execution hold display area change with the progress of a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display surface which the 2nd hold relation information is displayed in the sub area. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the hold change pattern lottery table for a reference condition. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the change of display color by hold change notice. It is explanatory drawing explaining the data structure of the special 1 hold effect storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the process for the already execution hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the process for removing the same color at the time of disengagement. It is explanatory drawing which shows how each hold display area changes in case 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows how each hold display area changes in case 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows how each hold display area changes in case 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows how each hold display area changes in case 4. It is explanatory drawing which shows how each hold display area changes in case 5. It is explanatory drawing which shows how each hold display area changes in case 6. It is explanatory drawing which shows how each hold display area changes in case 7. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a start opening. It is a flowchart which shows the advance determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for thru. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hold information shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric service support. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service opening / closing control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the game time production setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of change start. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows how each hold display area changes in case 8. It is explanatory drawing which shows how each hold display area changes in case A. It is explanatory drawing which shows how each hold display area changes in case A. It is explanatory drawing which shows how each hold display area changes in case A. It is explanatory drawing which shows how each hold display area changes in case B. It is explanatory drawing which shows how each hold display area changes in case B. It is explanatory drawing which shows how each hold display area changes in case B.

Embodiments of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
<< 1 >> 1st embodiment (mainly corresponding to the following << Z >> feature lA group to feature lH group):
<< 2 >> Second embodiment (mainly corresponding to the following << Z >> feature mA group to feature mR group):
<< 3 >> Third embodiment (mainly corresponding to the following << Z >> feature nA group to feature nN group):
<< 4 >> Fourth embodiment (mainly corresponding to the following << Z >> feature oA group to feature oJ group):
<< 5 >> Fifth embodiment (mainly corresponding to the following << Z >> feature pA group to feature pL group):
<< 6 >> 6th embodiment (mainly corresponding to the following << Z >> feature qA group to feature qM group):
<< 7 >> 7th embodiment (mainly corresponding to the following << Z >> feature rA group to feature rV group):
<< 8 >> Eighth embodiment (mainly corresponding to the following << Z >> feature sA group to feature sV group):
<< 9 >> 9th embodiment (mainly corresponding to the following << Z >> feature tA group to feature tP group):
<< 10 >> 10th embodiment (mainly corresponding to the following << Z >> feature uA group to feature uU group and feature uIA group to feature uIM group):
<< 11 >> 11th embodiment (mainly corresponding to the following << Z >> feature vA group to feature vR group):
<< 12 >> 12th embodiment (mainly corresponding to the following << Z >> feature wA group to feature wT group):
<< Y >> Application to other configurations:
<< Z >> About the feature group extracted from each of the above embodiments:

<< 1 >> First embodiment:
<< 1-1 >> Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as the first embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a voice emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. Illuminations are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect of the effect by lighting or blinking at each game round performed by the pachinko machine 10, when a big hit is won, when a reach occurs, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two plate glasses is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. The details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls rented from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball stored in the upper plate 20 is supplied to the game ball launch mechanism included in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launch mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores the game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged to the outside from the lower plate 21.

An effect operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game effect reflecting the operation.

An operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “right side”). When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and an operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c that detects the rotation operation amount of the above by the change of the electric resistance is provided. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes according to the rotation operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball launch button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “left side”). When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined firing intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the player's operation handle 25. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the front view of the game board and flows down to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can make a so-called "right-handed". The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26 to launch the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26. Can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing. For example, a seal is attached to a place that can be opened and closed, and the characters such as "open" appear when the board box is opened.

The second control unit 52 includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90. The design display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays a design or an image for directing.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The launch control device 80 launches a game ball having a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player when an instruction to launch the game ball is input from the main control device 60. Controls the ball launch mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a slope connected below the tank 54 and gently inclined so that the game balls flow to the downstream side. The game balls are supplied from the tank rail 55, the case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, and the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power supply switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies the electric power required for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85. By turning the power switch 88 on and off, the supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and the non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding the game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicular to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. The game balls that have entered each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are placed in the individual openings formed in the game board 30. Be guided. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 has a special figure unit 37, a normal figure unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

As shown in the figure, the general winning opening 32 is an entry opening member that forms an entry opening into which a game ball can enter, and a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 2).

The first starting port 33 is an entry port member that forms an entry port into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is an entry port member that forms an entry port into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 is provided with a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to execute a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric service is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric service open state in which the electric service is opened in a predetermined mode. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second starting port 34. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34. In this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and also includes an opening / closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening / closing door 36b is normally closed so that the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60, when a big hit is won and the opening / closing execution mode is entered, the opening / closing door 36b repeats an open state and a closed state in which the game ball can win a prize. The opening / closing execution mode shifts to the case where a big hit is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by entering the ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and the opening / closing door 36b is in the open state. It is a mode that repeats the closed state and the closed state. That is, as a result of the winning lottery based on the entry into the first starting port 33, if a big hit is won, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 can enter the large winning opening 36a. Similarly, as a result of the winning lottery based on the entry into the second starting port 34, even if a big hit is won, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 can enter the large winning opening 36a. .. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

An out opening 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and a game ball that has not entered the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, or the variable winning device 36 is out. It is discharged from the game area PA through the mouth 43.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. The first symbol display unit 37a is a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. , The variable display of the first symbol is performed. When the lottery is completed, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to display the stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying the second symbol. The second symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display unit 37b is used as a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. , The second symbol is changed and displayed. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display to display the stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b to the stop display is also referred to as the variable time. Call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a to the stop display is also referred to as the first variable time, and is displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first hold display unit 37c and a second hold display unit 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won a prize in the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of holds of the first start port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won a prize in the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second hold display unit 37d displays the number of holds of the second start port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on.

The normal drawing unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, the normal drawing unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode as the display mode of the light emitting display. When the electric accessory opening lottery is completed, the normal drawing unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode, or displays corresponding to the number of round games. The round game opens and closes until either the predetermined upper limit duration elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the open / close execution mode is started, and ends when the open / close execution mode ends and a new game round starts.

The special figure unit 37, the normal figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being composed of a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp, and for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. It may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery result, such as a CRT or a dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The symbol display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. conduct. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the display effect triggered by entering the ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, but also performs a display effect in the open / close execution mode that shifts when a big hit is won. .. Hereinafter, the details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol and a display surface 41a that are variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol that is variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the symbol indicating the numbers 1 to 8 is variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. As the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol having a pattern such as a character may be adopted for each of the symbols showing the numbers 1 to 8.

FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram showing a display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 4A are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row is periodically arranged from top to bottom or from bottom. A variable display that scrolls up is performed. As shown in FIG. 4B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L. Specifically, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity is started. Then, each scrolling symbol switches from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. When the variation display of the symbol is completed and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit winning, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the effective line L. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L. The mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, and the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol row, and the symbol of each symbol row. Various modes such as numbers can be adopted as the mode of variable display of the symbol.

Here, "game times" means from the start of the variation display of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to the end of the variation display and the stop display, until the stop display ends. That is, one unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. be. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display unit is used for each game. After the segment display is variablely displayed on either 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device is used for each game. In 41, after the predetermined symbol string is variablely displayed, the symbol string is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game is also referred to as a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the predetermined lottery result, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, the first reserved display area Ds1 and the second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first hold display area Ds1, the number of holds based on the entry of the ball into the first start port 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, the number of holds based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is four, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 3, a pair of nails (so-called life nails and belly button nails) 42 (42a, 42b) are provided above the first starting port 33. The probability of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 changes depending on the distance between the pair of nails 42a and 42b.

<< 1-2 >> Electrical configuration of gaming machines:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 temporarily stores various data and the like when executing a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a program recorded in the ROM 63. It is provided with a RAM 64 which is a memory for storing. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may have a part of the function which MPU 62 has. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown), respectively. The payout control device 70 and the power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a DC stable 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, the power supply device 85 includes a capacitor (not shown), and when a power failure occurs or the power supply switch 88 (FIG. 2) is turned off, power supply to each device is continued for a predetermined period. do.

Further, various detection sensors 67a to 67e are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. Specifically, it is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided in various winning openings such as a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each entry port based on signals from various detection sensors 67a to 67e, and the game ball is a through gate. It is determined whether or not the vehicle has passed 35. Further, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the second starting opening 34, and also executes an electric accessory opening lottery based on the entry of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

The output port of the main control board 61 includes a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , Is connected to the main display unit 45. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the electric accessory opening is won as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the main display unit 45. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the open / close execution mode and the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode is determined, the display control of the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is executed.

Further, the payout control device 70 and the voice emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry to the general winning opening 32 is specified, the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry to the first starting opening 33 is performed. When is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when the entry to the second starting port 34 is specified, one game ball is paid out. The prize ball command corresponding to is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. Further, the launch control device 80 is connected to the operation handle 25 and the game ball launch button 26.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the voice emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, control of the display control device 100 is performed. Further, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the voice emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 and the type of the combination of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. , Whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the advance notice effect executed in each game round, etc. are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time when the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 wins a lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, sets the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting jackpot types such as probabilistic jackpot results and normal jackpot results. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate reach when the symbol sequence displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displaced and varied. The fall random number counter CF is used for the fall lottery as to whether or not to end the high probability mode (also referred to as a high probability gaming state). The "high probability mode" is a gaming state started by winning a probabilistic jackpot, and the probability of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is relatively higher than that in the low probability mode.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, the fluctuation type counter CS is used when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45, and the symbol display device 41. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CF, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The hold information storage area 64b is provided with a first hold area Ra and a second hold area Rb. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF at the timing of entering the ball are stored in the reserved information storage area. It is stored in the first holding area Ra of 64b in chronological order. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF at the timing of entering the ball are the second in the reserved information storage area 64b. 2 It is stored in the holding area Rb in chronological order.

The details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 1199, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is set in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. It is stored, and when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first hold area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is matched with the jackpot. It is determined whether or not it becomes. Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second hold area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c and collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. Whether or not it will be a big hit is determined.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is such that the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. By doing so, the process moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not the hit is a big hit.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Further, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. .. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big hit. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value, for example.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. It is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the ball. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second hold area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. However, when the result of the winning lottery becomes a big hit and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some of the symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 may have a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot for some of the symbols. It is a display state in which the symbols are displayed and the remaining symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 4B, the symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. In the situation where the reach line is formed and the reach line is formed, the symbol is varied and displayed in the symbol row Z2 to reach the reach. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, in the state where the reach line is formed, the variable display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. A combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when the reach effect is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to display a notice using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

Next, the details of the fall random number counter CF will be described. The fall random number counter CF is used when executing a fall lottery for determining whether or not to end the high probability mode in a gaming state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode. If the fall lottery is won, the lottery mode in the game round is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

The fall random number counter CF is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, reach the maximum, and then return to 0. The fall random number counter CF is periodically updated and stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. Specifically, the updated value of the fall random number counter CF is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the game ball enters the second start port 34. The update value of the fall random number counter CF is stored in the second hold area Rb of the RAM 64 at the timing. Then, the value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb is moved to the execution area AE and then stored in the fall lottery table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 (the hit / fail table). It is collated with the fall lottery winning / failing table), and it is decided whether or not to end the high probability mode.

Next, the details of the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 62 to determine the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value, for example.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, the details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric service holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 64d moves to the electric service execution area 64e, and then the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 in the electric service execution area 64e. A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory opening lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state. Specifically, in the electric service execution area 64e, the winning / failing table (winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery) stored in the accessory lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 are It is collated and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state.

It should be noted that at least one of the acquired value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4, and the value of the fall random number counter CF is the special information in the present invention. Corresponds to. Further, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the first hold area Ra and the second hold area Rb is held. Also called information.

Next, the pass / fail table will be described. The hit / fail table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when a winning lottery is performed based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode set as a lottery mode for the winning lottery. At the time of the winning lottery in the probability mode, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the pass / fail table. FIG. 7A shows a hit / miss table for the low probability mode (for the low probability mode), and FIG. 7B shows a hit / miss table for the high probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 7A, five values 0 to 4 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the hit / fail table for the low probability mode. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values of 0 to 4 are out of the range. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7B, 16 values from 0 to 15 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the hit / fail table for the high probability mode. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (16 to 1199) other than the 16 values of 0 to 15 are out of the range. As described above, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / fail table for the low probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / miss table for the high probability mode. Included in the group. However, as a result of the winning lottery, if the probability of winning the jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary.

Although it is not adopted in the winning / failing table in this embodiment, a "small hit" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

The "small hit" is a result of success or failure that triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode in which the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened / closed, but does not trigger the transition in both the lottery mode and the support mode. .. On the other hand, "off" is a result of success or failure that does not trigger the transition of the open / close execution mode, and also does not trigger the transition of the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three modes or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode of winning lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends (3) The electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (1) open / close execution mode, the frequency of winning the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode The high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode can be set so that is relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 sec elapses or to the opening / closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number of balls entered is 10. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed twice from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec elapses or the ball enters the opening / closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening / closing door 36b at one time is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening / closing door 36b once is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode in which the low frequency winning mode is applied, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur. However, even in the open / close execution mode related to the low frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the winning of the game ball can occur.

The number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the number of opening limits for one opening are determined by winning the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the frequency of occurrence of the above is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening / closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of openings and closings than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is long, or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that the variable winning device 36 does not substantially win a prize.

The pachinko machine 10 has, as a mode of the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the above-mentioned (2) opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a winning / losing table for high probability as a winning / failing table, and a winning / losing table. It is possible to set a low probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a winning / failing table for low probability. As explained with reference to FIG. 7, the case where the winning lottery is performed using the high-probability winning / failing table is compared with the case where the winning lottery is performed using the low-probability winning / failing table, and the big hit is won. There is a high probability of doing so.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening / closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 continues to launch the game ball in the same manner with respect to the game area PA. The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are used so that the frequency with which the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the above-mentioned situations. Can be set.

Specifically, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the one-time opening time of the electric accessory 34a may be set longer than that in the low-frequency support mode when the electric combination opening is won.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electric combination open is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode. May be good. Further, the electric accessory 34a may be configured to have a long opening time once. In addition, when the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times in the high frequency support mode, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is It may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory opening lottery to the next electric accessory opening lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. You may.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary gaming state that assists in the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the big hit type counter C2 is used to sort the big hit types. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 8A shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 8B shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to at the time of a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is to the second start port 34. It is referred to at the time of the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball. Both distribution tables function as a reference table for sorting jackpot types, but in the present embodiment, they also function as a reference table for sorting the first drop mode and the second drop mode in the mode selection lottery. The details of the mode selection lottery will be described later.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. 8A, the distribution table for the first starting port has a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. A 16R probability variation jackpot, an 8R probability variation jackpot, and an 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot, the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening / closing execution mode (hereinafter, simply "lottery mode"). (Also called) is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is a high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot is that the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the open / close execution mode is different, the 16R probability variation jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R probability variation jackpot is 8. It is a round (8 rounds).

In the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends is the low probability mode, and the support after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is a big hit that the mode becomes a high frequency support mode. The number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening / closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds).

In the distribution table for the first starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 64" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "65 to 89" corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot. "90-99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, three types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the mode of the jackpot is diversified. When comparing these three types of jackpots, the degree of advantage for the player is highest for the 16R probability variation jackpot, next for the 8R probability variation jackpot, and finally for the 8R normal jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different advantages for the player in this way, it is possible to suppress the monotonicization of the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 8B, the distribution table for the second starting port has a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. A 16R probability variation jackpot, an 8R probability variation jackpot, and an 8R normal jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 74" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "75 to 89" corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot. "90-99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won is the case where the jackpot is won based on the entry into the first starting port 33 and the second. It is different from the case where the big hit is won based on the entry into the starting port 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the type of jackpot set in the distribution table for the first starting port and the type of jackpot set in the distribution table for the second starting port are the same. However, instead of this, a different configuration may be used. Further, the types of jackpots defined by each distribution table do not have to be limited to three types, and may be, for example, four types including a 16R normal jackpot, two types, or a number of five or more types. Further, the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening / closing execution mode is not limited to 8R and 16R, and may be other times such as 4R and 5R.

In addition, if the result is a loss in the winning lottery, the opening / closing execution mode is not performed, and the lottery mode and the support mode are not changed. In the distribution of the types of jackpots, when 16 probability variation jackpots or 8R probability variation jackpots are obtained, the lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the high probability mode, as described above. The state continues until the next big win in the winning lottery or winning in the fall lottery.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to perform the jackpot type. Further, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to cause the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b to stop and display the segment display. Determine the display mode. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the fall lottery winning / failing table used when executing the fall lottery. As shown in FIG. 9, three values of 0, 1, and 2 are set as the values of the fall random number counter CF that is won in the fall lottery in the fall lottery winning / failing table. 97 values from 3 to 99 are set as the values of the falling random number counter CF that is out of order. That is, in the game times of the high probability mode, the probability of falling by winning the fall lottery, ending the high probability mode and becoming the low probability mode is 3/100, and the probability of losing the fall lottery and continuing the high probability mode is It is 97/100. In addition, in this embodiment, the fall lottery is not executed in the game times of the low probability mode.

FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a winning / failing table (winning / failing table for electric accessory opening lottery) used when executing the electric accessory opening lottery.

FIG. 10A shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 10 (a), in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode), two electric accessory opening counters C4, which are the electric accessory opening winning counters, are 0 and 1. The value is set. 464 values of 2 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is out of alignment. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening is won in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 10B shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 10B, in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode), 462 electric accessory opening counters C4, which are the electric accessory opening winning counters, are set to 0 to 461. The value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is out of alignment. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening is won in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second starting port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. ..

<< 1-3 >> Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configurations of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Some configurations of the power supply device 85 (FIG. 5) and the like are omitted. The MPU 92 is mounted on the voice emission control board 91 provided in the voice emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element having a built-in CPU, ROM 93, RAM 94, interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data input / output circuit, and the like.

Various control programs, fixed value data, tables, etc. executed by the MPU 92 are stored in the ROM 93. For example, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the ROM 93. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 60 and an effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and a display control device 100 is connected to the output side.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the voice emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 102.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio emission control device 90 are the sound light side MPU 92 and the sound light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound / light side RAM 94 are also referred to, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as a display side MPU 102.

<< 1-4 >> Outline of processing by the gaming machine:
Next, an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after shifting to the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the number of games reaches a predetermined guaranteed number of games. The "guaranteed number of games" is the number of games guaranteed to be continuously executed in the high frequency support mode, for example, 100 times. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, after shifting to the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is guaranteed up to 100 times, which is the guaranteed number of games. After the guaranteed number of games exceeds 100, if the low probability mode is set as the lottery mode at that time, the support mode is shifted from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. Even after the number of games played in the high-frequency support mode reaches 100, if the high-probability mode is continued as the lottery mode at that time, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode.

FIG. 12 is a timing chart illustrating an example of processing when a fall lottery is won in the game times before the guaranteed number of games is reached. FIG. 12A shows a state of the lottery mode and a state of the support mode. In FIG. 12, the numbers shown in [] (for example, [1] and [60]) indicate the number of times the game has been executed since the high frequency support mode was started.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a probabilistic jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and then the high frequency support mode. If the fall lottery is won in the game times (60 times in the illustrated example) before the number of games has reached the guaranteed number of games since the start of the game, the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. Then, from the 60th game round, the winning lottery is executed in the low probability mode. On the other hand, regarding the support mode, even if the high-probability mode ends and the high-probability mode shifts to the low-probability mode after winning the fall lottery in the 60th game round, 100 after the high-frequency support mode is started. The high frequency support mode is continued until the game round to be executed is reached.

FIG. 12B shows each state of the effect, the lottery mode, and the support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in the 60th game round in which the fall lottery is won. In this example, up to the 60th game round (1 to 59 times), neither the fall lottery nor the winning lottery nor the reach lottery has been won. Therefore, up to the 59th game round, the winning lottery in each game round Performs a normal production (also called a normal production) that announces the result of the lottery or the notice of the result. Then, in the 60th game round in which the fall lottery is won, for example, a battle effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a battle effect) in which the player-side character and the enemy-side character confront each other is executed.

The battle effect is an effect executed before the result announcement effect of announcing the lottery result of the fall lottery and the winning lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, three types of battle effects are prepared: a normal battle effect, a life-and-death battle effect, and a dominant battle effect. It is suggested that the normal battle production corresponds to one of a result that is advantageous to the player (win), a result that is disadvantageous to the player (defeat), and a result that cannot be said to be advantageous or disadvantageous to the player (draw). It is a production. The life-and-death battle production is a production that suggests that the result is either favorable to the player (victory) or unfavorable to the player (defeat). The dominant battle effect is an effect that suggests that the result is either advantageous to the player (win) or not advantageous or disadvantageous to the player (draw). In the game times before the guaranteed number of games is reached, a normal battle effect is executed as a battle effect. That is, in the case of the example of FIG. 12B, a normal battle effect is executed as a battle effect.

Then, after executing the battle effect, the result notification effect of notifying the lottery result of the fall lottery and the winning lottery is executed. In the result notification effect, the effect corresponding to the lottery result of the fall lottery and the winning lottery is executed. Specifically, if the player wins the fall lottery and does not win the big hit in the winning lottery, the player-side character is defeated. Regardless of the lottery result of the fall lottery, if a big hit is won in the winning lottery, the winning effect that the player-side character wins is executed. If a reach occurs without winning the fall lottery and without winning the big hit in the winning lottery, a draw effect is executed in which the player-side character and the enemy-side character are drawn. In the case of the example of FIG. 12B, since the fall lottery was won in the 60th game round, the defeat effect is executed as the result notification effect.

As a result of winning the fall lottery in the 60th game round, the timing of shifting from the high probability mode to the low probability mode coincides with the timing when the 60th game round won in the fall lottery starts. There is. That is, when the fall lottery is won in the game round executed in the 60th time, the lottery mode immediately shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. As for the support mode, as described above, the high frequency support mode is continued.

FIG. 13 is a timing chart illustrating an example of processing when a big hit is won in a winning lottery in a game number before the guaranteed number of games is reached.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a winning lottery is used to win a probabilistic jackpot, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and then the high frequency support mode starts. If the number of games played is before the guaranteed number of games is reached (60 times in the example shown in the figure) and a big hit is won in the winning lottery, the 60th game is finished and the open / close execution mode is set. The lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode at the start timing (that is, the timing immediately after the victory result notification effect is completed). On the other hand, as for the support mode, the high-frequency support mode is changed to the low-frequency support mode at the timing when the 60th game round is completed and the open / close execution mode is started. That is, when the guaranteed number of games has not been reached, both the lottery mode and the support mode are reset to the lower side at the timing when the game times won by the jackpot end and the open / close execution mode starts.

Regarding the production, in the example of FIG. 13, up to the 60th game round (1 to 59 times), since neither the fall lottery nor the winning lottery nor the reach lottery was won, the normal production is performed up to the 59th game round. To execute. Then, in the 60th game round in which the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, a battle effect and a result notification effect for notifying that the jackpot is won in the winning lottery are executed. As explained earlier, in the game times before the guaranteed number of games is reached, a normal battle effect is executed, which is a production that suggests that the battle is one of victory, defeat, and draw. Will be done. That is, in the case of the example of FIG. 13, a normal battle effect is executed as a battle effect.

FIG. 14 shows the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in which the number of games before the guaranteed number of games is reached, the player does not win the fall lottery and does not win the big hit in the winning lottery, and the reach (so-called out-of-reach) is determined. ) Is a timing chart for explaining an example of processing when it is determined to occur. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a probabilistic jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and then. , The number of games after the high frequency support mode was started before the number of games reached the guaranteed number of games (60 times in the example shown in the figure), the fall lottery was not won, and the big hit was not won in the winning lottery. In addition, FIG. 14 shows a process when it is determined in the reach determination that a reach (out-of-reach) occurs.

In the 60th game, which was determined to generate a reach (out-of-reach) in the reach judgment without winning the fall lottery and not winning the big hit in the winning lottery, either win, defeat, or draw. A normal battle effect that can suggest that the above is applicable is executed, and then a draw effect in which the player-side character does not win or lose is executed as a result notification effect. In the game times where the fall lottery was not won and the big hit was not won in the winning lottery, the lottery mode maintains the high probability mode and the support mode maintains the high frequency support mode regardless of the occurrence of reach. do.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing a display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 when the above-mentioned battle effect or result notification effect is being executed. When the battle effect or the result notification effect is executed, the display surface 41a is divided into a first display area 41aS and a second display area 41aL. Then, in the first display area 41aS, the variable display and the stop display of the symbol are executed. Specifically, among the unit game times, the variable display of the symbol is executed during the variable time, and the stop display of the symbol is executed during the stop time. On the other hand, in the second display area 41aL, a battle effect or a result notification effect is executed.

FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a battle effect. FIG. 16A shows an example of a normal battle effect, FIG. 16B shows an example of a life-and-death battle effect, and FIG. 16C shows an example of a dominant battle effect. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a battle effect, an image (moving image) in which a female character on the player side and a male character on the enemy side confront each other is displayed, and this image is for each type of battle effect. It is different. In the life-and-death battle shown in FIG. 16 (b), the swords possessed by both characters are larger than in the case of the normal battle shown in FIG. 16 (a), and the image suggests that the result of the battle is only victory or defeat. ing. In the dominant battle shown in FIG. 16 (c), the sword of the female character on the player side is larger than the sword of the male character on the enemy side, the player side is dominant, and the result of the battle is only victory or draw. It is an image that suggests (that is, there is no loss). In each battle effect, the images shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C are displayed in the second display area 41aL of the display surface 41a, and the sound and light associated with the images are transmitted to the speaker 46 and various types. Output to the lamp 47.

The above-mentioned images of the normal battle production, the life-and-death battle production, and the superior battle production are merely examples, and are not limited to these. In this embodiment, the overall composition of each battle production is that the female character on the player side and the male character on the enemy side confront each other, and only the sword possessed by the character is different. Instead of this, the overall composition may be completely different depending on the type of battle production. In short, the normal battle production is a production that can suggest that the result of the battle corresponds to either victory, defeat, or a draw, and the life-and-death battle production is a production in which the result of the battle is victory or defeat. It is a production that can suggest that it corresponds to, and the superior battle production is a production that can suggest that the result of the battle corresponds to either victory or draw, what kind of production is each. It can also be an embodiment. Furthermore, even if the above-mentioned suggestions cannot be obtained, what kind of production mode should be used for each of the normal battle production, the life-and-death battle production, and the superior battle production as long as the productions are different from each other. You can also. The reason why the normal battle production, the life-and-death battle production, and the superior battle production are different from each other is to change the sense of urgency and expectation given to the player depending on the type of battle production. If it is not desired, the normal battle production, the life-and-death battle production, and the superior battle production can each have the same production content.

FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the result notification effect executed after the battle effect. FIG. 17A shows a winning effect as a result notification effect, FIG. 17B shows a defeat effect as a result notification effect, and FIG. 17C shows a draw effect as a result notification effect. In the victory effect, as shown in FIG. 17A, an image (moving image) in which the female character on the player side is pleased with the victory is displayed in the second display area 41aL (FIG. 15) of the display surface 41a, and the image is displayed. The sound and light accompanying the above are output to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47. In the example of FIG. 13 in which the big hit is won in the winning lottery, the winning effect is executed as the result notification effect.

In the defeat effect, as shown in FIG. 17B, an image (moving image) in which the female character on the player side is sad due to defeat is displayed in the second display area 41aL of the display surface 41a, and the sound accompanying the image is displayed. And light is output to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47. In the example of FIG. 12 in which the fall lottery is won, the defeat effect is executed as the result notification effect.

In the draw effect, as shown in FIG. 17 (c), an image (moving image) informing that the female character on the player side is not defeated is displayed in the second display area 41aL (FIG. 15) of the display surface 41a. The sound and light associated with the image are output to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47. In the game times before the number of games after the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games, the game times in which the reach occurred without winning the fall lottery and not winning the big hit in the winning lottery. As a result notification effect, a draw effect is executed. In addition, each of the victory effect, the defeat effect, and the draw effect can be replaced with other images (moving images) instead of the images (moving images) shown in FIGS. 17A to 17C. In short, the victory effect can be any image as long as it can announce that the result is advantageous to the player, and the defeat effect can be an image that can announce that the result is disadvantageous to the player. Any image can be used as long as it is an image that can announce that the draw effect is a result that cannot be said to be advantageous or disadvantageous to the player.

Next, in the game times after reaching the guaranteed number of games, the case where the fall lottery is won and the case where the big hit is won in the winning lottery will be described.

FIG. 18 is a timing chart illustrating an example of processing when a fall lottery is won in the game times after reaching the guaranteed number of games. In FIG. 18A, a probabilistic jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and then the high frequency support mode starts. In the game times (120 times in the example shown) after the number of games reaches the guaranteed number of games, the lottery mode is changed to the low probability mode and the support mode is changed to the low frequency support mode. It shows the case of migration. Even if the fall lottery is won in the 120th game round, the lottery result in the fall lottery is reflected in the lottery mode of the winning lottery in the game round, as in the case of winning the fall lottery in the 60th game round. .. That is, in the example of FIG. 18A, in the 120th game round, the fall lottery is won and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. Then, from the 120th game round, the winning lottery is executed in the low probability mode.

As for the support mode, as described above, after shifting to the high frequency support mode, when the number of games reaches the guaranteed number of games (100 times), the mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. However, even if the number of games played in the high-frequency support mode reaches 100, if the high-probability mode is continued as the lottery mode at that time, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode. To. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 18A, when the fall lottery is won in the 120th game round, the high probability mode is continued until the 120th game round is reached, so that the high frequency support mode is continued. Has been done. Then, in the 120th game round, the fall lottery is won, and as the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode, the support mode also shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

FIG. 18B shows each state of the effect, the lottery mode, and the support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in the 120th game round in which the fall lottery is won. In this example, up to the 120th game round (1 to 119 times), neither the fall lottery nor the winning lottery has been won. Therefore, until the 120th game round, the result of the winning lottery in each game round is announced. Or perform a normal effect (also called a normal effect) to announce the lottery result. Then, in the 120th game round in which the fall lottery is won, a battle effect is executed. Here, as the battle effect, the life-and-death battle effect (see FIG. 16B) described above is executed.

Then, after executing the life-and-death battle effect, the result notification effect of notifying the lottery result of the fall lottery and the winning lottery is executed. In the result notification effect, the effect corresponding to the lottery result of the fall lottery and the winning lottery is executed. Specifically, if the player wins the fall lottery and does not win the big hit in the winning lottery, the defeat effect in which the player-side character is defeated is executed as shown in FIG. 17 (b). When a big hit is won in the winning lottery, the winning effect shown in FIG. 17A in which the player-side character wins is executed regardless of the result of the falling lottery. In the case of FIG. 18B, since the fall lottery was won in the 120th game round and the big hit was not won in the winning lottery, the defeat effect is executed as the result notification effect.

As a result of winning the fall lottery in the 120th game round, the timing of shifting from the high probability mode to the low probability mode coincides with the timing when the 120th game round won in the fall lottery starts. There is. That is, when the fall lottery is won in the 120th game round, the lottery mode immediately shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. Further, as the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. The timing at which the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode is almost the same as the timing at which the lottery mode shifts to the low-probability mode. Therefore, the mode shifts to the low frequency support mode almost at the same time as the timing when the 120th game round is started.

Next, the processing when a big hit is won in the winning lottery in the game times after reaching the guaranteed number of games will be described. Hereinafter, prior to the description of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the processing executed by the pachinko machines of Comparative Example 1 and Comparative Example 2 will be described.

FIG. 19 is a timing chart illustrating a process in which the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 does not win the fall lottery in the game rounds after reaching the guaranteed number of games, but wins the big hit in the winning lottery. Specifically, in FIG. 19, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, a probability variation jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode is changed to the high probability mode and the support mode is changed to the high frequency support mode. After the transition, after the number of games since the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games (120 times in the example shown in the figure), the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the opening / closing is executed. The case where the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode and the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode at the start of the mode is shown.

In the 120th game round in which the big hit is won in the winning lottery without winning the fall lottery, a battle effect is executed, and then a victory effect in which the player-side character wins is executed as a result notification effect. Then, the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode at the timing when the 120th game round in which the jackpot is won ends and the open / close execution mode starts (that is, the timing when the winning result notification effect ends). At the same time, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. That is, both the lottery mode and the support mode are reset to the lower side at the timing when the game round in which the jackpot is won ends and the open / close execution mode starts.

Here, the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 wins the fall lottery in the game times after reaching the guaranteed number of games, and when the big hit is not won in the winning lottery, the present implementation is performed in the lottery mode and the support mode. It is assumed that the same operation as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the form, that is, the operation shown in FIG. 18 is performed. Comparing FIG. 18 (b) with FIG. 19, it can be seen that the mode of change in the support mode is different between the two in the period from the start to the end of the 120th game round. During this period, the fall lottery was not won, and when the big hit was won in the winning lottery, the high frequency support mode was set as shown in FIG. 19, whereas the falling lottery was won and the big hit was won in the winning lottery. When not, the low frequency support mode is set as shown in FIG. 18 (b). Therefore, assuming the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 that executes both the process shown in FIG. 18B and the process shown in FIG. 19, the player is required to perform the result notification effect before the result notification effect is executed. In addition, by confirming whether or not the high-frequency support mode has ended and the low-frequency support mode has been entered from the open / closed state of the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 3), has the fall lottery been won in the 120th game round? You can recognize whether or not.

Specifically, when the player can confirm that the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 3) stops the opening / closing operation in the 120th game round before the result notification effect is executed. Assuming that the high-frequency support mode ends and the mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode at the timing when the 120th game round starts, it can be predicted that the fall lottery was won in the 120th game round. As a result, the player can predict the type of result notification effect to be executed after the battle effect is being executed. In other words, when the battle effect is started when the game times in the high probability mode are continued 100 times or more and in the high frequency support mode, the player side character and the enemy side character Although it is not known until the result announcement (that is, whether the fall lottery is won or the big hit is won in the winning lottery is not known until the result announcement), the player does not know which one will win. , By confirming that the high-frequency support has ended from the open / closed state of the electric accessory 34a during the period when the battle production is being executed, the player side character loses in this battle (wins the fall lottery). That can be predicted during the battle production. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of urgency or expectation for the results of the fall lottery and the winning lottery in the 120th game round by the battle effect and the result announcement effect. This is the problem of Comparative Example 1.

FIG. 20 is a timing chart illustrating a process in which the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 does not win the fall lottery in the game rounds after reaching the guaranteed number of games, but wins the big hit in the winning lottery. Specifically, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, the probability variation jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and then the high frequency support mode is started. In the 120th game round, the lottery mode may be changed to the low probability mode at the start of the open / close execution mode by winning the big hit in the winning lottery without winning the fall lottery. It is shown in.

In the 120th game round in which the big hit is won in the winning lottery without winning the fall lottery, a battle effect is executed, and then a victory effect in which the player-side character wins is executed as a result notification effect. The support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the timing when the 120th game round of winning the jackpot starts, the 120th game round of winning the jackpot ends, and the open / close execution mode starts. The lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode at the timing (that is, the timing immediately after the victory result notification effect is completed). That is, when the number of games played in the high probability mode is continuously executed for the guaranteed number of games (100 times) or more, and the player does not win the fall lottery and wins the big hit in the winning lottery, the support mode However, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, the timing of shifting from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode is the timing at which the game round in which the jackpot is won ends and the open / close execution mode starts (see FIG. 19). On the other hand, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, the difference is that the timing of the start of the game round in which the jackpot is won (that is, the start of the game round) is set.

Comparing FIG. 18 (b), which is an example of winning the fall lottery, with FIG. 20 which is an example of winning the big hit in the winning lottery, in the period from the start to the end of the 120th game round. It can be seen that the mode of change of the support mode is the same. Therefore, before the result notification effect is executed, the player wins the fall lottery in the 120th game round from the open / closed state of the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 3). It is not possible to recognize whether you have won. That is, it is impossible for the player to predict the type of result notification effect (winning effect or defeating effect) to be executed thereafter during the execution of the battle effect. Therefore, when the fall lottery is won in the game times after reaching the guaranteed number of games, the process shown in FIG. 18 (b) is performed, and when the jackpot is won in the game times after the guaranteed number of games is reached, the figure is shown. According to the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 that executes the process shown in 20, it is possible to solve the above-mentioned problem of Comparative Example 1.

However, even with the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, the following problems become apparent.

According to the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, in both the case where the fall lottery is won and the case where the big hit is won in the winning lottery in the game times after the guaranteed number of games is reached, the support mode is performed at the timing when the game times are started. Shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, and the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 3) stops the opening / closing operation. If the fall lottery is not won and the big hit is not won in the winning lottery in the game times after reaching the guaranteed number of games, the support mode maintains the high frequency support mode and the electric accessory 34a ( Figure 3) continues the opening and closing operation. Therefore, by confirming that the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 3) continues the opening / closing operation even after the start of the game round, the player wins the fall lottery in the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games. It is possible to predict that the player did not win and did not win the big hit in the winning lottery.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, the battle effect executed in the game times after reaching the guaranteed number of games does not win the fall lottery and does not win the big hit in the winning lottery. Even if it is a production that can suggest, specifically, a dominant battle production, it is a draw by confirming that the electric accessory 34a (Fig. 3) continues the opening and closing operation, that is, the fall lottery is won. In addition, since it is possible to predict that the big hit was not won in the winning lottery, the superior battle production becomes meaningless. That is, the battle effect executed in the game times after the guaranteed number of games is reached only makes sense for the life-and-death battle effect in which the result of the battle is only victory or defeat. As a result, according to the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, there is a problem that it is not possible to widen the range of the effect of the battle effect to be executed in the game times after the guaranteed number of games is reached.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has the following configurations to solve both the problems of Comparative Example 1 and the problems of Comparative Example 2.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment wins a probabilistic jackpot by a winning lottery, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and then the guaranteed game is started after the high frequency support mode is started. In the game rounds after reaching the number of times (for example, the 120th game round), when a big hit is won in the winning lottery, there are two modes as a mode for changing the support mode. The two modes are hereinafter referred to as "first drop mode" and "second drop mode". In the present embodiment, which mode to adopt, the first drop mode or the second drop mode, is determined by a lottery (hereinafter referred to as a mode selection lottery), and the distribution result by the mode selection lottery is determined. It is configured not to notify the player.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the big hit type is sorted by using the big hit type counter C2, but also in the mode selection lottery, when the big hit is obtained as a result of the winning lottery. , The jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort out whether the mode is the first drop mode or the second drop mode. If a big hit is obtained in the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the first drop mode is performed using the distribution table for the first starting port shown in FIG. 8 (a). If a big hit is obtained in the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 33 by sorting the back drop mode, the sorting for the second starting opening shown in FIG. 8 (b) is performed. Using the table, the first drop mode and the second drop mode are sorted.

In the distribution table for the first starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 39", "65 to 89", and "90 to 99" correspond to the first drop mode. "40-64" corresponds to the back-fall mode. That is, in the distribution table for the first starting port, "0 to 39" is the value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 64" to which the 16R probability variation jackpot is associated as the distribution result of the jackpot type. It is associated with the first drop mode, and "40 to 64" is associated with the second drop mode. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "65-89" to which the 8R probability variation jackpot is associated as the distribution result of the jackpot type is associated with the first drop mode. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "90 to 99" to which the 8R normal jackpot is associated as the distribution result of the jackpot type is associated with the first drop mode.

In the distribution table for the second starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 49", "75 to 89", and "90 to 99" correspond to the first drop mode. "50-74" corresponds to the back-fall mode. That is, in the distribution table for the second starting port, "0 to 49" is the value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 74" to which the 16R probability variation jackpot is associated as the distribution result of the jackpot type. It is associated with the first drop mode, and "50 to 74" is associated with the second drop mode. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "75 to 89" to which the 8R probability variation jackpot is associated as the distribution result of the jackpot type is associated with the first drop mode. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "90 to 99" to which the 8R normal jackpot is associated as the distribution result of the jackpot type is associated with the first drop mode.

In this embodiment, the distribution result of the mode selection lottery for the value of the type counter C2 specified in the distribution table for the first start port and the type specified in the distribution table for the second start port. The configuration is different from the distribution result of the mode selection lottery for the value of the counter C2, but the same configuration may be used.

FIG. 21 shows the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in which the number of games is played after the guaranteed number of games is reached, and the player does not win the fall lottery. It is a timing chart explaining an example of processing in the case of winning. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a probabilistic jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and then. , The number of games after the high-frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games (120 times in the example shown in the figure). At the same time, FIG. 21 shows a case where the first drop mode is won in the mode selection lottery and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode at the start of the open / close execution mode.

It is suggested that the player won the big hit in the winning lottery without winning the fall lottery, and in the 120th game round in which the first-placed mode was won in the mode selection lottery, it corresponds to either victory or defeat. The life-and-death battle effect to be obtained (see FIG. 16B) is executed, and then the victory effect in which the player-side character wins (see FIG. 17A) is executed as the result notification effect. If you win the first-come-first-served mode in the mode selection lottery, the support mode will change from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support at the timing when the 120th game round that won the jackpot starts (that is, at the start of the game round). The lottery mode is changed from the high probability mode at the timing when the mode is changed, the 120th game round in which the jackpot is won is completed, and the open / close execution mode is started (that is, the timing immediately after the victory result notification effect is completed). Move to low probability mode. Such changes in the effects, the lottery mode, and the support modes correspond to the changes in the effects, the lottery mode, and the support modes in Comparative Example 2 shown in FIG. 20.

FIG. 22 shows the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in which the number of games is played after the guaranteed number of games is reached, and the player does not win the fall lottery. It is a timing chart explaining an example of processing in the case of winning. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a probabilistic jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and then. , The number of games after the high-frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games (120 times in the example shown in the figure). FIG. 22 shows a case where the late drop mode is won in the mode selection lottery and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode at the start of the open / close execution mode.

It is suggested that the player does not win the fall lottery, wins a big hit in the winning lottery, and wins or draws in the 120th game round in which the mode selection lottery wins the back-fall mode. The superior battle effect to be obtained (see FIG. 16 (c)) is executed, and then the victory effect (see FIG. 17 (a)) in which the player-side character wins is executed as the result notification effect. When the late drop mode is won in the mode selection lottery, the 120th game round in which the jackpot is won ends and the open / close execution mode starts (that is, the timing immediately after the victory result notification effect ends). Therefore, the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode, and the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. Such changes in the lottery mode and the support mode are in agreement with the changes in the lottery mode and the support mode in Comparative Example 1 shown in FIG.

Comparing the case where the first drop mode is won in the mode selection lottery (FIG. 21) and the case where the second drop mode is won in the mode selection lottery (FIG. 22), the game times in the high probability mode are guaranteed games. If the battle is continuously executed more than the number of times (100 times) and the big hit is won in the winning lottery, the battle effect executed in the game times is won if the first-place mode is won. , It is a life-and-death battle production that can suggest that it corresponds to either of defeats, but if you win the fall mode, it can suggest that it corresponds to either victory or draw. The difference is that it is a dominant battle production. The timing at which the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode is the timing at which the winning game round starts (that is, at the start of the game round) when the first-come-first-served mode is won. On the other hand, when the back-fall mode is won, the difference is that the game times won in the big hit are finished and the open / close execution mode is started.

FIG. 23 shows the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in which the number of games played after the guaranteed number of games is reached, the player does not win the fall lottery, does not win the big hit in the winning lottery, and reaches in the reach determination (so-called loss). It is a timing chart explaining an example of processing when it is determined that reach) occurs. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a probabilistic jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and then. , Do not win the fall lottery and win the big hit in the winning lottery in the number of games after the number of games since the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games (120 times in the example shown in the figure). FIG. 23 shows a process when it is determined that a reach (off reach) is generated in the reach determination.

In the 120th game, which was determined to generate a reach (out-of-reach) in the reach judgment without winning the fall lottery and not winning the big hit in the winning lottery, it corresponds to either a win or a draw. A dominant battle effect (see FIG. 16 (c)) that may suggest that the player should be performed is executed, and then a draw effect (see FIG. 17 (c)) in which the player-side character does not win or lose is executed as a result notification effect. .. In the game times where the fall lottery was not won and the big hit was not won in the winning lottery, the lottery mode maintains the high probability mode and the support mode maintains the high frequency support mode regardless of the occurrence of reach. do.

The summary is as follows. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a number of games after the guaranteed number of games has been reached.
(A) If you win the fall lottery (regardless of the result of the winning lottery), or
(B) If you do not win the fall lottery, you win the big hit in the winning lottery, and you win the first drop mode in the mode selection lottery.
A life-and-death battle effect is executed as a battle effect executed in the game round, and the support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode at the timing when the game round starts (that is, at the start of the game round).

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a number of games after the guaranteed number of games has been reached.
(C) If it is determined that a reach will occur in the reach judgment without winning the fall lottery and not winning the big hit in the winning lottery, or
(D) If you do not win the fall lottery, you win the big hit in the winning lottery, and you win the fall mode in the mode selection lottery.
The dominant battle effect is executed as the battle effect executed in the game round, and the support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode at the timing when the game round in which the jackpot is won ends and the open / close execution mode starts.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode at the same timing in the case of the above (A) and the case of the above (B), so that the guaranteed number of games is played. In the game round after reaching, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting that the fall lottery was won from the open / closed state of the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 3) during the battle production. Play. Furthermore, since it is possible to perform a life-and-death battle effect or a dominant battle effect in the game times after reaching the guaranteed number of games, the battle effect to be executed in the game times after reaching the guaranteed number of games It has the effect of expanding the range of production.

<< 1-5 >> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-mentioned processing in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes will be described below. The MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal in addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, but description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

In step Sl0101, reading processing of various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main control device 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0102.

In step Sl0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0103.

In step Sl0103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the fall random number counter CF, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the fall random number counter CF, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and each of these counter values reaches the maximum value. In that case, clear to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 and CF are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0104. The value of the variable type counter CS is updated in the normal processing (FIG. 28) described later.

In step Sl0104, a ball entry process for the start port accompanying the entry into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the starting port of step Sl0104 will be described later. After executing step Sl0104, the process proceeds to step Sl0105.

In step Sl0105, a ball entry process for through ball accompanying the entry into the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the through of step Sl0105 will be described later. After executing step Sl0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Incoming ball entry process for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be described. The ball entry process for the start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 24: Sl0104).

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the starting port. In step Sl0201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33. If it is determined in step Sl0201 that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (Sl0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0202, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set the command. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0203.

In step Sl0203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0204.

In step Sl0204, the start hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold number RaN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra, is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The first start hold number RaN indicates the hold number based on the entry of the ball into the first start port 33. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0209.

If it is determined in step Sl0201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 33 (Sl0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl0205 and whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

If it is determined in step Sl0205 that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sl0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0206, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set the command. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (Sl0205: NO), the ball entry process for the main starting port is terminated.

In step Sl0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0208.

In step Sl0208, the start hold number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as the second start hold number RbN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb, is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on the entry of the ball into the second start port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0209.

In step Sl0209, it is determined whether or not the start hold number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sl0204 or step Sl0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step Sl0209, if the starting hold number N is not less than the upper limit value (Sl0209: NO), the ball entry process for the main starting port is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sl0209, if the start hold number N is less than the upper limit value (Sl0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0210, 1 is added to the start hold number N of the corresponding hold area, and then the process proceeds to step Sl0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reserved quantity CRN). The total hold quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first start hold quantity RaN and the second start hold quantity RbN. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0212.

In step Sl0212, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF updated in step Sl0103 (FIG. 24) are stored in the first free storage area of the corresponding hold area. It is stored in an area, that is, a storage area corresponding to the reserved number obtained by adding 1 in step Sl0210. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as the processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF updated in step Sl0103. Each value is stored in the first storage area in the free storage area of the first hold area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold number RaN to which 1 is added in step Sl0210. When the second start pending number RbN is set as the processing target, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF updated in step Sl0103 are used. , It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the second hold area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step Sl0210. After executing step Sl0212, the process proceeds to step Sl0213.

In step Sl0213, the first determination process is executed. The pre-judgment process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF, and the winning / failing determination result (lottery result) of the winning lottery and the jackpot. This is a process of executing the determination of the type, the presence / absence of reach, the winning / failing determination result (lottery result) of the fall lottery, etc., before the pending information becomes the target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The details of the pre-determination process will be described later. After executing step Sl0213, the process proceeds to step Sl0214.

In step Sl0214, a process of setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the prior determination process executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF is set as the pending command. do.

The hold command determines that a ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 and the determination result (first determination information) by the advance determination process based on the hold information acquired based on the entry. This is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to confirm the hold information before it becomes the target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 28: step Sl0503) of the normal process described later.

Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the ball into the first start port 33, the voice emission control device 90 displays the number of holds in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the entry into the second start port 34 is received, the voice emission control device 90 displays the number of holds in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds.

After executing step Sl0214, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

<First judgment process>
Next, the prior determination process will be described. The pre-determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 25: Sl0213) for the ball entry process for the start port.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the prior determination process. As described above, in the prior judgment process, based on the hold information, the hold information determines the judgment result such as the winning / failing judgment of the winning lottery, the judgment of the type of the jackpot, the judgment of the presence / absence of the reach, and the winning / failing judgment of the fall lottery. This is a process to be executed before the target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60.

In step Sl0301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting port in the ball entering process for the starting port (FIG. 25) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the determination result of the pre-judgment process executed by the previous entry before the current entry is read from the corresponding storage area, and the presence or absence of the probable change jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery by the current entry. In addition, by grasping whether or not the player has won the fall lottery, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round is determined.

If it is determined in step Sl0302 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round, the process proceeds to (Sl0302: YES), step Sl0303, and the winning / failing table is stored. Refer to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode stored in the area 63a. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0308, and as a result of referring to the hit / fail table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Sl0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round (Sl0302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl0304 and the entry is made this time. The value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the storage area by the sphere is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0305, and it is determined whether or not the player has won the fall lottery by referring to the fall hit / fail determination table stored in the fall hit / fail determination table storage area 63d.

If it is determined in step Sl0305 that the fall lottery has been won (Sl0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0306, the fall winning information is stored in the pre-determination processing result storage area 64h, and the process proceeds to step Sl0303. In step Sl0303, as described above, the hit / miss table for the low probability mode stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0308, and as a result of referring to the hit / fail table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

If it is determined in step Sl0305 that the fall lottery has not been won (Sl0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl0307. In step Sl0307, as a result of referring to the hit / fail table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0308, and as a result of referring to the hit / fail table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

In step Sl0308, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot (Sl0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0309, and the ball is stored in the storage area by entering the starting port this time. Grasp the value of the jackpot type counter C2. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0310, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2, which is the target of distribution this time, is acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33, refer to the distribution table for the first starting port. , When the ball is acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 34, the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to. After executing step Sl0310, the process proceeds to step Sl0311.

In step Sl0311, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step Sl0311 that the probability variation jackpot is supported (Sl0311: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0312, and the probability variation jackpot information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the first determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0311 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (Sl0311: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl0313, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the first determination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl0308 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to the jackpot (Sl0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl0314, and the ball enters the storage area this time. The value of the stored reach random number counter C3 is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0315, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl0316, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

If it is determined in step Sl0316 that the reach generation is supported (Sl0316: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0317, and the reach generation information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the first determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0316 that it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach (Sl0316: NO), the prior determination process is terminated as it is.

<Through ball entry process>
Next, the ball entry process for through will be described. The ball entry process for through is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 24: Sl0105).

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for thru. In step Sl0401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35. If it is determined in step Sl0401 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sl0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0402, and whether the number of reserved characters SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Judge whether or not. The number of reserved items SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that is reserved for performing the electric accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved items SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sl0401: NO), the entry process for this through is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl0402 that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the number of reserved items SN (Sl0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0403, and 1 is added to the number of reserved items SN. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0404.

In step Sl0404, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step Sl0103 (FIG. 24) is stored in the first free storage area of the electric service holding area 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the ball entry process for through is completed.

On the other hand, in step Sl0402, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is not less than the upper limit value (Sl0402: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is equal to or more than the upper limit value, The ball entry process for through is completed without storing the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter, also referred to as “power on”). In the normal process, the main process of the game is executed.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sl0501, the start-up process is executed. Specifically, the initial setting of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0502.

In step Sl0502, a start-up command is set. The start-up command is a command for starting a demo movie for each control device on the sub side when the power is turned on. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0503.

In step Sl0503, output data such as a start-up command set in step Sl0502 and a command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. If commands related to effects such as start-up commands, variable commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After executing step Sl0503, the process proceeds to step Sl0504.

In step Sl0504, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variable type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0505.

In step Sl0505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sl0506. In step Sl0506, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of a symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display unit 37a, the second symbol display unit 37b, and the like are performed. The details of the game times control process will be described later. After executing step Sl0506, the process proceeds to step Sl0507.

In step Sl0507, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. The details of the game state transition process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0508.

In step Sl0508, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is in the open state. The details of the processing for electric service support will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0509.

In step Sl0509, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal process (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process in step Sl0503). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached. If it is determined in step Sl0509 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal process (Sl0509: NO), in step Sl0510 and step Sl0511 until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached. Within the remaining time of, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sl0510, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Sl0511, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0509 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (Sl0509: YES), the process returns to step Sl0503 and each process from step Sl0503 to step Sl0508 is performed. Run.

Since the execution time of each process from step Sl0503 to step Sl0508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process will be described. The game times control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 28: Sl0506) of the normal process.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the game times control process. In step Sl0601, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The open / close execution mode flag is turned on when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is turned off when the open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process.

If it is determined in step Sl0601 that the open / close execution mode is in progress (Sl0601: YES), the game round control process ends without executing any of the processes after step Sl0602. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the game round is not started regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0601 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (Sl0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl0602.

In step Sl0602, it is determined whether or not the special figure unit 37 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b provided in the special symbol unit 37 is in variable display. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the special map variation display flag in the special map variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special symbol variation display flag is turned on when starting the variation display for either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, and is turned off when the variation display ends.

If it is determined in step Sl0602 that the special figure unit 37 is not displaying the fluctuation (Sl0602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl0603.

In step Sl0603, a variation start process for starting the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start processing will be described later. After executing step Sl0603, the game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0602 that the special figure unit 37 is in the variable display (Sl0602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0604.

In step Sl0604, the variation end processing for terminating the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the variable end processing will be described later. After executing step Sl0604, the game round control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described. The variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 29: Sl0603) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. In step Sl0701, it is determined whether or not the total reserved quantity CRN exceeds "0". When the total reserved quantity CRN is "0" or less, it means that the starting reserved quantity is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Therefore, if it is determined in step Sl0701 that the total number of reserved pieces CRN is "0" or less (Sl0701: NO), the fluctuation start process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0701 that the total number of reserved pieces CRN exceeds "0" (Sl0701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0702.

In step Sl0702, the hold information shift process for setting the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sl0703. The details of the hold information shift process will be described later.

In step Sl0703, a game state determination process for determining the game state is performed. The details of the game state determination process will be described later. After executing step Sl0703, the process proceeds to step Sl0704.

In step Sl0704, a fall determination process including a process when the fall lottery is won is performed. The details of the fall determination process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0705.

In step Sl0705, a hit determination process including a process when a big hit is won in the hit lottery is performed. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Sl0705, the process proceeds to step Sl0706.

In step Sl0706, the variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is to set the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, based on the presence / absence of a big hit, the presence / absence of reach, and the like. It is the processing of. The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sl0706, the process proceeds to step Sl0707.

In step Sl0707, a variable command is set. The variable command is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33, or is acquired based on the entry into the second starting opening 34. It contains information indicating whether or not the information is on hold, information on whether or not reach has occurred, and information on the fluctuation time set in step Sl0706. After executing step Sl0707, the process proceeds to step Sl0708.

In step Sl0708, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence / absence of a big hit and the result of the distribution determination. That is, the type command includes 16R probability variation jackpot information, 8R probability variation jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or missed result information as the jackpot type information.

The variable command and the type command set in step Sl0707 and step Sl0708 are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by step Sl0503 in the normal process (FIG. 28). The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variable command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step Sl0708, the process proceeds to step Sl0709.

In step Sl0709, among the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is started to display the variation of the symbol. Specifically, when the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is specified to be the first symbol display unit 37a, and the variable display is started. When the second symbol display unit flag is ON, it is specified that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is the second symbol display unit 37b, and the variable display is started. After executing step Sl0709, the process proceeds to step Sl0710.

In step Sl0710, the special figure change display flag stored in the special figure change display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sl0710, this fluctuation start process ends.

<Hold information shift processing>
Next, the hold information shift process will be described. The hold information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 30: Sl0702) for the variable start process.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the hold information shift process. In step Sl0801, it is determined whether or not the hold area to be processed for executing the hold information shift process is the first hold area Ra. Specifically, among the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 6) in time series, the hold information stored first (hold stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra). Information) is stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb (information), which is the earliest hold information stored in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 6) in time series. If it is stored in the hold area before the hold information), it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra. On the other hand, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb in time series is earlier than the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra in time series. If the stored hold information is stored in the hold area first, it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the second hold area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sl0801, the reserved information can be processed in the order stored in the first reserved area Ra or the second reserved area Rb.

If it is determined in step Sl0801 that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra (step Sl0801: YES), the hold information shift process for the first hold area in steps Sl0802 to Step Sl0807 is executed. On the other hand, in step Sl0801, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (step Sl0801: NO). ), Hold information shift processing for the second hold area in steps Sl0808 to Sl0813 is executed.

In step Sl0802, after subtracting 1 from the first start hold quantity RaN in the first hold area Ra, the process proceeds to step Sl0803 and the total hold quantity CRN is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0804. In step Sl0804, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0805.

In step Sl0805, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step Sl0805, the process proceeds to step Sl0806.

In step Sl0806, when the second symbol display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second symbol display unit flag is information for specifying whether the target for starting the variation display this time is the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0807.

In step Sl0807, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the first hold area Ra, that is, corresponding to the first start port 33. A shift command including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the pending information shift process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sl0807 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Sl0503 in the normal process (FIG. 28). The voice emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command. do. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

In step Sl0801, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (Sl0801: NO), the step. Proceed to Sl0808.

In step Sl0808, the second start hold quantity RbN of the second hold area Rb is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0809. In step Sl0809, the total number of reserved pieces CRN is subtracted by 1, the process proceeds to step Sl0810, and the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0811.

In step Sl0811, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step Sl0811, the process proceeds to step Sl0812.

In step Sl0812, if the second symbol display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0813.

In step Sl0813, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, the information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the second hold area Rb, that is, corresponding to the second start port 34. A shift command including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the pending information shift process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sl0813 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Sl0503 in the normal process (FIG. 28). The voice emission control device 90 gives a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command. Send. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

<Game state determination process>
Next, the game state determination process will be described. The game state determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 30: Sl0703) of the variation start process.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the game state determination process. In step Sl0901, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sl0901 that it is in the high probability mode (Sl0901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0902, and it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sl0902 that the mode is high frequency support mode (Sl0902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0903 and the high accuracy / high support flag is turned on. The high probability / high support flag is a flag for specifying with the MPU 62 whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode in the gaming state (high probability / high support state). It is stored in various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64. When the high accuracy / high support flag is ON, the high accuracy / high support state is set. When the high accuracy / high support flag is OFF, it is not in the high accuracy / high support state. According to step Sl0903, it is possible for the MPU 62 to specify the determination result of whether or not the game state determination process is in the high accuracy / high support state at the time of execution. After executing step Sl0903, the process proceeds to step Sl0904.

In step Sl0904, a high-accuracy / high-support command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the state is in the high-accuracy / high-support state, is used as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Set. After executing step Sl0904, the game state determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0901 that it is not in the high probability mode (Sl0901: NO), or if it is determined in step Sl0902 that it is not in the high frequency support mode (Sl0902: NO), step Sl0903 and step Sl0904 are not executed. , Ends the game state determination process.

<Fall judgment processing>
Next, the fall determination process will be described. The fall determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 30: Sl0704) of the fluctuation start process.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a fall determination process. In step Sl1001, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1001 that the mode is high probability mode (Sl1001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1002.

In step Sl1002, the winning / failing determination of the falling lottery is executed with reference to the winning / failing table for the falling lottery. Specifically, the value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the winning in the fall lottery winning / failing table (see FIG. 9) in the falling lottery table storage area 63d. Determine if it is. In the following step Sl1003, if the result of the winning / failing determination in step Sl1002 is winning the fall lottery (Sl1003: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1004.

In step Sl1004, the high probability mode flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1005, and the fall flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. The fall flag is a flag for storing the result of the winning / failing determination of the fall lottery. After executing step Sl1005, the process proceeds to step Sl1006.

In step Sl1006, it is determined whether or not the number of games continuously executed in the high frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games (for example, 100 times) (hereinafter, simply referred to as "before the guaranteed number of games"). judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed game count counter PNC exceeds 0. Since the guaranteed game count counter PNC indicates the remaining number of guaranteed games, the number of games continuously executed in the high frequency support mode by determining whether or not PNC> 0. Can be determined whether or not is before the guaranteed number of games is reached. In step Sl1006, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed game count counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sl1006: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not before the guaranteed number of games (= after the guaranteed number of games), the step Proceed to Sl1007 and turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After executing step Sl1007, the main fall determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1006 that it is before the guaranteed game times (Sl1006: YES), the fall determination process is immediately terminated. If it is determined in step Sl1001 that the mode is not in the high probability mode (Sl1001: NO), or if the result of the winning / failing determination is not won in the fall lottery in step Sl1003 (Sl1003: NO), the main fall determination process is immediately performed. finish.

By the fall determination process configured as described above, changes in the lottery mode and the support mode at the timing of the fall winning in FIG. 18 (after the guaranteed number of games, the fall winning) are realized.

<Collision detection processing>
Next, the hit determination process will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 30: Sl0705).

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the hit determination process. In step Sl1101, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sl1101 that the mode is in the high probability mode (Sl1101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1102, and the pass / fail determination is made with reference to the pass / fail table for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 7 (b). Is determined. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1104.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1101 that the mode is not in the high probability mode (Sl1101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1103, and the pass / fail determination is made with reference to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 7A. Is determined. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1104.

In step Sl1104, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination (winning lottery) in step Sl1102 or step Sl1103 is a big hit winning. In step Sl1104, if the result of the winning / failing determination is a big hit (Sl1104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1105.

In steps Sl1105 to Sl1109, a process for setting a game result and a process for setting a stop result in the case of a big hit winning are executed.

In step Sl1105, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1105 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (Sl1105: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1106, and the distribution table for the first starting port (see FIG. 8A) is referred to. Then, the distribution is determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 16R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variation jackpot, or the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. do.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1105 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (Sl1105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1107, and the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 8B). The distribution is determined with reference to. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 16R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variation jackpot, or the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. do. After executing the process of step Sl1106 or step Sl1107, the process proceeds to step Sl1108.

In step Sl1108, the flag (big hit flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sl1106 or step Sl1107 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, turn on the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, if it is an 8R probability variation jackpot, turn on the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, and if it is an 8R normal jackpot, turn on the 8R normal jackpot flag. Turn it on. After executing step Sl1108, the process proceeds to step Sl1109.

In step Sl1109, a process of setting a stop result for a big hit is executed. Specifically, in this game round in which a big hit is won, it is set which stop result is displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to end the variable display. It is a process to do. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63f (FIG. 5), the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot distributed in step Sl1106 or step Sl1107 can be obtained. The address information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sl1109, the process proceeds to step Sl1110.

In step Sl1110, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sl1110 that the mode is in the high frequency support mode (Sl1110: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl111, and the number of games continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is the guaranteed number of games (for example, 100 times). ) Is reached (= before the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed game count counter PNC exceeds 0. In step Sl1111, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed game count counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sl1111: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not before the guaranteed number of games (= after the guaranteed number of games), the step Proceed to Sl1112.

In steps Sl1112 to Sl1116, after the guaranteed number of games, various processes are executed when a big hit is won in the winning lottery without winning the fall lottery.

In step Sl1112, a command is set after the guaranteed number of games. The set guaranteed game count post-command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by step Sl0503 in the normal process (FIG. 28). When the voice emission control device 90 receives the command after the guaranteed number of games, it becomes possible to grasp that the current game times are the games after the guaranteed number of games. After executing step Sl1112, the process proceeds to step Sl1113.

In step Sl1113, it is determined whether or not the result of the distribution determination (mode selection lottery) in step Sl1106 or step Sl1107 is the first drop mode. In step Sl1106 or step Sl1107, it was explained earlier that the distribution determination for distributing the jackpot type is performed as the distribution determination, but the game falls after the guaranteed number of games is reached after the high frequency support mode is started. Instead of winning the lottery, a mode selection lottery will also be performed to sort out the mode to change the support mode when a big hit is won in the winning lottery. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is for the distribution table for the first starting port shown in FIG. 8A or for the second starting port shown in FIG. 8B. In the distribution table of, it is determined whether or not the distribution result of the mode selection lottery matches the value set as the first drop mode. Then, in step Sl1113, it is determined whether or not the result of the mode selection lottery in step Sl1106 or step Sl1107 is the first drop mode (= second drop mode).

In step Sl1113, if the result of the mode selection lottery is the first drop mode (Sl1113: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1114 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1115.

In step Sl1115, the first drop mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. The first drop mode flag is a flag for memorizing that the result of the mode selection lottery is the first drop mode. After executing step Sl1115, the process proceeds to step Sl1116.

In step Sl1116, the first drop mode command is set. The set first drop mode command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by step Sl0503 in the normal process (FIG. 28). When the voice emission control device 90 receives the first drop mode command, it can grasp that the result of the mode selection lottery is the first drop mode. After executing step Sl1116, the hit determination process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sl1110 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (Sl1110: NO), when it is determined in step Sl1111 that the number of games is before the guaranteed number of games (step Sl1111: YES), or in step Sl1113, the mode is not the first drop mode. That is, when it is determined that the mode is the back-fall mode (step Sl1113: NO), the hit determination process is immediately terminated. If the fall lottery is won and the big hit is won in the winning lottery, the process of step Sl1111 to step Sl1116 is not executed because it is determined as NO in step Sl1110.

About the lottery mode and the support mode at the timing of the jackpot winning in FIG. 21 (after the guaranteed number of games, the jackpot winning, the first drop mode winning) by the processing from step Sl1101 to step Sl1107 and the processing from step Sl1110 to step Sl1116 described above. Fluctuations are realized.

In step Sl1104, if the result of the winning lottery in step Sl1102 or step Sl1103 is not a big hit (Sl1104: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1117, and the reach determination table is referred to to see if reach occurs in the game round. Judge whether or not. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is set as the reach occurrence in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 5). Determine if it matches the value you have. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1118.

In step Sl1118, if the result of the reach determination in step Sl1117 is that reach occurs in the game round (Sl1118: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1119 and the reach generation flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach generation flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sl1119, the process proceeds to step Sl1120.

On the other hand, in step Sl1118, if the result of the reach determination in step Sl1117 is that reach does not occur in the game round (Sl1118: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1120 without executing step Sl1119.

In step Sl1120, a process of setting a stop result for disconnection is executed. Specifically, in this game round, which is the result of the deviation, the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b is used to set which stop result is displayed to end the variable display. It is a process. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for deviation in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. , The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sl1120, the hit determination process ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 30: Sl0706) of the variation start process.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation time setting process. In step Sl1201, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1202.

In step Sl1202, it is determined whether or not the state is high accuracy and high support. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high accuracy / high support flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high accuracy / high support flag is a flag that is turned ON in step Sl0903 in FIG. If it is determined in step Sl1202 that the high accuracy / high support flag is not ON (Sl1202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1203.

In steps Sl1203 to Sl1209, a process of setting a variable time is executed in a gaming state that is not in a high-accuracy / high-support state (a gaming state in which the lottery mode is a high-probability mode and the support mode is a high-frequency support mode). do.

In step Sl1203, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is a big hit winning. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any of the flags is ON, it is determined. Assuming that the jackpot is won (Sl1203: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1204.

In step Sl1204, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the jackpot fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1205, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

In step Sl1203, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is not a big hit (Sl1203: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1206, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs in this game round. do. Since this process (Sl1206) is executed when the big hit is not won in the winning lottery related to the current game in step Sl1203, in Sx1206, the reach (so-called) among the game times in which the big hit is not won in the winning lottery is executed. It is determined whether or not the game is a game in which an out-of-reach) occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach generation flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON, and if it is ON, reach is generated (Sl1206: YES), and step Sl1207. Proceed to.

In step Sl1207, the reach generation flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is shifted from ON to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1208.

In step Sl1208, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1205 described above, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl1206 that reach does not occur in the current game round (Sl1206: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1209, and the variation time table storage area 63h is stored with reference to the reach non-generation variation time table. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time is acquired. The variation time table for non-reach generation is a so-called variation time table for deviation. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1205 described above, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl1202 that the high accuracy / high support flag is ON (Sl1202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1210.

In steps Sl1210 to Sl1213, a process of setting a fluctuation time is executed in a high-accuracy / high-support state in which the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode.

In step Sl1210, the high accuracy / high support flag is switched from ON to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1211.

In step Sl1211, it is determined whether or not the number of games continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is before the guaranteed number of games (for example, 100 times) is reached (= before the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed game count counter PNC exceeds 0. If it is determined in step Sl1211 that the value of the guaranteed game count counter PNC exceeds 0 (step Sl1211: YES), that is, if it is determined that the value is before the guaranteed number of games, the process proceeds to step Sl1212.

In step Sl1212, the variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games is executed. The variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games will be described later. After executing step Sl1212, the present variable time setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl1211 that the value of the guaranteed game count counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sl1211: NO), that is, if it is determined that the guaranteed game count is later, the process proceeds to step Sl1213 and the guaranteed game is played. The variable time setting process after the number of times is executed. The variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games will be described later. After executing step Sl1213, the present variable time setting process is terminated.

<Variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games>
Next, the variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games will be described. The variation time setting process before the guaranteed number of games is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 35: Sl1212) of the variation time setting process.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a variation time setting process before the guaranteed number of games. In step Sl1301, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is a big hit winning. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any of the flags is ON, the jackpot is determined. Assuming that the winner is (Sl1301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1302.

In step Sl1302, the variable time table for the jackpot is specified from the variable time table group for the guaranteed number of games before, which is stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. For the variable time table group for before the guaranteed number of games,
(I) The variable time table for big hits used when the big hit is won in the winning lottery in the game times before the number of games after the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games (hereinafter, before the guaranteed number of games).・ It is called a variable time table for big hits),
(Ii) Fluctuation time for falling used when the number of games after the high frequency support mode is started is before the guaranteed number of games is reached, and the player wins the fall lottery and does not win the big hit in the winning lottery. Table (hereinafter referred to as the variable time table for falling before the guaranteed number of games),
(Iii) Reach (so-called out-of-reach) without winning the fall lottery and not winning the big hit in the winning lottery in the game times before the number of games played after the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games. Fluctuation time table for out-of-reach occurrence used when the occurrence of
Is provided. In step Sl1302, from (i) to (iii), the variable time table for the guaranteed number of games before / jackpot, which is (i), is specified. The variable time table for before the guaranteed number of games and for big hits is, for example, a variable time table for executing a normal battle effect as a battle effect and a winning effect as a result notification effect (see FIG. 13). After executing step Sl1302, the process proceeds to step Sl1303.

In step Sl1303, with reference to the fluctuation time table specified in step Sl1302, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS obtained by step Sl1201 of the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 35) is acquired. Subsequently, in step Sl1304, the fluctuation time information acquired in step Sl1303 is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1301 that the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is not a big hit winning (Sl1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1305 and is the winning lottery related to this game round? Judge whether or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fall flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1305 that the fall flag is ON (Sl1305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1306.

In step Sl1306, the variable time table for falling is specified from the variable time table group for the guaranteed number of games before, which is stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, from the above-mentioned (i) to (iii), the variable time table for the guaranteed number of games before / falling, which is (ii), is specified. The variable time table for before the guaranteed number of games and for falling is, for example, a variable time table for executing a normal battle effect as a battle effect and a defeat effect as a result notification effect (see FIG. 12). After executing step Sl1306, the process proceeds to step Sl1303 described above, and the fluctuation time table specified in step Sl1306 is referred to to acquire the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1304, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl1305 that the player has not won the fall lottery related to the current game round (Sl1305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1307 to determine whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. This process (step Sl1307) is executed when the big hit is not won in the winning lottery related to the current game round in step Sl1301 and when the falling lottery related to the current game round is not won in step Sl1305. Therefore, in step Sl1307, it is determined whether or not the game is a game in which a reach (so-called off-reach) occurs among the game times in which the game is not won in the fall lottery and the big hit is not won in the winning lottery. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach generation flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON, and if it is ON, reach is generated (Sl1307: YES), and step Sl1308 Proceed to.

In step Sl1308, the reach generation flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is shifted from ON to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1309.

In step Sl1309, the variable time table for generating the out-of-reach is specified from the variable time table group for the guaranteed number of games before, which is stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, from the above-mentioned (i) to (iii), the variable time table for the occurrence of the guaranteed number of games before / off reach according to (iii) is specified. The variable time table for the occurrence of the out-of-reach before the guaranteed number of games is, for example, a variable time table for executing a normal battle effect as a battle effect and a draw effect as a result notification effect (see FIG. 14). After executing step Sl1309, the process proceeds to step Sl1303, and the fluctuation time table specified in step Sl1309 is referred to to acquire the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1304, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1307 that reach does not occur in the current game round (Sl1307: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1310, and the variation time table for non-reach generation is stored in the variation time table storage area 63h. Refer to, and acquire the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS. The process of step Sl1310 is the same as the process of step Sl1209 of the variable time setting process (FIG. 35). After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1304, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process before the guaranteed number of games is terminated.

<Variable time setting process after guaranteed number of games>
Next, the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games will be described. The variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 35: Sl1213) of the variable time setting process.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a variation time setting process after the guaranteed number of games. In step Sl1401, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is a big hit winning. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any of the flags is ON, the jackpot is determined. Assuming that the winner is (Sl1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1402.

In step Sl1402, it is determined whether or not the player has won the fall lottery related to the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fall flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1402 that the fall flag is not ON (Sl1402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1403.

In step Sl1403, it is determined whether or not the result of the mode selection lottery related to the current game round is the first drop mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first drop mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1403 that the first drop mode flag is ON (Sl1403: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1404.

In step Sl1404, the first drop mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is changed from ON to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1405.

In step Sl1405, the variable time table for the jackpot first-off mode is specified from the variable time table group for after the guaranteed number of games stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. In the variable time table group for after the guaranteed number of games,
(Iv) The jackpot used when the number of games since the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and the first-out mode is won in the mode selection lottery. And the variable time table for the first drop mode (hereinafter referred to as the variable time table for the guaranteed number of games / big hit first drop mode),
(V) The jackpot used when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the falling mode is won in the mode selection lottery in the gaming times after the number of games since the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games. Moreover, the variable time table for the late drop mode (hereinafter referred to as the variable time table for the guaranteed number of games after / big hit after drop mode),
(Vi) Fluctuations for falling used when the number of games since the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games, and the player wins the fall lottery and does not win the big hit in the winning lottery. Time table (hereinafter referred to as the variable time table for after the guaranteed number of games / falling),
(Vii) Reach (so-called off-reach) without winning the fall lottery and not winning the big hit in the winning lottery in the number of games after the number of games since the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games. ), Which is used when the out-of-reach occurs (hereinafter referred to as the out-of-reach after-guaranteed / out-of-reach occurrence variation time table),
Is provided. In step Sl1405, the variable time table for the guaranteed game count after / big hit first drop mode, which is (iv) from (iv) to (vii), is specified. The variable time table for the guaranteed game count after / big hit first drop mode is, for example, a variable time table for executing a life-death battle effect as a battle effect and a winning effect as a result notification effect (see FIG. 21). After executing step Sl1405, the process proceeds to step Sl1406.

In step Sl1406, with reference to the fluctuation time table specified in step Sl1405, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS obtained by step Sl1201 of the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 35) is acquired. Subsequently, in step Sl1407, the fluctuation time information acquired in step Sl1406 is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1403 that the result of the mode selection lottery related to this game round is not the first drop mode, that is, the second drop mode (Sl1403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1408.

In step Sl1408, the variable time table for the jackpot after-fall mode is specified from the variable time table group for after the guaranteed number of games stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, from the above-mentioned (iv) to (vii), the variable time table for the guaranteed game count after / big hit after drop mode (v) is specified. The variable time table for the guaranteed game count / big hit after drop mode is, for example, a variable time table for executing a dominant battle effect as a battle effect and a winning effect as a result notification effect (see FIG. 22). After executing step Sl1408, the process proceeds to step Sl1406 described above, and the fluctuation time table specified in step Sl1408 is referred to to acquire the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1407, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl1402 that the player has won the fall lottery related to this game (Sl1402: YES), the player proceeds to step Sl1405 without executing steps Sl1403 and Sl1404, and the number of guaranteed games is guaranteed. Specify the variable time table for the back / big hit first drop mode. If you win in the fall lottery related to the game times after the guaranteed number of games, and if you win the big hit in the winning lottery related to the current game times, the high frequency support mode flag is set in step Sl1007 of the fall determination process (FIG. 33). Is turned off and NO is determined in step Sl1110 of the hit determination process (FIG. 34). Therefore, the first drop mode flag is not turned on by step Sl1115 of the hit determination process (FIG. 34). Therefore, in the variable time setting process after the number of guaranteed games, in order to avoid the process of step Sl1403, the process of step Sl1402 for determining the fall flag is provided between step Sl1401 and step Sl1403. Then, when it is determined to be YES in step Sl1402, the process proceeds to step Sl1405, and the variable time table for the guaranteed game count after / big hit first drop mode is specified.

If it is determined in step Sl1401 that the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is not a big hit winning (Sl1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1409, and whether or not the winning lottery related to this game round is won. To judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fall flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1409 that the fall flag is ON (Sl1409: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1410.

In step Sl1410, the variable time table for falling is specified from the variable time table group for after the guaranteed number of games stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, from the above-mentioned (iv) to (vii), the variable time table for the guaranteed number of games after / falling, which is (vi), is specified. The variable time table for the guaranteed number of games after / falling is, for example, a variable time table for executing a life-and-death battle effect as a battle effect and a defeat effect as a result notification effect (see FIG. 18). After executing step Sl1410, the process proceeds to step Sl1406, and the fluctuation time table specified in step Sl1410 is referred to to acquire the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1407, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl1409 that the player has not won the fall lottery related to the current game round (Sl1409: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1411 to determine whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. This process (step Sl1411) is executed when the big hit is not won in the winning lottery related to the current game round in step Sl1401 and when the falling lottery related to the current game round is not won in step Sl1409. Therefore, in step Sl1411, it is determined whether or not the game is a game in which a reach (so-called out-of-reach) occurs among the game times in which the game is not won in the fall lottery and the big hit is not won in the winning lottery. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach generation flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON, and if it is ON, reach is generated (Sl1411: YES), and step Sl1412 Proceed to.

In step Sl1412, the reach generation flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is shifted from ON to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1413.

In step Sl1413, the variable time table for generating the out-of-reach is specified from the variable time table group for after the guaranteed number of games stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, from the above-mentioned (iv) to (vii), the variable time table for the occurrence of the guaranteed number of games after / out of the guaranteed game (vii) is specified. The variable time table for generating the guaranteed number of games after / out of reach is, for example, a variable time table for executing a dominant battle effect as a battle effect and a draw effect as a result notification effect (see FIG. 23). After executing step Sl1413, the process proceeds to step Sl1406, and the fluctuation time table specified in step Sl1413 is referred to to acquire the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1407, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1411 that reach does not occur in the current game round (Sl1411: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1414, and the variation time table for non-reach generation stored in the variation time table storage area 63h. Refer to, and acquire the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS. The process of step Sl1414 is the same as the process of step Sl1209 of the variable time setting process (FIG. 35). After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1407, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process after the guaranteed number of games is terminated.

<Variation end processing>
Next, the variable end processing will be described. The variation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 29: Sl0604) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variation end processing. In step Sl1501, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the fluctuation time is the time from the start of fluctuation of the symbol row to the stop of all the symbol rows, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sl1501, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 is "0". The value of the fluctuation time information is set in the above-mentioned fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 35). The value of the set fluctuation time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started.

If it is determined in step Sl1501 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sl1501: NO), the fluctuation end processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl1501 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (Sl1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1502, and the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b correspond to the current game times. Performs processing to end the fluctuation of the symbol in the symbol display unit. Subsequent step Sl1503 turns off the special figure change display flag stored in the special figure change display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64. After executing step Sl1503, the process proceeds to step Sl1504.

In step Sl1504, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is a big hit winning. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1504 that none of the above flags is ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery related to the current game round is not a big hit winning (Sl1504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1505.

In step Sl1505, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sl1505 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Sl1505: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1506, and it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed game count counter PNC exceeds 0. If it is determined in step Sl1506 that the value of the guaranteed game count counter PNC exceeds 0 (Sl1506: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1507, and the value of the guaranteed game count counter PNC is subtracted by 1. After executing step Sl1507, the process proceeds to step Sl1508. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1506 that the value of the guaranteed game count counter PNC is 0 or less (Sl1506: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1508 without executing step Sl1507.

In step Sl1508, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sl1508 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Sl1508: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1509, and the number of games continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is the guaranteed number of games (for example, 100). It is determined whether or not it has reached (= before the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed game count counter PNC exceeds 0.

If it is determined in step Sl1509 that the value of the guaranteed game count counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sl1509: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value is not before the guaranteed number of games, the process proceeds to step Sl1510 and high frequency support is performed. Turn off the mode flag. After executing step Sl1510, the process proceeds to step Sl1511.

In step Sl1511, it is determined whether or not the fall flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1511 that the fall flag is ON (Sl1511: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1512 and the fall flag is turned off. After executing step Sl1512, the present variable time end processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl1508 that the high probability mode flag is ON (Sl1508: YES), or if it is determined in step Sl1509 that the number of games has not been guaranteed (step Sl1509: YES), steps Sl151 to Step Sl1512 This variable time end processing is terminated without executing. Further, even when it is determined in step Sl1511 that the fall flag is not ON (Sl1511: NO), the variable time end processing is terminated without executing step Sl1512.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1505 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sl1505: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1513.

In step Sl1513, it is determined whether or not the fall flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1513 that the fall flag is ON (Sl1513: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1514 and the fall flag is turned off. After executing step Sl1514, the present variable time end processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl1513 that the fall flag is not ON (Sl1513: NO), the variable time end processing is terminated without executing step Sl1514.

In step Sl1504, it is determined that any one of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag is ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is the jackpot winning. In that case (Sl1504: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1515, and the open / close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sl1515, the present variable time end processing is terminated.

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 28: Sl0507) of the normal process.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step Sl1601, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the large winning opening opening / closing processing period (at the beginning of the ending period) in the opening / closing execution mode, and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the open / close execution mode.

If it is determined in step Sl1601 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sl1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1602, and it is determined whether or not the open / close processing period flag is ON. The opening / closing processing period flag is turned on at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening / closing execution mode and the large winning opening opening / closing processing period, which is the period during which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed, is started. , It is turned off at the timing when the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 36b is completed.

If it is determined in step Sl1602 that the open / close processing period flag is not ON (Sl1602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1603, and it is determined whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the beginning of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Sl1603 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sl1603: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1604, and it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1604 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (Sl1604: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1605. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1604 that the open / close execution mode flag is OFF (Sl1604: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

In step Sl1605, the high probability mode flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1606. In step Sl1606, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1607.

In step Sl1607, an opening / closing scenario setting process for setting an opening / closing scenario is executed. The opening / closing scenario defines a pattern of opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 36b in the round game. In this embodiment, the condition for shifting the opening / closing door 36b from the closed state to the open state (hereinafter, also referred to as “opening condition”) This is a program in which the condition for shifting the opening / closing door 36b from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter, also referred to as “closed condition”) is recorded. The opening / closing scenario is stored in the opening / closing scenario storage area 63i of the ROM 63.

The opening conditions are as follows, for example.
-The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing to start each round game in the open / close execution mode.
When the above one item is satisfied, the opening / closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

The closing conditions are as follows, for example.
-The elapsed time from the start of each round game exceeds the predetermined upper limit duration (for example, 15 seconds).
-The number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening 36a after starting each round game exceeds the predetermined maximum number.
When either of the above two items is satisfied, the opening / closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

After executing step Sl1607, the process proceeds to step Sl1608 described above.

In step Sl1608, the opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period (hereinafter, also referred to as an opening time) in the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, the same constant length of opening time is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sl1608, the process proceeds to step Sl1609.

In step Sl1609, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Sl0503 in the normal process (FIG. 28). This opening command contains information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current open / close execution mode. The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the large winning opening opening / closing processing period based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step Sl1609, the process proceeds to step Sl1610, and the opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl1603 that the opening period flag is ON (Sl1603: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1611.

In step Sl1611, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Sl1611 that the opening period has ended (Sl1611: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1612, and the opening period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1613.

In step Sl1613, a round display start process for notifying the type of the opening / closing execution mode this time is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the above address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is specified from the specified stop result data. Confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round display unit 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step Sl1613, the process proceeds to step Sl1614.

In step Sl1614, the open / close processing period flag is turned ON. In the following step Sl1615, an open / close process start command is set. The open / close process start command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the open / close process period has started. The open / close process start command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 28: step Sl0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sl1615, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl1602 that the open / close processing period flag is ON (Sl1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1616 to execute the large winning opening opening / closing process. The process of opening and closing the large winning opening will be described later. After executing step Sl1616, the process proceeds to step Sl1617.

In step Sl1617, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed depending on whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened is "0". do. If it is determined in step Sl1617 that the opening / closing process for the large winning opening has been completed (Sl1617: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1618. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1617 that the large winning opening opening / closing process has not been completed (Sl1617: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

In step Sl1618, the open / close processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Sl1619.

In step Sl1619, the round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is terminated so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step Sl1619, the process proceeds to step Sl1620.

In step Sl1620, the ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the ending period (hereinafter, also referred to as an ending time) in the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set in each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sl1620, the process proceeds to step Sl1621.

In step Sl1621, an ending command is set. This set ending command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Sl0503 in the normal process (FIG. 28). The voice emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on the reception of the ending command. After executing step Sl1621, the process proceeds to step Sl1622.

In step Sl1622, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl1601 that the ending period flag is ON (Sl1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1623.

In step Sl1623, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sl1620), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step Sl1620 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Sl1623: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1624.

In step Sl1624, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1625, and the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of the game times after the end of the current ending period. Details of the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sl1625, the process proceeds to step Sl1626, and the open / close execution mode flag is turned off. After executing step Sl1626, the process proceeds to step Sl1627.

In step Sl1627, it is determined whether or not the total reserved quantity CRN is “0”. When the total reserved quantity CRN is "0", it means that the starting reserved quantity is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. If it is determined in step Sl1627 that the total number of reserved pieces CRN is "0" (Sl1627: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1628.

In step Sl1628, a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command is for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that no hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 64b at the time when the symbol change (game round) is completed. It is a command that contains the information of. This set customer waiting command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Sl1628 in the normal process (FIG. 28). After executing step Sl1628, the game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1627 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (Sl1627: NO), the game round control process is terminated as it is. If it is determined in step Sl1623 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Sl1623: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

<Large winning opening opening / closing process>
Next, the process of opening and closing the large winning opening will be described. The large winning opening opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 39: Sl1616) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening / closing process. In step Sl1701, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning driving unit 36c. If it is determined in step Sl1701 that the opening / closing door 36b is not open (Sl1701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1702.

In step Sl1702, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening / closing scenario set by the opening / closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the opening / closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sl1702 that the opening condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied (Sl1702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1703.

In step Sl1703, the opening / closing door 36b is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1704.

In step Sl1704, an open / close door open command is set. The opening / closing door opening command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the opening / closing door 36b has been opened. The opening / closing door opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 28: step Sl0503) of the normal processing. After executing step Sl1704, the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed.

If it is determined in step Sl1702 that the opening condition of the opening / closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sl1702: NO), the large winning opening opening / closing process is terminated without executing steps Sl1703 and Sl1704.

If it is determined in step Sl1701 that the opening / closing door 36b is being opened (Sl1701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1705.

In step Sl1705, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening / closing scenario set by the opening / closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the opening / closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sl1705 that the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied (Sl1705: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1706.

In step Sl1706, the opening / closing door 36b is closed. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1707.

In step Sl1707, an open / close door closing command is set. The opening / closing door closing command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the opening / closing door 36b has been closed. The opening / closing door closing command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 28: step Sl0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sl1707, the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed.

If it is determined in step Sl1705 that the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sl1705: NO), the large winning opening opening / closing process is terminated without executing steps Sl1706 and Step Sl1707.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 39: Sl1625) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of the ending period. In step Sl1801, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probabilistic jackpot is turned on in the jackpot flag. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sl1801 that the 16R probability variation jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON (Sl1801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1802, and among the 16R probability variation jackpot flag and the 8R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64. Turn off the flag that is ON. After executing step Sl1802, the process proceeds to step Sl1803.

In step Sl1803, the high probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step Sl1804, and the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after ending the open / close execution mode, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1805.

In step Sl1805, 100 is set in the guaranteed game count counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. The value set in the guaranteed game count counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1806.

In step Sl1806, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub-side to recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. .. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1811.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1801 that the 16R probability variation jackpot flag and the 8R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 are not ON (Sl1801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1807 and the 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1808.

In step Sl1808, after turning on the high frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step Sl1809, and 100 is set in the guaranteed game count counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1810.

In step Sl1810, a low-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub-side to recognize that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. .. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1811.

In step Sl1811, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is used as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Set. After that, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electric service support>
Next, the processing for electric service support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 28: Sl0508) of the normal process.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the electric service support process. In step Sl1901, it is determined whether or not the support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The supporting flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened and turned off when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sl1901 that the supporting flag is not ON (Sl1901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1902.

In step Sl1902, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned on when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is ON. Is. If it is determined in step Sl1902 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sl1902: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1903.

In step Sl1903, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal diagram unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

If it is determined in step Sl1903 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sl1903: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sl1903: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1904.

In step Sl1904, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display of the symbol in the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step Sl1904 that it is the end timing of the variation display (Sl1904: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1905, the off display is set, and then the main electric service support process is terminated. By setting the off display, the variable display of the symbol in the normal figure unit 38 is terminated in the state where the off display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1904 that it is not the end timing of the variation display (Sl1904: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1906.

In step Sl1906, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0". If it is determined in step Sl1906 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is "0" (Sl1906: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1906 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0" (Sl1906: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1907.

In step Sl1907, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step Sl1908 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If the mode is not the open / close execution mode in step Sl1907 (Sl1907: NO) and the high frequency support mode is in step Sl1908 (Sl1908: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1909 and the electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1910.

In step Sl1910, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sl1909 is a support winning. If it is determined in step Sl1910 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is the support winning (Sl1910: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1911, the support winning flag is turned ON, and the counter area 64f of the RAM 64 is provided. Set "3" in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. After that, the processing for electric service support is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1910 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not the support winning (Sl1910: NO), the electric service support process is terminated without executing the process of step Sl1911.

If it is determined in step Sl1907 that the open / close execution mode is set (Sl1907: YES), or if it is determined in step Sl1908 that the mode is not in the high frequency support mode (Sl1908: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1912 and the motorized accessory opening lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl1913.

In step Sl1913, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sl1912 is the support winning. If it is determined in step Sl1913 that the support is not won (Sl1913: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1913 that the support is won (Sl1913: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1914, the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , End the processing for main electric service support.

If it is determined in step Sl1902 that the support winning flag is ON (Sl1902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1915, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step Sl1915 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sl1915: NO), the pattern variation is being displayed in the normal drawing unit 38, so that the main electric service support process is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1915 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sl1915: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1916.

In step Sl1916, the hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the pattern in the normal drawing unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped and displayed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1917, the supporting flag is turned ON, and the support winning flag is turned OFF. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl1901 that the supporting flag is ON (Sl1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1918, and the electric function opening / closing control process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

<Electrical function opening / closing control processing>
Next, the electric function opening / closing control process will be described. The electric service opening / closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 42: Sl1918) of the electric service support process.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the electric function opening / closing control process. In step Sl2001, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in the driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (Sl20011: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2002.

In step Sl2002, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sl2002 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sl2002: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. That is, if the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the main electric accessory opening / closing control process ends.

If it is determined in step Sl2002 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sl2002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2003, and a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state is performed. “250” (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sl2003, the process proceeds to step Sl2004.

In step Sl2004, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step Sl2005, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step Sl2005 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sl2005: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2005 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Sl2005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2006 and the supporting flag is turned off. After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl2001 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sl20011: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2007, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sl2007 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sl2007: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2007 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sl2007: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2008, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state is executed. .. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl2009.

In step Sl2009, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and if it is determined that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (Sl2009: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2010 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step Sl2010 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (Sl2010: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2011, and "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2009 that the open / close execution mode is set (Sl2009: YES), or if it is determined in step Sl2010 that the mode is not in the high frequency support mode (Sl2010: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2012 and the second step is performed. The timer counter area T2 is set to "100" (that is, 0.2 sec). After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

<< 1-6 >> Various processes executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device will be described. The process executed by the voice emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed with a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described.

In step Sl2101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound / light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main MPU 62, and the commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Read sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step Sl2101, the process proceeds to step Sl2102.

In step Sl2102, the game rotation effect processing is executed. In the game round effect processing, processing related to the effect to be executed in the game round from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the symbol is performed. The details of the game time production process will be described later. After executing step Sl2102, the process proceeds to step Sl2103.

In step Sl2103, the opening / closing execution mode effect processing is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode production processing, processing related to the production in the opening period, the production in the large winning opening opening / closing processing period, and the production in the ending period is performed. After executing step Sl2103, the process proceeds to step Sl2104.

In step Sl2104, other processing is executed. Other processes include a process of displaying a moving image showing a game state on the symbol display device 41, a process of displaying a demo moving image on the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, as a moving image showing the gaming state, a background moving image determined according to the gaming state determination value PN included in the gaming state command received from the main MPU 62 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. For example, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode is being continued, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode has been terminated, and a background video indicating that the high-probability mode is being continued are displayed. After executing step Sl2104, the process proceeds to step Sl2105.

In step Sl2105, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the above-mentioned effect processing. After executing step Sl2105, the process proceeds to step Sl2106.

In step Sl2106, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read in the above-mentioned BGM process and each effect process. After executing step Sl2106, this timer interrupt process ends.

<Processing for game production>
Next, the processing for producing the game times will be described. The game rotation effect processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 44: Sl2102) of the timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a game rotation effect processing. In step Sl2201, the game rotation effect setting process is executed. The game round effect setting process is a process executed when a variable command and a type command are received from the main MPU 62, and is a process of setting an effect to be executed in the game round when the game round is started. be. The details of the game time production setting process will be described later. After executing step Sl2201, the process proceeds to step Sl2202.

In step Sl2202, the game rotation effect execution process is executed. The game turn effect execution process is a process executed when the game turn effect setting process is set to execute the game turn effect (notice effect and reach effect). The details of the processing for executing the game rotation effect will be described later. After executing step Sl2202, the process for producing the game round is terminated.

<Game times production setting process>
Next, the game rotation effect setting process will be described. The game rotation effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 45: Sl2201) of the game rotation effect processing.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the game rotation effect setting process. In step Sl2301, it is determined whether or not the variation command and the type command have been received. If it is determined in step Sl2301 that the variation command and the type command have not been received (Sl2301: NO), the game round effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2301 that the variation command and the type command have been received (Sl2301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2302.

In step Sl2302, the variable command received this time is read, and information on the presence / absence of a big hit, the type of the big hit, the presence / absence of a fall win, the presence / absence of a reach, and the fluctuation time is read from the command. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl2303.

In step Sl2303, the effect pattern setting process is executed. The effect pattern setting process is a process of determining and setting the effect pattern (battle effect, result announcement effect, notice effect, content of reach effect and execution timing) to be executed in this game round based on the effect pattern table. be. The details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sl2303, the process proceeds to step Sl2304.

In step Sl2304, the stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game round is 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, or 8R normal jackpot, the same symbol is on the effective line L of the symbol display device 41. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of is established is set as the information of the stop symbol of this time. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game round is a 16R probability variation jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot, the same odd-numbered symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, and the same. A combination of even symbols can be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, this selectivity is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the same combination of even-numbered symbols, but instead, the former is selected over the latter. The configuration may have a high rate, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot. Further, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game round is an 8R normal jackpot, the same even-numbered symbol combination is selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the big hit lottery of this game is a deviation result, it is determined whether or not reach has occurred from the content of the variable command. When it is determined that the reach is generated, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L, and the stop result is that the combination of the reach symbols is established on the effective line L. The information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach generation is not supported, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L, and the stop result is that the combination of reach symbols is not established on the effective line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the stop symbol of this time. After executing step Sl2304, the process proceeds to step Sl2305.

In step Sl2305, a process for setting a variation display pattern of the current game times is executed. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the current game is specified from the content of the fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information on the stop symbol set in the above step Sl2304 are combined. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl2306.

In step Sl2306, information on the effect pattern, the stop symbol, and the variation display pattern set in this game round is set in the effect command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl2307, and the effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect content corresponding to the received effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step Sl2307, the process proceeds to step Sl2308 to execute the update process at the start of fluctuation. The update process at the start of the fluctuation is a process for updating the hold display in the first hold display area Ds1 or the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. After executing step Sl2308, the game round effect setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 46: Sl2303) of the game turn effect setting process.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process. In step Sl2401, a random number acquisition process for an effect pattern is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition process, the effect pattern random number RN is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c (FIG. 11) of the sound light side RAM 94. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl2402.

In step Sl2402, it is determined whether or not a high accuracy / high support command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sl2402 that the high accuracy / high support command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sl2402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2403.

The processing from step Sl2403 to step Sl2408 is to execute a jackpot effect, a reach effect, and an off effect in a game round in a state other than the high accuracy / high support state.

In step Sl2403, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is a big hit winning. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery is the jackpot winning from the information on the presence or absence of the jackpot stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 by the step Sl2302 of the game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 46). .. If it is determined in step Sl2302 that the result of the winning lottery is a big hit winning (Sl2403: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2404.

In step Sl2404, referring to the effect pattern table for jackpots stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 11) of the sound light side ROM 93, the fluctuation time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and the current time. The effect pattern for the jackpot corresponding to the value of the random number RN for the effect pattern is acquired. The variable time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2404 is a jackpot obtained by executing step Sl1204 and step Sl1205 in the variable time setting process (FIG. 35) executed by the main MPU62. Fluctuating time for. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired by step Sl2404 corresponds to the fluctuation time for the jackpot obtained by the main MPU 62. After executing step Sl2404, the process proceeds to step Sl2405.

In step Sl2405, the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2404 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After that, the present effect pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sl2403, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is not a big hit winning (Sl2403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2406, and whether or not reach occurs in this game round. To judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not reach is generated from the information on whether or not reach is generated stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 by step Sl2302 of the game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 46). If it is determined in step Sl2406 that reach will occur in this game round (Sl2406: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2407.

In step Sl2407, the variation time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and this time with reference to the effect pattern table for reach generation stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 11) of the sound light side ROM 93. The effect pattern for generating the reach corresponding to the value of the random number RN for the effect pattern of is acquired. The variation time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2407 is the reach obtained by executing steps Sl1208 and Step Sl1205 in the variation time setting process (FIG. 35) executed by the main MPU 62. It is the fluctuation time for occurrence. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired by step Sl2407 corresponds to the variation time for reach generation obtained by the main MPU 62. After the execution of step Sl2407, the process proceeds to step Sl2405 described above, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2407 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in this game. After that, the present effect pattern setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl2406 that reach does not occur in this game round (Sl2406: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2408.

In step Sl2408, the variation time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and the variation time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) with reference to the effect pattern table for non-reach generation stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 11) of the sound light side ROM 93. The effect pattern for non-reach generation corresponding to the value of the random number RN for the effect pattern this time is acquired. The variation time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2408 is the reach obtained by executing steps Sl1209 and Sl1205 in the variation time setting process (FIG. 35) executed by the main MPU62. Variable time for non-occurrence. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired by step Sl2407 corresponds to the variation time for non-reach generation obtained by the main MPU 62. After the execution of step Sl2408, the process proceeds to step Sl2405 described above, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2408 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in this game. After that, the present effect pattern setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl2402 that a high accuracy / high support command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sl2402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2409.

In steps Sl2409 to Sl2411, a process of setting an effect pattern is executed in a high-accuracy / high-support state in which the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode.

In step Sl2409, it is determined whether or not a command has been received from the main MPU 62 after the guaranteed number of games. If it is determined in step Sl2409 that the command has not been received from the main MPU 62 after the guaranteed number of games (Sl2409: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2410.

In step Sl2410, the effect pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games is executed. The effect pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games will be described later. After that, the present effect pattern setting process is terminated.

In step Sl2409, if it is determined that the command after the number of games has been received from the main MPU 62 (step Sl2409: YES), that is, if it is determined that the command has been after the guaranteed number of games, the process proceeds to step Sl2411.

In step Sl2411, the effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games is executed is executed. The effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games will be described later. After that, the present effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games>
Next, the effect pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games will be described. The effect pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 47: Sl2410) of the effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games. In step Sl2501, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is a big hit winning. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery is the jackpot winning from the information on the presence or absence of the jackpot stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 by the step Sl2302 of the game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 46). .. If it is determined in step Sl2501 that the result of the winning lottery is a big hit (Sl2501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2502.

In step Sl2502, the effect pattern table corresponding to the jackpot winning is specified from the effect pattern table group for before the guaranteed number of games stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 11) of the sound light side ROM 93. For the production pattern table group for before the guaranteed number of games,
(I) A production pattern table that executes a normal battle effect as a battle effect and a victory effect as a result notification effect (hereinafter referred to as a normal battle effect / victory effect effect pattern table),
(II) A production pattern table that executes a normal battle effect as a battle effect and a defeat effect as a result notification effect (hereinafter referred to as a normal battle effect / defeat effect effect pattern table),
(III) A production pattern table that executes a normal battle effect as a battle effect and a draw effect as a result notification effect (hereinafter referred to as a normal battle effect / draw effect effect pattern table),
Is provided. In step Sl2502, from (I) to (III), the effect pattern table for the normal battle effect / victory effect (I) is specified. After executing step Sl2502, the process proceeds to step Sl2503.

In step Sl2503, referring to the effect pattern table for the normal battle effect / victory effect specified in step Sl2502, the variation time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 47) step Sl2401 The effect pattern corresponding to the value of the obtained random number RN for the effect pattern of this time is acquired. The variable time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when step Sl2503 is executed is the variable time setting process (FIG. 36) before the guaranteed number of games executed by the main MPU 62, and steps Sl1302 to Step Sl1304 are executed. It is the fluctuation time for the jackpot before the guaranteed number of games obtained. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired by step Sl2503 corresponds to the fluctuation time for the jackpot before the guaranteed number of games obtained by the main MPU 62. After the execution of step Sl2503, the process proceeds to step Sl2504, and the effect pattern acquired by step Sl2503 is set.

By executing the processes from step Sl2501 to step Sl2504 described above, the effect in FIG. 13 (before the guaranteed number of games, the jackpot winning), that is, the normal battle effect as a battle effect and the victory effect as a result notification effect can be obtained. It can be carried out. After the execution of step Sl2504, the effect pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl2501 that the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is not a big hit (Sl2501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2505, and the result of the falling lottery related to this game round is won. Judge whether or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the fall lottery is a win from the information on the presence or absence of the fall win stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 by the step Sl2302 of the game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 46). .. If it is determined in step Sl2505 that the result of the fall lottery is winning (Sl2505: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2506.

In step Sl2506, the effect pattern table corresponding to the fall winning is specified from the effect pattern table group for the guaranteed number of games before, which is stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a of the sound light side ROM 93. Specifically, from the above-mentioned (I) to (III), the effect pattern table for the normal battle effect / defeat effect (II) is specified. After executing step Sl2506, the process proceeds to step Sl2507.

In step Sl2507, referring to the effect pattern table for the normal battle effect / defeat effect specified in step Sl2506, the variation time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 47) step Sl2401 The effect pattern corresponding to the value of the obtained random number RN for the effect pattern of this time is acquired. The variable time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2507 is the variable time setting process (FIG. 36) before the guaranteed number of games executed by the main MPU 62, in which step Sl1306, step Sl1303, and step. It is the fluctuation time for falling before the guaranteed number of games obtained by executing Sl1304. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired by step Sl2507 corresponds to the fluctuation time before the guaranteed number of games and for the fall obtained by the main MPU 62. After the execution of step Sl2507, the process proceeds to step Sl2504 described above, and the effect pattern acquired by step Sl2507 is set. After that, the effect pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games is terminated.

By executing the processes of steps Sl2501, Sx2505, Sx2506, Sx2507, and Sx2504 described above, the effect in FIG. 12 (before the guaranteed number of games, the fall winning), that is, the normal battle effect as a battle effect and the result notification effect. You can perform a defeat production.

If it is determined in step Sl2505 that the result of the fall lottery related to this game round is not a win (Sl2505: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2508 to determine whether or not reach occurs in this game round. .. Specifically, it is determined whether or not reach is generated from the information on whether or not reach is generated stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 by step Sl2302 of the game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 46). If it is determined in step Sl2508 that reach will occur in this game round (Sl2508: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2509.

In step Sl2509, the effect pattern table corresponding to the out-of-reach is specified from the effect pattern table group for the guaranteed number of games before, which is stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a of the sound light side ROM 93. Specifically, from the above-mentioned (I) to (III), the effect pattern table for the normal battle effect / draw effect (III) is specified. After executing step Sl2509, the process proceeds to step Sl2510.

In step Sl2510, referring to the effect pattern table for the normal battle effect / draw effect specified in step Sl2509, the variation time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 47) step Sl2401 The effect pattern corresponding to the value of the obtained random number RN for the effect pattern of this time is acquired. The variable time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2510 is the variable time setting process (FIG. 36) before the guaranteed number of games executed by the main MPU 62, in which step Sl1309, step Sl1303, and step. It is the fluctuation time for the occurrence of the out-of-reach before the guaranteed number of games obtained by executing Sl1304. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired by step Sl2510 corresponds to the variation time before the guaranteed number of games and for the occurrence of the out-of-reach obtained by the main MPU 62. After the execution of step Sl2510, the process proceeds to step Sl2504 described above, and the effect pattern acquired by step Sl2510 is set. After that, the effect pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games is terminated.

By executing the processes of steps Sl2501, Sx2505, Sx2508 to Sx2510, and Sx2504 described above, the effect in FIG. 14 (before the guaranteed number of games, the loss reach occurs), that is, the normal battle effect as a battle effect and the result notification effect. It is possible to perform a draw effect.

If it is determined in step Sl2508 that reach does not occur in this game round (Sl2508: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2511.

In step Sl2511, the variation time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and the variation time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) with reference to the effect pattern table for non-reach generation stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 11) of the sound light side ROM 93. The effect pattern for non-reach generation corresponding to the value of the random number RN for the effect pattern this time is acquired. The variable time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when step Sl2511 is executed is the variable time setting process (FIG. 36) before the guaranteed number of games executed by the main MPU 62, and step Sl1310 and step Sl1304 are executed. This is the variable time for non-reach obtained. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired by step Sl2511 corresponds to the variation time for non-reach generation obtained by the main MPU 62. After the execution of step Sl2511, the process proceeds to step Sl2504 described above, and the effect pattern acquired by step Sl2511 is set. After that, the effect pattern setting process before the guaranteed number of games is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games>
Next, the effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games will be described. The effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 47: Sl2411) of the effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games. In step Sl2601, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is a big hit winning. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery is the jackpot winning from the information on the presence or absence of the jackpot stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 by the step Sl2302 of the game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 46). .. If it is determined in step Sl2601 that the result of the winning lottery is a big hit (Sl2601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2602.

In step Sl2602, it is determined whether or not the result of the fall lottery related to the current game round is a winning. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the fall lottery is a win from the information on the presence or absence of the fall win stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 by the step Sl2302 of the game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 46). .. If it is determined in step Sl2602 that the result of the fall lottery is not a winning (Sl2602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2603.

In step Sl2603, it is determined whether or not the first drop mode command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sl2603 that the first drop mode command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sl2603: YES), it is assumed that the result of the mode selection lottery is the first drop mode, and the process proceeds to step Sl2604.

In step Sl2604, the effect pattern table corresponding to the big hit winning and the first drop mode winning is specified from the effect pattern table group for after the guaranteed number of games stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 11) of the sound light side ROM 93. do. For the production pattern table group for after the guaranteed number of games,
(IV) A production pattern table that executes a life-and-death battle production as a battle production and a victory production as a result notification production (hereinafter referred to as a production pattern table for a life-and-death battle production / victory production),
(V) A production pattern table that executes a life-and-death battle production as a battle production and a defeat production as a result notification production (hereinafter referred to as a production pattern table for a life-and-death battle production / defeat production),
(VI) A production pattern table that executes a dominant battle effect as a battle effect and a victory effect as a result notification effect (hereinafter referred to as a dominant battle effect / victory effect effect pattern table),
(VII) A production pattern table that executes a dominant battle effect as a battle effect and a draw effect as a result notification effect (hereinafter referred to as a dominant battle effect / draw effect effect pattern table),
Is provided. In step Sl2604, the production pattern table for the life-death battle production / victory production, which is (IV), is specified from (IV) to (VII). After executing step Sl2604, the process proceeds to step Sl2605.

In step Sl2605, referring to the effect pattern table for the life-and-death battle effect / victory effect specified in step Sl2604, the variation time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 47) step Sl2401 The effect pattern corresponding to the value of the obtained random number RN for the effect pattern of this time is acquired. For the variable time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2605, the variable time setting process (FIG. 37) after the guaranteed number of games executed by the main MPU 62 executes steps Sl1405 to step Sl1407. This is the variable time for the guaranteed number of games after the number of games and the jackpot first drop mode. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired by step Sl2605 corresponds to the variation time for the guaranteed game count after / big hit first drop mode obtained by the main MPU 62. After the execution of step Sl2605, the process proceeds to step Sl2606, and the effect pattern acquired by step Sl2605 is set.

By executing the processes from step Sl2601 to step Sl2606 described above, the effect in FIG. 21 (after the guaranteed number of games, the big hit win, the first drop mode win), that is, the life-and-death battle effect as a battle effect and the result notification effect. You can do the victory production of. After the execution of step Sl2606, the effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2603 that the first drop mode command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sl2603: NO), it is assumed that the result of the mode selection lottery is the second drop mode, and the process proceeds to step Sl2607.

In step Sl2607, the effect pattern table corresponding to the jackpot winning and the back drop mode winning is specified from the effect pattern table group for the guaranteed number of games stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 11) of the sound light side ROM 93. do. Specifically, from the above-mentioned (IV) to (VII), the production pattern table for the superior battle production / victory production (VI) is specified. After executing step Sl2607, the process proceeds to step Sl2608.

In step Sl2608, referring to the effect pattern table for the superior battle effect / victory effect specified in step Sl2605, the fluctuation time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 47) step Sl2401 The effect pattern corresponding to the value of the obtained random number RN for the effect pattern of this time is acquired. The variation time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2608 is the variation time setting process (FIG. 37) after the guaranteed number of games executed by the main MPU 62, and steps Sl1408, step Sl1406, and step. It is a fluctuation time for the guaranteed game count after / big hit after drop mode obtained by executing Sl1407. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired by step Sl2608 corresponds to the variation time for the guaranteed game count after / big hit after drop mode obtained by the main MPU 62. After the execution of step Sl2608, the process proceeds to step Sl2606, and the effect pattern acquired by step Sl2608 is set. After that, the effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sl2602 that the result of the fall lottery is winning (Sl2602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2604 without executing step Sl2603, and the production pattern table for life-and-death battle production / victory production is performed. To identify.

By executing the processes of steps Sl2601 to Sx2603, Sx2607, Sx2608, and Sx2606 described above, the effect in FIG. It is possible to perform a victory effect as a result notification effect.

If it is determined in step Sl2601 that the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is not a big hit (Sl2601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2609, and the result of the falling lottery related to this game round is won. Judge whether or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the fall lottery is a win from the information on the presence or absence of the fall win stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 by the step Sl2302 of the game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 46). .. If it is determined in step Sl2609 that the result of the fall lottery is winning (Sl2609: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2610.

In step Sl2610, the effect pattern table corresponding to the fall winning is specified from the effect pattern table group for after the guaranteed number of games stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a of the sound light side ROM 93. Specifically, from the above-mentioned (IV) to (VII), the production pattern table for the life-death battle production / defeat production, which is (V), is specified. After executing step Sl2610, the process proceeds to step Sl2611.

In step Sl2611, the variation time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 47) step Sl2401 with reference to the effect pattern table for life-and-death battle effect / defeat effect specified in step Sl2610. The effect pattern corresponding to the value of the obtained random number RN for the effect pattern of this time is acquired. The variation time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2611 is the variation time setting process (FIG. 37) after the guaranteed number of games executed by the main MPU 62, and steps Sl1410, step Sl1406, and step. It is a variable time for after / falling after the guaranteed number of games obtained by executing Sl1407. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired by step Sl26011 corresponds to the variation time for the guaranteed number of games after / falling obtained by the main MPU 62. After the execution of step Sl2611, the process proceeds to step Sl2606, and the effect pattern acquired by step Sl2611 is set. After that, the effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games is terminated.

By executing the processes of steps Sl2601 and Sx2609 to Step Sl2611 and Sx2606 described above, the effect in FIG. 18 (after the guaranteed number of games, the fall is won), that is, the life-and-death battle effect as a battle effect and the defeat as a result notification effect. It can be directed.

If it is determined in step Sl2609 that the result of the fall lottery related to the current game round is not a win (Sl2609: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2612 to determine whether or not reach will occur in this game round. .. Specifically, it is determined whether or not reach is generated from the information on whether or not reach is generated stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 by step Sl2302 of the game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 46). If it is determined in step Sl2612 that reach will occur in this game round (Sl2612: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2613.

In step Sl2613, the effect pattern table corresponding to the occurrence of the out-of-reach is specified from the effect pattern table group for after the guaranteed number of games stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a of the sound light side ROM 93. Specifically, from the above-mentioned (IV) to (VII), the effect pattern table for the dominant battle effect / draw effect (VII) is specified. After executing step Sl2613, the process proceeds to step Sl2614.

In step Sl2614, referring to the effect pattern table for the superior battle effect / draw effect specified in step Sl2613, the variation time read out by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 47) step Sl2401 The effect pattern corresponding to the value of the obtained random number RN for the effect pattern of this time is acquired. The variation time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2614 is the variation time setting process (FIG. 37) after the guaranteed number of games executed by the main MPU 62, in which step Sl1413, step Sl1406, and step. It is a variable time for generating a reach after the guaranteed number of games obtained by executing Sl1407. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired by step Sl2614 corresponds to the variation time for the occurrence of the guaranteed game number of times and the out-of-reach obtained by the main MPU 62. After the execution of step Sl2614, the process proceeds to step Sl2606, and the effect pattern acquired by step Sl2614 is set. After that, the effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games is terminated.

By executing the processes of steps Sl2601, Sx2609, Sx2612 to Sx2614, and Sx2606 described above, the effect in FIG. It is possible to perform a draw effect.

If it is determined in step Sl2612 that reach does not occur in this game round (Sl2612: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2615.

In step Sl2615, the variation time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) and the variation time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) with reference to the effect pattern table for non-reach generation stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 11) of the sound light side ROM 93. The effect pattern for non-reach generation corresponding to the value of the random number RN for the effect pattern this time is acquired. For the variable time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 46) when executing step Sl2615, step Sl1414 and step Sl1407 are executed in the variable time setting process (FIG. 37) after the guaranteed number of games executed by the main MPU62. This is the variable time for non-reach obtained. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired by step Sl2615 corresponds to the variation time for non-reach generation obtained by the main MPU 62. After the execution of step Sl2615, the process proceeds to step Sl2606 described above, and the effect pattern acquired by step Sl2615 is set. After that, the effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games is terminated.

<Process for executing game times production>
Next, the process for executing the game rotation effect will be described. The game round effect execution process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 45: Sl2202) of the game round effect process.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a game rotation effect execution process. In step Sl2701, it is determined whether or not the effect pattern set in the above-mentioned game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 46) exists. If it is determined in step Sl2701 that the set effect pattern does not exist (Sl2701: NO), the game round effect execution process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2701 that the set effect pattern exists (Sl2701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2702.

In step Sl2702, the set effect pattern is referred to, and then the process proceeds to step Sl2703 to determine whether or not it is the start timing of the game rotation effect. The game-playing effect referred to here is an effect based on various effect patterns set in the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 47). In these effect patterns, the content and timing of the effect to be executed in the game times are stored.

If it is determined in step Sl2703 that it is not the start timing of the game round effect (Sl2703: NO), the process for executing the main game round effect is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2703 that it is the start timing of the game rotation effect (Sl2703: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2704.

In step Sl2704, a moving image display start command corresponding to the content of the game rotation effect set in the effect pattern is transmitted to the display control device 100. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl2705 to start the light emission control processing of the various lamps 47 corresponding to the contents of the game rotation effect set in the effect pattern. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl2706, and the sound output LSI (not shown) is started to reproduce the audio data corresponding to the content of the advance notice effect set in the effect pattern. After executing step Sl2706, the process for executing the game round effect is terminated.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, the process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly the main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and the processes that are executed when a command is received from the voice emission control device 90. There is a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes the main process after the power is turned on, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. If the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, the main process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a main process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described.

In step Sl2801, the initial setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the character information in the compressed format stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, the information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also, make other settings necessary for initialization. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl2802.

In step Sl2802, the interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process executed every time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sl2901, the command storage process is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed by detecting the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105. In the V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute the display instruction.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal generated in VDP105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is performed every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Therefore, since the VDP 105 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image is started or displayed during the drawing of the image. It is possible to suppress the expansion of an image accompanying a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information inside is stored. Hereinafter, the processing details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described.

In step Sl3001, command correspondence processing is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt processing (FIG. 52), and the processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when an effect command is stored, control of drawing and displaying an image is started so that the effect mode specified by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, and when it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of drawing and displaying an image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command correspondence process (Sl3001), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so that there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the voice emission control device 90 and the effect is started, it is highly possible that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop symbol set by the voice emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the mode. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41.

In step Sl3002, the display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command correspondence process (Sl3001) or the like. .. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl3003.

In step Sl3003, task processing is executed. In the task process, the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting process (Sl3002). In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step Sl3004.

In step Sl3004, the drawing process is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character determined by the task process (Sl3003) are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on these information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received at the time of the previous V interrupt processing on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl3005, other processing is executed, and then the V interrupt processing is terminated. As described above, an example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described.

<< 1-7 >> Action / Effect:
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the probabilistic jackpot is won by the winning lottery, and after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the lottery mode is changed to the high probability mode and the support mode is changed to the high frequency support mode. After the transition, the support mode is high when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game times after the number of games reaches the guaranteed number of games (= after the guaranteed number of games) after the high frequency support mode is started. The frequency support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode, and the transition timing is switched between the start of the game round and the end of the game round by a lottery (= mode selection lottery). When the timing to shift to the low frequency support mode is the start of the game round, the life-and-death battle effect is executed in the game round, and the timing to shift to the low frequency support mode is the end of the game round. In, the dominant battle effect is executed in the game times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, when a big hit is won in the winning lottery in the game times after the guaranteed number of games, it is possible to perform the production in two ways, the life-and-death battle effect and the superior battle effect. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to broaden the range of the mode of production when a big hit is won in the winning lottery related to the game times after reaching the guaranteed number of games, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player wins the fall lottery in the game times after the guaranteed number of games is reached, or when the player does not win the fall lottery but wins the big hit in the lottery, the mode selection lottery is performed. In both cases where the first drop mode is won, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode at the timing when the game round starts, and the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 3) stops the opening / closing operation. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing whether the player has won the fall lottery or the big hit in the winning lottery from the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory 34a. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can give the player a sense of urgency and expectation for the result of the fall lottery and the winning lottery related to the game times after reaching the guaranteed number of games, by the battle effect, and as a result, the game. It is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Here, let us assume a pachinko machine having only a first-fall mode and not a second-fall mode (= the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 described above). According to the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, a life-and-death battle effect is executed, which suggests that the player wins the jackpot in the winning lottery (winning) or wins the falling lottery (defeat). Therefore, when the battle production is started in the game times after the guaranteed number of games is reached, the player can either win the big hit in the winning lottery or win the fall lottery. Although it can be predicted that this will be the case, and a sense of urgency and expectation for the results of the fall lottery and the winning lottery can be given, it is not possible to give the player a sense of security including a draw in the battle production. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game times after reaching the guaranteed number of games, when a big hit is won in the winning lottery, there are two ways of a life-and-death battle production and a dominant battle production. Since the production can be performed, it is possible to perform a battle production including a draw by the superior battle production, and it is possible to give the player a sense of security including a draw in the battle production.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the guaranteed number of games is reached, a big hit is won in the winning lottery without winning the fall lottery, and the game times in which the first-fall mode is won in the mode selection lottery and the fall lottery. The opening / closing operation of the electric accessory 34a is the same for the winning game times. Therefore, even if the player confirms that the electric accessory 34a is stopped at the start of the game round, the game round in which the big hit is won in the winning lottery without winning the fall lottery and the first drop mode is won in the mode selection lottery. And, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing one of the game times won in the fall lottery. However, by confirming that the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory 34a is stopped at the start of the game round after reaching the guaranteed number of games, the big hit is won in the winning lottery without winning the fall lottery, and the mode selection lottery is first. The player can grasp that the game times are narrowed down to either the game times won in the fall mode or the game times won in the fall lottery. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the game times are narrowed down to one of the game times in which the big hit is won in the winning lottery without winning the fall lottery and the first drop mode is won in the mode selection lottery, and the game times in which the fall lottery is won. By executing a life-and-death battle production that suggests that, it is possible to improve the player's sense of urgency and expectation as to whether he won the big hit in the winning lottery or the fall lottery. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the guaranteed number of games is reached, the game is not won in the fall lottery, is won in the big hit in the winning lottery, and is won in the back-falling mode in the mode selection lottery. The opening and closing operation of the electric accessory 34a is the same for the times and the game times in which it is determined that a reach (so-called off-reach) is generated in the reach determination without winning the fall lottery and not winning the big hit in the winning lottery. Is. Therefore, even if the player observes that the electric accessory 34a continues to open and close in the game round, the player does not win the fall lottery, wins a big hit in the winning lottery, and also wins the mode selection lottery. One of the game times in which the player wins the fall mode and the game times in which the reach is determined to occur in the reach judgment without winning the fall lottery and the big hit in the winning lottery. You can prevent people from guessing. However, by confirming that the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory 34a is continued in the game times after reaching the guaranteed number of games, the fall lottery is not won, the big hit is won in the winning lottery, and the mode is used. One of the game times in which the fall mode was won in the selection lottery, and the game times in which the reach was determined to occur in the reach judgment without winning the fall lottery and not winning the big hit in the winning lottery. The player can grasp that it has been narrowed down to. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the fall lottery is not won, the big hit is won in the winning lottery, and the game times in which the late falling mode is won in the mode selection lottery, and the falling lottery is not won, and the big hit is made in the winning lottery. By executing a superior battle production that suggests that the game was narrowed down to one of the game times that were determined to generate reach in the reach judgment without winning the game, the big hit was won in the winning lottery. , It is possible to improve the player's expectation as to which of the out-of-reach occurrences has occurred, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10, in the game times after reaching the guaranteed number of games, the fall lottery is not won, the big hit is won in the winning lottery, and the first-placed mode is won in the mode selection lottery. In the case of winning the fall lottery without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, it corresponds to either winning the jackpot in the winning lottery (winning) or winning the falling lottery (defeat). Since the suggested life-and-death battle effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency and expectation for the result of the fall lottery and the winning lottery related to the game times after the guaranteed number of games is reached. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10, in the game times after the guaranteed number of games is reached, the player does not win the fall lottery, wins the big hit in the winning lottery, and wins the back-falling mode in the mode selection lottery. And, in the case where it is determined that a reach (so-called out-of-reach) will occur in the reach judgment without winning the fall lottery and not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, winning the jackpot in the winning lottery (winning). And, the superior battle production suggesting that it corresponds to either that the big hit was not won in the winning lottery and that the falling lottery was not won (drawing) is executed. Since the dominant battle effect only occurs as a result of victory or draw, the player is more advantageous when the dominant battle effect is executed than when the life-and-death battle effect is executed. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to give a great expectation to the player by the superior battle effect, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player does not win the fall lottery in the game times after reaching the guaranteed number of games and wins the big hit in the winning lottery, the life-and-death battle effect and the superior battle effect are selected. Is executed. Life-and-death battle effects can result in defeat, but superior battle effects only result in victory or draw, so when the dominant battle effect is executed, it is better than when the life-and-death battle effect is executed. Highly advantageous for players. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to give a great expectation to the player by making the dominant battle effect appear. In particular, in the case of this embodiment, when winning the back-fall mode in which the superior battle effect can be executed, the jackpot type is limited to the 16R probability variation jackpot, which has the highest degree of advantage for the player (see FIG. 8). , It is possible to give a greater sense of expectation to the player.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the distribution table, the 16R probability variation jackpot, which has the highest degree of advantage for the player, is associated with the post-fall mode, which has a high degree of advantage. The 8R normal jackpot, which has the lowest degree of advantage for the player, may be associated with the back-fall mode, which has a high degree of advantage. Further, the post-fall mode having a high degree of advantage may be configured to correspond to two jackpot types, for example, a 16R probability variation jackpot and an 8R probability variation jackpot. According to this configuration, when winning the post-fall mode in which the dominant battle effect can be executed, the jackpot type is limited to the probabilistic jackpot, which has a high degree of advantage for the player, so that the player is given a great expectation. can do.

<< 1-8 >> Modification example of the first embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be carried out in various embodiments without departing from the gist thereof, and for example, the following modifications are also possible. In the modified examples described below, the description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as those of the above embodiment will be omitted.

<< 1-8-1 >> Modification 1:
In the first embodiment, the support mode is changed when a big hit is won in the game times after the guaranteed number of games is reached (= after the guaranteed number of games) after the high frequency support mode is started. Which mode to adopt, the drop mode or the back drop mode, was determined by a lottery based on the jackpot type counter C2 (= mode selection lottery). The configuration may be determined by a lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1 to be used. Specifically, it is as follows. Since the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in the first modification is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the same parts as those of the first embodiment will be described below using the same names and reference numerals. I do.

FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the pass / fail table for the high probability mode provided in the pachinko machine of the first modification. In the hit / fail table for the high probability mode, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in which the hit / fail result is a big hit is the same as in the case of the hit / miss table for the high probability mode (see FIG. 7B) in the first embodiment. Further, in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode, the distribution result of the mode selection lottery is associated with the value of 0 to 15 in which the winning / failing result is a big hit among the values of 0 to 1199. Specifically, of the 0 to 15 values that are big hits, 10 values from 0 to 9 are set to the first drop mode, and 6 values from 10 to 15 are set to the second drop mode.

In the pachinko machine of the first modification, when it is determined in the high probability mode in the hit determination process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, a winning lottery is performed with reference to the hit / fail table for the high probability mode. At the same time, a mode selection lottery is performed to determine whether the mode is the first drop mode or the second drop mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 54. If they match, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 further matches the value set in the first drop mode or the second drop mode as the distribution result of the mode selection lottery. Judge whether it is a fall mode or a fall mode.

As a result, as a mode for changing the support mode when a big hit is won in the winning lottery related to the game times after the guaranteed number of games is reached after the high frequency support mode is started (= after the guaranteed number of games). It is possible to decide which mode to adopt, the fall mode or the fall mode. The processing other than the portion of determining which of the first-fall mode and the second-fall mode to be adopted, which is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, is the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, the various processes executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the various processes executed by the display control device 100 are the same as those of the first embodiment.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 1 configured as described above, as in the case of the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, the effect of winning a big hit in the winning lottery related to the game times after reaching the guaranteed number of games. It is possible to widen the range of aspects of the above, and from the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 3), it can be predicted by the player whether the player has won the fall lottery or the big hit in the winning lottery. Can be prevented. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the first modification, it is possible to improve the interest of the game as in the pachinko machine of the first embodiment.

In this modification 1, the item of the distribution result of the mode selection lottery is added to the winning / failing table, and the sorting result of the mode selection lottery according to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is obtained by referring to the winning / failing table. Was there. On the other hand, as another modification, the hit / fail table remains as the first embodiment, and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 used for referencing the hit / miss table is compared with the threshold value for separating the first drop mode and the second drop mode. By doing so, it may be configured to determine whether it is a first-fall mode or a second-fall mode. Specifically, in the case of the hit / fail table for the high probability mode illustrated in FIG. 54, since the threshold value for separating the first drop mode and the second drop mode is a value of 10, when a big hit is won in the winning lottery. By determining whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is 10 or more, it is determined whether the mode is the late drop mode or the early drop mode. With this configuration as well, it is possible to determine which mode to adopt, the first drop mode or the second drop mode, when the jackpot is won. In particular, according to this modification, when the possible value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is as large as 65536 (2 to the 16th power), the processing time required for determination can be shortened.

<< 1-8-2 >> Modification 2:
In the first embodiment and the first modification thereof, the support mode is changed when a big hit is won in the game times after the guaranteed number of games is reached after the high frequency support mode is started (= after the guaranteed number of games). It was decided by lottery whether to adopt the first drop mode or the second drop mode as a mode for making the player drop. On the other hand, as a modification, in the game times after reaching the guaranteed number of games, the first drop mode and the second drop mode are based on the number of game times since the high frequency support mode is started. It may be configured to determine which one is to be adopted. Specifically, it is as follows. Since the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in Modification 2 is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the same parts as those of the first embodiment will be described below using the same names and reference numerals. I do.

In the pachinko machine of the second modification, the ROM 63 of the main control device 60 stores a mode selection table for determining whether the mode is the first drop mode or the second drop mode.

FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the mode selection table. As shown in the figure, the mode selection table indicates whether the mode is the first-fall mode or the second-fall mode with respect to the number of games from the 101st time, which is the guaranteed number of games, among the number of games since the high-frequency support mode is started. It has a data structure that associates the selection results. In the example of FIG. 55, the period from the 101st to the 105th and the period after the 109th are set as the number of games in the first drop mode. The period from the 106th time to the 108th time is set as the number of games in which the back-fall mode is set.

As described above, in the mode selection table, either the first-fall mode or the second-fall mode is displayed as a mode for changing the support mode when a big hit is won in the winning lottery for each game after the guaranteed number of games. It is stipulated whether to adopt the mode of. The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 refers to the mode selection table when a big hit is won in the winning lottery related to the game times after the guaranteed number of games, and supports in the game times when the big hit is won after the guaranteed number of games. It is determined whether the mode change mode is changed in the first drop mode or the second drop mode. The processing other than the portion of determining which of the first-fall mode and the second-fall mode to be adopted, which is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, is the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, the various processes executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the various processes executed by the display control device 100 are the same as those of the first embodiment.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 2 configured as described above, as in the case of the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, the effect of winning a big hit in the winning lottery related to the game times after reaching the guaranteed number of games. It is possible to widen the range of aspects of the above, and from the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 3), it can be predicted by the player whether the player has won the fall lottery or the big hit in the winning lottery. Can be prevented. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the second modification, it is possible to improve the interest of the game as in the pachinko machine of the first embodiment. Further, according to the pachinko machine of the second modification, the period after reaching the guaranteed number of games is divided into a plurality of periods, and either the first-fall mode or the second-fall mode is set for each of the divided periods. Since it is possible to set in advance whether or not to adopt the machine, it is possible to prevent the processing from being biased to one of the first-fall mode and the second-fall mode, resulting in an excessively advantageous or disadvantageous state for the player. It is possible to produce a rich story.

The mode selection result to be stored in the mode selection table shown in FIG. 55 is merely an example, and various modes such as a configuration in which the number of times of switching between the first drop mode and the second drop mode is increased can be used. Further, a plurality of mode selection tables having different mode selection results may be prepared in advance, and the mode selection table to be used may be switched. For example, in the winning / failing table, the mode selection table is switched when a small hit is won, as a configuration in which a "big hit" and a "small hit" are provided as a result of the winning lottery. According to such a configuration, it is possible to switch between the first drop mode and the second drop mode in various ways. In particular, if the mode selection table is switched when a small hit is won, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the small hit has been won in the winning lottery, so that the player does not notice. , It is possible to switch the mode selection table.

Further, the mode selection table displays the selection result of the first drop mode or the second drop mode with respect to the number of games from the 101st time, which is after the guaranteed number of games, among the number of games since the high frequency support mode is started. The data structure was associated with each other, but on the other hand, the selection result of the first drop mode or the second drop mode for the number of games from the first game since the high frequency support mode was started. It may be configured to associate. In this configuration, when the number of games is from the first to 100 times, the back drop mode is set (see FIG. 13).

In the second modification, the mode selection result according to the number of games was obtained by referring to the mode selection table. On the other hand, as another modification, the first-fall mode or the second-fall mode is performed by performing an operation that compares the number of games with the threshold value that separates the first-fall mode and the second-fall mode without using the mode selection table. It may be configured to determine whether or not. Specifically, in the mode selection table illustrated in FIG. 55, since the threshold values for separating the first-fall mode and the second-fall mode are 101, 106, and 109, the number of games is 101 or more by arithmetic processing. If it is less than 106, it is determined to be in the first drop mode, if the number of games is 106 or more and less than 109, it is determined to be the second drop mode, and if the number of games is 109 or more, it is determined to be the first drop mode. Judged as a mode. Also with this configuration, it is possible to determine which mode to adopt, the first drop mode or the second drop mode, according to the number of games.

<< 1-8-3 >> Modification 3:
In the first embodiment and the first modification thereof, the support mode is changed when a big hit is won in the game times after the guaranteed number of games is reached after the high frequency support mode is started (= after the guaranteed number of games). As a mode for making the player drop, which of the first drop mode and the second drop mode should be adopted was determined by lottery. On the other hand, as a modification, a configuration may be used in which the first-fall mode or the second-fall mode is determined according to the fluctuation time set by the fluctuation time setting process. Also with this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game as in the first embodiment and its modified examples.

<< 1-8-4 >> Modification 4:
In the first embodiment and the modifications 1 to 3 above, the player is not notified which of the first-fall mode and the second-fall mode is to be adopted. On the other hand, as a modification, the player may be notified of which mode is to be adopted, the first drop mode or the second drop mode. For example, at the start of the game round, the mode adoption result is displayed on the symbol display device 41. According to this modification 4, when the player learns from the display of the symbol display device 41 that the mode is in the back drop mode, the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 3) is stopped at the start of the game round. When it is admitted, it can be predicted that the fall lottery was won in the middle of the superior battle production. Therefore, according to the modification 4, the player can leave room for predicting that he / she has won the fall lottery in the middle of the battle production.

In the first embodiment, the mode selection result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 is obtained by referring to the distribution table used when sorting the jackpot types. On the other hand, as another modification, it is possible to perform a first-drop mode by performing an operation of comparing the value of the jackpot type counter C2 with the threshold value for separating the first-fall mode and the second-fall mode without using the distribution table. It may be configured to determine whether it is the back-fall mode. Specifically, in the distribution table for the first starting port illustrated in FIG. 8A, the threshold values for separating the first drop mode and the second drop mode are 40 and 65, so that the threshold value is 40 and 65. When the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 0 or more and less than 40, it is determined to be the first drop mode, and when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 40 or more and less than 65, it is the second drop mode. When the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 65 or more, it is determined that the mode is the first drop mode. Also with this configuration, it is possible to determine which mode to adopt, the first drop mode or the second drop mode, according to the jackpot type counter C2. In the case of the first embodiment, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the value of the game ball into the second start port 34. The distribution result of the mode selection lottery according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 was different depending on the case obtained based on the ball entry, but according to this modification 4, the same distribution result is obtained. ..

<< 1-8-5 >> Modification 5:
In the first embodiment and its modifications, the low-frequency support mode is adopted as the first state in which the state information is specified in the state storage means, and the high-frequency support mode is adopted as the state other than the first state. However, the first state and the states other than the first state are not limited to these. For example, a high frequency support mode may be adopted as the first state, and a low frequency support mode may be adopted as the second state. Further, in the first embodiment and its modification, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are provided as states in which the high-frequency support mode flag, which is the state information, can be specified. The 34a may be configured to have three types of support modes (for example, a low frequency support mode, a medium frequency support mode, and a high frequency support mode) in which the frequency at which the 34a is opened per unit time is divided into three stages. Further, the configuration may have n types of support modes in which the frequency is divided into n stages (n is a positive integer of 4 or more).

<< 1-8-6 >> Modification 6:
In the first embodiment and its modifications, the determination means has a low probability mode and a high probability mode as the determination mode (lottery mode), but instead, the probability that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition is It may be configured to have three types of probability modes (for example, a low probability mode, a medium probability mode, and a high probability mode) divided into three stages. Further, there may be a configuration having n kinds of probability modes in which the probability that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition is divided into n stages (n is a positive integer of 4 or more).

<< 1-8-7 >> Modification 7:
In the first embodiment and the modification thereof, the case where the special information satisfies a predetermined condition is described as an example of winning a big hit in the winning lottery, but the predetermined condition is that the big hit is won in the winning lottery. Not limited. For example, as a case where the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, a case where the condition for executing the reach effect based on the acquired counter value of the reach random number counter C3 is satisfied may be adopted.

<< 1-8-8 >> Modification 8:
In the first embodiment and its modifications, the main control device 60 side sets the fluctuation time based on various information including the high frequency support mode, and the voice emission control device 90 sets various information including the high frequency support mode. The effect pattern is set based on the information in. On the other hand, as a modification, a mode such as a specific operation or display other than the above in the gaming machine, for example, a background moving image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is set based on various information including the high frequency support mode. It may be configured.

<< 1-8-9 >> Modification 9:
In the first embodiment and its modification, the battle effect (battle effect) is executed as a specific effect executed before the result notification effect, but the specific effect is limited to the battle effect. There is no. The specific effect can be any configuration as long as it suggests that the result notification effect may be executed. Even with such a configuration, the same effect as that described in the first embodiment can be obtained.

<< 1-8-10 >> Modification 10:
In the first embodiment and its modification, the effect executed in one game is composed of two types of effects, a battle effect and a result notification effect, but instead of this, a notice effect, a battle effect, and a result. It may be composed of three types of effects, that is, an announcement effect. Furthermore, it may be produced in four or more types.

<< 1-8-11 >> Modification 11:
In the first embodiment and its modification, the life-and-death battle effect executed when the fall lottery is won, and the life-and-death executed when the big hit is won in the winning lottery and the first-fall mode is won in the mode selection lottery. The battle production was the same, but not limited to this. For example, a part of the image constituting the life-and-death battle effect is different between the life-and-death battle effect when the fall lottery is won and the life-and-death battle effect when the big hit is won in the winning lottery and the first drop mode is won. May be. For example, by making the images similar as a whole but only some players can notice that they are different, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification thereof, the fall lottery is not won, the big hit is won in the winning lottery, and the superior battle effect is executed when the falling mode is won in the mode selection lottery. , The predominant battle effect executed when it is determined that a reach (so-called out-of-reach) occurs in the reach judgment without winning the fall lottery and not winning the big hit in the winning lottery is the same. Not limited to this. For example, a part of the image constituting the dominant battle effect may be different between the former dominant battle effect and the latter dominant battle effect. For example, by making the images similar as a whole but only some players can notice that they are different, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<< 1-8-12 >> Modification 12:
In the first embodiment and its modification, when a big hit is won in the winning lottery related to the game times after the guaranteed number of games, the life-and-death battle effect and the dominant battle effect are selectively executed in the game times. On the other hand, as a modification, when a big hit is won in the winning lottery related to the game times after the guaranteed number of games, the life-and-death battle effect and the dominant battle effect are selected in the game times. Only one of them may be executed, and the other of the life-and-death battle effect and the superior battle effect may be executed in the game times before the guaranteed number of games. For example, if a big hit is won in the winning lottery related to the game times after the guaranteed number of games, or if the player wins in the fall lottery related to the game times, a life-and-death battle is performed in the game times and before the guaranteed number of games. If a big hit is won in the winning lottery related to the game times, or if the falling lottery related to the game times is not won and the big hit is not won in the winning lottery, a superior battle effect is performed in the game times. It may be configured. In this configuration, the dominant battle production may be a battle production with other contents as long as it is different from the life-and-death battle production, or may be a production other than the battle production with other contents.

<< 1-8-13 >> Modification 13:
In the first embodiment and the modified example thereof, after the guaranteed number of games is reached, the reach (so-called out-of-reach) is generated in the reach determination without winning the fall lottery and not winning the big hit in the winning lottery. The configuration is such that a dominant battle effect is performed for the determined game times, but as a modification, a reach is generated in the reach determination without winning the fall lottery and not winning the big hit in the winning lottery. Even in the game times that are not determined to be so, the configuration may be such that a superior battle effect is performed. That is, regardless of whether or not a reach has occurred in the reach determination, the dominant battle effect may be performed for the game times in which the fall lottery is not won and the big hit is not won in the winning lottery. According to this modification, the same effect as that described in the first embodiment can be obtained.

<< 1-8-14 >> Modification 14:
In the first embodiment and its modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices such as a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, but instead of this, the main control It may be configured to include two control devices such as a device and a sub control device. The sub-control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the first embodiment. Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification thereof, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, 100 need not be limited to the division described in the first embodiment, and the three controls are not limited to the divisions described. It suffices that various processes according to the first embodiment can be executed as a whole of the devices 60, 90, 100.

<< 2 >> Second embodiment:
<< 2-1 >> Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 56 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a voice emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. Illuminations are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect of the effect by lighting or blinking at the time of the special drawing lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, the winning prize, the reach occurrence, or the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two plate glasses is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. The details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls rented from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball stored in the upper plate 20 is supplied to the game ball launch mechanism included in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launch mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores the game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged to the outside from the lower plate 21.

An effect operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game effect reflecting the operation.

Further, an operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front. When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game balls are moved from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board at predetermined intervals (0.6 second intervals in the present embodiment) in conjunction with the operation. Be fired. Inside the operation handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and an operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c that detects the rotation operation amount of the above by the change of the electric resistance is provided. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes according to the rotation operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. When the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is less than the predetermined value, that is, when the firing intensity of the game ball is less than the predetermined value, the fired game ball flows down the region on the left side of the front view of the game board. The launch mode of the game ball in this case is also referred to as "left-handed". On the other hand, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is a predetermined amount or more, that is, when the firing intensity of the game ball is a predetermined value or more, the fired game ball flows down the region on the right side of the front view of the game board. The launch mode of the game ball in this case is also referred to as "right-handed".

Further, on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 in the front view, a game ball launch button 26 for the player to operate is provided. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined firing intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the player's operation handle 25. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the front view of the game board and flows down to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can "hit right". The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player turns on the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26 to launch the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26. It can be realized.

In the present embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 in the front view, but the game ball launch button 26 is arranged at another position. It may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25 in the same manner as the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operation handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball launch button 26 only with the right hand.

FIG. 57 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding the game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicular to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general winning opening 32, a general drawing start gate 35, a general electric winning device 34, a first special electric winning device 57, a second special electric winning device 58, and an out opening 43. In particular, in the present embodiment, a single resin flow passage 301 through which the game ball can be distributed is provided in the game area on the right side where the game ball can be reached by "right-handed", and the flow passage 301 is provided. Is provided with a general electric winning device 34, a first special electric winning device 57, a second special electric winning device 58, and an out port 43 in this order from the upstream side. In the present embodiment, since no nail is provided on the path from the launch of the game ball to the flow path 301, the "right-handed" game ball enters the flow path 301 with a constant trajectory. To reach. Further, in the present embodiment, since the nail is not provided inside the flow passage 301, each game ball circulating inside the flow passage 301 has no variation in behavior and is distributed in the same manner. Hereinafter, each configuration provided on the game board 30 will be described.

The general winning opening 32 is an entry opening into which a game ball can enter, and when a game ball enters, one game ball is paid out from the payout device 71 as a prize ball. In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30.

The normal drawing start gate 35 is a gate provided with a through hole through which a game ball can pass, and when the game ball passes through, a normal drawing lottery, which is an internal lottery by the main control device 60, is executed. As a result of the normal drawing lottery, if the normal drawing is won, the normal electric opening / closing execution mode in which the ordinary electric accessory 34b, which will be described later, executes the opening / closing operation is started. The Fuden opening / closing execution mode is composed of a Fuden opening period, a Fuden opening / closing processing period, and a Fuden ending period. The Fuden opening period is a waiting period until the opening / closing process of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is started, and the Fuden opening / closing processing period is a period during which the opening / closing process of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is actually executed. The normal electric accessory ending period is a waiting period after the opening / closing process of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is completed until the next normal drawing lottery can be executed. Even if the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out. In the present embodiment, the normal drawing start gate 35 is provided in the lower center of the game board 30. Further, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 32 is provided at a position where the game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 35 can enter. More specifically, a general winning opening 32 is provided directly below the normal drawing start gate 35. In the following description, passing the game ball through the normal drawing start gate 35 is also referred to as "the game ball enters the normal drawing start gate 35".

The general electric winning device 34 includes a special figure starting port 34a into which a game ball can enter, and an ordinary electric accessory 34b that functions as a shutter for opening and closing the entrance of the special drawing starting port 34a.

The ordinary electric accessory 34b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the special drawing start port 34a, and when the above-mentioned general electric opening / closing execution mode is started, the game ball is special. Figure: The ball is in an open state where the ball can enter the starting port 34a.

In the present embodiment, the ordinary electric accessory 34b is composed of a plate-shaped member, and in the closed state, it protrudes in front of the game board 30, and the upper surface thereof constitutes the bottom surface of the flow passage 301. The game ball is in a state where it can circulate on the upper surface of the plate-shaped member. On the other hand, in the open state, the ordinary electric accessory 34b is stored behind the game board 30, and the game ball circulating in the flow passage 301 is provided below the ordinary electric accessory 34b. The ball can enter the starting port 34a. Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of protrusions are provided on the upper surface of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, and the protrusions reduce the speed of the game ball circulating on the upper surface of the ordinary electric accessory 34b. As a result, the time required for the game ball to pass over the upper surface of the ordinary electric accessory 34b of the present embodiment is 0.7 seconds or more.

The special drawing start port 34a is an entry port into which a game ball can enter, and when the game ball enters, three game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls, and the inside by the main control device 60. A special drawing lottery, which is a lottery, is executed. As a result of the special figure lottery, if the special figure big hit or the special figure small hit is won, the special electric accessory (first special electric accessory 57b or second special electric accessory 58b) described later executes the opening / closing operation. The mode is started. The special electric opening / closing execution mode is composed of a special electric opening opening period, a special electric opening / closing processing period, and a special electric ending period. The special electric opening period is the waiting period until the opening / closing process of the special electric accessory is started, the special electric opening / closing processing period is the period during which the opening / closing process of the special electric accessory is actually executed, and the special electric ending period is. , It is a waiting period until the next special drawing lottery can be executed after the opening / closing process of the special electric accessory is completed. In this embodiment, as a result of the special figure lottery, the special figure big hit and the miss are not set, and only the special figure small hit is set. Then, in the present embodiment, as a result of the special figure lottery, when the special figure small hit is won, the special electric opening / closing execution mode in which the first special electric accessory 57b executes the opening / closing operation is started.

The first special electric winning device 57 includes a first special winning opening 57a into which a game ball can enter, a first special electric accessory 57b that functions as a shutter for opening and closing the entrance of the first special winning opening 57a, and a first. It is provided with a V winning opening 57av provided inside the large winning opening 57a.

The first special electric accessory 57b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the first large winning opening 57a, and when the above-mentioned special electric opening / closing execution mode is started, the game ball Is in an open state where the ball can enter the first prize opening 57a.

In the present embodiment, the first special electric accessory 57b is composed of a plate-shaped member, and in a closed state, it protrudes in front of the game board 30, and the upper surface thereof constitutes the bottom surface of the flow passage 301. The game ball is in a state where it can circulate on the upper surface of the plate-shaped member. On the other hand, in the open state, the first special electric accessory 57b is stored behind the game board 30, and the game ball circulating in the flow passage 301 is provided below the first special electric accessory 57b. The ball can be entered into the first large winning opening 57a. Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of protrusions are provided on the upper surface of the first special electric accessory 57b, and the protrusions reduce the speed of the game ball circulating on the upper surface of the first special electric accessory 57b. .. As a result, the time required for the game ball to pass the upper surface of the first special electric accessory 57b of the present embodiment is 1.0 second or more.

The first large winning opening 57a is an entrance where a game ball can enter when the first special electric accessory 57b is open, and when the game ball enters, 15 game balls are inserted. It is paid out from the payout device 71 as a prize ball. As described above, in the present embodiment, the V winning opening 57av is provided inside the first large winning opening 57a.

The V winning opening 57av is an entry opening where a game ball can enter, and when the game ball enters, the V winning jackpot is won and the above-mentioned special electric opening / closing execution mode is started. As described above, in the present embodiment, the V winning opening 57av is provided inside the first large winning opening 57a, and the game ball that has entered the first large winning opening 57a is surely followed by the V winning opening 57av. It is configured to enter the ball. Then, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 57av, the special electric opening / closing execution mode in which the second special electric accessory 58b, which will be described later, executes the opening / closing operation is started. In the following description, the entry of a game ball into the V winning opening 57av is also referred to as "winning the V winning jackpot".

The second special electric winning device 58 includes a second special winning opening 58a into which a game ball can enter, and a second special electric accessory 58b that functions as a shutter for opening and closing the entrance of the second special winning opening 58a. There is.

The second special electric accessory 58b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the second special winning opening 58a, and when the above-mentioned special electric opening / closing execution mode is started, the game ball Is in an open state where the ball can enter the second prize opening 58a.

In the present embodiment, the second special electric accessory 58b is composed of a plate-shaped member, and in a closed state, it protrudes in front of the game board 30, and the upper surface thereof constitutes the bottom surface of the flow passage 301. The game ball is in a state where it can circulate on the upper surface of the plate-shaped member. On the other hand, in the open state, the second special electric accessory 58b is stored behind the game board 30, and the game ball that has circulated in the flow passage 301 is provided below the second special electric accessory 58b. The ball can be entered into the second large winning opening 58a.

The second big winning opening 58a is an entrance where a game ball can enter when the second special electric accessory 58b is in the open state, and when the game ball enters, 15 game balls are inserted. It is paid out from the payout device 71 as a prize ball. The above-mentioned V winning opening is not provided inside the second large winning opening 58a.

The out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30 and at the end of the flow passage 301, and the game ball that has not entered the various entry ports is discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43. ..

In addition, "entry ball" means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening or a predetermined area, and is discharged from the game area PA after the game ball passes through the predetermined opening or the predetermined area. Not only that, it also includes an embodiment in which the game ball continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged from the game area PA after passing through the predetermined opening or the predetermined area. Further, the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 32, the special drawing starting opening 34a, the first large winning opening 57a, the V winning opening 57av, and the second large winning opening 58a is also referred to as winning.

Next, various display units provided on the game board 30 will be described.

The game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 has a special figure unit 37, a normal figure unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a special symbol display unit 37a.

The special symbol display unit 37a is a display unit for variable display and stop display of the special symbol. The special symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed and stopped when the special symbol lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the special symbol start opening 34a. When the special figure lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the special figure start port 34a, the special symbol display unit 37a is displayed as a display mode until the display corresponding to the lottery result of the special figure lottery is performed. , Perform variable display of special symbols. After that, the special symbol display unit 37a stops and displays the special symbol in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. Hereinafter, the time from the start of the variation display of the special symbol to the stop display on the special symbol display unit 37a is also referred to as a special symbol variation time.

In the present embodiment, the special symbol display unit 37a is composed of a 7-segment display in which seven segment light emitting units are arranged in a figure eight shape. When the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a, the 7-segment display constituting the special symbol display unit 37a blinks in a predetermined mode and then lights up in a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result of the special figure lottery. However, the special symbol display unit 37a is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may have other configurations.

It should be noted that the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display unit 37a to the end of the variable display to the stop display and the end of the stop display is also referred to as a special symbol game. That is, the special figure game round is one unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the special figure lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the special figure start opening 34a. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one special drawing lottery for each special drawing game. Further, the time required for one special figure game is also referred to as a unit special figure game time. The unit special symbol game time is the special symbol fluctuation time, which is the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display unit 37a until the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, and the result of the special symbol lottery. It is composed of the special figure stop time, which is the time displayed as a stop.

In a general pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the special figure start port 34a during the execution of the special electric opening / closing execution mode or the variable display of the special symbol, a special figure lottery based on the entry of the game ball is performed. It has a function to hold the execution of the special figure (also called a special figure hold function), and has a special figure hold display unit that displays information corresponding to the number of held special figure lottery held. The pachinko machine 10 of the form does not have the above-mentioned special figure holding function, and does not have the special drawing holding display unit.

The normal figure unit 38 includes a normal symbol display unit 38a and a normal figure hold display unit 38b.

The normal symbol display unit 38a is a display unit that displays the normal symbol in a variable manner and stops. The normal symbol is a symbol that is displayed in a variable manner and stopped when the regular drawing lottery is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the regular drawing start gate 35. When the normal figure lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the normal figure start gate 35, the normal symbol display unit 38a is displayed as a display mode until the display corresponding to the lottery result of the normal figure lottery is performed. , Ordinary symbol variation display is executed. After that, the ordinary symbol display unit 38a stops and displays the ordinary symbol in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery. In the following, the time from the start of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol to the stop display on the normal symbol display unit 38a is also referred to as the normal symbol fluctuation time.

In the present embodiment, the ordinary symbol display unit 38a is composed of a 7-segment display in which seven segment light emitting units are arranged in a figure eight shape. When the game ball enters the normal map start gate 35, the 7-segment display constituting the normal symbol display unit 38a blinks in a predetermined mode and then lights up in a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result of the normal map lottery. However, the ordinary symbol display unit 38a is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may have other configurations.

It should be noted that the period from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 38a to the end of the variable display to the stop display and the end of the stop display is also referred to as a normal symbol game. That is, the Fuzu game round is one unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the Fuzu lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the Fuzu start gate 35. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one normal drawing lottery for each normal drawing game. In addition, the time required for one Fuzu game is also referred to as a unit Fuzu game time. The unit normal symbol game time is the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 38a until the result of the normal symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, and the result of the normal symbol lottery is It is composed of the normal map stop time, which is the time displayed as a stop.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the normal map start gate 35 during the execution of the normal electric opening / closing execution mode or the variable display of the normal symbol, the normal map lottery based on the entry of the game ball is performed. It has a function of holding execution (also referred to as a holding function of a drawing), and has a holding display unit 38b of a drawing that displays information corresponding to the number of holdings of the reserved drawing lottery.

The normal map reservation display unit 38b is a display unit that displays information corresponding to the number of reserved normal map lottery. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four (4 times) drawing lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the starting gate 35 is suspended. In the present embodiment, the normal drawing hold display unit 38b is composed of four LED lamps, and the number of LED lamps corresponding to the number of holding numbers of the normal drawing lottery is lit.

The round display unit 39 is a display unit that displays information corresponding to the number of round games executed in the special electric opening / closing execution mode. Round game means that either a predetermined predetermined time (maximum opening time) has elapsed, or a predetermined upper limit number (maximum number of balls) can be entered into the large winning opening. It is a game in which the special electric accessory is kept open until one of the conditions is satisfied. The number of round games differs depending on the type of special figure that triggered the transition to the special electric open / close execution mode. The round display unit 39 starts the display corresponding to the number of round games at the start of the special electric opening / closing processing period in the special electric opening / closing execution mode, and ends the display at the end of the special electric opening / closing processing period. In the present embodiment, the round display unit 39 is configured by arranging two 7-segment displays in which seven segment light emitting units are arranged in a figure eight shape. However, the round display unit 39 is not limited to the two 7-segment displays, and may have other configurations.

The special figure unit 37, the normal figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 described above are not limited to being composed of a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and are, for example, a liquid crystal display device and an organic EL display. It may be composed of various display devices capable of showing the lottery during and the lottery result, such as a device, a CRT or a dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100, which will be described later. The configuration of the symbol display device 41 included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the liquid crystal display, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the special symbol in the special symbol display unit 37a or the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol display unit 38a displays a variable display, the symbol display device 41 performs a variable display of the decorative symbol accordingly. Further, the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the variable display of the decorative symbol, but also performs an effect display during the special electric open / close execution mode or the general electric open / close execution mode. Hereinafter, the details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing a decorative symbol that is variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41 and a display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. FIG. 58A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol that is variablely displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIG. 58 (A), on the symbol display device 41, symbols showing numbers 1 to 7 are variablely displayed as decorative symbols. As the decorative symbol to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol having a pattern such as a character may be adopted for each of the symbols showing the numbers 1 to 7.

FIG. 58B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, the main display area MA and the sub display area SA are displayed on the display surface 41a. In the present embodiment, the main display area MA is a large area in the center of the display surface 41a, and the sub display area SA is a region smaller than the main display area MA on the upper right side of the display surface 41a.

In the main display area MA, three decorative symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each decorative symbol row Z1 to Z3, the decorative symbols of numbers 1 to 7 shown in FIG. 58 (A) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and in each of the decorative symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the decorative symbols are arranged. Is periodically scrolled from top to bottom or from bottom to top. Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), after the variable display by scrolling, one decorative symbol for each decorative symbol row is displayed in a state of being stopped on the effective line L1.

In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the normal symbol start gate 35 and the variation display of the normal symbol is started on the normal symbol display unit 38a, the decorative symbols of the decorative symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are predetermined with periodicity. A variable display that scrolls in the direction of is started. Then, each scrolling decorative symbol switches from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the decorative symbol row Z1, the decorative symbol row Z3, and the decorative symbol row Z2. After that, in synchronization with the timing when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 38a, one decorative symbol is stopped and displayed for each decorative symbol row Z1 to Z3. When the result of the normal drawing lottery by the main control device 60 is a normal drawing, when the variation display of the decorative symbol in each decorative symbol row ends and the display is stopped, a predetermined predetermined value is set in advance. A combination of decorative symbols is formed on the effective line L1. For example, the same combination of decorative symbols is formed on the effective line L1. The mode of variable display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol row is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, and the number of decorative symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the scroll direction of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol row, and each. Various modes can be adopted as the mode of variable display of the decorative symbols, such as the number of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol row.

Next, the reach in the decorative design will be described. Reach is a possibility that a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a hit is formed on the effective line L1 in a part of the decorative symbol rows among the plurality of decorative symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. A display state in which a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and in that state, variable display of decorative symbols is performed in the remaining decorative symbol rows. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the hit means the combination of the same decorative symbols. Specifically, for example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 58 (B), the decorative symbol "7" is first stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol row Z1, and then the decorative symbol row is displayed in the decorative symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the same decorative symbol "7" as Z1, and the decorative symbol is scrolling (variably displayed) in the decorative symbol row Z2 in a state where the reach line is formed. ) The state is called reach. Then, when a hit occurs, the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, in the state where the reach line is formed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in the remaining decorative symbol row, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. In addition, a combination of decorative symbols on which a reach line is formed is reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to produce a reach effect. ..

Similar to the main display area MA, the sub display area SA displays three decorative symbol columns Z4, Z5, and Z6 on the left, middle, and right. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the special symbol start port 34a and the variable display of the special symbol is started on the special symbol display unit 37a, the decorative symbol in the sub display area SA is started with the start of the variable display. Fluctuation display of is started. Then, in synchronization with the timing at which the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 37a, one decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L2 for each decorative symbol row Z4 to Z6. That is, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol in the sub display area SA is synchronized with the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol in the special symbol display unit 37a.

As shown in FIG. 58 (B), the normal figure hold display area Dn is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the normal map reservation display area Dn, the number of normal map lottery held based on the entry of the game ball into the normal map start gate 35 (the number of reserved normal map lottery) is displayed. The reserved normal figure lottery is a normal figure lottery that has not been executed, and the variable display of the normal symbol for notifying the lottery result of the normal figure lottery has not been started. In the present embodiment, the number of reserved normal drawing lottery that can be held based on the entry of the game ball into the normal drawing start gate 35 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the reserved display area Dn can be displayed on hold corresponding to four reserved normal drawing lottery.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, a blinking display and a lighting display synchronized with the fluctuation display and the stop display of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display unit 38a are performed. It is provided with a normal figure synchronization display unit Sync1 and a special figure synchronization display unit Sync2 that performs blinking display and lighting display synchronized with the variable display and stop display of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display unit 37a. Specifically, when the normal symbol is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display unit 38a, the normal symbol synchronous display unit Sync1 blinks and the normal symbol display unit 38a stops and displays the normal symbol. In this case, the normal figure synchronization display unit Sync1 displays lighting. Further, when the special symbol is variablely displayed on the special symbol display unit 37a, the special symbol synchronization display unit Sync2 blinks, and when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 37a, the special symbol display unit 37a displays a blinking display. The special figure synchronization display unit Sync2 displays lighting.

In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 has a main display area MA, a sub display area SA, a normal figure hold display area Dn, a normal figure synchronous display unit Sync1, and a special figure synchronous display unit. Although the configuration is such that Sync2 is displayed, a configuration may be adopted in which a part or all of these displays are not displayed on the display surface 41a.

<< 2-2 >> Electrical configuration of gaming machines:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 59 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a program recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may have a part of the function which MPU 62 has. Further, details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively.

A payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a DC stable 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power.

Further, on the input side of the main control board 61, there are various types such as a general winning opening 32, a special drawing starting port 34a, a normal drawing starting gate 35, a first large winning opening 57a, a V winning opening 57av, and a second large winning opening 58a. Various detection sensors provided at the entrance of the ball are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each entry port. Further, the MPU 62 executes the special drawing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the special drawing start port 34a, and executes the special drawing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the normal drawing start gate 35.

On the output side of the main control board 61, a first special electric accessory drive unit 57c that opens and closes the first special electric accessory 57b and a second special electric accessory drive that opens and closes the second special electric accessory 58b. The unit 58c, the ordinary electric accessory driving unit 34c that opens and closes the ordinary electric accessory 34b, and the main display unit 45 are connected to each other. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, the MPU 62 has a first special electric accessory drive unit 57c or a second special electric motor so that the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b is opened and closed in the special electric opening / closing execution mode. The drive control of the accessory drive unit 58c is executed. Further, in the normal electric accessory opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the ordinary electric accessory driving unit 34c so that the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened / closed. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the special symbol display unit 37a on the main display unit 45 when the special figure lottery is executed, and rounds on the main display unit 45 when the special electric opening / closing execution mode is executed. The display control of the display unit 39 is executed. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the normal symbol display unit 38a in the main display unit 45 when the normal symbol lottery is executed.

Further, the payout control device 70 and the voice emission control device 90 are connected to the output side of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63b of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the special drawing start opening 34a. When the entry of the game ball is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the game is played in the first prize opening 57a or the second prize opening 58a. When the entry of a ball is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. Further, an operation handle 25 is connected to the launch control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes according to the rotation operation amount. The game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Further, a game ball launch button 26 is connected to the launch control device 80. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is configured to be fired on the game board provided that the touch sensor 25a is on.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63b of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the voice emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, control of the display control device 100 is performed. Further, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the voice emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the decorative symbol in the symbol display device 41 and the type of the combination of the decorative symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. At the same time, the presence or absence of reach, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the effect executed while the decorative design is variablely displayed are grasped. In this embodiment, the time during which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is constant. Therefore, by determining the variation time of the decorative symbol, the unit game round time, which is the time required for one game round, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for special drawing lottery, general drawing lottery, and the like. Various counters are used when the MPU 62 performs a special drawing lottery, a general drawing lottery, and the like. Specifically, the special figure hit / miss determination counter Cs1 and the special figure type determination counter Cs2 are used for the special figure lottery. Further, the special symbol variation type determination counter Cs4 is used when determining the variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol display unit 37a. Further, the normal map hit / miss determination counter Cn1 and the normal map type determination counter Cn2 are used for the normal map lottery. Further, the normal map reach determination counter Cn3 is used for the normal map reach determination as to whether or not to generate reach when the decorative symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displaced and varied. Further, the normal symbol variation type determination counter Cn4 is used when determining the fluctuation time of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 38a. The random number initial value counter Cini is used when setting the initial values of the special figure hit / miss determination counter Cs1 and the normal figure hit / miss determination counter Cn1.

Each of the counters Cs1 to Cs4, Cn1 to Cn4, and Cini is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a special figure determination area 64c, a normal figure holding area 64d, and a normal figure determination area 64e. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a, the values of the special figure hit / miss determination counter Cs1 and the special figure type determination counter Cs2 at the timing of the entry are stored in the special figure determination area 64c. .. Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the normal map start gate 35, the values of the normal map hit / miss determination counter Cn1, the normal map type determination counter Cn2, and the normal map reach determination counter Cn3 at the timing of the entry are changed. It is stored in the normal figure holding area 64d in chronological order.

The details of the special figure hit / miss determination counter Cs1 will be described. The special figure hit / miss determination counter Cs1 is used when determining whether or not to win a special figure hit (special figure big hit or special figure small hit). The special figure winning / failing determination, which is the determination of whether or not to win the special figure, is a part of the above-mentioned special figure lottery. The special figure hit / miss determination counter Cs1 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 1199, reach a maximum value, and then return to 0. Further, when the special figure hit / miss determination counter Cs1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter Cini at that time is read as the initial value of the special figure hit / miss determination counter Cs1. The random number initial value counter Cini is a loop counter similar to the special figure hit / miss determination counter Cs1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The special figure hit / miss determination counter Cs1 is periodically updated, and a game ball is placed at the special figure start port 34a in a situation where the special electric opening / closing execution mode is not being executed and the special symbol of the special symbol display unit 37a is not being displayed in a variable manner. When the ball is entered, the updated value is stored in the special figure determination area 64c at the timing of the entry.

The value of the special figure hit / miss determination counter Cs1 stored in the special figure judgment area 64c is collated with the special figure hit / miss judgment table stored in various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63, and the special figure jackpot or the special figure small hit is won. It is determined whether or not to do so. As will be described later, since the special figure jackpot and the special figure miss are not set in the special figure hit / miss determination table of the present embodiment, the special figure small hit is won with a 100% probability.

Next, the details of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 will be described. The special symbol type determination counter Cs2 is used when determining the type of the special symbol. The special symbol type determination, which is the determination of the special symbol type, is a part of the above-mentioned special symbol lottery. The special figure type determination counter Cs2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The special symbol type determination counter Cs2 is periodically updated, and a game ball is placed at the special symbol start port 34a in a situation where the special electric opening / closing execution mode is not being executed and the special symbol of the special symbol display unit 37a is not being displayed in a variable manner. When the ball is entered, the updated value is stored in the special figure determination area 64c together with the value of the above-mentioned special figure hit / miss determination counter at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the special figure hit / miss determination using the value of the special figure hit / miss determination counter Cs1 stored in the special figure hit / miss determination area 64c. Then, one special figure type determination table corresponding to the result of the special figure hit / miss determination is selected from the plurality of special figure type determination tables stored in the various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63, and the special figure determination area 64c is selected. The value of the special symbol type determination counter Cs2 stored in is collated with the selected special symbol type determination table, and the type of the special symbol is determined. Then, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 37a based on the determined type of the special symbol. In this embodiment, since all the results of the special figure hit / miss determination are the special figure small hits, only one type of the special figure type determination table for the special figure small hits is prepared.

Next, the details of the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 will be described. The special symbol variation type determination counter Cs4 is used to determine the variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol display unit 37a and the variation time of the decorative symbol in the symbol display device 41. The special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value, for example.

The special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 is updated once every time the normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process, and the updated value is set in the special symbol display unit 37a. It is acquired just before the start of the variable display of the special symbol. Then, the acquired value of the special figure fluctuation type determination counter Cs4 is collated with the special figure fluctuation time table stored in the various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63, and the special figure fluctuation time is determined.

Next, the details of the normal figure hit / miss determination counter Cn1 will be described. The normal figure hit / miss determination counter Cn1 is used when determining whether or not to win a normal figure. The determination of whether or not to win the prize is a part of the above-mentioned lottery. The normal figure hit / miss determination counter Cn1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 1199, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the normal figure hit / miss determination counter Cn1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter Cini at that time is read as the initial value of the normal figure hit / miss determination counter Cn1.

The normal figure hit / miss determination counter Cn1 is periodically updated, and when the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 35, the updated value is stored in the normal figure holding area 64d at the timing of the passage.

The value of the normal map hit / miss determination counter Cn1 is stored in the normal map holding area 64d up to four each time a game ball enters the normal map start gate 35, and moves to the normal map determination area 64e in the order of storage. Then, the value of the normal figure hit / miss determination counter Cn1 moved to the normal figure judgment area 64e is collated with the normal figure hit / miss judgment table stored in the various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63, and whether or not the normal figure is won or not is won. Is determined.

Next, the details of the normal figure type determination counter Cn2 will be described. The normal symbol type determination counter Cn2 is used when determining the type of a normal symbol. The normal symbol type determination, which is the determination of the normal symbol type, is a part of the above-mentioned normal symbol lottery. The normal figure type determination counter Cn2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The normal map type determination counter Cn2 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the normal map start gate 35, the updated value is set to the above-mentioned normal map hit / miss determination counter Cn1 at the timing of the entry. It is stored in the normal map holding area 64d together with the value.

Up to four values of the normal figure hit / miss determination counter Cn1 are stored in the normal figure holding area 64d each time a game ball enters the normal figure start gate 35, and in the order of storage, the above-mentioned normal figure hit / miss judgment counter Cn1 It moves to the normal map determination area 64e together with the value.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the normal figure hit / miss determination using the value of the normal figure hit / miss determination counter Cn1 stored in the normal figure judgment area 64e. Then, from the plurality of normal map type determination tables stored in the various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63, one normal figure type determination table corresponding to the result of the normal figure hit / miss determination is selected, and the normal map type determination area 64e is selected. The value of the normal symbol type determination counter Cn2 stored in is collated with the selected general diagram type determination table, and the type of the ordinary symbol is determined. Then, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 38a based on the determined type of the normal symbol.

Next, the details of the general figure reach determination counter Cn3 will be described. The normal figure reach determination counter Cn3 is used to determine whether or not reach occurs when the result of the normal figure hit / miss determination is not a normal figure hit. The normal figure reach determination counter Cn3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The normal map reach determination counter Cn3 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the normal map start gate 35, the updated value is the above-mentioned normal map hit / miss determination counter Cn1 and the above-mentioned normal map hit / miss determination counter Cn1 at the timing of the entry. It is stored in the normal figure holding area 64d together with the value of the normal figure type determination counter Cn2.

Up to four values of the normal map reach determination counter Cn3 are stored in the normal map holding area 64d each time a game ball enters the normal map start gate 35, and in the order of storage, the above-mentioned normal map hit / miss determination counter Cn1 and It moves to the normal map determination area 64e together with the value of the normal map type determination counter Cn2.

The MPU 62 stores the value of the normal figure reach determination counter Cn3 stored in the special figure determination area 64c in various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63 when it is determined in the normal figure hit / miss determination that the normal figure is not hit. It is checked against the existing normal reach determination table to determine whether or not reach occurs. If the result of the normal map hit / miss determination in the normal map lottery is a normal map hit, the MPU 62 determines that reach has occurred regardless of the value of the normal map reach determination counter Cn3.

Next, the details of the normal map variation type determination counter Cn4 will be described. The normal symbol variation type determination counter Cn4 is used to determine the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display unit 38a and the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol in the symbol display device 41. The normal-figure variation type determination counter Cn4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The normal figure variation type determination counter Cn4 is updated once every time the normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process, and the updated value is set in the normal symbol display unit 38a. It is acquired just before the start of the variable display of the normal symbol. Then, the acquired value of the normal map fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 is collated with the normal map fluctuation time table stored in the various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63, and the normal map fluctuation time is determined.

Next, the special figure hit / miss judgment table will be described.

FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special figure hit / miss determination table. As described above, when the game ball enters the special figure start opening 34a, one value is acquired from the values in the range of 0 to 1199 in the special figure hit / miss determination counter Cs1. Then, the special figure hit / fail determination, which is the determination of whether or not to win the special figure hit (special figure big hit or special figure small hit), is determined by the acquired value of the special figure hit / miss determination counter Cs1 and the special figure hit / miss judgment table. It will be done.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the special figure hit / miss determination table of the present embodiment, all the values of 0 to 1199 out of the 1200 values of the special figure hit / miss determination counter Cs1 are in the special figure small hit. It is set as a winning value, and a winning value and a non-special drawing value are not set for the special figure jackpot. That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure winning / failing determination is 100% probability of winning the special figure small hit.

The "special figure small hit" is a determination result that triggers the start of the special electric opening / closing execution mode.

Next, the special figure type determination table will be described.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special figure type determination table. As described above, when the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, one value is acquired from the values in the range of 0 to 99 in the special figure type determination counter Cs2. Then, the special figure type determination table is selected according to the result of the above-mentioned special figure hit / miss determination, and the special symbol is determined by the selected special figure type determination table and the acquired value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2. A special figure type determination for determining the type is performed. However, as described above, in the present embodiment, only the special figure small hit is set as a result of the special figure small hit, so that the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines the special figure type for the special figure small hit. It has only a table.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the special figure type determination table of the present embodiment, 40 values of 0 to 39 out of 100 values of 0 to 99 of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 are special symbols A ( It is set to the special figure small hit A), and the remaining 60 values of 40 to 99 are set to the special symbol B (special figure small hit B). The types of special symbols set in the special symbol type determination table all trigger the execution of the special electric open / close execution mode, but are selected when the special electric open / close execution mode is executed for each special symbol type. The types of special electric opening / closing scenarios are different.

The special electric opening / closing scenario is a control program in which the control mode of the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b in the special electric opening / closing execution mode is stored, and the special electric opening / closing scenario is selected depending on the type of the special electric opening / closing scenario. The mode of opening and closing the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b in the execution mode is different.

Next, the special electric opening / closing scenario selection table will be described.

FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special electric opening / closing scenario selection table.

FIG. 63 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special electric opening / closing scenario selection table for special figure small hits. The special electric opening / closing scenario selection table for special figure small hits is a table for selecting a special electric opening / closing scenario corresponding to the type of special symbol when the special figure small hit is won.

As shown in FIG. 63 (A), in the special electric opening / closing scenario selection table for special figure small hits of this embodiment, the special electric opening / closing scenario A for special figure small hits is set corresponding to the special symbol A, and is special. A special electric opening / closing scenario B for special figure small hits is set corresponding to the symbol B. That is, if the special figure small hit is won in the special figure hit / fail judgment and the result of the special figure type judgment is the special symbol A, the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the special figure small hit is executed when the special electric opening / closing execution mode is executed. Is selected, on the other hand, if the special figure small hit is won in the special figure hit / fail judgment and the result of the special figure type judgment is the special symbol B, the special figure small hit is used when the special electric opening / closing execution mode is executed. The special electric opening / closing scenario B will be selected.

When the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario A for special figure small hits is started, the special electric opening / closing period of 0.5 seconds is first started, and then the special electric opening / closing processing period is started. During the special electric opening / closing processing period, a round game in which the first special electric accessory 57b is opened is executed once (one round). The number of times the first special electric accessory 57b is opened in one round game is one, and in one round game, the first special electric accessory 57b is opened for 1.0 second, which is the maximum opening time. It ends when either the condition that 10 game balls, which is the maximum number of balls to be entered, is entered into the first large winning opening 57a is satisfied. When the special electric opening / closing processing period ends, the special electric ending period of 0.5 seconds starts. Since it is practically impossible for 10 game balls to enter the first large winning opening 57a while the first special electric accessory 57b is open for 1.0 second, the special electric opening / closing for special figure small hits is made. The total required time of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the scenario A is fixed at 2.0 seconds.

When the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario B for special figure small hits is started, the special electric opening / closing period of 0.5 seconds is first started, and then the special electric opening / closing processing period is started. During the special electric opening / closing processing period, a round game in which the first special electric accessory 57b is opened is executed once (one round). The number of times the first special electric accessory 57b is opened in one round game is one, and in one round game, the first special electric accessory 57b is opened for 1.1 seconds, which is the maximum opening time. It ends when either the condition that 10 game balls, which is the maximum number of balls to be entered, is entered into the first large winning opening 57a is satisfied. When the special electric opening / closing processing period ends, the special electric ending period of 0.5 seconds starts. Since it is practically impossible for 10 game balls to enter the first large winning opening 57a while the first special electric accessory 57b is open for 1.1 seconds, the special electric opening / closing for special figure small hits The total required time of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the scenario B is fixed at 2.1 seconds.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special electric opening / closing execution mode is started when the game ball enters the V winning opening 57av in addition to the case where the special figure small hit is won in the special figure winning / failing determination.

FIG. 63 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special electric opening / closing scenario selection table for the V prize jackpot. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first large winning opening 57a and enters the V winning opening 57av as it is during the execution of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario A for special figure small hits. In, the V prize jackpot A is won, and after the end of the special electric opening / closing execution mode, the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot is selected, and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot starts. Will be done. On the other hand, if the game ball enters the first large winning opening 57a and enters the V winning opening 57av as it is during the execution of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario B for special figure small hits, After winning the V winning jackpot B and ending the special electric opening / closing execution mode, the special electric opening / closing scenario B for the V winning jackpot is selected, and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario B for the V winning jackpot is started.

When the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot is started, the special electric opening / closing period for 0.5 seconds is first started, and then the special electric opening / closing processing period is started. During the special electric opening / closing processing period, the round game in which the second special electric accessory 58b is opened is executed 16 times (16 rounds). The number of times the second special electric accessory 58b is opened in one round game is one, and in one round game, the second special electric accessory 58b is opened for 5.0 seconds, which is the maximum opening time. It ends when either the condition that 10 game balls, which is the maximum number of balls to be entered, is entered into the second large winning opening 58a is satisfied. The closing period (special electric interval period) of the second special electric accessory 58b during the round game is set to 3.0 seconds. When the special electric opening / closing processing period ends, the special electric ending period of 0.5 seconds starts.

When the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario B for the V prize jackpot is started, the special electric opening / closing execution period of 0.5 seconds is first started, and then the special electric opening / closing processing period is started. During the special electric opening / closing processing period, the round game in which the second special electric accessory 58b is opened is executed 12 times (12 rounds). The number of times the second special electric accessory 58b is opened in one round game is one, and in one round game, the second special electric accessory 58b is opened for 5.0 seconds, which is the maximum opening time. It ends when either the condition that 10 game balls, which is the maximum number of balls to be entered, is entered into the second large winning opening 58a is satisfied. The closing period (special electric interval period) of the second special electric accessory 58b during the round game is set to 5.9 seconds. When the special electric opening / closing processing period ends, the special electric ending period of 0.5 seconds starts.

As described above, in the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot, the maximum opening time of one round of opening during the special electric opening / closing processing period is set to 5.0 seconds, and the maximum number of balls entered is set to 10. Since the shortest firing interval of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, only about 8 game balls can be inserted into the second prize opening 58a during the opening period of 5.0 seconds, which is the maximum opening time. Can't. That is, in the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot, the second special electric accessory 58b starts from 5.0 seconds due to the entry of 10 game balls during one opening of the second special electric accessory 58b. Is also configured so that it will not close in a short time. As a result, in the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot, the length of the opening period of one round of the second special electric accessory 58b is fixed to 5.0 seconds regardless of the mode in which the player launches the game ball. The time length (total required time) of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot is 0.5 seconds (special electric opening period) + 5.0 seconds (1 round) x 16 (number of rounds). +3.0 seconds (special electric interval period) x 15 (number of intervals) +0.5 seconds (special electric ending period), which is fixed at 126.0 seconds.

Similarly, in the special electric opening / closing scenario B for the V prize jackpot, the maximum opening time of one round of opening during the special electric opening / closing processing period is set to 5.0 seconds, and the maximum number of balls entered is set to 10. Since the shortest firing interval is 0.6 seconds, only about eight game balls can be entered into the second large winning opening 58a during the opening period of 5.0 seconds, which is the maximum opening time. That is, even in the special electric opening / closing scenario B for the V prize jackpot, the second special electric accessory 58b enters for 5.0 seconds due to the entry of 10 game balls during one opening of the second special electric accessory 58b. It is configured so that it does not close in less time than. As a result, even in the special electric opening / closing scenario B for the V prize jackpot, the length of the opening period of one round of the second special electric accessory 58b is fixed to 5.0 seconds regardless of the mode in which the player launches the game ball. , V prize The time length (total required time) of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario B is 0.5 seconds (special electric opening period) + 5.0 seconds (1 round) x 12 (number of rounds). ) + 5.9 seconds (special electric interval period) x 11 (number of intervals) + 0.5 seconds (special electric ending period), which is fixed at 125.9 seconds.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the time length of the special electric opening / closing execution mode is selected regardless of which of the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot and the special electric opening / closing scenario B for the V winning jackpot is selected. (Total required time) is 126.0 seconds or less. Then, the time length of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot (total required time) and the time length of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario B for the V winning jackpot (total required time). The difference from the time) is as small as about 0.1 seconds.

Further, in the present embodiment, the total required time (2.0 seconds) of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario A for special figure small hits and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario A for V winning big hits. The total time (128.0 seconds, hereinafter also referred to as "total time A") including the total required time (126.0 seconds) is the total required time of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario B for special figure small hits. The total time (128.0 seconds) of the time (2.1 seconds) and the total required time (125.9 seconds) of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario B for the V prize jackpot, hereinafter "total time B". Also called). The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described later.

Next, the normal figure pass / fail judgment table will be described.

FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the normal figure hit / miss determination table. As described above, when the game ball enters the normal drawing start gate 35, one value is acquired from the values in the range of 0 to 1199 in the normal drawing hit / miss determination counter Cn1. Then, the value of the acquired normal figure hit / miss determination counter Cn1 and the normal figure hit / miss determination table are used to perform a normal figure hit / miss determination, which is a determination of whether or not to win the normal figure.

As shown in FIG. 64, in the normal figure hit / fail judgment table of the present embodiment, four values of 0 to 3 out of 1200 values of 0 to 1199 of the normal figure hit / miss judgment counter Cn1 are per normal figure. It is set as a winning value, and other values are set as values that are out of the ordinary. That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the normal figure winning / failing determination is a winning of the normal figure per one with a probability of 1/300.

The "per-figure" is a determination result that triggers the start of the open / close execution mode. On the other hand, "out of the ordinary figure" is a determination result that does not trigger the start of the ordinary electric opening / closing execution mode.

Next, the general figure type determination table will be described.

FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the normal diagram type determination table. As described above, when the game ball enters the normal drawing start gate 35, one value is acquired from the values in the range of 0 to 99 in the normal drawing type determination counter Cn2. Then, the normal figure type judgment table is selected according to the result of the above-mentioned normal figure hit / miss judgment, and the normal symbol is determined by the selected normal figure type judgment table and the value of the acquired normal figure hit / miss judgment counter Cn1. Determining the type The table type determination is performed.

As a result of the above-mentioned normal figure hit / miss judgment, the normal figure type judgment table 1 is selected when it is judged to be a normal figure hit, while when the result of the normal figure correctness judgment is judged to be out of the normal figure, the normal figure is selected. The type determination table 2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 65 (A), in the normal figure type determination table 1 of the present embodiment, 40 values of 0 to 39 out of 100 values of 0 to 99 of the normal figure type determination counter Cn2 are displayed. It is set to normal symbol A (A per normal symbol), 20 values from 40 to 59 are set to normal symbol B (B per normal symbol), and 15 values from 60 to 74 are normal symbols. It is set to C (C per normal figure), 15 values from 75 to 89 are set to normal symbol D (D per normal figure), and 5 values from 90 to 94 are set to normal symbol E (normal symbol E). It is set to E) per normal figure, three values from 95 to 97 are set to normal symbol F (F per normal figure), and two values from 98 to 99 are set to normal symbol G (normal figure G). It is set to hit G). The types of normal symbols set in the normal symbol type determination table 1 all trigger the execution of the normal electric open / close execution mode, but when the normal electric open / close execution mode is executed for each type of normal symbol. The type of open / close scenario selected is different. The normal electric opening / closing scenario is a control program in which the control mode of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is stored, and the normal electric combination in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is selected depending on the type of the normal electric opening / closing scenario. The mode of opening and closing the object 34b will be different.

As shown in FIG. 65 (B), in the normal diagram type determination table 2 of the present embodiment, all 100 values out of 100 values of 0 to 99 of the normal diagram type determination counter Cn2 are normal symbols. It is set to Z (out of the ordinary figure). That is, when it is determined in the normal symbol hit / miss determination that the normal symbol is out of order, the type of the normal symbol is determined to be the normal symbol Z.

Next, the general electric opening / closing scenario selection table will be described.

FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the general electric opening / closing scenario selection table. The Fuden opening / closing scenario selection table is a table for selecting a Fuden opening / closing scenario corresponding to the type of a normal symbol when a winner is won.

As shown in FIG. 66, in the normal power opening / closing scenario selection table of the present embodiment, the normal power opening / closing scenarios A to G are set corresponding to each of the ordinary symbols A to G. That is, if a normal figure is won in the normal figure hit / fail judgment and the result of the normal figure type judgment is the normal symbols A to G, respectively, the normal electric opening / closing scenario A to the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is executed. G will be selected respectively. Hereinafter, the details of the Fuden opening / closing scenarios A to G will be described.

When the normal power opening / closing execution mode based on the normal power opening / closing scenario A is started, the normal power opening / closing period of 5.0 seconds is started first, and then the normal power opening / closing processing period is started. During the general electric opening / closing processing period, the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened once, and the opening time is set to 0.8 seconds. When the normal electric opening / closing processing period ends, the normal electric ending period of 140.0 seconds starts. If 10 game balls, which is the maximum number of balls to be entered, enter the special figure start opening 34a during the normal electric opening / closing processing period, the normal electric accessory 34b is 0, which is the opening time of one time. Even before 8 seconds have passed, the game will be closed and the opening / closing process period will end. However, in this embodiment, the shortest firing interval of the game ball is 0.6 seconds, so the normal electric power is used. It is configured so that 10 game balls, which is the maximum number of balls to be entered, does not enter the special drawing start opening 34a during the opening / closing processing period.

When the normal power opening / closing execution mode based on the normal power opening / closing scenario B is started, the normal power opening / closing period of 5.0 seconds is started first, and then the normal power opening / closing processing period is started. During the general electric opening / closing processing period, the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened twice, the opening time is 0.8 seconds, the total opening time is 1.6 seconds, and the ordinary electric accessory between opening and opening. The closing period (normal electric interval period) of 34b is set to 135.0 seconds. When the normal electric opening / closing processing period ends, the normal electric ending period of 140.0 seconds starts. If 10 game balls, which is the maximum number of balls, enter the special drawing start port 34a during the normal electric opening / closing processing period, the normal electric accessory 34b has a total opening time of 1.6. Even before the lapse of seconds, the closed state is reached and the normal electric opening / closing processing period ends. However, in the present embodiment, the shortest firing interval of the game ball is 0.6 seconds, so the general electric opening / closing processing is performed. It is configured so that 10 game balls, which is the maximum number of balls that can be entered during the period, do not enter the special drawing start opening 34a. The same applies to the general electric opening / closing scenarios C to G described below.

The normal electric opening / closing scenarios C to G differ only in the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened and the total opening time in the normal electric opening / closing processing period as compared with the normal electric opening / closing scenario B. Same as scenario B. Specifically, the number of times of opening the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electric opening / closing processing period of the general electric opening / closing scenario C is three, and the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electric opening / closing processing period of the ordinary electric opening / closing scenario D. The number of times is four, and the number of times of opening the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electric opening / closing processing period of the ordinary electric opening / closing scenario E is five times, and the number of times of opening the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electric opening / closing processing period of the ordinary electric opening / closing scenario F is five times. The number of times of opening is 6 times, and the number of times of opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening / closing processing period of the general electric opening / closing scenario G is 7 times.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the time length (135.0 seconds) of the closing period (normal power interval period) set in the normal power opening / closing scenario and the time length of the normal power ending period (140. 0 seconds) is the total required time (126.0 seconds) of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing execution mode A for the V winning jackpot and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario B for the V winning jackpot. The time is set longer than the total required time (125.9 seconds). Furthermore, the time length (135.0 seconds) of the closing period (normal power interval period) and the time length (140.0 seconds) of the normal power ending period set in the normal power opening / closing scenario are both. , The total time is set to be longer than the total time A (128.0 seconds) and the total time B (128.0 seconds). The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described later.

In the following explanation, the fact that the special figure small hit was won in the special figure winning / failing judgment and the special symbol A was judged in the special figure type judgment is also referred to as "the special figure small hit A was won in the special figure lottery". Express. The same applies to the special symbol B. In addition, the fact that a normal symbol is won in the normal figure hit / fail judgment and is determined to be a normal symbol A in the normal figure type judgment is also expressed as "winning in the normal figure hit A in the normal figure lottery". The same applies to ordinary symbols B to G.

<< 2-3 >> Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 67 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configurations of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Some configurations of the power supply device 85 and the like are omitted.

The voice emission control board 91 provided in the voice emission control device 90 includes an MPU 92, which is an arithmetic device that controls the entire voice emission control device 90, and a speaker 46 that generates a sound signal and is based on the generated sound signal. A sound output LSI 97 that drives and outputs sound, and a voice data ROM 98 that is a memory in which various voice data are stored are mounted. The audio data ROM 98 is connected to the sound output LSI 97, and the sound output LSI 97 is connected to the MPU 92 via a signal line.

The MPU 92 is an element having a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. Various control programs, fixed value data, tables, etc. executed by the MPU 92 are stored in the ROM 93. For example, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the ROM 93. The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped.

The sound output LSI 97 is a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) that generates a sound to be reproduced based on an instruction from the MPU 92 and outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46. Specifically, when the sound output LSI 97 receives a reproduction start command from the MPU 92, the sound output LSI 97 identifies a sound to be reproduced, which is instructed by the reproduction start command, and uses audio data corresponding to the specified sound for audio data. Read from ROM 98 and generate the sound to be reproduced. Then, the sound output LSI 97 outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46. Further, when the sound output LSI 97 receives the reproduction end command from the MPU 92, the sound output LSI 97 specifies the sound to end the reproduction instructed by the reproduction end command, and ends the reproduction of the specified sound.

The sound output LSI 97 has 16 audio channels, and a maximum of 16 sounds are simultaneously generated, combined (mixed), and then output from the speaker 46. Further, the sound output LSI 97 can set the output of the sound being reproduced for each audio channel to mute (mute) according to the instruction from the MPU 92, and can cancel the mute setting. The audio channel set to mute reads the corresponding audio data in the sound output LSI 97 and generates the sound to be reproduced, but when mixing with the sound of another audio channel, the audio channel targeted for mute setting By setting the sound level to 0 or by not inputting the sound of the audio channel targeted for mute setting to the mixing circuit, the sound of the audio channel targeted for mute setting is not mixed. As a result, the sound of the audio channel targeted for mute setting is not output from the speaker 46.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 60 and an effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and the MPU 92 receives various commands from the main control device 60 and also receives a signal indicating an operation mode of the effect operation button 24. A speaker 46, various lamps 47, and a display control device 100 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the voice emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 102.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio emission control device 90 are the sound light side MPU 92 and the sound light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound / light side RAM 94 are also referred to, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as a display side MPU 102.

<< 2-4 >> Outline of processing by the gaming machine:
Next, an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 68 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. 69 and 70 are explanatory views showing an example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment.

A player who plays a game on the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment first operates the operation handle 25 so that the game ball enters the normal drawing start gate 35 provided at the lower center of the game board 30. Adjust the firing intensity of the game ball. As shown in FIG. 68, when the game ball enters the normal symbol start gate 35, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 executes the above-mentioned normal map lottery, and the normal symbol display unit 38a displays the variation of the normal symbol. Is started (time t1). Further, the voice emission control device 90 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 with the start of the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 38a.

After that, when the set normal symbol fluctuation time elapses, the main control device 60 stops and displays the changing normal symbol in the normal symbol display unit 38a in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery, and emits voice. The control device 90 stops and displays the changing decorative symbol in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the general drawing lottery (time t2). The player confirms the display mode of the normal symbol stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 38a or the display mode of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41, thereby drawing a lottery for the normal symbol. The result can be recognized. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the result of the drawing lottery is a hit, the decorative symbols that are changing in the main display area MA have the same numbers in the three decorative symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It is stopped and displayed in a certain display mode (for example, "555"). On the other hand, when the result of the drawing lottery is out of the ordinary drawing, the decorative symbols that are changing in the main display area MA are displayed in a display mode in which the numbers in the three decorative symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are not the same (not aligned). For example, stop display at "135").

The player repeatedly inserts the game ball into the normal drawing start gate 35 until the normal drawing is won in the normal drawing lottery. In this embodiment, since the general winning opening 32 is provided downstream of the normal drawing start gate 35, the game ball that has entered the normal drawing starting gate 35 enters the general winning opening 32 as it is, and 1 Each game ball is paid out from the payout device 71 as a prize ball.

As a result of the normal symbol lottery, when the normal symbol is won, the main control device 60 displays the changing normal symbol in the normal symbol display unit 38a corresponding to the type of the normal symbol (type of the normal symbol). Stops and displays in the mode, then selects the normal power opening / closing scenario corresponding to the type of normal symbol (type of normal symbol), and starts the normal power opening / closing execution mode based on the selected normal power opening / closing scenario (time). t2). On the other hand, the voice emission control device 90 displays the changing decorative symbol in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 in the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode executed after the winning of the normal figure. The stop display is made in the display mode corresponding to the number of times of opening.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the normal electric accessory 34b is opened once in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode and the normal electric accessory 34b is opened to A per normal figure, the changing decorative symbol is set to "1 ↓ 1". ”(Display mode in which only the decorative symbol in the central decorative symbol row Z2 is scrolled) to generate reach, and then stop display is performed in the display mode such as“ 111 ”. Further, for example, when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened twice in the normal electric accessory opening / closing execution mode and the B is won, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), the changing decorative symbol is displayed. After displaying in a display mode such as "2 ↓ 2" to generate reach, the stop display is performed in a display mode such as "222" as shown in FIG. 69 (B). Therefore, when a reach occurs in the changing decorative symbol in the main display area MA, the player opens the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode executed when the player wins the normal figure. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation not only whether or not to win the game, but also a feeling of expectation for the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened after the winning. .. The reason why the player has an expectation for the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened will be described later.

Hereinafter, in the example shown in FIG. 68, a case where B is won per general figure as a result of the general drawing lottery will be described.

As a result of the normal drawing lottery, when B is won per normal figure, the main control device 60 starts the normal electric opening / closing execution mode based on the above-mentioned general electric opening / closing scenario B, and the normal electric opening / closing period of the general electric opening / closing execution mode is started. Is started (time t2). As described above, in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode based on the general electric opening / closing scenario B, the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened twice. Further, when the Fuden opening period is started, the voice emission control device 90 starts the Fuden opening effect and the right-handed notification process. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 as a general electric opening effect, and a special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot described later ( Perform an effect that suggests that the so-called jackpot) will occur twice. Further, in the right-handed notification process in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), the right is an image in which a character string such as "right-handed" and a right-pointing arrow are combined on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. The hitting instruction image GD1 is displayed, and a sound such as "right hit!" Is output from the speaker 46.

The player who recognizes that "right-handed" should be performed by the right-handed notification process operates the operation handle 25 to perform "right-handed". When the player makes a "right-handed hit", the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 reaches the flow passage 301 provided on the right side of the game area PA of the game board 30. Here, in the present embodiment, it is configured so that it takes 0.7 seconds or more for the game ball to pass over the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the closed state. Then, in the present embodiment, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, if the player continues to "right-hand" after the start of the right-handed notification process, at least one game ball is passing over the closed ordinary electric accessory 34b (the game ball is). It will be in the state of being listed).

Then, when the Fuden opening period ends, the main control device 60 starts the Fuden opening / closing processing period and starts the first opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b (time t3). Then, the game ball passing over the ordinary electric accessory 34b falls below the opened ordinary electric accessory 34b, and enters the special drawing start port 34a provided below the ordinary electric accessory 34b. Enter the ball (time t4).

When the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a, the main control device 60 executes the above-mentioned special figure lottery, starts the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display unit 37a, and the voice emission control device 90 sets the voice emission control device 90. In the sub-display area SA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (time t4). In the present embodiment, the special figure fluctuation time is set to 0.5 seconds each time regardless of the result of the special figure lottery.

After that, when the set special symbol fluctuation time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses, the main control device 60 corresponds to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery for the changing special symbol in the special symbol display unit 37a. The voice emission control device 90 stops and displays the changing decorative symbol in the sub-display area SA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 in the display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the special figure lottery. (Time t5). As described above, in the present embodiment, in the special figure lottery, the special figure small hit (special figure small hit A or special figure small hit B) is always won, and for example, the result of the special figure lottery. When is a special figure small hit A, the voice emission control device 90 stops and displays the changing decorative symbol in the sub display area SA in a display mode such as "777", and the result of the special figure lottery is the special figure small. If it is a hit B, the decorative symbol that is changing in the sub display area SA is stopped and displayed in a display mode such as "333".

In the example shown in FIG. 68, the case where the special figure small hit A is won as a result of the special figure lottery will be described.

As a result of the special figure lottery, when the special figure small hit A is won, the main control device 60 starts the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the above-mentioned special electric opening / closing scenario A for the special figure small hit, and the special electric of the special electric opening / closing execution mode is started. The opening period is started (time t5).

Then, when the special electric power opening period ends, the main control device 60 starts the special electric power opening / closing processing period and starts opening the first special electric accessory 57b (time t6). As described above, in the special electric opening / closing processing period in the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario A for special figure small hits, the first special electric accessory 57b is opened once. Here, in the present embodiment, it is configured so that it takes 1.0 second or more for the game ball to pass over the first special electric accessory 57b in the closed state. Then, in the present embodiment, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, if the player continues to "right-hand" after the start of the right-handed notification process, at least one game ball is passing over the closed first special electric accessory 57b (game). The ball is on it). Therefore, when the first special electric accessory 57b is opened, the game ball passing over the first special electric accessory 57b falls below the opened first special electric accessory 57b, and the first special electric accessory 57b is opened. The ball enters the first large winning opening 57a provided below the electric accessory 57b (time t7).

When the game ball enters the first large winning opening 57a, the game ball enters the V winning opening 57av as it is (time t7). That is, in the present embodiment, if the player continues to "hit right", the game ball can be easily inserted into the first large winning opening 57a and the V winning opening 57av while the first special electric accessory 57b is open. It is configured so that the ball can be entered (certainly).

When the game ball enters the V winning opening 57av, the voice emission control device 90 indicates that the game ball enters the V winning opening 57av and wins the V winning jackpot. After executing the effect suggesting that the special electric opening / closing execution mode of the round is started, the main control device 60 ends the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the special figure small hit that is being executed. The 16-round special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the above-mentioned special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot is started (time t8).

When the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot is started, the special electric opening / closing processing period is started after 0.5 seconds of the special electric opening period has elapsed, and 16 of the second special electric accessory 58b. The first opening of the opening (the round game of the first round) is started (time t9). Then, when the second special electric accessory 58b satisfies either the condition that the maximum opening time of 5.0 seconds has elapsed or that 10 game balls, which is the maximum number of balls, have entered. , Closed. After the closed state, the second opening (the second round game) of the second special electric accessory 58b is started after 3.0 seconds of the closing period (special electric interval period) has elapsed. After that, after the 16th opening (16th round round game) of the second special electric accessory 58b is completed and closed, the special electric ending period is started, and 0.5 seconds of the special electric ending period elapses. , The special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot ends (time t10). During the special electric opening / closing processing period of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot, the player enters the game ball into the second large winning opening 58a while the second special electric accessory 58b is open. By doing so, a large number of game balls can be obtained as prize balls.

As described above, in the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot, the maximum opening time of one round of opening during the special electric opening / closing processing period is set to 5.0 seconds, and the maximum number of balls entered is set to 10. Since the shortest firing interval of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, only about 8 game balls can be inserted into the second prize opening 58a during the opening period of 5.0 seconds, which is the maximum opening time. Can't. That is, in the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot, the second special electric accessory 58b starts from 5.0 seconds due to the entry of 10 game balls during one opening of the second special electric accessory 58b. Is also configured so that it will not close in a short time. As a result, in the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot, the length of the opening period of one round of the second special electric accessory 58b is long regardless of the launch mode of the game ball by the player and the behavior of the game ball after the launch. It is fixed at 5.0 seconds, and the time length (total required time) of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot is 0.5 seconds (special electric opening period) + 5.0 seconds (1). Round) x 16 (number of rounds) + 3.0 seconds (special electric interval period) x 15 (number of intervals) + 0.5 seconds (special electric ending period), which is fixed at 126.0 seconds. That is, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot in the present embodiment is 126.0 after being started regardless of the launch mode of the game ball by the player and the behavior of the game ball after the launch. It will end in seconds.

Further, in the present embodiment, from the time when the first opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode starts (time t3), the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the above-mentioned special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot The time required until the start of the game (time t8) is configured to be about 4 seconds at the maximum when the player is performing "right-handed" as instructed by the right-handed notification process. There is.

Further, in the present embodiment, the closing period (normal electric interval period) in the normal electric opening / closing processing period of the general electric opening / closing execution mode based on the general electric opening / closing scenario B is set to 135.0 seconds, so that the ordinary electric accessory is used. After 135.0 seconds have elapsed from the first closing of the 34b, the second opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b will start (time t11).

As a result, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot ends before the second opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b starts. become.

Then, when the game ball enters the special figure start opening 34a by the second opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode based on the normal electric opening / closing scenario B, the main control device 60 has the above-mentioned special drawing. A lottery is executed, the special symbol display unit 37a starts the variable display of the special symbol, and the voice emission control device 90 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the sub display area SA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 (. Time t12).

The subsequent processing flow is different only in that the normal power interval period (closed period) in the normal power opening / closing execution mode is replaced with the normal power ending period, and the processing flow from time t13 to time t18 shown in FIG. 68 is as follows. The process flow is the same as that described above from time t5 to time t10. And since the time length of the Fuden ending period of the Fuden opening / closing execution mode based on the Fuden opening / closing scenario B is set to 140.0 seconds, even if there is a reserved Fuzu lottery, it is normal. The next normal drawing lottery will not be executed until 140.0 seconds of the normal ending period, which starts after the second closing of the electric accessory 34b, has elapsed. That is, it is configured so that the next general drawing lottery is not executed earlier than the end of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the second V prize jackpot. After that, 140.0 seconds of the Fuden ending period elapses, and the Fuden open / close execution mode ends (time t19).

In this embodiment, the Fuden ending effect suggesting that the Fuden opening / closing execution mode ends is executed in 5 seconds before the end of the Fuden ending period. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 as a general electric ending effect, and a character string such as "Have you enjoyed it? See you again !!" is displayed. indicate.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the processing from the time t3 to the time t10 is repeated as many times as the number of times corresponding to the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode. In other words, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the 16th round or 12th round V winning jackpot is executed as many times as the number of times corresponding to the opening number of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the general electric opening / closing execution mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 68, when the special figure small hit A is won in the first and second special figure lottery, and then the game ball enters the V winning opening 57av and wins the V winning big hit. However, in the case where the special figure small hit B was won in the first or second special drawing lottery, after that, the game ball entered the V winning opening 57av and won the V winning big hit. In this case, the main control device 60 will start the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario B for the V prize jackpot described above in the ordinary electric opening / closing execution mode in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the special figure starting port 34a is not provided with the special drawing holding function, it is assumed that the second opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is started and the game ball is placed in the special drawing starting port 34a. If the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario for the V prize jackpot has not ended even at the time of entering the ball, the special drawing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the special drawing start port 34a is not executed. .. As a result, in the special figure lottery, the special figure small hit is not won, and it is impossible to win the V prize big hit.

Further, unlike the example shown in FIG. 68, when the player does not perform "right-handed" even though the right-handed notification process is executed, the normal electric accessory 34b is being opened. The game ball cannot be entered into the special drawing start opening 34a, or the game ball may be entered into the first large winning opening 57a and the V winning opening 57av while the first special electric accessory 57b is open. Can not. In this case, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario for the special figure small hit and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario for the V prize big hit are not started, and the player opens / closes the general electric power. It waits for the closing period (the ordinary electric interval period) until the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the execution mode and the end of the ordinary electric ending period.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of consecutive winnings for the V winning jackpot is determined based on the type of the ordinary symbol. More specifically, based on the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode, the maximum number of times the special electric opening / closing execution mode can be executed based on the V prize jackpot during the execution of the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is Since it is determined, the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is a very important factor for the player. Therefore, when the normal electric accessory opening / closing execution mode is executed by winning the normal drawing in the general drawing lottery, the player is interested in the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened in the general electric power opening / closing execution mode. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the special figure jackpot is not set as a result of the special figure lottery, various restrictions imposed on the pachinko machine for which the special figure jackpot is set are not imposed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine is increased, and it becomes possible to design and manufacture the pachinko machine having various playability (specs).

Further, in the present embodiment, since the high probability mode (so-called probabilistic state) in which the probability of winning the special figure jackpot is high in the special figure lottery is not provided, the control can be simplified and these modes are provided. Various regulations imposed on pachinko machines are not imposed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine is increased, and it becomes possible to design and manufacture the pachinko machine having various playability (specs).

Further, in the present embodiment, a high-frequency support mode (so-called electric support mode) in which the probability of winning a pachinko machine in a pachinko lottery is high, or the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened when a pachinko machine is won is high (so-called electric support). Since it does not have a state), control can be simplified and various regulations imposed on pachinko machines equipped with these modes are not imposed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine is increased, and it becomes possible to design and manufacture the pachinko machine having various playability.

Further, since the present embodiment does not have the function of holding the special figure lottery, the special figure holding area for holding the special figure lottery can be omitted from the main RAM 64, and the storage area of the main RAM 64 can be saved. It can be effectively used for other purposes.

Further, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the normal electric opening / closing execution mode, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is executed a plurality of times without a substantial lottery (so-called jackpots are consecutive). Therefore, at the time of a big hit consecutive villa in a general pachinko machine, for example, even though it is in a high probability mode (so-called probabilistic state), it is difficult to win the big hit in the big hit lottery and the next special electric opening / closing execution mode is not started easily. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of such a situation (so-called hamari).

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the normal figure start gate 35, the game ball is won in the normal figure lottery, and the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is executed, the game ball is in the flow path. If the ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds in the firing mode that reaches 301 (so-called "right-handed" firing mode), the game ball is launched during the execution of the normal electric opening / closing execution mode. The special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is executed by entering the ball 34a, and the game ball enters the first large winning opening 57a during the execution of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit. 1 The game ball that has entered the big winning opening 57a enters the V winning opening 57av, and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning big hit is executed.

Then, according to this embodiment, the time required from the start to the end of the normal electric opening / closing execution mode, the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit, and the special electric based on the V prize jackpot The configuration can be set to a longer time than the total time (total time: 128.0 seconds) of the time required from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode. More specifically, in the situation where the game ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds in the firing mode (so-called "right-handed" firing mode) in which the game ball reaches the flow passage 301, the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is started. When the time required from the start of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot (the time from time t2 to time t10 in FIG. 68) is defined as the specific required time, from the start of the normal electric opening / closing execution mode. The configuration is such that the time required to complete can be set to a time longer than the specific required time. Therefore, even after the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit ends and then the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot ends, the general electric opening / closing execution mode continues, and the general electric opening / closing execution is executed. During the continuation of the mode, the normal electric accessory 34b may shift to the open state and the game ball may be able to enter the special drawing start port 34a.

Then, according to this embodiment, when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is won in the ordinary drawing lottery when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened twice or more, the special electric power based on the V prize jackpot is executed during the execution of the ordinary electric opening / closing execution mode. After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the normal electric accessory 34b transitions from the closed state to the open state, so that the game ball enters the special drawing start port 34a after the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot ends. Is possible. Then, if the game ball enters the special figure start opening 34a after the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is completed, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is executed again, and then the V winning jackpot is executed again. The special electric open / close execution mode based on is executed. That is, when the normal electric accessory 34b is won twice or more in the normal figure lottery and the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is executed, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the V prize jackpot are entered. The special electric open / close execution mode based on this will be executed multiple times. When the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is executed a plurality of times, the player can have an opportunity to acquire a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the game ball has a special figure start opening 34a while the special symbol is changing, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is being executed, or the special electric opening / closing execution mode is being executed based on the V winning jackpot. If you enter the ball, you will avoid getting various counter values for the special figure lottery (in other words, because it does not have the special figure lottery hold function), so while the special symbol is changing, the special figure is small. Even if the game ball enters the special figure start opening 34a during the execution of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the hit or the execution of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot, the special electric opening / closing execution based on the special figure small hit is executed thereafter. The mode is not executed, and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is not executed, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, the player wants the player to finish the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot by the time when the game ball can enter the special drawing start port 34a. You can feel the tension.

Further, unlike the present embodiment, the game ball starts the special figure during the change of the special symbol, the execution of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit, or the execution of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. When a configuration that does not avoid acquisition of various counter values for the special drawing lottery (that is, a configuration having a holding function for the special drawing lottery) is adopted even when the ball enters the mouth 34a, the ordinary electric accessory 34b If a plurality of game balls enter the special drawing start port 34a in one opening, a plurality of special drawing lottery will be suspended, regardless of the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode. However, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot may be executed multiple times.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, even when a plurality of game balls enter the special drawing start port 34a in one opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the ordinary electric accessory 34b 1 It is possible to realize the playability in which the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot are executed once for each opening.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, the time required from the start to the end is predetermined regardless of the launch mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after the launch. Since it is configured to have a predetermined length, the length of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not longer than the predetermined length. Therefore, for example, even at the timing when the ordinary electric accessory 34b transitions to the open state due to the length of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot becoming longer than a predetermined length, the special electric power based on the V winning jackpot It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the open / close execution mode has not yet ended. As a result, even at the timing when the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot has not ended, and the game ball has entered the special figure start port 34a. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player, such as the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not executed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, the time required from the start to the end is predetermined regardless of the launch mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after the launch. Since it is configured to have a predetermined length, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot ends early in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode of the general electric opening / closing execution mode, and the special electric opening / closing execution mode ends. Then, the period from that time to the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b becomes long, and it is possible to prevent the game from being delayed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the normal electric accessory 34b is the period from the transition from the open state to the closed state to the transition from the closed state to the open state in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode. The length can be set to a time (135.0 seconds) longer than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (for example, 126.0 seconds). The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

First, unlike the present embodiment, the length of the normal power interval period of the normal power opening / closing execution mode is set to the time required from the start to the end of the special electric power opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot (for example, 126.0). A case where the configuration of the comparative example in which the time is set shorter than the time (for example, 80.0 seconds) is adopted will be described.

First, in the configuration of the comparative example, a case where the game ball enters the special drawing start opening 34a in the first open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode will be described. In this case, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is started, and then the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is started. After that, the first normal electric opening / closing execution mode in the general electric opening / closing execution mode ends, and in the second open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot still continues. .. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the special figure start opening 34a, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot are not newly started. After that, the second normal electric opening / closing execution mode in the general electric opening / closing execution mode ends, and in the third open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot has already ended. When the ball enters the special figure start opening 34a, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is newly started, and then the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is started. That is, in this case, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot are set in the first and third open states of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode. It will be started when the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a, but it will not be started even if the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a in the second open state. ..

Next, in the configuration of the comparative example, a case where the game ball does not enter the special drawing start opening 34a in the first open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode will be described. In this case, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not started, and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not started either. After that, the first normal electric opening / closing execution mode in the general electric opening / closing execution mode ends, and in the second open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is not executed. When the ball enters the special figure start opening 34a, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit is started, and then the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning big hit is started. After that, the second normal electric opening / closing execution mode in the general electric opening / closing execution mode ends, and in the third open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot still continues. .. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the special figure start opening 34a, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot are not newly started. After that, the third normal electric opening / closing execution mode in the general electric opening / closing execution mode ends, and in the fourth open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot has already ended. When the ball enters the special figure start opening 34a, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is newly started, and then the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is started. That is, in this case, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot are set in the second and fourth open states of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode. It will be started when the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a, but it will not be started even if the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a in the third open state. ..

As described above, unlike the present embodiment, a comparative example configuration is adopted in which the length of the normal power opening / closing execution mode is set to a shorter time than the length of the special power opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot. In that case, the start timing of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot during the execution of the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is not fixed, and the flow of the game becomes complicated. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to control the game.

Next, the length of the normal power interval period of the normal power opening / closing execution mode is longer than the time (126.0 seconds) required from the start to the end of the special power opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (135). A case where the configuration of this embodiment set to (0.0 seconds) is adopted will be described.

First, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the case where the game ball enters the special drawing start port 34a in the first open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode will be described. In this case, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is executed, and then the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed. After that, the first normal electric opening / closing execution mode in the general electric opening / closing execution mode ends, and in the second open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot has already ended. When the ball enters the special figure start opening 34a, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is newly started, and then the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is started.

Next, in the configuration of the present embodiment, a case where the game ball does not enter the special drawing start opening 34a in the first open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode will be described. In this case, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed, and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not executed either. After that, the first normal electric opening / closing execution mode in the general electric opening / closing execution mode ends, and in the second open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is not executed. When the ball enters the special figure start opening 34a, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit is started, and then the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning big hit is started.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the length of the normal power interval period of the normal power opening / closing execution mode is the time (126.0 seconds) required from the start to the end of the special power opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. ) Is set to a longer time (135.0 seconds), so that the normal electric accessory 34b is in the open state at the timing when the normal electric accessory 34b is in the open state in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode. Regardless of the number of times, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is not executed or has already ended. Therefore, even though the game ball enters the special figure start opening 34a when the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode, the special electric opening / closing execution mode and V based on the special figure small hit. It does not mean that the special electric open / close execution mode based on the winning jackpot is not started. That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to fix the start timing of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot during the execution of the normal electric opening / closing execution mode. It is possible to prevent the flow of the game from becoming complicated, and by setting the number of times that the normal electric accessory 34b is in the open state during the execution of the normal electric opening / closing execution mode, the execution of the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is executed. It is possible to set the upper limit of the number of times that the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot can be executed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the normal electric accessory 34b is the period from the last transition from the open state to the closed state in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode until the normal electric drawing lottery can be executed. The length of the period can be set to a time (140.0 seconds) longer than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (for example, 126.0 seconds). The reason for adopting this configuration will be explained.

First, unlike the present embodiment, when a configuration is adopted in which the length of the Fuden ending period is set to a shorter time than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric open / close execution mode based on the V prize jackpot. Will be explained. In this configuration, for example, when the Fu-Den lottery is executed after the end of the Fu-Den ending period and the Fu-Den is won, the Fu-Den opening / closing execution mode is executed, and the game is played during the execution of the Fu-Den opening / closing execution mode. There is a possibility that the ball enters the special drawing start port 34a and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit is executed. However, in this configuration, if the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed immediately after the start of the Fuden ending period, the special electric opening / closing based on the V winning jackpot is executed even after the Fuden ending period ends. The execution mode is continued, and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot may be continued even at the timing when the game ball enters the special figure start opening 34a. In this case, even if the game ball enters the special figure start opening 34a, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed, and there is a problem that the situation is disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the length of the Fuden ending period can be set to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot continues even after the end of the normal electric ending period, and it is possible to suppress the situation that is disadvantageous to the player. Can be done.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the length of the Fuden ending period is set to be longer than the length of the Fuden interval period, a series of series realized in the Fuden interval period of the Fuden opening / closing execution mode. It is possible to realize the flow of the game in the same way during the Fuden ending period of the Fuden opening / closing execution mode. As a result, a new special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and a special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot can be executed in both the normal electric interval period and the general electric ending period in the general electric opening / closing execution mode. It becomes possible to realize the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot can be executed in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode in the general electric opening / closing execution mode, the number of times of the normal electric opening / closing execution period included in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is the game. It is a very important factor for people. Therefore, when the player wins the hobby drawing lottery and the hobby opening / closing execution mode is executed, the player is asked how many times the hobby opening / closing execution mode includes the hobby interval period. It is possible to make people interested in and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot can be executed a plurality of times between the start and the end of the general electric opening / closing execution mode, the general electric opening / closing execution mode is started. Whether or not it is a very important factor for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the Fuden opening / closing execution mode is started by winning the Fuzu drawing in the Fuzu lottery, and the Fuden opening / closing execution mode is started. If this is the case, the player can be interested in how many times the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is executed, and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

Further, according to the present embodiment, an effect (FIG. 69, FIG. 70 (A), etc.) suggesting the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is executed. When the player is elected and the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is executed, the player can be interested in the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the general electric opening / closing execution mode. It is possible to improve the interest.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the number of decorative symbols that are variablely displayed and stopped displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 is the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened when the general drawing lottery is won. That is, since it suggests the number of consecutive villas of the V prize jackpot), it is possible to make the player feel that the decorative pattern with as large a number as possible should stop on the effective line L1, and the interest of the game is improved. Can be planned. In addition, when a reach is generated by a decorative pattern with a large number, the player can have a great expectation.

Further, according to the present embodiment, based on the result of the drawing lottery, the opening operation of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is executed at least a plurality of times for each drawing. Then, when one cycle from the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b (time t3 in FIG. 68) to the end of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot (time t10) is defined as one special game time, the ordinary electric accessory is defined as one special game. One special game round based on the object 34b opening at the first timing (time t3 in FIG. 68) is executed, and the normal electric motor is executed at the second timing (time t11 in FIG. 68) after the one special game round is completed. It is controlled so that the accessory 34b is opened. Therefore, it is possible to execute one special game times a plurality of times for one normal figure per one in the normal figure lottery.

Further, according to the present embodiment, a limited period is generated to limit the variable display of the normal symbol so as not to start. More specifically, a predetermined limited period is generated in the period from the first timing to the end of one special game round that occurs after the second timing. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the fluctuation display of the normal symbol from starting before the end of one special game round, the regular drawing lottery is executed even though the one special game round has not ended. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation such as being done. As a result, for example, even though the result of the general drawing lottery is a general drawing that is advantageous to the player, one special game round that has already been executed has not been completed, so that the game ball is a special figure. It is possible to prevent a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, such as the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed even if the ball enters the starting port 34a.

Further, in the present embodiment, since a plurality of types (V prize jackpots A and B) are set for the V prize jackpot, not only the number of V prize jackpots to be won in one normal electric opening / closing execution mode, but also which It is also possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not he / she will win the V prize jackpot of the type.

Further, in the present embodiment, the total required time (2.0 seconds) of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario A for special figure small hits and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario A for V winning big hits. The total time A (128.0 seconds), which is the sum of the total required time (126.0 seconds), is the total required time (2.1 seconds) of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario B for special figure small hits. Since it is the same as the total time B, which is the sum of the total required time (125.9 seconds) of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario B for the V prize jackpot, the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the special figure small hit The opening / closing execution mode is executed, and then the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot is executed, and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario B for the special figure small hit is executed. After that, the timing at which the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot ends is the same as the case where the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario B for the V winning jackpot is executed. As a result, the waiting time from the end of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot to the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b becomes the same. can do.

Further, in the present embodiment, the normal drawing start gate 35 is provided at the position of the lower center of the game board 30, and the general winning opening 32 is at a position where the game ball that has entered the normal drawing start gate 35 can enter. As with a general pachinko machine in which a special drawing start port 34a is provided at the position of the lower center of the game board 30, a prize ball is given to the player and the drawing is performed in the drawing lottery. It is possible to realize a game in which a player is expected to win a prize.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player operates the operation handle 25 so that the game ball enters the normal drawing start gate 35, so that many game balls enter the normal drawing start gate 35. It will be a ball. Then, in the present embodiment, since the game ball that has entered the normal drawing start gate 35 enters the general prize opening 32, it is possible to increase the ratio of the number of prize balls by the general winning opening 32 to the total number of prize balls. can. In other words, it is possible to reduce the prize ratio, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls due to the operation of the prize to the total number of prize balls.

<< 2-5 >> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the above-mentioned game, the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. The main MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal in addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, but description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is periodically executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 (in this embodiment, a cycle of 2 msec).

In step Sm0101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 60 is read, the state of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm0102.

In step Sm0102, the value of the random number initial value counter Cini is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the value of the random number initial value counter Cini, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter Cini is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm0103.

In step Sm0103, the values of the normal figure hit / miss determination counter Cn1, the normal figure type determination counter Cn2, the normal figure reach determination counter Cn3, the special figure hit / miss determination counter Cs1, and the special figure type determination counter Cs2 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the values of the normal figure hit / miss judgment counter Cn1, the normal figure type judgment counter Cn2, the normal figure reach judgment counter Cn3, the special figure hit / miss judgment counter Cs1, and the special figure type judgment counter Cs2, and they are added to each of them. When each counter value of is reached the maximum value, it is cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the update values of the determination counters Cn1 to Cn3, Cs1 and Cs2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm0104.

In step Sm0104, a ball entry process for the normal drawing start gate based on the entry of the game ball into the normal drawing start gate 35 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the starting gate will be described later. After executing step Sm0104, the process proceeds to step Sm0105.

In step Sm0105, the ball entry process for the special figure start port based on the entry of the game ball into the special figure start port 34a is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the special drawing start port will be described later. After executing step Sm0105, the process proceeds to step Sm0106.

In step Sm0106, a ball entry process for the V winning opening based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 57av is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the V winning opening will be described later. After executing step Sm0106, this timer interrupt process ends.

<Incoming ball entry process for the normal start gate>
Next, the ball entry process for the normal drawing start gate will be described. The ball entry process for the normal figure start gate is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 71: Sm0104).

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the normal drawing start gate. In step Sm0201, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the normal drawing start gate 35. If it is determined in step Sm0201 that a game ball has entered the normal drawing start gate 35 (Sm0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0202, and the normal drawing lottery hold number SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). It is determined whether or not it is. In addition, the number of reserved number SN of the regular drawing lottery is a value indicating the number of reserved (waiting for execution) regular drawing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the regular drawing start gate 35. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN for the number of reserved lottery tickets is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm0201 that the game ball has not entered the normal drawing start gate 35 (Sm0201: NO), the ball entry process for the normal drawing start gate is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sm0202 that the number SN of the number of reserved lottery drawings is less than the upper limit (less than 4) (Sm0202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0203, and 1 is added to the number of reserved number SNs of the regular drawing lottery. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm0204.

In step Sm0204, the values of the normal map hit / miss determination counter Cn1, the normal map type determination counter Cn2, and the normal map reach determination counter Cn3 are stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the normal map reservation area 64d of the RAM 64, that is, in step Sm0203. In the storage area corresponding to the number SN of the number of reserved lottery drawings in which 1 is added. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm0205.

In step Sm0205, the normal map destination determination process is executed. The normal map destination determination process is based on the information of each value (normal map hold information) of the normal map hit / miss determination counter Cn1, the normal map type determination counter Cn2, and the normal map reach determination counter Cn3 stored in the normal map hold area 64d. , The judgment result of the normal figure lottery (the judgment result of the normal figure hit / fail judgment, the judgment result of the normal figure type judgment, the judgment result of the presence / absence of the normal figure reach, etc.) It is a process of determining before being the target of the figure lottery. After executing step Sm0205, the process proceeds to step Sm0206.

In step Sm0206, a general map hold command is set. Specifically, it is executed based on the information of each value of the normal map hit / fail determination counter Cn1, the normal map type determination counter Cn2, and the normal map reach determination counter Cn3 stored in the normal map hold area 64d (normal map hold information). Set the judgment result of the normal map destination judgment process as the normal map hold command.

The normal map hold command tells the control device on the sub side the determination result of the normal map destination determination process for the normal map hold information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the normal map start gate 35. This is a command for recognizing the figure hold information before it becomes the target of the normal figure lottery with fluctuations in the normal symbol. The normal figure hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 75: step Sm0503) of the normal process described later. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the normal figure hold command, the voice emission control device 90 gives a command to change the display in the normal figure hold display area Dn of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the normal figure lottery hold number SN. Send to 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the normal figure hold display area Dn of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the normal figure lottery hold number SN.

After executing step Sm0206, the ball entry process for the starting gate of this normal figure is completed.

On the other hand, in step Sm0202, when it is determined that the value of the normal figure lottery hold number SN is not less than the upper limit value (Sm0202: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the normal figure lottery hold number SN is the upper limit value. , The normal figure hit / miss determination counter Cn1, the normal figure type determination counter Cn2, and the normal figure reach determination counter Cn3 are not stored in the normal figure holding area 64d, and the ball entry process for the normal figure start gate is completed.

<Incoming ball entry process for special drawing start port>
Next, the ball entry process for the special drawing start port will be described. The ball entry process for the special figure start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 71: Sm0105).

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the special drawing start port. In step Sm0301, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the special drawing start opening 34a based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the special drawing start opening 34a. If it is determined in step Sm0301 that a game ball has entered the special drawing start port 34a (Sm0301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0302, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set the command. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm0303. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm0301 that the game ball has not entered the special drawing start opening 34a (Sm0301: NO), the ball entry process for the special drawing starting opening is terminated.

In step Sm0303, it is determined whether or not the special electric open / close execution mode flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. The special electric open / close execution mode flag is a flag that turns ON when the special electric open / close execution mode described above is started and turns OFF when the special electric open / close execution mode ends. That is, the special electric open / close execution mode flag is a flag that is turned on during the execution of the special electric open / close execution mode. If it is determined in step Sm0303 that the special electric open / close execution mode flag is not ON (step Sm0303: NO), that is, if it is determined that the special electric open / close execution mode is not being executed, the process proceeds to step Sm0304.

In step Sm0304, it is determined whether or not the special figure changing flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. The special symbol changing flag is a flag that turns ON when the special symbol change starts in the special symbol display unit 37a and turns OFF when the special symbol change ends. That is, the special symbol changing flag is a flag that is turned on during the change of the special symbol. If it is determined in step Sm0304 that the special symbol changing flag is not ON (step Sm0304: NO), that is, if it is determined that the special symbol is not changing, the process proceeds to step Sm0305.

In step Sm0305, the values of the special figure hit / miss determination counter Cs1 and the special figure type determination counter Cs2 are stored in the special figure determination area 64c of the main RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm0306.

In step Sm0306, the special figure fluctuation start flag stored in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. The special symbol variation start flag is a flag for starting the variation of the special symbol on the special symbol display unit 37a, and is turned off when the variation of the special symbol is started, as will be described later. After executing step Sm0306, the ball entry process for the starting port of the special figure is completed.

<Ball entry process for V winning opening>
Next, the ball entry process for the V winning opening will be described. The ball entry process for the V winning opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 71: Sm0106) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the V winning opening. In step Sm0401, whether or not a game ball has entered the V winning opening 57av is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the V winning opening 57av. If it is determined in step Sm0401 that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 57av (Sm0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0402, and whether or not the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. To judge. The V winning flag is turned on when a game ball enters the V winning opening 57av, and the special electric opening / closing execution mode is started when the V winning flag is turned ON, and the special electric opening / closing execution mode is terminated. It is a flag that turns off at that time. That is, in step Sm0402, by determining whether or not the V winning flag is already ON, even when a plurality of game balls enter the V winning opening 57av, steps Sm0403 to Step Sm0405 described later will be described. The configuration is adopted so that the processing of is not executed in duplicate.

If it is determined in step Sm0402 that the V winning flag is not ON (step Sm0402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm0403 and the V winning flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0404, and the V winning type flag corresponding to the special figure type flag that is ON is turned ON. Specifically, for example, when the special symbol A flag is ON as the special symbol type flag, the V prize A flag is ON as the V prize type flag, and the special symbol B flag is ON as the special symbol type flag. If, the V winning B flag is turned on as the V winning type flag. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm0405.

In step Sm0405, a V winning command is set. The V winning command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 57av and won the V winning jackpot and the type of the V winning. The V winning command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 75: step Sm0503) of the normal process described later. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the V winning command, the game ball enters the V winning opening 57av and wins the V winning jackpot, and the special electric opening / closing execution mode is based on the type of the V winning and the V winning. The V winning effect, which is an effect suggesting that is started, is executed.

After executing step Sm0405, the ball entry process for the V winning opening is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sm0401 that the game ball has not entered the V winning opening 57av (step Sm0401: NO) and when it is determined in step Sm0402 that the V winning flag is ON (step Sm0402: YES). Ends the ball entry process for the V winning opening without executing the process from step Sm0403 to step Sm0405 described above.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal process, the main process of the game is executed.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sm0501, the start-up process is executed. Specifically, the initial setting of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm0502.

In step Sm0502, a start-up command is set. The start-up command is a command for starting a demo movie for each control device on the sub side when the power is turned on. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm0503.

In step Sm0503, output data such as a start-up command set in step Sm0502 and a command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, the command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when a start-up command or a command related to various effects described later is set, they are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After executing step Sm0503, the process proceeds to step Sm0504.

In step Sm0504, the values of the normal map variation type determination counter Cn4 and the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each value of the normal figure variation type determination counter Cn4 and the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4, and when each counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the normal figure variation type determination counter Cn4 and the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm0505.

In step Sm0505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm0506.

In step Sm0506, the normal symbol control process, which is the control process related to the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display unit 38a, is executed. In the normal symbol control process, the normal symbol lottery and the control of the variable display of the normal symbol based on the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery are performed. The details of the normal symbol control process will be described later. After executing step Sm0506, the process proceeds to step Sm0507.

In step Sm0507, the ordinary electric accessory control process, which is the control process for the ordinary electric accessory 34b, is executed. In the ordinary electric accessory control process, control in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the ordinary electric accessory 34b is performed. The details of the ordinary electric accessory control process will be described later. After executing step Sm0507, the process proceeds to step Sm0508.

In step Sm0508, the special symbol control process, which is the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol display unit 37a, is executed. In the special symbol control process, the special symbol lottery and the control of the variable display of the special symbol based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery are performed. The details of the special symbol control process will be described later. After executing step Sm0508, the process proceeds to step Sm0509.

In step Sm0509, the special electric accessory control process, which is the control process for the special electric accessory, is executed. In the special electric accessory control process, control is performed in the special electric opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing the first special electric accessory 57b and the second special electric accessory 58b. The details of the special electric accessory control process will be described later. After executing step Sm0509, the process proceeds to step Sm0510.

In step Sm0510, when the standby state elapses for a predetermined time, each control device on the sub side executes a standby process for starting the demo moving image. Then, after executing step Sm0510, the process proceeds to step Sm0511.

In step Sm0511, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process in step Sm0503). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached. If it is determined in step Sm0511 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal process (Sm0511: NO), in step Sm0512 and step Sm0513, until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached. Within the remaining time of, the random number initial value counter Cini, the normal figure variation type determination counter Cn4, and the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sm0512, 1 is added to the value of the random number initial value counter Cini, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter Cini is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Sm0513, 1 is added to each value of the normal figure variation type determination counter Cn4 and the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4, and when each counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, each update value of the normal figure variation type determination counter Cn4 and the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm0511 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (Sm0511: YES), the process returns to step Sm0503 and each process from step Sm0503 to step Sm0510 is performed. Run.

Since the execution time of each process from step Sm0503 to step Sm0510 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, these counter values are randomly updated by repeatedly updating each value of the random number initial value counter Cini, the normal figure variation type determination counter Cn4, and the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 using the remaining time. can do.

<Ordinary symbol control processing>
Next, the normal symbol control process will be described. The normal symbol control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 75: Sm0506).

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol control process. In step Sm0601, the normal symbol change start process, which is a process for starting the change of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display unit 38a, is executed. The details of the normal symbol change start processing will be described later. After executing step Sm0601, the process proceeds to step Sm0602.

In step Sm0602, the normal symbol fluctuation stop process, which is a process for stopping the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display unit 38a, is executed. The details of the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step Sm0602, the present normal symbol control process is terminated.

<Normal symbol change start processing>
Next, the normal symbol change start processing will be described. The normal symbol change start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 76: Sm0601) of the normal symbol control process.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol change start process. In step Sm0701, it is determined whether or not the normal power opening / closing execution mode flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. The normal power opening / closing execution mode flag is a flag that turns ON when the normal power opening / closing execution mode is started and turns OFF when the normal power opening / closing execution mode ends. That is, the normal power opening / closing execution mode flag is a flag that is turned on during the execution of the normal power opening / closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step Sm0701 that the normal power open / close execution mode flag is ON (Sm0701: YES), the normal symbol change start process is terminated without executing any of the processes after step Sm0702 described later. .. That is, the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display unit 38a is not started during the execution of the normal power opening / closing execution mode. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm0701 that the normal power opening / closing execution mode flag is not ON (Sm0701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm0702.

In step Sm0702, it is determined whether or not the flag during fluctuation of the normal map stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. The normal symbol changing flag is a flag that turns ON when the normal symbol change starts in the normal symbol display unit 38a and turns OFF when the normal symbol change ends. That is, the flag during fluctuation of the normal symbol is a flag that is ON during the fluctuation of the normal symbol. If it is determined in step Sm0702 that the flag during normal symbol change is not ON (step Sm0702: NO), that is, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not changing, the process proceeds to step Sm0703.

In step Sm0703, it is determined whether or not the number SN for the number of reserved lottery drawings is "1" or more. If it is determined in step Sm0703 that the number SN for the number of reserved numbers in the normal symbol lottery is not "1" or more (Sm0703: NO), the normal symbol variation start process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm0703 that the number SN for the number of reserved lottery drawings is "1" or more (Sm0703: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0704. That is, in a situation where the normal symbol display unit 38a is not executing the normal symbol opening / closing execution mode and the normal symbol is not changing, the process proceeds to step Sm0704 when the normal symbol lottery hold number SN is 1 or more.

In step Sm0704, the number SN for the number of reserved lottery drawings is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm0705.

In step Sm0705, a normal map reservation information shift process, which is a process of shifting the normal map hold information stored in each area of the normal map hold area 64d, is executed. Specifically, in the normal map reservation information shift process, after moving the normal map reservation information stored in the first area of the normal map reservation area 64d to the normal map determination area 64e, the second area → the first area. , 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area, and so on. After executing step Sm0705, the process proceeds to step Sm0706.

In step Sm0706, a normal figure winning / failing determination process, which is a process of determining whether or not to win a normal figure, is executed. Specifically, in the normal figure winning / failing determination process, whether or not to win the normal figure based on the value of the normal figure winning / failing determination counter Cn1 stored in the normal figure winning / failing determination area 64e and the above-mentioned normal figure winning / failing determination table. Judge whether or not. After executing step Sm0706, the process proceeds to step Sm0707.

In step Sm0707, a normal symbol type determination process, which is a process of determining the type of a normal symbol, is executed. Specifically, in the normal map type determination process, the above-mentioned normal map type determination table is selected according to the result of the normal map type determination process, and the value of the normal map type determination counter Cn2 stored in the normal map type determination area 64e is used. , The type of the normal symbol is determined based on the selected normal symbol type determination table. After executing step Sm0707, the process proceeds to step Sm0708.

In step Sm0708, the normal symbol type flag corresponding to the type of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol type determination process of step Sm0707 is turned ON. Specifically, for example, when it is determined in the normal symbol type determination process of step Sm0707 that it is a normal symbol A, the normal symbol A flag is turned ON as the normal symbol type flag, and it is determined that it is a normal symbol B. The normal symbol B flag is turned on as the normal symbol type flag. After executing step Sm0708, the process proceeds to step Sm0709.

In step Sm0709, the normal map fluctuation time setting process is executed. The normal symbol fluctuation time setting process is a process of setting the normal symbol fluctuation time (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol display unit 38a. The details of the normal map fluctuation time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sm0709, the process proceeds to step Sm0710.

In step Sm0710, a command for changing the normal map is set. The command for changing the normal map includes information indicating that the change in the symbol this time is based on the entry of the game ball into the normal map start gate 35, as well as information on whether or not a reach has occurred and information on whether or not a reach has occurred. Information on the fluctuation time of the normal map set in step Sm0709 is included. After executing step Sm0710, the process proceeds to step Sm0711.

In step Sm0711, a command for the normal map type is set. The normal figure type command includes information on the result of the normal figure hit / miss determination (presence / absence of a normal figure hit) and the result of the normal figure type determination (normal symbol type).

The command for changing the normal map and the command for the normal map type set in steps Sm0710 and Sm0711 are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by the command output process (step Sm0503) of the normal process (FIG. 75). The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect based on the received command for changing the normal map and the command for the normal map type, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step Sm0711, the process proceeds to step Sm0712.

In step Sm0712, the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display unit 38a is started. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0713, and the flag during fluctuation of the normal map stored in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. After that, the normal symbol change start processing is terminated.

<Public map fluctuation time setting process>
Next, the normal map fluctuation time setting process will be described. The normal symbol variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 77: Sm0709) of the normal symbol variation start process.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a normal map fluctuation time setting process. In step Sm0801, the value of the normal map variation type determination counter Cn4 stored in the normal figure variation type determination counter buffer of the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm0802.

In step Sm0802, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal figure hit / miss determination related to the change of the normal symbol this time is a normal figure hit. Specifically, among the normal figure type flags stored in the RAM 64, it is determined whether or not the normal figure type flag corresponding to the normal figure hit is ON, and the normal figure type flag corresponding to the normal figure hit is set. When it is ON, it is determined that the result of the normal figure hit / miss determination is a normal figure hit. If it is determined in step Sm0802 that the result of the normal figure hit / miss determination is a normal figure hit (Sm0802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0803.

In step Sm0803, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current normal map fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 is acquired by referring to the normal map fluctuation time table for normal map stored in the various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63. .. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0804, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the normal figure fluctuation time timer counter provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value of this normal fluctuation time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sm0804, the variable time setting process of this normal diagram is terminated.

In step Sm0802, if it is determined that the result of the normal symbol hit / miss determination related to the change of the normal symbol is not a normal symbol (Sm0802: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm0805, and the reach is reached in the change of the normal symbol this time. Determine if it occurs. Since this process (Sm0805) is executed when the result of the normal figure hit / miss determination related to the change of the normal symbol in the above step Sm0802 is not the normal figure hit, the result of the normal figure hit / fail judgment is usually in step Sm0805. It is determined whether or not the variation of the normal symbol that is not a hit is a variation that causes reach. Specifically, the value of the normal map reach determination counter Cn3 stored in the normal map determination area 64e is determined by referring to the normal map reach determination table stored in the various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63. If it matches the value set as reach occurrence in the table, it is determined that reach occurs. If it is determined in step Sm0805 that reach will occur (Sm0805: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0806.

In step Sm0806, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the current normal map fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 is referred to with reference to the normal map deviation (for reach generation) normal map fluctuation time table stored in various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63. Get information. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0804, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the normal map fluctuation time counter provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process of this normal map is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sm0805 that no reach does not occur due to the change of the normal symbol this time (Sm0805: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm0807, and it is out of the ordinary figure stored in various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63 (non-reach). With reference to the normal map fluctuation time table for (occurrence), the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current normal map fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0804, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the normal map fluctuation time counter provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the normal map fluctuation time table for out-of-normal (reach non-occurrence) is shorter as the number of the normal map lottery pending number SN is larger. It is set to be. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the configuration may be configured so as not to depend on the number of the number of reserved number SNs of the regular drawing lottery, and the fluctuation time is set to be shorter as the number of reserved number SNs of the regular drawing lottery is smaller. You may. Further, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time information stored in the normal map fluctuation time table for hitting the normal map and the normal map fluctuation time table for off-line (reach occurrence).

<Normal symbol fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing will be described. The normal symbol fluctuation stop process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 76: Sm0602) of the normal symbol control process.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol fluctuation stop process. In step Sm0901, it is determined whether or not the flag during fluctuation of the normal map is ON. If it is determined in step Sm0901 that the flag during normal symbol change is not ON (step Sm0901: NO), the normal symbol change stop process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm0901 that the flag during fluctuation of the normal map is ON (step Sm0901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0902.

In step Sm0902, it is determined whether or not the normal map fluctuation time set in the normal map fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 78) has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal map fluctuation time timer counter in the main RAM 64 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the normal map fluctuation time has elapsed. do. If it is determined in step Sm0902 that the normal symbol fluctuation time has not elapsed (step Sm0902: NO), the normal symbol fluctuation stop process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm0902 that the normal map fluctuation time has elapsed (step Sm0902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0903.

In step Sm0903, the normal symbol that is changing in the normal symbol display unit 38a is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the ON normal symbol type flag. As a result, the normal symbol in the display mode corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 38a. After executing step Sm0903, the process proceeds to step Sm0904.

In step Sm0904, it is determined whether or not the normal map type flag corresponding to the normal map is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal figure hit / miss determination related to the change of the normal symbol this time is a normal figure hit. In step Sm0904, when it is determined that the normal figure type flag corresponding to the normal figure is not ON (step Sm0904: NO), that is, the result of the normal figure correctness judgment related to the change of the normal symbol this time is out of the normal figure. If there is, the process proceeds to step Sm0905, and the ON normal symbol type flag (in this case, the normal symbol Z flag) is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0907, and the flag during fluctuation of the normal map is turned off. After that, the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sm0904, when it is determined that the normal figure type flag corresponding to the normal figure is ON (step Sm0904: YES), that is, the result of the normal figure hit / miss determination related to the change of the normal symbol this time is the normal figure. If it is a hit, the process proceeds to step Sm0906, and the normal power opening / closing execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm0907, and the flag during fluctuation of the normal map is turned off. After that, the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing is terminated. As a result, when the result of the normal figure hit / miss determination related to the change of the normal symbol this time is a normal figure, the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is started.

<Ordinary electric accessory control processing>
Next, the ordinary electric accessory control process will be described. The ordinary electric accessory control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 75: Sm0507) of the normal process.

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory control process. In step Sm1001, it is determined whether or not the Fuden ending period flag is ON. The Fuden ending period flag is a flag that is turned on at the start of the Fuden ending period and turned off at the end of the Fuden ending period. That is, the Fuden ending period flag is a flag for determining whether or not the Fuden ending period is in progress.

If it is determined in step Sm1001 that the normal electric ending period flag is not ON (Sm1001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1002, and it is determined whether or not the general electric open / close processing period flag is ON. The normal power opening / closing processing period flag is a flag that is turned on at the start of the normal power opening / closing processing period and turned off at the end of the normal power opening / closing processing period. That is, the normal power opening / closing processing period flag is a flag for determining whether or not the normal power opening / closing processing period is in progress.

If it is determined in step Sm1002 that the normal electric opening / closing processing period flag is not ON (Sm1002: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1003, and it is determined whether or not the general electric opening period flag is ON. The Fuden opening period flag is a flag that is turned on at the start of the Fuden opening period and turned off at the end of the Fuden opening period. That is, the Fuden opening period flag is a flag for determining whether or not the Fuden opening period is in progress.

If it is determined in step Sm1003 that the Fuden opening period flag is not ON (Sm1003: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1004, and it is determined whether or not the Fuden open / close execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sm1004 that the normal power opening / closing execution mode flag is ON (Sm1004: YES), the process proceeds to the processing group for starting the normal power opening / closing execution mode after step Sm1005 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1004 that the normal electric opening / closing execution mode flag is not ON (Sm1004: NO), the normal electric accessory control process is terminated.

In step Sm1005, the general electric opening / closing scenario selection process is executed. The normal power opening / closing scenario selection process is a process of selecting the type of the normal power opening / closing scenario to be referred to in the normal power opening / closing execution mode based on the normal power opening / closing scenario selection process and the above-mentioned normal power opening / closing scenario selection table. Specifically, for example, when the normal symbol A flag is ON as the normal symbol type flag, the normal power opening / closing scenario A is selected. After executing step Sm1005, the process proceeds to step Sm1006.

In step Sm1006, the Fuden opening time setting process is executed. The Fuden opening time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the Fuden opening period (hereinafter, also referred to as the Fuden opening time). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the Fuden opening time information is acquired from the Fuden opening / closing scenario selected by the above-mentioned Fuden opening / closing scenario selection process, and the acquired Fuden opening time information is provided in the RAM 64. Electric opening time timer Set to the counter. The value of the Fuden opening time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sm1006, the process proceeds to step Sm1007.

In step Sm1007, the Fuden opening command is set. The set Fuden opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 75). The voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the Fuden opening effect and the right-handed notification effect based on the reception of the Fuden opening command. After executing step Sm1007, the process proceeds to step Sm1008, and the Fuden opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the normal electric accessory control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sm1003 that the Fuden opening period flag is ON (Sm1003: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1009.

In step Sm1009, it is determined whether or not the Fuden opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the Fuden opening time timer counter set as the Fuden opening time in the above-mentioned Fuden opening time setting process is "0". If it is determined in step Sm1009 that the Fuden opening period has ended (Sm1009: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1010 and the Fuden opening period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm1011.

In step Sm1011, the normal electric open / close processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1012, and the general electric open / close processing period command is set. The set normal power opening / closing processing period command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output processing (step Sm0503) in the normal processing (FIG. 75). This general electric opening / closing processing period command includes information on the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened during the current general electric opening / closing processing period. The voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the effect of the content corresponding to the number of times of opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b based on the received normal electric opening / closing processing period command. After executing step Sm1012, the normal electric accessory control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sm1002 that the normal power opening / closing processing period flag is ON (Sm1002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1013 to execute the normal power opening / closing processing. In the normal electric opening / closing process, the opening / closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is controlled based on the normal electric opening / closing scenario selected by the general electric opening / closing scenario selection process described above. The details of the normal electric opening / closing process will be described later. After executing step Sm1013, the process proceeds to step Sm1014.

In step Sm1014, it is determined whether or not the normal electric opening / closing processing period has expired. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the final opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is completed and the closed state is established based on the general electric opening / closing scenario, and the final opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is completed and closed. When it is determined that the state has been reached, it is determined that the normal electric opening / closing processing period has expired. If it is determined in step Sm1014 that the normal electric opening / closing processing period has not ended (Sm1014: NO), the normal electric accessory control processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1014 that the normal power opening / closing processing period has ended (Sm1014: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1015 and the normal power opening / closing processing period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm1016.

In step Sm1016, the Fuden ending time setting process is executed. The Fuden ending time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the Fuden ending period (hereinafter, also referred to as the Fuden ending time). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the Fuden ending time information is acquired from the Fuden opening / closing scenario selected by the above-mentioned Fuden opening / closing scenario selection process, and the acquired Fuden ending time information is provided in the RAM 64. Electric ending time timer Set to the counter. The value of this normal ending time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sm1016, the process proceeds to step Sm1017.

In step Sm1017, the Fuden ending command is set. The set Fuden ending command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 75). After executing step Sm1017, the process proceeds to step Sm1018, and the Fuden ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the normal electric accessory control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sm1001 that the Fuden ending period flag is ON (Sm1001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1019.

In step Sm1019, it is determined whether or not the Fuden ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the Fuden ending time timer counter set as the Fuden ending time in the above-mentioned Fuden ending time setting process is "0". If it is determined in step Sm1019 that the end period of the normal electric power is not completed (Sm1019: NO), the normal electric accessory control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1019 that the end of the Fuden ending period has ended (Sm1019: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1020.

In step Sm1020, the Fuden ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1021 and the normal figure type flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm1022.

In step Sm1022, a command to end the normal electric open / close execution mode is set. The set normal power opening / closing execution mode end command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 75). After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1023, and the normal power opening / closing execution mode flag is turned off. After that, the normal electric accessory control process is terminated.

<Public electricity opening / closing process>
Next, the general electric opening / closing process will be described. The normal electric function opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 80: Sm1013) of the ordinary electric accessory control process.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a normal electric opening / closing process. In step Sm1101, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric accessory 34b is open. If it is determined in step Sm1101 that the ordinary electric accessory 34b is not open (Sm1101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1102.

In step Sm1102, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is satisfied. Specifically, the general electric opening / closing scenario selected by the general electric opening / closing scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the ordinary electric accessory 34b set in the general electric opening / closing scenario is satisfied. If it is determined in step Sm1102 that the opening condition of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is satisfied (Sm1102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1103.

In step Sm1103, the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm1104.

In step Sm1104, a public power release command is set. The normal electric accessory release command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the ordinary electric accessory 34b has been released. The normal power release command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 75: Sm0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sm1104, this normal electric opening / closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sm1102 that the opening condition of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is not satisfied (Sm1102: NO), the main electric opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step Sm1101 that the ordinary electric accessory 34b is open (Sm1101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1105.

In step Sm1105, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is satisfied. Specifically, the general electric opening / closing scenario selected by the general electric opening / closing scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the ordinary electric accessory 34b set in the general electric opening / closing scenario is satisfied. If it is determined in step Sm1105 that the closing condition of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is satisfied (Sm1105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1106.

In step Sm1106, the ordinary electric accessory 34b is closed. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm1107.

In step Sm1107, a command to close the electric power is set. The normal electric accessory closing command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the ordinary electric accessory 34b has closed. The normal power closing command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 75: Sm0503) of the normal processing. After executing step Sm1107, this normal electric opening / closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sm1105 that the closing condition of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is not satisfied (Sm1105: NO), the main electric opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

<Special symbol control processing>
Next, the special symbol control process will be described. The special symbol control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 75: Sm0508) of the normal process.

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the special symbol control process. In step Sm1201, a special symbol change start process, which is a process for starting the change of the special symbol in the special symbol display unit 37a, is executed. The details of the special symbol change start processing will be described later. After executing step Sm1201, the process proceeds to step Sm1202.

In step Sm1202, a special symbol fluctuation stop process, which is a process for stopping the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display unit 37a, is executed. The details of the special symbol fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step Sm1202, the special symbol control process is terminated.

<Special symbol change start processing>
Next, the special symbol change start processing will be described. The special symbol change start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 82: Sm1201) of the special symbol control process.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a special symbol change start process. In step Sm1301, it is determined whether or not the special electric open / close execution mode flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. The special electric open / close execution mode flag is a flag that turns ON when the special electric open / close execution mode is started and turns OFF when the special electric open / close execution mode ends. That is, the special electric open / close execution mode flag is a flag that is turned on during the execution of the special electric open / close execution mode.

If it is determined in step Sm1301 that the special electric open / close execution mode flag is ON (Sm1301: YES), the special symbol change start process is terminated without executing any of the processes after step Sm1302 described later. That is, the change of the special symbol in the special symbol display unit 37a is not started during the execution of the special electric opening / closing execution mode. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1301 that the special electric open / close execution mode flag is not ON (Sm1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1302.

In step Sm1302, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sm1302 that the V winning flag is ON (step Sm1302: YES), the special symbol variation start process is terminated without executing any of the processes after step Sm1303 described later. That is, when the V winning flag is ON, the change of the special symbol in the special symbol display unit 37a is not started. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1302 that the V winning flag is not ON (Sm1302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1303.

In step Sm1303, it is determined whether or not the special figure changing flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. The special symbol changing flag is a flag that turns ON when the special symbol change starts in the special symbol display unit 37a and turns OFF when the special symbol change ends. That is, the special symbol changing flag is a flag that is turned on during the change of the special symbol. If it is determined in step Sm1303 that the special figure changing flag is ON (step Sm1303: YES), the special symbol change start process is terminated without executing any of the processes after step Sm1304 described later. .. That is, when the special symbol changing flag is ON, the change of the special symbol in the special symbol display unit 37a is not started. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1303 that the special symbol changing flag is not ON (step Sm1303: NO), that is, if it is determined that the special symbol is not changing, the process proceeds to step Sm1304.

In step Sm1304, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation start flag is ON. As described above, the special figure change start flag is set when the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a in a situation where the special electric opening / closing execution mode is not being executed and the special symbol is not changing in the special symbol display unit 37a. This is a flag that turns ON in some cases. If it is determined in step Sm1304 that the special symbol variation start flag is not ON (Sm1304: NO), the special symbol variation start process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1304 that the special figure fluctuation start flag is ON (Sm1304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1305. That is, when the game ball enters the special symbol start port 34a in a situation where the special electric opening / closing execution mode is not being executed, the V winning flag is not ON, and the special symbol is not changing in the special symbol display unit 37a. , Step Sm1305.

In step Sm1305, the special figure fluctuation start flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm1306.

In step Sm1306, a special figure hit / fail determination process, which is a process of determining whether or not to win a special figure hit (special figure big hit or special figure small hit), is executed. Specifically, in the special figure hit / miss determination process, whether or not to win a special figure based on the value of the special figure hit / miss determination counter Cn1 stored in the special figure hit / fail determination area 64e and the above-mentioned special figure hit / miss determination table. Judge whether or not. After executing step Sm1306, the process proceeds to step Sm1307.

In step Sm1307, the special symbol type determination process, which is the process of determining the type of the special symbol, is executed. Specifically, in the special figure type determination process, the above-mentioned special figure type determination table is selected according to the result of the special figure type determination, and the value of the special figure type determination counter Cn2 stored in the special figure determination area 64e is used. , The type of the special symbol is determined based on the selected special symbol type determination table. After executing step Sm1307, the process proceeds to step Sm1308.

In step Sm1308, the special symbol type flag corresponding to the type of the special symbol determined in the special symbol type determination process of step Sm1307 is turned ON. Specifically, for example, when it is determined to be the special symbol A in the special symbol type determination process of step Sm1307, the special symbol A flag is turned ON as the special symbol type flag, and it is determined to be the special symbol B. The special symbol B flag is turned on as the special symbol type flag. After executing step Sm1308, the process proceeds to step Sm1309.

In step Sm1309, the special figure fluctuation time setting process is executed. The special symbol variation time setting process is a process of setting the variation time (special symbol variation time) of the special symbol on the special symbol display unit 37a. The details of the special figure fluctuation time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sm1309, the process proceeds to step Sm1310.

In step Sm1310, a command for changing the special figure is set. The special figure change command includes information indicating that the change of the symbol this time is based on the entry of the game ball into the special figure start port 34a, and information on the special figure change time set in step Sm1309. It has been. After executing step Sm1310, the process proceeds to step Sm1311.

In step Sm1311, a special figure type command is set. The special figure type command includes information on the result of the special figure hit / miss determination (presence / absence of hitting the special figure) and the result of the special figure type determination (type of special symbol).

The special figure change command and the special figure type command set in steps Sm1310 and Sm1311 are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by the command output process (step Sm0503) of the normal process (FIG. 75). The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect based on the received command for changing the special figure and the command for the special figure type, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step Sm1311, the process proceeds to step Sm1312.

In step Sm1312, the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display unit 37a is started. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1313, and the special figure changing flag stored in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. After that, the special symbol change start processing is terminated.

<Special figure fluctuation time setting process>
Next, the special figure fluctuation time setting process will be described. The special symbol variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 83: Sm1309) of the special symbol variation start process.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the special figure fluctuation time setting process. In step Sm1401, the value of the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 stored in the normal figure variation type determination counter buffer of the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm1402.

In step Sm1402, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 is acquired by referring to the special figure variation time table stored in the various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1403, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the special figure fluctuation time timer counter provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value of this special figure variation time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sm1403, the special figure fluctuation time setting process is terminated.

<Special symbol fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the special symbol fluctuation stop processing will be described. The special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 82: Sm1202) of the special symbol control process.

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing a special symbol fluctuation stop process. In step Sm1501, it is determined whether or not the special figure changing flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sm1501 that the special symbol changing flag is not ON (step Sm1501: NO), the special symbol fluctuation stop process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1501 that the special figure changing flag is ON (step Sm1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1502.

In step Sm1502, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time set in the special figure fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 84) has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure fluctuation time timer counter in the main RAM 64 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed. do. If it is determined in step Sm1502 that the special symbol fluctuation time has not elapsed (step Sm1502: NO), the special symbol fluctuation stop process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1502 that the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed (step Sm1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1503.

In step Sm1503, the special symbol that is changing in the special symbol display unit 37a is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the special symbol type flag that is ON. As a result, the special symbol in the display mode corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 37a. After executing step Sm1503, the process proceeds to step Sm1504.

In step Sm1504, it is determined whether or not the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure hit (special figure big hit or special figure small hit) is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure hit / miss determination related to the change of the special symbol this time is a special figure hit. In step Sm1504, when it is determined that the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure is not ON (step Sm1504: NO), that is, the result of the special figure pass / fail judgment relating to the change of the special symbol this time is out of the special figure. If there is, the process proceeds to step Sm1505, and the ON special figure type flag is turned OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1507, and the special figure changing flag is turned off. After that, the special symbol fluctuation stop processing is terminated. In addition, in this embodiment, since all the results of the special figure hit / miss determination are the special figure small hits, it is determined in step Sm1504 that the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure hit is not ON, and the process proceeds to step Sm1505. No.

On the other hand, in step Sm1504, when it is determined that the special figure type flag corresponding to the special figure is ON (step Sm1504: YES), that is, the result of the special figure hit / miss determination related to the change of the special symbol this time is the special figure. If it is a hit, the process proceeds to step Sm1506, and the special electric open / close execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1507, and the special figure changing flag is turned off. After that, the special symbol fluctuation stop processing is terminated. As a result, when the result of the special figure hit / miss determination related to the change of the special symbol this time is a special figure, the special electric opening / closing execution mode is started.

<Special electric accessory control processing>
Next, the special electric accessory control process will be described. The special electric accessory control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 75: Sm0509) of the normal process.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing a special electric accessory control process. In step Sm1601, it is determined whether or not the special electric ending period flag is ON. The special electric ending period flag is a flag that is turned on at the start of the special electric ending period and turned off at the end of the special electric ending period. That is, the special electric ending period flag is a flag for determining whether or not the special electric ending period is in progress.

If it is determined in step Sm1601 that the special electric ending period flag is not ON (Sm1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1602, and it is determined whether or not the special electric opening / closing processing period flag is ON. The special electric open / close processing period flag is a flag that is turned on at the start of the special electric open / close processing period and turned off at the end of the special electric open / close processing period. That is, the special electric switching processing period flag is a flag for determining whether or not the special electric switching processing period is in progress.

If it is determined in step Sm1602 that the special electric opening / closing processing period flag is not ON (Sm1602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1603, and it is determined whether or not the special electric opening period flag is ON. The special electric opening period flag is a flag that is turned on at the start of the special electric opening period and turned off at the end of the special electric opening period. That is, the special electric opening period flag is a flag for determining whether or not the special electric opening period is in progress.

If it is determined in step Sm1603 that the special electric opening period flag is not ON (Sm1603: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1604, and it is determined whether or not the special electric open / close execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sm1604 that the special electric opening / closing execution mode flag is ON (Sm1604: YES), the process proceeds to the processing group for starting the special electric opening / closing execution mode after step Sm1607 described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1604 that the special electric open / close execution mode flag is not ON (Sm1604: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1605, and it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sm1605 that the V winning flag is ON (step Sm1605: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1606, the special electric open / close execution mode flag and the V trigger flag are turned ON, and then step Sm1607 described later. Proceed to the processing group for starting the subsequent special electric opening / closing execution mode. The V trigger flag is a flag for determining whether or not the trigger for executing the special electric opening / closing execution mode this time is due to the V prize. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1605 that the V winning flag is not ON (step Sm1605: NO), the special electric accessory control process is terminated. That is, in this embodiment, not only when the special figure is won in the special figure lottery (when the special electric opening / closing execution mode flag is turned ON), but also when the game ball enters the V winning opening 57av and the V winning jackpot is won. (When the V winning flag is turned on), the special electric open / close execution mode is also started.

In step Sm1607, the special electric opening / closing scenario selection process is executed. In the special electric opening / closing scenario selection process, the type of the special electric opening / closing scenario to be referred to in the special electric opening / closing execution mode is selected based on the V trigger flag, the V winning type flag, the special figure type flag, and the special electric opening / closing scenario selection table described above. It is a process to do. Specifically, for example, when the V trigger flag is OFF and the special symbol A flag is ON as the special symbol type flag, the special power opening / closing scenario A for special figure small hits is selected. Further, for example, when the V trigger flag is ON and the V prize A flag is ON as the V prize type flag, the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot is selected. After executing step Sm1607, the process proceeds to step Sm1608.

In step Sm1608, the special electric opening time setting process is executed. The special electric opening time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the special electric opening period (hereinafter, also referred to as a special electric opening time). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the special electric opening time information is acquired from the special electric opening / closing scenario selected by the special electric opening / closing scenario selection process described above, and the acquired special electric opening time information is used as the special electric opening time timer counter provided in the RAM 64. Set to. The value of this special electric opening time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sm1608, the process proceeds to step Sm1609.

In step Sm1609, a special electric opening command is set. The set special electric opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 75). The voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the special electric opening effect and the right-handed notification effect based on the reception of the special electric opening command. After executing step Sm1609, the process proceeds to step Sm1610, and the special electric power opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the special electric accessory control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sm1603 that the special electric opening period flag is ON (Sm1603: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1611.

In step Sm1611, it is determined whether or not the special electric opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric opening time timer counter set as the special electric opening time in the above-mentioned special electric opening time setting process is "0". If it is determined in step Sm1611 that the special electric opening period has ended (Sm1611: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1612 and the special electric opening period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm1613.

In step Sm1613, a round display start process, which is a process of displaying the number of rounds in the special electric opening / closing execution mode on the round display unit 39, is executed. Specifically, the number of rounds set in the selected special electric opening / closing scenario is read out, and the read number of rounds is displayed on the round display unit 39. After executing step Sm1613, the process proceeds to step Sm1614.

In step Sm1614, the special electric open / close processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1615, and the special electric opening / closing processing period command is set. The set special electric opening / closing processing period command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output processing (step Sm0503) in the normal processing (FIG. 75). This special electric switch processing period command includes information on the number of times the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b is opened during the current special electric switch processing period. The voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the effect of the content corresponding to the number of times of opening of the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b based on the received special electric opening / closing processing period command. After executing step Sm1615, the special electric accessory control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sm1602 that the special electric opening / closing processing period flag is ON (Sm1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1616 to execute the special electric opening / closing process. In the special electric opening / closing process, the opening / closing operation of the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b is controlled based on the special electric opening / closing scenario selected by the special electric opening / closing scenario selection process described above. The details of the special electric opening / closing process will be described later. After executing step Sm1616, the process proceeds to step Sm1617.

In step Sm1617, it is determined whether or not the special electric opening / closing processing period has expired. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the final opening of the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b is completed and the closed state is obtained based on the special electric opening / closing scenario, and the first special electric accessory is closed. When it is determined that the last opening of the object 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b is completed and the closed state is reached, it is determined that the special electric opening / closing processing period has ended. If it is determined in step Sm1617 that the special electric opening / closing processing period has not ended (Sm1617: NO), the special electric accessory control processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1617 that the special electric opening / closing processing period has ended (Sm1617: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1618 and the special electric opening / closing processing period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm1619.

In step Sm1619, a round display end process, which is a process of ending the display of the number of rounds on the round display unit 39, is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm1620.

In step Sm1620, the special electric ending time setting process is executed. The special electric ending time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the special electric ending period (hereinafter, also referred to as a special electric ending time). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the special electric ending time information is acquired from the special electric opening / closing scenario selected by the special electric opening / closing scenario selection process described above, and the acquired special electric ending time information is used as the special electric ending time timer counter provided in the RAM 64. Set to. The value of the special electric ending time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed. After executing step Sm1620, the process proceeds to step Sm1621.

In step Sm1621, a special electric ending command is set. The set special electric ending command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 75). The voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the special electric ending effect based on the reception of the special electric ending command. After executing step Sm1621, the process proceeds to step Sm1622, and the special electric ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the special electric accessory control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sm1601 that the special electric ending period flag is ON (Sm1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1623.

In step Sm1623, it is determined whether or not the special electric ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric ending time timer counter set as the special electric ending time in the above-mentioned special electric ending time setting process is "0". If it is determined in step Sm1623 that the special electric ending period has not ended (Sm1623: NO), the special electric accessory control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1623 that the special electric ending period has ended (Sm1623: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1624.

In step Sm1624, the special electric ending period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm1625.

In step Sm1625, it is determined whether or not the V trigger flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sm1625 that the V trigger flag is not ON (step Sm1625: NO), that is, if the trigger for executing the special electric opening / closing execution mode this time is not due to the V prize, the process proceeds to step Sm1626. , Turn off the special figure type flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1628 described later. On the other hand, in step Sm1625, when it is determined that the V trigger flag is ON (step Sm1625: YES), that is, when the trigger for executing the special electric opening / closing execution mode this time is due to the V prize, step Sm1627. Proceed to, and turns off the V trigger flag, the V winning flag, and the V winning type flag. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm1628.

In step Sm1628, the special electric open / close execution mode end command is set. The set special electric open / close execution mode end command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 75). The voice emission control device 90 is set to end the special electric power ending effect based on the reception of the special electric power opening / closing execution mode end command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1629, and the special electric open / close execution mode flag is turned off. After that, the special electric accessory control process is terminated.

<Special electric opening / closing process>
Next, the special electric opening / closing process will be described. The special electric opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 86: Sm1616) of the special electric accessory control process.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the special electric opening / closing process. In step Sm1701, it is determined whether or not the first special electric accessory 57b is open. If it is determined in step Sm1701 that the first special electric accessory 57b is not open (Sm1701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1702.

In step Sm1702, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the first special electric accessory 57b is satisfied. Specifically, the special electric opening / closing scenario selected by the special electric opening / closing scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the first special electric accessory 57b set in the special electric opening / closing scenario is satisfied. If it is determined in step Sm1702 that the opening condition of the first special electric accessory 57b is satisfied (Sm1702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1703.

In step Sm1703, the first special electric accessory 57b is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm1704.

In step Sm1704, the first special electric release command is set. The first special electric release command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the first special electric accessory 57b has been released. The first special electric release command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 75: Sm0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sm1704, the special electric power opening / closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sm1702 that the opening condition of the first special electric accessory 57b is not satisfied (Sm1702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1708 described later.

If it is determined in step Sm1701 that the first special electric accessory 57b is open (Sm1701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1705.

In step Sm1705, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the first special electric accessory 57b is satisfied. Specifically, the special electric opening / closing scenario selected by the special electric opening / closing scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the first special electric accessory 57b set in the special electric opening / closing scenario is satisfied. If it is determined in step Sm1705 that the closing condition of the first special electric accessory 57b is satisfied (Sm1705: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1706.

In step Sm1706, the first special electric accessory 57b is closed. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm1707.

In step Sm1707, the first special electric closing command is set. The first special electric closing command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the first special electric accessory 57b has closed. The first special electric closing command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 75: Sm0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sm1707, the special electric power opening / closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sm1705 that the closing condition of the first special electric accessory 57b is not satisfied (Sm1705: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1708 described later.

In step Sm1708, it is determined whether or not the second special electric accessory 58b is open. If it is determined in step Sm1708 that the second special electric accessory 58b is not open (Sm1708: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1709.

In step Sm1709, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the second special electric accessory 58b is satisfied. Specifically, the special electric opening / closing scenario selected by the special electric opening / closing scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the second special electric accessory 58b set in the special electric opening / closing scenario is satisfied. If it is determined in step Sm1709 that the opening condition of the second special electric accessory 58b is satisfied (Sm1709: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1710.

In step Sm1710, the second special electric accessory 58b is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm1711.

In step Sm1711, the second special electric release command is set. The second special electric release command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the second special electric accessory 58b has been released. The second special electric release command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 75: Sm0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sm1711, the special electric power opening / closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sm1709 that the opening condition of the second special electric accessory 58b is not satisfied (Sm1709: NO), the special electric opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step Sm1708 that the second special electric accessory 58b is open (Sm1708: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1712.

In step Sm1712, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the second special electric accessory 58b is satisfied. Specifically, the special electric opening / closing scenario selected by the special electric opening / closing scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the second special electric accessory 58b set in the special electric opening / closing scenario is satisfied. If it is determined in step Sm1712 that the closing condition of the second special electric accessory 58b is satisfied (Sm1712: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1713.

In step Sm1713, the second special electric accessory 58b is closed. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm1714.

In step Sm1714, the second special electric closing command is set. The second special electric closing command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the second special electric accessory 58b has closed. The second special electric closing command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 75: Sm0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sm1714, the special electric power opening / closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sm1712 that the closing condition of the second special electric accessory 58b is not satisfied (Sm1712: NO), the special electric opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

<< 2-6 >> Various processes executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device will be described. The process executed by the voice emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed with a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described.

In step Sm3101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound / light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main MPU 62, and the commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Read sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step Sm3101, the process proceeds to step Sm3102.

In step Sm3102, a process for producing a normal game game is executed. In the process for producing the Fuzu game times, the process related to the effect during the execution of the Fuzu game times is executed. Specifically, for example, when a command for changing a normal map and a command for a normal map type are received, the normal symbol type included in the command for changing the normal map or the normal symbol included in the command for changing the normal map is selected. Based on this, processing related to variable display and stop display of decorative symbols in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 is executed. After executing step Sm3102, the process proceeds to step Sm3103.

In step Sm3103, the process for producing the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is executed. In the process for producing the normal power opening / closing execution mode, the processing related to the effect during the execution of the normal power opening / closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, for example, when a Fuden opening command is received, it is set to execute the Fuden opening effect and the right-handed notification process corresponding to the type of the Fuden opening / closing scenario. In addition, when the Fuden open / close processing period command is received, it is set to execute the effect for the Fuden open / close processing period corresponding to the type of the Fuden open / close scenario. In addition, when the Fuden opening command is received, the Fuden opening effect is executed corresponding to the type of the Fuden opening / closing scenario and the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened. In addition, when the Fuden closing command or the Fuden ending command is received, the Fuden closing effect corresponding to the type of the Fuden opening / closing scenario and the number of closings of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is executed. If it is 5 seconds before the end of the Fuden ending period, the Fuden ending effect is executed. After executing step Sm3103, the process proceeds to step Sm3104.

In step Sm3104, the special figure game rotation effect processing is executed. In the process for producing the special figure game times, the process related to the effect during the execution of the special figure game times is executed. Specifically, for example, when a special figure change command and a special figure type command are received, the special figure change time included in the special figure change command and the special symbol type included in the special figure type command are selected. Based on this, processing related to variable display and stop display of decorative symbols in the sub-display area SA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 is executed. After executing step Sm3104, the process proceeds to step Sm3105.

In step Sm3105, the special electric opening / closing execution mode effect processing is executed. In the special electric opening / closing execution mode effect processing, the processing related to the effect during the execution of the special electric opening / closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, for example, when a special electric power opening command is received, it is set to execute the special electric power opening effect and the right-handed notification process corresponding to the type of the special electric power opening / closing scenario. Further, when the special electric opening / closing processing period command is received, the effect for the special electric opening / closing processing period corresponding to the type of the special electric opening / closing scenario is set to be executed. In addition, when the special electric power release command is received, the special electric power opening effect is executed according to the type of the special electric power opening / closing scenario and the number of times the special electric power accessory is opened. In addition, when the special electric closing command is received, the special electric interval period effect corresponding to the type of the special electric opening / closing scenario and the number of closings of the special electric accessory is executed. In addition, when the special electric ending command is received, the special electric ending effect corresponding to the type of the special electric opening / closing scenario is executed. After executing step Sm3105, the process proceeds to step Sm3106.

In step Sm3106, the V winning effect processing is executed. In the V-winning effect processing, when the V-winning command is received, the effect suggesting that the V-winning has been won is set to be executed. After executing step Sm3106, the process proceeds to step Sm3107.

In step Sm3107, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the above-mentioned effect processing. After executing step Sm3107, the process proceeds to step Sm3108.

In step Sm3108, the audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read in each of the above-mentioned production processes. After executing step Sm3108, this timer interrupt process ends.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, the process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly the main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and the processes that are executed when a command is received from the voice emission control device 90. There is a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes the main process after the power is turned on, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. If the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, the main process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a main process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described.

In step Sm6101, the initial setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the character information in the compressed format stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, the information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also, make other settings necessary for initialization. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm6102.

In step Sm6102, the interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process executed every time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sm6201, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed by detecting the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105. In the V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute the display instruction.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal generated in VDP105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is performed every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Therefore, since the VDP 105 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image is started or displayed during the drawing of the image. It is possible to suppress the expansion of an image accompanying a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information in the image is stored. Hereinafter, the processing details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described.

In step Sm6301, command correspondence processing is executed. In the command correspondence process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 90), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the moving image display start command corresponding to the advance notice effect is stored, the image drawing and display control is started so that the moving image corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Further, when the moving image display start command corresponding to the reach effect is stored, the image drawing and display control is started so that the moving image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

In the command correspondence process (Sm6301), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so that there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the voice emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop symbol set by the voice emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the mode. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41. The details of the command correspondence process will be described later.

In step Sm6302, the display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command correspondence process (Sm6301) or the like. .. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm6303.

In step Sm6303, task processing is executed. In the task process, the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting process (Sm6302). In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step Sm6304.

In step Sm6304, the drawing process is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character determined by the task process (Sm6303) are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on these information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received at the time of the previous V interrupt processing on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm6305, other processing is executed, and then the V interrupt processing is terminated.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of consecutive winnings for the V winning jackpot is determined based on the type of the ordinary symbol. More specifically, based on the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode, the maximum number of times the special electric opening / closing execution mode can be executed based on the V prize jackpot during the execution of the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is Since it is determined, the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is a very important factor for the player. Therefore, when the normal electric accessory opening / closing execution mode is executed by winning the normal drawing in the general drawing lottery, the player is interested in the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened in the general electric power opening / closing execution mode. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the special figure jackpot is not set as a result of the special figure lottery, various restrictions imposed on the pachinko machine for which the special figure jackpot is set are not imposed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine is increased, and it becomes possible to design and manufacture the pachinko machine having various playability (specs).

Further, in the present embodiment, since the high probability mode (so-called probabilistic state) in which the probability of winning the special figure jackpot is high in the special figure lottery is not provided, the control can be simplified and these modes are provided. Various regulations imposed on pachinko machines are not imposed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine is increased, and it becomes possible to design and manufacture the pachinko machine having various playability (specs).

Further, in the present embodiment, a high-frequency support mode (so-called electric support mode) in which the probability of winning a pachinko machine in a pachinko lottery is high, or the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened when a pachinko machine is won is high (so-called electric support). Since it does not have a state), control can be simplified and various regulations imposed on pachinko machines equipped with these modes are not imposed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine is increased, and it becomes possible to design and manufacture the pachinko machine having various playability.

Further, since the present embodiment does not have the function of holding the special figure lottery, the special figure holding area for holding the special figure lottery can be omitted from the main RAM 64, and the storage area of the main RAM 64 can be saved. It can be effectively used for other purposes.

Further, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the normal electric opening / closing execution mode, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is executed a plurality of times without a substantial lottery (so-called jackpots are consecutive). Therefore, at the time of a big hit consecutive villa in a general pachinko machine, for example, even though it is in a high probability mode (so-called probabilistic state), it is difficult to win the big hit in the big hit lottery and the next special electric opening / closing execution mode is not started easily. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of such a situation (so-called hamari).

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the normal figure start gate 35, the game ball is won in the normal figure lottery, and the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is executed, the game ball is in the flow path. If the ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds in the firing mode that reaches 301 (so-called "right-handed" firing mode), the game ball is launched during the execution of the normal electric opening / closing execution mode. The special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is executed by entering the ball 34a, and the game ball enters the first large winning opening 57a during the execution of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit. 1 The game ball that has entered the big winning opening 57a enters the V winning opening 57av, and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning big hit is executed.

Then, according to this embodiment, the time required from the start to the end of the normal electric opening / closing execution mode, the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit, and the special electric based on the V prize jackpot The configuration can be set to a longer time than the total time (total time: 128.0 seconds) of the time required from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode. More specifically, in the situation where the game ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds in the firing mode (so-called "right-handed" firing mode) in which the game ball reaches the flow passage 301, the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is started. When the time required from the start of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot (the time from time t2 to time t10 in FIG. 68) is defined as the specific required time, from the start of the normal electric opening / closing execution mode. The configuration is such that the time required to complete can be set to a time longer than the specific required time. Therefore, even after the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit ends and then the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot ends, the general electric opening / closing execution mode continues, and the general electric opening / closing execution is executed. During the continuation of the mode, the normal electric accessory 34b may shift to the open state and the game ball may be able to enter the special drawing start port 34a.

Then, according to this embodiment, when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is won in the ordinary drawing lottery when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened twice or more, the special electric power based on the V prize jackpot is executed during the execution of the ordinary electric opening / closing execution mode. After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the normal electric accessory 34b transitions from the closed state to the open state, so that the game ball enters the special drawing start port 34a after the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot ends. Is possible. Then, if the game ball enters the special figure start opening 34a after the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is completed, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is executed again, and then the V winning jackpot is executed again. The special electric open / close execution mode based on is executed. That is, when the normal electric accessory 34b is won twice or more in the normal figure lottery and the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is executed, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the V prize jackpot are entered. The special electric open / close execution mode based on this will be executed multiple times. When the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is executed a plurality of times, the player can have an opportunity to acquire a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the game ball has a special figure start opening 34a while the special symbol is changing, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is being executed, or the special electric opening / closing execution mode is being executed based on the V winning jackpot. If you enter the ball, you will avoid getting various counter values for the special figure lottery (in other words, because it does not have the special figure lottery hold function), so while the special symbol is changing, the special figure is small. Even if the game ball enters the special figure start opening 34a during the execution of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the hit or the execution of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot, the special electric opening / closing execution based on the special figure small hit is executed thereafter. The mode is not executed, and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is not executed, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, the player wants the player to finish the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot by the time when the game ball can enter the special drawing start port 34a. You can feel the tension.

Further, unlike the present embodiment, the game ball starts the special figure during the change of the special symbol, the execution of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit, or the execution of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. When a configuration that does not avoid acquisition of various counter values for the special drawing lottery (that is, a configuration having a holding function for the special drawing lottery) is adopted even when the ball enters the mouth 34a, the ordinary electric accessory 34b If a plurality of game balls enter the special drawing start port 34a in one opening, a plurality of special drawing lottery will be suspended, regardless of the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode. However, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot may be executed multiple times.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, even when a plurality of game balls enter the special drawing start port 34a in one opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the ordinary electric accessory 34b 1 It is possible to realize the playability in which the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot are executed once for each opening.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, the time required from the start to the end is predetermined regardless of the launch mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after the launch. Since it is configured to have a predetermined length, the length of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not longer than the predetermined length. Therefore, for example, even at the timing when the ordinary electric accessory 34b transitions to the open state due to the length of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot becoming longer than a predetermined length, the special electric power based on the V winning jackpot It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the open / close execution mode has not yet ended. As a result, even at the timing when the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot has not ended, and the game ball has entered the special figure start port 34a. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player, such as the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not executed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, the time required from the start to the end is predetermined regardless of the launch mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after the launch. Since it is configured to have a predetermined length, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot ends early in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode of the general electric opening / closing execution mode, and the special electric opening / closing execution mode ends. Then, the period from that time to the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b becomes long, and it is possible to prevent the game from being delayed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the normal electric accessory 34b is the period from the transition from the open state to the closed state to the transition from the closed state to the open state in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode. The length can be set to a time (135.0 seconds) longer than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (for example, 126.0 seconds). The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

First, unlike the present embodiment, the length of the normal power interval period of the normal power opening / closing execution mode is set to the time required from the start to the end of the special electric power opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot (for example, 126.0). A case where the configuration of the comparative example in which the time is set shorter than the time (for example, 80.0 seconds) is adopted will be described.

First, in the configuration of the comparative example, a case where the game ball enters the special drawing start opening 34a in the first open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode will be described. In this case, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is started, and then the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is started. After that, the first normal electric opening / closing execution mode in the general electric opening / closing execution mode ends, and in the second open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot still continues. .. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the special figure start opening 34a, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot are not newly started. After that, the second normal electric opening / closing execution mode in the general electric opening / closing execution mode ends, and in the third open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot has already ended. When the ball enters the special figure start opening 34a, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is newly started, and then the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is started. That is, in this case, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot are set in the first and third open states of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode. It will be started when the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a, but it will not be started even if the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a in the second open state. ..

Next, in the configuration of the comparative example, a case where the game ball does not enter the special drawing start opening 34a in the first open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode will be described. In this case, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not started, and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not started either. After that, the first normal electric opening / closing execution mode in the general electric opening / closing execution mode ends, and in the second open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is not executed. When the ball enters the special figure start opening 34a, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit is started, and then the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning big hit is started. After that, the second normal electric opening / closing execution mode in the general electric opening / closing execution mode ends, and in the third open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot still continues. .. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the special figure start opening 34a, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot are not newly started. After that, the third normal electric opening / closing execution mode in the general electric opening / closing execution mode ends, and in the fourth open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot has already ended. When the ball enters the special figure start opening 34a, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is newly started, and then the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is started. That is, in this case, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot are set in the second and fourth open states of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode. It will be started when the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a, but it will not be started even if the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a in the third open state. ..

As described above, unlike the present embodiment, a comparative example configuration is adopted in which the length of the normal power opening / closing execution mode is set to a shorter time than the length of the special power opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot. In that case, the start timing of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot during the execution of the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is not fixed, and the flow of the game becomes complicated. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to control the game.

Next, the length of the normal power interval period of the normal power opening / closing execution mode is longer than the time (126.0 seconds) required from the start to the end of the special power opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (135). A case where the configuration of this embodiment set to (0.0 seconds) is adopted will be described.

First, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the case where the game ball enters the special drawing start port 34a in the first open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode will be described. In this case, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is executed, and then the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed. After that, the first normal electric opening / closing execution mode in the general electric opening / closing execution mode ends, and in the second open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot has already ended. When the ball enters the special figure start opening 34a, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is newly started, and then the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is started.

Next, in the configuration of the present embodiment, a case where the game ball does not enter the special drawing start opening 34a in the first open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode will be described. In this case, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed, and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not executed either. After that, the first normal electric opening / closing execution mode in the general electric opening / closing execution mode ends, and in the second open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is not executed. When the ball enters the special figure start opening 34a, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit is started, and then the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning big hit is started.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the length of the normal power interval period of the normal power opening / closing execution mode is the time (126.0 seconds) required from the start to the end of the special power opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. ) Is set to a longer time (135.0 seconds), so that the normal electric accessory 34b is in the open state at the timing when the normal electric accessory 34b is in the open state in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode. Regardless of the number of times, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is not executed or has already ended. Therefore, even though the game ball enters the special figure start opening 34a when the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode, the special electric opening / closing execution mode and V based on the special figure small hit. It does not mean that the special electric open / close execution mode based on the winning jackpot is not started. That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to fix the start timing of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot during the execution of the normal electric opening / closing execution mode. It is possible to prevent the flow of the game from becoming complicated, and by setting the number of times that the normal electric accessory 34b is in the open state during the execution of the normal electric opening / closing execution mode, the execution of the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is executed. It is possible to set the upper limit of the number of times that the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot can be executed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the normal electric accessory 34b is the period from the last transition from the open state to the closed state in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode until the normal electric drawing lottery can be executed. The length of the period can be set to a time (140.0 seconds) longer than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (for example, 126.0 seconds). The reason for adopting this configuration will be explained.

First, unlike the present embodiment, when a configuration is adopted in which the length of the Fuden ending period is set to a shorter time than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric open / close execution mode based on the V prize jackpot. Will be explained. In this configuration, for example, when the Fu-Den lottery is executed after the end of the Fu-Den ending period and the Fu-Den is won, the Fu-Den opening / closing execution mode is executed, and the game is played during the execution of the Fu-Den opening / closing execution mode. There is a possibility that the ball enters the special drawing start port 34a and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit is executed. However, in this configuration, if the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed immediately after the start of the Fuden ending period, the special electric opening / closing based on the V winning jackpot is executed even after the Fuden ending period ends. The execution mode is continued, and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot may be continued even at the timing when the game ball enters the special figure start opening 34a. In this case, even if the game ball enters the special figure start opening 34a, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed, and there is a problem that the situation is disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the length of the Fuden ending period can be set to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot continues even after the end of the normal electric ending period, and it is possible to suppress the situation that is disadvantageous to the player. Can be done.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the length of the Fuden ending period is set to be longer than the length of the Fuden interval period, a series of series realized in the Fuden interval period of the Fuden opening / closing execution mode. It is possible to realize the flow of the game in the same way during the Fuden ending period of the Fuden opening / closing execution mode. As a result, a new special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and a special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot can be executed in both the normal electric interval period and the general electric ending period in the general electric opening / closing execution mode. It becomes possible to realize the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot can be executed in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode in the general electric opening / closing execution mode, the number of times of the normal electric opening / closing execution period included in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is the game. It is a very important factor for people. Therefore, when the player wins the hobby drawing lottery and the hobby opening / closing execution mode is executed, the player is asked how many times the hobby opening / closing execution mode includes the hobby interval period. It is possible to make people interested in and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot can be executed a plurality of times between the start and the end of the general electric opening / closing execution mode, the general electric opening / closing execution mode is started. Whether or not it is a very important factor for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the Fuden opening / closing execution mode is started by winning the Fuzu drawing in the Fuzu lottery, and the Fuden opening / closing execution mode is started. If this is the case, the player can be interested in how many times the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is executed, and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

Further, according to the present embodiment, an effect (FIG. 69, FIG. 70 (A), etc.) suggesting the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is executed. When the player is elected and the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is executed, the player can be interested in the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the general electric opening / closing execution mode. It is possible to improve the interest.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the number of decorative symbols that are variablely displayed and stopped displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 is the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened when the general drawing lottery is won. That is, since it suggests the number of consecutive villas of the V prize jackpot), it is possible to make the player feel that the decorative pattern with as large a number as possible should stop on the effective line L1, and the interest of the game is improved. Can be planned. In addition, when a reach is generated by a decorative pattern with a large number, the player can have a great expectation.

Further, according to the present embodiment, based on the result of the drawing lottery, the opening operation of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is executed at least a plurality of times for each drawing. Then, when one cycle from the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b (time t3 in FIG. 68) to the end of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot (time t10) is defined as one special game time, the ordinary electric accessory is defined as one special game. One special game round based on the object 34b opening at the first timing (time t3 in FIG. 68) is executed, and the normal electric motor is executed at the second timing (time t11 in FIG. 68) after the one special game round is completed. It is controlled so that the accessory 34b is opened. Therefore, it is possible to execute one special game times a plurality of times for one normal figure per one in the normal figure lottery.

Further, according to the present embodiment, a limited period is generated to limit the variable display of the normal symbol so as not to start. More specifically, a predetermined limited period is generated in the period from the first timing to the end of one special game round that occurs after the second timing. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the fluctuation display of the normal symbol from starting before the end of one special game round, the regular drawing lottery is executed even though the one special game round has not ended. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation such as being done. As a result, for example, even though the result of the general drawing lottery is a general drawing that is advantageous to the player, one special game round that has already been executed has not been completed, so that the game ball is a special figure. It is possible to prevent a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, such as the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed even if the ball enters the starting port 34a.

Further, in the present embodiment, since a plurality of types (V prize jackpots A and B) are set for the V prize jackpot, not only the number of V prize jackpots to be won in one normal electric opening / closing execution mode, but also which It is also possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not he / she will win the V prize jackpot of the type.

Further, in the present embodiment, the total required time (2.0 seconds) of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario A for special figure small hits and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario A for V winning big hits. The total time A (128.0 seconds), which is the sum of the total required time (126.0 seconds), is the total required time (2.1 seconds) of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario B for special figure small hits. Since it is the same as the total time B, which is the sum of the total required time (125.9 seconds) of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario B for the V prize jackpot, the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the special figure small hit The opening / closing execution mode is executed, and then the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot is executed, and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario B for the special figure small hit is executed. After that, the timing at which the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot ends is the same as the case where the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario B for the V winning jackpot is executed. As a result, the waiting time from the end of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot to the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b becomes the same. can do.

Further, in the present embodiment, the normal drawing start gate 35 is provided at the position of the lower center of the game board 30, and the general winning opening 32 is at a position where the game ball that has entered the normal drawing start gate 35 can enter. As with a general pachinko machine in which a special drawing start port 34a is provided at the position of the lower center of the game board 30, a prize ball is given to the player and the drawing is performed in the drawing lottery. It is possible to realize a game in which a player is expected to win a prize.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player operates the operation handle 25 so that the game ball enters the normal drawing start gate 35, so that many game balls enter the normal drawing start gate 35. It will be a ball. Then, in the present embodiment, since the game ball that has entered the normal drawing start gate 35 enters the general prize opening 32, it is possible to increase the ratio of the number of prize balls by the general winning opening 32 to the total number of prize balls. can. In other words, it is possible to reduce the prize ratio, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls due to the operation of the prize to the total number of prize balls.

<< 2-7 >> Modification example of the second embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be carried out in various embodiments without departing from the gist thereof, and for example, the following modifications are also possible. In the modified examples described below, the description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as those of the above embodiment will be omitted.

<< 2-7-1 >> Modification 1:
In the above embodiment, by executing a pseudo-Public ending effect that suggests that the Pseudophone opening / closing execution mode ends just before the end of the Fukuden interval period of the Fudoden opening / closing execution mode, the player is once given the Fukuden. After making the person think that the open / close execution mode ends, the continuation effect, which is an effect suggesting that the open / close execution mode does not end, may be executed. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, in addition to the seven types of normal symbols A to G in the above embodiment, the normal symbol H (H per normal figure) is set as the result of the normal symbol type determination in the normal figure lottery. In addition to the seven types of normal electric opening / closing scenarios A to G in the above embodiment, the general electric opening / closing scenario H is prepared. Then, when it is determined to be the normal symbol H in the normal symbol type determination, the normal electric opening / closing scenario H is selected.

In the normal electric opening / closing scenario H, compared to the normal electric opening / closing scenario G (the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened 7 times), from the first closing to the second opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b during the normal electric opening / closing processing period. The only difference is in the length of the closing period (first normal power interval period), and the other controls are the same as in the normal power opening / closing scenario G. Specifically, in the above-mentioned normal power opening / closing scenario G, the length of all the normal power interval periods including the first normal power interval period is set to 135.0 seconds, whereas the normal power opening / closing scenario H Then, the length of the first normal power interval period is set to 145.0 seconds, which is 10.0 seconds longer than the other normal power interval periods.

In this modification, when the normal drawing H is won in the normal drawing lottery, the decorative symbol is "" in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, as in the case of winning the general drawing A. It stops in a display mode such as "111".

The player who recognizes the stop mode of this decorative symbol opens the normal electric accessory 34b once in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode executed based on the current normal drawing hit, and executes the normal electric opening / closing execution mode. It is recognized that the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is executed once.

After that, it is suggested that the normal power opening / closing execution mode ends in 5 seconds from 10 seconds before the end of the first normal power opening / closing execution mode of the normal power opening / closing execution mode based on the normal power opening / closing scenario H to 5 seconds before the end. Execute a pseudo-fuden ending production that is a production. The content of the pseudo-Public ending effect is the content of the normal Practicing ending effect (FIG. 70 (B)), which is executed in 5 seconds from 5 seconds before the end of the Pseudo-Den ending period described in the above embodiment to the end. )) Is the same.

FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example. In this modification, as a pseudo-Public ending effect, as shown in FIG. 92 (A), a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and a character string such as "Have you enjoyed it? See you again !!" Is displayed. While the pseudo-Public ending effect is being executed, the right-handed instruction image GD2 is an image in which a character string such as "right-handed" and a right-pointing arrow are combined in the upper right area of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Is displayed. The right-handed instruction image GD2 has a size smaller than that of the right-handed instruction image GD1 shown in FIG. 70 (A), and is difficult for the player to recognize.

The player who recognizes this pseudo-Public ending effect has only one execution of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot in this Fudoden opening / closing execution mode, and the Fudoden opening / closing execution mode ends. Recognize that.

After that, in 5 seconds from 5 seconds before the end of the first normal electric interval period to the end, a continuous effect, which is an effect suggesting that the normal electric open / close execution mode is continued without ending, is executed. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 92 (B), as a continuous effect, a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and a character string such as "I was surprised !? Is displayed. Then, during the execution of this continuous effect, the right-handed instruction image GD1 larger than the right-handed instruction image GD2 shown in FIG. 92A is displayed in the upper right area of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Output a voice such as "Right-handed!" As a result, the player can recognize that the normal electric opening / closing execution mode continues without ending, and also recognizes that the state should be "right-handed".

As described above, in this modification, after executing the pseudo-Public ending effect, which is an effect suggesting that the normal-electric opening / closing execution mode ends, the normal-electric opening / closing execution mode continues without ending. Since the continuous effect, which is a suggestive effect, is executed, after giving the player a disappointment that the normal electric opening / closing execution mode ends, the fact is that the normal electric opening / closing execution mode continues without ending. It is possible to have great joy and improve the interest of the game.

In this modification, the decorative symbol is stopped in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 in a display mode such as "111", and then the pseudo-normal ending effect is produced in the first normal electric interval period. However, the period of the normal electric interval for executing the pseudo-general ending effect is not limited to the first time. For example, as a configuration in which the decorative symbol is stopped in the display mode such as "333" in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and then the pseudo-normal ending effect is executed in the third normal electric interval period. May be good. That is, the pseudo-normal ending effect may be executed in any of the second and subsequent normal electric interval periods. Further, for example, it may be configured to execute a pseudo-Public ending effect every time during the Pulden interval period. Even with such a configuration, after giving the player a disappointment that the normal power opening / closing execution mode ends, in fact, the normal power opening / closing execution mode continues without ending, which makes the player even more happy. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<< 2-7-2 >> Modification 2:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the control mode of the final round of the special power switch processing period in the special power switch execution mode based on the V prize is set to a mode different from the control mode of the other rounds, and in the final round. Unless the game ball with the maximum number of winning balls is entered into the second big winning opening 58a and the final round is finished early, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the next V winning big hit will not be executed. It may be configured to end up. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

In this modification, only the round game of the final round (16th round) of the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot is configured so that the second special electric accessory 58b is opened multiple times, and 1 in the final round. The opening time of each time is 0.5 seconds, the closing time until the next opening is 1.0 seconds, the maximum opening time is 30.0 seconds, the maximum number of balls entered is 10, and the special electric ending period is 0.0 seconds. It is set. Therefore, until the 10 game balls enter the second large winning opening 58a in the final round, the final round ends unless the total opening time of the second special electric accessory 58b reaches the maximum opening time. do not do. Specifically, the final round continues until the opening for 0.5 seconds reaches 60 times and the closing for 1.0 seconds reaches 59 times, and the time required for the final round is 89.0 seconds at the maximum. On the other hand, since the maximum number of balls entered in the final round is set to 10, the final round ends when 10 game balls enter the second large winning opening 58a, and the special electric opening / closing execution mode is also set. finish. That is, in the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot of this modification, the required time per round is 5 from the first round to the fifteenth round regardless of the launch mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after the launch. Although it is fixed at 0.0 seconds, only in the 16th round, the time required for one round changes significantly depending on the launch mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after launch. Then, the required time of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot of this modification changes from about 130 seconds to a maximum of 209.5 seconds.

Also in this modification, as in the above embodiment, the normal electric interval period is 135.0 seconds, and the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize must be completed by the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b. If this happens, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the next V prize will not be executed, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, in the final round of the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot, a predetermined number (maximum number of winning balls) of game balls are entered into the second major winning opening 58a within a predetermined time. Execute a ball entry promotion effect, which is an effect that encourages the player to do so.

FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 93 (A), a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 as a ball entry promotion effect, and "Put the ball in time !!" Along with displaying a character string such as "Do your best !!", the effect of displaying the remaining time of the Fuden interval period is executed.

Then, if the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize can be terminated by the end of the normal electric interval period, that is, by the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the next V prize is awarded. An effect suggesting that the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the execution is executed is executed. Specifically, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 93 (B), a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and a character string such as "Congratulations! Is displayed.

On the other hand, if the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize cannot be terminated by the end of the normal electric interval period, that is, by the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the next V prize is awarded. The extinction effect that suggests that the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on is no longer executed is executed. Specifically, in this modification, as an extinction effect, as shown in FIG. 93 (C), a sad female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and "I'm sorry. Next big hit. Has disappeared .. "is displayed. Then, the displayed right-handed instruction image GD1 is changed to a smaller right-handed instruction image GD2.

As described above, in this modification, in the final round of the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot, the maximum number of game balls to be entered is set to the second major winning opening 58a by the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b. Since the game of entering the ball can be provided to the player, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Then, since the time required for the final round becomes long, there is a possibility that the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the next V winning jackpot will not be executed. It is possible to have a feeling of impatience that the final round should be completed by the time it is opened, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in this modification, in the final round of the special electric opening / closing scenario A for the V prize jackpot, a ball entry promotion effect is an effect of encouraging a predetermined number of game balls to enter the second large prize opening 58a within a predetermined time. Is executed, so that a predetermined number of game balls are inserted into the second large winning opening 58a within a predetermined time, so that the special electric opening / closing execution mode is terminated by the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b. It is possible to make the player understand the sexuality and to increase the motivation of the player to put a predetermined number of game balls into the second large winning opening 58a within a predetermined time.

Further, in this modification, if the special electric opening / closing execution mode is not terminated by the next opening of the normal electric accessory 34b, the extinction effect is executed, so that the player can see the normal electric accessory 34b until the next opening. Can be made to recognize that the special electric opening / closing execution mode has not ended, and can also recognize that the subsequent game flow changes due to the fact that the special electric opening / closing execution mode has not ended.

Further, in this modification, the special electric opening / closing scenario A (16 rounds, length change) for the V winning jackpot has a larger number of rounds than the special electric opening / closing scenario B (12 rounds, fixed length) for the V winning jackpot. On the other hand, there is also a risk that the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the next V winning jackpot will not be executed due to the longer time required for the final round. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel both happiness and tension, such as taking risks in exchange for many benefits (many rounds), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

In this modification, the required time is not fixed only for the final round, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and the required time is not fixed only for a specific round (for example, an odd number of rounds), or the required time for all rounds is required. The time may not be fixed. That is, the configuration may be such that the total required time of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not fixed. Even with such a configuration, there is a possibility that the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the next V winning jackpot will not be executed because the entire required time of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot becomes long. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel nervous and to improve the interest of the game.

<< 2-7-3 >> Modification 3:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the time required for each round game constituting the special electric open / close processing period of the special electric open / close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is fixed by adopting the configuration of the present modification described below. It may be configured to be changed. Hereinafter, the configuration of this modification will be described.

In this modification, in the special electric opening / closing execution scenario for the V prize jackpot, the special electric opening period is 12.0 seconds, the number of rounds is 10, the number of times of opening the second special electric accessory 58b in one round is one, and the maximum opening time. Is set to 0.1 seconds, the maximum number of balls entered is 5, the special electric interval period is set to 12.0 seconds, and the special electric ending period is set to 5.0 seconds. In this modification, a plurality of protrusions are provided on the upper surface of the second special electric accessory 58b as a speed reducing means for reducing the passing speed of the game ball, and the game reaches the second special electric accessory 58b. The ball temporarily stays on the upper surface of the second special electric accessory 58b until it passes through the second special electric accessory 58b.

Then, in a situation where the game ball is launched toward the flow passage 301 at intervals of 0.6 seconds and the launched game ball reaches the second special electric accessory 58b, the second special electric accessory 58b is 5 When the closed state is maintained for 0.0 seconds or more, a maximum of about eight game balls are configured to stay on the upper surface of the second special electric accessory 58b during the closed state. Then, when the second special electric accessory 58b is opened, about eight game balls staying on the upper surface of the second special electric accessory 58b enter the second special winning opening 58a. Although the maximum number of game balls that can be entered into the second prize opening 58a is set to 5, the maximum number of game balls is already opened before it is detected that the game balls have entered the second prize opening 58a. Since 0.1 seconds of time have passed, the second special electric accessory 58b has the maximum number of balls to be entered into the second large winning opening 58a regardless of whether or not the number of balls to be entered has reached the maximum number of balls. , Closed. Therefore, the time required for one round is fixed at 0.1 seconds regardless of the launch mode of the game ball and the behavior of the launched game ball.

As a result, the time required for the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing execution scenario for the V prize jackpot in this modification is 12.0 seconds (special electric opening period) + 0.1 seconds (1 round) x 10 (number of rounds) +12. It is 0.0 seconds (special electric interval period) x 9 (number of intervals) + 5.0 seconds (special electric ending period), and is fixed at 126.0 seconds.

Even with such a configuration, the time required for the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot can be fixed, as in the above embodiment.

<< 2-7-4 >> Modification 4:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, even when the time required for all the round games constituting the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is the maximum opening time, the normal electric motor in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode The special electric opening / closing execution mode may be reliably terminated by the next opening of the accessory 34b. Hereinafter, the configuration of this modification will be described.

In this modification, only one type of special electric opening / closing scenario for V prize jackpot is set. In the special electric opening / closing scenario, the special electric opening period is 5.0 seconds, the number of rounds is 16, and the second special electric combination in one round. The number of times the object 58b is opened is set to 1, the maximum opening time is set to 20.0 seconds, the maximum number of balls entered is 10, the special electric interval period is 5.0 seconds, and the special electric ending period is 5.0 seconds.

Therefore, the maximum required time for each round game in this modification is 20.0 seconds, and the maximum required time for the entire special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing execution mode is 5.0 seconds (special electric opening period) +20. 0.0 seconds (1 round) x 16 (number of rounds) + 5.0 seconds (special electric interval period) x 15 (number of intervals) + 5.0 seconds (special electric ending period), which is 405.0 seconds.

Next, the shortest required time for each round game in this modification will be described. Also in this modification, the shortest firing interval of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, so the shortest time required for 10 game balls to enter the second prize opening 58a is 6.0 seconds. The shortest time required for each round game is about 6.0 seconds. As a result, the shortest required time for the entire special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario is 5.0 seconds (special electric opening period) + about 6.0 seconds (1 round) x 16 (number of rounds) + 5.0. Seconds (special electric interval period) x 15 (number of intervals) + 5.0 seconds (special electric ending period), which is about 181.0 seconds.

In this modification, the normal power interval period is set to 415.0 seconds and the normal power ending period is set to 420.0 seconds in each normal power opening / closing scenario, and the special power opening / closing based on the special figure small hit. The execution mode ends in about 2.0 seconds. Therefore, in this modification, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed after the first opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode, and is included in the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. Even if the time required for all round games is the longest of 20.0 seconds, the special electric opening / closing execution mode is set by the second opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the general electric opening / closing execution mode. It will definitely end.

In other words, according to this modification, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is executed after the first opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, and all the round games included in the special electric opening / closing execution mode are required. Even when the maximum time is 20.0 seconds, it is possible to realize the pachinko machine 10 capable of opening the ordinary electric accessory 34b after the end of the special electric opening / closing execution mode. As a result, regardless of the length of time required for the multiple round games included in the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is surely executed multiple times. It is possible to make it.

<< 2-7-5 >> Modification 5:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, during the execution of the round game during the special electric opening / closing processing period of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, the symbol display device 41 displays information corresponding to the number of rounds of the round game being executed. It may be configured to be displayed on the display surface 41a of. Specifically, for example, during the period in which the round game of the first round is being executed, a character string such as "It is in the first round!" May be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. ..

Further, in the special electric opening / closing processing period of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, information corresponding to the number of remaining round games may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, for example, during the period in which the first round round game is being executed in the special electric opening / closing execution mode configured by the 16 round round games, the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 has "remaining 15". A character string such as "times" is displayed, and during the period in which the round game of the 15th round is being executed, the character string such as "one remaining time" is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the 16th round (final). During the period in which the round game of (round) is being executed, a character string such as "last!" May be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of round games executed in the special electric opening / closing execution mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the games.

Further, a specific image may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 at the end of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. Specifically, for example, in the special electric ending period of the special electric opening / closing execution mode, as a specific image, an image in which a specific character (for example, a whale character) speaks a line such as "Have you enjoyed it? See you again!" Is displayed as a pattern. It may be configured to be displayed on the display surface 41a of the device 41. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special electric opening / closing execution mode has ended, and at the same time, give a sense of fulfillment to the execution of the special electric opening / closing execution mode and motivation for the subsequent game. can do.

Further, at the end of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, information regarding the profit acquired by the player during the execution of the special electric opening / closing execution mode may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, for example, during the special electric ending period of the special electric opening / closing execution mode, information regarding the number of game balls paid out as prize balls during the execution of the special electric opening / closing execution mode (related to the number of game balls acquired by the player). Information) may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. With such a configuration, the player can be made to grasp the profit gained by executing the special electric opening / closing execution mode, and at the same time, a sense of fulfillment for the execution of the special electric opening / closing execution mode and the subsequent feeling of fulfillment. Can give motivation to the game.

Further, during the execution of the round game in the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and then the decorative symbol being variablely displayed is stopped in a predetermined display mode. It may be configured to be displayed. Specifically, for example, immediately after winning a winning figure in the regular drawing lottery, the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened due to winning the winning figure is not suggested to the player, and then after that. During the execution of the round game of the final round of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and after the special electric opening / closing execution mode is completed, the ordinary electric accessory 34b When the display is to be opened (in the case of consecutive villas), for example, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode in which the same decorative symbol such as "777" is aligned, while the end of the special electric opening / closing execution mode. If the ordinary electric accessory 34b is not opened later (when the villa is not opened), the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed in a display mode such as "326" in which the same decorative symbol is not aligned. According to such a configuration, since the variable display of the decorative symbol is started during the execution of the round game, the player can be surprised and the display mode when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is possible to give the player a great expectation as to what the (stop mode) will be.

<< 2-7-6 >> Modification 6:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, after the end of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (time t10 in FIG. 68), the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the general electric opening / closing execution mode (time t11). ), If the player has not performed "right-handed", a special notice (violently) that the player should hit right-handed is stronger than the normal right-handed notification process executed in other periods. It may be configured to execute the right-handed notification process. Hereinafter, the configuration of this modification will be described.

Also in this modification, as in the above embodiment, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is short, so that the player confirms that the ordinary electric accessory 34b has been opened before the game ball. When the game ball reaches the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the ordinary electric accessory 34b is already closed, and the special start port 34a provided below the ordinary electric accessory 34b is provided. The game ball cannot be put into the ball. Then, since the game ball did not enter the special figure start port 34a, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed, and as a result, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not executed. It will be a disadvantageous situation for the person.

Therefore, in this modification, "right-handed" is performed in the period from the end of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot to the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode. Whether or not it is determined, and if it is determined that "right-handed" has not been performed, a special right-handed notification process is executed. Specifically, in the special right-handed notification process, a character larger than the right-handed instruction image GD1 shown in FIG. 70 (A) and a right-handed arrow instruction image are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. A voice such as "Please hit right" is output from the speaker 46 at the maximum volume.

It should be noted that various configurations can be adopted as the configuration for determining whether or not "right-handed" is performed. For example, in this modification, a sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is provided near the entrance of the flow passage 301, and the interval at which the passage of the game ball is detected by the sensor is a predetermined interval (for example, 2.0 seconds). ) By determining whether or not it is the above, it is determined whether or not "right-handed" is performed. Then, when it is determined that the interval at which the passage of the game ball is detected by the sensor is equal to or longer than the predetermined interval, it is determined that "right-handed" is not performed, while the interval is less than the predetermined interval. If it is determined, it is determined that "right-handed" is being performed.

As described above, in this modification, in the period from the end of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot to the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening / closing execution mode, "right-handed". If it is determined that "right-handed" is not performed, the special right-handed notification process is executed, so that the game ball does not enter the special figure start opening 34a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming a disadvantageous situation in which the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed, and as a result, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not executed either. can.

It should be noted that the notification mode of the special right-handed notification process is a mode in which the notification mode is stronger (violently) than the notification mode of the normal right-handed notification process, that is, a notification mode in which the player can more easily recognize that the player should strike right. , The notification mode is not limited to the above. For example, the right-handed instruction image displayed in the special right-handed notification process may be repeatedly enlarged and reduced, or, for example, the right-handed instruction image may emit rainbow colors and blink. May be good.

<< 2-7-7 >> Modification 7:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the special figure lottery result executed when the game ball enters the special figure start opening 34a may include a special figure deviation. According to such a configuration, even if the player wins the game in the lottery, the game ball is executed in the open / close execution mode, and the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a, the special figure small hit is obtained thereafter. Since there is a possibility that the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric power opening / closing execution mode is not executed, the player can be interested in the result of the special drawing lottery, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<< 2-7-8 >> Modification 8:
In the general electric winning device 34 of the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a special electric starting port may be provided instead of the special drawing starting port 34a. When a game ball enters the special electric start port provided in place of the special figure start port 34a, the special electric opening / closing execution mode in which the first special electric accessory 57b opens / closes without performing the above-mentioned special figure lottery. Is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the control by omitting the counter and the table for the special drawing lottery, and it is possible to obtain the same effect as the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications.

<< 2-7-9 >> Modification 9:
In the general electric winning device 34 of the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, a V winning opening is provided instead of the special drawing start opening 34a, and the first special electric winning device 57 (first large winning opening 57a, first special electric motor combination). The object 57b and the V winning opening 57av) may be omitted. According to such a configuration, if the game ball enters the Fuzu start gate 35 and wins the Fuzu lottery, the Fuden opening / closing execution mode is executed. Then, if the game ball enters the V winning opening while the normal electric accessory 34b is being opened while the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is being executed, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed. After that, if the normal electric accessory 34b is opened again and the game ball enters the V winning opening even after the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is terminated. The special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot will be executed again. That is, according to such a configuration, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed a plurality of times in one normal drawing without going through the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit in the above embodiment. It is possible to realize the configuration.

In addition, as in this modification, in the configuration where the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed, or in the configuration where the execution period of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is very short, the normal electric opening / closing execution mode If the time required from the start to the end of the V prize jackpot can be set to a longer time than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is usually used. It is possible to realize a configuration that can be executed multiple times during the execution of the electric switch execution mode.

<< 2-7-10 >> Modification 10:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, all the results of the special figure lottery executed when the game ball enters the special figure start port 34a are set to the special figure jackpot, and the first special electric winning device is set. 57 (first large winning opening 57a, first special electric accessory 57b, V winning opening 57av) may be omitted. According to such a configuration, if the game ball enters the Fuzu start gate 35 and wins the Fuzu lottery, the Fuden opening / closing execution mode is executed. Then, if the game ball enters the special figure start opening 34a while the normal electric accessory 34b is being opened while the normal electric opening / closing execution mode is being executed, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure jackpot is executed. In the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure jackpot, the opening / closing process of the second special electric accessory 58b is executed. After that, even after the end of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure jackpot, the normal electric opening / closing execution mode continues, the normal electric accessory 34b is opened again, and the game ball enters the special drawing start opening 34a. If so, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure jackpot will be executed again. That is, according to such a configuration, the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure big hit is executed a plurality of times in one normal drawing without going through the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit in the above embodiment. It is possible to realize the configuration.

It should be noted that not all of the results of the special figure lottery may be set as the special figure jackpot, and the special figure jackpot may be set as a part of the result of the special figure lottery. For example, 50% of the result of the special drawing lottery may be set to the special drawing jackpot, and the remaining 50% may be set to be out of the special drawing. According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in the result of the special drawing lottery, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<< 2-7-11 >> Modification 11:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the configuration may be provided with a high-probability mode (so-called probabilistic state) in which the probability of winning the special figure jackpot in the special figure lottery is high. Specifically, for example, the configuration is such that the start of the high-probability mode as a specific profit is determined based on the fact that the game ball enters the V winning opening 57av, which is advantageous to the player after the start of the high-probability mode. As a configuration (number-cutting probability change machine, ST (special time) machine) that terminates the high probability mode when a predetermined end condition that the special figure lottery in the high probability mode is executed multiple times (for example, 100 times) is satisfied. May be good.

Further, in this configuration, the information corresponding to the remaining number of times of the special figure lottery executed in the high probability mode may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, for example, when the remaining number of times of the special figure lottery executed in the high probability mode is 15, a character string such as "remaining 15 times" is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. During the period in which the special symbol is fluctuating in the final special symbol lottery executed in the high probability mode, a character string such as "last!" May be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of special drawing lottery executed in the high probability mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a specific image may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 at the end of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. Specifically, for example, in the special electric ending period of the special electric opening / closing execution mode, as a specific image, an image in which a specific character (for example, a whale character) speaks a line such as "Have you enjoyed it? See you again!" Is displayed as a pattern. It may be configured to be displayed on the display surface 41a of the device 41. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special electric opening / closing execution mode has ended, and at the same time, give a sense of fulfillment to the execution of the special electric opening / closing execution mode and motivation for the subsequent game. can do.

Further, at the end of the high-probability mode, the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 may display information on the profit acquired by the player during the execution of the high-probability mode. Specifically, for example, the number of times the special figure jackpot was won without shifting from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode (so-called number of consecutive villas), and the number of game balls paid out as prize balls during the consecutive villas. Information (information on the number of game balls acquired by the player) may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. According to such a configuration, the player can be made to grasp the profit gained by executing the high-probability mode, and at the same time, a sense of fulfillment for the execution of the high-probability mode and the subsequent game. Can motivate you.

Further, it may be configured to determine one specific profit from a plurality of types of specific profits (for example, specific profits A and B). Specifically, for example, in addition to the high-probability mode, the above-mentioned high-frequency support mode (so-called electric support state) is also provided, and the specific profit A starts the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. , High probability mode and high frequency support mode are configured to end when 100 special figure lottery is executed without winning the special figure jackpot, while the specific profit B is the high probability mode. And the high frequency support mode is started, the high probability mode ends when 100 special figure lottery is executed without winning the special figure jackpot, and the high probability support mode does not win the special figure jackpot. It may be configured to end when the special drawing lottery is executed 30 times. Further, for example, the specific profit A starts the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and in both the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the special figure lottery is performed 100 times without winning the special figure jackpot. The configuration is such that it ends when it is executed, while the specific profit B is when the special figure lottery is executed 30 times without winning the special figure jackpot in both the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. It may be configured to end in. According to such a configuration, the player is not only interested in whether or not a specific benefit is granted, but if a specific benefit is granted, what kind of specific benefit is granted. It can make you interested in things like that.

Further, during the execution of the special symbol lottery in the high probability mode (during the fluctuation of the special symbol), the decorative symbol is variablely displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and then the decorative symbol being variablely displayed is displayed in a predetermined display mode. It may be configured to stop and display with. Specifically, for example, during the execution of the special symbol lottery in the high probability mode, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the special symbol jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. If this is the case, for example, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode in which the same decorative symbol is aligned, such as "777". On the other hand, if the special figure jackpot is not won in the special figure lottery, For example, the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed in a display mode such as "326" in which the same decorative symbol is not aligned. According to such a configuration, since the variable display of the decorative symbol is started during the execution of the special symbol lottery in the high probability mode, what is the display mode (stop mode) when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed? It is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation.

Further, based on the result of the drawing lottery, the opening operation of the ordinary electric accessory 34b may be executed at least a plurality of times for each drawing.

Further, when one cycle from the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b to the end of the high probability mode is defined as one special game, one special game based on the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b at the first timing is performed. It may be configured to be executed and controlled so that the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened at the second timing after the one special game round is completed.

Further, it may be configured to limit the variable display of the normal symbol so as not to start. More specifically, a predetermined limited period may be generated in the period from the first timing to the end of one special game that occurs after the second timing.

Further, the special figure lottery in the high probability mode can be changed from the shortest execution time of the first special figure fluctuation time (for example, 2 seconds) to the longest execution time of the second special figure fluctuation time (for example, 180 seconds) depending on the game state. Yes, even if a plurality of special figure lottery times in the high probability mode of one special game time executed after the first timing are all executed in the second special figure fluctuation time, the one special game time It may be configured so that the ordinary electric accessory 34b can be opened after the end.

As described above, according to the present modification, since the high probability mode is provided, it is possible to improve the interest of the game more than the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications.

<< 3 >> Third embodiment:
<< 3-1 >> Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 94 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as the third embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a voice emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. Illuminations are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect of the effect by lighting or blinking at each game round performed by the pachinko machine 10, when a big hit is won, when a reach occurs, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two plate glasses is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. The details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls rented from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball stored in the upper plate 20 is supplied to the game ball launch mechanism included in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launch mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores the game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged to the outside from the lower plate 21.

An effect operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game effect reflecting the operation.

An operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “right side”). When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and an operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c that detects the rotation operation amount of the above by the change of the electric resistance is provided. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes according to the rotation operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball launch button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “left side”). When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined firing intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the player's operation handle 25. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the front view of the game board and flows down to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can make a so-called "right-handed". The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26 to launch the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26. Can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 95 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing. For example, a seal is attached to a place that can be opened and closed, and the characters such as "open" appear when the board box is opened.

The second control unit 52 includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90. The design display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays a design or an image for directing.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The launch control device 80 launches a game ball having a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player when an instruction to launch the game ball is input from the main control device 60. Controls the ball launch mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a slope connected below the tank 54 and gently inclined so that the game balls flow to the downstream side. The game balls are supplied from the tank rail 55, the case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, and the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power supply switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies the electric power required for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85. By turning the power switch 88 on and off, the supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and the non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 96 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding the game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicular to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a first variable winning device 36. Further, a delay mechanism 202 and a V winning mechanism 210 are arranged on the right side of the game board 30 when viewed from the front. The delay mechanism 202 and the V winning mechanism 210 will be described in detail later.

Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 has a special figure unit 37, a normal figure unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

As shown in the figure, the general winning opening 32 is an entry opening member that forms an entry opening into which a game ball can enter, and a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 95).

The first starting port 33 is an entry port member that forms an entry port into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is an entry port member that forms an entry port into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the lower right side of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

As shown in the figure, the through gate 35 is provided in the flow path 203 of the delay mechanism 202. The through gate 35 is provided with a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to execute a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric service is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric service open state in which the electric service is opened in a predetermined mode. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second starting port 34. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34. In this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The first variable winning device 36 includes a first large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and also includes a first opening / closing door 36b for opening and closing the first large winning opening 36a. The first opening / closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the first large winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60, when a big hit or a small hit is won and the opening / closing execution mode is entered, the first opening / closing door 36b is a game ball according to a preset opening / closing scenario. The state changes between the open state and the closed state where the prize can be won. The opening / closing execution mode is a mode in which the player shifts to a big hit or a small hit as a result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by entering the ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. In this mode, the first opening / closing door 36b or the second opening / closing door 212b, which will be described later, repeats an open state and a closed state. That is, as a result of the winning lottery based on the entry into the first starting port 33, if a big hit or a small hit is won, the opening / closing that enables entry into the first large winning opening 36a or the second opening / closing door 212b. Move to execution mode. Similarly, even if a big hit or a small hit is won as a result of a winning lottery based on the entry into the second starting opening 34, the opening / closing that allows entry into the first large winning opening 36a or the second opening / closing door 212b. Move to the execution mode. In the present embodiment, when one game ball enters the first large winning opening 36a of the first variable winning device 36, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

Here, the delay mechanism 202 and the V winning mechanism 210 will be described.

FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the delay mechanism 202 and the V winning mechanism 210. As can be seen from FIG. 96, the delay mechanism 202 and the V winning mechanism 210 are arranged on the right side of the front view of the game area PA, and the player operates the operation handle 25 to distribute the game ball on the right side of the game area PA. The game ball is configured to always circulate through the delay mechanism 202 when it is made to flow.

As shown in FIG. 97, the delay mechanism 202 includes a flow path 203. The flow path 203 communicates with the V winning mechanism 210, and the game ball flowing into the flow path 203 is guided to the V winning mechanism 210. The flow path 203 has a shape meandering to the left and right with respect to the game board 30, and the time until the game ball circulating on the right side of the game area PA reaches the V winning mechanism 210 is nailed to the right side of the game board 30. It has a function of delaying compared with a general game machine in which is arranged. The delay mechanism 202 is not limited to the meandering flow path, and any other configuration is adopted as long as it has a function of delaying the arrival of the game ball circulating on the right side of the game area PA to the V winning mechanism 210. You may. For example, a croon having an opening at the bottom may be adopted, or a configuration is adopted in which the distribution of the game ball is temporarily stopped by a dynamic accessory and the distribution of the game ball is restarted after a certain period of time. May be good.

A detection sensor 205 for detecting that a game ball has circulated is arranged in the flow path 203. It is arranged to detect the distribution mode of the game ball circulating on the right side of the game board 30. In other words, the detection sensor 205 detects the mode of the game ball launch operation by the player operating the operation handle 25 or the game ball launch button 26. The content of the detection process of the distribution mode of the game ball using the detection sensor 205 will be described later.

As described above, the through gate 35 is arranged in the flow path 203. As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the flow path 203 is formed so that a game ball flowing through the flow path 203 may or may not pass through the through gate 35.

The V winning mechanism 210 includes a second variable winning device 212, a detection sensor 213, a flow path 214, a flow path 215, a flow path 216, and a flow path 217. The second variable winning device 212 includes a second large winning opening 212a and a second opening / closing door 212b for opening and closing the second large winning opening 212a. Similar to the first opening / closing door 36b described above, the second opening / closing door 212b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the second large winning opening 212a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60, when a big hit or a small hit is won and the opening / closing execution mode is entered, the second opening / closing door 212b is a game ball according to a preset opening / closing scenario. Changes between the open state and the closed state where a prize can be won.

As shown in the figure, the game ball circulating through the flow path 203 of the delay mechanism 202 enters the second large winning opening 212a when the second opening / closing door 212b is in the open state at the timing when the V winning mechanism 210 is reached. It spheres and circulates in the flow path 214. On the other hand, when the second opening / closing door 212b is closed at the timing when the game ball reaches the V winning mechanism 210, the game ball does not enter the second large winning opening 212a and flows out from the flow path 203. The area on the right side of the game area PA flows further downward.

The detection sensor 213 is a sensor that detects that a game ball has entered the second large winning opening 212a. In the present embodiment, when one game ball enters the second large winning opening 212a of the second variable winning device 212, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

The flow path 214 branches into a flow path 215, a flow path 216, and a flow path 217 on the downstream side. A first distribution valve 218 and a second distribution valve 219 are arranged on the flow path 214, and a combination of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 in an open / closed state (hereinafter referred to as a combination of open / closed states). The game ball flowing through the flow path 214 by the opening / closing pattern) is distributed to any of the flow paths 215, the flow path 216, and the flow path 217. Specifically, when the first distribution valve 218 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing through the flow path 214 is distributed to the flow path 215. When the first distribution valve 218 is in the open state and the second distribution valve 219 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing through the flow path 214 is distributed to the flow path 216. When the first distribution valve 218 is in the open state and the second distribution valve 219 is in the open state, the game ball flowing through the flow path 214 is distributed to the flow path 217. The opening / closing pattern of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 corresponds to the type of big hit or small hit that triggered the opening of the second opening / closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212. In the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in the winning lottery, the second opening / closing door 212b opens the second opening / closing door 212b during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of small hits are provided. Then, the opening / closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set in association with each other for each type of small hit. The correspondence between the type of small hit and the opening / closing pattern of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 will be described later.

The flow path 215 guides the game ball to the crune 220 included in the V winning mechanism 210. The Kroon 220 has three first V winning openings V1 and three outlets 223. Regardless of which of the three first V winning openings V1 the game ball enters, the pachinko machine 10 executes the same process. That is, the three channels communicating with the inside of the pachinko machine 10 from each of the three first V winning openings V1 arranged on the crune 220 internally join one channel or the winning opening. The game ball flowing out of the flow path 215 turns the concave surface provided in the croon 220, and then enters either the third first V winning opening V1 or the three discharging ports 223.

The flow path 216 guides the game ball to the discharge port 225. The flow path 217 guides the game ball to the second V winning opening V2 included in the V winning mechanism 210.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first V winning opening V1 or the second V winning opening V2, the jackpot is determined. More specifically, during the period in which the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the game ball enters the second large winning opening 212a at the timing when the second opening / closing door 212b is opened, and then the game ball is the first. When the ball enters the 1V winning opening V1 or the 2nd V winning opening V2, the big hit is confirmed. Then, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the opening / closing execution mode is executed again as a privilege for the confirmed jackpot. The type of jackpot that is determined when a game ball enters the 1st V winning opening V1 or the 2nd V winning opening V2 will be described later. The delay mechanism 202 and the V winning mechanism 210 have been described above.

The explanation is returned to FIG. An out opening 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and a ball is entered into the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the first variable winning device 36, or the second variable winning device 212. The game ball that has not been played is discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. The first symbol display unit 37a is a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. , The variable display of the first symbol is performed. When the lottery is completed, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to display the stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying the second symbol. The second symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display unit 37b is used as a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. , The second symbol is changed and displayed. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display to display the stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b to the stop display is also referred to as the variable time. Call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a to the stop display is also referred to as the first variable time, and is displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first hold display unit 37c and a second hold display unit 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won a prize in the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of holds of the first start port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won a prize in the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second hold display unit 37d displays the number of holds of the second start port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on.

The normal drawing unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, the normal drawing unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode as the display mode of the light emitting display. When the electric accessory opening lottery is completed, the normal drawing unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode, or displays corresponding to the number of round games. The round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the first variable winning device 36 or the second variable winning device 212. This is a game in which the first opening / closing door 36b or the second opening / closing door 212b is continuously opened until one of the conditions is satisfied. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the open / close execution mode is started, and ends when the open / close execution mode ends and a new game round starts.

The special figure unit 37, the normal figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being composed of a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp, and for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. It may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery result, such as a CRT or a dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The symbol display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. conduct. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the display effect triggered by entering the ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, but is in the open / close execution mode that shifts when a big hit (or a small hit) is won. It also performs display effects such as. Hereinafter, the details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram showing a liquid crystal display symbol and a display surface 41a that are variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 98A is an explanatory diagram showing a liquid crystal display symbol that is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in FIG. 98 (a), the liquid crystal display symbol indicating the numbers 1 to 8 is variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. As the liquid crystal display symbol that is variablely displayed, a liquid crystal display symbol in which a pattern such as a character is attached to each liquid crystal symbol indicating the numbers 1 to 8 may be adopted.

FIG. 98B is an explanatory diagram showing a display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the liquid crystal symbols of the numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 98 (a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row is periodically arranged from top to bottom or from top to bottom. A variable display that scrolls from bottom to top is performed. As shown in FIG. 98 (b), after the variable display by scrolling, one liquid crystal display symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L. Specifically, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display in which the liquid crystal symbols of the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity is started. Then, each scrolling symbol switches from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined liquid crystal symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Will be. When the variable display of the liquid crystal display ends and the display is stopped, and the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit, a predetermined combination of liquid crystal symbols is effective. It is formed on the line L. For example, the same combination of liquid crystal symbols is formed on the effective line L. The mode of variable display of the liquid crystal display in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned mode, and the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of the liquid crystal symbol in the symbol row, and each. Various modes can be adopted as the mode of variable display of the symbols such as the number of symbols in the symbol row.

Here, "game times" means from the start of the variation display of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to the end of the variation display and the stop display, until the stop display ends. That is, the lottery result of the winning lottery about the random number value (also called special information) acquired based on the entry of the game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 is given to the player. It is one unit of the notification process. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display unit is used for each game. After the segment display is variablely displayed on either 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device is used for each game. In 41, after the predetermined symbol string is variablely displayed, the symbol string is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game is also referred to as a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the predetermined lottery result, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), the first reserved display area Ds1 and the second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first hold display area Ds1, the number of holds based on the entry of the ball into the first start port 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, the number of holds based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is four, respectively. Further, in the present embodiment, the game times that are executed later in response to the reserved game ball and have not been executed yet are also referred to as the reserved game times.

<< 3-2 >> Electrical configuration of gaming machines:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 99 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 temporarily stores various data and the like when executing a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a program recorded in the ROM 63. It is provided with a RAM 64 which is a memory for storing. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may have a part of the function which MPU 62 has. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The payout control device 70 and the power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a DC stable 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, the power supply device 85 includes a capacitor (not shown), and when a power failure occurs or the power supply switch 88 (FIG. 95) is turned off, power supply to each device is continued for a predetermined period. do.

Further, various detection sensors are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. Specifically, a plurality of winning openings provided in various winning openings such as a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, a first variable winning device 36, and a second variable winning device 212. It is connected to the detection sensor 205 (FIG. 97) provided in the detection sensor and the delay mechanism 202. Based on the signals from various detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each entry port, and the game ball passes through the through gate 35. It is determined whether or not the game ball has been distributed, and whether or not the game ball has circulated through the delay mechanism 202 (detection of the distribution mode of the game ball) and the like. Further, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the second starting opening 34, and also executes an electric accessory opening lottery based on the entry of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

At the output port of the main control board 61, the first variable winning drive unit 36c for opening and closing the first opening / closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 and the second opening / closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 are opened / closed. The second variable winning drive unit 212c to open and close the first distribution valve 218, the first distribution valve drive unit 218a to open and close the first distribution valve 218, and the second distribution valve drive unit 219a to open and close the second distribution valve 219. The electric accessory drive unit 34b for opening and closing the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 and the main display unit 45 are connected to each other. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the first variable winning drive unit 36c so that the first opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed, and further, the second opening / closing door 212b is opened / closed. The drive control of the second variable winning drive unit 212c is executed as described above. Further, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the first distribution valve drive unit 218a so that the first distribution valve 218 is opened and closed in the open / close execution mode, and further opens and closes the second distribution valve 219. The drive control of the second distribution valve drive unit 219a is executed. In addition, when the electric accessory opening is won as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the main display unit 45. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the open / close execution mode and the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode is determined, the display control of the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is executed.

Further, the payout control device 70 and the voice emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry to the general winning opening 32 is specified, the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry to the first starting opening 33 is performed. When is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when the entry to the second starting port 34 is specified, one game ball is paid out. The prize ball command corresponding to is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. Further, the launch control device 80 is connected to the operation handle 25 and the game ball launch button 26.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the voice emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, control of the display control device 100 is performed. Further, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the voice emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 and the type of the combination of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. , Whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the advance notice effect executed in each game round, etc. are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time when the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 wins a lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, sets the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. The hit type counter C2 is used when sorting the types of big hit results and the types of small hit results. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate reach when the symbol sequence displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displaced and varied.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. Further, the fluctuation type counter CS is used when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45, and the symbol display device 41. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The hold information storage area 64b is provided with a first hold area Ra and a second hold area Rb. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of entering the ball are held for the first time in the information storage area 64b. It is stored in the area Ra in chronological order. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of entering the ball enter the second hold area Rb of the hold information storage area 64b. It is stored in chronological order.

The details of the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The hit random number counter C1 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 1199, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. Further, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is set in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. It is stored, and when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

The value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first hold area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is called a big hit. It is determined whether or not it becomes a small hit and whether or not it becomes a small hit. Further, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the second hold area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c and collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not it is a big hit and whether or not it is a small hit.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is such that the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. By doing so, the process moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the hit random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not the hit is a big hit and whether or not the hit is a small hit. Will be done.

Next, the details of the hit type counter C2 will be described. The hit type counter C2 is used when determining the big hit type and the small hit type. The hit type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, reach a maximum value, and then return to 0.

The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a big hit, the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in. If the result of the winning lottery is a small hit, the small hit type is determined using the value of the winning type counter C2 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. Further, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b by using the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the hit type counter C2. .. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big hit or a small hit. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value, for example.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. It is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the ball. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second hold area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. However, when the result of the winning lottery becomes a big hit and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some of the symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 may have a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot for some of the symbols. It is a display state in which the symbols are displayed and the remaining symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 98 (b), the symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. In the situation where the reach line is formed and the reach line is formed, the symbol is varied and displayed in the symbol row Z2 to reach the reach. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, in the state where the reach line is formed, the variable display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. A combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when the reach effect is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to display a notice using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

Next, the details of the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 62 to determine the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value, for example.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, the details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric service holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 64d moves to the electric service execution area 64e, and then the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 in the electric service execution area 64e. Is used to draw a lottery as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state. Specifically, in the electric service execution area 64e, the winning / failing table (winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery) stored in the accessory lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 are It is collated and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state. For example, if C4 = 0, 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4 = 2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

At least one of the acquired value of the hit random number counter C1, the value of the hit type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 corresponds to the special information in the present invention. Further, at least one of the value of the hit random number counter C1, the value of the hit type counter C2, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra and the second hold area Rb is also referred to as hold information.

Next, the pass / fail table will be described. The winning / failing table is table data for collating with the winning random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the winning random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment includes a pass / fail table for the first start port and a pass / fail table for the second start port as the pass / fail table.

FIG. 101 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit / fail table for the first starting port. As shown in FIG. 101, in the hit / fail table for the first starting port, five values 0 to 4 are set as the values of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit. Further, five values of 5 to 9 are set as the values of the random number counter C1 which is a small hit (off). Then, among the random number counters C1 of 0 to 1199, the values of 10 to 1199 are out of order.

The "small hit" is an opportunity to shift to the opening / closing execution mode in which the opening / closing door of the variable winning device (the second opening / closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 in the present embodiment) is opened / closed, but the support is provided. Regarding the mode, it is a result of success or failure that does not trigger a transition. On the other hand, "off" is a result of success or failure that does not trigger the transition of the open / close execution mode and also does not trigger the transition of the support mode.

FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit / fail table for the second starting port. As shown in FIG. 102, in the hit / fail table for the second starting port, five values 0 to 4 are set as the values of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit. Further, 1195 values of 5 to 1199 are set as the values of the hit random number counter C1 which is a small hit (off). It should be noted that the value of the hit random number counter C1 which is not a small hit but is a hit is not set in the hit / fail table for the second starting port of the present embodiment.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing a difference between the following two modes or modes, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set.
(1) Mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 36 in this embodiment) in the opening / closing execution mode (2) Support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment opens and closes the first opening / closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode executed when the big hit is won, and is executed when the small hit is won. In the opening / closing execution mode, the second opening / closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 is opened / closed.

In the pachinko machine 10, as the mode of opening / closing control of the first variable winning device 36 in the above (1) opening / closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 has a first variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency of winning is relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the first opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 sec has elapsed or the first. It can be set to continue until the number of balls entering the opening / closing door 36b reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the first opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed twice from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 sec elapses or the first opening / closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number of balls entered into the ball reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the first opening / closing door 36b at one time is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the first opening / closing door 36b is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode in which the low frequency winning mode is applied, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur. However, even in the open / close execution mode related to the low frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the winning of the game ball can occur.

The number of times the first opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the number of opening limits for one opening are the first variable winning devices from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the frequency of winning a prize in 36 is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the first opening / closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is long, or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that the first variable winning device 36 does not substantially win a prize.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (2) opening / closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 continues to launch the game ball in the same manner with respect to the game area PA. The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are used so that the frequency with which the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the above-mentioned situations. Can be set.

Specifically, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the one-time opening time of the electric accessory 34a may be set longer than that in the low-frequency support mode when the electric combination opening is won.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electric combination open is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode. May be good. Further, the electric accessory 34a may be configured to have a long opening time once. In addition, when the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times in the high frequency support mode, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is It may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory opening lottery to the next electric accessory opening lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. You may.

The electric accessory 34a opens the electric accessory when the distribution mode of the game ball to the through gate 35 satisfies a predetermined distribution condition (that is, when the game ball is distributed through the through gate 35). It is driven based on the result of the lottery, and is not driven when the game ball does not circulate in the through gate 35.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary gaming state that assists in the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the winning type counter C2 is used to sort the big hit types. If a small hit is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the winning type counter C2 is used to sort the small hit types. The distribution of the big hit type and the small hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table for the first starting port. FIG. 103 (a) shows a big hit distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 103 (b) shows a small hit distribution table for the first starting port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referred to at the time of a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33.

As shown in FIG. 103 (a), in the jackpot distribution table for the first starting port, jackpot A and jackpot B are set as jackpot types based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. ing. In the jackpot A, the number of round games in the open / close execution mode is 10R, and in the open / close execution mode, the first variable winning device 36 opens and closes. The description indicated by [] in the [Opening / Closing Scenario for Jackpot] column of the jackpot distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. 103 (a) indicates the number of round games set in the opening / closing execution mode at the time of jackpot. Correspondingly, it is a program for controlling the opening / closing of the first opening / closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 (hereinafter, also referred to as an opening / closing scenario for a big hit). In the jackpot A, the main MPU 62 controls the opening / closing of the first opening / closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of round games 10R according to the opening / closing scenario [LOP10] for the jackpot. Further, the jackpot A is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode is 100 times.

In the jackpot B, the number of round games in the open / close execution mode is 10R, and in the open / close execution mode, the first open / close door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 operates to open / close. In the jackpot B, the main MPU 62 controls the opening / closing of the first opening / closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of round games 10R according to the opening / closing scenario [LOP10] for the jackpot. Further, the jackpot B is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency support mode. That is, the number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode is 0.

In the jackpot distribution table for the first starting port, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 54" corresponds to the jackpot A, and "55 to 99" corresponds to the jackpot B. It corresponds.

As shown in FIG. 103 (b), the small hit distribution table for the first starting port has the small hit a and the big hit b as the small hit types based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. Is set.

For the small hit a, the number of round games in the open / close execution mode is 1R, and in the open / close execution mode, the second open / close door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 operates to open / close. The description indicated by [] in the [Open / close scenario for small hit] column of the small hit distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. 103 (b) is the round set in the open / close execution mode at the time of small hit. A program for controlling the opening and closing of the second opening / closing door 212b, the first distribution valve 218, and the second distribution valve 219 of the second variable winning device 212 according to the number of games (hereinafter, also referred to as an opening / closing scenario for small hits). Call). In the small hit a, the main MPU 62 controls the opening / closing of the second opening / closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 corresponding to the number of round games 1R according to the opening / closing scenario [SOPa] for the small hit, and also controls the opening / closing of the first. The opening / closing control of the distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 is performed. In the opening / closing scenario [SOPa] for small hits, the first distribution valve 218 and the first distribution valve 218 are provided so that the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 212a when the second opening / closing door 212b is open is easily attracted by the croon 220. The opening / closing pattern of the second distribution valve 219 is set. Specifically, the first distribution valve 218 is closed at the timing when the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 212a flows through the flow path 214 and reaches the first distribution valve 218, and the game ball. The opening and closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set so as to be easily distributed to the flow path 215 and reach the crune 220.

Further, when the game ball enters the V winning opening (1st V winning opening V1 or 2nd V winning opening V2) during the opening / closing execution mode started with the small hit a as a trigger, the big hit is confirmed. The type of jackpot to be determined in this case is jackpot Va. The details of the jackpot Va will be described later.

If a game ball enters the V winning opening during the opening / closing execution mode started with a small hit and the big hit is confirmed, the game ball enters the V winning again after the end of the opening / closing execution mode being executed. The open / close execution mode corresponding to the jackpot determined by the ball is started. Then, the open / close execution mode is executed according to the determined jackpot type, and when the high frequency support mode is set, a predetermined number of game times are executed in the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. To.

For the small hit b, the number of round games in the open / close execution mode is 1R, and in the open / close execution mode, the second open / close door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 operates to open / close. In the small hit b, the main MPU 62 controls the opening / closing of the second opening / closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 corresponding to the number of round games 1R according to the opening / closing scenario [SOPb] for the small hit, and also controls the opening / closing of the first. The opening / closing control of the distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 is performed. In the opening / closing scenario [SOPb] for small hits, the first distribution valve 218 and the first distribution valve 218 so that the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 212a when the second opening / closing door 212b is open is easily attracted to the croon 220. The opening / closing pattern of the second distribution valve 219 is set. When the game ball enters the V winning opening during the opening / closing execution mode started with the small hit b as a trigger, the big hit Vb is determined. The details of the jackpot Vb will be described later.

In the small hit distribution table for the first starting port, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 49" corresponds to the small hit a, and "50 to 99" is small. It corresponds to the hit b.

As described above, in the opening / closing scenario [SOPa] for small hits and the opening / closing scenario [SOPb] for small hits, the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 212a is likely to be attracted to the Kroon 220. Although the opening / closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set, the game ball is not always triggered by the Kroon 220, and the game ball enters the second variable winning device 212. Depending on the timing, the player may be guided to the second V winning port V2 or the discharging port 225.

FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table for the second starting port. FIG. 104 (a) shows a big hit distribution table for the second starting port, and FIG. 104 (b) shows a small hit distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the second starting port is referred to at the time of a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34.

As shown in FIG. 104 (a), the jackpot distribution table for the second starting port includes jackpot C, jackpot D, and jackpot E as jackpot types based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. Is set. In the jackpot C, the number of round games in the open / close execution mode is 15R, and in the open / close execution mode, the first variable winning device 36 opens and closes. In the case of the jackpot C, the main MPU 62 controls the opening / closing of the first opening / closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of round games 15R according to the opening / closing scenario [LOP15] for the jackpot. Further, the jackpot C is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode is 100 times.

In the jackpot D, the number of round games in the open / close execution mode is 5R, and in the open / close execution mode, the first open / close door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 operates to open / close. In the jackpot D, the main MPU 62 controls the opening / closing of the first opening / closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of round games 5R according to the opening / closing scenario [LOP5] for the jackpot. Further, the jackpot D is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode is 100 times.

In the jackpot E, the number of round games in the open / close execution mode is 5R, and in the open / close execution mode, the first open / close door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 operates to open / close. In the jackpot E, the main MPU 62 controls the opening / closing of the first opening / closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of round games 5R according to the opening / closing scenario [LOP5] for the jackpot. Further, the jackpot E is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency support mode. That is, the number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode is 0.

In the jackpot distribution table for the second starting port, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 28" corresponds to the jackpot C, and "29 to 43" corresponds to the jackpot D. It corresponds, and "44-99" corresponds to the jackpot E.

As shown in the small hit distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 104 (b), the small hit distribution table for the second starting port is based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. As the small hit type, a small hit c, a large hit d, a small hit e, a small hit f, and a small hit g are set.

In the small hit c, the number of round games in the open / close execution mode is 1R, and in the open / close execution mode, the second open / close door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 operates to open / close. In the small hit c, the main MPU 62 controls the opening / closing of the second opening / closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 corresponding to the number of round games 1R according to the opening / closing scenario [SOPc] for the small hit, and also controls the opening / closing of the first. The opening / closing control of the distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 is performed. In the opening / closing scenario [SOPc] for small hits, the first distribution valve 218 and the first distribution valve 218 so that the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 212a when the second opening / closing door 212b is open is easily attracted to the croon 220. The opening / closing pattern of the second distribution valve 219 is set. Specifically, the first distribution valve 218 is closed at the timing when the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 212a flows through the flow path 214 and reaches the first distribution valve 218, and the game ball. The opening and closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set so as to be easily distributed to the flow path 215 and reach the crune 220.

Further, when the game ball enters the V winning opening (1st V winning opening V1 or 2nd V winning opening V2) during the opening / closing execution mode started with the small hit a as a trigger, the big hit is confirmed. The type of jackpot to be determined in this case is jackpot Vc. The details of the jackpot Vc will be described later.

For the small hit d, the number of round games in the open / close execution mode is 1R, and in the open / close execution mode, the second open / close door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 operates to open / close. In the small hit d, the main MPU 62 controls the opening / closing of the second opening / closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 corresponding to the number of round games 1R according to the opening / closing scenario [SOPd] for the small hit, and also controls the opening / closing of the first. The opening / closing control of the distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 is performed. In the opening / closing scenario [SOPd] for small hits, the first distribution is made so that the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 212a when the second opening / closing door 212b is open is easily attracted to the second V winning opening V2. The opening / closing pattern of the valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 is set. Specifically, the first distribution valve 218 is in an open state at the timing when the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 212a flows through the flow path 214 and reaches the first distribution valve 218, and the game ball. The second distribution valve 219 is in the open state at the timing when it reaches the second distribution valve 219, and the game ball is distributed to the flow path 217 so that it can easily reach the second V winning opening V2. The opening / closing pattern of the valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 is set.

Further, when the game ball enters the V winning opening (1st V winning opening V1 or 2nd V winning opening V2) during the opening / closing execution mode started with the small hit d as a trigger, the big hit is confirmed. The type of jackpot to be determined in this case is jackpot Vd. The details of the jackpot Vd will be described later.

For the small hit e, the number of round games in the open / close execution mode is 1R, and in the open / close execution mode, the second open / close door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 operates to open / close. In the small hit e, the main MPU 62 controls the opening / closing of the second opening / closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 corresponding to the number of round games 1R according to the opening / closing scenario [SOPe] for the small hit, and also controls the opening / closing of the first. The opening / closing control of the distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 is performed. In the opening / closing scenario [SOPe] for small hits, the first distribution is made so that the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 212a when the second opening / closing door 212b is open is easily attracted to the second V winning opening V2. The opening / closing pattern of the valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 is set. Specifically, the first distribution valve 218 is in an open state at the timing when the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 212a flows through the flow path 214 and reaches the first distribution valve 218, and the game ball. The second distribution valve 219 is in the open state at the timing when it reaches the second distribution valve 219, and the game ball is distributed to the flow path 217 so that it can easily reach the second V winning opening V2. The opening / closing pattern of the valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 is set.

Further, when the game ball enters the V winning opening (1st V winning opening V1 or 2nd V winning opening V2) during the opening / closing execution mode started with the small hit e as a trigger, the big hit is confirmed. The type of jackpot to be determined in this case is jackpot Ve. The details of the jackpot Ve will be described later.

For the small hit f, the number of round games in the open / close execution mode is 1R, and in the open / close execution mode, the second open / close door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 operates to open / close. In the small hit f, the main MPU 62 controls the opening / closing of the second opening / closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 corresponding to the number of round games 1R according to the opening / closing scenario [SOPf] for the small hit, and also controls the opening / closing of the first. The opening / closing control of the distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 is performed. In the opening / closing scenario [SOPf] for small hits, the first distribution is made so that the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 212a when the second opening / closing door 212b is open is easily attracted to the second V winning opening V2. The opening / closing pattern of the valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 is set. Specifically, the first distribution valve 218 is in an open state at the timing when the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 212a flows through the flow path 214 and reaches the first distribution valve 218, and the game ball. The second distribution valve 219 is in the open state at the timing when it reaches the second distribution valve 219, and the game ball is distributed to the flow path 217 so that it can easily reach the second V winning opening V2. The opening / closing pattern of the valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 is set.

Further, when the game ball enters the V winning opening (1st V winning opening V1 or 2nd V winning opening V2) during the opening / closing execution mode started with the small hit f as a trigger, the big hit is confirmed. The type of jackpot to be determined in this case is jackpot Vf. The details of the jackpot Vf will be described later.

For the small hit g, the number of round games in the open / close execution mode is 1R, and in the open / close execution mode, the second open / close door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 operates to open / close. In the small hit g, the main MPU 62 controls the opening / closing of the second opening / closing door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 corresponding to the number of round games 1R according to the opening / closing scenario [SOPg] for the small hit, and also controls the opening / closing of the first. The opening / closing control of the distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 is performed. The opening / closing scenario [SOPg] for small hits is the first distribution valve 218 so that the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 212a when the second opening / closing door 212b is open is easily attracted to the discharge port 225. And the opening / closing pattern of the second distribution valve 219 is set. Specifically, the first distribution valve 218 is in an open state at the timing when the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 212a flows through the flow path 214 and reaches the first distribution valve 218, and the game ball. The second distribution valve 219 is closed at the timing when it reaches the second distribution valve 219, and the game ball is distributed to the flow path 216 so that it can easily reach the discharge port 225. And the opening / closing pattern of the second distribution valve 219 is set.

Further, when the game ball enters the V winning opening (1st V winning opening V1 or 2nd V winning opening V2) during the opening / closing execution mode started with the small hit g as a trigger, the big hit is confirmed. The type of jackpot to be determined in this case is jackpot Vg. The details of the jackpot Vg will be described later.

In the small hit distribution table for the second starting port, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 32" corresponds to the small hit c, and "32 to 38" is small. It corresponds to the hit d, "39 to 44" corresponds to the small hit e, "45 to 66" corresponds to the small hit f, and "67 to 99" corresponds to the small hit g. ing.

As described above, in the opening / closing scenario [SOPc] for small hits, the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 218 and the second swing are used so that the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 212a is easily attracted by the Kroon 220. Although the opening / closing pattern of the split valve 219 is set, it is not always triggered by the Kroon 220, and depending on the timing when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 212, the second V winning port V2 or the discharging port 225 There is also the possibility of being tempted by. In the opening / closing scenario [SOPd] for small hits, the opening / closing scenario [SOPe] for small hits, and the opening / closing scenario [SOPf] for small hits, the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 212a wins the second V. The opening and closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set so that they are easily attracted to the mouth V2, but they are not always attracted to the second V winning opening V2, and the game ball is the first. 2 Depending on the timing of entering the variable winning device 212, it may be triggered by the crune 220 or the discharge port 225. Further, in the opening / closing scenario [SOPg] for small hits, the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are used so that the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 212a is easily attracted to the discharge port 225. Although the opening / closing pattern is set, it is not always triggered by the discharge port 225, and is attracted to the Kroon 220 or the second V winning port V2 depending on the timing when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 212. There is also the possibility.

Next, during the opening / closing execution mode started with each small hit a to small hit g, the game ball enters the V winning opening (1st V winning opening V1 or 2nd V winning opening V2) (hereinafter, both V winning opening). The jackpot Va to jackpot Vg that are determined in the case of (calling) will be described.

FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a jackpot type determined by a game ball entering the V winning opening (1st V winning opening V1, 2nd V winning opening V2).

As shown in the figure, in the jackpot Va, the number of round games in the open / close execution mode is 10R, and in the open / close execution mode, the first open / close door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 operates to open / close. In the jackpot Va, the main MPU 62 controls the opening / closing of the first opening / closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of round games 10R according to the opening / closing scenario [LOP10] for the jackpot. Further, the jackpot Va is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode is 100 times.

In the jackpot Vb, the number of round games in the open / close execution mode is 10R, and in the open / close execution mode, the first open / close door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 operates to open / close. In the jackpot Vb, the main MPU 62 controls the opening / closing of the first opening / closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of round games 10R according to the opening / closing scenario [LOP10] for the jackpot. Further, the jackpot Vb is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency support mode. That is, the number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode is 0.

In the jackpot Vc, the number of round games in the open / close execution mode is 15R, and in the open / close execution mode, the first open / close door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 operates to open / close. In the jackpot Vc, the main MPU 62 controls the opening / closing of the first opening / closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of round games 15R according to the opening / closing scenario [LOP15] for the jackpot. Further, the jackpot Vc is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode is 100 times.

In the jackpot Vd, the number of round games in the open / close execution mode is 15R, and in the open / close execution mode, the first open / close door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 operates to open / close. In the jackpot Vd, the main MPU 62 controls the opening / closing of the first opening / closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of round games 15R according to the opening / closing scenario [LOP15] for the jackpot. Further, the jackpot Vd is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode is 100 times.

In the jackpot Ve, the number of round games in the open / close execution mode is 5R, and in the open / close execution mode, the first open / close door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 operates to open / close. In the jackpot Ve, the main MPU 62 controls the opening / closing of the first opening / closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of round games 5R according to the opening / closing scenario [LOP5] for the jackpot. Further, the jackpot Ve is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode is 100 times.

In the jackpot Vf, the number of round games in the open / close execution mode is 5R, and in the open / close execution mode, the first open / close door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 operates to open / close. In the jackpot Vf, the main MPU 62 controls the opening / closing of the first opening / closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of round games 5R according to the opening / closing scenario [LOP5] for the jackpot. Further, the jackpot Vf is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency support mode. That is, the number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode is 0.

In the jackpot Vg, the number of round games in the open / close execution mode is 5R, and in the open / close execution mode, the first open / close door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 operates to open / close. In the jackpot Vg, the main MPU 62 controls the opening / closing of the first opening / closing door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 corresponding to the number of round games 5R according to the opening / closing scenario [LOP5] for the jackpot. Further, the jackpot Vg is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency support mode. That is, the number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode is 0.

As can be seen from FIG. 105, since the jackpot Vc and the jackpot Vd, and the jackpot Vf and the jackpot Vg have the same number of round games and high frequency support mode games, the processing after winning the jackpot is substantially the same. Although they are the same, the types of small hits that trigger the winning of the big hits are different, so they are set as different types of big hits in terms of processing.

FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a winning / failing table (winning / failing table for electric accessory opening lottery) used when executing the electric accessory opening lottery.

FIG. 106 (a) shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 106 (a), in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode), two electric accessory opening counters C4, which are the electric accessory opening winning counters, are 0 and 1. The value is set. 464 values of 2 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is out of alignment. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening is won in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 106 (b) shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 106 (b), in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode), 462 electric accessory opening counters C4 for winning the electric combination opening are set to 0 to 461. The value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is out of alignment. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening is won in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 5.0 seconds.

In this way, the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second starting port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. ..

<< 3-3 >> Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 107 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configurations of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Some configurations of the power supply device 85 (FIG. 99) and the like are omitted. The MPU 92 is mounted on the voice emission control board 91 provided in the voice emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element having a built-in CPU, ROM 93, RAM 94, interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data input / output circuit, and the like.

Various control programs, fixed value data, tables, etc. executed by the MPU 92 are stored in the ROM 93. For example, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the ROM 93.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 60 and an effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and a display control device 100 is connected to the output side.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the voice emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 102.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio emission control device 90 are the sound light side MPU 92 and the sound light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound / light side RAM 94 are also referred to, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as a display side MPU 102.

<< 3-4 >> Outline of processing by the gaming machine:
[Flow of the game]
Next, an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a so-called type 1 type 2 type mixer. Specifically, the bonus is released when the small hit is won, and the game ball wins a V when the bonus is released, and the jackpot is confirmed. Hereinafter, the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a flow of games in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment.

When the player starts the game, the game ball is distributed on the left side of the front view of the game area PA by operating the operation handle 25 (hereinafter, also referred to as left-handed). Then, the game ball is inserted into the first starting port 33 to start the game round (F101). Hereinafter, the game times started by inserting the game ball into the first start port 33 will also be referred to as the first start port game times. In this description, the support mode is the low frequency support mode at the time when the game round is started.

Then, in the winning lottery in the executed first start opening game round, if the jackpot is won (F103) and the jackpot type is other than the jackpot A (big hit B) (F103: NO), the jackpot is won. The opening / closing execution mode (round game) triggered by this is executed (F104). After that, the player hits the left again to insert the game ball into the first start opening 33 and execute the first start opening game round (F101).

On the other hand, in F103, when the jackpot type is jackpot A (F103: YES), the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot is executed (F105). After that, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The player distributes the game ball to the right side of the front view of the game area PA (hereinafter, also referred to as right-handed), and causes the game ball to enter the second start port 34 to execute the second start port game round (F112). ).

In the winning lottery of the first start opening game round executed in F101, if the big hit is not won (F102: NO) and the small hit is not won (F106: NO). , Left-handed to enter the game ball into the first start port 33 to execute the first start port game round (F101).

In the winning lottery of the first start opening game round executed in F101, if the big hit is not won (F102: NO) and the small hit is won (F106: YES), the small hit is an opportunity. The open / close execution mode is executed (F107). In the opening / closing execution mode, as described above, the second opening / closing door 212b opens / closes. When the player hits right and puts the game ball into the second big winning opening 212a and distributes it in the V winning mechanism 210 and makes the game ball V winning (F108: YES), the big hit is Determine. Specifically, in the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit winning, a game ball is inserted into the second large winning opening 212a and distributed in the V winning mechanism 210, and the first distribution valve 218 is used. And when the game ball is guided to the crune 220 and the game ball enters the first V winning opening V1 by the distribution by the second distribution valve 219, or the distribution by the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219. When a game ball enters the 2nd V winning opening V2, a V winning is obtained and a big hit is confirmed.

When the confirmed jackpot type is jackpot Va, the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot is executed (F110). After that, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The player distributes the game ball to the right side of the front view of the game area PA (right-handed), enters the game ball into the second start port 34, and executes the second start port game round (F112).

On the other hand, when the confirmed jackpot type is jackpot Vb, the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot is executed (F111). After that, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode. After that, the player hits the left again to insert the game ball into the first start opening 33 and execute the first start opening game round (F101).

In F108, if the game ball does not win a V in the open / close execution mode triggered by a small hit (F108: NO), the player strikes the left again after the end of the open / close execution mode, and the second A game ball is inserted into the 1 start port 33 to execute the first start port game round (F101).

In F112, in the high frequency support mode, the player strikes right to insert the game ball into the second start opening 34, and the second start opening game round is executed. In the winning lottery in the second start opening game, if the jackpot is won (F113: YES) and the jackpot type is other than jackpot C and jackpot D (big hit E) (F114: NO), the jackpot is won. The opening / closing execution mode (round game) triggered by this is executed (F115). After that, the player hits the left again to insert the game ball into the first start opening 33 and execute the first start opening game round (F101).

On the other hand, in the winning lottery in the second starting opening game executed in F112, when the jackpot type is jackpot C or jackpot D (F114: YES), the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot is executed. (F116). After that, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode again. The player strikes right and causes the game ball to enter the second start opening 34 to execute the second start opening game round (F112).

In the winning lottery in the second starting opening game executed in F112, if the big hit is not won (F113: NO) and the small hit is not won (F117: NO). If the executed second start opening game is within the limit number of times (100 times) of the game to be executed as the high frequency support mode (F118: YES), the high frequency support mode is continued and the game is played. The person strikes right and causes the game ball to enter the second start opening 34 to execute the second start opening game round (F112). On the other hand, when the executed second start opening game times exceeds the limit number of times (100 times) of the games executed as the high frequency support mode (F118: NO), the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode. The player strikes the left again to insert the game ball into the first start opening 33 and execute the first start opening game round (F101).

In the winning lottery of the second start opening game round executed in F112, if the big hit is not won (F113: NO) and the small hit is won (F117: YES), the small hit is an opportunity. The open / close execution mode is executed (F119). In the opening / closing execution mode, as described above, the second opening / closing door 212b opens / closes. When the player hits right and puts the game ball into the second big winning opening 212a and distributes it in the V winning mechanism 210 and makes the game ball V winning (F120: YES), the big hit is Determine. Specifically, in the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit winning, a game ball is inserted into the second large winning opening 212a and distributed in the V winning mechanism 210, and the first distribution valve 218 is used. And when the game ball is guided to the crune 220 and the game ball enters the first V winning opening V1 by the distribution by the second distribution valve 219, or the distribution by the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219. When a game ball enters the 2nd V winning opening V2, a V winning is obtained and a big hit is confirmed.

When the confirmed jackpot type is jackpot Vc, jackpot Vd, or jackpot Ve (F121: YES), the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot is executed (F122). After that, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The player hits the right again and causes the game ball to enter the second start opening 34 to execute the second start opening game round (F112).

On the other hand, when the confirmed jackpot type is jackpot Vf (F121: NO), the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot is executed (F123). After that, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode. After that, the player hits the left again to insert the game ball into the first start opening 33 and execute the first start opening game round (F101).

In F120, if the game ball does not win a V prize during the opening / closing execution mode triggered by a small hit (F120: NO), the process proceeds to F118. Since F118 has already been described, the description thereof will be omitted. The flow of a series of games by the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

As described in the flow of the game shown in FIG. 108, the player strikes right in the high frequency support mode to allow the game ball to enter the second start opening 34, and the second start opening game turn. To execute. At this time, as can be seen from FIG. 102, in the winning lottery in the executed second start opening game round, a small hit is won with a high probability. Further, as shown in FIG. 104, the types of small hits to be won in the second start opening game round are small hit c, small hit d, small hit e, small hit f, or small hit g.

Here, the advantage of the player when each small hit of small hit c, small hit d, small hit e, small hit f, and small hit g is won is considered.

If the small hit c is won, the game ball is attracted to the croon 220 in the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit c. When the game ball enters the first V winning opening V1 of the Kroon 220, the jackpot Vc is confirmed, and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode again in the game times to be executed from the next time. Further, when the game ball enters the discharge port 223 of the croon 220 and the executed game times is less than the limit number of games (100 times) of the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is set. Continuing, the player can enter the game ball into the second start opening 34 again to execute the second start opening game round. That is, if the small hit c is won in less than the limited number of games (100 times) in the high frequency support mode, the big hit Vc is confirmed (when the ball enters the 1st V winning opening V1), or the high frequency support mode is set. It is either continued (when the ball enters the discharge port 223), and the player is not disadvantaged by winning the small hit c.

If the small hit d is won, the game ball is attracted to the second V winning opening V2 in the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit d. When the game ball enters the second V winning opening V2, the jackpot Vd is confirmed, and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode again in the game times to be executed from the next time. Even if the small hit e is won, the game ball is attracted to the second V winning opening V2 in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit e. When the game ball enters the second V winning opening V2, the jackpot Ve is confirmed, and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode again in the game times to be executed from the next time. When the small hit f is won, the game ball is attracted to the second V winning opening V2 in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit f. When the game ball enters the second V winning opening V2, the jackpot Vf is determined, and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode in the game times to be executed from the next time.

Then, when the small hit g is won, the game ball is attracted to the discharge port 223 in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit g. When the game ball enters the discharge port 223, if the executed second start port game times is less than the limit number of times (100 times) of the number of games executed as the high frequency support mode, the next time. High-frequency support will continue for game times.

When each of these small hits c, small hit d, small hit e, small hit f, and small hit g is viewed from the player's point of view, when the small hit c is won, as described above, as a result. There is no disadvantage. The small hit d, the small hit e, and the small hit f cannot be determined as to which of the small hits the game ball has entered the second V winning opening V2. Then, as can be seen from FIG. 104 (b), six hit type counters C2 are distributed to the small hit d, six hit type counters C2 are distributed to the small hit e, and 12 are distributed to the small hit f. Since the hit type counters C2 are sorted, assuming that the ball has entered the second V winning opening V2, the ratio of the small hit d is 25%, the ratio of the small hit e is 25%, and the small. The ratio of hit f is 50%. That is, from the viewpoint of the player, when the game ball enters the second V winning opening V2 and the jackpot is confirmed, the probability of the jackpot Vf shifting to the low frequency support mode in the future is 50%.

Therefore, when the player wins a small hit in the second start opening game round executed during the high frequency support mode, the player expects that the type of the small hit is the small hit c.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player is given a sense of expectation by utilizing the effect of the second start opening game times executed during the high frequency support mode. The details will be described below.

[Production setting process for game times]
In the present embodiment, a specific suggestion effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific suggestion effect) suggesting that the small hit c may be won in the second start opening game round executed during the high frequency support mode. Call) is executed. More specifically, in the second start opening game round in which the small hit c is won, the specific suggestion effect is executed with a high probability. In addition, even in the other second start opening game times in which the small hit c is not won, the specific suggestion effect is executed with a lower probability than in the second start opening game times in which the small hit c is won.

FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a specific suggestion effect. FIG. 109 (a) shows the display surface 41a immediately after the start of the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is the small winning c. As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, as a specific suggestion effect, the female character CH is displayed on the display surface 41a for a short time (for example, 2 seconds) immediately after the start of the game round, thereby performing the game round. It is suggested that the result of the winning lottery is a small hit c.

After that, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), at the end of the variable time, the liquid crystal display symbol corresponding to the result of the winning lottery in the game round is stopped and displayed.

As described in FIG. 108 above, in the second start opening game round in which the small hit c is won, the specific suggestion effect is executed with a high probability, but the second start opening game round in which the small hit c is won. When the player recognizes that the specific suggestion effect is to be executed in, the player has a sense of expectation, and on the other hand, the player wins a small hit other than the small hit c and the game ball is placed in the second V winning opening V2. In order to avoid entering the ball, there is a possibility that the right-handed hit is stopped or the launching of the game ball to the game area PA itself is stopped in the game times in which the specific suggestion effect is not executed. Hereinafter, in a specific case, the act of stopping the right-handed hit by the player and the act of stopping the firing of the game ball into the game area PA itself are also referred to as a stop-handed hit. As mentioned above, from the player's point of view, assuming that the game ball enters the 2nd V winning opening V2 and the jackpot is confirmed, the probability of the jackpot Vf shifting to the low frequency support mode in the future is Since it is 50%, the player desires to win a small hit other than the small hit c and prevent the game ball from entering the second V winning opening V2. Therefore, the player may make a stop at the second start opening game round in which the specific suggestion effect is not executed.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the specific suggestion effect is executed with a high probability in the second start opening game round in which the small hit c is won, and when the stop hit is detected, the small hit c is won. The execution of the specific suggestion effect is stopped in the second start opening game round. By doing so, while giving a sense of expectation to the player, it is possible to suppress the acquisition of an unreasonable profit of the player who is not originally planned. Hereinafter, the outline of the process described above will be described using a simple flowchart. The details of the processing will be described later.

FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing an outline of a process for setting an effect in a game time (also referred to as a game time effect setting process).

In F201, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery in the game times to be executed is a big hit. In F201, if the result of the winning lottery in the game round is a big hit (F201: YES), the process proceeds to F202, and an effect pattern for the big hit is set. Specifically, according to the fluctuation time of the game times for which the effect pattern is set, one is selected by lottery by a random number from a plurality of types of effect patterns prepared for the jackpot, and the effect pattern is set as the effect pattern to be executed. .. After executing F202, the game round effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, in F201, if the result of the winning lottery in the game round is not a big hit (F201: NO), the process proceeds to F203. In F203, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery in the game times to be executed is a small hit.

In F203, if the result of the winning lottery in the game round is a small hit (F203: YES), the process proceeds to F204.

In F204, it is determined whether or not the type of the winning small hit is the small hit c. In F204, if the type of the winning small hit is the small hit c (F204: YES), the process proceeds to F205, and it is determined whether or not the stop flag is ON. The stop-hit flag is turned on when it is determined that the player is making a stop in the second start opening game round that has been executed during the high-frequency support mode, and a series of high-frequency support modes have ended. In some cases, it turns off.

Although the details will be described later, the determination of whether or not the player is making a stop is determined during the period during which the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c is being executed during the high frequency support mode. This is performed based on the number of game balls distributed in the detection sensor 205 and the number of game balls distributed by the detection sensor 205 during the period in which the game times in which the result of the winning lottery is other than the small hit c are being executed. In the present embodiment, a value obtained by calculating the number of distributions per unit time from the number of distributions of game balls detected by the detection sensor 205 during the period in which the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is a small hit c is being executed (hereinafter, (Also called distribution frequency) and the value obtained by calculating the number of distributions per unit time from the number of distributions of game balls detected by the detection sensor 205 during the period when the game rounds in which the result of the winning lottery is other than the small hit c is being executed (also called distribution frequency). The distribution frequency) determines whether or not the player is making a stop, depending on whether or not a predetermined condition (hereinafter, also referred to as a stop condition) is satisfied. The details of the stopping conditions will be described later.

If it is determined in F205 that the stop flag is not ON (F205: NO), the process proceeds to F206, and an effect pattern for the small hit c is set. Specifically, as described above, an effect pattern is set in which the specific suggestion effect is executed with a high probability. In all cases where the result of the winning lottery is a small hit c, the specific suggestion effect may not be set as the effect pattern, and the specific suggestion effect may not be set. Whether or not to set a specific suggestion effect is determined by a lottery using random numbers. After executing F205, the game rotation effect setting process is terminated.

If the type of the winning small hit is not the small hit c in F204 (F204: NO), or if it is determined in F205 that the stop flag is ON (F205: YES), the process proceeds to F207. In F207, a normal effect pattern for small hits is set. Specifically, the specific suggestion effect is hardly executed, and a lottery is performed by a random number from a plurality of types of effect patterns prepared for the small hit according to the type of each small hit and the fluctuation time of the game times. Select one and set it as the effect pattern to be executed. After executing F207, the game rotation effect setting process is terminated. In F207, the specific suggestion effect is not set at all as the effect pattern, but the specific suggestion effect is set in the effect pattern with a lower probability than the case where the effect pattern for the small hit c is set in F206. ..

In F203, if the result of the winning lottery in the game round is not a small hit (F203: NO), the process proceeds to F208. In F208, it is determined whether or not reach occurs in the game times. If it is determined in F208 that reach occurs (outside the reach occurs) (F208: YES), the process proceeds to F209, and the effect pattern for generating reach is set. After executing F209, the game rotation effect setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in F208 that reach does not occur (F208: NO), the process proceeds to F210, and the effect pattern for non-reach generation is set. After executing F210, the game rotation effect setting process is terminated.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the specific suggestion effect is executed in the game times in which the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c. On the other hand, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation about the result of the winning lottery. Further, when it is determined that the player has stopped, the specific suggestion effect is not executed in the game times when the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c. Therefore, the player desires to execute the specific suggestion effect. In some cases, it is possible to suppress the player's firing operation of the game ball, which would be a stoppage. As a result, when the player gives the player a privilege that is not planned for the gaming machine, the possibility of the specific suggestion effect is determined by the presence or absence of the stop. It is possible to suppress the granting of benefits to the unscheduled player.

In other words, when it is determined that the distribution mode of the game ball by the launching operation of the player is a stop, the specific suggestion effect is not executed even though the small hit c, so that the specific suggestion effect is performed. It is possible to urge the player who wants to execute the game ball to launch the game ball so that it is not determined to be a stop.

Further, when determining the production of the game times in which the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c, the distribution frequency in the detection sensor 205 in the game times in which the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c among the already executed game times , The result of the winning lottery is the game number to be executed from now on based on the distribution frequency in the detection sensor 205 in the game time in which the result of the winning lottery is the lottery result other than the small hit c among the already executed game times. Since it is determined whether or not to execute the specific suggestion effect in the game times with the small hit c, the distribution frequency in the detection sensor 205 in the game times in which the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c among the already executed game times By comparing with the distribution frequency in the detection sensor 205 in the game times in which the result of the winning lottery is the lottery result other than the small hit c among the already executed game times, the game in which the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c. It is possible to detect whether or not the player has switched the mode of launching the game ball between the times and the game times in which the result of the winning lottery is other than the small hit c. Therefore, for example, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the player is intentionally trying to obtain a privilege that is not planned by the gaming machine, and whether or not to execute the specific suggestion effect based on the determination result. Can be determined.

Further, the detection of the firing operation by the player (specifically, the detection of the stop hit) is detected based on the distribution frequency of the game ball in the detection sensor 205. Since the distribution frequency is the time average of the number of distributions, it is possible to accurately detect the distribution mode of the player by excluding the noise-like change of the distribution mode in a short period (for example, 1 second). In addition, the distribution frequency correlates with the launch mode of the game ball by the player. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that reflects the launch mode of the game ball by the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the effect in the game times to be executed is determined based on the distribution frequency in the game times in which the specific suggestion effect is executed, the launch mode of the player by executing the specific suggestion effect, that is, the specific suggestion effect is determined. It is possible to decide whether or not to execute the specific suggestion process after taking into consideration the reaction of the player and the psychology of the player due to the execution. That is, when deciding whether or not to execute the specific suggestion effect, the reaction of the player when the specific suggestion effect is previously executed can be taken into consideration, and the reaction of the player regarding whether or not the specific suggestion effect is executed can be taken into consideration. Can be controlled by feeding back.

<< 3-5 >> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-mentioned processing in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes will be described below. The MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal in addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, but description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

In step Sn0101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 60 is read, the state of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0102.

In step Sn0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0103.

In step Sn0103, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, each of them is added. Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0104. The value of the variable type counter CS is updated in the normal processing (FIG. 116) described later.

In step Sn0104, a ball entry process for the start port accompanying the entry into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the starting port of step Sn0104 will be described later. After executing step Sn0104, the process proceeds to step Sn0105.

In step Sn0105, a ball entry process for through ball accompanying the entry into the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the through of step Sn0105 will be described later. After executing step Sn0105, the process proceeds to step Sn0106.

In step Sn0106, the ball entry process for the V winning opening is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the V winning opening in step Sn0106 will be described later. After executing step Sn0106, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Incoming ball entry process for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be described. The ball entry process for the start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 111: Sn0104).

FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the starting port. In step Sn0201, whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball) is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33. If it is determined in step Sn0201 that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (Sn0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0202, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set the command. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0203.

In step Sn0203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0204.

In step Sn0204, the start hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold number RaN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra, is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The first start hold number RaN indicates the hold number based on the entry of the ball into the first start port 33. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0209.

If it is determined in step Sn0201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 33 (Sn0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn0205 and whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

If it is determined in step Sn0205 that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sn0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0206, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set the command. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn0205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (Sn0205: NO), the ball entry process for the main starting port is terminated.

In step Sn0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0208.

In step Sn0208, the start hold number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as the second start hold number RbN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb, is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on the entry of the ball into the second start port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0209.

In step Sn0209, it is determined whether or not the start hold number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sn0204 or step Sn0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step Sn0209, if the start hold number N is not less than the upper limit value (Sn0209: NO), the ball entry process for the main start port is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sn0209, if the start hold number N is less than the upper limit value (Sn0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0210, 1 is added to the start hold number N of the corresponding hold area, and then the process proceeds to step Sn0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reserved quantity CRN). The total hold quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first start hold quantity RaN and the second start hold quantity RbN. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0212.

In step Sn0212, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sn0103 (FIG. 111) are stored in the first storage area of the corresponding reserved area, that is, step. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved number obtained by adding 1 in Sn0210. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as the processing target, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sn0103 are set to the first value. 1 The storage area is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area Ra of the reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN to which 1 is added in step Sn0210. When the second start hold quantity RbN is set as the processing target, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sn0103 are set in the second hold area. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step Sn0210. After executing step Sn0212, the process proceeds to step Sn0213.

In step Sn0213, the first determination process is executed. In the pre-determination process, the winning / failing determination result (lottery result), the jackpot type, and the reach are generated based on the information (holding information) of each value of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. This is a process of executing the determination of the presence or absence of the information before the reserved information is subject to the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The details of the pre-determination process will be described later. After executing step Sn0213, the process proceeds to step Sn0214.

In step Sn0214, a process of setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the prior determination process executed based on the information (holding information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as the hold command.

The hold command determines that a ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 and the determination result (first determination information) by the advance determination process based on the hold information acquired based on the entry. This is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to confirm the hold information before it becomes the target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 116: step Sn0603) of the normal process described later.

Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the ball into the first start port 33, the voice emission control device 90 displays the number of holds in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the entry into the second start port 34 is received, the voice emission control device 90 displays the number of holds in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds.

After executing step Sn0214, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

<First judgment process>
Next, the prior determination process will be described. The pre-determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 112: Sn0213) for the ball entry process for the start port.

FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the prior determination process. As described above, in the prior determination process, based on the pending information, the determination results such as the winning / failing determination of the winning lottery, the determination of the type of the jackpot, and the determination of the presence / absence of the reach are determined, and the pending information is the hit by the main control device 60. This is a process to be executed before the lottery target.

In step Sn0301, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the storage area is read out by the ball entering the starting port in the ball entering process for the starting port (FIG. 112). After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0302, and it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter C1 is the first reserved area Ra.

If it is determined in step Sn0302 that the value of the read random number counter C1 is the first holding area Ra (Sn0302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0303 and the hit / fail table for the first starting port is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn305, and as a result of referring to the hit / miss table for the first start port, it is determined whether or not the information of the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the big hit.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn0302 that the value of the read random number counter C1 is not the first holding area Ra (Sn0302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn0304 and the hit / fail table for the second start port is referred to. .. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn305, and as a result of referring to the hit / miss table for the second starting port, it is determined whether or not the information of the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the big hit.

If it is determined in step Sn0305 that the value of the hit random number counter C1 corresponds to a big hit (Sn0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0306, and the hit stored in the storage area by entering the starting port this time. Grasp the value of the type counter C2. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0307, and the distribution table for jackpots stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the hit type counter C2, which is the target of distribution this time, is acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33, the jackpot distribution table for the first starting port is used. Refer to the jackpot distribution table for the second starting port when the ball is acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 34. After executing step Sn0307, the process proceeds to step Sn0308.

In step Sn0308, as a result of referring to the distribution table for jackpots, the sorted jackpot types are stored in the pre-determination processing result storage area 64 as jackpot information. After that, the first determination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sn0305 that the value of the hit random number counter C1 does not correspond to the jackpot (Sn0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn0309. In step Sn309, it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter C1 corresponds to a small hit. If it is determined in step Sn309 that the value of the hit random number counter C1 corresponds to a small hit (Sn0309: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0310.

In step Sn0310, the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting port this time is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0311, and the distribution table for small hits stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the hit type counter C2, which is the target of this distribution, is acquired based on the entry into the first start port 33, the small hit distribution table for the first start port 33. Refer to the small hit distribution table for the second starting port when the ball is acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 34. After executing step Sn0311, the process proceeds to step Sn0312.

In step Sn0312, as a result of referring to the distribution table for small hits, the distributed small hit types are stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64 as small hit information. After that, the first determination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sn0309 that the value of the hit random number counter C1 does not correspond to a small hit (Sn0309: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn0313.

In step Sn0313, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the storage area due to the entry into the starting port this time is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0314, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn0315, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

If it is determined in step Sn0315 that the reach generation is supported (Sn0315: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0316, and the reach generation information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the first determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn0315 that the reach generation is not supported (Sn0315: NO), the prior determination process is terminated as it is.

<Through ball entry process>
Next, the ball entry process for through will be described. The ball entry process for through is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 111: Sn0105).

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for thru. In step Sn0401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35. If it is determined in step Sn0401 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sn0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0402, and whether the number of reserved characters SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Judge whether or not. The number of reserved items SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that is reserved for performing the electric accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved items SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sn0401: NO), the entry process for this through is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sn0402 that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the number of reserved items SN (Sn0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0403, and 1 is added to the number of reserved items SN. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0404.

In step Sn0404, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step Sn0103 (FIG. 111) is stored in the first free storage area of the electric service holding area 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the ball entry process for through is completed.

On the other hand, in step Sn0402, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is not less than the upper limit value (Sn0402: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is equal to or more than the upper limit value, The ball entry process for through is completed without storing the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4.

<Ball entry process for V winning opening>
Next, the ball entry process for the V winning opening will be described. The ball entry process for the V winning opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 111: Sn0106) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the V winning opening. In step Sn0501, it is determined whether or not the V winning opening entry permission flag is ON. The V winning opening entry permission flag opens and closes to open and close the second opening / closing door 212b, the first distribution valve 218, and the second distribution valve 219 in the opening / closing execution mode executed when a small hit is won. It is turned on when the scenario is set, and is cleared when the other flags indicating the status are cleared in the transition process at the end of the ending period, which is executed when the open / close execution mode is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sn0501 that the V winning opening ball entry permission flag is ON (Sn0501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0502. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn0501 that the V winning opening entry permission flag is not ON (Sn0501: NO), the ball entry process for the V winning opening is terminated as it is.

In step Sn0502, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the V winning opening (in the present embodiment, the first V winning opening V1 or the second V winning opening V2). If it is determined in step Sn0502 that the game ball has entered the V winning opening (Sn0502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0503.

In step Sn0503, it is determined whether or not the V winning type flag is ON. The V winning type flag turns on the V winning type flag corresponding to the confirmed jackpot type when the jackpot is confirmed by the game ball entering the V winning opening. Then, in the transition process at the end of the ending period executed when the open / close execution mode is terminated, the flag is deleted when the other flags indicating the status are deleted. Specifically, when the jackpot Va is confirmed, the V winning Va flag, when the jackpot Vb is confirmed, the V winning Vb flag, when the jackpot Vc is confirmed, the V winning Vc flag, and when the jackpot Vd is confirmed. Turn on the V winning Vd flag, the V winning Ve flag when the jackpot Ve is confirmed, the V winning Vf flag when the jackpot Vf is confirmed, and the V winning Vg flag when the jackpot Vg is confirmed. ..

If it is determined in step Sn0503 that the V winning type flag is ON (Sn0503: YES), the ball entering process for the V winning opening is terminated as it is. If it is determined in step Sn0503 that the V winning type flag is not ON (Sn0503: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn0504.

In step Sn0504, the V winning type flag corresponding to the winning small hit type is turned ON. After executing step Sn0504, the process proceeds to step Sn0505, and the V winning command is set. After that, the ball entry process for the V winning opening is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn0502 that no game ball has entered the V winning opening (Sn0502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn0506. In step Sn0506, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the discharge port (discharge port 223, discharge port 225).

If it is determined in step S0506 that the game ball has entered the discharge port (Sn0506: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0507. In step Sn0507, a non-V winning command is set. After that, the ball entry process for the V winning opening is completed.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter, also referred to as “power on”). In the normal process, the main process of the game is executed.

FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sn0601, the startup process is executed. Specifically, the initial setting of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0602.

In step Sn0602, a start-up command is set. The start-up command is a command for starting a demo movie for each control device on the sub side when the power is turned on. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0603.

In step Sn0603, output data such as a start-up command set in step Sn0602 and a command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. If commands related to effects such as start-up commands, variable commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After executing step Sn0603, the process proceeds to step Sn0604.

In step Sn0604, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variable type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0605.

In step Sn0605, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sn0606. In step Sn0606, a game turn control process for controlling a game in each game turn is executed. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of a symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display unit 37a, the second symbol display unit 37b, and the like are performed. The details of the game times control process will be described later. After executing step Sn0606, the process proceeds to step Sn0607.

In step Sn0607, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. The details of the game state transition process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0608.

In step Sn0608, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is in the open state. The details of the processing for electric service support will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0609.

In step Sn0609, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal process (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process in step Sn0603). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached. If it is determined in step Sn0609 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal process (Sn0609: NO), in step Sn0610 and step Sn0611 until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached. Within the remaining time of, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sn0610, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Sn0611, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn0609 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the current normal process (Sn0609: YES), the process returns to step Sn0603 and each process from step Sn0603 to step Sn0608 is performed. Run.

Since the execution time of each process from step Sn0603 to step Sn0608 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process will be described. The game times control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 116: Sn0606) of the normal process.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the game times control process. In step Sn0701, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The open / close execution mode flag is turned on when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is turned off when the open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process.

If it is determined in step Sn0701 that the open / close execution mode is in progress (Sn0701: YES), the game round control process ends without executing any of the processes after step Sn0702. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the game round is not started regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn0701 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (Sn0701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn0702.

In step Sn0702, it is determined whether or not the special figure unit 37 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b provided in the special symbol unit 37 is in variable display. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the special map variation display flag in the special map variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special symbol variation display flag is turned on when starting the variation display for either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, and is turned off when the variation display ends.

If it is determined in step Sn0702 that the special figure unit 37 is not displaying fluctuations (Sn0702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn0703.

In step Sn0703, the fluctuation start processing for starting the fluctuation display in the special figure unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start processing will be described later. After executing step Sn0703, the game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn0702 that the special figure unit 37 is in the variable display (Sn0702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0704.

In step Sn0704, the variation end processing for terminating the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the variable end processing will be described later. After executing step Sn0704, the game round control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described. The variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 117: Sn0703) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. In step Sn0801, it is determined whether or not the total reserved quantity CRN exceeds "0". When the total reserved quantity CRN is "0" or less, it means that the starting reserved quantity is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Therefore, if it is determined in step Sn0801 that the total number of reserved pieces CRN is "0" or less (Sn0801: NO), the fluctuation start process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn0801 that the total number of reserved pieces CRN exceeds "0" (Sn0801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn0802.

In step Sn0802, the hold information shift process for setting the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sn0803. The details of the hold information shift process will be described later.

In step Sn0803, a hit determination process including a process when a big hit is won in the hit lottery is performed. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Sn0803, the process proceeds to step Sn0804.

In step Sn0804, the variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is to set the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, based on the presence / absence of a big hit and the presence / absence of reach. It is the processing of. The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sn0804, the process proceeds to step Sn0805.

In step Sn0805, a variable command is set. The variable command is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33, or is acquired based on the entry into the second starting opening 34. It contains information indicating whether or not the information is on hold, information on whether or not reach has occurred, and information on the fluctuation time set in step Sn0804. After executing step Sn0805, the process proceeds to step Sn0806.

In step Sn0806, a type command is set. The type command includes the presence / absence of a big hit by a winning lottery, the presence / absence of a small hit, the information of the result of the distribution determination, and the information of the result of the loss.

The variable command and the type command set in step Sn0805 and step Sn0806 are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by step Sn0603 in the normal process (FIG. 116). The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variable command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step Sn0806, the process proceeds to step Sn0807.

In step Sn0807, among the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is started to display the variation of the symbol. Specifically, when the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is specified to be the first symbol display unit 37a, and the variable display is started. When the second symbol display unit flag is ON, it is specified that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is the second symbol display unit 37b, and the variable display is started. After executing step Sn0807, the process proceeds to step Sn0808.

In step Sn0808, the special figure change display flag stored in the special figure change display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sn0808, this fluctuation start process ends.

<Hold information shift processing>
Next, the hold information shift process will be described. The hold information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 118: Sn0802) of the variable start process.

FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the hold information shift process. In step Sn0901, it is determined whether or not the hold area to be processed for executing the hold information shift process is the first hold area Ra. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment preferentially processes the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 100). Specifically, when the hold information is stored only in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 100), the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is targeted for processing, and the second hold area Rb ( When the hold information is stored only in FIG. 100), the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is targeted for processing, and the hold information is stored in both the first hold area Ra and the second hold area Rb. If it is stored, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is preferentially processed.

As a modification, a configuration may be adopted in which the reserved information stored first in time series is preferentially processed. Specifically, the hold information stored first among the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra in time series (hold information stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra). Is held before the hold information stored first among the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb in time series (hold information stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb). If it is stored in the area, it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra. On the other hand, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb in time series is earlier than the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra in time series. If the stored hold information is stored in the hold area first, it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the second hold area Rb. Such a configuration may be adopted.

If it is determined in step Sn0901 that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra (step Sn0901: YES), the hold information shift process for the first hold area in steps Sn0902 to Step Sn0907 is executed. On the other hand, in step Sn0901, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (step Sn0901: NO). ), Hold information shift processing for the second hold area in steps Sn0908 to Sn0913 is executed.

In step Sn0902, after subtracting 1 from the first start hold quantity RaN in the first hold area Ra, the process proceeds to step Sn0903 and the total hold quantity CRN is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0904. In step Sn0904, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0905.

In step Sn0905, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reserved area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step Sn0905, the process proceeds to step Sn0906.

In step Sn0906, when the second symbol display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second symbol display unit flag is information for specifying whether the target for starting the variation display this time is the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0907.

In step Sn0907, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the first hold area Ra, that is, corresponding to the first start port 33. A shift command including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the pending information shift process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sn0907 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Sn0603 in the normal process (FIG. 116). The voice emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command. do. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

In step Sn0901, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (Sn0901: NO), the step. Proceed to Sn0908.

In step Sn0908, the second start hold quantity RbN of the second hold area Rb is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0909. In step Sn0909, the total number of reserved pieces CRN is subtracted by 1, the process proceeds to step Sn0910, and the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0911.

In step Sn0911, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reserved area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step Sn0911, the process proceeds to step Sn0912.

In step Sn0912, if the second symbol display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn0913.

In step Sn0913, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, the information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the second hold area Rb, that is, corresponding to the second start port 34. A shift command including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the pending information shift process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sn0913 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Sn0603 in the normal process (FIG. 116). The voice emission control device 90 gives a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command. Send. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

<Collision detection processing>
Next, the hit determination process will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 118: Sn0703).

FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing a hit determination process. In step Sn1001, the value of the random number counter C1 to be processed is read out. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn1002.

In step Sn1002, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sn1002 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (Sn1002: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1003, and a pass / fail determination is made with reference to the pass / fail table for the first start port. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn1005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1002 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (Sn1002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1004, and the pass / fail determination is made with reference to the pass / fail table for the second starting port. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn1005.

In step Sn1005, as a result of the winning / failing determination, it is determined whether or not the jackpot has been won. If it is determined in step Sn1005 that the jackpot has been won (Sn1005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1006.

In step Sn1006, the value of the hit type counter C2 is read out. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1007, and the jackpot type is sorted by referring to the jackpot distribution table. Specifically, when the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is to be processed, the jackpot distribution table for the first start port is referred to to sort the jackpot types. When the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is to be processed, the jackpot type is sorted by referring to the jackpot distribution table for the second start port.

After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1008, and the jackpot flag corresponding to the sorted jackpot type is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a jackpot A, the jackpot A flag is turned ON, if it is a jackpot B, the jackpot B flag is turned ON, if it is a jackpot C, the jackpot C flag is turned ON, and the jackpot D is used. In some cases, the jackpot D flag is turned ON, and in the case of jackpot E, the jackpot E flag is turned ON. The jackpot Va to jackpot Vg (hereinafter, the jackpot by V winning is also referred to as V winning jackpot) is not the jackpot won by the winning lottery in the game round, but the V winning during the opening / closing execution mode executed by the small hit. Since it is a jackpot to be determined, it is not a jackpot for which the jackpot flag is turned ON in step Sn1008. The jackpot flag when the V winning jackpot is confirmed is turned ON in the transition process (FIG. 126) at the end of the ending period. After executing step Sn1008, the process proceeds to step Sn1009.

In step Sn1009, a process of setting a stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is executed. Specifically, in this game round in which a big hit is won, it is set which stop result is displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to end the variable display. It is a process to do. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot distributed in step Sn1007 is acquired, and the address information thereof is acquired. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sn1009, the hit determination process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1005 that the jackpot has not been won (Sn1005: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1010. In step Sn1010, as a result of the winning / failing determination, it is determined whether or not the small hit has been won. If it is determined in step Sn1010 that a small hit has been won (Sn1010: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1011.

In step Sn1011, the value of the hit type counter C2 is read out. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1012, and the types of small hits are sorted with reference to the small hit distribution table. Specifically, when the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is the processing target, the small hit distribution table for the first start port is referred to, and the type of the small hit is sorted. When the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is to be processed, the small hit distribution table for the second start port is referred to, and the type of the small hit is sorted.

After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1013, and the small hit flag corresponding to the distributed small hit type is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a small hit a, the small hit a flag is turned ON, when it is a small hit b, the big hit b flag is turned ON, and when it is a small hit c, the small hit c flag is turned ON. If it is a small hit d, the big hit d flag is turned ON, if it is a small hit e, the small hit e flag is turned ON, and if it is a small hit f, the small hit f flag is turned ON and the small hit is made. If it is g, the small hit g flag is turned ON. After executing step Sn1013, the process proceeds to step Sn1014.

In step Sn1014, a process of setting a stop symbol corresponding to the type of small hit is executed. Specifically, in this game round in which a small hit is won, which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to end the variable display. This is the process for setting. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for small hits stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of small hits distributed in step Sn1012 is acquired. , The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sn1014, the hit determination process ends.

If it is determined in step Sn1010 that the small hit has not been won (Sn1010: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1015.

In step Sn1015, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is read, and then the process proceeds to step Sn1016 to refer to the reach determination table. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1017, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs in the game round. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is set as the reach occurrence in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 99). Determine if it matches the value you have.

If it is determined in step Sn1017 that reach will occur in the game round (Sn1017: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1018 and the reach generation flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach generation flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sn1018, the process proceeds to step Sn1019.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1017 that reach does not occur in the game round (Sn1017: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1019 as it is.

In step Sn1019, a process of setting a stop result for disconnection is executed. Specifically, in this game round, which is the result of the deviation, the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b is used to set which stop result is displayed to end the variable display. It is a process. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for off in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data stored in the execution area AE is acquired, and the address information is used as the stop result of the RAM 64. Store in the address storage area. After executing step Sn1019, the final hit determination process is terminated.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 118: Sn0804) of the variation start process.

FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation time setting process. In step Sn1101, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is read out. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn1102.

In step Sn1102, it is determined whether or not a big hit has been won in the winning lottery related to this game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if the jackpot flag is ON (Sn1102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1103.

In step Sn1103, the variable time setting process for the jackpot is executed. Specifically, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the jackpot fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the jackpot fluctuation time table is set so that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the total number of reserved pieces CRN increases. Therefore, when the second start hold number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases, and when the first start hold number RaN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter. , The larger the number of second start hold numbers RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration that does not depend on the total number of reserved quantity CRNs may be used, and the fluctuation time may be set to be shorter as the number of total reserved quantity CRNs is smaller. Further, it may be set to be constant without depending on each of the reserved numbers RaN and RbN.

After executing step Sn1103, the process proceeds to step Sn1109.

If it is determined in step Sn1102 that the jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery related to this game round (Sn1102: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1104.

In step Sn1104, it is determined whether or not a small hit has been won in the winning lottery related to this game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if the small hit flag is ON (Sn1104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1105.

In step Sn1105, the variable time setting process for small hits is executed. Specifically, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the fluctuation time table for small hits stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table for small hits is set so that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the total number of reserved pieces CRN increases. Therefore, when the second start hold number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases, and when the first start hold number RaN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter. , The larger the number of second start hold numbers RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration that does not depend on the total number of reserved quantity CRNs may be used, and the fluctuation time may be set to be shorter as the number of total reserved quantity CRNs is smaller. Further, it may be set to be constant without depending on each of the reserved numbers RaN and RbN.

After executing step Sn1105, the process proceeds to step Sn1109.

If it is determined in step Sn1104 that the small hit has not been won in the winning lottery related to this game round (Sn1104: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1106.

In step Sn1106, it is determined whether or not reach occurs in the winning lottery related to this game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach generation flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if the reach generation flag is ON (Sn1106: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1107.

In step Sn1107, the variable time setting process for the reach generation is executed. Specifically, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS this time is acquired by referring to the variation time table for reach generation stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the reach generation fluctuation time table is set so that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the total number of reserved pieces CRN increases. Therefore, when the second start hold number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases, and when the first start hold number RaN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter. , The larger the number of second start hold numbers RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration that does not depend on the total number of reserved quantity CRNs may be used, and the fluctuation time may be set to be shorter as the number of total reserved quantity CRNs is smaller. Further, it may be set to be constant without depending on each of the reserved numbers RaN and RbN.

After executing step Sn1107, the process proceeds to step Sn1109.

If it is determined in step Sn1106 that no reach does not occur in the winning lottery related to this game round (Sn1106: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1108.

In step Sn1108, the variable time setting process for non-reach generation is executed. Specifically, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS this time is acquired by referring to the variation time table for non-reach stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the reach non-generation fluctuation time table is set so that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the total number of reserved pieces CRN increases. Therefore, when the second start hold number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases, and when the first start hold number RaN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter. , The larger the number of second start hold numbers RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration that does not depend on the total number of reserved quantity CRNs may be used, and the fluctuation time may be set to be shorter as the number of total reserved quantity CRNs is smaller. Further, it may be set to be constant without depending on each of the reserved numbers RaN and RbN.

After executing step Sn1108, the process proceeds to step Sn1109.

In step Sn1109, the fluctuation time information is stored. Specifically, the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

<Variation end processing>
Next, the variable end processing will be described. The variation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 117: Sn0704) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the variation end processing. In step Sn1201, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the fluctuation time is the time from the start of fluctuation of the symbol row to the stop of all the symbol rows, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sn1201, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 is "0". The value of the fluctuation time information is set in the above-mentioned fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 121). The value of the set fluctuation time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started.

If it is determined in step Sn1201 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sn1201: NO), the fluctuation end processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sn1201 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (Sn1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1202, and the game times of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b correspond to the current game times. Performs processing to end the fluctuation of the symbol in the symbol display unit. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1203, and the special figure change display flag stored in the special figure change display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing step Sn1203, the process proceeds to step Sn1204.

In step Sn1204, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to the current game round is a big hit winning or a small winning winning. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag (any of the jackpot A flag to the jackpot E flag) or the small hit flag (any of the small hit a flag to the small hit g flag) of the RAM 64 is ON. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is ON in step Sn1204 (Sn1204: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1206.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1204 that any of the big hit flags or small hit flags is ON (Sn1204: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1205. In step Sn1205, the open / close execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the variable end processing is terminated.

In step Sn1206, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sn1206 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Sn1206: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1206 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sn1206: NO), the variation end processing is terminated as it is.

In step Sn1207, the value of the game count counter PNC is subtracted by 1. The game count counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of game rounds (hereinafter, also referred to as guaranteed number of games) executed as a high-frequency support mode. In this embodiment, the guaranteed number of games is set to 100 times. That is, in step Sn1207, when the game times are executed once as the high frequency support mode, the number of games that can be executed as the high frequency support mode is counted by subtracting 1 from the game number counter PNC. After executing step Sn1207, the process proceeds to step Sn1208.

In step Sn1208, it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter PNC exceeds 0. That is, it is determined whether or not the guaranteed number of games is less than 100 times. If it is determined in step Sn1208 that the value of the game count counter PNC exceeds 0 (guaranteed game times is less than 100) (Sn1208: YES), the variable end processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1208 that the value of the game count counter PNC does not exceed 0 (guaranteed game times have reached 100) (Sn1208: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1209 and the high frequency support mode flag is set. Turn it off. After that, the variable end processing is terminated.

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 116: Sn0607) of the normal process.

FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step Sn1301, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the large winning opening opening / closing processing period (at the beginning of the ending period) in the opening / closing execution mode, and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the open / close execution mode.

If it is determined in step Sn1301 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sn1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1302, and it is determined whether or not the open / close processing period flag is ON. The open / close processing period flag is the period during which the opening period ends in the open / close execution mode and the open / close operation of the first open / close door 36b of the first variable winning device 36 or the second open / close door 212b of the second variable winning device 212 is executed. It is turned on at the timing when the large winning opening opening / closing processing period is started, and is turned off at the timing when the opening / closing operation of the first opening / closing door 36b or the second opening / closing door 212b is completed.

If it is determined in step Sn1302 that the open / close processing period flag is not ON (Sn1302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1303, and it is determined whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the beginning of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Sn1303 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sn1303: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1304 to determine whether or not the open / close execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sn1304 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (Sn1304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1305. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1304 that the open / close execution mode flag is OFF (Sn1304: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

In step Sn1305, it is determined whether or not a small hit is won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the trigger for starting the current open / close execution mode is triggered by the small hit winning. If it is determined in step Sn1305 that the small hit is not won, that is, that the opening / closing execution mode of this time is triggered by the big hit winning (Sn1305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1306.

In step Sn1306, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. That is, when the open / close execution mode triggered by the big hit is started, the high frequency support mode is stopped. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn1307.

On the other hand, in step Sn1305, if it is determined that the small hit is won, that is, that the opening / closing execution mode of this time is triggered by the small hit winning (Sn1305: YES), the step is performed without executing step Sn1306. Proceed to Sn1307.

In step Sn1307, an opening / closing scenario setting process for setting an opening / closing scenario is executed. The opening / closing scenario defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the first opening / closing door 36b and the second opening / closing door 212b in the round game (large winning opening opening / closing process). The condition for shifting the 212b from the closed state to the open state (hereinafter, also referred to as "open condition") and the condition for shifting the first open / close door 36b or the second open / close door 212b from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter, "closed condition"). ") Is a recorded program. The opening / closing scenario is stored in the opening / closing scenario storage area 63i of the ROM 63. The opening / closing scenario setting process will be described later. After executing step Sn1307, the process proceeds to step Sn1308 described above.

In step Sn1308, the opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period (hereinafter, also referred to as an opening time) in the open / close execution mode. After executing step Sn1308, the process proceeds to step Sn1309.

In step Sn1309, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (Sn0603) in the normal process (FIG. 116). This opening command contains information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current open / close execution mode. The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the large winning opening opening / closing processing period based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step Sn1309, the process proceeds to step Sn1310, and the opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sn1303 that the opening period flag is ON (Sn1303: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1311.

In step Sn1311, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter T3 is "0". The third timer counter T3 is a timer counter that down-counts the time of the opening period. If it is determined in step Sn1311 that the opening period has ended (Sn1311: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1312 and the opening period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn1313.

In step Sn1313, a round display start process for notifying the type of the opening / closing execution mode this time is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the above address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is specified from the specified stop result data. Confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round display unit 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step Sn1313, the process proceeds to step Sn1314.

In step Sn1314, the open / close processing period flag is turned ON. In the following step Sn1315, an open / close process start command is set. The open / close process start command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the open / close process period has started. The open / close process start command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 116: step Sn0603) of the normal process. After executing step Sn1314, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sn1302 that the open / close processing period flag is ON (Sn1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1315 to execute the large winning opening opening / closing process. The process of opening and closing the large winning opening will be described later. After executing step Sn1315, the process proceeds to step Sn1316.

In step Sn1316, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed depending on whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of executed rounds is "0". If it is determined in step Sn1316 that the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed (Sn1316: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1317. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1316 that the large winning opening opening / closing process has not been completed (Sn1316: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

In step Sn1317, the open / close processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Sn1318.

In step Sn1318, the round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is terminated so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step Sn1318, the process proceeds to step Sn1319.

In step Sn1319, the ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the ending period (hereinafter, also referred to as an ending time) in the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set in each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sn1319, the process proceeds to step Sn1320.

In step Sn1320, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Sn0603 in the normal process (FIG. 116). The ending command includes information on the ending time set in the ending time setting process (Sn1320). The voice emission control device 90 executes an ending effect based on receiving an ending command. After executing step Sn1320, the process proceeds to step Sn1321.

In step Sn1321, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sn1301 that the ending period flag is ON (Sn1301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1322.

In step Sn1322, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sn1319), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step Sn1322 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Sn1322: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1323.

In step Sn1323, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1324 to execute the transition process at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of the game times after the end of the current ending period. Details of the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sn1324, the process proceeds to step Sn1325.

In step Sn1325, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag due to the V winning (hereinafter, also referred to as the V winning jackpot flag) is ON. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the jackpot Va flag, jackpot Vb flag, jackpot Vc flag, jackpot Vd flag, jackpot Ve flag, jackpot Vf flag, and jackpot Vg flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sn1325 that the V winning jackpot flag is not ON (Sn1325: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1326.

In step Sn1326, the open / close execution mode flag is turned off. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sn1325 that the big hit flag due to the V winning is ON, that is, the opening / closing execution mode this time is triggered by the small hit winning, and the big winning opening in the opening / closing execution mode. When the jackpot due to winning the V winning opening is confirmed in the opening / closing process (Sn1325: YES), the game state transition process is terminated without turning off the opening / closing execution mode flag. If a game ball wins in the V winning opening and the big hit is confirmed in the opening / closing execution mode in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit winning, the V winning is performed again after the end of the opening / closing execution mode during the execution. In order to execute the open / close execution mode corresponding to the confirmed jackpot, the open / close execution mode flag is not turned off and the ON state is continued. By doing so, the open / close execution mode can be started again the next time the game state transition process is executed.

<Open / close scenario setting process>
Next, the opening / closing scenario setting process will be described. The opening / closing scenario setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 123: Sn1307) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the opening / closing scenario setting process. In step Sn1401, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON. The big winning opening opening / closing process in the open / close execution mode may be triggered by the big hit winning or the small hit winning, and this process triggers the big hit winning. It is determined whether it is the winning opening opening / closing process or the large winning opening opening / closing process triggered by the small hit winning. If it is determined in step Sn1401 that the jackpot flag is ON (Sn1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1402.

In step Sn1402, an opening / closing scenario corresponding to the type of jackpot is set. Specifically, an opening / closing scenario is set according to the type of the jackpot flag (big hit A flag to jackpot E flag, jackpot flag Va to jackpot Vg). As described with reference to FIGS. 103, 104, and 105, when the jackpot A or the jackpot B is won, the opening / closing scenario [LOP10] is set so that the round game of 10R is executed. When the jackpot C is won, the opening / closing scenario [LOP15] is set so that the round game of 15R is executed. If the jackpot D or jackpot E is won, the opening / closing scenario [LOP5] is set so that the round game of 5R is executed. When the jackpot Va or the jackpot Vb is won, the opening / closing scenario [LOP10] is set so that the round game of 10R is executed. When the jackpot Vc or the jackpot Vd is won, the opening / closing scenario [LOP15] is set so that the round game of 15R is executed. When the jackpot Ve, jackpot Vf, or jackpot Vg is won, the opening / closing scenario [LOP5] is set so that the round game of 5R is executed.

After the execution of step Sn1402, the opening / closing scenario setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sn1401 that the jackpot flag is not ON (Sn1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1403. In step Sn1403, an opening / closing scenario corresponding to the type of small hit is set. Specifically, an opening / closing scenario is set according to the type of the small hit flag (small hit a flag to small hit g flag). As described with reference to FIGS. 103, 104, and 105, when the small hit a is won, the opening / closing scenario [SOPa] is set. In the opening / closing scenario [SOPa], the number of rounds is set to 1R, and the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 212a when the second opening / closing door 212b is open is easily attracted by the croon 220. The opening / closing patterns of the 1 distribution valve 218 and the 2nd distribution valve 219 are set. If the small hit b is won, the opening / closing scenario [SOPb] is set. In the opening / closing scenario [SOPb], the number of rounds is set to 1R, and the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 212a when the second opening / closing door 212b is open is easily attracted by the croon 220. The opening / closing patterns of the 1 distribution valve 218 and the 2nd distribution valve 219 are set. If the small hit c is won, the opening / closing scenario [SOPc] is set. In the opening / closing scenario [SOPc], the number of rounds is set to 1R, and the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 212a when the second opening / closing door 212b is open is easily attracted by the croon 220. The opening / closing patterns of the 1 distribution valve 218 and the 2nd distribution valve 219 are set. If the small hit d is won, the opening / closing scenario [SOPd] is set. In the opening / closing scenario [SOPd], the number of rounds is set to 1R, so that the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 212a when the second opening / closing door 212b is open is likely to be attracted to the second V winning opening V2. The opening / closing pattern of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 is set. If the small hit e is won, the opening / closing scenario [SOPe] is set. In the opening / closing scenario [SOPe], the number of rounds is set to 1R, so that the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 212a when the second opening / closing door 212b is open is likely to be attracted to the second V winning opening V2. The opening / closing pattern of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 is set. If the small hit f is won, the opening / closing scenario [SOPf] is set. In the opening / closing scenario [SOPf], the number of rounds is set to 1R, so that the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 212a when the second opening / closing door 212b is open is likely to be attracted to the second V winning opening V2. The opening / closing pattern of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 is set. If the small hit g is won, the opening / closing scenario [SOPg] is set. In the opening / closing scenario [SOPg], the number of rounds is set to 1R, and the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 212a when the second opening / closing door 212b is open is easily attracted to the discharge port 225. The opening / closing patterns of the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219 are set. After executing step Sn1403, the process proceeds to step Sn1404.

In step Sn1404, the V winning opening entry permission flag is turned ON. The V winning opening entry permission flag is a flag that turns ON when an opening / closing scenario triggered by a small hit is set, and only when the V winning opening entry permission flag is ON, the ball enters the V winning opening. In this case, it is determined that the ball has entered the V winning opening (see FIG. 115: Sn0501). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from being determined when the game ball unreasonably enters the V winning opening due to some unexpected problem or the like. After executing step Sn1404, the opening / closing scenario setting process is terminated.

<Large winning opening opening / closing process>
Next, the process of opening and closing the large winning opening will be described. The large winning opening opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 123: Sn1315) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening / closing process. In step Sn1501, the opening / closing scenario set in the opening / closing scenario setting process (FIG. 123: Sn1309) is read out. Then, the process proceeds to step S1502.

In step Sn1502, it is determined whether or not the first opening / closing door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the first variable winning driving unit 36c. If it is determined in step Sn1502 that the first opening / closing door 36b is not open (Sn1502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1503.

In step Sn1503, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the first opening / closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening / closing scenario set by the opening / closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the first opening / closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sn1503 that the opening condition of the first opening / closing door 36b is satisfied (Sn1503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1504.

In step Sn1504, the first opening / closing door 36b is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn1505.

In step Sn1505, an open / close door open command is set. The opening / closing door opening command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the first opening / closing door 36b has been opened. The opening / closing door opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 116: step Sn0603) of the normal processing. After executing step Sn1505, the process proceeds to step Sn1509.

If it is determined in step Sn1503 that the opening condition of the first opening / closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sn1503: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1509 without executing steps Sn1504 and Sn1505.

If it is determined in step Sn1502 that the first opening / closing door 36b is open (Sn1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1506.

In step Sn1506, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the first opening / closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening / closing scenario set by the opening / closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the first opening / closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sn1506 that the closing condition of the first opening / closing door 36b is satisfied (Sn1506: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1507.

In step Sn1507, the first opening / closing door 36b is closed. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn1508.

In step Sn1508, the first open / close door closing command is set. The first opening / closing door closing command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the first opening / closing door 36b has been closed. The first open / close door closing command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 116: step Sn0603) of the normal process. After executing step Sn1508, the process proceeds to step Sn1509.

If it is determined in step Sn1506 that the closing condition of the first opening / closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sn1506: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1509 without executing steps Sn1507 and Sn1508.

In step Sn1509, it is determined whether or not the second opening / closing door 212b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the second variable winning driving unit 212c. If it is determined in step Sn1509 that the second opening / closing door 212b is not open (Sn1509: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1510.

In step Sn1510, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the second opening / closing door 212b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening / closing scenario set by the opening / closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the second opening / closing door 212b. If it is determined in step Sn1510 that the opening condition of the second opening / closing door 212b is satisfied (Sn1510: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1511.

In step Sn1511, the second opening / closing door 212b is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn1512.

In step Sn1512, a second opening / closing door opening command is set. The second opening / closing door opening command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the second opening / closing door 212b has been opened. The second open / close door open command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 116: step Sn0603) of the normal process. After executing step Sn1512, the process proceeds to step Sn1516.

If it is determined in step Sn1510 that the opening condition of the second opening / closing door 212b is not satisfied (Sn1510: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1516 without executing steps Sn1511 and Sn1512.

If it is determined in step Sn1509 that the second opening / closing door 212b is open (Sn1509: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1513.

In step Sn1513, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the second opening / closing door 212b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening / closing scenario set by the opening / closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the second opening / closing door 212b. If it is determined in step Sn1513 that the closing condition of the second opening / closing door 212b is satisfied (Sn1513: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1514.

In step Sn1514, the second opening / closing door 212b is closed. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn1515.

In step Sn1515, a second opening / closing door closing command is set. The second opening / closing door closing command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the second opening / closing door 212b has closed. The second open / close door closing command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 116: step Sn0603) of the normal process. After executing step Sn1515, the process proceeds to step Sn1516.

If it is determined in step Sn1513 that the closing condition of the second opening / closing door 212b is not satisfied (Sn1513: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1516 without executing steps Sn1514 and Sn1515.

In step Sn1516, it is determined whether or not the first distribution valve 218 is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the first distribution valve driving unit 218a. If it is determined in step Sn1516 that the first distribution valve 218 is not open (Sn1516: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1517.

In step Sn1517, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the first distribution valve 218 is satisfied. Specifically, the opening / closing scenario set by the opening / closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the first distribution valve 218. If it is determined in step Sn1517 that the opening condition of the first distribution valve 218 is satisfied (Sn1517: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1518.

In step Sn1518, the first distribution valve 218 is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn1519.

In step Sn1519, the first distribution valve open command is set. The first distribution valve open command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the first distribution valve 218 has been opened. The first distribution valve opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 116: step Sn0603) of the normal process. After executing step Sn1519, the process proceeds to step Sn1523.

If it is determined in step Sn1517 that the opening condition of the first distribution valve 218 is not satisfied (Sn1517: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1523 without executing steps Sn1518 and Sn1519.

If it is determined in step Sn1516 that the first distribution valve 218 is open (Sn1516: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1520.

In step Sn1520, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the first distribution valve 218 is satisfied. Specifically, the opening / closing scenario set by the opening / closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the first distribution valve 218. If it is determined in step Sn1520 that the closing condition of the first distribution valve 218 is satisfied (Sn1520: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1521.

In step Sn1521, the first distribution valve 218 is closed. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn1522.

In step Sn1522, the first distribution valve closing command is set. The first distribution valve closing command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the first distribution valve 218 has closed. The first distribution valve closing command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 116: step Sn0603) of the normal process. After executing step Sn1522, the process proceeds to step Sn1523.

If it is determined in step Sn1520 that the closing condition of the first distribution valve 218 is not satisfied (Sn1520: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1523 without executing steps Sn1521 and Sn1522.

In step Sn1523, it is determined whether or not the second distribution valve 219 is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the second distribution valve driving unit 219a. If it is determined in step Sn1523 that the second distribution valve 219 is not open (Sn1523: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1524.

In step Sn1524, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the second distribution valve 219 is satisfied. Specifically, the opening / closing scenario set by the opening / closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the second distribution valve 219. If it is determined in step Sn1524 that the opening condition of the second distribution valve 219 is satisfied (Sn1524: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1525.

In step Sn1525, the second distribution valve 219 is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn1526.

In step Sn1526, the second distribution valve open command is set. The second distribution valve opening command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the second distribution valve 219 has been opened. The second distribution valve open command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 116: step Sn0603) of the normal process. After executing step Sn1526, the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed.

If it is determined in step Sn1524 that the opening condition of the second distribution valve 219 is not satisfied (Sn1524: NO), the large winning opening opening / closing process is terminated without executing steps Sn1525 and Step Sn1526.

If it is determined in step Sn1523 that the second distribution valve 219 is open (Sn1523: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1527.

In step Sn1527, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the second distribution valve 219 is satisfied. Specifically, the opening / closing scenario set by the opening / closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the second distribution valve 219. If it is determined in step Sn1527 that the closing condition of the second distribution valve 219 is satisfied (Sn1527: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1528.

In step Sn1528, the second distribution valve 219 is closed. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn1529.

In step Sn1529, a second distribution valve closing command is set. The second distribution valve closing command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the second distribution valve 219 has closed. The second distribution valve closing command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 116: step Sn0603) of the normal process. After executing step Sn1529, the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed.

If it is determined in step Sn1527 that the closing condition of the second distribution valve 219 is not satisfied (Sn1527: NO), the large winning opening opening / closing process is terminated without executing steps Sn1528 and Sn1529.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 123: Sn1324) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of the ending period. In step Sn1601, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sn1601 that the small hit flag is not ON (Sn1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1602.

In step Sn1602, the value of the game count counter PNC corresponding to the winning type is set. That is, when the high frequency support mode is executed after the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the big hit is executed, the number of game times executed as the high frequency mode is set as the game number counter PNC. More specifically, the value shown in the column of the number of high-frequency support games in the distribution table for big hits in FIGS. 103, 104, and 105 is set. After executing step Sn1602, the process proceeds to step Sn1603.

In step Sn1603, the flag erasing process is executed. Specifically, the flag indicating the game state is deleted. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1604, and it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter PNC is larger than 0. In step Sn1604, when the game count counter PNC is not larger than 0, that is, when the game count counter PNC is 0 (Sn1604: NO), the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated as it is. More specifically, when the trigger for executing the opening / closing execution mode this time is a big hit, and the type of the big hit is a big hit type that does not shift to high frequency support after the end of the opening / closing execution mode (for example, big hit B or big hit). In step Sn1602, 0 is set in the game count counter PNC (Sn1604: NO), and the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated as the process progresses.

If it is determined in step Sn1604 that the game count counter PNC is not 0 (Sn1604: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1605 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. After executing step S1605, the process proceeds to step Sn1606 to set the high frequency support mode command. After that, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1601 that the small hit flag is ON (Sn1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1607. In step Sn1607, it is determined whether or not the V winning type flag is ON. The V winning type flag is a flag that turns ON when a game ball enters the V winning opening (see FIG. 115: Sn0504). If it is determined in step S1607 that the V winning type flag is ON (Sn1607: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1608.

In step Sn1608, the jackpot flag corresponding to the V winning type flag is turned ON. Specifically, the jackpot Va flag for the V winning Va flag, the jackpot Vb flag for the V winning Vb flag, the jackpot Vc flag for the V winning Vc flag, and the jackpot for the V winning Vd flag. Turn on the jackpot Ve flag for the Vd flag and the V winning Ve flag, the jackpot Vf flag for the V winning Vf flag, and the jackpot Vg flag for the V winning Vg flag.

After executing step Sn1608, the process proceeds to step Sn1609 to execute the flag erasing process. After that, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

If it is determined in step Sn1607 that the V winning type flag is not ON (Sn1607: NO), the process proceeds to step S1609 without executing step S1608, and the flag erasing process is executed. After that, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electric service support>
Next, the processing for electric service support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 116: Sn0608) of the normal process.

FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing a process for electric service support. In step Sn1701, it is determined whether or not the support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The supporting flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened and turned off when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sn1701 that the supporting flag is not ON (Sn1701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1702.

In step Sn1702, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned on when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is ON. Is. If it is determined in step Sn1702 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sn1702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1703.

In step Sn1703, it is determined whether or not the value of the electric timer counter Td provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the electric service timer counter Td is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38. The count value set in the electric service timer counter Td is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

If it is determined in step Sn1703 that the value of the timer counter Td for electric service is not "0" (Sn1703: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sn1703: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1704.

In step Sn1704, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display of the symbol in the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step Sn1704 that it is the end timing of the variable display (Sn1704: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1705, the off display is set, and then the main electric service support process is terminated. By setting the off display, the variable display of the symbol in the normal figure unit 38 is terminated in the state where the off display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1704 that it is not the end timing of the variation display (Sn1704: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1706.

In step Sn1706, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0". If it is determined in step Sn1706 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is "0" (Sn1706: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1706 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0" (Sn1706: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1707.

In step Sn1707, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step Sn1708 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If the mode is not the open / close execution mode in step Sn1707 (Sn1707: NO) and the high frequency support mode is in step Sn1708 (Sn1708: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1709 and the electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the electric accessory timer counter Td. The electric service timer counter Td is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn1710.

In step Sn1710, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sn1709 is a support winning. If it is determined in step Sn1710 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is the support winning (Sn1710: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1711 and the support winning flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1712, and the high-frequency support mode electric function opening / closing scenario setting process is executed. Specifically, it is a process of setting an opening / closing scenario in which an opening pattern of the electric accessory 34a is set when the electric accessory opening lottery is won in the high frequency support mode. In the opening / closing scenario, an opening condition of the electric accessory 34a (electric service opening condition) and a closing condition of the electric accessory 34a (electric service closing condition) are set. In step Sn1712, after executing the electric service opening / closing scenario setting process for the high frequency support mode, the main electric service support process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1710 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not the support winning (Sn1710: NO), the electric service support process is terminated without executing the processes of step Sn1711 and step Sn1712. ..

If it is determined in step Sn1707 that the open / close execution mode is set (Sn1707: YES), or if it is determined in step Sn1708 that the mode is not in the high frequency support mode (Sn1708: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1713 and the motorized accessory opening lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric service holding area 64d is shifted, and when the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 or 1, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the electric accessory timer counter Td. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn1714.

In step Sn1714, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sn1713 is the support winning. If it is determined in step Sn1714 that the support is not won (Sn1714: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1714 that the support is won (Sn1714: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1715 and the support winning flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1716, and the low-frequency support mode electric function opening / closing scenario setting process is executed. Specifically, it is a process of setting an opening / closing scenario in which an opening pattern of the electric accessory 34a is set when the electric accessory opening lottery is won in the low frequency support mode. In the opening / closing scenario, an opening condition of the electric accessory 34a (electric service opening condition) and a closing condition of the electric accessory 34a (electric service closing condition) are set. In step Sn1716, after executing the low frequency support mode electric service opening / closing scenario setting process, the main electric service support process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sn1702 that the support winning flag is ON (Sn1702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1717, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter Td for electric service is "0". If it is determined in step Sn1717 that the value of the timer counter Td for electric service is not "0" (Sn1717: NO), the pattern variation is being displayed in the normal drawing unit 38, so that the process for supporting main electric service is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1717 that the value of the timer counter Td for electric service is "0" (Sn1717: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1718.

In step Sn1718, the hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the pattern in the normal drawing unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped and displayed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn1719, the supporting flag is turned ON, and the support winning flag is turned OFF. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sn1701 that the supporting flag is ON (Sn1701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1720, and an electric function opening / closing control process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. The details of the electric service opening / closing control process will be described later. After executing step Sn1720, the process for supporting the main electric service is terminated.

<Electric service opening / closing process>
Next, the electric function opening / closing process will be described. The electric service opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 127: Sn1720) of the electric service support process.

FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the electric service opening / closing process. In step Sn1801, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. If it is determined in step Sn1801 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sn1801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn1802.

In step Sn1802, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the set opening / closing scenario is satisfied. Specifically, the time for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened (once in the present embodiment) when winning one electric accessory opening lottery and maintaining the closed state of the electric accessory 34a is performed. By counting with the timer counter whether or not the timing of opening has passed, it is determined whether or not the condition for shifting the electric accessory 34a to the open state is satisfied. If it is determined in step Sn1802 that the opening condition of the opening / closing scenario is not satisfied (Sn1802: NO), the electric service opening / closing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1802 that the opening condition of the opening / closing scenario is satisfied (Sn1802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1803.

In step Sn1803, the electric accessory 34a is opened. After executing step Sn1803, the process proceeds to step Sn1804.

In step Sn1804, an electric service release command is set. The electric service release command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 116: step Sn0603) of the normal process. The voice light emitting device that has received the electric service release command executes the setting for executing the effect for electric service release. After that, the electric service opening / closing process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1801 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sn1801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1805.

In step Sn1805, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the electric accessory 34a is satisfied. If it is determined in step Sn1805 that the closing condition is not satisfied (Sn1805: NO), the electric service opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn1805 that the closing condition is satisfied (Sn1805: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn1806.

In step Sn1806, the electric accessory 34a is closed. After executing step Sn1806, the process proceeds to step Sn1807.

In step Sn1807, a command to close the electric service is set. The electric service closing command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 116: step Sn0603) of the normal process. The voice emitting device that has received the electric service closing command executes the setting for executing the effect for closing the electric service. After that, the electric service opening / closing process is completed.

<< 3-6 >> Various processes executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device will be described. The process executed by the voice emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed with a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described.

In step Sn1901, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound / light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main MPU 62, and the commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Read sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step Sn1901, the process proceeds to step Sn1902.

In step Sn1902, the game rotation effect processing is executed. In the game round effect processing, processing related to the effect to be executed in the game round from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the symbol is performed. The details of the game time production process will be described later. After executing step Sn1902, the process proceeds to step Sn1903.

In step Sn1903, a game ball distribution mode detection process is executed. The game ball distribution mode detection process is a process for detecting the distribution mode of the game ball that is launched by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player and circulates in the game area. By executing the game ball distribution mode detection process, the player's stoppage is detected. The game ball distribution mode detection process will be described later. After executing step Sn1903, the process proceeds to step Sn1904.

In step Sn1904, other processing is executed. Other processes include a process of displaying the effect moving image on the symbol display device 41 and a process of displaying the demo moving image on the symbol display device 41 during the opening / closing execution mode. After executing step Sn1904, the process proceeds to step Sn1905.

In step Sn1905, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the above-mentioned effect processing. After executing step Sn1905, the process proceeds to step Sn1906.

In step Sn1906, the audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read in the above-mentioned BGM process and each effect process. After executing step Sn1906, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Processing for game production>
Next, the processing for producing the game times will be described. The game rotation effect processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 129: Sn1902).

FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing a game rotation effect processing. In step Sn2001, it is determined whether or not the variation command and the type command have been received. If it is determined in step Sn2001 that the variation command and the type command have not been received (Sn20011: NO), the game round effect processing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn2001 that the variable command and the type command have been received (Sn20011: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn2002.

In step Sn2002, the variable command received this time is read, and from the command, the presence / absence of a big hit or a small hit, the type of the big hit or a small hit, the presence / absence of reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time are read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn2003.

In step Sn2003, the game rotation effect pattern setting process is executed. The game time effect pattern setting process is a process of determining and setting an effect pattern (preliminary effect, content of reach effect, execution timing) to be executed in this game time based on the effect pattern table. The details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sn2003, the process proceeds to step Sn2004.

In step Sn2004, the stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, when the result of the winning lottery of this game round is a big hit, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established on the effective line L of the symbol display device 41 is displayed. , Set as information of this stop symbol.

If the result of the winning lottery for this game round is a losing result (including a small hit), it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred from the content of the variable command. When it is determined that the reach is generated, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L, and the stop result is that the combination of the reach symbols is established on the effective line L. The information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach generation is not supported, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L, and the stop result is that the combination of reach symbols is not established on the effective line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the stop symbol of this time. After executing step Sn2004, the process proceeds to step Sn2005.

In step Sn2005, a process for setting a variation display pattern of the current game times is executed. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the current game is specified from the content of the fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information on the stop symbol set in the above step Sn2004 are combined. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn2006.

In step Sn2006, information on the effect pattern, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern set in this game round is set in the effect command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn2007, and the effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect content corresponding to the received effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step Sn2007, the process proceeds to step Sn2008 to execute the update process at the start of fluctuation. The update process at the start of the fluctuation is a process for updating the hold display in the first hold display area Ds1 or the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. After executing step Sn2008, the process for producing the game round is terminated.

<Game times production pattern setting process>
Next, the game rotation effect pattern setting process will be described. The game rotation effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 130: Sn2003) of the game rotation effect processing.

FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing a game rotation effect pattern setting process. In step Sn2101, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery of the game times, which is the target of setting the effect pattern, is a big hit. Specifically, the determination is made based on the information read from the variation command and the type command in step Sn2002. If it is determined in step Sn2101 that the result of the winning lottery of the game times for which the effect pattern is set is a big hit (Sn2101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn2102.

In step Sn2102, the effect pattern setting process for the jackpot is executed. Specifically, from the effect patterns set corresponding to each jackpot type, the effect pattern corresponding to the jackpot type in the game times to be processed and the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation time setting process is selected and executed. Set as an effect pattern.

As described in the variation time setting process, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the jackpot variation time table is such that the variation time becomes shorter as the total number of reserved pieces CRN increases. Is set to. Therefore, when the second start hold number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases, and when the first start hold number RaN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter. , The larger the number of second start hold numbers RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Therefore, the effect pattern set in the effect pattern setting process for the jackpot differs depending on the number of reserved CRNs at the time when the effect pattern of the game times to be processed is set.

After that, the game rotation effect pattern setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sn2101 that the result of the winning lottery for the game times for which the effect pattern is set is not a big hit (Sn2101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn2103. In step Sn2103, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery of the game times for which the effect pattern is set is a small hit. Specifically, the determination is made based on the information read from the variation command and the type command in step Sn2002.

If it is determined in step Sn2103 that the result of the winning lottery of the game times for which the effect pattern is set is a small hit (Sn2103: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn2104.

In step Sn2104, it is determined whether or not the type of the small hit is the small hit c. If it is determined in step Sn2104 that the type of small hit is small hit c (Sn2104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn2105.

In step Sn2105, it is determined whether or not the stop flag is ON. The stop-hit flag is a flag to be turned ON when it is detected in the game ball distribution mode detection process that the player has made a stop-hit in a game time other than the game times in which the small hit c has been won. The stop flag is turned off when a series of high-frequency support modes are completed. If it is determined in step Sn2105 that the stop flag is not ON (Sn2105: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn2106. As described in the outline of the processing by the game machine, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes the specific suggestion effect when the small hit c is won, but the specific suggestion effect is not executed, that is, , In order to prevent the player from making a stop in a game that is unlikely to have won the small hit c, the result of the winning lottery is a lottery result other than the small hit c. When it is detected that it is doing, the specific suggestion effect is not executed. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the stop flag is ON.

In step Sn2106, the effect pattern setting process for the small hit c is performed. Specifically, as described with reference to FIG. 108, an effect pattern for executing the specific suggestion effect is set. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of effect patterns for the small hit c are prepared, and from the effect patterns prepared according to the fluctuation time, the effect pattern according to the fluctuation time in the game times to be processed is selected. Select and set as the effect pattern to be executed.

As described in the variation time setting process, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the variation time table for small hits becomes shorter as the total number of reserved pieces CRN increases. Is set to. Therefore, when the second start hold number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases, and when the first start hold number RaN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter. , The larger the number of second start hold numbers RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Therefore, the effect pattern set in the effect pattern setting process for the small hit c differs depending on the number of reserved CRNs at the time when the effect pattern of the game times to be processed is set.

After that, the game rotation effect pattern setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sn2104 that the type of small hit is not the small hit c (Sn2104: NO), or if it is determined in step Sn2105 that the stop flag is ON (Sn2105: YES), the step. Proceed to Sn2107.

In step Sn2107, a normal effect pattern setting process for small hits is executed. The effect pattern is an effect pattern that does not execute the specific suggestion effect. Specifically, from the effect patterns set corresponding to each small hit type, the effect pattern corresponding to the small hit type in the game times to be processed and the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation time setting process is selected. , Set as an effect pattern to be executed.

As described in the variation time setting process, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the variation time table for small hits becomes shorter as the total number of reserved pieces CRN increases. Is set to. Therefore, when the second start hold number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases, and when the first start hold number RaN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter. , The larger the number of second start hold numbers RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Therefore, the effect pattern set in the effect pattern setting process for small hits differs depending on the number of reserved CRNs at the time when the effect pattern of the game times to be processed is set.

After executing step Sn2107, the game rotation effect pattern setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sn2103 that the result of the winning lottery of the game times for which the effect pattern is set is not a small hit (Sn2103: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn2108. In step Sn2108, it is determined whether or not reach occurs in the game times to be processed. If it is determined in step Sn2108 that reach will occur (Sn2108: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn2109.

In step Sn2109, the effect pattern setting process for generating reach is executed. Specifically, an effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time set for the game times to be processed is selected and set as an effect pattern to be executed.

As described in the variation time setting process, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the variation time table for reach generation becomes shorter as the total number of reserved pieces CRN increases. Is set to. Therefore, when the second start hold number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases, and when the first start hold number RaN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter. , The larger the number of second start hold numbers RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Therefore, the effect pattern set in the effect pattern setting process for generating reach differs depending on the number of reserved CRNs at the time when the effect pattern of the game times to be processed is set.

After that, the game rotation effect pattern setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sn2108 that reach does not occur (Sn2108: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn2110. In step S2110, the effect pattern setting process for non-reach generation is executed. Specifically, an effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time set for the game times to be processed is selected and set as an effect pattern to be executed.

As described in the variation time setting process, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the variation time table for non-reach generation has a shorter variation time as the total number of reserved pieces CRN increases. It is set to be. Therefore, when the second start hold number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases, and when the first start hold number RaN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter. , The larger the number of second start hold numbers RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Therefore, the effect pattern set in the effect pattern setting process for non-reach generation differs depending on the number of reserved CRNs at the time when the effect pattern of the game times to be processed is set.

After that, the game rotation effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Game ball distribution mode detection processing>
Next, the game ball distribution mode detection process will be described. The game ball distribution mode detection process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 129: Sn1903).

FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing a game ball distribution mode detection process. In step Sn2201, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress. Specifically, in the command storage process (Sn1901) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 129), it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode command is received. If it is determined in step Sn2201 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (Sn2201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn2202.

In step Sn2202, it is determined whether or not the game round is being executed. Specifically, when a variation command and a type command are received, it is determined whether or not the game is being executed based on the variation time included in the received information.

If it is determined in step Sn2202 that the game times are being executed (Sn2202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn2203 to execute the game ball number counting process.

The game ball number counting process is the number of game balls detected by the detection sensor 205 (see FIG. 97) of the delay mechanism 202 for each game number executed during the high frequency support (hereinafter, also referred to as the game ball distribution number). Is the process of counting. Specifically, each information of the lottery result, the fluctuation time, and the number of distributions of the winning lottery is counted for each game number executed in the high frequency support mode, in the game ball number count provided in the work RAM 104 of the display control device 100. Store in the memory area.

FIG. 133 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a game ball number count memory area. As shown in the figure, in the game ball count memory area, a series of high-frequency support modes (high-frequency support modes executed when one big hit is won) are started, and the game times that have been executed most recently. As a result of the winning lottery for each game round, the fluctuation time, the number of game balls distributed, and the distribution frequency are recorded during the period up to. In the variable time column, the value of the variable time for each game is recorded based on the information of the variable time included in the received variable command. FIG. 40X shows information corresponding to four game times. For example, when the game times are executed N times (N is an integer of 1 or more) in the high frequency support mode, the N times are performed. Information corresponding to the game times of is recorded in the game ball count memory area.

In the distribution number column, the number of game balls detected by the detection sensor 205 during the period in which each game round is executed is recorded. Then, in the distribution frequency column, the number of game balls detected by the detection sensor 205 per unit time (1 second in this embodiment) is recorded. The value of the distribution frequency is calculated by executing the calculation of (number of game balls distributed / fluctuation time) in the calculation process (Sn2205) for determining the stoppage, which will be described later.

The description returns to FIG. 132. After executing step Sn2203, the process proceeds to step Sn2204, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing to end the game round.

If it is determined in step Sn2204 that it is the timing to end the game round (Sn2204: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn2205. In step Sn2205, the stop hitting determination calculation process is executed. Specifically, as described above, the calculation of (number of distribution / variation time) is executed from the value of the fluctuation time and the number of distribution of game balls recorded in the game ball count memory area for each game. Record the calculated value in the distribution frequency column of the game ball count memory area. In this embodiment, the unit of distribution frequency is [pieces / second]. Further, in the following description, the notation of the unit of distribution frequency may be omitted. After executing step Sn2205, the process proceeds to step Sn2206.

In step Sn2206, it is determined whether or not a predetermined stop-stop condition is satisfied based on the information recorded in the game ball count memory area (hereinafter, also referred to as distribution mode information). The stop hitting condition is a condition for determining whether or not the player has made a stop hit in a game round other than the game round in which the winning lottery is a small hit c. If the stop hitting condition is satisfied, the stop hitting condition is satisfied. Is determined to be executed.

In the present embodiment, the following determination criteria are used to determine whether or not the stop-stop condition is satisfied.
-Judgment Criteria 1: If the distribution mode information has not yet been recorded in the game ball count memory area, it is determined that the stop-stop condition is not satisfied.
-Judgment Criteria 2: When the distribution mode information in the game times (hereinafter, also referred to as the standard game times) in which the small hit c is won is recorded, and the distribution frequency in the standard game times is 1.0 or more. In addition, if the distribution frequency is less than 1.0 in any one of the game times of the lottery result other than the latest small hit c before and after the standard game time, the stop condition is satisfied. judge.
Judgment Criteria 3: When the information in the standard game times is recorded and the distribution frequency in the standard game times is less than 1.0, the distribution frequency in other game times is less than 1.0. Even so, it is determined that the stop-stop condition is not satisfied.
-Judgment Criteria 4: If the standard game times have not been executed yet, the distribution frequency will be one of the game times other than the already executed standard game times (game times of the lottery result other than the small hit c). If it is less than 1.0 times, it is determined that the stop hitting condition is satisfied.
-Judgment Criteria 5: In cases other than the above-mentioned Judgment Criteria 1 to Judgment Criteria 4, it is determined that the stop-stop condition is not satisfied.

In step Sn2206, it is determined whether or not the stop-stop condition is satisfied based on the above-mentioned determination criteria. In addition, not limited to the judgment criteria of the contents of the above-mentioned judgment criteria 1 to judgment criteria 5, other judgment criteria may be adopted. For example, the value of the distribution frequency in the game times other than the small hit c in the period from the game times of the small hit c to the next game times of the small hit c is the distribution frequency of the game times of the small hit c. If it is smaller than a predetermined number by a predetermined number or more, it may be determined to be a stop. In addition, various judgment criteria may be used.

If it is determined in step Sn2206 that the stop striking condition is satisfied (Sn2206: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn2207 and the stop striking flag is turned ON. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn2208.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sn2201 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (Sn2201: NO), or when it is determined in step S2202 that the game round is not being executed (Sn2202: NO), or in step Sn2204, the game round is not being executed. If it is determined that it is not the end timing (Sn2204: NO), or if it is determined that the stop stop condition is not satisfied in step Sn2206 (Sn2206: NO), the process proceeds to step Sn2208 without executing step Sn2207. ..

In step Sn2208, it is determined whether or not the low frequency support mode command is received. If it is determined in step Sn2208 that the low frequency support mode command has been received (Sn2208: YES), the process proceeds to step Sn2209 to reset the game ball count memory area. That is, the distribution mode information recorded in the game ball count memory area is deleted. After executing step Sn2209, the process proceeds to step Sn2210, and the stop flag is turned off. After that, the game ball distribution mode detection process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sn2208 that the low frequency support mode command has not been received (Sn2208: NO), the game ball distribution mode detection process is terminated as it is.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, the process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly the main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and the processes that are executed when a command is received from the voice emission control device 90. There is a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes the main process after the power is turned on, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. If the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, the main process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the main process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described.

In step Sn2301, the initial setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the character information in the compressed format stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, the information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also, make other settings necessary for initialization. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn2302.

In step Sn2302, the interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process executed every time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sn2401, the command storage process is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed by detecting the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105. In the V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute the display instruction.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal generated in VDP105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is performed every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Therefore, since the VDP 105 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image is started or displayed during the drawing of the image. It is possible to suppress the expansion of an image accompanying a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information inside is stored. Hereinafter, the processing details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described.

In step Sn2501, command correspondence processing is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt processing (Fig. 135), and the processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when an effect command is stored, control of drawing and displaying an image is started so that the effect mode specified by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, and when it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of drawing and displaying an image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command correspondence process (Sn2501), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so that there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the voice emission control device 90 and the effect is started, it is highly possible that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop symbol set by the voice emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the mode. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41.

In step Sn2502, the display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command correspondence process (Sn2501) or the like. .. Then, the process proceeds to step Sn2503.

In step Sn2503, task processing is executed. In the task process, the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting process (Sn2502). In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step Sn2504.

In step Sn2504, the drawing process is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character determined by the task process (Sn2503) are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on these information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received at the time of the previous V interrupt processing on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process proceeds to step Sn2505, other processing is executed, and then the V interrupt processing is terminated. As described above, an example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the specific suggestion effect is executed in the game times in which the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c, so that the game recognizes that the specific suggestion effect is executed. It is possible to give a person a sense of expectation about the result of the winning lottery. Further, in the game round executed before the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c, the distribution mode in which the player has stopped the game ball is distributed. , Since the specific suggestion effect is not executed in the game times in which the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c, if the player wishes to execute the specific suggestion effect, the player will stop the operation of launching the game ball. The firing operation can be suppressed. As a result, when the player gives the player a privilege that is not planned for the gaming machine, the possibility of the specific suggestion effect is determined by the presence or absence of the stop. It is possible to suppress the granting of benefits to the unscheduled player.

In other words, when it is determined that the distribution mode of the game ball by the launching operation of the player is a stop, the specific suggestion effect is not executed even though the small hit c, so that the specific suggestion effect is performed. It is possible to urge the player who wants to execute the game ball to launch the game ball so that it is not determined to be a stop.

Further, when determining the production of the game times in which the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c, the distribution frequency in the detection sensor 205 in the game times in which the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c among the already executed game times , The result of the winning lottery is the game number to be executed from now on based on the distribution frequency in the detection sensor 205 in the game time in which the result of the winning lottery is the lottery result other than the small hit c among the already executed game times. Since it is determined whether or not to execute the specific suggestion effect in the game times with the small hit c, the distribution frequency in the detection sensor 205 in the game times in which the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c among the already executed game times By comparing with the distribution frequency in the detection sensor 205 in the game times in which the result of the winning lottery is the lottery result other than the small hit c among the already executed game times, the game in which the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c. It is possible to detect whether or not the player has switched the mode of launching the game ball between the times and the game times in which the result of the winning lottery is other than the small hit c. Therefore, for example, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the player is intentionally trying to obtain a privilege that is not planned by the gaming machine, and whether or not to execute the specific suggestion effect based on the determination result. Can be determined.

Further, the detection of the firing operation by the player (specifically, the detection of the stop hit) is detected based on the distribution frequency of the game ball in the detection sensor 205. Since the distribution frequency is the time average of the number of distributions, it is possible to accurately detect the distribution mode of the player by excluding the noise-like change of the distribution mode in a short period (for example, 1 second). In addition, the distribution frequency correlates with the launch mode of the game ball by the player. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that reflects the launch mode of the game ball by the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the effect in the game times to be executed is determined based on the distribution frequency in the game times in which the specific suggestion effect is executed, the launch mode of the player by executing the specific suggestion effect, that is, the specific suggestion effect is determined. It is possible to decide whether or not to execute the specific suggestion process after taking into consideration the reaction of the player and the psychology of the player due to the execution. That is, when deciding whether or not to execute the specific suggestion effect, the reaction of the player when the specific suggestion effect is previously executed can be taken into consideration, and the reaction of the player regarding whether or not the specific suggestion effect is executed can be taken into consideration. Can be controlled by feeding back.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, for each game round, the result of the winning lottery corresponding to the game round and the number of game balls distributed through the detection sensor 205 during the period during which the game round is executed. It is provided with a game ball count memory area for storing information associated with a certain number of distributions. The number of distributions correlates with the mode in which the player launches the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to execute various processes based on the lottery result of the winning lottery or the effect during the game rotation that reflects the lottery result, and the mode of launching the game ball by the player (the reaction of the player). For example, it is possible to feed back the reaction of the player to the effect reflecting the predetermined lottery result and select the effect in the game times to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, the game ball number count memory area also stores the fluctuation time of each game time in correspondence with each game time. Therefore, it is possible to calculate the frequency (distribution frequency) of the game balls circulating at a specific position in the game area based on the fluctuation time of the game times and the number of distributions, and the lottery result for each game time. , Based on the distribution frequency corresponding to the lottery result, it can be applied to various processes in the game times to be executed from now on. For example, it can be used not only for stopping but also for detecting the tendency of the launching mode of the game ball by the player and determining the effect in the game times to be executed from the detection result.

In the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game state is in the high frequency support mode, and when the game state is in the high frequency support mode, the distribution mode of the game ball for detecting the stop hit is detected. That is, in the low frequency support mode, the distribution mode of the game ball is not detected. More specifically, in the low frequency support mode, even if the game ball passes through the detection sensor 205, it is not even stored in the game ball count memory area. Therefore, the processing in the low frequency support mode can be simplified.

Further, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the flow path 215, the crune 220, and the flow path 217 in the V winning mechanism 210, the first V winning opening V1 is set from the time when the game ball enters the second large winning opening 212a. The time to reach is longer than the time from when the game ball enters the second large winning opening 212a to when it reaches the second V winning opening V2. It is more advantageous for the player that the game ball enters the 1st V winning opening V1 than the game ball enters the 2nd V winning opening V2, and the game ball enters the 2nd large winning opening 212a. Since the time from the time point to the time when the first V winning opening V1 is reached is longer than the time from the time when the game ball enters the second large winning opening 212a to the time when the game ball reaches the second V winning opening V2. When the game ball is distributed to the flow path 215 by the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219, the player is expected to enter the first V winning opening V1. On the other hand, it can be continuously granted for a long period of time. On the other hand, when the game ball is distributed to the flow path 217 by the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219, the negative tension that the game ball enters the second V winning opening V2. A feeling (sense of crisis) can be given to the player for a short period of time. As a result, a gaming machine that gives the player a well-balanced inflection of expectation is realized, in which the sense of expectation is given to the player for a long time and the sense of crisis is given to the player for a short time. be able to.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment depends on the result of the winning lottery.
Since the flow paths (flow paths 215, flow path 216, flow path 217) to which the game balls entered from the second large winning opening 212a are distributed are different, it is possible to further draw the player's attention to the result of the winning lottery. .. Further, in addition to the result of the winning lottery, the player can be attracted to the method of distributing the game balls by the first distribution valve 218 and the second distribution valve 219, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can obtain the following effects by providing the delay mechanism 202. That is, in the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is a small hit, the game ball launched to the game area PA before the result of the winning lottery is notified has the second opening / closing door 212b triggered by the small hit. It is possible to reach the second big winning opening 212a during the transition to the open state, and in the game round where the result of the winning lottery is a small hit, it is fired to the game area PA after the result of the lottery is notified. It becomes impossible for the game ball to reach the second big winning opening 212a during the period when the second opening / closing door 212b is in the open state due to the small hit.

Therefore, when it is recognized by the notification of the result of the winning lottery in the game round that the result of the winning lottery is a small hit c, the game ball is fired after the notification, and the game ball is inserted into the second large winning opening 212a. If it is recognized by the notification of the result of the winning lottery in the game round that the result of the winning lottery is not the small hit c or the small hit other than the small hit c, the second big winning opening without firing the game ball. It is possible to suppress the intentional switching (for example, stop hitting) of the launch mode of the game ball for each winning lottery result by the player, such as not allowing the game ball to enter the 212a.

<< 3-7 >> Modification example of the third embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be carried out in various embodiments without departing from the gist thereof, and for example, the following modifications are also possible. In the modified examples described below, the description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as those of the above embodiment will be omitted.

<< 3-7-1 >> Modification 1:
In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109, the image of the character CH is displayed on the display surface 41a as the specific suggestion effect, but another effect may be adopted as the specific suggestion effect. For example, a specific suggestion effect may be executed by driving a movable accessory. FIG. 137 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific suggestion effect for driving a driving accessory.

As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification provides the game board 30 with a movable accessory MY which is a dynamic accessory. The movable accessory MY functions as a driving means for driving the player so as to be visible to the player. When the specific suggestion effect is set as the effect to be executed in the game times, the movable accessory MY is driven so as to be visible to the player for a predetermined time (2 seconds in this modification).

By driving the movable accessory MY so that the player can visually recognize the specific suggestion effect as in the present modification, it is possible to make the player aware of the execution of the specific suggestion effect. As a result, by driving the movable accessory MY, it is possible to easily give a sense of expectation to the player.

<< 3-7-2 >> Modification 2:
In the third embodiment, the detection sensor 205 is arranged on the upper right side of the game area PA in order to detect the distribution mode of the game ball, but the detection sensor may be arranged at another position. FIG. 138 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the arrangement position of the detection sensor. As an example, the detection sensor 230 is arranged on the upper left side of the game area PA and above the guide rail 31. By arranging the detection sensor 230 at the position shown in FIG. 138, it is possible to detect whether or not the game ball has been launched. Therefore, it is possible for the player to detect a stop strike by switching between execution and stop of the launch operation of the game ball.

As another example, a configuration may be adopted in which both the detection sensor 205 on the flow path 203 and the detection sensor 230 on the upper left side of the game area PA are provided. By adopting such a configuration, as one aspect of the stop-hit, the stop-field is switched between right-handed and left-handed according to the result of the winning lottery, and the player executes and stops the launch operation of the game ball. It is possible to detect any aspect of the stoppage, that is, the stoppage of the mode of switching between.

<< 3-7-3 >> Modification 3:
In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 97, the delay mechanism 202 has a configuration including a flow path 203 having a shape meandering to the left and right with respect to the game board 30, but adopts another configuration. May be. For example, by having a flow path in which the protrusions are arranged, the speed at which the game ball circulates may be adopted in principle. In addition, a croon having an opening at the bottom may be adopted, or a configuration is adopted in which the distribution of the game ball is temporarily stopped by a dynamic accessory and the distribution of the game ball is restarted after a certain period of time. Any configuration may be adopted as long as it has a function of delaying the arrival of the game ball circulating on the right side of the game area PA to the V winning mechanism 210.

<< 3-7-4 >> Modification 4:
As the information to be recorded in the game ball count memory area, whether or not the specific suggestion effect is executed for each game time executed, and the game in which the detection sensor 205 is distributed during the period when each game time is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which information relating the number of balls in circulation and the fluctuation time for each game is recorded. Then, using the information recorded in the game ball count memory area, it may be determined whether or not the player is making a stop. In this case, regarding the reference game times used for the stop hitting condition, in the above-mentioned third embodiment, the game times in which the small hit c is won are set as the reference game times, but in this modification, the game times in which the specific suggestion effect is executed are used. Adopted as a standard game. Then, it is determined whether or not the stop-beating condition is satisfied based on the determination criteria of the stop-beating condition in which the game times in which the specific suggestion effect is executed are adopted as the reference game times. By doing so, it is possible to determine whether or not the player has made a stop in response to the presence or absence of the execution of the specific suggestion effect directly.

<< 3-7-5 >> Modification 5:
In this modification, when the result of the winning lottery acquired by the prior determination processing is the small hit c, the distribution mode of the game ball in the period before specifying that it is the small hit c by the prior determination processing. Based on, it is determined whether or not the player has executed the stop strike. As a result, when it is determined that the player has not stopped, the specific suggestion effect is executed in the period before the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the player has made a stop, the specific suggestion effect is not executed in the period before the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c is executed.

FIG. 139 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the modified example 5. As shown in the figure, when the game times U1 are executed, there are reserved game times corresponding to the game times U2 and the game times U3, and the game ball corresponding to the game times U4 is the second starting port during the execution of the game times U1. The case of entering the ball 34 will be described. In this modification, based on the special information (hit random number counter C1, type counter C2, reach random number counter C3) acquired when the game ball corresponding to the game turn U4 enters the second starting port 34. , Executes the first judgment process. As a result of the pre-determination process, when it is specified that the result of the winning lottery in the game times U4 is the small hit c, the number of game balls is obtained for one or more game times executed before the specified. Based on the information recorded in the count memory area, the game ball distribution mode detection process is executed, and it is determined whether or not the stop-stop condition is satisfied.

Then, when it is determined that the stop hitting condition is not satisfied, the game times (game times U2 or game times U3) executed in the period before the game times in which the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c are executed. ), The specific suggestion effect is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop hitting condition is satisfied, the game times (game times U2 or game times U3) executed in the period before the game times in which the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c are executed. ), The specific suggestion effect is not executed.

By doing so, the player who wants to guess whether or not the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c before the game round is executed is conscious of the firing operation of the game ball. Can be made to. That is, it is possible to suppress the stoppage by the player.

<< 3-7-6 >> Modification 6:
In this modification, when the result of the winning lottery acquired by the prior determination process is the small hit c, the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c after it is specified by the prior determination process that the result is the small hit c. Based on the distribution mode of the game ball in the period before the game round is executed, it is determined whether or not the player has executed the stop strike. As a result, when it is determined that the player has not stopped, the specific suggestion effect is executed in the period before the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the player has made a stop, the specific suggestion effect is not executed in the period before the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c is executed.

FIG. 140 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the modification 6. As shown in the figure, when the game times U1 are executed, there are reserved game times corresponding to the game times U2 and the game times U3, and the game ball corresponding to the game times U4 is the second starting port during the execution of the game times U1. The case of entering the ball 34 will be described. In this modification, based on the special information (hit random number counter C1, type counter C2, reach random number counter C3) acquired when the game ball corresponding to the game turn U4 enters the second starting port 34. , Executes the first judgment process. When it is specified that the result of the winning lottery in the game round U4 is the small hit c as a result of the pre-determination process, the number of game balls is counted in the game ball count memory area for one or more game rounds executed after the identification. Based on the information recorded in, the game ball distribution mode detection process is executed, and it is determined whether or not the stop-stop condition is satisfied.

Then, when it is determined that the stop hitting condition is not satisfied, the game times are executed in the period before the game times in which the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c (the game times U3 in this modification). ), The specific suggestion effect is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop hitting condition is satisfied, the specific suggestion effect is not executed in the game times executed in the period before the game times in which the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c is executed. ..

By doing so, the player who wants to guess whether or not the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c before the game round is executed is conscious of the firing operation of the game ball. Can be made to. That is, it is possible to suppress the stoppage by the player.

<< 3-7-7 >> Modification 7:
In this modification, when the result of the winning lottery acquired by the prior determination process is the small hit c, the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c after it is specified by the prior determination process that the result is the small hit c. Based on the distribution mode of the game ball in the period before the game round is executed, it is determined whether or not the player has executed the stop strike. As a result, when it is determined that the player has not stopped, the specific suggestion effect is executed in the game times in which the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c. On the other hand, if it is determined that the player has made a stop, the specific suggestion effect is not executed in the game times in which the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c.

FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the modified example 7. As shown in the figure, when the game times U1 are executed, there are reserved game times corresponding to the game times U2 and the game times U3, and the game ball corresponding to the game times U4 is the second starting port during the execution of the game times U1. The case of entering the ball 34 will be described. In this modification, based on the special information (hit random number counter C1, type counter C2, reach random number counter C3) acquired when the game ball corresponding to the game turn U4 enters the second starting port 34. , Executes the first judgment process. When it is specified that the result of the winning lottery in the game round U4 is the small hit c as a result of the pre-determination process, the number of game balls is counted in the game ball count memory area for one or more game rounds executed after the identification. Based on the information recorded in, the game ball distribution mode detection process is executed, and it is determined whether or not the stop-stop condition is satisfied.

Then, when it is determined that the stop hitting condition is not satisfied, the specific suggestion effect is executed in the game times (game times U4 in this example) in which the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop hitting condition is satisfied, the specific suggestion effect is not executed in the game times (game times U4) in which the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player who wants to guess the result of the winning lottery in the game round by the effect executed in the game round to be aware of the firing operation of the game ball. That is, it is possible to suppress the stoppage by the player. Further, from the operation of launching the game ball by the player in the period after the small hit c is specified by the prior determination process and before the game round in which the result of the winning lottery is the small hit c is executed. In consideration of the psychological situation that can be inferred, it is possible to determine the effect to be executed in the game round, which is a small hit c.

<< 3-7-8 >> Modification 8:
In the third embodiment, it is related to the determination of whether or not the player is making a stop, such as the counting process of the number of game balls, the calculation process for determining the stop hit, and the determination process of whether or not the stop hit condition is satisfied. The processing is executed only when the game times are executed in the high-frequency support mode, but the processing is not limited to such a configuration, and the processing related to the stop-stop determination may be executed even in the low-frequency support mode. In this case, the number of distributions is detected not by the detection sensor 205 but by the detection sensor 230 shown in the above modification. Then, a configuration may be adopted in which information such as the result of the winning lottery for each game round, the fluctuation time, the number of distributions in the detection sensor 230, the type of the executed effect, and the like is recorded in the game ball number count memory area. By adopting such a configuration of the game ball count memory area, not only the player's reaction to the small hit c but also the mode of the player's firing operation with respect to other lottery results (player with respect to the lottery result). (Reaction) and the mode of the player's launch operation with respect to the type of effect performed (player's reaction to each effect), etc., it is possible to grasp the characteristics related to the player's launch operation of the game ball. It is possible to perform an effect in consideration of the characteristics.

<< 3-7-9 >> Modification 9:
In the third embodiment, when the game state shifts from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode, the player is suggested to distribute the game ball to the right side of the game board 30 (to hit the right side). A configuration for executing the effect (right-handed suggestion effect) may be adopted. In addition, when the gaming state shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, the effect of suggesting to the player that the game ball is distributed on the left side of the game board 30 (to left-handed) (left-handed suggestion). A configuration for executing the production) may be adopted. In addition, when the gaming state shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, and the detection sensor 205 or the through gate 35 detects that the game ball has been distributed during the low-frequency support mode, the game is played. A configuration may be adopted in which an effect (left-handed suggestion effect) is performed to suggest to the player that the game ball is distributed on the left side of the board 30 (left-handed effect). By doing so, it is possible to encourage the player to play a game in line with the flow of the game.

<< 3-7-10 >> Modification 10:
When the result of the winning lottery acquired by the pre-judgment process is a specific lottery result (for example, out of reach non-occurrence, out of reach occurrence, big hit win, small hit win, etc.), the specific lottery is specified by the pre-judgment process. Distribution mode of game balls in the period before the lottery result is acquired (for example, the number of game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, that is, the number of holdings CRN or the first starting holding Based on the number RaN, the second start pending number RbN, etc.), a configuration may be adopted in which the effect in the game times executed before the game times that result in the specific lottery is executed is determined. It is possible to make the player who wants to guess whether or not the result is a specific lottery result before the game times that result in the specific lottery result be aware of the operation of launching the game ball. ..

<< 3-7-11 >> Modification 11:
When the result of the winning lottery acquired by the pre-judgment process is a specific lottery result (for example, out of reach non-occurrence, out of reach occurrence, big hit win, small hit win, etc.), the specific lottery is specified by the pre-judgment process. The distribution mode of the game balls (for example, the first start port 33 and the first 2 Based on the number of game balls that have entered the start port 34, that is, the number of reserved balls CRN, the number of reserved first start RaN, the number of second start reserved RbN, etc.), the game times that result in the specific lottery are effective. You may adopt a configuration that determines the production in the game times that are executed before the game. It is possible to make the player who wants to guess whether or not the result is a specific lottery result before the game round which is the specific lottery result is aware of the operation of launching the game ball. ..

<< 3-7-12 >> Modification 12:
When the result of the winning lottery acquired by the pre-judgment process is a specific lottery result (for example, out of reach non-occurrence, out of reach occurrence, big hit win, small hit win, etc.), the specific lottery is specified by the pre-judgment process. The distribution mode of the game ball (for example, the first start port 33 or Executed in the game times that result in the specific lottery based on the number of game balls that have entered the second start opening 34, that is, the number of reserved balls CRN, the number of reserved first start RaN, the number of reserved second start RbN, etc.). A configuration that determines the effect to be produced may be adopted. It is possible to make the player who wants to guess whether or not the result is a specific lottery result by the effect performed in the game times which is the specific lottery result to be aware of the operation of launching the game ball.

<< 3-7-13 >> Modification 13:
In the third embodiment, when it is detected that the player is notified in advance that the specific suggestion effect is likely to be executed when the small hit c is won, or that the player is stopped. In the above, an effect of notifying the player in advance that the specific suggestion effect is not executed may be executed. For example, such an effect may be won as a big hit in the game round for the first start opening and executed as an opening effect during the opening period before the start of the round game round, or a video effect for waiting for customers (customer). It may be executed as a waiting video production, a demo video production). In the video production for waiting for customers, when there is no next game to be executed when the execution of the game is completed, that is, the value of the special information (hit random number counter C1) is the first holding area Ra or the second holding. When it is not stored in the area Rb and it satisfies a predetermined distribution mode such that the distribution of the game ball is not detected for a predetermined time by the detection sensor that detects the distribution of the game ball, or when the operation handle is operated by the player. It is an effect executed when the condition such as the operation of 25 is not performed is satisfied.

<< 3-7-14 >> Modification 14:
The judgment criteria of the stop hitting condition used for judging whether or not the player is making a stop hit is not limited to the judgment criteria (judgment criteria 1 to judgment criteria 5) described in the third embodiment, and other judgment criteria. Can be adopted. For example, even if a judgment criterion for determining that the game is stopped when the distribution frequency in the game times executed immediately before the game times in which the result of the winning lottery is a small hit c is less than a predetermined value is adopted. However, if the distribution frequency in the game rounds executed immediately after the game rounds in which the result of the winning lottery is a small hit c is less than or equal to a predetermined value, a criterion for judging that the game is stopped is adopted. May be. Processing can be simplified by using such a simple determination standard.

<< 4 >> Fourth Embodiment:
<< 4-1 >> Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 142 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as a fourth embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a voice emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. Illuminations are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect of the effect by lighting or blinking at each game round performed by the pachinko machine 10, when a big hit is won, when a reach occurs, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two plate glasses is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. The details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls rented from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball stored in the upper plate 20 is supplied to the game ball launch mechanism included in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launch mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores the game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged to the outside from the lower plate 21.

An effect operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game effect reflecting the operation.

An operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “right side”). When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and an operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c that detects the rotation operation amount of the above by the change of the electric resistance is provided. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes according to the rotation operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball launch button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “left side”). When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined firing intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the player's operation handle 25. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the front view of the game board and flows down to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can make a so-called "right-handed". The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26 to launch the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26. Can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 143 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing. For example, a seal is attached to a place that can be opened and closed, and the characters such as "open" appear when the board box is opened.

The second control unit 52 includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90. The design display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays a design or an image for directing.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The launch control device 80 launches a game ball having a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player when an instruction to launch the game ball is input from the main control device 60. Controls the ball launch mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a slope connected below the tank 54 and gently inclined so that the game balls flow to the downstream side. The game balls are supplied from the tank rail 55, the case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, and the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power supply switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies the electric power required for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85. By turning the power switch 88 on and off, the supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and the non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 144 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding the game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicular to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. The game balls that have entered each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are placed in the individual openings formed in the game board 30. Be guided. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 has a special figure unit 37, a normal figure unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

As shown in the figure, the general winning opening 32 is an entry opening member that forms an entry opening into which a game ball can enter, and a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 143).

The first starting port 33 is an entry port member that forms an entry port into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is an entry port member that forms an entry port into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 is provided with a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to execute a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric service is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric service open state in which the electric service is opened in a predetermined mode. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second starting port 34. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34. In this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and also includes an opening / closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening / closing door 36b is normally closed so that the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60, when a big hit is won and the opening / closing execution mode is entered, the opening / closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state. The opening / closing execution mode shifts to the case where a big hit is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by entering the ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and the opening / closing door 36b is in the open state. It is a mode that repeats the closed state and the closed state. That is, as a result of the winning lottery based on the entry into the first starting port 33, if a big hit is won, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 can enter the large winning opening 36a. Similarly, as a result of the winning lottery based on the entry into the second starting port 34, even if a big hit is won, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 can enter the large winning opening 36a. .. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

An out opening 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and a game ball that has not entered the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, or the variable winning device 36 is out. It is discharged from the game area PA through the mouth 43.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. The first symbol display unit 37a is a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. , The variable display of the first symbol is performed. When the lottery is completed, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to display the stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying the second symbol. The second symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display unit 37b is used as a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. , The second symbol is changed and displayed. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display to display the stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b to the stop display is also referred to as the variable time. Call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a to the stop display is also referred to as the first variable time, and is displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first hold display unit 37c and a second hold display unit 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of holds of the first start port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second hold display unit 37d displays the number of holds of the second start port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on.

The normal drawing unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, the normal drawing unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode as the display mode of the light emitting display. When the electric accessory opening lottery is completed, the normal drawing unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode, or displays corresponding to the number of round games. The round game opens and closes until either the predetermined upper limit duration elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the open / close execution mode is started, and ends when the open / close execution mode ends and a new game round starts.

The special figure unit 37, the normal figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being composed of a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp, and for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. It may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery result, such as a CRT or a dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The symbol display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. conduct. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the display effect triggered by entering the ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, but also performs a display effect in the open / close execution mode that shifts when a big hit is won. .. Hereinafter, the details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 145 is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol and a display surface 41a that are variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 145 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol that is variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 145 (a), the symbol indicating the numbers 1 to 8 is variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. As the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol having a pattern such as a character may be adopted for each of the symbols showing the numbers 1 to 8.

FIG. 145 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 145 (a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row is periodically arranged from top to bottom or from bottom. A variable display that scrolls up is performed. As shown in FIG. 145 (b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L. Specifically, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity is started. Then, each scrolling symbol switches from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. When the variation display of the symbol is completed and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit winning, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the effective line L. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L. The mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, and the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol row, and the symbol of each symbol row. Various modes such as numbers can be adopted as the mode of variable display of the symbol.

Here, "game times" means from the start of the variation display of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to the end of the variation display and the stop display, until the stop display ends. That is, one unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. be. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display unit is used for each game. After the segment display is variablely displayed on either 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device is used for each game. In 41, after the predetermined symbol string is variablely displayed, the symbol string is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game is also referred to as a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the predetermined lottery result, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 145 (b), below the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, a first start port holding area Ds1, a holding digestion area Dm, and a second starting port holding area Ds2 are provided. Is displayed. The reserved digestion area Dm is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a in the left-right direction, the first starting port holding area Ds1 is displayed on the left side of the holding digestion area Dm, and the second starting port holding area Ds2 is the reserved digestion area Dm. It is displayed on the right side. In the first starting port holding area Ds1, the number of holdings based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second starting port holding area Ds2, the number of holdings based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is four, respectively. The details of the operation of the first start port holding area Ds1, the second starting port holding area Ds2, and the holding digestion area Dm will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 144, a pair of nails (so-called life nails and belly button nails) 42 (42a, 42b) are provided above the first starting port 33. The probability of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 changes depending on the distance between the pair of nails 42a and 42b.

<< 4-2 >> Electrical configuration of gaming machines:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 146 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 temporarily stores various data and the like when executing a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a program recorded in the ROM 63. It is provided with a RAM 64 which is a memory for storing. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may have a part of the function which MPU 62 has. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown), respectively. The payout control device 70 and the power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a DC stable 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, the power supply device 85 includes a capacitor (not shown), and when a power failure occurs or the power supply switch 88 (FIG. 143) is turned off, power supply to each device is continued for a predetermined period. do.

Further, various detection sensors 67a to 67e are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. Specifically, it is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided in various entrances such as a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. .. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each entry port based on signals from various detection sensors 67a to 67e, and the game ball is a through gate. It is determined whether or not the vehicle has passed 35. Further, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the second starting opening 34, and also executes an electric accessory opening lottery based on the entry of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

The output port of the main control board 61 includes a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , Is connected to the main display unit 45. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the electric accessory opening is won as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the main display unit 45. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the open / close execution mode and the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode is determined, the display control of the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is executed.

Further, the payout control device 70 and the voice emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry to the general winning opening 32 is specified, the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry to the first starting opening 33 is performed. When is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when the entry to the second starting port 34 is specified, one game ball is paid out. The prize ball command corresponding to is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. Further, the launch control device 80 is connected to the operation handle 25 and the game ball launch button 26.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the voice emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, control of the display control device 100 is performed. Further, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the voice emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 and the type of the combination of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. , Whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the advance notice effect executed in each game round, etc. are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time when the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 147 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 wins a lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, sets the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting jackpot types such as probabilistic jackpot results and normal jackpot results. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate reach when the symbol sequence displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displaced and varied.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, the fluctuation type counter CS is used when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45, and the symbol display device 41. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The hold information storage area 64b is provided with a first hold area Ra and a second hold area Rb. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of entering the ball are the first of the reserved information storage areas 64b. It is stored in the hold area Ra in chronological order. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of entering the ball are set in the second reserved area Rb of the reserved information storage area 64b. It is stored in time series.

The details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 1199, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is set in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. It is stored, and when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first hold area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is matched with the jackpot. It is determined whether or not it becomes. Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second hold area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c and collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. Whether or not it will be a big hit is determined.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is such that the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. By doing so, the process moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not the hit is a big hit.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Further, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. .. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big hit. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value, for example.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. It is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the ball. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second hold area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. However, when the result of the winning lottery becomes a big hit and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some of the symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 may have a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot for some of the symbols. It is a display state in which the symbols are displayed and the remaining symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 145 (b), the symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. In the situation where the reach line is formed and the reach line is formed, the symbol is varied and displayed in the symbol row Z2 to reach the reach. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, in the state where the reach line is formed, the variable display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. A combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when the reach effect is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to display a notice using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

Next, the details of the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 62 to determine the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value, for example.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, the details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric service holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 64d moves to the electric service execution area 64e, and then the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 in the electric service execution area 64e. A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory opening lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state. Specifically, in the electric service execution area 64e, the winning / failing table (winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery) stored in the accessory lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 are It is collated and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state.

At least one of the acquired value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 corresponds to the special information in the present invention. Further, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra and the second hold area Rb is also referred to as hold information.

Next, the pass / fail table will be described. The hit / fail table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when a winning lottery is performed based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode set as a lottery mode for the winning lottery. At the time of the winning lottery in the probability mode, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to. The high-probability mode (also called the high-probability gaming state) is a gaming state that is started by winning a probabilistic jackpot, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is relatively higher than that in the low-probability mode. To tell.

FIG. 148 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the pass / fail table. FIG. 148 (a) shows a pass / fail table for the low probability mode (for the low probability mode), and FIG. 148 (b) shows the pass / fail table for the high probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 148 (a), five values 0 to 4 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the hit / fail table for the low probability mode. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values of 0 to 4 are out of the range. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 148 (b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the hit / fail table for the high probability mode. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (16 to 1199) other than the 16 values of 0 to 15 are out of the range. As described above, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / fail table for the low probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / miss table for the high probability mode. Included in the group. However, as a result of the winning lottery, if the probability of winning the jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary.

Although it is not adopted in the winning / failing table in this embodiment, a "small hit" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

The "small hit" is a result of success or failure that triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode in which the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened / closed, but does not trigger the transition in both the lottery mode and the support mode. .. On the other hand, "off" is a result of success or failure that does not trigger the transition of the open / close execution mode, and also does not trigger the transition of the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three modes or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode of winning lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends (3) The electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (1) open / close execution mode, the occurrence of a ball entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency is relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 sec elapses or to the opening / closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number of balls entered is 10. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed twice from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec elapses or the ball enters the opening / closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening / closing door 36b at one time is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening / closing door 36b once is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode in which the low-frequency winning mode is applied, the game ball does not substantially enter. However, even in the open / close execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the game ball can be entered.

The number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the number of opening limits for one opening are entered into the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the frequency of occurrence of balls is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening / closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of openings and closings than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is long, or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that the ball does not substantially enter the variable winning device 36.

The pachinko machine 10 has, as a mode of the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the above-mentioned (2) opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a winning / losing table for high probability as a winning / failing table, and a winning / losing table. It is possible to set a low probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a winning / failing table for low probability. As described with reference to FIG. 148, the case where the winning lottery is performed using the high-probability winning / failing table is compared with the case where the winning lottery is performed using the low-probability winning / failing table, and the jackpot is won. There is a high probability of doing so.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening / closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 continues to launch the game ball in the same manner with respect to the game area PA. The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are used so that the frequency with which the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the above-mentioned situations. Can be set.

Specifically, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the one-time opening time of the electric accessory 34a may be set longer than that in the low-frequency support mode when the electric combination opening is won.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electric combination open is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode. May be good. Further, the electric accessory 34a may be configured to have a long opening time once. In addition, when the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times in the high frequency support mode, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is It may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory opening lottery to the next electric accessory opening lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. You may.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary gaming state that assists in the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the big hit type counter C2 is used to sort the big hit types. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 149 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 149 (a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 149 (b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to at the time of a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is to the second start port 34. It is referred to at the time of the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. 149 (a), the distribution table for the first starting port has a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot, the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening / closing execution mode (hereinafter, simply "lottery mode"). (Also called) is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is a high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot is that the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the open / close execution mode is different, the 16R probability variation jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R probability variation jackpot is 8. It is a round (8 rounds).

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the low probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end becomes the high frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot is that the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the open / close execution mode is different, the 16R normal jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R normal jackpot is 8. It is a round (8 rounds).

In the distribution table for the first starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 39" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "40 to 64" corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot. "65-89" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "90-99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the mode of the jackpot is diversified. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the advantage for the player is that the 16R probability variation jackpot is the highest, the 8R probability variation jackpot is the next highest, then the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different advantages for the player in this way, it is possible to suppress the monotonicization of the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 149 (b), the distribution table for the second starting port has a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. 16R probability variation jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 64" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "65 to 99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. It corresponds to.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won is the case where the jackpot is won based on the entry into the first starting port 33 and the second. It is different from the case where the big hit is won based on the entry into the starting port 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player.

In addition, if the result is a loss in the winning lottery, the opening / closing execution mode is not performed, and the lottery mode and the support mode are not changed. In the distribution of the types of jackpots, when 16 probability variation jackpots or 8R probability variation jackpots are obtained, the lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the high probability mode, as described above. The state will continue until the next big hit in the winning lottery.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to perform the jackpot type. Further, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to cause the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b to stop and display the segment display. Determine the display mode. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

FIG. 150 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a winning / failing table (winning / failing table for electric accessory opening lottery) used when executing the electric accessory opening lottery.

FIG. 150 (a) shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 150 (a), in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode), two electric accessory opening counters C4, which are the electric accessory opening winning counters, are 0 and 1. The value is set. 464 values of 2 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is out of alignment. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening is won in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 150 (b) shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 150 (b), in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode), 462 electric accessory opening counters C4, which are the electric accessory opening winning counters, are set to 0 to 461. The value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is out of alignment. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening is won in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second starting port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. ..

<< 4-3 >> Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 151 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configurations of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Some configurations of the power supply device 85 (FIG. 146) and the like are omitted. The MPU 92 is mounted on the voice emission control board 91 provided in the voice emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element having a built-in CPU, ROM 93, RAM 94, interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data input / output circuit, and the like.

Various control programs, fixed value data, tables, etc. executed by the MPU 92 are stored in the ROM 93. For example, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the ROM 93. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 60 and an effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and a display control device 100 is connected to the output side.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the voice emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 102.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols and pictures displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores various display symbols, bitmap format image data of the display picture, a color palette table referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The various display drawings also include drawings of petals P1 to P4, which will be described later. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio emission control device 90 are the sound light side MPU 92 and the sound light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound / light side RAM 94 are also referred to, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as a display side MPU 102.

<< 4-4 >> Outline of processing by the gaming machine:
Next, an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, the first start indicating the number of holdings based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 below the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. The mouth holding area Ds1, the second starting port holding area Ds2 indicating the number of holdings based on the number of game balls entering the second starting port 34, the first starting port holding area Ds1 and the second starting port holding area. The reserved digestion region Dm located between the regions Ds2 is displayed.

FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of changes in the first start port holding area Ds1 and the holding digestion area Dm. In the first start port hold area Ds1, up to four hold display icons corresponding to each hold (each of up to four holds) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 are arranged in the left-right direction. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, the hold display icon is circular, and in the example shown in FIG. 152 (a), the first hold display icon H1 and the second hold corresponding to the first hold and the second hold, respectively. The display icon H2 is shown. In the first start port holding area Ds1, the first holding display icon H1 is displayed at the rightmost position, and the second holding display icon H2 is displayed at the second position from the right side to the left side. That is, in the first start port hold area Ds1, each time the game ball enters the first start port 33, the hold display icon is displayed so as to increase by one from the right side to the left side.

The reserved digestion area Dm has a trapezoidal shape in which the upper base is longer than the lower base, and in the example shown in FIG. 152 (a), the hold display icon H0 is placed on the upper part of the reserved digestion area Dm. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a winning lottery is performed when the ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and a variable display for notifying the result of the winning lottery is performed. At the timing when this variable display is started, the hold display icon is placed on the upper part of the hold digestion area Dm. This variable display is based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the hold display icon H0 placed on the upper part of the hold digestion area Dm. By observing that the hold display icon H0 is placed on the upper part of the hold digestion area Dm, the player can know that the hold corresponding to the hold display icon H0 has been digested.

In the state shown in FIG. 152 (a), when the variable display ends and the stop display is displayed, the hold display icon H0 placed on the upper part of the hold digestion area Dm disappears thereafter. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 152 (b), the first hold display icon H1 located on the far right side in the first start port hold area Ds1 moves to the upper part of the hold digestion area Dm. At this time, in the first start port holding area Ds1, the second holding display icon H2 located second from the right side moves (shifts) to the rightmost position. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (b), the hold display icon located at the third and fourth positions from the right side to the left side does not exist, but if it exists, the hold display icon located at the third position does not exist. Moves (shifts) to the second position, and the hold display icon located at the fourth moves (shifts) to the third position.

As a result of the movement shown in FIG. 152 (b), the state shown in FIG. 152 (c) is obtained. That is, the first hold display icon H1 is placed on the upper part of the hold digestion area Dm, and the second hold display icon H2 is displayed at the rightmost position of the first start port hold area Ds1. At this time, a variable display for notifying the result of the winning lottery based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the first hold display icon H1 is executed.

As described above, each hold display icon displayed in the first start port hold area Ds1 shifts from the left side to the right side each time the fluctuation display and the stop display corresponding to one game are executed. Finally, it moves from the rightmost position to the upper part of the reserved digestion area Dm. Then, the variable display and the stop display for notifying the result of the winning lottery based on the hold information corresponding to the hold display icon are executed. In this way, in each hold display icon displayed in the first start port hold area Ds1, the hold information corresponding to each hold display icon is displayed in the order from the right side to the left side (that is, the hold order). It is subject to a winning lottery.

FIG. 153 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of changes in the second start port holding area Ds2 and the holding digestion area Dm. In the second start opening hold area Ds2, a maximum of four hold display icons H corresponding to each hold (each of the maximum four holds) based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 are arranged in the left-right direction. It is displayed in. The mode of change of the second start port holding area Ds2 is roughly the same as the mode of change of the first start port holding area Ds1 shown in FIG. 152, and the direction of operation is the first start port holding area. The direction is opposite to that of Ds1. That is, each time the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the hold display icon H is displayed so as to increase by one from the left side to the right side. Each time the game round is executed, the hold display icon H moves one by one from the right side to the left side in the second start opening hold area Ds2, and finally moves to the upper part of the hold digestion area Dm to display the hold. The variable display and the stop display for notifying the result of the winning lottery based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the icon H will be executed. In this way, in each hold display icon displayed in the second start port hold area Ds2, the hold information corresponding to each hold display icon is displayed in the order from the left side to the right side (that is, the hold order). It is subject to a winning lottery.

The hold display icon displayed in the first start port hold area Ds1 and the second start port hold area Ds2 was circular as described above, but instead of this, a triangle, a quadrangle, a pentagon, etc. It may be another polygonal shape. Further, the hold display icon is not limited to the image of the figure, but may be an image of a character or the like. The reserved digestion region Dm is trapezoidal as described above, but instead of this, an image having another shape such as a triangle, a quadrangle, or a circle may be used. Further, the reserved digestion area Dm is not limited to the image of the figure, but may be an image of a character or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, the hold display icon moved from the first start port hold area Ds1 or the second start port hold area Ds2 to the hold digestion area Dm is placed on the upper part of the hold digestion area Dm. However, instead of this, the display mode may be such that it enters the reserved digestion region Dm and disappears.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, each hold display icon may have a plurality of display modes. In the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold display icon suggests the possibility of winning a big hit in the winning lottery. Specifically, the configuration is such that the possibility that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hold information corresponding to each hold display icon wins the jackpot in the winning lottery is suggested by the display mode of each hold display icon. Specifically, as the display mode of each hold display icon, a display mode having a plurality of stages from upper to lower is set according to the high or low possibility. As the display mode of the hold display icon becomes higher (ranks up) among multiple stages, it is suggested that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display icon is more likely to win the jackpot in the winning lottery. ..

FIG. 154 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode of the hold display icon set in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, the display mode of the hold display icon is set to a plurality of stages from the upper rank to the lower rank according to the high and low possibility of winning a big hit in the winning lottery. In the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold display icon is set in the order of five levels of display level Lvr5, display level Lvr4, display level Lvr3, display level Lvr2, and display level Lvr1. If the display level Lvr is higher, there is a high possibility of winning a big hit.

In the present embodiment, the display mode corresponding to each display level Lvr is represented by a color. Specifically, the display level Lvr5 is represented by gold, the display level Lvr4 is represented by red, the display level Lvr3 is represented by green, the display level Lvr2 is represented by blue, and the display level Lvr1 is represented by white. The display mode corresponding to each display level Lvr is not limited to the mode represented by color, and for example, a game represented by a pattern, a shape represented by a shape, a character represented by a character, and the like. Various display modes can be adopted as long as the difference in each display level Lvr is expressed in a mode that can be recognized by a person.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, an effect of changing the display mode of the above-mentioned hold display icon is executed. For example, an effect of changing the white hold display icon to blue, an effect of changing the blue hold display icon to green, and the like are executed. In the present embodiment, the trigger for executing this effect is that the petals, which are a kind of the effect image displayed on the symbol display device 41, are attached to the hold display icon.

FIG. 155 is an explanatory diagram showing a state when petals are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, a large number of petals are displayed on the entire display surface 41a. Each petal moves (falls) so as to dance from the upper side to the lower side. In the present embodiment, each petal is classified into one of the first kind petal P1, the second kind petal P2, the third kind petal P3, and the fourth kind petal P4.

FIG. 156 is an explanatory diagram showing a display method of the petals P1 to P4 of the first to fourth species. In the present embodiment, the display on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 is arranged on the background layer L1 for displaying the background and the upper side (front side) of the background layer L1, and the symbol row and the first start opening are reserved. The symbol row layer L2 for displaying the work area Ds1, the hold digestion area Dm, and the second start port hold area Ds2 (FIG. 155), and the upper layer L3 arranged on the upper side (front side) of the symbol row layer L2. It is done by a layer structure having at least.

The first kind petal P1 is displayed on the background layer L1. In the present embodiment, a plurality of times are repeated during a predetermined period from the time when the demo image is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 to the middle of the game being performed by the player. The first kind petals P1 are displayed on the background layer L1. As a result, a plurality (many) first-class petals P1 are repeatedly displayed on the display surface 41a, at least while the game is being played by the player. In addition, instead of this configuration, the predetermined period may be configured not to include the period of the jackpot effect executed by winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. According to this configuration, the first kind petal P1 is not displayed during the jackpot production.

The first kind petal P1 moves in various directions. By displaying the petals P1 of the first kind on the background layer L1, when the position overlaps with the symbol row displayed on the symbol row layer L2, the petals P1 flow so as to dive under the symbol row. The first kind petal P1 is for making the display surface 41a lively, and has no other function. A plurality of first-class petals P1 are displayed, but one may be used.

Petals other than the first kind petals P1, that is, the second kind petals P2, the third kind petals P3, and the fourth kind petals P4 are displayed on the upper layer L3.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of times are repeated during a predetermined period from the time when the demo image is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 to the middle of the game being performed by the player. The second kind petal P2 is displayed on the upper layer L3. As a result, at least while the game is being played by the player, a plurality of (many) type 2 petals P2 are repeatedly displayed on the display surface 41a. In addition, instead of this configuration, the predetermined period may be configured not to include the period of the jackpot effect executed by winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. According to this configuration, the second kind petal P2 is not displayed during the jackpot production.

The plurality of second-class petals P2 move in various directions. The second kind petal P2 is displayed on the upper layer L3, and flows over the symbol row when the position overlaps with the symbol row displayed on the symbol row layer L2. The second kind petal P2 is for making the display surface 41a lively, and has no other function. A plurality of type 2 petals P2 are displayed, but one may be used.

The type 3 petals P3 are the type 3 petals P31 for holding the first starting port and the display surface 41a that move so as to dance from the upper side toward the area Ds1 for holding the first starting port on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. It is classified into the second type 3 petal P32 for holding the second starting port, which moves so as to dance toward the second starting port holding area Ds2 from the upper side of the. The third kind petal P31 for holding the first starting port functions to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the holding display icon displayed in the holding area Ds1 for the first starting port. The third kind petal P32 for holding the second starting port functions to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the holding display icon displayed in the holding area Ds2 for the second starting port. The third type petal P31 for holding the first starting port and the third type petal P32 for holding the second starting port will be described in detail later.

The type 4 petal P4 moves from the upper side of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 toward the symbol row in the game times won in the specific lottery process (petal revariable lottery process), and moves into the symbol row. adhere to. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes an effect of changing the variation display of the symbol row when the fourth kind petal P4 adheres to the symbol row. The movement of the fourth kind petal P4 and the above-mentioned production will be described in detail later.

In this embodiment, the petals P1 to P4 of the first kind to the fourth kind are composed of the same picture. Since each petal P1 to P4 moves while changing its orientation, its shape and size change variously, but it is composed of the same picture as a whole. Therefore, the player cannot identify the types of the first to fourth petals P1 to P4. If it is difficult for the player to identify the type, each of the first to fourth petals P1 to P4 does not necessarily have to be the same picture, and is composed of image data of different pictures. You may. Further, as a modification, the drawing of the petal P3 of the third kind may be different from the drawing of the petals P1, P2, P4 of other kinds. Since the third type petal P3 has a special function (a function of executing an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display icon) different from the function for making the display surface 41a lively, a special function is executed. In order to give the player a sense of expectation, the drawing of the type 3 petal P3 may be different from the drawing of the type 1 petal P1, the type 2 petal P2, and the type 4 petal P4. .. Further, as a modification, the picture of the petal P4 of the fourth kind may be different from the picture of the petals P1 to P3 of other kinds. Since the type 4 petal P4 has a special function (a function of re-variating the symbol sequence) different from the function for making the display surface 41a lively, the player has a feeling of expectation that the special function will be executed. In order to make it possible, the drawing of the type 4 petals P4 may be intentionally different from the drawing of the types 1 to 3 petals P1 to P3.

FIG. 157 is an explanatory diagram showing the behavior of the third kind petal P3. The illustration shows the type 3 petal P31 for holding the first starting port among the type 3 petals P3. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four hold display icons are displayed in the first start port hold area Ds1, but four types of first start port hold third type petals P31 facing each hold display icon are prepared. ing. The first type 3 petal P31 for holding the first starting port toward the first holding display icon H1 located on the rightmost side in the area Ds1 for holding the first starting port is hereinafter referred to as a special 1 / holding 1 petal Pa. The third type petal P31 for holding the first starting port toward the second holding display icon H2 located second from the right side in the holding area Ds1 for the first starting port is hereinafter referred to as a petal Pb for special 1 and holding 2. The third type petal P31 for holding the first starting port toward the third holding display icon H3 located third from the right side in the holding area Ds1 for the first starting port is hereinafter referred to as a petal Pc for special 1 / holding 3. The third type petal P31 for holding the first starting port toward the fourth holding display icon H4 located fourth from the right side in the holding area Ds1 for the first starting port is hereinafter referred to as a petal Pd for special 1 / holding 4.

Since the petals Pa to Pd for special 1 / hold 1 to the petals Pa for special 1 / hold 4 perform the same operation only with different hold display icons, they represent the operation of the petals Pa for special 1 / hold 1. I will explain.

The petal Pa for special 1 and hold 1 moves along one orbit selected from three types of orbits prepared in advance. The three types of orbits are composed of a common route RA common from the start point R1 to the specific point R2, and individual routes RB1, RB2, RB3 extending in individual directions from the specific point R2. The common route RA has a length exceeding 80% of the total length of each orbit, and extends close to the first hold display icon H1. The first individual route RB1 reaches the position of the first hold display icon H1. The second individual route RB2 reaches a position shifted to the right from the first hold display icon H1. The third individual route RB3 reaches a position shifted to the left from the first hold display icon H1. Of the three types of orbits, the orbit composed of the common route RA and the first individual route RB1 is hereinafter referred to as a target hold arrival orbit. Of the three types of orbitals, the orbital composed of the common route RA and the second individual route RB2 is hereinafter referred to as the first target unheld orbital. Of the three types of orbitals, the orbital composed of the common route RA and the third individual route RB3 is hereinafter referred to as the second target unheld orbital. The end point of the target hold arrival trajectory is the display position of the hold display icon.

In this embodiment, a specific lottery process is used to determine which of the target hold arrival trajectory, the first target hold non-orbit, and the second target hold non-orbit is adopted as the orbit of the petal Pa for special 1 and hold 1. The composition is determined by the petal orbit lottery process). In addition, instead of the lottery, the trajectory may be changed in order.

In the present embodiment, the time length (time required to reach) required for the petals to move along each of the target pending arrival orbit, the first target pending out-of-orbit, and the second target pending out-of-orbit is set to, for example, 10 seconds. did. Further, the time required for the petals to move on the common route RA in each orbit is set to 8.5 seconds, and the time required for the petals to move on the first to third individual routes RB1 to RB3 in each orbit. The target length was 1.5 seconds. These temporal lengths are merely examples and may be replaced with other numerical values.

The petals Pb for special 1 and hold 2, the petals Pc for special 1 and hold 3, and the petals Pd for special 1 and hold 4 are each petal Pb to Pd in the same manner as the petals Pa for special 1 and hold 1 described above. It moves along one orbit selected from the target pending arrival orbit, the first target unheld orbit, and the second target unheld orbit, which are provided corresponding to the above.

It was explained that the petals Pa to Pd for special 1 / hold 1 to special 1 / hold 4 go to the corresponding hold display icon, but this is because the corresponding hold display icon is the first start port hold area Ds1. This is because it was explained as being present in. Even when the corresponding hold display icon does not exist in the first start port hold area Ds1, the petals Pa to Pd for special 1 / hold 1 to special 1 / hold 4 are displayed in the same manner as when they do exist. .. For example, when the value of the first hold quantity counter is 2, and the third hold display icon H3 and the fourth hold display icon H4 do not exist in the first start port hold area Ds1, special 1 / hold The petal Pc for 3 moves toward the third position from the right in the first start port holding area Ds1 (that is, the position where the third holding display icon H3 can be displayed), and the petals for special 1 and holding 4 are displayed. Pd moves toward the fourth position from the right in the first start port holding area Ds1 (that is, the position where the fourth holding display icon H4 can be displayed). That is, regardless of whether the corresponding hold display icon exists in the first start port hold area Ds1, the display of the petals Pa to Pd for special 1 / hold 1 to special 1 / hold 4 is started and special. 1. There is no difference in the orbits of petals Pa to Pd for hold 1 to special 1 and hold 4. In other words, the petals Pa to Pd for special 1 / hold 1 to special 1 / hold 4 are concerned regardless of whether or not the hold display icon exists at the display position for displaying the corresponding hold display icon. Move toward the display position.

FIG. 158 is an explanatory diagram showing the state of the first hold display icon H1 when the petal Pa for special 1 / hold 1 moves along the target hold arrival trajectory. As shown in FIG. 158, the petal Pa for special 1 and hold 1 that was elected to adopt the target hold arrival track in the petal track lottery process and proceeded from the common route RA to the first individual route RB1 is shown in FIG. 158 (a). The first individual route RB1 is moved toward the first hold display icon H1. Then, as shown in FIG. 158 (b), the petal Pa for special 1 / hold 1 reaches the first hold display icon H1. After arriving, the petal Pa for special 1 and hold 1 stays on the first hold display icon H1 for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). As a result, the player can recognize that the petal Pa for special 1 and hold 1 is attached to the first hold display icon H1. After that, as shown in FIG. 158 (c), the attached petal Pa for special 1 and hold 1 disappears, and the display mode of the first hold display icon H1 changes. For example, the first hold display icon H1 changes from white to blue. That is, the pachinko machine 10 changes the display mode of the hold display icon, in which the petal Pa for special 1 / hold 1 reaches the first hold display icon H1 and stays (attaches) for a predetermined time. A suggestion effect is executed, and then an effect of changing the display mode of the first hold display icon H1 is performed. For example, an effect of changing the first hold display icon H1 from white to blue, an effect of changing the blue hold display icon to red, and the like are executed. In the present specification, it is expressed that the petals stay on the hold display icon for a predetermined time as the petals adhere to the hold display icon.

Each of the petals Pb to Pd for special 1 / hold 2 to special 1 / hold 4 performs the same operation as the petals Pa for special 1 / hold 1 described above. The pachinko machine 10 suggests that the display mode of the hold display icon changes, in which each petal Pb to Pd reaches the corresponding hold display icons H2 to H4 and stays (attaches) for a predetermined time. After that, the suggestion effect is performed, and then the display mode of the hold display icons H2 to H4 to which the petals Pb to Pd are attached is changed. For example, an effect of changing the hold display icons H2 to H4 from white to blue, an effect of changing the blue hold display icons H2 to H4 from red, and the like are executed.

In the above description, when each petal Pa to Pd reaches each hold display icon H1 to H4 and stays for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), the display mode of each hold display icon H1 to H4 is changed. However, in reality, when each petal Pa to Pd reaches each of the hold display icons H1 to H4, it is determined whether or not the following two conditions are satisfied, and the two conditions are set. Only when it is established, the effect of changing the display mode of each hold display icon H1 to H4 is executed. The two conditions are as follows.

・ Condition 1:
The shift of the hold display icon does not occur during the period from the time when the petals reach the hold display icon to the time when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses.
・ Condition 2:
The display mode (display level Lvr) of the hold display icon reached by the petals is less than the preset upper limit value (hereinafter referred to as the display level upper limit value Lvm).

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 performs the following processing. When a ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 and the hold information is acquired based on the entry, the value of the display level Lvr of the hold display icon corresponding to the entry is set. Set to 1, and set the value of the display level upper limit Lvm of the hold display icon based on the game results such as jackpot winning and reach occurrence. Then, when the petals Pa to Pd reach the hold display icons H1 to H4, it is determined whether or not the hold display icon shift does not occur during the period from the arrival to the elapse of 2 seconds (condition 1). Judgment of).

When it is determined that the shift of the hold display icon does not occur during the above period (when condition 1 is satisfied), the display level Lvr set to the hold display icons H1 to H4 at which the petals Pa to Pd have reached is also the same. It is determined whether or not it is below the set display level upper limit value Lvm (determination of condition 2 is performed). Here, when it is determined that the display level Lvr is lower than the display level upper limit value Lvm (that is, when both condition 1 and condition 2 are satisfied), the display mode of the hold display icons H1 to H4 is changed. Run. Specifically, in the above period, the petals that have reached the hold display icon are continuously displayed at the position of the hold display icon (the petals are erased after the end of the above period), and then the display level corresponding to the hold display icon. Lvr is increased by one step, and the display mode of the hold display icon is changed.

On the other hand, in the determination of whether or not the display level Lvr is lower than the display level upper limit value Lvm, it is determined that the display level Lvr is not lower than the display level upper limit value Lvm, that is, the display level upper limit value Lvm is reached (that is, the condition 1 is satisfied and the condition 1 is satisfied. , Condition 2 is not satisfied), the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display icons H1 to H4 is not executed. Specifically, during the above period, the petals that have reached the hold display icon are continuously displayed (the petals are erased after the end of the above period), but the display mode of the hold display icon is not changed.

Further, in the determination of whether or not the shift of the hold display icon does not occur during the above period, if it is determined that the shift occurs (that is, when the condition 1 is not satisfied), whether or not the condition 2 is satisfied. Regardless of this, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display icons H1 to H4 is not executed. Specifically, when the petals Pa to Pd reach the hold display icons H1 to H4, the petals are erased, and the display mode of the hold display icon is not changed.

The petals Pa to Pd for special 1 / hold 1 to special 1 / hold 4 that perform the above operations are repeated during the period in which the first start port hold area Ds1 and the second start port hold area Ds2 are displayed. Is displayed. Specifically, for the petals Pa to Pd for special 1 / hold 1 to special 1 / hold 4, the first start port hold area Ds1 and the second start port hold area Ds2 are predetermined during the period of display. The display is started one by one in order at intervals of a period (for example, 5 seconds). That is, in the above period, the pachinko machine 10 starts displaying the petals Pa to Pd for special 1 / hold 1 to special 1 / hold 4 one by one at intervals of the predetermined period in this order. After starting the display of the petal Pd for the special 1 / hold 4, the petal Pa for the special 1 / hold 1 is returned to and the display is started after the predetermined period. In this way, the petals Pa to Pd for special 1 / hold 1 to special 1 / hold 4 are repeatedly displayed.

When the pachinko machine 10 starts displaying each of the petals Pa to Pd for special 1 / hold 1 to special 1 / hold 4, the petal orbit lottery process is performed, and the target hold arrival orbit and the first target hold non-goal orbit are performed. , 2nd target Decide which of the out-of-hold orbits to adopt. When it is decided to adopt the target hold arrival orbit in the petal orbit lottery process, the display of the petals moving along the target hold arrival orbit consisting of the common route RA and the first individual route RB1 is started. .. When it is decided to adopt the first target non-reserved orbit in the petal orbit lottery process, the petals moving along the first target unreserved orbit consisting of the common route RA and the second individual route RB2. Start displaying. If it is decided to adopt the second target non-reserved orbit in the petal orbit lottery process, the petals moving along the second target unreserved orbit consisting of the common route RA and the third individual route RB3. Start displaying. The petals that have moved along the first target non-holding orbit or the second target non-holding orbit do not reach the hold display icon, and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display icon is not performed.

As described above, the petals Pa to Pd for the third type petal special 1 / hold 1 to special 1 / hold 4 are repeatedly displayed while the player is playing the game, and therefore one hold. Petals Pa to Pd may adhere to the display icon multiple times. In this case, if the display level Lvr is less than the display level upper limit value Lvm, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display icons H1 to H4 is executed every time the petals Pa to Pd are attached. For example, when the petals Pa to Pd adhere to each of the white hold display icons H1 to H4 twice, the effect of changing from white to blue is executed the first time, and the effect is changed from blue to green the second time. The production is executed.

What has been described with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158 is the operation of the third kind petal P31 for holding the first starting port. On the other hand, the second type 3 petal P32 for holding the first starting port also operates in the same manner as the third type petal P31 for holding the first starting port. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, each of the special 2 / hold 1 to special 2 / hold 4 petals as the second start port hold type 3 petal P32 is displayed in the second start port hold area Ds2. A suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display icon changes, such as reaching each hold display icon and staying (adhering) for a predetermined time, is executed, and then the display mode of the hold display icon is displayed. Perform a changing effect. It is the same as the first start port holding side in that the display mode of the hold display icon is changed only when the condition 1 and the condition 2 are satisfied.

The first-class petals P1 and the second-class petals P2 having the function of making the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 lively, which have been described above, are repeatedly displayed in large numbers. One of them is configured to move along the same orbit as the target hold arrival orbit of the above-mentioned type 3 petal P3, and after reaching the hold display icon, it is displayed so as to proceed further downward. Even if the first type petal P1 or the second type petal P2 of this kind reaches the hold display icon, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display icon is executed by passing through the hold display icon. There is no such thing.

FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram showing how the type 4 petal P4 acts on the symbol displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In FIG. 159 (a), in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1 and the symbol Z3, and the symbol variation is displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. It shows the state of being. In this state, the fourth kind petal P4 moves so as to dance toward the symbol row Z2.

The state of FIG. 159 (a) shifts to the state of FIG. 159 (b), and the symbol column Z2 is stopped and displayed. At this time, the symbols stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2 are different from the symbols stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3. In this state, the fourth kind petal P4 reaches the last stopped symbol row Z2, and after reaching the fourth kind petal P4, the fourth kind petal P4 stops for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) on the symbol. As a result, the player can recognize that the petal P4 of the fourth kind has adhered to the symbol row Z2 in the stopped state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 159 (c), the attached type 4 petal P4 disappears, and the symbol row Z2 starts the variable display again. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 159 (d), the symbol column Z2 is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the symbol of the symbol row Z2 that is stopped and displayed after this variation display is restarted matches the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3. That is, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are a combination of the same symbols that are the big hit winners.

As described above, the type 4 petal P4 moves toward the symbol row in the variable display and adheres to the symbol immediately after the variable display of the symbol row is stopped. Then, when the fourth kind petal P4 is attached, the effect of re-variating the symbol sequence is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the third type petal P3 among the plurality of types of petals P1 to P4 displayed on the symbol display device 41 reaches the hold display icon and is predetermined. When it stays (that is, adheres) for a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds), an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display icon is executed. In a conventional pachinko machine that does not have such a configuration, the display mode of the hold display icon is displayed at the start of the variable display, at the time of shifting the hold information, or at the time of entering the game ball into the first start port or the second start port. In general, an effect suggesting a change (hereinafter referred to as a hold change suggestion effect) is executed, and then an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display icon is executed. In this conventional pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as the conventional 1 pachinko machine), such as when the fluctuation display is started, when the hold information is shifted, or when the game ball enters the first start port or the second start port. , At a predetermined timing, the hold change suggestion effect is executed, and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display icon is executed. Therefore, the player can change the display mode of the hold display icon. It was possible to predict the timing of appearance, and there was a problem that the player lacked a sense of expectation and urgency. Further, since the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display icon does not appear unless the hold change suggestion effect is executed, the player can change the hold display icon to the hold display icon only when the hold change suggestion effect is executed. There was no attention, and the player had less expectation and urgency.

In addition, as another conventional pachinko machine, a special character appears on the hold display icon during variable display, and when this character appears, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display icon is executed. There was a composition. In the pachinko machine with this configuration, the above effect is never executed when a special character does not appear, and the above effect is always executed when a special character appears. Like the pachinko machine, there was a problem that the player lacked a sense of anticipation and urgency.

Further, as another conventional pachinko machine, a mini-game-like hold change effect is executed during variable display, and when the mini-game is won, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display icon is executed. There was a structure to do. In the pachinko machine having this configuration, if the above-mentioned effect for changing the hold does not appear, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display icon is never executed. There was a problem that the player lacked a sense of expectation and urgency.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of petals are repeatedly fluttering on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 regardless of whether or not the hold display icon is displayed.
(I) The majority of these petals (Type 1 petals P1 and Type 2 petals P2) do not act on the hold display icon, even if they pass around the hold display icon or over the hold display icon. Not
(Ii) If you think that one of those petals (the third kind petal P3 that moves along the first target non-holding orbit or the second target non-holding orbit) has moved toward the hold display icon, the relevant Immediately before the hold display icon, it is removed from the hold display icon,
(Iii) If you think that one of those petals (Type 3 petal P3 that moves along the target hold arrival trajectory) has reached the hold display icon, a predetermined time has passed since it arrived. Due to the previous shift of the hold display icon, the display mode of the hold display icon does not change.
(Iv) If one of those petals (Type 3 petal P3 that moves along the target hold arrival trajectory) reaches the hold display icon and stays (attaches) for a predetermined time. , The display mode of the hold display icon does not change because the display level Lvr set for the hold display icon has already reached the display level upper limit value Lvm.
(V) I think that one of those petals (the third kind petal P3 that moves along the target hold arrival trajectory) reached the hold display icon and stayed (attached) for a predetermined time. Then, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display icon is executed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the petals are repeatedly displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, it is expected that the display mode of the hold display icon will change for the player. A feeling of urgency and urgency can always be given (as long as one of the petals is displayed) and at the same time.
-The petals have reached the hold display icon, but they have passed the hold display icon.
-The petals headed for the hold display icon, but the petals reached the outside of the hold display icon.
-The petals have reached the hold display icon, but the petals did not adhere to the hold display icon.
-The petals have reached the hold display icon and the petals have adhered to the hold display icon, but (because the display level Lvr of the hold display icon has already reached the set display level upper limit Lvm). Since it is possible to give a feeling of disappointment that the display mode of the hold display icon has not changed, it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation and urgency. Further, in the present embodiment, since the petals that can play the role of the hold change suggestion effect and the petals having the same pattern as the petals are always dancing, it is expected that an effect that changes the display mode of the hold display icon will appear. Since the player can always have a feeling, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation and a sense of urgency. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the first place, the production image that floats on the display surface 41a such as petals, confetti, butterflies, etc. is for making the display surface 41a lively. It didn't do anything. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display surface 41a is lively because the petals are attached to the hold display icon to perform an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display icon. You can effectively use the petals to make it.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, among the plurality of types of petals P1 to P4 displayed on the symbol display device 41, the fourth type petal P4 is stopped from the variable display state. When it adheres to, the effect of restarting the variable display of the symbol sequence is executed. In a conventional pachinko machine that does not have such a configuration, since the petals do not affect the variable display of the symbol row, the variable display of the symbol row is stopped and the symbol row is no longer a combination of the same symbol. It only gave the player a sense of disappointment. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the petal P4 of the fourth kind adheres to the symbol of the stopped symbol row, it is possible to execute an effect of restarting the variable display of the symbol row. From what can be done, it is possible to give a player who is once disappointed that the symbol sequence is not the same combination of symbols to be surprised that the variable display has resumed and to expect a big hit again. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<< 4-5 >> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-mentioned processing in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes will be described below. The MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal in addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, but description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

In step So0101, reading processing of various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main control device 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. Then, the process proceeds to step So0102.

In step So0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step So0103.

In step So0103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, Clear each to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step So0104. The value of the variable type counter CS is updated in the normal processing (FIG. 164) described later.

In step So0104, the ball entry process for the start port accompanying the ball entry into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the starting port of step So0104 will be described later. After executing step So0104, the process proceeds to step So0105.

In step So0105, a ball entry process for through ball accompanying the entry into the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the through of step So0105 will be described later. After executing step So0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Incoming ball entry process for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be described. The ball entry process for the start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 160: So0104).

FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the starting port. In step So0201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33. If it is determined in step So0201 that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (So0201: YES), the process proceeds to step So0202, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set the command. Then, the process proceeds to step So0203.

In step So0203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33. Then, the process proceeds to step So0204.

In step So0204, the start hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold number RaN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra, is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The first start hold number RaN indicates the hold number based on the entry of the ball into the first start port 33. Then, the process proceeds to step So0209.

If it is determined in step So0201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 33 (So0201: NO), the process proceeds to step So0205 and whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

If it is determined in step So0205 that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (So0205: YES), the process proceeds to step So0206, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set the command. Then, the process proceeds to step So0207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So0205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (So0205: NO), the ball entry process for the main starting port is terminated.

In step So0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step So0208.

In step So0208, the start hold number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as the second start hold number RbN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb, is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on the entry of the ball into the second start port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step So0209.

In step So0209, it is determined whether or not the start hold number N (RaN or RbN) set in step So0204 or step So0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step So0209, if the starting hold number N is not less than the upper limit value (So0209: NO), the ball entry process for the main starting port is terminated.

On the other hand, in step So0209, if the start hold number N is less than the upper limit value (So0209: YES), the process proceeds to step So0210, 1 is added to the start hold number N of the corresponding hold area, and then the process proceeds to step So0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reserved quantity CRN). The total hold quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first start hold quantity RaN and the second start hold quantity RbN. Then, the process proceeds to step So0212.

In step So0212, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step So0103 (FIG. 160) are stored in the first storage area of the corresponding reserved area, that is, the free storage area. In step So0210, 1 is added and stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved number. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as the processing target, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step So0103 are set. It is stored in the first storage area in the free storage area of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN to which 1 is added in step So0210. When the second start hold quantity RbN is set as the processing target, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step So0103 are second-held. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step So0210. After executing step So0212, the process proceeds to step So0213.

In step So0213, the first determination process is executed. The pre-judgment process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, and is based on the winning / failing determination result (lottery result), the jackpot type, and the reach. This is a process for determining whether or not the information has occurred before the pending information is subject to a winning lottery by the main control device 60. The details of the pre-determination process will be described later. After executing step So0213, the process proceeds to step So0214.

In step So0214, a process of setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the prior determination process executed based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a hold command.

The hold command determines that a ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 and the determination result (first determination information) by the advance determination process based on the hold information acquired based on the entry. This is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to confirm the hold information before it becomes the target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 164: step So0503) of the normal process described later.

Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the entry into the first start port 33, the voice emission control device 90 holds the display in the first start port hold area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing the number in accordance with the increase in the number is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first start port holding area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holdings. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the entry into the second start port 34 is received, the voice emission control device 90 holds the display in the second start port hold area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing the number in accordance with the increase in the number is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second start port holding area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holdings.

After executing step So0214, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

<First judgment process>
Next, the prior determination process will be described. The pre-determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 161: So0213) for the ball entry process for the start port.

FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing a prior determination process. As described above, in the prior determination process, based on the pending information, the determination results such as the winning / failing determination of the winning lottery, the determination of the type of the jackpot, and the determination of the presence / absence of the reach are determined, and the pending information is the hit by the main control device 60. This is a process to be executed before the lottery target.

In step So0301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting port in the ball entering process for the starting port (FIG. 161) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step So0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the determination result of the pre-judgment process executed by the previous entry before the current entry is read from the corresponding storage area, and the presence or absence of the probable change jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery by the current entry. In addition, by grasping whether or not the player has won the fall lottery, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round is determined.

If it is determined in step So0302 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round, the process proceeds to step So0303 and the winning / failing table is stored. Refer to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode (FIG. 148 (a)) stored in the area 63a. After that, the process proceeds to step So0305, and as a result of referring to the hit / fail table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step So0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round (So0302: NO), the process proceeds to step So0304 and the winning / failing table is stored. Refer to the hit / fail table for the high probability mode (FIG. 148 (b)) stored in the area 63a. After that, the process proceeds to step So0305, and as a result of referring to the hit / fail table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

In step So0305, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot (So0305: YES), the process proceeds to step So0306, and the ball is stored in the storage area by entering the starting port this time. Grasp the value of the jackpot type counter C2. After that, the process proceeds to step So0307, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2, which is the target of distribution this time, is acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33, refer to the distribution table for the first starting port. , When the ball is acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 34, the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to. After executing step So0307, the process proceeds to step So0308.

In step So0308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step So0308 that the probability variation jackpot is supported (So0308: YES), the process proceeds to step So0309, and the probability variation jackpot information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the first determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So0308 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (So0308: NO), the process proceeds to step So0310, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the first determination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step So0305 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to the jackpot (So0305: NO), the process proceeds to step So0311, and the ball enters the storage area this time. The value of the stored reach random number counter C3 is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step So0312, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step So0313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

If it is determined in step So0313 that the reach generation is supported (So0313: YES), the process proceeds to step So0314, and the reach generation information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the first determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So0313 that the reach generation is not supported (So0313: NO), the prior determination process is terminated as it is.

<Through ball entry process>
Next, the ball entry process for through will be described. The ball entry process for through is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 160: So0105).

FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for thru. In step So0401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35. If it is determined in step So0401 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (So0401: YES), the process proceeds to step So0402, and whether the number of reserved characters SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Judge whether or not. The number of reserved items SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that is reserved for performing the electric accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved items SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (So0401: NO), the entry process for this through is terminated.

If it is determined in step So0402 that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the number of reserved items SN (So0402: YES), the process proceeds to step So0403 and 1 is added to the number of reserved items SN. Then, the process proceeds to step So0404.

In step So0404, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step So0103 (FIG. 160) is stored in the first free storage area of the electric service holding area 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the ball entry process for through is completed.

On the other hand, in step So0402, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is not less than the upper limit value (So0402: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is equal to or more than the upper limit value, The ball entry process for through is completed without storing the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter, also referred to as “power on”). In the normal process, the main process of the game is executed.

FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step So0501, the startup process is executed. Specifically, the initial setting of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, the process proceeds to step So0502.

In step So0502, a start-up command is set. The start-up command is a command for starting a demo movie for each control device on the sub side when the power is turned on. Then, the process proceeds to step So0503.

In step So0503, output data such as a start-up command set in step So0502 and a command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. If commands related to effects such as start-up commands, variable commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After executing step So0503, the process proceeds to step So0504.

In step So0504, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variable type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step So0505.

In step So0505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step So0506. In step So0506, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of a symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display unit 37a, the second symbol display unit 37b, and the like are performed. The details of the game times control process will be described later. After executing step So0506, the process proceeds to step So0507.

In step So0507, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. The details of the game state transition process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step So0508.

In step So0508, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is in the open state. The details of the processing for electric service support will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step So0509.

In step So0509, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process of step So0503). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached. If it is determined in step So0509 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal process (So0509: NO), in step So0510 and step So0511 until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached. Within the remaining time of, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step So0510, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step So0511, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So0509 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (So0509: YES), the process returns to step So0503 and each process from step So0503 to step So0508 is performed. Run.

Since the execution time of each process from step So0503 to step So0508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process will be described. The game times control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 164: So0506) of the normal process.

FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the game times control process. In step So0601, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The open / close execution mode flag is turned on when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is turned off when the open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process.

If it is determined in step So0601 that the open / close execution mode is in progress (So0601: YES), the game round control process ends without executing any of the processes after step So0602. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the game round is not started regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So0601 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (So0601: NO), the process proceeds to step So0602.

In step So0602, it is determined whether or not the special figure unit 37 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b provided in the special symbol unit 37 is in variable display. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the special map variation display flag in the special map variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special symbol variation display flag is turned on when starting the variation display for either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, and is turned off when the variation display ends.

If it is determined in step So0602 that the special figure unit 37 is not displaying the fluctuation (So0602: NO), the process proceeds to step So0603.

In step So0603, the fluctuation start processing for starting the fluctuation display in the special figure unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start processing will be described later. After executing step So0603, the game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So0602 that the special figure unit 37 is in the variable display (So0602: YES), the process proceeds to step So0604.

In step So0604, the variation end processing for terminating the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the variable end processing will be described later. After executing step So0604, the game round control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described. The variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 165: So0603) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. In step So0701, it is determined whether or not the total reserved quantity CRN exceeds "0". When the total reserved quantity CRN is "0" or less, it means that the starting reserved quantity is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Therefore, if it is determined in step So0701 that the total reserved quantity CRN is "0" or less (So0701: NO), the fluctuation start processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So0701 that the total number of reserved pieces CRN exceeds "0" (So0701: YES), the process proceeds to step So0702.

In step So0702, the hold information shift process for setting the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step So0703. The details of the hold information shift process will be described later.

In step So0703, a hit determination process including a process when a big hit is won in the hit lottery is performed. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step So0703, the process proceeds to step So0704.

In step So0704, the variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is to set the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, based on the presence / absence of a big hit, the presence / absence of reach, and the like. It is the processing of. The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step So0704, the process proceeds to step So0705.

In step So0705, a variable command is set. The variable command is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33, or is acquired based on the entry into the second starting opening 34. It contains information indicating whether or not the information is on hold, information on whether or not reach has occurred, and information on the fluctuation time set in step So0706. After executing step So0705, the process proceeds to step So0706.

In step So0706, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence / absence of a big hit and the result of the distribution determination. That is, the type command includes 16R probability variation jackpot information, 8R probability variation jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or loss result information about the winning lottery as the jackpot type information. It has been.

The variable command and the type command set in step So0705 and step So0706 are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by step So0503 in the normal process (FIG. 164). The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variable command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step So0706, the process proceeds to step So0707.

In step So0707, among the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is started to display the variation of the symbol. Specifically, when the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is specified to be the first symbol display unit 37a, and the variable display is started. When the second symbol display unit flag is ON, it is specified that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is the second symbol display unit 37b, and the variable display is started. After executing step So0707, the process proceeds to step So0708.

In step So0708, the special figure change display flag stored in the special figure change display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step So0708, this fluctuation start process ends.

<Hold information shift processing>
Next, the hold information shift process will be described. The hold information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 166: So0702).

FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the hold information shift process. In step So0801, it is determined whether or not the hold area to be processed for executing the hold information shift process is the first hold area Ra. Specifically, among the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 147) in time series, the hold information stored first (hold stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra). Information) is stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb (information), which is the earliest hold information stored in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 147) in time series. If it is stored in the hold area before the hold information), it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra. On the other hand, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb in time series is earlier than the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra in time series. If the stored hold information is stored in the hold area first, it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the second hold area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step So0801, the reserved information can be processed in the order stored in the first reserved area Ra or the second reserved area Rb.

If it is determined in step So0801 that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra (step So0801: YES), the hold information shift process for the first hold area in steps So0802 to step So0807 is executed. On the other hand, in step So0801, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (step So0801: NO). ), Hold information shift processing for the second hold area in steps So0808 to So0813 is executed.

In step So0802, after subtracting 1 from the first start hold number RaN in the first hold area Ra, the process proceeds to step So0803 and the total hold number CRN is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step So0804. In step So0804, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step So0805.

In step So0805, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step So0805, the process proceeds to step So0806.

In step So0806, when the second symbol display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second symbol display unit flag is information for specifying whether the target for starting the variation display this time is the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. Then, the process proceeds to step So0807.

In step So0807, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the first hold area Ra, that is, corresponding to the first start port 33. A shift command including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the pending information shift process is terminated. The shift command set in step So0807 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step So0503 in the normal process (FIG. 164).

In step So0801, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (So0801: NO), the step. Proceed to So0808.

In step So0808, the second start hold quantity RbN of the second hold area Rb is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step So0809. In step So0809, the total number of reserved pieces CRN is subtracted by 1, the process proceeds to step So0810, and the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step So0811.

In step So0811, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step So0811, the process proceeds to step So0812.

In step So0812, if the second symbol display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Then, the process proceeds to step So0813.

In step So0813, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, the information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the second hold area Rb, that is, corresponding to the second start port 34. A shift command including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the pending information shift process is terminated.

The shift command set in step So0813 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step So0503 in the normal process (FIG. 164). The voice emission control device 90 sets a command for changing the display in the second start port hold area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command. Send to 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second start port holding area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holdings.

<Collision detection processing>
Next, the hit determination process will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 166: So0703).

FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing a hit determination process. In step So0901, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step So0901 that the mode is in the high probability mode (So0901: YES), the process proceeds to step So0902, and the pass / fail determination is made with reference to the pass / fail table for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 148 (b). Is determined. Then, the process proceeds to step So0904.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So0901 that the mode is not in the high probability mode (So0901: NO), the process proceeds to step So0903, and the pass / fail determination is made with reference to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 148 (a). Is determined. Then, the process proceeds to step So0904.

In step So0904, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination (winning lottery) in step So0902 or step So0903 is a big hit winning. In step So0904, if the result of the winning / failing determination is a big hit (So0904: YES), the process proceeds to step So0905.

In step So0905, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step So0905 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (So0905: NO), the process proceeds to step So0906, and the distribution table for the first starting port (see FIG. 149 (a)) is referred to. Then, the distribution is determined. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of 16R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. Determine if it is included in.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So0905 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (So0905: YES), the process proceeds to step So0907, and the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 149 (b)). The distribution is determined with reference to. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 16R probability variation jackpot or the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. After executing the process of step So0906 or step So0907, the process proceeds to step So0908.

In step So0908, the flag (big hit flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step So0906 or step So0907 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, turn on the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, if it is an 8R probability variation jackpot, turn on the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, and if it is a 16R normal jackpot, turn on the 16R normal jackpot flag. Turn it on, and if it is an 8R normal jackpot, turn on the 8R normal jackpot flag. After executing step So0908, the process proceeds to step So0909.

In step So0909, a process of setting a stop result for a big hit is executed. Specifically, in this game round in which a big hit is won, it is set which stop result is displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to end the variable display. It is a process to do. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63f (FIG. 146), the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot distributed in step So0906 or step So0907 can be obtained. The address information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step So0909, the hit determination process ends.

In step So0904, if the result of the winning lottery in step So0902 or step So0903 is not a big hit (So0904: NO), the process proceeds to step So0910, and the reach determination table is referred to to see if a reach occurs in the game round. Judge whether or not. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is set as the reach occurrence in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 146). Determine if it matches the value you have. Then, the process proceeds to step So0911.

In step So0911, if the result of the reach determination in step So0910 is that reach occurs in the game round (So0911: YES), the process proceeds to step So0912 and the reach generation flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach generation flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step So0912, the process proceeds to step So0913.

On the other hand, in step So0911, if the result of the reach determination in step So0910 is that reach does not occur in the game round (So0911: NO), the process proceeds to step So0913 without executing step So0912.

In step So0913, a process of setting a stop result for disconnection is executed. Specifically, in this game round, which is the result of the deviation, the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b is used to set which stop result is displayed to end the variable display. It is a process. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for deviation in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. , The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step So0913, the hit determination process ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 166: So0704) of the variation start process.

FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation time setting process. In step So1001, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, the process proceeds to step So1002.

In step So1002, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is a big hit winning. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and any of the flags is ON. In some cases, it is assumed that the jackpot is won (So1002: YES), and the process proceeds to step So1003.

In step So1003, the petal revariable lottery process is executed. In the present embodiment, there are two types of fluctuation time when the jackpot is won: a normal jackpot fluctuation time and a jackpot fluctuation time accompanied by re-variation. The "re-variation" referred to here means the re-variation of the symbol sequence caused by the attachment of the type 4 petal P4, which was explained with reference to FIG. As the required fluctuation time, a fluctuation time for jackpot with re-variation is prepared. The petal re-variation lottery process is a process of determining by lottery whether or not to adopt the jackpot fluctuation time accompanied by re-variation at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, the value is acquired from the random number counter for lottery, and corresponds to the value of the acquired random number counter among the plurality of values stored as "winning" in the table data for lottery stored in the ROM 63. Determine if there is a value. If there is a value corresponding to the acquired random number value among the multiple values stored as "winning", it is decided to adopt the jackpot fluctuation time with re-variation, and it corresponds to the acquired random number value. If there is no value, it is decided not to adopt the jackpot fluctuation time with re-variation. The random number counter for the petal orbit lottery is provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94. The random number counter is updated at short intervals. After executing step So1003, the process proceeds to step So1004.

In step So1004, it is determined whether or not to adopt the jackpot fluctuation time accompanied by the re-variation based on the result of the petal re-variation lottery process. In step So1004, if the petal re-variation lottery process is won, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation time accompanied by re-variation is adopted (So1004: YES), the process proceeds to step So1005.

In step So1005, a petal revariable lottery winning command is set. The petal revariable lottery winning command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the petal revariable lottery has been won. The petal revariation lottery winning command set in step So1005 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step So0503 in the normal process (FIG. 164). After executing step So1005, the process proceeds to step So1006.

In step So1006, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the fluctuation time table for jackpot with re-variation stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After that, the process proceeds to step So1007, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step So1004, if the petal re-variation lottery process is not won, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation time accompanied by re-variation is not adopted (So1004: NO), the process proceeds to step So1008.

In step So1008, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the fluctuation time table for the normal jackpot stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After that, the process proceeds to step So1006, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

In step So1002, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is not a big hit (So1002: NO), the process proceeds to step So1009, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs in this game round. do. Since this process (So1009) is executed when the big hit is not won in the winning lottery related to the current game in step So1002, in Sx1009, the reach (so-called) among the game times in which the big hit is not won in the winning lottery is executed. It is determined whether or not the game is a game in which an out-of-reach) occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach generation flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON, and if it is ON, reach is generated (So1009: YES), and step So1010. Proceed to.

In step So1010, the reach generation flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is shifted from ON to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step So1011.

In step So1011, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the variation time table for reach generation stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After that, the process proceeds to step So1007 described above, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step So1009 that reach does not occur in the current game round (So1009: NO), the process proceeds to step So1012, and the variation time table storage area 63d is stored with reference to the variation time table for non-reach generation. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. The variation time table for non-reach generation is a so-called variation time table for deviation. After that, the process proceeds to step So1007 described above, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

<Variation end processing>
Next, the variable end processing will be described. The variation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 165: So0604) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the variation end processing. In step So1101, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the fluctuation time is the time from the start of fluctuation of the symbol row to the stop of all the symbol rows, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step So1101, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 is "0". The value of the fluctuation time information is set in the above-mentioned fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 169). The value of the set fluctuation time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started.

If it is determined in step So1101 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (So1101: NO), the fluctuation end processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step So1101 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (So1101: YES), the process proceeds to step So1102, which corresponds to the current game times among the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. Performs processing to end the fluctuation of the symbol in the symbol display unit. Subsequently, in step So1103, the special figure change display flag stored in the special figure change display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing step So1103, the process proceeds to step So1104.

In step So1104, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is a big hit winning. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step So1104 that none of the above flags is ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery related to the current game round is not a big hit winning (So1104: NO), the process proceeds to step So1105.

In step So1105, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step So1105 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (So1105: YES), the process proceeds to step So1106, and it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter PNC exceeds 0. If it is determined in step So1106 that the value of the game count counter PNC exceeds 0 (So1106: YES), the process proceeds to step So1107, and the value of the game count counter PNC is decremented by 1. After executing step So1107, the process proceeds to step So1108. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So1106 that the value of the game count counter PNC is 0 or less (So1106: NO), the process proceeds to step So1108 without executing step So1107.

In step So1108, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step So1108 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (So1108: NO), the process proceeds to step So1109, and it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter PNC exceeds 0.

If it is determined in step So1109 that the value of the game count counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step So1109: NO), the process proceeds to step So1110 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After executing step So1110, the variable time end processing is terminated.

When it is determined in step So1108 that the high probability mode flag is ON (So1108: YES), or when it is determined in step So1109 that the value of the game count counter PNC exceeds 0 (Step So1109: YES). , This variable time end process is terminated without executing step So1110. Further, when it is determined in step So1105 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (So1105: NO), the variable time end processing is terminated without executing steps So106 to So1110.

On the other hand, in step So1104, any one of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag is ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is If it is determined that the jackpot is won (So1104: YES), the process proceeds to step So1111, and the open / close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step So1111, the variable time end processing is terminated.

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 164: So0507) of the normal process.

FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step So1201, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the large winning opening opening / closing processing period (at the beginning of the ending period) in the opening / closing execution mode, and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the open / close execution mode.

If it is determined in step So1201 that the ending period flag is not ON (So1201: NO), the process proceeds to step So1202, and it is determined whether or not the open / close processing period flag is ON. The opening / closing processing period flag is turned on at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening / closing execution mode and the large winning opening opening / closing processing period, which is the period during which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed, is started. , It is turned off at the timing when the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 36b is completed.

If it is determined in step So1202 that the open / close processing period flag is not ON (So1202: NO), the process proceeds to step So1203, and it is determined whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the beginning of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step So1203 that the opening period flag is not ON (So1203: NO), the process proceeds to step So1204, and it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step So1204 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (So1204: YES), the process proceeds to step So1205. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So1204 that the open / close execution mode flag is OFF (So1204: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

In step So1205, the high probability mode flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step So1206. In step So1206, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step So1207.

In step So1207, an opening / closing scenario setting process for setting an opening / closing scenario is executed. The opening / closing scenario defines a pattern of opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 36b in the round game. In this embodiment, the condition for shifting the opening / closing door 36b from the closed state to the open state (hereinafter, also referred to as “opening condition”) This is a program in which the condition for shifting the opening / closing door 36b from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter, also referred to as “closed condition”) is recorded. The opening / closing scenario is stored in the opening / closing scenario storage area 63h of the ROM 63.

The opening conditions are as follows, for example.
-The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing to start each round game in the open / close execution mode.
When the above one item is satisfied, the opening / closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

The closing conditions are as follows, for example.
-The elapsed time from the start of each round game exceeds the predetermined upper limit duration (for example, 15 seconds).
-The number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening 36a after starting each round game exceeds the predetermined maximum number.
When either of the above two items is satisfied, the opening / closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

After executing step So1207, the process proceeds to step So1208 described above.

In step So1208, the opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period (hereinafter, also referred to as an opening time) in the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, the same constant length of opening time is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step So1208, the process proceeds to step So1209.

In step So1209, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step So0503 in the normal process (FIG. 164). This opening command contains information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current open / close execution mode. The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the large winning opening opening / closing processing period based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step So1209, the process proceeds to step So1210, and the opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step So1203 that the opening period flag is ON (So1203: YES), the process proceeds to step So1211.

In step So1211, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step So1211 that the opening period has ended (So1211: YES), the process proceeds to step So1212 and the opening period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step So1213.

In step So1213, a round display start process for notifying the type of the opening / closing execution mode this time is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the above address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is specified from the specified stop result data. Confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round display unit 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step So1213, the process proceeds to step So1214.

In step So1214, the open / close processing period flag is turned ON. In the following step So1215, an open / close process start command is set. The open / close process start command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the open / close process period has started. The open / close process start command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 164: step So0503) of the normal process. After executing step So1215, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step So1202 that the open / close processing period flag is ON (So1202: YES), the process proceeds to step So1216 to execute the large winning opening opening / closing process. The process of opening and closing the large winning opening will be described later. After executing step So1216, the process proceeds to step So1217.

In step So1217, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed depending on whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened is "0". do. If it is determined in step So1217 that the opening / closing process for the large winning opening is completed (So1217: YES), the process proceeds to step So1218. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So1217 that the large winning opening opening / closing process has not been completed (So1217: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

In step So1218, the open / close processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step So1219.

In step So1219, the round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is terminated so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step So1219, the process proceeds to step So1220.

In step So1220, the ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the ending period (hereinafter, also referred to as an ending time) in the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set in each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step So1220, the process proceeds to step So1221.

In step So1221, an ending command is set. This set ending command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step So0503 in the normal process (FIG. 164). The voice emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on the reception of the ending command. After executing step So1221, the process proceeds to step So1222.

In step So1222, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step So1201 that the ending period flag is ON (So1201: YES), the process proceeds to step So1223.

In step So1223, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (So1220), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0”. If it is determined in step So1220 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (So1223: YES), the process proceeds to step So1224.

In step So1224, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step So1225, and the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of the game times after the end of the current ending period. Details of the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step So1225, the process proceeds to step So1226, and the open / close execution mode flag is turned off. After executing step So1226, the process proceeds to step So1227.

In step So1227, it is determined whether or not the total reserved quantity CRN is “0”. When the total reserved quantity CRN is "0", it means that the starting reserved quantity is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. If it is determined in step So1227 that the total number of reserved pieces CRN is "0" (So1227: YES), the process proceeds to step So1228.

In step So1228, a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command is for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that no hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 64b at the time when the symbol change (game round) is completed. It is a command that contains the information of. This set customer waiting command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step So1228 in the normal process (FIG. 164). After executing step So1228, the game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So1227 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (So1227: NO), the game round control process is terminated as it is. If it is determined in step So1223 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (So1223: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

<Large winning opening opening / closing process>
Next, the process of opening and closing the large winning opening will be described. The large winning opening opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 171: So1216) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening / closing process. In step So1301, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning driving unit 36c. If it is determined in step So1301 that the opening / closing door 36b is not open (So1301: NO), the process proceeds to step So1302.

In step So1302, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening / closing scenario set by the opening / closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the opening / closing door 36b. If it is determined in step So1302 that the opening condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied (So1302: YES), the process proceeds to step So1303.

In step So1303, the opening / closing door 36b is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step So1304.

In step So1304, an open / close door open command is set. The opening / closing door opening command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the opening / closing door 36b has been opened. The opening / closing door opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 164: step So0503) of the normal processing. After executing step So1304, the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed.

If it is determined in step So1302 that the opening condition of the opening / closing door 36b is not satisfied (So1302: NO), the large winning opening opening / closing process is terminated without executing steps So1303 and So1304.

If it is determined in step So1301 that the opening / closing door 36b is being opened (So1301: YES), the process proceeds to step So1305.

In step So1305, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening / closing scenario set by the opening / closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the opening / closing door 36b. If it is determined in step So1305 that the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied (So1305: YES), the process proceeds to step So1306.

In step So1306, the opening / closing door 36b is closed. Then, the process proceeds to step So1307.

In step So1307, an open / close door closing command is set. The opening / closing door closing command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the opening / closing door 36b has been closed. The opening / closing door closing command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 164: step So0503) of the normal process. After executing step So1307, the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed.

If it is determined in step So1305 that the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b is not satisfied (So1305: NO), the large winning opening opening / closing process is terminated without executing steps So1306 and So1307.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 171: So1225) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of the ending period. In step So1401, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probabilistic jackpot is turned ON in the jackpot flag. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step So1401 that the 16R probability variation jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON (So1401: YES), the process proceeds to step So1402, and among the 16R probability variation jackpot flag and the 8R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64. Turn off the flag that is ON. After executing step So1402, the process proceeds to step So1403.

In step So1403, the high probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step So1404, and the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after ending the open / close execution mode, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Then, the process proceeds to step So1405.

In step So1405, 100 is set in the game count counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. The value set in the game count counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. Then, the process proceeds to step So1406.

In step So1406, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. .. Then, the process proceeds to step So1411.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So1401 that the 16R probability variation jackpot flag and the 8R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 are not ON (So1401: NO), the process proceeds to step So1407 and the 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step So1408.

In step So1408, after turning on the high frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step So1409, and 100 is set in the game count counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step So1410.

In step So1410, a low-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub-side to recognize that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. .. Then, the process proceeds to step So1411.

In step So1411, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is used as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Set. After that, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electric service support>
Next, the processing for electric service support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 164: So0508) of the normal process.

FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the electric service support process. In step So1501, it is determined whether or not the support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The supporting flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened and turned off when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step So1501 that the supporting flag is not ON (So1501: NO), the process proceeds to step So1502.

In step So1502, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned on when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is ON. Is. If it is determined in step So1502 that the support winning flag is not ON (So1502: NO), the process proceeds to step So1503.

In step So1503, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal diagram unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

If it is determined in step So1503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (So1503: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (So1503: YES), the process proceeds to step So1504.

In step So1504, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display of the symbol in the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step So1504 that it is the end timing of the variable display (So1504: YES), the process proceeds to step So1505, the off display is set, and then the main electric service support process is terminated. By setting the off display, the variable display of the symbol in the normal figure unit 38 is terminated in the state where the off display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So1504 that it is not the end timing of the variation display (So1504: NO), the process proceeds to step So1506.

In step So1506, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0". If it is determined in step So1506 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is "0" (So1506: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So1506 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0" (So1506: YES), the process proceeds to step So1507.

In step So1507, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step So1508 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If the step So1507 is not in the open / close execution mode (So1507: NO) and the step So1508 is in the high frequency support mode (So1508: YES), the process proceeds to step So1509 and the electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. Then, the process proceeds to step So1510.

In step So1510, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step So1509 is a support winning. If it is determined in step So1510 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is the support winning (So1510: YES), the process proceeds to step So1511, the support winning flag is turned ON, and the counter area 64f of the RAM 64 is provided. Set "3" in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. After that, the processing for electric service support is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So1510 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not the support winning (So1510: NO), the electric service support process is terminated without executing the process of step So1511.

If it is determined in step So1507 that the open / close execution mode is set (So1507: YES), or if it is determined in step So1508 that the mode is not in the high frequency support mode (So1508: NO), the process proceeds to step So1512 and the motorized accessory opening lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. Then, the process proceeds to step So1513.

In step So1513, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step So1512 is the support winning. If it is determined in step So1513 that the support is not won (So1513: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So1513 that the support is won (So1513: YES), the process proceeds to step So1514, the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , End the processing for main electric service support.

If it is determined in step So1502 that the support winning flag is ON (So1502: YES), the process proceeds to step So1515, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38. If it is determined in step So1515 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (So1515: NO), the pattern variation is being displayed in the normal drawing unit 38, so that the main electric service support process is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So1515 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (So1515: YES), the process proceeds to step So1516.

In step So1516, the hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the pattern in the normal drawing unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped and displayed. After that, the process proceeds to step So1517, the supporting flag is turned ON, and the support winning flag is turned OFF. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

If it is determined in step So1501 that the supporting flag is ON (So1501: YES), the process proceeds to step So1518, and an electric function opening / closing control process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

<Electrical function opening / closing control processing>
Next, the electric function opening / closing control process will be described. The electric service opening / closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 174: So1518) of the electric service support process.

FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the electric function opening / closing control process. In step So1601, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in the driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (So1601: YES), the process proceeds to step So1602.

In step So1602, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step So1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (So1602: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. That is, if the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the main electric accessory opening / closing control process ends.

If it is determined in step So1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (So1602: YES), the process proceeds to step So1603, and a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state is performed. “250” (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step So1603, the process proceeds to step So1604.

In step So1604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step So1605, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step So1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (So1605: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (So1605: YES), the process proceeds to step So1606 and the supporting flag is turned off. After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step So1601 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (So1601: NO), the process proceeds to step So1607, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step So1607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (So1607: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So1607 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (So1607: YES), the process proceeds to step So1608, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state is executed. .. Then, the process proceeds to step So1609.

In step So1609, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, and if it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is not in progress (So1609: NO), the process proceeds to step So1610 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step So1610 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (So1610: YES), the process proceeds to step So1611, and "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So1609 that the open / close execution mode is set (So1609: YES), or if it is determined in step So1610 that the mode is not in the high frequency support mode (So1610: NO), the process proceeds to step So1612, and the second step is performed. The timer counter area T2 is set to "100" (that is, 0.2 sec). After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

<< 4-6 >> Various processes executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device will be described. The process executed by the voice emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed with a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described.

In step So1701, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound / light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main MPU 62, and the commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Read sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step So1701, the process proceeds to step So1702.

In step So1702, the pending command correspondence process is executed. In the hold command correspondence process, the process corresponding to the hold command among the commands stored in step So1701 is performed. The details of the pending command support processing will be described later. After executing step So1702, the process proceeds to step So1703.

In step So1703, the game rotation effect setting process is executed. In the game time effect setting process, the effect to be executed in the game time from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the symbol is set. The details of the game time production setting process will be described later. After executing step So1703, the process proceeds to step So1704.

In step So1704, the opening / closing execution mode effect processing is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode production processing, processing related to the production in the opening period, the production in the large winning opening opening / closing processing period, and the production in the ending period is performed. After executing step So1704, the process proceeds to step So1705.

In step So1705, the second kind petal production process is executed. In the process for producing the type 2 petals, the process for displaying the type 2 petals P2 (see FIGS. 155 and 156) on the symbol display device 41 is performed. Specifically, an effect command instructing execution of an effect in which a plurality of type 2 petals P2 move from the upper side to the lower side is transmitted to the display control device 100. The effect command also includes a command to set the display destination of the second kind petal P2 to the upper layer L3. The display control device 100 that has received the effect command causes the symbol display device 41 to display the above-mentioned type 2 petal P2. In addition, instead of the configuration in which the above-mentioned effect command is transmitted, a command for instructing the display control device 100 to play back the video (video) data in which a plurality of type 2 petals P2 move so as to dance from the upper side to the lower side is given to the display control device 100. The video data may be displayed on the symbol display device 41 by transmission. After executing step So1705, the process proceeds to step So1706.

In step So1706, the third kind petal effect setting process is executed. In the type 3 petal effect setting process, the effect of displaying the type 3 petal P3 (see FIGS. 155 to 157) on the symbol display device 41 is set. The details of the type 3 petal effect setting process will be described later. After executing step So1706, the process proceeds to step So1707.

In step So1707, the hold display change setting process is executed. In the hold display change setting process, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display icon is set. The details of the hold display change setting process will be described later. After executing step So1707, the process proceeds to step So1708.

In step So1708, the background effect processing is executed. In the background effect processing, a process of displaying a background moving image determined according to a command indicating a game state received from the main MPU 62 on the symbol display device 41 is performed. For example, a process is performed to display a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode is ongoing, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that the high-probability mode is continuing. .. In addition, these background moving images include an image in which a plurality of first-class petals P1 (see FIGS. 155 and 156) move from the upper side to the lower side. After executing step So1708, the process proceeds to step So1709.

In step So1709, other processing is executed. The other processing is a process of displaying a demo image (moving image) on the symbol display device 41 when the game is not performed by the player. After executing step So1709, the process proceeds to step So1710.

In step So1710, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the above-mentioned effect processing. After executing step So1710, the process proceeds to step So1711.

In step So1711, the audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read in the above-mentioned BGM process and each effect process. After executing step So1711, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Processing for pending commands>
Next, the pending command correspondence process will be described. The hold command correspondence process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 176: So1702).

FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the pending command correspondence process. In step So1801, it is determined whether or not a hold command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step So1801 that the hold command is received from the main MPU 62 (So1801: YES), the process proceeds to step So1802.

In step So1802, the update process at the time of entering the ball is executed. In the update process at the time of entering the ball, the number of hold information acquired based on the entry into the first start port 33, the number of hold information acquired based on the entry into the second start port 34, and the number of hold information acquired. A process for making the total number of these reserved information identifiable in the sound light side MPU 92 is executed. The details of the update process at the time of entering the ball in step So1802 will be described later. In the following, the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33 is also referred to as the "first reserved number", and the reserved information acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 34. The number is also referred to as a "second hold quantity", and the total number of the first hold quantity and the second hold quantity is also referred to as a "total hold quantity". After executing step So1802, the process proceeds to step So1803.

In step So1803, the hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the display (hold display icon) in the first start port hold area Ds1 and the second start port hold area Ds2 corresponding to the first hold number and the second hold number specified in step So1802. A command for changing the display (display such as how many are lined up) is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 makes the display in the first start port hold area Ds1 and the second start port hold area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 correspond to the first hold number and the second hold number. change. Specifically, the display control device 100 that has received the command defines each display position for displaying the hold display icons H1 to H4 in the first start port hold area Ds1, and is set to the first hold number. Display the corresponding number of hold display icons at the display position. Further, the display control device 100 defines each display position for displaying the hold display icon in the second start port hold area Ds2, and the number of hold display icons corresponding to the second hold number is set as the display position. indicate. After executing step So1803, the pending command correspondence process ends.

<Update process at the time of entry>
Next, the update process at the time of entering the ball will be described. The update process at the time of entering the ball is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 177: So1802) of the hold command corresponding process.

FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing an update process at the time of entering the ball. In step So1901, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the entry into the first starting port 33. If it is determined in step So1901 that the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the entry into the first starting port 33 (So1901: YES), the process proceeds to step So1902 and the sound is produced. The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the optical side RAM 94 is executed. The first reserved quantity counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33 in the sound light side MPU 92. In the update process of the first hold quantity counter area, the information of the first hold count counter area is updated to the information of the hold count included in the hold command to be read this time. After executing step So1902, the process proceeds to step So1904.

In step So1901, when it is determined that the hold command to be read this time is not transmitted based on the entry into the first start port 33 (So1901: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start. If it is determined that the ball was transmitted based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process proceeds to step So1903 to update the second reserved number counter area provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94. Run. The second reserved quantity counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 34 in the sound light side MPU 92. In the second hold quantity counter area update process, the information in the second hold count counter area is updated to the hold count information included in the command to be read this time. After executing step So1903, the process proceeds to step So1904.

The reason why the processing of step So1902 and step So1903 is performed as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while the backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the voice emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, if the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information relating to the entry into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the hold information is held in the main control device 60. Is stored and retained, whereas the voice emission control device 90 grasps that the number of reserved information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first hold quantity counter area or the second hold count counter area is counted up each time the voice emission control device 90 receives a hold command, the main control device 60 actually holds the hold storage. There may be an inconvenience that the number of reserved information stored and the number of reserved information grasped by the voice emission control device 90 do not match. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment described above, the main control device 60 transmits the hold command including the information on the number of holds, and the voice emission control device 90 sends the hold command to the command each time the hold command is received. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the number of reserved pieces included is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

In step So1904, the update process of the total reserved number counter area provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94 is executed. The total number of hold counter areas is the sum of the number of hold information acquired based on the entry into the first start port 33 and the number of hold information acquired based on the entry into the second start port 34. It is a counter area for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92. In the update process, the information of the total reserved quantity counter area is the sum of the information of the reserved quantity measured in the first reserved quantity counter area and the information of the reserved quantity measured in the second reserved quantity counter area. Update to. After executing step So1904, the process proceeds to step So1905.

In step So1905, the hold effect parameter setting process is executed. In the hold effect parameter setting process, various parameters necessary for changing the display mode of the hold display are set. The details of the parameter setting process for the hold effect will be described later. After executing step So1905, the update process at the time of the main ball entry is terminated.

The storage area for the hold effect used for the parameter setting process for the hold effect in step So1905 will be described below. The parameters set by the hold effect parameter setting process are stored in the hold effect storage area 94d provided in the sound light side RAM 94 included in the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 179 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a storage area 94d for holding effect. The hold effect storage area 94d includes a first start port hold effect storage area and a second start port hold effect storage area. FIG. 179 (a) shows a storage area for the first start port hold effect, and FIG. 179 (b) shows a storage area for the second start port hold effect.

The storage area for the first start port hold effect is a storage area for storing various parameters necessary for changing the display mode of the hold display icons H1 to H4 of the first start port hold area Ds1. The storage area for the second start port hold effect is a storage area for storing various parameters necessary for changing the display mode of the hold display icon of the second start port hold area Ds2. Since the first start port hold effect storage area and the second start port hold effect storage area have the same configuration, the first start port hold effect storage area shown in FIG. 179 (a) will be described. The description of the storage area for the second start port hold effect shown in 179 (b) will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 179 (a), the storage area for the first start port hold effect stores various parameters for each hold game times (n) for the first start port. The reserved game times (n = 1 to 4) for the first starting port shown in the figure correspond to the reserved display icons H1 to H4. That is, the reserved game times (n = 1) of the first starting port are executed in the order of the reserved game times (n = 4) of the first starting port.

As shown in the figure, the storage area for the hold effect of the first start port stores the display level upper limit value Lvm and the display level Lvr as various parameters for each hold game round (n) for the first start port.

The display level upper limit value Lvm is a parameter that defines an upper limit value of how much the display level Lvr can be changed to a higher level when the display mode of the hold display icon is changed. For example, the hold display icon having the display level upper limit Lvm of 5 can change the display level Lvr to 5. A hold display icon having a display level upper limit Lvm of 3 can change the display level Lvr to 3, but cannot change the display level Lvr to a display level Lvr higher than 3 such as 4 or 5.

The display level Lvr is a parameter indicating the level of the display mode of the current hold display icon, as described with reference to FIG. 154.

The display level upper limit value Lvm and the display level Lvr are associated with various parameters such as the jackpot random number counter C1 in each reserved game round, and each time the game round is executed, the stored area is the next reserved game round. Shift to the storage area of. For example, as shown in FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b), the display level upper limit value Lvm and the display level Lvr stored in the storage area of the reserved game times (n = 4) of the first start port. Each parameter shifts to the storage area of the reserved game times (n = 3) of the first start port in the storage area for the first start port hold effect when the game times are executed once, and further, the game times are performed once. When executed, the game shifts to the storage area of the reserved game times (n = 2) of the first starting port in the storage area for the holding effect of the first starting port.

The display level upper limit value Lvm and the display level Lvr are values that are stored corresponding to the reserved game times when the game ball enters the starting port and the reserved game times exist. Is. Therefore, as shown by an example in FIG. 179 (b), for example, at a certain point in time, there are reserved game times (n = 3) for the second starting port and reserved game times (n = 4) for the second starting port. If not, the values of the display level upper limit value Lvm and the display level Lvr corresponding to the reserved game times are not stored. The parameter setting process for the hold effect executed by using the hold effect storage area will be described below.

<Parameter setting process for hold effect>
FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing a parameter setting process for holding effect. The hold effect parameter setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 178: So1905) of the update process at the time of entering the ball.

In step So2001, the display level upper limit value setting process is executed. This process is a process executed to set the display level upper limit value Lvm. The details of the display level upper limit setting process will be described later. After executing the display level upper limit setting process in step So2001, the process proceeds to step So2002.

In step So2002, 1 is set to the display level Lvr of the reserved game times corresponding to the entry of the game ball this time. The parameter setting process for the hold effect is a process executed every time the game ball enters the start port. In step So2002, every time the game ball enters the start port, the hold effect storage area becomes the first. 1 is set to 1 in the display level Lvr of the storage area of the reserved game times corresponding to the incoming ball in the storage area for the start opening hold effect or the storage area for the second start port hold effect. In this process, 1 is set for the display level Lvr of the reserved game times corresponding to the incoming ball, so that the display mode is set to white corresponding to 1 of the display level Lvr. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the starting port, the display level Lvr of the storage area of the reserved game times corresponding to the entry is set to 1, but for example, the display level upper limit value Lvm. Within the following range, if the reach random number counter C3 acquired by the entry is scheduled to execute the reach effect by the reach determination table, the display level Lvr is set to 2 or the entry is made. When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired by the ball is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning, the display level Lvr is set to a value of 2 or more, and various counters acquired by entering the ball to the starting port, such as setting the display level Lvr to a value of 2 or more. The display level Lvr may be determined based on the value. After executing step So2002, the parameter setting process for the hold effect is terminated.

<Display level upper limit setting process>
FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing a display level upper limit value setting process. The display level upper limit value setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 180: So2001) of the parameter setting process for holding effect.

In step So2101, the value of the upper limit value setting counter Cm is acquired. The upper limit value setting counter Cm is used when the sound light side MPU 92 determines the display level upper limit value Lvm. The upper limit value setting counter Cm is configured as a loop counter in which 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 99, and after reaching the maximum value, the counter returns to 0. After executing step So2101, the process proceeds to step So2102.

In step So2102, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the reserved game times corresponding to the entry of the game ball this time has won the jackpot in the winning lottery. Specifically, it is based on the information on the determination result of the advance determination process included in the hold command acquired from the main MPU 62 by the sound light side MPU 92 by the advance determination process executed when the ball enters the start port this time. To judge.

If it is determined in step So2102 that the reserved game times corresponding to the current entry of the game ball have been won as a big hit (So2102: YES), the process proceeds to step So2103.

In step So2103, the jackpot upper limit table is referred to. Specifically, the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit value setting counter Cm is extracted by referring to the jackpot upper limit value table.

FIG. 182 is an explanatory diagram showing an upper limit value table. FIG. 182 (a) shows a jackpot upper limit table.

The jackpot upper limit table is table data recorded in which each value (0 to 99) of the upper limit setting counter Cm and the value of the display level upper limit Lvm are associated with each other. The sound light side MPU 92 extracts the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit value setting counter Cm with reference to the jackpot upper limit table.

As shown in the figure, in the jackpot upper limit value table, 80 values from 20 to 99 correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm = 5 as the value of the upper limit value setting counter Cm, and as the value of the upper limit value setting counter Cm. 10 values of 10 to 19 correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm = 4, and 5 values of 5 to 9 correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm = 3 as the value of the upper limit value setting counter Cm, and the upper limit Four values 1 to 4 as the value of the value setting counter Cm correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm = 2, and one upper limit value setting counter Cm is 0 as the value of the upper limit value setting counter Cm. The value is set corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm = 1. That is, in the reserved game times in which the big hit is won in the winning lottery, the probability that the display level upper limit value Lvm becomes 5 is configured to be the highest.

FIG. 182 (b) shows an upper limit table for reach. The reach upper limit table is an upper limit table used in step So2105 described later. Similar to the jackpot upper limit table, the reach upper limit table is also the table data recorded in which each value (0 to 99) of the upper limit setting counter Cm and the value of the display level upper limit Lvm are associated with each other. Is. In the reserved game times in which reach occurs, the probability that the display level upper limit Lvm is 4 is the highest, and then the probability that the display level upper limit is 5 or 3 is high.

FIG. 182 (c) shows an upper limit table for non-reach generation. The reach non-generation upper limit table is an upper limit table used in step So2106 described later. Similar to the jackpot upper limit table, the reach non-generation upper limit table is also recorded in which each value (0 to 99) of the upper limit setting counter Cm and the value of the display level upper limit Lvm are associated with each other. It is table data. In the reserved game times in which reach does not occur, the probability that the display level upper limit value Lvm becomes 1 is the highest, and then the probability that the display level upper limit value becomes 2 is high.

The description returns to FIG. 181. In step So2103, after referring to the jackpot upper limit value table, the process proceeds to step So2107.

On the other hand, in step So2102, if it is determined that the reserved game times corresponding to the entry of the game ball this time have not won the big hit (So2102: NO), the process proceeds to step So2104.

In step So2104, it is determined whether or not the reserved game times corresponding to the current entry of the game ball correspond to the game times that generate reach. That is, it is determined whether or not the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the current reserved game times corresponds to the reach generation. Specifically, based on the information on the determination result of the advance determination process included in the hold command acquired from the main MPU 62 by the sound light side MPU 92 by the advance determination process executed with the ball entering the start port this time. judge.

If it is determined in step So2104 that the reserved game times corresponding to the current entry of the game ball correspond to the game times that generate reach (So2104: YES), the process proceeds to step So2105.

In step So2105, the reach upper limit value table is referred to. More specifically, the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit value setting counter Cm is extracted by referring to the reach upper limit value table. Then, the process proceeds to step So2107.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So2104 that the reserved game times corresponding to the current entry of the game ball do not correspond to the game times that generate reach (So2104: NO), the process proceeds to step So2106.

In step So2106, the upper limit table for non-reach generation is referred to. More specifically, the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit value setting counter Cm is extracted by referring to the reach non-generation upper limit value table. Then, the process proceeds to step So2107.

In step So2107, the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm extracted in any one of step So2103, step So2105, or step So2106 is stored in the storage area for the first start port hold effect or the storage area for the second start port hold effect. It is set in the storage area of the display level upper limit Lvm corresponding to the reserved game times this time. After that, the display level upper limit setting process is terminated.

<Game times production setting process>
Next, the game rotation effect setting process will be described. The game rotation effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 176: So1703).

FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the game rotation effect setting process. In step So2201, it is determined whether or not the variation command and the type command have been received. If it is determined in step So2201 that at least one of the variable command and the type command has not been received (So2201: NO), the game round effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So2201 that the variable command and the type command have been received (So2201: YES), the process proceeds to step So2202.

In step So2202, the fluctuation command received this time is read, and information on the presence / absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence / absence of reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time is read from the command. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Then, the process proceeds to step So2203.

In step So2203, an effect pattern setting process for setting an effect pattern to be executed in a game round such as a big hit or a reach is executed. The details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step So2203, the process proceeds to step So2204.

In step So2204, the stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, when the result of the winning lottery of this game round is 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, or 8R normal jackpot, it is on the effective line L of the symbol display device 41. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established is set as the information of the stop symbol this time. Specifically, when the result of the winning lottery of this game round is a 16R probability variation jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot, the same odd-numbered symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, and the same. A combination of even symbols can be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, this selectivity is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the same combination of even-numbered symbols, but instead, the former is selected over the latter. The configuration may have a high rate, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot. Further, when the result of the winning lottery of this game round is a 16R normal jackpot or an 8R normal jackpot, the same even-numbered symbol combination is selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the winning lottery for this game round is a deviation result, it is determined whether or not reach has occurred from the content of the variable command. When it is determined that the reach is generated, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L, and the stop result is that the combination of the reach symbols is established on the effective line L. The information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach generation is not supported, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L, and the stop result is that the combination of reach symbols is not established on the effective line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the stop symbol of this time. After executing step So2204, the process proceeds to step So2205.

In step So2205, a process for setting a variation display pattern of the current game times is executed. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the current game is specified from the content of the fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information on the stop symbol set in the above step So2204 are combined. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b (FIG. 151) of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. Then, the process proceeds to step So2206.

In step So2206, the information of the effect pattern, the stop symbol, and the variation display pattern set in this game round is set in the effect command. After that, the process proceeds to step So2207, and the effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect content corresponding to the received effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step So2207, the process proceeds to step So2208.

In step So2208, the update process at the start of fluctuation is executed. In the update process at the start of fluctuation, a process of reducing the number of first hold or the number of second hold by 1 at the start of change is performed. The details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later. After executing step So2208, the process proceeds to step So2209.

In step So2209, the hold display control process is executed. The hold display control process performs the same process as the hold display control process executed in step So1803 of the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 177). Specifically, the display (hold display icon) in the first start port hold area Ds1 and the second start port hold area Ds2 corresponding to the first hold number and the second hold number specified in step So2208. A command for changing the display (display such as how many are lined up) is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 makes the display in the first start port hold area Ds1 and the second start port hold area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 correspond to the first hold number and the second hold number. change. Specifically, the display control device 100 that has received the command defines four display positions for displaying the hold display icons H1 to H4 in the first start port hold area Ds1, and the first hold number. The number of hold display icons corresponding to is displayed at the display position. Further, the display control device 100 defines four display positions for displaying the hold display icons in the second start port hold area Ds2, and displays the number of hold display icons corresponding to the second hold number. Display on. Further, in the hold display control process of step So2209, the hold display icon is also displayed at the upper part of the hold digestion area Dm. After executing step So2209, the game round effect setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 183: So2203) of the game turn effect setting process.

FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process. In step So2301, a random number acquisition process for an effect pattern is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition process, the effect pattern random number RN is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c (FIG. 151) of the sound light side RAM 94. Then, the process proceeds to step So2302.

In step So2302, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is a big hit winning. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery is the jackpot winning from the information on the presence or absence of the jackpot stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 by the step So2202 of the game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 183). .. If it is determined in step So2302 that the result of the winning lottery is a big hit (So2302: YES), the process proceeds to step So2303.

In step So2303, it is determined whether or not the petal revariable lottery winning command has been received. If it is determined in step So2303 that the petal revariating lottery winning command has not been received (So2303: NO), the process proceeds to step So2304.

In step So2304, the fluctuation time read out by step So2202 (FIG. 183) with reference to the normal jackpot effect pattern table stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 151) of the sound light side ROM 93, and The normal jackpot effect pattern corresponding to the value of the random number RN for the effect pattern this time is acquired. In the effect pattern table storage area 93a of the sound light side ROM 93, there are two effect pattern tables for storing the effect pattern when the jackpot is won, a normal jackpot effect pattern table and a jackpot effect pattern table with re-variation. Types are available. In step So2304, a normal jackpot effect pattern table is referred to. The variable time read by step So2202 (FIG. 183) when executing step So2304 is a normal time obtained by executing steps So1008 and step So1007 in the variable time setting process (FIG. 169) executed by the main MPU 62. It is the fluctuation time for the jackpot. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired by step So2304 corresponds to the normal jackpot variation time obtained by the main MPU 62. After executing step So2304, the process proceeds to step So2309.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So2303 that the petal revariable lottery winning command has been received (So2303: YES), the process proceeds to step So2305.

In step So2305, the fluctuation time read by step So2202 (FIG. 183) with reference to the jackpot effect pattern table with re-variation stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 151) of the sound light side ROM 93. And, the jackpot effect pattern with re-variation corresponding to the value of the random number RN for the effect pattern of this time is acquired. The variable time read by step So2202 (FIG. 183) when executing step So2306 is the re-time obtained by executing steps So1006 and step So1007 in the variable time setting process (FIG. 169) executed by the main MPU 62. It is a fluctuation time for jackpots with fluctuations. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired by step So2305 corresponds to the jackpot fluctuation time accompanied by the re-variation obtained by the main MPU 62. After executing step So2305, the process proceeds to step So2309. The jackpot effect pattern with re-variation represents the jackpot effect with re-variation shown in FIG. 159, and includes the type 4 petal P4.

On the other hand, in step So2302, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is not a big hit winning (So2302: NO), the process proceeds to step So2306, and whether or not reach occurs in this game round. To judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not reach is generated from the information on whether or not reach is generated stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 by step So2202 of the game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 178). If it is determined in step So2306 that reach will occur in this game round (So2306: YES), the process proceeds to step So2307.

In step So2307, the variation time read by step So2202 (FIG. 183) and this time with reference to the effect pattern table for reach generation stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 151) of the sound light side ROM 93. The effect pattern for generating the reach corresponding to the value of the random number RN for the effect pattern of is acquired. The variable time read by step So2202 (FIG. 183) when executing step So2307 is the reach obtained by executing steps So1011 and step So1007 in the variable time setting process (FIG. 169) executed by the main MPU 62. It is the fluctuation time for occurrence. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired by step So2307 corresponds to the variation time for reach generation obtained by the main MPU 62. After executing step So2307, the process proceeds to step So2309.

If it is determined in step So2306 that reach does not occur in this game round (So2306: NO), the process proceeds to step So2308.

In step So2308, with reference to the effect non-reach generation effect pattern table stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 151) of the sound light side ROM 93, the fluctuation time read by step So2202 (FIG. 183) and The effect pattern for non-reach generation corresponding to the value of the random number RN for the effect pattern this time is acquired. The variable time read by step So2202 (FIG. 183) when executing step So2308 is the reach obtained by executing steps So1012 and step So1007 in the variable time setting process (FIG. 169) executed by the main MPU 62. Variable time for non-occurrence. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired by step So2308 corresponds to the variation time for non-reach generation obtained by the main MPU 62. After executing step So2308, the process proceeds to step So2309.

In step So2309, the effect pattern acquired by step So2304, step So2305, step So2307, or step So2308 is set as an effect pattern to be executed in this game round. After executing step So2309, the process proceeds to step So2310.

In step So2310, the game round remaining time setting process is executed. The game round remaining time setting process is a process of setting the remaining game round time (referred to as the game round remaining time). Specifically, a count value corresponding to the fluctuation time read by step So2202 (FIG. 183) is set in the timer counter area T30 indicating the remaining game time. The timer counter area T30 is provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound / light side RAM 94. The count value set in the timer counter area T30 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. After executing step So2310, the present effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Update process at the start of fluctuation>
Next, the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of the fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 183: So2208) of the game rotation effect setting process.

FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing an update process at the start of fluctuation. In step So2401, the variable command received this time is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33 this time (hereinafter referred to as the first variable command). It is determined whether the information is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 34 (hereinafter referred to as the second variable command). If it is determined in step So2401 that the variable command received this time is the first variable command (So2401: YES), the process proceeds to step So2402.

In step So2402, the first hold number counter stored in the sound / light side RAM 94 is decremented by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step So2403.

In step So2403, the data (display level upper limit value Lvm and display level Lvr) stored in the first start port hold effect storage area (see FIG. 179 (a)) stored in the sound light side RAM 94 is shifted. Execute the process. This shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the stored area to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step So2403, the process proceeds to step So2406.
nothing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So2401 that the variable command received this time is not the first variable command, that is, it is determined to be the second variable command (So2401: NO), the process proceeds to step So2404, and the sound and light side RAM 94 is reached. The stored second hold quantity counter is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step So2405.

In step So2405, the data (display level upper limit value Lvm and display level Lvr) stored in the second start port hold effect storage area (see FIG. 179 (b)) stored in the sound light side RAM 94 is shifted. Execute the process. This shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the stored area to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step So2405, the process proceeds to step So2406.

In step So2406, the information in the total hold quantity counter area is updated so that the total hold count stored in the total hold quantity counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1. After that, the update process at the start of fluctuation is terminated.

<Type 3 petal production setting process>
Next, the third kind petal effect setting process will be described. The third kind petal effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 176: So1706) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the third kind petal effect setting process. In step So2501, the third kind petal effect setting process for holding the first start port is executed. The details of the type 3 petal effect setting process for holding the first start port will be described later. After executing step So2501, the process proceeds to step So2502.

In step So2502, the third kind petal effect setting process for holding the second starting port is executed. The details of the type 3 petal effect setting process for holding the second start port will be described later. After executing step So2502, the third kind petal effect setting process is terminated.

<Type 3 petal production setting process for holding the 1st start port>
Next, the third kind petal effect setting process for holding the first start port will be described. The third type petal effect setting process for holding the first start port is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 186: So2501) of the third type petal effect setting process.

FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing a type 3 petal effect setting process for holding the first start port. In step So2601, it is determined whether or not the power switch 88 is the first execution time from the time when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (when the power is turned on). If it is determined in step So2601 that it is the first execution time from the time when the power is turned on (So2601: YES), the process proceeds to step So2603.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So2601 that it is not the first execution time from the time when the power is turned on (So2601: NO), the process proceeds to step So2602, and the third kind petal effect setting process for holding the first starting port is executed last time. It is determined whether or not 5 seconds or more have passed since then. If it is determined in step So2602 that 5 seconds or more have not elapsed (So2602: NO), the third kind petal effect setting process for holding the first starting port is terminated.

If it is determined in step So2602 that 5 seconds or more have elapsed (So2602: YES), the process proceeds to step So2603. That is, by the processing of step So2601 and step So2602, the processing after step So2603 is repeatedly executed at intervals of 5 seconds from the time when the power is turned on.

In step So2603, the variable J stored in the sound / light side RAM 94 is added by the value 1. It is assumed that the variable J is initially set to a value of 0 when the power is turned on. After executing step So2603, the process proceeds to step So2604.

In step So2604, it is determined whether or not the variable J is 1. If it is determined in step So2604 that the variable J is 1 (So2604: YES), the process proceeds to step So2605.

In step So2605, the petal effect setting process for special 1 and hold 1 is executed. The petal effect setting process for special 1 / hold 1 is directed toward the first hold display icon H1 located on the rightmost side in the first start port hold area Ds1 displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. This is an effect process for the petal Pa for No. 1 (see FIG. 157). The details of the petal effect setting process for Special 1 and Hold 1 will be described later. After executing step So2605, the process of setting the type 3 petal effect for holding the first start port is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So2604 that the variable J is not 1 (So2604: NO), the process proceeds to step So2606, and it is determined whether or not the variable J is 2. If it is determined in step So2606 that the variable J is 2 (So2606: YES), the process proceeds to step So2607.

In step So2607, the petal effect setting process for special 1 and hold 2 is executed. The petal effect setting process for special 1 and hold 2 is directed toward the second hold display icon H2 located second from the right side in the first start port hold area Ds1 displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. -This is an effect process for the petal Pb for hold 2 (see FIG. 157). The details of the petal effect setting process for Special 1 and Hold 2 will be described later. After executing step So2607, the process of setting the petal effect of the third kind for holding the first starting port is completed.

If it is determined in step So2606 that the variable J is not 2 (So2606: NO), the process proceeds to step So2608, and it is determined whether or not the variable J is 3. If it is determined in step So2608 that the variable J is 3 (So2608: YES), the process proceeds to step So2609.

In step So2609, the petal effect setting process for special 1 and hold 3 is executed. The petal effect setting process for special 1 and hold 3 is directed toward the third hold display icon H3 located third from the right side in the first start port hold area Ds1 displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. -This is an effect process for the petal Pc for hold 3 (see FIG. 157). The details of the petal effect setting process for Special 1 and Hold 3 will be described later. After executing step So2609, the process of setting the type 3 petal effect for holding the first start port is completed.

If it is determined in step So2608 that the variable J is not 3, that is, if the variable J is 4 (So2608: NO), the process proceeds to step So2610.

In step So2610, the petal effect setting process for special 1 and hold 4 is executed. The petal effect setting process for special 1 and hold 4 is directed toward the fourth hold display icon H4 located fourth from the right side in the first start port hold area Ds1 displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. -This is an effect process for the petal Pd for hold 4 (see FIG. 157). The details of the petal effect setting process for Special 1 and Hold 4 will be described later. After executing step So2610, the process proceeds to step So2611.

In step So2611, the variable J is set to 0. After executing step So2611, the process of setting the type 3 petal effect for holding the first start port is completed.

<Petal production setting process for special 1 and hold 1>
Next, the petal effect setting process for special 1 and hold 1 will be described. The petal effect setting process for special 1 and hold 1 is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 187: So2605) of the third type petal effect setting process for holding the first start port.

FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing a petal effect setting process for special 1 and hold 1. In step So2701, the petal orbit lottery process is executed. The petal orbit lottery process is performed as the orbit of the petal Pa for special 1 / hold 1 displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 among the target hold arrival orbit, the first target hold out-of-orbit, and the second target out-of-hold orbit. It is a process of deciding which one to adopt by lottery. Specifically, the above determination is made by acquiring a value from a random number counter for petal orbit lottery and collating this value with a petal orbit lottery table stored in the sound light side ROM 93. The random number counter for the petal orbit lottery is provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94. The random number counter is updated at short intervals.

FIG. 189 is an explanatory diagram showing a petal orbital lottery table. As shown in FIG. 189, among the values of the random number counters for the petal orbit lottery of "0 to 1199", "0 to 399" corresponds to the target hold arrival orbit, and "400 to 799" is the first target. It corresponds to the unreserved orbit, and "800 to 1199" corresponds to the second target unreserved orbit.

In the petal orbit lottery process, when the value of the acquired random number counter falls within the range of "0 to 399" associated with the "target hold arrival orbit" in the petal orbit lottery table, the target hold arrival orbit is set. Decide to adopt. When the value of the acquired random number counter falls within the range of "400 to 799" associated with the "first target unheld orbit" in the petal orbit lottery table, the first target unheld orbit is adopted. decide. When the value of the acquired random number counter falls within the range of "800 to 1199" associated with the "second target unheld orbit" in the petal orbit lottery table, the second target unheld orbit is adopted. decide.

In the present embodiment, the distribution ratio of the target hold arrival orbit, the first target hold non-orbit, and the second target hold non-orbit in the petal orbit lottery table is set to 1: 1: 1, but it is not limited to this. The ratio allocated to the target pending arrival orbit may be larger or smaller than the ratio allocated to the first target reserved orbit and the second target reserved orbit.

Return to FIG. 188. After executing the petal trajectory lottery process of step So2701, the process proceeds to step So2702.

In step So2702, a process is performed in which the petal Pa for special 1 / hold 1 that moves according to the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Specifically, when the lottery result of the petal orbit lottery process is the target hold arrival orbit, the display control device 100 issues a command to display the petal Pa for special 1 and hold 1 that moves along the target hold arrival orbit. Send to. The command also includes that the display destination of the petal Pa for special 1 and hold 1 is the upper layer L3. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 causes the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 to display the petal Pa for special 1 and hold 1 that moves along the target hold arrival trajectory.

When the lottery result of the petal orbit lottery process is the first target non-holding orbit, the display control device 100 is instructed to display the petal Pa for special 1 and the holding 1 that moves along the first target non-holding orbit. Send. The command also includes that the display destination of the petal Pa for special 1 and hold 1 is the upper layer L3. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 causes the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 to display the petal Pa for special 1 and hold 1 that moves in the first target non-holding orbit.

When the lottery result of the petal orbit lottery process is the second target reserved orbit, the display control device 100 is instructed to display the petal Pa for special 1 and the reserved 1 that moves along the second target reserved orbit. Send. The command also includes that the display destination of the petal Pa for special 1 and hold 1 is the upper layer L3. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 causes the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 to display the petal Pa for special 1 and hold 1 that moves in the second target non-holding orbit. After executing step So2702, the process proceeds to step So2703.

In step So2703, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the petal orbit lottery process executed in step So2701 is the target hold arrival orbit. If it is determined in step So2703 that the lottery result is the target hold arrival trajectory (step So2703: YES), the process proceeds to step So2704, and whether the trajectory of the petal Pa for special 1 / hold 1 is the target hold arrival trajectory. 1 is set in the flag F11 indicating whether or not. After executing step So2704, the process proceeds to step So2705.

In step So2705, the arrival required time setting process for special 1 and hold 1 is executed. The special 1 / hold 1 arrival time setting process is the time length required for the special 1 / hold 1 petal Pa to reach the first hold display icon H1 (hereinafter, also referred to as the arrival time). ) Is the process of setting. Specifically, a count value corresponding to 10 seconds is set in the timer counter area T11 that determines the required arrival time. The timer counter area T11 is provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound / light side RAM 94. The count value set in the timer counter area T11 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. After executing step So2705, the petal effect setting process for this special 1 / hold 1 is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So2703 that the lottery result is not the target hold arrival orbit (step So2703: NO), the process proceeds to step So2706, and the orbit of the petal Pa for special 1 and hold 1 is the target hold arrival orbit. Set 0 to the flag F11 indicating whether or not. After executing step So2706, the petal effect setting process for this special 1 / hold 1 is terminated.

<Petal production setting process for special 1 and hold 2>
Next, the petal effect setting process for special 1 and hold 2 will be described. The petal effect setting process for special 1 and hold 2 is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 187: So2607) of the third type petal effect setting process for holding the first start port.

FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing a petal effect setting process for special 1 and hold 2. In step So2801, the petal orbit lottery process is executed. The petal orbit lottery process is performed as the orbit of the petal Pb for special 1 and hold 2 displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 among the target hold arrival orbit, the first target hold out-of-orbit, and the second target out-of-hold orbit. It is a process of deciding which one to adopt by lottery. Specifically, as in step So2701 of the petal effect setting process for special 1 / hold 1 (FIG. 188), a value is acquired from the random number counter for the petal orbit lottery, and this value is stored in the sound / light side ROM 93. The above determination is made by collating with the petal orbital lottery table. After executing step So2801, the process proceeds to step So2802.

In step So2802, a process is performed in which the petal Pb for special 1 and hold 2 that moves according to the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Specifically, when the lottery result of the petal orbit lottery process is the target hold arrival orbit, the display control device 100 issues a command to display the petal Pb for special 1 and hold 2 that moves along the target hold arrival orbit. Send to. The command also includes that the display destination of the petal Pb for special 1 and hold 2 is the upper layer L3. When the lottery result of the petal orbit lottery process is the first target non-holding orbit, a command to display the petal Pb for special 1 and hold 2 moving along the first target non-holding orbit is given to the display control device 100. Send. The command also includes that the display destination of the petal Pb for special 1 and hold 2 is the upper layer L3. When the lottery result of the petal orbit lottery process is the second target reserved orbit, the display control device 100 is instructed to display the petal Pb for special 1 and the reserved 2 that moves along the second target reserved orbit. Send. The command also includes that the display destination of the petal Pb for special 1 and hold 2 is the upper layer L3. After executing step So2802, the process proceeds to step So2803.

In step So2803, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the petal orbit lottery process executed in step So2801 is the target hold arrival orbit. If it is determined in step So2803 that the lottery result is the target hold arrival trajectory (step So2803: YES), the process proceeds to step So2804, and whether the trajectory of the petal Pb for special 1 / hold 2 is the target hold arrival trajectory. Set 1 to the flag F12 indicating whether or not. After executing step So2804, the process proceeds to step So2805.

In step So2805, the arrival required time setting process for special 1 and hold 2 is executed. The special 1 / hold 2 arrival time setting process is the time length required for the special 1 / hold 2 petals Pb to reach the second hold display icon H2, which is the destination (hereinafter, also referred to as the arrival time). ) Is the process of setting. Specifically, a count value corresponding to 10 seconds is set in the timer counter area T12 that determines the required arrival time. The timer counter area T12 is provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound / light side RAM 94. The count value set in the timer counter area T12 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. After executing step So2805, the petal effect setting process for this special 1 / hold 2 is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So2803 that the lottery result is not the target hold arrival orbit (step So2803: NO), the process proceeds to step So2806, and the orbit of the petal Pb for special 1 and hold 2 is the target hold arrival orbit. Set 0 to the flag F12 indicating whether or not. After executing step So2806, the petal effect setting process for this special 1 / hold 2 is terminated.

<Petal production setting process for special 1 and hold 3>
Next, the petal effect setting process for Special 1 and Hold 3 will be described. The petal effect setting process for special 1 and hold 3 is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 187: So2609) of the type 3 petal effect setting process for holding the first start port.

FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing a petal effect setting process for special 1 and hold 3. In step So2901, the petal orbit lottery process is executed. The petal orbit lottery process is performed as the orbit of the petal Pc for special 1 and hold 3 displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 among the target hold arrival orbit, the first target hold out-of-orbit, and the second target out-of-hold orbit. It is a process of deciding which one to adopt by lottery. Specifically, as in step So2701 of the petal effect setting process for special 1 / hold 1 (FIG. 188), a value is acquired from the random number counter for the petal orbit lottery, and this value is stored in the sound / light side ROM 93. The above determination is made by collating with the petal orbital lottery table. After executing step So2901, the process proceeds to step So2902.

In step So2902, a process is performed in which the petal Pc for special 1 and hold 3 that moves according to the lottery result of the petal orbit lottery process is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Specifically, when the lottery result of the petal orbit lottery process is the target hold arrival orbit, the display control device 100 issues a command to display the petal Pc for special 1 and hold 3 that moves along the target hold arrival orbit. Send to. The command also includes that the display destination of the petal Pc for special 1 and hold 3 is the upper layer L3. When the lottery result of the petal orbit lottery process is the first target non-holding orbit, the display control device 100 is instructed to display the petal Pc for special 1 and hold 3 that moves along the first target non-holding orbit. Send. The command also includes that the display destination of the petal Pc for special 1 and hold 3 is the upper layer L3. When the lottery result of the petal orbit lottery process is the second target reserved orbit, the display control device 100 is instructed to display the petal Pc for special 1 and the reserved 3 that moves along the second target reserved orbit. Send. The command also includes that the display destination of the petal Pc for special 1 and hold 3 is the upper layer L3. After executing step So2802, the process proceeds to step So2803.

In step So2903, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the petal orbit lottery process executed in step So2901 is the target hold arrival orbit. If it is determined in step So2903 that the lottery result is the target hold arrival trajectory (step So2903: YES), the process proceeds to step So2904, and whether the trajectory of the petal Pc for special 1 / hold 3 is the target hold arrival trajectory. 1 is set in the flag F13 indicating whether or not. After executing step So2904, the process proceeds to step So2905.

In step So2905, the arrival required time setting process for special 1 and hold 3 is executed. The special 1 / hold 3 arrival time setting process is the time length required for the special 1 / hold 3 petal Pc to reach the third hold display icon H3 (hereinafter, also referred to as the arrival time). ) Is the process of setting. Specifically, a count value corresponding to 10 seconds is set in the timer counter area T13 that determines the required arrival time. The timer counter area T13 is provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound / light side RAM 94. The count value set in the timer counter area T13 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. After executing step So2905, the petal effect setting process for this special 1 / hold 3 is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So2903 that the lottery result is not the target hold arrival orbit (step So2903: NO), the process proceeds to step So2906, and the orbit of the petal Pc for special 1 and hold 3 is the target hold arrival orbit. Set 0 to the flag F13 indicating whether or not. After executing step So2906, the petal effect setting process for this special 1 / hold 3 is terminated.

<Petal production setting process for special 1 and hold 4>
Next, the petal effect setting process for special 1 and hold 4 will be described. The petal effect setting process for special 1 and hold 4 is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 187: So2611) of the type 3 petal effect setting process for holding the first start port.

FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing a petal effect setting process for special 1 and hold 4. In step So3001, the petal orbit lottery process is executed. The petal orbit lottery process is performed as the orbit of the petal Pd for special 1 and hold 4 displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 among the target hold arrival orbit, the first target hold out-of-orbit, and the second target out-of-hold orbit. It is a process of deciding which one to adopt by lottery. Specifically, as in step So2701 of the petal effect setting process for special 1 / hold 1 (FIG. 188), a value is acquired from the random number counter for the petal orbit lottery, and this value is stored in the sound / light side ROM 93. The above determination is made by collating with the petal orbital lottery table. After executing step So3001, the process proceeds to step So3002.

In step So3002, a process is performed in which the petal Pd for special 1 and hold 4 that moves according to the lottery result of the petal orbit lottery process is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Specifically, when the lottery result of the petal orbit lottery process is the target hold arrival orbit, the display control device 100 issues a command to display the petal Pd for special 1 and hold 4 that moves along the target hold arrival orbit. Send to. The command also includes that the display destination of the petal Pd for special 1 and hold 4 is the upper layer L3. When the lottery result of the petal orbit lottery process is the first target non-holding orbit, a command to display the petal Pd for special 1 and hold 4 moving along the first target non-holding orbit is given to the display control device 100. Send. The command also includes that the display destination of the petal Pd for special 1 and hold 4 is the upper layer L3. When the lottery result of the petal orbit lottery process is the second target reserved orbit, the display control device 100 is instructed to display the petal Pd for special 1 and the reserved 4 that moves along the second target reserved orbit. Send. The command also includes that the display destination of the petal Pd for special 1 and hold 4 is the upper layer L3. After executing step So3002, the process proceeds to step So3003.

In step So3003, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the petal orbit lottery process executed in step So3001 is the target hold arrival orbit. If it is determined in step So3003 that the lottery result is the target hold arrival orbit (step So3003: YES), the process proceeds to step So3004, and whether the orbit of the petal Pd for special 1 and hold 4 is the target hold arrival orbit. 1 is set in the flag F14 indicating whether or not. After executing step So3004, the process proceeds to step So3005.

In step So3005, the arrival required time setting process for special 1 and hold 4 is executed. The special 1 / hold 4 arrival time setting process is the time length required for the special 1 / hold 4 petal Pd to reach the 4th hold display icon H4 (hereinafter, also referred to as the arrival time). ) Is the process of setting. Specifically, a count value corresponding to 10 seconds is set in the timer counter area T14 that determines the required arrival time. The timer counter area T14 is provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound / light side RAM 94. The count value set in the timer counter area T14 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. After executing step So3005, the petal effect setting process for this special 1 / hold 4 is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So3003 that the lottery result is not the target hold arrival orbit (step So3003: NO), the process proceeds to step So3006, and the orbit of the petal Pd for special 1 and hold 4 is the target hold arrival orbit. Set 0 to the flag F14 indicating whether or not. After executing step So3006, the petal effect setting process for this special 1 / hold 4 is terminated.

<Type 3 petal production setting process for holding the 2nd start port>
Next, the third kind petal effect setting process for holding the second starting port will be described. The third type petal effect setting process for holding the second start port is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 186: So2502) of the third type petal effect setting process.

FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing a type 3 petal effect setting process for holding the second starting port. In step So3101, it is determined whether or not the power switch 88 is the first execution time from the time when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (when the power is turned on). If it is determined in step So3101 that it is the first execution time from the time when the power is turned on (So3101: YES), the process proceeds to step So3103.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So3101 that it is not the first execution time from the power-on time (So3101: NO), the process proceeds to step So3102, and the third kind petal effect setting process for holding the second start port is executed last time. It is determined whether or not 5 seconds or more have passed since then. If it is determined in step So3102 that 5 seconds or more have not elapsed (So3102: NO), the third kind petal effect setting process for holding the second starting port is terminated.

If it is determined in step So3102 that 5 seconds or more have elapsed (So3102: YES), the process proceeds to step So3103. That is, by the processing of step So3101 and step So3102, the processing after step So3103 is repeatedly executed at intervals of 5 seconds from the time when the power is turned on.

In step So3103, the variable K stored in the sound / light side RAM 94 is added by the value 1. It is assumed that the variable K is initially set to a value of 0 when the power is turned on. After executing step So3103, the process proceeds to step So3104.

In step So3104, it is determined whether or not the variable K is 1. If it is determined in step So3104 that the variable K is 1 (So3104: YES), the process proceeds to step So3105.

In step So3105, the petal effect setting process for special 2 and hold 1 is executed. The petal effect setting process for special 2 / hold 1 is directed toward the 1st hold display icon located on the leftmost side in the 2nd start port hold area Ds2 displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. This is a production process for petals. Although detailed explanation using the flowchart is omitted, in the petal effect setting process for special 2 / hold 1 in FIG. 188, the petal effect setting process for special 1 / hold 1 in FIG. 188 is read as for special 2 (for the second starting port). It is the content. That is, in the petal effect setting process for special 1 / hold 1, the petals for special 2 / hold 1 that move along the trajectory according to the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process are displayed, and the lottery result indicates the target hold arrival trajectory. When it is decided to adopt it, the value 1 is set in the flag F11 and the arrival time required time setting process for special 1 / hold 1 is executed, whereas in the petal effect setting process for special 2 / hold 1 When the petals for special 2 and hold 1 that move along the orbit according to the lottery result of the petal orbit lottery process are displayed and the lottery result is decided to adopt the target hold arrival orbit, the value is set to flag F21. 1 is set, and the arrival required time setting process for special 2 and hold 1 is executed. After executing step So3105, the process of setting the type 3 petal effect for holding the second start port is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step So3104 that the variable K is not 1 (So3104: NO), the process proceeds to step So3106, and it is determined whether or not the variable K is 2. If it is determined in step So3106 that the variable K is 2 (So3106: YES), the process proceeds to step So3107.

In step So3107, the petal effect setting process for special 2 and hold 2 is executed. Special 2 ・ The petal effect setting process for hold 2 is directed toward the second hold display icon located second from the left side in the second start port hold area Ds2 displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. This is a production process for the petals for hold 2. Although detailed explanation using the flowchart is omitted, in the petal effect setting process for special 2 / hold 2 in FIG. 190, the petal effect setting process for special 1 / hold 2 in FIG. 190 is read as for special 2 (for the second starting port). It is the content. That is, in the petal effect setting process for special 2 / hold 2, the petals for special 2 / hold 2 that move along the trajectory according to the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process are displayed, and the lottery result determines the target hold arrival trajectory. When it is decided to be adopted, the value 1 is set in the flag F22, and the arrival required time setting process for the special 2 / hold 2 is executed. After executing step So3107, the process of setting the type 3 petal effect for holding the second start port is completed.

If it is determined in step So3106 that the variable K is not 2 (So3106: NO), the process proceeds to step So3108, and it is determined whether or not the variable K is 3. If it is determined in step So3108 that the variable K is 3 (So3108: YES), the process proceeds to step So3109.

In step So3109, the petal effect setting process for special 2 and hold 3 is executed. The petal effect setting process for special 2 and hold 3 is directed toward the third hold display icon located third from the left side in the second start port hold area Ds2 displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. This is an effect process for the petal Pc for hold 3. Although detailed explanation using the flowchart is omitted, in the petal effect setting process for special 2 and hold 3, the petal effect setting process for special 1 and hold 3 in FIG. 191 is read as for special 2 (for the second starting port). It is the content. That is, in the petal effect setting process for special 2 / hold 3, the petals for special 2 / hold 3 that move along the trajectory according to the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process are displayed, and the lottery result indicates the target hold arrival trajectory. When it is decided to adopt it, the value 1 is set in the flag F23, and the arrival required time setting process for special 2 and hold 3 is executed. After executing step So3109, the process of setting the type 3 petal effect for holding the second start port is completed.

If it is determined in step So3108 that the variable K is not 3, that is, if the variable K is 4 (So3108: NO), the process proceeds to step So3110.

In step So3110, the petal effect setting process for special 2 and hold 4 is executed. Special 2 ・ The petal effect setting process for hold 4 is directed toward the 4th hold display icon located fourth from the left side in the 2nd start port hold area Ds2 displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. This is a production process for the petals for hold 4. Although detailed explanation using the flowchart is omitted, in the petal effect setting process for special 2 / hold 4 in FIG. 192, the petal effect setting process for special 1 / hold 4 in FIG. 192 is read as for special 2 (for the second starting port). It is the content. That is, in the petal effect setting process for special 2 / hold 4, the petals for special 2 / hold 4 that move along the trajectory according to the lottery result of the petal trajectory lottery process are displayed, and the lottery result indicates the target hold arrival trajectory. When it is decided to adopt it, the value 1 is set in the flag F24, and the arrival required time setting process for the special 2 / hold 4 is executed. After executing step So3110, the process proceeds to step So3111.

In step So3111, the variable K is set to 0. After executing step So3111, the process of setting the type 3 petal effect for holding the second start port is completed.

<Hold display change setting process>
Next, the hold display change setting process will be described. The hold display change setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 176: So1707).

FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing a hold display change setting process. In step So3201, the first start port hold display change setting process is executed. The details of the first start port hold display change setting process will be described later. After executing step So3201, the process proceeds to step So3202.

In step So3202, the second start port hold display change setting process is executed. The details of the second start port hold display change setting process will be described later. After executing step So3202, the present hold display change setting process is terminated.

<1st start port hold display change setting process>
Next, the first start port hold display change setting process will be described. The first start port hold display change setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 194: So3201) of the hold display change setting process.

FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the first start port hold display change setting process. In step So3301, 1 is set in the variable x stored in the sound / light side RAM 94. After executing step So3301, the process proceeds to step So3302.

In step So3302, it is determined whether or not the flag F1x corresponding to the value of the variable x is 1. The flag F1x is a flag set by the third type petal effect setting process for holding the first starting port in FIG. 187, and when the variable x is 1, the petal effect setting process for special 1 and hold 1 (FIG. 188). ) Corresponds to the flag F11 set by the above, and when the variable x is 2, it corresponds to the flag F12 set by the petal effect setting process for special 1 / hold 2 (FIG. 190), and the variable x is 3. In this case, it corresponds to the flag F13 set by the petal effect setting process for special 1 / hold 3 (FIG. 191), and when the variable x is 4, the petal effect setting process for special 1 / hold 4 (FIG. 192). Corresponds to the flag F14 set by. In step So3302, it is determined whether or not the flag F1x corresponding to the value of the variable x is a value 1 indicating that the petal orbit is the target hold arrival orbit.

In step So3302, when it is determined that the flag F1x corresponding to the value of the variable x is 1, that is, it is determined that the trajectory of the petals for special 1 / hold x corresponding to the value of the variable x is the target hold arrival trajectory. If so (step So3302: YES), the process proceeds to step So3303.

In step So3303, it is determined whether or not the time required to reach the special 1 / hold x corresponding to the value of the variable x has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter area T1x corresponding to the value of the variable x, which is set by the type 3 petal effect setting process for holding the first start port in FIG. 187, is "0". do. As a result, whether or not the petals for special 1 / hold x corresponding to the value of the variable x have reached the display position for displaying the target hold display icon (hereinafter, also simply referred to as the display position of the hold display icon). Is determined. When the variable x is 1, whether or not the value of the timer counter area T11 is "0" determines whether the petal Pa for special 1 / hold 1 has reached the display position of the hold display icon H1. Whether or not it is determined. When the variable x is 2, whether or not the value of the timer counter area T12 is "0" determines whether the petal Pb for special 1 / hold 2 has reached the display position of the hold display icon H2. Whether or not it is determined. When the variable x is 3, whether or not the value of the timer counter area T13 is "0" determines whether the petal Pc for special 1 / hold 3 has reached the display position of the hold display icon H3. Whether or not it is determined. When the variable x is 4, whether or not the value of the timer counter area T14 is "0" determines whether the petal Pd for special 1 / hold 4 has reached the display position of the hold display icon H4. Whether or not it is determined.

If it is determined in step So3303 that the time required to reach the special 1 / hold x corresponding to the value of the variable x has elapsed (step So3303: YES), the process proceeds to step So3304.

In step So3304, it is determined whether or not the hold display icons H1 to H4 exist at the display position where the petals for special 1 / hold x have reached (step So3304). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the hold display icon exists from the first hold number.

If it is determined in step So3304 that the hold display icon exists at the display position where the petals for special 1 / hold x have reached (step So3304: YES), the process proceeds to step So3305.

In step So3305, a predetermined time (a predetermined time described above) from the present time (when it is determined in step So3304 that the hold display icon exists at the display position where the petals for special 1 / hold x have reached). For example, it is determined whether or not the shift of the hold display icon does not occur in the period until the elapse of (2 seconds) (hereinafter referred to as a predetermined period after the petals arrive). Since the shift of the hold display icon occurs when the current game round ends, in step So3305, it is determined whether or not the current game round does not end within a predetermined period after the petals are reached. .. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter area T30 indicating the remaining game time set by step So2310 of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 184) exceeds the predetermined time (2 seconds). It is determined whether or not the current game round is completed within a predetermined period after the petals are reached. If it is determined in step So3305 that the value of the timer counter area T30 exceeds 2 seconds, it is assumed that the shift for the hold display icon does not occur within a predetermined period after the petals arrive (step So3305: YES), and step So3406. Proceed to.

In step So3306, a command for continuously displaying the petals for special 1 / hold X at the display position of the reached hold display icon is transmitted to the display control device 100 for a predetermined period after the petals arrive. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 continuously displays the petals for special 1 / hold X in the state of reaching the hold display icon on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As a result, the petals for special 1 and hold X that have reached the hold display icon will stay on the hold display icon for a predetermined time. After transmitting the command in step So3306, the process proceeds to step So3307.

In step So3307, the display level upper limit value Lvm of the reserved game times corresponding to the value of the variable x stored in the storage area for the first start port hold effect (see FIG. 179 (a)) is read. Specifically, when the variable x is 1, the display level upper limit value Lvm of the hold game times (1) for the first start opening stored in the first hold effect storage area is read. When the variable x is 2, the display level upper limit value Lvm of the reserved game times (2) for the first starting port is read. When the variable x is 3, the display level upper limit value Lvm of the reserved game times (3) for the first starting port is read. When the variable x is 4, the display level upper limit value Lvm of the reserved game times (4) for the first starting port is read. After executing step So3307, the process proceeds to step So3308.

In step So3308, the display level Lvr of the hold game times corresponding to the value of the variable x stored in the storage area for the hold effect of the first start port is read. Specifically, when the variable x is 1, the display level Lvr of the hold game times (1) for the first start opening stored in the first hold effect storage area is read. When the variable x is 2, the display level Lvr of the reserved game times (2) for the first starting port is read. When the variable x is 3, the display level Lvr of the reserved game times (3) for the first starting port is read. When the variable x is 4, the display level Lvr of the reserved game times (4) for the first starting port is read. After executing step So3308, the process proceeds to step So3309.

In step So3309, it is determined whether or not the read display level Lvr is lower than the read display level upper limit value Lvm. If it is determined in step So3309 that the display level Lvr is lower than the display level upper limit value Lvm (So3309: YES), the process proceeds to step So3310.

In step So3310, the display level Lvr of the hold game times corresponding to the value of the variable x stored in the storage area for the hold effect of the first start port is updated to a higher level by one level. Specifically, when the variable x is 1, the display level Lvr of the reserved game times (1) for the first starting port stored in the storage area for the first reserved effect is set to a higher level by one level. Update to. When the variable x is 2, the display level Lvr of the reserved game times (2) for the first starting port is updated to a higher level by one level. When the variable x is 3, the display level Lvr of the reserved game times (3) for the first starting port is updated to a higher level by one level. When the variable x is 4, the display level Lvr of the reserved game times (4) for the first starting port is updated to a higher level by one level. After executing step So3310, the process proceeds to step So3311.

In step So3311, a command for changing the display mode of the hold display icon at the position corresponding to the value of the variable x in the first start port hold area Ds1 is transmitted to the display control device 100. Specifically, a command instructing the display mode (color) corresponding to the display level Lvr of the reserved game times (y) for the first start port updated in step So3310 is transmitted to the display control device 100. do. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 has updated the display mode of the hold display icon at the xth position from the right in the first start port hold area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in step So3310. It is changed according to the display level Lvr of the reserved game times (y) for. After executing step So3311, the process proceeds to step So3312.

In step So3312, 0 is set in the flag F1x corresponding to the value of the variable x. After that, the process proceeds to step So3313, and the variable x is added by the value 1. After executing step So3313, the process proceeds to step So3314.

In step So3314, it is determined whether or not the variable x exceeds 4. If it is determined in step So3314 that the variable x does not exceed 4, the process proceeds to step So3302, and the processes from step So3302 to step So3314 are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So3314 that the variable x exceeds 4, (So3314: YES), the first start port hold display change setting process is terminated.

When it is determined in step So3302 that the flag F1x corresponding to the value of the variable x is not 1 (step So3302: NO), in step So3303, the time required to reach the special 1 / hold x corresponding to the value of the variable x has elapsed. If it is determined not to do so (step So3303: NO), if it is determined in step So3304 that the hold display icon does not exist (step So3304: NO), or in step So3305, for a predetermined period after reaching the petals. If it is determined that the shift for the hold display icon is not non-occurrence (step So3305: NO), the process proceeds to step So3313, the variable x is added by the value 1, and then the process proceeds to step So3314.

If it is determined in step So3309 that the display level Lvr does not fall below the display level upper limit value Lvm (So3309: NO), the process proceeds to step So3312 without executing steps So3310 and So3311.

<Second start port hold display change setting process>
Next, the second start port hold display change setting process will be described. The second start port hold display change setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 194: So3202) of the hold display change setting process.

FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing a second start port hold display change setting process. In step So3401, 1 is set in the variable y stored in the sound / light side RAM 94. After executing step So3401, the process proceeds to step So3402.

In step So3402, it is determined whether or not the flag F2y corresponding to the value of the variable y is 1. The flag F2y is a flag set by the type 3 petal effect setting process for holding the second starting port in FIG. 193. In step So3402, it is determined whether or not the flag F2y corresponding to the value of the variable y is a value 1 indicating that the petal orbit is the target hold arrival orbit.

In step So3402, when it is determined that the flag F2y corresponding to the value of the variable y is 1, that is, it is determined that the trajectory of the petals for special 2 / hold y corresponding to the value of the variable y is the target hold arrival trajectory. If so (step So3402: YES), the process proceeds to step So3403.

In step So3403, it is determined whether or not the time required to reach the special 2 / hold y corresponding to the value of the variable y has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter area T2y corresponding to the value of the variable y, which is set by the type 3 petal effect setting process for holding the second start port in FIG. 187, is "0". do. As a result, it is determined whether or not the petals for special 2 / hold y corresponding to the value of the variable y have reached the display position for displaying the target hold display icon.

If it is determined in step So3403 that the time required to reach the special 2 / hold y corresponding to the value of the variable y has elapsed (step So3403: YES), the process proceeds to step So3404.

In step So3404, it is determined whether or not the hold display icon exists at the display position where the petals for special 2 / hold y have reached (step So3404). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the hold display icon exists from the second hold number.

If it is determined in step So3404 that the hold display icon exists at the display position where the petals for special 2 / hold y have reached (step So3404: YES), the process proceeds to step So3405.

In step So3405, a predetermined time (a predetermined time described above) from the present time (when it is determined in step So3404 that the hold display icon exists at the display position where the petals for special 2 / hold y have reached). For example, it is determined whether or not the shift of the hold display icon does not occur in the period until the elapse of (2 seconds) (hereinafter referred to as a predetermined period after the petals arrive). Since the shift of the hold display icon occurs when the current game round ends, in step So3405, it is determined whether or not the current game round does not end within a predetermined period after the petals are reached. .. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter area T30 indicating the remaining game time set by step So2310 of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 184) exceeds the predetermined time (2 seconds). It is determined whether or not the current game round is completed within a predetermined period after the petals are reached. If it is determined in step So3405 that the value of the timer counter area T30 exceeds 2 seconds, it is assumed that the shift for the hold display icon does not occur within a predetermined period after the petals arrive (step So3405: YES), and step So3406. Proceed to.

In step So3406, a command for continuously displaying the petals for special 2 / hold y at the display position of the reached hold display icon is transmitted to the display control device 100 for a predetermined period after the arrival of the petals. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 continuously displays the petals for special 2 / hold y in the state of reaching the hold display icon on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As a result, the petals for special 2 / hold y that have reached the hold display icon will stay on the hold display icon for a predetermined time. After sending the command in step So3406, the process proceeds to step So3407.

In step So3407, the display level upper limit value Lvm of the hold game times (y) corresponding to the value of the variable y stored in the second start opening hold effect storage area (see FIG. 179 (b)) is read. After executing step So3407, the process proceeds to step So3408.

In step So3408, the display level Lvr of the hold game times (y) corresponding to the value of the variable y stored in the storage area for the hold effect of the second start port is read. After executing step So3408, the process proceeds to step So3409.

In step So3409, it is determined whether or not the read display level Lvr is lower than the read display level upper limit value Lvm. If it is determined in step So3409 that the display level Lvr is lower than the display level upper limit value Lvm (So3409: YES), the process proceeds to step So3410.

In step So3410, the display level Lvr of the reserved game times corresponding to the value of the variable y stored in the storage area for the second start opening reserved effect is updated to a higher level by one level. After executing step So3410, the process proceeds to step So3411.

In step So3411, a command for changing the display mode of the hold display icon at the position corresponding to the value of the variable y in the second start port hold area Ds2 is transmitted to the display control device 100. Specifically, a command instructing the display mode (color) corresponding to the display level Lvr of the reserved game times (y) for the second starting port updated in step So3410 is transmitted to the display control device 100. do. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 updates the display mode of the hold display icon at the yth position from the left in the second start port hold area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in step So3410. It is changed according to the display level Lvr of the reserved game times (y) for. After executing step So3411, the process proceeds to step So3412.

In step So3412, 0 is set in the flag F2y corresponding to the value of the variable y. After that, the process proceeds to step So3413, and the variable y is added by the value 1. After executing step So3413, the process proceeds to step So3414.

In step So3414, it is determined whether or not the variable y exceeds 4. If it is determined in step So3414 that the variable y does not exceed 4, the process proceeds to step So3402, and the processes from step So3402 to step So3414 are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step So3414 that the variable y exceeds 4, (So3414: YES), the second start port hold display change setting process is terminated.

When it is determined in step So3402 that the flag F2y corresponding to the value of the variable y is not 1 (step So3402: NO), in step So3403, the time required to reach the special 2 / hold y corresponding to the value of the variable y has elapsed. If it is determined not to do so (step So3403: NO), if it is determined in step So3404 that the hold display icon does not exist (step So3404: NO), or in step So3405, for a predetermined period after the petals arrive. If it is determined that the shift for the hold display icon is not non-occurrence (step So3405: NO), the process proceeds to step So3413, the variable y is added by the value 1, and then the process proceeds to step So3414.

If it is determined in step So3409 that the display level Lvr does not fall below the display level upper limit value Lvm (So3409: NO), the process proceeds to step So3412 without executing steps So3410 and So3411.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, the process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly the main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and the processes that are executed when a command is received from the voice emission control device 90. There is a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes the main process after the power is turned on, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. If the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, the main process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing a main process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described.

In step So3501, the initial setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the character information in the compressed format stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, the information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also, make other settings necessary for initialization. Then, the process proceeds to step So3502.

In step So3502, the interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process executed every time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step So3601, the command storage process is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed by detecting the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105. In the V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute the display instruction.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal generated in VDP105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is performed every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Therefore, since the VDP 105 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image is started or displayed during the drawing of the image. It is possible to suppress the expansion of an image accompanying a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information inside is stored. Hereinafter, the processing details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described.

In step So3701, the command correspondence process is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt processing (FIG. 184), and the processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when an effect command is stored, control of drawing and displaying an image is started so that the effect mode specified by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, and when it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of drawing and displaying an image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command correspondence process (So3701), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so that there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the voice emission control device 90 and the effect is started, it is highly possible that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop symbol set by the voice emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the mode. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41.

In step So3702, the display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command correspondence process (So3701) or the like. .. Then, the process proceeds to step So3703.

In step So3703, task processing is executed. In the task process, the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting process (So3702). In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step So3704.

In step So3704, the drawing process is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character determined by the task process (So3703) are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on these information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received at the time of the previous V interrupt processing on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process proceeds to step So3705, other processing is executed, and then the V interrupt processing is terminated. As described above, an example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described.

<< 4-7 >> Action / Effect:
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the third type petal P3 among the plurality of types of petals P1 to P4 displayed on the symbol display device 41 reaches the hold display icon and is predetermined. When it stays (that is, adheres) for a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds), an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display icon is executed. In a conventional pachinko machine that does not have such a configuration, the display mode of the hold display icon is displayed at the start of the variable display, at the time of shifting the hold information, or at the time of entering the game ball into the first start port or the second start port. It was common to execute an effect suggesting a change (hold change suggestion effect), and then execute an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display icon. In this conventional pachinko machine, the hold change is suggested at a predetermined timing such as when the fluctuation display is started, when the hold information is shifted, or when the game ball enters the first start port or the second start port. Since the effect is executed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display icon is executed, the player can predict the timing at which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display icon appears. There was a problem that the player lacked a sense of expectation and urgency. Further, since the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display icon does not appear unless the hold change suggestion effect is executed, the player can change the hold display icon to the hold display icon only when the hold change suggestion effect is executed. There was no attention, and the player had less expectation and urgency.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of petals are repeatedly fluttering on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 regardless of whether or not the hold display icon is displayed.
(I) The majority of these petals (Type 1 petals P1 and Type 2 petals P2) do not act on the hold display icon, even if they pass around the hold display icon or over the hold display icon. Not
(Ii) If you think that one of those petals (the third kind petal P3 that moves along the first target non-holding orbit or the second target non-holding orbit) has moved toward the hold display icon, the relevant Immediately before the hold display icon, it is removed from the hold display icon,
(Iii) If you think that one of those petals (Type 3 petal P3 that moves along the target hold arrival trajectory) has reached the hold display icon, a predetermined time has passed since it arrived. Due to the previous shift of the hold display icon, the display mode of the hold display icon does not change.
(Iv) If one of those petals (Type 3 petal P3 that moves along the target hold arrival trajectory) reaches the hold display icon and stays (attaches) for a predetermined time. , The display mode of the hold display icon does not change because the display level Lvr set for the hold display icon has already reached the display level upper limit value Lvm.
(V) I think that one of those petals (the third kind petal P3 that moves along the target hold arrival trajectory) reached the hold display icon and stayed (attached) for a predetermined time. Then, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display icon is executed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the petals are repeatedly displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, it is expected that the display mode of the hold display icon will change for the player. A feeling of urgency and urgency can always be given (as long as one of the petals is displayed) and at the same time.
-The petals have reached the hold display icon, but they have passed the hold display icon.
-The petals headed for the hold display icon, but the petals reached the outside of the hold display icon.
-The petals have reached the hold display icon, but the petals did not adhere to the hold display icon.
-The petals have reached the hold display icon and the petals have adhered to the hold display icon, but (because the display level Lvr of the hold display icon has already reached the set display level upper limit Lvm). Since it is possible to give a feeling of disappointment that the display mode of the hold display icon has not changed, it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation and urgency. Further, in the present embodiment, since the petals that can play the role of the hold change suggestion effect and the petals having the same pattern as the petals are always dancing, it is expected that an effect that changes the display mode of the hold display icon will appear. Since the player can always have a feeling, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation and a sense of urgency. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the effect image of petals, confetti, confetti, butterflies, etc. floating on the display surface 41a is for making the display surface 41a lively, and in the conventional pachinko machine, some operation is performed by acting on the hold display. There was nothing like that. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display surface 41a is lively because the petals are attached to the hold display icon to perform an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display icon. You can effectively use the petals to make it.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, among the plurality of types of petals P1 to P4 displayed on the symbol display device 41, the fourth type petal P4 is stopped from the variable display state. When it adheres to, the effect of restarting the variable display of the symbol sequence is executed. In a conventional pachinko machine that does not have such a configuration, since the petals do not affect the variable display of the symbol row, the variable display of the symbol row is stopped and the symbol row is no longer a combination of the same symbol. It only gave the player a sense of disappointment. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the petal P4 of the fourth kind adheres to the symbol of the stopped symbol row, it is possible to execute an effect of restarting the variable display of the symbol row. From what can be done, it is possible to give a player who is once disappointed that the symbol sequence is not the same combination of symbols to be surprised that the variable display has resumed and to expect a big hit again. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the petal P3 of the third kind reaches the display position of the hold display icon, the process of determining whether or not the hold display icon exists (step So3304 in FIG. 195) and the petal reach A configuration for executing a determination process (step So3305) for determining whether or not the shift of the hold display icon has not occurred and a determination process (step So3309) for determining whether the display level Lvr does not fall below the display level upper limit value Lvm in the subsequent predetermined period. And said. For this reason, a ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 in the middle of the game round, hold information is acquired based on the entry, and a new hold display icon is added. Occasionally, the type 3 petal P3 also acts on the added hold display icon, and it becomes possible to execute an effect that changes the display mode of the hold display icon. When the hold display icon is newly added in the middle of this game, when the display of the third type petal P3 is started, the hold display is displayed at the display position of the hold display icon corresponding to the third type petal P3. By the time the type 3 petal P3 reaches the display position without displaying the icon, the hold display icon may be displayed at the display position. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the hold display icon is newly added in the middle of the game round, the expectation for the petals is given to the player when the hold display icon is started to be displayed. It will be granted after the fact. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a further sense of expectation.

<< 4-8 >> Modification example of the fourth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be carried out in various embodiments without departing from the gist thereof, and for example, the following modifications are also possible. In the modified examples described below, the description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as those of the above embodiment will be omitted.

<< 4-8-1 >> Modification 1:
In the fourth embodiment, in the first start port hold display change setting process (FIG. 195) and the second start port hold display change setting process (FIG. 196), the petals reach the hold display icon for a predetermined period after reaching the hold display icon. , When it is determined that the display level Lvr has reached the display level upper limit Lvm when the shift for the hold display icon does not occur, no special processing is performed. As a modification, when it is determined that the display level Lvr has reached the display level upper limit Lvm, a lottery (lottery process when the display level upper limit is reached, which will be described later) is performed, and when the lottery is won, after the petals are reached. The petals that have arrived may be continuously displayed at the display position of the hold display icon that has arrived for a predetermined period, and if the lottery is not won, the petals that have arrived may be displayed so as to pass through the hold display icon. That is, in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the display level Lvr has reached the display level upper limit value Lvm, the petals that have reached the hold display icon disappear and the display mode of the hold display icon is changed. In this modification 1, when it is determined that the display level Lvr has reached the display level upper limit value Lvm, the petals that have reached the hold display icon pass through and the hold display icon is displayed. In the first mode in which the display mode is not changed (when the lottery is not won), the petals that have reached the hold display icon are continuously displayed at the display position of the hold display icon for a predetermined period, and the hold display is displayed. A second mode (when a lottery is won) in which the display mode of the icon is not changed, or one of the two modes can be selectively selected. In addition, instead of the lottery, the first mode and the second mode may be switched in order.

Hereinafter, specific control of the first start port hold display change setting process will be described. The second start port hold display change setting process is the same process as the first start port hold display change setting process is changed for the second start port, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. Since the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in the first modification is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the same parts as those of the fourth embodiment will be described below using the same names and reference numerals. I do. Further, regarding the software, the processing other than the first start port hold display change setting process and the second start port hold display change setting process is the same as that of the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the first start port hold display change setting process in the first modification. The first start port hold display change setting process in the first modification is almost the same as the first start port hold display change setting process (FIG. 195) in the fourth embodiment, only a part is different. Is. The steps having the same processing content are designated by the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 195.

In the first start port hold display change setting process (FIG. 195) in the fourth embodiment, a command for continuously displaying the petals for special 1 / hold X at the display position of the reached hold display icon for a predetermined period after the petals arrive. In step So3305, it was determined that the shift for the hold display icon did not occur during a predetermined period after the petals arrived (step So3305: YES). ) It was configured to be executed immediately after. On the other hand, in the first start port hold display change setting process (FIG. 200) in the first modification, it is determined in step So3309 that the display level Lvr is lower than the display level upper limit value Lvm (So3309: YES). It was configured to be executed.

Then, if it is determined in step So3309 that the display level Lvr does not fall below the display level upper limit value Lvm (So3309: NO), the process proceeds to step So3309a to execute the petal display change process. The details of the petal display change process will be described later. After executing step So3309a, the process proceeds to step So3312.

FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the petal display change process. In step So3801, the lottery process when the display level upper limit value is reached is executed. When it is determined that the display level Lvr does not fall below the display level upper limit value Lvm, the lottery process when the display level upper limit value is reached is a lottery as to which of the above first mode and the second mode is adopted. It is a process determined by. Specifically, the value is acquired from the random number counter for the lottery when the upper limit of the display level is reached, and this value is collated with the table for the lottery when the upper limit of the display level is reached stored in the sound light side ROM 93. Make a decision. The random number counter for the lottery when the display level upper limit value is reached is provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94. The random number counter is updated at short intervals.

In the table for lottery when the upper limit of the display level is reached, "0 to 599" corresponds to the first mode among the values of the random number counter for the lottery when the upper limit of the display level is reached, which is "0 to 1199". "600 to 1199" corresponds to the second mode. It should be noted that this is an example, and the ratio of winning the first mode and the ratio of winning the second mode may be different. After executing step So3801, the process proceeds to step So3802.

In step So3802, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the lottery process at the time of reaching the display level upper limit value executed in step So3801 is the second mode. If it is determined in step So3802 that the lottery result is the second mode (step So3802: YES), the process proceeds to step So3803, and for a predetermined period after the petals arrive, the petals for special 1 / hold X are placed on the hold icon. A command to be continuously displayed at the display position is transmitted to the display control device 100. This process is the same as step So3306 in FIG. 200. After the execution of step So3803, the process of changing the display of the main petals is terminated.

On the other hand, in step So3802, if the lottery result is not the second mode, that is, if it is determined that the lottery result is the first mode (step So3802: NO), the process proceeds to step So3804, and special 1 / hold X A command for displaying the petals to move downward from the position where the hold display icon is reached is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 displays on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 so that the petals for special 1 / hold X are moved downward. As a result, the petals for special 1 / hold X that have reached the hold display icon pass through without staying at the hold display icon. After the execution of step So3804, the process of changing the display of the main petals is terminated.

According to the pachinko machine of the first modification configured as described above, when the third type petal P3 reaches the hold display icon, the third type petal P3 passes through the hold display icon and the display mode of the hold display icon. The first mode in which the display mode of the hold display icon is not changed, and the second mode in which the third type petal P3 is continuously displayed at the display position of the hold display icon for a predetermined period and the display mode of the hold display icon is not changed. Mode and can be taken. Further, in the first start port hold display change setting process (FIG. 200), a third mode for changing the display mode of the hold display icon may be taken by executing steps So3306, Step So3310, and Step So3311. That is, when the petals of the third kind reach the hold display icon, one of the first to third modes is selectively executed. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the first modification, even if the petals are displayed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and urgency that the display mode of the hold display icon will change. .. Furthermore, although the petals have reached the hold display icon, they have passed through the hold display icon, and it is possible to give a feeling of disappointment that the display mode of the hold display icon has not changed, so that the player has a sense of expectation. And a sense of urgency can be further imparted. As a result, according to the pachinko machine of the first modification, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As another form of this modification 1, the configuration may be such that the process of step So3804 of the petal display change process (FIG. 201) is eliminated. According to this configuration, in the first mode, the petals reach the hold display icon, but immediately after that, the petals disappear, giving a feeling of disappointment that the display mode of the hold display icon has not changed. It becomes possible, and the same effect as that of the pachinko machine of the first modification can be obtained.

<< 4-8-2 >> Modification 2:
In the fourth embodiment and its modification, when the petal P3 of the third kind reaches the display position of the hold display icon, the process of determining whether or not the hold display icon exists (step So3304 in FIG. 195), the petal arrival Configuration to execute the determination process (step So3305) of whether or not the shift of the hold display icon has not occurred and the determination process (step So3309) of whether or not the display level Lvr is below the display level upper limit value Lvm in the subsequent predetermined period. And said. On the other hand, as a modification, the configuration may be such that the above three determinations are executed when the display of the third kind petal P3 is started. This configuration has the effect of simplifying the control process.

<< 4-8-3 >> Modification 3:
In the fourth embodiment and its modification, when the petal P3 of the third kind reaches the display position of the hold display icon, the process of determining whether or not the hold display icon exists (step So3304 in FIG. 195), the petal arrival Configuration to execute the determination process (step So3305) of whether or not the shift of the hold display icon has not occurred and the determination process (step So3309) of whether or not the display level Lvr is below the display level upper limit value Lvm in the subsequent predetermined period. And said. On the other hand, as a modification 3, when the petal P3 of the third kind reaches the display position of the hold display icon, the process of determining whether or not the hold display icon exists is executed, and it is determined that the hold display icon exists. If this is the case, the display mode of the hold display icon may be changed without performing the other two determination processes. Further, as another form of the modification 2, when the petal P3 of the third kind reaches the display position of the hold display icon, the process of determining whether or not the hold display icon exists and the hold display within a predetermined period after the petals arrive. The display mode of the hold display icon may be changed by executing the determination process of whether or not the shift of the icon has occurred and without performing the other determination process. Further, as another form of the modification 2, when the petal P3 of the third kind reaches the display position of the hold display icon, the process of determining whether or not the hold display icon exists and the display level Lvr are the display level upper limit values. It may be configured to change the display mode of the hold display icon without performing the determination process of whether or not it is less than Lvm and performing the other determination process.

<< 4-8-4 >> Modification 4:
In the above-mentioned fourth embodiment and its modification, petals (type 3 petals P3) are adopted as moving bodies that can play a role of holding change suggestion effect, but instead of this, confetti, jellyfish, butterflies, etc. are adopted. It may be another pattern. Further, in the fourth embodiment and its modified example, the petals (type 4 petals P4) were adopted as the moving body for resuming the variable display, but instead of this, other other materials such as confetti, jellyfish, and butterflies were adopted. It may be a picture. Moving objects such as petals, paper wipes, burrs, butterflies, etc. have the function of making the display surface 41a lively and enhancing the atmosphere of the production. According to the fourth embodiment and the present modification 4, such moving objects are used. Since the display mode of the hold display icon and the display mode of the symbol can be changed, the effect that the moving body can be effectively used is obtained.

<< 4-8-5 >> Modification 5:
In the fourth embodiment and its modifications, a plurality of petals as moving bodies are displayed so as to dance (fall) from the upper side to the lower side on the display surface 41a. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the moving body is a butterfly, the butterfly is displayed so as to move in a loop in the display surface 41a. In the middle of the looped movement, the butterfly moves towards the hold display icon and reaches the hold display icon. When this is reached, the display mode of the hold display icon is changed. According to this configuration, since the moving object can be directed in various directions, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency such as when the display mode of the hold display icon will change. can. The range of movement of the butterfly is the entire display surface 41a, but instead of this, the butterfly may be configured to move in a predetermined area set in the display surface 41a. The predetermined area includes at least the display position of the hold display icon. According to this configuration, the range in which butterflies are generated can be limited to a part of the area of the effect displayed on the display surface 41, and various effects can be supported. Further, although the butterfly is configured to move in a loop shape, it does not necessarily have to be one ring shape, and may have a shape in which the movement trajectories intersect. Any form may be used as long as it is configured to be displayed at all times during the period.

That is, the moving body may be configured to be repeatedly displayed, for example, like a petal, or may be configured to be displayed so as to always exist for a predetermined period, such as a butterfly. In the configuration of repeated display, one or more petals may always appear on the display surface 41a for a predetermined period, or a configuration may occur in the middle when one petal does not exist. May be good. In the fourth embodiment and modifications described above, the moving body is a tangible object such as a petal, a paper wipe, a jellyfish, or a butterfly, but it is not limited to a tangible object and is an intangible object such as a light beam, a laser beam, or a radio wave. It can also be changed to. In other words, the moving object can be regarded as an agent for acting on the hold display icon or the symbol sequence, including the above-mentioned tangible and intangible objects.

<< 4-8-6 >> Modification 6:
In the fourth embodiment and its modifications, as the first type 3 petal P31 for holding the start port, the petal Pa for special 1 / holding 1, the petal Pb for special 1 / holding 2, and the petal Pb for special 1 / holding 3 are used. Four types of petals Pc and petals Pd for special 1 and hold 4 were prepared. On the other hand, as a modification, two types of petals are prepared as the first type 3 petal P31 for holding the first starting port, and one type of petal is called special 1 / holding 1 and special 1 / holding 2. The other type of petals may be shared, such as for special 1 / hold 3 and special 1 / hold 4. That is, the petals of the first type have the display position of the first hold display icon H1 located first from the right side and the second hold display located second from the right side in the first start port hold area Ds1. The second type of petals is configured to face one of the display positions of the icon H2, and the display of the third hold display icon H3 located third from the right side in the first start port hold area Ds1. It may be configured to face either the position or the display position of the fourth hold display icon H4 located fourth from the right side. In addition, one of the two types of petals is shared, such as for special 1 / hold 1 and special 1 / hold 2 and special 1 / hold 3, and the other type of petal is used for special 1 / hold 4 It may be configured to be shared, such as for use. In short, one type of petal may be shared for the display position of two or more hold display icons (any combination is acceptable). Similarly, the second type petal P32 for holding the second start port may be configured so that one type of petal is shared for the display position of two or more hold display icons. According to the present modification 6, since it is difficult for the player to determine which of the display positions of the plurality of hold display icons one type of petal is directed to, the player is given a feeling of expectation and urgency. can do.

<< 4-8-7 >> Modification 7:
In the fourth embodiment and its modification, the first type 3 petal P31 for starting port holding and the second type petal P32 for holding the second starting port are displayed and displayed in the first starting port holding area Ds1. The display mode of both the hold display icon and the hold display icon displayed in the second start port hold area Ds2 is configured to be changeable. On the other hand, as a modification, only one of the first type petal P31 for holding the first start port and the third type petal P32 for holding the second start port is displayed, and the area Ds1 for holding the first start port is displayed. The display mode may be changed for only one of the hold display icon displayed on the hold display icon and the hold display icon displayed on the second start port hold area Ds2. Further, as a configuration capable of displaying both the first type petal P31 for holding the first start port and the third type petal P32 for holding the second start port, at least one of both is displayed according to the gaming state. It may be configured. Specifically, for example, in the high-probability gaming state, only the third type petal P32 for holding the second starting port is displayed, and in the normal gaming state (low-probability gaming state), the third type 3 petal for holding the first starting port is displayed. It may be configured to display only the seed petals P31. According to this configuration, it is possible to further improve the expectation that the game will be in a high-probability gaming state.

<< 4-8-8 >> Modification 8:
In the above-mentioned fourth embodiment and its modification, the third kind petal P3 as a moving body that can serve as a holding change suggestion effect is configured to appear from the display start point and move toward the corresponding holding display icon. On the other hand, as a modification, for example, the character may be configured to throw a moving object toward the corresponding hold display icon. According to this configuration, for example, the number of first holdings is three, and the character moves a ball as a moving object toward the third holding display icon from the right side in the first starting port holding area Ds1. When the ball is thrown, the thrown ball reaches the third hold display icon without displaying the hold display icon at the display position of the fourth hold display icon from the right side at the timing of throwing the ball. When a ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, hold information is acquired based on the entry, and a new hold display icon is added, the fourth from the right side. The hold display icon may be displayed at the display position of the second hold display icon. According to this configuration, when a new hold display icon is added in the middle of the game, the expectation for the moving body is given to the player after the fact when the display of the hold display icon is started. It is possible to give the player a further sense of expectation. Further, in the fourth embodiment and its modification, the type 4 petal P4 as a moving body for resuming the variable display appears from the display start point and moves toward the symbol. On the other hand, as a modification, for example, the configuration may be such that the character throws a moving body toward the design.

<< 4-8-9 >> Modification 9:
In the above-mentioned fourth embodiment and its modification, the type 3 petal P3, which can serve as a hold change suggestion effect, is configured to start displaying periodically from the hold 1 to the hold 4 in order. Therefore, the display may be started randomly from the hold 1 to the hold 4. According to this configuration, it becomes more difficult for the player to measure the timing when the petals reach the display position of the hold display icon, so that the player can be further given a sense of expectation and urgency. ..

<< 4-8-10 >> Modification 10:
In the fourth embodiment and its modification, when it is determined that the shift of the hold display icon does not occur during the predetermined period after the petals arrive, the petals are held and displayed for the predetermined period after the petals arrive. The configuration is such that the icon is continuously displayed at the display position. This is to continue displaying the petals that have reached the hold display icon while they have reached them. On the other hand, within a predetermined period after the arrival of the petals, the petals are blinked, lit like fireworks, or the color of the petals is changed to another color such as gold or rainbow at the display position of the reached hold display icon. The display form of the petals may be changed, such as. According to this configuration, it is possible to further emphasize the suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display icon changes, and it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

<< 4-8-11 >> Modification 11:
In the above-mentioned fourth embodiment and its modification, the type 4 petal P4 acting on the pattern of the variation display is configured to be included in the jackpot effect pattern accompanied by re-variation, whereas the jackpot effect pattern The type 4 petal P4 may be displayed in a routine different from the display of. According to this configuration, it becomes easy to change the movement path of the type 4 petal P4 that acts on the pattern of the variable display. For example, the movement path of the type 4 petal P4 is the same as the target arrival trajectory that reaches the display position of the target symbol and the target arrival trajectory from the start point to the middle, as in the case of the type 3 petal P3. It is possible to take any of the off-target orbits that reach a position deviating from the display position of the symbol. According to this configuration, even if the type 4 petal P4 is displayed, the display mode of the design may or may not change. Therefore, according to the present modification 11, the player gives the player a sense of anticipation and urgency that the display mode of the design may change even if the type 4 petal P4 is displayed. can do. Furthermore, although the type 4 petal P4 is displayed, it is possible to give a feeling of disappointment that the display mode of the design has not changed, so that the player can be further given a sense of expectation and urgency. Can be done.

<< 4-8-12 >> Modification 12:
In the above-mentioned fourth embodiment and its modification, the display form of the hold display icon as the hold identification information corresponds to the high or low possibility of winning a big hit in the winning lottery, but it is not necessary to be limited to this, and other It may be meaningful.

<< 4-8-13 >> Modification 13:
In the fourth embodiment and its modification, the hold display icon as the hold identification information is a pattern displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, but instead of this, the symbol display device 41 is used. Separately, a predetermined number of lamps may be installed, and the display form of the hold identification information may be changed by changing the lighting color of the lamps.

<< 4-8-14 >> Modification 14:
In the fourth embodiment and its modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices such as a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, but instead of this, the main control It may be configured to include two control devices such as a device and a sub control device. The sub-control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the fourth embodiment. Further, in the fourth embodiment and its modifications, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 do not have to be limited to the classification described in the fourth embodiment, and the three control devices need not be limited. As a whole of 60, 90, 100, it suffices if various processes according to the fourth embodiment can be executed.

<< 4-8-15 >> Modification 15:
In the fourth embodiment and its modification, the predetermined period is from the time when the demo image is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 to the middle of the game being played by the player. The composition was such that the petals as a moving body were displayed repeatedly for a while. Further, as described above, as a modification, the predetermined period does not include the period of the jackpot effect executed by winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. Further, as a modification 15, the predetermined period in which the moving body is always displayed can be changed as follows.

The predetermined period is a period set after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. As described above, the predetermined period may be configured not to include the period of the jackpot effect executed by winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. Further, the predetermined period may be configured not to include the period of the reach effect in which the reach is generated and executed. The predetermined period may be configured not to include the period of the normal reach effect in which the normal reach is generated and executed. The predetermined period may be configured not to include the period of the super reach effect in which the super reach is generated and executed. The predetermined period may be configured not to include the period of the special reach effect in which the special reach is generated and executed. The predetermined period may be configured not to include the period during which the RTC (real-time clock) effect is being executed. The predetermined period may be configured not to include a period in which a specific mode is selected in the mode selection for designating the type of effect of the entire game and the game is executed in the specific mode. The predetermined period may be configured not to include the period in which the demo image is displayed. The period excluded from the predetermined period may not be one period as described above, and the predetermined period may be a period excluding a plurality of periods selected from the various periods described above. For example, the predetermined period may be configured not to include the period of the jackpot effect executed by winning the jackpot in the winning lottery and the period of the reach effect executed when the reach occurs. According to the configuration of the present modification 15, the period in which the moving object is displayed can be narrowed down to the period effective for changing the display mode of the hold display icon.

<< 4-8-16 >> Modification 16:
In the above-mentioned fourth embodiment and its modification, the third kind petal P3 as a moving body changes the display mode of the hold display icon as the specific identification information, and the fourth kind petal P4 as the moving body is used as the specific identification information. The display mode of the symbol is changed. On the other hand, as a modification, the specific identification information may be configured to be specific identification information corresponding to the special information other than the hold display icon or the symbol.

<< 5 >> Fifth Embodiment:
<< 5-1 >> Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 202 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as the fifth embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a voice emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. Illuminations are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect of the effect by lighting or blinking at each game round performed by the pachinko machine 10, when a big hit is won, when a reach occurs, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two plate glasses is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. The details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls rented from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball stored in the upper plate 20 is supplied to the game ball launch mechanism included in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launch mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores the game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged to the outside from the lower plate 21.

An effect operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game effect reflecting the operation.

An operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “right side”). When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and an operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c that detects the rotation operation amount of the above by the change of the electric resistance is provided. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes according to the rotation operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball launch button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “left side”). When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined firing intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the player's operation handle 25. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the front view of the game board and flows down to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can make a so-called "right-handed". The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26 to launch the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26. Can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 203 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing. For example, a seal is attached to a place that can be opened and closed, and the characters such as "open" appear when the board box is opened.

The second control unit 52 includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90. The design display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays a design or an image for directing.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The launch control device 80 launches a game ball having a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player when an instruction to launch the game ball is input from the main control device 60. Controls the ball launch mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a slope connected below the tank 54 and gently inclined so that the game balls flow to the downstream side. The game balls are supplied from the tank rail 55, the case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, and the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power supply switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies the electric power required for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85. By turning the power switch 88 on and off, the supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and the non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 204 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding the game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicular to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. The game balls that have entered each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are placed in the individual openings formed in the game board 30. Be guided. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 has a special figure unit 37, a normal figure unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

As shown in the figure, the general winning opening 32 is an entry opening member that forms an entry opening into which a game ball can enter, and a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 203).

The first starting port 33 is an entry port member that forms an entry port into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is an entry port member that forms an entry port into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 is provided with a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to execute a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric service is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric service open state in which the electric service is opened in a predetermined mode. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second starting port 34. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34. In this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and also includes an opening / closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening / closing door 36b is normally closed so that the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60, when a big hit is won and the opening / closing execution mode is entered, the opening / closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state. The opening / closing execution mode shifts to the case where a big hit is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by entering the ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and the opening / closing door 36b is in the open state. It is a mode that repeats the closed state and the closed state. That is, as a result of the winning lottery based on the entry into the first starting port 33, if a big hit is won, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 can enter the large winning opening 36a. Similarly, as a result of the winning lottery based on the entry into the second starting port 34, even if a big hit is won, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 can enter the large winning opening 36a. .. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

An out opening 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and a game ball that has not entered the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, or the variable winning device 36 is out. It is discharged from the game area PA through the mouth 43.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. The first symbol display unit 37a is a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. , The variable display of the first symbol is performed. When the lottery is completed, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to display the stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying the second symbol. The second symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display unit 37b is used as a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. , The second symbol is changed and displayed. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display to display the stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b to the stop display is also referred to as the variable time. Call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a to the stop display is also referred to as the first variable time, and is displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first hold display unit 37c and a second hold display unit 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of holds of the first start port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second hold display unit 37d displays the number of holds of the second start port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on.

The normal drawing unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, the normal drawing unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode as the display mode of the light emitting display. When the electric accessory opening lottery is completed, the normal drawing unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode, or displays corresponding to the number of round games. The round game opens and closes until either the predetermined upper limit duration elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the open / close execution mode is started, and ends when the open / close execution mode ends and a new game round starts.

The special figure unit 37, the normal figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being composed of a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp, and for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. It may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery result, such as a CRT or a dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100 (FIG. 203). The symbol display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. conduct. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the display effect triggered by entering the ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, but also performs a display effect in the open / close execution mode that shifts when a big hit is won. .. Hereinafter, the details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 205 is an explanatory diagram showing a display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. On the display surface 41a, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are variablely displayed. Specifically, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols showing the numbers 1 to 8 are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row is periodically arranged from top to bottom or from bottom to top. A variable display that scrolls is performed. After the variable display by scrolling, as shown in FIG. 205, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L.

FIG. 206 is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol that is variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 206 (a) is for a symbol showing an even number among the symbols showing the numbers 1 to 8, and FIGS. 206 (b) and 206 (c) are an odd number among the symbols showing the numbers 1 to 8. In the figure, it is about the symbols showing 7 and 5). In the present embodiment, the symbols that are variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41 are divided into two types: a symbol that shows only numbers and a symbol that has a warrior character added to the numbers. Symbols showing only numbers are applied to symbols showing even numbers. That is, as shown in FIG. 206 (a), the symbol showing the number 2, the symbol showing the number 4, the symbol showing the number 6, and the symbol showing the number 8 are the symbols showing only the number. ing.

On the other hand, a symbol in which a warrior character is added to a number is applied to a symbol indicating an odd number. That is, as shown in FIG. 206 (b), the symbol showing the number 7 is a symbol in which the warrior character A is added to the number 7. As shown in FIG. 206 (c), the symbol showing the number 5 is a symbol in which the warrior character B is added to the number 5. Although the symbol showing the number 3 is not shown, it is a symbol in which the warrior character C is added to the number 3. The symbol showing the number 1 is not shown, but is a symbol in which the warrior character D is added to the number 1. In this embodiment, the warrior character A is, for example, a beautiful girl warrior character, as shown in FIG. 206 (b). As shown in FIG. 206 (c), the warrior character B is, for example, a youth warrior character.

In the present embodiment, the variable display symbol is composed of two types, a numerical symbol and a symbol in which a warrior character is added to the numbers. On the other hand, the variable display is performed as a modification. The symbol may be composed of one of the above two types. That is, the variable display symbol may be composed only of the numerical symbol, or may be composed only of the symbol in which the warrior character is added to the number. Further, the number of warrior characters is not limited to four, and may be any number as long as it is less than or equal to the number of symbols. When the symbol is composed only of numbers, the number of warrior characters appearing in the production described later may exceed the number of symbols.

Here, the warrior character is a character who can fight. Characters are people and animals that appear in works such as novels, comics, and games. The character may include not only living things but also inorganic substances (robots, automobiles, battleships, etc.). Furthermore, the character may be judged to be acting based on independent thinking, and may include conceptual ones (nation, prefecture, region, territory, clan) by using anthropomorphism. good.

Next, the state of fluctuation of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (FIG. 205) will be described in detail. Specifically, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity is started. Then, each scrolling symbol switches from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. When the variation display of the symbol is completed and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit winning, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the effective line L. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L. The mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, and the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol row, and the symbol of each symbol row. Various modes such as numbers can be adopted as the mode of variable display of the symbol.

Here, the game times refer to the period from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to the end of the variable display, the stop display, and the end of the stop display. It is one unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery about the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display unit is used for each game. After the segment display is variablely displayed on either 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device is used for each game. In 41, after the predetermined symbol string is variablely displayed, the symbol string is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game is also referred to as a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the predetermined lottery result, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 205, a first start port holding area Ds1, a holding digestion area Dm, and a second starting port holding area Ds2 are displayed below the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. To. The reserved digestion area Dm is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a in the left-right direction, the first starting port holding area Ds1 is displayed on the left side of the holding digestion area Dm, and the second starting port holding area Ds2 is the reserved digestion area Dm. It is displayed on the right side. In the first starting port holding area Ds1, the number of holdings based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second starting port holding area Ds2, the number of holdings based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is four, respectively. Each hold displayed in the first start port hold area Ds1 is moved to the hold digestion area Dm and is subject to a winning lottery. Further, each hold displayed in the second start opening hold area Ds2 is moved to the hold digestion area Dm and is subject to a winning lottery.

As shown in FIG. 204, a pair of nails (so-called life nails and belly button nails) 42 (42a, 42b) are provided above the first starting port 33. The probability of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 changes depending on the distance between the pair of nails 42a and 42b.

<< 5-2 >> Electrical configuration of gaming machines:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 207 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 temporarily stores various data and the like when executing a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a program recorded in the ROM 63. It is provided with a RAM 64 which is a memory for storing. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may have a part of the function which MPU 62 has. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown), respectively. The payout control device 70 and the power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a DC stable 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, the power supply device 85 includes a capacitor (not shown), and when a power failure occurs or the power supply switch 88 (FIG. 203) is turned off, power supply to each device is continued for a predetermined period. do.

Further, various detection sensors 67a to 67e are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. Specifically, it is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided in various entrances such as a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. .. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each entry port based on signals from various detection sensors 67a to 67e, and the game ball is a through gate. It is determined whether or not the vehicle has passed 35. Further, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the second starting opening 34, and also executes an electric accessory opening lottery based on the entry of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

The output port of the main control board 61 includes a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , Is connected to the main display unit 45. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the electric accessory opening is won as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the main display unit 45. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the open / close execution mode and the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode is determined, the display control of the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is executed.

Further, the payout control device 70 and the voice emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry to the general winning opening 32 is specified, the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry to the first starting opening 33 is performed. When is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when the entry to the second starting port 34 is specified, one game ball is paid out. The prize ball command corresponding to is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. Further, the launch control device 80 is connected to the operation handle 25 and the game ball launch button 26.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the voice emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, control of the display control device 100 is performed. Further, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the voice emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 and the type of the combination of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. , Whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the advance notice effect executed in each game round, etc. are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time when the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 208 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 wins a lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, sets the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting jackpot types such as probabilistic jackpot results and normal jackpot results. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate reach when the symbol sequence displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displaced and varied.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, the fluctuation type counter CS is used when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45, and the symbol display device 41. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The hold information storage area 64b is provided with a first hold area Ra and a second hold area Rb. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of entering the ball are the first of the reserved information storage areas 64b. It is stored in the hold area Ra in chronological order. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of entering the ball are set in the second reserved area Rb of the reserved information storage area 64b. It is stored in time series.

The details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 1199, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is set in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. It is stored, and when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first hold area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is matched with the jackpot. It is determined whether or not it becomes. Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second hold area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c and collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. Whether or not it will be a big hit is determined.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is such that the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. By doing so, the process moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not the hit is a big hit.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Further, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. .. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big hit. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value, for example.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. It is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the ball. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second hold area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. However, when the result of the winning lottery becomes a big hit and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some of the symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 may have a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot for some of the symbols. It is a display state in which the symbols are displayed and the remaining symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 205 (b), the symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. In the situation where the reach line is formed and the reach line is formed, the symbol is varied and displayed in the symbol row Z2 to reach the reach. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, in the state where the reach line is formed, the variable display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the screen effect. A combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when the reach effect is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to display a notice using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the types of reach are normal reach (also referred to as normal reach) and super reach, which suggests that the possibility (expectation) of winning a big hit in the winning lottery is higher than that of normal reach. There is a special reach that suggests that the chances of winning a big hit (expectation) in the lottery are higher than the super reach. The frequency of appearance of normal reach, super reach, and special reach is set to be relatively high and low. Specifically, the frequency of appearance of super reach is lower than the frequency of appearance of normal reach, and the frequency of appearance of special reach is lower than the frequency of appearance of super reach. Each production during normal reach, super reach, and special reach will be described in detail later.

Next, the details of the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 62 to determine the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value, for example.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. The updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, and the holding information is stored at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34. It is stored in the second holding area Rb of the storage area 64b. The variation stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 using the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the first hold area Ra or the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the second hold area Rb. By referring to the time table, the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b is determined.

Next, the details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric service holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 64d moves to the electric service execution area 64e, and then the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 in the electric service execution area 64e. A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory opening lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state. Specifically, in the electric service execution area 64e, the winning / failing table (winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery) stored in the accessory lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 are It is collated and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state.

At least one of the acquired value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the variable type counter CS, and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is special in the present invention. Corresponds to information. Further, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first hold area Ra and the second hold area Rb, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the variable type counter CS, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 is used. Also called pending information.

Next, the pass / fail table will be described. The hit / fail table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when a winning lottery is performed based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode set as a lottery mode for the winning lottery. At the time of the winning lottery in the probability mode, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to. The high-probability mode (also called the high-probability gaming state) is a gaming state that is started by winning a probabilistic jackpot, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is relatively higher than that in the low-probability mode. To tell.

FIG. 209 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the pass / fail table. FIG. 209 (a) shows a pass / fail table for the low probability mode (for the low probability mode), and FIG. 209 (b) shows the pass / fail table for the high probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 209 (a), five values 0 to 4 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the hit / fail table for the low probability mode. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values of 0 to 4 are out of the range. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 209 (b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the hit / fail table for the high probability mode. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (16 to 1199) other than the 16 values of 0 to 15 are out of the range. As described above, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / fail table for the low probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / miss table for the high probability mode. Included in the group. However, as a result of the winning lottery, if the probability of winning the jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary.

Although it is not adopted in the winning / failing table in this embodiment, a "small hit" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

The "small hit" is a result of success or failure that triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode in which the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened / closed, but does not trigger the transition in both the lottery mode and the support mode. .. On the other hand, "off" is a result of success or failure that does not trigger the transition of the open / close execution mode, and also does not trigger the transition of the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three modes or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode of winning lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends (3) The electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (1) open / close execution mode, the occurrence of a ball entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency is relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 sec elapses or to the opening / closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number of balls entered is 10. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed twice from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec elapses or the ball enters the opening / closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening / closing door 36b at one time is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening / closing door 36b once is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode in which the low-frequency winning mode is applied, the game ball does not substantially enter. However, even in the open / close execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the game ball can be entered.

The number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the number of opening limits for one opening are entered into the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the frequency of occurrence of balls is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening / closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of openings and closings than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is long, or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that the ball does not substantially enter the variable winning device 36.

The pachinko machine 10 has, as a mode of the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the above-mentioned (2) opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a winning / losing table for high probability as a winning / failing table, and a winning / losing table. It is possible to set a low probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a winning / failing table for low probability. As described with reference to FIG. 209, the case where the winning lottery is performed using the high-probability winning / failing table is compared with the case where the winning lottery is performed using the low-probability winning / failing table, and the big hit is won. There is a high probability of doing so.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening / closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 continues to launch the game ball in the same manner with respect to the game area PA. The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are used so that the frequency with which the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the above-mentioned situations. Can be set.

Specifically, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the one-time opening time of the electric accessory 34a may be set longer than that in the low-frequency support mode when the electric combination opening is won.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electric combination open is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode. May be good. Further, the electric accessory 34a may be configured to have a long opening time once. In addition, when the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times in the high frequency support mode, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is It may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory opening lottery to the next electric accessory opening lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. You may.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary gaming state that assists in the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the big hit type counter C2 is used to sort the big hit types. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 210 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 210 (a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 210 (b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to at the time of a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is to the second start port 34. It is referred to at the time of the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. 210 (a), the distribution table for the first starting port has a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot, the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening / closing execution mode (hereinafter, simply "lottery mode"). (Also called) is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is a high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot is that the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the open / close execution mode is different, the 16R probability variation jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R probability variation jackpot is 8. It is a round (8 rounds).

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the low probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end becomes the high frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot is that the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the open / close execution mode is different, the 16R normal jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R normal jackpot is 8. It is a round (8 rounds).

In the distribution table for the first starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 39" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "40 to 64" corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot. "65-89" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "90-99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the mode of the jackpot is diversified. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the advantage for the player is that the 16R probability variation jackpot is the highest, the 8R probability variation jackpot is the next highest, then the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different degrees of advantage for the player in this way, it is possible to suppress the monotonicization of the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 210 (b), the distribution table for the second starting port has a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. 16R probability variation jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 64" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "65 to 99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. It corresponds to.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won is the case where the jackpot is won based on the entry into the first starting port 33 and the second. It is different from the case where the big hit is won based on the entry into the starting port 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player.

In addition, if the result is a loss in the winning lottery, the opening / closing execution mode is not performed, and the lottery mode and the support mode are not changed. In the distribution of the types of jackpots, when 16 probability variation jackpots or 8R probability variation jackpots are obtained, the lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the high probability mode, as described above. The state will continue until the next big hit in the winning lottery.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to perform the jackpot type. Further, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to cause the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b to stop and display the segment display. Determine the display mode. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, a table for reach determination (hereinafter referred to as a reach determination hit / fail table) will be described. The reach determination hit / fail table is table data for collating with the value of the reach random number counter C3 when determining whether or not reach occurs based on the value of the reach random number counter C3.

FIG. 211 is an explanatory diagram showing a reach determination hit / miss table. As shown in FIG. 211, among the values of the reach random number counters C3 from 0 to 399, 20 values of 0 to 19 are set as the values to win the reach in the reach determination hit / fail table. Then, among the values from 0 to 399, the values (20 to 399) other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 are set as deviations, that is, values that do not win the reach. That is, in the situation where the big hit is not won in the winning lottery, the probability of winning the reach is 1/20.

FIG. 212 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a winning / failing table (winning / failing table for electric accessory opening lottery) used when executing the electric accessory opening lottery.

FIG. 212 (a) shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 212 (a), in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode), two electric accessory opening counters C4, which are the electric accessory opening winning counters, are 0 and 1. The value is set. 464 values of 2 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is out of alignment. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening is won in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 212 (b) shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 212 (b), in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode), 462 electric accessory opening counters C4, which are the electric accessory opening winning counters, are set to 0 to 461. The value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is out of alignment. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening is won in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second starting port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. ..

<< 5-3 >> Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 213 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configurations of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Some configurations of the power supply device 85 (FIG. 207) and the like are omitted. The MPU 92 is mounted on the voice emission control board 91 provided in the voice emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element having a built-in CPU, ROM 93, RAM 94, interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data input / output circuit, and the like.

Various control programs, fixed value data, tables, etc. executed by the MPU 92 are stored in the ROM 93. For example, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the ROM 93. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 60 and an effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and a display control device 100 is connected to the output side.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the voice emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 102.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols and pictures displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio emission control device 90 are the sound light side MPU 92 and the sound light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound / light side RAM 94 are also referred to, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as a display side MPU 102.

<< 5-4 >> Outline of processing by the gaming machine:
Next, an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 has the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that fluctuate / stop, the screen effect when super reach or special reach occurs, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The process of displaying the background image appearing on the back side (rear side) is being performed.

The background image will be described first. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a background image called a stage is displayed. A stage is a form of an effect mode that defines an effect mode, and each stage is provided with a moving image having a story.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, two types of stages, a character stage and a non-character stage, are prepared. The character stage is a stage corresponding to the warrior character. A non-character stage is a stage that does not correspond to a warrior character.

FIG. 214 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a character-based stage. In the pachinko machine 10, four character-based stages corresponding to each of the warrior characters A to D described above are prepared as character-based stages. Specifically, as a character-type stage corresponding to the warrior character A, a stage in the room of the beautiful girl warrior character shown in FIG. 214 (a) is prepared. On this stage, a beautiful girl warrior character as a warrior character A spends her time in her room. Further, as a character stage corresponding to the warrior character B, a stage in the room of the youth warrior character shown in FIG. 214 (b) is prepared. At this stage, the youth warrior character as warrior character B spends his time in his room. In addition, although not shown, a stage in the room of the warrior character C as a character stage corresponding to the warrior character C and a stage in the room of the warrior character D as a character stage corresponding to the warrior character D are prepared. There is.

That is, one warrior character is associated with each stage corresponding to the character-based stage, and a moving image in which the associated warrior character appears is assigned. Each of the stages of the rooms of the warrior characters A to D is a production in which the warrior character who is the owner of the room appears, but it does not prevent other warrior characters from appearing in addition to the warrior character. Further, as a modification, a configuration in which the associated warrior character does not appear in the moving image of each stage of the character stage may be used. In short, in the pachinko machine 10, it is sufficient that one warrior character is internally associated with each stage corresponding to the character stage, and whether or not the warrior character appears in the moving image of the stage. It doesn't matter. In the present embodiment, each stage corresponding to the character stage is associated with the warrior character added to the variable display symbol, but as a modification, it is added to the variable display symbol. It can be a character stage associated with a character unrelated to the warrior character. In this case, the number of character stages is not limited to four, and may be another number.

FIG. 215 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a non-character stage. In the pachinko machine 10, a rural stage illustrated in FIG. 215 (a) is prepared as one of the non-character stages. On this stage, the landscape of the countryside is represented. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as another non-character stage, an urban stage illustrated in FIG. 215 (b) is prepared. At this stage, the scenery of the city is represented. In the pachinko machine 10, as other non-character stages, an ocean stage (not shown) and a stage for everyone (not shown) are prepared. On the ocean stage, the ocean landscape is represented. On the stage of all, it is shown that all of the warrior characters A to D appear. The non-character stage is a stage that does not correspond to a warrior character, but it does not prevent only one warrior character from appearing or multiple warrior characters from appearing. In short, one warrior character is associated with the character stage, whereas the warrior character is not associated with the non-character stage. In the present embodiment, the number of non-character stages is four, but instead of this, another number may be used.

In this embodiment, stage names such as "Bishojo Warrior Character Room Stage" and "Countryside Stage" are displayed on each stage as a character stage and each stage as a non-character stage. , Instead of this, the stage name may not be displayed on each stage. Further, the stage name may be displayed only for a predetermined period immediately after the stage is switched, and the stage name may be hidden after the predetermined period has elapsed.

In the pachinko machine 10, one stage is selected from each stage as a character stage and each stage as a non-character stage, and the selected stage is displayed as a background image.

Next, the screen effect when super reach or special reach occurs will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, normal reach, super reach, and special reach are prepared as the types of reach.

In the present embodiment, the normal reach is a reach that does not involve switching of the screen effect displayed on the symbol display device 41. Reach occurs when two of the three symbol rows Z1 to Z3 stop at the same symbol, and the third symbol fluctuates at a slower speed than before, just before the third symbol stops. Then the speed will drop further. As a result, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the game will stop as it is and become a big hit. During the production of normal reach, it may change to super reach or special reach, or it may stop once in a disengaged state where the patterns are not aligned, then restart, and then re-enter the reach.

The super reach is a reach that involves switching the screen effect displayed on the symbol display device 41. In the case of super reach, the screen effect changes after the reach occurs with two of the three symbol rows Z1 to Z3 stopped at the same symbol, as in the normal reach. The screen effect at this time is composed of a moving image in which one warrior character specified from the warrior characters A to D described above is the main character. Specifically, for example, the screen effect is composed of a moving image of the daily life of the warrior character as the main character. A moving image based on the daily life of a warrior character is, for example, a moving image in which a warrior character trains, devises a technique, or meditates. The screen effect is an effect that does not involve a confrontation with an enemy character, which will be described later. After the end of the effect, the arrangement of the symbols in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped is displayed.

The warrior character that is the main character of the screen effect displayed when super reach occurs is one of the warrior characters A to D added to the variable display pattern. As a modification, it can be a character unrelated to the warrior characters A to D added to the variable display pattern. However, the warrior character that is the main character of the screen effect displayed when super reach occurs matches any of the warrior characters associated with each stage of the character system stage.

The special reach is a reach that involves switching the screen effect displayed on the symbol display device 41. In the case of special reach, the screen effect changes after the reach occurs with two of the three symbol rows Z1 to Z3 stopped at the same symbol, as in the normal reach. The screen effect at this time is composed of a moving image in which one warrior character specified from the warrior characters A to D described above is the main character. Specifically, the screen production is composed of the battle production in which the warrior character as the main character and the enemy character confront each other (hereinafter also referred to as the battle production) and the result notification production that announces whether the warrior character has won or lost. Will be done.

Before notifying the player whether the result of the battle production is favorable to the player (for example, winning a big hit in the winning lottery) or unfavorable (for example, losing in the winning lottery). It is a production (suggestion production) that suggests to the player whether the result is advantageous or disadvantageous. The result notification effect is an effect of notifying the player whether the result is favorable or unfavorable, depending on whether the warrior character has won or lost. In the present embodiment, in the result notification production, if the warrior character wins in the battle production, the warrior character survives, and if the warrior character is defeated, the warrior character dies, so-called dead or alive.・ It is a production of the live. After the result notification effect is completed, the arrangement of the symbols in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped is displayed.

FIG. 216 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a battle effect and a result notification effect. FIG. 216 (a) shows an example of a battle effect, FIG. 216 (b) shows an example of a victory effect as a result notification effect, and FIG. 216 (c) shows an example of a defeat effect as a result notification effect. .. In the battle effect shown in FIG. 216 (a), an image (moving image) in which a beautiful girl warrior character as a warrior character A and a monster as an enemy character confront each other is displayed on the symbol display device 41. However, the battle effect may be in another mode.

In the victory effect shown in FIG. 216 (b), an image in which the warrior character A is pleased with the victory is displayed on the symbol display device 41. However, the winning effect as the result effect may be another aspect.

In the defeat effect shown in FIG. 216 (c), the image in which the warrior character A died is displayed on the symbol display device 41. However, the defeat effect as the result notification effect may be another mode.

The warrior character that is the main character of the screen effect displayed when the special reach occurs is one of the warrior characters A to D added to the variable display pattern. As a modification, it can be a character unrelated to the warrior characters A to D added to the variable display pattern. However, the warrior character that is the main character of the screen effect displayed when the special reach occurs matches any one of the warrior characters associated with each stage of the character system stage.

The screen effect (battle effect) executed during the above special reach and the screen effect (effect without battle) executed during the super reach display the moving image described above. The sound or light accompanying the moving image may be configured to be output to the speaker 46 or various lamps 47.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the reach determination is that super reach occurs in the game times, or when special reach occurs, the symbol display device in the game times. As described above, the screen effect peculiar to each of the super reach and the special reach is displayed on the display surface 41a of the 41.

You can also say: In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, one warrior character is associated with each of the character-based stages, and the associated warrior character is the main character as a reach effect in the game times on the character-based stage. There are two types of productions that can be performed. One of the two types of production is a battle production in which the warrior character as the main character and the enemy character confront each other, and the other one is a production without a battle.

FIG. 217 shows a display mode of the fluctuating / stopping symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (symbols), a screen effect when super reach or special reach occurs (hereinafter, also referred to as a special reach screen effect), and a stage as a background image. It is a timing chart showing. In the figure, a plurality of game times in which the game result progresses in the order of reach non-occurrence / loss, normal reach / miss, and super reach / miss are shown. Reach non-occurrence / loss is a case where the game times in which the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery and the reach does not occur. Normal reach / loss is a game in which a big hit is not won in a winning lottery, and a reach occurs and the type of reach that occurs is normal reach. Super reach / loss is a game in which a big hit is not won in a winning lottery, and a reach occurs and the type of reach that occurs is super reach.

The stage as a background image is a period from the start point t1 to the point t2 in the non-reach / out-of-reach game times, the normal reach / out-of-game times, and the super reach / out-of-game times (hereinafter referred to as t1-t2 period). ) And, it is displayed. Here, for example, it is assumed that the character stage corresponding to the warrior character A is displayed. During the period from the point t2 to the end point t3 (hereinafter referred to as the t2-t3 period) in the super reach / out-of-game game, the stage as the background image is hidden.

The special reach screen effect is hidden in the non-reach / out-of-reach game times and the normal reach / out-of-game times. On the other hand, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in the non-reach / out-of-reach game times and the normal reach / out-of-reach game times. Specifically, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that fluctuate / stop are displayed. As a result, the fluctuating / stopping symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are superimposed and displayed on the upper surface side (front side) of the stage as the background image.

The special reach screen effect is hidden during the t1-t2 period of the super reach / off game times. On the other hand, in the t1-t2 period, the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed. Specifically, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that fluctuate / stop are displayed. As a result, the fluctuating / stopping symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are superimposed and displayed on the upper surface side (front side) of the stage as the background image.

A special reach screen effect is displayed during the t2-t3 period of the super reach / off game times. On the other hand, in the t2-t3 period, the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a reduced size. As a result, instead of the stage as the background image, a special reach screen effect when super reach occurs is displayed.

In the game times following the super reach / out-of-game times (here, it is assumed that the reach does not occur / out of the game), the stage as the background image is continuously displayed with the stage before it is hidden, and the special reach. The screen effect is hidden. The display modes for the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the special reach screen effect, and the stage in the super reach / jackpot, special reach / miss, special reach / jackpot game times are the super reach / miss game shown in FIG. 217. It is the same as the display mode for the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the special reach screen effect, and the stage in the times.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the stage before switching to the special reach screen effect is the character stage in the game times in which the super reach or the special reach occurs, the warrior character associated with the character stage is associated with the character stage. The warrior character that matches with is configured to appear as the main character in the special reach screen production. For example, when a super reach or a special reach occurs in a game on a character stage corresponding to the warrior character A, the screen effect displayed in these reach is that the warrior character A is the main character. ..

If the stage before switching to the special reach screen production is a non-character stage, and if a super reach or special reach occurs in the game, the warrior character that appears as the main character in the special reach screen production. Was arbitrarily determined by lottery. If the stage before switching to the special reach screen effect is a non-character stage instead of this configuration, the special reach screen effect may be an effect unrelated to the warrior character.

FIG. 218 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the transition of the stages executed in the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 plays a game while repeating stage transitions between a character-based stage and a non-character-based stage. In addition, the game is performed while shifting the stage in the character-based stage or shifting the stage in the non-character-based stage. These stage transitions are executed based on the winning / failing determination result of the winning lottery, the game result such as the presence / absence of reach, the reach type when reach occurs, and the hold information.

FIG. 219 is an explanatory diagram showing an aspect of stage transition in the character system stage. In FIG. 219, the game result of the game times “reach non-occurrence / loss” corresponds to the case where the game times are not won in the big hit in the winning lottery and the reach does not occur. The game result of the game round is "normal reach / missed", which corresponds to the case where the normal reach occurs in the game round that resulted in the missed lottery. The game result of the game round is "super reach / miss", which corresponds to the case where the super reach occurs in the game round in which the result of the game is missed in the winning lottery. The game result of the game round is "special reach / miss", which corresponds to the case where the special reach occurs in the game round in which the result of the game is missed in the winning lottery. The "big hit" corresponds to the game times in which the big hit was won in the winning lottery, regardless of whether or not a reach has occurred and the type of reach.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the character stage and the game result of the game round is non-reachable or out of reach, the stage in the game round is continued (maintained) and the stage transition is not performed. And said. That is, in the case of so-called complete deviation in which reach does not occur, the stage transition is not performed.

In addition, even if the player is on a character stage and the game result of the game is normal reach or off, the stage in the game is continued and the stage is not changed. Since game times that are normal reach / off occur frequently, it is difficult for the player to read the story of the stage if the stage is changed each time. Therefore, in this embodiment, the stage is changed. Was not performed. In addition, instead of this configuration, the stage may be changed to a configuration in which the stage is changed to the character stage when the game result of the game round is normal reach / off. For example, the character stage may be transferred from one stage to another stage, or may be transferred to a non-character stage.

Even if the player is in a character stage and the game result of the game is super reach / off, the stage in the game is continued and the stage is not changed (that is, the stage is restricted). As explained earlier, the screen production in the game times when the super reach occurred is a moving image based on the daily life of the warrior character, and it is dead or alive like the game times when the special reach occurred. It is not a production. Therefore, since a moving image that causes the warrior character to die is not projected on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, even if the warrior character appears on the stage in the next game round, no player is involved. There is no sense of discomfort. For this reason, in the present embodiment, if a super reach occurs in a game round that is in the character stage and the result of the winning lottery is lost, the stage in the game round is continued and the stage transition is not performed. And said. In addition, instead of this configuration, a configuration may be performed in which the stage shift is performed when the character system stage is used and the game result of the game round is super reach / off. For example, the character stage may be transferred from one stage to another stage, or may be transferred to a non-character stage.

If the stage is in a character stage and the game result of the game round is special reach / miss, the stage is changed from the character stage to the non-character stage at the end of the game round (with exceptions). ). As described above, since the screen effect in the game times in which the special reach occurs is the effect of dead or alive, in the game times in which the result is missed in the winning lottery, the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is displayed. A moving image in which the warrior character dies is projected on 41a (see FIG. 216 (c)). For this reason, if the stage in the game round is continued and the stage transition is not performed, the player will display a moving image in which the dead warrior character appears as if nothing had happened in the next game round. There was a risk of feeling uncomfortable when I saw it. In order to solve this problem, in this embodiment, if a special reach occurs in the game times that are in the character-based stage and the result of the winning lottery is lost, the character-based stage is changed from the current character-based stage. The stage shift to a non-character stage that is not directly related to the warrior character corresponding to the stage. As a result, after the player sees the moving image of the warrior character dying on the character stage, the character stage corresponding to the dead warrior character is continued, and the warrior character who died did not have anything. It is possible to prevent the feeling of strangeness such as appearance. Therefore, according to this configuration, the story of the production in which the character appears is guaranteed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As described above, there are exceptions to the configuration in which the stage is transferred from the character stage to the non-character stage when the stage is in the character stage and the game result of the game is special reach / off. Specifically, when the player is on the character stage and the game result of the game is special reach / miss, the hold information at the end of the game contains information indicating that the game corresponds to super reach or special reach. When it exists, it does not perform stage transition to the non-character stage, but performs different processing. That is, when the player is on the character stage and the game result of the game is special reach / miss, the hold information at the end of the game is the information indicating that the game corresponds to super reach, and the special reach. Only when there is no information indicating that, the above-mentioned process of shifting the stage from the character stage to the non-character stage is performed. The above-mentioned super reach does not matter whether or not a big hit is won in the winning lottery. That is, super reach includes super reach / miss and super reach / jackpot. The above special reach does not matter whether or not a big hit is won in the winning lottery. That is, the special reach includes the special reach / miss and the special reach / jackpot.

If you are on a character stage and the game result of the game round is special reach / miss, and there is information indicating that it corresponds to the special reach in the hold information at the end of the game round, the game round The stage in was continued, and the stage transition was not performed (exception 1). In other words, by limiting the stage transition, the stage in the game round is continued. According to this configuration, a moving image that causes the warrior character to die is projected on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 in the screen production of the special reach, and the stage shift is not performed at the end of the game round. The screen effects corresponding to the character stage where the dead warrior character appears will continue to be displayed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in principle, the stage shifts to the non-character stage when the game result of the game is a special reach / out of the character stage. The dead warrior character will not appear as the main character in the next game stage. Nevertheless, according to the configuration of Exception 1, the dead warrior character will appear on the stage of the next game round without the stage transition. On the other hand, in the case of Exception 1, the holding information at the end of the game round includes information indicating that it corresponds to the special reach, so that the player has an advantage (expectation of big hit). expensive. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player recognizes that the stage transition is not made when the special reach / miss is achieved in the game times in the state of the character system stage. After that, when the pending information is digested, it is possible to know that a favorable result can be expected if the stage transition is not made by recognizing the production that is expected to have a favorable result, specifically, the battle production. can. In particular, since the above battle effect executed when the hold information is digested is by the same warrior character as the warrior character who was defeated earlier, the player can perform the battle effect by the warrior character who was defeated first. You can watch it again, and if you win, you can win the defeat (win a big hit). For this reason, the player is more likely to feel emotional about the production. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 having the configuration of the exception 1, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game result of the game is on the character stage and the game result is special reach / miss, the hold information at the end of the game is indicated to correspond to super reach. If the indicated information exists, the stage is set to shift to a character-type stage corresponding to a warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the production corresponding to the special reach / deviation of the game (exception 2).

According to the configuration of Exception 2, a moving image that causes the warrior character to die is projected on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 in the special reach screen production, and the warrior character other than the dead warrior character is projected at the end of the game. The screen effect corresponding to the character stage corresponding to the warrior character of is displayed. In the case of exception 2, since the reserved information at the end of the game round includes information indicating that the game corresponds to super reach, the player has a relatively high degree of advantage. Super reach has a lower advantage than special reach, but has a higher advantage than normal reach, so it has a relatively high advantage for players. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, when the player recognizes that the player has moved to the character stage corresponding to the warrior character other than the dead warrior character at the end of the game round, an advantageous result comes. You will have a sense of expectation. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 having the configuration of the exception 2, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that a relatively advantageous result will come, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, new characters after the stage transition (= warrior characters other than the dead warrior character) will appear at the stage after the transition and when the pending information corresponding to Super Reach is exhausted. Even if the character is different from the characters that have appeared until then, you can immediately become familiar with it, and the emotional empathy for the production will increase. For this reason, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, as an exception to the above-mentioned exception to the principle of shifting the stage from the character stage to the non-character stage when the stage is in the character stage and the game result of the game is special reach / off. Although 1 and exception 2 are prepared, as a modification, only the above-mentioned exception 1 may be prepared and the configuration may be such that exception 2 is excluded.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the pachinko machine 10 is on the character stage and a big hit is won in the winning lottery related to the game round, regardless of the presence or absence of reach and the reach type when reach occurs, in the game round. The stage was continued and the stage transition was not performed. When a big hit is won in the winning lottery, the player often wants to carry on the luck and continue the game on the same stage as the stage when the big hit is won, so the stage transition is not performed. In addition, instead of this configuration, if the character is on the stage and a big hit is won in the winning lottery, the stage may be changed. For example, the character stage may be transferred from one stage to another stage, or may be transferred to a non-character stage.

FIG. 220 is an explanatory diagram showing an aspect of stage transition in a non-character stage. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a non-character stage and the game result of the game is non-reach or out of reach, the stage in the game is continued and the stage is not changed. .. That is, in the case of so-called complete deviation in which reach does not occur, the stage transition is not performed.

In addition, even if the player is on a non-character stage and the game result of the game is normal reach or off, the stage in the game is continued and the stage is not changed. Since game times that are normal reach / off occur frequently, it is difficult for the player to read the story of the stage if the stage is changed each time. Therefore, in this embodiment, the stage is changed. Was not performed. In addition, instead of this configuration, if the stage is in a non-character stage and the game result of the game round is normal reach / off, the stage may be changed. For example, in the non-character stage, one stage may be transferred to another stage, or the character stage may be transferred.

If you are on a non-character stage and the game result of the game is super reach / miss, it corresponds to the warrior character that appeared in the production corresponding to the super reach / miss of the game at the end of the game. It was configured to shift to the character stage. As explained earlier, the screen production in the game times when the super reach occurred is a moving image based on the daily life of the warrior character, and it is dead or alive like the game times when the special reach occurred. It is not a production. Therefore, since a moving image that causes the warrior character to die is not projected on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, even if the warrior character appears on the stage in the next game round, no player is involved. There is no sense of discomfort. For this reason, in the present embodiment, if a super reach occurs in a game that is on a non-character stage and the result is a loss in the winning lottery, a character corresponding to the warrior character that appeared in the production of the super reach. It was configured to move to the system stage.

If you are on a non-character stage and the game result of the game is special reach / miss, at the end of the game, a warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the production corresponding to the special reach / miss of the game. (However, there are exceptions). As described above, since the screen effect in the game times in which the special reach occurs is the effect of dead or alive, in the game times in which the result is missed in the winning lottery, the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is displayed. A moving image that causes the warrior character to die is projected on 41a. For this reason, if the stage is set to shift to the character-based stage corresponding to the warrior character that appeared in the special reach / out of the game, the player will be the next warrior character who died. There was a risk of feeling uncomfortable when I saw the moving image that appeared as if nothing had happened in the game. In order to solve this problem, in the present embodiment, if a special reach occurs in a game round that is in a non-character stage and the result is a loss in the winning lottery, the game round is at the end of the game round. It was configured to shift to the character stage corresponding to the warrior characters other than the warrior characters that appeared in the special reach / disengagement production. As a result, after seeing the moving image of the warrior character dying on the non-character stage, the player shifts to the character stage corresponding to the deceased warrior character, and it seems that the deceased warrior character did not have anything. It is possible to prevent the feeling of strangeness such as appearing in. Therefore, according to this configuration, the story of the production in which the character appears is guaranteed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

If you are on a non-character stage and the game result of the game is special reach / miss, go to the character stage corresponding to the warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the production corresponding to the special reach / miss of the game. There are exceptions to the migrated configuration as described above. Specifically, when the player is on a non-character stage and the game result of the game is special reach / miss, there is information indicating that the game corresponds to special reach in the hold information at the end of the game. Occasionally, it was configured to shift to a character-based stage corresponding to the warrior character that appeared in the production corresponding to the special reach / deviation of the game (exception A). The above special reach does not matter whether or not a big hit is won in the winning lottery. That is, the special reach includes the special reach / miss and the special reach / jackpot.

According to the configuration of Exception A, a moving image that causes the warrior character to die is projected on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 in the screen production of the special reach on the non-character stage, and at the end of the game round, The screen effect corresponding to the character stage where the dead warrior character appears will be displayed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in principle, when the game is on a non-character stage and the game result of the game is special reach / miss, the special reach / miss of the game is made. We are shifting the stage to a character-based stage that corresponds to warrior characters other than the warrior characters that appeared in the production corresponding to, and the dead warrior character will not appear as the leading role in the next game stage. Nevertheless, according to the composition of Exception A, the dead warrior character will appear on the stage of the next game. On the other hand, in the case of the exception A, the holding information at the end of the game round includes information indicating that the game corresponds to the special reach, so that the player has a high degree of advantage. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, the player can do anything in the next game stage when the dead warrior character is out of the special reach in the game time in the non-character stage. When the pending information is digested after recognizing that it will appear as if it did not appear, the dead warrior character will be next by recognizing the production that is expected to have a favorable result, specifically the battle production. It can be seen that it is possible to expect advantageous results by appearing on the stage of the game times. In particular, since the above battle effect executed when the hold information is digested is by the same warrior character as the warrior character who was defeated earlier, the player can perform the battle effect by the warrior character who was defeated first. You can watch it again, and if you win, you can play the humiliation of defeat. For this reason, the player is more likely to feel emotional about the production. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 having the configuration of the exception A, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the pachinko machine 10 is on a non-character stage and a big hit is won in a winning lottery related to a game round, the game round is regardless of whether or not a reach has occurred and the reach type when a reach has occurred. The stage was continued and the stage transition was not performed. When a big hit is won in the winning lottery, the player often wants to carry on the luck and continue the game on the same stage as the stage when the big hit is won, so the stage transition is not performed. In addition, instead of this configuration, if the player is in a non-character stage and a big hit is won in the winning lottery, the stage may be changed. For example, in the non-character stage, one stage may be transferred to another stage, or the character stage may be transferred.

<< 5-5 >> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-mentioned processing in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes will be described below. The MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal in addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, but description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

In step Sp0101, reading processing of various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main control device 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0102.

In step Sp0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0103.

In step Sp0103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, Clear each to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0104. The value of the variable type counter CS is updated in the normal processing (FIG. 225) described later.

In step Sp0104, a ball entry process for the start port accompanying the entry into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the starting port of step Sp0104 will be described later. After executing step Sp0104, the process proceeds to step Sp0105.

In step Sp0105, a ball entry process for through ball accompanying the entry into the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the through of step Sp0105 will be described later. After executing step Sp0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Incoming ball entry process for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be described. The ball entry process for the start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 221: Sp0104).

FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the starting port. In step Sp0201, whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball) is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33. If it is determined in step Sp0201 that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (Sp0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0202, and the payout control device 70 is made to pay out three game balls. Set the command. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0203.

In step Sp0203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0204.

In step Sp0204, the start hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold number RaN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra, is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The first start hold number RaN indicates the hold number based on the entry of the ball into the first start port 33. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0209.

If it is determined in step Sp0201 that the game ball has not entered the first start port 33 (Sp0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp0205 and whether or not the game ball has entered the second start port 34. Is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

If it is determined in step Sp0205 that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sp0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0206, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set the command. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp0205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (Sp0205: NO), the ball entry process for the main starting port is terminated.

In step Sp0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0208.

In step Sp0208, the start hold number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as the second start hold number RbN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb, is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on the entry of the ball into the second start port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0209.

In step Sp0209, it is determined whether or not the start hold number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sp0204 or step Sp0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step Sp0209, if the start hold number N is not less than the upper limit value (Sp0209: NO), the ball entry process for the main start port is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sp0209, if the start hold number N is less than the upper limit value (Sp0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0210, 1 is added to the start hold number N of the corresponding hold area, and then the process proceeds to step Sp0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reserved quantity CRN). The total hold quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first start hold quantity RaN and the second start hold quantity RbN. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0212.

In step Sp0212, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sp0103 (FIG. 221), and the values of the variable type counter CS updated in the normal processing (FIG. 225) described later. Is stored in the first storage area in the free storage area of the corresponding reservation area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations obtained by adding 1 in step Sp0210. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as the processing target, each value of the updated jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS is used. , The first storage area in the free storage area of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN to which 1 is added in step Sp0210. When the second start hold quantity RbN is set as the processing target, the updated jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS are set to the second value. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the hold area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step Sp0210. After executing step Sp0212, the process proceeds to step Sp0213.

In step Sp0213, the first determination process is executed. The pre-judgment process determines the winning / failing judgment result (lottery result) of the winning lottery based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS. , The determination of the type of jackpot, the determination of the presence or absence of the occurrence of reach, the determination of the fluctuation time, and the like are the processes to be executed before the pending information is the target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The details of the pre-determination process will be described later. After executing step Sp0213, the process proceeds to step Sp0214.

In step Sp0214, a process of setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the prior determination process executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS is used as a hold command. Set. The determination result of the pre-determination process includes the above-mentioned winning / failing determination result of the winning lottery (also referred to as the presence / absence of a jackpot), the type of the jackpot, the presence / absence of reach, and the fluctuation time.

The hold command determines that a ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 and the determination result (first determination information) by the advance determination process based on the hold information acquired based on the entry. This is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to confirm the hold information before it becomes the target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 225: step Sp0503) of the normal process described later.

Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the entry into the first start port 33, the voice emission control device 90 holds the display in the first start port hold area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing the number in accordance with the increase in the number is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first start port holding area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holdings. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the entry into the second start port 34 is received, the voice emission control device 90 holds the display in the second start port hold area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing the number in accordance with the increase in the number is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second start port holding area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holdings.

After executing step Sp0214, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

<First judgment process>
Next, the prior determination process will be described. The pre-determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 222: Sp0213) for the ball entry process for the start port.

FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing the prior determination process. As described above, in the prior determination process, based on the pending information, the determination results such as the winning / failing determination of the winning lottery, the determination of the type of the jackpot, and the determination of the presence / absence of the reach are determined, and the pending information is the hit by the main control device 60. This is a process to be executed before the lottery target.

In step Sp0301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting port in the ball entering process for the starting port (FIG. 222) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the determination result of the pre-judgment process executed by the previous entry before the current entry is read from the corresponding storage area, and the presence or absence of the probable change jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery by the current entry. In addition, by grasping whether or not the player has won the fall lottery, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round is determined.

If it is determined in step Sp0302 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round, the process proceeds to (Sp0302: YES), step Sp0303, and the winning / failing table is stored. Refer to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode (FIG. 209 (a)) stored in the area 63a. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0305, and as a result of referring to the hit / fail table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Sp0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round (Sp0302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp0304 and the winning / failing table is stored. Refer to the hit / miss table (FIG. 209 (b)) for the high probability mode stored in the area 63a. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0305, and as a result of referring to the hit / fail table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

In step Sp0305, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot (Sp0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0306, and the ball is stored in the storage area by entering the starting port this time. Grasp the value of the jackpot type counter C2. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0307, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2, which is the target of distribution this time, is acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33, refer to the distribution table for the first starting port. , When the ball is acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 34, the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to. After executing step Sp0307, the process proceeds to step Sp0308.

In step Sp0308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step Sp0308 that the probability variation jackpot is supported (Sp0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0309, and the probability variation jackpot information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the first determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp0308 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (Sp0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp0310, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0315, which will be described later.

If it is determined in step Sp0305 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to the jackpot (Sp0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp0311, and the ball enters the storage area this time. The value of the stored reach random number counter C3 is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0312, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp0313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

If it is determined in step Sp0313 that the reach generation is supported (Sp0313: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0314, and the reach generation information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0315. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp0313 that it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach (Sp0313: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp0315 as it is.

In step Sp0315, the fluctuation time destination determination process for determining the fluctuation time first is executed. Specifically, the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting port in the ball entering process for the starting port (FIG. 222), the winning / failing determination result of the winning lottery obtained by step Sp0315, and the winning / failing determination result of the winning lottery. Based on the determination result of the presence or absence of reach, the process of obtaining the fluctuation time is performed. In this process, the variable time is obtained by the same process as the variable time setting process (FIG. 230) described later. After executing step Sp0315, the destination determination process ends.

<Through ball entry process>
Next, the ball entry process for through will be described. The ball entry process for through is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 221: Sp0105).

FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for thru. In step Sp0401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35. If it is determined in step Sp0401 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sp0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0402, and whether the number of reserved characters SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Judge whether or not. The number of reserved items SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that is reserved for performing the electric accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved items SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sp0401: NO), the entry process for this through is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sp0402 that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the number of reserved items SN (Sp0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0403 and 1 is added to the number of reserved items SN. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0404.

In step Sp0404, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step Sp0103 (FIG. 221) is stored in the first free storage area of the electric service holding area 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the ball entry process for through is completed.

On the other hand, in step Sp0402, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is not less than the upper limit value (Sp0402: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is equal to or more than the upper limit value, The ball entry process for through is completed without storing the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter, also referred to as “power on”). In the normal process, the main process of the game is executed.

FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sp0501, the startup process is executed. Specifically, the initial setting of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0502.

In step Sp0502, a start-up command is set. The start-up command is a command for starting a demo movie for each control device on the sub side when the power is turned on. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0503.

In step Sp0503, output data such as a start-up command set in step Sp0502 and a command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. If commands related to effects such as start-up commands, variable commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After executing step Sp0503, the process proceeds to step Sp0504.

In step Sp0504, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variable type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0505.

In step Sp0505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sp0506. In step Sp0506, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of a symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display unit 37a, the second symbol display unit 37b, and the like are performed. The details of the game times control process will be described later. After executing step Sp0506, the process proceeds to step Sp0507.

In step Sp0507, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. The details of the game state transition process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0508.

In step Sp0508, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is in the open state. The details of the processing for electric service support will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0509.

In step Sp0509, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal process (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process in step Sp0503). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached. If it is determined in step Sp0509 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal process (Sp0509: NO), in step Sp0510 and step Sp0511 until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached. Within the remaining time of, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sp0510, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Sp0511, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp0509 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the current normal process (Sp0509: YES), the process returns to step Sp0503 and each process from step Sp0503 to step Sp0508 is performed. Run.

Since the execution time of each process from step Sp0503 to step Sp0508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process will be described. The game times control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 225: Sp0506) of the normal process.

FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the game times control process. In step Sp0601, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The open / close execution mode flag is turned on when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is turned off when the open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process.

If it is determined in step Sp0601 that the open / close execution mode is in progress (Sp0601: YES), the game round control process ends without executing any of the processes after step Sp0602. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the game round is not started regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp0601 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (Sp0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp0602.

In step Sp0602, it is determined whether or not the special figure unit 37 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b provided in the special symbol unit 37 is in variable display. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the special map variation display flag in the special map variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special symbol variation display flag is turned on when starting the variation display for either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, and is turned off when the variation display ends.

If it is determined in step Sp0602 that the special figure unit 37 is not displaying the fluctuation (Sp0602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp0603.

In step Sp0603, the fluctuation start processing for starting the fluctuation display in the special figure unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start processing will be described later. After executing step Sp0603, the game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp0602 that the special figure unit 37 is in the variable display (Sp0602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0604.

In step Sp0604, the variation end processing for terminating the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the variable end processing will be described later. After executing step Sp0604, the game round control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described. The variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 226: Sp0603) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. In step Sp0701, it is determined whether or not the total reserved quantity CRN exceeds "0". When the total reserved quantity CRN is "0" or less, it means that the starting reserved quantity is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Therefore, if it is determined in step Sp0701 that the total number of reserved pieces CRN is "0" or less (Sp0701: NO), the fluctuation start process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp0701 that the total number of reserved pieces CRN exceeds "0" (Sp0701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0702.

In step Sp0702, the hold information shift process for setting the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sp0703. The details of the hold information shift process will be described later.

In step Sp0703, a hit determination process including a process when a big hit is won in the hit lottery is performed. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Sp0703, the process proceeds to step Sp0704.

In step Sp0704, the variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is to set the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, based on the presence / absence of a big hit, the presence / absence of reach, and the like. It is the processing of. The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sp0704, the process proceeds to step Sp0705.

In step Sp0705, a variable command is set. The variable command is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33, or is acquired based on the entry into the second starting opening 34. It contains information indicating whether or not the information is on hold, information on whether or not reach has occurred, and information on the fluctuation time set in step Sp0706. After executing step Sp0705, the process proceeds to step Sp0706.

In step Sp0706, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence / absence of a big hit and the result of the distribution determination. That is, the type command includes 16R probability variation jackpot information, 8R probability variation jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or loss result information about the winning lottery as the jackpot type information. It has been.

The variable command and the type command set in step Sp0705 and step Sp0706 are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by step Sp0503 in the normal process (FIG. 225). The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variable command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step Sp0706, the process proceeds to step Sp0707.

In step Sp0707, among the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is started to display the variation of the symbol. Specifically, when the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is specified to be the first symbol display unit 37a, and the variable display is started. When the second symbol display unit flag is ON, it is specified that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is the second symbol display unit 37b, and the variable display is started. After executing step Sp0707, the process proceeds to step Sp0708.

In step Sp0708, the special figure change display flag stored in the special figure change display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sp0708, this fluctuation start process ends.

<Hold information shift processing>
Next, the hold information shift process will be described. The hold information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 227: Sp0702).

FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the hold information shift process. In step Sp0801, it is determined whether or not the hold area to be processed for executing the hold information shift process is the first hold area Ra. Specifically, among the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 208) in time series, the hold information stored first (hold stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra). Information) is stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb (information), which is the earliest hold information stored in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 208) in time series. If it is stored in the hold area before the hold information), it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra. On the other hand, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb in time series is earlier than the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra in time series. If the stored hold information is stored in the hold area first, it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the second hold area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sp0801, the reserved information can be processed in the order stored in the first reserved area Ra or the second reserved area Rb.

If it is determined in step Sp0801 that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra (step Sp0801: YES), the hold information shift process for the first hold area in steps Sp0802 to Step Sp0807 is executed. On the other hand, in step Sp0801, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (step Sp0801: NO). ), The hold information shift process for the second hold area of step Sp0808 to step Sp0813 is executed.

In step Sp0802, after subtracting 1 from the first start hold quantity RaN in the first hold area Ra, the process proceeds to step Sp0803 and the total hold quantity CRN is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0804. In step Sp0804, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0805.

In step Sp0805, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step Sp0805, the process proceeds to step Sp0806.

In step Sp0806, when the second symbol display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second symbol display unit flag is information for specifying whether the target for starting the variation display this time is the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0807.

In step Sp0807, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the first hold area Ra, that is, corresponding to the first start port 33. A shift command including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the pending information shift process is terminated. The shift command set in step Sp0807 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Sp0503 in the normal process (FIG. 225).

In step Sp0801, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (Sp0801: NO), the step. Proceed to Sp0808.

In step Sp0808, the second start hold quantity RbN of the second hold area Rb is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0809. In step Sp0809, the total number of reserved pieces CRN is subtracted by 1, the process proceeds to step Sp0810, and the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0811.

In step Sp0811, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reserved area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step Sp0811, the process proceeds to step Sp0812.

In step Sp0812, if the second symbol display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0813.

In step Sp0813, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, the information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the second hold area Rb, that is, corresponding to the second start port 34. A shift command including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the pending information shift process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sp0813 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Sp0503 in the normal process (FIG. 225). The voice emission control device 90 sets a command for changing the display in the second start port hold area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command. Send to 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second start port holding area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holdings.

<Collision detection processing>
Next, the hit determination process will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 227: Sp0703).

FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the hit determination process. In step Sp0901, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sp0901 that the mode is in the high probability mode (Sp0901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0902, and the pass / fail determination is made with reference to the pass / fail table for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 209 (b). Is determined. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0904.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp0901 that the mode is not in the high probability mode (Sp0901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp0903, and the pass / fail determination is made with reference to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 209 (a). Is determined. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0904.

In step Sp0904, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination (winning lottery) in step Sp0902 or step Sp0903 is a big hit winning. In step Sp0904, if the result of the winning / failing determination is a big hit (Sp0904: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0905.

In step Sp0905, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sp0905 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (Sp0905: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp0906, and the distribution table for the first starting port (see FIG. 210 (a)) is referred to. Then, the distribution is determined. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of 16R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. Determine if it is included in.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp0905 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (Sp0905: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0907, and the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 210 (b)). The distribution is determined with reference to. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 16R probability variation jackpot or the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. After executing the process of step Sp0906 or step Sp0907, the process proceeds to step Sp0908.

In step Sp0908, the flag (big hit flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sp0906 or step Sp0907 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, turn on the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, if it is an 8R probability variation jackpot, turn on the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, and if it is a 16R normal jackpot, turn on the 16R normal jackpot flag. Turn it on, and if it is an 8R normal jackpot, turn on the 8R normal jackpot flag. After executing step Sp0908, the process proceeds to step Sp0909.

In step Sp0909, a process of setting a stop result for a big hit is executed. Specifically, in this game round in which a big hit is won, it is set which stop result is displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to end the variable display. It is a process to do. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63f (FIG. 207), the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot distributed in step Sp0906 or step Sp0907 can be obtained. The address information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sp0909, the hit determination process ends.

In step Sp0904, if the result of the winning lottery in step Sp0902 or step Sp0903 is not a big hit (Sp0904: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp0910, and the reach determination table is referred to to see if a reach occurs in the game round. Judge whether or not. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is set as the reach occurrence in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 207). Determine if it matches the value you have. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp0911.

In step Sp0911, if the result of the reach determination in step Sp0910 is that reach occurs in the game round (Sp0911: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp0912 and the reach generation flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach generation flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sp0912, the process proceeds to step Sp0913.

On the other hand, in step Sp0911, if the result of the reach determination in step Sp0910 is that reach does not occur in the game round (Sp0911: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp0913 without executing step Sp0912.

In step Sp0913, a process of setting a stop result for disconnection is executed. Specifically, in this game round, which is the result of the deviation, the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b is used to set which stop result is displayed to end the variable display. It is a process. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for deviation in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. , The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sp0913, the hit determination process ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 227: Sp0704).

FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation time setting process. In step Sp1001, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer 64a in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is grasped. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp1002.

In step Sp1002, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is a big hit winning. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and any of the flags is ON. In some cases, it is assumed that the jackpot is won (Sp1002: YES), and the process proceeds to step Sp1003.

In step Sp1003, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the jackpot fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp1004, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

In step Sp1002, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is not a big hit (Sp1002: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1005, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs in this game round. do. Since this process (Sp1005) is executed when the big hit is not won in the winning lottery related to the current game in step Sp1002, in step Sp1005, the reach (reach) among the game times in which the big hit is not won in the winning lottery. It is determined whether or not the game is a game in which a so-called off-reach) occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach generation flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON, and if it is ON, reach is generated (Sp1005: YES), and step Sp1006. Proceed to.

In step Sp1006, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation / loss variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp1004 described above, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sp1005 that reach does not occur in the current game round (Sp1005: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1007, and the variation time table storage area 63d is stored in the variation time table storage area 63d. Refer to, and acquire the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp1004 described above, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

<Variation end processing>
Next, the variable end processing will be described. The variation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 226: Sp0604) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing the variation end processing. In step Sp1101, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the fluctuation time is the time from the start of fluctuation of the symbol row to the stop of all the symbol rows, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sp1101, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 is "0". The value of the fluctuation time information is set in the above-mentioned fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 230). The value of the set fluctuation time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started.

If it is determined in step Sp1101 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sp1101: NO), the fluctuation end processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sp1101 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (Sp1101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1102, which corresponds to the current game times among the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. Performs processing to end the fluctuation of the symbol in the symbol display unit. Subsequent step Sp1103 turns off the special figure change display flag stored in the special figure change display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64 g of the RAM 64. After executing step Sp1103, the process proceeds to step Sp1104.

In step Sp1104, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is a big hit winning. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sp1104 that none of the above flags is ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery related to the current game round is not a big hit winning (Sp1104: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1105.

In step Sp1105, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sp1105 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Sp1105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1106, and it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter PNC exceeds 0. If it is determined in step Sp1106 that the value of the game count counter PNC exceeds 0 (Sp1106: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1107, and the value of the game count counter PNC is decremented by 1. After executing step Sp1107, the process proceeds to step Sp1108. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp1106 that the value of the game count counter PNC is 0 or less (Sp1106: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1108 without executing step Sp1107.

In step Sp1108, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sp1108 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Sp1108: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1109, and it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter PNC exceeds 0.

If it is determined in step Sp1109 that the value of the game count counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sp1109: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1110 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After executing step Sp1110, the variable time end processing is terminated.

When it is determined in step Sp1108 that the high probability mode flag is ON (Sp1108: YES), or when it is determined in step Sp1109 that the value of the game count counter PNC exceeds 0 (step Sp1109: YES). , This variable time end processing is terminated without executing step Sp1110. Further, when it is determined in step Sp1105 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sp1105: NO), the variable time end processing is terminated without executing steps Sp1106 to Step1110.

On the other hand, in step Sp1104, any one of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag is ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is If it is determined that the jackpot is won (Sp1104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp111, and the open / close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sp1111, the variable time end processing is terminated.

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 225: Sp0507) of the normal process.

FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step Sp1201, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the large winning opening opening / closing processing period (at the beginning of the ending period) in the opening / closing execution mode, and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the open / close execution mode.

If it is determined in step Sp1201 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sp1201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1202, and it is determined whether or not the open / close processing period flag is ON. The opening / closing processing period flag is turned on at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening / closing execution mode and the large winning opening opening / closing processing period, which is the period during which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed, is started. , It is turned off at the timing when the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 36b is completed.

If it is determined in step Sp1202 that the open / close processing period flag is not ON (Sp1202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1203, and it is determined whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the beginning of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Sp1203 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sp1203: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1204, and it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sp1204 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (Sp1204: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1205. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp1204 that the open / close execution mode flag is OFF (Sp1204: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

In step Sp1205, the high probability mode flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp1206. In step Sp1206, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp1207.

In step Sp1207, an opening / closing scenario setting process for setting an opening / closing scenario is executed. The opening / closing scenario defines a pattern of opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 36b in the round game. In this embodiment, the condition for shifting the opening / closing door 36b from the closed state to the open state (hereinafter, also referred to as “opening condition”) This is a program in which the condition for shifting the opening / closing door 36b from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter, also referred to as “closed condition”) is recorded. The opening / closing scenario is stored in the opening / closing scenario storage area 63h (FIG. 207) of the ROM 63.

The opening conditions are as follows, for example.
-The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing to start each round game in the open / close execution mode.
When the above one item is satisfied, the opening / closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

The closing conditions are as follows, for example.
-The elapsed time from the start of each round game exceeds the predetermined upper limit duration (for example, 15 seconds).
-The number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening 36a after starting each round game exceeds the predetermined maximum number.
When either of the above two items is satisfied, the opening / closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

After executing step Sp1207, the process proceeds to step Sp1208 described above.

In step Sp1208, the opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period (hereinafter, also referred to as an opening time) in the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, the same constant length of opening time is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sp1208, the process proceeds to step Sp1209.

In step Sp1209, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Sp0503 in the normal process (FIG. 225). This opening command contains information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current open / close execution mode. The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the large winning opening opening / closing processing period based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step Sp1209, the process proceeds to step Sp1210, and the opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sp1203 that the opening period flag is ON (Sp1203: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1211.

In step Sp1211, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Sp1211 that the opening period has ended (Sp1211: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1212 and the opening period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp1213.

In step Sp1213, a round display start process for notifying the type of the opening / closing execution mode this time is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the above address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is specified from the specified stop result data. Confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round display unit 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step Sp1213, the process proceeds to step Sp1214.

In step Sp1214, the open / close processing period flag is turned ON. In the following step Sp1215, an open / close process start command is set. The open / close process start command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the open / close process period has started. The open / close process start command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 225: step Sp0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sp1215, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sp1202 that the open / close processing period flag is ON (Sp1202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1216 to execute the large winning opening opening / closing process. The process of opening and closing the large winning opening will be described later. After executing step Sp1216, the process proceeds to step Sp1217.

In step Sp1217, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed depending on whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened is "0". do. If it is determined in step Sp1217 that the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed (Sp1217: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1218. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp1217 that the large winning opening opening / closing process has not been completed (Sp1217: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

In step Sp1218, the open / close processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Sp1219.

In step Sp1219, the round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is terminated so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step Sp1219, the process proceeds to step Sp1220.

In step Sp1220, the ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the ending period (hereinafter, also referred to as an ending time) in the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set in each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sp1220, the process proceeds to step Sp1221.

In step Sp1221, the ending command is set. This set ending command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Sp0503 in the normal process (FIG. 225). The voice emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on the reception of the ending command. After executing step Sp1221, the process proceeds to step Sp1222.

In step Sp1222, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sp1201 that the ending period flag is ON (Sp1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1223.

In step Sp1223, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sp1220), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step Sp1220 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Sp1223: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1224.

In step Sp1224, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp1225, and the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of the game times after the end of the current ending period. Details of the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sp1225, the process proceeds to step Sp1226 to turn off the open / close execution mode flag. After executing step Sp1226, the process proceeds to step Sp1227.

In step Sp1227, it is determined whether or not the total reserved quantity CRN is "0". When the total reserved quantity CRN is "0", it means that the starting reserved quantity is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. If it is determined in step Sp1227 that the total number of reserved pieces CRN is "0" (Sp1227: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1228.

In step Sp1228, a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command is for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that no hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 64b at the time when the symbol change (game round) is completed. It is a command that contains the information of. This set customer waiting command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by step Sp0503 in the normal process (FIG. 225). After executing step Sp1228, the game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp1227 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (Sp1227: NO), the game round control process is terminated as it is. If it is determined in step Sp1223 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Sp1223: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

<Large winning opening opening / closing process>
Next, the process of opening and closing the large winning opening will be described. The large winning opening opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 232: Sp1216) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the opening / closing process of the large winning opening. In step Sp1301, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning driving unit 36c. If it is determined in step Sp1301 that the opening / closing door 36b is not open (Sp1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1302.

In step Sp1302, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening / closing scenario set by the opening / closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the opening / closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sp1302 that the opening condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied (Sp1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1303.

In step Sp1303, the opening / closing door 36b is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp1304.

In step Sp1304, an open / close door open command is set. The opening / closing door opening command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the opening / closing door 36b has been opened. The open / close door open command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 225: step Sp0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sp1304, the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed.

If it is determined in step Sp1302 that the opening condition of the opening / closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sp1302: NO), the large winning opening opening / closing process is terminated without executing steps Sp1303 and step Sp1304.

If it is determined in step Sp1301 that the opening / closing door 36b is being opened (Sp1301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1305.

In step Sp1305, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening / closing scenario set by the opening / closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the opening / closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sp1305 that the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied (Sp1305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1306.

In step Sp1306, the opening / closing door 36b is closed. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp1307.

In step Sp1307, an open / close door closing command is set. The opening / closing door closing command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the opening / closing door 36b has been closed. The opening / closing door closing command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 225: step Sp0503) of the normal processing. After executing step Sp1307, the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed.

If it is determined in step Sp1305 that the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sp1305: NO), the large winning opening opening / closing process is terminated without executing steps Sp1306 and Step1307.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 232: Sp1225) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of the ending period. In step Sp1401, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probabilistic jackpot is turned ON in the jackpot flag. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sp1401 that the 16R probability variation jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON (Sp1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1402, and among the 16R probability variation jackpot flag and the 8R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64. Turn off the flag that is ON. After executing step Sp1402, the process proceeds to step Sp1403.

In step Sp1403, the high probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step Sp1404, and the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after ending the open / close execution mode, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp1405.

In step Sp1405, 100 is set in the game count counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. The value set in the game count counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp1406.

In step Sp1406, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. .. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp1411.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp1401 that the 16R probability variation jackpot flag and the 8R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 are not ON (Sp1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1407 and the 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp1408.

In step Sp1408, after turning on the high frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step Sp1409, and 100 is set in the game count counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp1410.

In step Sp1410, a low-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub-side to recognize that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. .. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp1411.

In step Sp1411, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is used as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Set. After that, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electric service support>
Next, the processing for electric service support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 225: Sp0508) of the normal process.

FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the electric service support process. In step Sp1501, it is determined whether or not the support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The supporting flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened and turned off when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sp1501 that the supporting flag is not ON (Sp1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1502.

In step Sp1502, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned on when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is ON. Is. If it is determined in step Sp1502 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sp1502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1503.

In step Sp1503, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f (FIG. 207) of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal diagram unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

If it is determined in step Sp1503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sp1503: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sp1503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1504.

In step Sp1504, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuation display of the symbol in the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step Sp1504 that it is the end timing of the variable display (Sp1504: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1505, the off display is set, and then the main electric service support process is terminated. By setting the off display, the variable display of the symbol in the normal figure unit 38 is terminated in the state where the off display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp1504 that it is not the end timing of the variation display (Sp1504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1506.

In step Sp1506, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0". If it is determined in step Sp1506 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is "0" (Sp1506: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp1506 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0" (Sp1506: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1507.

In step Sp1507, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step Sp1508 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If the mode is not the open / close execution mode in step Sp1507 (Sp1507: NO) and the high frequency support mode is in step Sp1508 (Sp1508: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1509 and the electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp1510.

In step Sp1510, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sp1509 is the support winning. If it is determined in step Sp1510 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is the support winning (Sp1510: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1511, the support winning flag is turned ON, and the counter area 64f of the RAM 64 is provided. Set "3" in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. After that, the processing for electric service support is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp1510 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not the support winning (Sp1510: NO), the electric service support process is terminated without executing the process of step Sp1511.

If it is determined in step Sp1507 that the open / close execution mode is set (Sp1507: YES), or if it is determined in step Sp1508 that the mode is not in the high frequency support mode (Sp1508: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1512 and the motorized accessory opening lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp1513.

In step Sp1513, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sp1512 is the support winning. If it is determined in step Sp1513 that the support is not won (Sp1513: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp1513 that the support is won (Sp1513: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1514, the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , End the processing for main electric service support.

If it is determined in step Sp1502 that the support winning flag is ON (Sp1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1515, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step Sp1515 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sp1515: NO), the pattern variation is being displayed in the normal drawing unit 38, so that the main electric service support process is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp1515 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sp1515: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1516.

In step Sp1516, the hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the pattern in the normal drawing unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped and displayed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp1517, the supporting flag is turned ON, and the support winning flag is turned OFF. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sp1501 that the supporting flag is ON (Sp1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1518, and an electric function opening / closing control process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

<Electrical function opening / closing control processing>
Next, the electric function opening / closing control process will be described. The electric service opening / closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 235: Sp1518) of the electric service support process.

FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing the electric function opening / closing control process. In step Sp1601, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in the driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (Sp1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1602.

In step Sp1602, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sp1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sp1602: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. That is, if the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the main electric accessory opening / closing control process ends.

If it is determined in step Sp1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sp1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1603, and a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state is performed. “250” (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sp1603, the process proceeds to step Sp1604.

In step Sp1604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step Sp1605, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step Sp1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sp1605: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Sp1605: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1606 and the supporting flag is turned off. After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sp1601 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sp1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1607, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sp1607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sp1607: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp1607 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sp1607: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1608, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state is executed. .. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp1609.

In step Sp1609, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and if it is determined that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (Sp1609: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1610 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step Sp1610 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (Sp1610: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1611, and "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp1609 that the open / close execution mode is set (Sp1609: YES), or if it is determined in step Sp1610 that the mode is not in the high frequency support mode (Sp1610: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp1612 and the second step is performed. The timer counter area T2 is set to "100" (that is, 0.2 sec). After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

<< 5-6 >> Various processes executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device will be described. The process executed by the voice emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed with a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described.

In step Sp1701, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound / light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main MPU 62, and the commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Read sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step Sp1701, the process proceeds to step Sp1702.

In step Sp1702, the pending command correspondence process is executed. In the hold command correspondence process, the process corresponding to the hold command among the commands stored in step Sp1701 is performed. The details of the pending command support processing will be described later. After executing step Sp1702, the process proceeds to step Sp1703.

In step Sp1703, the game rotation effect setting process is executed. In the game time effect setting process, the effect to be executed in the game time from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the symbol is set. The details of the game time production setting process will be described later. After executing step Sp1703, the process proceeds to step Sp1704.

In step Sp1704, the opening / closing execution mode effect processing is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode production processing, processing related to the production in the opening period, the production in the large winning opening opening / closing processing period, and the production in the ending period is performed. After executing step Sp1704, the process proceeds to step Sp1705.

In step Sp1705, a stage effect process is executed. In the stage effect processing, a process for displaying the screen effect corresponding to the stage described above is performed. The details of the stage production process will be described later. After executing step Sp1705, the process proceeds to step Sp1706.

In step Sp1706, the background effect processing is executed. In the background effect processing, a process of displaying a background moving image determined according to a command indicating a game state received from the main MPU 62 on the symbol display device 41 is performed. For example, processing is performed to display a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode is ongoing, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that the high-probability mode is continuing. .. After executing step Sp1706, the process proceeds to step Sp1707.

In step Sp1707, other processing is executed. The other processing is a process of displaying a demo image (moving image) on the symbol display device 41 when the game is not performed by the player. After executing step Sp1707, the process proceeds to step Sp1708.

In step Sp1708, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the above-mentioned effect processing. After executing step Sp1708, the process proceeds to step Sp1709.

In step Sp1709, the audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read in the above-mentioned BGM process and each effect process. After executing step Sp1709, this timer interrupt process ends.

<Processing for pending commands>
Next, the pending command correspondence process will be described. The hold command correspondence process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 237: Sp1702).

FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing the pending command correspondence process. In step Sp1801, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sp1801 that the hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sp1801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1802.

In step Sp1802, the hold command received this time is read, and the hold information is read from the hold command. The pending information includes information on the presence / absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence / absence of a reach, and the fluctuation time. Then, the read hold information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. As the hold information, information for a maximum of four pieces, which is the number of holds for the first start port 33, and information for a maximum of four pieces, which is the number of pieces held for the second start port 34, are updated and stored. After executing step Sp1802, the process proceeds to step Sp1803.

In step Sp1803, the update process at the time of entering the ball is executed. In the update process at the time of entering the ball, the number of hold information acquired based on the entry into the first start port 33, the number of hold information acquired based on the entry into the second start port 34, and the number of hold information acquired. A process for making the total number of these reserved information identifiable in the sound light side MPU 92 is executed. The details of the update process at the time of entering the ball in step Sp1803 will be described later. In the following, the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33 is also referred to as the "first reserved number", and the reserved information acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 34. The number is also referred to as a "second hold quantity", and the total number of the first hold quantity and the second hold quantity is also referred to as a "total hold quantity". After executing step Sp1803, the process proceeds to step Sp1804.

In step Sp1804, the hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the display (hold display icon) in the first start port hold area Ds1 and the second start port hold area Ds2 corresponding to the first hold number and the second hold number specified in step Sp1803. A command for changing the display (display such as how many are lined up) is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 makes the display in the first start port hold area Ds1 and the second start port hold area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 correspond to the first hold number and the second hold number. change. Specifically, the display control device 100 that has received the command defines the display position of the hold display icon in the first start port hold area Ds1, and displays the number of icons corresponding to the first hold number. Display at the position. Further, the display control device 100 defines the display position of the hold display icon in the second start port hold area Ds2, and displays the number of icons corresponding to the second hold number at the display position. After executing step Sp1804, the pending command correspondence process ends.

<Update process at the time of entry>
Next, the update process at the time of entering the ball will be described. The update process at the time of entering the ball is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 238: Sp1803) of the hold command corresponding process.

FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing the update process at the time of entering the ball. In step Sp1901, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the entry into the first starting port 33. If it is determined in step Sp1901 that the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the entry into the first starting port 33 (Sp1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp1902 and the sound is produced. The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the optical side RAM 94 is executed. The first reserved quantity counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33 in the sound light side MPU 92. In the update process of the first hold quantity counter area, the information of the first hold count counter area is updated to the information of the hold count included in the hold command to be read this time. After executing step Sp1902, the process proceeds to step Sp1904.

In step Sp1901, when it is determined that the hold command to be read this time is not transmitted based on the entry into the first start port 33 (Sp1901: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start. If it is determined that the ball was transmitted based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process proceeds to step Sp1903 to update the second reserved number counter area provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94. Run. The second reserved quantity counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 34 in the sound light side MPU 92. In the second hold quantity counter area update process, the information in the second hold count counter area is updated to the hold count information included in the command to be read this time. After executing step Sp1903, the process proceeds to step Sp1904.

The reason why the processing of step Sp1902 and step Sp1903 is performed as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while the backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the voice emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, if the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information relating to the entry into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the hold information is held in the main control device 60. Is stored and retained, whereas the voice emission control device 90 grasps that the number of reserved information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first hold quantity counter area or the second hold count counter area is counted up each time the voice emission control device 90 receives a hold command, the main control device 60 actually holds the hold storage. There may be an inconvenience that the number of reserved information stored and the number of reserved information grasped by the voice emission control device 90 do not match. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment described above, the main control device 60 transmits the hold command including the information on the number of holds, and the voice emission control device 90 sends the hold command to the command each time the hold command is received. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the number of reserved pieces included is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

In step Sp1904, the update process of the total reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94 is executed. The total number of hold counter areas is the sum of the number of hold information acquired based on the entry into the first start port 33 and the number of hold information acquired based on the entry into the second start port 34. It is a counter area for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92. In the update process, the information of the total reserved quantity counter area is the sum of the information of the reserved quantity measured in the first reserved quantity counter area and the information of the reserved quantity measured in the second reserved quantity counter area. Update to. After executing step Sp1904, the update process at the time of the main ball entry is terminated.

<Game times production setting process>
Next, the game rotation effect setting process will be described. The game rotation effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 237: Sp1703).

FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing a game rotation effect setting process. In step Sp2001, it is determined whether or not the variation command and the type command have been received. If it is determined in step Sp2001 that at least one of the variable command and the type command has not been received (Sp2001: NO), the game round effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp2001 that the variable command and the type command have been received (Sp20011: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp2002.

In step Sp2002, the fluctuation command received this time is read, and information on the presence / absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence / absence of reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time is read from the command. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp2003.

In step Sp2003, an effect pattern setting process for setting an effect pattern to be executed in a game round such as a big hit or a reach is executed. The details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sp2003, the process proceeds to step Sp2004.

In step Sp2004, the stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, when the result of the winning lottery of this game round is 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, or 8R normal jackpot, it is on the effective line L of the symbol display device 41. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established is set as the information of the stop symbol this time. Specifically, when the result of the winning lottery of this game round is a 16R probability variation jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot, the same odd-numbered symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, and the same. A combination of even symbols can be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, this selectivity is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the same combination of even-numbered symbols, but instead, the former is selected over the latter. The configuration may have a high rate, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot. Further, when the result of the winning lottery of this game round is a 16R normal jackpot or an 8R normal jackpot, the same even-numbered symbol combination is selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the winning lottery for this game round is a deviation result, it is determined whether or not reach has occurred from the content of the variable command. When it is determined that the reach is generated, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L, and the stop result is that the combination of the reach symbols is established on the effective line L. The information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach generation is not supported, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L, and the stop result is that the combination of reach symbols is not established on the effective line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the stop symbol of this time. After executing step Sp2004, the process proceeds to step Sp2005.

In step Sp2005, a process for setting a variation display pattern of the current game times is executed. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the current game is specified from the content of the fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information on the stop symbol set in the above step Sp2004 are combined. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b (FIG. 213) of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp2006.

In step Sp2006, information on the effect pattern, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern set in this game round is set in the effect command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp2007, and the effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect content corresponding to the received effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step Sp2007, the process proceeds to step Sp2008.

In step Sp2008, the update process at the start of fluctuation is executed. In the update process at the start of fluctuation, a process of reducing the number of first hold or the number of second hold by 1 at the start of change is performed. The details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later. After executing step Sp2008, the process proceeds to step Sp2009.

In step Sp2009, the hold display control process is executed. The hold display control process performs the same process as the hold display control process executed in step Sp1803 of the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 238). Specifically, the display (hold display icon) in the first start port hold area Ds1 and the second start port hold area Ds2 corresponding to the first hold number and the second hold number specified in step Sp2008. A command for changing the display (display such as how many are lined up) is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 makes the display in the first start port hold area Ds1 and the second start port hold area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 correspond to the first hold number and the second hold number. change. After executing step Sp2009, the game round effect setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 240: Sp2003) of the game turn effect setting process.

FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process. In step Sp2101, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is a big hit winning. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery is the jackpot winning from the information on the presence or absence of the jackpot stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 by the step Sp2002 of the game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 240). .. If it is determined in step Sp2101 that the result of the winning lottery is a big hit winning (Sp2101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp2102.

In step Sp2102, the effect pattern setting process for big hits is executed. The effect pattern setting process for a big hit is a process of setting to execute an effect pattern for an effect indicating that a big hit has been won in the winning lottery related to this game round. The effect pattern setting process for big hits will be described later. After executing step Sp2102, the present effect pattern setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sp2101 that the jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery of this game round (Sp2101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2103.

In step Sp2103, it is determined whether or not reach has occurred in this game round. This determination is made using the information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence grasped by step Sp2001 in FIG. 240. If it is determined in step Sp2103 that reach has occurred in this game round (Sp2103: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp2104.

In step Sp2104, the effect pattern setting process for when reach occurs / misses is executed. As for the effect pattern for when reach occurs / misses, the effect pattern for the effect indicating that various types of reach have been achieved in the game times in which reach occurs among the game times in which the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery is executed. This is the process to set to. The effect pattern setting process for when reach occurs / misses will be described later. After executing step Sp2104, the present effect pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp2103 that reach has not occurred in the current game round (Sp2103: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2105, and the effect pattern setting process for non-reach occurrence / disengagement is executed. The effect pattern for non-reach occurrence / loss is a process of setting to execute an effect when the game times in which the big hit is not won in the winning lottery and the reach does not occur. The effect pattern setting process for non-reach occurrence / disconnection will be described later. After executing step Sp2105, the present effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process for big hits>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for big hits will be described. The effect pattern setting process for a big hit is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 241: Sp2102) of the effect pattern setting process. The jackpot effect pattern setting process determines the type of reach and sets the effect pattern for the jackpot according to the type of reach. Hereinafter, the effect pattern setting process for a big hit will be described in detail.

FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process for a big hit. In step Sp2201, the reach distribution table for big hits is referred to. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores a reach distribution table for big hits and a reach distribution table for when reach occurs / misses in the reach distribution table storage area 93c (FIG. 213) of the sound / light side ROM 93. is doing.

FIG. 243 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the reach distribution table. FIG. 243 (a) shows a reach distribution table for big hits, and FIG. 243 (b) shows a reach distribution table for when reach occurs / misses. In each reach distribution table, normal reach, super reach, and special reach are set as distribution results.

As shown in FIG. 243 (a), the reach distribution table for big hits shows the correspondence between the fluctuation time and the type of reach (normal reach, super reach, special reach). As described above, the variable time at the time of big hit (when the big hit is won in the winning lottery) set by the variable time setting process (FIG. 230) executed by the main MPU 62 is based on the type of reach. It has become. The correspondence between this fluctuation time and the reach type is stored in the reach distribution table for big hits. Specifically, the case where the fluctuation time is 35 seconds corresponds to the normal reach, the case where the fluctuation time is 65 seconds corresponds to the super reach, and the case where the fluctuation time is 125 seconds corresponds to the special reach. It corresponds.

As shown in FIG. 243 (b), the reach distribution table for when reach occurs / misses shows the correspondence between the fluctuation time and the type of reach (normal reach, super reach, special reach). As described above, the fluctuation time at the time of reach occurrence / loss (when the big hit is not won in the winning lottery and the reach occurs) set by the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 230) executed by the main MPU 62. Is according to the type of reach. The correspondence between this fluctuation time and the type of reach is stored in the reach distribution table for when reach occurs / misses. Specifically, the case where the fluctuation time is 30 seconds corresponds to the normal reach, the case where the fluctuation time is 60 seconds corresponds to the super reach, and the case where the fluctuation time is 120 seconds corresponds to the special reach. It corresponds.

In step Sp2201 of FIG. 242, the reach distribution table for big hits shown in FIG. 243 (a) is read out from the reach distribution table storage area 93c and referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp2202, and as a result of referring to the reach distribution table for when reach occurs / misses in step Sp2201, the fluctuation stored in the register of the sound / light side MPU 92 by step Sp2002 of the game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 240). Determine if the time information corresponds to normal reach.

If it is determined in step Sp2202 that it corresponds to normal reach (Sp2202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp2203.

In step Sp2203, referring to the effect pattern table for normal reach / jackpot time stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 213) of the sound light side ROM 93, step Sp2002 of the game round effect setting process (FIG. 240). Acquires an effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. The effect pattern table for normal reach / jackpot is a table of effect patterns that suggests that normal reach has occurred and that the jackpot has been won. After executing step Sp2203, the process proceeds to step Sp2204.

In step Sp2204, the effect pattern acquired in step Sp2203 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After the execution of step Sp2204, the effect pattern setting process for this big hit is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp2202 that the normal reach is not supported (Sp2202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2205, and as a result of referring to the reach distribution table for big hits in step Sp2201, the game round effect setting process is performed. It is determined in step Sp2002 of FIG. 240 whether or not the fluctuation time information stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 corresponds to super reach.

If it is determined in step Sp2205 that it corresponds to super reach (Sp2205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp2206.

In step Sp2206, referring to the effect pattern table for super reach / jackpot time stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 213) of the sound light side ROM 93, step Sp2002 of the game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 240). Acquires an effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. The production pattern table for super reach / big hit is a table of production patterns that suggests that super reach has occurred and that the big hit has been won. This effect pattern is the same as the effect pattern acquired by the effect pattern table reference process for super reach / out of time, which will be described later, and the part indicating that super reach has occurred is the same, suggesting the result of the winning lottery. The part to be done is different. Therefore, more specific processing contents will be described in the super reach / out-of-action effect pattern table reference processing. After executing step Sp2206, the process proceeds to step Sp2204 described above, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sp2206 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in this game.

If it is determined in step Sp2205 that the super reach is not supported (Sp2205: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2207. If it is determined in step Sp2205 that it does not correspond to super reach, it means that the result of referring to the reach distribution table for big hits in step Sp2201 is a special reach. In this case, step Sp2207 Proceed to.

In step Sp2207, the step of the game round effect setting process (FIG. 240) with reference to the effect pattern table for special reach / jackpot time stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 213) of the sound light side ROM 93. The effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 by Sp2002 is acquired. The special reach / jackpot production pattern table is a production pattern table that suggests that a special reach has occurred and that the jackpot has been won. This effect pattern is the same as the effect pattern obtained by the special reach / out-of-order effect pattern table reference processing described later, and the part indicating that the special reach has occurred is the same, suggesting the result of the winning lottery. The part to be done is different. Therefore, more specific processing contents will be described in the special reach / removal effect pattern table reference processing. After executing step Sp2207, the process proceeds to step Sp2204 described above, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sp2207 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in this game.

<Production pattern setting process for reach occurrence / detachment>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for when reach occurs / misses will be described. The effect pattern setting process for reach generation / disconnection is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 241: Sp2105) of the effect pattern setting process. Similar to the effect pattern setting process for big hits, the effect pattern setting process for reach occurrence / loss determines the type of reach and sets the effect pattern for reach generation / disconnection according to the type of reach. It is something to do. Hereinafter, the effect pattern setting process for when reach occurs / misses will be described in detail.

FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process for when reach occurs / misses. In step Sp2301, the reach distribution table for when reach occurs / is out of reach shown in FIG. 243 (b) is read out from the reach distribution table storage area 93c and referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp2302, and as a result of referring to the reach distribution table for when reach occurs / misses in step Sp2301, the fluctuation stored in the register of the sound / light side MPU 92 by step Sp2002 of the game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 240). Determine if the time information corresponds to normal reach.

If it is determined in step Sp2302 that it corresponds to normal reach (Sp2302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp2303.

In step Sp2303, referring to the effect pattern table for normal reach / disconnection stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 213) of the sound light side ROM 93, step Sp2002 of the game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 240). Acquires an effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. After executing step Sp2303, the process proceeds to step Sp2304.

In step Sp2304, the effect pattern acquired in step Sp2303 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After the execution of step Sp2304, the effect pattern setting process for the occurrence / disconnection of this reach is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp2302 that it does not correspond to the normal reach (Sp2302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2305, and as a result of referring to the reach distribution table for when reach occurs / misses in step Sp2301, the game times. It is determined in step Sp2002 of the effect setting process (FIG. 240) whether or not the fluctuation time information stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 corresponds to the super reach.

If it is determined in step Sp2305 that it corresponds to super reach (Sp2305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp2306.

In step Sp2306, the reach type determination value VR at the time of reach occurrence / disconnection is set to 1. Reach type determination value VR at the time of reach occurrence / loss is a value for determining the type of reach when reach occurs in the game times that resulted in loss in the winning lottery, and when the value is 1, the type is super. It means that it is reach, when it is 2, it means that the type is special reach, and when it is 0, it means that it is neither super reach nor special reach. After executing step Sp2306, the process proceeds to step Sp2307.

In step Sp2307, the effect pattern table reference process for super reach / disconnection is executed. The effect pattern table reference process for super reach / disengagement is a process of acquiring an effect pattern by referring to the effect pattern table for super reach / disengagement. The production pattern table reference processing for super reach / disconnection will be described later. After executing step Sp2307, the process proceeds to step Sp2304 described above, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sp2307 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in this game.

If it is determined in step Sp2305 that the super reach is not supported (Sp2305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2308. If it is determined in step Sp2305 that it does not correspond to super reach, it means that the result of referring to the reach distribution table for when reach occurs / misses in step Sp2301 is special reach. , Step Sp2308.

In step Sp2308, the reach type determination value VR at the time of reach occurrence / loss is set to 2. That is, the reach type determination value VR at the time of reach occurrence / loss is set to the value 2 which means that the reach type is special reach when the reach occurs in the game times which is the result of the loss in the winning lottery. After executing step Sp2308, the process proceeds to step Sp2309.

In step Sp2309, special reach / out-of-order effect pattern table reference processing is executed. The special reach / disconnection effect pattern table reference process is a process of acquiring an effect pattern by referring to the special reach / out effect pattern table. The special reach / detachment effect pattern table reference processing will be described later. After executing step Sp2309, the process proceeds to step Sp2304 described above, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sp2309 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in this game.

<Production pattern table reference processing for super reach / detachment>
Next, the effect pattern table reference processing for super reach / disconnection will be described. The super reach / disconnection effect pattern table reference process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 244: Sp2307) of the reach generation / disconnection effect pattern setting process. Hereinafter, the super reach / detachment effect pattern table reference processing will be described in detail.

FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern table reference processing for super reach / disconnection. In step Sp2401, it is determined whether or not the character-based stage determination value VS is 1. The character-based stage determination value VS is a value for determining whether the stage described above is in the character-based stage or the non-character-based stage, and when it is 1, it means that it is in the character-based stage. When it is not 1 (= 0), it means that it is in the non-character stage. In step Sp2401, if the character-based stage determination value VS is not 1, that is, if it is determined that the stage is in the non-character-based stage (Sp2401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2402.

In step Sp2402, the warrior character lottery process is executed. The warrior character lottery process is a process of performing a lottery for identifying one warrior character from the warrior characters A to D described above. Specifically, a lottery is performed by acquiring a value from the random number counter C5 for the warrior character lottery and collating this value with the warrior character lottery table stored in the sound light side ROM 93. The random number counter C5 for the warrior character lottery is provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94. The random number counter C5 is updated at short intervals.

FIG. 246 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the warrior character lottery table. As shown in FIG. 246, among the values of the random number counter C5 for the warrior character lottery of "0 to 99", "0 to 24" corresponds to the warrior character A, and "25 to 49" corresponds to the warrior character. It corresponds to B, "50 to 74" corresponds to the warrior character C, and "75 to 99" corresponds to the warrior character D. In the present embodiment, the warrior characters A to D each have the same probability of winning, but instead, the warrior characters A to D may have different winning probabilities. After executing step Sp2402, the process proceeds to step Sp2403.

In step Sp2403, the warrior character determination value VC is set based on the lottery result obtained in step Sp2402. Specifically, the warrior character determination value VC is set by collating the lottery result with the warrior character determination value correspondence table stored in the sound light side ROM 93.

FIG. 247 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the warrior character determination value correspondence table. As shown in FIG. 247, the lottery result of the warrior character A corresponds to the warrior character determination value Vc of 1, and the lottery result of the warrior character B corresponds to the warrior character determination value Vc of 2. 3 corresponds to the lottery result of the warrior character as the warrior character determination value Vc, and 4 corresponds to the lottery result of the warrior character D as the warrior character determination value Vc. After executing step Sp2403 of FIG. 245, the process proceeds to step Sp2404.

In step Sp2401, when the character-based stage determination value VS is 1, that is, when it is determined that the stage is in the character-based stage (Sp2401: YES), step Sp2402 and step Sp2403 are not executed, and step Sp2404 Proceed to.

In step Sp2404, the effect pattern table based on the warrior character determination value VC is specified from the effect pattern table group for super reach / off time stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 213) of the ROM 93. The super reach / detachment effect pattern table group includes the super reach / detachment effect pattern table corresponding to each of the warrior characters A to D, that is, the super reach / detachment effect pattern table for the warrior character A. It is equipped with a super reach / disengagement production pattern table for warrior character B, a super reach / disengagement production pattern table for warrior character C, and a super reach / disengagement production pattern table for warrior character D. In step Sp2404, when the warrior character judgment value VC is 1, the super reach / out-of-order effect pattern table for the warrior character A is specified, and when the warrior character judgment value VC is 2, the super for the warrior character B is specified. The reach / out-of-reach effect pattern table is specified, and when the warrior character judgment value VC is 3, the super reach / out-of-out effect pattern table for the warrior character C is specified, and the warrior character judgment value VC is 4. Occasionally, specify the super reach / out-of-order production pattern table for the warrior character D. After executing step Sp2404, the process proceeds to step Sp2405.

In step Sp2405, the effect pattern table specified in step Sp2404 is referred to, and the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 is acquired by step Sp2002 of the game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 240). .. After executing step Sp2405, the super reach / off effect pattern table reference process is terminated.

After the super reach / disconnection effect pattern table reference processing is completed, the process proceeds to step Sp2304 of the reach generation / disconnection effect pattern setting process (FIG. 244), and the effect pattern acquired by step Sp2405 (FIG. 245) is the present time. It is set as an effect pattern to be executed in the game times.

<Special reach / Disengagement production pattern table reference processing>
Next, the special reach / detachment effect pattern table reference processing will be described. The special reach / disconnection effect pattern table reference process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 244: Sp2309) of the reach generation / disconnection effect pattern setting process. Hereinafter, the special reach / detachment effect pattern table reference processing will be described in detail.

FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern table reference processing for special reach / disconnection. Steps Sp2501 to Sp2503 are the same processes as steps Sp2401 to Sp2403 in the effect pattern table reference process for super reach / disconnection.

Step Sp2504 is a process corresponding to step Sp2404 in the effect pattern table reference process for super reach / disconnection. Specifically, in step Sp2504, the effect pattern table based on the warrior character determination value VC is specified from the effect pattern table group for special reach / off time stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 213) of the ROM 93. do. After executing step Sp2504, the process proceeds to step Sp2505.

In step Sp2505, referring to the effect pattern table specified in step Sp2504, the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 is acquired by step Sp2002 of the game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 240). .. After executing step Sp2505, the effect pattern table reference process for super reach / disconnection is terminated.

After the special reach / disconnection effect pattern table reference processing is completed, the process proceeds to step Sp2304 of the reach generation / disconnection effect pattern setting process (FIG. 244), and the effect pattern acquired by step Sp2505 (FIG. 248) is the present time. It is set as an effect pattern to be executed in the game times.

<Production pattern setting process for non-reach / detachment>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for non-reach occurrence / disconnection will be described. The effect pattern setting process for non-reach occurrence / disconnection is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 241: Sp2105) of the effect pattern setting process. Hereinafter, the effect pattern setting process for non-reach occurrence / disconnection will be described in detail.

FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process for non-reach occurrence / disconnection. In step Sp2601, the sound is produced by step Sp2002 of the game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 240) with reference to the effect pattern table for off-set stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 213) of the sound light side ROM 93. The effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time stored in the register of the optical side MPU 92 is acquired. The effect for non-reach / non-reach occurrence is an effect suggesting that the jackpot was not won and the reach did not occur. Specifically, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the symbol display device 41. It is a production that makes the design of the above different on the effective line L. After executing step Sp2601, the process proceeds to step Sp2602, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sp2601 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in this game round. After the execution of step Sp2602, the effect pattern setting process for non-reach occurrence / disconnection is terminated.

<Update process at the start of fluctuation>
Next, the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of the fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 240: Sp2008) of the game rotation effect setting process.

FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing an update process at the start of fluctuation. In step Sp2701, the variable command received this time is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33 (hereinafter referred to as the first variable command). It is determined whether the information is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 34 (hereinafter referred to as the second variable command). If it is determined in step Sp2701 that the variable command received this time is the first variable command (Sp2701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp2702.

In step Sp2702, the first hold number counter stored in the sound / light side RAM 94 is decremented by 1. After executing step Sp2702, the process proceeds to step Sp2703.

In step Sp2403, a process of shifting the data stored in the first start port hold effect storage area (not shown) stored in the sound light side RAM 94 is executed. This shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the stored area to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step Sp2403, the process proceeds to step Sp2406.
nothing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp2701 that the variable command received this time is not the first variable command, that is, it is determined to be the second variable command (Sp2701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2703 and the sound and light side RAM 94. The stored second hold quantity counter is subtracted by 1. After executing step Sp2703, the process proceeds to step Sp2704.

In step Sp2704, the information in the total hold quantity counter area is updated so that the total hold count stored in the total hold quantity counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1. After that, the update process at the start of fluctuation is terminated.

<Processing for stage production>
Next, the stage effect processing will be described. The stage effect processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 237: Sp1705).

FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing a stage effect processing. In step Sp2801, it is determined whether or not the power switch 88 is the first execution time from the time when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (when the power is turned on). If it is determined in step Sp2801 that it is the first execution time from the power-on time (Sp2801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp2802.

In step Sp2802, a process of displaying the screen effect corresponding to the rural stage (see FIG. 215 (a)) on the symbol display device 41 is performed. Specifically, a command for displaying a screen effect corresponding to a rural stage is transmitted to the display control device 100. The command includes the fact that the display destination is the background layer, and the screen effect corresponding to the stage in the countryside is displayed as the background on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. After executing step Sp2802, the process proceeds to step Sp2803.

In step Sp2803, the character-based stage determination value VS is set to 0, which means that the stage is a non-character-based stage. After executing step Sp2803, the process proceeds to step Sp2804.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp2801 that it is not the first execution time from the power-on time (Sp2801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2804 without executing step Sp2802 and step Sp2803.

In step Sp2804, it is determined whether or not it is the end of the game round. In the present embodiment, the time corresponding to the fluctuation time read out in step Sp2002 of the game turn effect setting process (FIG. 240) is reached at the end of the game turn by determining whether or not the time corresponding to the read time has elapsed. Determine if it has been done. If it is determined in step Sp2804 that it is the end of the game round (Sp2804: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp2805.

In step Sp2805, it is determined whether or not the character-based stage determination value VS is 1. In step Sp2805, when the character-based stage determination value VS is 1, that is, when it is determined that the stage is in the character-based stage (Sp2805: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp2806.

In step Sp2806, the stage transition process in the character stage is executed. The stage transition process in the character stage will be described later. After executing step Sp2806, the process proceeds to step Sp2808.

On the other hand, in step Sp2805, if the character-based stage determination value VS is not 1, that is, if it is determined that the stage is in the non-character-based stage (Sp2805: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2807.

In step Sp2807, the stage transition process in the non-character stage is executed. The stage transition process in the non-character stage will be described later. After executing step Sp2807, the process proceeds to step Sp2808.

In step Sp2808, the reach type determination value VR at the time of reach occurrence / loss is set to 0. After step Sp2806 or step Sp2807 is executed, the reach type determination value VR at the time of reach occurrence / loss is temporarily cleared to 0. After executing step Sp2808, the stage effect processing is terminated.

<Stage transition processing in character stage>
Next, the stage transition process in the character stage will be described. The stage transition process in the character-based stage is a process for controlling execution / non-execution of the stage transition when the stage is in the character-based stage, and realizes the contents of FIG. 219 described above. This process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 251: Sp2806) of the stage effect process.

FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing a stage transition process in the character stage. In step Sp2901, it is determined whether or not a special reach has occurred (special reach / loss) in the game times that resulted in a loss in the winning lottery in this game time. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach type determination value VR at the time of reach occurrence / disconnection is 2.

In step Sp2901, when it is determined that the reach type determination value VR at the time of reach occurrence / out is not 2, that is, when it is determined that it does not correspond to special reach / out (Sp2901: NO), the process described later is executed. The stage transition process in the character stage is completed without doing so. That is,
・ Game times that won a big hit in the winning lottery,
・ If no reach occurs in the game times that resulted in a loss in the winning lottery
・ If a normal reach occurs in a game that results in a loss in the winning lottery,
-In any case where super reach occurs in the game times that are out of the winning lottery, by ending the stage transition process in the character stage, the stage in the current game times is continued and the stage Do not migrate.

On the other hand, in step Sp2901 when it is determined that the reach type determination value VR at the time of reach occurrence / out is 2, that is, when it is determined that it is special reach / out (Sp2901: YES), step Sp2902 is performed. move on.

In step Sp2902, the presence / absence of a big hit and the fluctuation time in each hold are grasped from the hold information at the end of the game round at this time. Specifically, the presence / absence of a jackpot and the fluctuation time in each hold are grasped from the hold information stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 by step Sp1802 of the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 238). After executing step Sp2902, the process proceeds to step Sp2903.

In step Sp2903, it is determined whether or not the reserved information at the end of the game round includes information indicating that it corresponds to a special reach / miss or a special reach / jackpot. Specifically, depending on whether or not there is a big hit in each hold grasped by step Sp2902 and whether the information on the fluctuation time in each hold grasped by step Sp2902 corresponds to the special reach, the hold information is special reach / missed or It is determined whether or not there is information indicating that the special reach / jackpot is applicable.

In step Sp2903, if it is determined that the hold information at the end of the game round includes information indicating that it corresponds to a special reach / miss or a special reach / jackpot (Sp2903: YES), the process described later is executed. The stage transition process in the character stage is completed without doing so. Exception 1 in FIG. 219 is realized by determining YES in this step Sp2903 and exiting the stage transition process in the character system stage.

On the other hand, in step Sp2903, when it is determined that the hold information at the end of the game round does not include the information indicating that the special reach / miss is applicable and the information indicating that the special reach / jackpot is applicable (). Sp2903: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2904.

In step Sp2904, it is determined whether or not the reserved information at the end of the game round includes information indicating that it corresponds to super reach / miss or super reach / jackpot. Specifically, depending on whether or not there is a big hit in each hold grasped by step Sp2902 and whether or not the information of the fluctuation time in each hold grasped by step Sp2902 corresponds to super reach, the hold information is super reach / missed or Judge whether or not there is information indicating that it corresponds to a super reach / jackpot.

If it is determined in step Sp2904 that the reserved information at the end of the game round includes information indicating that the game corresponds to super reach / miss or super reach / jackpot (Sp2904: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp2905.

In step Sp2905, the character-based stage lottery process is executed. The character stage lottery process is performed by selecting one of the stages of Warrior A's room, Warrior B's room, Warrior C's room, and Warrior D's room as the character stage described above. It is a process of performing a lottery for identification. Specifically, a lottery is performed by acquiring a value from the random number counter C6 for the character-based stage lottery and collating this value with the character-based stage lottery table stored in the sound / light side ROM 93. The random number counter C6 for the character stage lottery is provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound / light side RAM 94. The random number counter C6 is updated at short intervals.

FIG. 253 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the stage lottery table. FIG. 253 (a) shows the contents of the character-based stage lottery table, and FIG. 253 (b) shows the contents of the non-character-based stage lottery table. As shown in FIG. 253 (a), among the values of the random number counter C6 for the character stage lottery of "0 to 99", "0 to 24" corresponds to the stage in the room of the warrior A, and " "25-49" corresponds to the stage in Warrior B's room, "50-74" corresponds to the stage in Warrior C's room, and "75-99" corresponds to the stage in Warrior D's room. ing. In the present embodiment, the stages of each room are won with the same probability, but instead of this, the stages of each room may be won with different probabilities. After executing step Sp2905, the process proceeds to step Sp2906.

In step Sp2906, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of step Sp2905 is a character-based stage corresponding to the warrior character specified by the warrior character determination value VC. In particular,
-If the warrior character judgment value VC is 1, it is judged whether or not the lottery result is the stage of the warrior A's room.
-If the warrior character judgment value VC is 2, it is judged whether or not the lottery result is the stage of the warrior B's room.
-If the warrior character judgment value VC is 3, it is judged whether or not the lottery result is the stage of the warrior C's room.
-When the warrior character determination value VC is 4, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is the stage of the room of the warrior D.

In step Sp2906, if the lottery result of step Sp2905 is determined to be a character stage corresponding to the warrior character specified by the warrior character determination value VC (Sp2906: YES), the process returns to step Sp2905 and step Sp2905. And each process of step Sp2906 is executed.

On the other hand, in step Sp2906, if it is determined that the lottery result of step Sp2905 is not the character stage corresponding to the warrior character specified by the warrior character determination value VC (Sp2906: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2907. When the determination process of step Sp2906 is executed, it is determined by step Sp2901 that the current game time is special reach / out, and the warrior is determined by the special reach / out of effect pattern table reference process (FIG. 248). The character judgment value VC is set to a value that identifies the warrior character that appears in the production corresponding to the special reach / disengagement. Therefore, if NO is determined in step Sp2906, it means that the warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the production corresponding to the special reach / deviation of this game time matches the lottery result of step Sp2905. do. Therefore, in step Sp2906, if the lottery result of step Sp2905 is a warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the production corresponding to the special reach / deviation of this game, the process proceeds to step Sp2907.

In step Sp2907, a command for displaying the screen effect of the character-based stage corresponding to the lottery result of step Sp2905 is transmitted to the display control device 100. The command includes the fact that the display destination is the background layer, and the screen effect is displayed as the background on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As a result, the transition from the character stage to the character stage corresponding to the warrior characters other than the warrior characters that appeared in the production corresponding to the special reach / disengagement will be performed. After executing step Sp2907, the process proceeds to step Sp2908.

In step Sp2908, the warrior character determination value VC is set to the value corresponding to the lottery result of step Sp2905. In particular,
・ If the lottery result is the stage of Warrior A's room, set the warrior character judgment value VC to 1 and set it to 1.
・ If the lottery result is the stage of Warrior B's room, set the Warrior character judgment value VC to 2 and set it to 2.
・ If the lottery result is the stage of Warrior C's room, set the Warrior character judgment value VC to 3 and set it to 3.
-If the lottery result is the stage of Warrior D's room, the warrior character judgment value VC is set to 4.

Exception 2 in FIG. 219 is realized by executing the processes from step Sp2904 to step Sp2908. After executing step Sp2908, the stage transition process in the character stage is terminated.

In step Sp2904, when it is determined that the hold information at the end of the game round does not include the information indicating that it corresponds to super reach / miss and the information indicating that it corresponds to super reach / jackpot (Sp2904: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp2909.

In step Sp2909, a non-character stage lottery process is executed. The non-character stage lottery process is a process of performing a lottery to identify one stage from the countryside stage, the urban stage, the ocean stage, and all the stages as the non-character stage described above. .. Specifically, a lottery is performed by acquiring a value from the random number counter C7 for the non-character stage lottery and collating this value with the non-character stage lottery table stored in the sound light side ROM 93. The random number counter C7 for the non-character stage lottery is provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound / light side RAM 94. The random number counter C7 is updated at short intervals.

As shown in FIG. 253 (b), among the values of the random number counter C7 for non-character stage lottery of "0 to 99", "0 to 24" corresponds to the rural stage, and "25 to". "49" corresponds to the urban stage, "50-74" corresponds to the ocean stage, and "75-99" corresponds to all stages. In the present embodiment, the winning probability of each stage is equal, but instead of this, the winning probability of each stage may be different. After executing step Sp2909, the process proceeds to step Sp2910.

In step Sp2910, a command for displaying the screen effect of the non-character stage corresponding to the lottery result of step Sp2909 is transmitted to the display control device 100. The command includes the fact that the display destination is the background layer, and the screen effect is displayed as the background on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As a result, the transition from the character stage to the non-character stage corresponding to the lottery result is performed. After executing step Sp2910, the process proceeds to step Sp2911.

In step Sp2911, the character-based stage determination value VS is set to 0. The principle in FIG. 219 is realized by determining YES in step Sp2901 and executing the processes from step Sp2909 to step Sp2911. After executing step Sp2911, the stage transition process in the character stage is completed.

<Stage transition processing in non-character stage>
Next, the stage transition process in the non-character stage will be described. The stage transition process in the non-character stage is a process for controlling the execution / non-execution of the stage transition when the stage is in the non-character stage, and realizes the contents of FIG. 220 described above. .. This process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 251: Sp2807) of the stage effect process.

FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing a stage transition process in a non-character stage. In step Sp3001, it is determined whether or not super reach has occurred (super reach / loss) in the game times that resulted in a loss in the winning lottery in this game time. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach type determination value VR at the time of reach occurrence / disconnection is 1.

If it is determined in step Sp3001 that the reach type determination value VR at the time of reach occurrence / out is 1, that is, if it is determined to be super reach / out, (Sp3001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sp3002. ..

In step Sp3002, a command for displaying the screen effect of the character-based stage corresponding to the warrior character specified by the warrior character determination value VC is transmitted to the display control device 100. The command includes the fact that the display destination is the background layer, and the screen effect is displayed as the background on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In particular,
-When the warrior character judgment value VC is 1, a command to display the screen effect of the stage in the room of warrior A is transmitted.
-If the warrior character judgment value VC is 2, a command to display the screen effect of the stage in the room of warrior B is transmitted.
-If the warrior character judgment value VC is 3, send a command to display the screen effect of the stage in the room of warrior C.
-If the warrior character judgment value VC is 4, send a command to display the screen effect of the stage in the room of warrior D.

When it is determined in step Sp3001 that it is super reach / out and step Sp3002 is executed, the warrior character determination value VC is a value that identifies the warrior character that appeared in the production corresponding to super reach / out. Therefore, in step Sp3002, the screen production of the character-based stage corresponding to the warrior character that appeared in the production corresponding to the super reach / disengagement will be displayed. After executing step Sp3002, the process proceeds to step Sp3003.

In step Sp3003, the character-based stage determination value VS is set to 1 indicating that the character-based stage is a character-based stage. When YES is determined in this step Sp3003 and the processes of step Sp3002 and step Sp3003 are executed, the exception A in FIG. 220 is realized. After executing step Sp3003, the stage transition process in the non-character stage is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sp3001 that the reach type determination value VR at the time of reach occurrence / out is not 1, that is, if it is determined that it is not super reach / out (Sp3001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp3004.

In step Sp3004, it is determined whether or not a special reach has occurred (special reach / loss) in the game times that resulted in a loss in the winning lottery in this game time. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach type determination value VR at the time of reach occurrence / disconnection is 2.

In step Sp3004, when it is determined that the reach type determination value VR at the time of reach occurrence / disconnection is not 2, that is, when it is determined that it does not correspond to special reach / detachment (Sp3004: NO), the process described later is executed. The stage transition process in the non-character stage is completed without doing so. That is,
・ Game times that won a big hit in the winning lottery,
・ If no reach occurs in the game times that resulted in a loss in the winning lottery
・ If a normal reach occurs in a game that results in a loss in the winning lottery,
In any of the above cases, by terminating the stage transition process in the non-character stage, the stage in the current game round is continued and the stage transition is not performed.

On the other hand, in step Sp3004, when it is determined that the reach type determination value VR at the time of reach occurrence / out is 2, that is, when it is determined that it is special reach / out (Sp3004: YES), step Sp3005 is performed. move on.

In step Sp3005, the presence / absence of a big hit and the fluctuation time in each hold are grasped from the hold information at the end of the game round at this time. The process of step Sp3005 is the same as that of step Sp2902 (FIG. 252) described above. After executing step Sp3005, the process proceeds to step Sp3006.

In step Sp3006, it is determined whether or not the reserved information at the end of the game round includes information indicating that it corresponds to a special reach / miss or a special reach / jackpot. The process of step Sp3006 is the same as that of step Sp2903 (FIG. 252) described above.

In step Sp3006, if it is determined that the reserved information at the end of the game round includes information indicating that it corresponds to special reach / miss or special reach / jackpot (Sp3006: YES), the step described above is performed. Proceed to Sp3002.

As described above, in step Sp3002, a command for displaying the screen effect of the character-based stage corresponding to the warrior character specified by the warrior character determination value VC is transmitted to the display control device 100. In step Sp3006, if it is determined that the pending information includes information indicating that it corresponds to special reach / miss or special reach / jackpot, and step Sp3002 is executed, the warrior character determination value VC is special reach / miss. Since it is a value that identifies the warrior character that appeared in the production corresponding to, in step Sp3002, the screen production of the character stage corresponding to the warrior character that appeared in the production corresponding to special reach / disengagement will be displayed. Become.

On the other hand, in step Sp3006, when it is determined that the hold information at the end of the game round does not include the information indicating that the special reach / miss is applicable and the information indicating that the special reach / jackpot is applicable (). Sp3006: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp3007.

In step Sp3007, the character-based stage lottery process is executed. The character stage lottery process is for identifying one stage from the stage of Warrior A's room, the stage of Warrior B's room, the stage of Warrior C's room, and the stage of Warrior D's room as character stage. This is a process of performing a lottery, which is the same as step Sp2905 (FIG. 252) described above. After executing step Sp3007, the process proceeds to step Sp3008.

In step Sp3008, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of step Sp3007 is a character-based stage corresponding to the warrior character specified by the warrior character determination value VC. The processing of step Sp3008 is the same as that of step Sp2906 (FIG. 252) described above.

In step Sp3008, if the lottery result of step Sp3007 is determined to be a character-based stage corresponding to the warrior character specified by the warrior character determination value VC (Sp3008: YES), the process returns to step Sp3007 and step Sp3007. And each process of step Sp3008 is executed.

On the other hand, in step Sp3008, if it is determined that the lottery result of step Sp3007 is not the character stage corresponding to the warrior character specified by the warrior character determination value VC (Sp3008: NO), the process proceeds to step Sp3008. When the determination process of step Sp3008 is executed, it is determined by step Sp3004 that the current game round is special reach / out, and the warrior is determined by the special reach / out of effect pattern table reference process (FIG. 248). The character judgment value VC is set to a value that identifies the warrior character that appears in the production corresponding to the special reach / disengagement. Therefore, if NO is determined in step Sp3008, it means that the warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the production corresponding to the special reach / deviation of this game time matches the lottery result of step Sp3007. do. Therefore, in step Sp3008, if the lottery result of step Sp3007 is a warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the production corresponding to the special reach / deviation of this game, the process proceeds to step Sp3009.

In step Sp3009, a command for displaying the screen effect of the character-based stage corresponding to the lottery result of step Sp3007 is transmitted to the display control device 100. The command includes the fact that the display destination is the background layer, and the screen effect is displayed as the background on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. The processing of step Sp3009 is the same as that of step Sp2907 (FIG. 252) described above. As a result of the processing of step Sp3009, the transition from the non-character stage to the character stage corresponding to the warrior character other than the warrior character appearing in the production corresponding to the special reach / disengagement is performed. After executing step Sp3009, the process proceeds to step Sp3010.

In step Sp3010, the warrior character determination value VC is set to the value corresponding to the lottery result of step Sp3007. The processing of step Sp3010 is the same as that of step Sp2908 (FIG. 252) described above. After executing step Sp3010, the process proceeds to step Sp3011.

In step Sp3011, the character-based stage determination value VS is set to 1 indicating that the character-based stage is a character-based stage. The principle in FIG. 220 is realized by determining YES in step Sp3004 and executing the processes from step Sp3007 to step Sp3011. After executing step Sp3011, the stage transition process in the non-character stage is terminated.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, the process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly the main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and the process that is executed when a command is received from the voice emission control device 90. There is a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes the main process after the power is turned on, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. If the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, the main process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing a main process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described.

In step Sp3101, the initial setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the character information in the compressed format stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, the information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also, make other settings necessary for initialization. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp3102.

In step Sp3102, the interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process executed every time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sp3201, the command storage process is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed by detecting the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105. In the V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute the display instruction.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal generated in VDP105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is performed every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Therefore, since the VDP 105 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image is started or displayed during the drawing of the image. It is possible to suppress the expansion of an image accompanying a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information inside is stored. Hereinafter, the processing details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described.

In step Sp3301, command correspondence processing is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt processing (FIG. 241), and the processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when an effect command is stored, control of drawing and displaying an image is started so that the effect mode specified by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, and when it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of drawing and displaying an image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command correspondence process (Sp3301), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so that there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the voice emission control device 90 and the effect is started, it is highly possible that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop symbol set by the voice emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the mode. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41.

In step Sp3302, the display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command correspondence process (Sp3301) or the like. .. Then, the process proceeds to step Sp3303.

In step Sp3303, task processing is executed. In the task process, the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting process (Sp3302). In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step Sp3304.

In step Sp3304, the drawing process is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character determined by the task process (Sp3303) are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on these information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received at the time of the previous V interrupt processing on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process proceeds to step Sp3305, other processing is executed, and then the V interrupt processing is terminated. As described above, an example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described.

<< 5-7 >> Action / Effect:

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a super reach occurs (in the case of a super reach / loss) in a game round that is on the character stage and the result is a loss in the winning lottery. The stage was continued in the game round, and the stage transition was not performed (see FIG. 219). Since the screen production in the game time when the super reach occurs is not a production in which the warrior character dies, even if the warrior character appears on the stage in the next game time, the player may feel something strange. No.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if a special reach occurs (in the case of special reach / loss) in a game round that is on the character stage and the result of the winning lottery is missed, at the end of the gaming round. , The stage is configured to shift from the character stage to the non-character stage (with exceptions). Since the screen production in the game times when the special reach occurs is the production of Dead or Alive, in the game times where the result is missed in the winning lottery, the warrior character is produced to die. For this reason, if the stage in the game round is continued and the stage transition is not performed, the player will display a moving image in which the dead warrior character appears as if nothing had happened in the next game round. There was a risk of feeling uncomfortable when I saw it. In order to solve this problem, in this embodiment, if a special reach occurs in the game times that are in the character-based stage and the result of the winning lottery is lost, the character-based stage is changed from the current character-based stage. The stage shift to a non-character stage that is not directly related to the warrior character corresponding to the stage. As a result, after the player sees the moving image of the warrior character dying on the character stage, the character stage corresponding to the dead warrior character is continued, and the warrior character who died did not have anything. It is possible to prevent the feeling of strangeness such as appearance. Therefore, according to this configuration, the story of the production in which the character appears is guaranteed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

However, there are exceptions to the configuration in which the stage is transferred from the character stage to the non-character stage when the stage is in the character stage and the game result of the game is special reach / off. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game result of the game round is on the character stage and the game result is special reach / miss, the hold information at the end of the game round corresponds to the special reach. When there is information indicating that the game is to be performed, the stage in the game is continued and the stage is not changed (exception 1). According to the configuration of Exception 1, in the screen production of the special reach, a moving image that causes the warrior character to die is projected, and at the end of the game round, the screen production corresponding to the character stage in which the dead warrior character appears. It will be displayed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in principle, the stage shifts to the non-character stage when the game result of the game is a special reach / out of the character stage. The dead warrior character will not appear as the main character in the next game stage. Nevertheless, according to the configuration of Exception 1, the dead warrior character will appear on the stage of the next game. On the other hand, in the case of Exception 1, the holding information at the end of the game round includes information indicating that it corresponds to the special reach, so that the player has an advantage (expectation of big hit). expensive. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player recognizes that the dead warrior character appears as if nothing had happened in the next game round stage, the pending information is subsequently displayed. By recognizing the effects that are expected to have favorable results when digested, it can be known that the appearance of the dead warrior character in the next game stage can be expected to have favorable results. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 having the configuration of the exception 1, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game is on the character stage and the game result of the game is special reach / miss, the information indicating that the hold information at the end of the game corresponds to super reach. When is present, the stage is set to shift to a character-type stage corresponding to a warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the production corresponding to the special reach / deviation of the game (exception 2). According to the configuration of Exception 2, in the screen production of Special Reach, a moving image that causes the warrior character to die is projected, and at the end of the game round, it corresponds to the character stage corresponding to the warrior character other than the dead warrior character. The screen effect will be displayed. In the case of exception 2, since the reserved information at the end of the game round includes information indicating that the game corresponds to super reach, the player has a relatively high degree of advantage. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, when the player admits that he / she has moved to the character stage corresponding to the warrior character other than the dead warrior character at the end of the game round, an advantageous result will come. You will have a sense of expectation that it may be. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 having the configuration of the exception 2, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that a relatively advantageous result will come, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game is on a non-character stage and the game result of the game is super reach / out, at the end of the game, the super reach / out of the game is dealt with. It was configured to shift to the character stage corresponding to the warrior character that appeared in the production (see Fig. 220). Since the screen production in the game time when the super reach occurs is not a production in which the warrior character dies, even if the warrior character appears on the stage in the next game time, the player may feel something strange. No. For this reason, in the present embodiment, if a super reach occurs in a game that is on a non-character stage and the result is a loss in the winning lottery, a character corresponding to the warrior character that appeared in the production of the super reach. It was configured to move to the system stage.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the pachinko machine 10 is on a non-character stage and the game result of the game round is special reach / miss, at the end of the game round, the effect corresponding to the special reach / miss of the game round is produced. It was configured to shift to the character stage corresponding to the warrior characters other than the warrior characters that appeared in (However, there are exceptions). Since the screen production in the game times when the special reach occurs is the production of Dead or Alive, in the game times where the result is missed in the winning lottery, the warrior character is produced to die. For this reason, if the stage is set to shift to the character-based stage corresponding to the warrior character that appeared in the special reach / out of the game, the player will be the next warrior character who died. There was a risk of feeling uncomfortable when I saw the moving image that appeared as if nothing had happened in the game. In order to solve this problem, in the present embodiment, if a special reach occurs in a game round that is in a non-character stage and the result is a loss in the winning lottery, the game round is at the end of the game round. It is configured to shift to the character stage corresponding to the warrior characters other than the warrior characters that appeared in the production corresponding to the special reach and disengagement of. As a result, after seeing the moving image of the warrior character dying on the non-character stage, the player shifts to the character stage corresponding to the deceased warrior character, and it seems that the deceased warrior character did not have anything. It is possible to prevent the feeling of strangeness such as appearing in. Therefore, according to this configuration, the story of the production in which the character appears is guaranteed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

However, if the player is on a non-character stage and the game result of the game is special reach / miss, and the hold information at the end of the game contains information indicating that the game corresponds to special reach, the relevant information is applicable. It is configured to shift to the character stage corresponding to the warrior character that appeared in the production corresponding to the special reach and deviation of the game times (exception A). According to the configuration of Exception A, in the screen production of the special reach, the production is made so that the warrior character dies, and at the end of the game, the screen production corresponding to the character stage in which the dead warrior character appears is displayed. Will be. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in principle, when the game is on a non-character stage and the game result of the game is special reach / miss, the special reach / miss of the game is made. We are shifting the stage to a character-based stage that corresponds to warrior characters other than the warrior characters that appeared in the production corresponding to, and the dead warrior character will not appear as the leading role in the next game stage. Nevertheless, according to the composition of Exception A, the dead warrior character will appear on the stage of the next game. On the other hand, in the case of the exception A, since the reserved information at the end of the game round contains information indicating that the game corresponds to the special reach, the player has a high degree of advantage. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, when the player recognizes that the dead warrior character appears as if nothing had happened in the next game round stage, when the pending information is subsequently digested. By recognizing the production that is expected to have a favorable result, it can be known that the dead warrior character will appear in the next game stage as well, and that a favorable result can be expected. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 having the configuration of the exception A, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a super reach or a special reach occurs in the game round, a screen effect (reach effect) composed of a moving image with one specific warrior character as the main character is performed. However, if the game is on the character stage, the warrior character that appears as the main character matches the screen effect when the above super reach or special reach occurs for the warrior character corresponding to the character stage. It is configured to do. For example, when a super reach or a special reach occurs in a game on a character stage corresponding to the warrior character A, the screen effect displayed in these reach is that the warrior character A is the main character. .. In a conventional pachinko machine that does not have such a configuration, the degree of connection between the reach effect and the set stage is low, so that the player may feel a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the warrior character corresponding to the reach production matches the warrior character corresponding to the character stage, so that the player feels a sense of discomfort in the production. Can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is sufficient that there are multiple sets in which the warrior character corresponding to the reach production and the warrior character corresponding to the character stage are matched, and the warrior character corresponding to all the reach production is necessarily the warrior corresponding to the character stage. It does not have to match the character. Further, each warrior character corresponding to the reach production and each warrior character corresponding to the character stage may not match at all.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the transition from the non-character stage to the character stage is made, the character stage indicates which of the character stages the stage corresponds to the warrior character. It is stored in the determination value VS (see FIG. 254). Then, based on this character-based stage determination value VS, the reach effect pattern when super reach or special reach occurs is determined (see FIGS. 245 and 246). In retrospect, the transition to the character stage is executed based on the presence or absence of a big hit in the winning lottery, the presence or absence of reach, and the type of reach that occurs (hereinafter, these three are collectively referred to as the game result). There is. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the warrior character determination value VC is obtained based on the game result in the previous winning lottery, and the special reach for the warrior character specified from the obtained warrior character determination value VC. -The production pattern for super reach is set. In a conventional pachinko machine that does not have such a configuration, the degree of connection between the reach effect and the game result of the previous game is low, so that the player may feel a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the warrior character corresponding to the reach effect matches the warrior character specified based on the game result of the previous game times. It is possible to prevent a person from feeling a sense of discomfort in the production.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the transition from the non-character stage to the character stage is executed based on the pending information. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the warrior character determination value VC is obtained based on the hold information, and the production for the special reach / super reach for the warrior character specified from the obtained warrior character determination value VC. The pattern is set. In a conventional pachinko machine that does not have such a configuration, the degree of connection between the reach effect and the hold information is low, so that the player may feel a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the warrior character corresponding to the reach effect matches the warrior character specified based on the hold information, so that the player feels uncomfortable with the effect. Can be prevented from making you feel. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can further improve the interest of the game.

<< 5-8 >> Modification example of the fifth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be carried out in various embodiments without departing from the gist thereof, and for example, the following modifications are also possible. In the modified examples described below, the description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as those of the above embodiment will be omitted.

<< 5-8-1 >> Modification 1:
In the fifth embodiment, when a special reach occurs (in the case of special reach / loss) in a game round that results in a loss in the winning lottery while in the character stage, at the end of the game round. The configuration is such that the transition from the character stage to the non-character stage is possible (see Fig. 219). According to this configuration, the stage transition will not be made unless a special reach occurs. Since the frequency of special reach occurs relatively infrequently, there is a problem that the stage transition is relatively small when it is in the character stage. On the other hand, as a modification, when the state in the character stage is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 10 game times) or more, the configuration may be such that the stage is forcibly shifted to the non-character stage. According to this configuration, after a predetermined period has elapsed, the transition to the non-character stage is performed, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, as another modification, when the state of being in the character stage is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 10 game times) or more, a lottery process for switching the stage is performed, and the lottery process is won. Occasionally, it may be configured to shift to a non-character stage.

In addition, as another modification, when the state of being in the character stage is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 10 game times) or more, the character stage shifts to a character stage in which the corresponding character is different. It may be configured to be used. For example, the stage may be changed from the stage of the room of the beautiful girl warrior character to the stage of the room of the youth warrior character. Even with this configuration, the player can enjoy the fun of shifting the stage, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, as a configuration for shifting to a character-based stage in which the corresponding characters are different in the character-based stage, a predetermined arrangement of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 when the variable display ends and the stop display is displayed is predetermined. When the line is arranged, the stage may be shifted to the character stage corresponding to the warrior character specified by the line. Specifically, when the reach is arranged as the specific arrangement, the stage may be shifted to the character stage corresponding to the warrior character specified by the same two symbols. For example, in the case of the arrangement of the symbols illustrated in FIG. 205, the stage is transferred to the room of the beautiful girl warrior character. According to this configuration, it is possible to associate the reach symbols and the transition stages, so that it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<< 5-8-2 >> Modification 2:
In the fifth embodiment, the stage transition is performed when the transition condition of FIG. 220 is satisfied in the non-character stage, and the stage transition is not performed when the transition condition is not satisfied. And said. On the other hand, as a modification, when the transition condition of FIG. 220 is not satisfied, a configuration may be configured in which the current stage is periodically transitioned to another stage in the non-character stage. For example, when the state of being in the non-character stage is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 10 games) or more, the current stage, the rural stage, may be changed to the urban stage. According to this configuration, every time a predetermined period elapses, the stage shifts within the non-character stage, so that it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that the above-mentioned stage transition is not limited to the configuration performed periodically, and may be configured to be performed irregularly. For example, the above stage transition may be performed when the arrangement of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 when the variation display ends and the stop display is reached becomes a predetermined arrangement.

<< 5-8-3 >> Modification 3:
In the fifth embodiment, the super reach generation effect pattern (for off or big hit) and the special reach generation effect pattern (for off or big hit) are individual ones corresponding to each warrior character A to D. However, if it is a super reach generation production pattern or a special reach generation production pattern for the same warrior character, the stage when the reach occurs is the same regardless of whether the stage is a character stage or a non-character stage. there were. On the other hand, as a modification, the super reach generation effect pattern and the special reach generation effect pattern may be different depending on whether the stage is a character stage or a non-character stage. That is, the super reach generation effect pattern in the game times when in the non-character stage is different from the super reach generation effect pattern in the game times when in the character stage, and the effect peculiar to the non-character stage is defined. It may be a thing. In addition, the special reach generation effect pattern in the game times when in the non-character stage is different from the special reach generation effect pattern in the game times when in the character stage, and the effect peculiar to the non-character stage is defined. It may be a thing. As a production peculiar to the non-character stage, a production pattern in which a warrior character does not appear can be used. Further, as a production peculiar to the non-character stage, a production pattern in which a sub (supporting character) character that is not associated with the character stage appears can be used.

<< 5-8-4 >> Modification 4:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the player may specify a favorite warrior character from the warrior characters A to D. Specifically, by selecting one warrior character from the warrior characters A to D on the demo screen, the desired warrior character can be specified. In this configuration, when a favorite warrior character is specified, only the stage corresponding to the favorite warrior character is set in the character stage. In this case, the stage transition is performed between the character-based stage corresponding to the favorite warrior character and the non-character-based stage. According to this configuration, the player can always see his / her favorite warrior character on the character stage, and the player can be satisfied. However, according to this configuration, if you are on a non-character stage and the game result of the game is a special reach / miss, your favorite warrior character who died in the battle production will appear on the character stage after the transition. As a result, the player who saw this may feel a sense of discomfort. In order to solve this problem, as a further modification, a character that corresponds to a warrior character that is different from the favorite warrior character when it is on a non-character stage and the game result of the game is special reach or out of reach. It may be configured to shift to the system stage once, and then, after a predetermined period of time, shift to the character system stage corresponding to the favorite warrior character. According to this configuration, it is possible to make many favorite warrior characters appear while ensuring the story of the production in which the characters appear. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. In addition, in the transition to the character stage corresponding to the warrior character different from the favorite warrior character, for example, the warrior character specified by lottery is specified from other warrior characters different from the favorite warrior character. , You can move to the character stage corresponding to the specified warrior character.

<< 5-8-5 >> Modification 5:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the degree of advantage for the player when a reach occurs varies depending on the type of reach, and is the same even if the warrior character is different in the same type of reach. On the other hand, as a modification, in the non-character stage, the configuration that changes the degree of advantage (expectation of big hit) for the player based on the warrior character corresponding to the generated reach is very good. For example, if a reach for warrior character D occurs, the advantage is 4.7%, if a reach for warrior character C occurs, the advantage is 7.9%, and a reach for warrior character B occurs. If this is the case, the advantage may be 16.6%, and if a reach for the warrior character A occurs, the advantage may be 94.5%. According to this configuration, it is possible to give superiority or inferiority to the types of warrior characters, so that it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<< 5-8-6 >> Modification 6:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is on the character stage and the game result of the game round is special reach / miss, the hold information at the end of the game round corresponds to the special reach. When the indicated information exists, the stage in the game round is continued and the stage transition is not performed (exception 1). According to this configuration, the player will play the game on the same character stage even in the game times after the special reach / missed game times. In addition, since the hold information contains information indicating that the hold information corresponds to the special reach, the player is defeated first by the special reach effect (that is, the battle effect) executed when the hold information is digested. You can watch another battle with the same warrior character as the one you did, and you can win the defeat (win a big hit) by winning. For this reason, as a modification example, when the above exception 1 occurs and the character stays on the same character stage, the content of the screen effect when the special reach executed in the subsequent game times occurs is first specified as the special reach / removal. It can also be configured to match the screen effect of the special reach in the game times that became. The match referred to here may be a configuration in which a complete match is made, or a configuration in which only a part of the match may be made.

The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 does not memorize the fluctuation time of the previous game round, and the game round is based on the winning / failing result of the winning lottery related to the current game round, the presence / absence of reach occurrence, and the value of the variable type counter CS. Since the fluctuation time of is determined, the fluctuation time changes sequentially, and it is difficult to completely match the reach effects. Therefore, a configuration may be made in which the fluctuation time allocated to the hold is combined to secure a length close to the fluctuation time in the previously special reach / missed game times. Specifically, if the holding information is pre-read and the fluctuation time in the game times executed later is shorter than the fluctuation time in the special reach / missed game times executed earlier, it corresponds to the special reach. The main part of the reach production in the special reach / missed game times executed earlier is assigned to the variable time related to the reserved information, and the reserved information corresponding to the special reach is digested before the reserved information. The introduction unit of the reach effect is assigned to the variable time related to the hold information. The introduction part of this reach effect is divided into a plurality of parts, and it is necessary from the divided introduction part according to the time that can be secured by the hold information that is digested before the hold information corresponding to the special reach. Extract and allocate only the required amount. Further, the length of each of the divided introduction portions can be expanded by a small amount as needed, and the length of the effect can be adjusted to the fluctuation time. If there is no hold information that is digested before the hold information that corresponds to the special reach, only the main part of the reach production should be assigned to the variable time related to the hold information that corresponds to the special reach. You may set the effect pattern. In addition, if the holding information is read ahead and the fluctuation time in the game times executed later is longer than the fluctuation time in the special reach / missed game times executed earlier, the special reach / missed first. By adding a new introduction part with no features to the reach production in the game times that have become, the game times that will be executed later for the contents of the production in the special reach / missed game times that have already been executed. It may be configured to roughly match the contents of the reach effect in.

With the above configuration, it is possible to roughly match the screen effect of the special reach in the game times in which the special reach occurs later with the screen effect of the special reach in the game times in which the special reach / missed earlier occurs. .. For this reason, it is possible to evoke the memory of the battle production that was defeated earlier to the player, and it is possible to arouse the desire to re-challenge and win. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of the above configuration, the screen effect of the special reach in the game times in which the special reach occurs later is partially different from the screen effect of the special reach in the game times that was previously special reach / missed. It may be configured to be used. In addition, if it can be determined from the hold information that a special reach / miss will occur, the screen effect of the special reach in the game times in which the special reach will occur later will be displayed, and the screen of the special reach in the game times in which the special reach / miss will occur first. If it is possible to match the production and determine that a special reach / jackpot will occur from the hold information, the screen production of the special reach in the game time in which the special reach will occur later will be displayed in the special reach / missed game time first. The configuration may be partially different from the screen effect of the special reach in.

<< 5-8-7 >> Modification 7:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the stage shift between the character-based stage and the non-character-based stage is performed at the end of the game round based on the game results such as the jackpot winning in the winning lottery and the occurrence of reach. Therefore, the game rounds from the next time will be executed on the stage after the transition. On the other hand, as a modification, the above-mentioned stage transition may be performed at the start of the current game round based on the game result such as the big hit win in the hit lottery related to the previous game round and the occurrence of reach. Even with this modification, the same effect as that of the fifth embodiment can be obtained. In short, the stage transition can be any timing as long as it is between the end of the game round related to the game result such as the big hit win in the win lottery and the occurrence of reach and the start time of the next game round. Further, the stage transition may be performed at a timing after the start of the next game round. For example, the stage may be changed in the middle of the change of the next game round described above. As the middle of the fluctuation, for example, it may be the timing immediately before the character appears in the special reach screen production. Furthermore, as another example of performing the stage transition at a timing after the start of the next game round, the starting point is when the game round related to the game result such as the big hit winning in the winning lottery and the occurrence of reach is set as the starting game round. One or more games after the starting game, such as one game after the game (corresponding to the next game mentioned above), two games, three games, and so on. The stage may be changed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start, at the end, etc.) of the times. In the case of this configuration, in the game rounds between the starting game rounds and the game rounds in which the stage is changed, for example, a dedicated switching effect may be executed. As a dedicated switching effect, for example, a character who has been defeated by a battle effect may appear, or as an effect that takes time to show what kind of stage the destination stage will be due to stage transition. Alternatively, it may be an effect including a screen effect in which the player can specify the stage to be transferred due to the stage transition.

<< 5-8-8 >> Modification 8:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, two types of production modes, a character stage and a non-character stage, are prepared, and the stage shift is performed between these two types of stages. On the other hand, as a modification, a stage transition may be performed between three or more types of stages including a character stage and a non-character stage. For example, the non-character stage is divided into a non-character stage of country A and a non-character stage of country B, and a mode of stage transition between the character stage and the non-character stage in the fifth embodiment. May be applied to the stage transition between the character-based stage and the non-character-based stage of country A.

<< 5-8-9 >> Modification 9:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the screen effect (special reach screen effect) displayed when the super reach occurs is composed of a moving image of the daily life of the warrior character. There is no need to limit it, and it can be changed to various productions as long as it does not involve a confrontation with an enemy character. For example, a video about the growth of a warrior character from a young age to an adult, a video about a warrior character traveling to another country, and the like may be used.

<< 5-8-10 >> Modification 10:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the screen effect displayed when the super reach occurs is limited to the one in which the warrior character appears as the main character, but on the other hand, the super reach occurs as a modification. As the screen effect displayed when the warrior character is displayed, there may be two types, one in which the warrior character appears as the main character (character type screen effect) and the other in which the warrior character does not appear (non-character type screen effect). In addition, in the case of having these two types, as a condition of stage transition in the non-character stage shown in FIG. 220, if the game result of the game times is super reach / out of the game times, the super reach of the game times. Only when the production corresponding to the deviation is the character screen production, the transition to the character stage corresponding to the warrior character who appeared as the main character in the character screen production is performed at the end of the game round. On the other hand, if the production corresponding to the super reach / deviation of the game is a non-character screen production, the stage transition is not performed. According to this modification, it is possible to increase the mode of the screen effect displayed when the super reach occurs, so that it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<< 5-8-11 >> Modification 11:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the screen effect displayed when a special reach occurs (hereinafter referred to as a special reach screen effect) is a battle effect in which a warrior character and an enemy character confront each other (battle effect). It was composed of the video of. On the other hand, as a modification, the special reach screen effect may be composed of a moving image of playing a game such as Go, Shogi, Renju, Othello, or backgammon. In short, if the character is configured to confront another person, it does not have to be accompanied by a battle scene. Furthermore, it is not always necessary to confront another person, as long as the character itself challenges something and includes a scene where a favorable or unfavorable result is announced for the character (that is, for the player). , Either production may be used. For example, it may be composed of a video including a scene in which an idol character challenges a singer audition and passes or fails. Further, it is not always necessary to announce both the favorable result and the unfavorable result, and any video may be composed as long as it includes at least a scene in which the unfavorable result is announced. Furthermore, in the screen effect displayed when a specific reach (special reach in this embodiment) occurs, after the screen effect is displayed when a scene in which the character performs some action or action is included. If the same character as the character who performed the above action or action appears on the stage, the player feels contradiction or discomfort, and if the screen production includes the scene where the above action or action is performed, the specific reach is The screen effect displayed when it occurs may be anything.

<< 5-8-12 >> Modification 12:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when the game is on the character stage and the game result of the game is special reach / miss, the pending information at the end of the game is super reach (super reach / miss). Or, when there is information indicating that it corresponds to (super reach / jackpot), the configuration shifts to the character stage corresponding to the warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the special reach / missed production of the game. (Exception 2). On the other hand, as a modification, it is shown that when the game result of the game round is special reach / miss, the hold information at the end of the game round corresponds to super reach / miss. When information exists, it is configured to shift to the character stage corresponding to the warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the special reach / out of the game round, while the pending information at the end of the game round. When there is information indicating that the character corresponds to a super reach / jackpot, the stage in the game may be continued and the stage may not be changed. According to this configuration, a battle production is performed in the game round, the dead warrior character appears as the leading role in the stage of the next game round, and then in the game round where super reach occurs, the super reach production (warrior character's) (Direction based on daily life) will be done, and you will definitely win a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sudden joy. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. Further, as another variation example, when the game result of the game round is a special reach / miss in the character stage, the information indicating that the hold information at the end of the game round corresponds to the super reach / miss. If there is, the stage will be shifted to the character stage corresponding to the warrior character other than the warrior character that appeared in the special reach / out of the game round, while the pending information at the end of the game round. When there is information indicating that the lottery is a big hit (regardless of whether or not a reach has occurred and the type of reach when a reach occurs), the stage in the game is continued and the stage is not changed. May be. According to this configuration, a battle effect is made in the game round, the dead warrior character appears as the leading role in the stage of the next game round, and then in the game round where normal reach and super reach occur, a big hit is always won. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sudden joy. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<< 5-8-13 >> Modification 13:
In the fifth embodiment and its modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices such as a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, but instead of this, the main control It may be configured to include two control devices such as a device and a sub control device. The sub-control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the fifth embodiment. Further, in the fifth embodiment and its modifications, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 do not have to be limited to the division described in the fifth embodiment, and the three control devices need not be limited. As a whole of 60, 90, 100, it suffices if various processes according to the fifth embodiment can be executed.

<< 6 >> Sixth Embodiment:
Next, the sixth embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is based on the pachinko machine of the fifth embodiment described above, and a new configuration is added. Hereinafter, the sixth embodiment will be described by mainly explaining the differences from the pachinko machine of the fifth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, the same hardware configuration and software configuration (processing) as those in the fifth embodiment will not be described. In the sixth embodiment, the same parts as those in the fifth embodiment will be described below using the same names and reference numerals.

<< 6-1 >> Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
FIG. 258 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configurations of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is the same as that of the fifth embodiment, and originally does not require a new drawing. However, in the fifth embodiment, the description is omitted. In the embodiment, since it is necessary to explain in detail, it was decided to add the drawing of FIG. 258 for the explanation.

The block diagram shown in FIG. 258 is different from the block diagram shown in FIG. 213 in the portion of the voice emission control board 91 provided in the voice emission control device 90. As shown in the figure, the voice emission control board 91 generates a sound signal and drives a speaker 46 based on the generated sound signal, in addition to the MPU 92 which is an arithmetic device that controls the entire voice emission control device 90. A sound output LSI 97 that outputs sound and a ROM 98 for audio data, which is a memory in which various audio data are stored, are mounted. The audio data ROM 98 is connected to the sound output LSI 97, and the sound output LSI 97 is connected to the MPU 92 via a signal line.

The sound output LSI 97 is a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) that generates a sound to be reproduced based on an instruction from the MPU 92 and outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46. Specifically, when the sound output LSI 97 receives a playback start command from the MPU 92, the sound output LSI 97 identifies a sound to be played back specified by the playback start command, and uses audio data corresponding to the specified sound for audio data. Read from ROM 98 and generate (ie, play) the sound to be played. Then, the sound output LSI 97 outputs the reproduced sound from the speaker 46. Further, when the sound output LSI 97 receives the reproduction end command from the MPU 92, the sound output LSI 97 specifies the sound to end the reproduction specified by the reproduction end command, and ends the reproduction of the specified sound.

The sound output LSI 97 has 16 audio channels, and a maximum of 16 sounds are simultaneously generated, combined (mixed), and then output from the speaker 46.

<< 6-2 >> Background technology related to sound reproduction:
The sound (sound) reproduced by the sound output LSI includes a plurality of parts such as an intro and a melody. Sound data is recorded corresponding to each of a plurality of parts, but since the sound data is reproduced as one (without interruption), a plurality of sound data may be combined into one piece of music.

One piece of music collected in this way may be reproduced in a different manner depending on the situation, and a general sound output LSI may have such a function. Specifically, consider a case where one piece of music is composed of an intro part and a loop part as shown in FIG. 259 (a). In the music collected in this way, both the intro part and the loop part are played by one playback start command. On the other hand, in the production of the pachinko machine, the intro part is the introduction part of the music and is played only once, but the loop part following the intro part may be intended to be repeatedly played for a predetermined period. In short, regarding the reproduction form of the sound of a pachinko machine, there is a scene in which only the "loop portion" is desired to be loop-reproduced when the music composed of the "intro portion" and the "loop portion" is reproduced.

As one form for realizing this, the audio emission control board outputs a reproduction start command with a setting to perform loop reproduction to the sound output LSI, and the sound output LSI side issues the above reproduction start command. Upon reception, the intro and loop sections are played first, and then the playback position is returned to the tip of the loop section (loop-in point), from the loop-in point to the rear end of the loop section (loop-out point). It may be configured to be repeatedly reproduced. Even with this configuration, as shown in FIG. 259 (b), the “intro portion” and the “loop portion” are reproduced, and then only the “loop portion” is reproduced in a loop.

On the other hand, in recent pachinko machines, so-called interactive sound expression that can change the BGM and sound effects according to the progress of the game is expected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to perform interactive sound expression, a highly interactive sound is configured so that commands and data can be exchanged bidirectionally between the MPU 92 of the voice emission control board 91 and the sound output LSI 97. Has realized the reproduction of. Therefore, the method of reproducing the "intro portion" and the "loop portion" and then reproducing only the "loop portion" in a loop is different from the method shown in FIG. 259 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. It has become. Hereinafter, the sound reproduced by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control board 91 and the sound output LSI 97 will be described in detail.

<< 6-3 >> Audio data structure:
FIG. 260 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the data structure of the data stored in the audio data ROM. The audio data ROM 98 of the present embodiment includes a sound data storage area 98a for a character stage that stores sound data corresponding to the content of the screen effect of the character stage (see FIG. 214) described above, and the sound data storage area 98a for the character stage described above. A sound data storage area 98b for a non-character stage is provided to store sound data corresponding to the content of the screen effect of the non-character stage (see FIG. 215). In addition to the two storage areas 98a and 98b, the voice data ROM 98 of the present embodiment stores various sound data corresponding to the contents of various effects, sound data such as sound effects and dialogues of various characters, and the like. Storage area is provided. In this embodiment, the voice data and the sound data are equivalent. Sound data is also acoustic data.

In the present embodiment, audio data in MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3) format is stored in the audio data ROM 98. However, any format can be adopted as the voice data. That is, the audio data may be in a data format in which the sound waveform is sampled by a linear pulse code fluctuation method, or may be data-compressed by various audio compression methods such as MP3 and AAC (Advanced Audio Coding). May be good. Further, a MIDI file compliant with the MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) standard for pronouncing various voices may be stored in the voice data ROM 98 as voice data. In this case, the sound output LSI 97 includes a MIDI sound module, reads a MIDI file for reproducing the type of sound instructed to start playback from the MPU 92 from the audio data ROM 98, and causes the MIDI sound module to sound according to the read MIDI file. Therefore, it may be configured to execute the reproduction of the sound.

In the example shown in FIG. 260, in the character system stage sound data storage area 98a, two types of sound data related to a specific music (hereinafter referred to as music A), that is, music A first data A1 and music A. The second data A2 is stored. In the present embodiment, as the music A, a music suitable for the screen production of the character stage is selected.

In the non-character stage sound data storage area 98b, two types of sound data related to a specific music (hereinafter referred to as music B) different from music A, that is, music B first data B1 and music B second. Data B2 is stored. In the present embodiment, as the music B, a music suitable for screen production of a non-character stage is selected.

FIG. 261 is an explanatory diagram showing each configuration of the first data A1 of the music A and the second data A2 of the music A. FIG. 261 (a) shows the structure of the first data A1 of the music A, and FIG. 261 (b) shows the structure of the second data A2 of the music A.

As shown in FIG. 261 (a), the music A first data A1 includes the music A first data_intro part A11, the music A first data_main part A12, and the music A first data_afterglow part A13. It consists of three parts. The three portions A11 to A13 are continuous in this order. That is, the three parts A11 to A13 are grouped so as to be continuously reproduced in this order. In other words, the music A first data_main part A12 is continuous with the music A first data_intro part A11 in the time axis direction of reproduction, and the music A first data_reverberation part A13 is music A first. 1 Data_main part A12 is continuous in the time axis direction of reproduction.

Music A In music A recorded in the first data A1, there is an intro part (prelude part or introduction part) as the beginning, there is a melody part following the intro part, and the part that ends with a lingering sound after the melody part ( There is a lingering part). The music A first data_intro part A11 records the intro part, the music A first data_main part A12 records the melody part, and the music A first data_afterglow part A13 records the above-mentioned afterglow. I'm recording the part. The melody portion has a length of, for example, 4 bars, 8 bars, or the like.

The lingering part will be further described. When, for example, an orchestral piece is adopted as the piece A, the sound of a stringed instrument or a percussion instrument leaves a relatively long lingering sound. Therefore, it is possible that a long lingering sound of a stringed instrument, a percussion instrument, or the like does not end at the end of the melody portion. In the present embodiment, by providing the music A first data_afterglow part A13 continuously at the end of the music A first data_main part A12, a relatively long afterglow of a stringed instrument, a percussion instrument, or the like can be reproduced. The first data of the music A_afterglow part A13 does not necessarily include the afterglow of the sound of a stringed instrument or a percussion instrument, and any data as long as the sound accompanying the melody portion is recorded. Is also good. Here, the sound accompanying the melody part is a sound that the player does not feel uncomfortable when the sound of the data recorded in the first data_afterglow part A13 of the music A is switched from the sound of the melody part. Yes, it means the sound that follows the melody part. Further, the sound accompanying the melody part can be said to be a sound succeeding from the sound of the last sound data of the melody part. Further, the music A first data_afterglow portion A13 may be a portion for recording a sound independent of the music A first data_main unit A12. The data length of the first data of the music A_the lingering part A13 is determined experimentally or by simulation so as to be a length that can at least exceed the delay period Δt described later at the time of reproduction.

As shown in FIG. 261 (b), the music A second data A2 is composed of two parts, the music A second data_main part A21 and the music A second data_afterglow part A22. The two parts A21 and A22 are continuous in this order. That is, the two parts A21 and A22 are grouped so as to be continuously reproduced in this order. In other words, the second data of the music A_the lingering part A22 is continuous with respect to the second data of the music A_the main part A21 in the time axis direction of reproduction. The second data of the music A_main part A21 is the same data as the first data of the music A_main part A12. The second data of the music A_afterglow part A22 is the same data as the first data of the music A_afterglow part A13. That is, the music A second data A2 is different from the music A first data A1 in that it does not have an intro portion, and the portion excluding the intro portion of the music A first data A1 (music A first data_ It coincides with the main part A12 and the music A first data_afterglow part A13).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, both the music A first data A1 and the music A second data A2 described above are used when the music A composed of the intro portion and the loop portion is reproduced on the character system stage. The specific procedure of reproduction using both data A1 and A2 will be described in detail later.

FIG. 262 is an explanatory diagram showing each configuration of the first data B1 of the music B and the second data B2 of the music B. FIG. 262 (a) shows the structure of the first data B1 of the music B, and FIG. 262 (b) shows the structure of the second data B2 of the music B.

As shown in FIG. 262 (a), the music B first data B1 includes the music B first data_intro part B11, the music B first data_main part B12, and the music B first data_afterglow part B13. It is composed of three parts. That is, the music B first data B1 is the music B first data_intro part B11 recording the intro portion of the music and the melody of the music, similarly to the music A first data A1 (FIG. 261 (a)). It includes a musical piece B first data_main part B12 in which a portion is recorded, and a musical piece B first data_reverberation portion B13 in which a lingering portion of the musical piece is recorded. The data length of the first data of the music B_the lingering part B13 is determined experimentally or by simulation so as to be a length that can at least exceed the delay period Δt described later at the time of reproduction.

As shown in FIG. 262 (b), the music B second data B2 is composed of two parts, the music B second data_main part B21 and the music B second data_afterglow part B22. That is, the music B second data B2 is the music B second data_main part B21 in which the melody part of the music is recorded, and the afterglow of the music, similarly to the music B second data B1 (FIG. 261 (b)). It includes music B second data_afterglow portion B22 in which a portion is recorded.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, both the above-mentioned music B first data B1 and music B second data B2 are used when the music B composed of the intro portion and the loop portion is reproduced on the non-character stage. .. The specific procedure of reproduction using both data B1 and B2 will be described in detail later.

<< 6-4 >> Outline of processing by the gaming machine:
Next, an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 263 is a timing chart showing a reproduction procedure for the music A in the sound output LSI 97. FIG. 263 shows the music A first data A1 reproduced on the audio channel 1 and the music A second data A2 repeatedly reproduced on the audio channel 1 in the sound output LSI 97, and the performance obtained as a result of these reproductions. The content of the form is shown.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the background images of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are character-based stages, the music A is reproduced in the sound output LSI 97 by the following procedure. At the time of transition to the character stage, the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 (see FIG. 258, hereinafter referred to as “sound light side MPU 92”) first commands the sound output LSI 97 to start playing music A first data. CA1 is transmitted (time t1). The music A first data reproduction start command CA1 is a command to start the reproduction of the music A first data A1 as the reproduction target, and the audio channel to be reproduced is the first of 16 audio channels. Includes a setting for the third audio channel (hereinafter referred to as "audio channel 1"). It should be noted that it is not necessary to be limited to the first audio channel, and any other specific audio channel can be used.

When the sound output LSI 97 receives the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 from the sound light side MPU 92, the music A first data reproduction is performed on the audio channel 1 designated by the music A first data reproduction start command CA1. The process of reproducing the music A first data A1 to be reproduced specified by the start command CA1 is started. Specifically, when the sound output LSI 97 receives the music A first data reproduction start command CA1, the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 designated by the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 from the audio data ROM 98 is the music A first to be reproduced. 1 Data A1 is specified, the specified music A first data A1 is sequentially read from the beginning, and the sound based on the read music A first data A1 is sounded by the music A first data reproduction start command CA1. In, sequentially generate (that is, regenerate). Then, the sound output LSI 97 sequentially outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46. In this way, in the audio channel 1, the music A first data A1 starts the sound generation and output from the tip of the music A first data_intro unit A11, and the sound is generated toward the end of the music A first data A1. And output follows. In the sound output LSI 97, a delay of a predetermined period occurs from the timing (time t1) when the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 is received until the sound is generated (that is, reproduced) (this period Δt). Is also hereinafter referred to as “delay period Δt”). The main cause of the delay is to specify the music A first data A1 to be played back specified by the music A first data playback start command CA1 from the audio data ROM 98, and the specified music A first data. This is because it takes a considerable amount of time to read the beginning of A1. That is, after the delay period Δt has elapsed from the timing (time t1) when the sound output LSI 97 receives the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 (time t1 + Δt), the music A first data A1 is reproduced from the speaker 46. Output. Also in the example shown in FIG. 259, the delay period is delayed from the timing when the reproduction start command is received, but in FIG. 259, it is shown that the delay does not occur for the sake of simplification of the explanation.

Returning to FIG. 263, the sound light side MPU 92 is set to the sound output LSI 97 at the timing when the reproduction position of the music A first data A1 in the voice channel 1 reaches the end of the music A first data_main part A12 (time t2). In response to this, the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is transmitted. The music A second data reproduction command CA2 is a command to start the reproduction of the music A second data A2 as the reproduction target, and includes a setting that the audio channel to be reproduced is the audio channel 1.

In the present embodiment, the sound output LSI 97 is configured so that the reproduction position of the data being reproduced, that is, the position of the generated sound in the data being reproduced can be sequentially grasped. By communicating with the MPU 92 (sound light side MPU 92) of the voice emission control device 90, the reproduction position of the data being reproduced can be transmitted to the sound light side MPU 92. Based on the reproduction position of the data being reproduced received from the sound output LSI 97, the sound light side MPU 92 determines whether or not the reproduction position is the timing at which the end of the first data_main part A12 of the music A is reached. .. In addition, instead of this configuration, the voice emission control device 90 side has a configuration in which the arrival time until the reproduction position reaches the end of the first data_main part A12 of the music A is stored in advance from the start of reproduction. From whether or not the time has reached the arrival time, it may be configured to determine whether or not the reproduction position is the timing when the end of the first data_main part A12 of the music A is reached.

When the sound output LSI 97 receives the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 from the sound light side MPU 92, the music A second data reproduction start in the audio channel 1 designated by the music A second data reproduction start command CA2. The process of reproducing the second data A2 of the music A to be reproduced specified by the command CA2 is started. Specifically, when the sound output LSI 97 receives the music A second data reproduction start command CA2, the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 designated by the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 from the audio data ROM 98 is the music Ath to be reproduced. 2 The data A2 is specified, the specified music A second data A2 is sequentially read from the beginning, and the sound based on the read music A second data A2 is sounded by the music A second data reproduction start command CA2. In, sequentially generate (that is, regenerate). Until just before the sound based on the second data A2 of the music A is generated, the sound based on the first data A1 of the music A is generated, and the generated sound is from the sound based on the first data A1 of the music A. The sound is switched to the sound based on the second data A2 of the music A. Then, the sound output LSI 97 sequentially outputs the sound based on the generated music A second data A2 from the speaker 46. In this way, in the audio channel 1, the music A second data A2 starts to generate and output the sound from the tip of the music A second data_main part A21, and the sound is generated toward the end of the music A second data A2. And output follows.

In the sound output LSI 97, there is a delay of a delay period Δt from the timing (time t2) when the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is received until the sound of the music A second data A2 is generated (that is, reproduced). Occurs. The main cause of the delay is to specify the music A second data A2 to be played back specified by the music A second data playback start command CA2 from the audio data ROM 98, and the specified music A second data. This is because it takes a considerable amount of time to read the beginning of A2. That is, after the delay period Δt has elapsed from the timing (time t2) when the sound output LSI 97 receives the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 (time t2 + Δt), the sound of the music A second data A2 is reproduced and the speaker. Output from 46. In the delay period Δt, the sounds of the music A first data_main part A12 continuous to the end of the music A first data_reverberation part A13 are continuously generated, and are generated when the delay period Δt elapses. The sound to be played is switched to the sound of the second data A2 of the music A.

After that, the sound-light side MPU 92 refers to the sound output LSI 97 at the timing when the reproduction position of the music A second data A2 in the audio channel 1 reaches the end of the music A second data_main part A21 (time t3). Music A The second data reproduction start command CA2 is transmitted again. The music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is the same as the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 transmitted at time t2, and is a command for starting the reproduction of the music A second data A2 on the audio channel 1 again. Is. In order to distinguish the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 received at time t3 from the first music A second data reproduction start command CA2, the second music A second data reproduction start is started as necessary. Called command CA2. Whether or not the reproduction position is the timing to reach the end of the second data_main part A21 of the music A is determined based on the reproduction position of the data being reproduced received from the sound output LSI 97. In addition, instead of this configuration, the voice emission control device 90 side has a configuration in which the arrival time until the reproduction position reaches the end of the second data_main part A21 of the music A is stored in advance from the start of reproduction. From whether or not the time has reached the arrival time, it may be configured to determine whether or not the reproduction position is the timing when the end of the second data_main part A21 of the music A is reached.

When the sound output LSI 97 receives the second music A second data reproduction start command CA2 from the sound light side MPU 92, the music output LSI 97 is the music A to be reproduced specified by the second music A second data reproduction start command CA2. 2 Start playing the data A2. Specifically, when the sound output LSI 97 receives the second music A second data reproduction start command CA2, it is designated by the second music A second data reproduction start command CA2 from the audio data ROM 98. The music A second data A2 to be played back (hereinafter, also referred to as the second music A second data A2) is specified, and the specified second music A second data A2 is sequentially read from the beginning and read music A. The sound based on the second data A2 is sequentially generated (that is, reproduced) as the audio channel 1. Until just before the sound based on the second music A second data A2 is generated, the sound based on the first music A first data A1 is generated, and the generated sound is the first music. The sound based on the first data A1 is switched to the sound based on the second music A second data A2. Then, the sound output LSI 97 sequentially outputs the sound based on the generated music A second data A2 from the speaker 46. In this way, in the audio channel 1, the second music A second data A2 starts to generate and output sound from the tip of the music A second data_intro unit A21, and the end of the second music A second data A2. Sound generation and output continues toward.

In the sound output LSI 97, from the timing (time t3) when the second music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is received to the time when the sound of the second music A second data A2 is generated (that is, reproduced). , A delay with a delay period of Δt occurs. The main factor that causes the delay is the same as the delay that occurs after the time t2. That is, after the delay period Δt has elapsed from the timing (time t3) when the sound output LSI 97 received the second music A second data reproduction start command CA2 (time t3 + Δt), the second music A second data A2 The sound is reproduced and output from the speaker 46. In the delay period Δt following the time t3, the sound of the first music A second data A2 music A second data_main part A21 continuous music A second data_afterglow part A22 continues. The generated sound is switched to the sound of the second music A second data A2 when the delay period Δt elapses. In this way, the music A second data A2 is repeatedly played.

As described above, after the first data A1 of the music A is reproduced, the second data A2 of the music A is repeatedly reproduced to realize the loop reproduction of the melody portion of the music A. This loop playback is performed until the character stage is completed. At the end of the character stage, the sound light side MPU 92 sends a music A second data reproduction end command to the sound output LSI 97, and the sound output LSI 97 receives the music A second data reproduction end command from the sound light side MPU 92. , Ends the loop playback of the second data A2 of the music A.

In the above description, in the sound output LSI 97, the delay period generated from the timing (time t1) when the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 is received until the sound is reproduced, and the first music A second data. The sound is reproduced from the delay period generated from the timing when the reproduction start command CA2 is received (time t2) to the reproduction of the sound and the timing (time t3) when the second music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is received. The delay periods that occur up to are shown as the same Δt, but these delay periods Δt are not necessarily the same temporal length. Although the delay period Δt may be different depending on the length of the data to be reproduced and the like, in the present embodiment, the delay period is shown as Δt as having the same temporal length for convenience.

FIG. 264 is a timing chart showing a reproduction procedure for the music B in the sound output LSI 97. FIG. 264 shows the music B first data B1 reproduced on the audio channel 1 and the music B second data B2 repeatedly reproduced on the audio channel 1 in the sound output LSI 97, and the performance obtained as a result of these reproductions. The content of the form is shown.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the background image is a non-character stage, the music B is reproduced in the sound output LSI 97 by the procedure shown in FIG. 264.

The content of FIG. 264 is similar to the content of FIG. 263. The content of FIG. 264 is different from the content of FIG. 263 only in that the description of "musical piece A" is replaced with the description of "musical piece B". That is, "musical piece A first data A1" is replaced with "musical piece B first data B1", "musical piece A second data A2" is replaced with "musical piece B second data B2", and "musical piece A first data reproduction start". "Command CA1" is replaced with "Music B first data reproduction start command CB1", and "Music A second data reproduction start command CA2" is replaced with "Music B second data reproduction start command CB2". The timing at which the music B first data reproduction start command CB1 and the music B second data reproduction start command CB2 are output is the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 and the music A second data reproduction start command CA2. It is the same as the timing. Further, there is a delay of the delay period Δt from the timing (time t1) when the music B first data reproduction start command CB1 is received until the sound of the music B first data B1 is actually output from the speaker 46. It is shown in FIG. 263 that a delay of Δt occurs from the timing (time t2, t3) when the second data reproduction start command CB2 is received until the sound of the music B second data B2 is actually output from the speaker 46. It is the same.

As shown in the figure, the loop reproduction of the melody portion of the music B is realized by repeatedly reproducing the music B first data B1 and then the music B second data B2. This loop playback is performed until the non-character stage is completed. At the end of the non-character stage, the sound light side MPU 92 sends a music B second data reproduction end command to the sound output LSI 97, and the sound output LSI 97 receives a music B second data reproduction end command from the sound light side MPU 92. Then, the loop reproduction of the music B second data B2 is terminated.

Returning to the reproduction of the musical piece A on the character stage shown in FIG. 263. According to the configuration shown in FIG. 263, the loop reproduction of the melody part of the music A is realized by repeatedly reproducing the music A second data A2 after the music A first data A1 is reproduced. A 1st data A1 music A 1st data_main part A12 end sound is output from the speaker 46 (time t2), music A 2nd data A2 music A 2nd data_main part A21 tip There is a delay of Δt in the delay period before the sound of is output from the speaker 46. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the music A first data A1 is configured to include the music A first data_main part A12 and the music A first data_reverberation part A13 continuous in the time axis direction. Then, in the delay period Δt, the sound of the music A first data_afterglow portion A13 is output. Therefore, the sound is not interrupted between the melody part of the music A and the melody part of the music A at the time of repetition (that is, the delay period Δt).

Next, the present embodiment will be compared with the reference example. FIG. 265 is an explanatory diagram showing the structure of data for the musical piece A and the playing mode in the reference example. FIG. 265 (a) shows the structure of the reference example music A first data X1, and FIG. 265 (b) shows the structure of the reference example music A second data X2. FIG. 265 (b) shows the performance form obtained by both data X1 and X2.

In the reference example, the reference example music A first data X1 and the reference example music A second data X2 are stored in the audio data ROM. The music A first data X1 for reference example corresponds to the music A first data A1 (FIG. 261) in the present embodiment, and the music A first data_intro part X11 and the music A first data_main part X12. It is composed of two parts, The music A first data_intro unit X11 is the same data as the music A first data_intro unit A11 in the present embodiment. The music A first data_main part X12 is the same data as the music A first data_main part A12 in the present embodiment. That is, the music A first data X1 for reference example has a configuration in which the music A first data_afterglow portion A13 is absent as compared with the music A first data A1 in the present embodiment.

The music A second data X2 for reference example corresponds to the music A second data A2 (FIG. 261) in the present embodiment, and is composed of the music A second data_main part X21. The music A second data_main part X21 is the same data as the music A second data_main part A21 in the present embodiment. That is, the music A second data X2 for reference example has a configuration in which the music A second data_afterglow portion A22 is absent as compared with the music A second data A2 in the present embodiment.

Similar to the present embodiment, consider a case where the music A second data X2 is reproduced after the music A first data X1 is reproduced. Similar to the present embodiment, the sound / light side MPU is a reference example music for the sound output LSI at the timing when the reproduction position of the music A first data X1 reaches the end of the music A first data_main part X12. A. The configuration is such that the second data reproduction start command is transmitted. According to this configuration, a delay period Δt occurs from the timing when the reference example music A second data reproduction start command is received until the sound of the music A second data_main part X21 is actually output from the speaker 46. do. Since the music A first data X1 for reference example does not have a continuous lingering part in the music A first data_main part X12, the delay period Δt is in a silent state. The delay period Δt is a relatively short time, for example, several tens of msec, but the player feels a sense of incongruity that the BGM cannot be easily noticed and interrupted in the middle of the silence.

On the other hand, since the music A first data A1 in the present embodiment includes the music A first data_main part A12 and the music A first data_afterglow part A13, as described above, it is a reference example. In the delay period Δt between the melody part of the music A and the melody part of the music A, the sound of the music A first data_afterglow part A13 is output, and the sound is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the sound is interrupted in the BGM when the character is on the stage. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the sound is not interrupted even in the delay period Δt when the second data A2 of the music A is repeatedly reproduced.

Similarly, the sound also has a delay period Δt when the music B first data A1 is reproduced and then the music B second data A2 is repeatedly reproduced, and a delay period Δt when the music B second data B2 is repeatedly reproduced. Is uninterrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the sound is interrupted even in the BGM when the player is on the non-character stage.

<< 6-5 >> Various processes executed in the voice emission control device:
Next, an example of a specific process executed by the voice emission control device 90 will be described. Since the processing executed by the main control device 60 and the processing executed by the display control device 100 are the same as those of the fifth embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted in this embodiment.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 (hereinafter, referred to as a sound light side MPU 92). The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed with a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). This timer interrupt process is largely the same as the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 237) executed in the sound light side MPU 92 in the fifth embodiment, with only a partial difference. Specifically, the timer interrupt processing steps Sq0101 and Sq0102 are the same as the timer interrupt processing steps Sp1701 and Sp1702 in the fifth embodiment. Step Sq0103 following step Sq0102 of this timer interrupt process is a newly added step. Steps Sq0104 to Sq0110 of the timer interrupt process are the same as steps Sp1703 to Step Sp1709 of the timer interrupt process in the fifth embodiment.

In step Sq0103, the BGM process is executed. In the BGM processing, processing such as setting and playback of BGM music is performed. The details of the processing for BGM will be described later. After executing step Sq0103, the process proceeds to step Sq0104.

<Processing for BGM>
Next, the BGM processing will be described. The BGM processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 266: Sq0103).

FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing the processing for BGM. In step Sq0201, the BGM reproduction start process is executed. In the BGM playback start process, when the non-character stage is transitioned to the character stage, or when the character stage is transitioned to the non-character stage, the sound output LSI 97 is subjected to the music A first data A1 or the music A as the BGM. The process of instructing the start of reproduction of the music B first data B1 is executed. The details of the BGM reproduction start processing will be described later. After executing step Sq0201, the process proceeds to step Sq0202.

In step Sq0202, the BGM continuous reproduction process is executed. In the BGM continuous reproduction, the sound output LSI 97 is repeatedly instructed to start the reproduction of the music A second data A2 or the music B second data B2. The details of the BGM continuous reproduction process will be described later. After executing step Sq0202, the process for this BGM is terminated.

<BGM playback start processing>
Next, the BGM reproduction start processing will be described. The BGM reproduction start process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the BGM process (FIG. 267: Sq0201).

FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing the BGM reproduction start process. In step Sq0301, it is determined whether or not the power switch 88 is the first execution time from the time when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (when the power is turned on). If it is determined in step Sq0301 that it is the first execution time from the time when the power is turned on (Sq0301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0302.

In step Sq0302, the music B first data reproduction start command CB1 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97. The music B first data reproduction start command CB1 is a command to start the reproduction of the music B first data B1 as the reproduction target, and includes a setting that the audio channel to be reproduced is the audio channel 1. After executing step Sq0302, the process proceeds to step Sq0303.

In step Sq0303, the old character stage determination value XVS is set to 0, which means that the stage is a non-character stage. The old character-based stage determination value XVS is a value for indicating the value of the character-based stage determination value VS in the previous round when the BGM reproduction start processing is executed. As described in the fifth embodiment, the character-based stage determination value VS is a value for determining whether the stage is in the character-based stage or the non-character-based stage, and when it is 1, the character-based stage is determined. It means that it is on the stage, and when it is not 1 (= 0), it means that it is on the non-character stage. After executing step Sq0303, the BGM reproduction start process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0301 that it is not the first execution time from the time when the power is turned on (Sq0301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0304.

In step Sq0304, it is determined whether or not the character-based stage determination value VS matches the old character-based stage determination value XVS. According to this determination process, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the character-based stage determination value VS at the time of transition from the previous time when the BGM reproduction start process is executed to this time. In step Sq0304, when it is determined that the character-based stage determination value VS matches the old character-based stage determination value XVS, that is, when it is determined that there is no change in the character-based stage determination value VS. (Sq0304: YES), this BGM reproduction start processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sq0304, when it is determined that the character-based stage determination value VS does not match the old character-based stage determination value XVS, that is, when it is determined that there is a change in the character-based stage determination value VS. (Sq0304: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0305.

In step Sq0305, it is determined whether or not the character stage determination value VS is 1. In step Sq0305, if the character-based stage determination value VS is 1, that is, if it is determined that the current stage is in the character-based stage (Sq0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0306.

In step Sq0306, the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97. The music A first data reproduction start command CA1 is a command to start the reproduction of the music A first data A1 as the reproduction target, and includes a setting that the audio channel to be reproduced is the audio channel 1. After executing step Sq0306, the process proceeds to step Sq0307.

In step Sq0307, a process of transferring the value of the character-based stage determination value VS to the old character-based stage determination value XVS is performed. After executing step Sq0307, the present BGM reproduction start process is terminated.

In step Sq0305, if the character-based stage determination value VS is not 1, that is, if it is determined that the current stage is in the non-character-based stage (Sq0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0308.

In step Sq0308, the music B first data reproduction start command CB1 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97. The music B first data reproduction start command CB1 is a command to start the reproduction of the music B first data B1 as the reproduction target, and includes a setting that the audio channel to be reproduced is the audio channel 1. This step Sq0308 is the same as the process of step Sq0302. After executing step Sq0302, the process proceeds to step Sq0307, the value of the character-based stage determination value VS is transferred to the old character-based stage determination value XVS, and then the BGM reproduction start process is terminated.

<BGM continuous playback processing>
Next, the BGM continuous reproduction process will be described. The BGM continuous reproduction process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the BGM process (FIG. 267: Sq0202).

FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing the BGM continuous reproduction process. In step Sq0401, it is determined whether or not the music A first data A1 is reproduced in the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position is the timing when the end of the music A first data_main part A12 is reached. In this determination, information indicating the type of data being reproduced and information indicating the reproduction position of the data being reproduced are received from the sound output LSI 97, and based on these information, the music A in the audio channel 1 is determined. 1 It is determined whether or not the data A1 is reproduced and the reproduction position is the timing when the end of the music A first data_main part A12 is reached. In addition, instead of this configuration, the voice emission control device 90 side has a configuration in which the arrival time until the reproduction position reaches the end of the first data_main part A12 of the music A is stored in advance, and the reproduction start transmitted immediately before is performed. The determination may be made depending on the type of command and whether or not the time from the start of reproduction has reached the arrival time. In step Sq0401, when the music A first data A1 is reproduced in the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position is determined to be the timing when the end of the music A first data_main part A12 is reached (Sq0401). : YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0402.

In step Sq0402, the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97. The music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is a command to start the reproduction of the music A second data A2 as the reproduction target, and includes a setting that the audio channel to be reproduced is the audio channel 1. After executing step Sq0402, the process proceeds to step Sq0403.

On the other hand, in step Sq0401, the music A first data A1 is not reproduced in the audio channel 1, or the music A first data A1 is reproduced in the audio channel 1, and the reproduction position is the music A first data_main. If it is determined that it is not the timing to reach the end of the unit A12 (Sq0401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0403 without executing step Sq0402.

In step Sq0403, it is determined whether or not the music B first data B1 is reproduced in the voice channel 1 and the reproduction position is the timing when the end of the music B first data_main part B12 is reached. In this determination, information indicating the type of data being reproduced and information indicating the reproduction position of the data being reproduced are received from the sound output LSI 97, and based on these information, the music B in the audio channel 1 is determined. 1 It is determined whether or not the data B1 is reproduced and the reproduction position is the timing when the end of the music B first data_main part B12 is reached. In addition, instead of this configuration, the voice emission control device 90 side has a configuration in which the arrival time until the reproduction position reaches the end of the music B first data_main part B12 is stored in advance, and the reproduction start transmitted immediately before is performed. The determination may be made depending on the type of command and whether or not the time from the start of reproduction has reached the arrival time. In step Sq0403, when it is determined that the music B first data B1 is reproduced in the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position reaches the end of the music B first data_main part B12 (Sq0403). : YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0404.

In step Sq0404, the music B second data reproduction start command CB2 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97. The music B second data reproduction start command CB2 is a command to start the reproduction of the music B second data B2 as the reproduction target, and includes a setting that the audio channel to be reproduced is the audio channel 1. After executing step Sq0404, the process proceeds to step Sq0405.

On the other hand, in step Sq0403, the music B first data B1 is not reproduced in the audio channel 1, or the music B first data B1 is reproduced in the audio channel 1, and the reproduction position is the music B first data_main. If it is determined that it is not the timing to reach the end of the unit B12 (Sq0403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0405 without executing step Sq0404.

In step Sq0405, it is determined whether or not the music A second data A2 is reproduced in the voice channel 1 and the reproduction position is the timing when the end of the music A second data_main part A21 is reached. In this determination, information indicating the type of data being reproduced and information indicating the reproduction position of the data being reproduced are received from the sound output LSI 97, and based on these information, the music A in the audio channel 1 is determined. 2 It is determined whether or not the data A2 is reproduced and the reproduction position is the timing when the end of the second data_main part A21 of the music A is reached. In addition, instead of this configuration, the voice emission control device 90 side has a configuration in which the arrival time until the reproduction position reaches the end of the second data_main part A21 of the music A is stored in advance, and the reproduction start transmitted immediately before is performed. The determination may be made depending on the type of command and whether or not the time from the start of reproduction has reached the arrival time. In step Sq0405, when the music A second data A2 is reproduced in the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position is determined to be the timing when the end of the music A second data_main part A21 is reached (Sq0405). : YES), proceed to step Sq0406.

In step Sq0406, the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97. The music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is a command to start the reproduction of the music A second data A2 as the reproduction target, and includes a setting that the audio channel to be reproduced is the audio channel 1. The process of step Sq0406 is the same as the process of step Sq0402. After executing step Sq0406, the process proceeds to step Sq0407.

On the other hand, in step Sq0405, the music A second data A2 is not reproduced in the audio channel 1, or the music A second data A2 is reproduced in the audio channel 1, and the reproduction position is the music A second data_main. If it is determined that it is not the timing to reach the end of the unit A21 (Sq0405: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0407 without executing step Sq0406.

In step Sq0407, it is determined whether or not the music B second data B2 is reproduced in the voice channel 1 and the reproduction position is the timing when the end of the music B second data_main part B21 is reached. In this determination, information indicating the type of data being reproduced and information indicating the reproduction position of the data being reproduced are received from the sound output LSI 97, and based on these information, the music B in the audio channel 1 is determined. 2 It is determined whether or not the data B2 is reproduced and the reproduction position is the timing when the end of the second data_main part B21 of the music B is reached. In addition, instead of this configuration, the voice emission control device 90 side has a configuration in which the arrival time until the reproduction position reaches the end of the second data of the music B_main part B21 is stored in advance, and the reproduction started immediately before. The determination may be made depending on the type of command and whether or not the time from the start of reproduction has reached the arrival time. In step Sq0407, when the music B second data B2 is reproduced in the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position is determined to be the timing when the end of the music B second data_main part B21 is reached (Sq0407). : YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0408.

In step Sq0408, the music B second data reproduction start command CB2 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97. The music B second data reproduction start command CB2 is a command to start the reproduction of the music B second data B2 as the reproduction target, and includes a setting that the audio channel to be reproduced is the audio channel 1. The process of step Sq0408 is the same as the process of step Sq0404. After executing step Sq0408, the present BGM continuous reproduction process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sq0407, the music B second data B2 is not reproduced in the audio channel 1, or the music B second data B2 is reproduced in the audio channel 1, and the reproduction position is the music B second data_main. If it is determined that it is not the timing to reach the end of unit B21 (Sq0407: NO), the BGM continuous reproduction process is terminated without executing step Sq0408.

<< 6-6 >> Processing executed in the sound output LSI:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the sound output LSI 97 will be described.

<Playback start execution process>
FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing a reproduction start execution process executed by the sound output LSI 97. The reproduction start execution process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec).

In step Sq0501, it is determined whether or not the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 has been received. If it is determined in step Sq0501 that the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 has been received (Sq0501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0502.

In step Sq0502, the process of reproducing the music A first data A1 to be reproduced specified by the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 on the audio channel 1 designated by the received music A first data reproduction start command CA1. To start. Specifically, the sound output LSI 97 specifies the music A first data A1 to be reproduced specified by the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 from the audio data ROM 98, and the specified music A first data A1. Is sequentially read from the beginning, and the sound based on the read music A first data A1 is sequentially generated (that is, reproduced) in the audio channel 1 designated by the music A first data reproduction start command CA1. Then, the sound output LSI 97 sequentially outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46. In this way, in the audio channel 1, the music A first data A1 starts the sound generation and output from the tip of the music A first data_intro unit A11, and the sound is generated toward the end of the music A first data A1. And output follows. In the sound output LSI 97, a delay period Δt occurs from the timing when the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 is received until the sound of the music A first data A1 is generated (that is, reproduced). The main cause of the delay is to specify the music A first data A1 to be played back specified by the music A first data playback start command CA1 from the audio data ROM 98, and the specified music A first data. This is because it takes a considerable amount of time to read the beginning of A1. That is, after the delay period Δt has elapsed from the timing when the sound output LSI 97 receives the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 (time t1 in FIG. 263) (time t1 + Δt), the sound of the music A first data A1 is reproduced. And output from the speaker 46. After executing step Sq0502, the process proceeds to step Sq0503.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0501 that the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 has not been received (Sq0501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0503 without executing step Sq0502.

In step Sq0503, it is determined whether or not the music B first data reproduction start command CB1 has been received. If it is determined in step Sq0503 that the music B first data reproduction start command CB1 has been received (Sq0503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0504.

In step Sq0504, the process of reproducing the music B first data B1 to be reproduced specified by the music B first data reproduction start command CB1 in the audio channel 1 designated by the received music B first data reproduction start command CB1. To start. Specifically, the sound output LSI 97 specifies the music B first data B1 to be reproduced specified by the music B first data reproduction start command CB1 from the audio data ROM 98, and the specified music B first data B1. Is sequentially read from the beginning, and the sound based on the read music B first data B1 is sequentially generated (that is, reproduced) in the audio channel 1 designated by the music B first data reproduction start command CB1. Then, the sound output LSI 97 sequentially outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46. In this way, in the audio channel 1, the music B first data B1 starts the sound generation and output from the tip of the music B first data_intro unit B11, and the sound is generated toward the end of the music B first data B1. And output follows. In the sound output LSI 97, a delay period Δt occurs from the timing when the music B first data reproduction start command CB1 is received until the sound of the music B first data B1 is generated (that is, reproduced). That is, after the delay period Δt has elapsed from the timing when the sound output LSI 97 receives the music B first data reproduction start command CB1 (time t1 in FIG. 264) (time t1 + Δt), the sound of the music B first data B1 is reproduced. And output from the speaker 46. After executing step Sq0504, the process proceeds to step Sq0505.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0503 that the music B first data reproduction start command CB1 has not been received (Sq0503: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0505 without executing step Sq0504.

In step Sq0505, it is determined whether or not the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 has been received. If it is determined in step Sq0505 that the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 has been received (Sq0505: YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0506.

In step Sq0506, the process of reproducing the music A second data A2 to be reproduced specified by the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 on the audio channel 1 designated by the received music A second data reproduction start command CA2. To start. Specifically, the sound output LSI 97 specifies the music A second data A2 to be reproduced specified by the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 from the audio data ROM 98, and the specified music A second data A2. Is sequentially read from the beginning, and the sound based on the read music A second data A2 is sequentially generated (that is, reproduced) in the audio channel 1 designated by the music A second data reproduction start command CA2. Then, the sound output LSI 97 sequentially outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46. In this way, in the audio channel 1, the music A second data A2 starts the sound generation and output from the tip of the music A second data_main part A21, and the sound is generated toward the end of the music A second data A2. And output follows. In the sound output LSI 97, from the timing when the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is received (time t2, time t3 in FIG. 263) to the time when the sound of the music A second data A2 is generated (that is, reproduced). , A delay with a delay period of Δt occurs. When the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 received in step Sq0505 is the first music A second data reproduction start command CA2, in the delay period Δt, the end of the music A first data_main part A12. The sound of the music A first data_afterglow portion A13 that is continuous to the music A is continuously generated, and the generated sound is switched to the sound of the music A second data A2 when the delay period Δt elapses. If the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 received in step Sq0505 is the second or subsequent music A second data reproduction start command CA2, the previous music A second data A2 is set in the delay period Δt. The sound of the music A second data_main part A21 continuous music A second data_afterglow part A22 is continuously generated, and the generated sound is repeated when the delay period Δt elapses. It becomes the sound of the music A second data A2. After executing step Sq0506, the process proceeds to step Sq0507.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0505 that the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 has not been received (Sq0505: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0507 without executing step Sq0506.

In step Sq0507, it is determined whether or not the music B second data reproduction start command CB2 has been received. If it is determined in step Sq0507 that the music B second data reproduction start command CB2 has been received (Sq0507: YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0508.

In step Sq0508, the process of reproducing the music B second data B2 to be reproduced specified by the music B second data reproduction start command CB2 in the audio channel 1 designated by the received music B second data reproduction start command CB2. To start. Specifically, the sound output LSI 97 specifies the music B second data B2 to be reproduced specified by the music B second data reproduction start command CB2 from the audio data ROM 98, and the specified music B second data B2. Is sequentially read from the beginning, and the sound based on the read music B second data B2 is sequentially generated (that is, played) in the audio channel 1 designated by the music B second data reproduction start command CB2. Then, the sound output LSI 97 sequentially outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46. In this way, in the audio channel 1, the music B second data B2 starts to generate and output the sound from the tip of the music B second data_main part B21, and the sound is generated toward the end of the music B second data B2. And output follows. In the sound output LSI 97, from the timing when the music B second data reproduction start command CB2 is received (time t2, time t3 in FIG. 264) to the time when the sound of the music A second data A2 is generated (that is, reproduced). , A delay with a delay period of Δt occurs. When the music B second data reproduction start command CB2 received in step Sq0507 is the first music B second data reproduction start command CB2, in the delay period Δt, the end of the music B first data_main part B12. The sound of the music B first data_afterglow portion A13 that is continuous to the music B is continuously generated, and the generated sound is switched to the sound of the music B second data B2 when the delay period Δt elapses. If the music B second data reproduction start command CB2 received in step Sq0507 is the music B second data reproduction start command CB2 for the second and subsequent times, in the delay period Δt, the previous music B second data B2 The sound of the music B second data_main part B21 continuous to the end of the music B second data_afterglow part B22 is continuously generated, and when the delay period Δt elapses, the generated sound is It becomes the sound of the previous music B second data B2 to the later music B second data B2. After executing step Sq0508, the main reproduction start execution process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0507 that the music B second data reproduction start command CB2 has not been received (Sq0507: NO), the main reproduction start execution process is terminated without executing step Sq0508.

<< 6-7 >> Action / Effect:
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the background image is a character stage, the MPU92 (sound light side MPU92) of the sound emission control device 90 makes the music Ath to the sound output LSI 97. 1 The data reproduction start command CA1 is transmitted, and the sound output LSI 97 receives the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 to start the reproduction of the music A first data A1. After that, at the timing when the reproduction position of the music A first data A1 reproduced in the sound output LSI 97 reaches the end of the music A first data_main part A12 (time t2 in FIG. 263), the sound is produced by the sound / light side MPU 92. The music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is transmitted to the output LSI 97. The sound output LSI 97 receives the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 and starts the reproduction of the music A second data A2. In the sound output LSI 97, a delay period Δt occurs between the time when the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is received and the time when the music A second data A2 is started to be reproduced. As described above, according to the configuration of the reference example composed of the sound data having no lingering part after the melody part, the sound data has already been reproduced at the delay time Δt, and there is no sound. There was a problem that the sound was interrupted. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the music A first data A1 includes the music A first data_main part A12 and the music A first data_afterglow part A13. In the delay period Δt, the sound of the music A first data_afterglow portion A13 of the music A first data A1 is reproduced, and the sound is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the sound is interrupted in the sound related to the character stage. Similarly, in the sound related to the non-character stage, there is no sense of discomfort that the sound is interrupted in the reproduction between the music B first data B1 and the music B second data B2. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

You can also think of it as follows. According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the sound output LSI 97 starts the reproduction of the music A first data A1, and the reproduction position of the music A first data A1 is after the end of the music A first data_main part A12. The reproduction of the second data A2 of the music A is started at a predetermined timing within the range from the first data of the music A to the end of the afterglow portion A13. On the other hand, since the music A first data A1 includes the music A first data_main part A12 and the music A first data_reverberation part A13 that are continuous to the music A first data_main part A12, the music of the music A first data A1 in the delay period Δt. The sound of A first data_afterglow part A13 is reproduced, and the sound is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the sound is interrupted in the sound related to the production. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the music A first data_main part A12 connected to the music A first data_main part A12 is recorded in the music A first data_main part A12. Since the sound accompanying the melody part of the music A is recorded, the delay period Δt can be filled with the sound accompanying the melody part of the music A that has been flowing until immediately before. Therefore, even if the delay period Δt occurs, it is possible to eliminate the discomfort that the sound is interrupted without impairing the flow of the music.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the music A second data_main part A21 of the music A second data A2 is the data recorded in the music A first data_main part A12 of the music A first data A1. Since it is the same as the above, the melody portion of the music A recorded in the first data_main part A12 of the music A can be repeatedly reproduced.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the reproduction of the music A first data A1 and the reproduction of the music A second data A2 are performed on the same audio channel 1, so that the audio channel 1 is performed in the above-mentioned delay period Δt. Then, the sound of the music A first data_reverberation part A13 of the music A first data A1 is reproduced, and when the delay period Δt elapses, the sound of the music A second data A2 is the music A first data on the audio channel 1. _The sound of the afterglow part A13 is switched and played. As a result, the sound of the music A first data A1 can be reliably switched to the sound of the music A second data A2 without interruption.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the background image is a character stage, the sound light side MPU 92 transmits the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 to the sound output LSI 97, and the sound output LSI 97 transmits the music A second data reproduction start command CA2. Upon receiving the music A second data reproduction start command CA2, the reproduction of the music A second data A2 (the first music A second data A2) is started. After that, at the timing when the reproduction position of the music A second data A2 to be reproduced in the sound output LSI 97 reaches the end of the music A second data_main part A21, the music A with respect to the music output LSI 97 by the sound light side MPU 92. The second data reproduction start command CA2 is transmitted. The sound output LSI 97 receives the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 and starts the reproduction of the music A second data A2 (the second music A second data A2). In the sound output LSI 97, a delay period Δt occurs between the time when the second music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is received and the time when the reproduction of the second music A second data A2 is started. .. As described above, according to the configuration of the reference example composed of the sound data having no lingering part after the melody part, the sound data has already been reproduced at the delay time Δt, and there is no sound. There was a problem that the sound was interrupted. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the music A second data A2 includes the music A second data_main part A21 and the music A second data_afterglow part A22. In the delay period Δt, the sound of the music A second data_afterglow portion A22 of the music A second data A2 is reproduced, and the sound is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the sound is interrupted in the sound related to the character stage. Similarly, in the sound related to the non-character stage, there is no sense of discomfort that the sound is interrupted in the reproduction between the music B second data B1 and the next music B second data B2. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<< 6-8 >> Modification example of the sixth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned sixth embodiment, and can be carried out in various embodiments without departing from the gist thereof, and for example, the following modifications are also possible. In the modified examples described below, the description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as those of the above embodiment will be omitted.

<< 6-8-1 >> Modification 1:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the music A first data A1 and the music A second data A2 are reproduced in the audio channel 1 as the BGM processing in the case of the character stage. On the other hand, as a modification, a configuration may be configured in which the music A first data A1 and the music A second data A2 are reproduced while switching the audio channel to be reproduced between the audio channel 1 and the audio channel 2. .. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the music B first data B1 and the music B second data B2 are reproduced in the voice channel 1 as the BGM processing in the case of the non-character stage. However, as a modification, as a modification, the music B first data B1 and the music B second data B2 are reproduced while switching the audio channel to be reproduced between the audio channel 1 and the audio channel 2. May be good. The combination of the voice channel 1 and the voice channel 2 may be replaced with a combination of the voice channel 1 and the voice channel 3, a combination of the voice channel 2 and the voice channel 3, and the like. Any combination of audio channels can be used as long as both channels are different.

Hereinafter, the outline of the processing for the reproduction of the music A in the case of the character stage will be described. The outline of the process for reproducing the music B in the case of the non-character stage is the same as the outline of the process for the reproduction of the music A in the case of the character stage, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, in the present modification 1, the same hardware configuration and software configuration (processing) as those in the sixth embodiment will not be described. In the first modification, the same parts as those in the sixth embodiment will be described below using the same names and reference numerals.

FIG. 271 is a timing chart showing a reproduction procedure for the music A in the sound output LSI 97. FIG. 271 shows the audio data reproduced on the audio channel 1 (1ch), the audio data reproduced on the audio channel 2 (2ch), and the contents of the performance form obtained by mixing these in the audio output LSI 97. It is shown.

In the pachinko machine of the first modification, when the background image is a character stage, the music A is reproduced in the sound output LSI 97 by the following procedure. At the time of transition to the character stage, the sound / light side MPU 92 first transmits the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 to the sound output LSI 97 (time t11). The music A first data reproduction start command CA1 is a command to start the reproduction of the music A first data A1 as the reproduction target, and includes a setting that the audio channel to be reproduced is the audio channel 1. The music A first data reproduction start command CA1 is the same as the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 in the sixth embodiment.

When the sound output LSI 97 receives the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 from the sound light side MPU 92, the music A first data reproduction is performed on the audio channel 1 designated by the music A first data reproduction start command CA1. The process of reproducing the music A first data A1 to be reproduced specified by the start command CA1 is started. In the sound output LSI 97, a delay of a predetermined period occurs from the timing (time t11) when the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 is received until the sound is generated (that is, reproduced) (this period Δt). Is hereinafter also referred to as “delay period Δt”).

The sound light side MPU 92 is at the timing when the reproduction position of the music A first data A1 in the audio channel 1 reaches the end of the music A first data_main part A12 (time t12), and the music A first with respect to the sound output LSI 97. 2 Send the data playback start command CA22. The music A second data reproduction command CA22 is a command to start the reproduction of the music A second data A2 as the reproduction target, and includes a setting that the audio channel to be reproduced is the audio channel 2. The music A second data reproduction command CA22 is different from the music A first data reproduction start command CA1 in the sixth embodiment in that the audio channel to be reproduced is the audio channel 2. It is determined by the same method as in the sixth embodiment whether or not the reproduction position is the timing at which the end of the first data_main part A12 of the music A is reached.

When the sound output LSI 97 receives the music A second data reproduction start command CA22 from the sound light side MPU 92, the music A second data reproduction start in the audio channel 2 designated by the music A second data reproduction start command CA22. The process of reproducing the music A second data A2 to be reproduced (hereinafter, also referred to as the first music A second data A2) designated by the command CA22 is started. In the sound output LSI 97, there is a delay of a delay period Δt from the timing (time t12) when the music A second data reproduction start command CA22 is received until the sound of the music A second data A2 is generated (that is, reproduced). Occurs. That is, at time t12 + Δt, the reproduction of the second data A2 of the music A is started. In the delay period Δt, the sound of the music A first data_the lingering part A13 that is continuous to the end of the music A first data_main part A12 is continuously reproduced. When the reproduction position of the audio channel 1 reaches the end of the music A first data_afterglow portion A13 (time tx1), the reproduction of the music A first data A1 ends. As described above, since the data length of the first data of the music A_the lingering part A13 exceeds the delay period Δt at the time of reproduction, the time tx1 is the time after the time t12 + Δt. Become. As a result, in the period from the time t12 + Δt to the time tx1 (the crosshatch portion in the figure), the music A first data A1 is continuously reproduced in the audio channel 1. At time t12 + Δt, since the music A second data A21 is started to be played on the audio channel 2, the sound of the music A first data A1 and the music A second data in the period from the time t12 + Δt to the time tx. The sound of A2 is mixed and output from the speaker 46.

After that, in the sound / light side MPU 92, the reproduction position of the music A second data A2 (hereinafter, also referred to as the first music A second data A2) in the audio channel 1 reaches the end of the music A second data_main part A21. At the timing (time t13), the music A second data reproduction start command CA21 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97. The music A second data reproduction start command CA21 is a command to start the reproduction of the music A second data A2 as the reproduction target, and includes a setting that the audio channel to be reproduced is the audio channel 1. That is, the music A second data reproduction start command CA21 is different from the music A second data reproduction start command CA22 transmitted at time t12 in that the audio channel to be reproduced is the audio channel 1.

When the sound output LSI 97 receives the music A second data reproduction start command CA21 from the sound light side MPU 92 at time t13, the music A second data reproduction start command CA21 is used in the audio channel 1 designated by the music A second data reproduction start command CA21. 2 Data reproduction start The reproduction of the music A second data A2 (hereinafter, also referred to as the second music A second data A2) to be reproduced designated by the data reproduction start command CA21 is started. In the sound output LSI 97, there is a delay of a delay period Δt from the timing (time t13) when the music A second data reproduction start command CA21 is received until the sound of the music A second data A2 is generated (that is, reproduced). Occurs. That is, at time t13 + Δt, the second reproduction of the music A second data A2 is started. In the delay period Δt, the sound of the first music A second data A2 music A second data_main part A21 continuous music A second data_afterglow part A22 is continuously reproduced. There is. When the reproduction position of the audio channel 2 reaches the end of the second data of the music A_the lingering part A22 (time tx2), the first reproduction of the second data A2 of the music A ends. In the period from the time t13 + Δt to the time tx2 (the crosshatch portion in the figure), the first music A second data A2 is continuously played on the audio channel 2. At time t13 + Δt, since the second music A second data A21 is started to be played on the audio channel 1, the sound of the first music A second data A2 in the period from time t13 + Δt to time tx2. And the sound of the second music A and the second data A2 are mixed and output from the speaker 46. In this way, while switching the playback destination between the audio channel 1 and the audio channel 2 in the order of audio channel 2 → audio channel 1 → audio channel 2 → ......, the music A second data A2 is played. Play repeatedly.

As described above, after the first data A1 of the music A is reproduced, the second data A2 of the music A is repeatedly reproduced to realize the loop reproduction of the melody portion of the music A. This loop playback is performed until the character stage is completed. At the end of the character stage, the sound light side MPU 92 sends a music A second data reproduction end command to the sound output LSI 97, and the sound output LSI 97 receives the music A second data reproduction end command from the sound light side MPU 92. , Ends the loop playback of the second data A2 of the music A.

Next, an example of specific processing executed by the voice emission control device 90 in this modification will be described. The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 (hereinafter referred to as the sound light side MPU 92) in this modification executes the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 266) and the BGM processing (FIG. 267) as in the sixth embodiment. The processing in this modification is the same as the BGM reproduction start processing (FIG. 268) executed in step Sq0201 of the BGM processing (FIG. 267) as compared with the sixth embodiment, and the BGM executed in step Sq0202. It differs in the detailed contents of the continuous playback process.

<BGM continuous playback processing executed in the audio emission control device>
The BGM continuous reproduction process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the BGM process (FIG. 267: Sq0202).

FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the BGM continuous reproduction process. In step Sq0601, the first second data reproduction process is executed. In the first second data reproduction process, the process for reproducing the first music A second data A2 and the first music B second data B2 described above is executed. The details of the first and second data reproduction processing will be described later. After executing step Sq0601, the process proceeds to step Sq0602.

In step Sq0602, the second and subsequent data reproduction processes are executed. In the second and subsequent second data reproduction processing, the processing for reproducing the second and subsequent music A second data A2 and the second and subsequent music B second data B2 described above is executed. The second and subsequent data reproduction processes will be described later. After executing step Sq0602, the present BGM continuous reproduction process is terminated.

<1st and 2nd data playback processing>
Next, the first and second data reproduction processing will be described. The first and second data reproduction processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 272: Sq0601) of the BGM continuous reproduction processing.

FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the first and second data reproduction processing. In step Sq0701, it is determined whether or not the music A first data A1 is reproduced in the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position is the timing when the end of the music A first data_main part A12 is reached. The processing of this determination is the same processing as in step Sq0401 of FIG. 269 in the sixth embodiment. In step Sq0701, when it is determined that the music A first data A1 is reproduced in the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position reaches the end of the music A first data_main part A12 (Sq0701). : YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0702.

In step Sq0702, the music A second data reproduction start command CA22 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97. The music A second data reproduction start command CA22 is a command to start the reproduction of the music A second data A2 as the reproduction target, and includes a setting that the audio channel to be reproduced is the audio channel 2. After executing step Sq0702, the process proceeds to step Sq0703.

On the other hand, in step Sq0701, the music A first data A1 is not reproduced in the audio channel 1, or the music A first data A1 is reproduced in the audio channel 1, and the reproduction position is the music A first data_main. If it is determined that it is not the timing to reach the end of the unit A12 (Sq0701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0703 without executing step Sq0702.

In step Sq0703, it is determined whether or not the music B first data B1 is reproduced in the voice channel 1 and the reproduction position is the timing when the end of the music B first data_main part B12 is reached. The processing of this determination is the same processing as in step Sq0403 of FIG. 269 in the sixth embodiment. In step Sq0703, when it is determined that the music B first data B1 is reproduced in the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position reaches the end of the music B first data_main part B12 (Sq0703). : YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0704.

In step Sq0704, the music B second data reproduction start command CB22 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97. The music B second data reproduction start command CB22 is a command to start the reproduction of the music B second data B2 as the reproduction target, and includes a setting that the audio channel to be reproduced is the audio channel 2. After executing step Sq0704, the first and second data reproduction processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sq0703, the music B first data B1 is not reproduced in the audio channel 1, or the music B first data B1 is reproduced in the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position is the music B first data_main. If it is determined that it is not the timing to reach the end of unit B12 (Sq0703: NO), the first and second data reproduction processing is terminated without executing step Sq0704.

<Second and subsequent data playback processing>
Next, the second and subsequent data reproduction processes will be described. The second and subsequent data reproduction processes are executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 272: Sq0602) of the BGM continuous reproduction process.

FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing the second and subsequent data reproduction processes. In step Sq0801, it is determined whether or not the music A second data A2 is reproduced in the audio channel 2 and the reproduction position is the timing when the end of the music A second data_main part A21 is reached. In this determination, information indicating the type of data being reproduced and information indicating the reproduction position of the data being reproduced are received from the sound output LSI 97, and based on these information, the music A in the audio channel 2 is determined. 2 It is determined whether or not the data A2 is reproduced and the reproduction position is the timing when the end of the second data_main part A21 of the music A is reached. In addition, instead of this configuration, the voice emission control device 90 side has a configuration in which the arrival time until the reproduction position reaches the end of the second data_main part A21 of the music A is stored in advance, and the reproduction start transmitted immediately before is performed. The determination may be made depending on the type of command and whether or not the time from the start of reproduction has reached the arrival time. In step Sq0801, when the music A second data A2 is reproduced in the audio channel 2 and the reproduction position is determined to be the timing when the end of the music A second data_main part A21 is reached (Sq0801). : YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0802.

In step Sq0802, the music A second data reproduction start command CA21 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97. The music A second data reproduction start command CA21 is a command to start the reproduction of the music A second data A2 as the reproduction target, and includes a setting that the audio channel to be reproduced is the audio channel 1. After executing step Sq0802, the process proceeds to step Sq0803.

On the other hand, in step Sq0801, the music A second data A2 is not reproduced in the audio channel 2, or the music A second data A2 is reproduced in the audio channel 2, and the reproduction position is the music A second data_main. If it is determined that it is not the timing to reach the end of the unit A21 (Sq0801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0803 without executing step Sq0802.

In step Sq0803, it is determined whether or not the music B second data B2 is reproduced in the audio channel 2 and the reproduction position is the timing when the end of the music B second data_main part B21 is reached. In this determination, information indicating the type of data being reproduced and information indicating the reproduction position of the data being reproduced are received from the sound output LSI 97, and based on these information, the music B in the audio channel 2 is determined. 2 It is determined whether or not the data B2 is reproduced and the reproduction position is the timing when the end of the second data_main part B21 of the music B is reached. In addition, instead of this configuration, the voice emission control device 90 side has a configuration in which the arrival time until the reproduction position reaches the end of the second data of the music B_main part B21 is stored in advance, and the reproduction started immediately before. The determination may be made depending on the type of command and whether or not the time from the start of reproduction has reached the arrival time. In step Sq0803, when it is determined that the music B second data B2 is reproduced in the audio channel 2 and the reproduction position reaches the end of the music B second data_main part B21 (Sq0803). : YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0804.

In step Sq0804, the music B second data reproduction start command CB21 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97. The music B second data reproduction start command CB21 is a command to start the reproduction of the music B second data B2 as the reproduction target, and includes a setting that the audio channel to be reproduced is the audio channel 1. After executing step Sq0804, the process proceeds to step Sq0805.

On the other hand, in step Sq0803, the music B second data B2 is not reproduced in the audio channel 2, or the music B second data B2 is reproduced in the audio channel 2 and the reproduction position is the music B second data_main. If it is determined that it is not the timing to reach the end of the unit B21 (Sq0803: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0805 without executing step Sq0804.

In step Sq0805, it is determined whether or not the music A second data A2 is reproduced in the voice channel 1 and the reproduction position is the timing when the end of the music A second data_main part A21 is reached. The process of this determination is the same process as step Sq0405 of FIG. 269 in the sixth embodiment. In step Sq0805, when it is determined that the music A second data A2 is reproduced in the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position reaches the end of the music A second data_main part A21 (Sq0805). : YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0806.

In step Sq0806, the music A second data reproduction start command CA22 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97. The music A second data reproduction start command CA22 is a command to start the reproduction of the music A second data A2 as the reproduction target, and includes a setting that the audio channel to be reproduced is the audio channel 2. After executing step Sq0806, the process proceeds to step Sq0807.

On the other hand, in step Sq0805, the music A second data A2 is not reproduced in the audio channel 1, or the music A second data A2 is reproduced in the audio channel 1, and the reproduction position is the music A second data_main. If it is determined that it is not the timing to reach the end of the unit A21 (Sq0805: NO), the process proceeds to step Sq0807 without executing step Sq0806.

In step Sq0807, it is determined whether or not the music B second data B2 is reproduced in the voice channel 1 and the reproduction position is the timing when the end of the music B second data_main part B21 is reached. The processing of this determination is the same processing as in step Sq0407 of FIG. 269 in the sixth embodiment. In step Sq0807, when the music B second data B2 is reproduced in the audio channel 1 and the reproduction position is determined to be the timing when the end of the music B second data_main part B21 is reached (Sq0807). : YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0808.

In step Sq0808, the music B second data reproduction start command CB22 is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97. The music B second data reproduction start command CB22 is a command to start the reproduction of the music B second data B2 as the reproduction target, and includes a setting that the audio channel to be reproduced is the audio channel 2. After executing step Sq0808, the second and subsequent data reproduction processes are terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sq0807, the music B second data B2 is not reproduced in the audio channel 1, or the music B second data B2 is reproduced in the audio channel 1, and the reproduction position is the music B second data_main. If it is determined that it is not the timing to reach the end of unit B21 (Sq0807: NO), the second and subsequent data reproduction processes are terminated without executing step Sq0808.

<Playback start execution process executed in the sound output LSI>
FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing a reproduction start execution process executed by the sound output LSI 97. The reproduction start execution process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). This reproduction start execution process is almost the same as the reproduction start execution process (FIG. 270) executed in the sound output LSI 97 in the sixth embodiment, with only a partial difference. Specifically, the contents of steps Sq0905 and Sq0907 of the main reproduction start execution process differ only from the contents of steps Sq0505 and Sq0507 of the sixth embodiment, and the steps Sq0901 to step Sq0904 of the main reproduction start execution process. Step Sq0906 and Step Sq0908 are the same as Steps Sq0501 to Step Sq0504, Step Sq0506, and Step Sq0508 of the sixth embodiment.

In step Sq0905, it is determined whether or not the music A second data reproduction start command CA21 or the music A second data reproduction start command CA22 has been received. In the sixth embodiment, the only start command for the music A second data A2 to be reproduced is the music A second data reproduction start command CA2, whereas in this modification, the music A second data A2 is reproduced. Since the target start commands include the music A second data reproduction start command CA21 and the music A second data reproduction start command CA22, in step Sq0905, a process of determining whether or not either of them has been received is performed. did.

If it is determined in step Sq0905 that the music A second data reproduction start command CA21 or the music A second data reproduction start command CA22 has been received (Sq0905: YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0906. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0905 that neither the music A second data reproduction start command CA21 nor the music A second data reproduction start command CA22 has been received (Sq0905: NO), step Sq0908 is executed. Without doing so, the process proceeds to step Sq0907.

In step Sq0907, it is determined whether or not the music B second data reproduction start command CB21 or the music B second data reproduction start command CB22 has been received. In the sixth embodiment, the only start command for the music B second data B2 to be reproduced is the music B second data reproduction start command CB2, whereas in this modification, the music B second data B2 is reproduced. Since the target start commands include the music B second data reproduction start command CB21 and the music B second data reproduction start command CB22, in step Sq0907, a process of determining whether or not either of them has been received is performed. did.

If it is determined in step Sq0907 that the music B second data reproduction start command CB21 or the music B second data reproduction start command CB22 has been received (Sq0907: YES), the process proceeds to step Sq0908. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sq0907 that neither the music B second data reproduction start command CB21 nor the music B second data reproduction start command CB22 has been received (Sq0907: NO), step Sq0908 is executed. This playback start execution process ends without doing so.

In the pachinko machine of the present modification configured as described above, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the music A first data A1 and the music A second data A2 are continuously connected on the character stage. When playing, the sound is not interrupted. Further, when the music A second data A2 and the next music A second data A2 are continuously reproduced, the sound is not interrupted. Even in the non-character stage, when the music B first data B1 and the music B second data B2 are continuously reproduced, the sound is not interrupted. Further, when the music B second data B1 and the next music B second data B2 are continuously reproduced, the sound is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the sound is interrupted in the BGM when the character stage and the non-character stage are located. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of this modified example, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine of this modification, the music A first data A1 and the music A second data A2 are reproduced while switching the audio channel to be reproduced between the audio channel 1 and the audio channel 2. .. Therefore, in the delay period Δt described above, the sound of the music A first data_afterglow portion A13 of the music A first data A1 is reproduced on the voice channel 1, and when the delay period Δt elapses, the music is played on the voice channel 2. The sound of A second data A2 is reproduced. When the delay period Δt elapses, the sound of the unreproduced portion of the music A first data_reverberation part A13 of the first data A1 is continuously reproduced in the audio channel 1, so that the unreproduced sound is reproduced. During the period, the music A second data A2 to be reproduced on the audio channel 2 is superimposed. As a result, immediately after the sound of the music A first data A1 is switched to the sound of the music A second data A2, the sound of the music A first data A1 and the sound of the music A second data A2 are heard. You can mix and switch sounds smoothly. Similarly, in the pachinko machine of this modification, the music A second data A2 and the next music A second data A2 are reproduced while switching the audio channel to be reproduced between the audio channel 1 and the audio channel 2. Therefore, immediately after the sound of the music A second data A2 is switched to the sound of the next music A second data A2, the sound of the music A second data A2 and the sound of the next music A second data A2 The sound can be mixed and the sound can be switched smoothly. Immediately after the sound of the music A second data A2 is switched to the sound of the next music A second data A2, the sound of the music A second data A2 and the sound of the next music A second data A2 Is mixed, so that the sound recorded in the first data_afterglow portion A13 of the music A can be output longer than in the sixth embodiment.

<< 6-8-2 >> Modification 2:
In the sixth embodiment and its modification, the music A corresponding to the character stage and the music B corresponding to the non-character stage are prepared, and at the time of transition between the character stage and the non-character stage, the BGM is prepared. It was configured to switch the music as. On the other hand, as a modification, each stage classified as a character stage (stage of the room of warrior characters A to D) and each stage classified as a non-character stage (country stage, urban stage, etc.) Music corresponding to the ocean stage, everyone's stage) may be prepared, and the music as BGM may be switched when there is a transition between these sub-category stages. According to this configuration, it is possible to switch the music as BGM more precisely.

<< 6-8-3 >> Modification 3:
In the sixth embodiment and its modifications, the sound related to the music is recorded in the music A first data A1 and the music A second data A2 (or the music B first data B1 and the music B second data B2). On the other hand, as a modification, it may be data in which sounds such as sound effects and dialogues of various characters are recorded. Also in this modification, the sound light side MPU 92 is playing the first sound data in which these sounds are recorded, and the second sound data in which the above sounds are recorded is recorded in the sound output LSI. By transmitting the command instructing the start of the reproduction of the player, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the sound is interrupted in the reproduction between the first sound data and the second sound data. Therefore, depending on the configuration of this modification, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<< 6-8-4 >> Modification 4:
In the sixth embodiment and its modifications, the music A first data A1 is the music A first data_intro part A11, the music A first data_main part A12, and the music A first data_afterglow part A13. The second data A2 of the music A is divided into two parts, the second data of the music A_main part A21 and the second data of the music A_the afterglow part A22. On the other hand, as a modification, the music A first data A1 and the music A second data A2 may not be divided into a plurality of parts. That is, the music A first data A1 and the music A second data A2 may be sound data in which one continuous sound is recorded and may not be divided into a plurality of parts in terms of data management. In this configuration, the sound / light side MPU 92 determines the timing at which the next sound data reproduction command is transmitted to the sound output LSI 97 during the reproduction of the sound data as follows. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 side has a configuration in which the arrival time until the reproduction position reaches the timing is stored in advance, and whether or not the time from the start of reproduction reaches the arrival time is determined. , It is configured to determine whether or not the reproduction position is the relevant timing. Even with the configuration of this modification, the player feels a sense of discomfort in the reproduction between the music A first data A1 and the music A second data A2, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. There is no. Therefore, depending on the configuration of this modification, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Similarly, as a modification, the music B first data B1 and the music B second data B2 may be configured not to be divided into a plurality of parts.

<< 6-8-5 >> Modification 5:
In the sixth embodiment and its modification, the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 (music A second data reproduction start command CA21 or music A second data reproduction start) is performed from the sound light side MPU 92 to the sound output LSI 97. The timing of transmitting the command CA22) (hereinafter, also referred to as transmission timing) is the timing of reaching the end of the music A first data_main part A12 of the music A first data A1, or the music A of the music A second data A2. The timing for reaching the end of the second data_main part A21 (hereinafter, also referred to as the end timing) was set. On the other hand, as a modification, the transmission timing may not exactly match the termination timing and may be set within a predetermined period including the termination timing.

FIG. 276 is an explanatory diagram showing the predetermined period that defines the transmission timing. FIG. 276 (a) shows the case where the transmission timing coincides with the end timing, FIG. 276 (b) shows the case where the transmission timing is the earliest within the predetermined period, and FIG. 276 (c) shows the case where the transmission timing is within the predetermined period. It shows the slowest case. As described above, in the sound output LSI 97, a delay period Δt is required from the timing when the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 is received until the sound is generated. Therefore, when the transmission timing is Ta, the time at which the second data A2 of the music A 2 starts to be reproduced is Ta + Δt. It is necessary to determine the transmission timing Ta so that this time Ta + Δt falls within the range of the reproducible period TT of the music A first data_afterglow portion A13. In other words, if the time Ta + Δt falls within the range of the period TT in which the music A first data_afterglow portion A13 can be reproduced, the transmission timing Ta can be any timing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 276 (b), when the time Ta + Δt is the timing of the tip of the music A first data_afterglow portion A13, the transmission timing Ta has the highest transmission timing within a predetermined period. It will be faster. As shown in FIG. 276 (c), when the time Ta + Δt is the timing of the end of the music A first data_afterglow portion A13, the transmission timing Ta becomes the latest within the predetermined period. That is, from the transmission timing Ta shown in FIG. 276 (b) (the timing earlier by the delay time Δt from the end of the first data of the music A_main part A12) to the transmission timing Ta (the first music A) shown in FIG. 276 (c). The music A second data reproduction start command CA2 can be transmitted at any timing as long as it is within the range (this is within a predetermined period) from the end of the data_afterglow portion A13 to the timing earlier by the delay time Δt). That is, the length of the predetermined period coincides with the length of the music A first data_afterglow portion A13. Even with this configuration, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the sound is interrupted in the reproduction between the first data of the music A and the second data A2 of the music A. Therefore, depending on the configuration of this modification, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<< 6-8-6 >> Modification 6:
In the sixth embodiment and its modifications, the music A first data A1 is the music A first data_intro part A11, the music A first data_main part A12, and the music A first data_afterglow part A13. However, as a modification, the music A first data A1 does not include the music A first data_intro part A11, and the music A first data_main part A12 and the music. A first data_afterglow portion A13 may be provided. According to this configuration, the music A first data A1 has the same configuration as the music A second data A2. In this configuration, the sound data recorded in the second data of the music A_main part A21 may be different from the sound data recorded in the first data of the music A_main part A12. For example, the sound data recorded in the second data of the music A_main part A21 is the same melody part of the music A as the sound data recorded in the first data of the music A_main part A12, but is arranged uptempo, for example. It may be configured so that the sound is made. According to this configuration, the atmosphere of the music A can be changed and the melody portion can be repeatedly reproduced. Similarly, the music B first data B1 may be configured to include the music B first data_main part B12 and the music B first data_afterglow part B13 without the music B first data_intro part B11. good. Further, the sound data recorded in the second data of the music B_main part B21 may be different from the sound data recorded in the first data of the music B_main part B12.

<< 6-8-7 >> Modification 7:
In the sixth embodiment and its modification, only one type of music A second data A2 is prepared, whereas as a modification, a plurality of types of music A second data A2 are prepared. It may be a prepared configuration. Each of the plurality of types of music A second data A2 is a melody part of the same music A, but the arrangement of the music is different from each other. For example, the first music A second data A2 may have a normal tempo, and the second music A second data A2 may have an up tempo. Then, the music A second data A2 to be used may be switched between the first music A second data A2 and the second music A second data A2 according to the gaming state. .. Specifically, for example, in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), the first music A second data A2 is used, and in the high probability gaming state, the second music A second data A2. It may be configured to use. According to this configuration, the BGM of the stage can further improve the expectation that the game will be in a high-probability gaming state. In other words, so-called interactive sound expression that can change the BGM and sound effects according to the progress of the game becomes possible. Similarly, a configuration in which a plurality of types of music B second data B2 are prepared may be used.

<< 6-8-8 >> Modification 8:
In the sixth embodiment and its modification, the music A second data A2 is configured to include the music A second data_main part A21 and the music A second data_afterglow part A22. As a modification, the composition may not include the second data of the music A_the afterglow part A22. According to this modification, in the reproduction between the music A first data and the music A second data A2 by the configuration in which the music A second data is reproduced only once following the music A first data. , The player does not feel any discomfort that the sound is interrupted. Therefore, depending on the configuration of this modification, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<< 6-8-9 >> Modification 9:
In the sixth embodiment and its modifications, the data length of the music A first data_afterglow part A13 and the data length of the music A second data_afterglow part A22 are the music A second data reproduction start commands in the sound output LSI 97. It has been determined experimentally or by simulation so that the delay period Δt required from the timing of receiving the CA2 to the reproduction of the sound can be at least longer than the delay period Δt. Then, in the sixth embodiment and its modification, the timing at which the MPU 92 (sound light side MPU 92) of the voice emission control device 90 transmits the music A second data reproduction start command CA2 to the sound output LSI 97 is set. By matching the reproduction position of the A first data A1 with the timing of reaching the end of the music A first data_main part A12, the music A second data A2 is performed before the reproduction of the music A first data A1 is completed. Was supposed to start playing. On the other hand, as a modification, the sound light side MPU 92 adjusts the timing of transmitting the music A second data reproduction start command CA2, so that the music A second after the reproduction of the music A first data A1 is completed. The configuration is such that the reproduction of the data A2 can be started. That is, the sound and light side MPU 92 adjusts the timing of transmitting the music A second data reproduction start command CA2, so that the reproduction of the music A second data A2 starts after the reproduction of the music A first data A1 is completed. A state (hereinafter referred to as a first state) and a state in which the reproduction of the second data A2 of the music A is started before the reproduction of the first data A1 of the music A is completed (hereinafter referred to as the second state). The configuration is such that both can be taken. In the first state, that is, in the state where the reproduction of the music A second data A2 is started after the reproduction of the music A first data A1 is completed, the reproduction position of the music A first data A1 is the music A first data_main. When the period from the timing of reaching the end of the part A12 to the start of the reproduction of the second data A2 of the music A exceeds the time length at the time of reproduction corresponding to the first data of the music A_the lingering part A13. be. In the second state, that is, in the state where the reproduction of the music A second data A2 is started before the reproduction of the music A first data A1 is completed, the reproduction position of the music A first data A1 is the music A first data_. The period from the timing of reaching the end of the main part A12 to the start of the reproduction of the second data A2 of the music A is equal to or less than the time length at the time of reproduction corresponding to the first data of the music A_the lingering part A13. If.

In the first state, by the time the reproduction of the second data A2 of the music A is started, the reproduction of the first data A1 of the music A is the end of the first data of the music A_the lingering part A13 (or the second data A2 of the music A). The reproduction ends up to the end of the music A second data_afterglow portion A22), and a silent state occurs between the reproduction of the music A first data A1 and the reproduction of the music A second data A2. On the other hand, in the second state, the reproduction of the music A second data A2 is started without becoming a silent state. In this modification, for example, in the winning lottery, the first state is taken when the possibility (expectation) of winning the jackpot is high, and the second state is taken when the expectation of winning the jackpot is not high. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the jackpot may have been won when silence occurs. Therefore, according to this modification, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<< 6-8-10 >> Modification 10:
In the sixth embodiment and the modification thereof, sound data has been described as an example of effect data, but instead of this, the effect data is changed in images such as symbols and pictures displayed on the symbol display device 41. The display pattern may be recorded data. Further, instead of the data in which the variation display pattern of the image is recorded, the data in which various images displayed on the symbol display device 41 may be recorded may be used. Further, the effect data can be replaced with data in which the light emission pattern of the light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs is recorded. Even with these modified examples, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the production is interrupted in the production. Therefore, depending on the configuration of this modification, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<< 6-8-11 >> Modification 11:
In the sixth embodiment and its modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices such as a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, but instead of this, the main control It may be configured to include two control devices such as a device and a sub control device. The sub-control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the sixth embodiment. Further, in the sixth embodiment and its modifications, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 do not have to be limited to the classification described in the sixth embodiment, and the three control devices need not be limited. As a whole of 60, 90, 100, it is sufficient that various processes according to the sixth embodiment can be executed.

<< 7 >> Seventh Embodiment:
<< 7-1 >> Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 277 is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko machine”) according to the seventh embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a voice emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. Illuminations are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect of the effect by lighting or blinking at each game round performed by the pachinko machine 10, when a big hit is won, when a reach occurs, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two plate glasses is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. The details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls rented from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball stored in the upper plate 20 is supplied to the game ball launch mechanism included in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launch mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores the game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged to the outside from the lower plate 21.

An effect operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game effect reflecting the operation.

Further, an operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front. When the player operates the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and an operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c that detects the rotation operation amount of the above by the change of the electric resistance is provided. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes according to the rotation operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 278 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. Specifically, each of these control units is provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game and a function of monitoring the power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material. This substrate box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing (also referred to as traces of opening and traces of opening). For example, a seal is attached to a place that can be opened and closed, and the characters such as "open" appear when the board box is opened. Further, the main control device 60 has a RAM clear switch 66a for clearing (erasing, initializing) the RAM mounted on the main control board, and a setting for executing a setting change mode and a setting confirmation mode described later. A setting key insertion unit 66b that is a keyhole into which a key can be inserted, a setting change switch 66c for changing setting information in the setting change mode, and an information display unit 45z that can display various information such as setting information. Is provided.

The information display unit 45z is configured by arranging four 7-segment displays adjacent to each other in a horizontal row. Each 7-segment display has 7 segment light emitting units and a DP light emitting unit indicating a decimal point, and "1", "2", and "1", "2", and " Various numerical values such as "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8", "9", "0", "b", "L.", "6." It is possible to display characters, symbols, etc. In the present embodiment, the seven segment light emitting units and the DP light emitting unit are composed of red LEDs (light emitting diodes). In the following, the 7-segment display arranged at the left end is also referred to as the left end 7-segment display, and the 7-segment display arranged adjacent to the right side of the left end 7-segment display is also referred to as the left middle 7-segment display. , The 7-segment display arranged adjacent to the right side of the left middle 7-segment display is also called the right middle 7-segment display, and is placed adjacent to the right side of the right middle 7-segment display and placed at the right end. The 7-segment display is also called the rightmost 7-segment display.

The second control unit 52 includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90. The design display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays a design or an image for directing.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70, a launch control device 80, and a power supply device 85. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The launch control device 80 launches a game ball having a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player when an instruction to launch the game ball is input from the main control device 60. Controls the ball launch mechanism. The power supply device 85 includes a power supply switch 85a, and when the power supply switch 85a is turned on while a power supply terminal (not shown) is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, the external power supplied from the commercial power source is supplied. , The main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. convert it into the required operating power and supply it to each of these devices.

In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a slope connected below the tank 54 and gently inclined so that the game balls flow to the downstream side. The game balls are supplied from the tank rail 55, the case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, and the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 279 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding the game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicular to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 has a special figure unit 37, a normal figure unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

The general winning opening 32 is an entry opening into which a game ball can enter, and a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls. In the present embodiment, three general winning openings 32a, 32b, and 32c are provided as general winning openings 32. Hereinafter, the general winning opening 32a is also referred to as a first winning opening 32a, the general winning opening 32b is also referred to as a second winning opening 32b, and the general winning opening 32c is also referred to as a third winning opening 32c.

The first starting port 33 is an entry port into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is an entry port into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as an ordinary electric accessory.

The through gate 35 is provided with a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to execute a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric service is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric service open state in which the electric service is opened in a predetermined mode. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second starting port 34. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34. In this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30 and an opening / closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening / closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 36a. When the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the main control device 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the winning lottery, if a big hit or a small hit is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode. The opening / closing execution mode is a mode for executing the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36. Specifically, when the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the open / close execution mode, the open / close state in which the game ball cannot enter is changed to the open state in which the game ball can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it transitions to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

Further, an out port 43 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 30, and the game ball that has not entered the various entry ports is discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

In this embodiment, a game in which a ball is entered into the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the first winning opening 32a, the second winning opening 32b, the third winning opening 32c, the large winning opening 36a, and the out opening 43. The ball is configured to join the discharge passage provided on the back surface of the game board 30, and the discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor for detecting the game ball. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls fired on the game board 30 by detecting the game balls by the discharge passage detection sensor.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. The first symbol display unit 37a is a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. , The variable display of the first symbol or the predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is completed, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to display the stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game times in which the lottery is executed when the game ball enters the first start port 33 are also referred to as the game times for the first start port.

The second symbol display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying the second symbol. The second symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display unit 37b is used as a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. , A variable display of the second symbol or a predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display to display the stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game times in which the lottery is executed when the game ball enters the second start port 34 are also referred to as the game times for the second start port.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b to the stop display is set. Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a to the stop display is also referred to as the first variable time, and is displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first hold display unit 37c and a second hold display unit 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b.

The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of holds of the first start port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are reserved.

The second hold display unit 37d displays the number of holds of the second start port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are reserved.

The normal drawing unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, the normal drawing unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode as the display mode of the light emitting display. When the electric accessory opening lottery is completed, the normal drawing unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode, or displays corresponding to the number of round games. The round game opens and closes until either the predetermined upper limit duration elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the open / close execution mode is started, and ends when the open / close execution mode ends.

The special figure unit 37, the normal figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being composed of a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp, and for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. It may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery result, such as a CRT or a dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 displays the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. I do. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. Is displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to displaying the fluctuation of the symbol or a predetermined display triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and when a big hit is won. It also displays the effect during the open / close execution mode that shifts. Hereinafter, the details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 280 is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol and a display surface 41a that are variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 280 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol that is variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 280 (a), the symbol indicating the numbers 1 to 8 is variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. As the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol having a pattern such as a character may be adopted for each of the symbols showing the numbers 1 to 8.

FIG. 280 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 280 (a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row is periodically arranged from top to bottom or from bottom. A variable display that scrolls up is performed. As shown in FIG. 280 (b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L. Specifically, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity is started. Then, each scrolling symbol switches from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. When the variation display of the symbol is completed and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit winning, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the effective line L. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L. The mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, and the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol row, and the symbol of each symbol row. Various modes such as numbers can be adopted as the mode of variable display of the symbol.

Here, the game times is one unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. Is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the first result display unit 37a or the second result is obtained for each game. After the segment display is variablely displayed on one of the display units 37b, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the pachinko machine 10 has a predetermined value in the symbol display device 41 for each game. After the symbol string is variablely displayed, the symbol column is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game is also referred to as a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the predetermined lottery result, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 280 (b), the first reserved display area Ds1 and the second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first hold display area Ds1, the number of holds based on the winning of the first start port 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, the number of holds based on the winning of the second starting port 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have won prizes in the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is four, respectively.

<< 7-2 >> Electrical configuration of gaming machines:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 281 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 temporarily stores various data and the like when the CPU 62x executes a CPU 62x that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a program recorded in the ROM 63. It has a RAM 64 which is a memory of the above. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may have a part of the function which MPU 62 has.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively.

A payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a DC stable 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and when the power switch 85a is turned on, the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, and the like are required to use the external power supplied from the commercial power source. It converts it into operating power and supplies power to each device. Further, in the present embodiment, the power supply device 85 includes a power supply switch state detection sensor 85b and a capacitor 87 as a backup power source. The power switch state detection sensor 85b is a sensor capable of detecting the state (ON state or OFF state) of the power switch 85a. The capacitor 87 continues to supply electric power to each device for a predetermined period when a power failure occurs or the power switch 85a is turned off.

Further, ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h provided at each entry port are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered the start port, the winning opening, or the large winning opening, and the game ball is discharged through the gate or ejected. It is determined whether or not the vehicle has passed the passage (out port). Further, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34.

Further, on the input side of the main control board 61, the above-mentioned RAM clear switch 66a, the setting key insertion unit 66b, and the setting change switch 66c are connected.

On the output side of the main control board 61, there is a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , The main display unit 45 and the above-mentioned information display unit 45z are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the electric accessory opening is won as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 44b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. Further, in each game, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the main display unit 45, and in the open / close execution mode, the round display on the main display unit 45 is performed. The display control of unit 39 is executed.

Further, the payout control device 70 and the voice emission control device 90 are connected to the output side of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the first starting port 33. When the entry of the game ball is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is specified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. Further, an operation handle 25 is connected to the launch control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes according to the rotation operation amount. The game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14 and the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. In addition to controlling the drive of the display control device 100, the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the voice emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 and the type of the combination of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. , Whether or not reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the effect executed while the first liquid crystal display symbol and the second liquid crystal display symbol are variable display. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal display symbol or the second liquid crystal display symbol is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game round time, which is the time required for one game round, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 282 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. Various counters are provided in various counter areas of the RAM 64, and are used when the MPU 62 wins a lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, sets the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. When sorting the jackpot types, the jackpot type counter C2 is used. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate reach when the symbol sequence displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displaced and varied.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. Further, the fluctuation type counter CS is used when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45, and the symbol display device 41. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The hold information storage area 64b is provided with a first hold area Ra and a second hold area Rb. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS at the timing of entering the ball are stored in the reserved information storage area. It is stored in the first holding area Ra of 64b in chronological order. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS at the timing of entering the ball are set in the reserved information storage area 64b. 2 It is stored in the holding area Rb in chronological order.

The details of the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The hit random number counter C1 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 1199, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. Further, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is set in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. It is stored, and when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

The value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first hold area Ra moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, is collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area of the ROM 63, and becomes a big hit. Whether or not it is determined. Further, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the second hold area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area of the ROM 63, and is a big hit. It is determined whether or not.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is such that the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. By doing so, the process moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the hit random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not the hit is a big hit.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 39, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a big hit, the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Further, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b by using the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. .. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big hit. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value, for example.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. It is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the ball. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra is collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63, and the reach is determined. Whether or not it occurs is determined. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second hold area Rb is collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63, and the reach is determined. Whether or not it occurs is determined. However, when the result of the winning lottery becomes a big hit and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some of the symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 may have a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot for some of the symbols. It is a display state in which the symbols are displayed and the remaining symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 280 (b), the symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. In the situation where the reach line is formed and the reach line is formed, the symbol is varied and displayed in the symbol row Z2 to reach the reach. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, in the state where the reach line is formed, the variable display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. A combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when the reach effect is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to display a notice using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

Next, the details of the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 62 to determine the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value, for example.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, the details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric service holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d moves to the electric accessory execution area 64e, and then the electric accessory release in the electric accessory execution area 64e. A lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state by using the value of the counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0, 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4 = 2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

It should be noted that at least one of the acquired value of the hit random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4, and the value of the variable type counter CS is the special information in the present invention. Corresponds to. Further, at least one of the value of the hit random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the first hold area Ra and the second hold area Rb is held. Also called information.

Next, the pass / fail table will be described. The winning / failing table is table data for collating with the winning random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the winning random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode set as a lottery mode for the winning lottery. At the time of the winning lottery in the probability mode, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to.

Here, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a plurality of settings (hereinafter, also referred to as “lottery settings”) having different probabilities of winning a big hit in a winning lottery. Specifically, even in the same low probability mode, it has six stages of lottery settings (“lottery setting 1” to “lottery setting 6”) in which the probability of winning a big hit in a winning lottery is different. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

The main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with six types of pass / fail tables for low probability modes corresponding to each of the six stages of lottery settings from "lottery setting 1" to "lottery setting 6". There is. Then, the main control device 60 executes a winning lottery with reference to the winning / failing table corresponding to the set lottery setting. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is set to the lottery setting 1 and the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the main control device 60 sets the winning / failing table for the low probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting 1. Refer to it and execute the winning lottery.

FIG. 283 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the pass / fail table. FIG. 283 (a) shows a winning / failing table for the low probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting 1, and FIG. 283 (b) shows a winning / failing table for the high probability mode. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 283 (a), in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting 1, among the values of the random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199, the value of winning the big hit is set. , 0 to 4 are set to five values. Although not shown, the present embodiment includes a winning / failing table for the low-probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting 2 to the lottery setting 6, and the winning / failing table for the low-probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting 2 is provided. , Of the values of the hit random number counter C1 from 0 to 1199, 6 values of 0 to 5 are set as the values to win the big hit. Further, in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting 3, seven values of 0 to 6 are set as the winning values of the jackpot among the values of the winning random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199. There is. Further, in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting 4, eight values of 0 to 7 are set as the winning values of the jackpot among the values of the winning random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199. There is. Further, in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting 5, nine values of 0 to 8 are set as the winning values of the jackpot among the values of the winning random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199. There is. Further, in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting 6, 10 values of 0 to 9 are set as the winning values of the jackpot among the values of the winning random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199. There is.

That is, in the present embodiment, the larger the number following the "lottery setting", the higher the winning probability of the winning lottery in the low probability mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 283 (b), in the hit / fail table for the high probability mode, 16 values of 0 to 15 are set as the values to win the big hit among the values of the hit random number counter C1 from 0 to 1199. Is set. As described above, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery than the low probability mode. In the present embodiment, no matter which of the six stages of lottery settings is set, the winning lottery is executed with reference to the same winning / failing table in the high probability mode. That is, in the high probability mode, the probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery is the same regardless of the lottery setting. However, as another configuration, even in the high probability mode, the larger the number following the "lottery setting", the higher the probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery.

In the present embodiment, the change of the lottery setting in six stages is configured to be feasible when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the administrator who manages the pachinko machine 10 changes the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, first, the setting key is set with the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 turned off. The setting key is inserted into the insertion portion 66b (keyhole). Then, the inserted key is turned to the setting change side (ON side) (for example, clockwise). Then, with the RAM clear switch 66a pressed (ON state) and all the frame opening switch and the door opening switch turned ON, the power switch 85a is turned ON and the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. do. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is activated as a setting change mode. The frame opening switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door opening switch is a switch in which the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13. It is a switch that sometimes turns on.

When the pachinko machine 10 is activated as the setting change mode, information indicating the current lottery setting (hereinafter, also referred to as setting information) is displayed on the above-mentioned information display unit 45z. For example, when the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is "lottery setting 1", "1" is displayed on the information display unit 45z. Then, every time the administrator presses the setting change switch 66c, the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z is "1"-> "2"-> "3"-> "4"-> "5"-> "6". → It switches in the order (ascending order) such as "1" → "2" ....

When the administrator turns the setting key from the setting change side to the original position while the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z is the value desired by the administrator, it is displayed on the information display unit 45z. It will be changed to the lottery setting corresponding to the setting information. Specifically, for example, when the administrator presses the setting change switch 66c and "6" is displayed on the information display unit 45z, the setting key is set to the original position from the setting change side (ON side). When turned to (OFF side), the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed to "lottery setting 6".

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery can be changed by changing the lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10.

In this embodiment, a configuration having a lottery setting of 6 stages is adopted, but the lottery setting is not limited to 6 stages, and even if a configuration having a lottery setting of 5 stages or less or 7 stages or more is adopted, for example. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that it is possible to confirm to which the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set when the power is turned on. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the administrator who manages the pachinko machine 10 confirms the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, first, the setting key is set with the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 turned off. The setting key is inserted into the insertion portion 66b (keyhole). Then, the inserted key is turned to the setting change side (ON side) (for example, clockwise). Then, with at least one of the RAM clear switch 66a, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch turned off, the power switch 85a is turned on to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is activated as a setting confirmation mode. In the setting confirmation mode, the current setting information is displayed on the information display unit 45z, but the setting information cannot be changed. When the administrator turns the setting key from the setting change side (ON side) to the original position (OFF side), the pachinko machine 10 ends the setting confirmation mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three modes or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Number of times (number of rounds) of opening / closing the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode
(2) Mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode of winning lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends (low probability mode or high probability mode)

As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (2) opening / closing execution mode, the generation of a game ball into the variable winning device 36 (winning) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency is relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds have elapsed or until the number of game balls entered into the opening / closing door 36b reaches 10. can do. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, it is set to continue until 1.6 seconds have passed or until the number of balls entered into the opening / closing door 36b reaches 10 in the opening / closing execution mode. Can be done.

The opening limit time for one opening of the opening / closing door 36b and the opening limit number for one opening are the frequency of occurrence of balls entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the high-frequency winning mode is higher than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening / closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may have a longer opening limit time for one opening or a larger number of opening limits for one opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that the variable winning device 36 does not substantially win a prize.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of winning modes are not provided as the opening / closing execution mode, and the above-mentioned high-frequency winning mode is used during the opening / closing execution mode. That is, one opening of the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds have elapsed or until the number of game balls entering the opening / closing door 36b is 10.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the big hit type counter C2 is used to sort the big hit types. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 63.

FIG. 284 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 284 (a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 284 (b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to at the time of a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is to the second start port 34. It is referred to at the time of the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. 284 (a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first starting port 33 are 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, and 16R normal. A jackpot, 8R normal jackpot is set.

In the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot, the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the winning / failing lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the high probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end of is the high frequency support mode.

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the winning / failing lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the low probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end of is the high frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 13" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "14 to 27" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. "28-33" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "34-39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the mode of the jackpot is diversified. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the advantage for the player is that the 16R probability variation jackpot is the highest, the 8R probability variation jackpot is the next highest, then the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different advantages for the player in this way, it is possible to suppress the monotonicization of the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 284 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, 16R probability variation jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are set as the jackpot types based on the second starting port 34. ing. In the distribution table for the second starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "28 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. It corresponds to.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot is the case where the jackpot is based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and the case where the jackpot is obtained. 2 It is different from the case where a big hit is made based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to perform the jackpot type. Further, the MPU 62 uses the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to cause the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b to stop and display the segment display. Determine the display mode. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening / closing execution mode, the launch of the game ball to the game area PA continues in the same manner. The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are used so that the frequency with which the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the above-mentioned situations. Can be set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. .. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the one-time opening time of the electric accessory 34a is set longer than that in the low-frequency support mode when the electric combination opening is won.

Although it is not adopted in this embodiment, in the case where the electric accessory opening is won in the high frequency support mode and the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times, the next after one open state is completed. The closing time until the opening state is started may be set shorter than the one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory opening lottery to the next electric accessory opening lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. You may.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary gaming state that assists in the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

FIG. 285 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a winning / failing table (winning / failing table for electric accessory opening lottery) used when executing the electric accessory opening lottery.

FIG. 285 (a) shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 285 (a), in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode), two electric accessory opening counters C4, which are the electric accessory opening winning counters, are 0 and 1. The value is set. 464 values of 2 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is out of alignment. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening is won in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 285 (b) shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 285 (b), in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode), 462 electric accessory opening counters C4 for winning the electric combination opening are set to 0 to 461. The value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is out of alignment. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening is won in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second starting port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. ..

<< 7-3 >> Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 286 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configurations of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 according to the seventh embodiment. Some configurations of the power supply device 85 and the like are omitted.

The voice emission control board 91 provided in the voice emission control device 90 outputs the MPU 92, which is an arithmetic unit that controls the entire voice emission control device 90, and the current date and time information, which is information that can specify the current date and time. It is equipped with a possible RTC97 (real-time clock). The MPU 92 and the RTC 97 are connected to each other so as to be able to communicate with each other via a signal line.

The MPU 92 is an element having a CPU 92x, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. The CPU 92x executes various control programs stored in the main ROM 63. The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs, fixed value data, tables, etc. executed by the CPU 92x. For example, a part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with various table storage areas in which the effect pattern table and the like are stored. The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the CPU 92x executes a control program. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a for storing various flags, an activation date / time information storage area 94b for storing activation date / time information described later, and the like. It is not essential that the CPU 92x, ROM 93, and RAM 94 are integrated into a single chip, and each may be individually chipped.

The RTC 97 has a function of measuring the current date and time, and has an RTC control unit 97a, a register 97b, and an RTC power supply 97c.

The RTC control unit 97a uses (controls) the register 97b to perform various controls such as timekeeping of the current date and time. The register 97b has a register table including a plurality of registers, and the register table includes a timekeeping register 97b1 and an activation date / time information storage area 97b2.

The timekeeping register 97b1 is a register for clocking the current date and time, and the register value as the current date and time information is updated every second. In the present embodiment, the current date and time information in the timekeeping register 97b1 includes information that can specify the current "year", "month", "day", "hour", "minute", and "second". ..

The RTC power supply 97c is a power supply dedicated to the RTC 97, which is different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the RTC control unit 97a and the register 97b even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. Therefore, the timekeeping register 97b1 can update the current date and time information even in the power failure state. In this embodiment, a button type battery is used for the RTC power supply 97c.

The start date / time information storage area 94b of the sound / light side RAM 94 is a storage area in which the current date / time information measured by the timekeeping register 97b1 is written at the timing immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is started. In the following, the current date and time information read from the timekeeping register 97b1 and written in the activation date and time information storage area 94b is referred to as activation date and time information. In the present embodiment, the start date / time information stored in the start date / time information storage area 94b includes the "year", "month", "day", "hour", and "time" at a predetermined timing after the pachinko machine 10 is started. It contains information that can identify "minutes" and "seconds". The details of the process in which the current date and time information timed by the timekeeping register 97b1 is written as the activation date and time information in the activation date and time information storage area 94b will be described later.

The voice emission control board 91 is provided with input / output ports, respectively. A main control device 60 and an effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the voice emission control board 91, and the MPU 92 receives various commands from the main control device 60 and receives a predetermined signal from the effect operation button 24. .. A speaker 46, various lamps 47, and a display control device 100 are connected to the output side of the voice emission control board 91.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the voice emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 102.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio emission control device 90 are the sound light side MPU 92 and the sound light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound / light side RAM 94 are also referred to, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as a display side MPU 102.

<< 7-4 >> Outline of processing by the gaming machine:
Next, an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 executes a power supply monitoring process for monitoring the drive voltage supplied to each device such as the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10. When it is determined that the value is less than a predetermined value, the main side power cutoff process, which is a process for dealing with the power supply being cut off, is executed. The main side power cutoff process is a process such as saving the register of the main side CPU 62x to the main side RAM 64. The details of the main side power cutoff process will be described later.

Then, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the drive voltage is less than a predetermined value, the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is operated from the ON state to the OFF state prior to the main side power failure processing. Maybe the drive voltage has dropped due to the power failure, or the power switch of the island equipment where the pachinko machine 10 is installed (hereinafter, also referred to as the island power switch) is in the OFF state from the ON state due to a power failure or the power switch 85a is in the ON state. It is determined whether the drive voltage has dropped due to the operation.

FIG. 287 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the periphery of the power switch 85a included in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. FIG. 287 (A) shows a state in which the power switch 85a is in the OFF state, and FIG. 287 (B) shows a state in which the power switch 85a is in the ON state. In the present embodiment, the power switch 85a employs a rocker switch that connects / disconnects an electric circuit by alternately pressing both ends of an operation button. Since the structure of the power switch 85a itself is the same as that of a general rocker switch, the detailed structure of the contact portion of the power switch 85a itself is omitted in FIG. 287.

As shown in FIG. 287, in the present embodiment, the power switch state detection sensor 85b capable of detecting whether the power switch 85a is in the OFF state or the ON state is provided. In the present embodiment, the power switch state detection sensor 85b employs a push-button type momentary operation electric contact type sensor (switch), and when the power switch 85a is in the ON state, it is pressed to close the contact. High level signal is output, while when the power switch 85a is in the OFF state, the contact is opened and the Low level signal is output. The main MPU 62 can determine the state (OFF state or ON state) of the power switch 85a based on the signal from the power switch state detection sensor 85b.

The power switch 85a is not limited to the rocker switch described above, and various types of switches can be adopted. For example, as shown in FIG. 288, various switches such as a toggle switch having a lever-shaped (rod-shaped) operating portion and a rotary switch having a rotary operating portion as shown in FIG. 289 can be adopted. FIG. 288 (A) shows a state in which the power switch 85a2 using the toggle switch is in the OFF state, and FIG. 288 (B) shows a state in which the power switch 85a2 is in the ON state. .. FIG. 289 (A) shows a state in which the power switch 85a3 using the rotary switch is in the OFF state, and FIG. 289 (B) shows a state in which the power switch 85a3 is in the ON state. .. As described above, the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to the rocker switch described above, and various types of switches can be adopted. Similar to FIG. 287, the detailed structure of the contact portion of the toggle switch itself and the detailed structure of the contact portion of the rotary switch itself are omitted.

Further, the power switch state detection sensor 85b is not limited to the above-mentioned electric contact type sensor, and various sensors can be adopted. For example, various switches such as an optical sensor (photo switch) and a magnetic sensor can be adopted.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 287, 288 and 289, the power switch state detection sensor 85b is configured to detect the ON state of the power switch 85a (turns ON when the power switch 85a is ON and outputs a High level signal. However, as another example, a configuration for detecting the OFF state of the power switch 85a (a configuration in which the power switch 85a is turned ON and a High level signal is output in the OFF state) may be used. Further, the power switch state detection sensor 85b may be provided at both the position where the power switch 85a is turned ON in the ON state and the position where the power switch 85a is turned ON when the power switch 85a is OFF. According to this configuration, the accuracy of detecting the state of the power switch 85a can be improved. In this configuration, if there is a contradiction in the signals from the two power switch state detection sensors 85b, an error may be notified.

Let's return to the control of the main MPU 62.

When the drive voltage becomes less than a predetermined value, the main MPU 62 determines whether the power switch 85a is in the ON state or the OFF state based on the signal from the power switch state detection sensor 85b, and determines whether the power switch 85a is in the ON state or the OFF state. When it is determined that the switch 85a is in the ON state, the main side abnormal power failure flag stored in the main RAM 64 is turned ON, and then the above-mentioned main side power failure process is executed. The main-side abnormal power-off flag is a flag for determining whether the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power-off was an ON state or an OFF state at the next power-on. Specifically, the main-side abnormal power failure flag is ON when the power switch 85a is in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure when the power is turned on, and the power supply at the time of the previous power failure. When the state of the switch 85a is the OFF state, it is OFF.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 85 is provided with a capacitor 87 as a backup power source, and after the power supply from the commercial power source is cut off, the power supply is switched to the capacitor 87. Therefore, even after the drive voltage becomes less than a predetermined value, the power required to complete the main side power failure processing is secured. Further, the state of the main side abnormal power failure flag stored in the main side RAM 64 is also held until the next startup. As a modification, a capacitor for securing the power required to complete the main side power cutoff process (capacitor for main side power cutoff processing) and a capacitor for holding (backing up) the state of the main side RAM 64 are used. (Main side RAM backup capacitor) may be provided separately. In this configuration, the main side power failure processing capacitor may be provided in, for example, the power supply device 85, and may be configured to supply electric power to the entire main control device 60. Further, the main RAM backup capacitor may be connected only to the main RAM 64, for example, and may be configured to supply backup power only to the RAM 64.

After that, the main MPU 62 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment refers to the main side abnormal power failure flag at the next startup when the power supply is started, so that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure Is in the OFF state or in the ON state. Then, when it is determined that the main side abnormal power interruption flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption was the OFF state, the normal power interruption command is voice-emitting control. It is transmitted to the device 90. The normal power cut command is a command for notifying the voice emission control device 90 that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power cut was in the OFF state.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the main side abnormal power failure flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was the ON state, the abnormal power failure command is voice emission controlled. It is transmitted to the device 90. The abnormal power cut command is a command for notifying the voice emission control device 90 that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power cut was ON.

When the voice emission control device 90 receives the normal power cutoff command, the sound light side abnormal power cutoff flag stored in the sound light side RAM 94 is turned off, and on the other hand, when the sound light side abnormal power cutoff command is received, the voice light emission control device 90 receives the abnormal power cutoff command. , Turn on the abnormal power failure flag on the sound and light side.

In this way, the main side abnormal power failure flag and the sound light side abnormal power failure flag are generated by the administrator or the like displacing the power switch 85a from the ON state to the OFF state, and then the administrator or the like. Is turned off when the pachinko machine 10 is started by displacing the power switch 85a from the OFF state to the ON state, while the administrator or the like turns the island power switch while the power switch 85a is in the ON state. The pachinko machine 10 was displaced from the ON state to the OFF state or a power failure occurred, causing a power failure, and then the administrator or the like displaced the island power switch from the OFF state to the ON state or the power failure was restored. Is ON when is started.

After starting the pachinko machine 10, the voice emission control device 90 executes various processes based on the state of the sound / light side abnormal power interruption flag.

First, the processing related to the RTC effect will be described.

In the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 executes a process of setting the RTC effect to an unexecutable state when the sound light side abnormal power interruption flag is OFF, while the sound light side abnormal power interruption flag is executed. When is ON, the process of setting the RTC effect to a state in which it can be executed is executed. That is, when the power switch 85a is displaced from the ON state to the OFF state to cause a power failure, and then the power switch 85a is displaced from the OFF state to the ON state to start the pachinko machine 10, the RTC effect is produced. The process of setting the infeasible state is executed, while the island power switch is displaced from the ON state to the OFF state while the power switch 85a is in the ON state, or a power failure occurs, resulting in a power failure, and then. When the pachinko machine 10 is started due to the displacement of the island power switch from the OFF state to the ON state or the restoration of the power failure, a process of setting the RTC effect to a state in which the RTC effect can be executed is executed. The RTC effect is an effect executed based on the current date and time (current year, date, time, day of the week, etc.), the elapsed time from a predetermined date and time, and the like. Hereinafter, prior to the specific description of the present embodiment, a game hall in which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed will be described, and then the RTC effect will be described.

Generally, in a game hall in which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed, power is simultaneously (simultaneously) started to be supplied to the plurality of pachinko machines 10. Specifically, a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed in so-called island equipment with their respective power switches 85a turned on, and when the island power switch of the island equipment is turned on, they are installed in the island equipment. The power supply to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is started all at once (at the same time).

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 reads the current date and time information from the time counting register 97b1 of the RTC 97 based on the start of supply of electric power to the pachinko machine 10, and reads the read current date and time information. A process of storing the start date / time information in the start date / time information storage area 94b of the sound / light side RAM 94 (hereinafter, also referred to as “start date / time information storage process”) is executed. Then, the start date / time information storage process is executed based on the start date / time information including the date and time when the start date / time information storage process is executed and the current date / time information timed by the timed register 97b1 of the RTC97. The activation elapsed time, which is the elapsed time since then, is calculated, and the execution of the RTC effect is started based on the calculated activation elapsed time. The effect of adopting this configuration will be described.

Temporarily, unlike the present embodiment, the RTC effect is started to be executed based on the current date and time information timed in the timekeeping register 97b1 of the RTC97, not the start elapsed time after the start date and time information storage process is executed. (For example, a case where the RTC effect is started at the timing when the time included in the current date and time information becomes 11:00:00) will be described. In this configuration, when the current date and time information measured by the time counting register 97b1 of each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility is deviated (for example, it is included in the current date and time information of the pachinko machine 10A at a certain moment). When the time is 11:00:00 and the time included in the current date and time information of the pachinko machine 10B is 10:59:52), the timing at which the RTC effect is started is for each pachinko machine. There is a problem that it is different for each machine 10 and gives a sense of discomfort to the player who expected that the RTC production is started all at once (at the same time) in each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility is based on the fact that the supply of power from the outside to the pachinko machine 10 is started, and the timekeeping register of the RTC 97 is started. The current date and time information is read from 97b1 and the start date and time information storage process for storing the read current date and time information as the start date and time information in the start date and time information storage area 94b is executed. Therefore, for example, when the manager of the game hall turns on the island power switch, the power supply to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the island equipment is started all at once (at the same time), and the island equipment is supplied with electric power. Each of the installed pachinko machines 10 simultaneously (simultaneously) executes the start date / time information storage process.

Then, according to this embodiment, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility clocks the start date / time information including the date and time when the start date / time information storage process is executed, and the timekeeping register 97b1 of the RTC97. Based on the current date and time information that has been set, the elapsed startup time since the activation date and time information storage process was executed is calculated. As described above, since each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility simultaneously (simultaneously) executes the start date / time information storage process, the start date / time information storage process calculated in each pachinko machine 10 is executed. The elapsed startup time since then is the same (or substantially the same) even if the time included in the current date and time information timed in the timekeeping register 97b1 of the RTC 97 of each pachinko machine 10 is deviated.

Then, according to the present embodiment, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility starts the RTC effect based on the calculated start-up elapsed time, so that all the pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility all at once. It is possible to start the RTC production (at the same time).

However, in the pachinko machine 10 having such a configuration, after turning on the island power switch to start supplying electric power to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility all at once (at the same time), For the purpose of changing the setting information, the power switch 85a of one pachinko machine 10 is individually displaced from the ON state to the OFF state to cut off the power supply, and the power switch 85a is displaced from the OFF state to the ON state again. If the setting change mode is activated, the activation date / time information storage process will be executed even when the second power supply is started, so other pachinko machines installed in the island facility will be executed. There is a problem that the start timing of the one pachinko machine 10 is different from the start timing of the RTC effect of the other pachinko machine 10. In particular, since the time required to change the setting information is about 1 minute, the one pachinko machine 10 whose setting information has been changed starts the RTC effect about 1 minute later than the other pachinko machine 10. Will be. In general, the RTC effect time is about 5 minutes, so that the RTC effect in the one pachinko machine 10 whose setting information has been changed is duplicated in a state of being deviated from the RTC effect in the other pachinko machine 10. There is a problem that it is executed and interferes with the player, causing discomfort to the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is displaced from the ON state to the OFF state and the power supply is cut off, and then the power switch 85a is displaced from the OFF state to the ON state and started. That is, when the abnormal power failure flag is OFF at the time of startup, the RTC effect is set to an unexecutable state. As a result, for example, since the RTC effect is not executed in the one pachinko machine 10 activated in the setting change mode, the RTC effect in the one pachinko machine 10 is deviated from the RTC effect in the other pachinko machine 10. It is possible to prevent the players from being duplicated and interfering with each other in the same state, and it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable.

On the other hand, while the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is in the ON state, the island power switch is displaced from the ON state to the OFF state, so that the power supply is cut off, and then the island power switch is displaced from the OFF state to the ON state. When it is activated by the above, that is, when the abnormal power failure flag is ON at the time of activation, the RTC effect is set to a state in which it can be executed. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the RTC effect at the same timing (or substantially the same) as the other pachinko machines 10 installed in the island equipment.

Next, the processing related to the deferred suggestion effect will be described.

In the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 executes a process of setting the deferred suggestion effect to an unexecutable state when the sound light side abnormal power interruption flag is OFF, while the sound light side abnormal power cutoff. When the flag is ON, the process of setting the deferred suggestion effect to a feasible state is executed. That is, when the power switch 85a is displaced from the ON state to the OFF state, a power failure occurs, and then the power switch 85a is displaced from the OFF state to the ON state, and the pachinko machine 10 is started. Is executed, while the power switch 85a is left on and the island power switch is displaced from the ON state to the OFF state or a power failure occurs, resulting in a power failure. When the island power switch is displaced from the OFF state to the ON state or the power failure is restored and the pachinko machine 10 is started, a process of setting the deferred suggestion effect to a state in which it can be executed is executed. Hereinafter, prior to the specific explanation of the present embodiment, the deferred suggestion effect will be described.

The deferred suggestion effect is an effect that can be executed when the setting information is not changed at the time of startup (when the power is turned on), and the setting information is not changed at the time of this startup (the setting information is deferred). ) Is a production that suggests. In the present embodiment, as a deferred suggestion effect, an effect is adopted in which the effect operation button 24 moves slightly toward you (to the player side) and then returns to the original position. However, as the deferred suggestion effect, various forms of effect can be adopted. For example, a specific character (for example, a specific female character) is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 in a predetermined display mode for several seconds. Directly indicate that the setting information has been deferred or may have been deferred by the effect of displaying the degree, or by the character string or voice such as "The setting has been deferred!" Or "The setting may have been deferred!". It is possible to adopt a suggestive effect or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, the timing of the start of the first game round (variation of the special symbol) after the power is turned on is adopted as the timing of executing the deferred suggestion effect. However, various timings can be adopted as the timing for executing the deferred suggestion effect, for example, the timing of starting the game rotation of the predetermined number of times (for example, the 30th rotation) after the power is turned on, or after the power is turned on. It is possible to adopt the timing of execution of the first specific effect (for example, a specific super reach effect) of.

According to such a configuration, the player confirms whether or not the deferred suggestion effect is executed, and thus whether or not the setting information is deferred at the time of the current startup of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the setting information is set). Whether it has changed or not) can be predicted. More specifically, for example, when there is a pachinko machine 10 having a high frequency of big hit winning in a certain game hall, the player can set the setting information of the pachinko machine 10 to a value with a high probability of winning a big hit (for example, setting 6). ) May be set. Then, when the player plays a game on the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall on the next day and the deferred suggestion effect is executed, the player maintains the high setting of the previous day. You can expect it to be. Therefore, according to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting whether or not the setting information of the pachinko machine 10 has been deferred from the previous day.

However, if the setting information is not changed at the time of startup (when the power is turned on) without adopting the configuration of the present embodiment described above, the deferred suggestion effect is produced regardless of the state of the abnormal power failure flag on the sound light side. Adopting a feasible configuration raises the challenges described below.

For example, in a certain game hall, a specific pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as a specific pachinko machine 10) operating at setting 6 exists, and a certain player puts out a large amount of balls in the specific pachinko machine 10. Suppose that you have won. Then, the player and other players who have seen the large number of balls will recognize that the specific pachinko machine 10 may be a high-setting platform.

Then, after the business of the game hall is closed, the malicious manager of the game hall includes the specific pachinko machine 10 installed in the island equipment by displacing the island power switch from the ON state to the OFF state. The power supply to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is cut off. Then, before the start of business on the next business day, the administrator displaces the island power switch from the OFF state to the ON state to supply electric power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the island equipment. To start. After that, the administrator temporarily cuts off the power supply to the specific pachinko machine 10 by displacing the power switch 85a of the specific pachinko machine 10 from the ON state to the OFF state, and then to the specific pachinko machine 10. By displacing the power switch 85a from the OFF state to the ON state while performing the operation for activating the setting change mode, the power switch 85a is started in the setting change mode, and the setting information is changed from 6 to 1 in the setting change mode. Then, by shifting the power switch 85a of the specific pachinko machine 10 from the ON state to the OFF state again, the supply of electric power to the specific pachinko machine 10 is cut off again. After that, when the administrator again displaces the power switch 85a of the specific pachinko machine 10 from the OFF state to the ON state and normally starts the specific pachinko machine 10 (the setting information remains 1), the pachinko machine 10 The deferred suggestion effect is ready to be executed.

Then, the player who has acquired a large amount of balls on the previous day (or the previous business day) or another player who has seen the large amount of balls has started the business of the game hall, and the specific pachinko machine When the game is played in 10 and the deferred suggestion effect is executed, the player has deferred the specific pachinko machine 10 in the same high setting state as the previous day (or the previous business day) (change). It may be mistaken as (not done).

That is, depending on the operation of the manager of the game hall, the deferred suggestion effect can be executed even though the setting information is actually changed from that of the previous day (or the previous business day) in the pachinko machine 10. This creates the problem that the player may be deceived.

Then, as described above, in the game hall where the power supply to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is started and stopped all at once by the island power switch of the island facility, the pachinko machine 10 operates the individual power switch 85a. If the power supply is cut off or the power supply is started, it is highly possible that the setting information has been changed from the previous day (or the previous business day).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the sound / light side abnormal power failure flag is OFF at startup, that is, the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is displaced from the ON state to the OFF state to supply power. When the power switch 85a is subsequently displaced from the OFF state to the ON state and activated, a process of setting the deferred suggestion effect to an unexecutable state is executed. According to such a configuration, even when the game hall is operated as described above, the deferred suggestion effect is not executed in the specific pachinko machine 10, so that the player is prevented from being deceived. Can be done.

<< 7-5 >> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. First, the process executed by the main control device 60 will be described, and then the process executed by the voice emission control device 90 will be described.

Next, an example of the processing executed by the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 of the present embodiment will be specifically described.

The main MPU 62 of the present embodiment executes the main process and the timer interrupt process. The main process is a process executed after the power is turned on.

FIG. 290 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment when the power is turned on.

In step Sr0101, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the control device on the sub side (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) can be operated. Wait processing is executed for, for example, about 1 second in order to wait for the state to be reached. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0102 to execute the setting process of the internal function register. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0103.

In step Sr0103, it is determined whether or not the main side abnormal power failure flag is ON. As described above, the main side abnormal power failure flag is a flag for determining whether the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was the ON state or the OFF state at the next power-on. be. Specifically, the main side abnormal power failure flag is ON when the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was ON, and the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure. Is OFF when is in the OFF state.

If it is determined in step Sr0103 that the main side abnormal power cutoff flag is not ON (step Sr0103: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0104, and a normal power cutoff command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0106, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0103 that the main side abnormal power interruption flag is ON (step Sr0103: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0105, and the abnormal power interruption command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0106. Since the normal power cut command and the abnormal power cut command are commands for notifying the voice emission control device 90 of the state (power cut type) of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power cut, the power cut type command. Also called.

In step Sr0106, it is determined whether or not the power recovery flag is ON.

Here, the power recovery flag will be described. In the present embodiment, when the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs, various information stored in the register of the main CPU 62x (information indicating the gaming state, control information, etc.) Is evacuated to a predetermined area of the main RAM 64. Then, when the saving of these information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON and a predetermined operation is executed based on the predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64. A RAM determination value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64. As described above, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying whether or not the information for returning to the state at the time of the previous power failure is stored in the main RAM 64 at the time of turning on the power. After the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the above-mentioned save process, RAM determination value calculation process, and the like can be executed by supplying power from a backup power source such as a capacitor.

If it is determined in step Sr0106 that the power recovery flag is ON (step Sr0106: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0107, and a predetermined operation is executed based on a predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64. By doing so, the RAM determination value is calculated. In the present embodiment, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM determination value. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0108, and whether or not the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) is normal, that is, the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) and the RAM determination value stored in the main RAM 64 ( It is determined whether or not the checksum value) matches. If it is determined in step Sr0108 that the RAM determination value is normal (step Sr0108: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0109.

In step Sr0109, the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 is read, and it is determined whether or not the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In the present embodiment, the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 has 6 stages from "1" to "6", so that the setting information is a numerical value within the range of "1" to "6". Determines that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range, while when "0" or "7" is stored as the setting information, or when information other than the numerical value is stored due to noise or the like. It is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range. If it is determined in step Sr0109 that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range (step Sr0109: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0110.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sr0106 described above that the power recovery flag is not ON (step Sr0106: NO), when it is determined in step Sr0108 described above that the RAM determination value is not normal (step Sr0108: NO), and If it is determined in step Sr0109 described above that the setting information is not within a predetermined range (step Sr0109: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0118 and the RAM error flag is turned ON. That is, the RAM abnormality flag is a flag that turns ON when the recovery flag is OFF, when the RAM determination value is not normal, or when the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range. This is a flag indicating that the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal.

Hereinafter, the flow of processing to be executed when the RAM error flag is not turned ON will be described, and then the flow of processing to be executed when the RAM error flag is turned ON will be described.

In step Sr0110, it is determined whether or not the setting changing flag is ON. The setting changing flag is a flag that turns ON at the start of the setting change process (setting change mode) described later and turns OFF at the end of the setting change process (setting change mode). Here, the situation in which the setting changing flag is ON in step Sr0110 means that the setting change process (setting change mode) described later is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on last time, and the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed. The power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs during the execution of the setting change mode), so that the setting changing flag is kept on.

If it is determined in step Sr0110 that the setting changing flag is ON (step Sr0110: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0121 to execute the setting change process (setting change mode). In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z is executed, and a process of accepting the change of the setting information of the lottery setting is executed. That is, the setting change mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can change the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0110 that the setting changing flag is not ON (step Sr0110: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0111.

In step Sr0111, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 66a is ON. If it is determined in step Sr0111 that the RAM clear switch 66a is not ON (step Sr0111: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0112, and whether or not all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON. To judge. Note that "the setting key is ON" means that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion unit 66b (keyhole) and is located on the ON side. Further, the frame opening switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door opening switch is a switch in which the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13. It is a switch that sometimes turns on.

If it is determined in step Sr0112 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step Sr0112: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0113.

In step Sr0113, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation flag is ON. The setting confirmation flag is a flag that turns ON at the start of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) described later and turns OFF at the end of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode). Here, the situation in which the setting confirmation flag is ON in step Sr0113 means that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) described later is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on last time, and the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is executed. The power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs during the execution of the setting confirmation mode), so that the setting confirmation flag is kept on.

If it is determined in step Sr0113 that the setting confirmation flag is not ON (step Sr0113: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0114, and a normal activation command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. The pachinko machine 10 (main control device 60) is in a normal state in which the normal start command is not determined to be a RAM abnormality and does not execute any of the setting change processing, the setting confirmation processing, and the RAM clear processing described later. This command indicates that it has started. Upon receiving the normal activation command, the voice emission control device 90 executes a process of notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated in the normal state. Specifically, in the present embodiment, a voice such as "normally starts" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step Sr0114, the process proceeds to step Sr0116 described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sr0112 described above that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch and the door opening switch are ON (step Sr0112: YES), and in step Sr0113, the setting confirmation flag is ON. If it is determined (step Sr0113: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0115. That is, when the RAM clear switch 66a is turned off when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are turned on, and the previous time of the pachinko machine 10. The setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is executed when the power is turned on, and the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs during the execution of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode). If the checking flag is kept ON, the process proceeds to step Sr0115.

In step Sr0115, the setting confirmation process is executed. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process of displaying the setting information of the current lottery setting on the information display unit 45z is executed. That is, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can confirm the setting information of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) will be described later. After executing step Sr0115, the process proceeds to step Sr0116.

In step Sr0116, a power recovery process for returning to the state when the power was turned off last time is executed. Specifically, in the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is returned to the register of the main CPU 62x. , The state of the register of the main CPU 62x is restored to the state before the power supply is cut off. After executing step Sr0116, the process proceeds to step Sr0117, and the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0126, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0111 described above that the RAM clear switch 66a is ON (step Sr0111: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0120, and the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all turned ON. It is determined whether or not it is. If it is determined in step Sr0120 that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON (step Sr0120: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0121 described above, and the setting change process (setting change) described above is performed. Mode) is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0126 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0120 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step Sr0120: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0122.

In step Sr0122, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sr0122 that the RAM error flag is not ON (step Sr0122: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0123 to execute the RAM clear process. The RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64 except for the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the RAM clear process is executed, various flag information indicating the game state, various control information, and the like are deleted, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not deleted, and the setting information is maintained as it is. After executing step Sr0123, the process proceeds to step Sr0124, and a RAM clear command, which is a command indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. As will be described later, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the RAM clear command, it starts any of the above-mentioned RAM clear notification processes A, B1 and B2. After executing step Sr0124, the process proceeds to step Sr0126, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0122 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step Sr0122: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0125, and a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is emitted by voice. It is transmitted to the control device 90. As will be described later, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, the voice emission control device 90 starts the RAM abnormality notification process. After executing step Sr0125, the process proceeds to step Sr0126. However, in the flow of this description, since the RAM abnormality flag is not turned ON, the process does not proceed to step Sr0125 described above.

In step Sr0126, a lighting / blinking process, which is a process of lighting and blinking all the light emitting units (segment light emitting unit and DP light emitting unit) constituting the information display unit 45z, is executed. In the lighting / blinking process, all the light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z are turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and then blinked synchronously for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). After executing step Sr0126, the process proceeds to step Sr0127.

In step Sr0127, an interrupt enable setting that permits the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is executed. After that, the infinite loop is repeated and waited, and the timer interrupt processing described later is periodically executed (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

Next, the flow of processing executed when the RAM error flag is turned ON in step Sr0118 will be described.

As described above, when it is determined in step Sr0106 that the power recovery flag is not ON (step Sr0106: NO), when it is determined in step Sr0108 that the RAM determination value is not normal (step Sr0108: NO), and step. If it is determined in Sr0109 that the setting information is not within a predetermined range (step Sr0109: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0118 and the RAM error flag is turned ON. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0119.

In step Sr0119, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 66a is ON. If it is determined in step Sr0119 that the RAM clear switch 66a is ON (step Sr0119: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0120, and whether or not all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON. Is determined. If it is determined in step Sr0120 that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON (step Sr0120: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0121 described above, and the setting change process (setting change) described above is performed. Mode) is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0125. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sr0119 that the RAM clear switch 66a is not ON (step Sr0119: NO), and in step Sr0120, it is determined that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON. If this is the case (step Sr0120: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0122.

In step Sr0122, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sr0122 that the RAM error flag is not ON (step Sr0122: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0123, and the above-mentioned RAM clearing process is executed. After executing step Sr0123, the process proceeds to step Sr0124, and a RAM clear command, which is a command indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After executing step Sr0124, the process proceeds to step Sr0125. However, in the flow of this description, since the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the process does not proceed to step Sr0123 described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0122 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step Sr0122: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0125, and a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is emitted by voice. It is transmitted to the control device 90. After executing step Sr0125, the process proceeds to step Sr0126.

In step Sr0126, the above-mentioned lighting / blinking process is executed. After executing step Sr0126, the process proceeds to step Sr0127 to execute the interrupt enable setting for permitting the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. After that, the infinite loop process is repeatedly waited for, and the timer interrupt process described later is periodically executed (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation for executing the setting change process (setting change mode) is that the RAM clear switch 66a is pressed (turned on) and the setting key (setting key). This is an operation of turning on the power switch 85a with all of the keyhole), the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch turned on. In addition, the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is that the RAM clear switch 66a is not pressed (OFF state), and the setting key (keyhole), frame opening switch, and door are set. This is an operation of turning on the power switch 85a with all the release switches turned on. The operation for executing the RAM clear process is to press the RAM clear switch 66a (turn it ON) and turn off any of the setting key (keyhole), the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch. This is an operation to turn on the power switch 85a in the state of.

An example of the processing flow realized by executing the above-mentioned main processing will be described below.

-When it is determined whether or not the main side abnormal power failure flag is ON (step Sr0103) when the power supply is started, and if it is determined that the main side abnormal power failure flag is OFF (step). Sr0103: NO), a normal power cut command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 (step Sr0104), while when it is determined that the main side abnormal power cut flag is ON (step Sr0103: YES), the power is abnormal. The disconnect command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 (step Sr0105). After that, it becomes one of the following processing flows.

-After transmitting either the normal power failure command or the abnormal power failure command, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM error flag is satisfied (step Sr0106, step Sr0108, step Sr0109), but the setting is changed. When the operation for executing the process (setting change mode) has been performed, regardless of whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM error flag is satisfied, the setting confirmation flag state is set. Regardless, the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed (step Sr0121).

-After transmitting either the normal power failure command or the abnormal power failure command, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM error flag is satisfied (step Sr0106, step Sr0108, step Sr0109), and the RAM error flag. When it is determined that the condition for turning ON is not satisfied, and when it is determined that the setting changing flag is ON (step Sr0110: YES), the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed. The setting change process (setting change mode) is executed regardless of whether or not the operation for executing the operation, the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), and the operation for executing the RAM clear process are performed. (Step Sr0121).

-After transmitting either the normal power failure command or the abnormal power failure command, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM error flag is satisfied (step Sr0106, step Sr0108, step Sr0109), and the RAM error flag. When it is determined that the condition for turning ON is not satisfied, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not ON (step Sr0110: NO), and an operation for executing the RAM clear process is performed. (Step Sr0111: YES, Step Sr0120: NO, Step Sr0122: NO), the RAM clear process is executed (step Sr0123) regardless of the state of the setting confirmation flag, and the RAM clear command is transmitted (step Sr0124). ..

-After transmitting either the normal power failure command or the abnormal power failure command, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM error flag is satisfied (step Sr0106, step Sr0108, step Sr0109), and the RAM error flag. When it is determined that the condition for turning ON is not satisfied, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not ON (step Sr0110: NO), and the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is performed. If it has been performed (step Sr0111: NO, step Sr0112: YES), the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is executed (step Sr0115).

-After transmitting either the normal power failure command or the abnormal power failure command, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM error flag is satisfied (step Sr0106, step Sr0108, step Sr0109), and the RAM error flag. When it is determined that the condition for turning ON is not satisfied, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not ON (step Sr0110: NO), and the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is performed. Even if it has not been performed, if the setting confirmation flag is ON (step Sr0113: YES), the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is executed (step Sr0115).

-After transmitting either the normal power failure command or the abnormal power failure command, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM error flag is satisfied (step Sr0106, step Sr0108, step Sr0109), and the RAM error flag. When it is determined that the condition to be turned ON is satisfied and the RAM error flag is turned ON (step Sr0118), even if the operation for executing the RAM clear process is performed, even if the operation for executing the RAM clear process is performed. The RAM error command is transmitted without executing the RAM clear process (step Sr0125).

-After transmitting either the normal power failure command or the abnormal power failure command, it is determined whether or not the condition for turning on the RAM error flag is satisfied (step Sr0106, step Sr0108, step Sr0109), and the RAM error flag. When it is determined that the condition to be turned ON is satisfied and the RAM error flag is turned ON (step Sr0118), the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is performed. Even so, the RAM error command is transmitted without executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) (step Sr0125).

Next, the details of the setting change process shown in step Sr0121 of FIG. 290 will be described.

FIG. 291 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment.

In step Sr0201, a setting change mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has been started, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.

After the setting change mode start command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90, the information indicating that the setting change mode has been started may be transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting change mode has started may be configured to display the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode on the management screen. After executing step Sr0201, the process proceeds to step Sr0202.

In step Sr0202, the setting changing flag in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. As described above, the setting changing flag is a flag indicating that the setting change process (setting change mode) has started, and a flag indicating that the setting change process (setting change mode) has not been completed yet. Is. After executing step Sr0202, the process proceeds to step Sr0203.

In step Sr0203, the initial setting process at the start of setting change is executed. At the start of setting change In the initial setting process, the initial settings required to start the setting change process are executed. Further, in the present embodiment, in the initial setting process at the start of setting change, it is determined whether or not the RAM error flag is ON, and if it is determined that the RAM error flag is ON, the RAM error flag is set. Turn it off. After executing step Sr0203, the process proceeds to step Sr0204.

In step Sr0204, the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 is read and saved as the setting information for updating. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read setting information is used for other than the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. Store (copy) in the update setting information storage area, which is an area. After executing step Sr0204, the process proceeds to step Sr0205.

In step Sr0205, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and control for displaying the read update setting information on the information display unit 45z is started. Specifically, the three left 7-segment displays of the information display unit 45z are started to display the character string "set." Indicates that the setting change mode is being executed, and the rightmost 7-segment display is displayed. In addition to starting the lighting display of the update setting information, the blinking display of the DP light emitting unit of the rightmost 7-segment display is started. After executing step Sr0205, the process proceeds to step Sr0206.

In step Sr0206, it is determined whether or not the update setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In the present embodiment, since the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 has 6 stages from "1" to "6", the update setting information is a numerical value within the range of "1" to "6". Judge whether or not. If it is determined in step Sr0206 that the update setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range (step Sr0206: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0208. On the other hand, in step Sr0206, when it is determined that the update setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range (step Sr0206: NO), for example, when "0" or "7" is stored as the update setting information. If information other than the numerical value is stored due to noise or the like, the process proceeds to step Sr0207, and the update setting information is changed to the initial value. In this embodiment, "1" is stored as an initial value in the update setting information. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0208.

In step Sr0208, it is determined whether or not the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the signal indicates the High level while the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) is on the ON side, and the setting key (setting key insertion) is inserted. While the part 66b) is on the OFF side, the signal indicating the Low level is monitored, and when the signal detects a falling edge falling from the High level to the Low level, a key for setting (setting). It is determined that the key insertion unit 66b) is on the OFF side. If it is determined in step Sr0208 that the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) has not shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step Sr0208: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0209, and the setting change switch 66c Is determined whether or not is pressed. If it is determined in step Sr0209 that the setting change switch 66c is pressed (step Sr0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0210 to update the update setting information. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical information stored as the update setting information. However, if the setting change switch 66c is pressed in a situation where the numerical information stored as the update setting information is "6", the numerical information is updated to "1". After that, the process returns to step Sr0206 described above, and it is determined whether or not the updated update setting information is within a predetermined range. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0209 that the setting change switch 66c is not pressed (step Sr0209: NO), the process returns to step Sr0206 described above without executing the process of step Sr0210, and the update setting information Determines whether or not is a numerical value within a predetermined range.

If it is determined in step Sr0208 described above that the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step Sr0208: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0211.

In step Sr0211, it is determined whether or not the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is the same as the setting information stored in the setting information storage area. If it is determined in step Sr0211 that the update setting information is not the same as the setting information (step Sr0211: NO), that is, if the setting information is changed by an administrator or the like, the process proceeds to step Sr0212 and the setting has been changed. Turn on the flag. The setting changed flag is a flag for determining whether or not the setting information has been changed when the setting change mode end command described later is transmitted. After executing step Sr0212, the process proceeds to step Sr0213. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0211 that the update setting information is the same as the setting information (step Sr0211: YES), that is, if the setting information is not changed by the administrator or the like, step Sr0212 is executed. The process proceeds to step Sr0213 without any problems.

In step Sr0213, the update setting information stored in the main RAM 64 is read and saved as the setting information. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read update setting information is stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. Remember (copy). After executing step Sr0213, the process proceeds to step Sr0214 to start the lighting display of the setting information on the rightmost 7-segment display and switch the display mode of the DP light emitting unit of the rightmost 7-segment display from the blinking display to the lighting display. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0215 to execute the wait process. In the wait process, it waits for 2 seconds without proceeding to the next process. As a result, the character string "set." Is lit and displayed on the three left 7-segment displays of the information display unit 45z, and the confirmed setting information is lit and displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display. The state in which the DP light emitting part of the rightmost 7-segment display is lit and displayed continues for 2 seconds. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0216, and the control for displaying the setting information on the information display unit 45z is terminated. Specifically, the four 7-segment displays constituting the information display unit 45z are shifted to the off state. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0217.

In step Sr0217, it is determined whether or not the setting changed flag described above is ON. If it is determined in step Sr0217 that the setting changed flag is not ON (step Sr0217: NO), that is, if the setting information is not changed by the administrator or the like, the process proceeds to step Sr0218 and the setting information is changed. The setting change mode end command A, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0220. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sr0217 that the setting changed flag is ON (step Sr0217: YES), that is, when the setting information is changed by the administrator or the like, the process proceeds to step Sr0219 and the setting information is changed. The setting change mode end command B, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0220.

After the setting change mode end command A or B is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90, the information indicating that the setting change mode has ended may be transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting change mode has ended may be configured to display the information indicating that the setting change mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen.

In step Sr0220, the RAM clear process is executed. In the RAM clear process, information other than the lottery setting setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is erased. That is, when this RAM clear processing is executed, the above-mentioned setting changing flag and setting changed flag are also erased (turned off).

After executing step Sr0220, this setting change process ends. After executing the setting change process, the setting information of the changed lottery setting is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal, and the hall computer that receives the information is displayed on the management screen of the pachinko machine. The setting information of the lottery setting after the change of 10 may be displayed.

Next, the details of the setting confirmation process shown in step Sr0115 of FIG. 290 will be described.

FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment.

In step Sr0301, a setting confirmation mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been started, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Upon receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the voice emission control device 90 starts the setting confirmation mode execution notification process described above.

After the setting confirmation mode start command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90, the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been started may be transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has started may be configured to display the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode on the management screen. After executing step Sr0301, the process proceeds to step Sr0302.

In step Sr0302, the setting confirmation flag in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. As described above, the setting confirmation flag is a flag indicating that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has started, and a flag indicating that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has not been completed yet. Is. After executing step Sr0302, the process proceeds to step Sr0303.

In step Sr0303, control for displaying the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 on the information display unit 45z is started. Specifically, as described above, the left three 7-segment displays of the information display unit 45z are started to light and display the character string "sec." Indicating that the setting confirmation mode is being executed, and the right end. The 7-segment display is made to start the lighting display of the setting information, and the lighting display of the DP light emitting unit of the rightmost 7-segment display is started. After executing step Sr0303, the process proceeds to step Sr0304.

In step Sr0304, it is determined whether or not the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the signal indicates the High level while the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) is on the ON side, and the setting key (setting key insertion) is inserted. While the part 66b) is on the OFF side, the signal indicating the Low level is monitored, and when the signal detects a falling edge falling from the High level to the Low level, a key for setting (setting). It is determined that the key insertion unit 66b) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. If it is determined in step Sr0304 that the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) has not shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step Sr0304: NO), step Sr0304 is executed again. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0304 that the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step Sr0304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0305. That is, until the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) shifts from the ON side to the OFF side, the infinite loop is repeated and the process does not proceed to step Sr0305, and the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) is turned ON. When shifting from the side to the OFF side, the process proceeds to step Sr0305.

In step Sr0305, the control for displaying the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z is terminated. Specifically, the four 7-segment displays constituting the information display unit 45z are shifted to the off state. As a result, the character string "sec." Is lit and displayed on the three left 7-segment displays of the information display unit 45z, and the setting information is lit and displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display and the rightmost 7-segment display. The state in which the DP light emitting unit of the display is lit and displayed continues from the start of the setting confirmation mode until the setting key (setting key insertion unit 66b) shifts to the OFF side. After executing step Sr0305, the process proceeds to step Sr0306.

In step Sr0306, the setting changing flag in the main RAM 64 is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0307.

In step Sr0307, a setting confirmation mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. As will be described later, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the setting confirmation mode end command, the voice emission control device 90 ends the setting confirmation mode execution notification process, and then executes the above-mentioned setting confirmation mode end notification process for 30 seconds.

After executing step Sr0307, this setting confirmation process ends. After the setting confirmation mode end command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90, the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended may be transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended may be configured to display the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and the pachinko machine 10 is started, the above-mentioned normal start command, RAM error command, RAM clear command, and setting change mode start command are started. , One of the five commands of the setting confirmation mode start command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 90. The voice emission control device 90 that received any one of these five commands started the main control device 60 based on the type of the received command (what type). It is possible to grasp whether the startup process of is executed). That is, the above-mentioned five commands of the normal start command, the RAM error command, the RAM clear command, the setting change mode start command, and the setting confirmation mode start command are commands indicating the type of start processing executed by the main control device 60. Therefore, these five commands are collectively referred to as a "startup type command".

Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is periodically (for example, 4 msec cycle) started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

FIG. 293 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr0401, various random number update processes are executed. In various random number update processes, the current numerical information is read from each counter (hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, electric accessory release counter C4, etc.) in the main RAM 64, and the read numerical information is used. After executing the process of adding 1, the process of overwriting the added numerical value to the reading source counter is executed. If the read numerical information is the maximum value of the counter, a process of overwriting 0 in the read source counter is executed. After executing step Sr0401, the process proceeds to step Sr0402.

In step Sr0402, the power supply monitoring process is executed. In the power supply monitoring process, the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is monitored, and when it is determined that the drive voltage is below a predetermined value (for example, 10 volts), the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is supplied. When it is determined that the switch 85a is turned off or a power failure has occurred, various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is saved in a predetermined area of the main RAM 64. Let me. Then, when the saving of these information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON and a predetermined operation is executed based on the predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64. A RAM determination value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64. After that, without proceeding to step Sr0403 described later, the infinite loop process is repeated until the supplied drive voltage drops and becomes inoperable. The power supply device 85 of the present embodiment is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 60 even when the drive voltage supplied to the main control device 60 drops below a predetermined value. It is configured to output a regulated voltage of 5 volts. As the time for outputting this stabilized voltage, a sufficient time is secured for executing the process until the above-mentioned RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64. Further, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the drive voltage has fallen below a predetermined value, it is determined whether or not the power switch 85a is in the OFF state, and the state of the power switch 85a is not in the OFF state. When it is determined, the above-mentioned main side abnormal power failure flag is turned ON.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the power supply monitoring process of step Sr0402 that the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is not below a predetermined value, the process proceeds to step Sr0403 as it is.

In step Sr0403, it is determined whether or not at least one of the RAM abnormality flag and the game stop flag is ON. As described above, the RAM abnormality flag is a flag that turns ON when it is determined that the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal in the main process executed when the power is turned on. The game stop flag is a flag that is turned ON in order to stop the progress of the game when shaking or magnetism is detected in the fraud detection process. If it is determined in step Sr0403 that both the RAM abnormality flag and the game stop flag are not ON (step Sr0403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0404. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0403 that at least one of the RAM error flag and the game stop flag is ON (step Sr0403: YES), the timer interrupt process is terminated without executing the processes after step Sr0404. do. That is, when at least one of the RAM abnormality flag and the game stop flag is ON, the process for enabling the progress of the game after step Sr0404 is not executed, and the game progress mode in which the game can proceed is set. Is configured so that it does not migrate. Hereinafter, the processes after step Sr0404, which are the processes for enabling the progress of the game, will be described.

In step Sr0404, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 36c and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the large winning opening 36a to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 36c is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. The output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory drive unit 34b is started, and the information for switching to the closed state is obtained. If it is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0405.

In step Sr0405, the reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the incoming ball signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0406.

In step Sr0406, the signals received from the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h are read, and the ball entry detection process for performing the process corresponding to the read information is executed. After executing step Sr0406, the process proceeds to step Sr0407.

In step Sr0407, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a predetermined timer counter provided in the main RAM 64 is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0408.

In step Sr0408, a ball entry process for the start port accompanying the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is executed. In the ball entry process for the start port, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are based on the determination that the game ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. Along with acquiring the value, the acquired counter value is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64. After executing step Sr0408, the process proceeds to step Sr0409.

In step Sr0409, the ball entry process for the through gate accompanying the entry (passage) of the game ball into the through gate 35 is executed. In the ball entry process for the through gate, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is acquired based on the determination that the game ball has entered (passed) into the through gate 35, and the acquired counter value is used in the RAM 64. Store in the electric service holding area 64d. After executing step Sr0409, the process proceeds to step Sr0410.

In step Sr0410, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game round control process, a winning lottery and display control of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are performed. After executing step Sr0410, the process proceeds to step Sr0411.

In step Sr0411, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. In the game state transition process, a process of shifting the game state to an open / close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like is executed. After executing step Sr0411, the process proceeds to step Sr0412.

In step Sr0412, an electric service support process for controlling the electric accessory 34a is executed. In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is in the open state (electric accessory opening lottery), and if it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the electric accessory 34a is driven and controlled. After executing step Sr0412, the process proceeds to step Sr0413.

In step Sr0413, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a process for launching the game ball into the game area PA when the operation handle 25 is operated by the player is executed. After executing step Sr0413, the process proceeds to step Sr0414.

In step Sr0414, the door monitoring process is executed. In the door monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are in the open state. After executing step Sr0414, the process proceeds to step Sr0415.

In step Sr0415, fraud detection processing is executed. In the fraud detection process, shaking and magnetism are monitored, and when shaking or magnetism is detected, an alarm sound or voice such as "Shaking detected!" Or "Magnetism detected!" Is output from the speaker 46. At the same time, various lamps 47 are made to blink at the maximum brightness. Further, in the fraud detection process, when shaking or magnetism is detected, the above-mentioned game stop flag is turned ON. As a result, after the game stop flag is turned ON, the execution of the processes from step Sr0404 to step Sr0417 is avoided. After executing step Sr0415, the process proceeds to step Sr0416.

In step Sr0416, a command output process for outputting (transmitting) a command set as a transmission target in the current timer interrupt process to each control device on the sub side is executed. For example, when commands related to effects such as fluctuation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, these are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After executing step Sr0416, the process proceeds to step Sr0417.

In step Sr0417, a game history process for calculating and displaying game history information is executed. The game history processing is a process for calculating game history information such as a bonus ratio and a ball output rate, and displaying the calculated game history information on the information display unit 45z. After executing step Sr0417, this timer interrupt process ends.

Next, the details of the power supply monitoring process shown in step Sr0402 of FIG. 293 will be described.

FIG. 294 is a flowchart showing a power supply monitoring process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr0501, it is determined whether or not the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is less than a predetermined value (for example, 10 volts). If it is determined in step Sr0501 that the drive voltage is not less than a predetermined value (step Sr0501: NO), the main power supply monitoring process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0501 that the drive voltage is less than a predetermined value (step Sr0501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0502, and it is determined whether or not the power switch 85a is in the OFF state.

If it is determined in step Sr0502 that the power switch 85a is in the OFF state (step Sr0502: YES), the process proceeds to step S0503 to turn off the main side abnormal power failure flag. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0505, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0502 that the power switch 85a is not in the OFF state (step Sr0502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0504 and the main side abnormal power failure flag is turned ON. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0505.

In step Sr0505, a power failure generation command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. The power failure generation command is a command for notifying the voice emission control device 90 that the drive voltage has become less than a predetermined value. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0506.

In step Sr0506, various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is saved in a predetermined area of the main RAM 64. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0507, and the information stored in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 64. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0508, and the power recovery flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0509, a RAM determination value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated by executing a predetermined operation based on a predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64, and the calculated RAM determination value is mainly used. Store in the side RAM 64. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0510, RAM access is prohibited, and then an infinite loop process is repeated until the supplied drive voltage drops and becomes inoperable.

The process from step Sr0505 to step Sr0510 executed when it is determined that the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is less than a predetermined value corresponds to the above-mentioned main side power failure process. do.

[Ball entry process for starting port]
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be described. The ball entry process for the start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 293: Sr0408).

FIG. 295 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for a starting port executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr0601, whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (starting entry) is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting opening 33. If it is determined in step Sr0601 that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (Sr0601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0602, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out four game balls. Set the command. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0603.

In step Sr0603, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0604.

In step Sr0604, the start hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold number RaN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra, is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The first start hold number RaN indicates the hold number based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0609.

If it is determined in step Sr0601 that the game ball has not entered the first start port 33 (Sr0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0605, and whether or not the game ball has entered the second start port 34. Is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

If it is determined in step Sr0605 that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sr0605: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0606, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball. Set the command. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0607. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0605 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (Sr0605: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is terminated.

In step Sr0607, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0608.

In step Sr0608, the start hold number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as the second start hold number RbN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb, is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0609.

In step Sr0609, it is determined whether or not the start hold number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sr0604 or step Sr0608 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step Sr0609, when the start hold number N is not less than the upper limit value (Sr0609: NO), that is, when the start hold number N is not more than the upper limit value, the ball entry process for the main start port is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sr0609, if the start hold number N is less than the upper limit value (Sr0609: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0610, 1 is added to the start hold number N of the corresponding hold area, and then the process proceeds to step Sr0611. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reserved quantity CRN). The total hold quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first start hold quantity RaN and the second start hold quantity RbN. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0612.

In step Sr0612, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are combined with the reserved number obtained by adding 1 to the first storage area in the free storage area of the corresponding reserved area, that is, step Sr0610. Store in the corresponding storage area. Specifically, when the first start hold number RaN is set as the processing target, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is vacant in the first hold area Ra. The storage area is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold number RaN to which 1 is added in step Sr0610. When the second start hold quantity RbN is set as the processing target, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are set in the free storage area of the second hold area Rb. Of these, storage is performed in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step Sr0610. After executing step Sr0612, the process proceeds to step Sr0613.

In step Sr0613, it is determined whether or not the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In the present embodiment, the setting information that can be set in the pachinko machine 10 is 6 stages from "1" to "6", so that the setting information is "1", "2", "3", "4", " It is determined whether or not the value is any of "5" and "6". If it is determined in step Sr0613 that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range (step Sr0613: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0614.

In step Sr0614, the first determination process is executed. In the pre-determination process, the winning / failing determination result (lottery result), the jackpot type, and the reach are generated based on the information (holding information) of each value of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. It is a process of executing the determination of the presence / absence of the presence / absence, etc. before the pending information becomes the target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The details of the pre-determination process will be described later. After executing step Sr0614, the process proceeds to step Sr0615.

In step Sr0615, a process of setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the prior determination process executed based on the information (holding information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as the hold command.

The hold command holds the determination result of the advance determination process based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 and the hold information acquired based on the entry. This is a command for the sub-side control device to confirm the information before the information is subject to the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the above-mentioned command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416).

Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the voice emission control device 90 displays the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing the number of holdings is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the entry into the second start port 34 is received, the voice emission control device 90 displays the number of holds in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds.

After executing step Sr0615, the main MPU 62 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sr0613 that the setting information is not within a predetermined range, for example, the setting information such as "7" or "B" in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 due to the influence of noise or the like may be used. If it is determined that an impossible value is stored (step Sr0613: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0616 without executing the pre-determination process of step Sr0614 described above, and an abnormal hold command is set. The abnormal hold command is a command indicating that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range at the time when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. The abnormal hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the above-mentioned command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416). After executing step Sr0616, the ball entry process for the main starting port is completed.

[First judgment process]
Next, the prior determination process will be described. The pre-determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 295: Sr0614) for the ball entry process for the start port.

FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing a destination determination process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. As described above, in the prior determination process, based on the pending information, the determination results such as the winning / failing determination of the winning lottery, the determination of the type of the jackpot, and the determination of the presence / absence of the reach are determined, and the pending information is the hit by the main control device 60. This is a process to be executed before the lottery target.

In step Sr0701, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the storage area due to the entry of the game ball into the start opening in the entry process for the start opening (FIG. 295) is read out. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0702, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the determination result of the pre-judgment process executed by the previous entry before the current entry is read from the corresponding storage area, and the presence or absence of the probable change jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery by the current entry. By determining, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round is determined.

If it is determined in step Sr0702 that the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round is the low probability mode (Sr0702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0703 and the setting information is supported. Refer to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode. As described above, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is used for six types of low-probability modes corresponding to each of the six stages of lottery settings from "lottery setting 1" to "lottery setting 6". The winning / failing table is provided, and the main MPU 62 refers to the winning / failing table for the low probability mode corresponding to the setting information indicating the lottery setting. Specifically, for example, when the value of the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is "1", the pass / fail table for the low probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting 1 is referred to. .. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0705, and as a result of referring to the hit / miss table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the information of the value of the hit random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the big hit. Since an example of the six types of pass / fail tables for the low probability mode has already been described in the aspect 57, the description thereof will be omitted here.

On the other hand, in step Sr0702, if it is determined that the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round is not the low probability mode (Sr0702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0704 for the high probability mode. Refer to the pass / fail table of. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0705, and as a result of referring to the hit / miss table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the big hit. In the present embodiment, one type of winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to regardless of the lottery setting. However, as with the winning / failing table for the low probability mode, the number of high probabilities corresponding to the lottery setting is high. A winning / failing table for the mode may be prepared, and the winning / failing table for the high probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting may be referred to.

If it is determined in step Sr0705 that the value of the hit random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a big hit (Sr0705: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0706, and the ball is stored in the storage area by entering the starting port this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is read out. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0707, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2, which is the target of distribution this time, is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the distribution table for the first starting port Refer to the distribution table for the second starting port when the ball is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. After executing step Sr0707, the process proceeds to step Sr0708.

In step Sr0708, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read out this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step Sr0708 that the probability variation jackpot is supported (Sr0708: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0709, and the probability variation jackpot information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the first determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0708 that it does not correspond to the probability variation jackpot (Sr0708: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0710, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the first determination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sr0705 that the value of the hit random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to a big hit (Sr0705: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0711, and the ball enters the storage area this time. The value of the stored reach random number counter C3 is read out. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0712, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr0713, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

If it is determined in step Sr0713 that the reach generation is supported (Sr0713: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0714, and the reach generation information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the first determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0713 that it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach (Sr0713: NO), the prior determination process is terminated as it is.

[Incoming ball processing for through gate]
Next, the ball entry process for the through gate will be described. The ball entry process for the through gate is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 293: Sr0409).

FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for a through gate executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr0801, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (passed) through the through gate 35. If it is determined in step Sr0801 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sr0801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0802, and whether the number of reserved characters SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Judge whether or not. The number of reserved items SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that is reserved for performing the electric accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved items SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0801 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sr0801: NO), the entry process for this through is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sr0802 that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the number of reserved items SN (Sr0802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0803, and 1 is added to the number of reserved items SN. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0804.

In step Sr0804, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step Sr0401 (FIG. 293) is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the electric service holding area 64c of the RAM 64. After that, the ball entry process for the through gate is completed.

On the other hand, in step Sr0802, when it is determined that the value of the accessory holding number SN is not less than the upper limit value (Sr0802: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the accessory holding number SN is equal to or more than the upper limit value, The ball entry process for through is completed without storing the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4.

[Game times control processing]
Next, the game times control process will be described. The game times control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 293: step Sr0410).

FIG. 298 is a flowchart showing a game times control process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr0901, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. As will be described later, the open / close execution mode flag is turned on at the timing when the change of the symbol in the game times won by the jackpot ends and shifts to the open / close execution mode, and is turned off at the timing when the open / close execution mode ends.

If it is determined in step Sr0901 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (Sr0901: YES), it is determined that the open / close execution mode is in progress, and this game is performed without executing any of the processes after step Sr0902. End the control process. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the game rotation is not started regardless of whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. .. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0901 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (Sr0901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0902.

In step Sr0902, it is determined whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b is in variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned on when starting variable display for either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, and is turned off when the variable display ends.

If it is determined in step Sr0902 that the main display unit 45 is not in the variable display (Sr0902: NO), the process proceeds to the game round start process of steps Sr0903 to Sr0905. In step Sr0903, it is determined whether or not the total reserved quantity CRN is "0". When the total reserved quantity CRN is "0", it means that the starting reserved quantity is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Therefore, if it is determined in step Sr0903 that the total number of reserved cards CRN is "0" (Sr0903: YES), the game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0903 that the total number of reserved pieces CRN is not "0" (Sr0903: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0904.

In step Sr0904, the hold information shift process for setting the data stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sr0905. The details of the hold information shift process will be described later.

In step Sr0905, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 45 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start processing will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr0906.

In step Sr0906, the value of the game count counter PNC is subtracted by 1. The game count counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode. After executing step Sr0906, the game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0902 that the main display unit 45 is in variable display (Sr0902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0907.

In step Sr0907, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the fluctuation time is the time from the start of fluctuation of the symbol row to the stop of all the symbol rows, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sr0907, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64d) of the RAM 64 is "0". The value of the fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 302) described later. The value of the set fluctuation time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started.

If it is determined in step Sr0907 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sr0907: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0908 to execute the fluctuation display process. The variable display process is a process for changing the display mode in the result display unit related to the current game round. After executing step Sr0908, the game round control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sr0907 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (Sr0907: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0909 to execute the fluctuation end processing. In the variable end processing, the stop symbol determined in the collision determination process (FIG. 301), which will be described later, is stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 as a result of the current game round. After executing step Sr0909, the process proceeds to step Sr0910.

In step Sr0910, it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags stored in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The jackpot flag is a flag that is turned ON when a jackpot is won in the hit determination process (FIG. 301) described later. If it is determined in step Sr0910 that any of the jackpot flags is ON (Sr0910: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0911 and the open / close execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0910 that none of the jackpot flags is ON (Sr0910: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr0912.

In step Sr0912, it is determined whether or not the total reserved quantity CRN is "0". If it is determined in step Sr0912 that the total number of reserved items CRN is "0" (Sr0912: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr0913, and a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command is for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that no hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 64b at the time when the symbol change (game round) is completed. It is a command that contains the information of. The customer waiting command set in step Sr0913 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the above-mentioned command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416). On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr0912 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (Sr0912: NO), the game round control process is terminated.

[Holding information shift processing]
Next, the hold information shift process will be described. The hold information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 298: Sr0904) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 299 is a flowchart showing a hold information shift process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr1001, it is determined whether or not the hold area to be processed for executing the hold information shift process is the first hold area Ra. Specifically, among the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 282) in time series, the hold information stored first (hold stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra). Information) is stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb (information), which is the earliest hold information stored in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 282) in time series. If it is stored in the hold area before the hold information), it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra. On the other hand, among the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 282) in time series, the hold information stored first is stored in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 282) in time series. When the reserved information stored first among the reserved information is stored in the reserved area first, it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sr1001, the reserved information can be processed in the order stored in the first reserved area Ra or the second reserved area Rb.

If it is determined in step Sr1001 that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra (step Sr1001: YES), the hold information shift process for the first hold area in steps Sr1002 to Sr1007 is executed. On the other hand, in step Sr1001, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (step Sr1001: NO). ), Hold information shift processing for the second hold area in steps Sr1008 to Sr1013 is executed.

In step Sr1002, after subtracting 1 from the first start hold number RaN in the first hold area Ra, the process proceeds to step Sr1003 and the total hold number CRN is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1004. In step Sr1004, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1005.

In step Sr1005, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step Sr1005, the process proceeds to step Sr1006.

In step Sr1006, when the second symbol display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64e is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second symbol display unit flag is information for specifying whether the target for starting the variation display this time is the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1007.

In step Sr1007, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the first hold area Ra, that is, corresponding to the first start port 33. A shift command including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the pending information shift process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sr1007 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the above-mentioned command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416). The voice emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command. do. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

In step Sr1001, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (step Sr1001: NO). Proceed to step Sr1008.

In step Sr1008, the second start hold quantity RbN of the second hold area Rb is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1009. In step Sr1009, the total number of reserved pieces CRN is subtracted by 1, the process proceeds to step Sr1010, and the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1011.

In step Sr1011, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step Sr1011, the process proceeds to step Sr1012.

In step Sr1012, if the second symbol display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64e is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1013.

In step Sr1013, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the second hold area Rb, that is, corresponding to the second start port 34. A shift command including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the pending information shift process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sr1013 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the above-mentioned command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416). The voice emission control device 90 gives a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command. Send. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

[Variation start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described. The variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 298: Sr0905) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 300 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr1101, it is determined whether or not the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is a numerical value within a predetermined range. If it is determined that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range (step Sr1101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1102.

In step Sr1102, the hit determination process is executed. The hit determination process is a process of determining whether or not a jackpot has been won based on the value of the hit random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area AE in the hold information shift process. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Sr1102, the process proceeds to step Sr1103.

In step Sr1103, the variable time setting process is executed. In the variation time setting process, the variation time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, is set based on the presence / absence of a big hit and the presence / absence of reach. The details of the fluctuation time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sr1103, the process proceeds to step Sr1104.

In step Sr1104, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sr1104 that the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (Sr1104: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1105, and the first variation command is set. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning of the first start port 33, and whether or not reach has occurred. And the information of the fluctuation time set in step Sr1103 are included. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1104 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (Sr1104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1106, and the second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34, and whether or not a reach has occurred. And the information of the fluctuation time set in step Sr1103 are included. After executing step Sr1105 or step Sr1106, the process proceeds to step Sr1107.

In step Sr1107, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence / absence of a big hit and the result of the distribution determination. That is, the type command includes 16R probability variation jackpot information, 8R probability variation jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or missed result information as the jackpot type information.

The variable command and the type command set in steps Sr1105-step Sr1107 are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the above-mentioned command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416). The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variable command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step Sr1107, the process proceeds to step Sr1108.

In step Sr1108, among the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is started to display the variation of the symbol. Specifically, when the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is specified to be the first symbol display unit 37a, and the variable display is started. When the second symbol display unit flag is ON, it is specified that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is the second symbol display unit 37b, and the variable display is started. After executing step Sr1108, this fluctuation start process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1101 described above that the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is not a numerical value within a predetermined range, the process proceeds to step Sr1109 and the game stop command is issued to the sub side. It is transmitted to the payout control device 70 and the voice emission control device 90, which are the control devices of the above. The game stop command is a command for causing the payout control device 70 and the voice emission control device 90, which are control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the progress of the game is stopped. After executing step Sr1109, the process proceeds to step Sr1110, and the game stop flag is turned ON. As a result, when the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 293) is executed, the process group for advancing the game (process group from step Sr0404 to step Sr0416 in FIG. 293) and the process for game history (step in FIG. 293). Execution of Sr0417) is avoided, and the progress of the game is stopped. After executing step Sr1110, this fluctuation start process ends.

[Collision detection processing]
Next, the hit determination process will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 300: Sr1102).

FIG. 301 is a flowchart showing a collision determination process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr1201, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode. After that, when the jackpot is won and the open / close execution mode is started, it is turned off. If it is determined in step Sr1201 that the mode is high probability mode (Sr1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1202.

In step Sr1202, the pass / fail determination is performed with reference to the pass / fail table for the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the hit / miss table for the high probability mode. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1204. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1201 that the mode is not in the high probability mode (Sr1201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1203.

In step Sr1203, the pass / fail determination is performed with reference to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode corresponding to the setting information. Specifically, for example, when the value of the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is "1", the pass / fail table for the low probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting 1 is referred to. Make a pass / fail judgment. In the win / fail determination, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the win / fail table for the low probability mode corresponding to the setting information. do. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1204.

In step Sr1204, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination (winning lottery) in step Sr1202 or step Sr1203 is a big hit winning. In step Sr1204, when the result of the winning / failing determination is a big hit (Sr1204: YES), in steps Sr1205-step Sr1212, in order to set the process for setting the game result in the case of the big hit winning and the stop result. Executes the processing of.

In step Sr1205, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sr1205 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (Sr1205: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1206, and the distribution table for the first starting port (see FIG. 284 (a)) is referred to. Then, the distribution is determined. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of 16R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. Determine if it is included in.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1205 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (Sr1205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1207, and the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 284 (b)). The distribution is determined with reference to. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of 16R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. Determine if it is included in. After executing the process of step Sr1206 or step Sr1207. Step Sr1208.

In step Sr1208, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot distributed in step Sr1206 or step Sr1207 is a probabilistic jackpot. If it is determined in step Sr1208 that the game result is a probabilistic jackpot (Sr1208: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1209.

In step Sr1209, the stop result setting process for the probability change jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the probabilistic jackpot varies depending on which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the current game round in which the probabilistic jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variation jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sr1206 or step Sr1207 can be obtained. It is acquired and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sr1209, the process proceeds to step Sr1210.

In step Sr1210, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Sr1206 or step Sr1207 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the 16R probability variation flag is turned ON, and when it is an 8R probability variation jackpot, the 8R probability variation flag is ON. After that, the final hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sr1208, when it is determined that the type of jackpot distributed in step Sr1206 or step Sr1207 is not a probabilistic jackpot (Sr1208: NO), that is, when the type of jackpot distributed is a normal jackpot, step. Proceed to Sr1211.

In step Sr1211, a stop result setting process for a normal jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the normal jackpot varies depending on which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the current game round in which the normal jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sr1206 or step Sr1207 can be obtained. It is acquired and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sr1211, the process proceeds to step Sr1212.

In step Sr1212, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Sr1206 or step Sr1207 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a 16R normal jackpot, the 16R normal flag is turned ON, and when it is an 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal flag is turned ON. After that, the final hit determination process is terminated.

In step Sr1204, if the result of the winning lottery in step Sr1202 or step Sr1203 is not a big hit (Sr1204: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1213, and the stop result setting process for the time of loss is executed. The stop result setting process for the time of disengagement is to end the variable display in the state where either the stop result is displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the current game time which is the disengagement result. It is a process for setting. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for when the stop result table is stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sr1213, the final hit determination process is terminated.

[Variation time setting process]
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 300: Sr1103) of the variation start process.

FIG. 302 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr1301, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1302.

In step Sr1302, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery related to the current game round is won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any of the flags is ON (Sr1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1303.

In step Sr1303, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the jackpot fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the game times won in the winning lottery is constant. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1304, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

In step Sr1302, if it is determined that the winning lottery related to the current game round is not won (Sr1302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1305, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs in this game round. Since this process (Sr1305) is executed when the winning lottery related to the current game round is not won in step Sr1302, in step Sr1305, reach occurs among the game rounds not won in the winning lottery. It is determined whether or not the game is a game. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach occurs (Sr1305: YES), and the process proceeds to step Sr1306. When specifying whether or not reach has occurred using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In step Sr1306, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the reach generation variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time for reaching is constant. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1304, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sr1305 that reach does not occur in the current game round (Sr1305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1307 and refers to the variation time table for non-reach storage stored in the variation time table storage area 63d. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1304, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the reach non-generation fluctuation time table is set so that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the total number of reserved pieces CRN increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration that does not depend on the total number of reserved quantity CRNs may be used, and the fluctuation time may be set to be shorter as the number of total reserved quantity CRNs is smaller. Further, when the second start hold number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases, and when the second start hold number RbN is "1" or more. May be set so that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the second start hold number RbN increases. Further, when the second start hold number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes longer as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases, and when the second start hold number RbN is "1" or more. May be set so that the fluctuation time becomes longer as the number of the second start reserved numbers RbN increases, or becomes constant without depending on the respective reserved numbers RaN and RbN.

Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach does not occur so that the shorter fluctuation time is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. A variable time table may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected fluctuation times may be the same, and the above relationship may be reversed.

Further, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time at the time of reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time that is easy to be selected and the fluctuation time that is difficult to be selected at the time of winning the jackpot and the time of losing reach may be different. good. Further, the variable time table for the probabilistic jackpot, the variable time table for the normal jackpot, the variable time table for the missed reach, and the variable time table for the complete miss may be set individually.

[Game state transition process]
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 293: Sr0411).

FIG. 303 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr1401, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the beginning of the ending period and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the open / close execution mode.

If it is determined in step Sr1401 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sr1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1402, and it is determined whether or not the open / close processing period flag is ON. The open / close processing period flag is turned on at the start of the open / close processing period and turned off at the end of the open / close processing period.

If it is determined in step Sr1402 that the open / close processing period flag is not ON (Sr1402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1403, and it is determined whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the beginning of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period. The opening period is a period for executing the opening effect in the opening / closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step Sr1403 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sr1403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1404, and the timing at which the symbol variation display on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b ends. It is determined whether or not it is. If it is determined in step Sr1404 that it is not the timing at which the variation display is completed (Sr1404: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step Sr1404 that the variation display has ended (Sr1404: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1405, and the result of the winning lottery for this game round corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. Determine if it exists. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined that the open / close execution mode flag is not ON (Sr1405: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sr1405 that the result of the winning lottery for this game round corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode (Sr1405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1406, and the high probability mode flag and high frequency Of the support mode flags, the ON flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1407. If both the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag are OFF in step Sr1406, the process proceeds to step Sr1407 as it is.

In step Sr1407, the opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period (hereinafter, also referred to as an opening time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. In the present embodiment, "1500" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various timer counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After executing step Sr1407, the process proceeds to step Sr1408.

In step Sr1408, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the above-mentioned command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416). The voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect based on the reception of the opening command, and starts controlling various devices so that these effects are sequentially executed. After executing step Sr1408, the process proceeds to step Sr1409, and the opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sr1403 that the opening period flag is ON (Sr1403: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1410.

In step Sr1410, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Sr1410 that the opening period has ended (Sr1410: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1411 and the opening period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1412.

In step Sr1412, a round display start process for notifying the type of the opening / closing execution mode this time is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the above address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is specified from the specified stop result data. Confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round display unit 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step Sr1412, the process proceeds to step Sr1413.

In step Sr1413, the number of rounds of the opening / closing execution mode this time is set. Specifically, the jackpot type flags (16R probability variation flag, 8R probability variation flag, 16R normal flag, 8R normal flag) stored in the RAM 64 are confirmed, and the number of rounds corresponding to the flags is determined by various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. It is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened. After executing step 13913, the process proceeds to step Sr1414.

In step Sr1414, the open / close processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1415, and the release start command is set. The set release start command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the above-mentioned command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416). This release start command includes information on the number of rounds in the current open / close execution mode. The voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the round effect of the content corresponding to the number of rounds based on the received release start command, and controls various devices so that the round effect of the set content is executed. Start. After executing step Sr1415, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sr1402 that the open / close processing period flag is ON (Sr1402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1416 to execute the large winning opening opening / closing process. Specifically, when the large winning opening 36a is closed, the variable winning driving unit 36c is set to the driving state on condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more, and the large winning is won. Open the mouth 36a. Further, when the large winning opening 36a is open, the opening limit time has elapsed since the opening of the large winning opening 36a, or the opening limit number of game balls has been entered. The drive state of the variable winning drive unit 36c is stopped, and the large winning opening 36a is closed. The details of the opening and closing process of the big winning opening will be described later. After executing step Sr1416, the process proceeds to step Sr1417.

In step Sr1417, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (Sr1417: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (Sr1417: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1418 and the open / close processing period flag is turned off. After executing step Sr1418, the process proceeds to step Sr1419.

In step Sr1419, the round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is terminated so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step Sr1419, the process proceeds to step Sr1420.

In step Sr1420, the ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the ending period (hereinafter, also referred to as an ending time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. In the present embodiment, "1500" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various timer counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After executing step Sr1420, the process proceeds to step Sr1421.

In step Sr1421, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the above-mentioned command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416). The voice emission control device 90 is set to execute the ending effect based on the reception of the ending command, and starts controlling various devices so that the ending effect is executed. After executing step Sr1421, the process proceeds to step Sr1422.

In step Sr1422, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sr1401 that the ending period flag is ON (Sr1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1423.

In step Sr1423, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sr1420), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step Sr1423 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Sr1423: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1423 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Sr1423: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1424.

In step Sr1424, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1425, and the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of the game times after the end of the current ending period. Details of the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sr1425, the process proceeds to step Sr1426 to turn off the open / close execution mode flag. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1427.

In step Sr1427, it is determined whether or not the total reserved quantity CRN is “0”. If it is determined in step Sr1427 that the total number of reserved items CRN is "0" (Sr1427: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1428 and a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command includes information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that no hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 64b when the open / close execution mode ends. It is a command. The customer waiting command set in step Sr1428 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the above-mentioned command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416). On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1427 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (Sr1427: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

[Large winning opening opening / closing process]
Next, the process of opening and closing the large winning opening will be described. The large winning opening opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 302: Sr1416) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 304 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening / closing process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr1501, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning driving unit 36c. If it is determined in step Sr1501 that the large winning opening 36a is not open (Sr1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1502, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined in step Sr1502 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (Sr1502: YES), the main prize opening opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1502 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (Sr1502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1503.

In step Sr1503, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the large winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step Sr1503 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (Sr1503: NO), the main winning opening opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1503 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (Sr1503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1504, and the variable winning drive unit is used to open the large winning opening 36a. The drive state is 36c. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1505.

In step Sr1505, the setting process for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, since all the set winning modes are high-frequency winning modes, "7500" (that is, 30 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Further, in order to count the number of winnings of the game ball to the large winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer update process (step Sr0407) of the timer interrupt process is executed, that is, in a cycle of 4 msec. After executing step Sr1505, the process proceeds to step Sr1506.

In step Sr1506, an open command is set. After that, the opening / closing process of the winning opening is completed. The release command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the opening of the large winning opening 36a has started, and is a command described above. It is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416). The voice emission control device 90 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has started based on the received opening command, and also displays the production contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 with the large winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the start of opening of. Further, the voice emission control device 90 transmits the release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has started based on the received opening command, and at the same time, the opening of the large winning opening 36a indicates the effect content of the symbol display device 41. Update to the content corresponding to what was started.

If it is determined in step Sr1501 that the large winning opening 36a is open (step Sr1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1507, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the large winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step Sr1507 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (Sr1507: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1508.

In step Sr1508, whether or not a game ball has entered the large winning opening 36a is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36. If it is determined in step Sr1508 that no ball has been entered (Sr1508: NO), the main prize opening opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1508 that a ball has been entered (Sr1508: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1509 and the value of the winning counter area PC is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1510.

In step Sr1510, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is “0”. If it is determined in step Sr1510 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0" (Sr1510: NO), the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is.

When it is determined in step Sr1507 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (Sr1507: YES), or when it is determined in step Sr1510 that the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". (Sr1510: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1511 to execute the large winning opening closing process. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 36c is set to a non-driving state in order to close the large winning opening 36a. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1512.

In step Sr1512, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is subtracted by 1. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1513, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined in step Sr1513 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (Sr1513: YES), the main prize opening opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1513 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (Sr1513: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1514, and the first timer counter area T1 is "500" (that is, 2 sec). To set. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the large winning opening 36a. After executing step Sr1514, the process proceeds to step Sr1515 to set the closing command. After that, the process of opening and closing the large winning opening is completed.

This set closing command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are the control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the opening of the large winning opening 36a has been completed, and is described above. It is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416). The voice emission control device 90 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed based on the received closing command, and at the same time, the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are displayed on the large winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the end of opening. Further, the voice emission control device 90 transmits the closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed, and at the same time, the opening of the large winning opening 36a has been completed with the effect content of the symbol display device 41. Update to the content corresponding to what you did.

[Migration process at the end of the ending period]
Next, the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 303: Sr1425) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 305 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of the ending period executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr1601, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probability variation jackpot as the jackpot type flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability change flag or the 8R probability change flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sr1601 that the 16R probability change flag or the 8R probability change flag of the RAM 64 is ON (Sr1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1602 and the flag erasing process is executed. Specifically, when the 16R probability variation flag, the 8R probability variation flag, the 16 normal flag, the 8R normal flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. .. After executing step Sr1602, the process proceeds to step Sr1603.

In step Sr1603, the high probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step Sr1604, and the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after ending the open / close execution mode, the game state shifts to the game state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. It should be noted that these high-probability modes and high-frequency support modes are maintained at least until the next big hit. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1605.

In step Sr1605, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. do. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1610 described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1601 that the 16R normal flag or the 8R normal flag of the RAM 64 is ON (Sr1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1606 and the flag erasing process is executed. Specifically, when the 16R probability variation flag, the 8R probability variation flag, the 16 normal flag, the 8R normal flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. .. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1607.

In step Sr1607, after turning on the high frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step Sr1608, and 100 is set in the game count counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the game count counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1609.

In step Sr1609, a low-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the winning / failing lottery mode is the low-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. do. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1610.

In step Sr1610, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is used as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Set. After that, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

[Processing for electrical support]
Next, the processing for electric service support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 293: Sr0412).

FIG. 306 is a flowchart showing an electric service support process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr1701, it is determined whether or not the support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag of the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The supporting flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened and turned off when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sr1701 that the supporting flag is not ON (Sr1701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1702.

In step Sr1702, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag of the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned on when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is ON. Is. If it is determined in step Sr1702 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sr1702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1703.

In step Sr1703, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal diagram unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer update process (step Sr0407) of the timer interrupt process is executed, that is, in a cycle of 4 msec.

If it is determined in step Sr1703 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sr1703: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sr1703: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1704.

In step Sr1704, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display of the symbol in the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step Sr1704 that it is the end timing of the variable display (Sr1704: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1705, the off display is set, and then the main electric service support process is terminated. By setting the off display, the variable display of the symbol in the normal figure unit 38 is terminated in the state where the off display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1704 that it is not the end timing of the variation display (Sr1704: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1706.

In step Sr1706, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0". If it is determined in step Sr1706 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is "0" (Sr1706: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1706 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0" (Sr1706: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1707.

In step Sr1707, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step Sr1708 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If the mode is not the open / close execution mode in step Sr1707 (Sr1707: NO) and the high frequency support mode is in step Sr1708 (Sr1708: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1709 and the electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "375" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1710.

In step Sr1710, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sr1709 is a support winning. If it is determined in step Sr1710 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is the support winning (Sr1710: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1711, the support winning flag is turned ON, and the counter area 64d of the RAM 64 is provided. Set "3" in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1712. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1710 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not the support winning (Sr1710: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1712 without executing the process of step Sr1711.

In step Sr1712, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step Sr1712 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode (Sr1712: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1713. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1712 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the low probability mode (Sr1712: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is.

In step Sr1713, it is determined whether or not the game count counter area is "0". The game count counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step Sr1713 that the game count counter area is not "0" (Sr1713: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1713 that the game count counter area is "0" (Sr1713: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1714 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1715.

In step Sr1715, a low-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is used as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Set. After that, the processing for electric service support is terminated.

The low-frequency support mode command set in step Sr1715 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the above-mentioned command output process (FIG. 293: step Sr0416). The voice emission control device 90 identifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the reception of the low frequency support mode command, and executes the corresponding processing.

If it is determined in step Sr1707 that the open / close execution mode is set (Sr1707: YES), or if it is determined in step Sr1718 that the mode is not in the high frequency support mode (Sr1708: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1716 and the motorized accessory opening lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric service holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 or 1, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "7375" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1717.

In step Sr1717, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sr1716 is the support winning. If it is determined in step Sr1717 that the support is not won (Sr1717: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1717 that the support is won (Sr1717: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1718, the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , End the processing for main electric service support.

If it is determined in step Sr1702 that the support winning flag is ON (Sr1702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1719, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step Sr1719 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sr1719: NO), the pattern variation is being displayed in the normal drawing unit 38, so that the main electric service support process is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1719 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sr1719: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1720.

In step Sr1720, the hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the pattern in the normal drawing unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped and displayed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr1721 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sr1701 that the supporting flag is ON (Sr1701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1722, and an electric function opening / closing control process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

[Electric service open / close control process]
Next, the electric function opening / closing control process will be described. The electric service opening / closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 306: Sr1722) of the electric service support process.

FIG. 307 is a flowchart showing an electric function opening / closing control process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr1801, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in the driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (Sr1801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1802.

In step Sr1802, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sr1802 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sr1802: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. That is, if the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the main electric accessory opening / closing control process ends.

If it is determined in step Sr1802 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sr1802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1803, and a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state is performed. “250” (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sr1803, the process proceeds to step Sr1804.

In step Sr1804, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step Sr1805, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step Sr1805 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sr1805: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1805 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Sr1805: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1806 and the supporting flag is turned off. After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sr1801 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sr1801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1807, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sr1807 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sr1807: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sr1807: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1808, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state is executed. .. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr1809.

In step Sr1809, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and if it is determined that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (Sr1809: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1810 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step Sr1810 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (Sr1810: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr1811, and "400" (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr1809 that the open / close execution mode is set (Sr1809: YES), or if it is determined in step Sr1810 that the mode is not in the high frequency support mode (Sr1810: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr1812, and the second step is performed. The timer counter area T2 is set to "50" (that is, 0.2 sec). After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

<< 7-6 >> Various processes executed in the voice emission control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the voice emission control device will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
First, the main processing executed by the sound light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 308 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the sound light side MPU 92 (sound light side CPU 92x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr4101, the start-up process is executed. Specifically, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power, the determination of whether or not the sound / light side RAM 94 functions normally, and the like are executed. After executing step Sr4101, the process proceeds to step Sr4102.

In step Sr4102, the start date / time information storage process is executed. The start date / time information storage process is a process of reading start date / time information from the start date / time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 and storing it in the start date / time information storage area 94b of the main RAM 64. The details of the start date / time information storage process will be described later. After executing step Sr4102, the process proceeds to step Sr4103.

In step Sr4103, the power failure type determination process is executed. The power failure type determination process is a process of determining the previous power failure type of the main control device 60 based on the power failure type command received from the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60. As described above, the type of power failure means the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure. The details of the power failure type determination process will be described later. After executing step Sr4103, the process proceeds to step Sr4104.

In step Sr4104, the activation type determination process is executed. The activation type determination process is a process for determining the activation type of the main control device 60 based on the activation type command received from the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60. The details of the activation type determination process will be described later. After executing step Sr4104, the process proceeds to step Sr4105.

In step Sr4105, the processing for dealing with the abnormal power failure flag on the sound / light side is executed. The processing for dealing with the abnormal power failure flag on the sound / light side is a process for setting the above-mentioned RTC effect or deferred suggestion effect to either a feasible state or an infeasible state. The details of the processing for dealing with the abnormal power failure flag on the sound light side will be described later. After executing step Sr4105, the process proceeds to step Sr4106.

In step Sr4106, the permission of the timer interrupt is set. As a result, the execution of the timer interrupt processing described later is permitted. After that, it enters an infinite loop.

Next, the details of the start date / time information storage process shown in step Sr4102 of FIG. 308 will be described.

FIG. 309 is a flowchart showing the start date / time information storage process executed by the sound light side MPU 92 (sound light side CPU 92x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr4201, the current date and time information is read from the timekeeping register 97b1 of the RTC 97, and the read current date and time information is written (stored) in the start date and time information storage area 94b of the sound light side RAM 94. After that, the main startup date / time information storage process is terminated.

Next, the details of the power failure type determination process shown in step Sr4103 of FIG. 308 will be described.

FIG. 310 is a flowchart showing a power failure type determination process executed by the sound light side MPU 92 (sound light side CPU 92x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr4301, it is determined whether or not a power failure type command has been received from the main MPU 62. Specifically, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not any one of the above-mentioned two commands, the normal power failure command and the abnormal power failure command, has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sr4301 that one of the two commands described above has been received (step Sr4301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4302. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr4301 that neither of the two commands described above has been received (step Sr4301: NO), the process returns to step Sr4301 again. That is, it waits until it is determined that one of the two commands described above has been received, and when it is determined that one of the two commands described above has been received, step Sr4302 is performed. move on.

In step Sr4302, it is determined whether or not the command received as the power cut type command from the main MPU 62 is an abnormal power cut command. If it is determined in step Sr4302 that the command received as the power cut type command from the main MPU 62 is an abnormal power cut command (step Sr4302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4303 and is stored in the sound / light side RAM 94. Turn on the abnormal power failure flag on the sound light side. After that, the main power interruption type determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sr4302, when it is determined that the command received as the power cut type command from the main MPU 62 is not an abnormal power cut command (step Sr4302: YES), that is, the command received as the power cut type command from the main MPU 62. If is a normal power cut command, the process proceeds to step Sr4304, and the sound light side abnormal power cut flag stored in the sound light side RAM 94 is turned off. After that, the main power interruption type determination process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the power cut type determination process is executed, it is possible for the voice emission control device 90 to grasp the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power cut.

Next, the details of the activation type determination process shown in step Sr4104 of FIG. 308 will be described.

FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing the activation type determination process executed by the sound light side MPU 92 (sound light side CPU 92x) of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr4401, it is determined whether or not the activation type command has been received from the main MPU 62. Specifically, in the present embodiment, any one of the above-mentioned five commands from the main MPU 62: the normal start command, the RAM error command, the RAM clear command, the setting change mode start command, and the setting confirmation mode start command. Judge whether or not the command of is received. If it is determined in step Sr4402 that any of the five commands described above has been received (step Sr4401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4402. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr4401 that none of the five commands described above has been received (step Sr4401: NO), the process returns to step Sr4401 again. That is, it waits until it is determined that any of the above-mentioned five commands has been received, and when it is determined that any of the above-mentioned five commands has been received, step Sr4402 is performed. move on.

In step Sr4402, it is determined whether or not the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is a normal activation command. If it is determined in step Sr4402 that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is a normal activation command (step Sr4402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4403.

In step Sr4403, "01" is set in the activation type determination value stored in the sound / light side RAM 94. The activation type determination value is numerical information for the voice emission control device 90 to grasp the current activation type of the main control device 60. In the present embodiment, the state in which "01" is set in the activation type determination value means that the activation type of the main control device 60 this time is normal activation. After executing step Sr4403, the activation type determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr4402 that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is not a normal activation command (step Sr4402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr4404 and is received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62. It is determined whether or not the command is a RAM error command. If it is determined in step Sr4404 that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is a RAM error command (step Sr4404: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4405.

In step Sr4405, "02" is set in the activation type determination value. In the present embodiment, the state in which "02" is set in the activation type determination value means that the activation type of the main control device 60 this time is a RAM abnormality. After executing step Sr4405, the activation type determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr4404 that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is not a RAM error command (step Sr4404: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr4406 and is received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62. It is determined whether or not the command is a RAM clear command. If it is determined in step Sr4406 that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is a RAM clear command (step Sr4406: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4407.

In step Sr4407, "03" is set in the activation type determination value. In the present embodiment, the state in which "03" is set in the activation type determination value means that the activation type of the main control device 60 this time is RAM clear. After executing step Sr4407, the activation type determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr4406 that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is not a RAM clear command (step Sr4406: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr4408 and is received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62. Judges whether the command is the setting change mode start command. If it is determined in step Sr4408 that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is the setting change mode start command (step Sr4408: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4409.

In step Sr4409, "04" is set in the activation type determination value. In the present embodiment, the state in which "04" is set in the activation type determination value means that the activation type of the main control device 60 this time is the setting change mode. After executing step Sr4409, the activation type determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sr4408, when it is determined that the command received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62 is not the setting change mode start command (step Sr4408: NO), in other words, it is received as the activation type command from the main MPU 62. If the command is a setting confirmation mode start command, the process proceeds to step Sr4410.

In step Sr4410, "05" is set in the activation type determination value. In the present embodiment, the state in which "05" is set in the activation type determination value means that the activation type of the main control device 60 this time is the setting confirmation mode. After executing step Sr4410, the activation type determination process is terminated.

Next, the details of the processing for dealing with the abnormal power failure flag on the sound light side shown in step Sr4105 of FIG. 308 will be described.

FIG. 312 is a flowchart showing a sound light side abnormal power interruption flag correspondence process executed by the sound light side MPU 92 (sound light side CPU 92x) of the seventh embodiment.

In step Sr4501, it is determined whether or not the sound light side abnormal power interruption flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sr4501 that the sound light side abnormal power interruption flag is not ON (step Sr4501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr4502, and the RTC effect execution permission flag stored in the sound light side RAM 94 is turned off. do. The RTC effect execution permission flag is a flag for the sound and light side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the RTC effect can be executed, and the state in which the RTC effect execution permission flag is ON is the execution condition (time) of the RTC effect. Etc.) is satisfied, which means that the RTC effect can be executed. On the other hand, when the RTC effect execution permission flag is OFF, the RTC effect is performed regardless of whether the execution condition (time, etc.) of the RTC effect is satisfied. Means an infeasible state. After executing step Sr4502, the process proceeds to step Sr4503.

In step Sr4503, the deferred suggestion effect execution permission flag stored in the sound / light side RAM 94 is turned off. The deferred suggestion effect execution permission flag is a flag for the sound and light side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the deferred suggestion effect can be executed, and the state in which the deferred suggestion effect execution permission flag is ON is the deferred suggestion effect. If the execution condition (normal activation, etc.) is satisfied, it means that the deferred suggestion effect can be executed. On the other hand, if the deferred suggestion effect execution permission flag is OFF, the deferred suggestion effect execution condition (normally activated) is satisfied. It means a state in which the deferred suggestion effect cannot be executed regardless of whether or not the above is established. After executing step Sr4503, the processing for dealing with the abnormal power failure flag on the real light side is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr4501 that the abnormal power interruption flag on the sound / light side is ON (step Sr4501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4504 and the RTC effect execution permission flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr4505, and the deferred suggestion effect execution permission flag is turned ON. After that, the processing for dealing with the abnormal power failure flag on the real light side is terminated.

Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 313 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the sound light side MPU 92 (sound light side CPU 92x) of the seventh embodiment. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed with a relatively short cycle (2 msec in this embodiment). Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described.

In step Sr6101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound / light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main MPU 62, and the commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Read sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step Sr6101, the process proceeds to step Sr6102.

In step Sr6102, the sound / light side power cutoff process is executed. The sound-light side power interruption process is a process of saving the used register or the like when a power interruption generation command is received from the main MPU 62. The details of the sound-light side power interruption processing will be described later. After executing step Sr6102, the process proceeds to step Sr6103.

In step Sr6103, the RTC effect processing is executed. The RTC effect processing is performed for the RTC for a predetermined time (5 minutes in the present embodiment) every predetermined time (every hour in the present embodiment) after the pachinko machine 10 is started (after the power supply is started). It is a process for executing the production. The details of the RTC effect processing will be described later. After executing step Sr6103, the process proceeds to step Sr6104.

In step Sr6104, the deferred suggestion effect processing is executed. The deferred suggestion effect processing is a process for executing the deferred suggestion effect, which is an effect suggesting that the setting information has been deferred. The details of the deferred suggestion effect processing will be described later. After executing step Sr6104, the process proceeds to step Sr6105.

In step Sr6105, the game rotation effect processing is executed. In the game round effect processing, processing related to the effect to be executed in the game round from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the symbol is performed. After executing step Sr6105, the process proceeds to step Sr6106.

In step Sr6106, the opening / closing execution mode effect processing is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode production processing, processing related to the production in the opening period, the production in the opening / closing processing period, and the production in the ending period is performed. After executing step Sr6106, the process proceeds to step Sr6107.

In step Sr6107, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the above-mentioned effect processing. After executing step Sr6107, the process proceeds to step Sr6108.

In step Sr6108, the audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read in the above-mentioned BGM process and each effect process. After executing step Sr6108, this timer interrupt process ends.

Next, the details of the sound-light side power interruption processing shown in step Sr6102 of FIG. 313 will be described.

FIG. 314 is a flowchart showing a sound light side power interruption process executed by the sound light side MPU 92 (sound light side CPU 92x) of the seventh embodiment.

In step Sr6201, it is determined whether or not a power failure generation command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sr6201 that the power cut generation command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (step Sr6201: NO), the real light side power cut process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr6201 that the power interruption generation command is received from the main MPU 62 (step Sr6201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr6202.

In step Sr6202, various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the sound / light side CPU 92x is saved in a predetermined area of the sound / light side RAM 94. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr6203, and the information stored in the stack pointer of the sound light side CPU 92x is stored in a predetermined area of the sound light side RAM 94. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr6204, and the power recovery flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr6205, a RAM determination value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated by executing a predetermined operation based on a predetermined information group stored in the sound / light side RAM 94, and the calculated RAM determination value is calculated. It is stored in the sound / light side RAM 94. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr6205, RAM access is prohibited, and then an infinite loop process is repeated until the supplied drive voltage drops and becomes inoperable.

Next, the details of the RTC effect processing shown in step Sr6103 of FIG. 313 will be described.

FIG. 315 is a flowchart showing the RTC effect processing executed by the sound light side MPU 92 (sound light side CPU 92x) of the seventh embodiment.

In step Sr6301, it is determined whether or not the RTC effect execution permission flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6301 that the RTC effect execution permission flag is ON (step Sr6301: YES), the processes of steps Sr6302 to Sr6313 described below are executed. The processes of steps Sr6302 to Sr6313 are processes for determining whether or not it is the timing to execute the RTC effect, and executing the RTC effect when it is determined that it is the timing to execute the RTC effect. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6301 that the RTC effect execution permission flag is not ON (step Sr6301: NO), the RTC effect processing is terminated without executing the processes of steps Sr6302 to Sr6313.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the RTC effect is executed at a predetermined timing when the RTC effect execution permission flag is ON, that is, when the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is ON. However, on the other hand, when the RTC effect execution permission flag is OFF, that is, when the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is OFF, the RTC effect is not executed. Hereinafter, the processes of steps Sr6302 to Sr6313 will be described.

In step Sr6202, it is determined whether or not the RTC effect executing flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. The RTC effect executing flag is a flag for determining whether or not the RTC effect described later is being executed, and is turned ON at the start of the RTC effect and turned OFF at the end of the RTC effect. If it is determined in step Sr6202 that the RTC effect executing flag is not ON (step Sr6202: NO), that is, if the RTC effect is not being executed, the process proceeds to step Sr6203.

In step Sr6203, the current date and time information is read from the timekeeping register 97b1 of RTC97. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr6204, and the elapsed time from the start date / time to the current date / time is based on the read current date / time information and the start date / time information stored in the start date / time information storage area 94b of the sound light side RAM 94. Calculate the elapsed startup time. Specifically, for example, the current date and time information read from the timekeeping register 97b1 of the RTC 97 indicates "December 15, 2017 11:53:45", and the start date and time information stored in the sound and light side RAM 94. When indicates "08:42:35 on December 15, 2017", the elapsed activation time is "3 hours 11 minutes 10 seconds". If the calculated startup elapsed time exceeds 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds, it will be 24 hours 00 minutes 00 from the startup elapsed time until the startup elapsed time becomes a value of 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds or less. Subtract the value corresponding to the second. For example, if the calculated startup elapsed time is "51 hours 35 minutes 24 seconds", the value corresponding to 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds is subtracted twice, and the new startup elapsed time is "3 hours 35 minutes". It will be "24 seconds". The reason for adopting such a process will be described later. After executing step Sr6204, the process proceeds to step Sr6205.

In step Sr6205, the RTC effect execution determination table stored in the sound / light side ROM 93 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the RTC effect in step Sr6206. In the RTC effect execution determination table, the elapsed activation time and the type of RTC effect are stored in association with each other.

FIG. 316 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an RTC effect execution determination table. As described above, in the RTC effect execution determination table, the activation elapsed time and the type of RTC effect are stored in association with each other. Specifically, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 316, different types of RTC effects are set for each hour of the elapsed activation time. For example, "RTC effect A" is set corresponding to the activation elapsed time "1 hour 00 minutes 00 seconds", and "RTC effect B" is set corresponding to the activation elapsed time "2 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds". Has been done. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the elapsed activation time exceeds 24 hours 00:00, the elapsed activation time is until the elapsed activation time becomes 24 hours 00:00 or less. The value corresponding to 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds is subtracted from. Therefore, since it is not necessary to make the RTC effect execution determination table correspond to the portion where the activation elapsed time exceeds 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds, the storage capacity of the sound / optical side ROM 93 required for storing the RTC effect execution determination table. Can be reduced.

The explanation is returned to FIG. 315. In step Sr6206, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the RTC effect. Specifically, when the activation elapsed time calculated in step Sr6204 matches the activation elapsed time set in the RTC effect execution determination table, it is determined that it is the start timing of the RTC effect, and they match. If not, it is determined that it is not the start timing of the RTC effect. For example, when the start elapsed time calculated in step Sr6204 is "1 hour 00 minutes 00 seconds", it is determined that it is the start timing of the RTC effect A.

If it is determined in step Sr6206 that it is not the timing to start the RTC effect (step Sr6206: NO), the RTC effect process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr6206 that it is time to start the RTC effect (step Sr6206: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr6207.

In step Sr6207, it is set to start the RTC effect of the type corresponding to the activation elapsed time set in the RTC effect execution determination table. For example, when the elapsed activation time is "1 hour 00 minutes 00 seconds", the control of the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 is started so as to be an effect mode corresponding to the RTC effect A, and a moving image corresponding to the RTC effect A is started. A command for starting the display of is transmitted to the display control device 100. In the present embodiment, the RTC effect A is an effect in which the character A appears and sings the music A for 5 minutes. The other RTC effect set in the RTC effect execution determination table is an effect in which another character appears and sings another song for 5 minutes. That is, the characters and songs that appear in each type of RTC production are different. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr6208.

In step Sr6208, the RTC effect executing flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr6209, and "150,000" is set in the RTC effect timer counter Tr. The RTC effect timer counter Tr is a counter for managing the remaining time of the RTC effect, and is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed, as will be described later. In the present embodiment, the timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, so that "150,000" set in the RTC effect timer counter Tr corresponds to 5 minutes. After that, the processing for this RTC effect is completed.

When it is determined in step Sr6202 described above that the RTC effect executing flag is ON (step Sr6202: YES), that is, in the timer interrupt process after turning on the RTC effect executing flag in step Sr6202 described above. If the process proceeds to step Sr6202, the process proceeds to step Sr6210.

In step Sr6210, 1 is subtracted from the value set in the RTC effect timer counter Tr. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr6211 to determine whether or not the value of the RTC effect timer counter Tr is 0. If it is determined in step Sr6211 that the value of the RTC effect timer counter Tr is not 0 (step Sr6211: NO), that is, if it is determined that the RTC effect end timing has not yet been reached, the RTC effect process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr6211 that the value of the RTC effect timer counter Tr is 0 (step Sr6211: YES), that is, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the RTC effect, the process proceeds to step Sr6212. Set to end the running RTC effect. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr6213, the RTC effect executing flag is turned off, and the RTC effect process ends.

Next, the details of the deferred suggestion effect processing shown in step Sr6104 of FIG. 313 will be described.

FIG. 317 is a flowchart showing a deferred suggestion effect processing executed by the sound light side MPU 92 (sound light side CPU 92x) of the seventh embodiment.

In step Sr6401, it is determined whether or not the deferred suggestion effect execution permission flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sr6401 that the deferred suggestion effect execution permission flag is ON (step Sr6401: YES), the processes of steps Sr6402 to Sr6406 described below are executed. The process of steps Sr6402 to Sr6406 is a process for determining whether or not it is the timing to execute the deferred suggestion effect, and executing the deferred suggestion effect when it is determined that it is the timing to execute the deferred suggestion effect. be. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6401 that the deferred suggestion effect execution permission flag is not ON (step Sr6401: NO), the RTC effect processing is terminated without executing the processes of steps Sr6402 to Sr6406. ..

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the deferred suggestion effect execution permission flag is ON, that is, when the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is ON, the deferred suggestion effect is executed at a predetermined timing. On the other hand, when the deferred suggestion effect execution permission flag is OFF, that is, when the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is OFF, the deferred suggestion effect is not executed. Hereinafter, the processes of steps Sr6402 to Sr6406 will be described.

In step Sr6402, it is determined whether or not the activation type determination value is "01", that is, whether or not the activation type this time is "normal activation". If it is determined in step Sr6402 that the activation type determination value is "01" (step Sr6402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr6403 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6402 that the activation type determination value is not "01" (step Sr6402: NO), the main deferred suggestion effect processing is terminated.

In step Sr6403, it is determined whether or not the deferred suggestion effect executed flag stored in the sound / light side RAM 94 is ON. The deferred suggestion effect executed flag is a flag for determining whether or not the deferred suggestion effect has already been executed after the current activation. In the present embodiment, since the configuration in which the deferred suggestion effect is executed only in the first game round after the normal activation is adopted, this deferred suggestion effect executed flag is provided. The deferred suggestion effect execution flag is not maintained in the ON state even when the power supply is cut off in the ON state, and is always OFF at the next startup.

If it is determined in step Sr6403 that the deferred suggestion effect execution completed flag is not ON (step Sr6403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr6404 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr6403 that the deferred suggestion effect execution completed flag is ON (step Sr6403: YES), the main deferred suggestion effect processing is terminated.

In step Sr6404, it is determined whether or not a variation command has been received from the main control device 60. The fluctuation command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 when the game round (variation of the special symbol) is started in the game round control process (step Sr0410) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 293) executed by the main control device 60. It is a command to be executed. That is, in step Sr6404, it is determined whether or not the game round (variation of the special symbol) has started. If it is determined in step Sr6404 that the variable command has been received (step Sr6404: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr6405, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr6404 that the variable command has not been received (step Sr6404: NO), the main deferred suggestion effect processing is terminated.

In step Sr6405, the deferred suggestion effect start process is executed. The deferred suggestion effect start process is a process for starting the deferred suggestion effect described above. After that, the process proceeds to step Sr6406, the above-mentioned deferred suggestion effect execution completed flag is turned ON, and the main deferred suggestion effect start process is terminated.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

According to the present embodiment, the RTC effect is executed based on the elapsed time (starting elapsed time) since the pachinko machine 10 is started. Therefore, in the game hall where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed in the island facility, the RTC effect is executed. When the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are started all at once (simultaneously) by turning on the island power switch of the island facility, the elapsed start time of each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility is the same. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to start the RTC effect all at once (at the same time).

However, after turning on the island power switch to start a plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility all at once (simultaneously), for example, one pachinko machine 10 for the purpose of changing the setting information. When the power switch 85a of the above is individually displaced from the ON position to the OFF position to cut off the power supply, and the power switch 85a is displaced from the OFF position to the ON position and started again, the one pachinko machine is used. The elapsed start time in 10 is different from the elapsed start time in the other pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility, and the timing of starting the RTC effect in the one pachinko machine 10 is different from that of the other pachinko machine 10. There is a problem that it shifts. In particular, since the time required to change the setting information is about 1 minute, the one pachinko machine 10 whose setting information has been changed starts the RTC effect about 1 minute later than the other pachinko machine 10. Will be. In general, the RTC effect time is about 5 minutes, so that the RTC effect in the one pachinko machine 10 whose setting information has been changed is duplicated in a state of being deviated from the RTC effect in the other pachinko machine 10. There is a problem that it is executed and interferes with the player, causing discomfort to the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state, the process of turning off the RTC effect execution permission flag is executed, so that the power switch 85a is in the ON position. If the power switch 85a is displaced from the OFF position to the ON position and started after being displaced from the OFF position and the power supply is cut off, the pachinko machine 10 is set to a state in which the RTC effect cannot be executed. Will be done. As a result, the RTC effect is not executed in the one pachinko machine 10 activated by operating the power switch 85a, so that the RTC effect in the one pachinko machine 10 becomes the RTC effect in the other pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the players from being duplicated and interfering with each other in a shifted state, and it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable.

On the other hand, while the power switch 85a of the pachinko machine 10 remains in the ON position, the power supply is cut off due to the displacement of the island power switch from ON to OFF, and then the island power switch is displaced from OFF to ON. When activated, the pachinko machine 10 is set to a state in which the RTC effect can be executed (the RTC effect execution permission flag is turned ON), so that it is the same as the other pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility. It is possible to execute the RTC effect at the timing (or substantially the same).

Further, in the game hall where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed in the island equipment and the power supply to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is started and stopped all at once by the island power switch of the island equipment. If the pachinko machine 10 is cut off or started to be supplied with power by operating the individual power switch 85a, it is highly possible that the setting information has been changed from the previous day (or the previous business day). ..

According to the present embodiment, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state, the process of turning off the deferred suggestion effect execution permission flag is executed. When the generation is due to the operation of the power switch 85a, the deferred suggestion effect is not executed in the pachinko machine 10 after the next activation. Therefore, even though the setting information is actually changed from the previous day (or the previous business day), the deferred suggestion effect is executed on the pachinko machine 10, and the player sets the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the information is mistakenly regarded as being deferred without being changed.

<< 7-7 >> Modification example of the 7th embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be carried out in various embodiments without departing from the gist thereof, and for example, the following modifications are also possible. In the modified examples described below, the description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as those of the above embodiment will be omitted.

<< 7-7-1 >> Modification 1:
In the seventh embodiment, the configuration is provided with a movable object for effect that can be moved within a predetermined range, and the sound emission control device 90 is used when the sound / light side abnormal power failure flag is ON, that is, at the time of the previous power failure. When it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the ON state, the movable object for effect may be moved from the origin position to the maximum position. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

318 and 319 are explanatory views illustrating a movable object 99 for effect provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first modification of the seventh embodiment. The effectable movable object 99 of this modification is configured to be movable from the origin position shown in FIG. 318 to the maximum position shown in FIG. 319. For example, the origin is accompanied by the execution of a predetermined effect such as a super reach effect. It moves from the position to the maximum position and returns to the origin position from the maximum position at the end of the effect. Although not shown, in this modification, a drive motor for moving the movable object 99 for production, an origin position detection sensor capable of detecting that the movable object 99 for production is at the origin position, and a movable object for production are used. A maximum position detection sensor that can detect that 99 is in the maximum position is provided, and when moving the movable object 99 for production from the origin position to the maximum position, the movable object 99 for production is the maximum position detection sensor. On the other hand, when the moving object 99 for effect is returned from the maximum position to the origin position, the drive motor is driven until the movable object 99 for effect is detected by the origin position detection sensor. Let me.

Then, in this modification, when the voice emission control device 90 determines that the sound light side abnormal power interruption flag is ON in the sound light side abnormal power interruption flag corresponding processing at the time of activation, that is, at the time of the previous power interruption. When it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a is the ON state, the movable object 99 for effect is moved from the origin position to the maximum position. According to such a configuration, the manager of the game hall or the like visually confirms whether or not the movable object 99 for production is at the origin position, so that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is turned off. It is possible to easily confirm whether it is determined to be in the state or whether it is determined to be in the ON state.

Then, when the administrator or the like notices that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is determined to be the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 has the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure. It is possible to perform work corresponding to the determination that the state is the ON state.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is started and stopped all at once by an island power switch of an island facility, the power is supplied at the time of the previous power failure. The fact that the state of the switch 85a remains ON means that there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Mr. Goto. Therefore, in such a game hall, the manager or the like of the game hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the pachinko machine 10 and inspect the pachinko machine 10.

A stepping motor may be used as the drive motor for moving the movable object 99 for production. Specifically, for example, when moving the movable object 99 for production from the origin position to the maximum position, a rotation direction (for example, a normal rotation direction) for moving the movable object 99 from the origin position to the maximum position is specified, and a predetermined step is performed. A number (for example, 20) is set in the counter to drive the stepping motor, and when the number of steps set in the counter becomes 0, it is determined whether or not the moving object 99 for production is detected by the maximum position detection sensor. .. When the moving object 99 for effect is detected by the maximum position detection sensor, the driving of the stepping motor is terminated. On the other hand, when the effect moving object 99 is not detected by the maximum position detection sensor, the effect moving object 99 is further moved in the direction of the maximum position by setting the counter one by one until it is detected. If the number of added steps exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5), an error may be notified.

On the other hand, when moving the movable object 99 for production from the maximum position to the origin position, a rotation direction (for example, a reverse direction) for moving from the maximum position to the origin position is specified, and a predetermined number of steps (for example, 20) is specified. It is set in the counter to drive the stepping motor, and when the number of steps set in the counter becomes 0, it is determined whether or not the moving object 99 for effect is detected by the origin position detection sensor. When the moving object 99 for effect is detected by the origin position detection sensor, the driving of the stepping motor is terminated. On the other hand, when the moving object 99 for effect is not detected by the origin position detection sensor, the movable object 99 for effect is further moved in the direction of the origin position by setting the counter one by one until it is detected. If the number of added steps exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5), an error may be notified.

The configuration using the stepping motor as the drive motor described above may be applied to each modification described below.

<< 7-7-2 >> Modification 2:
In the seventh embodiment and each of the above modifications, the voice emission control device 90 is in the ON state when the sound light side abnormal power interruption flag is ON, that is, the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption is ON. When it is determined, a predetermined notification process (for example, a process of sounding an alarm at the maximum volume) may be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the manager of the game hall or the like aware that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is determined to be the ON state. As a result, the administrator or the like can perform work corresponding to the determination that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure in the pachinko machine 10 is the ON state.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is started and stopped all at once by an island power switch of an island facility, the power is supplied at the time of the previous power failure. The fact that the state of the switch 85a remains ON means that there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Mr. Goto. Therefore, in such a game hall, the manager or the like of the game hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the pachinko machine 10 and inspect the pachinko machine 10.

<< 7-7-3 >> Modification 3:
In the seventh embodiment and each of the above modifications, the configuration is such that an external output terminal capable of outputting information to an external device such as a hall computer is provided, and the main control device 60 is configured when the main side abnormal power failure flag is ON. That is, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state, predetermined information indicating that an abnormality may have occurred may be output from the external output terminal. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the manager of the game hall or the like aware that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is determined to be the ON state. As a result, the administrator or the like can perform work corresponding to the determination that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure in the pachinko machine 10 is the ON state.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is started and stopped all at once by an island power switch of an island facility, the power is supplied at the time of the previous power failure. The fact that the state of the switch 85a remains ON means that there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Mr. Goto. Therefore, in such a game hall, the manager or the like of the game hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the pachinko machine 10 and inspect the pachinko machine 10.

<< 7-7-4 >> Modification 4:
In the seventh embodiment and each of the above modifications, when the main side abnormal power failure flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state, the power supply is supplied. The configuration may include a drive mechanism that forcibly displaces the switch 85a to the OFF state. According to this configuration, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state, the power switch 85a is displaced to the OFF state and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. It will be dripping. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is determined to be the ON state. ..

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is started and stopped all at once by an island power switch of an island facility, the power is supplied at the time of the previous power failure. The fact that the state of the switch 85a remains ON means that there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Mr. Goto. According to this modification, if the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was an abnormal ON state, the power switch 85a is forcibly displaced to the OFF state at the next startup, and the state concerned is concerned. The power supply to the pachinko machine 10 will be forcibly cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of abnormality.

<< 7-7-5 >> Modification 5:
In the seventh embodiment and each of the above modifications, the voice emission control device 90 is in the OFF state when the sound light side abnormal power interruption flag is OFF, that is, the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power interruption is OFF. When it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is started, the start-up demo image displayed at the start-up of the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41. According to this configuration, the manager of the game hall or the like confirms whether or not the activation demo image is displayed on the symbol display device 41, so that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is in the OFF state. It is possible to confirm whether it is determined to be present or whether it is determined to be in the ON state.

Then, when the administrator or the like notices that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is determined to be the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 has the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure. It is possible to perform work corresponding to the determination that the state is the ON state.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is started and stopped all at once by an island power switch of an island facility, the power is supplied at the time of the previous power failure. The fact that the state of the switch 85a remains ON means that there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Mr. Goto. Therefore, in such a game hall, the manager or the like of the game hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the pachinko machine 10 and inspect the pachinko machine 10.

<< 7-7-6 >> Modification 6:
In the seventh embodiment and each of the above modifications, the main control device 60 determines that the main side abnormal power failure flag is OFF, that is, the state of the power supply switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state. If this is the case, the game ball launching mechanism 81 may be configured to enable the game ball to be launched. Specifically, for example, a permission flag for permitting the launch of the game ball is provided, and the game ball launch mechanism 81 can launch the game ball only when the permission flag is ON. Then, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state, the permission flag is turned ON, and it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state. If so, the permission flag is turned off.

According to such a configuration, the player can play the game on the pachinko machine 10 when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the process for launching the game ball, so that the player can perform the previous time. If it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of power failure is the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 cannot play a game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is determined to be the ON state. ..

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is started and stopped all at once by an island power switch of an island facility, the power is supplied at the time of the previous power failure. The fact that the state of the switch 85a remains ON means that there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Mr. Goto. As described above, according to the present modification, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 can launch the game ball. Since it is not executed, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is determined to be the ON state. Can be done.

Further, in this modification, even when the main side abnormal power failure flag is ON, that is, even when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state, the current power supply is used. If the game permission switch provided in the main control device 60 accommodating the main control board 61 is pressed within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 minutes) from the start of the supply of the above-mentioned game ball, the above-mentioned game ball is permitted to be launched. It may be configured to turn on the permission flag. In this configuration, the manager of the game hall has a valid reason that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure, and there is a problem even if the game is played in the pachinko machine 10. If it is determined that there is no such thing, the game permission switch on the pachinko machine 10 may be pressed. According to the configuration described above, the game is played in the pachinko machine 10 with the possibility of an abnormality that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is determined to be the ON state. When the manager of the game hall recognizes that the possibility of abnormality has been eliminated while suppressing the above, and the manager or the like presses the game permission switch, the player plays the game on the specific pachinko machine 10. Can be done.

<< 7-7-7 >> Modification 7:
In the seventh embodiment and each of the above modifications, the main control device 60 determines that the main side abnormal power failure flag is OFF, that is, the state of the power supply switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state. If this is the case, the configuration may be such that the game ball can be detected by the ball entry detection sensor. Specifically, for example, a permission flag for permitting the detection of the game ball is provided, and the game ball can be detected by the ball entry detection sensor only when the permission flag is ON. Then, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state, the permission flag is turned ON, and it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state. If so, the permission flag is turned off.

According to such a configuration, the player can play the game on the pachinko machine 10 when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the process of enabling the detection of the game ball by the ball entry detection sensor. If it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state, the person cannot play the game in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is determined to be the ON state. ..

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is started and stopped all at once by an island power switch of an island facility, the power is supplied at the time of the previous power failure. The fact that the state of the switch 85a remains ON means that there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Mr. Goto. As described above, according to this modification, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 detects the game ball by the ball entry detection sensor. Since the process for enabling is not executed, the game is played in the pachinko machine 10 with the possibility of an abnormality that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is determined to be the ON state. It can be suppressed.

Further, in this modification, even when the main side abnormal power failure flag is ON, that is, even when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state, the current power supply is used. If the game permission switch provided in the main control device 60 accommodating the main control board 61 is pressed within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 minutes) from the start of the supply of the above-mentioned game ball, the above-mentioned detection of the game ball is permitted. It may be configured to turn on the permission flag. In this configuration, the manager of the game hall has a valid reason that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure, and there is a problem even if the game is played in the pachinko machine 10. If it is determined that there is no such thing, the game permission switch on the pachinko machine 10 may be pressed. According to the configuration described above, the game is played in the pachinko machine 10 with the possibility of an abnormality that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is determined to be the ON state. When the manager of the game hall recognizes that the possibility of abnormality has been eliminated while suppressing the above, and the manager or the like presses the game permission switch, the player plays the game on the specific pachinko machine 10. Can be done.

<< 7-7-8 >> Modification 8:
In the seventh embodiment and each of the above modifications, the main control device 60 determines that the main side abnormal power failure flag is OFF, that is, the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is OFF. If this is the case, the counter values such as the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 may be configured to enable acquisition. Specifically, for example, a permission flag for permitting the acquisition of these counter values is provided, and the counter value can be acquired only when the permission flag is ON. Then, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state, the permission flag is turned ON, and it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state. If so, the permission flag is turned off.

According to such a configuration, the player can play the game on the pachinko machine 10 when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state, the processing that enables the acquisition of the counter value is not executed in the pachinko machine 10, so that the player can perform the previous operation. If it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of power failure is the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 cannot play a game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is determined to be the ON state. ..

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is started and stopped all at once by an island power switch of an island facility, the power is supplied at the time of the previous power failure. The fact that the state of the switch 85a remains ON means that there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Mr. Goto. As described above, according to this modification, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 can acquire the counter value. Since it is not executed, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is determined to be the ON state. Can be done.

Further, in this modification, even when the main side abnormal power failure flag is ON, that is, even when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state, the current power supply is used. If the game permission switch provided in the main control device 60 accommodating the main control board 61 is pressed within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 minutes) from the start of the supply of the above-mentioned counter value, acquisition of the above-mentioned counter value is permitted. It may be configured to turn on the permission flag. In this configuration, the manager of the game hall has a valid reason that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure, and there is a problem even if the game is played in the pachinko machine 10. If it is determined that there is no such thing, the game permission switch on the pachinko machine 10 may be pressed. According to the configuration described above, the game is played in the pachinko machine 10 with the possibility of an abnormality that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is determined to be the ON state. When the manager of the game hall recognizes that the possibility of abnormality has been eliminated while suppressing the above, and the manager or the like presses the game permission switch, the player plays the game on the specific pachinko machine 10. Can be done.

<< 7-7-9 >> Modification 9:
In the seventh embodiment and each of the above modifications, the main control device 60 determines that the main side abnormal power failure flag is OFF, that is, the state of the power supply switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state. If this is the case, the configuration may be configured to enable variable display of the special symbol on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. Specifically, for example, a permission flag for permitting the variable display of the special symbol is provided, and the variable display of the special symbol is possible only when the permission flag is ON. Then, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state, the permission flag is turned ON, and it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state. If so, the permission flag is turned off.

According to such a configuration, the player can play the game on the pachinko machine 10 when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the process of enabling the variable display of the special symbol, so that the player can perform the previous time. If it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of power failure is the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 cannot play a game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is determined to be the ON state. ..

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is started and stopped all at once by an island power switch of an island facility, the power is supplied at the time of the previous power failure. The fact that the state of the switch 85a remains ON means that there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Mr. Goto. As described above, according to this modification, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 enables the variable display of the special symbol. Is not executed, so that the pachinko machine 10 is prevented from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is determined to be the ON state. be able to.

Further, in this modification, even when the main side abnormal power failure flag is ON, that is, even when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state, the current power supply is used. If the game permission switch provided in the main control device 60 that houses the main control board 61 is pressed within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 minutes) from the start of the supply of the above-mentioned special symbol, the above-mentioned variation display of the special symbol is displayed. It may be configured to turn on the permission flag to be permitted. In this configuration, the manager of the game hall has a valid reason that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure, and there is a problem even if the game is played in the pachinko machine 10. If it is determined that there is no such thing, the game permission switch on the pachinko machine 10 may be pressed. According to the configuration described above, the game is played in the pachinko machine 10 with the possibility of an abnormality that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is determined to be the ON state. When the manager of the game hall recognizes that the possibility of abnormality has been eliminated while suppressing the above, and the manager or the like presses the game permission switch, the player plays the game on the specific pachinko machine 10. Can be done.

<< 7-7-10 >> Modification 10:
In the seventh embodiment and each of the above modifications, the main control device 60 determines that the main side abnormal power failure flag is OFF, that is, the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is OFF. If it is done, it may be configured to enable the execution of the winning lottery. Specifically, for example, a permission flag for permitting execution of the winning lottery is provided, and the winning lottery can be executed only when the permission flag is ON. Then, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state, the permission flag is turned ON, and it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state. If so, the permission flag is turned off.

According to such a configuration, the player can play the game on the pachinko machine 10 when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the process that enables the execution of the winning lottery. If it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of power failure is the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 cannot play a game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is determined to be the ON state. ..

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is started and stopped all at once by an island power switch of an island facility, the power is supplied at the time of the previous power failure. The fact that the state of the switch 85a remains ON means that there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Mr. Goto. As described above, according to the present modification, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 can execute the winning lottery. Since it is not executed, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is determined to be the ON state. Can be done.

Further, in this modification, even when the main side abnormal power failure flag is ON, that is, even when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state, the current power supply is used. If the game permission switch provided in the main control device 60 accommodating the main control board 61 is pressed within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 minutes) from the start of the supply of the above-mentioned winning lottery, the execution of the above-mentioned winning lottery is permitted. It may be configured to turn on the permission flag. In this configuration, the manager of the game hall has a valid reason that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure, and there is a problem even if the game is played in the pachinko machine 10. If it is determined that there is no such thing, the game permission switch on the pachinko machine 10 may be pressed. According to the configuration described above, the game is played in the pachinko machine 10 with the possibility of an abnormality that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is determined to be the ON state. When the manager of the game hall recognizes that the possibility of abnormality has been eliminated while suppressing the above, and the manager or the like presses the game permission switch, the player plays the game on the specific pachinko machine 10. Can be done.

<< 7-7-11 >> Modification 11:
In the seventh embodiment and each of the above modifications, the main control device 60 determines that the main side abnormal power failure flag is OFF, that is, the state of the power supply switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state. If this is the case, the configuration may be such that the open / close execution mode can be executed. Specifically, for example, a permission flag for permitting execution of the open / close execution mode is provided, and the open / close execution mode can be executed only when the permission flag is ON. Then, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state, the permission flag is turned ON, and it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state. If so, the permission flag is turned off.

According to such a configuration, the player can play the game on the pachinko machine 10 when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the process for enabling the execution of the open / close execution mode. If it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of power failure is the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 cannot play a game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is determined to be the ON state. ..

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is started and stopped all at once by an island power switch of an island facility, the power is supplied at the time of the previous power failure. The fact that the state of the switch 85a remains ON means that there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Mr. Goto. As described above, according to the present modification, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state, the processing that enables the pachinko machine 10 to execute the open / close execution mode. Is not executed, so that the pachinko machine 10 is prevented from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is determined to be the ON state. be able to.

Further, in this modification, even when the main side abnormal power failure flag is ON, that is, even when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state, the current power supply is used. If the game permission switch provided in the main control device 60 accommodating the main control board 61 is pressed within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 minutes) from the start of the supply of the above-mentioned, the above-mentioned opening / closing execution mode is executed. It may be configured to turn on the permission flag to be permitted. In this configuration, the manager of the game hall has a valid reason that the power switch 85a was in the ON state at the time of the previous power failure, and there is a problem even if the game is played in the pachinko machine 10. If it is determined that there is no such thing, the game permission switch on the pachinko machine 10 may be pressed. According to the configuration described above, the game is played in the pachinko machine 10 with the possibility of an abnormality that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is determined to be the ON state. When the manager of the game hall recognizes that the possibility of abnormality has been eliminated while suppressing the above, and the manager or the like presses the game permission switch, the player plays the game on the specific pachinko machine 10. Can be done.

<< 7-7-12 >> Modification 12:
In the seventh embodiment and each of the above modifications, the state of the power supply switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is as follows, based on the state of the main side abnormal power failure flag stored in the main RAM 64 of the main control device 60. However, instead of this configuration, the configuration is provided with the effectable movable object 99 described in the above-mentioned modification 1, and the previous configuration is based on the position of the effectable movable object 99. The state of the power switch 85a at the time of power failure may be determined at the next startup. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

In this modification, in the main control device 60, when the drive voltage becomes less than a predetermined value, is the state of the power switch 85a turned on based on the signal from the power switch state detection sensor 85b? When it is determined whether the power switch 85a is in the OFF state and the power switch 85a is determined to be in the ON state, an abnormal power interruption occurrence command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90, and then the above-mentioned main side power interruption processing is executed. do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the OFF state, the normal power cutoff generation command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90, and then the above-mentioned main side power cutoff process is executed.

When the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 receives an abnormal power interruption generation command, the sound light side power interruption process described above is performed after moving the effect movable object 99 from the origin position to the maximum position. To execute. On the other hand, when the normal power failure generation command is received, the effect moving object 99 stands by at the origin position or is returned to the origin position, and then the above-mentioned sound / light side power failure process is executed. That is, when the power supply is cut off while the power switch 85a is ON, the effect moving object 99 is in the state of being moved to the maximum position, and the power supply is cut off while the power switch 85a is in the OFF state. When it hangs down, the movable object 99 for directing is in a state of staying at the origin position.

After that, the sound light side MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 determines whether or not the moving object 99 for effect is detected by the origin position detection sensor at the next start-up when the power supply is started. It is determined whether the state of the power switch 85a at the time of power failure is the OFF state or the ON state. Then, when it is determined that the movable object 99 for effect is detected by the origin position detection sensor, that is, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state, the abnormal electric power on the sound / light side is determined. Turn off the disconnect flag. On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable object 99 for effect is not detected by the origin position detection sensor, that is, when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure was the ON state, the sound / light side abnormality Turn on the power cut flag.

In addition, the processing executed by the main control device 60 and the voice emission control device 90 is the same as the above-mentioned seventh embodiment and each of the above-described modifications.

Next, an example of the processing executed by the main MPU 62 and the sound light side MPU 92 of this modification will be described.

The processes executed by the main MPU 62 and the sound light side MPU 92 of this modification are the main process (FIG. 290), the power supply monitoring process (FIG. 294), and the power failure type determination process (FIG. 294) as compared with the seventh embodiment. The other processes are the same as those in the seventh embodiment, except that the contents of 310) and the sound-light side power cutoff process (FIG. 314) are different. Hereinafter, the main process, the power supply monitoring process, the power cut type determination process, and the sound light side power cut process executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of this modification will be described.

FIG. 320 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the main MPU 62 of the modified example 12 of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the main processing shown in FIG. 290 is that the processing from step Sr0103 to step Sr0105 in FIG. 290 is omitted, and the processing of the other steps is the same as the main processing shown in FIG. 290. be. That is, in this modification, the main side abnormal power cut flag is not provided, and the power cut type command (normal power cut command or abnormal power cut command) corresponding to the state of the main side abnormal power cut flag is voiced. The process of transmitting to the light emission control device 90 is not executed.

Next, the power supply monitoring process executed by the main MPU 62 of this modification will be described.

FIG. 321 is a flowchart showing a power supply monitoring process executed by the main MPU 62 of the modified example 12 of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the power supply monitoring process shown in FIG. 294 is that when it is determined in step Sr0502 of FIG. 321 that the power switch 85a is in the OFF state, a normal power failure generation command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Sr0503a. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power switch 85a is in the ON state, an abnormal power failure occurrence command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S0504a, and the processing of the other steps is shown in FIG. 294. It is the same as the power supply monitoring process shown.

Next, the power failure type determination process executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 of this modification will be described.

FIG. 322 is a flowchart showing a power failure type determination process executed by the sound / light side MPU 92 of the modification 12 of the seventh embodiment. In step Sr4301a, it is determined whether or not the moving object 99 for effect is located on the origin position sensor side. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the origin position sensor is at the Hi level, and if the signal from the origin position sensor is at the Hi level, the movable object 99 for effect is located on the origin position sensor side. It is determined that it is. If it is determined in step Sr4301a that the movable object 99 for effect is located on the origin position sensor side (step Sr4301a: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4302a, and the sound / light side abnormal power interruption flag is turned off. After that, the main power interruption type determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr4301a that the movable object 99 for effect is not located on the origin position sensor side (step Sr4301a: NO), the process proceeds to step Sr4303a and the sound / light side abnormal power interruption flag is turned ON. .. After that, the main power interruption type determination process is terminated.

Next, the sound-light side power interruption process executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 of this modification will be described.

FIG. 323 is a flowchart showing the sound light side power interruption process executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the modification 12 of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the sound-light side power failure processing shown in FIG. 314 is that the received power failure generation command is a normal power failure generation command when it is determined in step Sr6201 of FIG. 323 that the power failure generation command has been received. Whether or not it is determined (step Sr6201a1), and if it is determined that it is a normal power failure generation command, the moving object 99 for production is moved to the origin position sensor side (step Sr6201a2), while the abnormal power failure generation command is used. If it is determined that there is, the movable object 99 for effect is moved to the maximum position sensor side (step Sr6201a3), and the processing of the other steps is the same as the sound light side power interruption processing shown in FIG. 314. be.

As described above, according to the present modification, the same effects as those of the above-mentioned 7th embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications can be obtained, and the following effects can be obtained.

According to this modification, when the power switch 85a is determined to be in the ON position when the power supply from the outside is cut off, the moving object 99 for production is moved to the maximum position, so that the power from the outside is generated. If the power switch 85a is in the OFF position when the power supply is cut off, the moving object 99 for production stays in the origin position, while the power switch 85a is in the ON position when the power supply from the outside is cut off. If this is the case, the movable object 99 for effect moves to a position other than the origin position. That is, the position of the power switch 85a in the pachinko machine 10 when the supply of electric power from the outside is cut off is indicated by the position of the movable object 99 for production. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like visually confirms whether or not the movable object 99 for production is at the origin position, so that the power switch in the pachinko machine 10 when the power supply from the outside is cut off. The position of 85a can be easily confirmed.

Then, according to this modification, when it is determined that the moving object 99 for effect is at the origin position when the power supply from the outside is started, the RTC effect execution permission flag and the deferred suggestion effect execution permission flag are used. Is executed, and if it is determined that the position is not the origin position, the RTC effect execution permission flag and the deferred suggestion effect execution permission flag are turned on. It can be switched according to the position of the power switch 85a when the power supply of the power switch is cut off. As a result, appropriate processing can be executed according to the position of the power switch 85a.

Further, according to this modification, transmission of the main side abnormal power failure flag and the power failure type command (normal power failure command, abnormal power failure command) can be omitted, so that the processing load of the main control device 60 can be reduced. Can be reduced.

In addition, each configuration of the above-mentioned modification 1 to modification 11 may be applied to this modification. Even in this way, the effects described in the modified examples 1 to 11 can be obtained.

<< 7-7-13 >> Modification 13:
In the seventh embodiment, the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure can be determined at the next startup based on the state of the main side abnormal power failure flag stored in the main RAM 64 of the main control device 60. The configuration was as follows. Further, in the modification 12, the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure can be determined at the next activation based on the position of the moving object 99 for effect controlled by the voice emission control device 90. Therefore, in this modification, after combining the configuration of the seventh embodiment and the configuration of the modification 12, it is determined whether there is a difference between the determination results, and if there is a difference, the notification is notified. It may be configured. Hereinafter, an example of the processing executed by the main MPU 62 and the sound light side MPU 92 of this modification will be described.

The processes executed by the main MPU 62 and the sound light side MPU 92 of this modification are the power supply monitoring process (FIG. 294), the power interruption type determination process (FIG. 310), and the sound light side electricity, as compared with the seventh embodiment. The other processes are the same as those in the seventh embodiment, except that the content of the disconnection process (FIG. 314) is different. Hereinafter, the power supply monitoring process executed by the main MPU 62 of this modification, the power cut type determination process executed by the sound / light side MPU 92 of this modification, and the sound / light side power cut process will be described.

FIG. 324 is a flowchart showing a power supply monitoring process executed by the main MPU 62 of the modified example 13 of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the power supply monitoring process shown in FIG. 294 is that after turning off the main side abnormal power interruption flag in step Sr0503 of FIG. After that, the point of proceeding to step Sr0506 and after turning on the main side abnormal power interruption flag in step Sr0504 of FIG. It is a point to proceed to step Sr0506, and the processing of the other steps is the same as the power supply monitoring processing shown in FIG. 294.

Next, the power failure type determination process executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 of this modification will be described.

FIG. 325 is a flowchart showing a power failure type determination process executed by the sound / light side MPU 92 of the modification 13 of the seventh embodiment. In this modification, the state of the power switch 85a (the state of the main side abnormal power failure flag, the type of the power failure type command) at the time of the previous power failure recognized by the main control device 60 side and the voice emission control device 90 side are The state of the power switch 85a (the position of the movable object 99 for effect) at the time of the previous power failure that is recognized is compared, and if they do not match, the abnormality notification is executed. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

In step Sr4301, it is determined whether or not a power failure type command has been received from the main MPU 62. Specifically, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not any one of the above-mentioned two commands, the normal power failure command and the abnormal power failure command, has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sr4301 that one of the two commands described above has been received (step Sr4301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4302. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sr4301 that neither of the two commands described above has been received (step Sr4301: NO), the process returns to step Sr4301 again. That is, it waits until it is determined that one of the two commands described above has been received, and when it is determined that one of the two commands described above has been received, step Sr4302 is performed. move on.

In step Sr4302, it is determined whether or not the command received as the power cut type command from the main MPU 62 is an abnormal power cut command. If it is determined in step Sr4302 that the command received as the power cut type command from the main MPU 62 is an abnormal power cut command (step Sr4302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sr4303 and is stored in the sound / light side RAM 94. Turn on the abnormal power failure flag on the sound light side. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr4303b1.

In step Sr4303b1, it is determined whether or not the moving object 99 for effect is located on the origin position sensor side. When it is determined in step Sr4303b1 that the movable object 99 for effect is not located on the origin position sensor side (step Sr4303b1: NO), that is, the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure recognized by the main control device 60 side. If the state (ON state) of the power switch 85a (ON state) at the time of the previous power failure recognized by the voice emission control device 90 matches, the main power failure type determination process is performed as it is. To finish.

On the other hand, in step Sr4303b1, when it is determined that the movable object 99 for effect is located on the origin position sensor side (step Sr4303b1: YES), that is, the power supply at the time of the previous power failure recognized by the main control device 60 side. If the state of the switch 85a (ON state) and the state of the power switch 85a (OFF state) at the time of the previous power failure recognized by the voice emission control device 90 side do not match, the process proceeds to step Sr4303b2. Executes the error notification process. In this modification, the abnormality notification process is a process in which a voice such as "An abnormality has occurred. Please check." Is repeatedly output from the speaker 46 at the maximum volume. After that, the infinite loop process is repeated.

When it is determined in step Sr4302 that the command received as the power cut type command from the main MPU 62 is not an abnormal power cut command (step Sr4302: YES), that is, the command received as the power cut type command from the main MPU 62 is normal. If it is a power cut command, the process proceeds to step Sr4304, and the sound light side abnormal power cut flag stored in the sound light side RAM 94 is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sr4304b1.

In step Sr4304b1, it is determined whether or not the moving object 99 for effect is located on the origin position sensor side. When it is determined in step Sr4304b1 that the movable object 99 for effect is located on the origin position sensor side (step Sr4303b1: YES), that is, the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure recognized by the main control device 60 side. If the state of (OFF state) and the state of the power switch 85a (OFF state) at the time of the previous power failure recognized by the voice emission control device 90 side match, the main power failure type determination process is performed as it is. To finish.

On the other hand, in step Sr4304b1, when it is determined that the movable object 99 for effect is not located on the origin position sensor side (step Sr4303b1: NO), that is, the power supply at the time of the previous power failure recognized by the main control device 60 side. If the state of the switch 85a (OFF state) and the state of the power switch 85a (ON state) at the time of the previous power failure recognized by the voice emission control device 90 side do not match, the process proceeds to step Sr4304b2. Executes the error notification process. In this modification, the abnormality notification process is a process in which a voice such as "An abnormality has occurred. Please check." Is repeatedly output from the speaker 46 at the maximum volume. After that, the infinite loop process is repeated.

Next, the sound-light side power interruption process executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 of this modification will be described.

FIG. 326 is a flowchart showing the sound light side power interruption process executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the modification 13 of the seventh embodiment. Since the sound-light side power-cutting process shown in FIG. 326 is the same as the sound-light-side power-cutting process of the modification 12 shown in FIG. 323, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, according to the present modification, the same effects as those of the above-mentioned 7th embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications can be obtained, and the following effects can be obtained.

According to this modification, when the power switch 85a is in the OFF position when the power supply from the outside is cut off, the moving object 99 for production stays at the origin position, while the power supply from the outside is supplied. If the power switch 85a is in the ON position when the power switch is turned off, the movable object 99 for effect moves to the maximum position. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like visually confirms whether or not the movable object 99 for production is at the origin position, so that the power switch in the pachinko machine 10 when the power supply from the outside is cut off. The position of 85a can be easily confirmed.

Further, according to this modification, when the supply of power from the outside is started, the main side abnormal power cutoff flag (and the sound light side abnormal power cutoff flag) is turned off, and the movable object 99 for production is turned off. When is determined to be the origin position, the process of turning off the RTC effect execution permission flag and the deferred suggestion effect execution permission flag is executed, while the main side abnormal power failure flag (and the sound light side abnormal power failure flag) are executed. When it is determined that is ON and the effect moving object 99 is not at the origin position, a process of turning on the RTC effect execution permission flag and the deferred suggestion effect execution permission flag is executed. Therefore, the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the position of the power switch 85a when the power supply from the outside is cut off. Then, according to this modification, the position of the power switch 85a when the power supply from the outside is cut off is determined by the dual system of the main control device 60 and the voice emission control device 90, so that the determination is made. The reliability of the results can be improved.

Further, according to this modification, it is determined that the main side abnormal power failure flag (and the sound light side abnormal power failure flag) is OFF, and the effect movable object 99 is not at the origin position by the second determination means. If so, the abnormality notification process (step Sr4304b2 in FIG. 325) is executed. Further, when it is determined that the main side abnormal power cutoff flag (and the sound light side abnormal power cutoff flag) is ON and the effect moving object 99 is at the origin position, the abnormality notification process (step of FIG. 325). Sr4303b2) is executed. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can notice that the determination results of the main control device 60 and the voice emission control device 90 in the pachinko machine 10 are in an abnormal state in which they are inconsistent. Specifically, for example, it is difficult for an illegal person such as Mr. Goto to prepare an illegal base in which the information on the state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the previous power failure is matched and stored. When a part of the main control device 60 is replaced with the illegal board, the determination results of the main control device 60 and the voice emission control device 90 are likely to be inconsistent. According to this modification, when the inconsistency is detected, the abnormality notification process is executed, so that the manager of the game hall or the like performs an illegal operation or modification to the pachinko machine 10. You can be aware that you may be. Then, the administrator or the like can temporarily suspend the operation of the pachinko machine 10 and inspect the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, each configuration of the above-mentioned modification 1 to modification 11 may be applied to this modification. Even in this way, the effects described in the modified examples 1 to 11 can be obtained.

<< 7-7-14 >> Modification 14:
In the modification 12 and the modification 13, when the power switch 85a is in the ON state at the time of power interruption (for example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are simultaneously disconnected by the island power switch), the effect is produced. By moving the movable object 99 to the maximum position, determining the position of the movable object 99 for the effect at the next activation, and moving the movable object 99 for the effect from the maximum position to the origin position after the determination, the effect is used. It may be configured so that it can be inspected whether or not the movable object 99 operates normally.

Specifically, for example, when the power switch 85a is in the ON state at the time of power failure (for example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are simultaneously powered by the island power switch), the power switch processing is performed. The stepping motor is set by designating the rotation direction (for example, forward rotation direction) of the stepping motor for moving the movable object 99 for production from the origin position to the maximum position, and setting a predetermined number of steps (for example, 20) on the counter. It is driven, and when the number of steps set in the counter becomes 0, it is determined whether or not the moving object 99 for effect is detected by the maximum position detection sensor. When the moving object 99 for effect is detected by the maximum position detection sensor, the driving of the stepping motor is terminated. On the other hand, when the effect moving object 99 is not detected by the maximum position detection sensor, the effect moving object 99 is further moved in the direction of the maximum position by setting the counter one by one until it is detected. Then, when the number of added steps exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5), the movable object operation failure flag is turned ON.

Then, at the next startup, the state of the movable object operation failure flag is determined, and if it is determined that the movable object operation failure flag is ON, the effect movable object 99 does not operate normally (it is abnormal). That) is notified. Movable object operation failure notification processing is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable object operation failure flag is not ON, the position of the moving object 99 for effect is determined. Then, when it is determined that the movable object 99 for production is at the maximum position, the rotation direction (for example, reverse direction) of the stepping motor for moving from the maximum position to the origin position is specified, and a predetermined number of steps (for example, 20) is specified. ) Is set in the counter to drive the stepping motor, and when the number of steps set in the counter becomes 0, it is determined whether or not the moving object 99 for effect is detected by the origin position detection sensor. When the moving object 99 for effect is detected by the origin position detection sensor, the driving of the stepping motor is terminated. On the other hand, when the moving object 99 for effect is not detected by the origin position detection sensor, the movable object 99 for effect is further moved in the direction of the origin position by setting the counter one by one until it is detected. Then, when the number of added steps exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5), the above-mentioned movable object operation failure notification process is executed.

According to this modification described above, each of the game halls installed in the island equipment in the game hall where the power supply to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is started and stopped all at once by the island power switch of the island equipment. It is possible to simultaneously inspect whether or not the moving object 99 for production of the pachinko machine 10 operates normally.

<< 7-7-15 >> Modification 15:
Among the above modifications, in the configuration including the effect moving object 99, when the power switch 85a is in the ON state at the time of power failure, the effect movable object 99 is moved to the maximum position and the power is cut off. When the state of the power switch 85a at the time is OFF, the movable object 99 for effect is moved to the origin position (remains at the origin position), but the moving mode of the movable object 99 for effect is this configuration. For example, when the state of the power switch 85a at the time of power failure is ON, the moving object 99 for production is moved to the origin position (remains at the origin position), and the power switch at the time of power failure. When the state of 85a is the OFF state, the movable object 99 for effect may be moved to the maximum position.

<< 7-7-16 >> Modification 16:
In the seventh embodiment and each of the above modifications, the case where the power switch 85a is turned off at the time of power failure (for example, when each pachinko machine 10 is individually powered by each power switch 85a) is regarded as "normal". It is expressed that when the power switch 85a is turned on at the time of power failure (for example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are powered off all at once by the island power switch), it is expressed as "abnormal". For convenience, for example, when the power switch 85a is turned off at the time of power failure, it may be expressed as "abnormal", and when the power switch 85a is turned on at the time of power failure, it may be expressed as "normal". .. Further, expressions different from "normal" and "abnormal" may be used. For example, when the power switch 85a is turned off at the time of power failure, it is expressed as "first state", and the power switch 85a at the time of power failure. When is ON, it may be expressed as "second state".

<< 8 >> Eighth embodiment:
<< 8-1 >> Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 327 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as the eighth embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a voice emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. Illuminations are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect of the effect by lighting or blinking at each game round performed by the pachinko machine 10, when a big hit is won, when a reach occurs, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two plate glasses is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. The details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls rented from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball stored in the upper plate 20 is supplied to the game ball launch mechanism included in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launch mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores the game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged to the outside from the lower plate 21.

An effect operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game effect reflecting the operation.

An operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “right side”). When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and an operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c that detects the rotation operation amount of the above by the change of the electric resistance is provided. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes according to the rotation operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball launch button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “left side”). When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined firing intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the player's operation handle 25. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the front view of the game board and flows down to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can make a so-called "right-handed". Further, in the following description, when the game ball is launched by operating the operation handle 25, the game ball flows to the left side of the front view of the game board and flows down the left side of the game board, the player "left". It may be expressed as "hit". The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26 to launch the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26. Can be realized.

In the present embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 in the front view, but the game ball launch button 26 is arranged at another position. It may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25 in the same manner as the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operation handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball launch button 26 only with the right hand.

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 328 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing. For example, a seal is attached to a place that can be opened and closed, and the characters such as "open" appear when the board box is opened.

The second control unit 52 includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90. The design display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays a design or an image for directing.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The launch control device 80 launches a game ball having a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player when an instruction to launch the game ball is input from the main control device 60. Controls the ball launch mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a slope connected below the tank 54 and gently inclined so that the game balls flow to the downstream side. The game balls are supplied from the tank rail 55, the case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, and the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power supply switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies the electric power required for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85. By turning the power switch 88 on and off, the supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and the non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 329 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding the game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicular to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 has a general winning opening 32, a central side first starting opening 33 (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a first starting opening 33), a second starting opening 34, and a right side first starting opening 44 (hereinafter, simply referred to as a first starting opening). A mouth 44), a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided. The second starting port 34 and the right first starting port 44 are provided inside the starting port unit 200.

Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The variable display unit 40 is provided substantially in the center of the game board 30, and the main display unit 45 is provided near the upper right of the front view of the game board 30. A decorative frame member DF whose surface is decorated is attached to the game board 30 so as to surround the variable display unit 40.

In the space sandwiched between the portion from the upper side to the right side of the decorative frame member DF and the outer rail portion 31b and the main display portion 45, the first right-handed rail R1 and the second right-handed rail R2 are placed. It is provided. A right-handed outer rail R3 is provided on the right side of the lower portion of the second right-handed rail R2. The first right-handed rail R1 and the second right-handed rail R2 form a right-handed first passage P1. The second right-handed rail R2, the outer rail portion 31b, the main display unit 45, and the right-handed outer rail R3 form a second passage P2 for right-handed striking. Both the right-handed first passage P1 and the right-handed second passage P2 are formed in a substantially arc shape, and the right-handed first passage P1 and the right-handed second passage P2 are located side by side. The right-handed first passage P1 is located inside the right-handed second passage P2.

Both the opening end P1a on one side of the first passage P1 when hitting right and the opening end P2a on one side of the second passage P2 when hitting right are located near the top of the game area PA, and a game ball can enter. ing. Both the opening end P1b on the other side of the first passage P1 when hitting right and the opening end P2b on the other side of the second passage P2 when hitting right are located near the right side of the game area PA, and are located in the first passage P1 when hitting right. According to the right-handed second passage P2, the game ball can be sent toward the variable winning device 36.

As described above, by maximizing the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 (FIG. 327) or by operating the game ball launch button 26 (FIG. 327), the game ball can be moved to the right side of the game area PA. It is possible to make a so-called "right-handed" shot toward the ball, but in the case of these operations, the game ball can be guided to the second passage P2 when the right-handed ball is hit. On the other hand, by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 (FIG. 327) from the maximum, the game ball can be guided to the first passage P1 when hitting to the right. Hereinafter, the second passage P2 when hitting right is referred to as "strong right-handed passage P2", and the first passage P1 when hitting right is referred to as "weak right-handed passage P1". The operation of guiding the game ball to the strong right-handed passage P2, that is, maximizing the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 (FIG. 327) or operating the game ball launch button 26 (FIG. 327) is ". The operation of guiding the game ball to the weak right-handed passage P1 is called "weak right-handed operation" or simply "weak right-handed".

The general winning opening 32 is a ball entry opening member that forms an entry opening into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the game board 30 in plurality. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 328).

The first starting port 33 on the central side is an entry port member that forms an entry port into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 on the center side is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 on the central side, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second start port 34 is an entry port member that forms an entry port into which a game ball can enter, and is provided inside the start port unit 200. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The game board 32 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. The game balls that have entered each of the general winning opening 32, the central first starting port 33, and the second starting opening 34 are guided to the individual openings formed in the game board 32, and the game board 30 is guided. It is sent to the back side.

The right first starting port 44 is provided on the right side of the game board 30, and is provided inside the starting port unit 200. The right first starting port 44 is configured by a through hole through which a game ball can penetrate. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the right first starting port 44, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a winning lottery described later is executed. Further, an electric accessory 34a is provided at the first starting port 44 on the right side.

The through gate 35 is provided below the opening end P1b of the weak right-handed passage P1 and above the entry port of the starting port unit 200 (the entry port 210a of the main passage portion 210 described later) and penetrates in the vertical direction. It has a through hole. The game ball that has flowed down from the open end P1b of the weak right-handed passage P1 passes through the through gate 35, and then enters the ball entry port 210a. In the present embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the through gate has a 100% probability of entering the ball entry port 210a. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to execute a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric service is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric service open state in which the electric service is opened in a predetermined mode. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the first starting port 44 on the right side with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down inside the starting port unit 200 after passing through. Then, it is possible to enter the ball into the first starting port 44 on the right side. In this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 is provided below the opening end P1b of the strong right-handed passage P2. The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and also includes an opening / closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening / closing door 36b is normally closed so that the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60, when a big hit is won and the opening / closing execution mode is entered, the opening / closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state. The open / close execution mode is a case where a big hit is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by entering the ball into the center side first starting port 33, the right side first starting port 44, or the second starting port 34. This is a mode in which the opening / closing door 36b repeats an open state and a closed state. That is, as a result of the winning lottery based on the entry into the first starting port 33 on the central side, if a big hit is won, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 can enter the large winning opening 36a. do. Similarly, when the jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the entry into the right first starting port 44, and when the jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery based on the entry into the second starting opening 34. Also shifts to the open / close execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 can enter the large winning opening 36a. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71. Next, the configuration of the starting port unit 200 will be described in detail.

FIG. 330 is an explanatory diagram showing the starting port unit 200. This figure is a view seen from the front of the game board 30. The starting port unit 200 includes a main line passage portion 210, a first branch passage portion 220 that branches from the middle of the main line passage portion 210 and extends downward, and a second branch passage that branches from the middle of the first branch passage portion 220 and extends downward. A unit 230, a second starting port 34, a right first starting port 44, an out port 251 in the starting port unit, and a falling port 252 are provided. In the present embodiment, the main line passage portion 210, the first branch passage portion 220, and the second branch passage portion 230 are formed of a transparent resin material, and the player can use the flow of the game ball inside the starting port unit 200. It is possible to observe.

The main passage portion 210 has a ball entry port 210a at the upper end and a ball ejection port 210b at the lower end, and a game ball can flow from the ball entry port 210a to the ball ejection port 210b. It is a passage. A second starting port 34 is provided below the ball ejection port 210b. An opening 210c through which a game ball can enter is formed in the middle of the main line passage portion 210, and an opening end on the upward side of the first branch passage portion 220 is connected to the opening 210c. The right side first starting port 44 is configured by the upward opening end of the first branch passage portion 220. Immediately below the right first starting port 44, a detection sensor 67d for the right first starting port is provided. The detection sensor 67d for the right first starting port detects the entry of the game ball into the right first starting port 44.

The electric accessory 34a is provided in the opening 210c of the main passage portion 210. The electric accessory 34a has an open state in which the opening 210c is opened (indicated by a broken line in the figure) and a closed state in which the opening 210c is closed (in the figure) by moving a substantially rectangular plate material in the front and back directions in the drawing. (Indicated by the solid line) and can be taken. When the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball is allowed to enter the first branch passage portion 220, that is, the game ball is allowed to enter the right first starting port 44, and is in the closed state. In addition, the entry of the game ball into the first branch passage portion 220, that is, the entry of the game ball into the right first starting port 44 is prohibited. The game ball that has entered the first starting port 44 on the right side advances downward through the first branch passage portion 220. On the other hand, the game ball prohibited from entering the right first starting port 44 advances through the main passage portion 210 toward the ball ejection port 210b.

A game ball distribution device 240 is provided at a point where the first branch passage portion 220 branches to the second branch passage portion 230. The game ball distribution device 240 includes a reciprocating rotation shaft 241 and a distribution piece portion 242 fixed to the reciprocating rotation shaft 241. As the reciprocating rotation shaft 241a reciprocates (swings), the distribution piece portion 242 is moved between the first position Q1 shown by the solid line in the figure and the second position Q2 shown by the broken line in the figure. Reciprocating operation is possible. Specifically, the reciprocating rotation shaft 241 is connected to the game ball distribution drive unit 241a (see FIG. 337), and the reciprocating rotation shaft 241a is reciprocated by the game ball distribution drive unit 241a to distribute. The piece 240b reciprocates between the first position Q1 and the second position Q2.

In the present embodiment, the distribution piece portion 242 repeats the operation of holding the state at the first position Q1 for 2.0 seconds and then holding the state at the second position Q2 for 0.1 seconds. , The main control device 60 (FIG. 337) executes the drive control of the game ball distribution drive unit 241a. As a result, the distribution piece portion 242 is displaced to the second position Q2 every 2.1 seconds for 0.1 seconds, and stays at the first position Q1 for the remaining 2 seconds.

FIG. 331 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball when the distribution piece portion 240b is in the first position Q1. When the distribution piece portion 242 is in the first position Q1, the game ball PB is prohibited from entering the second branch passage portion 230, and the distribution piece portion 242 heads toward the downward end portion 220a of the first branch passage portion 220. You can send the game ball PB.

FIG. 332 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball when the distribution piece portion 240b is in the second position Q2. When the distribution piece portion 242 is in the second position Q2, the distribution piece portion 242 allows the game ball PB to enter the second branch passage portion 230 and heads toward the downward end portion 230a of the second branch passage portion 230. You can send a game ball.

As shown in FIG. 330, an out port 251 in the starting port unit is provided below the lower end 220a of the first branch passage 220, and the lower end 230a of the second branch 230 is provided. A fall opening 252 is provided below the.

The out port 251 in the start port unit is an entry port into which a game ball can enter, and is provided inside the start port unit 200. The game ball that has entered the out port 251 in the start port unit is guided to the opening formed in the game board 32 that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and is sent to the back side of the game board 30.

The fall opening 252 is an entry opening into which a game ball can enter, and is provided inside the start opening unit 200. When the game ball enters the fall opening 252, the lottery mode of the winning lottery, which will be described later, is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. The game ball that has entered the fall opening 252 is guided to an opening formed in the game board 32 that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and is sent to the back side of the game board 30.

According to the start port unit 200 configured as described above, since the distribution piece portion 242 is displaced to the second position Q2 by 0.1 second every 2.1 seconds, it is 0. With a probability of 1 second (= 1/21), the game ball that has entered the right first starting port 44 enters the falling opening 252. The probability that the game ball that has entered the right first starting port 44 will enter the falling opening 252 is not limited to the probability of 1/21, and may be replaced with the probability of another value.

According to the start port unit 200 configured as described above, the game ball that has entered the ball entry port 210a flows along one of the following first to third routes.
(I) First route RT1: As shown by the solid line in FIG. 333, the game ball PB is a route that enters the right first starting port 44 and then enters the out opening 251 in the starting port unit. That is, it is a route that allows the ball to enter the first starting port 44 on the right side.
(Ii) Second route RT2: As shown by the solid line in FIG. 334, the game ball PB is a route that enters the right first starting port 44 and then enters the falling opening 252. That is, it is a route that can enter the first starting port 44 on the right side and can enter the falling opening 252.
(Iii) Third route RT3: As shown by the solid line in FIG. 335, it is a route through which the game ball PB enters the second starting port 34. That is, it is a route that allows the ball to enter the second starting port 34.

Which of the first to third routes RT1 to RT3 is selected depends on whether or not the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the game ball reaches the position in front of the electric accessory 34a, and whether the game ball is in the open state. It is determined whether the distribution piece portion 242 is in the first position Q1 or the second position Q2 when the position in front of the distribution piece portion 242 of the game ball distribution device 240 is reached. Specifically, the game ball PB flows along the first route RT1 (FIG. 333) because the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the game ball reaches a position in front of the electric accessory 34a. Further, when the game ball reaches the position in front of the distribution piece portion 242 of the game ball distribution device 240, the distribution piece portion 242 is in the first position Q1. The game ball PB flows along the second route RT2 (FIG. 334) because the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the game ball reaches the position in front of the electric accessory 34a, and the game ball is in an open state. This is the case where the distribution piece portion 242 is in the second position Q2 when the position in front of the distribution piece portion 242 of the game ball distribution device 240 is reached. The game ball PB flows along the third route RT3 (FIG. 335) when the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state when the game ball reaches a position in front of the electric accessory 34a.

As shown in FIG. 329, an out port 43 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 30, and a game ball that has not entered various entry ports is discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43. To.

The game ball that has entered the general winning opening 32, the central side first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the out opening 251 in the starting opening unit, the falling opening 252, the variable winning device 36, and the out opening 43 is a game board. It is configured to finally join the discharge passage provided on the back surface of the 30, and the discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor that detects a game ball. By detecting the game balls with the discharge passage detection sensor, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls fired on the game board 30.

The main display unit 45 has a special figure unit 37, a normal figure unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol is a variable display or stop based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting openings 33 and 44 (the first starting opening 33 on the center side and the first starting opening 44 on the right side). The displayed design. When the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting ports 33 and 44 is performed, the first symbol display unit 37a displays until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result. As an embodiment, the variation display of the first symbol is performed. When the lottery is completed, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to display the stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying the second symbol. The second symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display unit 37b is used as a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. , The second symbol is changed and displayed. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display to display the stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b to the stop display is set. Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a to the stop display is also referred to as the first variable time, and is displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first hold display unit 37c and a second hold display unit 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of holds of the first start ports 33 and 44 (the first start port 33 on the center side and the first start port 44 on the right side) according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting openings 33 and 44 are reserved as a total of the two first starting openings 33 and 44. The second hold display unit 37d displays the number of holds of the second start port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are reserved.

The normal drawing unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, the normal drawing unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode as the display mode of the light emitting display. When the electric accessory opening lottery is completed, the normal drawing unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode, or displays corresponding to the number of round games. A round game is an opening / closing door until either a predetermined upper limit duration elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins a prize in the variable winning device 36. It is a game that keeps the open state of 36b. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the open / close execution mode is started, and ends when the open / close execution mode ends and a new game round starts.

The special figure unit 37, the normal figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being composed of a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp, and for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. It may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery result, such as a CRT or a dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The symbol display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a displays the variation or the stop based on the winning of the first start port 33 on the center side or the first start port 44 on the right side, the symbol display device 41 displays the variation of the symbol accordingly. Or, stop display is displayed. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b displays the fluctuation display or the stop display based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 performs the fluctuation display or the stop display of the symbol accordingly. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the display effect triggered by entering the ball into the center side first start port 33, the right side first start port 44, or the second start port 34, and shifts to the case where a big hit is won. It also performs display effects during the open / close execution mode. Hereinafter, the details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 336 is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol and a display surface 41a that are variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 336 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a first decorative symbol or a second decorative symbol that is variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. The first decorative symbol is an image displayed on the symbol display device 41, and is a symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a. The second decorative symbol is an image displayed on the symbol display device 41, and is a symbol corresponding to the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b.

As shown in FIG. 336 (a), the symbol display device 41 variablely displays the symbols 1 to 8 as the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol. As the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol having a pattern such as a character may be adopted for each of the symbols showing the numbers 1 to 8.

FIG. 336 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, the main display area MA and the sub display area SA are displayed on the display surface 41a. The image of the first decorative symbol may be displayed or the image of the second decorative symbol may be displayed in the main display area MA. Similarly, in the sub display area SA, an image of the first decorative symbol may be displayed or an image of the second decorative symbol may be displayed, as in the main display area MA. When the image of the first decorative symbol is displayed in the main display area MA, the image of the second decorative symbol is displayed in the sub display area SA, and the image of the second decorative symbol is displayed in the main display area MA. The image of the first decorative pattern is displayed in the sub display area SA. Whether the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol is displayed in the main display area MA and the sub display area SA is determined by the state of the game.

In the main display area MA, three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 8 as the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol shown in FIG. 336 (a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row is arranged. A variable display that scrolls from top to bottom or from bottom to top with periodicity is performed. As shown in FIG. 336 (b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a state of being stopped on the effective line L1.

Specifically, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, 44 (the first starting port 33 on the center side, the first starting port 44 on the right side) or the second starting port 34, the symbols of the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed. Starts a variable display that scrolls in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Then, each scrolling symbol switches from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. When the variation display of the symbol is completed and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit winning, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the effective line L1. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L1. The modes of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in the main display area MA are not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, there are various display modes of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, such as the number of symbol rows in the main display area MA, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, and the number of symbols in each symbol row. Aspects can be adopted.

In the sub display area SA, three symbol columns Z4, Z5, and Z6 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z4 to Z6, the symbols 1 to 8 as the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol shown in FIG. 336 (a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row is arranged. A variable display that scrolls from top to bottom or from bottom to top with periodicity is performed. As shown in FIG. 336 (b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a state of being stopped on the effective line L2.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting openings 33 and 44 (the first starting opening 33 on the center side and the first starting opening 44 on the right side), the symbols in the respective symbol rows Z4 to Z6 are periodically predetermined. A variable display that scrolls in the direction is started. Then, each scrolling symbol switches from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z4, the symbol row Z6, and the symbol row Z5, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the respective symbol rows Z4 to Z6. .. When the variation display of the symbol is completed and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit winning, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the effective line L2. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L2. The modes of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in the sub-display area SA are not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, there are various display modes of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, such as the number of symbol rows in the sub display area SA, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, and the number of symbols in each symbol row. Aspects can be adopted.

Here, "game times" means from the start of the variation display of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to the end of the variation display and the stop display, until the stop display ends. That is, a winning lottery for special information acquired based on the entry of any one of the first starting port 33, 44 (center side first starting port 33, right side first starting port 44) and the second starting port 34. It is one unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result.

Further, as shown in FIG. 336 (b), the first reserved display area Ds1 and the second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first hold display area Ds1, the number of holds based on the entry into the first start ports 33 and 44 (the first start port 33 on the center side and the first start port 44 on the right side) is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, the number of holds based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34 is displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls that have won prizes in the first starting port 33, 44 (center side first starting port 33, right side first starting port 44) and the second starting port 34 is the reserved number. , Up to 4 each.

Further, as shown in FIG. 336 (b), on the display surface 41a, a blinking display and lighting synchronized with the variation display and the stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a of the special figure unit 37 are displayed. The first synchronous display unit Sync1 that displays and the second synchronous display that performs blinking display and lighting display synchronized with the fluctuation display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b of the special figure unit 37. A unit Sync2 is provided. Specifically, when the first symbol display unit 37a is displaying a variable display, the first synchronous display unit Sync1 is blinking, and when the first symbol display unit 37a is displaying a stop, the first symbol display unit 37a is displayed. 1 Synchronous display unit Sync1 displays lighting. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b is displaying a variable display, the second synchronous display unit Sync2 blinks, and when the second symbol display unit 37b is displaying a stop display, the second synchronous display is displayed. The unit Sync2 displays lighting.

In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the sub display area SA, the first synchronous display unit Sync1, and the second synchronous display unit Sync2, but the display surface 41a is configured. A configuration may be adopted in which some or all of these displays are not displayed.

<< 8-2 >> Electrical configuration of gaming machines:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 337 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 temporarily stores various data and the like when executing a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a program recorded in the ROM 63. It is provided with a RAM 64 which is a memory for storing. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may have a part of the function which MPU 62 has. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown), respectively. The payout control device 70 and the power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a DC stable 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, the power supply device 85 includes a capacitor (not shown), and when a power failure occurs or the power supply switch 88 (FIG. 328) is turned off, power supply to each device is continued for a predetermined period. do.

Further, various detection sensors 67a to 67g are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. Specifically, various entrances such as a general winning opening 32, a central first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a right first starting opening 44, a falling opening 252, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. It is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided in. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each entry port based on signals from various detection sensors 67a to 67g, and the game ball is a through gate. It is determined whether or not the vehicle has passed 35. Further, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, 44 (the first starting port 33 on the center side, the first starting port 44 on the right side) and the second starting port 34. , The electric accessory opening lottery is executed based on the entry into the through gate 35.

In this embodiment, a detection sensor (not shown) is also provided in the out port 251 inside the start port unit provided in the start port unit 200. The detection sensor is also connected to the input port of the main control board 61, and in the MPU 62 of the main control board 61, a game ball flowing down the game area PA based on a signal from the detection sensor is an out port in the start port unit. It is possible to determine whether or not the ball has entered 251. The first branch passage connecting the opening 210c and the out port 251 in the start port unit is configured so that it can be determined whether or not the game ball has entered the out port 251 in the start port unit. It is possible to detect the jamming of the game ball in the unit 220. Specifically, when the entry of the game ball into the right first starting port 44 is detected based on the signal from the detection sensor 67d for the right first starting port, then the detection for the second starting port is performed. When the entry of the game ball is not detected by both the sensor and the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the start port unit, it can be determined that the game ball is jammed in the middle of the first branch passage portion 220. ..

The output port of the main control board 61 has a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the right first starting port 44. The game ball distribution drive unit 241a for reciprocating the distribution piece unit 240b of the game ball distribution device 240 between the first position Q1 and the second position Q2, and the main display unit 45 are connected to each other. .. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the electric accessory opening is won as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the main display unit 45. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the open / close execution mode and the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode is determined, the display control of the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is executed.

Further, the payout control device 70 and the voice emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry into the general winning opening 32 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the first starting openings 33 and 44. When the entry is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when the entry to the second starting port 34 is specified, one game ball is specified. The prize ball command corresponding to the payout is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. Further, the launch control device 80 is connected to the operation handle 25 and the game ball launch button 26.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the voice emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, control of the display control device 100 is performed. Further, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the voice emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 and the type of the combination of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. , Whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the advance notice effect executed in each game round, etc. are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time when the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 338 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 wins a lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, sets the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting jackpot types such as probabilistic jackpot results and normal jackpot results. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate reach when the symbol sequence displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displaced and varied.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. Further, the fluctuation type counter CS is used when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45, and the symbol display device 41. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the right first starting port 44.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The hold information storage area 64b is provided with a first hold area Ra and a second hold area Rb. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the center side first starting port 33 or the right side first starting port 44, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of entering the ball. Is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b in chronological order. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of entering the ball are set in the second reserved area Rb of the reserved information storage area 64b. It is stored in time series.

The details of the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The hit random number counter C1 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 1199, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. Further, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set when the game ball enters the first starting port (the first starting port 33 on the center side and the first starting port 44 on the right side). It is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of, and when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the second holding area of the holding information storage area 64b is stored at the timing of the entry. It is stored in Rb.

The value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first hold area Ra moves to the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c, is collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is a big hit. It is determined whether or not. Further, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the second hold area Rb is moved to the determination process execution area 64 cp 2nd execution area and collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, 44 (the first starting port 33 on the center side, the first starting port 44 on the right side), it is stored in the first holding area Ra. The value of the winning random number counter C1 is moved to the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c, collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and whether or not a big hit is obtained. The value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the judgment processing execution area 64c when the game ball enters the second start port 34 and the process of performing the determination. Then, the process of collating with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 and determining whether or not the hit is a big hit is executed in parallel. In the following, the process of determining whether or not the game ball will be a big hit triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting ports 33 and 44, and the big hit triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. This book can execute the process of determining whether or not to be true in parallel, and can execute the variable display of the first symbol display unit 37a and the variable display of the second symbol display unit 37b in parallel (simultaneously). The pachinko machine 10 of the embodiment is also referred to as a simultaneous variable machine.

In the following description, the game (also referred to as a game time) executed when the game ball enters the first start ports 33 and 44 is referred to as a game time for the first start port, and is referred to as a second start port. A game (also referred to as a game time) executed when the game ball enters the 34 may be referred to as a game time for the second starting opening.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting ports 33 and 44, the updated value is the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a big hit, the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Further, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b by using the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. .. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big hit. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value, for example.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting ports 33 and 44, and the second starting is performed. When the game ball enters the mouth 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second hold area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. However, when the result of the winning lottery becomes a big hit and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some of the symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 may have a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot for some of the symbols. It is a display state in which the symbols are displayed and the remaining symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 336 (b), the symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. In the situation where the reach line is formed and the reach line is formed, the symbol is varied and displayed in the symbol row Z2 to reach the reach. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, in the state where the reach line is formed, the variable display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. A combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when the reach effect is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to display a notice using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

Next, the details of the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 62 to determine the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value, for example.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, the details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric service holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 64d moves to the electric service execution area 64e, and then the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 in the electric service execution area 64e. A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory opening lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state. Specifically, in the electric service execution area 64e, the winning / failing table (winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery) stored in the accessory lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 are It is collated and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state.

At least one of the acquired value of the hit random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 corresponds to the special information in the present invention. Further, at least one of the value of the hit random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra and the second hold area Rb is also referred to as hold information.

Next, the pass / fail table will be described. The winning / failing table is table data for collating with the winning random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the winning random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode set as a lottery mode for the winning lottery. At the time of the winning lottery in the probability mode, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to. The high-probability mode (also called the high-probability gaming state) is a gaming state that is started by winning a probabilistic jackpot, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is relatively higher than that in the low-probability mode. To tell. Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a winning random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting ports 33 and 44. A pass / fail table for collation and a pass / fail table for collating with the hit random number counter C1 stored in the second hold area Rb of the hold information storage area 64b triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34. Are stored as separate table data. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a pass / fail table for the first start port (for low probability mode), a pass / fail table for the first start port (for high probability mode), and a pass / fail table for the second start port (low). Four hit / miss tables, one for the probability mode) and the hit / miss table for the second start port (for the high probability mode), are stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63.

FIG. 339 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the pass / fail table for the first starting port. FIG. 339 (a) shows a hit / miss table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 339 (b) shows a hit / miss table for the first starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 339 (a), four values 0 to 3 are set as the values of the random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the hit / fail table (for the low probability mode) for the first starting port. There is. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (4 to 1199) other than the four values of 0 to 3 are out of the range.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 339 (b), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set as the values of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the hit / fail table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port. Has been done. Further, 40 values of 20 to 59 are set as the value of the hit random number counter C1 which is a special small hit, and 1140 values of 60 to 1199 are set as the value of the random number counter C1 which is a normal small hit. There is.

Here, the "small hit" is a result of success or failure that does not trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 is opened / closed, but the lottery mode described later does not trigger the transition. The number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode is limited to one. In this embodiment, two types of small hits, a normal small hit and a special small hit (premium small hit), are prepared. The special small hit is a small hit that can trigger the transition of the support mode from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. The opening time of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 at the time of a small hit is 0.1 sec.

The "off" is a result of success or failure that does not trigger the transition of the open / close execution mode, and also does not trigger the transition of the lottery mode and the support mode. In the present embodiment, in the hit / fail table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port shown in FIG. 339 (b), there is no setting of a value that is “off”.

In the present embodiment, the value group of the hit random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / fail table for the first start port (for the low probability mode) is set in the hit / fail table for the first start port (for the high probability mode). It is included in the value group of the hit random number counter C1 set as a jackpot. However, as a result of the winning lottery, if the probability of winning the jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary.

FIG. 340 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the pass / fail table for the second starting port. FIG. 340 (a) shows a hit / miss table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 340 (b) shows a hit / miss table for the second starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 340 (a), four values 0 to 3 are set as the values of the random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the hit / fail table (for the low probability mode) for the second starting port. There is. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (4 to 1199) other than the four values of 0 to 3 are out of the range. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 340 (b), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set as the values of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the hit / fail table (for high probability mode) for the second starting port. Has been done. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (20 to 1199) other than the 20 values of 0 to 19 are out of the range. As described above, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the hit random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / fail table for the second start port (for the low probability mode) is the hit / fail table for the second start port (for the high probability mode). ) Is included in the value group of the hit random number counter C1 set as a big hit. However, as a result of the winning lottery, if the probability of winning the jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three modes or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode of winning lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends (3) Electric accessory 34a of the right first starting port 44 after the opening / closing execution mode ends Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (1) open / close execution mode, the occurrence of a ball entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency is relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 sec elapses or to the opening / closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number of balls entered is 10. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed twice from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec elapses or the ball enters the opening / closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening / closing door 36b at one time is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening / closing door 36b once is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode in which the low-frequency winning mode is applied, the game ball does not substantially enter. However, even in the open / close execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the game ball can be entered.

The number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the number of opening limits for one opening are entered into the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the frequency of occurrence of balls is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening / closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of openings and closings than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is long, or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that the ball does not substantially enter the variable winning device 36.

The pachinko machine 10 has, as a mode of the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the above-mentioned (2) opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a winning / losing table for high probability as a winning / failing table, and a winning / losing table. It is possible to set a low probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a winning / failing table for low probability. As described with reference to FIGS. 339 and 340, the case where the winning lottery is performed using the high-probability winning / failing table is compared with the case where the winning lottery is performed using the low-probability winning / failing table. There is a high probability of winning a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the right first starting port 44 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening / closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 launches a game ball in the same manner with respect to the game area PA. High-frequency support mode and low-frequency support so that the frequency with which the electric accessory 34a of the right first starting port 44 is opened per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in a continuous situation. You can set the mode.

Specifically, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the one-time opening time of the electric accessory 34a may be set longer than that in the low-frequency support mode when the electric combination opening is won.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electric combination open is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode. May be good. Further, the electric accessory 34a may be configured to have a long opening time once. In addition, when the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times in the high frequency support mode, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is It may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory opening lottery to the next electric accessory opening lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. You may.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the ball enters the right first starting port 44 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary gaming state that assists in the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the big hit type counter C2 is used to sort the big hit types. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 341 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 341 (a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 341 (b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to at the time of a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is to the second start port 34. It is referred to at the time of the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. 341 (a), the distribution table for the first starting port has a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot, the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening / closing execution mode (hereinafter, simply "lottery mode"). (Also called) is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is a high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot is that the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the open / close execution mode is different, the 16R probability variation jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R probability variation jackpot is 8. It is a round (8 rounds).

In the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends is the low probability mode, and the support after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is a big hit that the mode becomes a high frequency support mode. The number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the 8R normal jackpot is 8 times (8 rounds).

In the distribution table for the first starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 54" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "55 to 69" corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot. "70-99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, three types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the mode of the jackpot is diversified. When comparing these three types of jackpots, the degree of advantage for the player is highest for the 16R probability variation jackpot, next for the 8R probability variation jackpot, and finally for the 8R normal jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different advantages for the player in this way, it is possible to suppress the monotonicization of the game and increase the degree of attention to the game. The type of jackpot does not have to be limited to the above three types of jackpots, and can be two or four types of jackpots. For example, four types of jackpots, 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot, may be set.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 341 (b), the distribution table for the second starting port has a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 64" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "65 to 69" corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot. "70-99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.
It usually corresponds to a big hit.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won is the case where the jackpot is won based on the entry into the first starting port 33 and the second. It is different from the case where the big hit is won based on the entry into the starting port 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player.

In addition, if the result is a loss in the winning lottery, the opening / closing execution mode is not performed, and the lottery mode and the support mode are not changed. In the distribution of the types of jackpots, when 16 probability variation jackpots or 8R probability variation jackpots are obtained, the lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the high probability mode, as described above. The state is continued until the next big hit is won in the winning lottery, or the game ball enters the falling opening 252 provided in the starting opening unit 200.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to perform the jackpot type. Further, the MPU 62 uses the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to cause the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b to stop and display the segment display. Determine the display mode. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, a table for reach determination (hereinafter referred to as a reach determination hit / fail table) will be described. The reach determination hit / fail table is table data for collating with the value of the reach random number counter C3 when determining whether or not reach occurs based on the value of the reach random number counter C3.

FIG. 342 is an explanatory diagram showing a reach determination hit / miss table. As shown in FIG. 342, 20 values from 0 to 19 are set as the values to be won in the reach among the values of the reach random number counters C3 from 0 to 399 in the reach determination hit / fail table. Then, among the values from 0 to 399, the values (20 to 399) other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 are set as deviations, that is, values that do not win the reach. That is, in the situation where the big hit is not won in the winning lottery, the probability of winning the reach is 1/20.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment corresponds to the total number of reserved game balls, which is the total value of the number of reserved game balls entered in the first starting port 33 and the reserved number of game balls entered in the second starting port 34. It is provided with five reach determination winning / failing tables having different probabilities of winning the reach. The hit / fail table shown in FIG. 342 is for a case where the total number of holds is 4 or more, and in the 5 reach determination hit / miss tables including the hit / miss table, the smaller the total number of holds, the higher the probability of winning the reach. It's getting higher. For example, when the total number of holdings is three, the reach winning probability is about 1/11, when the total number of holdings is two, the reach winning probability is about 1/10, and when the total number of holdings is one. Has a reach winning probability of about 1/9, and when the total number of reserved pieces is 0, the reach winning probability is about 1/6. The number of hit / fail tables for reach determination is not limited to five, and may be two, three, four, six or more. In short, there may be a plurality of hit / fail tables for reach determination, and any configuration may be used as long as the total number of reserved items is smaller and the probability of winning the reach is higher.

FIG. 343 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a winning / failing table (winning / failing table for electric accessory opening lottery) used when executing the electric accessory opening lottery.

FIG. 343 (a) shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 343 (a), in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode), two electric accessory opening counters C4, which are the electric accessory opening winning counters, are 0 and 1. The value is set. 464 values of 2 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is out of alignment. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening is won in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 343 (b) shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 343 (b), in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode), 462 electric accessory opening counters C4, which are the electric accessory opening winning, are set to 0 to 461. The value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is out of alignment. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening is won in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 0.5 seconds.

In this way, the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the right first starting port 44 than the low-frequency support mode. There is.

<< 8-3 >> Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 344 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configurations of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Some configurations of the power supply device 85 (FIG. 337) and the like are omitted. The MPU 92 is mounted on the voice emission control board 91 provided in the voice emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element having a built-in CPU, ROM 93, RAM 94, interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data input / output circuit, and the like.

Various control programs, fixed value data, tables, etc. executed by the MPU 92 are stored in the ROM 93. For example, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, a reach distribution table storage area 93c, and the like are provided in a part of the ROM 93 area. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 60 and an effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and a display control device 100 is connected to the output side.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the voice emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 102.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols and pictures displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores various display symbols, bitmap format image data of the display picture, a color palette table referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The various display drawings also include drawings of petals P1 to P4, which will be described later. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio emission control device 90 are the sound light side MPU 92 and the sound light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound / light side RAM 94 are also referred to, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as a display side MPU 102.

<< 8-4 >> Outline of processing by the gaming machine:
Next, an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

<< 8-4-1 >> High / low transition between lottery mode and support mode:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of winning jackpot is a normal jackpot, the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the support mode Goes to high frequency support mode. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the winning jackpot is a probability variable jackpot, the lottery mode is changed to the high probability mode and the support mode is changed after the opening / closing execution mode is completed. Move to high frequency support mode.

After shifting to the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the number of games since the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches a predetermined guaranteed number of games. The "guaranteed number of games" is the number of games guaranteed to be continuously executed in the high frequency support mode, for example, 50 times. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, after shifting to the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is guaranteed up to 50 times, which is the guaranteed number of games. When the number of games since the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games, the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode. In particular, in the present embodiment, the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode even if the high-probability mode continues at the time when the guaranteed number of games is reached.

When the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery executed when the through gate 35 is passed is 231/233 is extremely high, so that it is electric. The accessory 34a is substantially in the electric service open state. Therefore, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the player makes a weak right-handed strike and causes the game ball to flow down to the weak right-handed strike passage P1, so that the first right side equipped with the electric accessory 34a is provided. The game is performed so that the game ball enters the starting port 44. The game ball that has entered the first start port 44 on the right side is divided into a route toward the out port 251 in the start port unit and a route toward the fall port 252 by the distribution piece portion 242 of the game ball distribution device 240. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the right first starting port 44 may enter the falling opening 252, although it has a low probability of 1/21 as described above.

The opportunity to shift to the high-frequency support mode is a probabilistic jackpot, and the number of games since the start of the high-frequency support mode has not reached the guaranteed number of games (for example, the 30th game), and the fall opening 252. When a game ball enters the game, the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. Then, the winning lottery is executed in the low probability mode from the next game round at the timing when the game ball enters the fall opening 252. Regarding the support mode, in the game times before the number of games after the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games (for example, the above 30th game times), the game ball enters the fall opening 252 and is high. Even if the probability mode ends and the mode shifts to the low probability mode, the high frequency support mode is continued until the number of games since the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games (that is, 50 times). To.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a probability change jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and then the high frequency support mode. If you win a big hit (regardless of whether it is a normal big hit or a probabilistic big hit) in the winning lottery in the game times (for example, the 30th game time) before the number of games has reached the guaranteed number of games since the start of The lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode at the timing when the 30th game round in which the jackpot is won ends and the open / close execution mode starts. As for the support mode, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode at the timing when the game times before the guaranteed number of games are reached (for example, the 30th game times described above) are completed and the open / close execution mode is started. .. That is, both the lottery mode and the support mode are reset to the lower side at the timing when the game round in which the jackpot is won ends and the open / close execution mode starts.

<< 8-4-2 >> Game flow:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, at least four types of states can be taken as the game states that transition in the progress of the game, depending on the combination of the lottery mode and the support mode. Specifically, i) the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode, which is a low probability low support state, and ii) the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is. High-probability high-support state, which is a high-frequency support mode, iii) High-probability low-support state, where the lottery mode is a high-probability mode, and the support mode is a low-probability support mode, and iv) Low-probability mode, which is a lottery mode. In addition, it is possible to take a low-probability and high-support state in which the support mode is a high-frequency support mode. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, an opening / closing execution mode in which a game ball can be entered into the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 can be set as a gaming state. The game progresses while transitioning between these game states.

FIG. 345 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10. When the game is started, it is initially in a low probability low support state (state H1). That is, the lottery mode is a low probability mode, and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

FIG. 346 is an explanatory diagram showing various aspects in each of the low accuracy low support state, the low accuracy high support state, the high accuracy high support state, and the high accuracy low support state. Here, as an embodiment, whether or not the game ball can enter the center side first starting port 33, the right side first starting port 44, the falling opening 252, and the second starting port 34, the fluctuation time of the first symbol, and the first. The fluctuation time of the two symbols is defined.

As shown in FIG. 346, in the low probability and low support state, the game ball can enter the first starting port 33 on the central side. For this reason, in the low probability and low support state, the player is made to hit left, the game ball is made to flow down to the left side of the game area PA, and the game ball is made to enter the first starting port 33 on the central side. When the game ball enters the first starting port 33 on the center side, the game round for the first starting port is executed and a winning lottery is performed. At this time, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a (see FIG. 336 (b)) of the liquid crystal display device 41, the first decorative symbol, which is an effect image corresponding to the game times for the first start port, is displayed and sub-displayed. A second decorative image, which is an effect image corresponding to the game round for the second starting port, is displayed in the area SA. That is, since the target for the player to enter the game ball is the central side first starting port 33, the first decorative symbol is displayed in the main display area MA.

Consider an entrance other than the first starting port 33 on the center side. In the low accuracy and low support state, it is not possible to enter the right first starting port 44 and the falling opening 252 provided in the starting port unit 200, but it is possible to enter the second starting port 34. .. Since the support mode is the low frequency support mode in the low probability low support state, the probability that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery executed when passing through the through gate 35 will be out of order is extremely high at 232/233. Therefore, the electric accessory 34a is substantially always closed, and the game ball flows along the third route RT3 (FIG. 335) described above, so that the ball can enter the second starting port 34. .. For this reason, some players aim to enter the game ball into the second starting port 34 by making a weak right-handed hit in a low-probability and low-support state and letting the game ball flow along the third route RT3. Can be considered. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second symbol display unit 37b (hereinafter, also referred to as the special 2 fluctuation time) is set to an extremely long time of, for example, 10 minutes as the simultaneous fluctuation machine. As a result, the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is prevented from being repeatedly executed in a short period of time. As a result, in the present embodiment, the player can be made to give up the weak right-handed operation and concentrate on the left-handed in the low probability and low support state.

The special 2 fluctuation time in the low probability low support state was set to an extremely long time of 10 minutes, but the fluctuation time of the first symbol display unit 37a in the low probability low support state (hereinafter, also referred to as special 1 fluctuation time). Is set to a normal length of time. The "normal length time" referred to here is a normal length time determined by the value of the variable type counter CS described later, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of reach, and the like, and is, for example, 2 seconds to. 3 minutes.

Return to FIG. 345. If the winning lottery in the first starting opening game round executed in the low probability low support state (state H1) is missed, the low probability low support state (state H1) is continued, and the player is the first on the center side. A game ball is inserted into the start port 33, and the game round for the first start port is executed.

If a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game round for the first starting opening executed in the low probability and low support state, and the type of the winning jackpot is a normal jackpot, the game is played after the game round for the first starting mouth is completed. The open / close execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the person. That is, the mode shifts from the low probability low support state (state H1) to the open / close execution mode (state H2). Prior to the round game that occurs in the open / close execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect that urges the player to hit hard to the right. The player executes a strong right-handed hit after the end of the game round for the first start opening according to the suggestion effect, causes the game ball to flow down to the strong right-handed passage P2, and puts the game ball into the large winning opening 36a to win the prize. Get the ball.

When the open / close execution mode (state H2) ends, the state shifts to the low accuracy high support state (state H3). That is, the lottery mode is a low probability mode, and the support mode is a high frequency support mode (limited to 50 times, which is the guaranteed number of games).

As shown in FIG. 346, in the low accuracy and high support state, it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the center side first starting port 33, the right side first starting port 44, and the falling opening 252. It is impossible to insert a game ball into the starting port 34. Since the support mode is the high frequency support mode in the low accuracy and high support state, there is a possibility that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery executed when passing through the through gate 35 will be the electric accessory opening winning. Since it is extremely high at 233, the electric accessory 34a is substantially in the electric accessory open state. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the state where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 passes through the electric accessory 34a in the electric service open state with a 100% probability. , The distance from the through gate 35 to the electric accessory 34a, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a once, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened, the fluctuation time of the symbol in the normal drawing unit 38, and the like are adjusted. Therefore, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 and entered the entry port 210a is the first route RT1 (FIG. 333) or the second route RT2 described above. Since it flows along (FIG. 334), the game ball enters the right first starting port 44 and the out port 251 in the starting port unit, or the game ball enters the right first starting port 44 and the falling port 252. Is possible, and it becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 34. Even if the game ball enters the fall opening 252, the lottery mode is a low probability mode in the low probability high support state, so the player is worried about shifting to the low probability mode (so-called fall). There is no. Therefore, in the low accuracy and high support state (state H3), the player is made to hit the game ball weakly to the right, and the game ball is made to flow down to the weak right-handed passage P1. You can enter the ball.

When the game ball enters the right first starting port 44, the game round for the first starting port is executed and a winning lottery is performed. At this time, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a (see FIG. 336 (b)) of the liquid crystal display device 41, the first decorative symbol, which is an effect image corresponding to the game times for the first start port, is displayed and sub-displayed. A second decorative image, which is an effect image corresponding to the game round for the second starting port, is displayed in the area SA. That is, since the target for the player to enter the game ball is the right first starting port 44, the first decorative symbol is displayed in the main display area MA.

The special 1 fluctuation time and the special 2 fluctuation time in the low accuracy high support state are set to a normal length time (for example, 2 seconds to 3 minutes).

Return to FIG. 345. If the winning lottery in the first start opening game round executed in the low accuracy high support state (state H3) is missed, the low accuracy high support state (state H3) is continued, and the player makes the first start on the right side. A game ball is inserted into the mouth 44, and a game round for the first starting mouth is executed. When the number of games since the high frequency support mode is started reaches 50, which is the guaranteed number of games, the state shifts to the low probability low support state (state H1).

If a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the first starting opening game round executed in the low accuracy high support state (state H3), and the type of winning jackpot is a normal jackpot, the first starting opening gaming round The opening / closing execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player after the end of. That is, the mode shifts from the low accuracy high support state (state H3) to the open / close execution mode (state H2). Prior to the round game that occurs in the open / close execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect that urges the player to hit hard to the right. The player executes a strong right-handed hit after the end of the game round for the first start opening according to the suggestion effect, causes the game ball to flow down to the strong right-handed passage P2, and puts the game ball into the large winning opening 36a to win the prize. Get the ball.

If a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the first starting opening game round executed in the low probability high support state (state H3), and the type of winning jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the first starting opening gaming round The opening / closing execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player after the end of. Here, the mode shifts from the low accuracy high support state (state H3) to the open / close execution mode (state H4).

In the low probability and low support state (state H1), the game ball is aimed to enter the first starting port 33 on the central side, but this entry cannot be performed with a high probability. On the other hand, in the low probability high support state (state H3), the player can hit the game ball into the right first starting port 44 with a high probability by making a weak right strike. Therefore, in the low probability high support state (state H3), compared to the low probability low support state (state H1), there are many opportunities for the first start opening game round to be executed and a winning lottery to be performed. It has an excellent advantage for those who do.

In the low probability low support state (state H1), if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game round for the first start opening, and the type of the winning jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the game round for the first starting opening is terminated. The open / close execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player later. That is, the mode shifts from the low probability low support state (state H1) to the open / close execution mode (state H4).

Prior to the round game that occurs in the open / close execution mode (state H4), the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect that urges the player to strike strongly to the right. The open / close execution mode (state H4) is the same process as the open / close execution mode (state H2). The reason why the states H2 and the state H4 are distinguished even though they are in the same open / close execution mode is that the branch destinations are different. When the open / close execution mode (state H4) is completed, the state shifts to the high accuracy high support state (state H5). That is, the lottery mode is a high-probability mode, and the support mode is a high-frequency support mode (limited to 50 times, which is the guaranteed number of games).

As shown in FIG. 346, in the high accuracy and high support state, it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the center side first starting port 33, the right side first starting port 44, and the falling opening 252. It is impossible to insert a game ball into the starting port 34. Whether or not these balls can be entered is the same as whether or not they can be entered in a low-probability and high-support state. However, in the low probability high support state, since the lottery mode is already in the low probability mode, the player does not have to worry about shifting to the low probability mode (so-called fall), whereas in the high probability high support state. The difference is that the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode (so-called fall) when the game ball enters the fall opening 252. Since the support mode is the high frequency support mode in the high accuracy and high support state, the probability that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery executed when passing through the through gate 35 will be the electric accessory opening winning is 231/233. Since it is extremely high, the electric accessory 34a is substantially in the electric accessory open state. Therefore, as described above, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 and entered the ball entrance 210a is the first route RT1 (FIG. 333) or the first. Since it flows along the 2 route RT2 (FIG. 334), the game ball enters the right first start port 44 and the out port 251 in the start port unit, or the game ball enters the right first start port 44 and the fall port 252. It becomes possible to enter the ball, and it becomes impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting port 34.

In the high-accuracy and high-support state, the player is made to make a weak right-handed hit, the game ball is made to flow down to the weak right-handed passage P1, and the game ball is made to enter the right first starting port 44. When the game ball enters the right first starting port 44, the game round for the first starting port is executed and a winning lottery is performed. At this time, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a (see FIG. 336 (b)) of the liquid crystal display device 41, the first decorative symbol, which is an effect image corresponding to the game times for the first start port, is displayed and sub-displayed. A second decorative image, which is an effect image corresponding to the game round for the second starting port, is displayed in the area SA. That is, since the target for the player to enter the game ball is the right first starting port 44, the first decorative symbol is displayed in the main display area MA.

Return to FIG. 345. If the winning lottery in the game round for the first starting port executed in the high accuracy high support state (state H5) is missed, the high accuracy high support state (state H5) is repeated and the right first starting port 44 is reached. A game ball is inserted and a game round for the first starting port is executed.

If a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game round for the first starting opening executed in the high accuracy and high support state (state H5), and the type of the winning jackpot is a normal jackpot, the game round for the first starting opening The opening / closing execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player after the end of. That is, the mode shifts from the low accuracy high support state (state H5) to the open / close execution mode (state H2). Prior to the round game that occurs in the open / close execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect that urges the player to hit hard to the right.

If a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the first starting opening game round executed in the high accuracy and high support state (state H5), and the type of winning jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the first starting opening gaming round The opening / closing execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player after the end of. Here, the state shifts from the high accuracy high support state (state H5) to the open / close execution mode (state H4).

In the high accuracy high support state (state H5), when the game ball enters the fall opening 252, the state shifts to the low accuracy high support state (state H3). That is, the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode, and the support mode continues as the high-frequency support mode. At the time of transition to the low accuracy high support state (state H3), the guaranteed game count counter PNC indicating the number of games continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is retained as it was before the transition. .. Therefore, the transition to the low accuracy high support state (state H3) does not reset the number of game times continuously executed in the high frequency support mode.

The special 1 fluctuation time in the high accuracy high support state (state H5) is set to a normal length, and the special 2 fluctuation time in the high accuracy high support state (state H5) is set to, for example, 10 minutes. .. The reason why the special 2 fluctuation time in the high accuracy and high support state (state H5) is set to an extremely long time of 10 minutes is as follows.

In the high accuracy and high support state, it is impossible to insert the game ball into the second starting port 34, but the reserved information (up to 4) is stored in the second reserved area Rb of the reserved information storage area 64b. In the remaining, high-accuracy and high-support state, it is possible that a winning lottery will be executed based on the remaining pending information. Then, the winning lottery will be executed with reference to the winning / failing table (for the high probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. 340 (b), which is an excessively advantageous state for the player. In order to solve this, in the present embodiment, in the high accuracy and high support state, the special 2 fluctuation time is set to, for example, 10 minutes, although it is impossible to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 34. By setting it to an extremely long time, the hold information remaining in the second hold area Rb is prevented from being repeatedly digested in a short period of time.

In the high-accuracy high-support state (state H5), when the number of games since the high-frequency support mode is started reaches 50, which is the guaranteed number of games, the state shifts to the high-accuracy low-support state (state H6). Further, even when a special small hit is won in the winning lottery in the game round for the first starting opening executed in the high accuracy high support state (state H5), the game shifts to the high accuracy low support state (state H6). In the high probability and low support state, the lottery mode is the high probability mode, and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, the player has a winning lottery in the first starting opening game round executed in a highly accurate and high support state from the effect content corresponding to the special small hit effect pattern displayed on the symbol display device 41. You can recognize that you have won a special small hit.

As shown in FIG. 346, in the high-accuracy and low-support state, it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the central side first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, and the right first starting port 44. It is impossible to insert a game ball into the fall opening 252. Since the support mode is the low frequency support mode in the high accuracy and low support state, the probability that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery executed when passing through the through gate 35 will be out of order is extremely high at 232/233. Therefore, the electric accessory 34a is substantially always closed, and the game ball flows along the third route RT3 (FIG. 335) described above, so that the ball can enter the second starting port 34. It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the first starting port 44 on the right side and the falling opening 252.

In the high-accuracy low support state (state H6), the player can make a weak right-handed hit and let the game ball flow down to the weak right-handed passage P1, so that the game ball can enter the second starting port 34. When the game ball enters the second start opening 34, the game round for the second start opening is executed and a winning lottery is performed. At this time, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a (see FIG. 336 (b)) of the liquid crystal display device 41, the second decorative symbol, which is an effect image corresponding to the game times for the second starting port, is displayed and is displayed as a sub. In the area SA, a first decorative image, which is an effect image corresponding to the game round for the first starting port, is displayed. That is, since the target for the player to enter the game ball is the second starting port 34, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the main display area MA.

If a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the second starting opening game round executed in the high accuracy and low support state (state H6), and the type of winning jackpot is a normal jackpot, the second starting opening gaming round The opening / closing execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player after the end of. That is, the state shifts from the high-accuracy low support state (state H6) to the open / close execution mode (state H2).

If a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the second starting opening game round executed in the high accuracy low support state (state H6), and the winning jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot, the second starting opening gaming round The opening / closing execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player after the end of. That is, it shifts from the high accuracy low support state (state H6) to the open / close execution mode (state H4).

In the above-mentioned high-probability and low-support state (state H6), it is impossible or difficult for the game ball hit by making a weak right-handed hit to enter the fall opening 252 as described above, so the value is 100%. The ball will enter the second starting port 34 with a close probability (this probability is also referred to as 100% for convenience). Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high accuracy low support state (state H6), 100% is continued until a big hit is won in the winning lottery in the game round for the second starting port, and the game goes to the second starting port 34. A game ball can be entered and a lottery can be performed. In other words, in the high accuracy and low support state (state H6), it becomes a so-called invincible zone where there is no fall. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the state shifts from the high accuracy high support state to the high accuracy low support state (invincible zone), it is possible to reliably win the jackpot again, that is, the so-called continuous chan, and the game. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation to a person in a row. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the guaranteed number of games is completed from the high accuracy high support state, the high accuracy low support state is set, but in this case, the special 2 fluctuation set to an extremely long time (long) of 10 minutes in the high accuracy high support state. There was a risk that a situation would occur in which time continued. In the high accuracy and low support state (invincible zone), in the state where the fluctuation of special 2 set to long continues, in the invincible zone, a winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 will be held. It becomes impossible to repeat it in a short period of time, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the lottery result of the winning lottery of the winning / failing table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port is limited to the big hit and the small hit (special small hit, normal small hit) (missing). (Without), long when the jackpot fluctuation or small hit fluctuation executed when the game ball enters the first starting port (first starting port 33 on the center side, first starting port 44 on the right side) stops. The change of the special 2 set in is configured to be able to be stopped regardless of the result of the winning lottery related to the special 2. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem that the fluctuation of the special 2 set for a long time in the invincible zone in the high accuracy and high support state continues, and it is possible to suppress the disadvantage to the player.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the support mode is the high frequency support mode in the high accuracy and high support state, the electric accessory 34a is substantially in the electric service open state and through. The gaming ball that has passed through the gate 35 shifts from the main line passage portion 210 to the first branch passage portion 220 in the starting port unit 200 (FIG. 330). Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 will surely enter the right first starting port 44. However, the game ball that has entered the first starting port 44 on the right side then enters the falling opening 252 with a probability of 0.1 seconds (= 1/21) with respect to 2.1 seconds. The opportunity to shift to the high-frequency support mode is a probabilistic jackpot, and when the number of games since the high-frequency support mode is started is before the guaranteed number of games is reached and the game ball enters the fall opening 252. , The lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. That is, when the game ball enters the right first starting port 44, the lottery mode may shift from the high probability mode to the low probability mode with a probability of 1/21, and the player may be disadvantaged. be.

On the other hand, if the number of games since the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games without the game ball entering the fall opening 252, the support mode changes from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency. It shifts to the support mode, and the game state shifts from the high accuracy high support state to the high accuracy low support state (invincible zone). When the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is substantially always closed, and as a result, the game ball flows along the third route RT3 (FIG. 335) and the game is played to the second starting port 34. The ball is ready to enter. In this case, unlike the case where the game ball flows to the right side first start port 44 side, the game ball does not enter the fall opening 252 and the lottery mode is not changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. Therefore, it is possible to continuously perform the game times executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 34 without the possibility of being in a disadvantageous state for the player. The high-accuracy and low-support state continues until the next jackpot win, and in effect, the next jackpot win is promised.

As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-probability and high-support state, the period from the start of the high-frequency support mode to the guaranteed number of games for the player. There is a sense of urgency that the lottery mode should not shift from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode (don't fall) when the game ball enters the fall opening 252, and the number of games has reached the guaranteed number of games before the fall. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation that you want it together. Then, when the number of games reaches the guaranteed number of games without falling, the player is executed with the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 without the risk of falling. A feeling of relief that allows you to shift to a high-accuracy low support state (invincible zone) that allows you to continuously perform the game times, and a continuous game time that is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. By doing so, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that a big hit will be won in the near future in a high accuracy and low support state. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a feeling of expectation, a feeling of urgency, and a feeling of relief.

As conventional pachinko machines, there are loop type pachinko machines and ST type pachinko machines. The loop type pachinko machine is a model in which the state of the high probability mode continues until the next big hit in the winning lottery. The ST type pachinko machine is a model in which the number of games played in the high probability mode is limited. In the loop type pachinko machine, in the high probability mode, the player can win a big hit in the winning lottery and give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the type of the winning big hit is usually a big hit. On the other hand, in the ST type pachinko machine, in the state of the high probability mode, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency that the jackpot may not be won within the limited number of times. With respect to these, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to give a sense of urgency and a sense of expectation that the number of games to be played reaches the guaranteed number of games before falling. In addition, when the number of games reaches the guaranteed number of games without falling, the player is executed with the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 without the risk of falling. A feeling of relief that allows you to shift to a high-accuracy low support state (invincible zone) that allows you to continuously perform the game times, and a continuous game time that is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. By doing so, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that a big hit will be won in the near future in a high accuracy and low support state. Such a sense of relief and anticipation is an effect peculiar to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even when a special small hit is won in the winning lottery in the high accuracy and high support state, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. The game state changes from a high-accuracy high-support state to a high-accuracy low-support state (invincible zone). For this reason, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that he / she wants to win a special small hit in the winning lottery, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, in the high accuracy and high support state H5, the player makes a weak right-handed strike, causes the game ball to flow down to the weak right-handed hit passage P1, and starts the first right side. It is normal to play a game so that the game ball enters the mouth 44. On the other hand, in the high accuracy and high support state H5, as described above, it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the first starting port 33 on the central side, and therefore, depending on the player, In the high-accuracy and high-support state H5, it is possible to hit left and play the game so that the game ball enters the first starting port 33 on the center side. In this case, since the game ball does not enter the fall opening 252 and the game state is not shifted to the low accuracy high support state on the way, the first start on the center side is only 50 times, which is the guaranteed number of games. If the game ball can be put into the mouth 33, the game state can be surely shifted to the high accuracy low support state which is an invincible zone. However, it is highly accurate to put the game ball into the first starting port 33 on the central side as many times as 50 times because it imposes a great burden on the player in terms of time and quantity of the game ball. In the high support state H5, the method of playing a game in which a left-handed ball is hit and a game ball is inserted into the first starting port 33 on the center side has no merit for the player and is not realistic. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, by setting the guaranteed number of games to 50, which is a relatively large number, the game ball is played against the central first starting port 33 in the high accuracy and high support state H5. The structure is such that it is difficult to play a game in which a ball is entered.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which it is difficult to play a game in which the game ball is inserted into the central first starting port 33 in the high accuracy and high support state H5. However, this way of playing is not completely excluded. If the above-mentioned difficult points can be tolerated, it is also possible to perform a left-handed strike in the high-accuracy and high-support state H5 and to enter the game ball into the first starting port 33 on the center side. For example, for a player whose lottery mode is mentally unacceptable to shift from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode when the game ball enters the fall opening 252, the above-mentioned game method is selected. May do. From the perspective of the game machine designer, by setting the guaranteed number of games to a relatively small number of times, for example, 5 times or 10 times, the game ball is inserted into the central side 1st starting port 33 in the high accuracy and high support state H5. It is possible to allow the game to be played to some extent, and by setting the guaranteed number of games to a large number such as 50 or 100, the game is played to the central first starting port 33 in the highly accurate high support state H5. It is possible to strictly prohibit playing a game so that the ball can enter the ball. That is, it is possible to adjust whether to allow or prohibit the game so that the game ball enters the central side first starting port 33 in the high accuracy and high support state H5, depending on the guaranteed number of games. Become.

<< 8-5 >> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of a specific process executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes will be described below. The MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal in addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, but description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 347 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

In step Ss0101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 60 is read, the state of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss0102.

In step Ss0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss0103.

In step Ss0103, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, each of them is added. Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss0104. The value of the variable type counter CS is updated in the normal processing (FIG. 349) described later.

In step Ss0104, a ball entry process for the start port accompanying the entry of the game ball into the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side, the first start port 44 on the right side) and the second start port 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the starting port of step Ss0104 will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss0105.

In step Ss0105, the ball entry process for the fall opening is executed when the game ball enters the fall opening 252. The details of the ball entry process for the fall opening of step Ss0105 will be described later. After executing step Ss0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Incoming ball entry process for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be described. The ball entry process for the start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 347: Ss0104).

FIG. 348 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the starting port. In step Ss0201, whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port (center side first starting port 33, right side first starting port 44) (starting prize) is determined by the first starting port (center side first starting). Judgment is made based on the detection state of the detection sensor (detection sensor 67d for the right first start port, etc.) corresponding to the port 33, the right first start port 44). If it is determined in step Ss0201 that the game ball has entered the first starting port (center side first starting port 33, right side first starting port 44) (Ss0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0202 and payout control is performed. A prize ball command for paying out one game ball is set in the device 70. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss0203.

In step Ss0203, an external signal is used to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side and the first start port 44 on the right side). Perform the setting process. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss0204.

In step Ss0204, the start hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold number RaN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra, is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The first start hold number RaN indicates the number of holds based on the entry into the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side and the first start port 44 on the right side). Then, the process proceeds to step Ss0209.

If it is determined in step Ss0201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting port (center side first starting port 33, right side first starting port 44) (Ss0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss0205. Whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

If it is determined in step Ss0205 that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Ss0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0206, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball. Set the command. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss0207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss0205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (Ss0205: NO), the ball entry process for the main starting port is terminated.

In step Ss0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss0208.

In step Ss0208, the start hold number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as the second start hold number RbN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb, is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on the entry of the ball into the second start port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss0209.

In step Ss0209, it is determined whether or not the start hold number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Ss0204 or step Ss0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step Ss0209, if the start hold number N is not less than the upper limit value (Ss0209: NO), the ball entry process for the main start port is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Ss0209, if the start hold number N is less than the upper limit value (Ss0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0210, 1 is added to the start hold number N of the corresponding hold area, and then the process proceeds to step Ss0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reserved quantity CRN). The total hold quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first start hold quantity RaN and the second start hold quantity RbN. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss0212.

In step Ss0212, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Ss0103 (FIG. 347) are stored in the first storage area of the corresponding reserved area, that is, step. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved number obtained by adding 1 in Ss0210. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as the processing target, each of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Ss0103 (FIG. 347). The value is stored in the first storage area in the free storage area of the first hold area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold number RaN to which 1 is added in step Ss0210. When the second start hold quantity RbN is set as the processing target, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Ss0103 (FIG. 347) are set. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the second hold area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step Ss0210. After executing step Ss0212, the process proceeds to step Ss0213.

In step Ss0213, the first determination process is executed. In the pre-determination process, the winning / failing determination result (lottery result), the jackpot type, and the reach are generated based on the information (holding information) of each value of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. This is a process of executing the determination of the presence or absence of the information before the reserved information is subject to the winning lottery by the main control device 60. After executing step Ss0213, the process proceeds to step Ss0214.

In step Ss0214, a process of setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result (prior judgment information) of the prior determination processing executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as the pending command. do.

The hold command is the hold information that the ball has entered the first start port (the first start port 33 on the center side, the first start port 44 on the right side) or the second start port 34, and the hold information acquired based on the entry. This is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize the determination result (prior determination information) by the prior determination process based on the above, before the pending information becomes the target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 350: step Ss0402) of the normal process described later.

Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the entry into the first starting port (the first starting port 33 on the center side and the first starting port 44 on the right side), the liquid crystal display is displayed. A command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the entry into the second start port 34 is received, the voice emission control device 90 displays the number of holds in the second hold display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41. A command for changing according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds.

After executing step Ss0214, the main MPU 62 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

<Ball entry process for the fall opening>
Next, the ball entry process for the fall opening will be described. The ball entry process for the fall port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 347: Ss0105).

FIG. 349 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the fall opening. In step Ss0301, whether or not the game ball has entered the fall opening 252 is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the fall opening 252. If it is determined in step Ss0301 that the game ball has entered the fall opening 252 (Ss0301: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0302.

In step Ss0302, the high probability mode flag is turned off. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode. , It is turned off at the end of the open / close execution mode related to the normal jackpot winning, and is also turned off in this step Ss0302. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss0303.

In step Ss0303, a low probability mode command is set. The low-probability mode command is a command for notifying the voice emission control device 90 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the low-probability mode. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss0304.

In step Ss0304, a fall command is set. The fall command is a command for notifying the voice emission control device 90 that the game ball has entered the fall opening 252 and the winning / failing lottery mode has changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. After executing step Ss0304, the ball entry process for the main fall opening is completed.

If it is determined in step Ss0301 that the game ball has not entered the fall opening 252 (Ss0301: NO), the entry process for the main fall opening is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal process, the main process of the game is executed.

FIG. 350 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Ss0401, the startup process is executed. Specifically, the initial setting of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss0402.

In step Ss0402, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when commands related to the effect such as the variable command, the type command, and the hold command are set, they are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After executing step Ss0402, the process proceeds to step Ss0403.

In step Ss0403, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variable type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss0404.

In step Ss0404, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Ss0405. In step Ss0405, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, a setting of a variable display of a symbol by the liquid crystal display device 41, a display control of the first symbol display unit 37a, the second symbol display unit 37b, and the like are performed. The details of the game times control process will be described later. After executing step Ss0405, the process proceeds to step Ss0406.

In step Ss0406, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. The details of the game state transition process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss0407.

In step Ss0407, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 44a provided in the right first starting port 44 is executed. In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 44a is in the open state. The details of the processing for electric service support will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss0408.

In step Ss0408, a game ball distribution control process for driving and controlling the game ball distribution device 240 provided in the start port unit 200 is executed. The details of the game ball distribution control process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss0409.

In step Ss0409, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (in the second and subsequent rounds, the start of the command output process of step Ss0402). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached.

If it is determined in step Ss0409 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal process (Ss0409: NO), in step Ss0410 and step Ss0411 until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached. Within the remaining time of, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Ss0410, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Ss0411, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss0409 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (Ss0409: YES), the process returns to step Ss0402 and each process from step Ss0402 to step Ss0408 is performed. Run.

Since the execution time of each process from step Ss0402 to step Ss0408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process will be described. The game times control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 350: Ss0405) of the normal process.

FIG. 351 is a flowchart showing the game times control process. In step Ss0501, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As will be described later, the open / close execution mode flag is turned on at the timing when the change of the symbol in the game times won by the jackpot ends and shifts to the open / close execution mode, and is turned off at the timing when the open / close execution mode ends. By determining whether or not the open / close execution mode is executed in step Ss0501, step Ss0503 (and step Ss0506) is prevented from being executed during the period in which the open / close execution mode is being executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game round from starting during the period when the open / close execution mode is being executed. The details will be described below.

If it is determined in step Ss0501 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (Ss0501: YES), it is determined that the open / close execution mode is in progress, and this game is performed without executing any of the processes after step Ss0502. End the control process. That is, in the open / close execution mode, is the game ball entering the first starting port (the first starting port 33 on the center side and the first starting port 44 on the right side) or the second starting port 34? Regardless of whether or not, the game round is not started. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss0501 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (Ss0501: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss0502.

In step Ss0502, it is determined whether or not the first changing flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The first changing flag is a flag that is turned on when the game round for the first starting port is started, the fluctuation display on the first symbol display unit 37a is stopped, and is turned off when the stop display is reached. If it is determined in step Ss0502 that the first changing flag is not ON (Ss0502: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss0503.

In step Ss0503, the fluctuation start processing for the first starting port is executed. The variation start process for the first start port is a process for starting the game round for the first start port. The details of the fluctuation start processing for the first start port will be described later. After executing step Ss0503, the process proceeds to step Ss0505.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss0502 that the first changing flag is ON (Ss0502: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0504.

In step Ss0504, the first fluctuation stop process is executed. The first fluctuation stop process is a process for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol of the started game round for the first start opening. The details of the first fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step Ss0504, the process proceeds to step Ss0505.

In step Ss0505, it is determined whether or not the second changing flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The second changing flag is a flag that is turned on when the game round for the second starting port is started, is turned off when the fluctuation display on the second symbol display unit 37b is stopped, and is turned off when the stop display is reached. .. If it is determined in step Ss0505 that the second changing flag is not ON (Ss0505: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss0506.

In step Ss0506, the fluctuation start processing for the second starting port is executed. The variation start process for the second start port is a process for starting the game round for the second start port. The details of the fluctuation start processing for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss0506, the game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss0505 that the second changing flag is ON (Ss0505: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0507.

In step Ss0507, the second fluctuation stop process is executed. The second variation stop process is a process for stopping the variation of the symbol of the started second start opening game. The details of the second fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step Ss0507, the game round control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing for the first start port>
Next, the fluctuation start processing for the first starting port will be described. The variation start process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 351: Ss0503) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 352 is a flowchart showing a variation start process for the first start port. In step Ss0601, it is determined whether or not the first start hold quantity RaN = 0. If it is determined in step Ss0601 that the first start hold quantity RaN = 0 is not (Ss0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss0602. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss0601 that the first start hold number RaN = 0 (Ss0601: YES), the variation start process for the first start port is terminated.

In step Ss0602, the hold information shift process for the first start port is executed. In the hold information shift process for the first start port, the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is shifted. The details of the hold information shift process for the first start port will be described later. After executing step Ss0602, the process proceeds to step Ss0603.

In step Ss0603, the determination process for the first starting port is executed. In the determination process for the first start port, a winning lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, the presence or absence of a big hit or a small hit (normal small hit, special small hit) is determined based on the values of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. The hit / fail judgment, the distribution judgment for sorting the jackpot type, and the reach judgment for judging the presence / absence of reach are performed. The details of the determination process for the first starting port will be described later. Hereinafter, when both normal small hits and special small hits are included, they are also simply referred to as "small hits". After executing step Ss0603, the process proceeds to step Ss0604.

In step Ss0604, the variable time setting process for the first starting port is executed. In the process of setting the fluctuation time for the first start port, the fluctuation time, which is the time from the start of the fluctuation to the stop of the symbol, is set. The details of the variable time setting process for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss0604, the process proceeds to step Ss0605.

In step Ss0605, the first variation command is set. The command for the first variation relates to the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (the first starting port 33 on the center side and the first starting port 44 on the right side). It contains information indicating that it is a thing, information on whether or not reach has occurred, and information on the fluctuation time set in step Ss0604. After executing step Ss0605, the process proceeds to step Ss0606.

In step Ss0606, the first type command is set. The first type command includes information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and information on the jackpot type. Specifically, the first type command includes 16R probability variation jackpot information, 8R probability variation jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, small hit (normal small hit, special small hit) information, or missed information. Is done.

The first variation command and the first type command set in step Ss0605 and step Ss0606 are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variable command and the first type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step Ss0606, the process proceeds to step Ss0607.

In step Ss0607, the fluctuation display in the first symbol display unit 37a is started, and then the process proceeds to step Ss0608, and the first changing flag is turned ON. The first changing flag is a flag that is turned on when the game round for the first starting port is started, and turned off when the fluctuation display on the first symbol display unit 37a is stopped. After executing step Ss0608, the process proceeds to step Ss0609.

In step Ss0609, the value of the game count counter PNC is subtracted by 1. The game count counter PNC is set to a value in the game count counter PNC when the high frequency support mode is started, and the counter value is decremented by 1 each time the game count is executed. After executing step Ss0609, the fluctuation start processing for the first starting port is terminated.

<Holding information shift processing for the first start port>
Next, the hold information shift process for the first start port will be described. The hold information shift process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 352: Ss0602) for the variable start process for the first start port.

FIG. 353 is a flowchart showing the hold information shift process for the first start port. In step Ss0701, the first start hold number RaN of the first hold area Ra is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss0702.

In step Ss0702, the data (holding information) stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss0703.

In step Ss0703, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step Ss0703, the main hold information shift process for the first start port is terminated.

<Judgment processing for the first starting port>
Next, the determination process for the first starting port will be described. The determination process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 352: Ss0603) of the variation start process for the first start port.

FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing a determination process for the first starting port. In step Ss0801, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode. , It is turned off at the start of the open / close execution mode related to the next big hit winning. Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the falling opening 252 provided in the starting opening unit 200, the high probability mode flag is turned off. If it is determined in step Ss0801 that the mode is in the high probability mode (Ss0801: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0802.

In step Ss0802, the hit / fail determination is performed with reference to the hit / miss table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port. Specifically, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a big hit in the hit / miss table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port shown in FIG. 339 (b). Determine if it matches the value you have. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss0804. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss0801 that the mode is not in the high probability mode (Ss0801: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss0803.

In step Ss0803, the hit / fail determination is made with reference to the hit / miss table (for the low probability mode) for the first starting port. Specifically, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a big hit in the hit / miss table (for low probability mode) for the first starting port shown in FIG. 339 (a). Determine if it matches the value you have. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss0804.

In step Ss0804, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination in step Ss0802 or step Ss0803 is a big hit. If it is determined in step Ss0804 that the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit (Ss0804: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0805.

In step Ss0805, the first hit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. As for the first hit flag, the lottery result of the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting port (the first starting port 33 on the center side or the first starting port 44 on the right side) is "big hit", " It is turned on when it is a "special small hit" or "normal small hit", and the change display of the first symbol due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port is stopped, and it is turned off when the stop display is displayed. It is a flag to be done. After executing step Ss0805, the process proceeds to step Ss0806.

In step Ss0806, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the first starting port (see FIG. 341 (a)). Specifically, it is determined which jackpot type numerical range the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is included in. After executing step Ss0806, the process proceeds to step Ss0807.

In step Ss0807, it is determined whether or not the result of the distribution determination (big hit type) in step Ss0806 is a probabilistic big hit. If it is determined in step Ss0807 that the distributed jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot (Ss0807: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0808.

In step Ss0808, the probability variation jackpot flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Ss0806 is turned ON. After executing step Ss0808, the process proceeds to step Ss0809.

In step Ss0809, the stop symbol setting process for the probabilistic jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the probabilistic jackpot, in the current game round, which is the probabilistic jackpot, the first symbol display unit 37a is set to end (stop display) which stop result is displayed. To execute the process for. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variation jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Ss0806 is acquired, and the address information thereof is acquired. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Ss0809, the determination process for the first starting port is terminated.

In step Ss0807, if it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is not a probabilistic jackpot (Ss0807: NO), that is, if the distributed jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step Ss0810.

In step Ss0810, the normal jackpot flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Ss0806 is turned ON. After executing step Ss0810, the process proceeds to step Ss0811.

In step Ss0811, a stop symbol setting process for a normal jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for a normal jackpot, in the current game round, which is a normal jackpot, the first symbol display unit 37a is set to end (stop display) the variable display with which stop result is displayed. To execute the process for. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Ss0806 is acquired, and the address information thereof is acquired. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Ss0811, the determination process for the first starting port is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss0804 that the result of the hit / fail judgment in step Sss0802 or step Ss0803 is not a big hit (Ss0804: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss0812, and the result of the hit / fail judgment in step Ss0802 or step Ss0803 is usually a small hit. Determine if it exists. If it is determined in step Ss0812 that the result of the hit / fail determination is a normal small hit (Ss0812: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0813, and the normal small hit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step Ss0813, the process proceeds to step Ss0814.

In step Ss0814, a stop symbol setting process for a normal small hit is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for normal small hits, in the current game round, which is a normal small hit, which stop result is displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b to end the variable display (stop display). Execute the process for setting. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for normal small hits stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the normal small hits is acquired, and the address information is used. The stop result of the RAM 64 is stored in the address storage area. After executing step Ss0814, the process proceeds to step Ss0819.

If it is determined in step Ss0812 that the result of the hit / fail judgment in step Sss0802 or step Ss0803 is not a normal small hit (Ss0812: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss0815, and the result of the hit / fail judgment in step Ss0802 or step Ss0803 is a special small hit. It is determined whether or not it is. If it is determined in step Ss0815 that the result of the hit / fail determination is a special small hit (Ss0815: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0816, and the special small hit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss0817, and a special small hit command is set. The special small hit command is a command for notifying the voice emission control device 90 that a special small hit has been won in the winning lottery. After executing step Ss0817, the process proceeds to step Ss0818.

In step Ss0818, a stop symbol setting process for a special small hit is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for special small hits, in the current game round, which is a special small hit, which stop result is displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b to end (stop display) the variable display. Execute the process for setting. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the special small hit stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the special small hit is acquired, and the address information is used. The stop result of the RAM 64 is stored in the address storage area. After executing step Ss0818, the process proceeds to step Ss0819.

In step Ss0819, the first hit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. As for the first hit flag, the lottery result of the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting port (the first starting port 33 on the center side or the first starting port 44 on the right side) is "big hit", " It is turned on when it is a "special small hit" or "normal small hit", and the change display of the first symbol due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port is stopped, and it is turned off when the stop display is displayed. It is a flag to be done. After executing step Ss0819, the determination process of the first starting port is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss0815 that the result of the hit / fail determination is not a special small hit (Ss0815: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss820.

In step Ss820, the reach determination of whether or not reach occurs is performed with reference to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c matches the value set as the reach generation in the referenced reach determination table. This process of step Ss0820 is executed when the result of the hit / fail determination (win lottery) in step Ss0804 is neither a big hit nor a small hit (normal small hit, special small hit). That is, in step Ss0820, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination is a game round in which a reach occurs among the game rounds that are neither a big hit nor a small hit (normal small hit, special small hit). After executing step Ss0820, the process proceeds to step Ss0821.

In step Ss0821, it is determined whether or not the result of the reach determination in step Ss0820 is reach occurrence. If it is determined in step Ss0821 that reach has occurred (Ss0821: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0822, and the reach generation flags of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 are turned on. After executing step Ss0822, the process proceeds to step Ss0823. If it is determined in step Ss0821 that no reach has occurred (Ss0821: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss0823 as it is.

In step Ss0823, the stop symbol setting process for disconnection is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for disengagement, in the game round of disengagement, the first symbol display unit 37a is used to set which stop result is displayed to end the variable display (stop display). Execute the process. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for deviation in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c can be obtained. It is acquired and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Ss0823, the determination process for the first starting port is terminated.

<Fluctuating time setting process for the first starting port>
Next, the variable time setting process for the first starting port will be described. The variable time setting process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 352: Ss0604) for the variable start process for the first start port.

FIG. 355 is a flowchart showing a variation time setting process for the first starting port. In step Ss0901, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss0902.

In step Ss0902, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss0902 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Ss0902: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss0903.

In step Ss0903, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss0903 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss0903: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss0904.

In step Ss0904, the low accuracy low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is executed. In the low probability low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first start port, the game round for the first start port is executed when the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In this case, it is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game times for the first starting port. Specifically, when the game round for the first start opening is executed in the low probability low support state (state H1) in FIG. 345, the fluctuation time information of the game round for the first start opening is acquired. It is a process. The details of the low-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss0904, the process proceeds to step Ss0909.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss0903 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss0903: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0905.

In step Ss0905, the low-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is executed. In the low probability high support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first start port, the game round for the first start port is executed when the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. In this case, it is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game times for the first starting port. Specifically, when the game round for the first start opening is executed in the low accuracy high support state (state H3) in FIG. 345, the fluctuation time information of the game round for the first start opening is acquired. It is a process. The details of the low-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss0905, the process proceeds to step Ss0909.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss0902 that the high probability mode flag is ON (Ss0902: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0906.

In step Ss0906, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss0906 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss0906: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss0907.

In step Ss0907, the high-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is executed. In the high-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first start port, the game round for the first start port is executed when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. In this case, it is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game times for the first starting port. Specifically, when the game round for the first start opening is executed in the high accuracy and high support state (state H5) in FIG. 345, the fluctuation time information of the game round for the first start opening is acquired. It is a process. The details of the high-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss0907, the process proceeds to step Ss0909.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss0906 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss0906: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss0908.

In step Ss0908, the high-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is executed. In the high-accuracy low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port, the game round for the first starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. In this case, it is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game times for the first starting port. Specifically, when the game round for the first start opening is executed in the high accuracy low support state (state H6) in FIG. 345, the fluctuation time information of the game round for the first start opening is acquired. It is a process. The details of the high-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss0908, the process proceeds to step Ss0909.

In step Ss0909, the fluctuation time information acquired in each process of step Ss0904, step Ss0905, step Ss0907, and step Ss0908 is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the process of setting the fluctuation time for the first starting port is completed.

<Low accuracy low support state fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the first starting port>
Next, the low-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port will be described. The low-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 355: Ss0904) for setting the variation time for the first start port.

FIG. 356 is a flowchart showing a low-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port. In step Ss1001, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination related to the current game round is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if any of the flags is ON (Ss1001: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1002.

In step Ss1002, the fluctuation time table for the jackpot is specified from the fluctuation time table group in the low probability low support state stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified fluctuation time table for the jackpot is referred to. By doing so, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. The low-probability low-support state fluctuation time table group includes (i) the jackpot fluctuation time table used when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the low-probability low-support state, and (ii) the low-probability low-support state. Reach generation fluctuation time table used when reach occurs without winning a big hit in the lottery, (iii) Reach non-used when reach does not occur without winning a big hit in the winning lottery in a low probability low support state A variable time table for generation is provided. In step Ss1002, first, (i) is specified from (i) to (iii). (I) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a normal effect for a big hit. Next, by referring to the specified fluctuation time table for the jackpot, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step Ss0901 (FIG. 355) is acquired. After executing step Ss1002, the low-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss1001 that the result of the winning / failing determination related to the current game round is not a big hit (step Ss1001: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1003.

In step Ss1003, it is determined whether or not reach occurs in this game round. If it is determined in step Ss1003 that reach will occur in this game round (step Ss1003: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1004.

In step Ss1004, the fluctuation time table for reach generation is specified from the low probability low support state fluctuation time table group stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified fluctuation time table for reach generation is obtained. By referring to it, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from (i) to (iii), (ii) a variable time table for reach generation, which is used when a reach occurs without winning a big hit in a winning lottery in a low probability low support state. Identify. (Ii) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a normal effect for generating reach. Next, by referring to the specified variation time table for reach generation, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired in step Ss0901 (FIG. 355) is acquired. After executing step Ss1004, the low-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss1003 that reach does not occur in this game round (step Ss1003: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1005.

In step Ss1005, the fluctuation time table for non-reach generation is specified from the fluctuation time table group in the low probability low support state stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified fluctuation time for non-reach generation occurs. By referring to the table, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from among (i) to (iii), (iii) the variable time for non-reach generation used when (iii) the low probability low support state, the big hit was not won in the winning lottery, and the reach did not occur. Identify the table. (Iii) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a normal effect for non-reach generation. Next, by referring to the specified variation time table for non-reach generation, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired in step Ss0901 (FIG. 355) is acquired. After executing step Ss1005, the low-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is terminated.

<Low accuracy high support state fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the first starting port>
Next, the low-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port will be described. The low-accuracy high support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 355: Ss0905) for setting the variation time for the first start port.

FIG. 357 is a flowchart showing a low-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port. In step Ss1101, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination related to the current game round is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if any of the flags is ON (Ss1101: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1102.

In step Ss1102, the fluctuation time table for the jackpot is specified from the fluctuation time table group during the low accuracy and high support state stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified fluctuation time table for the jackpot is referred to. By doing so, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. The low probability high support state fluctuation time table group includes (iv) the jackpot fluctuation time table used when a big hit is won in the winning lottery in the low probability high support state, and (v) the hit in the low probability high support state. Reach generation fluctuation time table used when reach occurs without winning a big hit in the lottery, (iv) Reach non-used when reach does not occur without winning a big hit in the winning lottery in a low probability high support state A variable time table for generation is provided. In step Ss1102, first, (iv) is specified from (iv) and (v). Next, by referring to the specified fluctuation time table for the jackpot, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step Ss0901 (FIG. 355) is acquired. After executing step Ss1102, the low-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss1101 that the result of the winning / failing determination related to the current game round is not a big hit (step Ss1101: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1103.

In step Ss1103, it is determined whether or not reach occurs in this game round. If it is determined in step Ss1103 that reach will occur in this game round (step Ss1103: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1104.

In step Ss1104, the fluctuation time table for reach generation is specified from the fluctuation time table group during the low accuracy and high support state stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified fluctuation time table for generation of reach is obtained. By referring to it, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from among (iv) and (v), (v) a variable time table for reach generation, which is used when a reach occurs without winning a big hit in a winning lottery in a low accuracy and high support state. Identify. Next, by referring to the specified variation time table for reach generation, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired in step Ss0901 (FIG. 355) is acquired. After executing step Ss1104, the low-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss1103 that reach does not occur in this game round (step Ss1103: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1105.

In step Ss1105, the fluctuation time table for non-reach generation is specified from the fluctuation time table group during the low accuracy and high support state stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified fluctuation time for non-reach generation occurs. By referring to the table, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from (iv) to (iv), (iv) in a low-accuracy high support state, the variable time for non-reach generation used when the big hit is not won in the winning lottery and the reach does not occur. Identify the table. Next, by referring to the specified variation time table for non-reach generation, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired in step Ss0901 (FIG. 355) is acquired. After executing step Ss1105, the low-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is terminated.

<High-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the first starting port>
Next, the high-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port will be described. The high-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 355: Ss0907) for setting the variation time for the first start port.

FIG. 358 is a flowchart showing a high-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port. In step Ss1201, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination related to the current game round is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if any of the flags is ON (Ss1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1202.

In step Ss1202, the fluctuation time table for the jackpot is specified from the fluctuation time table group during the high accuracy and high support state stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified fluctuation time table for the jackpot is referred to. By doing so, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. The high-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time table group includes (vii) the jackpot fluctuation time table used when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the high-accuracy high-support state, and (viii) the high-accuracy high-support state. The variable time table for special small hits used when winning a special small hit in the lottery, (ix) the variable time table for normal small hits used when winning a normal small hit in the winning lottery in the high accuracy and high support state, It is prepared. In step Ss1202, first, (vii) is specified from (vii) to (ix). Next, by referring to the specified fluctuation time table for the jackpot, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step Ss0901 (FIG. 355) is acquired. After executing step Ss1202, the high-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss1201 that the result of the hit / fail determination related to the current game round is not a big hit (step Ss1201: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1203.

In step Ss1203, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination related to the current game round is a special small hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special small hit flag is ON, and if it is determined that the special small hit flag is ON (Ss1203: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1204.

In step Ss1204, the fluctuation time table for the special small hit is specified from the highly accurate high support state fluctuation time table group stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the fluctuation time for the specified special small hit is specified. By referring to the table, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from (vii) to (ix), specify (viii) the variable time table for special small hits used when a special small hit is won in the winning lottery in the high accuracy and high support state. .. Next, by referring to the specified variable time table for special small hits, the variable time information corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CS acquired in step Ss0901 (FIG. 355) is acquired. After executing step Ss1204, the high-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss1203 that the result of the winning / failing determination related to the current game round is not a special small hit (Ss1203: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1205.

In step Ss1205, the fluctuation time table for the normal small hit is specified from the highly accurate high support state fluctuation time table group stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified fluctuation time for the normal small hit is specified. By referring to the table, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from (vii) to (ix), (ix) a variable time table for normal small hits, which is used when a normal small hit is won in a winning lottery in a high accuracy and high support state, is specified. .. Next, by referring to the specified fluctuation time table for normal small hits, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step Ss0901 (FIG. 355) is acquired. After executing step Ss1205, the high-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is terminated.

<High-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the first starting port>
Next, the high-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port will be described. The high-accuracy low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 355: Ss0907) for setting the variation time for the first start port.

FIG. 359 is a flowchart showing a high-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port. In step Ss1301, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination related to the current game round is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if any of the flags is ON (Ss1301: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1302.

In step Ss1302, the fluctuation time table for the jackpot is specified from the fluctuation time table group during the high accuracy and low support state stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified fluctuation time table for the jackpot is referred to. By doing so, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. The high-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time table group includes (x) the jackpot fluctuation time table used when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the high-accuracy low support state, and (xi) the high-accuracy low support state. A variable time table for small hits, which is used when a small hit (normal small hit, special small hit) is won in the lottery, is provided. In step Ss1302, first, (x) is specified from among (x) and (xi). Next, by referring to the specified fluctuation time table for the jackpot, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step Ss0901 (FIG. 355) is acquired. After executing step Ss1302, the high-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss1301 that the result of the winning / failing determination related to the current game round is not a big hit (that is, if it is determined to be a small hit) (step Ss1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1303.

In step Ss1303, the fluctuation time table for small hits is specified from the high-accuracy low support state fluctuation time table group stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified fluctuation time table for small hits is obtained. By referring to it, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, for small hits used when a small hit (normal small hit, special small hit) is won in the winning lottery in the (xi) high accuracy low support state from among (x) and (xi). Specify the variable time table. Next, by referring to the specified fluctuation time table for small hits, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step Ss0901 (FIG. 355) is acquired. After executing step Ss1303, the high-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the first starting port is terminated.

<First fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the first fluctuation stop processing will be described. The first fluctuation stop process is executed by the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 351: Ss504) of the game round control process.

FIG. 360 is a flowchart showing the first fluctuation stop processing. In step Ss1401, it is determined whether or not the second hit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The second hit flag is turned on when the lottery result of the winning lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is "big hit", and the game to the second starting port 34 is turned on. The variation display of the second symbol due to the entry of the ball is stopped, and is turned off when the stop display is displayed. If it is determined in step Ss1401 that the second hit flag is not ON (Ss1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1402.

In step Ss1402, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the first symbol display unit 37a has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time for the first symbol set in the variation time setting process for the first start port (FIG. 355) has elapsed. If it is determined in step Ss1402 that the fluctuation time of the first symbol display unit 37a has ended (Ss1402: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1403. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss1402 that the fluctuation time of the first symbol display unit 37a has not ended (Ss1402: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1411.

In step Ss1403, the fluctuation of the first symbol display unit 37a is stopped. That is, the first symbol of the first symbol display unit 37a is changed from the variable display state to the stop display. The combination of the symbols to be stopped and displayed (stop symbols) is set in step Ss0809, step Ss0811, step Ss0814, step Ss0818, or step Ss0823 of the determination process for the first start port (FIG. 354). After executing step Ss1403, the process proceeds to step Ss1404.

In step Ss1404, the first changing flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. As described above, the first changing flag is the first symbol display unit 37a of the first symbol display unit 37a triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (the first starting port 33 on the center side and the first starting port 44 on the right side). It is a flag that is turned on when the symbol 1 starts to fluctuate and is turned off when the first symbol stops the fluctuation. After executing step Ss1404, the process proceeds to step Ss1405.

In step Ss1405, it is determined whether or not the second changing flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As described above, the second changing flag is turned on when the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b starts to change when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, and the second symbol is turned on. This is a flag that is turned off when the symbol 2 stops changing. If it is determined in step Ss1405 that the second changing flag is not ON (Ss1405: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1406.

In step Ss1406, the first hit flag is turned off. After that, the first fluctuation stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss1405 that the second changing flag is ON (Ss1405: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1411.

If it is determined in step Ss1401 that the second hit flag is ON (Ss1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1407.

In step Ss1407, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the second symbol display unit 37b has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time for the second symbol set in the variation time setting process for the second starting port (FIG. 364), which will be described later, has elapsed. If it is determined in step Ss1407 that the fluctuation time of the second symbol display unit 37b has not ended (Ss1407: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1402. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss1407 that the fluctuation time of the second symbol display unit 37b has ended (Ss1407: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1408.

In step Ss1408, the second hit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing step Ss1408, the process proceeds to step Ss1409.

In step Ss1409, the fluctuation of the first symbol display unit 37a is stopped. That is, the first symbol of the first symbol display unit 37a is changed from the variable display state to the stop display. In the present embodiment, the stop symbol for disengagement is used as the stop display symbol (stop symbol). Further, in step Ss1409, a process of shifting various flags such as the probability variation jackpot flag related to the first start opening game round and the normal jackpot flag to OFF is performed, and in the winning lottery related to the first starting opening game round, the process is performed. Even if you win a big hit or a small hit (special small hit, normal small hit), those wins are invalidated. After executing step Ss1409, the process proceeds to step Ss1410.

In step Ss1410, the first changing flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss1411.

In step Ss1411, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Ss1411 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss1411: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1412, and the number of games continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is the guaranteed number of games (Ss1411: YES). For example, it is determined whether or not it has reached (= within the guaranteed number of games) before reaching (50 times). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed game count counter PNC exceeds 0. Since the guaranteed game count counter PNC indicates the remaining number of guaranteed games, the number of games continuously executed in the high frequency support mode by determining whether or not PNC> 0. Can be determined whether or not is before the guaranteed number of games is reached.

If it is determined in step Ss1412 that the value of the guaranteed game count counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Ss1412: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value is not within the guaranteed number of games, the process proceeds to step Ss1413 and high frequency support is provided. Turn off the mode flag. After executing step Ss1413, the process proceeds to step Ss1414.

In step Ss1414, a low frequency support mode command is set. The low-frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the voice emission control device 90 that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. The low frequency support mode command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). After executing step Ss1414, the process proceeds to step Ss1415.

In step Ss1415, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Ss1415 that the high probability mode flag is ON (Ss1411: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1416 and an invincible zone command is set. The invincible zone command is a command for notifying the voice emission control device 90 that the state has changed from the high accuracy high support state to the high accuracy low support state (invincible zone). The invincible zone command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). After executing step Ss1414, the first fluctuation stop processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss1415 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Ss1415: NO), the first fluctuation stop process is terminated. If it is determined in step Ss1411 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss1411: NO), the first fluctuation stop process is terminated. If it is determined in step Ss1412 that the value of the guaranteed game count counter PNC exceeds 0 (step Ss1412: YES), the first fluctuation stop process is terminated.

<Variation start processing for the second starting port>
Next, the fluctuation start processing for the second starting port will be described. The variation start process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 351: Ss0506) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 361 is a flowchart showing a variation start process for the second start port. In step Ss1501, it is determined whether or not the second start hold quantity RbN = 0. If it is determined in step Ss1501 that the second start hold quantity RbN = 0 is not (Ss1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1502. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss1501 that the number of reserved second starts RbN = 0 (Ss1501: YES), the variation start process for the second start port is terminated.

In step Ss1502, the hold information shift process for the second start port is executed. In the hold information shift process for the second start port, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is shifted. The details of the hold information shift process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss1502, the process proceeds to step Ss1503.

In step Ss1503, the determination process for the second starting port is executed. In the determination process for the second start port, a winning lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, based on the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, the hit / fail determination for determining the presence or absence of a jackpot or a small hit, and the jackpot type are sorted. Distribution judgment and reach judgment to judge the presence or absence of reach are performed. The details of the determination process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss1503, the process proceeds to step Ss1504.

In step Ss1504, the variable time setting process for the second starting port is executed. In the process of setting the fluctuation time for the second starting port, the fluctuation time, which is the time from the start of the fluctuation to the stop of the symbol, is set. The details of the variable time setting process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss1504, the process proceeds to step Ss1505.

In step Ss1505, a second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, and the reach. Information on the presence or absence of occurrence and information on the fluctuation time set in step Ss1504 are included. After executing step Ss1505, the process proceeds to step Ss1506.

In step Ss1506, a second type command is set. The second type command includes information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and information on the jackpot type. Specifically, the second type command includes 16R probability variation jackpot information, 8R probability variation jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or missed information.

The variable command and the second type command set in step Ss1505 and step Ss1506 are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variable command and the second type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step Ss1506, the process proceeds to step Ss1507.

In step Ss1507, the fluctuation display on the second symbol display unit 37b is started, and then the process proceeds to step Ss1508, and the second changing flag is turned ON. The second changing flag is a flag that is turned on when the game round for the second starting port is started, and turned off when the fluctuation display on the second symbol display unit 37b is stopped. After executing step Ss1508, the process proceeds to step Ss1509.

In step Ss1509, the value of the game count counter PNC is subtracted by 1. The game count counter PNC is set to a value in the game count counter PNC when the high frequency support mode is started, and the counter value is decremented by 1 each time the game count is executed. After executing step Ss1509, the variation start processing for the second starting port is terminated.

<Holding information shift processing for the second start port>
Next, the hold information shift process for the second starting port will be described. The hold information shift process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 361: Ss1502) for the variable start process for the second start port.

FIG. 362 is a flowchart showing the hold information shift process for the second starting port. In step Ss1601, the second start hold quantity RbN of the second hold area Rb is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss1602.

In step Ss1602, the data (holding information) stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss1603.

In step Ss1603, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step Ss1603, the hold information shift process for the second start port is terminated.

<Judgment processing for the second starting port>
Next, the determination process for the second starting port will be described. The determination process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 361: Ss1503) for the variable start process for the second start port.

FIG. 363 is a flowchart showing a determination process for the second starting port. In step Ss1701, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode. , It is usually turned off at the end of the open / close execution mode related to the winning of the jackpot. Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the falling opening 252 provided in the starting opening unit 200, the high probability mode flag is turned off. If it is determined in step Ss1701 that the mode is high probability mode (Ss1701: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1702.

In step Ss1702, the hit / fail determination is made with reference to the hit / miss table (for high probability mode) for the second starting port. Specifically, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a big hit in the hit / fail table (for high probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. 340 (b). Determine if it matches the value you have. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss1704. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss1701 that the mode is not in the high probability mode (Ss1701: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1703.

In step Ss1703, the hit / fail determination is made with reference to the hit / miss table (for the low probability mode) for the second starting port. Specifically, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a big hit in the hit / miss table (for low probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. 340 (a). Determine if it matches the value you have. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss1704.

In step Ss1704, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination in step Ss1702 or step Ss1703 is a big hit. If it is determined in step Ss1704 that the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit (Ss1704: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1705.

In step Ss1705, the second hit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. The second hit flag is turned on when the lottery result of the winning lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is "big hit", and the game ball to the second starting port 34 is turned on. It is a flag that is turned off when the change display of the second symbol due to the entry of the ball is stopped and the stop display is displayed. After executing step Ss1705, the process proceeds to step Ss1706.

In step Ss1706, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 341 (b)). Specifically, it is determined which jackpot type numerical range the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is included in. After executing step Ss1706, the process proceeds to step Ss1707.

In step Ss1707, it is determined whether or not the result of the distribution determination (big hit type) in step Ss1706 is a probabilistic jackpot. If it is determined in step Ss1707 that the distributed jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot (Ss1707: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1708.

In step Ss1708, the probability variation jackpot flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Ss1706 is turned ON. After executing step Ss1708, the process proceeds to step Ss1709.

In step Ss1709, the stop symbol setting process for the probabilistic jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the probabilistic jackpot, in the current game round, which is the probabilistic jackpot, the second symbol display unit 37b is set to end (stop display) which stop result is displayed. To execute the process for. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variation jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Ss1706 is acquired, and the address information thereof is acquired. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Ss1709, the determination process for the second starting port is terminated.

In step Ss1707, if it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is not a probabilistic jackpot (Ss1707: NO), that is, if the distributed jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step Ss1710.

In step Ss1710, the normal jackpot flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Ss1706 is turned ON. After executing step Ss1710, the process proceeds to step Ss1711.

In step Ss1711, a stop symbol setting process for a normal jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for a normal jackpot, in the current game round, which is a normal jackpot, the second symbol display unit 37b is set to end (stop display) the variable display with which stop result is displayed. To execute the process for. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Ss1706 is acquired, and the address information thereof is acquired. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Ss1711, the determination process for the second starting port is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss1704 that the result of the hit / fail determination in step Ss1702 or step Ss1703 is not a big hit (Ss1704: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1712.

In step Ss1712, the reach determination of whether or not reach occurs is performed with reference to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c matches the value set as the reach generation in the referenced reach determination table. The process of step Ss1712 is executed when the result of the winning / failing determination (winning lottery) in step Ss1704 is not a big hit. That is, in step Ss1712, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination is a game time in which reach occurs among the game times that are not big hits. After executing step Ss1712, the process proceeds to step Ss1713.

In step Ss1713, it is determined whether or not the result of the reach determination in step Ss1712 is reach occurrence. If it is determined in step Ss1713 that reach has occurred (Ss1713: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1714, and the reach generation flags of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 are turned on. After executing step Ss1714, the process proceeds to step Ss1715. If it is determined in step Ss1713 that no reach has occurred (Ss1713: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1715 without executing step Ss1714.

In step Ss1715, the stop symbol setting process for disconnection is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for disengagement, in the game round of disengagement, the second symbol display unit 37b is used to set which stop result is displayed to end the variable display (stop display). Execute the process. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for deviation in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c can be obtained. It is acquired and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Ss1715, the determination process for the second starting port is terminated.

<Fluctuating time setting process for the second starting port>
Next, the variable time setting process for the second starting port will be described. The variable time setting process for the second starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 361: Ss1504) for the variable starting process for the second starting port.

FIG. 364 is a flowchart showing a variation time setting process for the second starting port. In step Ss1801, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss1802.

In step Ss1802, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss1802 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Ss1802: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1803.

In step Ss1803, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss1803 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss1803: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1804.

In step Ss1804, the low accuracy low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is executed. In the low probability low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port, the game round for the second starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In this case, it is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game times for the second starting port. Specifically, when the second start opening game round is executed in the low probability low support state (state H1) in FIG. 345, the fluctuation time information of the second start opening game round is acquired. It is a process. The details of the low-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss1804, the process proceeds to step Ss1809.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss1803 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss1803: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1805.

In step Ss1805, the low-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is executed. In the low probability high support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port, the game round for the second starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. In this case, it is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game times for the second starting port. Specifically, when the second start opening game round is executed in the low accuracy high support state (state H3) in FIG. 345, the fluctuation time information of the second start opening game round is acquired. It is a process. The details of the low-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss1805, the process proceeds to step Ss1809.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss1802 that the high probability mode flag is ON (Ss1802: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1806.

In step Ss1806, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss1806 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss1806: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss1807.

In step Ss1807, the high-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is executed. In the high-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port, the game round for the second starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. In this case, it is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game times for the second starting port. Specifically, when the second start opening game round is executed in the high accuracy high support state (state H5) in FIG. 345, the fluctuation time information of the second start opening game round is acquired. It is a process. The details of the high-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss1807, the process proceeds to step Ss1809.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss1806 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss1806: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss1808.

In step Ss1808, the high-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is executed. In the high-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port, the game round for the second starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. In this case, it is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game times for the second starting port. Specifically, when the second start opening game round is executed in the high accuracy low support state (state H6) in FIG. 345, the fluctuation time information of the second start opening game round is acquired. It is a process. The details of the high-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss1808, the process proceeds to step Ss1809.

In step Ss1809, the variable time information acquired in each process of step Ss1804, step Ss1805, step Ss1807, and step Ss1808 is set in the variable time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the process of setting the fluctuation time for the second starting port is completed.

<Low accuracy low support state fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the second starting port>
Next, the low-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port will be described. The low-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 364: Ss1804) for setting the variation time for the second start port.

FIG. 365 is a flowchart showing a low-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port. In step Ss1901, long fluctuation time information is acquired. Specifically, an extremely long fluctuation time (long fluctuation time) of 10 minutes is acquired as fluctuation time information. After executing step Ss1901, the low-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is terminated.

<Low accuracy high support state fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the second starting port>
Next, the low-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port will be described. The low-accuracy high support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 364: Ss1805) for setting the variation time for the second start port.

FIG. 366 is a flowchart showing a low-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port. In step Ss2001, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination related to the current game round is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if any of the flags is ON (Ss20011: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2002.

In step Ss2002, the fluctuation time table for the jackpot is specified from the fluctuation time table group during the low accuracy and high support state stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified fluctuation time table for the jackpot is referred to. By doing so, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. The low-probability high-support state fluctuation time table group includes (I) the jackpot fluctuation time table used when a big hit is won in the winning lottery in the low-probability high support state, and (II) the low-probability high support state. Reach generation fluctuation time table used when reach occurs without winning a big hit in the lottery, (III) Reach non-used when reach does not occur without winning a big hit in the winning lottery in a low probability high support state A variable time table for generation is provided. In step Ss2002, first, (I) is specified from (I) to (III). Next, by referring to the specified fluctuation time table for the jackpot, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step Ss1801 (FIG. 364) is acquired. After executing step Ss2002, the low-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss2001 that the result of the winning / failing determination related to the current game round is not a big hit (step Ss20011: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2003.

In step Ss2003, it is determined whether or not reach occurs in this game round. If it is determined in step Ss2003 that reach will occur in this game round (step Ss2003: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2004.

In step Ss2004, the fluctuation time table for reach generation is specified from the fluctuation time table group during the low accuracy and high support state stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified fluctuation time table for generation of reach is obtained. By referring to it, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from (I) to (III), (II) a variable time table for reach generation, which is used when a reach occurs without winning a big hit in a winning lottery in a low accuracy and high support state. Identify. Next, by referring to the specified variation time table for reach generation, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired in step Ss1801 (FIG. 364) is acquired. After executing step Ss2004, the low-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss2003 that reach does not occur in this game round (step Ss2003: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2005.

In step Ss2005, the fluctuation time table for non-reach generation is specified from the fluctuation time table group during the low accuracy and high support state stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified fluctuation time for non-reach generation occurs. By referring to the table, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, from among (I) to (III), (III) in the low accuracy and high support state, the variation time for non-reach generation used when the big hit is not won in the winning lottery and the reach does not occur. Identify the table. Next, by referring to the specified variation time table for non-reach generation, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired in step Ss1801 (FIG. 364) is acquired. After executing step Ss2005, the process of acquiring the low-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is terminated.

<High-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the second starting port>
Next, the high-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port will be described. The high-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 364: Ss1807) for setting the variation time for the second start port.

FIG. 367 is a flowchart showing a high-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port. In step Ss2101, long fluctuation time information is acquired. Specifically, an extremely long fluctuation time of 10 minutes is acquired as fluctuation time information. After executing step Ss2101, the high-accuracy high-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is terminated.

<High-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition processing for the second starting port>
Next, the high-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port will be described. The high-accuracy low support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 364: Ss1807) for setting the variation time for the second start port.

FIG. 368 is a flowchart showing a high-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port. In step Ss2201, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination related to the current game round is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if any of the flags is ON (Ss2201: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2202.

In step Ss2202, the fluctuation time table for the jackpot is specified from the fluctuation time table group during the high accuracy and low support state stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified fluctuation time table for the jackpot is referred to. By doing so, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. The high-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time table group includes (IV) the jackpot fluctuation time table used when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the high-accuracy low-support state, and (V) the high-accuracy low-support state. Reach generation fluctuation time table used when reach occurs without winning a big hit in the lottery, (VI) Reach non-used when reach does not occur without winning a big hit in the winning lottery in the high accuracy and low support state A variable time table for generation is provided. In step Ss2202, first, (IV) is specified from (IV) to (VI). Next, by referring to the specified fluctuation time table for the jackpot, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step Ss1801 (FIG. 364) is acquired. After executing step Ss2202, the high-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss2201 that the result of the winning / failing determination related to the current game round is not a big hit (step Ss2201: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2203.

In step Ss2203, it is determined whether or not reach occurs in this game round. If it is determined in step Ss2203 that reach will occur in this game round (step Ss2203: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2204.

In step Ss2204, the fluctuation time table for reach generation is specified from the high-accuracy low support state fluctuation time table group stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified fluctuation time table for reach generation is obtained. By referring to it, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, (V) is specified from (IV) to (VI). Next, by referring to the specified variation time table for reach generation, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired in step Ss1801 (FIG. 364) is acquired. After executing step Ss2204, the high-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss2203 that reach does not occur in this game round (step Ss2203: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2205.

In step Ss2205, the fluctuation time table for non-reach generation is specified from the high-accuracy low support state fluctuation time table group stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the specified fluctuation time for non-reach generation occurs. By referring to the table, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Specifically, first, (VI) is specified from (IV) to (VI). Next, by referring to the specified variation time table for non-reach generation, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired in step Ss1801 (FIG. 364) is acquired. After executing step Ss2205, the high-accuracy low-support state fluctuation time information acquisition process for the second starting port is terminated.

<Second fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the second fluctuation stop processing will be described. The second fluctuation stop process is executed by the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 351: Ss507) of the game round control process.

FIG. 369 is a flowchart showing the second fluctuation stop processing. In step Ss2301, it is determined whether or not the first hit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As for the first hit flag, the lottery results of the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting port (the first starting port 33 on the center side and the first starting port 44 on the right side) are "big hit" and ". It is turned on when it is a "special small hit" or "normal small hit", and it is turned off when the change display of the first symbol due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port is stopped and the stop display is displayed. Be made. If it is determined in step Ss2301 that the first hit flag is not ON (Ss2301: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2302.

In step Ss2302, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the second symbol display unit 37a has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time for the second symbol set in the fluctuation time setting process for the second starting port (FIG. 364) has elapsed. If it is determined in step Ss2302 that the fluctuation time of the second symbol display unit 37a has ended (Ss2302: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2303. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss2302 that the fluctuation time of the second symbol display unit 37a has not ended (Ss2302: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2311.

In step Ss2303, the fluctuation of the second symbol display unit 37a is stopped. That is, the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37a is changed from the variable display state to the stop display. The combination of the symbols to be stopped and displayed (stop symbols) is set in step Ss1709, step Ss1711, or step Ss1715 of the determination process for the second starting port (FIG. 363). After executing step Ss2303, the process proceeds to step Ss2304.

In step Ss2304, the second changing flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. As described above, the second changing flag is turned on when the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37a starts to change when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, and the second symbol is turned on. This is a flag that is turned off when the symbol 2 stops changing. After executing step Ss2304, the process proceeds to step Ss2305.

In step Ss2305, it is determined whether or not the first changing flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As described above, the first changing flag is the first symbol display unit 37b triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (the first starting port 33 on the center side and the first starting port 44 on the right side). It is a flag that is turned on when the symbol 1 starts to fluctuate and is turned off when the first symbol stops the fluctuation. If it is determined in step Ss2305 that the first changing flag is not ON (Ss2305: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2306.

In step Ss2306, the second hit flag is turned off. After that, the second fluctuation stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss2305 that the first changing flag is ON (Ss2305: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2311.

If it is determined in step Ss2301 that the first hit flag is ON (Ss2301: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2307.

In step Ss2307, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the first symbol display unit 37b has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time for the first symbol set in the variation time setting process for the first start port (FIG. 355) has elapsed. If it is determined in step Ss2307 that the fluctuation time of the first symbol display unit 37b has not ended (Ss2307: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2302. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss2307 that the fluctuation time of the first symbol display unit 37b has ended (Ss2307: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2308.

In step Ss2308, the first hit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing step Ss2308, the process proceeds to step Ss2309.

In step Ss2309, the fluctuation of the second symbol display unit 37a is stopped. That is, the second symbol of the second symbol display unit 37a is changed from the variable display state to the stop display. In the present embodiment, the stop symbol for disengagement is used as the stop display symbol (stop symbol). Further, in step Ss2309, a process of shifting various flags such as the probability variation jackpot flag related to the second start opening game round and the normal jackpot flag to OFF is performed, and in the winning lottery related to the second starting opening game round, the process is performed. Even if you win a big hit, those wins will be invalidated. After executing step Ss2309, the process proceeds to step Ss2310.

In step Ss2310, the second changing flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss2311.

In step Ss2311, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Ss2311 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss2311: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2312, and the number of games continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is the guaranteed number of games (Ss2311: YES). For example, it is determined whether or not it has reached (= within the guaranteed number of games) before reaching (50 times). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed game count counter PNC exceeds 0. Since the guaranteed game count counter PNC indicates the remaining number of guaranteed games, the number of games continuously executed in the high frequency support mode by determining whether or not PNC> 0. Can be determined whether or not is before the guaranteed number of games is reached.

If it is determined in step Ss2312 that the value of the guaranteed game count counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Ss2312: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value is not within the guaranteed number of games, the process proceeds to step Ss2313 and high frequency support is provided. Turn off the mode flag. After executing step Ss2313, the process proceeds to step Ss2314.

In step Ss2314, a low frequency support mode command is set. The low-frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the voice emission control device 90 that the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the low-frequency support mode. The low frequency support mode command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). After that, the second fluctuation stop processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss2311 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Ss2311: NO), the second fluctuation stop process is terminated. If it is determined in step Ss2312 that the value of the guaranteed game count counter PNC exceeds 0 (step Ss2312: YES), the second fluctuation stop process is terminated.

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 350: Ss0406) of the normal process.

FIG. 370 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step Ss2401, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the opening / closing processing period (at the beginning of the ending period) in the opening / closing execution mode, and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the open / close execution mode.

If it is determined in step Ss2401 that the ending period flag is not ON (Ss2401: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2402, and it is determined whether or not the open / close processing period flag is ON. As described above, the open / close processing period flag is turned on when the gaming state is shifted to the open / close processing period, and turned off when the open / close processing period is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss2402 that the open / close processing period flag is not ON (Ss2402: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2403, and it is determined whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the beginning of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Ss2403 that the opening period flag is not ON (Ss2403: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2404, and it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag is ON. The open / close execution mode flag is turned on when the game round that triggered the start of the open / close execution mode ends, and turns off when the open / close execution mode ends.

If it is determined in step Ss2404 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (Ss2404: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2405. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss2404 that the open / close execution mode flag is not ON (Ss2404: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

In step Ss2405, it is determined whether or not it is a normal small hit. Specifically, by determining whether or not the normal small hit flag is ON, it is determined whether or not the trigger for starting the open / close execution mode is the winning of the normal small hit. If it is determined in step Ss2405 that it is not a normal small hit (Ss2405: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2406.

In step Ss2406, it is determined whether or not it is a special small hit. Specifically, by determining whether or not the special small hit flag is ON, it is determined whether or not the trigger for starting the open / close execution mode is the winning of the special small hit. If it is determined in step Ss2406 that it is not a special small hit (Ss2406: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2407.

In step Ss2407, the high probability mode flag is turned off. In steps Ss2405 and Ss2406, it is determined that the game result (win lottery result) of this game round is not a small hit (normal small hit, special small hit), so that is the result of the winning lottery in this game round. Is a big hit. The high-probability mode flag is turned off in order to set the lottery mode during execution of the open / close execution mode, which is executed when the jackpot is won, to the low-probability mode. After executing step Ss2407, the process proceeds to step Ss2408.

In step Ss2408, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. In step Ss2408, since it is determined that the game result (win lottery result) of this game round is not a small hit (normal small hit, special small hit), the result of the winning lottery in this game round is a big hit. be. In order to change the support mode during execution of the open / close execution mode, which is executed when the jackpot is won, to the low frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After executing step Ss2408, the process proceeds to step Ss2409.

In step Ss2409, a jackpot open / close execution mode command is set. The jackpot open / close execution mode command is a command for notifying the voice emission control device 90 that the open / close execution mode is started when the jackpot is won. The jackpot open / close execution mode command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 350: step Ss0402) of the normal process. After executing step Ss2409, the process proceeds to step Ss2413.

If it is determined in step Ss2405 that it is a normal small hit (Ss2405: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2413.

If it is determined in step Ss2406 that it is a special small hit (Ss2406: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2410.

In step Ss2410, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss2411 to set the low frequency support mode command. The low-frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the voice emission control device 90 that the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the low-frequency support mode. The low frequency support mode command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). After executing step Ss2411, the process proceeds to step Ss2412.

In step Ss2412, an invincible zone command is set. The invincible zone command is a command for notifying the voice emission control device 90 that the state has changed from the high accuracy high support state to the high accuracy low support state (invincible zone). The invincible zone command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). After executing step Ss2412, the process proceeds to step Ss2413.

In step Ss2413, the open / close execution mode start command is set. The open / close execution mode start command is a command for notifying the voice emission control device 90 that the open / close execution mode is started when the big hit is won or when the small hit is triggered. That is, the open / close execution mode start command is set when the open / close execution mode is started regardless of whether it is a big hit or a small hit. The open / close execution mode start command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 350: step Ss0402) of the normal process. After executing step Ss2413, the process proceeds to step Ss2414.

In step Ss2414, the opening / closing scenario setting process is executed. The opening / closing scenario setting process is a process for setting an opening / closing scenario in which the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 36b in the round game is set. The opening / closing scenario setting process will be described later. After executing step Ss2414, the process proceeds to step Ss2415.

In step Ss2415, the opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period (hereinafter, also referred to as an opening time) in the special gaming state. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the third timer counter area T3 as the opening time. The opening time setting process will be described later. After executing step Ss2415, the process proceeds to step Ss2416.

In step Ss2416, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). This opening command includes information on the set opening time, information on the jackpot type, and information on the jackpot or small hit that triggered the execution of this open / close execution mode. The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step Ss2416, the process proceeds to step Ss2417, and the opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss2403 that the opening period flag is ON (Ss2403: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2418 to execute the processing when the opening period flag is ON. Details of the processing when the opening period flag is ON will be described later. After executing step Ss2418, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss2402 that the open / close process period flag is ON (Ss2402: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2419, and the open / close process period flag ON time process is executed. The details of the processing when the open / close processing period flag is ON will be described later. After executing step Ss2419, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss2401 that the ending period flag is ON (Ss2401: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2420 to execute the processing when the ending period flag is ON. The details of the processing when the ending period flag is ON will be described later. After executing step Ss2420, the game state transition process is terminated.

<Open / close scenario setting process>
Next, the opening / closing scenario setting process will be described. The opening / closing scenario setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 370: Ss2414) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 371 is a flowchart showing an opening / closing scenario setting process. In step Ss2501, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss2501 that the jackpot flag is ON (Ss2501: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2502.

In step Ss2502, a jackpot opening / closing scenario according to the type of jackpot is set. The opening / closing scenario is a program in which the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 36b in the round game is set. After executing step Ss2502, the main opening / closing scenario setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss2501 that the jackpot flag is not ON (Ss2501: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2503.

In step Ss2503, the opening / closing scenario for small hits is set. In the present embodiment, in the small hit opening / closing scenario, an opening / closing pattern in which the opening / closing door 36b opens / closes once in the round game is set. After executing step Ss2503, the main opening / closing scenario setting process is terminated.

<Opening time setting process>
Next, the opening time setting process will be described. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 370: Ss2415) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 372 is a flowchart showing the opening time setting process. In step Ss2601, it is determined whether or not the trigger of the opening / closing execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON.

If it is determined in step Ss2601 that the trigger of the opening / closing execution mode this time is a big hit (Ss2601: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2602.

In step Ss2602, 3000 (about 6.0 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 as the opening time. After that, the opening time setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Ss2601, when it is determined that the trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is not a big hit, that is, when it is determined that the trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is a small hit (Ss2601: NO), the step. Proceed to Ss2603.

In step Ss2603, 0 (0 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 as the opening time. After that, the opening time setting process is terminated.

<Processing when the opening period flag is ON>
Next, the processing when the opening period flag is ON will be described. The processing when the opening period flag is ON is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 370: Ss2418) of the game state transition processing.

FIG. 373 is a flowchart showing the processing when the opening period flag is ON. In step Ss2701, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 set in the opening time setting process is "0". If it is determined in step Ss2701 that the opening period has ended (Ss2701: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2702 and the opening period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss2703.

In step Ss2703, a round display start process for notifying the type of the opening / closing execution mode this time is executed. Specifically, the jackpot type is displayed on the round display unit 39. After executing step Ss2703, the process proceeds to step Ss2704.

In step Ss2704, the open / close processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the processing when the opening period flag is ON is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss2701 that the opening period has not ended (Ss2701: NO), the processing at the time of turning on the opening period flag is terminated.

<Processing when the open / close processing period flag is ON>
Next, the processing when the open / close processing period flag is ON will be described. The processing when the open / close processing period flag is ON is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 370: Ss2419) of the game state transition processing.

FIG. 374 is a flowchart showing the processing when the open / close processing period flag is ON. In step Ss2801, the large winning opening opening / closing process is executed. The process of opening and closing the large winning opening will be described later. After executing step Ss2801, the process proceeds to step Ss2802.

In step Ss2802, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed, and if it is determined that the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed (Ss2802: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2803. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss2802 that the opening / closing process for the large winning opening has not been completed (Ss2802: NO), the process for turning on the main opening / closing process period flag is terminated as it is.

In step Ss2803, the open / close processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Ss2804.

In step Ss2804, the round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is terminated so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step Ss2404, the process proceeds to step Ss2805.

In step Ss2805, the ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the ending period (hereinafter, also referred to as an ending time) in the open / close execution mode. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 as the ending time. After executing step Ss2805, the process proceeds to step Ss2806.

In step Ss2806, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). The voice emission control device 90 starts the effect corresponding to the ending period based on the reception of the ending command. After executing step Ss2806, the process proceeds to step Ss2807.

In step Ss2807, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the processing when the main opening / closing processing period flag is ON is terminated.

<Large winning opening opening / closing process>
Next, the process of opening and closing the large winning opening will be described. The opening / closing process of the large winning opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 374: Ss2801) of the processing when the opening / closing process period flag is ON.

FIG. 375 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening / closing process. In step Ss2901, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing door 36b is open. If it is determined in step Ss2901 that the opening / closing door 36b is not open (Ss2901: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss2902.

In step Ss2902, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening / closing scenario set by the opening / closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the opening / closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Ss2902 that the opening condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied (Ss2902: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2903.

In step Ss2903, the opening / closing door 36b is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss2904.

In step Ss2904, an open / close door open command is set. The opening / closing door opening command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the opening / closing door 36b has been opened. The opening / closing door opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 350: Ss0402) of the normal processing. After executing step Ss2904, the process of opening and closing the winning opening of the main prize is completed.

If it is determined in step Ss2902 that the opening condition of the opening / closing door 36b is not satisfied (Ss2902: NO), the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step Ss2901 that the opening / closing door 36b is being opened (Ss2901: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2905.

In step Ss2905, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied. As for the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b, it was detected that the continuous opening time of the opening / closing door 36b set in the opening / closing scenario has elapsed, or that a preset number of game balls have entered the large winning opening 36a. It holds in the case. If it is determined in step Ss2905 that the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied (Ss2905: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss2906.

In step Ss2906, the opening / closing door 36b is closed. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss2907.

In step Ss2907, an open / close door closing command is set. The opening / closing door closing command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the opening / closing door 36b has been closed. The opening / closing door closing command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 350: Ss0402) of the normal processing. After executing step Ss2907, the opening / closing process of the winning opening is completed.

If it is determined in step Ss2905 that the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b is not satisfied (Ss2905: NO), the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is.

<Processing when the ending period flag is ON>
Next, the processing when the ending period flag is ON will be described. The processing when the ending period flag is ON is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 370: Ss2420) of the game state transition processing.

FIG. 376 is a flowchart showing the processing when the ending period flag is ON. In step Ss3001, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Ss2805), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0”. If it is determined in step Ss2805 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Ss3001: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3002.

In step Ss3002, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss3003, and the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of the game times after the end of the current ending period. Details of the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Ss3003, the process proceeds to step Ss3004, and the open / close execution mode flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss3005, and the open / close execution mode end command is set. The open / close execution mode end command is a command for notifying the voice emission control device 90 that the open / close execution mode has ended. The open / close execution mode end command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). After that, the processing when the ending period flag is ON is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3001 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Ss3001: NO), the processing at the time of turning on the ending period flag is terminated as it is.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 376: Ss3003) of the process when the ending period flag is ON.

FIG. 377 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of the ending period. In step Ss3101, it is determined whether or not the trigger for the transition to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, when any of the jackpot type flags stored in the RAM 64 is ON, it is determined that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a jackpot.

If it is determined in step Ss3101 that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode is a big hit (Ss3101: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3102, and the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a probable big hit. Judge whether or not. Specifically, when the probabilistic jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON, it is determined that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is the probabilistic jackpot.

If it is determined in step Ss3102 that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode is a probable change jackpot (Ss3102: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3103. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3102 that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode is not a probable change jackpot (Ss3102: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3112.

In step Ss3103, the corresponding probability variation jackpot flag is turned off. Specifically, the process of turning off the ON flag among the 10R probability variation jackpot flag and the 2R probability variation flag is executed. After executing step Ss3103, the process proceeds to step Ss3104.

In step Ss3104, the high probability mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is turned ON. As a result, after the opening / closing execution mode is terminated, the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. After executing step Ss3104, the process proceeds to step Ss3105.

In step Ss3105, the high probability mode command is set as the command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. The high-probability mode command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the winning / failing lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the high-probability mode. After executing step Ss3105, the process proceeds to step Ss3106.

In step Ss3106, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss3107, and 50 is set as the counter value in the game count counter PNC. After executing step Ss3107, the process proceeds to step Ss3108.

In step Ss3108, a high frequency support mode command is set. The high-frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the voice emission control device 90 that the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). After that, the transition process at the end of this ending period ends.

If it is determined in step Ss3102 that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode is not a probable change jackpot (Ss3102: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3109 and the corresponding normal jackpot flag is turned off. After executing step Ss3109, the process proceeds to step Ss3110.

In step Ss3110, the low probability mode command is set as the command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. The low-probability mode command is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the winning / failing lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the low-probability mode. After executing step Ss3110, the process proceeds to step Ss3111.

In step Ss3111, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss3112, and 50 is set as the counter value in the game count counter PNC. After executing step Ss3112, the process proceeds to step Ss3113.

In step Ss3113, a high frequency support mode command is set. The high-frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the voice emission control device 90 that the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Ss0402 in the normal process (FIG. 350). After that, the transition process at the end of this ending period ends.

If it is determined in step Ss3101 that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode is not a big hit (Ss3101: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3114. In step Ss3114, it is determined whether or not the trigger for the transition to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a normal small hit. Specifically, when the normal small hit stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON, it is determined that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is the normal small hit.

If it is determined in step Ss3114 that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a normal small hit (Ss3114: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3115 and the normal small hit flag is turned off. After executing step Ss3115, the transition process at the end of this ending period ends.

On the other hand, in step Ss3114, when it is determined that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is not a normal small hit (Ss3114: NO), that is, the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a special small hit. Goes to step Ss3116 and turns off the special small hit flag. After executing step Ss3116, the transition process at the end of this ending period ends.

<Processing for electric service support>
Next, the processing for electric service support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 350: Ss0407) of the normal process.

FIG. 378 is a flowchart showing the electric service support process. In step Ss3201, it is determined whether or not the support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The supporting flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 44a of the right first starting port 44 is opened and turned off when the electric accessory 44a of the right first starting port 44 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Ss3201 that the supporting flag is not ON (Ss3201: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3202.

In step Ss3202, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned on when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 44a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is ON. Is. If it is determined in step Ss3202 that the support winning flag is not ON (Ss3202: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3203.

In step Ss3203, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

If it is determined in step Ss3203 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Ss3203: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Ss3203: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3204.

In step Ss3204, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display of the symbol in the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step Ss3204 that it is the end timing of the variation display (Ss3204: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3205, the off display is set, and then the main electric service support process is terminated. By setting the off display, the variable display of the symbol in the normal figure unit 38 is terminated in the state where the off display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3204 that it is not the end timing of the variation display (Ss3204: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3206.

In step Ss3206, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0". If it is determined in step Ss3206 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is "0" (Ss3206: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3206 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0" (Ss3206: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3207.

In step Ss3207, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step Ss3208 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If the step Ss3207 is not in the open / close execution mode (Ss3207: NO) and the step Ss3208 is in the high frequency support mode (Ss3208: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3209 and the electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "5" (that is, 0.01 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss3210.

In step Ss3210, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Ss3209 is the support winning. If it is determined in step Ss3210 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is the support winning (Ss3210: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3211, the support winning flag is turned ON, and the counter area 64f of the RAM 64 is provided. "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 44a is opened. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3210 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not the support winning (Ss3210: NO), the main electric role support process is terminated without executing the process of step Ss3211.

If it is determined in step Ss3207 that it is in the open / close execution mode (Ss3207: YES), or if it is determined in step Ss3208 that it is not in the high frequency support mode (Ss3208: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3212 and the motorized accessory opening lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss3213.

In step Ss3213, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Ss3212 is the support winning. If it is determined in step Ss3213 that the support is not won (Ss3213: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3213 that the support is won (Ss3213: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3214, the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , End the processing for main electric service support.

If it is determined in step Ss3202 that the support winning flag is ON (Ss3202: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3215, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38. If it is determined in step Ss3215 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Ss3215: NO), the pattern is being displayed in a variable manner in the normal drawing unit 38. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3215 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Ss3215: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3216.

In step Ss3216, the hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the pattern in the normal drawing unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped and displayed. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss3217, the supporting flag is turned ON, and the support winning flag is turned OFF. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss3201 that the supporting flag is ON (Ss3201: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3218, and the electric function opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 44a is executed. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

<Electric service opening / closing process>
Next, the electric function opening / closing process will be described. The electric service opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 378: Ss3218) of the electric service support process.

FIG. 379 is a flowchart showing the electric service opening / closing process. In step Ss3301, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 44a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 44a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 44b is in the driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 44a is open (Ss3301: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3302.

In step Ss3302, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 44a. If it is determined in step Ss3302 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Ss3302: NO), the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. That is, if the opening duration of the electric accessory 44a has not ended, the main electric accessory opening / closing process ends.

If it is determined in step Ss3302 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Ss3302: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3303, and a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 44a to the closed state is performed. The second timer counter area T2 is set to "5" (that is, 0.01 sec). That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 44a is "0", the electric accessory 44a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the accessory 44a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Ss3303, the process proceeds to step Ss3304.

In step Ss3304, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step Ss3305 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step Ss3305 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Ss3305: NO), the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3305 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Ss3305: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3306 and the supporting flag is turned off. After that, the main electric function opening / closing process is completed.

If it is determined in step Ss3301 that the electric accessory 44a is not open (Ss3301: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3307, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 44a. If it is determined in step Ss3307 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Ss3307: NO), the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3307 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Ss3307: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3308, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 44a to the open state is executed. .. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss3309.

In step Ss3309, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and if it is determined that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (Ss3309: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3310 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step Ss3310 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (Ss3310: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3311, and "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electric function opening / closing process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3309 that the open / close execution mode is set (Ss3309: YES), or if it is determined in step Ss3310 that the mode is not in the high frequency support mode (Ss3310: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3312 and the second step is performed. The timer counter area T2 is set to "100" (that is, 0.2 sec). After that, the main electric function opening / closing process is completed.

<Game ball distribution control processing>
Next, the game ball distribution control process will be described. The game ball distribution control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 350: Ss0408) of the normal process.

FIG. 380 is a flowchart showing a game ball distribution control process. In step Ss3401, it is determined whether or not the value of the fifth timer counter area T5 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is “0”. The fifth timer counter area T5 is used as a parameter for switching the distribution piece portion 242 of the game ball distribution device 240 between the first position Q1 and the second position Q2. By determining whether or not the value of the fifth timer counter area T5 is "0", it is determined whether or not it is the timing to switch the distribution piece portion 242 from the first position Q1 to the second position Q2. Can be done. The count value set in the fifth timer counter area T5 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

If it is determined in step Ss3401 that the value of the fifth timer counter area T5 is "0" (Ss3401: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3402.

In step Ss3402, the game ball distribution drive unit 241a (FIG. 337) is driven and controlled to switch the distribution piece unit 242 from the first position Q1 to the second position Q2. After that, the game ball distribution control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss3401 that the value of the fifth timer counter area T5 is not "0" (Ss3401: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3403.

In step Ss3403, it is determined whether or not the value of the fifth timer counter area T5 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is “-50”. The value "50" corresponds to about 0.1 sec.

If it is determined in step Ss3403 that the value of the fifth timer counter area T5 is "-50" (Ss3403: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3404.

In step Ss3404, the game ball distribution drive unit 241a (FIG. 337) is driven and controlled to switch the distribution piece unit 242 from the second position Q2 to the first position Q1. As a result, the distribution piece portion 242 is in the second position Q2 for the period from when the value of the fifth timer counter area T5 becomes "0" to when it becomes "-50", that is, for about 0.1 seconds. The state will be maintained. After executing step Ss3403, the process proceeds to step Ss3405.

In step Ss3405, 1000 (about 2.0 sec) is set in the fifth timer counter area T5. By setting the fifth timer counter area T5 to about 2.0 seconds as an initial value, the distribution piece unit 242 holds the state at the first position Q1 for about 2.0 seconds. After executing step Ss3405, the game ball distribution control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Ss3403 that the value of the fifth timer counter area T5 is not "-50" (Ss3403: NO), the game ball distribution control process is terminated as it is.

<< 8-6 >> Various processes executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device will be described. The process executed by the voice emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 381 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed with a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described.

In step Ss3501, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound / light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main MPU 62, and the commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Read sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step Ss3501, the process proceeds to step Ss3502.

In step Ss3502, the pending command correspondence process is executed. In the hold command correspondence process, the process corresponding to the hold command among the commands stored in step Ss3501 is performed. The details of the pending command support processing will be described later. After executing step Ss3502, the process proceeds to step Ss3503.

In step Ss3503, the game rotation effect setting process is executed. In the game time effect setting process, the effect to be executed in the game time from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the symbol is set. The details of the game time production setting process will be described later. After executing step Ss3503, the process proceeds to step Ss3504.

In step Ss3504, the opening / closing execution mode effect processing is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode production processing, processing related to the production in the opening period, the production in the large winning opening opening / closing processing period, and the production in the ending period is performed. After executing step Ss3504, the process proceeds to step Ss3505.

In step Ss3505, the background effect processing is executed. In the background effect processing, a process of displaying a background moving image determined according to a command indicating a game state received from the main MPU 62 on the symbol display device 41 is performed. For example, processing is performed to display a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode is ongoing, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that the high-probability mode is continuing. .. After executing step Ss3505, the process proceeds to step Ss3506.

In step Ss3506, the fall effect processing is executed. In the fall effect processing, a process of displaying an effect image (moving image) determined according to the fall command received from the main MPU 62 on the symbol display device 41 is performed. Specifically, whether or not a fall command is received from the main MPU 62 when the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode (that is, in the high accuracy and high support state). When the determination is made and it is determined that the command has been received, a process is performed in which the symbol display device 41 displays an effect image that can indicate that the state is disadvantageous to the player. By visually recognizing the effect image displayed on the symbol display device 41 that may indicate that the state is disadvantageous to the player, the player acknowledges that the lottery mode has changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. be able to. In the present embodiment, since the first branch passage portion 220 and the second branch passage portion 230 provided in the start port unit 200 are formed of a transparent resin material, the second route RT2 in the start port unit 200 (FIG. 334). ), The player can admit that the lottery mode has changed from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode, but according to the process of step Ss3506, it is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Since it can be recognized by the production image, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. After executing step Ss3506, the process proceeds to step Ss3507.

In step Ss3507, the invincible zone entry effect processing is executed. In the invincible zone entry effect processing, a process of displaying an effect image (moving image) determined according to the invincible zone command received from the main MPU 62 on the symbol display device 41 is performed. By visually recognizing the effect image displayed on the symbol display device 41, which is determined according to the invincible zone command, the player acknowledges that the state has changed from the high accuracy high support state to the high accuracy low support state (invincible zone). Can be done. In the present embodiment, since the main line passage portion 210, the first branch passage portion 220, and the second branch passage portion 230 provided in the start port unit 200 are formed of a transparent resin material, the first branch passage portion 200 in the start port unit 200 is formed. The player can admit that the flow of the game ball along the 3 route RT3 (FIG. 335) has shifted from the high accuracy high support state to the high accuracy low support state (invincible zone), but the process of step Ss3507 According to the above, since it can be recognized by the effect image displayed on the symbol display device 41, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. After executing step Ss3507, the process proceeds to step Ss3508.

In step Ss3508, other processing is executed. The other processing is a process of displaying a demo image (moving image) on the symbol display device 41 when the game is not performed by the player. After executing step Ss3508, the process proceeds to step Ss3509.

In step Ss3509, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the above-mentioned effect processing. After executing step Ss3509, the process proceeds to step Ss3510.

In step Ss3510, the audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read in the above-mentioned BGM process and each effect process. After executing step Ss3510, this timer interrupt process ends.

<Processing for pending commands>
Next, the pending command correspondence process will be described. The hold command correspondence process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 381: Ss3502).

FIG. 382 is a flowchart showing the pending command correspondence process. In step Ss3601, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Ss3601 that the hold command is received from the main MPU 62 (Ss3601: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3602.

In step Ss3602, the hold command received this time is read, and the hold information is read from the hold command. The pending information includes information on the presence / absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence / absence of a reach, and the fluctuation time. Then, the read hold information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. As the hold information, information for a maximum of four pieces, which is the number of holds for the first start port 33, and information for a maximum of four pieces, which is the number of pieces held for the second start port 34, are updated and stored. After executing step Ss3602, the process proceeds to step Ss3603.

In step Ss3603, the update process at the time of entering the ball is executed. In the update process at the time of entering the ball, the number of hold information acquired based on the entry into the first start port 33, the number of hold information acquired based on the entry into the second start port 34, and the number of hold information acquired. A process for making the total number of these reserved information identifiable in the sound light side MPU 92 is executed. The details of the update process at the time of entering the ball in step Ss3603 will be described later. In the following, the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33 is also referred to as the "first reserved number", and the reserved information acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 34. The number is also referred to as a "second hold quantity", and the total number of the first hold quantity and the second hold quantity is also referred to as a "total hold quantity". After executing step Ss3603, the process proceeds to step Ss3604.

In step Ss3604, the hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the display (hold display icon) in the first start port hold area Ds1 and the second start port hold area Ds2 corresponding to the first hold number and the second hold number specified in step Ss3603. A command for changing the display (display such as how many are lined up) is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 makes the display in the first start port hold area Ds1 and the second start port hold area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 correspond to the first hold number and the second hold number. change. Specifically, the display control device 100 that has received the command defines the display position of the hold display icon in the first start port hold area Ds1, and displays the number of icons corresponding to the first hold number. Display at the position. Further, the display control device 100 defines the display position of the hold display icon in the second start port hold area Ds2, and displays the number of icons corresponding to the second hold number at the display position. After executing step Ss3604, the pending command correspondence process ends.

<Update process at the time of entry>
Next, the update process at the time of entering the ball will be described. The update process at the time of entering the ball is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 382: Ss3603) of the hold command corresponding process.

FIG. 383 is a flowchart showing an update process at the time of entering the ball. In step Ss3701, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the entry into the first starting port 33. If it is determined in step Ss3701 that the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the entry into the first starting port 33 (Ss3701: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3702 and a sound is produced. The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the optical side RAM 94 is executed. The first reserved quantity counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33 in the sound light side MPU 92. In the update process of the first hold quantity counter area, the information of the first hold count counter area is updated to the information of the hold count included in the hold command to be read this time. After executing step Ss3702, the process proceeds to step Ss3704.

In step Ss3701, when it is determined that the hold command to be read this time is not transmitted based on the entry into the first start port 33 (Ss3701: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start. If it is determined that the ball was transmitted based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process proceeds to step Ss3703 to update the second reserved number counter area provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94. Run. The second reserved quantity counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 34 in the sound light side MPU 92. In the second hold quantity counter area update process, the information in the second hold count counter area is updated to the hold count information included in the command to be read this time. After executing step Ss3703, the process proceeds to step Ss3704.

The reason why the processing of step Ss3702 and step Ss3703 is performed as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while the backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the voice emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, if the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information relating to the entry into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the hold information is held in the main control device 60. Is stored and retained, whereas the voice emission control device 90 grasps that the number of reserved information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first hold quantity counter area or the second hold count counter area is counted up each time the voice emission control device 90 receives a hold command, the main control device 60 actually holds the hold storage. There may be an inconvenience that the number of reserved information stored and the number of reserved information grasped by the voice emission control device 90 do not match. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment described above, the main control device 60 transmits the hold command including the information on the number of holds, and the voice emission control device 90 sends the hold command to the command each time the hold command is received. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the number of reserved pieces included is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

In step Ss3704, the update process of the total reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94 is executed. The total number of hold counter areas is the sum of the number of hold information acquired based on the entry into the first start port 33 and the number of hold information acquired based on the entry into the second start port 34. It is a counter area for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92. In the update process, the information of the total reserved quantity counter area is the sum of the information of the reserved quantity measured in the first reserved quantity counter area and the information of the reserved quantity measured in the second reserved quantity counter area. Update to. After executing step Sp3704, the update process at the time of the main ball entry is terminated.

<Game times production setting process>
Next, the game rotation effect setting process will be described. The game rotation effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 381: Ss3503).

FIG. 384 is a flowchart showing a game rotation effect setting process. In step Ss3801, it is determined whether or not a high probability mode command is received from the main MPU 62.

If it is determined in step Ss3801 that the high probability mode command is received from the main MPU 62 (Ss3801: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3802, and the sound light stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light side RAM 94. Turn on the side high probability mode flag.

If it is determined in step Ss3801 that the high probability mode command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Ss3801: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3803, and whether or not the low probability mode command has been received from the main MPU 62 is determined. judge.

If it is determined in step Ss3803 that a low probability mode command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Ss3803: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3804, and the sound light stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light side RAM 94. Turn off the side high probability mode flag.

If it is determined in step Ss3803 that the low probability mode command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Ss3803: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3805 as it is. Further, after executing step Ss3802 or after executing step Ss3804, the process proceeds to step Ss3805.

In step Ss3805, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode command is received from the main MPU 62.

If it is determined in step Ss3805 that a high-frequency support mode command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Ss3805: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3806, and the sound stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound / light side RAM 94. Turn on the optical side high frequency support mode flag.

If it is determined in step Ss3805 that the high frequency support mode command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Ss3805: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3807, and whether or not the low frequency support mode command has been received from the main MPU 62. Is determined.

If it is determined in step Ss3807 that the low frequency support mode command is received from the main MPU 62 (Ss3807: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3808, and the sound stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound / light side RAM 94. Turn off the high frequency support mode flag on the optical side.

If it is determined in step Ss3807 that the low frequency support mode command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Ss3807: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3809 as it is. Further, after executing step Ss3806 or after executing step Ss3808, the process proceeds to step Ss3809.

In step Ss3809, the display mode switching process is executed. The display mode switching process is a process of switching an area for displaying the first decorative symbol corresponding to the game times for the first start opening and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the game times for the second start opening. Specifically, there is a case where the first decorative symbol is displayed in the main display area MA and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the sub display area SA, and a case where the second decorative symbol is displayed in the main display area MA and the sub display area SA is displayed. The process of switching between the case of displaying the first decorative pattern and the case of displaying the first decorative pattern is executed. The details of the display mode switching process will be described later. After executing step Ss3809, the process proceeds to step Ss3810.

In step Ss3810, the special 1 game round effect processing is executed. The special 1 game turn effect process is a process for setting and executing an effect corresponding to the first start port game turn. The details of the processing for producing the special 1 game will be described later. After executing step Ss3810, the process proceeds to step Ss3811.

In step Ss3811, the special 2 game rotation effect processing is executed. The special 2 game turn effect process is a process for setting and executing an effect corresponding to the second start opening game turn. The details of the processing for producing the special 2 game will be described later. After executing step Ss3811, the game round effect setting process is terminated.

<Display mode switching process>
Next, the display mode switching process will be described. The display mode switching process is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 384: Ss3809) of the game rotation effect setting process.

FIG. 385 is a flowchart showing a display mode switching process. In step Ss3901, it is determined whether or not the sound light side high probability mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas 94a is ON.

If it is determined in step Ss3901 that the sound / light side high probability mode flag is ON (Ss3901: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3902, and the sound / light side high frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas 94a is set. It is determined whether or not it is ON.

If it is determined in step Ss3902 that the high frequency support mode flag on the sound / light side is not ON (Ss3902: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3903.

In step Ss3903, the special 2 main display command is transmitted to the display control device 100. Special 2 The display control device 100 that has received the main display command controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the second decorative symbol corresponding to the game times for the second start port in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41. The first decorative symbol corresponding to the game times for the first starting port is displayed in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41. That is, in the high probability low support state (invincible zone) where the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the second decorative symbol is displayed. The first decorative symbol is displayed in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41.

If it is determined in step Ss3901 that the high probability mode flag on the sound light side is not ON (Ss3901: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss3904. If it is determined in step Ss3902 that the high frequency support mode flag on the sound / light side is ON (Ss3902: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss3904.

In step Ss3904, the special 1 main display command is transmitted to the display control device 100. Special 1 The display control device 100 that has received the main display command controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the first decorative symbol corresponding to the game times for the first start port in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41. The second decorative symbol corresponding to the game times for the second starting port is displayed in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41. That is, the lottery mode is a low probability mode, the support mode is a low frequency support mode, a low probability low support state, the lottery mode is a low probability mode, and the support mode is a high frequency support mode, a low probability high support state. In each of the high-probability mode, the high-probability mode, and the high-frequency support mode, the first decorative symbol is displayed on the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the liquid crystal display is displayed. The second decorative symbol is displayed in the sub display area SA of the device 41.

After executing step Ss3903 or after executing step Ss3904, the display mode switching process ends.

<Game times production setting process for special 1>
Next, the special 1 game rotation effect setting process will be described. The special 1 game rotation effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 384: Ss3810) of the game rotation effect setting process.

FIG. 386 is a flowchart showing a game rotation effect setting process for special 1. In step Ss4001, it is determined whether or not the first variation command and the first type command have been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Ss4001 that at least one of the first variation command and the first type command has not been received (Ss4001: NO), the game rotation effect setting process for this special 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss4001 that the first variation command and the first type command have been received (Ss4001: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4002.

In step Ss4002, the first variable command received this time is read, and information on the presence / absence of a big hit, the type of the big hit, the presence / absence of a special small hit, the presence / absence of reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time is read from the command. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss4003.

In step Ss4003, the first effect pattern setting process for setting the effect pattern to be executed in the game times such as the big hit, the small hit, and the reach is executed. The details of the first effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Ss4003, the process proceeds to step Ss4004.

In step Ss4004, the stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, when the result of the winning lottery of this game round is a 16R probability variation jackpot, an 8R probability variation jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, the same symbol is displayed on the effective line L of the symbol display device 41. The information corresponding to the stop result for which the combination is established is set as the information of the stop symbol this time. Specifically, when the result of the winning lottery of this game round is a 16R probability variation jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot, the same odd-numbered symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, and the same. A combination of even symbols can be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, this selectivity is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the same combination of even-numbered symbols, but instead, the former is selected over the latter. The configuration may have a high rate, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot. Further, when the result of the winning lottery of this game round is an 8R normal jackpot, the same even-numbered symbol combination is selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the winning lottery for this game round is a deviation result, it is determined whether or not reach has occurred from the content of the variable command. When it is determined that the reach is generated, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L, and the stop result is that the combination of the reach symbols is established on the effective line L. The information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach generation is not supported, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L, and the stop result is that the combination of reach symbols is not established on the effective line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the stop symbol of this time. After executing step Ss4004, the process proceeds to step Ss4005.

In step Ss4005, a process for setting a variation display pattern (hereinafter, referred to as a first variation display pattern) of the game times for the first start port is executed. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the game for the first start port this time is specified from the content of the first fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information set in step Ss4004 are set. The first variation display pattern corresponding to the combination of the stop symbol information is selected. When selecting the first variation display pattern, the first variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b (FIG. 344) of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss4006.

In step Ss4006, the information of the first effect pattern, the stop symbol, and the first variation display pattern set in the game round for the first start port is set in the effect command. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss4007, and the effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect content corresponding to the received effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step Ss4007, the process proceeds to step Ss4008.

In step Ss4008, the pending information update process is executed. In the hold information update process, the information in the first hold quantity counter area is updated so that the first hold count stored in the first hold count counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1. After executing step Ss4008, the process proceeds to step Ss4009.

In step Ss4009, the hold display control process is executed. The hold display control process performs the same process as the hold display control process executed in step Ss3604 of the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 382). Specifically, a command for changing the display (display such as how many hold display icons are lined up) in the first start port hold area Ds1 corresponding to the first hold number specified in step Ss4008 is given. It is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first start port holding area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 according to the number of first holdings. After executing step Ss4009, the special 1 game rotation effect setting process is terminated.

<First effect pattern setting process>
Next, the first effect pattern setting process will be described. The first effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 386: Ss4003) of the special 1 game time effect setting process.

FIG. 387 is a flowchart showing the first effect pattern setting process. In step Ss4101, it is determined whether or not the sound light side high probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss4101 that the high probability mode flag on the sound light side is not ON (Ss4101: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4102.

In step Ss4102, it is determined whether or not the sound light side high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss4102 that the high frequency support mode flag on the sound / light side is not ON (Ss4102: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4103.

In step Ss4103, the low-accuracy low-support state effect pattern setting process for the first starting port is executed. The low-probability low-support state effect pattern setting process for the first start port is when the game round for the first start port is executed when the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. In addition, it is a process of setting the effect pattern of the game times for the first starting port. Specifically, in the low probability low support state (state H1) in FIG. 345, when the game round for the first start opening is executed, the process of setting the effect pattern of the game round for the first start opening. Is. The details of the effect pattern setting process in the low accuracy and low support state for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss4103, the first effect pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss4102 that the high frequency support mode flag on the sound / light side is ON (Ss4102: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4104.

In step Ss4104, the effect pattern setting process in the low accuracy and high support state for the first starting port is executed. The low-probability high-support state effect pattern setting process for the first start port is when the game round for the first start port is executed when the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. In addition, it is a process of setting the effect pattern of the game times for the first starting port. Specifically, in the low accuracy high support state (state H3) in FIG. 345, when the game round for the first start opening is executed, the process of setting the effect pattern of the game round for the first start opening. Is. The details of the effect pattern setting process in the low accuracy and high support state for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss4104, the first effect pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss4101 that the high probability mode flag on the sound light side is ON (Ss4101: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4105.

In step Ss4105, it is determined whether or not the sound light side high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss4105 that the sound light side high frequency support mode flag is ON (Ss4105: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4106.

In step Ss4106, a high-accuracy high-support state effect pattern setting process for the first starting port is executed. The high-accuracy high-support state effect pattern setting process for the first start port is when the game round for the first start port is executed when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. In addition, it is a process of setting the effect pattern of the game times for the first starting port. Specifically, when the game round for the first start opening is executed in the high accuracy and high support state (state H5) in FIG. 345, the process of setting the effect pattern of the game round for the first start opening. Is. The details of the effect pattern setting process in the high accuracy and high support state for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss4106, the first effect pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss4105 that the high frequency support mode flag on the sound / light side is not ON (Ss4105: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4107.

In step Ss4107, a high-accuracy low-support state effect pattern setting process for the first starting port is executed. The high-probability low-support state effect pattern setting process for the first starting port is performed when the game round for the first starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. In addition, it is a process of setting the effect pattern of the game times for the first starting port. Specifically, in the high-accuracy low support state (state H6) in FIG. 345, when the game round for the first start opening is executed, the process of setting the effect pattern of the game round for the first start opening. Is. The details of the effect pattern setting process in the high accuracy and low support state for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss4107, the first effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Low accuracy low support state production pattern setting process for the first starting port>
Next, the effect pattern setting process in the low accuracy and low support state for the first starting port will be described. The low-accuracy low-support state effect pattern setting process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 387: Ss4103) of the first effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 388 is a flowchart showing a low-accuracy low-support state effect pattern setting process for the first starting port. In step Ss4201, a random number acquisition process for the effect pattern is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition process, the effect pattern random numbers are acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound light side RAM 94. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss4202.

In step step Ss4202, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination (winning lottery) in this game round is a big hit winning. Specifically, whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination is the jackpot winning or not from the information on the presence / absence of the jackpot stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 by the step Ss4002 of the special 1 game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 386). Is determined. If it is determined in step Ss4202 that the result of the winning / failing determination is a big hit (Ss4202: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4203.

In step Ss4203, the effect pattern table for the jackpot is specified from the effect pattern table group for the low probability and low frequency state stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. The low-probability low-frequency state effect pattern table group includes (a) the big hit effect pattern table used when a big hit is won in the low-probability low-frequency state, and (b) the low-probability low-frequency state. Reach generation effect pattern table used when reach occurs without winning a big hit in the lottery, (c) Reach non-used when reach does not occur without winning a big hit in the winning lottery in a low probability low frequency state A production pattern table for generation is provided. In step Ss4203, (a) is specified from (a) to (c). (A) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for a big hit. After executing step Ss4203, the process proceeds to step Ss4204.

In step Ss4204, with reference to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4203, the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time acquired in step Ss1002 (FIG. 356) and the value of the random number for the current effect pattern obtained in step Ss4201. To get. In the subsequent step Ss4205, the effect pattern acquired in step Ss4204 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in this game round. After executing step Ss4205, the low-accuracy low-support state effect pattern setting process for the first starting port is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Ss4202, if it is determined that the result of the winning / failing determination in this game round is not a big hit (Ss4202: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4206, and whether or not reach occurs in this game round is determined. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not reach is generated from the information on whether or not reach is generated stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 by Ss4002 of the special 1 game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 386). If it is determined in step Ss4206 that the result of the hit / fail determination in the current game round is the occurrence of reach (Ss4206: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4207.

In step Ss4207, the effect pattern table for generating reach is specified from the effect pattern table group for the low accuracy and low support state stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. Specifically, the above-mentioned (a) low probability and low support state, a reach generation effect pattern table used when a reach occurs without a big hit in the winning lottery is specified. (A) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for reach. After executing step Ss4207, the process proceeds to step Ss4204 described above, the variation time acquired by step Ss1002 (FIG. 356) and the fluctuation time acquired by step Ss1004 (FIG. 356) with reference to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4207. The effect pattern corresponding to the changed fluctuation time and the value of the random number for the effect pattern this time is acquired.

If it is determined in step Ss4206 that the result of the hit / fail determination in the current game round is not reach occurrence (Ss4206: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4208.

In step Ss4208, the effect pattern table for non-reach generation is specified from the effect pattern table group for the low accuracy and low support state stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. Specifically, the effect pattern table for non-reach generation, which is used when the reach is not generated without winning the big hit in the winning lottery in the above-mentioned (c) low probability and low support state, is specified. (C) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for disengagement. After executing step Ss4208, the process proceeds to step Ss4204 described above, and with reference to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4208, the fluctuation time acquired in step Ss1005 (FIG. 356) and the value of the random number for the effect pattern this time are used. Acquire the corresponding production pattern.

<Low accuracy high support state production pattern setting process for the first starting port>
Next, the effect pattern setting process in the low accuracy and high support state for the first starting port will be described. The low-accuracy high-support state effect pattern setting process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 387: Ss4104) of the first effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 389 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process in the low accuracy and high support state for the first starting port. In step Ss4301, a random number acquisition process for the effect pattern is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition process, the effect pattern random numbers are acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound light side RAM 94. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss4302.

In step step Ss4302, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination (winning lottery) in this game round is a big hit winning. Specifically, whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination is the jackpot winning or not from the information on the presence / absence of the jackpot stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 by the step Ss4002 of the special 1 game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 386). Is determined. If it is determined in step Ss4302 that the result of the winning / failing determination is a big hit (Ss4302: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4303.

In step Ss4303, the effect pattern table for big hits is specified from the effect pattern table group for low accuracy and high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. The production pattern table group for low accuracy and high support includes (d) the production pattern table for jackpot used when a big hit is won in the winning lottery with low accuracy and high support, and (e) the big hit in the winning lottery with low accuracy and high support. Reach generation effect pattern table used when reach occurs without winning, (f) Reach non-generation effect pattern used when reach does not occur without winning a big hit in the winning lottery with low accuracy and high support A table, is provided. In step Ss4303, (d) is specified from (d) to (f). (D) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for a big hit. After executing step Ss4303, the process proceeds to step Ss4304.

In step Ss4304, with reference to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4303, the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time acquired in step Ss1102 (FIG. 357) and the value of the random number for the current effect pattern obtained in step Ss4301. To get. In the subsequent step Ss4305, the effect pattern acquired in step Ss4304 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Ss4305, the low-accuracy high-support state effect pattern setting process for the first starting port is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Ss4302, if it is determined that the result of the winning / failing determination in this game round is not a big hit (Ss4302: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4306, and whether or not reach occurs in this game round is determined. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not reach is generated from the information on whether or not reach is generated stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 by Ss4002 of the special 1 game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 386). If it is determined in step Ss4306 that the result of the hit / fail determination in the current game round is the occurrence of reach (Ss4306: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4307.

In step Ss4307, the effect pattern table for generating reach is specified from the effect pattern table group for low accuracy and high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (e) low accuracy and high support, a reach generation effect pattern table used when a reach occurs without winning a big hit in the winning lottery is specified. (E) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for reach. After executing step Ss4307, the process proceeds to step Ss4304 described above, and with reference to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4307, the fluctuation time acquired in step Ss1104 (FIG. 357) and the value of the random number for the effect pattern this time are used. Acquire the corresponding production pattern.

If it is determined in step Ss4306 that the result of the hit / fail determination in the current game round is not reach occurrence (Ss4306: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4308.

In step Ss4308, the effect pattern table for non-reach generation is specified from the effect pattern table group for low accuracy and high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. Specifically, the effect pattern table for non-reach generation, which is used when the reach is not generated without winning the big hit in the winning lottery in the above-mentioned (f) low accuracy and high support state, is specified. (F) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for disengagement. After executing step Ss4308, the process proceeds to step Ss4304 described above, and with reference to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4308, the fluctuation time acquired by step Ss1105 (FIG. 357) and the value of the random number for the effect pattern this time are used. Acquire the corresponding production pattern.

<High-accuracy high-support state production pattern setting process for the first starting port>
Next, the effect pattern setting process in the high accuracy and high support state for the first starting port will be described. The high-accuracy high-support state effect pattern setting process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 387: Ss4106) of the first effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 390 is a flowchart showing a high-accuracy high-support state effect pattern setting process for the first starting port. In step Ss4401, the random number acquisition process for the effect pattern is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition process, the effect pattern random numbers are acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound light side RAM 94. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss4402.

In step step Ss4402, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination (winning lottery) in this game round is a big hit winning. Specifically, whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination is the jackpot winning or not from the information on the presence / absence of the jackpot stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 by the step Ss4002 of the special 1 game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 386). Is determined. If it is determined in step Ss4402 that the result of the winning / failing determination is a big hit (Ss4402: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4403.

In step Ss4403, the effect pattern table for big hits is specified from the effect pattern table group for high accuracy and high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. The high-accuracy high-support production pattern table group includes (g) high-accuracy high-support, jackpot production pattern table used when a big hit is won in the winning lottery, and (c) high-accuracy high-support, special in the winning lottery. It is equipped with a special small hit effect pattern table used when a small hit is won, and a normal small hit effect pattern table used when a normal small hit is won in a winning lottery with high accuracy and high support. .. In step Ss4403, (ki) is specified from (ki) to (ke). (G) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for a big hit. After executing step Ss4403, the process proceeds to step Ss4404.

In step Ss4404, referring to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4403, the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time acquired by step Ss1202 (FIG. 358) and the value of the random number for the current effect pattern obtained by step Ss4401. To get. In the subsequent step Ss4405, the effect pattern acquired in step Ss4404 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in this game round. After executing step Ss4405, the high-accuracy high-support state effect pattern setting process for the first starting port is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss4402 that the result of the winning / failing determination in this game round is not a big hit (Ss4402: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4406.

In Tep Ss4406, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination (winning lottery) in the current game round is a special small hit winning. Specifically, the result of the winning / failing determination is the special small hit winning from the information on the presence / absence of the special small hit stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 by the step Ss4002 of the game rotation effect setting process for special 1 (FIG. 386). Determine if it exists. If it is determined in step Ss4406 that the result of the winning / failing determination is a special small hit winning (Ss4406: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4407.

In step Ss4407, the effect pattern table for small hits is specified from the effect pattern table group for high accuracy and high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (c) high accuracy and high support, a special small hit effect pattern table used when a special small hit is won in the winning lottery is specified. After executing step Ss4407, the process proceeds to step Ss4404 described above, and with reference to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4407, the fluctuation time acquired in step Ss1204 (FIG. 358) and the value of the random number for the effect pattern this time are used. Acquire the corresponding production pattern.

If it is determined in step Ss4406 that the result of the winning / failing determination in the current game round is not a special small hit winning (Ss4406: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4408.
In step Ss4408, the effect pattern table for normal small hits is specified from the effect pattern table group for high accuracy and high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (ke) high accuracy and high support, a normal small hit effect pattern table used when a normal small hit is won in a winning lottery is specified. After executing step Ss4408, the process proceeds to step Ss4404 described above, and with reference to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4408, the fluctuation time acquired by step Ss1203 (FIG. 358) and the value of the random number for the effect pattern this time are set. Acquire the corresponding production pattern.

<High-accuracy low-support state production pattern setting process for the first starting port>
Next, the effect pattern setting process in the high-accuracy and low-support state for the first starting port will be described. The high-accuracy and low-support state effect pattern setting process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 387: Ss4107) of the first effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 391 is a flowchart showing a high-accuracy low-support state effect pattern setting process for the first starting port. In step Ss4501, a random number acquisition process for an effect pattern is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition process, the effect pattern random numbers are acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound light side RAM 94. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss4502.

In step step Ss4502, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination (winning lottery) in this game round is a big hit winning. Specifically, whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination is the jackpot winning or not from the information on the presence / absence of the jackpot stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 by the step Ss4002 of the special 1 game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 386). Is determined. If it is determined in step Ss4502 that the result of the winning / failing determination is a big hit (Ss4502: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4503.

In step Ss4503, the effect pattern table for big hits is specified from the effect pattern table group for high accuracy and low support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. The high-accuracy low-support production pattern table group includes (ko) high-accuracy low support, the jackpot production pattern table used when a big hit is won in the winning lottery, and (sa) high-accuracy low support, small in the winning lottery. A small hit effect pattern table, which is used when a hit (special small hit, normal small hit) is won, is provided. In step Ss4503, (ko) is specified from (ko) and (sa). (K) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for a big hit. After executing step Ss4503, the process proceeds to step Ss4504.

In step Ss4504, with reference to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4503, the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time acquired in step Ss1302 (FIG. 359) and the value of the random number for the current effect pattern obtained in step Ss4501. To get. In the subsequent step Ss4505, the effect pattern acquired in step Ss4504 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Ss4505, the high-accuracy low-support state effect pattern setting process for the first starting port is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss4502 that the result of the winning / failing determination in the current game round is not a big hit (Ss4502: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4506.

In step Ss4506, the effect pattern table for small hits is specified from the effect pattern table group for high accuracy and low support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (sa) high accuracy and low support, a small hit effect pattern table used when a small hit (special small hit, normal small hit) is won in the winning lottery is specified. After executing step Ss4506, the process proceeds to step Ss4504 described above, and the fluctuation time acquired by step Ss1303 (FIG. 359) and the value of the random number for the current effect pattern are set with reference to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4506. Acquire the corresponding production pattern.

<Game times production setting process for special 2>
Next, the game rotation effect setting process for special 2 will be described. The special 2 game rotation effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 384: Ss3811) of the game rotation effect setting process.

FIG. 392 is a flowchart showing the game rotation effect setting process for the special 2. In step Ss4601, it is determined whether or not the second variation command and the second type command have been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Ss4601 that at least one of the second variation command and the second type command has not been received (Ss4601: NO), the game rotation effect setting process for this special 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss4601 that the second variation command and the second type command have been received (Ss4601: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4602.

In step Ss4602, the second fluctuation command received this time is read, and information on the presence / absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence / absence of reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time is read from the command. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss4603.

In step Ss4603, a second effect pattern setting process for setting an effect pattern to be executed in a game round such as a big hit or a reach is executed. The details of the second effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Ss4603, the process proceeds to step Ss4604.

In step Ss4604, the stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, when the result of the winning lottery of this game round is a 16R probability variation jackpot, an 8R probability variation jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, the same symbol is displayed on the effective line L of the symbol display device 41. The information corresponding to the stop result for which the combination is established is set as the information of the stop symbol this time. Specifically, when the result of the winning lottery of this game round is a 16R probability variation jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot, the same odd-numbered symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, and the same. A combination of even symbols can be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, this selectivity is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the same combination of even-numbered symbols, but instead, the former is selected over the latter. The configuration may have a high rate, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot. Further, when the result of the winning lottery of this game round is an 8R normal jackpot, the same even-numbered symbol combination is selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the winning lottery for this game round is a deviation result, it is determined whether or not reach has occurred from the content of the variable command. When it is determined that the reach is generated, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L, and the stop result is that the combination of the reach symbols is established on the effective line L. The information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach generation is not supported, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L, and the stop result is that the combination of reach symbols is not established on the effective line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the stop symbol of this time. After executing step Ss4604, the process proceeds to step Ss4605.

In step Ss4605, a process for setting a variation display pattern (hereinafter, referred to as a second variation display pattern) of the game times for the second start opening is executed. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the game round for the second start port this time is specified from the content of the second fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information set in the above step Ss4604 are set. The second variation display pattern corresponding to the combination of the stop symbol information is selected. When selecting the second variation display pattern, the second variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b (FIG. 344) of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss4606.

In step Ss4606, the information of the second effect pattern, the stop symbol, and the second variation display pattern set in the game round for the second start port is set in the effect command. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss4607, and the effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect content corresponding to the received effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step Ss4607, the process proceeds to step Ss4608.

In step Ss4608, the pending information update process is executed. In the hold information update process, the information in the second hold quantity counter area is updated so that the second hold count stored in the second hold count counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1. After executing step Ss4608, the process proceeds to step Ss4609.

In step Ss4609, the hold display control process is executed. The hold display control process performs the same process as the hold display control process executed in step Ss3604 of the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 382). Specifically, a command for changing the display (display such as how many hold display icons are lined up) in the second start port hold area Ds2 corresponding to the second hold number specified in step Ss4608 is given. It is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second start port holding area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 according to the number of second holdings. After executing step Ss4609, the special 2 game rotation effect setting process is terminated.

<Second effect pattern setting process>
Next, the second effect pattern setting process will be described. The second effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 392: Ss4603) of the special 2 game rotation effect setting process.

FIG. 393 is a flowchart showing the second effect pattern setting process. In step Ss4701, it is determined whether or not the sound light side high probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss4701 that the high probability mode flag on the sound light side is not ON (Ss4701: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4702.

In step Ss4702, it is determined whether or not the sound light side high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss4702 that the high frequency support mode flag on the sound / light side is not ON (Ss4702: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4703.

In step Ss4703, the low-accuracy low-support state effect pattern setting process for the second starting port is executed. The low-probability low-support state effect pattern setting process for the second starting port is performed when the game round for the second starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. In addition, it is a process of setting the effect pattern of the game times for the second starting port. Specifically, in the low probability low support state (state H1) in FIG. 345, when the game round for the second start opening is executed, the process of setting the effect pattern of the game round for the second start opening. Is. The details of the effect pattern setting process in the low accuracy and low support state for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss4703, the second effect pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss4702 that the high frequency support mode flag on the sound / light side is ON (Ss4702: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4704.

In step Ss4704, the effect pattern setting process in the low accuracy and high support state for the second starting port is executed. The low-probability high-support state effect pattern setting process for the second starting port is performed when the game round for the second starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. In addition, it is a process of setting the effect pattern of the game times for the second starting port. Specifically, when the second start opening game round is executed in the low accuracy high support state (state H3) in FIG. 345, the process of setting the effect pattern of the second start opening game round. Is. The details of the effect pattern setting process in the low accuracy and high support state for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss4704, the second effect pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss4701 that the high probability mode flag on the sound light side is ON (Ss4701: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4705.

In step Ss4705, it is determined whether or not the sound light side high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Ss4705 that the high frequency support mode flag on the sound light side is ON (Ss4705: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4706.

In step Ss4706, a high-accuracy high-support state effect pattern setting process for the second starting port is executed. The high-accuracy high-support state effect pattern setting process for the second starting port is performed when the game round for the second starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. In addition, it is a process of setting the effect pattern of the game times for the second starting port. Specifically, when the second start opening game round is executed in the high accuracy high support state (state H5) in FIG. 345, the process of setting the effect pattern of the second start opening game round. Is. The details of the effect pattern setting process in the high accuracy and high support state for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss4706, the second effect pattern setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss4705 that the high frequency support mode flag on the sound / light side is not ON (Ss4705: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4707.

In step Ss4707, the high-accuracy low-support state effect pattern setting process for the second starting port is executed. The high-probability low-support state effect pattern setting process for the second starting port is performed when the game round for the second starting port is executed when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. In addition, it is a process of setting the effect pattern of the game times for the second starting port. Specifically, in the high-accuracy low support state (state H6) in FIG. 345, when the game round for the second start opening is executed, the process of setting the effect pattern of the game round for the second start opening. Is. The details of the effect pattern setting process in the high accuracy and low support state for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Ss4707, the second effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Low accuracy low support state production pattern setting process for the second starting port>
Next, the effect pattern setting process in the low accuracy and low support state for the second starting port will be described. The low-accuracy low-support state effect pattern setting process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 393: Ss4703) of the second effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 394 is a flowchart showing a low-accuracy low-support state effect pattern setting process for the second starting port. In step Ss4801, the effect pattern for long variation is specified from the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. After executing step Ss4801, the process proceeds to step Ss4802.

In step Ss4802, the effect pattern corresponding to the long fluctuation time acquired in step Ss1901 (FIG. 365) is acquired with reference to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4802. In the subsequent step Ss4803, the effect pattern acquired in step Ss4802 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in this game round. After executing step Ss4803, the low-accuracy low-support state effect pattern setting process for the second starting port is terminated.

<Low accuracy high support state production pattern setting process for the second starting port>
Next, the effect pattern setting process in the low accuracy and high support state for the second starting port will be described. The low-accuracy high-support state effect pattern setting process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 393: Ss4704) of the second effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process in the low accuracy and high support state for the second starting port. In step Ss4901, a random number acquisition process for the effect pattern is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition process, the effect pattern random numbers are acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound light side RAM 94. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss4902.

In step step Ss4902, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination (winning lottery) in this game round is a big hit winning. Specifically, whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination is the jackpot winning or not from the information on the presence / absence of the jackpot stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 by the step Ss4602 of the special 2 game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 392). Is determined. If it is determined in step Ss4902 that the result of the winning / failing determination is a big hit (Ss4902: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4903.

In step Ss4903, the effect pattern table for big hits is specified from the effect pattern table group for low accuracy and high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. The low-accuracy high-support production pattern table group includes (sa) low-accuracy high-support, jackpot production pattern table used when a big hit is won in the winning lottery, and (shi) low-accuracy high-support, jackpot in the winning lottery. Reach generation effect pattern table used when reach occurs without winning, (s) Reach non-generation effect pattern used when a big hit is not won and reach does not occur in the winning lottery with low accuracy and high support A table, is provided. In step Ss4903, (sa) is specified from (sa) to (su). (Sa) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for a big hit. After executing step Ss4903, the process proceeds to step Ss4904.

In step Ss4904, with reference to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4903, the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time acquired in step Ss2002 (FIG. 366) and the value of the random number for the current effect pattern obtained in step Ss4901. To get. In the subsequent step Ss4905, the effect pattern acquired in step Ss4904 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Ss4905, the low-accuracy high-support state effect pattern setting process for the second starting port is completed.

On the other hand, in step Ss4902, if it is determined that the result of the winning / failing determination in this game round is not a big hit (Ss4902: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4906, and whether or not reach occurs in this game round is determined. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not reach is generated from the information on whether or not reach is generated stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 by Ss4602 of the special 2 game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 392). If it is determined in step Ss4906 that the result of the hit / fail determination in the current game round is the occurrence of reach (Ss4906: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss4907.

In step Ss4907, the effect pattern table for generating reach is specified from the effect pattern table group for low accuracy and high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (shi) low accuracy and high support, a reach generation effect pattern table used when a reach occurs without winning a big hit in the winning lottery is specified. (S) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for reach. After executing step Ss4907, the process proceeds to step Ss4904 described above, and with reference to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4907, the fluctuation time acquired in step Ss2004 (FIG. 366) and the value of the random number for the effect pattern this time are used. Acquire the corresponding production pattern.

If it is determined in step Ss4906 that the result of the hit / fail determination in the current game round is not reach occurrence (Ss4906: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss4908.

In step Ss4908, the effect pattern table for non-reach generation is specified from the effect pattern table group for low accuracy and high support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. Specifically, the effect pattern table for non-reach generation, which is used when the reach is not generated without winning the big hit in the winning lottery in the above-mentioned (s) low accuracy and high support state, is specified. (S) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for disengagement. After executing step Ss4908, the process proceeds to step Ss4904 described above, and with reference to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss4908, the fluctuation time acquired in step Ss2005 (FIG. 366) and the value of the random number for the effect pattern this time are used. Acquire the corresponding production pattern.

<High-accuracy high-support state production pattern setting process for the second starting port>
Next, the effect pattern setting process in the high accuracy and high support state for the second starting port will be described. The high-accuracy high-support state effect pattern setting process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 393: Ss4706) of the second effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 396 is a flowchart showing a high-accuracy high-support state effect pattern setting process for the second starting port. In step Ss5001, the effect pattern for long variation is specified from the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. After executing step Ss5001, the process proceeds to step Ss5002.

In step Ss5002, the effect pattern corresponding to the long fluctuation time acquired in step Ss2101 (FIG. 367) is acquired with reference to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss5002. In the subsequent step Ss5003, the effect pattern acquired in step Ss5002 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in this game round. After executing step Ss5003, the high-accuracy high-support state effect pattern setting process for the second starting port is completed.

<High-accuracy low-support state production pattern setting process for the second starting port>
Next, the effect pattern setting process in the high-accuracy and low-support state for the second starting port will be described. The high-accuracy and low-support state effect pattern setting process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 393: Ss4704) of the second effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 397 is a flowchart showing a high-accuracy low-support state effect pattern setting process for the second starting port. In step Ss5101, a random number acquisition process for the effect pattern is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition process, the effect pattern random numbers are acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound light side RAM 94. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss5102.

In step step Ss5102, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination (winning lottery) in this game round is a big hit winning. Specifically, whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination is the jackpot winning or not from the information on the presence / absence of the jackpot stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 by the step Ss4602 of the special 2 game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 392). Is determined. If it is determined in step Ss5102 that the result of the winning / failing determination is a big hit (Ss5102: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss5103.

In step Ss5103, the effect pattern table for big hits is specified from the effect pattern table group for high accuracy and low support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. The high-accuracy low-support production pattern table group includes (C) high-accuracy low support, the jackpot production pattern table used when a big hit is won in the winning lottery, and (S) high-accuracy low support, big hit in the winning lottery. Reach generation effect pattern table used when reach occurs without winning, (ta) High accuracy low support, reach non-generation effect pattern used when a big hit is not won in the winning lottery and reach does not occur A table, is provided. In step Ss5103, (se) is specified from (se) to (ta). (C) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for a big hit. After executing step Ss5103, the process proceeds to step Ss5104.

In step Ss5104, with reference to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss5103, the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time acquired in step Ss2202 (FIG. 368) and the value of the random number for the current effect pattern obtained in step Ss5101. To get. In the subsequent step Ss5105, the effect pattern acquired in step Ss5104 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Ss5105, the high-accuracy low-support state effect pattern setting process for the second starting port is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Ss5102 that the result of the winning / failing determination in the current game round is not a big hit (Ss5102: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss5106, and whether or not reach occurs in the current game round is determined. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not reach is generated from the information on whether or not reach is generated stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92 by Ss4602 of the special 2 game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 392). If it is determined in step Ss5106 that the result of the hit / fail determination in the current game round is the occurrence of reach (Ss5106: YES), the process proceeds to step Ss5107.

In step Ss5107, the effect pattern table for generating reach is specified from the effect pattern table group for high accuracy and low support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (So) high accuracy and low support, a reach generation effect pattern table used when a reach occurs without a big hit in the winning lottery is specified. (S) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for reach. After executing step Ss5107, the process proceeds to step Ss5104 described above, and the fluctuation time acquired by step Ss2204 (FIG. 368) and the value of the random number for the current effect pattern are set with reference to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss5107. Acquire the corresponding production pattern.

If it is determined in step Ss5106 that the result of the hit / fail determination in the current game round is not reach occurrence (Ss5106: NO), the process proceeds to step Ss5108.

In step Ss5108, the effect pattern table for non-reach generation is specified from the effect pattern table group for high accuracy and low support stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 344) of the ROM 93. Specifically, the effect pattern table for non-reach generation, which is used when the reach is not generated without winning the big hit in the winning lottery in the above-mentioned (ta) high accuracy and low support state, is specified. (T) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal effect for disengagement. After executing step Ss5108, the process proceeds to step Ss5104 described above, and the fluctuation time acquired by step Ss2205 (FIG. 368) and the value of the random number for the current effect pattern are set with reference to the effect pattern table specified in step Ss2108. Acquire the corresponding production pattern.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, the process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly the main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and the processes that are executed when a command is received from the voice emission control device 90. There is a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes the main process after the power is turned on, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. If the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, the main process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 398 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described.

In step Ss5201, the initial setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the character information in the compressed format stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, the information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also, make other settings necessary for initialization. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss5202.

In step Ss5202, the interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process executed every time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 399 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Ss5301, the command storage process is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 400 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed by detecting the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105. In the V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute the display instruction.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal generated in VDP105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is performed every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Therefore, since the VDP 105 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image is started or displayed during the drawing of the image. It is possible to suppress the expansion of an image accompanying a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information inside is stored. Hereinafter, the processing details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described.

In step Ss5401, command correspondence processing is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt processing (E19), and the processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when an effect command is stored, control of drawing and displaying an image is started so that the effect mode specified by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, and when it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of drawing and displaying an image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command correspondence process (Ss5401), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so that there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the voice emission control device 90 and the effect is started, it is highly possible that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop symbol set by the voice emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the mode. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41.

In step Ss5402, the display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command correspondence process (Ss5401) or the like. .. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss5403.

In step Ss5403, task processing is executed. In the task process, the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting process (Ss5402). In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step Ss5404.

In step Ss5404, the drawing process is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character determined by the task process (Ss5403) are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on these information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received at the time of the previous V interrupt processing on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process proceeds to step Ss5405, other processing is executed, and then the V interrupt processing is terminated. As described above, an example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described.

<< 8-7 >> Action / Effect:
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the support mode is the high frequency support mode in the high accuracy and high support state, the electric accessory 34a is substantially in the electric service open state and through. The game ball that has passed through the gate 35 circulates from the main line passage portion 210 to the first branch passage portion 220 in the starting port unit 200 (FIG. 330). Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 will surely enter the right first starting port 44. However, the game ball that has entered the first starting port 44 on the right side then enters the falling opening 252 with a probability of 0.1 seconds (= 1/21) with respect to 2.1 seconds. The opportunity to shift to the high-frequency support mode is a probabilistic jackpot, and when the number of games since the high-frequency support mode is started is before the guaranteed number of games is reached and the game ball enters the fall opening 252. , The lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. That is, when the game ball enters the right first starting port 44, the lottery mode may shift from the high probability mode to the low probability mode with a probability of 1/21, and the player may be disadvantaged. be.

On the other hand, if the number of games since the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games without the game ball entering the fall opening 252, the support mode changes from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency. It shifts to the support mode, and the game state shifts from the high accuracy high support state to the high accuracy low support state (invincible zone). When the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is substantially always closed, and as a result, the game ball flows along the third route RT3 (FIG. 335) and the game is played to the second starting port 34. The ball is ready to enter. In this case, unlike the case where the game ball flows to the right side first start port 44 side, the game ball does not enter the fall opening 252 and the lottery mode is not changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. Therefore, it is possible to continuously perform the game times executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 34 without the possibility of being in a disadvantageous state for the player. The high-accuracy and low-support state continues until the next jackpot win, and in effect, the next jackpot win is promised.

As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-probability and high-support state, the period from the start of the high-frequency support mode to the guaranteed number of games for the player. There is a sense of urgency that the lottery mode should not shift from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode (don't fall) when the game ball enters the fall opening 252, and the number of games has reached the guaranteed number of games before falling. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation that you want it to be. Then, when the number of games reaches the guaranteed number of games without falling, the player is executed with the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 without the risk of falling. A feeling of relief that allows you to shift to a high-accuracy low support state (invincible zone) that allows you to continuously perform the game times, and a continuous game time that is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. By doing so, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that a big hit will be won in the near future in a high accuracy and low support state. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a feeling of expectation, a feeling of urgency, and a feeling of relief.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even when a special small hit is won in the winning lottery in the high accuracy and high support state, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. The game state changes from a high-accuracy high-support state to a high-accuracy low-support state (invincible zone). For this reason, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that he / she wants to win a special small hit in the winning lottery, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the low accuracy and low support state, it is not possible to enter the right first starting port 44 and the falling opening 252 provided in the starting port unit 200, but the second starting port. It is possible to enter the ball at 34. Since the support mode is the low frequency support mode in the low probability low support state, the probability that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery executed when passing through the through gate 35 will be out of order is extremely high at 232/233. Therefore, the electric accessory 34a is substantially always closed, and the game ball flows along the third route RT3 (FIG. 335), so that the ball can enter the second starting port 34. For this reason, some players aim to enter the game ball into the second starting port 34 by making a weak right-handed hit in a low-probability and low-support state and letting the game ball flow along the third route RT3. Can be considered. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second symbol display unit 37b (hereinafter, also referred to as the special 2 fluctuation time) is set to an extremely long time of, for example, 10 minutes as the simultaneous fluctuation machine. As a result, the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is prevented from being repeatedly executed in a short period of time. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player can be made to give up the weak right-handed operation in the low-accuracy low-support state and concentrate on the left-handed.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the starting port unit 200 is a structure (hardware-like) including a main line passage portion 210, a first branch passage portion 220, a second branch passage portion 230, and a distribution piece portion 242. The main line passage portion 210, the first branch passage portion 220, and the second branch passage portion 230 are formed of a transparent resin material. According to this configuration, the player can observe the flow of the game ball in the start port unit 200, and by the observation, whether or not the game ball enters the fall opening 252 and the game to the second start port 34. Whether or not the ball enters can be recognized. When the game ball enters the fall opening 252, the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, which is disadvantageous to the player. For this reason, it is possible to give the player who observes the flow of the game ball in the start port unit 200 a sense of urgency whether or not the game ball enters the fall port 252 and becomes a disadvantageous state. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the game state shifts to the invincible zone in which the game ball does not enter the fall opening 252. For this reason, it is possible to give the player who observes the flow of the game ball in the starting port unit 200 a sense of expectation to shift to a gaming state which is advantageous to the player, such as an invincible zone. As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<< 8-8 >> Modification example of the eighth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be carried out in various embodiments without departing from the gist thereof, and for example, the following modifications are also possible. In the modified examples described below, the description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as those of the above embodiment will be omitted.

<< 8-8-1 >> Modification 1:
In the eighth embodiment, the main passage portion 210, the first branch passage portion 220, the second branch passage portion 230, the second starting port 34, the right first starting port 44, the out port 251 in the starting port unit, and the falling port By providing the start port unit 200 having 252, there is a possibility that the game ball enters the fall port 252 and the lottery mode of the winning lottery falls from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the high accuracy and high support state. On the other hand, there is no possibility of falling if the game ball does not enter the fall opening 252 for a period until the number of times the game is executed in the high accuracy high support state H5 reaches the guaranteed number of games. You can shift the game state to the support state. In the high-accuracy and low-support state, a winning lottery can be performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, and as described above, there is no possibility of falling, and in fact, the following A big hit is promised. On the other hand, as a modification, the above-mentioned playability may be realized by adopting a configuration different from the above-mentioned start port unit 200. In short, in the high probability high support state, there is a possibility that the game ball enters the fall opening 252 and the lottery mode of the winning lottery falls from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, while in the high probability high support state H5. A configuration that can shift the game state to a high-probability low support state where there is no possibility of falling if the game ball does not enter the fall opening 252 for a period until the number of times the game is executed reaches the guaranteed number of games. If so, any configuration can be adopted.

<< 8-8-2 >> Modification 2:
In the eighth embodiment, since the main line passage portion 210, the first branch passage portion 220, and the second branch passage portion 230 provided in the start port unit 200 are formed of a transparent resin material, the start port unit 200 The player can observe the flow of the game ball inside the. On the other hand, as a modification, the main line passage portion 210, the first branch passage portion 220, and the second branch passage portion 230 are formed of non-transparent members, and the flow of the game ball inside the starting port unit 200 is played. It may be configured so that no one can observe it. According to this configuration, the player cannot know that the game ball enters the fall opening 252, the game ball enters the second starting port 34, etc. only from the flow of the game ball. According to the configuration of the eighth embodiment, the player has fallen (the lottery mode has changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode) or has moved to the invincible zone by the effect image displayed on the symbol display device 41. You can know what you did.

<< 8-8-3 >> Modification 3:
In the eighth embodiment, since the first branch passage portion 220 and the second branch passage portion 230 provided in the starting port unit 200 are made of a transparent resin material, the player can see from the flow of the game ball. It is possible to know that the game ball has entered the fall opening 252. On the other hand, as a modification, the first branch passage portion 220 and the second branch passage portion 230 are formed of a non-transparent member, and the game ball enters the fall opening 252 or the out opening 251 in the starting port unit. It may be invisible. In addition, the voice emission control device 90 does not perform the process of displaying the effect image (moving image) determined according to the entry of the game ball into the fall opening 252 on the symbol display device 41, and further, the high frequency support mode. It is configured so that the production does not notify whether the number of games since the start of the game has reached the guaranteed number of games. According to this configuration, in a high-accuracy and high-support state, the player is given a sense of urgency as to whether or not he / she has fallen for a long period of time until the number of games since the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games. Can be done. In addition, when the number of games played since the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games, the player is given the expectation that he / she should shift to a high-accuracy low-support state (invincible zone) without falling. can do. As described above, according to this modification, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<< 8-8-4 >> Modification 4:
In the eighth embodiment, when the result of the winning / failing determination in the current game round is a special small hit winning in the high accuracy and high support state, the support mode is shifted from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. The configuration is such that the transition to a high-accuracy low support state (invincible zone) is performed. Then, in the eighth embodiment, when the support mode is changed from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode in the high accuracy high support state, the high accuracy high support state is changed to the high accuracy low support state (invincible zone). The effect image indicating that the transition has been made is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, as a modification, as in the modification 1 of the eighth embodiment, the main line passage portion 210, the first branch passage portion 220, and the second branch passage portion 230 are formed of non-transparent members. After that, when the support mode is changed from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode in the high accuracy high support state, the effect showing that the high accuracy high support state has changed to the high accuracy low support state (invincible zone). The timing of displaying the image may be delayed until the number of games since the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games. According to this configuration, as a result of the hit / fail judgment, the special small hit is won and the state shifts to the high accuracy low support state (invincible zone), and the number of games since the high frequency support mode is started is the guaranteed number of games. Since it cannot be recognized until it is reached, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and urgency, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, in this modification 4, the configuration of the modification 3 may be added. That is, in the modification 4, the voice emission control device 90 does not perform the process of displaying the effect image (moving image) determined according to the entry of the game ball into the fall opening 252 on the symbol display device 41, and further increases the height. Until the number of games played after the frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games, the game state shifts from the high accuracy high support state to the low accuracy high support state or the high accuracy low support state (invincible zone). It may be configured so that it is not notified by the production. According to this configuration, whether or not the player has fallen for a long period of time until the number of games played since the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games, and whether or not the player has transitioned to a high-accuracy low support state (invincible zone). It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency. In addition, when the number of games played since the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games, the player is given the expectation that he / she should shift to a high-accuracy low-support state (invincible zone) without falling. can do. As described above, according to this modification, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<< 8-8-5 >> Modification 5:
In the eighth embodiment and its modification, when the game ball enters the fall opening 252, the lottery mode of the winning lottery is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. On the other hand, as a modification, it is determined by a lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the fall opening 252, for example, whether or not to win with a probability of 1/2, and if the winning is won, the lottery mode of the winning lottery is set. It may be configured to shift from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a more tense feeling as to whether or not the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode and becomes a disadvantageous state for the player.

<< 8-8-6 >> Modification 6:
In the eighth embodiment and its modification, the game ball that has entered the right first starting port 44 is made to enter the falling opening 252 with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/21), and the game ball moves to the falling opening 252. By switching the lottery mode of the lottery from the high probability mode to the low probability mode when the ball is entered, the lottery mode is set to a high probability with a predetermined probability when the game ball enters the right first starting port 44. The configuration is such that it is possible to switch from the probability mode to the low probability mode. On the other hand, as a modification, it is determined by a lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 44 on the right side, for example, whether or not the player will win the fall with a probability of 1/21, and the case where the player wins the fall. The lottery mode of the lottery may be changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. That is, software may realize a configuration in which the lottery mode can be switched from the high probability mode to the low probability mode with a predetermined probability when the game ball enters the right first starting port 44. According to this modification, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode and becomes a disadvantageous state for the player. Further, according to this modification, the out port 251 in the start port unit, the fall port 252, the passage toward the out port 251 in the start port unit, the passage toward the fall port 252, and the like can be omitted. It also has the effect of being simplified.

<< 8-8-7 >> Modification 7:
In the eighth embodiment and its modification, the number of games since the high frequency support mode is started is guaranteed as a condition for shifting the support mode from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode in the high accuracy and high support state. There are two configurations, one is when the number of games is reached and the other is when a special small hit is won in the winning lottery in this game. On the other hand, as a modification, as a condition for shifting to the above, when the number of games since the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games, and in the winning lottery in this game, a special small hit is won. It may be one of the cases where it is done. Further, as the above-mentioned transition condition, a condition of 3 or more may be used by adding the other cases to the above-mentioned two cases.

<< 8-8-8 >> Modification 8:
In the eighth embodiment and its modification, as shown in FIG. 346, the special 2 fluctuation time is set to a normal length in the low accuracy and high support state. On the other hand, as a modification, in the low accuracy and high support state, the special 2 fluctuation time may be set to an extremely long time, for example, 10 minutes. In the low accuracy and high support state, it is impossible to enter the game ball into the second starting port 34, but the reserved information (up to 4) is stored in the second reserved area Rb of the reserved information storage area 64b. In the remaining, low accuracy and high support state, it is possible that a winning lottery will be executed based on the remaining pending information. Then, it becomes an excessively advantageous state for the player, but in this modified example, in the low accuracy and high support state, although it is impossible to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 34, the special feature is By setting the 2 fluctuation time to an extremely long time, for example, 10 minutes, it is possible to prevent the holding information remaining in the second holding area Rb from being repeatedly digested in a short period of time.

<< 8-8-9 >> Modification 9:
In the eighth embodiment and its modification, the game ball distribution device 240 that distributes the game ball between the flow path leading to the falling port 252 and the flow path leading to the out port 251 in the starting port unit is reciprocated. The game balls are distributed by the fragment portion 242. According to this configuration, the distribution destination of the game ball is determined by the timing at which the game ball enters the range of motion of the distribution piece portion 242. On the other hand, as a modification, the game ball may be distributed by a dish-shaped accessory (so-called crune) provided with a plurality of holes for the game ball. According to this configuration, the distribution destination of the game ball is determined by the kinetic energy (speed) of the game ball moving on the crune. This modification also gives the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency. Further, the game ball distribution device 240 is not limited to a configuration including a distribution piece portion 242 or a configuration including a dish-shaped accessory, and may be configured by various shapes (hardware-like configurations). It can also be replaced with a device that distributes game balls.

<< 8-8-10 >> Modification 10:
In the eighth embodiment and its modification, the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 341 (b)) is changed as a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. The jackpot and the normal jackpot were mixed and set. On the other hand, as a modification, the distribution table for the second starting port may be configured such that only the probability variation jackpot is set and the normal jackpot is not set. This configuration is realized by the V probability change machine. The V probability change machine is a model in which the lottery mode becomes a high probability mode when a game ball enters a specific area (V zone) during a round game generated in the open / close execution mode. By using the V probabilistic machine, it is possible to change the probability of a probabilistic jackpot depending on whether the game ball enters the first starting port or the second starting port. In this modification, the V probability change machine realizes a configuration in which only the probability change jackpot is set for the distribution table for the second starting port.

The flow of the game in this modified example is different from the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment shown in FIG. It becomes. Therefore, the high probability low support state H6 continues until the next probability change jackpot is won, and in fact, the next probability change jackpot is guaranteed. In the high probability low support state H6 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, the next big hit is guaranteed, but the result of the distribution determination (big hit type) is not guaranteed to be the probability variable big hit. On the other hand, in this modification, the next probability variation jackpot is guaranteed in the high accuracy low support state H6, so that when the high accuracy high support state H5 shifts to the high accuracy low support state H6, the probability is further increased. A feeling of relief can be given to the player.

<< 8-8-11 >> Modification 11:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the outer frame provided in the pachinko machine is not limited to wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, and steel (carbon steel) or cast iron. , Cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel and the like. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., and steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, etc. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , Stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel and the like. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame inaccessibly to the outer frame and a function of locking the front door frame inaccessibly to the inner frame. A cylinder lock is provided, but after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, the first cylinder lock having the function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so as not to be opened, and the front door frame are provided. A configuration may be adopted in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so as not to be opened is provided separately. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration is adopted in which a rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side in the front view, but the rotation shaft is on the right side in the front view. The provided configuration may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration is adopted in which a rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side in the front view, but this rotation shaft is on the right side in the front view. The configuration provided in may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., and steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, etc. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, when the game ball passes through the ball entry portion 210a of the starting port unit 200 as a predetermined area through which the game ball can pass, the first right side as a plurality of types of result information. From the signal from the detection sensor for the start port 44, the signal from the detection sensor for the second start port 34, the signal from the detection sensor for the fall port 252, and the signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the start port unit. The configuration is such that one result information is acquired. On the other hand, as a modification, when the game ball passes through the right first starting port 44 as a predetermined area through which the game ball can pass, the value of the hit random number counter C1 as a plurality of types of result information and the jackpot type. It may be configured to acquire one result information from the value of the counter C2. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the pachinko machine adopts a configuration including an upper plate and a lower plate, but a configuration in which the lower plate is omitted and only the upper plate is provided may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side of the front view is adopted, but the configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side of the front view may be adopted. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation handles are provided on both the right side of the front view and the left side of the front view. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is holding the operation handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operation handle) is provided on the operation handle. However, a configuration in which this touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the launching means capable of launching the game ball, for example, a configuration in which the game ball is launched by using an elastic force such as a spring. Alternatively, a configuration in which a game ball is launched by using the wind pressure when the compressed gas is ejected may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modified examples, in a state where the operation handle is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are fired per minute. The configuration may be such that less than 100 (for example, 60) game balls are fired in one minute, or 100 or more (for example, 200) game balls are fired in one minute. good. Further, the game ball may be fired one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the first distribution means is configured by the electric accessory 34a and the second distribution means is configured by the game ball distribution device 240. As a result, the first distribution means and the second distribution means can be configured by a control unit and table data stored in the storage unit. As the table data, for example, a pass / fail table and a distribution table can be adopted. Specifically, the means for executing the winning lottery using the winning / failing table may be used as the first sorting means, and the means for executing the sorting determination using the sorting table may be used as the second sorting means. In this case, the first result obtained by the first sorting means corresponds to the winning lottery, the second result obtained by the first sorting means corresponds to the winning lottery jackpot, and the second sorting means corresponds to the loss. The third result obtained may correspond to the probability variation jackpot as a result of the distribution determination, and the fourth result may correspond to the normal jackpot as a result of the distribution determination. In such a modified example, as in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modified examples, the specific gaming state of the transition source to be migrated by the gaming state transition means corresponds to the high-accuracy high support state, and the predetermined gaming state of the transition destination is low-accuracy high. Corresponds to the support state. This modification also gives the player a sense of expectation and urgency, and can improve the interest of the game. The predetermined area in this modification may be replaced with the right first starting port 44 as the main passage portion 210 leading to the second starting port 34. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration including a speaker is adopted as a means capable of outputting sound, but a configuration including an earphone jack in addition to or in place of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones brought by the player to the earphone jack, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he / she is playing without being disturbed by the sound of the surrounding pachinko machine. It will be possible to enjoy it in minutes. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations may be adopted as display means capable of displaying a special symbol that starts variable display based on the entry of a game ball into various starting ports. Therefore, for example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying a normal symbol that starts variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , A drum rotary display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, but various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, and the like, and combinations thereof can be adopted. For example, as a decorative pattern, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and the like, and combinations thereof may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. When a configuration in which one symbol row of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration may be used in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative symbol (for example, "7") is stopped. Further, when a configuration in which two or four or more rows of decorative symbols are adopted, for example, when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line, a jackpot may be won. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory, for example, a rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member. A configuration in which the large winning opening can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward around the rotation axis, a configuration in which the large winning opening is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. May be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, for example, a so-called tulip-type ordinary electric accessory in which a pair of movable valves can be opened to the left and right. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member can be rotated forward around the rotation shaft to open the starting port. A configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the direction may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of prize balls set in each entry port (starting opening, general winning opening, large winning opening, etc.) is an example and is set in each entry opening. By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications.

<< 8-8-12 >> Modification 12:
In the eighth embodiment and its modification, the starting port provided in the opening 210c of the starting port unit 200 is the first starting port (the first starting port 44 on the right side). On the other hand, as a modification, the starting port provided in the opening 210c of the starting port unit 200 may be used as the second starting port.

FIG. 401 is an explanatory diagram showing a starting port unit 200X in this modified example. The starting port unit 200X in this modification has an upper second starting port (a second starting port that replaces the right first starting port 44 in the eighth embodiment) 934 and a lower second starting port (a eighth starting port) as starting ports. The same starting port) 34 as the second starting port 34 in the embodiment is provided. The configuration of the starting port unit 200X other than this configuration and the hardware configuration other than the starting port are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. In FIG. 401, the same parts as those in the eighth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals as those in the eighth embodiment. In this modification, the winning / failing table for the second starting port (high probability mode) is further changed to a configuration in which a special small hit is provided in the lottery result of the winning / failing table for the first starting port (for high probability mode). A special small win is provided for the lottery result of the winning lottery. Even with this modification, it is possible to shift from the high-accuracy high-support state to the high-accuracy low-support state, which is an invincible zone, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and urgency as in the eighth embodiment. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this modification, the following effects are also obtained. In the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won is the case where the jackpot is won based on the entry into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port. It is different from the case where the jackpot is won based on the entry into the ball 34, and the case where the jackpot is won based on the entry into the second starting port 34 is the entry into the first starting opening 33. Compared to the case where the jackpot is won based on the ball, the configuration is highly advantageous for the player. Therefore, according to this modification, since the right first starting port 44 is replaced with the upper second starting port 934, the game ball is passed through the starting port unit 200X as compared with the eighth embodiment. The benefits will be higher. Therefore, according to this modification, in the high-accuracy high support state H5, a weak right-handed hit is made and the upper second starting opening is made rather than a left-handed hit and a game ball is made to enter the central side first starting opening 33. Since it is possible to make the player recognize that it is more advantageous to put the game ball into the 934, it is recommended to the player to hit the weak right in the high accuracy and high support state H5. It has the secondary effect of being able to. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, the case where the big hit is originally won based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 is the one to the first starting port 33. Compared to the case where a big hit is won based on the entry of a ball, the configuration has a high advantage for the player, but the degree to which the advantage is high may be made larger. Specifically, the number of round games of the distribution result of the distribution table for the first starting port may be reduced to, for example, 2R. In short, the advantage for the player when the big hit is won based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port, and the game when the big hit is won based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening. Any configuration may be used as long as it can be made lower than the advantage for the person.

Further, in this modified example in which the starting port provided in the opening 210c of the starting port unit 200X is the upper second starting port 934, the fluctuation time of the first symbol display unit 37b in the high accuracy and high support state H5 (special 1 fluctuation time). By setting an extremely long time, for example, 10 minutes), the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 34 is repeatedly executed in a short period of time in the high accuracy high support state H5. It may be configured to suppress this. As a result, in this modification, the player can be made to give up the left-handed operation in the high-accuracy high-support state H5 and concentrate on the weak right-handed. As a modification to this modification, in addition to the high accuracy high support state H5, the special 1 fluctuation time is set to an extremely long time of, for example, 10 minutes for the low accuracy high support state H3 and the high accuracy low support state H6. It may be configured. That is, even if the special 1 fluctuation time in various game states H3, H5, and H6 other than the low probability low support state H1 that is supposed to be left-handed by the player is set to an extremely long time of, for example, 10 minutes. good. As a result, the player can be made to give up the left-handed operation in the game states H3, H5, and H6 other than the low-probability low-support state H1 and concentrate on the weak right-handed.

Further, in this modified example in which the starting port provided in the opening 210c of the starting port unit 200X is the upper second starting port 934, the distribution result of the distribution table for the second starting port is only the probability variation jackpot (normal jackpot). May not be included). This configuration is realized by the V probability change machine described above. According to this configuration, first of all, in the high accuracy high support state H5, as long as the jackpot is won, the high accuracy high support state H5 can be continuously continued, so that the upper side in the high accuracy high support state H5. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that he / she wants to win a big hit in the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 934. In addition, in a high-accuracy and high-support state, even if a big hit is not won, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the number of games will reach the guaranteed number of games before falling. Then, in the high-accuracy low support state H6, which shifts when the number of games reaches the guaranteed number of games without falling, the game feels a sense of relief, which is an invincible zone where there is usually no big hit (always a certain change big hit). It is possible to give more to the person, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<< 8-8-13 >> Modification 13:
In the high-accuracy and high-support state H5, a weak right-handed hit is made and the game ball is made to enter the right-side first starting port 44, rather than a left-handed hit and the game ball is made to enter the first starting port 33 on the center side. There is also the following method as a method for making the player recognize that is more advantageous. Specifically, for example, the fluctuation time of the first symbol display unit 37b (also referred to as the central side special 1 fluctuation time) based on the entry of the game ball into the center side first starting port 33 in the high accuracy and high support state H5 is 10. By setting it to an extremely long time of minutes, it is possible to prevent the winning lottery from being repeatedly executed in a short period of time when the game ball enters the central first starting port 33 in the high accuracy and high support state H5. It may be configured to be used. As a result, in this modification, the player can be made to give up the left-handed operation in the high-accuracy high-support state H5 and concentrate on the weak right-handed. As a modification to this modification, in addition to the high accuracy high support state H5, the central side special 1 fluctuation time is set to an extremely long time of, for example, 10 minutes for the low accuracy high support state H3 and the high accuracy low support state H6. It may be configured to be set. That is, even if the special 1 fluctuation time in various game states H3, H5, and H6 other than the low probability low support state H1 that is supposed to be left-handed by the player is set to an extremely long time of, for example, 10 minutes. good. As a result, the player can be made to give up the left-handed operation in the game states H3, H5, and H6 other than the low-probability low-support state H1 and concentrate on the weak right-handed.

<< 8-8-14 >> Modification 14:
In the eighth embodiment and its modification, the guaranteed number of games in the high frequency support mode is 50 times, whereas as a modification, the guaranteed number of games may be one. The flow of the game in this modified example is different from the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment shown in FIG. 345 when the transition destination is different in the high accuracy and high support state H5. If the number of guaranteed games is one and the player falls in the first game, the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode at the time of the fall, and the support mode is high when the fluctuation of the game is stopped. Since the transition from the frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode is performed, the transition destination when the player falls in the high probability high support state H5 is the low probability low support state H1. That is, in the high accuracy high support state H5, when the person falls, the high accuracy high support state H5 shifts to the low accuracy low support state H1. If the guaranteed number of games is one and the player does not fall in the first game, the high accuracy and high support state H5 to the high accuracy low are the same as in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. It shifts to the support state H6. Even with this modification, as in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings of expectation, urgency, and relief. The guaranteed number of games is not limited to 1 or 50, and may be any other number.

<< 8-8-15 >> Modification 15:
In the eighth embodiment and its modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices such as a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, but instead of this, the main control device 10 is provided. It may be configured to include two control devices such as a device and a sub control device. The sub-control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the eighth embodiment. Further, in the eighth embodiment and its modifications, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 do not have to be limited to the division described in the eighth embodiment, and the three control devices need not be limited. As a whole of 60, 90, 100, it suffices if various processes according to the eighth embodiment can be executed.

<< 9 >> 9th embodiment:
<< 9-1 >> Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 402 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as the ninth embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a voice emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. Illuminations are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect of the effect by lighting or blinking at each game round performed by the pachinko machine 10, when a big hit is won, when a reach occurs, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two plate glasses is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. The details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls rented from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball stored in the upper plate 20 is supplied to the game ball launch mechanism included in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launch mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores the game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged to the outside from the lower plate 21.

An effect operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game effect reflecting the operation.

An operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “right side”). When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and an operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c that detects the rotation operation amount of the above by the change of the electric resistance is provided. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes according to the rotation operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball launch button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “left side”). When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined firing intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the player's operation handle 25. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the front view of the game board and flows down to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can make a so-called "right-handed". The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26 to launch the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26. Can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 403 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing. For example, a seal is attached to a place that can be opened and closed, and the characters such as "open" appear when the board box is opened.

The second control unit 52 includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90. The design display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays a design or an image for directing.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The launch control device 80 launches a game ball having a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player when an instruction to launch the game ball is input from the main control device 60. Controls the ball launch mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a slope connected below the tank 54 and gently inclined so that the game balls flow to the downstream side. The game balls are supplied from the tank rail 55, the case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, and the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power supply switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies the electric power required for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85. By turning the power switch 88 on and off, the supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and the non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 404 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding the game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicular to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable winning device 36, and a V winning opening 48. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. Specifically, the variable display unit 40 is provided substantially in the center of the game board 30, and the main display unit 45 is provided near the upper right of the front view of the game board 30.

The general winning opening 32 is an entry opening into which a game ball can enter, and a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 403).

The first starting port 33 is an entry port into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game area PA. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is an entry port into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the upper right side of the game area PA. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a winning lottery described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 is provided with a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to execute a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric service is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric service open state in which the electric service is opened in a predetermined mode. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second starting port 34. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34. In this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 is provided on the lower right side of the game area PA. The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30 and an opening / closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The large winning opening 36a is an entry opening into which a game ball can enter, and is formed in a rectangular shape in the present embodiment. The opening / closing door 36b is a rectangular lid having a size one size larger than that of the large winning opening 36a, and is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 36a. When the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the main control device 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the winning lottery, if the jackpot is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode. The opening / closing execution mode is a mode for executing the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36. Specifically, when the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the open / close execution mode, the open / close state in which the game ball cannot enter is changed to the open state in which the game ball can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it transitions to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

The V winning opening 48 is an entry opening into which a game ball can enter, and is a entry opening that is a condition for operating the high probability mode. In the present embodiment, the V winning opening 48 is provided inside the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36. The V winning opening 48 is provided with a V winning opening shutter 48a that opens and closes the V winning opening 48. After winning a big hit by a winning lottery, the V winning opening shutter 48a changes from the closed state to the open state at a predetermined timing in the opening / closing execution mode executed by the big hit winning, and returns to the closed state after a lapse of a certain period of time. During the period when the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is in the open state and the V winning opening shutter 48a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the V winning opening 48. When the game ball enters the V winning opening 48, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The predetermined timing for switching from the closed state to the open state will be described later.

When the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes a predetermined number of gaming times (hereinafter, also referred to as ST number of times) in the gaming state of the high-probability mode, the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. The number of STs is 50 in this embodiment. The number of STs does not have to be limited to 50, and may be other times such as 60, 40, 30 and 20. In the present embodiment, the number of STs is limited to a number larger than the number of times of shortening of time (for example, 10 times) described later, and may be any number as long as it is more than the number of times of continuing of time saving.

An out port 43 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 30, and a game ball that has not entered the various entry ports is discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

The game balls that have entered the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the V winning opening 48, and the out opening 43 are on the back surface of the game board 30. It is configured to finally join the provided discharge passage, and the discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor that detects a game ball. By detecting the game balls with the discharge passage detection sensor, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls fired on the game board 30.

The main display unit 45 has a special figure unit 37, a normal figure unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. The first symbol display unit 37a is a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. , The variable display of the first symbol is performed. When the lottery is completed, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to display the stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying the second symbol. The second symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display unit 37b is used as a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. , The second symbol is changed and displayed. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display to display the stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b to the stop display is set. Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a to the stop display is also referred to as the first variable time, and is displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special symbol unit 37 further includes a first hold display unit 37c made of an LED lamp at a position adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of holds of the first start port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball that has entered the second starting port 34 is not held. Therefore, the condition for the second symbol to be variablely displayed is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 during the period when both the first symbol and the second symbol are not variablely displayed. On the other hand, the configuration is not established based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 during the period in which the first symbol or the second symbol is variablely displayed.

The normal drawing unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, the normal drawing unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode as the display mode of the light emitting display. When the electric accessory opening lottery is completed, the normal drawing unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode, or displays corresponding to the number of round games. The round game opens and closes until either the predetermined upper limit duration elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the open / close execution mode is started, and ends when the open / close execution mode ends and a new game round starts.

The special figure unit 37, the normal figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being composed of a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp, and for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. It may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery result, such as a CRT or a dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The symbol display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a displays a variable display or a stop display based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs a variable display or a stop display of the symbol accordingly. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b displays the fluctuation display or the stop display based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 performs the fluctuation display or the stop display of the symbol accordingly. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the display effect triggered by entering the ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, but also performs a display effect in the open / close execution mode that shifts when a big hit is won. .. Hereinafter, the details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 405 is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol and a display surface 41a that are variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 405 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a decorative symbol that is variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 405 (a), on the symbol display device 41, symbols showing numbers 1 to 8 are variablely displayed as decorative symbols. As the decorative symbol to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol having a pattern such as a character may be adopted for each of the symbols showing the numbers 1 to 8.

FIG. 405 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 405 (a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row is periodically arranged from top to bottom or from bottom. A variable display that scrolls up is performed. As shown in FIG. 405 (b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a state of being stopped on the effective line L1.

Specifically, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity is started. Then, each scrolling symbol switches from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. When the variation display of the symbol is completed and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit winning, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the effective line L1. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L1. The mode of variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned mode, and the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol row Various modes can be adopted as the mode of variable display of decorative symbols such as the number of symbols.

Here, "game times" means from the start of the variation display of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to the end of the variation display and the stop display, until the stop display ends. That is, it is one unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery about the special information acquired based on the entry of any one of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of any of the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37a are obtained for each game. After the segment display is variablely displayed on one of the symbol display units 37b, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of any of the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, the pachinko machine 10 is predetermined in the symbol display device 41 for each game. After variable display of the symbol column of, the symbol column is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game is also referred to as a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the predetermined lottery result, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 405 (b), the first reserved display area Ds1 is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first hold display area Ds1, the number of holds based on the winning of the first start port 33 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 is four.

Further, as shown in FIG. 405 (b), on the display surface 41a, a blinking display and lighting synchronized with the variation display and the stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a of the special figure unit 37 are displayed. The first synchronous display unit Sync1 that displays and the second synchronous display that performs blinking display and lighting display synchronized with the fluctuation display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b of the special figure unit 37. A unit Sync2 is provided. Specifically, when the first symbol display unit 37a is displaying a variable display, the first synchronous display unit Sync1 is blinking, and when the first symbol display unit 37a is displaying a stop, the first symbol display unit 37a is displayed. 1 Synchronous display unit Sync1 displays lighting. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b is displaying a variable display, the second synchronous display unit Sync2 blinks, and when the second symbol display unit 37b is displaying a stop display, the second synchronous display is displayed. The unit Sync2 displays lighting.

In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the first reserved display area Ds1, the first synchronous display unit Sync1, and the second synchronous display unit Sync2. A configuration may be adopted in which 41a does not display a part or all of these displays.

<< 9-2 >> Electrical configuration of gaming machines:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 406 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 temporarily stores various data and the like when executing a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a program recorded in the ROM 63. It is provided with a RAM 64 which is a memory for storing. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may have a part of the function which MPU 62 has. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown), respectively. The payout control device 70 and the power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a DC stable 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, the power supply device 85 includes a capacitor (not shown), and when a power failure occurs or the power supply switch 88 (FIG. 403) is turned off, power supply to each device is continued for a predetermined period. do.

Further, the input port of the main control board 61 includes various entry ports such as a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable winning device 36, and a V winning opening 48. Various detection sensors 67a to 67f provided on the through gate are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors 67a to 67f, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered the ball entry port, and the game ball is a through gate. Is determined whether or not the signal has passed. Further, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the second starting opening 34, and also executes an electric accessory opening lottery based on the entry of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

The output port of the main control board 61 includes a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , The V winning opening shutter drive unit 48b that opens and closes the V winning opening shutter 48a, and the main display unit 45 are connected to each other. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the electric accessory opening is won as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. Further, when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 33 and the second start opening 34, the V winning opening 48 is opened at a predetermined timing during the round game. -The drive control of the V winning opening shutter drive unit 48b is executed so that the V winning opening shutter 48a to be closed is opened and closed. Further, in each game, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the main display unit 45, and in the open / close execution mode, the round display on the main display unit 45 is performed. The display control of unit 39 is executed.

The payout control device 70 and the voice emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry to the general winning opening 32 is specified, the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry to the first starting opening 33 is performed. When is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when the entry into the second starting port 34 is specified, one game ball is paid out. The prize ball command corresponding to is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when the entry to the large winning opening 36a is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60. To. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. Further, the launch control device 80 is connected to the operation handle 25 and the game ball launch button 26. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes according to the rotation operation amount. The game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. As described above, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximum regardless of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 of the player. A game ball is fired on the front of the game board with the same firing intensity.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the voice emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, control of the display control device 100 is performed. Further, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the voice emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 and the type of the combination of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. , Whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the advance notice effect executed in each game round, etc. are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time when the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 407 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 wins a lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, sets the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. When sorting the jackpot types, the jackpot type counter C2 is used. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate reach when the symbol sequence displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displaced and varied.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. Further, the fluctuation type counter CS is used when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45, and the symbol display device 41. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The hold information storage area 64b is provided with a first hold area Ra. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF at the timing of entering the ball are stored as pending information. It is stored in the first reserved area Ra of the area 64b in chronological order. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF at the timing of entering the ball are stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. Will be done.

The details of the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The hit random number counter C1 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 1199, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. Further, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is set in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. It is stored, and when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing of the entry.

The value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first hold area Ra moves to the determination processing execution area 64c every time the game being executed ends, and the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. Is collated with, and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not it will be a big hit.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 39, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing of the entry. The value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved area Ra moves to the determination processing execution area 64c every time the game being executed ends.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a big hit, the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Further, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b by using the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. .. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the opening / closing execution mode that shifts to the case of winning a big hit is being executed, or When the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display by the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b is the case where the game ball enters the second starting port 34. However, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 described later, and the fall random number counter CF described later are not stored in the determination processing execution area 64c (there is no hold function). Configuration).

Next, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big hit. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value, for example.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing of the entry. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reserved area Ra moves to the determination processing execution area 64c every time the game being executed ends.

The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs. To. However, when the result of the winning lottery becomes a big hit and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some of the symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 may have a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot for some of the symbols. It is a display state in which the symbols are displayed and the remaining symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 405 (b), the symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. In the situation where the reach line is formed and the reach line is formed, the symbol is varied and displayed in the symbol row Z2 to reach the reach. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, in the state where the reach line is formed, the variable display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. A combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when the reach effect is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to display a notice using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

Next, the details of the fall random number counter CF will be described. The fall random number counter CF is used when executing a fall lottery for determining whether or not to end the high probability mode in a gaming state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode. If the fall lottery is won, the lottery mode in the game round is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

The fall random number counter CF has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 299, and after reaching the maximum, it returns to 0. The fall random number counter CF is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing of the entry. The value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the first hold area Ra moves to the determination processing execution area 64c every time the game being executed ends.

The value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is collated with the hit / fail table (fall lottery win / fail table: FIG. 411) stored in the fall lottery table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and has a high probability. Whether or not to terminate the mode is determined.

Next, the details of the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 62 to determine the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value, for example.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, the details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric service holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 64d moves to the electric service execution area 64e, and then the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 in the electric service execution area 64e. A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory opening lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state. Specifically, in the electric service execution area 64e, the winning / failing table (winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery) stored in the accessory lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 are It is collated and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state.

It should be noted that at least one of the acquired value of the hit random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4, and the value of the fall random number counter CF is the special information in the present invention. Corresponds to.

Next, the pass / fail table will be described. The winning / failing table is table data for collating with the winning random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the winning random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode set as a lottery mode for the winning lottery. At the time of the winning lottery in the probability mode, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to. Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and then the determination processing execution area 64c. The hit / miss table for collating with the hit random number counter C1 transferred to the above, and the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. The pass / fail table is stored as separate table data. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a pass / fail table for the first start port (for low probability mode), a pass / fail table for the first start port (for high probability mode), and a pass / fail table for the second start port (low). Four hit / miss tables, one for the probability mode) and the hit / miss table for the second start port (for the high probability mode), are stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63.

FIG. 408 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the pass / fail table for the first starting port. FIG. 408 (a) shows a hit / miss table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 408 (b) shows a hit / miss table for the first starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 408 (a), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set as the values of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the hit / fail table (for the low probability mode) for the first starting port. There is. Then, among the values from 0 to 3979, the values other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 (20 to 3979) are out of the range. In this case, the number of value groups of the random number counter C1 which is a big hit is 20/3980 (= 1/199) with respect to the total number.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 408 (b), 199 values from 0 to 198 are set as the values of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the hit / fail table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port. Has been done. Then, among the values from 0 to 3979, the values other than the 199 values from 0 to 198 (199 to 3979) are out of the range. In this case, the number of value groups of the random number counter C1 which is a big hit is 199/3980 (= 1/20) with respect to the total number. As described above, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

FIG. 409 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the pass / fail table for the second starting port. FIG. 409 (a) shows a hit / miss table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 409 (b) shows a hit / miss table for the second starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 409 (a), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set as the values of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the hit / fail table (for the low probability mode) for the second starting port. There is. Then, in the hit / fail table for the second starting port (for the low probability mode), among the values from 0 to 3979, values other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 (20 to 3979) are given as a time saving. It is set as the value of the random number counter C1. In this case, the number of value groups of the random number counter C1 which is a big hit is 20/3980 (= 1/199) with respect to the total number.

The "time reduction grant" is a result of success or failure that does not trigger a transition to the open / close execution mode in which the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened / closed, although the support mode described later serves as a transition trigger. If the support mode is in the low frequency support mode when the time saving grant is won, the support mode shifts from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode.

It should be noted that the hit / fail table (for the low probability mode) for the second starting port in the present embodiment is not set to be off. That is, in the hit / miss table for the second starting port (for the low probability mode) in the present embodiment, the time saving is set as the hit / miss result instead of the miss.

As shown in FIG. 409 (b), 199 values from 0 to 198 are set as the values of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the hit / fail table (for high probability mode) for the second starting port. There is. Then, among the values from 0 to 3979, the values other than the 199 values from 0 to 198 (199 to 3979) are out of the range. In this case, the number of value groups of the random number counter C1 which is a big hit is 199/3980 (= 1/20) with respect to the total number. As described above, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

The "off" is a result of success or failure that does not trigger the transition of the open / close execution mode, and also does not trigger the transition of the lottery mode and the support mode.

In the present embodiment, the value group of the hit random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / fail table for the low probability mode becomes the value group of the hit random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / miss table for the high probability mode. include. However, as a result of the winning lottery, if the probability of winning the jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary.

Although it is not adopted in the winning / failing table in this embodiment, a "small hit" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

The "small hit" is a result of success or failure that does not trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened / closed, but the lottery mode described later does not trigger the transition. , The number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode is limited to one.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three modes or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode of winning lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends (3) The electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (1) open / close execution mode, the frequency of winning the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode The high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode can be set so that is relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 sec elapses or to the opening / closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number of balls entered is 10. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed twice from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec elapses or the ball enters the opening / closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening / closing door 36b at one time is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening / closing door 36b once is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode in which the low frequency winning mode is applied, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur. However, even in the open / close execution mode related to the low frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the winning of the game ball can occur.

The number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the number of opening limits for one opening are determined by winning the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the frequency of occurrence of the above is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening / closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of openings and closings than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is long, or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that the variable winning device 36 does not substantially win a prize.

The pachinko machine 10 has, as a mode of the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the above-mentioned (2) opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a winning / losing table for high probability as a winning / failing table, and a winning / losing table. It is possible to set a low probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a winning / failing table for low probability. As described with reference to FIG. 408, the case where the winning lottery is performed using the high-probability winning / failing table is compared with the case where the winning lottery is performed using the low-probability winning / failing table, and the big hit is won. There is a high probability of doing so.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening / closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 continues to launch the game ball in the same manner with respect to the game area PA. The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are used so that the frequency with which the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the above-mentioned situations. Can be set.

Specifically, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the one-time opening time of the electric accessory 34a may be set longer than that in the low-frequency support mode when the electric combination opening is won.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electric combination open is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode. May be good. Further, the electric accessory 34a may be configured to have a long opening time once. In addition, when the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times in the high frequency support mode, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is It may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory opening lottery to the next electric accessory opening lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. You may.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary gaming state that assists in the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the big hit type counter C2 is used to sort the big hit types. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 410 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 410 (a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 410 (b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to at the time of a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is to the second start port 34. It is referred to at the time of the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in FIG. 410 (a), 8R probability variable jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are set as jackpot types based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 in the distribution table for the first starting port. Has been done.

In the 8R probability variation jackpot, the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening / closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. .. Further, the 8R probability variation jackpot is a jackpot that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 48 in the first round of the round game. Specifically, the opening / closing door 36b in the first round of the round game includes the period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is in the open state in the opening period of the opening / closing door 36b in the first round of the round game. It is a big hit that sets the opening period. The opening period of the opening / closing door 36b in the first round of the round game includes the period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is open (not a part but the whole), so that one round of the round game is included. It becomes easy to enter the game ball into the V winning opening 48 opened by the eyes. As described above, it has been explained that the V winning opening shutter 48a is opened and closed at a predetermined timing during the round game. Specifically, the V winning opening shutter 48a is opened and closed for a predetermined time from the start of the opening / closing execution mode. After the lapse of time, the state is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and then the state is closed. The 8R probability variation jackpot is defined so that the opening / closing door 36b in the first round of the round game is opened during the period of the open state.

When a game ball enters the opened V winning opening 48, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode. As described above, the V winning opening 48 makes it easy for the game ball to enter in the first round of the round game, but nevertheless, if the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 48, The lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends does not shift to the high probability mode.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of executions of the game times executed in the high probability mode is limited to 50 times (ST number of times), and the number of executions of the game times executed in the high probability mode is 50 times. When it reaches, the lottery mode of the winning lottery shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. In addition, in the game times executed in the high probability mode, if the game ball is further won in the probability change jackpot and the game ball enters the V winning opening 48 opened by the probability change jackpot, the high that has been executed up to that point. The number of game times in the probability mode is reset, and after a round game executed with the probability variation jackpot as a trigger, 50 game times are counted again from the game times in the high probability mode executed thereafter. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the high probability mode, the game times in the high probability mode may be continuously executed 50 times or more.

In the 8R normal jackpot, the opening / closing number of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. .. Further, in the 8R normal jackpot, the opening / closing door 36b in the first round of the round game does not overlap with the opening period of the opening / closing door 36b in the first round of the round game and the period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is in the open state. It is a big hit that sets the opening period of. Since the opening period of the opening / closing door 36b and the opening period of the opening / closing door 36b do not overlap, the probability that the game ball will enter the V winning opening 48 is extremely low. Therefore, the 8R normal jackpot is a jackpot in which the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is substantially a low probability mode.

In this way, the probability variation jackpot is easier for the game ball to enter the V winning opening 48 in the first round of the round game than the normal jackpot, so the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends has a high probability. There is a high probability of becoming a mode. On the other hand, in the normal jackpot, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the V winning opening 48 as compared with the probability variation jackpot, so that the probability that the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the high probability mode is very low. In this specification, the distribution result of which the game ball is easy to enter the V winning opening 48 and the probability that the lottery mode of the winning lottery becomes the high probability mode is higher is referred to as "probability change jackpot" for convenience. That is, if the jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the type of the winning jackpot is a probability variable jackpot, and the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 48 opened by the jackpot, after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Although the lottery mode of the winning lottery does not shift to the high probability mode, as described above, it is called "probability variable jackpot" for convenience.

In the distribution table for the first starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 19" corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot, and "20 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. It is set to do.

As shown in FIG. 410 (b), a 16R probability variable jackpot is set as a jackpot type based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 in the distribution table for the second starting port.

In the 16R probability variation jackpot, the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening / closing execution mode is 16 times (16 rounds), and the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. .. Further, the 16R probability variation jackpot is a jackpot that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 48 in the first round of the round game. Specifically, the 16R probability variation jackpot is the first round of the round game so that the opening period of the opening / closing door 36b in the first round of the round game includes the period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is in the open state. It is a big hit that defines the opening period of the opening / closing door 36b in. The opening period of the opening / closing door 36b in the first round of the round game includes the period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is in the open state, so that the game to the V winning opening 48 opened in the first round of the round game is included. It becomes easy to enter the ball. As described above, it has been explained that the V winning opening shutter 48a is opened and closed at a predetermined timing during the round game. Specifically, the V winning opening shutter 48a is opened and closed for a predetermined time from the start of the opening / closing execution mode. After the lapse of time, the state is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and then the state is closed. The 16R probability variation jackpot is defined so that the opening / closing door 36b is opened in the first round of the round game during the period of the open state. That is, the 16R probability variation jackpot differs from the 8R probability variation jackpot only in the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening / closing execution mode, and the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode. Is the same in that is a high-frequency winning mode and that the game ball can be easily entered into the V winning opening 48 in the first round of the round game.

In the distribution table for the second starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 39" is set to correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot. That is, all of the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39" are set to correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot is the case where the jackpot is based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and the case where the jackpot is obtained. 2 It is different from the case where a big hit is made based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player.

In the present embodiment, as described above, three types of jackpots are set: 8R probability variation jackpot, 8R normal jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot, but the number is not limited to three, and includes, for example, 16R normal jackpot. It may be 4 types, 2 types, or 5 or more types. Further, the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening / closing execution mode is not limited to 8R and 16R, and may be other times such as 4R and 5R.

As described above, when the number of executions of the game times executed in the high probability mode reaches the ST number (50 times), the lottery mode of the winning lottery shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. In the embodiment, even if the game is played before the number of STs is reached, if the player wins the fall lottery described later, the lottery mode of the winning lottery is configured to shift from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. There is.

FIG. 411 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the fall lottery winning / failing table used when executing the fall lottery. As shown in FIG. 411, 100 values from 0 to 99 out of 0 to 299 are set as the values of the fall random number counter CF that wins in the fall lottery in the fall lottery winning / failing table. .. In the fall lottery winning / failing table, 200 values of 100 to 299 out of the values of 0 to 299 are set as the values of the fall random number counter CF that is lost in the fall lottery. That is, in the game times of the high probability mode, the probability of falling by winning the fall lottery, ending the high probability mode, and becoming the low probability mode is 1/3. In the game times of the high probability mode, if the fall lottery is missed, the high probability mode is continued. In addition, in this embodiment, the fall lottery is not executed in the game times of the low probability mode.

FIG. 412 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a winning / failing table (winning / failing table for electric accessory opening lottery) used when executing the electric accessory opening lottery.

FIG. 412 (a) shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 412 (a), in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode), two electric accessory opening counters C4, which are the electric accessory opening winning counters, are 0 and 1. The value is set. 464 values of 2 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is out of alignment. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening is won in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 412 (b) shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 412 (b), in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode), 462 electric accessory opening counters C4 for winning the electric combination opening are set to 0 to 461. The value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is out of alignment. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening is won in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second starting port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. ..

<< 9-3 >> Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 413 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configurations of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Some configurations of the power supply device 85 (FIG. 406) and the like are omitted. The MPU 92 is mounted on the voice emission control board 91 provided in the voice emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element having a built-in CPU, ROM 93, RAM 94, interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data input / output circuit, and the like.

Various control programs, fixed value data, tables, etc. executed by the MPU 92 are stored in the ROM 93. For example, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the ROM 93. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 60 and an effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and a display control device 100 is connected to the output side.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the voice emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 102.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio emission control device 90 are the sound light side MPU 92 and the sound light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound / light side RAM 94 are also referred to, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as a display side MPU 102.

<< 9-4 >> Outline of processing by the gaming machine:
Next, an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

<< 9-4-1 >> Transition between high and low lottery mode and support mode:
First, the case where the high and low of the lottery mode and the support mode are changed will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of winning jackpot is a normal jackpot, the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the support mode Goes into infrequent support mode.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a big hit is won by a winning lottery, the type of the winning big hit is a probability variable big hit, and a game ball enters the V winning opening 48 opened by the big hit, it opens and closes. After the end of the execution mode, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In this embodiment, if a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the type of winning jackpot is a probability variable jackpot, and the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 48 opened by the jackpot as a trigger, The lottery mode does not shift to the high probability mode, and the support mode does not shift to the high frequency support mode.

After winning a jackpot by a winning lottery and shifting the support mode to the high frequency support mode based on the type of the winning jackpot being a probable variable jackpot, the game times are executed after the high frequency support mode is started. The high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (hereinafter, also referred to as a time-saving continuation number). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of times of shortening the time reduction is, for example, 10 times. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, after shifting to the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is continued up to 10 times, which is the number of time-saving continuations. The support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode after the number of times the game has been executed has reached 10 times, which is the number of time-saving continuations since the high-frequency support mode was started. The number of times of shortening the time is not limited to the above 10 times, and may be another number.

On the other hand, the winning lottery is executed with reference to the winning / failing table (for the low probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. 409 (a), and the support mode is high based on the winning of the time saving grant in the winning lottery. When shifting to the frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode will continue as the support mode until the next big hit is won.

When the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery executed when the through gate 35 is passed is 231/233 is extremely high, so that it is electric. The accessory 34a is frequently in the electric service open state. Therefore, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the player strikes right and plays the game so that the game ball enters the second starting port 34 provided with the electric accessory 34a.

After the lottery mode shifts to the high-probability mode, the high-probability mode is continued as the lottery mode until the number of times the game is executed after the high-probability mode is started reaches a predetermined number of times (ST number of times). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of STs is, for example, 50 times. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the high-probability mode is started and then 50 game rounds, which is the number of STs, are executed, the lottery mode is subsequently changed from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode.

In addition, even if the fall lottery is won in the game times before the number of times the game is executed reaches the ST number after the high probability mode is started, the lottery mode is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. .. Specifically, if a player wins a fall lottery related to a game before the number of times the game has been executed reaches the number of STs, the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode at the start of the game, and the game times. The winning lottery is executed in the low probability mode. Therefore, in the winning lottery in the game round, the winning lottery with reference to the winning / failing table (for the low probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. 409 (a) is executed, and the winning lottery is won in the time saving. If this is the case, the high-frequency support mode will continue as the support mode until the next big hit is won.

In the game times executed in the high probability mode, if a game ball is further won in the jackpot and the game ball enters the V winning opening 48 opened by the jackpot, the game in the high probability mode executed so far. The number of times is reset, and after a round game executed with the jackpot as a trigger, 50 game times are counted again from the game times in the high probability mode executed thereafter. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the high probability mode, the game times in the high probability mode may be continuously executed 50 times or more.

<< 9-4-2 >> Game flow:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, at least four types of states can be taken as the game states that transition in the progress of the game, depending on the combination of the lottery mode and the support mode. Specifically, i) the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode, which is a low probability low support state, and ii) the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is. Low probability high support state which is high frequency support mode, iii) High probability high support state where lottery mode is high probability mode and support mode is high probability support mode, iv) High probability mode is lottery mode In addition, the support mode can be a high-probability and low-support state, which is a low-frequency support mode. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, an opening / closing execution mode in which a game ball can be entered into the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 can be set as a gaming state. The game progresses while transitioning between these game states.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the high-probability mode flag for specifying the lottery mode and the high-frequency support mode for specifying the support mode are stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64. When the high probability mode flag is OFF, the lottery mode is specified as the low probability mode, and when the high probability mode flag is ON, the lottery mode is specified as the high probability mode. When the high frequency support mode flag is OFF, the support mode is specified as the low frequency support mode, and when the high frequency support mode flag is ON, the support mode is specified as the high frequency support mode. Therefore, each of the above-mentioned low-probability low-support state, low-probability high-support state, high-probability low-support state, and high-probability high-support state is specified by the high-probability mode flag and the high-frequency support mode flag. Become. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, by switching at least one of the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag, the flow of the game progresses while the above-mentioned four states are switched.

In the present embodiment, the lottery mode is specified by one flag (that is, the high probability mode flag), but instead of this, the lottery mode is specified by two flags (that is, the high probability mode flag). It may be configured by the low probability mode flag). In this modification, when either one of the high-probability mode flag and the low-probability mode flag is turned on, the other is automatically turned off. Further, in the present embodiment, the support mode is specified by one flag (that is, the high frequency support mode flag), but instead of this, the support mode is specified by two flags (that is, the high frequency support mode). It may be configured by a flag and a low frequency support mode flag). In this modification, when either one of the high frequency support mode flag and the low frequency support mode flag is turned on, the other is automatically turned off. According to both modifications, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, by switching the flag, the flow of the game progresses while switching the above-mentioned four states.

FIG. 414 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10. When the game is started, it is initially in a low probability low support state (state H1). That is, the lottery mode is a low probability mode, and the support mode is a low frequency support mode. In the low probability low support state (state H1), the player executes a left-handed strike, causes the game ball to flow down to the left side of the game area PA, and causes the game ball to enter the first starting port 33. When the game ball enters the first starting port 33, a winning lottery is performed for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and the lottery result of the winning lottery is given to the player. A game round for notification is executed.

If the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game times executed in the low probability low support state (state H1) is out of order, the low probability low support state (state H1) is continued, and the player moves to the first starting port 33. Enter the game ball and execute the game times.

If a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game round executed in a low probability low support state and the type of the winning jackpot is a normal jackpot, the open / close execution mode is given to the player after the end of the game round. Is executed. That is, the mode shifts from the low probability low support state (state H1) to the open / close execution mode (state H2).

The pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect that urges the player to hit right prior to the round game that occurs in the open / close execution mode (state H2). The player executes a right-handed hit according to the suggestion effect, causes the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA, and causes the game ball to enter the large winning opening 36a to obtain a prize ball. In the open / close execution mode (state H2), which is executed when the type of the winning jackpot is a normal jackpot, as described above, the game ball rarely enters the V winning opening 48.

When the open / close execution mode (state H2) ends, the state shifts to the low probability low support state (state H1). That is, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode.

On the other hand, in the low probability low support state (state H1), even if the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game round and the type of the winning jackpot is the probability variation jackpot, the privilege given to the player after the end of the game round. The open / close execution mode is executed. That is, the mode shifts from the low probability low support state (state H1) to the open / close execution mode (state H3).

Prior to the round game that occurs in the open / close execution mode (state H3), the pachinko machine 10 has a suggestion effect that encourages the player to hit right, and inserts a game ball into the V winning opening 48 in the first round of the round game. Perform a suggestion effect that encourages you to make a ball. The player executes a right-handed hit according to these suggested effects, causes the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA, and the game ball is inserted into the large winning opening 36a to obtain a prize ball, and one round of the round game. A game ball is inserted into the V winning opening 48 in the large winning opening 36a. In the open / close execution mode (state H3), which is executed when the type of the winning jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, as described above, the game ball enters the V winning opening 48 in the first round of the round game. It is easy to ball.

When the game ball enters the V winning opening 48 in the first round of the round game in the open / close execution mode (state H3) and the open / close execution mode (state H3) ends, the state shifts to the high accuracy high support state (state H4). .. That is, the lottery mode is a high probability mode (limited to 50 times, which is the number of STs), and the support mode is a high frequency support mode (limited to 10 times, which is the number of times of shortening the time).

In the high-accuracy and high-support state (state H4), the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect that urges the player to hit right. In the high-accuracy high-support state (state H4), the player executes a right-handed hit according to the suggested effect to cause the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA, and the game ball enters the second starting port 34. Let me. Since the support mode is the high frequency support mode in the high accuracy and high support state, there is a possibility that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery executed when passing through the through gate 35 will be the electric accessory opening winning. Since it is extremely high at 233, the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is frequently opened. Therefore, in the high accuracy and high support state, the game ball easily enters the second starting port 34. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, a winning lottery is made for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, and the lottery result of the winning lottery is given to the player. A game round for notification is executed. That is, in the high-accuracy high support state (state H4), the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is frequently opened to the electric service, and the game ball is placed in the second starting port 34 more than usual (low support state). By entering a lot of balls, the player can receive a winning lottery in a state where the number of balls held is difficult to decrease.

When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game times executed in the high probability high support state (state H4) is a big hit, the type of the winning big hit is limited to the probability variable big hit (second start of FIG. 410 (b)). (Refer to the distribution table for the mouth), the high-accuracy high-support state H4 is shifted to the open / close execution mode H3. If the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game times executed in the high accuracy high support state (state H4) is out of order, the high accuracy high support state (state H4) is continued, and the player moves to the second starting port 34. Enter the game ball and execute the game times.

In the game times executed in the high accuracy and high support state (state H4), since the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the fall lottery described above is executed.

As described above, the game state in which the support mode is a high frequency support mode continues up to 10 game times, which is the number of time-saving continuations, but in the game times before reaching this 10 times (within 10 times). If the fall lottery is won, the lottery mode in the game round is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. That is, it shifts from the high accuracy high support state (state H4) to the low accuracy high support state (state H5). In addition, at the time of transition to the low accuracy high support state (state H5), the time-saving game count counter PNC indicating the number of games continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is held as it was before the transition. To. Therefore, the transition to the low accuracy high support state (state H5) does not reset the number of game times continuously executed in the high frequency support mode.

The winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 in the low probability high support state (state H5) is the winning / failing table (low probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. 409 (a). For) is used. Therefore, the lottery result of the winning lottery related to the game times won in the above-mentioned fall lottery is either a big hit winning or a time saving grant winning. If the time saving grant is won in the winning lottery, the high frequency support mode will be continued as the support mode until the next big hit is won. In other words, if you win the time saving grant in the winning lottery, the high frequency support mode will continue until you win the next jackpot, effectively guaranteeing the next jackpot. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 410 (b), the jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is limited to the 16R probability variable jackpot, so that the jackpot is in a low probability high support state (state H5). In), it is guaranteed that the player wins the probability change jackpot and shifts to the high probability high support state (state H4) again.

In the low accuracy and high support state (state H5), the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect that urges the player to hit right. In the low-accuracy high support state (state H5), the player executes a right-handed hit according to the suggested effect to cause the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA, and the game ball enters the second starting port 34. Let me. Since the support mode is the high frequency support mode in the low accuracy and high support state, there is a possibility that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery executed when passing through the through gate 35 will be the electric accessory opening winning. Since it is extremely high at 233, the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is frequently opened. Therefore, in the low accuracy and high support state, the game ball easily enters the second starting port 34. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, a winning lottery is made for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, and the lottery result of the winning lottery is given to the player. A game round for notification is executed. That is, in the low accuracy high support state (state H5), the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is frequently opened to the electric service, and the game ball is sent to the second starting port 34 more than usual (low support state). By entering a lot of balls, the player can receive a winning lottery in a state where the number of balls held is difficult to decrease.

If a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game round executed in a low probability high support state (state H5), the type of the winning jackpot will be a probability variable jackpot, and opening and closing will be executed as a privilege given to the player after the end of the game round. The mode is executed. That is, the mode shifts from the low accuracy high support state (state H5) to the open / close execution mode (state H3).

In summary, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the low accuracy and high support state (state H5), the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big hit is won in the winning lottery. With the number of balls held difficult to decrease, the game ball can be inserted into the second starting port 34 and the winning lottery can be repeated with high frequency until the next big hit is won. In addition, this state in which the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big hit is won is hereinafter referred to as "high support continuation state until the next time (= high support continuation state until the next time)". As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is changed from the high accuracy high support state (state H4) to the low accuracy high support state (state H5) by winning the fall lottery within 10 game times. , It is possible to surely perform the so-called consecutive chan, which is to win the jackpot again, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation to be consecutive chan.

In the high-accuracy high support state (state H4), when the number of executions of the game times executed in the high-frequency support mode reaches 10 times, which is the number of time-saving continuations, without winning the fall lottery, the support mode is high-frequency support. Move from mode to low frequency support mode. That is, it shifts from the high accuracy high support state (state H4) to the high accuracy low support state (state H6). At the time of transition to the high-probability low support state (state H6), the ST game count counter SNC, which indicates the number of games continuously executed in the high-probability mode, is held as it was before the transition. .. Therefore, the transition to the high-probability low-support state (state H6) does not reset the number of game times continuously executed in the high-probability mode.

In the high-accuracy and low-support state (state H6), the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect that urges the player to strike left. Since the support mode is the low frequency support mode in the high probability and low support state, there is a possibility that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery executed when passing through the through gate 35 will be the electric accessory opening winning. It is extremely low at 233, and the probability that the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 will be in the electric accessory open state is extremely low. Therefore, in the high accuracy and low support state (state H6), it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start port 34. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 tells the player the second start port 34. Perform a suggestion effect that encourages left-handed strikes instead of right-handed strikes. In the high-accuracy low support state (state H6), the player executes a left-handed hit according to the suggested effect to cause the game ball to flow down to the left side of the game area PA, and the game ball enters the first starting port 33. Let me. When the game ball enters the first starting port 33, a winning lottery is performed for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and the lottery result of the winning lottery is given to the player. A game round for notification is executed. In this game round, since the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the fall lottery described above is executed. If the player continues to hit right in the high accuracy and low support state (state H6), the game ball does not enter the second starting port 34, and the game ball is wasted.

When the fall lottery in the game times executed in the high probability low support state (state H6) is won, the lottery mode is shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. That is, it shifts from the high probability low support state (state H6) to the low probability low support state (state H1).

In the high-accuracy low support state (state H6), if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game round and the type of the winning jackpot is a normal jackpot, it opens and closes as a privilege given to the player after the end of the game round. The execution mode is executed. That is, the state shifts from the high-accuracy low support state (state H6) to the open / close execution mode (state H2).

In the high probability low support state (state H6), if the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game round and the type of the winning jackpot is the probability variable jackpot, it opens and closes as a privilege given to the player after the game round ends. The execution mode is executed. That is, the state shifts from the high accuracy low support state (state H6) to the open / close execution mode (state H3).

In the high probability low support state (state H6), the number of executions of the game times executed in the high probability mode is the number of STs (high) without winning the big hit in the winning lottery in the game times and not winning the fall lottery. When the count reaches 40 times after shifting to the probability low support state H6, the lottery mode is shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. That is, it shifts from the high probability low support state (state H6) to the low probability low support state (state H1).

The advantages for the players of the above-mentioned four states H1, H4, H5, and H6 specified by the lottery mode and the support mode are as follows. Of the four states H1, H4, H5, and H6, the low probability low support state H1 has the lowest advantage. Among the high accuracy high support state H4, the low accuracy high support state H5, and the high accuracy low support state H6, the high accuracy low support state H6 has the lowest advantage. This is because the high probability low support state H6 shifts to the low probability low support state (state H1) when the fall lottery is won or when the number of times the game is executed reaches the ST number. Comparing the high accuracy high support state H4 and the low accuracy high support state H5, the low accuracy high support state H5 is more advantageous than the high accuracy high support state H4. The high-accuracy high-support state H4 has a high advantage because the lottery mode is a high-probability mode, but when the number of times the game is executed reaches 10 times, which is the number of time-saving continuations, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode. Since it shifts, the advantage is low as compared with the high probability high support state H4 in which the next probability change jackpot is guaranteed.

Based on the above-mentioned changes in the gaming state, the player plays the game as follows. First, the player strikes left in the low probability low support state H1 and causes the game ball to enter the first starting port 33. At this time, the player expects to win a big hit in the winning lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and further, the type of the big hit is a probable change big hit. expect.

In the low probability low support state H1, if the jackpot is won and the type of the jackpot is a normal jackpot, the player is disappointed that the jackpot is not a probability variation jackpot but a normal jackpot, and from the low probability low support state H1. In the shifted open / close execution mode H2, the round game is repeatedly performed. After all round games are completed, it returns to the low probability low support state H1.

In the low probability low support state H1, if the jackpot is won and the type of the jackpot is the probability variation jackpot, the player is delighted to have obtained the probability variation jackpot and opens and closes from the low probability low support state H1. In the execution mode H3, the round game is repeated. After all the round games are completed, it shifts to the high accuracy and high support state H4.

In the high-accuracy high-support state H4, the player strikes right and causes the game ball to enter the second starting port 34. In the high-accuracy high-support state H4, since the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, as described above, the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is frequently opened to the electric accessory, and the second start is started. The game ball can be easily put into the mouth 34. At this time, the player expects to win a big hit in the winning lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. If the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game times executed in the high probability high support state H4 is a big hit, the type of the winning big hit is limited to the probability variable big hit, so that the player wins the big hit. I expect more.

In the high accuracy high support state H4, the player expects to win the big hit as explained above, but further, the number of games after shifting to the high accuracy high support state H4 is the number of continuous time reductions 10 We expect to win the fall lottery in the game rounds before reaching the rounds (within 10 rounds). If the fall lottery is won in a game in which the number of games has been 10 or less since the transition to the high accuracy high support state H4, the transition from the high accuracy high support state H4 to the low accuracy high support state H5 will occur first. As explained, since the low probability high support state H5 is effectively guaranteed to be the next probability variation jackpot, the player can play within 10 times after shifting to the high probability high support state H4. In the game round, you will expect to win the fall lottery.

On the other hand, in the high accuracy high support state H4, when the number of games after shifting to the high accuracy high support state H4 reaches 10 times without winning the fall lottery, the high accuracy high support state H4 to the high accuracy low. It shifts to the support state H6, but the high accuracy low support state H6 does not guarantee the next big hit. Therefore, in the high accuracy high support state H4, the player does not win the fall lottery as well as the winning lottery, and the number of games after shifting to the high accuracy high support state H4 does not reach 10 times. It will have a sense of urgency together with the above-mentioned expectation.

In the low accuracy and high support state H5, the player strikes right and causes the game ball to enter the second starting port 34. If the winning lottery is executed in the low probability high support state H5 and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode based on winning the time saving grant in the winning lottery, the high support continues until the next time explained above. It becomes a state. Therefore, in the low probability high support state H5, the player can have a sense of security that the high frequency support mode does not end as the support mode until the big hit is won in the winning lottery and the probability change big hit is distributed.

In the high accuracy high support state H4, if neither the winning lottery nor the fall lottery is won and the number of games after shifting to the high accuracy high support state H4 reaches 10 times, the support mode Shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, and as a result, shifts from the high accuracy high support state H4 to the high accuracy low support state H6.

In the high-accuracy low support state H6, the player strikes left and causes the game ball to enter the first starting port 33. In the high accuracy low support state H6, the player did not win the big hit in the high accuracy high support state H4 before shifting to the high accuracy low support state H6, and the number of games was 10 times in the high accuracy high support state H4. While being disappointed that he did not win the fall lottery in the following game times,
i) Winning a fall lottery,
ii) Winning a big hit in the winning lottery,
iii) The number of executions of the game times after shifting to the high accuracy low support state H6 reaches 40 times (50 times when counting after shifting to the high accuracy high support state H4).
The game times will be repeated until any of the above is satisfied. When the above i) or iii) is satisfied, the state shifts from the high probability low support state H6 to the low probability low support state H1. When the above ii) is satisfied, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode H2 or H3 corresponding to the distribution result by the distribution determination.

Further, in the high probability low support state H6, since the lottery mode is a high probability mode, the player can still have a feeling of expectation that the big hit will not be won, and further, the big hit is won and the type of the big hit is. It becomes a probability change jackpot, and you can have a feeling of expectation that you want to return to the high probability high support state H4. In addition, it has a sense of urgency as to whether or not it will win the fall lottery, along with the above-mentioned expectation.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment having the above-mentioned game flow, when a big hit is won in a winning lottery in a low probability low support state H1 and the game shifts to a high probability high support state H4 by being distributed to a probability change big hit. In addition, the probability of winning a big hit next time (hereinafter referred to as "continuation rate") will be considered below.

In the high accuracy high support state H4, when the number of games after shifting to the high accuracy high support state H4 is within the time reduction continuation number (10 times) and the fall lottery is won, from the high accuracy high support state H4 , It shifts to the low probability high support state H5 where the next probability change jackpot is guaranteed. Therefore, in order to calculate the continuation rate in the high accuracy high support state H4, in addition to the case of winning a big hit in the winning lottery (the distribution is 100% probability variation big hit), the high accuracy high support state H4 to the low accuracy high support state H5 It is necessary to consider the case of migrating to. Therefore, in one game, the probability of not winning in the fall lottery and not winning the big hit in the winning lottery is calculated, and from that probability, the probability of losing to the winning lottery or the falling lottery in all the time-saving continuation times (10 times). Is calculated, and the value obtained by subtracting the probability of deviation from 1 is the continuation rate. Specifically, the continuation rate can be calculated according to the following equation (1).

Continuation rate = 1-{(1-1 / 3) × (1-1 / 20)} ^ 10 ... (1)

In the formula (1), "1-1 / 3" is the probability that the fall lottery will not be won in one game. "1-1 / 20" is the probability that a big hit will not be won in the winning lottery in one game round in the high probability mode (the distribution is 100% probability variable big hit). "10" is the number of time-saving continuations. "^" Is an operator that represents a power calculation. When the formula (1) is calculated, the continuation rate is about 99.0%. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a continuous-changing system completely different from the conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to realize a model having extremely high specifications in terms of continuous-changing performance.

According to the pachinko machine 10 having the continuous-changing performance, the following effects are also obtained as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. Conventionally, there are loop type and ST type pachinko machines, which have different methods for continuing big hits. In the loop type pachinko machine, since it is confirmed that the next big hit will be won in the high accuracy and high support state, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability of distribution to the probable change big hit when the big hit is won. It can be said that in the loop type pachinko machine, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability that when the symbols are aligned, the aligned symbols become probabilistic symbols (for example, "7" symbol). For this reason, in the high accuracy and high support state, the player simply watches the game times being digested, and when the symbols are aligned, the player only expects that the aligned symbols are probabilistic symbols. .. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, in the high-accuracy high-support state H4, the number of times the game is executed after the high-frequency support mode is started is 10 times or less. At the times, the player can be expected to win the fall lottery or the winning lottery. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as compared with the conventional loop type pachinko machine, the player is not won not only in the winning lottery but also in the falling lottery, and the high accuracy and high support state H4. It is possible to give a sense of urgency as to whether or not the number of games played after shifting to is 10 times.

In the ST type pachinko machine, the continuation rate in the high accuracy and high support state is calculated by calculating the probability of losing in all ST times from the probability of not winning a big hit in one winning lottery, and subtracting the probability of losing from 1. Can be obtained by. Therefore, in the ST type pachinko machine, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability that the symbols are aligned (the probability of winning a big hit) and the number of STs. Therefore, in the ST type pachinko machine, as the number of game times executed in the high accuracy and high support state progresses, the game feels a sense of urgency as to whether the number of game times will reach the ST number without winning a big hit. Can be given to a person. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high accuracy high support state H4, in addition to the big hit winning (the symbols are aligned), the falling lottery is not won, and the machine shifts to the high accuracy high support state H4. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the number of games played after that has reached the number of times of continuous time reduction (10 times). Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as compared with the conventional ST type pachinko machine, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of urgency by the amount of the fall winning addition to the big hit winning. can.

As a pachinko machine with other game characteristics, the following configuration can be considered. In a specific advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, if the small hit is won in the winning lottery until the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches a predetermined number (the small hit is won with a high probability). , It is conceivable that the game ball enters the V winning opening to continue the opening / closing execution mode (round game). According to this configuration, since the game times executed until the transition from the advantageous state to the open / close execution mode is consumed in a short time, the open / close execution mode is repeated at short intervals, and the gambling is excessively increased. There was a problem to end up. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the lottery mode is low as a lottery mode in which it is promised that a big hit will be finally won in the route of shifting from the high probability high support state H4 to the open / close execution mode H3. Since the winning lottery can be repeated in the probability mode via the low accuracy high support state H5, it is possible to take a sufficient time to shift from the high accuracy high support state H4 to the open / close execution mode H3. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from being excessively increased by repeating the opening / closing execution mode at short intervals. In addition, by taking sufficient time, it is possible to produce a secondary effect that various effects can be performed. These effects can never be achieved even with the configuration of the pachinko machine having the above-mentioned other game characteristics.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment exhibits excellent effects as compared with various types of conventional pachinko machines.

<< 9-5 >> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-mentioned processing in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes will be described below. The MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal in addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, but description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 415 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

In step St0101, reading processing of various detection sensors 67a to 67f is executed. That is, the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67f connected to the main control device 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. Then, the process proceeds to step St0102.

In step St0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step St0103.

In step St0103, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the fall random number counter CF, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the fall random number counter CF, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and each of these counter values reaches the maximum value. If so, clear to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 and CF are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step St0104. The value of the variable type counter CS is updated in the normal processing (FIG. 419) described later.

In step St0104, a ball entry process for the start port accompanying the entry into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the starting port of step St0104 will be described later. After executing step St0104, the process proceeds to step St0105.

In step St0105, a ball entry process for through ball accompanying the entry into the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the through of step St0105 will be described later. After executing step St0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Incoming ball entry process for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be described. The ball entry process for the start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 415: St0104).

FIG. 416 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the starting port. In step St0201, whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (starting entry) is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting opening 33. If it is determined in step St0201 that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (St0201: YES), the process proceeds to step St0202, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set the command. Then, the process proceeds to step St0203.

In step St0203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33. Then, the process proceeds to step St0204.

In step St0204, the start hold quantity RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold quantity RaN), which is a value stored in the hold quantity storage area of the first hold area Ra, is read, and the first start hold quantity RaN is the upper limit value. (In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not it is less than 4). In step St0204, if the first start hold number RaN is not less than the upper limit value (St0204: NO), the ball entry process for the main start port is terminated.

On the other hand, in step St0204, if the first start hold number RaN is less than the upper limit value (St0204: YES), the process proceeds to step St0205, and 1 is added to the first start hold number RaN. Then, the process proceeds to step St0206.

In step St0206, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF updated in step St0103 (FIG. 415) are stored in the first free storage area of the corresponding hold area. It is stored in the storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold number RaN to which 1 is added in step St0205. After executing step St0206, the process proceeds to step St0207.

In step St0207, the first determination process is executed. The pre-judgment process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF, and the winning lottery winning / failing determination result (lottery result) and the jackpot. This is a process of executing determination of the type, presence / absence of reach, success / failure result of the fall lottery, etc. before the pending information becomes the target of the winning lottery (determination process) by the main control device 60. The details of the pre-determination process will be described later. After executing step St0207, the process proceeds to step St0208.

In step St0208, a process of setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the prior determination process executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF is first reserved. Set as a command.

The first hold command is based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first start port 33 and the determination result (first determination information) by the advance determination process based on the hold information acquired based on the entry. This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize the hold information before it becomes the target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The first hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 419: step St0503) of the normal process described later.

When the voice emission control device 90 receives the first hold command transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the voice emission control device 90 displays the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing the number of holdings is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds. After executing step St0208, the ball entry process for the main starting port is completed.

If it is determined in step St0201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 33 (St0201: NO), the process proceeds to step St0209, and whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

If it is determined in step St0209 that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (St0209: YES), the process proceeds to step St0210, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball. Set the command. Then, the process proceeds to step St0211. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2t0209 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (St0209: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is terminated.

In step St0211, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal indicating that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 to the management control device on the game hall side. Then, the process proceeds to step St0212.

In step St0212, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The open / close execution mode flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is turned OFF when the open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process. If it is determined in step St0212 that the open / close execution mode flag is not ON (step St0212: NO), the process proceeds to step St0213. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St0212 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (step St0212: YES), the ball entry process for the main start port is terminated.

In step St0213, it is determined whether or not the special figure unit 37 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b provided in the special symbol unit 37 is in variable display. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the special map variation display flag in the special map variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special symbol variation display flag is turned on when starting the variation display for either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, and is turned off when the variation display ends.

If it is determined in step St0213 that the special figure unit 37 is not in the variable display (St0213: NO), the process proceeds to step St0214. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St0213 that the flag for displaying the special figure variation is ON (step St0213: YES), the ball entry process for the main starting port is terminated.

In step St0214, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF updated in step St0103 (FIG. 415) are stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. After executing step St0214, the process proceeds to step St0215.

In step St0215, the second start port entry flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. The second starting port entry flag is turned on when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34, and is turned off when the second symbol starts to fluctuate when the second starting opening 34 enters the ball. Be made. After executing step St0215, the ball entry process for the main starting port is completed.

<First judgment process>
Next, the prior determination process will be described. The pre-determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 416: St0207) for the ball entry process for the start port.

FIG. 417 is a flowchart showing the prior determination process. As described above, in the prior judgment process, based on the hold information, the hold information determines the judgment result such as the winning / failing judgment of the winning lottery, the judgment of the type of the jackpot, the judgment of the presence / absence of the reach, and the winning / failing judgment of the fall lottery. This is a process to be executed before the target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60.

In step St0301, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting port in the ball entering process for the starting port (FIG. 416) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step St0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the determination result of the pre-judgment process executed by the previous entry before the current entry is read from the corresponding storage area, and the presence or absence of the probable change jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery by the current entry. In addition, by grasping whether or not the player has won the fall lottery, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round is determined.

If it is determined in step St0302 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round, the process proceeds to (St0302: YES), step St0303, and the winning / failing table is stored. Refer to the hit / miss table (for low probability mode) for the first starting port stored in the area 63a. After that, the process proceeds to step St0308, and as a result of referring to the hit / fail table (for low probability mode) for the first start port, it is determined whether or not the information of the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the big hit. ..

On the other hand, in step St0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round (St0302: NO), the process proceeds to step St0304 and the entry is made this time. The value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the storage area by the sphere is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step St0305, and it is determined whether or not the player has won the fall lottery by referring to the fall win / fail determination table stored in the fall lottery table storage area 63d.

If it is determined in step St0305 that the fall lottery has been won (St0305: YES), the process proceeds to step St0306, the fall winning information is stored in the pre-determination processing result storage area 64h, and the process proceeds to step St0303. In step St0303, as described above, the hit / miss table for the first start port (for the low probability mode) stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step St0308, and as a result of referring to the hit / miss table (for low probability mode) for the first start port, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the big hit.

If it is determined in step St0305 that the fall lottery has not been won (St0305: NO), the process proceeds to step St0307, and the hit / fail table for the first starting port (for high probability mode) is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step St0308, and as a result of referring to the hit / miss table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the big hit.

In step St0308, if it is determined that the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a big hit (St0308: YES), the process proceeds to step St0309, and the ball is stored in the storage area by entering the starting port this time. Grasp the value of the jackpot type counter C2. After that, the process proceeds to step St0310, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2, which is the target of distribution this time, is acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33, refer to the distribution table for the first starting port. , When the ball is acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 34, the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to. After executing step St0310, the process proceeds to step St0311.

In step St0311, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step St0311 that the probability variation jackpot is supported (St0311: YES), the process proceeds to step St0312, and the probability variation jackpot information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the first determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St0311 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (St0311: NO), the process proceeds to step St0313, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the first determination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step St0308 that the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to the big hit (St0308: NO), the process proceeds to step St0314, and the ball enters the storage area this time. The value of the stored reach random number counter C3 is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step St0315, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step St0316, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

If it is determined in step St0316 that the reach generation is supported (St0316: YES), the process proceeds to step St0317, and the reach generation information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the first determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St0316 that the reach generation is not supported (St0316: NO), the prior determination process is terminated as it is.

<Through ball entry process>
Next, the ball entry process for through will be described. The ball entry process for through is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 415: St0105).

FIG. 418 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for thru. In step St0401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35. If it is determined in step St0401 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (St0401: YES), the process proceeds to step St0402, and whether the number of reserved characters SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Judge whether or not. The number of reserved items SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that is reserved for performing the electric accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved items SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (St0401: NO), the entry process for this through is terminated.

If it is determined in step St0402 that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the number of reserved items SN (St0402: YES), the process proceeds to step St0403 and 1 is added to the number of reserved items SN. Then, the process proceeds to step St0404.

In step St0404, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step St0103 (FIG. 415) is stored in the first free storage area of the electric service holding area 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the ball entry process for through is completed.

On the other hand, in step St0402, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is not less than the upper limit value (St0402: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is equal to or more than the upper limit value, The ball entry process for through is completed without storing the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter, also referred to as “power on”). In the normal process, the main process of the game is executed.

FIG. 419 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step St0501, the startup process is executed. Specifically, the initial setting of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, the process proceeds to step St0502.

In step St0502, a start-up command is set. The start-up command is a command for starting a demo movie for each control device on the sub side when the power is turned on. Then, the process proceeds to step St0503.

In step St0503, output data such as a start-up command set in step St0502 and a command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when commands related to the effect such as a start-up command, a variable command, a type command, and a first hold command are set, they are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After executing step St0503, the process proceeds to step St0504.

In step St0504, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variable type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step St0505.

In step St0505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step St0506. In step St0506, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of a symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display unit 37a, the second symbol display unit 37b, and the like are performed. The details of the game times control process will be described later. After executing step St0506, the process proceeds to step St0507.

In step St0507, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. The details of the game state transition process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step St0508.

In step St0508, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is in the open state. The details of the processing for electric service support will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step St0509.

In step St0509, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal process (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process in step St0503). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached. If it is determined in step St0509 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal process (St0509: NO), in step St0510 and step St0511 until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached. Within the remaining time of, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step St0510, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step St0511, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St0509 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (St0509: YES), the process returns to step St0503 and each process from step St0503 to step St0508 is performed. Run.

Since the execution time of each process from step St0503 to step St0508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process will be described. The game times control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 419: St0506) of the normal process.

FIG. 420 is a flowchart showing the game times control process. In step St0601, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The open / close execution mode flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is turned OFF when the open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process.

If it is determined in step St0601 that the open / close execution mode is in progress (St0601: YES), the game round control process ends without executing any of the processes after step St0602. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the game round is not started regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St0601 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (St0601: NO), the process proceeds to step St0602.

In step St0602, it is determined whether or not the special figure unit 37 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b provided in the special symbol unit 37 is in variable display. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the special map variation display flag in the special map variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special symbol variation display flag is turned on when starting the variation display for either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, and is turned off when the variation display ends.

If it is determined in step St0602 that the special figure unit 37 is not displaying the fluctuation (St0602: NO), the process proceeds to step St0603.

In step St0603, the fluctuation start processing for starting the fluctuation display in the special figure unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start processing will be described later. After executing step St0603, the game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St0602 that the special figure unit 37 is in the variable display (St0602: YES), the process proceeds to step St0604.

In step St0604, the variation end processing for terminating the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the variable end processing will be described later. After executing step St0604, the game round control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described. The variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 420: St0603) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 421 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. In step St0701, it is determined whether or not the second start port entry flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The second starting port entry flag is turned on when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34, and is turned off when the second symbol starts to fluctuate when the second starting opening 34 enters the ball. Be made. If it is determined in step St0701 that the second start port entry flag is not ON (St0701: NO), the process proceeds to step St0702.

In step St0702, it is determined whether or not the first start pending number RaN exceeds "0". When the number of first start hold RaN is "0" or less, it means that the number of start hold for the first start port 33 is "0". Therefore, if it is determined in step St0702 that the first start hold quantity RaN is "0" or less (St0702: NO), the fluctuation start process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St0702 that the first start pending number RaN exceeds "0" (St0702: YES), the process proceeds to step St0703.

In step St0703, the hold information shift process for setting the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step St0706. The details of the hold information shift process will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St0701 that the second start port entry flag is ON (St0701: YES), the process proceeds to step St0704, and the second symbol display unit flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g. Is turned on. The second symbol display unit flag is information for specifying whether the target for starting the variation display this time is the second symbol display unit 37b or the first symbol display unit 37a. Then, the process proceeds to step St0705.

In step St0705, the second start port entry flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing step St0705, the process proceeds to step St0706.

In step St0706, a fall determination process including a process when the fall lottery is won is performed. The details of the fall determination process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step St0707.

In step St0707, a hit determination process including a process when a big hit is won in the hit lottery is performed. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step St0707, the process proceeds to step St0708.

In step St0708, the fluctuation time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b based on the game state, the presence / absence of the jackpot and the time reduction, and the presence / absence of the reach. This is a process for setting the fluctuation time. The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step St0708, the process proceeds to step St0709.

In step St0709, a variable command is set. Whether the game round this time is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first start port 33 or the change command is based on the entry into the second start opening 34. Information indicating whether or not reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation time set in step St0708 are included. After executing step St0709, the process proceeds to step St0710.

In step St0710, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence / absence of a big hit, the presence / absence of a time saving grant, and the result of the distribution determination. That is, the type command includes information on whether or not a jackpot was won in the winning lottery, information on whether or not a time saving grant was won in the winning lottery, and information on the type of jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot information, 8R normal. It contains jackpot information, 16R probability variation jackpot information, or missed result information.

The variable command and the type command set in step St0709 and step St0710 are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by step St0503 in the normal process (FIG. 419). The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variable command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step St0710, the process proceeds to step St0711.

In step St0711, among the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is started to display the variation of the symbol. Specifically, when the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is specified to be the first symbol display unit 37a, and the variable display is started. When the second symbol display unit flag is ON, it is specified that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is the second symbol display unit 37b, and the variable display is started. After executing step St0711, the process proceeds to step St0712.

In step St0712, the special figure change display flag stored in the special figure change display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step St0712, this fluctuation start process ends.

<Hold information shift processing>
Next, the hold information shift process will be described. The hold information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 421: St0703).

FIG. 422 is a flowchart showing the hold information shift process. In step St0801, 1 is subtracted from the first start hold number RaN for the first hold area Ra that is the processing target for executing the hold information shift process. Then, the process proceeds to step St0802.

In step St0802, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c. Then, the process proceeds to step St0803.

In step St0803, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step St0803, the process proceeds to step St0804.

In step St0804, when the second symbol display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. Then, the process proceeds to step St0805.

In step St0805, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the first hold area Ra, that is, corresponding to the first start port 33. A shift command including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the pending information shift process is terminated.

<Fall judgment processing>
Next, the fall determination process will be described. The fall determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 421: St0706).

FIG. 423 is a flowchart showing the fall determination process. In step St0901, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step St0901 that the mode is in the high probability mode (St0901: YES), the process proceeds to step St0902.

In step St0902, the winning / failing determination of the falling lottery is executed with reference to the winning / failing table for the falling lottery. Specifically, the value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is the value set as the winning in the fall lottery winning / failing table (see FIG. 411) of the falling lottery table storage area 63d. Determine if they match. In the following step St0903, if the result of the winning / failing determination in step St0902 is winning the fall lottery (St0903: YES), the process proceeds to step St0904.

In step St0904, the high probability mode flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step St0905, and a fall command is set. The fall command is a command for winning the fall lottery and notifying the voice emission control device 90 that the winning / failing lottery mode has changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. After executing step St0905, the main fall determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St0901 that the mode is not in the high probability mode (St0901: NO), or if the result of the winning / failing determination is not won in the fall lottery in step St0903 (St0903: NO), the main fall determination process is immediately performed. finish.

<Collision detection processing>
Next, the hit determination process will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 421: St0707).

FIG. 424 is a flowchart showing the hit determination process. In step St1001, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step St1001 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (St1001: NO), the process proceeds to step St1002, and it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step St1002 that the mode is in the high probability mode (St1002: YES), the process proceeds to step St1003, and the pass / fail determination is made with reference to the pass / fail table for the first starting port (for high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is a big hit in the hit / miss table for the first start port (for high probability mode) shown in FIG. 408 (b). Judges whether or not it matches the value set as. Then, the process proceeds to step St1008.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1002 that the mode is not in the high probability mode (St1002: NO), the process proceeds to step St1004, and the pass / fail determination is made with reference to the pass / fail table for the first starting port (for low probability mode). Specifically, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a big hit win in the hit / miss table (for low probability mode) for the first start port shown in FIG. 408 (a). Judge whether or not it matches the value. Then, the process proceeds to step St1008.

If it is determined in step St1001 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (St1001: YES), the process proceeds to step St1005, and it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step St1005 that the mode is in the high probability mode (St1005: YES), the process proceeds to step St1006, and the pass / fail determination is made with reference to the pass / fail table for the second starting port (for high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is a big hit in the hit / miss table for the second start port (for high probability mode) shown in FIG. 409 (b). Judges whether or not it matches the value set as. Then, the process proceeds to step St1006.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1005 that the mode is not in the high probability mode (St1005: NO), the process proceeds to step St1007, and the pass / fail determination is made with reference to the pass / fail table for the second starting port (for low probability mode). Specifically, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a big hit win in the hit / miss table (for low probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. 409 (a). Judge whether or not it matches the value. Then, the process proceeds to step St1008.

In step St1008, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination (winning lottery) in step St1003, step St1004, step St1006, or step St1007 is a big hit winning. In step St1008, if the result of the winning / failing determination is a big hit (St1008: YES), the process proceeds to step St1009.

In step St1009, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step St1009 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (St1009: NO), the process proceeds to step St1010, and the distribution table for the first starting port (FIG. 410 (a)) is referred to. And make a distribution judgment. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is included in the numerical range of the 8R probability variation jackpot or the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1009 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (St1009: YES), the process proceeds to step St1011 and the distribution table for the second starting port (FIG. 410 (b)) is displayed. The distribution is determined with reference to it. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is included in the numerical range of the 16R probability variation jackpot. In the distribution table for the second starting port of the present embodiment, since the distribution result is only one type of 16R probability variation jackpot, the result of the above determination is always 16R probability variation jackpot. After executing the process of step St1010 or step St1011, the process proceeds to step St1012.

In step St1012, the flag (big hit flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step St1010 or step St1011 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is an 8R probability variation jackpot, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag is turned ON, if it is an 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal jackpot flag is turned ON, and if it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set. Turn it on. After executing step St1012, the process proceeds to step St1013.

In step St1013, a process of setting a stop result for a big hit is executed. Specifically, in this game round in which a big hit is won, it is set which stop result is displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to end the variable display. It is a process to do. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot distributed in step St1010 or stepSt1011 is acquired. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step St1013, the final hit determination process is terminated.

In step St1008, if the result of the winning lottery in step St1003, step St1004, step St1006, or step St1007 is not a big hit winning (St1008: NO), the process proceeds to step St1014.

In step St1014, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination (winning lottery) in step St1007 is the time saving grant winning (winning the time saving grant). In step St1014, if the result of the winning / failing determination is the winning of the reduced working hours (St1014: YES), the process proceeds to step St1015.

In step St1015, the time saving flag is turned ON. Specifically, the time saving flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. The time saving grant flag is a flag indicating that the time saving grant has been won. After executing step St1015, the process proceeds to step St1016.

In step St1016, a process of setting a stop result for giving a time saving is executed. Specifically, it is a process for setting which stop result is displayed in the second symbol display unit 37b to end the variable display in the current game round in which the time saving grant is won. .. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for assigning the time reduction in the stop result table storage area 63f, the stop result data corresponding to the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the stop result table storage area 63f can be obtained. The address information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step St1016, the final hit determination process is terminated.

In step St1014, if the result of the winning / failing determination in step St1007 is not the reduction of working hours winning (St1014: NO), the process proceeds to step St1017.

In step St1017, it is determined whether or not reach occurs in the game round with reference to the reach determination table. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is the value set as the occurrence of reach in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. It is determined whether or not it matches with. Then, the process proceeds to step St1018.

In step St1018, if the result of the reach determination in step St1017 is that reach occurs in the game round (St1018: YES), the process proceeds to step St1019 and the reach generation flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach generation flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step St1019, the process proceeds to step St1020.

On the other hand, in step St1018, if the result of the reach determination in step St1017 is that reach does not occur in the game round (St1018: NO), the process proceeds to step St1020 without executing step St1019.

In step St1020, a process of setting a stop result for disconnection is executed. Specifically, in this game round, which is the result of the deviation, the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b is used to set which stop result is displayed to end the variable display. It is a process. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for deviation in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c can be obtained. It is acquired and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step St1016, the final hit determination process is terminated.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 421: St0708).

FIG. 425 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation time setting process. In step St1101, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, the process proceeds to step St1102.

In step St1102, a process for specifying the fluctuation time table is executed. The fluctuation time table is tabular data in which the fluctuation time information (variation time information), which is the time from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the symbol, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS are used as data elements. In the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63, various types of variable time tables are stored according to the game state, the presence / absence of a jackpot and time reduction, and the presence / absence of reach occurrence. In step S1102, one fluctuation time table is specified from these fluctuation time tables. Specifically, based on the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag, the current gaming state is among the low probability low support state, high probability high support state, low probability high support state, and high probability low support state. The judgment result, the judgment result of the hit / fail judgment to determine whether or not the jackpot or the time reduction is given, and the judgment result of the reach judgment to determine whether or not the reach has occurred, Based on the above, one variable time table is specified from the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. After executing step St1102, the process proceeds to step St1103.

In step St1103, by referring to the fluctuation time table specified in step St1102, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step St1101 is acquired. After executing step St1103, the process proceeds to step St1104.

In step St1104, the fluctuation time information acquired in step St1103 is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

<Variation end processing>
Next, the variable end processing will be described. The variation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 420: St0604) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 426 is a flowchart showing the variation end processing. In step St1201, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the fluctuation time is the time from the start of fluctuation of the symbol row to the stop of all the symbol rows, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step St1201, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 is "0". The value of the fluctuation time information is set in the above-mentioned fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 425). The value of the set fluctuation time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started.

If it is determined in step St1201 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (St1201: NO), the fluctuation end processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step St1201 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (St1201: YES), the process proceeds to step St1202, and the game times of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b correspond to the current game times. Performs processing to end the fluctuation of the symbol in the symbol display unit. Subsequent step St1203 turns off the special figure change display flag stored in the special figure change display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64. After executing step St1203, the process proceeds to step St1204.

In step St1204, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is a big hit winning. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R normal jackpot flag, and the 16R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step St1204 that none of the above flags is ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery related to the current game round is not a big hit winning (St1204: NO), the process proceeds to step St1205.

In step St1205, a time saving process, which is a process executed when the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is a time saving grant, is executed. The details of the time saving process will be described later. After executing step St1205, the process proceeds to step St1206.

In step St1206, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step St1206 that the high probability mode flag is ON (St1206: YES), the process proceeds to step St1207, and the value of the ST game count counter SNC is decremented by 1. The ST game count counter SNC is a counter for counting how many times the number of games continuously executed in the high probability mode reaches the ST number. After executing step St1207, the process proceeds to step St1208.

In step St1208, it is determined whether or not the number of game times continuously executed in the high probability mode has reached the ST number (for example, 50 times). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the ST game count counter SNC is 0. Since the ST game count counter SNC indicates the remaining number of ST counts, the number of game rounds continuously executed in the high probability mode can be determined by determining whether or not SNC = 0. It can be determined whether or not the number of STs has been reached.

In step St1208, when it is determined that the value of the ST game count counter SNC is 0 (St1208: YES), that is, it is determined that the number of games continuously executed in the high probability mode has reached the ST count. If so, the process proceeds to step St1209 and the high probability mode flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step St1210.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step St1208 that the value of the ST game count counter SNC is not 0 (St1208: NO), that is, before the number of games continuously executed in the high probability mode reaches the ST number ( = Within the number of STs), the process proceeds to step St1210 without executing step St1209.

Even when it is determined in step St1206 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (St1206: NO), the process proceeds to step St1210.

In step St1210, it is determined whether or not the high support continuation state flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON until the next time. The high support continuation state flag until the next time is a flag indicating whether or not the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big hit is won (high support continuation state until the next time), and the time reduction in step St1205. It is turned ON when it is determined that the time saving grant flag is ON in the grant process, and is turned OFF at the start of the open / close execution mode (at the start of the opening period).

If it is determined in step St1210 that the high support continuation state flag is ON until the next time (St1210: YES), the variable end processing is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1210 that the high support continuation state flag is not ON until the next time (St1210: NO), the process proceeds to step St1211.

In step St1211, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step St1211 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (St1211: YES), the process proceeds to step St1212.

In step St1212, the value of the time-saving game count counter PNC is subtracted by 1. The time-saving game count counter PNC is a counter for counting how many times the number of continuously executed games in the high-frequency support mode reaches the time-saving continuation number. Then, the process proceeds to step St1213.

In step St1213, it is determined whether or not the number of game times continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode has reached the time-saving continuation number (for example, 10 times). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the time-saving game count counter PNC is 0 or less. Since the time-saving game count counter PNC indicates the remaining number of time-saving continuation times, the number of games continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode is determined by determining whether or not PNC = 0. It is possible to determine whether or not the number of times has reached the number of times of shortening of time.

When it is determined in step St1213 that the value of the time-saving game count counter PNC is 0 (St1213: YES), that is, the number of games continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode has reached the time-saving continuation number. If it is determined, the process proceeds to step St1214, and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After executing step St1214, the variable end processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step St1213 that the value of the time-saving game count counter PNC is not 0 (St1213: NO), that is, the number of games continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode reaches the time-saving continuation number. If it is determined that it is before (= within the number of time reduction continuations), the variable end processing is immediately terminated without executing step St1214.

Even when it is determined in step St1211 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (St1211: NO), the variable end processing is immediately terminated.

In step St1204, it is determined that any one of the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R normal jackpot flag, and the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is the jackpot winning. In that case (St1204: YES), the process proceeds to step St1215, and the open / close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step St1215, the variable time end processing is terminated.

<Processing for time saving>
Next, the time saving process will be described. The time saving process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 426: St1205) for the variable end process.

FIG. 427 is a flowchart showing a time saving process. In step St1301, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON.

If it is determined in step St1301 that the time reduction grant flag is ON (St1301: YES), the process proceeds to step St1302 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, when the time saving grant flag is ON, that is, when the time saving grant is won in the winning lottery, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. After executing step St1302, the process proceeds to step St1303.

In step St1303, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is used as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Set. After executing step St1303, the process proceeds to step St1304.

In step St1304, the high support continuation state flag is turned ON until the next time, then the process proceeds to step St1305, and until the next time, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub side recognize that the high support continuation state is in the high support continuation state until the next time. The high support continuation state command is set as the command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After executing step St1305, the process proceeds to step St1306.

In step St1306, the time saving flag is turned off. After executing step St1306, the time saving process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1301 that the time saving grant flag is not ON (St1301: NO), the time saving granting process is immediately terminated.

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 419: St0507) of the normal process.

FIG. 428 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step St1401, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the large winning opening opening / closing processing period (at the beginning of the ending period) in the opening / closing execution mode, and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the open / close execution mode.

If it is determined in step St1401 that the ending period flag is not ON (St1401: NO), the process proceeds to step St1402, and it is determined whether or not the open / close processing period flag is ON. The opening / closing processing period flag is turned on at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening / closing execution mode and the large winning opening opening / closing processing period, which is the period during which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed, is started. , It is turned off at the timing when the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 36b is completed.

If it is determined in step St1402 that the open / close processing period flag is not ON (St1402: NO), the process proceeds to step St1403, and it is determined whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the beginning of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step St1403 that the opening period flag is not ON (St1403: NO), the process proceeds to step St1404 to determine whether or not the open / close execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step St1404 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (St1404: YES), the process proceeds to step St1405. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1404 that the open / close execution mode flag is OFF (St1404: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

In step St1405, the high probability mode flag is turned off. After executing step St1405, the process proceeds to step St1406 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After executing step St1406, the process proceeds to step St1407, and the high support continuation status flag is turned off until the next time. After executing step St1407, the process proceeds to step St1408.

In step St1408, an opening / closing scenario setting process for setting an opening / closing scenario is executed. The opening / closing scenario defines a pattern of opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 36b in the round game. In this embodiment, the condition for shifting the opening / closing door 36b from the closed state to the open state (hereinafter, also referred to as “opening condition”) This is a program in which the condition for shifting the opening / closing door 36b from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter, also referred to as “closed condition”) is recorded. The opening / closing scenario is stored in the opening / closing scenario storage area 63i of the ROM 63.

The opening conditions are as follows, for example.
-The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing to start each round game in the open / close execution mode.
When the above one item is satisfied, the opening / closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

The closing conditions are as follows, for example.
-The elapsed time from the start of each round game exceeds the predetermined upper limit duration (for example, 15 seconds).
-The number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening 36a after starting each round game exceeds the predetermined maximum number.
When either of the above two items is satisfied, the opening / closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the V winning opening shutter 48a is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the opening / closing execution mode by the shutter opening / closing process described later. After that, it is controlled to be closed. On the other hand, the opening / closing scenario that defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the opening / closing door 36b described above is set to be different depending on whether the type of jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot. When the type of jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, that is, when the 8R probability variation jackpot flag or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag of RAM 64 is ON, a V prize is won during the opening period of the opening / closing door 36b in the first round of the round game. The above-mentioned opening condition is determined so as to include a period in which the mouth shutter 48a is in the open state (including not a part but the whole). As a result, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the winning jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the V winning opening 48 opened in the first round of the round game.

In addition, instead of the configuration in which the opening period of the opening / closing door 36b in the first round of the round game includes the period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is in the open state, the opening / closing in the number of rounds other than the first round of the round game. The opening period of the door 36b may include a period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is in the open state. After executing step St1408, the process proceeds to step St1409.

In step St1409, the opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period (hereinafter, also referred to as an opening time) in the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, the same constant length of opening time is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step St1409, the process proceeds to step St1410.

In step St1410, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step St0503 in the normal process (FIG. 419). This opening command contains information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current open / close execution mode. The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the large winning opening opening / closing processing period based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step St1410, the process proceeds to step St1411 and the opening period flag is turned ON. After executing step St1411, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step St1403 that the opening period flag is ON (St1403: YES), the process proceeds to step St1412.

In step St1412, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step St1412 that the opening period has ended (St1412: YES), the process proceeds to step St1413 and the opening period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step St1414.

In step St1413, a round display start process for notifying the type of the opening / closing execution mode this time is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the above address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is specified from the specified stop result data. Confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round display unit 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step St1414, the process proceeds to step St1415.

In step St1415, the open / close processing period flag is turned ON. In the following step St1415, an open / close process start command is set. The open / close process start command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the open / close process period has started. The open / close process start command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 419: step St0503) of the normal process. After executing step St1415, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step St1402 that the open / close processing period flag is ON (St1402: YES), the process proceeds to step St1416 to execute the large winning opening opening / closing process. The process of opening and closing the large winning opening will be described later. After executing step St1416, the process proceeds to step St1417.

In step St1417, the shutter opening / closing process is executed. The shutter opening / closing process will be described later. After executing step St1417, the process proceeds to step St1418.

In step St1418, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed depending on whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened is "0". do. If it is determined in step St1418 that the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed (St1418: YES), the process proceeds to step St1419. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1418 that the large winning opening opening / closing process has not been completed (St1418: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

In step St1419, the open / close processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step St1420.

In step St1420, the round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is terminated so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step St1420, the process proceeds to step St1421.

In step St1421, the ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the ending period (hereinafter, also referred to as an ending time) in the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set in each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step St1421, the process proceeds to step St1422.

In step St1422, an ending command is set. This set ending command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step St0503 in the normal process (FIG. 419). The voice emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on the reception of the ending command. After executing step St1422, the process proceeds to step St1423.

In step St1423, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step St1401 that the ending period flag is ON (St1401: YES), the process proceeds to step St1424.

In step St1424, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (St1421), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time in step St1421 is “0”. If it is determined in step St1424 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (St1424: YES), the process proceeds to step St1425.

In step St1425, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step St1426, and the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of the game times after the end of the current ending period. Details of the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step St1426, the process proceeds to step St1427.

In step St1427, the open / close execution mode flag is turned off. After executing step St1426, the game state transition process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1424 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (St1424: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

<Large winning opening opening / closing process>
Next, the process of opening and closing the large winning opening will be described. The large winning opening opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 428: St1416) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 429 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening / closing process. In step St1501, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning driving unit 36c. If it is determined in step St1501 that the opening / closing door 36b is not open (St1501: NO), the process proceeds to step St1502.

In step St1502, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening / closing scenario set by the opening / closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the opening / closing door 36b. If it is determined in step St1502 that the opening condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied (St1502: YES), the process proceeds to step St1503.

In step St1503, the opening / closing door 36b is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step St1504.

In step St1504, an open / close door open command is set. The opening / closing door opening command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the opening / closing door 36b has been opened. The opening / closing door opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 419: step St0503) of the normal processing. The voice emission control device 90 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has started based on the received open / close door opening command, and also gives a large prize to the production contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46. The content will be updated to correspond to the start of opening of the mouth 36a. Further, the voice emission control device 90 transmits the opening / closing door opening command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has started based on the received open / close door opening command, and at the same time, the effect content in the symbol display device 41 is described in the large winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the start of opening. After executing step St1504, the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed.

If it is determined in step St1502 that the opening condition of the opening / closing door 36b is not satisfied (St1502: NO), the large winning opening opening / closing process is terminated without executing steps St1503 and St1504.

If it is determined in step St1501 that the opening / closing door 36b is being opened (St1501: YES), the process proceeds to step St1505.

In step St1505, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening / closing scenario set by the opening / closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the opening / closing door 36b. If it is determined in step St1505 that the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied (St1505: YES), the process proceeds to step St1506.

In step St1506, the opening / closing door 36b is closed. Then, the process proceeds to step St1507.

In step St1507, an open / close door closing command is set. The opening / closing door closing command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the opening / closing door 36b has been closed. The opening / closing door closing command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 419: step St0503) of the normal processing. The voice emission control device 90 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed based on the received open / close door closing command, and also displays the production contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 as the large winning opening. The content will be updated to correspond to the completion of the opening of 36a. Further, the voice emission control device 90 transmits the opening / closing door closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. Based on the received open / close door closing command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed, and at the same time, the effect content in the symbol display device 41 is the opening of the large winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the end of. After executing step St1507, the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed.

If it is determined in step St1505 that the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b is not satisfied (St1505: NO), the large winning opening opening / closing process is terminated without executing steps St1506 and Step1507.

<Shutter opening / closing process>
Next, the shutter opening / closing process will be described. The shutter opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 428: St1417) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 430 is a flowchart showing the shutter opening / closing process. In step St1601, it is determined whether or not the V winning opening shutter 48a is open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the V winning opening shutter 48a is open depending on the operating state of the V winning opening shutter drive unit 48b (FIG. 406).

If it is determined in step St1601 that the V winning opening shutter 48a is not open (St1601: NO), the process proceeds to step St1602.

In step St1602, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the V winning opening shutter 48a is satisfied. In the present embodiment, as described above, the V winning opening shutter 48a is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the opening / closing execution mode, and then closed. It works like this. In order to realize this operation, in step St1602, the opening condition of the V winning opening shutter 48a is satisfied by counting with a timer counter whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the opening / closing execution mode and the opening timing has been reached. Judge whether or not it is done.

If it is determined in step St1602 that the opening condition of the V winning opening shutter 48a is satisfied (St1602: YES), the process proceeds to step St1603 to open the V winning opening shutter 48a. After executing step St1603, the process proceeds to step St1606, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1602 that the opening condition of the V winning opening shutter 48a is not satisfied (St1602: NO), the process proceeds to step St1606 without executing step St1603.

If it is determined in step St1601 that the V winning opening shutter 48a is open (St1601: YES), the process proceeds to step St1604.

In step St1604, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the V winning opening shutter 48a is satisfied. Specifically, the closing condition of the V winning opening shutter 48a is set by counting with a timer counter whether the timing for closing the V winning opening shutter 48a has reached the time when the above-mentioned fixed time (10 seconds) has elapsed from the opening timing. Determine if it holds.

If it is determined in step St1604 that the closing condition of the V winning opening shutter 48a is satisfied (St1604: YES), the process proceeds to step St1605 and the V winning opening shutter 48a is closed. After executing step St1605, the process proceeds to step St1606.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1604 that the closing condition of the V winning opening shutter 48a is not satisfied (St1604: NO), the process proceeds to step St1606 without executing step St1605.

In step St1606, the V winning determination process is executed. The V prize determination process will be described later. After executing step St1606, the shutter opening / closing process is terminated.

<V winning judgment processing>
Next, the V winning determination process will be described. The V winning determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the shutter opening / closing process (FIG. 430: St1606).

FIG. 431 is a flowchart showing the V winning determination process. In step St1701, it is determined whether or not the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 48 is detected. This determination is determined from the detection signal of the detection sensor 67f that detects the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 48. If the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 48 is detected in step St1701 (St1701: YES), the process proceeds to step St1702.

In step St1702, the V winning flag is turned ON. The V winning flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 48, and the lottery mode in the game times executed after the end of the round game is set to either the high probability mode or the low probability mode. It is used to determine whether to do it. The V winning flag is turned on when the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 48 is detected, and turned off at the end of the ending period. After executing step St1702, the process proceeds to step St1703.

In step St1703, a V winning command is set. The V winning command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 419: step St0503) of the normal process. The voice emitting device that has received the V winning command executes the setting for executing the V winning effect. The V winning effect is an effect for notifying the player that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 48. After executing step St1703, the V winning determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 48 is not detected in step St1701 (St1701: NO), the V winning determination process is terminated without executing step St1702 and step St1703.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 428: St1426) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 432 is a flowchart showing the transition process at the end of the ending period. In step St1801, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is ON.

If it is determined in step St1801 that the V winning flag is ON (St1801: YES), the process proceeds to step St1802 and the flag erasing process is executed. Specifically, the ON flag among the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag is turned off, and the non-ON flag is maintained in that state. Also, the V winning flag is turned off. After executing step St1802, the process proceeds to step St1803.

In step St1803, the high probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step St1804, and the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after ending the open / close execution mode, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. After executing step St1804, the process proceeds to step St1805.

In step St1805, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. .. After executing step St1805, the process proceeds to step St1806.

In step St1806, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is used as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Set. After executing step St1806, the process proceeds to step St1807.

In step St1807, 50 is set in the ST game count counter SNC provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. The value set in the ST game count counter SNC is a value indicating the limited number of games when the high probability mode is executed by limiting the number of games. After executing step St1807, the process proceeds to step St1808.

In step St1808, 10 is set in the time-saving game count counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. The value set in the time-saving game count counter PNC is a value indicating the limited number of games when the high-frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. After executing step St1808, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1801 that the V winning flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step St1809 (St1801: NO), and the flag erasing process is executed. Specifically, the ON flag among the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag is turned off, and the non-ON flag is maintained in that state. After executing step St1809, the process proceeds to step St1810.

In step St1810, a low-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub-side to recognize that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. .. After executing step St1810, the process proceeds to step St1811.

In step St1811, the low-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is used as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Set. After executing step St1811, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electric service support>
Next, the processing for electric service support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 419: St0508) of the normal process.

FIG. 433 is a flowchart showing the electric service support process. In step St1901, it is determined whether or not the support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The supporting flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened and turned off when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step St1901 that the supporting flag is not ON (St1901: NO), the process proceeds to step St1902.

In step St1902, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned on when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is ON. Is. If it is determined in step St1902 that the support winning flag is not ON (St1902: NO), the process proceeds to step St1903.

In step St1903, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal diagram unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

If it is determined in step St1903 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (St1903: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (St1903: YES), the process proceeds to step St1904.

In step St1904, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuation display of the symbol in the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step St1904 that it is the end timing of the variable display (St1904: YES), the process proceeds to step St1905, the off display is set, and then the main electric service support process is terminated. By setting the off display, the variable display of the symbol in the normal figure unit 38 is terminated in the state where the off display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1904 that it is not the end timing of the variation display (St1904: NO), the process proceeds to step St1906.

In step St1906, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0". If it is determined in step St1906 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is "0" (St1906: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1906 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0" (St1906: YES), the process proceeds to step St1907.

In step St1907, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step St1908 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If the mode is not the open / close execution mode (St1907: NO) in step St1907 and the high frequency support mode is set in step St1908 (St1908: YES), the process proceeds to step St1909 and the electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. Then, the process proceeds to step St1910.

In step St1910, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step St1909 is a support winning. If it is determined in step St1910 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is the support winning (St1910: YES), the process proceeds to step St1911, the support winning flag is turned ON, and the counter area 64f of the RAM 64 is provided. Set "3" in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. After that, the processing for electric service support is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1910 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not the support winning (St1910: NO), the electric service support process is terminated without executing the process of step St1911.

If it is determined in step St1907 that the open / close execution mode is set (St1907: YES), or if it is determined in step St1908 that the mode is not in the high frequency support mode (St1908: NO), the process proceeds to step St1912 and the motorized accessory opening lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. Then, the process proceeds to step St1913.

In step St1913, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step St1912 is the support winning. If it is determined in step St1913 that the support is not won (St1913: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1913 that the support is won (St1913: YES), the process proceeds to step St1914, the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , End the processing for main electric service support.

If it is determined in step St1902 that the support winning flag is ON (St1902: YES), the process proceeds to step St1915, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step St1915 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (St1915: NO), the pattern variation is being displayed in the normal drawing unit 38, so that the main electric service support process is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St1915 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (St1915: YES), the process proceeds to step St1916.

In step St1916, the hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the pattern in the normal drawing unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped and displayed. After that, the process proceeds to step St1917, the supporting flag is turned ON, and the support winning flag is turned OFF. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

If it is determined in step St1901 that the supporting flag is ON (St1901: YES), the process proceeds to step St1918, and the electric function opening / closing control process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

<Electrical function opening / closing control processing>
Next, the electric function opening / closing control process will be described. The electric service opening / closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 433: St1918) of the electric service support process.

FIG. 434 is a flowchart showing the electric function opening / closing control process. In step St2001, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in the driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (St2001: YES), the process proceeds to step St2002.

In step St2002, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step St2002 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (St2002: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. That is, if the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the main electric accessory opening / closing control process ends.

If it is determined in step St2002 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (St2002: YES), the process proceeds to step St2003, and a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state is performed. “250” (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step St2003, the process proceeds to step St2004.

In step St2004, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step St2005 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step St2005 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (St2005: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St2005 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (St2005: YES), the process proceeds to step St2006 and the supporting flag is turned off. After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step St2001 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (St20011: NO), the process proceeds to step St2007, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step St2007 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (St2007: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St2007 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (St2007: YES), the process proceeds to step St2008, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state is executed. .. Then, the process proceeds to step St2009.

In step St2009, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and if it is determined that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (St2009: NO), the process proceeds to step St2010 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step St2010 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (St2010: YES), the process proceeds to step St2011, and "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St2009 that the open / close execution mode is set (St2009: YES), or if it is determined in step St2010 that the mode is not in the high frequency support mode (St2010: NO), the process proceeds to step 201712, and the second step is performed. The timer counter area T2 is set to "100" (that is, 0.2 sec). After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

<< 9-6 >> Various processes executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device in order to execute the advance notice effect and the result notification effect will be described. The process executed by the voice emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 435 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed with a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described.

In step St2101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound / light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main MPU 62, and the commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Read sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step St2101, the process proceeds to step St2102.

In step St2102, the pending command correspondence process is executed. In the hold command correspondence process, the process corresponding to the first hold command among the commands stored in step St2101 is performed. The details of the pending command support processing will be described later. After executing step St2102, the process proceeds to step St2103.

In step St2103, the game rotation effect setting process is executed. In the game time effect setting process, the effect to be executed in the game time from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the symbol is set. The details of the game time production setting process will be described later. After executing step St2103, the process proceeds to step St2104.

In step St2104, the opening / closing execution mode effect processing is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode production processing, processing related to the production in the opening period, the production in the large winning opening opening / closing processing period, and the production in the ending period is performed. After executing step St2104, the process proceeds to step St2105.

In step St2105, the background effect processing is executed. In the background effect processing, a process of displaying a background moving image determined according to a command indicating a game state received from the main MPU 62 on the symbol display device 41 is performed. For example, processing is performed to display a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode is ongoing, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that the high-probability mode is continuing. .. After executing step St2105, the process proceeds to step St2106.

In step St2106, the V winning effect processing is executed. In the V-winning effect processing, a process of displaying an effect image (moving image) determined according to the V-winning command received from the main MPU 62 on the symbol display device 41 is performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a V winning command has been received from the main MPU 62 during the execution of the large winning opening opening / closing process in the opening / closing execution mode, and if it is determined that the V winning command has been received, a game is played in the V winning opening 48. A process is performed in which the symbol display device 41 displays an effect image for notifying the player that the ball has entered. By visually recognizing the effect image displayed on the symbol display device 41 indicating that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 48, the player wins the jackpot by the winning lottery, and the type of the winning jackpot changes. You can recognize that it is a big hit. After executing step St2106, the process proceeds to step St2107.

In step St2107, the fall effect processing is executed. In the fall effect processing, a process of displaying an effect image (moving image) determined according to the fall command received from the main MPU 62 on the symbol display device 41 is performed. Specifically, whether or not a fall command is received from the main MPU 62 when the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode (that is, in the high accuracy and high support state). When the determination is made and it is determined that the command has been received, a process of displaying an effect image that can indicate that the player is in an advantageous state is displayed on the symbol display device 41. By visually recognizing the effect image displayed on the symbol display device 41, which may indicate that the player is in an advantageous state, the player shifts the lottery mode from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and as a result, the lottery mode is changed to the low probability mode. It can be admitted that the transition to the low-probability high-support state H5 has occurred. On the other hand, when the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode (that is, in the high probability low support state), it is determined whether or not the fall command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined that the command has been received, a process is performed in which the symbol display device 41 displays an effect image that can indicate that the player is in a disadvantageous state. By visually recognizing the effect image displayed on the symbol display device 41, which may indicate that the state is disadvantageous to the player, the player shifts the lottery mode from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and as a result, the lottery mode is changed to the low probability mode. It can be acknowledged that the transition to the low probability low support state H1 has occurred. After executing step St2107, the process proceeds to step St2108.

In step St2108, the high support continuous effect processing is executed until the next time. In the high support continuation effect processing until the next time, a process of displaying an effect image (moving image) determined according to the high support continuation state command received from the main MPU 62 on the symbol display device 41 is performed. By visually recognizing the effect image displayed on the symbol display device 41, which is determined according to the high support continuation state command until the next time, the player can continue the high frequency support mode as the support mode until the next big hit is won ( It is possible to recognize that the state has shifted to the high support continuation state until the next time. After executing step St2108, the process proceeds to step St2109.

In step St2109, other processing is executed. The other processing is a process of displaying a demo image (moving image) on the symbol display device 41 when the game is not performed by the player. After executing step St2109, the process proceeds to step St2110.

In step St2110, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the above-mentioned effect processing. After executing step St2110, the process proceeds to step St2111.

In step St2111, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read in the above-mentioned BGM process and each effect process. After executing step St2111, this timer interrupt process ends.

<Processing for pending commands>
Next, the pending command correspondence process will be described. The hold command correspondence process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 435: St2102).

FIG. 436 is a flowchart showing the pending command correspondence process. In step St2201, it is determined whether or not the first hold command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step St2201 that the first hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 (St2201: YES), the process proceeds to step St2202.

In step St2202, the update process of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94 is executed. The first reserved quantity counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33 in the sound light side MPU 92. In the update process of the first hold quantity counter area, the information of the first hold quantity counter area is updated to the information of the hold count included in the first hold command to be read this time. After executing step St2202, the process proceeds to step St2203.

In step St2203, the hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display unit 37c (color of the LED lamp to be turned on) based on the number of hold information acquired based on the entry into the first start port 33 specified in step St2202. And combinations). After executing step St2203, the process corresponding to this hold command is terminated.

The reason why the processing of step St2202 and step St2203 is performed as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while the backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the voice emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, if the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information relating to the entry into the first starting port 33 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the hold information is stored and held in the main control device 60. On the other hand, the voice emission control device 90 grasps that the number of reserved information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first hold count counter area is counted up each time the voice emission control device 90 receives the first hold command, the hold information actually held and stored in the main control device 60 is used. There may be a problem that the number of information on hold and the number of reserved information grasped by the voice emission control device 90 do not match. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 transmits the first hold command including the information on the number of holds, and the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command each time. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the included number of holds is set in the first hold number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

If it is determined in step St2201 that the first hold command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (St2201: NO), the hold command correspondence process ends without executing steps St2202 and Step2203.

<Game times production setting process>
Next, the game rotation effect setting process will be described. The game rotation effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 435: St2103) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 437 is a flowchart showing the game rotation effect setting process. In step St2301, it is determined whether or not the variation command and the type command have been received. If it is determined in step St2301 that the change command and the type command have not been received (St2301: NO), the game round effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step St2301 that the variable command and the type command have been received (St2301: YES), the process proceeds to step St2302.

In step St2302, the variable command and the type command received this time are read, and from these commands, information on the presence / absence of a big hit, the presence / absence of a time saving grant, the type of a big hit, the presence / absence of a reach, and the fluctuation time is grasped. Then, the grasped information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Then, the process proceeds to step St2303.

In step St2303, the effect pattern setting process is executed. The effect pattern setting process is a process of determining and setting an effect pattern (preliminary effect, content of reach effect, execution timing) to be executed in this game round based on the effect pattern table. The details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step St2303, the process proceeds to step St2304.

In step St2304, the stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery of this game round is a 16R probability variation jackpot, an 8R probability variation jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, the same symbol is displayed on the effective line L1 (see FIG. 405). The information corresponding to the stop result for which the combination is established is set as the information of the stop symbol this time. Specifically, when the result of the winning lottery of this game round is a 16R probability variation jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot, the same odd-numbered symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, and the same. A combination of even symbols can be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, this selectivity is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the same combination of even-numbered symbols, but instead, the former is selected over the latter. The configuration may have a high rate, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot. Further, when the result of the winning lottery of this game round is an 8R normal jackpot, the same even-numbered symbol combination is selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the big hit lottery of this game is a deviation result, it is determined whether or not reach has occurred from the content of the variable command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of reach, it corresponds to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L1 and the stop result is established in which the combination of reach symbols is established on the effective line L1. The information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L1 and the combination of the reach symbols is not established on the effective line L1. The corresponding information is set as the information of the stop symbol of this time.

If the result of the winning lottery for this game is a time-saving symbol, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the predetermined combination of symbols is established on the effective line L1 (see FIG. 405) is provided in the stop symbol of this time. Set as information. The combination of predetermined symbols corresponding to the time-saving symbols is, for example, [3.4.1] (see FIG. 405). After executing step St2304, the process proceeds to step St2305.

In step St2305, a process for setting a variation display pattern of the current game times is executed. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the current game is specified from the content of the fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information on the stop symbol set in the above step St2304 are combined. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. Then, the process proceeds to step St2306.

In step St2306, information on the effect pattern set in step St2303, the stop symbol set in step St2304, and the variation display pattern set in step St2305 in this game round is set in the effect command. After that, the process proceeds to step St2307, and the effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect content corresponding to the received effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step St2307, the process proceeds to step St2308.

In step St2308, the update process at the start of fluctuation is executed. The update process at the start of the fluctuation is a process for updating the hold display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41. The details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later. After executing step St2308, the game round effect setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 437: St2303) of the game turn effect setting process.

FIG. 438 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process. In step St2401, a random number RN for an effect pattern is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound / light side RAM 94. Then, the process proceeds to step St2402.

In step St2402, a process for specifying the effect pattern table is executed. The effect pattern table is three-dimensional tabular data in which the effect pattern to be executed in the game times, the fluctuation time, and the random number RN for the effect pattern are data elements. In the effect pattern table storage area 93a of the ROM 93, various types of effect pattern tables are stored according to the presence / absence of a big hit, the presence / absence of time saving, and the presence / absence of reach. In step St2402, one effect pattern table is specified from these effect pattern tables. Specifically, the effect pattern table storage area of the ROM 93 is based on the presence / absence of the jackpot, the presence / absence of the time saving, the type of the jackpot, and the presence / absence of the reach, which are grasped in step St2302 of the game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 437). One production pattern table is specified from 93a. After executing step St2402, the process proceeds to step St2403.

In step St2403, with reference to the effect pattern table specified in St2402, the fluctuation time grasped in step St2302 of the game round effect setting process (FIG. 437) and the value of the random number RN for the current effect pattern obtained by step St2401. Acquires the production pattern corresponding to and. After executing step St2403, the process proceeds to step St2404.

In step St2404, the effect pattern acquired in step St2403 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step St2404, the present effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Update process at the start of fluctuation>
Next, the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of the fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 437: St2308) of the game rotation effect setting process.

FIG. 439 is a flowchart showing an update process at the start of fluctuation. In step St2501, it is determined whether or not the variable command received this time is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33. If it is determined in step St2501 that the variable command received this time is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33 (St2501: YES), the process proceeds to step St2502. The information in the first reserved quantity counter area is updated so that the number stored in the first reserved quantity counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1. After that, the update process at the start of fluctuation is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step St2501 that the variable command received this time does not relate to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33 (St2501: NO), step St2502 is performed. The update process at the start of this fluctuation is terminated without being executed.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, the process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly the main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and the processes that are executed when a command is received from the voice emission control device 90. There is a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes the main process after the power is turned on, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. If the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, the main process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 440 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described.

In step St2601, the initial setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the character information in the compressed format stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, the information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also, make other settings necessary for initialization. Then, the process proceeds to step St2602.

In step St2602, the interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process executed every time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 441 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step St2701, the command storage process is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 442 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed by detecting the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105. In the V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute the display instruction.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal generated in VDP105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is performed every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Therefore, since the VDP 105 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image is started or displayed during the drawing of the image. It is possible to suppress the expansion of an image accompanying a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information inside is stored. Hereinafter, the processing details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described.

In step St2801, command correspondence processing is executed. In the command correspondence process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area are analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 441), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when an effect command is stored, control of drawing and displaying an image is started so that the effect mode specified by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, and when it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of drawing and displaying an image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command correspondence process (St2801), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so that there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the voice emission control device 90 and the effect is started, it is highly possible that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop symbol set by the voice emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the mode. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41.

In step St2802, the display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command correspondence process (St2801) or the like. .. Then, the process proceeds to step St2803.

In step St2803, task processing is executed. In the task process, the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting process (St2802). In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step St2804.

In step St2804, the drawing process is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character determined by the task process (St2803) are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on these information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received at the time of the previous V interrupt processing on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process proceeds to step St2805, other processing is executed, and then the V interrupt processing is terminated. As described above, an example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described.

<< 9-7 >> Action / Effect:
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-probability high-support state H4, the number of times the game is executed after the high-frequency support mode is started reaches the number of time-saving continuations (10 times). If the fall lottery is won (within), the lottery mode in the game times won in the fall lottery is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and as a result, the high probability high support state H4 is changed to the low probability high support state H5. Will be migrated. Then, in the low probability high support state H5, when the time saving grant is won in the winning lottery, the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big hit is won. In the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is frequently opened, the game ball is easily entered into the second starting port 34, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls held. Therefore, the winning lottery, which is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, can be executed with high frequency. Therefore, if it is possible to shift to the low accuracy and high support state H5, the next big hit is effectively guaranteed. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-accuracy high-support state H4, not only is the player expected to win a big hit in the winning lottery, but also the game after the high-frequency support mode is started. It is possible to expect the player to win the fall lottery in the game times in which the number of times of execution is 10 times or less.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the low accuracy high support state H5, the player is in a state where the number of balls held is difficult to decrease, and the lottery mode is high frequency until the next big hit is won in the winning lottery. You can have a sense of security that the support mode will not end.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-accuracy high-support state H4, the number of times the game is executed after shifting to the high-accuracy high-support state H4 without winning either the winning lottery or the fall lottery. When the number reaches 10 times, the support mode is shifted from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, and as a result, the high accuracy high support state H4 is shifted to the high accuracy low support state H6. The high-accuracy low-support state H6 is based on the fact that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode and that the distribution of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot is based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. For this reason, the advantage for the player is lower than that of the low probability high support state H5. When the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second starting port 34, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls held, whereas the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. In this case, since it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 34 and the number of balls held continues to decrease, the high accuracy low support state H6 is less advantageous to the player than the low accuracy high support state H5. Further, in the case of a big hit, the distribution mode of the big hit type is based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, and the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is higher than the case of the big hit. Since it is less advantageous for the player to hit the jackpot based on The high-accuracy and low-support state H6 in which the game ball is inserted is less advantageous to the player. Therefore, in the high-accuracy high-support state H4, the player does not win not only the winning lottery but also the fall lottery, and the number of times the game is executed after shifting to the high-accuracy high-support state H4 is the number of continuous time reductions (10). (Times) will be reached, and there will be a sense of urgency as to whether or not the high-accuracy high-support state H4 will shift to the high-accuracy low-support state H6.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation, a sense of security, and a sense of urgency.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-accuracy high-support state H4, the number of times the game is executed after the high-frequency support mode is started reaches the number of times of short-time continuation (within 10 times), and the lottery is performed. When the player is elected, the state shifts from the high accuracy high support state H4 to the low accuracy high support state H5. The low accuracy and high support state H5 is, as explained above, effectively guaranteed the next jackpot. Therefore, the probability (continuation rate) of winning the big hit next time when shifting to the high accuracy and high support state H4 is a value calculated by the following equation (1) (= equation (1) shown above). ..

Continuation rate = 1-{(1-1 / 3) × (1-1 / 20)} ^ 10 ... (1)

In the formula (1), "1-1 / 3" is the probability that the fall lottery will not be won in one game. "1-1 / 20" is the probability that a big hit will not be won in the winning lottery in one game round in the high probability mode (the distribution is 100% probability variable big hit). "10" is the number of time-saving continuations. "^" Is an operator that represents a power calculation. When the formula (1) is calculated, the continuation rate is about 99.0%. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a continuous-changing system completely different from the conventional pachinko machine, and can realize a device having extremely high specifications in terms of continuous-changing performance.

According to the pachinko machine 10 having the continuous-changing performance, the following effects are also obtained as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. Conventionally, there are loop type and ST type pachinko machines, which have different methods for continuing big hits. In the loop type pachinko machine, since it is confirmed that the next big hit will be won in the high accuracy and high support state, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability of distribution to the probable change big hit when the big hit is won. It can be said that in the loop type pachinko machine, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability that when the symbols are aligned, the aligned symbols become probabilistic symbols (for example, "7" symbol). For this reason, in the high accuracy and high support state, the player simply watches the game times being digested, and when the symbols are aligned, the player only expects that the aligned symbols are probabilistic symbols. .. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, in the high-accuracy high-support state H4, the number of times the game is executed after the high-frequency support mode is started is 10 times or less. At the times, the player can be expected to win the fall lottery or the winning lottery. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as compared with the conventional loop type pachinko machine, the player is not won not only in the winning lottery but also in the falling lottery, and the high accuracy and high support state H4. It is possible to give a sense of urgency as to whether or not the number of games played after shifting to is 10 times.

In the ST type pachinko machine, the continuation rate in the high accuracy and high support state is calculated by calculating the probability of losing in all ST times from the probability of not winning a big hit in one winning lottery, and subtracting the probability of losing from 1. Can be obtained by. Therefore, in the ST type pachinko machine, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability that the symbols are aligned (the probability of winning a big hit) and the number of STs. Therefore, in the ST type pachinko machine, as the number of game times executed in the high accuracy and high support state progresses, the game feels a sense of urgency as to whether the number of game times will reach the ST number without winning a big hit. Can be given to a person. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high accuracy high support state H4, in addition to the big hit winning (the symbols are aligned), the falling lottery is not won, and the machine shifts to the high accuracy high support state H4. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the number of games played after that has reached the number of times of continuous time reduction (10 times). Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as compared with the conventional ST type pachinko machine, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of urgency by the amount of the fall winning addition to the big hit winning. can.

As a pachinko machine with other game characteristics, the following configuration can be considered. In a specific advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, if the small hit is won in the winning lottery until the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches a predetermined number (the small hit is won with a high probability). , It is conceivable that the game ball enters the V winning opening to continue the opening / closing execution mode (round game). According to this configuration, since the game times executed until the transition from the advantageous state to the open / close execution mode is consumed in a short time, the open / close execution mode is repeated at short intervals, and the gambling is excessively increased. There was a problem to end up. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the lottery mode is low as a lottery mode in which it is promised that a big hit will be finally won in the route of shifting from the high probability high support state H4 to the open / close execution mode H3. Since the winning lottery can be repeated in the probability mode via the low accuracy high support state H5, it is possible to take a sufficient time to shift from the high accuracy high support state H4 to the open / close execution mode H3. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from being excessively increased by repeating the opening / closing execution mode at short intervals. In addition, by taking sufficient time, it is possible to produce a secondary effect that various effects can be performed. These effects can never be achieved even with the configuration of the pachinko machine having the above-mentioned other game characteristics.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment exhibits excellent effects as compared with various types of conventional pachinko machines.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, which has not been described so far, as one of the transitions of the gaming state, the high-accuracy high-support state H4 (see FIG. 414) is passed through the open / close execution mode H2. It may shift to the low probability low support state H1. Specifically, immediately after shifting from the low probability low support state H1 to the high probability high support state H4 via the open / close execution mode H3, the random number counter hits the first hold area Ra of the hold information storage area 64b (FIG. 407). Consider the case where the value of C1 (hereinafter referred to as special 1 hold) remains. In this case, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the entry is not valid until all the winning lottery based on the special 1 hold is executed (to the second starting opening 34). Because there is no function to hold the entry of the game ball). Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high accuracy and high support state H4, a winning lottery based on the special 1 hold may be executed and the pachinko machine 10 may be normally distributed to a big hit. When it is normally distributed to a big hit, it shifts from the high accuracy high support state H4 to the low accuracy low support state H1 via the open / close execution mode H2.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the special 1 hold remains immediately after shifting from the low accuracy low support state H1 to the high accuracy high support state H4 via the open / close execution mode H3. In the winning lottery based on the special 1 hold, you will have a sense of urgency as to whether or not you will win the jackpot and be distributed to the regular jackpot. Further, in the high-accuracy and high-support state H4, the player can avoid wasteful hitting of the game ball due to invalid entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, so that the player can use the first hold display area Ds1. Check the number of holdings displayed in (FIG. 405), and if the number of holdings exists, press the weight button 25b provided on the operation handle 25 to stop the firing of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism. You may let me. Further, the player may perform the following operations.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, an effect of displaying a symbol on the symbol display device 41 is performed in order to notify the result of the winning lottery, but the player wins from the effect in the low probability low support state H1. When it is determined that the probability of winning a big hit in the lottery is extremely high, the weight button 25b provided on the operation handle 25 may be pressed to stop the launching of the gaming ball by the gaming ball launching mechanism. By this operation (hereinafter referred to as stop-hit operation), when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the distribution result by the distribution determination becomes a probability variation jackpot, a high accuracy high support state is performed via the open / close execution mode H3. After H4, the number of special 1 hold remaining in the first hold area Ra of the hold information storage area 64b (FIG. 407) can be reduced. As a result, in the high accuracy high support state H4, the special 1 hold is exhausted and the normal jackpot is won, and the transition to the low accuracy low support state H1 via the open / close execution mode H2 is eliminated as much as possible. At the same time, it is possible to make the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 effective at an early stage.

On the other hand, it can be determined that the player who wants to increase the number of fluctuations of the symbol (that is, the number of winning lottery) as much as possible has an extremely high probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery from the production in the low probability low support state H1. In that case, the game may be continued without performing the stop striking operation. That is, the player is aware of the risk of shifting to the low accuracy low support state H1 via the open / close execution mode H2 in the high accuracy high support state H4, and continues the game without performing the stop operation. Therefore, the number of times the symbol changes can be increased. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment wins a big hit in the winning lottery in the low probability low support state H1, and when the distribution result by the distribution determination becomes the probability change big hit, the stop hitting operation is performed and the above is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by providing a game property in which it is possible to select whether to avoid the risk of the above or to continue the game and increase the number of fluctuations of the symbol while being aware of the risk.

In addition, in the above-mentioned high accuracy and high support state H4, during the period in which the winning lottery based on the special 1 hold is executed, the symbol display device 41 may be configured to perform an effect including a special effect content. As the special production content, for example, it may be configured to include a battle production and a result notification production.

The battle production (combat production) is, for example, a production in which the player-side character and the enemy-side character confront each other, and before notifying the player whether the result is favorable or unfavorable for the player. It is a production of. In the present embodiment, in the battle production during the above period, if the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the distribution result by the distribution determination is a probable variable jackpot, or if the fall lottery is won, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. It is a production that suggests that if the distribution result by the minute judgment is a normal big hit, it corresponds to either of the cases (when neither the fall lottery nor the winning lottery is won). .. Then, after the battle effect is executed, the result notification effect is executed to announce whether the result is advantageous or unfavorable for the player. As a result notification effect, specifically, when the player wins the fall lottery, the player shifts to the low accuracy and high support state H5 as described above, which is highly advantageous for the player. Perform a victory effect in which the side character wins. In addition, even if a big hit is won in the winning lottery and the distribution result by the distribution determination becomes a probabilistic jackpot, the player-side character wins the winning effect. If a big hit is won in the winning lottery and the distribution result by the distribution judgment becomes a normal big hit, the player side character is defeated because it shifts to the low probability low support state H1 via the open / close execution mode H2. Perform a defeat production. If the player does not fall and the big hit is not won in the winning lottery (in the case of a loss), a draw effect is executed in which the player-side character and the enemy-side character are drawn. According to this configuration, in the high-accuracy and high-support state H4, during the period in which the winning lottery based on the special 1 hold is being executed, a sense of urgency and a sense of expectation are given to the player by the battle production. Can be done.

<< 9-8 >> Modification example of the ninth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be carried out in various embodiments without departing from the gist thereof, and for example, the following modifications are also possible. In the modified examples described below, the description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as those of the above embodiment will be omitted.

<< 9-8-1 >> Modification 1:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the number of STs is set to be larger than the number of times of shortening of time, for example, the number of times of shortening of time is 10 times and the number of times of ST is 50 times. On the other hand, as a modification, the number of STs and the number of times of shortening of time may be the same, for example, the number of times of shortening of time is 10 times and the number of times of ST is 10 times. According to this configuration, in the high accuracy high support state H4, when the number of executions of the game times reaches the number of time reduction continuations (= ST number) without winning the fall lottery, the high accuracy high support state H4 is low. Immediate transition to low support state H1. That is, according to this modification, the gaming state that transitions in the progress of the game does not have the high accuracy and low support state H6 in the transition diagram shown in FIG. 414. Specifically, in the high accuracy high support state H4, when the number of executions of the game times after shifting to the high accuracy high support state H4 is 10, the high accuracy high support state H4 to the low accuracy low support state. The state H1 will be immediately transferred. According to this modification, there is a sense of urgency that the number of game rounds executed after shifting to the high-accuracy high-support state H4 will reach 10 times without winning not only the winning lottery but also the falling lottery. , Can be made stronger for the player.

<< 9-8-2 >> Modification 2:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, a big hit is won by a winning lottery, and even though the type of the winning big hit is a probability variable big hit, the game ball enters the V winning opening 48 opened by the big hit. When the ball is not played, the lottery mode does not shift to the high probability mode, and the support mode does not shift to the high frequency support mode. On the other hand, as a modification, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the type of winning jackpot is a probability variable jackpot, and the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 48 opened by the jackpot. Although the lottery mode does not shift to the high probability mode, the support mode may be configured to shift to the high frequency support mode.

According to this modification, in the low probability low support state H1 (see FIG. 414), a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and the type of winning jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, and the V winning opening 48 opened with the jackpot as an opportunity. When the game ball does not enter the ball, the low probability low support state H1 shifts to the low probability high support state H5 via the open / close execution mode H3. In the low probability high support state H5, since the next big hit (probability change big hit) is practically guaranteed, it is highly advantageous for the player. Therefore, according to this modified example, a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and the type of the winning jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, and a game operation in which the game ball is not intentionally entered into the V winning opening 48 opened by the jackpot. Can be valid. According to this modification, in the high-accuracy high-support state H4, until the number of executions of the game rounds after shifting to the high-accuracy high-support state H4 reaches 10 times (within 10 times), which is the number of time-saving continuations. If the player wins the fall lottery, it has the game property of being able to move to the low probability high support state H5 where the next probability change jackpot is guaranteed, but the above V winning opening 48 is a game ball. If you dare to perform a game operation that does not allow the ball to enter, it is possible to shift to the low accuracy high support state H5 without having to win the fall lottery within the above 10 times, and the above game characteristics are impaired. There was a problem that ended up. This problem can be solved by the following modification 3.

<< 9-8-3 >> Modification 3:
The pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment is provided with one variable winning device 36. On the other hand, as a modification, the configuration may include a first variable winning device and a second variable winning device. The first variable winning device is provided with a large winning opening and an opening / closing door for opening and closing the large winning opening, and is not provided with a V winning opening. The second variable winning device includes a large winning opening, an opening / closing door for opening and closing the large winning opening, and a V winning opening provided inside the large winning opening. The second variable winning device is different from the variable winning device 36 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment in that the V winning opening shutter 48a is not provided. In this modification, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the winning jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the opening / closing door of the first variable winning device is opened and closed in the open / close execution mode. Repeat with the state. On the other hand, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the winning jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, the opening / closing door of the second variable winning device is opened and closed in the open / close execution mode. repeat.

According to the above configuration, if a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of winning jackpot is a normal jackpot, a game ball enters the jackpot of the first variable winning device and a game is played in the V winning slot. The ball never enters. On the other hand, if a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of winning jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, a game ball enters the jackpot of the second variable winning device and is equipped with a V winning slot shutter. Since there is no such thing, the game ball that has entered the large winning opening will be 100% likely to be entered into the V winning opening. For this reason, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the winning jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, the game ball does not enter the V winning opening while the game ball enters the large winning opening. Therefore, according to this modification, it is possible to avoid shifting from the low accuracy low support state H1 to the low accuracy high support state H5 via the open / close execution mode H3. Therefore, in the high accuracy high support state H4, If the player wins the fall lottery until the number of times the game is executed reaches 10 times (within 10 times), which is the number of times of continuous time reduction after shifting to the high accuracy and high support state H4, the following is virtually the case. It is possible to demonstrate the original game characteristics of being able to shift to the low probability high support state H5 in which the probability change jackpot is guaranteed.

<< 9-8-4 >> Modification 4:
Further, as a configuration that makes it impossible to perform a game operation in which the game ball is not intentionally entered into the V winning opening 48, the following configuration can be used instead of the modification 3. A variable winning device 36 is provided in the area where the game ball can enter by right-handed operation, and only when the gate is passed when the round game based on the big hit winning is executed. The opening / closing door 36b of the above is configured to start the opening / closing operation, and a V winning opening is provided directly under the gate. According to this configuration, in order to start the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, it is necessary to pass the game ball through the gate, and in that case, the game ball always enters the V winning opening. It will be. Therefore, even with this modification, if a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of winning jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, the game ball does not enter the V winning opening while the game ball enters the big winning opening. There is no such thing. Therefore, according to this modification, it is possible to avoid shifting from the low accuracy low support state H1 to the low accuracy high support state H5 via the open / close execution mode H3. Therefore, in the high accuracy high support state H4, If the player wins the fall lottery until the number of times the game is executed reaches 10 times (within 10 times), which is the number of times of continuous time reduction after shifting to the high accuracy and high support state H4, in fact, the next It is possible to demonstrate the original game characteristics of being able to shift to the low probability high support state H5 in which the probability change jackpot is guaranteed.

<< 9-8-5 >> Modification 5:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the value of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit and the time saving are given to the hit / fail table for the second starting port (for low probability mode: see FIG. 409 (b)). The value of the winning random number counter C1 is set, and there is no setting of deviation. On the other hand, as a modification, in the hit / fail table for the second start port (for low probability mode: see FIG. 409 (b)), the value of the hit random number counter C1 that is a big hit and the hit random number counter that gives a time saving are given. The value of C1 and the value of the random number counter C1 that is out of alignment may be set. According to this modification, when the big hit is not won in the winning lottery, there may be a case where the time saving grant is won or a case where neither the big hit nor the time saving grant is won. For this reason, according to this modification, the player shifts to the low probability high support state H5, betraying the expectation of the player who is pleased that the next jackpot (probability change jackpot) has shifted to the guaranteed low probability high support state H5. Even so, it is possible that the high-frequency support mode ends after 10 times, which is the number of times the time reduction continues, without winning the time reduction grant in the winning lottery. Therefore, according to this modification, it is possible to give the player a feeling of disappointment, disappointing. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, if the big hit is not won in the winning lottery in the low accuracy high support state H5, the player always wins the time saving grant, so that the player feels the above disappointment. It is possible to win the trust of the player without giving it to the player.

<< 9-8-6 >> Modification 6:
In the ninth embodiment and its modification, when a winner is won in the fall lottery using the value of the fall random number counter CF, the lottery mode of the winning lottery is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. On the other hand, as a modification, a fall opening where a game ball can enter is prepared in the game board 30, and when the game ball enters the fall opening, the lottery mode of the winning lottery is low from the high probability mode. It may be configured to be changed to the probability mode. In this configuration, a game ball distribution device that distributes game balls between a flow path leading to the fall opening and a flow path other than the fall opening (for example, an out port or a second starting port) is provided above the fall opening. It can also be provided. According to these configurations, the player can visually recognize whether or not the game ball enters the fall opening, so that the game after the transition to the high accuracy high support state H4 in the high accuracy high support state H4. The player can wait with a sense of urgency and anticipation as to whether or not the game ball enters the fall opening before the number of times of execution reaches the number of times of shortening of time.

<< 9-8-7 >> Modification 7:
In the ninth embodiment and its modification, in the winning lottery using the winning / failing table for the second starting port (for low probability mode: see FIG. 409 (b)), if the winning lottery is given even once, the winning lottery is given. In the configuration, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the big hit is won. In particular, in the ninth embodiment, in the winning lottery using the winning / failing table for the second starting port (for low probability mode: see FIG. 409 (b)), if the big hit is not won, the time saving grant is won. In the low-probability and high-support state H5, the time-saving grant winning is repeated in the winning lottery until the big hit is won in the winning lottery. That is, in the above-mentioned ninth embodiment and its modified example, when the time saving grant is won even once in the winning lottery, the winning lottery is executed where the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the big hit is won in the winning lottery. It is configured to win a time saving grant every time it is won, and by this configuration, in the low accuracy high support state H5, the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the big hit is won. On the other hand, as a modified example, when the big hit was not won in the winning lottery using the winning / failing table for the second starting port (for low probability mode: see FIG. 409 (b)), the time saving grant was won. If neither the big hit win nor the time saving grant win is applicable in the winning lottery, the high frequency support mode is used as the support mode until the big hit is won in the winning lottery. However, if the winning lottery is won with a reduced time, the high-frequency support mode may be continued as the support mode until the big hit is won in the winning lottery.

<< 9-8-8 >> Modification 8:
In the ninth embodiment and its modification, when a time-saving grant is won in the winning lottery, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big hit is won in the winning lottery. On the other hand, as a modification, the period during which the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode (hereinafter referred to as the high support continuation period) is until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times). You may change to. That is, in the case of winning the winning lottery, the high-frequency support mode may be continued as the support mode until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times). The predetermined number of times is not limited to 5 times, and may be any number of times such as 1 time, 2 times, 3 times, 4 times, and 6 times. Regarding other configurations in this modification, in the winning lottery using the same configuration as the above-mentioned ninth embodiment (in particular, the hit / fail table for the second starting port (for low probability mode: see FIG. 409 (b))). If you do not win the big hit, you will win the time saving grant).

According to the configuration of this modification, by the end of the high support continuation period, the time saving grant is won in the lottery repeatedly, and the high support continuation period is only for the period until the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number of times. Will be extended in sequence, and this extension will be repeated until a big hit is won in the winning lottery. As a result, the high-frequency support mode will be continued as the support mode until the next big hit is won in the winning lottery. Therefore, according to this modification, as in the ninth embodiment, in the low accuracy high support state H5, the lottery mode is set until the next big hit is won in the winning lottery by using the time saving grant that continues only a predetermined number of times. It has the effect of realizing playability that allows the high-frequency support mode to continue. In other words, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the big hit is won in the winning lottery. The high-frequency support mode is continued as the lottery mode until the next big hit is won in the winning lottery without using the time saving grant. Playability can be realized.

As a modification of this modification, if the big hit is not won in the winning lottery using the winning / failing table for the second starting port (for low probability mode: see FIG. 409 (b)), the time saving grant is won. The period until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) in the case of winning the time saving grant in the winning lottery with the configuration that may not be the case (configuration of the modification 5). The high-frequency support mode may be continued as the support mode. According to this configuration, in the high support continuation period, which is the period until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times, the high support continuation period can be extended only when the time saving grant is won in the winning lottery. Therefore, according to the modification of this modification, in the high support continuation period, even if the big hit is not won in the winning lottery, the time saving grant is won by the time the predetermined number of times is reached, and the high frequency support mode is continued. Can be expected from the player to be extended.

<< 9-8-9 >> Modification 9:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the outer frame provided in the pachinko machine is not limited to wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, and steel (carbon steel) or cast iron. , Cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel and the like. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., and steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, etc. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , Stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel and the like. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame inaccessibly to the outer frame and a function of locking the front door frame inaccessibly to the inner frame. A cylinder lock is provided, but after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, the first cylinder lock having the function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so as not to be opened, and the front door frame are provided. A configuration may be adopted in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so as not to be opened is provided separately. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration is adopted in which a rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side in the front view, but the rotation shaft is on the right side in the front view. The provided configuration may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration is adopted in which a rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side in the front view, but this rotation shaft is on the right side in the front view. The configuration provided in may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., and steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, etc. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, in the high-accuracy high-support state, when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the high-accuracy high-support state reaches the number of continuous time reductions, the player wins the fall lottery. The configuration is such that the next big hit (probability change big hit) is guaranteed to shift to a low probability high support state. On the other hand, as a modification, in the ST type pachinko machine, in the high accuracy and high support state, the big hit was won in the lottery until the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the high accuracy and high support state reached the ST number. In some cases, it may be configured to shift to the open / close execution mode. In the open / close execution mode, it is guaranteed to shift to the high accuracy and high support state next. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, it is decided that a specific condition that can trigger the switching of the lottery mode between the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode in the high-probability high-support state is won in the fall lottery. , Instead of this, a big hit may be won in the winning lottery. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the pachinko machine adopts a configuration including an upper plate and a lower plate, but a configuration in which the lower plate is omitted and only the upper plate is provided may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side of the front view is adopted, but the configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side of the front view may be adopted. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation handles are provided on both the right side of the front view and the left side of the front view. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is holding the operation handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operation handle) is provided on the operation handle. However, a configuration in which this touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the launching means capable of launching the game ball, for example, a configuration in which the game ball is launched by using an elastic force such as a spring. Alternatively, a configuration in which a game ball is launched by using the wind pressure when the compressed gas is ejected may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modified examples, in a state where the operation handle is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are fired per minute. The configuration may be such that less than 100 (for example, 60) game balls are fired in one minute, or 100 or more (for example, 200) game balls are fired in one minute. good. Further, the game ball may be fired one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, when the fall lottery is won in the high-accuracy high-support state, the player shifts to the low-accuracy high-support state, which is more advantageous to the player than the high-accuracy high-support state. When the fall lottery is won in the high accuracy low support state, the configuration is such that the player shifts to the low accuracy low support state, which is less advantageous for the player than the high accuracy low support state. On the other hand, as a modification, in a loop type pachinko machine, when it is established that a big hit is won in the winning lottery in a low probability low support state and a normal big hit is won by the distribution judgment, the low probability low support is established. It was configured to shift to a low accuracy high support state, which is more advantageous for the player than the state, and in the high accuracy high support state, it was established that a big hit was won in the winning lottery and a normal big hit was won by the distribution judgment. In some cases, the configuration may be such that the player shifts to the low accuracy high support state (or the low accuracy low support state), which is less advantageous to the player than the high accuracy high support state. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration including a speaker is adopted as a means capable of outputting sound, but a configuration including an earphone jack in addition to or in place of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones brought by the player to the earphone jack, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he / she is playing without being disturbed by the sound of the surrounding pachinko machine. It will be possible to enjoy it in minutes. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations may be adopted as display means capable of displaying a special symbol that starts variable display based on the entry of a game ball into various starting ports. Therefore, for example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying a normal symbol that starts variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , A drum rotary display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, but various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, and the like, and combinations thereof can be adopted. For example, as a decorative pattern, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and the like, and combinations thereof may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. When a configuration in which one symbol row of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration may be used in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative symbol (for example, "7") is stopped. Further, when a configuration in which two or four or more rows of decorative symbols are adopted, for example, when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line, a jackpot may be won. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory, for example, a rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member. A configuration in which the large winning opening can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward around the rotation axis, a configuration in which the large winning opening is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. May be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, for example, a so-called tulip-type ordinary electric accessory in which a pair of movable valves can be opened to the left and right. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member can be rotated forward around the rotation shaft to open the starting port. A configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the direction may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of prize balls set in each entry port (starting opening, general winning opening, large winning opening, etc.) is an example and is set in each entry opening. By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications.

<< 9-8-10 >> Modification 10:
In the ninth embodiment and its modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices such as a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, but instead of this, the main control It may be configured to include two control devices such as a device and a sub control device. The sub-control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the ninth embodiment. Further, in the ninth embodiment and its modifications, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 do not have to be limited to the classification described in the ninth embodiment, and the three control devices need not be limited. It suffices if various processes according to the ninth embodiment can be executed as a whole of 60, 90, and 100.

<< 10 >> 10th Embodiment:
<< 10-1 >> Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 443 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as the tenth embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a voice emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. Illuminations are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect of the effect by lighting or blinking at each game round performed by the pachinko machine 10, when a big hit is won, when a reach occurs, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two plate glasses is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. The details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls rented from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball stored in the upper plate 20 is supplied to the game ball launch mechanism included in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launch mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores the game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged to the outside from the lower plate 21.

An effect operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game effect reflecting the operation.

An operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “right side”). When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and an operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c that detects the rotation operation amount of the above by the change of the electric resistance is provided. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes according to the rotation operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball launch button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “left side”). When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined firing intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the player's operation handle 25. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the front view of the game board and flows down to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can make a so-called "right-handed". The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26 to launch the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26. Can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 444 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing. For example, a seal is attached to a place that can be opened and closed, and the characters such as "open" appear when the board box is opened.

The second control unit 52 includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90. The design display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays a design or an image for directing.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The launch control device 80 launches a game ball having a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player when an instruction to launch the game ball is input from the main control device 60. Controls the ball launch mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a slope connected below the tank 54 and gently inclined so that the game balls flow to the downstream side. The game balls are supplied from the tank rail 55, the case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, and the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power supply switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies the electric power required for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85. By turning the power switch 88 on and off, the supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and the non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 445 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding the game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicular to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable winning device 36, and a V winning opening 48. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. Specifically, the variable display unit 40 is provided substantially in the center of the game board 30, and the main display unit 45 is provided near the upper right of the front view of the game board 30.

The general winning opening 32 is an entry opening into which a game ball can enter, and a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 444).

The first starting port 33 is an entry port into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game area PA. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is an entry port into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the upper right side of the game area PA. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the two game balls are paid out as prize balls and a winning lottery described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 is provided with a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to execute a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric service is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric service open state in which the electric service is opened in a predetermined mode. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second starting port 34. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34. In this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 is provided on the lower right side of the game area PA. The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30 and an opening / closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The large winning opening 36a is an entry opening into which a game ball can enter, and is formed in a rectangular shape in the present embodiment. The opening / closing door 36b is a rectangular lid having a size one size larger than that of the large winning opening 36a, and is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 36a. When the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the main control device 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the winning lottery, if the jackpot is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode. The opening / closing execution mode is a mode for executing the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36. Specifically, when the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the open / close execution mode, the open / close state in which the game ball cannot enter is changed to the open state in which the game ball can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it transitions to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

The V winning opening 48 is an entry opening into which a game ball can enter, and is a entry opening that is a condition for operating the high probability mode. In the present embodiment, the V winning opening 48 is provided inside the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36. The V winning opening 48 is provided with a V winning opening shutter 48a that opens and closes the V winning opening 48. After winning a big hit by a winning lottery, the V winning opening shutter 48a changes from the closed state to the open state at a predetermined timing in the opening / closing execution mode executed by the big hit winning, and returns to the closed state after a lapse of a certain period of time. During the period when the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is in the open state and the V winning opening shutter 48a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the V winning opening 48. When the game ball enters the V winning opening 48, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The predetermined timing for switching from the closed state to the open state will be described later.

When the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes a predetermined number of gaming times (hereinafter, also referred to as ST number of times) in the gaming state of the high-probability mode, the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. The number of STs is 10 in this embodiment. The number of STs is not limited to 10 times, and may be other times such as 20 times, 9 times, 8 times, 7 times, and 6 times. In the present embodiment, the number of STs is limited to a number larger than the number of times of shortening of time (for example, 5 times) described later, and may be any number as long as it is more than the number of times of continuing of time saving.

An out port 43 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 30, and a game ball that has not entered the various entry ports is discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

The game balls that have entered each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the V winning opening 48, and the out opening 43 are placed on the game board 30. It is configured to be guided to the back side of the game board 30 through the formed individual openings and finally join the discharge passage provided on the back side of the game board 30. The discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor that detects a game ball. By detecting the game balls with the discharge passage detection sensor, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls fired on the game board 30.

The main display unit 45 has a special figure unit 37, a normal figure unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. The first symbol display unit 37a is a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. , The variable display of the first symbol is performed. When the lottery is completed, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to display the stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying the second symbol. The second symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display unit 37b is used as a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. , The second symbol is changed and displayed. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display to display the stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b to the stop display is set. Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a to the stop display is also referred to as the first variable time, and is displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first hold display unit 37c and a second hold display unit 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of holds of the first start port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second hold display unit 37d displays the number of holds of the second start port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on.

The normal drawing unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, the normal drawing unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode as the display mode of the light emitting display. When the electric accessory opening lottery is completed, the normal drawing unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode, or displays corresponding to the number of round games. The round game opens and closes until either the predetermined upper limit duration elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the open / close execution mode is started, and ends when the open / close execution mode ends and a new game round starts.

The special figure unit 37, the normal figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being composed of a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp, and for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. It may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery result, such as a CRT or a dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The symbol display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a displays a variable display or a stop display based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs a variable display or a stop display of the symbol accordingly. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b displays the fluctuation display or the stop display based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 performs the fluctuation display or the stop display of the symbol accordingly. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the display effect triggered by entering the ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, but also performs a display effect in the open / close execution mode that shifts when a big hit is won. .. Hereinafter, the details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 446 is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol and a display surface 41a that are variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 446 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a decorative symbol that is variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 446 (a), on the symbol display device 41, symbols showing numbers 1 to 8 are variablely displayed as decorative symbols. As the decorative symbol to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol having a pattern such as a character may be adopted for each of the symbols showing the numbers 1 to 8.

FIG. 446 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 446 (a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row is periodically arranged from top to bottom or from bottom. A variable display that scrolls up is performed. As shown in FIG. 446 (b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a state of being stopped on the effective line L1.

Specifically, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity is started. Then, each scrolling symbol switches from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. When the variation display of the symbol is completed and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit winning, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the effective line L1. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L1. The mode of variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned mode, and the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol row Various modes can be adopted as the mode of variable display of decorative symbols such as the number of symbols.

Here, "game times" means from the start of the variation display of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to the end of the variation display and the stop display, until the stop display ends. That is, it is one unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery about the special information acquired based on the entry of any one of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of any of the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37a are obtained for each game. After the segment display is variablely displayed on one of the symbol display units 37b, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of any of the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, the pachinko machine 10 is predetermined in the symbol display device 41 for each game. After variable display of the symbol column of, the symbol column is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game is also referred to as a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the predetermined lottery result, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 446 (b), the first reserved display area Ds1 and the second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first hold display area Ds1, the number of holds based on the entry of the ball into the first start port 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, the number of holds based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is four, respectively.

Further, as shown in FIG. 446 (b), on the display surface 41a, a blinking display and lighting synchronized with the variation display and the stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a of the special figure unit 37 are displayed. The first synchronous display unit Sync1 that displays and the second synchronous display that performs blinking display and lighting display synchronized with the fluctuation display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b of the special figure unit 37. A unit Sync2 is provided. Specifically, when the first symbol display unit 37a is displaying a variable display, the first synchronous display unit Sync1 is blinking, and when the first symbol display unit 37a is displaying a stop, the first symbol display unit 37a is displayed. 1 Synchronous display unit Sync1 displays lighting. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b is displaying a variable display, the second synchronous display unit Sync2 blinks, and when the second symbol display unit 37b is displaying a stop display, the second synchronous display is displayed. The unit Sync2 displays lighting.

In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the first reserved display area Ds1, the second reserved display area Ds2, the first synchronous display unit Sync1, and the second synchronous display unit Sync2. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the display surface 41a does not display a part or all of these displays.

<< 10-2 >> Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 447 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 temporarily stores various data and the like when executing a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a program recorded in the ROM 63. It is provided with a RAM 64 which is a memory for storing. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may have a part of the function which MPU 62 has. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown), respectively. The payout control device 70 and the power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a DC stable 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, the power supply device 85 includes a capacitor (not shown), and when a power failure occurs or the power supply switch 88 (FIG. 444) is turned off, power supply to each device is continued for a predetermined period. do.

Further, the input port of the main control board 61 includes various entry ports such as a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable winning device 36, and a V winning opening 48. Various detection sensors 67a to 67f provided on the through gate are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors 67a to 67f, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered the ball entry port, and the game ball is a through gate. Is determined whether or not the signal has passed. Further, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the second starting opening 34, and also executes an electric accessory opening lottery based on the entry of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

The output port of the main control board 61 includes a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , The V winning opening shutter drive unit 48b that opens and closes the V winning opening shutter 48a, and the main display unit 45 are connected to each other. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the electric accessory opening is won as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. Further, when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 33 and the second start opening 34, the V winning opening 48 is opened at a predetermined timing during the round game. -The drive control of the V winning opening shutter drive unit 48b is executed so that the V winning opening shutter 48a to be closed is opened and closed. Further, in each game, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the main display unit 45, and in the open / close execution mode, the round display on the main display unit 45 is performed. The display control of unit 39 is executed.

The payout control device 70 and the voice emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry to the general winning opening 32 is specified, the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry to the first starting opening 33 is performed. When is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when the entry into the second starting port 34 is specified, two game balls are paid out. The prize ball command corresponding to is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when the entry to the large winning opening 36a is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60. To. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. Further, the launch control device 80 is connected to the operation handle 25 and the game ball launch button 26. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes according to the rotation operation amount. The game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. As described above, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximum regardless of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 of the player. A game ball is fired on the front of the game board with the same firing intensity.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the voice emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, control of the display control device 100 is performed. Further, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the voice emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 and the type of the combination of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. , Whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the advance notice effect executed in each game round, etc. are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time when the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 448 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 wins a lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, sets the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. When sorting the jackpot types, the jackpot type counter C2 is used. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate reach when the symbol sequence displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displaced and varied. The fall random number counter CF is used for the fall lottery as to whether or not to terminate the high probability mode.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. Further, the fluctuation type counter CS is used when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45, and the symbol display device 41. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The hold information storage area 64b is provided with a first hold area Ra and a second hold area Rb. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF at the timing of entering the ball are stored as pending information. It is stored in the first reserved area Ra of the area 64b. In the first holding area Ra, there are four areas corresponding to the maximum number of holding balls that have entered the first starting port 33, that is, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth. There is an area. When the game ball enters the first starting port 33, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF at the timing of entering the ball are held information (hereinafter, special 1 hold). Also called), it is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. Which of the first to fourth areas is stored is determined by the order of entering the ball, and the earlier the timing of entering the ball, the higher the area (the first area is the highest area).

Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF at the timing of entering the ball are the second in the reserved information storage area 64b. 2 It is stored in the holding area Rb in chronological order. In the second holding area Rb, there are four areas corresponding to the maximum number of holding balls that have entered the second starting port 34, that is, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth. There is an area. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF at the timing of entering the ball are held information (hereinafter, special 2 hold). Also called), it is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. Which of the first to fourth areas is stored is determined by the order of entering the ball, and the earlier the timing of entering the ball, the higher the area (the first area is the highest area).

The details of the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The hit random number counter C1 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 1199, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. Further, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is set in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. It is stored, and when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

The value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first hold area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is called a big hit. It is determined whether or not it becomes. Further, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the second hold area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c and collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. Whether or not it will be a big hit is determined.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is the determination processing execution area in the order acquired by the game ball entering the first starting port 33. Move to the execution area AE of 64c. Specifically, a process of moving the data stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra to the determination process execution area 64c and shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first hold area Ra is executed. do. The data shift shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas in order to the upper area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area.

Further, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c in the order acquired by the game ball entering the second starting port 34. .. Specifically, a process of moving the data stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb to the determination process execution area 64c and shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second hold area Rb is executed. do. The data shift shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas in order to the upper area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area.

When the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the second holding area Rb, the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the second holding area Ra regardless of whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the first holding area Ra. The stored value of the random number counter C1 is set as a target for moving to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c. As a result, when the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in both the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb, the hit stored in the second holding area Rb corresponding to the second starting port 34. The value of the random number counter C1 has priority. That is, in the present embodiment, when the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in both the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb, it is stored in the second holding area Rb corresponding to the second starting port 34. The value of the hit random number counter C1 is prioritized, and among the values of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the second hold area Rb, the data stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb is determined. The process of moving to the process execution area 64c and shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second hold area Rb is executed. When the value of the random number counter C1 is not stored in the second hold area Rb, the value of the random number counter C1 stored in the first hold area Ra is stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra. The stored data is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the processing of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed.

In the above description, the order in which the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c will be described. However, the value is not limited to the value of the hit random number counter C1, and counters other than the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb (big hit type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fall random number). Each value of the counter CF) is also moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c in the same order.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 39, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first hold area Ra moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the second hold area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a big hit, the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Further, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b by using the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. .. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big hit. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value, for example.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra is the same as the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 after moving to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c. It is collated and it is determined whether or not reach occurs. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second hold area Rb is the same as the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 after moving to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c. It is collated and it is determined whether or not reach occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery becomes a big hit and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some of the symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 may have a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot for some of the symbols. It is a display state in which the symbols are displayed and the remaining symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 446 (b), the symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. In the situation where the reach line is formed and the reach line is formed, the symbol is varied and displayed in the symbol row Z2 to reach the reach. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, in the state where the reach line is formed, the variable display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. A combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when the reach effect is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to display a notice using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

Next, the details of the fall random number counter CF will be described. The fall random number counter CF is used when executing a fall lottery for determining whether or not to end the high probability mode in a gaming state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode. If the fall lottery is won, the lottery mode in the game round is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

The fall random number counter CF has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 299, and after reaching the maximum, it returns to 0. The fall random number counter CF is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the updated value of the fall random number counter CF is stored in the second holding area Rb of the RAM 64 at the timing of the entry. The value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the first hold area Ra moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c every time the game round being executed ends. The value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the second hold area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, and then the hit / fail table (fall lottery) stored in the fall lottery table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. It is collated with the pass / fail table: FIG. 452), and it is determined whether or not to terminate the high probability mode.

Next, the details of the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 62 to determine the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value, for example.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, the details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric service holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 64d moves to the electric service execution area 64e, and then the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 in the electric service execution area 64e. A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory opening lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state. Specifically, in the electric service execution area 64e, the winning / failing table (winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery) stored in the accessory lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 are It is collated and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state.

It should be noted that at least one of the acquired value of the hit random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4, and the value of the fall random number counter CF is the special information in the present invention. Corresponds to.

Next, the pass / fail table will be described. The winning / failing table is table data for collating with the winning random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the winning random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode set as a lottery mode for the winning lottery. At the time of the winning lottery in the probability mode, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to. Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and then the determination processing execution area 64c. The hit / miss table for collating with the hit random number counter C1 transferred to the above, and the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. The pass / fail table is stored as separate table data. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a pass / fail table for the first start port (for low probability mode), a pass / fail table for the first start port (for high probability mode), and a pass / fail table for the second start port (low). Four hit / miss tables, one for the probability mode) and the hit / miss table for the second start port (for the high probability mode), are stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63.

FIG. 449 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the pass / fail table for the first starting port. FIG. 449 (a) shows a hit / miss table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 449 (b) shows a hit / miss table for the first starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 449 (a), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set as the values of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the hit / fail table (for the low probability mode) for the first starting port. There is. Then, among the values from 0 to 3979, the values other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 (20 to 3979) are out of the range. In this case, the number of value groups of the random number counter C1 which is a big hit is 20/3980 (= 1/199) with respect to the total number.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 449 (b), 199 values from 0 to 198 are set as the values of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the hit / fail table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port. Has been done. Then, among the values from 0 to 3979, the values other than the 199 values from 0 to 198 (199 to 3979) are out of the range. In this case, the number of value groups of the random number counter C1 which is a big hit is 199/3980 (= 1/20) with respect to the total number. As described above, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

FIG. 450 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit / fail table for the second starting port. FIG. 450 (a) shows a hit / miss table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 450 (b) shows a hit / miss table for the second starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 450 (a), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set as the values of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the hit / fail table (for low probability mode) for the second starting port. There is. Then, in the hit / fail table for the second starting port (for the low probability mode), among the values from 0 to 3979, values other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 (20 to 3979) are given as a time saving. It is set as the value of the random number counter C1. In this case, the number of value groups of the random number counter C1 which is a big hit is 20/3980 (= 1/199) with respect to the total number.

The "time reduction grant" is a result of success or failure that does not trigger a transition to the open / close execution mode in which the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened / closed, although the support mode described later serves as a transition trigger. If the support mode is in the low frequency support mode when the time saving grant is won, the support mode shifts from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode. The "time saving grant" that is won in this embodiment is a type of time saving grant that is continued until the next big hit is won in the high frequency support mode. That is, if the support mode is in the low frequency support mode when the time saving grant is won, the support mode shifts from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode, and the high frequency support mode continues until the next big hit is won. Will be done.

It should be noted that the hit / fail table (for the low probability mode) for the second starting port in the present embodiment is not set to be off. That is, in the hit / miss table for the second starting port (for the low probability mode) in the present embodiment, the time saving is set as the hit / miss result instead of the miss.

As shown in FIG. 450 (b), 199 values from 0 to 198 are set as the values of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the hit / fail table (for high probability mode) for the second starting port. There is. Then, among the values from 0 to 3979, the values other than the 199 values from 0 to 198 (199 to 3979) are out of the range. In this case, the number of value groups of the random number counter C1 which is a big hit is 199/3980 (= 1/20) with respect to the total number. As described above, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

The "off" is a result of success or failure that does not trigger the transition of the open / close execution mode, and also does not trigger the transition of the lottery mode and the support mode.

In the present embodiment, the value group of the hit random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / fail table for the low probability mode becomes the value group of the hit random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / miss table for the high probability mode. include. However, as a result of the winning lottery, if the probability of winning the jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary.

Although it is not adopted in the winning / failing table in this embodiment, a "small hit" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

The "small hit" is a result of success or failure that does not trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened / closed, but the lottery mode described later does not trigger the transition. , The number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode is limited to one.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three modes or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode of winning lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends (3) The electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (1) open / close execution mode, the frequency of winning the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode The high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode can be set so that is relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 sec elapses or to the opening / closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number of balls entered is 10. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed twice from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec elapses or the ball enters the opening / closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening / closing door 36b at one time is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening / closing door 36b once is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode in which the low frequency winning mode is applied, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur. However, even in the open / close execution mode related to the low frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the winning of the game ball can occur.

The number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the number of opening limits for one opening are determined by winning the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the frequency of occurrence of the above is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening / closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of openings and closings than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is long, or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that the variable winning device 36 does not substantially win a prize.

The pachinko machine 10 has, as a mode of the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the above-mentioned (2) opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a winning / losing table for high probability as a winning / failing table, and a winning / losing table. It is possible to set a low probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a winning / failing table for low probability. As described with reference to FIG. 449, the case where the winning lottery is performed using the high-probability winning / failing table is compared with the case where the winning lottery is performed using the low-probability winning / failing table, and the big hit is won. There is a high probability of doing so.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening / closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 continues to launch the game ball in the same manner with respect to the game area PA. The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are used so that the frequency with which the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the above-mentioned situations. Can be set.

Specifically, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the one-time opening time of the electric accessory 34a may be set longer than that in the low-frequency support mode when the electric combination opening is won.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electric combination open is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode. May be good. Further, the electric accessory 34a may be configured to have a long opening time once. In addition, when the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times in the high frequency support mode, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is It may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory opening lottery to the next electric accessory opening lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. You may.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary gaming state that assists in the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the big hit type counter C2 is used to sort the big hit types. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 451 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 451 (a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 451 (b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to at the time of a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is to the second start port 34. It is referred to at the time of the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball. In each of FIGS. 451 (a) and 451 (b), the portion on the left side of the vertical double line corresponds to the distribution table. The part on the right side of the vertical double line shows which mode the lottery mode and the support mode after the big hit shifts to when the distribution is performed by the distribution table. In addition, the term "after the big hit" here means, in detail, after the end of the open / close execution mode executed when the big hit is won in the winning lottery.

As shown in FIG. 451 (a), 8R probability variable jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are set as jackpot types based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 in the distribution table for the first starting port. Has been done.

In the 8R probability variation jackpot, the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening / closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. .. Further, the 8R probability variation jackpot is a jackpot that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 48 in the first round of the round game. Specifically, the opening / closing door 36b in the first round of the round game includes the period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is in the open state in the opening period of the opening / closing door 36b in the first round of the round game. It is a big hit that sets the opening period. The opening period of the opening / closing door 36b in the first round of the round game includes the period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is open (not a part but the whole), so that one round of the round game is included. It becomes easy to enter the game ball into the V winning opening 48 opened by the eyes. As described above, it has been explained that the V winning opening shutter 48a is opened and closed at a predetermined timing during the round game. Specifically, the V winning opening shutter 48a is opened and closed for a predetermined time from the start of the opening / closing execution mode. After the lapse of time, the state is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and then the state is closed. The 8R probability variation jackpot is defined so that the opening / closing door 36b in the first round of the round game is opened during the period of the open state.

When a game ball enters the opened V winning opening 48, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode. As described above, the V winning opening 48 makes it easy for the game ball to enter in the first round of the round game, but nevertheless, if the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 48, The lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends does not shift to the high probability mode.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of executions of the game times executed in the high probability mode is limited to 10 times (ST number of times), and the number of executions of the game times executed in the high probability mode is 10 times. When is reached, the lottery mode of the winning lottery shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode after the end of the game round. In addition, in the game times executed in the high probability mode, if the game ball is further won in the probability change jackpot and the game ball enters the V winning opening 48 opened by the probability change jackpot, the high that has been executed up to that point. The number of game times in the probability mode is reset, and after a round game executed with the probability change jackpot as a trigger, 10 game times are counted again from the game times in the high probability mode executed thereafter. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the high probability mode, the game times in the high probability mode may be continuously executed 10 times or more.

If the jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the winning jackpot is the 8R probability variation jackpot, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The number of times the game is executed in the high frequency support mode is limited to 5 times (the number of times the time is shortened). Here, the case of 8R probability variation jackpot is assumed, but in reality, the number of rounds is irrelevant, and if the probability variation jackpot is applicable, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. In this case as well, the number of times the game is executed in the high frequency support mode is limited to the number of times the game is continued in a short time.

In the 8R normal jackpot, the opening / closing number of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. .. Further, in the 8R normal jackpot, the opening / closing door 36b in the first round of the round game does not overlap with the opening period of the opening / closing door 36b in the first round of the round game and the period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is in the open state. It is a big hit that sets the opening period of. Since the opening period of the opening / closing door 36b and the opening period of the opening / closing door 36b do not overlap, the probability that the game ball will enter the V winning opening 48 is extremely low. Therefore, the 8R normal jackpot is a jackpot in which the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is substantially a low probability mode.

In this way, the probability variation jackpot is easier for the game ball to enter the V winning opening 48 in the first round of the round game than the normal jackpot, so the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends has a high probability. There is a high probability of becoming a mode. On the other hand, in the normal jackpot, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the V winning opening 48 as compared with the probability variation jackpot, so that the probability that the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the high probability mode is very low. In this specification, the distribution result of which the game ball is easy to enter the V winning opening 48 and the probability that the lottery mode of the winning lottery becomes the high probability mode is higher is referred to as "probability change jackpot" for convenience. That is, if the jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the type of the winning jackpot is a probability variable jackpot, and the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 48 opened by the jackpot, after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Although the lottery mode of the winning lottery does not shift to the high probability mode, as described above, it is called "probability variable jackpot" for convenience.

If the jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the winning jackpot is the 8R normal jackpot, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Here, the case of 8R normal jackpot is assumed, but in reality, the number of rounds is irrelevant, and in the case of normal jackpot, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 19" corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot, and "20 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. It is set to do.

As shown in FIG. 451 (b), a 16R probability variable jackpot is set as a jackpot type based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 in the distribution table for the second starting port.

In the 16R probability variation jackpot, the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening / closing execution mode is 16 times (16 rounds), and the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. .. Further, the 16R probability variation jackpot is a jackpot that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 48 in the first round of the round game. Specifically, the 16R probability variation jackpot is the first round of the round game so that the opening period of the opening / closing door 36b in the first round of the round game includes the period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is in the open state. It is a big hit that defines the opening period of the opening / closing door 36b in. The opening period of the opening / closing door 36b in the first round of the round game includes the period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is in the open state, so that the game to the V winning opening 48 opened in the first round of the round game is included. It becomes easy to enter the ball. As described above, it has been explained that the V winning opening shutter 48a is opened and closed at a predetermined timing during the round game. Specifically, the V winning opening shutter 48a is opened and closed for a predetermined time from the start of the opening / closing execution mode. After the lapse of time, the state is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and then the state is closed. The 16R probability variation jackpot is defined so that the opening / closing door 36b is opened in the first round of the round game during the period of the open state. That is, the 16R probability variation jackpot differs from the 8R probability variation jackpot only in the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening / closing execution mode, and the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode. Is the same in that is a high-frequency winning mode and that the game ball can be easily entered into the V winning opening 48 in the first round of the round game. Further, the 16R probability variation jackpot is the same as the lottery mode and the support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode as compared with the 8R probability variation jackpot.

In the distribution table for the second starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 39" is set to correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot. That is, all of the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39" are set to correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot is the case where the jackpot is based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and the case where the jackpot is obtained. 2 It is different from the case where a big hit is made based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player.

In the present embodiment, as described above, three types of jackpots are set: 8R probability variation jackpot, 8R normal jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot, but the number is not limited to three, and includes, for example, 16R normal jackpot. It may be 4 types, 2 types, or 5 or more types. Further, the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening / closing execution mode is not limited to 8R and 16R, and may be other times such as 4R and 5R.

As described above, when the number of executions of the game times executed in the high probability mode reaches the ST number (10 times), the lottery mode of the winning lottery is lower than the high probability mode after the end of the game times. The mode shifts to the probability mode, but in the present embodiment, even if the game is played before the number of STs is reached, if the player wins the fall lottery described later, the lottery mode of the winning lottery changes from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. It is configured to migrate to.

FIG. 452 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the fall lottery winning / failing table used when executing the fall lottery. As shown in FIG. 452, in the fall lottery winning / failing table, 100 values from 0 to 99 are set as the values of the fall random number counter CF that wins in the fall lottery. .. In the fall lottery winning / failing table, 200 values of 100 to 299 out of the values of 0 to 299 are set as the values of the fall random number counter CF that is lost in the fall lottery. That is, in the game times of the high probability mode, the probability of falling by winning the fall lottery, ending the high probability mode, and becoming the low probability mode is 1/3. In the game times of the high probability mode, if the fall lottery is missed, the high probability mode is continued. In addition, in this embodiment, the fall lottery is not executed in the game times of the low probability mode. The probability of winning in the fall lottery is not limited to the above 1/3, and may be other probabilities such as 1/2 and 1/4.

FIG. 453 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a winning / failing table (winning / failing table for electric accessory opening lottery) used when executing the electric accessory opening lottery.

FIG. 453 (a) shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 453 (a), in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode), two electric accessory opening counters C4, which are the electric accessory opening winning counters, are 0 and 1. The value is set. 464 values of 2 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is out of alignment. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening is won in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 453 (b) shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 453 (b), in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode), 462 electric accessory opening counters C4, which are the electric accessory opening winning, are set to 0 to 461. The value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is out of alignment. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening is won in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second starting port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. ..

<< 10-3 >> Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 454 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configurations of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Some configurations of the power supply device 85 (FIG. 447) and the like are omitted. The MPU 92 is mounted on the voice emission control board 91 provided in the voice emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element having a built-in CPU, ROM 93, RAM 94, interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data input / output circuit, and the like.

Various control programs, fixed value data, tables, etc. executed by the MPU 92 are stored in the ROM 93. For example, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the ROM 93. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 60 and an effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and a display control device 100 is connected to the output side.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the voice emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 102.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio emission control device 90 are the sound light side MPU 92 and the sound light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound / light side RAM 94 are also referred to, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as a display side MPU 102.

<< 10-4 >> Outline of processing by the gaming machine:
Next, an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

<< 10-4-1 >> Transition between high and low lottery mode and support mode:
First, the case where the high and low of the lottery mode and the support mode are changed will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of winning jackpot is a normal jackpot, the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the support mode Goes into infrequent support mode.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a big hit is won by a winning lottery, the type of the winning big hit is a probability variable big hit, and a game ball enters the V winning opening 48 opened by the big hit, it opens and closes. After the end of the execution mode, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In this embodiment, if a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the type of winning jackpot is a probability variable jackpot, and the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 48 opened by the jackpot as a trigger, The lottery mode does not shift to the high probability mode, and the support mode does not shift to the high frequency support mode.

After winning a jackpot by a winning lottery and shifting the support mode to the high frequency support mode based on the type of the winning jackpot being a probable variable jackpot, the game times are executed after the high frequency support mode is started. The high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (hereinafter, also referred to as a time-saving continuation number). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of times of shortening the time is, for example, 5 times. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, after shifting to the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is continued up to 5 times, which is the number of time-saving continuations. When the number of executions of the game rounds since the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches five times, which is the number of continuous time reductions, the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode after the end of the game rounds. The number of times of shortening the time is not limited to the above five times, and may be another number.

On the other hand, a winning lottery is executed with reference to the winning / failing table (for low probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. 450 (a), and the support mode is high based on the fact that the time saving grant is won in the winning lottery. When shifting to the frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode will continue as the support mode until the next big hit is won.

When the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery executed when the through gate 35 is passed is 231/233 is extremely high, so that it is electric. The accessory 34a is frequently in the electric service open state. Therefore, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the player strikes right and plays the game so that the game ball enters the second starting port 34 provided with the electric accessory 34a.

After the lottery mode shifts to the high-probability mode, the high-probability mode is continued as the lottery mode until the number of times the game is executed after the high-probability mode is started reaches a predetermined number of times (ST number of times). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of STs is, for example, 10 times. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the high-probability mode is started and then 10 game times, which is the number of STs, are executed, the lottery mode is subsequently shifted from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode.

In addition, even if the fall lottery is won in the game times before the number of times the game is executed reaches the ST number after the high probability mode is started, the lottery mode is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. .. Specifically, if a player wins a fall lottery related to a game before the number of times the game has been executed reaches the number of STs, the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode at the start of the game, and the game times. The winning lottery is executed in the low probability mode. Therefore, in the winning lottery in the game round, the winning lottery with reference to the winning / failing table (for the low probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. If this is the case, the high-frequency support mode will continue as the support mode until the next big hit is won.

In the game times executed in the high probability mode, if the jackpot is further won and the type of the winning jackpot is a probability variable jackpot, and the game ball enters the V winning opening 48 opened by the jackpot as a trigger, The number of game times in the high-probability mode executed up to that point is reset, and after the round game executed with the jackpot as a trigger, the number of game times in the high-probability mode executed thereafter is changed to 10 times. The count is executed. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the high probability mode, the game times in the high probability mode may be continuously executed 10 times or more.

<< 10-4-2 >> Game flow:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, at least four types of states can be taken as the game states that transition in the progress of the game, depending on the combination of the lottery mode and the support mode. Specifically, i) the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode, which is a low probability low support state, and ii) the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is. Low probability high support state which is high frequency support mode, iii) High probability high support state where lottery mode is high probability mode and support mode is high probability support mode, iv) High probability mode is lottery mode In addition, the support mode can be a high-probability and low-support state, which is a low-frequency support mode. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, an opening / closing execution mode in which a game ball can be entered into the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 can be set as a gaming state. The game progresses while transitioning between these game states.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the high-probability mode flag for specifying the lottery mode and the high-frequency support mode for specifying the support mode are stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64. When the high probability mode flag is OFF, the lottery mode is specified as the low probability mode, and when the high probability mode flag is ON, the lottery mode is specified as the high probability mode. When the high frequency support mode flag is OFF, the support mode is specified as the low frequency support mode, and when the high frequency support mode flag is ON, the support mode is specified as the high frequency support mode. Therefore, each of the above-mentioned low-probability low-support state, low-probability high-support state, high-probability low-support state, and high-probability high-support state is specified by the high-probability mode flag and the high-frequency support mode flag. Become. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, by switching at least one of the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag, the flow of the game progresses while the above-mentioned four states are switched.

In the present embodiment, the lottery mode is specified by one flag (that is, the high probability mode flag), but instead of this, the lottery mode is specified by two flags (that is, the high probability mode flag). It may be configured by the low probability mode flag). In this modification, when either one of the high-probability mode flag and the low-probability mode flag is turned on, the other is automatically turned off. Further, in the present embodiment, the support mode is specified by one flag (that is, the high frequency support mode flag), but instead of this, the support mode is specified by two flags (that is, the high frequency support mode). It may be configured by a flag and a low frequency support mode flag). In this modification, when either one of the high frequency support mode flag and the low frequency support mode flag is turned on, the other is automatically turned off. According to both modifications, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, by switching the flag, the flow of the game progresses while switching the above-mentioned four states.

FIG. 455 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10. When the game is started, it is initially in a low probability low support state (state H1). That is, the lottery mode is a low probability mode, and the support mode is a low frequency support mode. In the low probability low support state (state H1), the player executes a left-handed strike, causes the game ball to flow down to the left side of the game area PA, and causes the game ball to enter the first starting port 33. When the game ball enters the first starting port 33, a winning lottery is performed for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and the lottery result of the winning lottery is given to the player. A game round for notification is executed. The contents described in the broken line rectangle H1a marked as "left-handed" in the figure correspond to the mode of the left-handed game up to this point. The contents described in the broken line rectangle H1b marked "Special 2 Remaining Hold Digestion" in the figure will be described later.

If the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game round executed in the left-handed mode H1a in the low probability low support state (state H1) is out of order, the low probability low support state (state H1) is continued.

If a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game round executed in the left-handed mode H1a in the low probability low support state (state H1), and the type of the winning jackpot is a normal jackpot, after the end of the game round. The open / close execution mode is executed as a privilege given to the player. That is, the mode shifts from the low probability low support state (state H1) to the open / close execution mode (state H2).

The pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect that urges the player to hit right prior to the round game that occurs in the open / close execution mode (state H2). The player executes a right-handed hit according to the suggestion effect, causes the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA, and causes the game ball to enter the large winning opening 36a to obtain a prize ball. In the open / close execution mode (state H2), which is executed when the type of the winning jackpot is a normal jackpot, as described above, the game ball rarely enters the V winning opening 48.

When the open / close execution mode (state H2) ends, the state shifts to the low probability low support state (state H1). That is, the low probability mode is continued as the lottery mode, and the low frequency support mode is continued as the support mode. In the open / close execution mode (state H2) transitioned from the low probability low support state (state H1), since the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the game ball rarely enters the second starting port 34. Therefore, when the open / close execution mode (state H2) is completed, the mode H1b during the special 2 residual hold digestion in the low probability low support state (state H1) is not performed, and the low probability low support state (state H1) is set. Transition to the left-handed aspect H1a.

On the other hand, in the low probability low support state (state H1), even if the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game round and the type of the winning jackpot is the probability variation jackpot, the privilege given to the player after the end of the game round. The open / close execution mode is executed. That is, the mode shifts from the low probability low support state (state H1) to the open / close execution mode (state H3). In the low probability low support state (state H1), the probability change jackpot may be won in either the left-handed mode H1a or the special 2 residual hold digestion mode H1b.

Prior to the round game that occurs in the open / close execution mode (state H3), the pachinko machine 10 has a suggestion effect that encourages the player to hit right, and inserts a game ball into the V winning opening 48 in the first round of the round game. Perform a suggestion effect that encourages you to make a ball. The player executes a right-handed hit according to these suggested effects, causes the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA, and the game ball is inserted into the large winning opening 36a to obtain a prize ball, and one round of the round game. A game ball is inserted into the V winning opening 48 in the large winning opening 36a. In the open / close execution mode (state H3), which is executed when the type of the winning jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, as described above, the game ball enters the V winning opening 48 in the first round of the round game. It is easy to ball.

When the game ball enters the V winning opening 48 in the first round of the round game in the open / close execution mode (state H3) and the open / close execution mode (state H3) ends, the state shifts to the high accuracy high support state (state H4). .. That is, the lottery mode is a high probability mode (limited to 10 times, which is the number of STs), and the support mode is a high frequency support mode (limited to 5 times, which is the number of times of shortening the time).

In the high-accuracy and high-support state (state H4), the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect that urges the player to hit right. In the high-accuracy high-support state (state H4), the player executes a right-handed hit according to the suggested effect to cause the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA, and the game ball enters the second starting port 34. Let me. Since the support mode is the high frequency support mode in the high accuracy and high support state, there is a possibility that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery executed when passing through the through gate 35 will be the electric accessory opening winning. Since it is extremely high at 233, the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is frequently opened. Therefore, in the high accuracy and high support state, the game ball easily enters the second starting port 34. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, a winning lottery is made for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, and the lottery result of the winning lottery is given to the player. A game round for notification is executed. That is, in the high-accuracy high support state (state H4), the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is frequently opened to the electric service, and the game ball is placed in the second starting port 34 more than usual (low support state). By entering a lot of balls, the player can receive a winning lottery in a state where the number of balls held is difficult to decrease.

When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game times executed in the high accuracy high support state (state H4) is a jackpot, the type of the winning jackpot is limited to the probability variation jackpot (second start of FIG. 451 (b)). (Refer to the distribution table for the mouth), the high-accuracy high-support state H4 is shifted to the open / close execution mode H3. If the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game times executed in the high accuracy high support state (state H4) is out of order, the high accuracy high support state (state H4) is continued, and the player moves to the second starting port 34. Enter the game ball and execute the game times. In the high-probability high-support state (state H4), the winning lottery based on the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 by right-handed is the second winning lottery shown in FIG. 450 (b). Since the hit / miss table for the start port (for high probability mode) is used, the time saving grant will not be won.

In the game times executed in the high accuracy and high support state (state H4), since the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the fall lottery described above is executed.

As explained earlier, the game state in which the support mode is high frequency support mode continues up to 5 game times, which is the number of time-saving continuations, but before reaching this 5 times (within 5 times: including 5 times). If the fall lottery is won in the game round, the lottery mode in the game round is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. That is, it shifts from the high accuracy high support state (state H4) to the low accuracy high support state (state H5). In addition, at the time of transition to the low accuracy high support state (state H5), the time-saving game count counter PNC indicating the number of games continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is held as it was before the transition. To. Therefore, the transition to the low accuracy high support state (state H5) does not reset the number of game times continuously executed in the high frequency support mode.

The winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 in the low probability high support state (state H5) is the winning / failing table (low probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. 450 (a). For) is used. Therefore, the lottery result of the winning lottery related to the game times won in the above-mentioned fall lottery is either a big hit winning or a time saving grant winning. If the time saving grant is won in the winning lottery, the high frequency support mode will be continued as the support mode until the next big hit is won. In other words, if you win the time saving grant in the winning lottery, the high frequency support mode will continue until you win the next jackpot, effectively guaranteeing the next jackpot. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 451 (b), the jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is limited to the 16R probability variable jackpot, so that the jackpot is in a low probability high support state (state H5). In), it is guaranteed that the player wins the probability change jackpot and shifts to the high probability high support state (state H4) again.

In the low-accuracy high support state (state H5), the player executes a right-handed strike to cause the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA and to enter the game ball into the second starting port 34. Since the support mode is the high frequency support mode in the low accuracy and high support state, there is a possibility that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery executed when passing through the through gate 35 will be the electric accessory opening winning. Since it is extremely high at 233, the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is frequently opened. Therefore, in the low accuracy and high support state, the game ball easily enters the second starting port 34. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, a winning lottery is made for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, and the lottery result of the winning lottery is given to the player. A game round for notification is executed. That is, in the low accuracy high support state (state H5), the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is frequently opened to the electric service, and the game ball is sent to the second starting port 34 more than usual (low support state). By entering a lot of balls, the player can receive a winning lottery in a state where the number of balls held is difficult to decrease.

If a jackpot is won in a winning lottery in a game round executed in a low probability high support state (state H5), the type of the winning jackpot will be a probability variable jackpot, and opening and closing will be executed as a privilege given to the player after the end of the game round. The mode is executed. That is, the mode shifts from the low accuracy high support state (state H5) to the open / close execution mode (state H3).

In summary, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the low accuracy and high support state (state H5), the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big hit is won in the winning lottery. With the number of balls held difficult to decrease, the game ball can be inserted into the second starting port 34 and the winning lottery can be repeated with high frequency until the next big hit is won. In addition, this state in which the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big hit is won is hereinafter referred to as "high support continuation state until the next time (= high support continuation state until the next time)". As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is changed from the high accuracy high support state (state H4) to the low accuracy high support state (state H5) by winning the fall lottery within 5 game times. , It is possible to surely perform the so-called consecutive chan, which is to win the jackpot again, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation to be consecutive chan.

In the high-accuracy high support state (state H4), when the number of executions of the game times executed in the high-frequency support mode reaches 5 times, which is the number of continuous time reductions, without winning the fall lottery, the game times are After the end, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. That is, it shifts from the high accuracy high support state (state H4) to the high accuracy low support state (state H6). At the time of transition to the high-probability low support state (state H6), the ST game count counter SNC, which indicates the number of games continuously executed in the high-probability mode, is held as it was before the transition. .. Therefore, the transition to the high-probability low-support state (state H6) does not reset the number of game times continuously executed in the high-probability mode.

In the present embodiment, as described above, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 are held, and then the first holding area Ra and the first holding area Ra are held. When the reserved information is stored in both of the two reserved areas Rb, the winning lottery for the reserved information stored in the second reserved area Rb corresponding to the second starting port 34 is preferentially executed. And said. Therefore, in the high-accuracy low-support state (state H6), the reserved information storage area 64b (FIG. 448) immediately after shifting from the high-accuracy high-support state (state H4) to the high-accuracy low-support state (state H6). When the holding information remains in the second holding area Rb of the above, the winning lottery based on the remaining holding information (hereinafter referred to as the special 2 remaining holding) is given priority, and the lottery result of the winning lottery is given to the player. A game round to announce is executed. The content described in the broken line rectangle H6a marked as "Special 2 residual hold digestion" in the figure corresponds to the mode of the game by the special 2 residual hold. That is, immediately after shifting from the high-accuracy high support state (state H4) to the high-accuracy low support state (state H6), if there is a special 2 residual hold, the mode H6a during the special 2 residual hold digestion is performed. become. Immediately after shifting from the high-accuracy high-support state (state H4) to the high-accuracy low-support state (state H6), if there is no special 2 remaining hold, the mode shifts to the left-handed mode H6b described later.

In the mode H6a during the special 2 remaining hold digestion in the high accuracy low support state (state H6), a winning lottery is performed by the special 2 remaining holding, and a game round for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery is executed. To. In the winning lottery due to the special 2 remaining hold, since the winning / failing table (for high probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. 450 (b) is used, the time saving grant is not won. In this game round, since the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the fall lottery described above is executed.

Aspect H6a during special 2 remaining hold digestion continues up to the number of game times corresponding to the number of special 2 remaining hold (up to 4 times), but in the game times before reaching this number, if the fall lottery is won. The lottery mode in the game round is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. That is, in the game times won in the fall lottery, the mode H6a during the special 2 residual hold digestion in the high probability low support state (state H6) shifts to the low probability low support state (state H1). In addition, the transition destination is the aspect H1b during the special 2 residual pending digestion in the low probability low support state (state H1).

In the low probability low support state (state H1), the winning lottery based on the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 by the left-handed hit is the first lottery shown in FIG. 449 (a). Since the winning / failing table for the starting port (for the low probability mode) is used, the time saving grant will not be won. On the other hand, in the winning lottery due to the special 2 remaining hold in the low probability low support state (state H1), the winning / failing table (for the low probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. 450 (a) is used. , It is possible that you will win the time saving grant.

If the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game times executed in the mode H1b during the special 2 residual hold digestion in the low probability low support state (state H1) is not a big hit, that is, if the time saving grant is won, the support mode is low. Move from frequency support mode to high frequency support mode. As a result, the state shifts from the low probability low support state (state H1) to the low probability high support state (state H5) described above. Special 2 The time saving grant to be won in the mode H1b during the remaining hold digestion is a type in which the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big hit is won. In addition, instead of the type of time saving grant in which the high frequency support mode is continued until the next big hit is won, the high frequency support mode is continued until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times). It may be given as a time saving. The predetermined number of times is not limited to 5 times, and may be any of 1 time, 2 times, 6 times, 8 times and the like.

In summary, in the embodiment H6a during the special 2 residual hold digestion in the high probability low support state (state H6), when the fall lottery is won, the special 2 residual hold digestion in the low probability low support state (state H1) is in progress. In the game times in which the player wins the fall in the mode H1b, the jackpot or the time saving grant is won, and when the time saving grant is won, the low probability low support state (state H1) is changed to the low probability high support state. It shifts to (state H5). In the low accuracy and high support state (state H5), the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big hit is won in the winning lottery. Until the player is elected, the game ball can be inserted into the second starting port 34 and the winning lottery can be repeated with high frequency. Therefore, in the mode H6a during the special 2 residual hold digestion in the high probability low support state (state H6), when the fall lottery is won, the special 2 residual hold digestion in the low probability low support state (state H1) is in progress. By shifting to the low probability high support state H5 via the embodiment H1b, the next probability variation jackpot is effectively guaranteed.

Return to the explanation of the high accuracy and low support state (state H6). In the winning lottery in the game rounds executed in the mode H6a during the special 2 residual hold digestion in the high accuracy low support state (state H6), if the jackpot is won, the jackpot won as shown in FIG. 451 (b). Since the type of is limited to the probability variation jackpot, the high probability low support state (state H6) is shifted to the open / close execution mode H3. Special 2 remaining hold in high accuracy low support state (state H6) If the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game times executed in the mode H6a during digestion is out of order, special 2 remaining hold remains. Aspect H6a during the remaining hold digestion is continued, a winning lottery is performed by the special 2 remaining holding, and a game round for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery is executed.

Special 2 Remaining Hold In the mode H6a during digestion, when the number of game times corresponding to the number of Special 2 Remaining Hold has elapsed without winning the fall lottery and winning the lottery, the Special 2 Remaining Hold The transition from the digesting aspect H6a to the left-handed aspect H6b.

In the high-accuracy and low-support state (state H6), the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect that urges the player to strike left. Since the support mode is the low frequency support mode in the high probability and low support state, there is a possibility that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery executed when passing through the through gate 35 will be the electric accessory opening winning. It is extremely low at 233, and the probability that the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 will be in the electric accessory open state is extremely low. Therefore, in the high accuracy and low support state (state H6), it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start port 34. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 tells the player the second start port 34. Perform a suggestion effect that encourages left-handed strikes instead of right-handed strikes. In the left-handed mode H6b in the high-accuracy low-support state (state H6), the player performs a left-handed hit according to the suggested effect, thereby causing the game ball to flow down to the left side of the game area PA, and the first starting port. Let the game ball enter 33. If the player continues to hit right in the high accuracy and low support state (state H6), the game ball does not enter the second starting port 34, and the game ball is wasted.

In the left-handed aspect H6b, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, a winning lottery is performed based on the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and the winning lottery is performed. A game round is executed to notify the player of the lottery result. In this game round, since the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the fall lottery described above is executed. In the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the winning / failing table (for the high probability mode) for the first starting port shown in FIG. 449 (b) is used, so that the time is shortened. Will not win.

When the fall lottery in the game round executed in the left-handed aspect H6b is won, the lottery mode is shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. That is, it shifts from the high probability low support state (state H6) to the low probability low support state (state H1). In addition, the transition destination is the aspect H1a during left-handed hitting in the low probability low support state (state H1).

In the left-handed mode H6b in the high-accuracy low support state H6, if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game round and the type of the winning jackpot is a normal jackpot, the player is given after the end of the game round. As a privilege, the open / close execution mode is executed. That is, the state shifts from the high-accuracy low support state (state H6) to the open / close execution mode (state H2).

In the left-handed mode H6b, if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game round and the type of the winning jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, the open / close execution mode is provided as a privilege given to the player after the end of the game round. Will be executed. That is, the state shifts from the high accuracy low support state (state H6) to the open / close execution mode (state H3).

In the left-handed mode H6b, the number of times the game is executed in the high probability mode is the number of STs (10 times: high) without winning the big hit in the winning lottery in the game times and not winning the fall lottery. When the count reaches 5 times after shifting to the probability low support state H6, the lottery mode is shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode after the end of the game round. That is, it shifts from the high probability low support state (state H6) to the low probability low support state (state H1). The transition destination is the mode H1a during left-handed strike in the low probability low support state (state H1).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of STs is 10 times, which is the maximum number of game balls that can enter the second starting port 34 in the special 2 residual hold digestion mode H6a in the high accuracy low support state H6. This is because it is possible to execute the number of game times (4 times) corresponding to the reserved number, and then 1 time is added as a margin. That is, the total number of times (5 times) corresponding to the maximum number of game balls to be held in the second starting port 34 is added to the number of times of continuous time reduction (5 times), and 1 time is added as a margin, for a total of 10 times. The number of times was set as the number of STs. The reason why the margin is necessary will be explained next.

Consider a case where the number of STs is 9 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. Then, when shifting from the high accuracy high support state H4 to the high accuracy low support state H6, that is, in the high accuracy high support state H4, the number of games played after shifting to the high accuracy high support state H4 is the number of continuous time reductions. Consider the case where the maximum number of reserved pieces of the second starting port 34 is 4 when (5 times) is reached. At the end of the game times when the number of games has reached the number of times of shortened continuation, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, and the electric accessory 34a returns from the electric function open state to the closed state, but is electric. A game ball may enter just before the accessory 34a closes. Then, by the time the entered game ball is detected by the detection sensor in the second starting port 34, the game round of the holding information corresponding to the first one of the holding numbers of the second starting port 34 is started. , It is determined that the number of holdings of the second starting port 34 is reduced by one to three, and the special information about the game ball entered immediately before the electric accessory 34a closes becomes the holding target for special 2. There is something to gain. Then, four game times are executed in the high probability low support state H6, and when the number of times the game times are executed in the high probability low support state H6 reaches the ST number, the lottery mode is set after the end of the game times. The high-probability mode shifts to the low-probability mode, and the high-probability low-support state H6 shifts to the low-probability low-support state H1, but immediately after the transition to the low-probability low support state H1, the electric accessory 34a closes. Special information about the game ball that entered immediately before remains as a special 2 remaining hold, and the special 2 remaining hold that you originally want to be used in the high probability low support state H6 is the special 2 in the low probability low support state H1. It will be used in embodiment H1b during residual hold digestion.

In the aspect H1b during the special 2 residual hold digestion, as described above, even if the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game times executed in the special 2 residual hold digestion aspect H1b is not a big hit, the time saving is given. From winning, it will shift to the low accuracy high support state H5 that is guaranteed to win the next big hit. In other words, during the transition from the high-accuracy high-support state H4 to the high-accuracy low-support state H6, the special 2 remaining hold corresponding to the game ball that entered just before the electric accessory 34a closes, and the special 2 remaining hold is being digested. It will shift to the low accuracy and high support state H5 via the aspect H1b of the above aspect. After reaching the number of STs from the high accuracy high support state H4 and returning to the low accuracy low support state H1, by winning the time saving grant with the special 2 remaining hold and shifting to the low accuracy high support state H5, the next big hit Being sure to win is a game that the designer originally did not anticipate.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the number of STs is 9 times, as described above, the game characteristics originally not expected by the designer are exhibited, and the soundness of the game is impaired. There was a risk. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the number of STs is 10 times, immediately before the electric accessory 34a closes at the time of transition from the high accuracy high support state H4 to the high accuracy low support state H6. The special 2 residual hold corresponding to the entered game ball will be used in the aspect H6a during the special 2 residual hold digestion in the high accuracy low support state (state H6), and the special 2 residual hold remains. , The high accuracy low support state H6 does not return to the low accuracy low support state H1. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after reaching the ST number of times from the high accuracy high support state H4 and returning to the low accuracy low support state H1, the game flow of winning the time saving grant with the special 2 remaining hold is performed. Since it can be erased, the soundness of the game can be improved.

The advantages for the players of the above-mentioned four states H1, H4, H5, and H6 specified by the lottery mode and the support mode are as follows. Of the four states H1, H4, H5, and H6, the low probability low support state H1 has the lowest advantage. Among the high accuracy high support state H4, the low accuracy high support state H5, and the high accuracy low support state H6, the high accuracy low support state H6 has the lowest advantage. The high-accuracy low-support state H6 shifts to the low-accuracy low-support state (state H1) when the fall lottery is won in the left-handed mode H6b or when the number of times the game is executed reaches the ST number. Is. Comparing the high accuracy high support state H4 and the low accuracy high support state H5, the low accuracy high support state H5 is more advantageous than the high accuracy high support state H4. The high-accuracy high-support state H4 has a high advantage because the lottery mode is a high-probability mode, but when the number of times the game is executed reaches five, which is the number of times the game is continued in a short time, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode. Since the transition, the advantage is low as compared with the low probability high support state H5 in which the next probability variation jackpot is guaranteed.

Based on the above-mentioned changes in the gaming state, the player plays the game as follows. First, the player strikes left in the low probability low support state H1 and causes the game ball to enter the first starting port 33. At this time, the player expects to win a big hit in the winning lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and further, the type of the big hit is a probable change big hit. expect.

In the low probability low support state H1, if the jackpot is won and the type of the jackpot is a normal jackpot, the player is disappointed that the jackpot is not a probability variation jackpot but a normal jackpot, and from the low probability low support state H1. In the shifted open / close execution mode H2, the round game is repeatedly performed. After all round games are completed, it returns to the low probability low support state H1.

In the low probability low support state H1, if the jackpot is won and the type of the jackpot is the probability variation jackpot, the player is delighted to have obtained the probability variation jackpot and opens and closes from the low probability low support state H1. In the execution mode H3, the round game is repeated. After all the round games are completed, it shifts to the high accuracy and high support state H4.

In the high-accuracy high-support state H4, the player strikes right and causes the game ball to enter the second starting port 34. In the high-accuracy high-support state H4, since the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, as described above, the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is frequently opened to the electric accessory, and the second start is started. The game ball can be easily put into the mouth 34. At this time, the player expects to win a big hit in the winning lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. If the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game times executed in the high probability high support state H4 is a big hit, the type of the winning big hit is limited to the probability variable big hit, so that the player wins the big hit. I expect more.

In the high-accuracy high-support state H4, the player expects to win the big hit as explained above, but the number of games after shifting to the high-accuracy high-support state H4 is the number of continuous time reductions5. We expect to win the fall lottery in the game rounds before reaching the rounds (within 5 rounds). If the fall lottery is won in a game in which the number of games has been less than 5 since the transition to the high accuracy high support state H4, the transition from the high accuracy high support state H4 to the low accuracy high support state H5 will occur first. As explained, since the low probability high support state H5 is effectively guaranteed to be the next probability variation jackpot, the player can play within 5 times after shifting to the high probability high support state H4. In the game round, you will expect to win the fall lottery.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the opening / closing execution mode H3 is changed to the high-accuracy high-support state H4, a pattern display including an effect content for notifying that the advantage for the player has increased is displayed. It is executed by the device 41. In the present embodiment, a specific character image and a character string such as "Chance zone rush !!" are displayed on the symbol display device 41 as an effect content for notifying that the advantage has increased, and a voice corresponding to the character string is displayed. Is output from the speaker 46. Then, a specific background image (hereinafter, referred to as a first specific background image) meaning that the player has entered the chance zone is displayed. By visually recognizing the first specific background image, which means that the player has entered the chance zone, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the player can win the above-mentioned jackpot or win the fall lottery. , I have high expectations.

In the low accuracy and high support state H5, the player strikes right and causes the game ball to enter the second starting port 34. If the winning lottery is executed in the low probability high support state H5 and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode based on winning the time saving grant in the winning lottery, the high support continues until the next time explained above. It becomes a state. Therefore, in the low probability high support state H5, the player can have a sense of security that the high frequency support mode does not end as the support mode until the big hit is won in the winning lottery and the probability change big hit is distributed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the symbol display device 41 executes an effect including an effect content for notifying that the state having a high advantage for the player is maintained in the low accuracy and high support state H5. As the production content for notifying that the state with high advantage is maintained, a specific background image (hereinafter referred to as a second specific background image) meaning that the user has entered the above-mentioned safety zone is displayed. That is. By visually recognizing the second specific background image, which means that the player has entered the safety zone, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the player has a greater sense of security that the above-mentioned high-frequency support mode does not end. It will be.

In the high accuracy high support state H4, if neither the winning lottery nor the fall lottery is won and the number of games after shifting to the high accuracy high support state H4 reaches 5 times, the 5th time. After the end of the game round, the high-accuracy high support state H4 shifts to the high-accuracy low support state H6. In, the player expects to win the fall lottery as well as the winning lottery. Special 2 in the high-probability low-support state (state H6) In the mode H6a during digestion with residual hold, when the fall lottery is won, the special feature from the high-probability low support state (state H6) to the low-probability low support state (state H1). 2 Transition to the mode H1b during the residual hold digestion, but as described above, in the special 2 mode H1b during the low probability low support state (state H1), the low probability low support state (state H1). ), By shifting to the low probability high support state H5 via the aspect H1b during the special 2 residual hold digestion, the next probability change jackpot is practically guaranteed, so that the player can perform the high probability low support. It is expected that the player will win the fall lottery even in the game rounds based on the special 2 hold after the transition to the state (state H6).

As described above, in order to execute many game times based on the special 2 hold in the high accuracy low support state (state H6), after shifting to the high accuracy high support state H4 in the high accuracy high support state H4. It is necessary to store the special 2 hold so that the number of hold of the second start port 34 becomes the maximum number of hold at the timing when the number of games of the game reaches the number of continuous time reductions (5 times). Therefore, in the high accuracy and high support state H4, the player continuously strikes right and plays the game so that the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism does not stop.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the aspect H6a during the special 2 residual hold digestion in the high accuracy low support state H6, the state having a high advantage for the player is a limited game corresponding to the number of the special 2 residual hold. The symbol display device 41 executes an effect including an effect content for notifying that the continuation is continued only for the number of times. The content of the effect is, for example, a specific background image (hereinafter referred to as a third specific background image) meaning that the player has entered the final battle zone and has been counted down for the remaining number of games. ) Is to be displayed. By visually recognizing the third specific background image on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the player is expected to win the above-mentioned jackpot or the fall lottery.

In the high-accuracy low support state H6, while confirming the existence of the special 2 remaining hold, the player makes a left-handed strike and causes the game ball to enter the first starting port 33. When the special 2 residual hold disappears and the game times shift from the aspect H6a during the special 2 residual hold digestion to the aspect H6b during the left-handed hit, the player is in the high-accuracy high-support state before the transition to the high-accuracy low-support state H6. It is disappointing that the jackpot was not won and that the fall lottery was not won between H4 and the aspect H6a during the special 2 residual hold digestion in the high accuracy low support state H6. Therefore, before shifting to the left-handed mode H6b, that is, in the mode H6a during the special 2 residual hold digestion, the game is executed based on the special 2 residual hold without winning the winning lottery or the fall lottery. The player will have a sense of urgency as to whether or not the game will end.

In aspect H6b during left-handed strike
i) Winning a fall lottery,
ii) Winning a big hit in the winning lottery,
iii) The number of executions of the game times after shifting to the high accuracy low support state H6 reaches 5 times (10 times when counting after shifting to the high accuracy high support state H4).
The game times will be repeated until any of the above is satisfied. When the above i) or iii) is satisfied, the state shifts from the high probability low support state H6 to the low probability low support state H1. When the above ii) is satisfied, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode H2 or H3 corresponding to the distribution result by the distribution determination.

In addition, since the lottery mode is a high-probability mode in the left-handed mode H6b in the high-probability low-support state H6, the player can still have the expectation that he / she will win the big hit, and further, the big hit win. However, the type of jackpot becomes a probability variation jackpot, and it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the player wants to return to the high probability high support state H4. In addition, it has a sense of urgency as to whether or not it will win the fall lottery, along with the above-mentioned expectation.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the left-handed mode H6b in the high-accuracy low-support state H6, the effect content for notifying that the state having high advantage for the player is about to completely disappear is provided. The including effect is executed by the symbol display device 41. The content of the effect is, for example, to display a specific background image (hereinafter, referred to as a fourth specific background image) meaning that the pinch zone has been entered. By visually recognizing the fourth specific background image, which means that the image is in the pinch zone, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the above-mentioned disappointment is further enhanced, while the above-mentioned high accuracy is achieved. The expectation that he wants to return to the high support state H4 will be even greater.

In the low-probability low support state H1 in the special 2 residual hold digestion mode H1b, which shifts to the case where the fall lottery is won in the special 2 residual hold digestion mode H6a, the special 2 residual hold is in progress. We expect to win a big hit in the winning lottery executed based on. Since the types of jackpots won based on the special 2 remaining hold are limited to probabilistic jackpots, players are more expected to win the jackpots. However, even if the jackpot is not won in the special 2 residual hold digestion mode H1b in the low probability low support state H1, the time saving grant is always won, so the transition to the low probability high support state H5 is finally achieved. Can win the jackpot again, so you can have a sense of security without being discouraged not to win the jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the mode H1b during the special 2 residual hold digestion in the low probability low support state H1, there is no possibility that the advantage for the player is reduced, and the advantage for the player is high. The symbol display device 41 executes an effect including an effect content for notifying the transition. Specifically, as a notification that there is no risk of the player's advantage being reduced, the production of the final battle zone executed in the special 2 residual hold digestion mode H6a in the high accuracy low support state H6 is continued. In the battle production as the production of the final battle zone, the specific character corresponding to the player side becomes dominant, and the production including the production content indicating that the specific character is not defeated is executed. After that, as the effect content for notifying the transition to a state having a high advantage for the player, an effect including one of the two types of effect content is executed. One of the two types of production content is executed when a big hit is won in a winning lottery and the game is distributed to a probable change jackpot in the special 2 residual hold digestion mode H1b in the low probability low support state H1. Includes the content of the production in which a specific character wins. The other of the two types of production content is executed when the time saving grant is won in the winning lottery, and includes the production content of drawing once while the specific character remains dominant in the battle production.

In the low probability high support state H5, which shifts to the case where the time saving grant is won in the mode H1b during the special 2 residual hold digestion in the low probability low support state H1, the specific character is dominant following the above-mentioned once-drawing effect content. As it is, the production content that cannot be settled is repeated. After that, in the low probability high support state H5, when the probability change jackpot is won, the production including the production content in which the specific character wins is executed. By visually recognizing a series of effects including these effects on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the player has a greater sense of expectation and security as described above.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment having the above-mentioned game flow, when a big hit is won in a winning lottery in a low probability low support state H1 and the game shifts to a high probability high support state H4 by being distributed to a probability change big hit. In addition, the probability of winning a big hit next time (hereinafter referred to as "continuation rate") will be considered below.

In the high accuracy high support state H4, when the number of games after shifting to the high accuracy high support state H4 is within the time reduction continuation number (5 times) and the fall lottery is won, from the high accuracy high support state H4 , It shifts to the low probability high support state H5 where the next probability change jackpot is guaranteed. In addition, in the high-accuracy low-support state H6, which has transitioned from the high-accuracy high-support state H4 after the number of time-saving continuation times (5 times) has elapsed, the fall lottery is performed within the number of game times corresponding to the number of special 2 remaining reservations. In the case of winning, the next probability change jackpot is obtained from the aspect H6a during the special 2 residual holding digestion in the high probability low support state H6 to the aspect H1b during the special 2 residual retention digestion in the low probability low support state H1. It shifts to the guaranteed low accuracy and high support state H5. Therefore, in order to calculate the continuation rate in the high accuracy high support state H4, in addition to the case of winning a big hit in the winning lottery (the distribution is 100% probability variation big hit), the high accuracy high support state H4 to the low accuracy high support state H5 In the case of transitioning to, and from the high-probability high-support state H4 to the special 2 residual-reserved digestive mode H1b in the low-probability low-support state H1 via the special 2 residual-reserved digestion mode H6a. It is necessary to consider the case of migration.

First, the probability A of shifting from the high-accuracy high support state H4 to the high-accuracy low support state H6 is calculated. Specifically, in one game, the probability of not winning in the fall lottery and not winning the big hit in the winning lottery is calculated, and from that probability, the falling lottery is also used for the winning lottery in all the time-saving continuation times (5 times). The probability of deviation is calculated as the above probability A. Specifically, the probability A is calculated according to the following equation (1).

Probability A = {(1-1 / 3) x (1-1 / 20)} ^ 5 ... (1)

In the formula (1), "1-1 / 3" is the probability that the fall lottery will not be won in one game. "1-1 / 20" is the probability that a big hit will not be won in the winning lottery in one game round in the high probability mode (the distribution is 100% probability variable big hit). "5" is the number of time reduction continuations. "^" Is an operator that represents a power calculation.

Next, the probability B of shifting from the aspect H6a during the special 2 residual hold digestion to the aspect H6b during the left-handed strike in the high-accuracy high support state H4 is calculated. Specifically, in one game, the probability of not winning in the fall lottery and not winning the big hit in the winning lottery is calculated, and from that probability, the winning lottery is also performed in all the times corresponding to the number of special 2 remaining hold. The probability of losing the fall lottery is calculated as the above probability B. Specifically, the probability B is calculated according to the following equation (2).

Probability B = {(1-1 / 3) x (1-1 / 20)} ^ 4 ... (2)

In the formula (2), "1-1 / 3" is the probability that the fall lottery will not be won in one game. "1-1 / 20" is the probability that a big hit will not be won in the winning lottery in one game round in the high probability mode (the distribution is 100% probability variable big hit). "4" is the number of times corresponding to the number of special 2 remaining reservations, and is set to the maximum of 4 times here. "^" Is an operator that represents a power calculation.

In the present embodiment, as described above, in the high probability low support state H6, the left-handed aspect H6b is configured. Therefore, in this left-handed aspect H6b, the probability change jackpot may be won. Need to consider. Therefore, in the left-handed mode H6b in the high probability low support state H6, the probability of not winning the probability variation jackpot is calculated as the probability C. Specifically, in one game round, the probability that the player will not win the fall lottery, the jackpot will not be won in the winning lottery, and even if the jackpot is won, the probability of not being distributed to the probabilistic jackpot is calculated as the above probability C. Here, it is assumed that the number of game times executed in the left-handed aspect H6b is one. Specifically, the probability C is calculated according to the following equation (3).

Probability C = (1-1 / 3) x (1-1 / 20) x (1-1 / 2) ... (3)

In the formula (3), "1-1 / 3" is the probability that the fall lottery will not be won in one game. "1-1 / 20" is the probability that a big hit will not be won in the winning lottery in one game round in the high probability mode. "1-1 / 2" is the probability that the probability variation jackpot cannot be distributed in the distribution table for the first starting port (see FIG. 451 (a)).

The continuation rate can be obtained by multiplying the above-mentioned probability A by the probability B and the probability C, respectively, and subtracting the answer from 1. That is, the continuation rate can be calculated according to the following equation (4).

Continuation rate = 1-Probability A x Probability B x Probability C
= 1-[{(1-1 / 3) x (1-1 / 20)} ^ 5] x
[{(1-1 / 3) x (1-1 / 20)} ^ 4] x
{(1-1 / 3) x (1-1 / 20) x (1-1 / 2)} ... (4)

When the formula (4) is calculated, the continuation rate is about 99.5%. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a continuous-changing system completely different from the conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to realize a model having extremely high specifications in terms of continuous-changing performance.

According to the pachinko machine 10 having the continuous-changing performance, the following effects are also obtained as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. Conventionally, there are loop type and ST type pachinko machines, which have different methods for continuing big hits. In the loop type pachinko machine, since it is confirmed that the next big hit will be won in the high accuracy and high support state, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability of distribution to the probable change big hit when the big hit is won. It can be said that in the loop type pachinko machine, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability that when the symbols are aligned, the aligned symbols become probabilistic symbols (for example, "7" symbol). For this reason, in the high accuracy and high support state, the player simply watches the game times being digested, and when the symbols are aligned, the player only expects that the aligned symbols are probabilistic symbols. .. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, in the high-accuracy high-support state H4, the number of times the game is executed after the high-frequency support mode is started is the number of times of short-time continuation. Each game is played within 5 times, and a maximum of 4 times are executed based on the special 2 remaining hold after shifting to the high accuracy low support state (state H6) (may be 5 times as described above). It is possible to expect the player to win the fall lottery or the winning lottery at each of the game times. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a greater sense of expectation can be given as compared with the conventional loop type pachinko machine.

In the ST type pachinko machine, the continuation rate in the high accuracy and high support state is calculated by calculating the probability of losing in all ST times from the probability of not winning a big hit in one winning lottery, and subtracting the probability of losing from 1. Can be obtained by. Therefore, in the ST type pachinko machine, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability that the symbols are aligned (the probability of winning a big hit) and the number of STs. Therefore, in the ST type pachinko machine, as the number of game times executed in the high accuracy and high support state progresses, the game feels a sense of urgency as to whether the number of game times will reach the ST number without winning a big hit. Can be given to a person. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the period from the high accuracy high support state (state H4) to the high accuracy low support state (state H6), in addition to the big hit winning (the symbols are aligned), the machine falls. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency, such as whether or not the special 2 remaining hold will be exhausted without winning the lottery. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as compared with the conventional ST type pachinko machine, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of urgency by the amount of the fall winning addition to the big hit winning. can.

As a pachinko machine with other game characteristics, the following configuration can be considered. In a specific advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, if the small hit is won in the winning lottery until the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches a predetermined number (the small hit is won with a high probability). , It is conceivable that the game ball enters the V winning opening to continue the opening / closing execution mode (round game). According to this configuration, since the game times executed until the transition from the advantageous state to the open / close execution mode is consumed in a short time, the open / close execution mode is repeated at short intervals, and the gambling is excessively increased. There was a problem to end up. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the lottery mode is low as a lottery mode in which it is promised that a big hit will be finally won in the route of shifting from the high probability high support state H4 to the open / close execution mode H3. Since the winning lottery can be repeated in the probability mode via the low accuracy high support state H5, it is possible to take a sufficient time to shift from the high accuracy high support state H4 to the open / close execution mode H3. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from being excessively increased by repeating the opening / closing execution mode at short intervals. In addition, by taking sufficient time, it is possible to produce a secondary effect that various effects can be performed. These effects can never be achieved even with the configuration of the pachinko machine having the above-mentioned other game characteristics.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment exhibits excellent effects as compared with various types of conventional pachinko machines.

<< 10-5 >> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-mentioned processing in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes will be described below. The MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal in addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, but description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 456 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

In step Su0101, reading processing of various detection sensors 67a to 67f is executed. That is, the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67f connected to the main control device 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0102.

In step Su0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0103.

In step Su0103, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the fall random number counter CF, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the fall random number counter CF, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and each of these counter values reaches the maximum value. If so, clear to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 and CF are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0104. The value of the variable type counter CS is updated in the normal processing (FIG. 460) described later.

In step Su0104, a ball entry process for the start port accompanying the entry into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the starting port of step Su0104 will be described later. After executing step Su0104, the process proceeds to step Su0105.

In step Su0105, a ball entry process for through ball accompanying the entry into the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the through of step Su0105 will be described later. After executing step Su0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Incoming ball entry process for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be described. The ball entry process for the start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 456: Su0104).

FIG. 457 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the starting port. In step Su0201, whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball) is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33. If it is determined in step Su0201 that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (Su0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0202, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set the command. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0203.

In step Su0203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0204.

In step Su0204, the start hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold number RaN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra, is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The first start hold number RaN indicates the hold number based on the entry of the ball into the first start port 33. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0209.

If it is determined in step Su0201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 33 (Su0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Su0205 and whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

If it is determined in step Su0205 that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Su0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0206, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out two game balls. Set the command. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su0205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (Su0205: NO), the ball entry process for the main starting port is terminated.

In step Su0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0208.

In step Su0208, the start hold number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as the second start hold number RbN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb, is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on the entry of the ball into the second start port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0209.

In step Su0209, it is determined whether or not the start hold number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Su0204 or step Su0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step Su0209, if the start hold number N is not less than the upper limit value (Su0209: NO), the ball entry process for the main start port is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Su0209, if the start hold number N is less than the upper limit value (Su0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0210, 1 is added to the start hold number N of the corresponding hold area, and then the process proceeds to step Su0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reserved quantity CRN). The total hold quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first start hold quantity RaN and the second start hold quantity RbN. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0212.

In step Su0212, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF updated in step Su0103 (FIG. 456) are stored in the first free storage area of the corresponding hold area. It is stored in an area, that is, a storage area corresponding to the reserved number obtained by adding 1 in step Su0210. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as the processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF updated in step Su0103. Each value is stored in the first storage area in the free storage area of the first hold area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold number RaN to which 1 is added in step Su0210. When the second start pending number RbN is set as the processing target, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF updated in step Su0103 are used. , It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the second hold area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step Su0210. After executing step Su0212, the process proceeds to step Su0213.

In step Su0213, the first determination process is executed. The pre-judgment process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF, and the winning / failing determination result (lottery result) of the winning lottery and the jackpot. This is a process of executing determination of the type, presence / absence of reach, success / failure result of the fall lottery, etc. before the pending information becomes the target of the winning lottery (determination process) by the main control device 60. The details of the pre-determination process will be described later. After executing step Su0213, the process proceeds to step Su0214.

In step Su0214, a process of setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the prior determination process executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fall random number counter CF is used as a hold command. Set.

The hold command determines that a ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 and the determination result (first determination information) by the advance determination process based on the hold information acquired based on the entry. This is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to confirm the hold information before it becomes the target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 460: step Su0503) of the normal process described later.

Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the ball into the first start port 33, the voice emission control device 90 displays the number of holds in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the entry into the second start port 34 is received, the voice emission control device 90 displays the number of holds in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds.

After executing step Su0214, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

<First judgment process>
Next, the prior determination process will be described. The pre-determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 457: Su0207) of the ball entry process for the starting port.

FIG. 458 is a flowchart showing the prior determination process. As described above, in the prior judgment process, based on the hold information, the hold information determines the judgment result such as the winning / failing judgment of the winning lottery, the judgment of the type of the jackpot, the judgment of the presence / absence of the reach, and the winning / failing judgment of the fall lottery. This is a process to be executed before the target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60.

In step Su0301, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting port in the ball entering process for the starting port (FIG. 457) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the determination result of the pre-judgment process executed by the previous entry before the current entry is read from the corresponding storage area, and the presence or absence of the probable change jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery by the current entry. In addition, by grasping whether or not the player has won the fall lottery, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round is determined.

If it is determined in step Su0302 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round, the process proceeds to step Su0303 and the winning / failing table is stored. Refer to the hit / miss table (for low probability mode) for the first starting port stored in the area 63a. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0308, and as a result of referring to the hit / miss table (for low probability mode) for the first starting port, it is determined whether or not the information of the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the big hit. ..

On the other hand, in step Su0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round (Su0302: NO), the process proceeds to step Su0304 and the entry is made this time. The value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the storage area by the sphere is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0305, and it is determined whether or not the player has won the fall lottery by referring to the fall win / fail determination table stored in the fall lottery table storage area 63d.

If it is determined in step Su0305 that the fall lottery has been won (Su0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0306, the fall winning information is stored in the pre-determination processing result storage area 64h, and the process proceeds to step Su0303. In step Su0303, as described above, the hit / miss table (for the low probability mode) for the first start port stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0308, and as a result of referring to the hit / miss table (for low probability mode) for the first starting port, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the big hit.

If it is determined in step Su0305 that the fall lottery has not been won (Su0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Su0307, and the pass / fail table for the first starting port (for high probability mode) is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0308, and as a result of referring to the hit / miss table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the big hit.

In step Su0308, if it is determined that the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a big hit (Su0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0309, and the ball is stored in the storage area by entering the starting port this time. Grasp the value of the jackpot type counter C2. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0310, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2, which is the target of distribution this time, is acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33, refer to the distribution table for the first starting port. , When the ball is acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 34, the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to. After executing step Su0310, the process proceeds to step Su0311.

In step Su0311, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step Su0311 that the probability variation jackpot is supported (Su0311: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0312, and the probability variation jackpot information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the first determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su0311 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (Su0311: NO), the process proceeds to step Su0313, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the first determination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Su0308 that the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to the big hit (Su0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Su0314, and the ball enters the storage area this time. The value of the stored reach random number counter C3 is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0315, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0316, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the reach generation.

If it is determined in step Su0316 that the reach generation is supported (Su0316: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0317, and the reach generation information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the first determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su0316 that the reach generation is not supported (Su0316: NO), the prior determination process is terminated as it is.

<Through ball entry process>
Next, the ball entry process for through will be described. The ball entry process for through is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 456: Su0105).

FIG. 459 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for thru. In step Su0401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35. If it is determined in step Su0401 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Su0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0402, and whether the number of reserved characters SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Judge whether or not. The number of reserved items SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that is reserved for performing the electric accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved items SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Su0401: NO), the entry process for this through is terminated.

If it is determined in step Su0402 that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the number of reserved items SN (Su0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0403, and 1 is added to the number of reserved items SN. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0404.

In step Su0404, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step Su0103 (FIG. 456) is stored in the first free storage area of the electric service holding area 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the ball entry process for through is completed.

On the other hand, in step Su0402, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is not less than the upper limit value (Su0402: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is equal to or more than the upper limit value, The ball entry process for through is completed without storing the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter, also referred to as “power on”). In the normal process, the main process of the game is executed.

FIG. 460 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Su0501, the startup process is executed. Specifically, the initial setting of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0502.

In step Su0502, a start-up command is set. The start-up command is a command for starting a demo movie for each control device on the sub side when the power is turned on. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0503.

In step Su0503, output data such as a start-up command set in step Su0502 and a command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when commands related to the effect such as a start-up command, a variable command, a type command, and a first hold command are set, they are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After executing step Su0503, the process proceeds to step Su0504.

In step Su0504, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variable type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0505.

In step Su0505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Su0506. In step Su0506, a game turn control process for controlling the game in each game turn is executed. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of a symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display unit 37a, the second symbol display unit 37b, and the like are performed. The details of the game times control process will be described later. After executing step Su0506, the process proceeds to step Su0507.

In step Su0507, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. The details of the game state transition process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0508.

In step Su0508, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is in the open state. The details of the processing for electric service support will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0509.

In step Su0509, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process of step Su0503). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached. If it is determined in step Su0509 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal process (Su0509: NO), in step Su0510 and step Su0511 until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached. Within the remaining time of, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Su0510, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Su0511, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su0509 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (Su0509: YES), the process returns to step Su0503 and each process from step Su0503 to step Su0508 is performed. Run.

Since the execution time of each process from step Su0503 to step Su0508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process will be described. The game times control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 460: Su0506) of the normal process.

FIG. 461 is a flowchart showing the game times control process. In step Su0601, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The open / close execution mode flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is turned OFF when the open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process. The open / close execution mode may be set to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

If it is determined in step Su0601 that the open / close execution mode is in progress (Su0601: YES), the game round control process ends without executing any of the processes after step Su0602. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the game round is not started regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su0601 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (Su0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Su0602.

In step Su0602, it is determined whether or not the special figure unit 37 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b provided in the special symbol unit 37 is in variable display. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the special map variation display flag in the special map variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special symbol variation display flag is turned on when starting the variation display for either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, and is turned off when the variation display ends.

If it is determined in step Su0602 that the special figure unit 37 is not displaying the fluctuation (Su0602: NO), the process proceeds to step Su0603.

In step Su0603, the fluctuation start processing for starting the fluctuation display in the special figure unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start processing will be described later. After executing step Su0603, the game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su0602 that the special figure unit 37 is in the variable display (Su0602: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0604.

In step Su0604, the variation end processing for terminating the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the variable end processing will be described later. After executing step Su0604, the game round control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described. The variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 461: Su0603) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 462 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. In step Su0701, it is determined whether or not the total reserved quantity CRN exceeds "0". When the total reserved quantity CRN is "0" or less, it means that the starting reserved quantity is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Therefore, if it is determined in step Su0701 that the total number of reserved pieces CRN is "0" or less (Su0701: NO), the fluctuation start process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su0701 that the total number of reserved pieces CRN exceeds "0" (Su0701: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0702.

In step Su0702, the hold information shift process for setting the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step Su0703. The details of the hold information shift process will be described later.

In step Su0703, a fall determination process including a process when the fall lottery is won is performed. The details of the fall determination process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0704.

In step Su0704, a hit determination process including a process when a big hit is won in the hit lottery is performed. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Su0704, the process proceeds to step Su0705.

In step Su0705, the variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b based on the game state, the presence / absence of the jackpot and the time reduction, and the presence / absence of the reach. This is a process for setting the fluctuation time. The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Su0705, the process proceeds to step Su0706.

In step Su0706, a variable command is set. Whether the game round this time is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first start port 33 or the change command is based on the entry into the second start opening 34. Information indicating whether or not reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation time set in step Su0705 are included. After executing step Su0706, the process proceeds to step Su0707.

In step Su0707, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence / absence of a big hit, the presence / absence of a time saving grant, and the result of the distribution determination. That is, the type command includes information on whether or not a jackpot was won in the winning lottery, information on whether or not a time saving grant was won in the winning lottery, and information on the type of jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot information, 8R normal. It contains jackpot information, 16R probability variation jackpot information, or missed result information.

The variable command and the type command set in step Su0706 and step Su0707 are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by step Su0503 in the normal process (FIG. 460). The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variable command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step Su0707, the process proceeds to step Su0708.

In step Su0708, among the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is started to display the variation of the symbol. Specifically, when the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is specified to be the first symbol display unit 37a, and the variable display is started. When the second symbol display unit flag is ON, it is specified that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is the second symbol display unit 37b, and the variable display is started. After executing step Su0708, the process proceeds to step Su0709.

In step Su0709, the special figure change display flag stored in the special figure change display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Su0709, this fluctuation start process ends.

<Hold information shift processing>
Next, the hold information shift process will be described. The hold information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 462: Su0703).

FIG. 463 is a flowchart showing the hold information shift process. In step Su0801, it is determined whether or not the second start hold quantity RbN stored in the hold quantity storage area of the second hold area Rb is larger than 0.

If it is determined in step Su0801 that the second start hold quantity RbN is not larger than 0 (that is, 0) (step Su0801: NO), the hold information shift process for the first hold area of step Su0802 to step Su0807. To execute. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su0801 that the second start hold quantity RbN is larger than 0 (step Su0801: YES), the hold information shift process for the second hold area of steps Su0808 to Step Su0813 is executed. As a result, when the hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb corresponding to the second start port 34, the hold information shift process for the second hold area in steps Su0808 to Su0813 is preferentially executed. Will be.

In step Su0802, after subtracting 1 from the first start hold number RaN in the first hold area Ra, the process proceeds to step Su0803 and the total hold number CRN is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0804. In step Su0804, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0805.

In step Su0805, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the upper area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step Su0805, the process proceeds to step Su0806.

In step Su0806, when the second symbol display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second symbol display unit flag is information for specifying whether the target for starting the variation display this time is the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0807.

In step Su0807, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the first hold area Ra, that is, corresponding to the first start port 33. A shift command including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the pending information shift process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Su0807 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Su0503 in the normal process (FIG. 460). The voice emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command. do. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

If it is determined in step Su0801 that the second start hold quantity RbN is larger than 0 (step Su0801: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0808.

In step Su0808, the second start hold quantity RbN of the second hold area Rb is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0809. In step Su0809, the total number of reserved pieces CRN is subtracted by 1, the process proceeds to step Su0810, and the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0811.

In step Su0811, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the upper area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step Su0811, the process proceeds to step Su0812.

In step Su0812, if the second symbol display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Then, the process proceeds to step Su0813.

In step Su0813, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, the information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the second hold area Rb, that is, corresponding to the second start port 34. A shift command including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the pending information shift process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Su0813 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Su0503 in the normal process (FIG. 460). The voice emission control device 90 gives a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command. Send. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

<Fall judgment processing>
Next, the fall determination process will be described. The fall determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 462: Su0706).

FIG. 464 is a flowchart showing a fall determination process. In step Su0901, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Su0901 that the mode is in the high probability mode (Su0901: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0902.

In step Su0902, the winning / failing determination of the falling lottery is executed with reference to the winning / failing table for the falling lottery. Specifically, the value of the fall random number counter CF stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is the value set as the winning in the fall lottery winning / failing table (see FIG. 452) in the falling lottery table storage area 63d. Determine if they match. In the following step Su0903, if the result of the winning / failing determination in step Su0902 is winning the fall lottery (Su0903: YES), the process proceeds to step Su0904.

In step Su0904, the high probability mode flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Su0905, and a fall command is set. The fall command is a command for winning the fall lottery and notifying the voice emission control device 90 that the winning / failing lottery mode has changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. After executing step Su0905, the main fall determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su0901 that the mode is not in the high probability mode (Su0901: NO), or if the result of the winning / failing determination is not won in the fall lottery in step Su0903 (Su0903: NO), the main fall determination process is immediately performed. finish.

<Collision detection processing>
Next, the hit determination process will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 462: Su0707).

FIG. 465 is a flowchart showing the hit determination process. In step Su1001, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Su1001 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (Su1001: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1002, and it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Su1002 that the mode is in the high probability mode (Su1002: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1003, and the pass / fail determination is made with reference to the pass / fail table for the first starting port (for high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is a big hit in the hit / miss table for the first start port (for high probability mode) shown in FIG. 449 (b). Judges whether or not it matches the value set as. Then, the process proceeds to step Su1008.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1002 that the mode is not in the high probability mode (Su1002: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1004, and the pass / fail determination is made with reference to the pass / fail table for the first starting port (for low probability mode). Specifically, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a big hit win in the hit / miss table (for low probability mode) for the first start port shown in FIG. 449 (a). Judge whether or not it matches the value. Then, the process proceeds to step Su1008.

If it is determined in step Su1001 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (Su1001: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1005, and it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Su1005 that the mode is in the high probability mode (Su1005: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1006, and the pass / fail determination is made with reference to the pass / fail table for the second starting port (for high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is a big hit in the hit / miss table for the second start port (for high probability mode) shown in FIG. 450 (b). Judges whether or not it matches the value set as. Then, the process proceeds to step Su1006.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1005 that the mode is not in the high probability mode (Su1005: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1007, and the pass / fail determination is made with reference to the pass / fail table for the second starting port (for low probability mode). Specifically, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a big hit win in the hit / miss table (for low probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. 450 (a). Judge whether or not it matches the value. Then, the process proceeds to step Su1008.

In step Su1008, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination (winning lottery) in step Su1003, step Su1004, step Su1006, or step Su1007 is a big hit winning. In step Su1008, if the result of the winning / failing determination is a big hit (Su1008: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1009.

In step Su1009, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Su1009 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (Su1009: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1010, and the distribution table for the first starting port (FIG. 451 (a)) is referred to. And make a distribution judgment. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is included in the numerical range of the 8R probability variation jackpot or the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1009 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (Su1009: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1011 and the distribution table for the second starting port (FIG. 451 (b)) is displayed. The distribution is determined with reference to it. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is included in the numerical range of the 16R probability variation jackpot. In the distribution table for the second starting port of the present embodiment, since the distribution result is only one type of 16R probability variation jackpot, the result of the above determination is always 16R probability variation jackpot. After executing the process of step Su1010 or step Su1011, the process proceeds to step Su1012.

In step Su1012, the flag (big hit flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Su1010 or step Su1011 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is an 8R probability variation jackpot, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag is turned ON, if it is an 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal jackpot flag is turned ON, and if it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set. Turn it on. After executing step Su1012, the process proceeds to step Su1013.

In step Su1013, a process of setting a stop result for a big hit is executed. Specifically, in this game round in which a big hit is won, it is set which stop result is displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to end the variable display. It is a process to do. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot distributed in step Su1010 or step Su1011 is acquired. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Su1013, the final hit determination process is terminated.

In step Su1008, if the result of the winning lottery in step Su1003, step Su1004, step Su1006, or step Su1007 is not a big hit (Su1008: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1014.

In step Su1014, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination (winning lottery) in step Su1007 is the winning of the reduced working hours (winning the winning of the reduced working hours). In step Su1014, if the result of the winning / failing determination is the winning of the reduced working hours (Su1014: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1015.

In step Su1015, the time saving flag is turned ON. Specifically, the time saving flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. The time saving grant flag is a flag indicating that the time saving grant has been won. After executing step Su1015, the process proceeds to step Su1016.

In step Su1016, a process of setting a stop result for granting a time saving is executed. Specifically, it is a process for setting which stop result is displayed in the second symbol display unit 37b to end the variable display in the current game round in which the time saving grant is won. .. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for assigning the time reduction in the stop result table storage area 63f, the stop result data corresponding to the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the stop result table storage area 63f can be obtained. The address information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Su1016, the final hit determination process is terminated.

In step Su1014, if the result of the winning / failing determination in step Su1007 is not the reduction of working hours winning (Su1014: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1017.

In step Su1017, it is determined whether or not reach occurs in the game round with reference to the reach determination table. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is the value set as the occurrence of reach in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. It is determined whether or not it matches with. Then, the process proceeds to step Su1018.

In step Su1018, if the result of the reach determination in step Su1017 is that reach occurs in the game round (Su1018: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1019 and the reach generation flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach generation flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Su1019, the process proceeds to step Su1020.

On the other hand, in step Su1018, if the result of the reach determination in step Su1017 is that reach does not occur in the game round (Su1018: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1020 without executing step Su1019.

In step Su1020, a process of setting a stop result for disconnection is executed. Specifically, in this game round, which is the result of the deviation, the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b is used to set which stop result is displayed to end the variable display. It is a process. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for deviation in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c can be obtained. It is acquired and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Su1020, the final hit determination process is terminated.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 462: Su0708) of the variation start process.

FIG. 466 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation time setting process. In step Su1101, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, the process proceeds to step Su1102.

In step Su1102, a process for specifying the fluctuation time table is executed. The fluctuation time table is tabular data in which the fluctuation time information (variation time information), which is the time from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the symbol, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS are used as data elements. In the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63, various types of variable time tables are stored according to the game state, the presence / absence of a jackpot and time reduction, and the presence / absence of reach occurrence. In step S1102, one fluctuation time table is specified from these fluctuation time tables. Specifically, based on the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag, the current gaming state is among the low probability low support state, high probability high support state, low probability high support state, and high probability low support state. The judgment result, the judgment result of the hit / fail judgment to determine whether or not the jackpot or the time reduction is given, and the judgment result of the reach judgment to determine whether or not the reach has occurred, Based on the above, one variable time table is specified from the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. After executing step Su1102, the process proceeds to step Su1103.

In step Su1103, by referring to the fluctuation time table specified in step Su1102, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step Su1101 is acquired. After executing step Su1103, the process proceeds to step Su1104.

In step Su1104, the fluctuation time information acquired in step Su1103 is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

<Variation end processing>
Next, the variable end processing will be described. The variation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 461: Su0604) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 467 is a flowchart showing the variation end processing. In step Su1201, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the fluctuation time is the time from the start of fluctuation of the symbol row to the stop of all the symbol rows, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Su1201, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 is "0". The value of the fluctuation time information is set in the above-mentioned fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 466). The value of the set fluctuation time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started.

If it is determined in step Su1201 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Su1201: NO), the fluctuation end processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Su1201 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (Su1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1202, and the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b correspond to the current game times. Performs processing to end the fluctuation of the symbol in the symbol display unit. Subsequent step Su1203 turns off the special figure change display flag stored in the special figure change display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64. After executing step Su1203, the process proceeds to step Su1204.

In step Su1204, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is a big hit winning. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R normal jackpot flag, and the 16R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Su1204 that none of the above flags is ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery related to the current game round is not a big hit winning (Su1204: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1205.

In step Su1205, a time saving process, which is a process executed when the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is a time saving grant, is executed. The details of the time saving process will be described later. After executing step Su1205, the process proceeds to step Su1206.

In step Su1206, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Su1206 that the high probability mode flag is ON (Su1206: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1207, and the value of the ST game count counter SNC is decremented by 1. The ST game count counter SNC is a counter for counting how many times the number of games continuously executed in the high probability mode reaches the ST number. After executing step Su1207, the process proceeds to step Su1208.

In step Su1208, it is determined whether or not the number of game times continuously executed in the high probability mode has reached the ST number (for example, 10 times). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the ST game count counter SNC is 0. Since the ST game count counter SNC indicates the remaining number of ST counts, the number of game rounds continuously executed in the high probability mode can be determined by determining whether or not SNC = 0. It can be determined whether or not the number of STs has been reached.

In step Su1208, when it is determined that the value of the ST game count counter SNC is 0 (Su1208: YES), that is, it is determined that the number of games continuously executed in the high probability mode has reached the ST count. If so, the process proceeds to step Su1209 and the high probability mode flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Su1210.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Su1208 that the value of the ST game count counter SNC is not 0 (Su1208: NO), that is, before the number of games continuously executed in the high probability mode reaches the ST number (Su1208: NO). = Within the number of STs), the process proceeds to step Su1210 without executing step Su1209.

Even when it is determined in step Su1206 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Su1206: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1210.

In step Su1210, it is determined whether or not the high support continuation state flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON until the next time. The high support continuation state flag until the next time is a flag indicating whether or not the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big hit is won (high support continuation state until the next time), and the time reduction in step Su1205. It is turned ON when it is determined that the time saving grant flag is ON in the grant process, and is turned OFF at the start of the open / close execution mode (at the start of the opening period).

If it is determined in step Su1210 that the high support continuation state flag is ON until the next time (Su1210: YES), the variable end processing is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1210 that the high support continuation state flag is not ON until the next time (Su1210: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1211.

In step Su1211, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Su1211 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Su1211: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1212.

In step Su1212, the value of the time-saving game count counter PNC is subtracted by 1. The time-saving game count counter PNC is a counter for counting how many times the number of continuously executed games in the high-frequency support mode reaches the time-saving continuation number. Then, the process proceeds to step Su1213.

In step Su1213, it is determined whether or not the number of game times continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode has reached the time-saving continuation number (for example, 5 times). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the time-saving game count counter PNC is 0 or less. Since the time-saving game count counter PNC indicates the remaining number of time-saving continuation times, the number of games continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode is determined by determining whether or not PNC = 0. It is possible to determine whether or not the number of times has reached the number of times of shortening of time.

When it is determined in step Su1213 that the value of the time-saving game count counter PNC is 0 (Su1213: YES), that is, the number of games continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode has reached the time-saving continuation number. If it is determined, the process proceeds to step Su1214, and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After executing step Su1214, the variable end processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Su1213 that the value of the time-saving game count counter PNC is not 0 (Su1213: NO), that is, the number of games continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode reaches the time-saving continuation number. If it is determined that it is before (= within the number of time reduction continuations), the variable end processing is immediately terminated without executing step Su1214.

Even when it is determined in step Su1211 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Su1211: NO), the variable end processing is immediately terminated.

In step Su1204, it is determined that any one of the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R normal jackpot flag, and the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is the jackpot winning. In that case (Su1204: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1215, and the open / close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Su1215, the variable time end processing is terminated.

<Processing for time saving>
Next, the time saving process will be described. The time saving process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 467: Su1205) for the variable end process.

FIG. 468 is a flowchart showing a time saving process. In step Su1301, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON.

If it is determined in step Su1301 that the time reduction grant flag is ON (Su1301: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1302 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, when the time saving grant flag is ON, that is, when the time saving grant is won in the winning lottery, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. After executing step Su1302, the process proceeds to step Su1303.

In step Su1303, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is used as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Set. After executing step Su1303, the process proceeds to step Su1304.

In step Su1304, the high support continuation state flag is turned on until the next time, then the process proceeds to step Su1305, and until the next time, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub side recognize that the high support continuation state is in the high support continuation state until the next time. The high support continuation state command is set as the command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After executing step Su1305, the process proceeds to step Su1306.

In step Su1306, the time saving flag is turned off. After executing step Su1306, the time saving process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1301 that the time saving grant flag is not ON (Su1301: NO), the time saving granting process is immediately terminated.

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 460: Su0507) of the normal process.

FIG. 469 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step Su1401, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the large winning opening opening / closing processing period (at the beginning of the ending period) in the opening / closing execution mode, and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the open / close execution mode.

If it is determined in step Su1401 that the ending period flag is not ON (Su1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1402, and it is determined whether or not the open / close processing period flag is ON. The opening / closing processing period flag is turned on at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening / closing execution mode and the large winning opening opening / closing processing period, which is the period during which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed, is started. , It is turned off at the timing when the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 36b is completed.

If it is determined in step Su1402 that the open / close processing period flag is not ON (Su1402: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1403, and it is determined whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the beginning of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Su1403 that the opening period flag is not ON (Su1403: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1404, and it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Su1404 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (Su1404: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1405. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1404 that the open / close execution mode flag is OFF (Su1404: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

In step Su1405, the high probability mode flag is turned off. After executing step Su1405, the process proceeds to step Su1406 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After executing step Su1406, the process proceeds to step Su1407, and the high support continuation status flag is turned off until the next time. After executing step Su1407, the process proceeds to step Su1408.

In step Su1408, an opening / closing scenario setting process for setting an opening / closing scenario is executed. The opening / closing scenario defines a pattern of opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 36b in the round game. In this embodiment, the condition for shifting the opening / closing door 36b from the closed state to the open state (hereinafter, also referred to as “opening condition”) This is a program in which the condition for shifting the opening / closing door 36b from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter, also referred to as “closed condition”) is recorded. The opening / closing scenario is stored in the opening / closing scenario storage area 63i of the ROM 63.

The opening conditions are as follows, for example.
-The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing to start each round game in the open / close execution mode.
When the above one item is satisfied, the opening / closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

The closing conditions are as follows, for example.
-The elapsed time from the start of each round game exceeds the predetermined upper limit duration (for example, 15 seconds).
-The number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening 36a after starting each round game exceeds the predetermined maximum number.
When either of the above two items is satisfied, the opening / closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the V winning opening shutter 48a is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the opening / closing execution mode by the shutter opening / closing process described later. After that, it is controlled to be closed. On the other hand, the opening / closing scenario that defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the opening / closing door 36b described above is set to be different depending on whether the type of jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot. When the type of jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, that is, when the 8R probability variation jackpot flag or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag of RAM 64 is ON, a V prize is won during the opening period of the opening / closing door 36b in the first round of the round game. The above-mentioned opening condition is determined so as to include a period in which the mouth shutter 48a is in the open state (including not a part but the whole). As a result, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the winning jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the V winning opening 48 opened in the first round of the round game.

In addition, instead of the configuration in which the opening period of the opening / closing door 36b in the first round of the round game includes the period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is in the open state, the opening / closing in the number of rounds other than the first round of the round game. The opening period of the door 36b may include a period in which the V winning opening shutter 48a is in the open state. After executing step Su1408, the process proceeds to step Su1409.

In step Su1409, the opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period (hereinafter, also referred to as an opening time) in the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, the same constant length of opening time is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Su1409, the process proceeds to step Su1410.

In step Su1410, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Su0503 in the normal process (FIG. 460). This opening command contains information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current open / close execution mode. The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the large winning opening opening / closing processing period based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step Su1410, the process proceeds to step Su1411 and the opening period flag is turned ON. After executing step Su1411, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Su1403 that the opening period flag is ON (Su1403: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1412.

In step Su1412, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Su1412 that the opening period has ended (Su1412: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1413 and the opening period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Su1414.

In step Su1413, a round display start process for notifying the type of the opening / closing execution mode this time is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the above address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is specified from the specified stop result data. Confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round display unit 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step Su1414, the process proceeds to step Su1415.

In step Su1415, the open / close processing period flag is turned ON. In the following step Su1415, an open / close process start command is set. The open / close process start command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the open / close process period has started. The open / close process start command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 460: step Su0503) of the normal process. After executing step Su1415, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Su1402 that the open / close processing period flag is ON (Su1402: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1416 to execute the large winning opening opening / closing process. The process of opening and closing the large winning opening will be described later. After executing step Su1416, the process proceeds to step Su1417.

In step Su1417, the shutter opening / closing process is executed. The shutter opening / closing process will be described later. After executing step Su1417, the process proceeds to step Su1418.

In step Su1418, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed depending on whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened is "0". do. If it is determined in step Su1418 that the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed (Su1418: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1419. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1418 that the large winning opening opening / closing process has not been completed (Su1418: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

In step Su1419, the open / close processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Su1420.

In step Su1420, the round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is terminated so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step Su1420, the process proceeds to step Su1421.

In step Su1421, the ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the ending period (hereinafter, also referred to as an ending time) in the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set in each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Su1421, the process proceeds to step Su1422.

In step Su1422, an ending command is set. This set ending command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Su0503 in the normal process (FIG. 460). The voice emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on the reception of the ending command. After executing step Su1422, the process proceeds to step Su1423.

In step Su1423, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Su1401 that the ending period flag is ON (Su1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1424.

In step Su1424, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Su1421), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time in step Su1421 is “0”. If it is determined in step Su1424 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Su1424: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1425.

In step Su1425, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Su1426, and the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of the game times after the end of the current ending period. Details of the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Su1426, the process proceeds to step Su1427.

In step Su1427, the open / close execution mode flag is turned off. After executing step Su1426, the game state transition process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1424 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Su1424: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

<Large winning opening opening / closing process>
Next, the process of opening and closing the large winning opening will be described. The large winning opening opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 469: Su1416) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 470 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening / closing process. In step Su1501, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning driving unit 36c. If it is determined in step Su1501 that the opening / closing door 36b is not open (Su1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1502.

In step Su1502, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening / closing scenario set by the opening / closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the opening / closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Su1502 that the opening condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied (Su1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1503.

In step Su1503, the opening / closing door 36b is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step Su1504.

In step Su1504, an open / close door open command is set. The opening / closing door opening command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the opening / closing door 36b has been opened. The opening / closing door opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 460: step Su0503) of the normal processing. The voice emission control device 90 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has started based on the received open / close door opening command, and also gives a large prize to the production contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46. The content will be updated to correspond to the start of opening of the mouth 36a. Further, the voice emission control device 90 transmits the opening / closing door opening command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has started based on the received open / close door opening command, and at the same time, the effect content in the symbol display device 41 is described in the large winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the start of opening. After executing step Su1504, the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed.

If it is determined in step Su1502 that the opening condition of the opening / closing door 36b is not satisfied (Su1502: NO), the large winning opening opening / closing process is terminated without executing steps Su1503 and Su1504.

If it is determined in step Su1501 that the opening / closing door 36b is being opened (Su1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1505.

In step Su1505, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening / closing scenario set by the opening / closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the opening / closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Su1505 that the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied (Su1505: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1506.

In step Su1506, the opening / closing door 36b is closed. Then, the process proceeds to step Su1507.

In step Su1507, an open / close door closing command is set. The opening / closing door closing command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the opening / closing door 36b has been closed. The opening / closing door closing command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 460: step Su0503) of the normal processing. The voice emission control device 90 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed based on the received open / close door closing command, and also displays the production contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 as the large winning opening. The content will be updated to correspond to the completion of the opening of 36a. Further, the voice emission control device 90 transmits the opening / closing door closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. Based on the received open / close door closing command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed, and at the same time, the effect content in the symbol display device 41 is the opening of the large winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the end of. After executing step Su1507, the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed.

If it is determined in step Su1505 that the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b is not satisfied (Su1505: NO), the large winning opening opening / closing process is terminated without executing steps Su1506 and Su1507.

<Shutter opening / closing process>
Next, the shutter opening / closing process will be described. The shutter opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 469: Su1417) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 471 is a flowchart showing a shutter opening / closing process. In step Su1601, it is determined whether or not the V winning opening shutter 48a is open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the V winning opening shutter 48a is open depending on the operating state of the V winning opening shutter drive unit 48b (FIG. 447).

If it is determined in step Su1601 that the V winning opening shutter 48a is not open (Su1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1602.

In step Su1602, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the V winning opening shutter 48a is satisfied. In the present embodiment, as described above, the V winning opening shutter 48a is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the opening / closing execution mode, and then closed. It works like this. In order to realize this operation, in step Su1602, the opening condition of the V winning opening shutter 48a is satisfied by counting with a timer counter whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the opening / closing execution mode and the opening timing has been reached. Judge whether or not it is done.

If it is determined in step Su1602 that the opening condition of the V winning opening shutter 48a is satisfied (Su1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1603 to open the V winning opening shutter 48a. After executing step Su1603, the process proceeds to step Su1606, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1602 that the opening condition of the V winning opening shutter 48a is not satisfied (Su1602: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1606 without executing step Su1603.

If it is determined in step Su1601 that the V winning opening shutter 48a is open (Su1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1604.

In step Su1604, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the V winning opening shutter 48a is satisfied. Specifically, the closing condition of the V winning opening shutter 48a is set by counting with a timer counter whether the timing for closing the V winning opening shutter 48a has reached the time when the above-mentioned fixed time (10 seconds) has elapsed from the opening timing. Determine if it holds.

If it is determined in step Su1604 that the closing condition of the V winning opening shutter 48a is satisfied (Su1604: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1605 and the V winning opening shutter 48a is closed. After executing step Su1605, the process proceeds to step Su1606.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1604 that the closing condition of the V winning opening shutter 48a is not satisfied (Su1604: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1606 without executing step Su1605.

In step Su1606, the V winning determination process is executed. The V prize determination process will be described later. After executing step Su1606, the shutter opening / closing process is terminated.

<V winning judgment processing>
Next, the V winning determination process will be described. The V winning determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the shutter opening / closing process (FIG. 471: Su1606).

FIG. 472 is a flowchart showing the V winning determination process. In step Su1701, it is determined whether or not the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 48 is detected. This determination is determined from the detection signal of the detection sensor 67f that detects the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 48. If the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 48 is detected in step Su1701 (Su1701: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1702.

In step Su1702, the V winning flag is turned ON. The V winning flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 48, and the lottery mode in the game times executed after the end of the round game is set to either the high probability mode or the low probability mode. It is used to determine whether to do it. The V winning flag is turned on when the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 48 is detected, and turned off at the end of the ending period. After executing step Su1702, the process proceeds to step Su1703.

In step Su1703, a V winning command is set. The V winning command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 460: step Su0503) of the normal process. The voice emitting device that has received the V winning command executes the setting for executing the V winning effect. The V winning effect is an effect for notifying the player that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 48. After executing step Su1703, the V winning determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 48 is not detected in step Su1701 (Su1701: NO), the V winning determination process is terminated without executing steps Su1702 and step Su1703.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 469: Su1426) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 473 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of the ending period. In step Su1801, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is ON.

If it is determined in step Su1801 that the V winning flag is ON (Su1801: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1802 and the flag erasing process is executed. Specifically, the ON flag among the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag is turned off, and the non-ON flag is maintained in that state. Also, the V winning flag is turned off. After executing step Su1802, the process proceeds to step Su1803.

In step Su1803, the high probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step Su1804, and the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after ending the open / close execution mode, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. After executing step Su1804, the process proceeds to step Su1805.

In step Su1805, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. .. After executing step Su1805, the process proceeds to step Su1806.

In step Su1806, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is used as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Set. After executing step Su1806, the process proceeds to step Su1807.

In step Su1807, 10 is set in the ST game count counter SNC provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. The value set in the ST game count counter SNC is a value indicating the limited number of games when the high probability mode is executed by limiting the number of games. After executing step Su1807, the process proceeds to step Su1808.

In step Su1808, 5 is set in the time-saving game count counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. The value set in the time-saving game count counter PNC is a value indicating the limited number of games when the high-frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. After executing step Su1808, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1801 that the V winning flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step Su1809 (Su1801: NO), and the flag erasing process is executed. Specifically, the ON flag among the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag is turned off, and the non-ON flag is maintained in that state. After executing step Su1809, the process proceeds to step Su1810.

In step Su1810, a low-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. .. After executing step Su1810, the process proceeds to step Su1811.

In step Su1811, a low-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is used as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Set. After executing step Su1811, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electric service support>
Next, the processing for electric service support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 460: Su0508) of the normal process.

FIG. 474 is a flowchart showing the electric service support process. In step Su1901, it is determined whether or not the support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The supporting flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened and turned off when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Su1901 that the supporting flag is not ON (Su1901: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1902.

In step Su1902, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned on when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is ON. Is. If it is determined in step Su1902 that the support winning flag is not ON (Su1902: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1903.

In step Su1903, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

If it is determined in step Su1903 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Su1903: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Su1903: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1904.

In step Su1904, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display of the symbol in the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step Su1904 that it is the end timing of the variable display (Su1904: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1905, the off display is set, and then the main electric service support process is terminated. By setting the off display, the variable display of the symbol in the normal figure unit 38 is terminated in the state where the off display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1904 that it is not the end timing of the variation display (Su1904: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1906.

In step Su1906, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0". If it is determined in step Su1906 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is "0" (Su1906: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1906 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0" (Su1906: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1907.

In step Su1907, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step Su1908 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If the step Su1907 is not in the open / close execution mode (Su1907: NO) and the step Su1908 is in the high frequency support mode (Su1908: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1909 and the electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. Then, the process proceeds to step Su1910.

In step Su1910, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Su1909 is a support winning. If it is determined in step Su1910 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is the support winning (Su1910: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1911, the support winning flag is turned on, and the counter area 64f of the RAM 64 is provided. Set "3" in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. After that, the processing for electric service support is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1910 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not the support winning (Su1910: NO), the electric service support process is terminated without executing the process of step Su1911.

If it is determined in step Su1907 that it is in the open / close execution mode (Su1907: YES), or if it is determined in step Su1908 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (Su1908: NO), the process proceeds to step Su1912 and the motorized accessory opening lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. Then, the process proceeds to step Su1913.

In step Su1913, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Su1912 is the support winning. If it is determined in step Su1913 that the support is not won (Su1913: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1913 that the support is won (Su1913: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1914, the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , End the processing for main electric service support.

If it is determined in step Su1902 that the support winning flag is ON (Su1902: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1915, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step Su1915 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Su1915: NO), the pattern variation is being displayed in the normal drawing unit 38, so that the main electric service support process is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1915 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Su1915: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1916.

In step Su1916, the hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the pattern in the normal drawing unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped and displayed. After that, the process proceeds to step Su1917, the supporting flag is turned ON, and the support winning flag is turned OFF. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

If it is determined in step Su1901 that the supporting flag is ON (Su1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Su1918, and an electric function opening / closing control process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

<Electrical function opening / closing control processing>
Next, the electric function opening / closing control process will be described. The electric service opening / closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 474: Su1918) of the electric service support process.

FIG. 475 is a flowchart showing the electric function opening / closing control process. In step Su2001, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in the driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (Su20011: YES), the process proceeds to step Su2002.

In step Su2002, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Su2002 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Su2002: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. That is, if the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the main electric accessory opening / closing control process ends.

If it is determined in step Su2002 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Su2002: YES), the process proceeds to step Su2003, and a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state is performed. “250” (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Su2003, the process proceeds to step Su2004.

In step Su2004, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step Su2005, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step Su2005 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Su2005: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su2005 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Su2005: YES), the process proceeds to step Su2006 and the supporting flag is turned off. After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Su2001 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Su20011: NO), the process proceeds to step Su2007, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Su2007 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Su2007: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su2007 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Su2007: YES), the process proceeds to step Su2008, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state is executed. .. Then, the process proceeds to step Su2009.

In step Su2009, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and if it is determined that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (Su2009: NO), the process proceeds to step Su2010 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step Su2010 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (Su2010: YES), the process proceeds to step Su2011, and "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su2009 that the open / close execution mode is set (Su2009: YES), or if it is determined in step Su2010 that the mode is not in the high frequency support mode (Su2010: NO), the process proceeds to step Su2012 and the second step is performed. The timer counter area T2 is set to "100" (that is, 0.2 sec). After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

<< 10-6 >> Various processes executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device in order to execute the advance notice effect and the result notification effect will be described. The process executed by the voice emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 476 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed with a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described.

In step Su2101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound / light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main MPU 62, and the commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Read sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step Su2101, the process proceeds to step Su2102.

In step Su2102, the pending command correspondence process is executed. In the hold command correspondence process, the process corresponding to the first hold command among the commands stored in step Su2101 is performed. The details of the pending command support processing will be described later. After executing step Su2102, the process proceeds to step Su2103.

In step Su2103, the game rotation effect setting process is executed. In the game time effect setting process, the effect to be executed in the game time from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the symbol is set. The details of the game time production setting process will be described later. After executing step Su2103, the process proceeds to step Su2104.

In step Su2104, the opening / closing execution mode effect processing is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode production processing, processing related to the production in the opening period, the production in the large winning opening opening / closing processing period, and the production in the ending period is performed. After executing step Su2104, the process proceeds to step Su2105.

In step Su2105, the background effect processing is executed. In the background effect processing, a process of displaying a background moving image determined according to a command indicating a game state received from the main MPU 62 on the symbol display device 41 is performed. For example, a process is performed to display a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode is ongoing, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that the high-probability mode is continuing. .. After executing step Su2105, the process proceeds to step Su2106.

In step Su2106, the V winning effect processing is executed. In the V-winning effect processing, a process of displaying an effect image (moving image) determined according to the V-winning command received from the main MPU 62 on the symbol display device 41 is performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a V winning command has been received from the main MPU 62 during the execution of the large winning opening opening / closing process in the opening / closing execution mode, and if it is determined that the V winning command has been received, a game is played in the V winning opening 48. A process is performed in which the symbol display device 41 displays an effect image for notifying the player that the ball has entered. By visually recognizing the effect image displayed on the symbol display device 41 indicating that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 48, the player wins the jackpot by the winning lottery, and the type of the winning jackpot changes. You can recognize that it is a big hit. After executing step Su2106, the process proceeds to step Su2107.

In step Su2107, the fall effect processing is executed. In the fall effect processing, a process of displaying an effect image (moving image) determined according to the fall command received from the main MPU 62 on the symbol display device 41 is performed. Specifically, whether or not a fall command is received from the main MPU 62 when the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode (that is, in the high accuracy and high support state). When the determination is made and it is determined that the command has been received, a process is performed in which the symbol display device 41 displays an effect image that can indicate that the player is in an advantageous state. By visually recognizing the effect image displayed on the symbol display device 41, which may indicate that the player is in an advantageous state, the player shifts the lottery mode from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and as a result, the lottery mode is changed to the low probability mode. As a result, it can be acknowledged that the next big hit will be shifted to the low probability high support state H5 in which the winning is substantially guaranteed.

On the other hand, when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the support mode is the low frequency support mode (that is, in the high probability low support state), and there is a special 2 remaining hold, a fall command is issued from the main MPU 62. It is determined whether or not the command has been received, and if it is determined that the command has been received, a process is performed in which the symbol display device 41 displays an effect image that can indicate that the player is in an advantageous state. By visually recognizing the effect image displayed on the symbol display device 41, which may indicate that the player is in an advantageous state, the player shifts the lottery mode from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and as a result, the lottery mode is changed to the low probability mode. As a result, it can be acknowledged that the next jackpot winning is substantially guaranteed to shift to the low probability high support state H5 via the special 2 residual pending digestion H1b in the low probability low support state H1.

When the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the support mode is the low frequency support mode (that is, in the high probability low support state), and there is no special 2 remaining hold, a fall command is received from the main MPU 62. It is determined whether or not the command is received, and when it is determined that the command is received, a process is performed in which the symbol display device 41 displays an effect image that can indicate that the player is in a disadvantageous state. By visually recognizing the effect image displayed on the symbol display device 41, which may indicate that the state is disadvantageous to the player, the player shifts the lottery mode from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and as a result, the lottery mode is changed to the low probability mode. It can be acknowledged that the transition to the low probability low support state H1 has occurred. After executing step Su2107, the process proceeds to step Su2108.

In step Su2108, the high support continuous effect processing is executed until the next time. In the high support continuation effect processing until the next time, a process of displaying an effect image (moving image) determined according to the high support continuation state command received from the main MPU 62 on the symbol display device 41 is performed. By visually recognizing the effect image displayed on the symbol display device 41, which is determined according to the high support continuation state command until the next time, the player can continue the high frequency support mode as the support mode until the next big hit is won ( It is possible to recognize that the state has shifted to the high support continuation state until the next time. After executing step Su2108, the process proceeds to step Su2109.

In step Su2109, other processing is executed. The other processing is a process of displaying a demo image (moving image) on the symbol display device 41 when the game is not performed by the player. After executing step Su2109, the process proceeds to step Su2110.

In step Su2110, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in each of the above-mentioned effect processing. After executing step Su2110, the process proceeds to step Su2111.

In step Su2111, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read in the above-mentioned BGM process and each effect process. After executing step Su2111, this timer interrupt process ends.

<Processing for pending commands>
Next, the pending command correspondence process will be described. The hold command correspondence process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 476: Su2102).

FIG. 477 is a flowchart showing the pending command correspondence process. In step Su2201, it is determined whether or not a hold command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Su2201 that the hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Su2201: YES), the process proceeds to step Su2202.

In step Su2202, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the entry into the first starting port 33. If it is determined in step Su2202 that the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the entry into the first starting port 33 (Su2202: YES), the process proceeds to step Su2203 and the sound is produced. The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the optical side RAM 94 is executed. The first reserved quantity counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33 in the sound light side MPU 92. In the update process of the first hold quantity counter area, the information of the first hold count counter area is updated to the information of the hold count included in the hold command to be read this time. After executing step Su2203, the process proceeds to step Su2205.

In step Su2202, when it is determined that the hold command to be read this time is not transmitted based on the entry into the first start port 33 (Su2202: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start. If it is determined that the ball was transmitted based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process proceeds to step Su2204 to update the second reserved number counter area provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94. Run. The second reserved quantity counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 34 in the sound / light side MPU 92. In the update process of the second reserved quantity counter area, the information of the second reserved quantity counter area is updated to the information of the reserved quantity included in the command to be read this time. After executing step Su2204, the process proceeds to step Su2205.

The reason why the processing of step Su2203 and step Su2204 is performed as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while the backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the voice emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, if the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information relating to the entry into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the hold information is held in the main control device 60. Is stored and retained, whereas the voice emission control device 90 grasps that the number of reserved information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first hold quantity counter area or the second hold count counter area is counted up each time the voice emission control device 90 receives a hold command, the main control device 60 actually holds the hold storage. There may be an inconvenience that the number of reserved information stored and the number of reserved information grasped by the voice emission control device 90 do not match. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment described above, the main control device 60 transmits the hold command including the information on the number of holds, and the voice emission control device 90 sends the hold command to the command each time the hold command is received. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the number of reserved pieces included is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

In step Su2205, the update process of the total reserved number counter area provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94 is executed. The total number of hold counter areas is the sum of the number of hold information acquired based on the entry into the first start port 33 and the number of hold information acquired based on the entry into the second start port 34. It is a counter area for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92. In the update process, the information of the total reserved quantity counter area is the sum of the information of the reserved quantity measured in the first reserved quantity counter area and the information of the reserved quantity measured in the second reserved quantity counter area. Update to. After executing step Su2205, the process proceeds to step Su2206.

If it is determined in step Su2201 that the hold command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Su2201: NO), the process proceeds to step Su2206 without executing steps Su2202-step Su2205.

In step Su2206, the hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display unit 37c (color of the LED lamp to be turned on) based on the number of hold information acquired based on the entry into the first start port 33 specified in step Su2203. And combination), and based on the number of hold information acquired based on the entry into the second start port 34 specified in step Su2204, the display mode (LED to be turned on) of the second hold display unit 37d. Control the color and combination of lamps). After executing step Su2206, the process corresponding to this pending command is terminated.

<Game times production setting process>
Next, the game rotation effect setting process will be described. The game rotation effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 476: Su2103) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 478 is a flowchart showing the game rotation effect setting process. In step Su2301, it is determined whether or not the variation command and the type command have been received. If it is determined in step Su2301 that the change command and the type command have not been received (Su2301: NO), the game round effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su2301 that the variable command and the type command have been received (Su2301: YES), the process proceeds to step Su2302.

In step Su2302, the variable command and the type command received this time are read, and from these commands, information on the presence / absence of a big hit, the presence / absence of a time saving grant, the type of a big hit, the presence / absence of a reach, and the fluctuation time is grasped. Then, the grasped information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Then, the process proceeds to step Su2303.

In step Su2303, the effect pattern setting process is executed. The effect pattern setting process is a process of determining and setting an effect pattern (preliminary effect, content of reach effect, execution timing) to be executed in this game round based on the effect pattern table. The details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Su2303, the process proceeds to step Su2304.

In step Su2304, the stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery of this game round is a 16R probability variation jackpot, an 8R probability variation jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, the same symbol is displayed on the effective line L1 (see FIG. 446). The information corresponding to the stop result for which the combination is established is set as the information of the stop symbol this time. Specifically, when the result of the winning lottery of this game round is a 16R probability variation jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot, the same odd-numbered symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, and the same. A combination of even symbols can be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, this selectivity is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the same combination of even-numbered symbols, but instead, the former is selected over the latter. The configuration may have a high rate, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot. Further, when the result of the winning lottery of this game round is an 8R normal jackpot, the same even-numbered symbol combination is selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the big hit lottery of this game round is a deviation result, it is determined whether or not reach has occurred from the content of the variable command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of reach, it corresponds to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L1 and the stop result is established in which the combination of reach symbols is established on the effective line L1. The information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L1 and the combination of the reach symbols is not established on the effective line L1. The corresponding information is set as the information of the stop symbol of this time.

If the result of the winning lottery for this game is a time-saving symbol, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the predetermined combination of symbols is established on the effective line L1 (see FIG. 446) is provided in the current stop symbol. Set as information. The combination of predetermined symbols corresponding to the time-saving symbols is, for example, [3.4.1] (see FIG. 446). After executing step Su2304, the process proceeds to step Su2305.

In step Su2305, a process for setting a variation display pattern of the current game times is executed. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the current game is specified from the content of the fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information on the stop symbol set in the above step Su2304 are combined. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. Then, the process proceeds to step Su2306.

In step Su2306, information on the effect pattern set in step Su2303, the stop symbol set in step Su2304, and the variation display pattern set in step Su2305 in this game round is set in the effect command. After that, the process proceeds to step Su2307, and the effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect content corresponding to the received effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step Su2307, the process proceeds to step Su2308.

In step Su2308, the update process at the start of fluctuation is executed. The update process at the start of the fluctuation is a process for updating the hold display in the first hold display area Ds1 or the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. The details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later. After executing step Su2308, the game round effect setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 478: Su2303) of the game turn effect setting process.

FIG. 479 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process. In step Su2401, a random number RN for an effect pattern is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound / light side RAM 94. Then, the process proceeds to step Su2402.

In step Su2402, a process for specifying the effect pattern table is executed. The effect pattern table is three-dimensional tabular data in which the effect pattern to be executed in the game times, the fluctuation time, and the random number RN for the effect pattern are data elements. In the effect pattern table storage area 93a of the ROM 93, various types of effect pattern tables are stored according to the presence / absence of a big hit, the presence / absence of time saving, and the presence / absence of reach. In step Su2402, one effect pattern table is specified from these effect pattern tables. Specifically, the effect pattern table storage area of the ROM 93 is based on the presence / absence of the jackpot, the presence / absence of the time saving, the type of the jackpot, and the presence / absence of the reach, which are grasped in step Su2302 of the game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 478). One production pattern table is specified from 93a. After executing step Su2402, the process proceeds to step Su2403.

In step Su2403, with reference to the effect pattern table specified in Su2402, the fluctuation time grasped in step Su2302 of the game round effect setting process (FIG. 478) and the value of the random number RN for the effect pattern obtained by step Su2401 this time. Acquires the production pattern corresponding to and. After executing step Su2403, the process proceeds to step Su2404.

In step Su2404, the effect pattern acquired in step Su2403 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game round. After executing step Su2404, the present effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Update process at the start of fluctuation>
Next, the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of the fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 478: Su2308) of the game rotation effect setting process.

FIG. 480 is a flowchart showing an update process at the start of fluctuation. In step Su2501, it is determined whether or not the variable command received this time is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33. If it is determined in step Su2501 that the variable command received this time is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33 (Su2501: YES), the process proceeds to step Su2502. The information in the first reserved quantity counter area is updated so that the number stored in the first reserved quantity counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Su2504.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su2501 that the variable command received this time does not relate to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33 (Su2501: NO), step Su2503 is performed. The information in the second reserved quantity counter area is updated so that the number stored in the second reserved quantity counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is decremented by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Su2504.

In step Su2504, the information in the total hold quantity counter area is updated so that the total hold quantity stored in the total hold quantity counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1. After that, the update process at the start of fluctuation is terminated.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, the process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly the main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and the process that is executed when a command is received from the voice emission control device 90. There is a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes the main process after the power is turned on, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. If the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, the main process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 481 is a flowchart showing a main process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described.

In step Su2601, the initial setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the character information in the compressed format stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, the information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also, make other settings necessary for initialization. Then, the process proceeds to step Su2602.

In step Su2602, the interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process executed every time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 482 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Su2701, the command storage process is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 483 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed by detecting the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105. In the V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute the display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal generated in VDP105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is performed every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Therefore, since the VDP 105 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image is started or displayed during the drawing of the image. It is possible to suppress the expansion of an image accompanying a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information inside is stored. Hereinafter, the processing details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described.

In step Su2801, command correspondence processing is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt processing (FIG. 482), and the processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when an effect command is stored, control of drawing and displaying an image is started so that the effect mode designated by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, and when it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of drawing and displaying an image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command correspondence process (Su2801), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so that there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the voice emission control device 90 and the effect is started, it is highly possible that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop symbol set by the voice emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the mode. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41.

In step Su2802, the display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command correspondence process (Su2801) or the like. .. Then, the process proceeds to step Su2803.

In step Su2803, task processing is executed. In the task process, the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting process (Su2802). In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step Su2804.

In step Su2804, the drawing process is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character determined by the task process (Su2803) are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on these information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received at the time of the previous V interrupt processing on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process proceeds to step Su2805, other processing is executed, and then the V interrupt processing is terminated. As described above, an example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described.

<< 10-7 >> Action / Effect:
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-probability high-support state H4, the number of times the game is executed after the high-frequency support mode is started reaches the number of time-saving continuations (5 times). If the fall lottery is won (within), the lottery mode in the game times won in the fall lottery is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and as a result, the high probability high support state H4 is changed to the low probability high support state H5. Will be migrated. Then, in the low probability high support state H5, the lottery result of the winning lottery is either a big hit winning or a time saving grant winning. If the time saving grant is won in the winning lottery, the high frequency support mode will be continued as the support mode until the next big hit is won. In the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is frequently opened, the game ball is easily entered into the second starting port 34, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls held. Therefore, the winning lottery, which is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, can be executed with high frequency. Therefore, if it is possible to shift to the low accuracy and high support state H5, the next big hit is effectively guaranteed. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-accuracy high-support state H4, not only is the player expected to win a big hit in the winning lottery, but also the game after the high-frequency support mode is started. It is possible to expect the player to win the fall lottery in the game times in which the number of times of execution is 5 times or less.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the low accuracy high support state H5, the player is in a state where the number of balls held is difficult to decrease, and the lottery mode is high frequency until the next big hit is won in the winning lottery. You can have a sense of security that the support mode will not end.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-accuracy high-support state H4, the number of times the game is executed after shifting to the high-accuracy high-support state H4 without winning either the winning lottery or the fall lottery. When the number reaches 5 times, the support mode is shifted from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, and as a result, the high accuracy high support state H4 is shifted to the high accuracy low support state H6. In the high accuracy low support state H6, when the reserved information remains in the second reserved area Rb of the reserved information storage area 64b immediately after the transition from the high accuracy high support state H4 to the high accuracy low support state H6. Winning lottery based on the remaining hold information (Special 2 remaining hold) is given priority. That is, immediately after the transition from the high-accuracy high support state H4 to the high-accuracy low support state H6, if there is a special 2 residual hold, the mode H6a is shifted to the special 2 residual hold digestion. Then, in the mode H6a during the special 2 residual hold digestion, when the fall lottery is won, the transition to the special 2 residual hold digestion mode H1b in the low probability low support state H1 is performed, and in the game times in which the fall is won. The jackpot or time saving grant will be won, and if the time saving grant is won, the low probability low support state H1 will be shifted to the low probability high support state H5 in which the next big hit winning is substantially guaranteed. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the aspect H6a during the special 2 residual hold digestion, the player is expected to win the big hit in the winning lottery, and the special 2 residual hold remains. It is possible to expect the player to win the fall lottery in the game times in between.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the fall lottery is won in the aspect H6a during the special 2 residual hold digestion in the high probability low support state H6, the special 2 residual hold digestion in the low probability low support state H1 is in progress. Aspect H1b, a low accuracy high support state H5, and an opening / closing execution mode H3 are surely transferred to the high accuracy high support state H4. In other words, if the fall lottery is won in the special 2 residual hold digestion mode H6a in the high probability low support state H6, there is a high probability (100% probability in this embodiment) the high probability high support state H4. Will move to again. On the other hand, if the fall lottery is won in the left-handed mode H6b in the high-probability low-support state H6, the situation shifts to the left-handed mode H1a in the low-probability low-support state H1. The probability of re-entering the state H4 is lower than the above high probability (100% probability in this embodiment). In other words, if the player wins the fall lottery in the left-handed mode H6b in the high probability low support state H6, the probability of shifting to the high probability high support state again is lower than the above high probability. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is expected that the player is expected to win the fall lottery by the time the aspect H6a during the special 2 residual hold digestion in the high accuracy low support state H6 is completed. can. Further, according to the present embodiment, when the fall lottery is won in the special 2 residual hold digestion mode H6a in the high probability low support state H6, there is a 100% probability of shifting to the high probability high support state H4 again. Therefore (because it is guaranteed to shift to the high-probability high-support state H4 again), it is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the fall lottery is won by the time all the winning lottery for the special 2 remaining hold acquired in the high probability high support state H4 is completed, the high probability high support state H4 The number of times the game is executed after the transition to the high-probability high-support state H4, which is guaranteed to shift to the high-probability high support state H4, is the predetermined number of times without winning the fall lottery. When the number of STs) is reached, the probability of transitioning to the high-accuracy high-support state H4 again is lower than that of the low-accuracy high-support state H5. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the player wins the fall lottery by the time the winning lottery for all the special 2 hold information stored in the high accuracy high support state H4 is completed, and the accuracy is low. It can be expected to shift to the high support state H5. That is, according to the present embodiment, in the high-accuracy high-support state H4, the player can be expected to win the jackpot in the high-probability mode in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high. By the time the winning lottery for all the special 2 hold information stored in the high-probability high-support state H4 is completed, it is possible to win the fall lottery and expect to shift to the low-probability high-support state H5. In the past, it was only expected that the player would win the jackpot by the end of the winning lottery for all the special 2 hold information stored in the high accuracy and high support state H4, but according to this embodiment. For example, the player is expected to win the fall lottery and shift to the low accuracy high support state H5 by the time the winning lottery for all the special 2 hold information stored in the high accuracy high support state H4 is completed. Can be done. Then, the low-accuracy high support state H5 continues until the jackpot is won and the open / close execution mode H3 is started, and after the end of the open / close execution mode H3, the configuration is guaranteed to shift to the high-accuracy high support state H4 again. By adopting it, even if the player does not win the big hit by the end of the winning lottery for all the special 2 hold information stored in the high accuracy high support state H4, the high accuracy high support state H4 If you win the fall lottery by the time the winning lottery for all the special 2 hold information stored in is completed, it is guaranteed that the open / close execution mode H3 will be guaranteed and the transition to the high accuracy high support state H4 will be performed again. It can give a sense of security such as being done. Then, according to the present embodiment, when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the high-probability high-support state H4 reaches a predetermined number of times (ST number) without winning the fall lottery, the high-probability high is achieved. Since the probability of re-transitioning to the support state H4 is lower than the low probability high support state H5, the transition to the low probability low support state H1 is performed. The number of executions of the game times after the transition to the high-probability high-support state H4 is predetermined without winning the fall lottery by the time the winning lottery for all the special 2 hold information stored in the high-support state H4 is completed. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the number of times is reached.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-accuracy high-support state H4, when the game times of the short-time continuation number are executed without winning the fall lottery, the game is shifted to the high-accuracy low-support state H6 and is high. When the player wins the fall lottery at the time of the winning lottery for the special 1 in the left-handed mode H6b of the high probability low support state H6, the advantage for the player is low as compared with the high probability low support state H6. It shifts to the support state H1. That is, according to the present embodiment, even if the same fall lottery is won, the player falls in the case where the fall lottery is won in the high accuracy high support state H4 and in the left-handed embodiment H6b in the high accuracy low support state H6. The function differs depending on whether the lottery is won. Specifically, when the fall lottery is won in the high accuracy high support state H4, the transition of the gaming state is such that the advantage for the player is high (from the high accuracy high support state H4 to the high accuracy low support state H6). On the other hand, if the player wins the fall lottery at the time of the winning lottery for the special 1 in the left-handed aspect H6b of the high accuracy low support state H6, the advantage for the player is low. The transition of the gaming state (transition from the high probability low support state H6 to the low probability low support state H1) is performed. That is, according to the present embodiment, winning the fall lottery triggers the transition of the gaming state in which the advantage for the player is improved, and the transition of the gaming state in which the advantage for the player is reduced. Since it also serves as an opportunity, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine 10 can be improved, and the diversification of playability can be facilitated.

Then, according to the present embodiment, when the fall lottery is won in the high accuracy and high support state H4, the game state is changed so as to increase the advantage for the player. In the high accuracy and high support state H4, it can be expected that the player will win the fall lottery. On the other hand, if the player wins the fall lottery at the time of the winning lottery for the special 1 in the left-handed aspect H6b of the high accuracy low support state H6, the transition of the gaming state is such that the advantage for the player is reduced. Since it is performed, it is possible to make the player think that he / she does not want to win the fall lottery in the left-handed aspect H6b of the high accuracy low support state H6. That is, the player is expected to win the fall lottery in the high accuracy high support state H4, and then, after shifting to the left-handed mode H6b of the high accuracy low support state H6, he does not want to win the fall lottery. Can make the player think. In this way, with the transition of the gaming state, it is possible to make the player feel the opposite emotion to winning the fall lottery, so that it is possible to add intonation to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the fall lottery is won, the lottery mode is changed and the game state is changed. The change of the lottery mode and the transition of the gaming state has a great influence on the advantage for the player. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make the player have a strong interest in whether or not to win the fall lottery, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation, a sense of security, and a sense of urgency.

In addition, "when the fall lottery is won in the aspect H6a during the special 2 residual hold digestion in the high accuracy low support state H6" is acquired in the high accuracy high support state H4, and the second hold area of the hold information storage area 64b. It can be rephrased as the case where the fall lottery is won by the time the hit determination for each of the special 2 remaining hold stored in Rb is completed in the high accuracy low support state H6. Therefore, until the hit determination for each of the special 2 remaining holds acquired in the high accuracy high support state H4 and stored in the second hold area Rb of the hold information storage area 64b is completed in the high accuracy low support state H6. In addition, if you win the fall lottery, you will be transferred to the special 2 residual hold digestion mode H1b in the low probability low support state H1, and you will win the big hit or the time saving grant in the game times that won the fall. If the time saving grant is won, the low probability low support state H1 will be shifted to the low probability high support state H5 in which the next big hit winning is substantially guaranteed.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the high-accuracy high-support state H4, the number of games after the transition to the high-accuracy high-support state H4 is within the reduced working hours continuation number (5 times), and the fall lottery is won. In that case, the high accuracy high support state H4 shifts to the low accuracy high support state H5 in which the next probability variation jackpot is guaranteed. In addition, in the high-accuracy low-support state H6, which has transitioned from the high-accuracy high-support state H4 after the number of time-saving continuation times (5 times) has elapsed, the fall lottery is performed within the number of game times corresponding to the number of special 2 remaining reservations. In the case of winning, the next probability change jackpot is obtained from the aspect H6a during the special 2 residual holding digestion in the high probability low support state H6 to the aspect H1b during the special 2 residual retention digestion in the low probability low support state H1. It shifts to the guaranteed low accuracy and high support state H5. Therefore, in the case of shifting to the high accuracy high support state H4, the probability (continuation rate) of winning the big hit again next time is high accuracy high support in addition to the case of winning the big hit in the winning lottery (the distribution is 100% probability variable jackpot). Special 2 in the case of transition from the state H4 to the low probability high support state H5, and from the high probability high support state H4 to the high probability low support state H6. 2 It is necessary to consider the case of shifting to the mode H1b during the residual hold digestion. Specifically, as described above, the value is calculated by the following equation (4) (= equation (4) shown above).

Continuation rate = 1-[{(1-1 / 3) x (1-1 / 20)} ^ 5] x
[{(1-1 / 3) x (1-1 / 20)} ^ 4] x
{(1-1 / 3) x (1-1 / 20) x (1-1 / 2)} ... (4)

When the formula (4) is calculated, the continuation rate is about 99.5%. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a continuous-changing system completely different from the conventional pachinko machine, and can realize a device having extremely high specifications in terms of continuous-changing performance.

According to the pachinko machine 10 having the continuous-changing performance, the following effects are also obtained as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. Conventionally, there are loop type and ST type pachinko machines, which have different methods for continuing big hits. In the loop type pachinko machine, since it is confirmed that the next big hit will be won in the high accuracy and high support state, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability of distribution to the probable change big hit when the big hit is won. It can be said that in the loop type pachinko machine, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability that when the symbols are aligned, the aligned symbols become probabilistic symbols (for example, "7" symbol). For this reason, in the high accuracy and high support state, the player simply watches the game times being digested, and when the symbols are aligned, the player only expects that the aligned symbols are probabilistic symbols. .. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, in the high-accuracy high-support state H4, the number of times the game is executed after the high-frequency support mode is started is the number of times the game is continued in a short time. Each game is played within 5 times, and a maximum of 4 times are executed based on the special 2 remaining hold after shifting to the high accuracy low support state (state H6) (may be 5 times as described above). It is possible to expect the player to win the fall lottery or the winning lottery at each of the game times. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a greater sense of expectation can be given as compared with the conventional loop type pachinko machine.

In the ST type pachinko machine, the continuation rate in the high accuracy and high support state is calculated by calculating the probability of losing in all ST times from the probability of not winning a big hit in one winning lottery, and subtracting the probability of losing from 1. Can be obtained by. Therefore, in the ST type pachinko machine, the continuation rate is determined based on the probability that the symbols are aligned (the probability of winning a big hit) and the number of STs. Therefore, in the ST type pachinko machine, as the number of game times executed in the high accuracy and high support state progresses, the game feels a sense of urgency as to whether the number of game times will reach the ST number without winning a big hit. Can be given to a person. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the period from the high accuracy high support state (state H4) to the high accuracy low support state (state H6), in addition to the big hit winning (the symbols are aligned), the machine falls. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency, such as whether or not the special 2 remaining hold will be exhausted without winning the lottery. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as compared with the conventional ST type pachinko machine, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of urgency by the amount of the fall winning addition to the big hit winning. can.

As a pachinko machine with other game characteristics, the following configuration can be considered. In a specific advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, if the small hit is won in the winning lottery until the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches a predetermined number (the small hit is won with a high probability). , It is conceivable that the game ball enters the V winning opening to continue the opening / closing execution mode (round game). According to this configuration, since the game times executed from the advantageous state to the transition to the open / close execution mode are consumed in a short time, the open / close execution mode is repeated at short intervals, and the gambling is excessively increased. There was a problem to end up. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the lottery mode is low as a lottery mode in which it is promised that a big hit will be finally won in the route of shifting from the high probability high support state H4 to the open / close execution mode H3. Since the winning lottery can be repeated in the probability mode via the low accuracy high support state H5, it is possible to take a sufficient time to shift from the high accuracy high support state H4 to the open / close execution mode H3. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from being excessively increased by repeating the opening / closing execution mode at short intervals. In addition, by taking sufficient time, it is possible to produce a secondary effect that various effects can be performed. These effects can never be achieved even with the configuration of the pachinko machine having the above-mentioned other game characteristics.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment exhibits excellent effects as compared with various types of conventional pachinko machines.

<< 10-8 >> Modification example of the tenth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be carried out in various embodiments without departing from the gist thereof, and for example, the following modifications are also possible. In the modified examples described below, the description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as those of the above embodiment will be omitted.

<< 10-8-1 >> Modification 1: Modification 1:
In the present modification 1, when the number of consecutive winnings in the probability variation jackpot (hereinafter referred to as the probability variation continuation number) reaches the upper limit (limit) with respect to the configuration of the tenth embodiment, even if the probability variation jackpot is won. Even in the case, a configuration has been added in which the lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode based on the probability variation jackpot becomes the low probability mode. Hereinafter, it will be described in detail.

FIG. 484 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game in the pachinko machine of the first modification. As shown in FIG. 484, the pachinko machine of the modified example 1 is provided with a probability change limit function in the open / close execution mode H3, which is executed when a jackpot is won and distributed to a probability change jackpot in a low probability low support state (state H1). Has been done.

In the open / close execution mode H3, the following processing is executed as the probability variation limit function. First, in the left-handed mode H1a in the low probability low support state H1, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the distribution result by the distribution determination is the probability variation jackpot (so-called first hit and the probability variation jackpot is won). When the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode H3, 1 is set in the probability change continuation count counter. After that, every time the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the distribution result by the distribution determination becomes the probability variation jackpot and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode H3, the value of the probability variation continuation number counter is incremented by 1. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation continuation counter has reached a predetermined probability variation limit (for example, 3 times), and when it is determined that the value of the probability variation continuation counter does not reach the probability variation limit. After the end of the opening / closing execution mode H3, as in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the lottery mode is changed to the high probability mode and the support mode is changed to the high frequency support mode. It shifts from H3 to a high-probability high-support state H4. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability change continuation counter has reached the probability change limit number, the lottery mode is shifted to the low probability mode and the support mode is shifted to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode H3 ends. By doing so, the mode shifts from the open / close execution mode H3 to the low probability high support state H5.

The operation in the low accuracy high support state H5 is the same as that of the tenth embodiment. That is, in the low accuracy high support state H5, the player continuously executes right-handed striking to cause the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA and to enter the game ball into the second starting port 34. Since the lottery result of the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 in the low accuracy high support state H5 is limited to either the big hit winning or the time saving grant winning, the big hit in the winning lottery. Even if you don't win, you will win the time saving grant, so the high frequency support mode will continue as the support mode until you win the next big hit. In other words, if you win the time saving grant in the winning lottery, the high frequency support mode will continue until you win the next jackpot, effectively guaranteeing the next jackpot. In addition, since the jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is limited to the 16R probability variation jackpot, in the low accuracy high support state H5, the probability variation jackpot is won and the high accuracy high support. It is guaranteed to re-enter state H4.

The value of the probability change continuation counter is cleared to 0 each time the lottery mode in the gaming state shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. Specifically, when the probability change continuation number reaches the upper limit (limit), when the player falls in the fall lottery, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and the distribution result by the distribution judgment becomes a normal jackpot, or high. When the number of executions of the game times executed in the probability mode reaches the number of STs, the value of the probability change continuation number counter is cleared to 0. Other configurations of the pachinko machine of the first modification are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 1 configured as described above, in the left-handed mode H1a in the low probability low support state H1, after winning the probability change jackpot at the first hit, the low probability low support state again. By the time the player returns to the left-handed mode H1a in H1, in the high-accuracy high support state H4 or the high-accuracy low support state H6, the number of times that the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the distribution result by the distribution determination becomes the probability variation jackpot changes. When the limit number of times of 3 times is reached, the state shifts to the low accuracy and high support state H5 after the end of the opening / closing execution mode H3 based on the jackpot winning. In the low accuracy high support state H5, as described above, it is guaranteed that the probability variation jackpot will be won and the transition to the high accuracy high support state H4 will be performed again. After winning the probability change jackpot, in the high probability high support state H4 or the high probability low support state H6, the jackpot was won in the winning lottery and the distribution result by the distribution judgment became the probability variation jackpot three times. In that case, the player wins the probability change jackpot again and shifts to the high probability high support state H4. That is, if the probabilistic jackpot is hit three times, the player will be given the privilege of hitting the probabilistic jackpot once more. In other words, if the probabilistic jackpot continues three times, the fourth probabilistic jackpot is guaranteed. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the first modification, it is possible to give great joy to the player by giving the above-mentioned another privilege. Furthermore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the probabilistic jackpot will continue three times. In particular, since it is very important that the probabilistic jackpot continues three times, it gives the player a greater sense of expectation that the probabilistic jackpot will be the third one after the second probabilistic jackpot. be able to.

In the pachinko machine of this modification 1, the probability variation limit number is set to 3 times, but instead of this, another number such as 2 times, 4 times, 5 times, etc. may be used.

<< 10-8-2 >> Modification 2:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, when a big hit is won by a winning lottery and the distribution result by the distribution determination is a normal hit, the support mode becomes a low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Met. On the other hand, as a modification, in a gaming state where the lottery mode is a high probability mode, when a big hit is won by a winning lottery and the distribution result by the distribution determination is a normal hit, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, Support mode It may be configured to be a high frequency support mode. Hereinafter, it will be described in detail.

FIG. 485 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table for the first starting port included in the pachinko machine of the second modification. FIG. 485 (a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 485 (b) shows a distribution table for the first starting port (for high probability mode). The distribution table for the first starting port included in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment does not distinguish between the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode, whereas the pachinko machine of the second modification includes the pachinko machine. The distribution table for the first starting port has a distinction between a low probability mode and a high probability mode.

The distribution table for the first starting port (for the low probability mode) included in the pachinko machine of the second modification is the same as the distribution table for the first starting port included in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment.

The distribution table for the first starting port (for high probability mode) provided in the pachinko machine of the second modification is a hit as compared with the distribution table for the first starting port provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. When a jackpot is won by lottery and the type of jackpot won is 8R normal jackpot, the difference is that the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, and the others are the same. The high-frequency support mode referred to here is a type in which the high-frequency support mode is continued until the next big hit is won.

Further, the pachinko machine of the second modification has a different number of STs as compared with the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the number of STs was set to 10 times, whereas in the pachinko machine of the modified example 2, the number of STs was set to 13 times.

FIG. 486 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game in the pachinko machine of the second modification. In the pachinko machine of the second modification, since the number of STs is 13, the number of game times executed in the left-handed mode H6b in the high-accuracy low support state H6 is compared with the case of the tenth embodiment. And it is increasing. Specifically, in the special 2 residual hold digestion mode H6a in the high accuracy low support state H6, the game times were executed four times corresponding to the maximum number of game balls to be held to enter the second starting port 34. In this case, the number of game times executed in the left-handed mode H6b in the high-accuracy low support state H6 is four. That is, the number of times obtained by subtracting the number of STs of 13 times, the number of times of shortening of time, 5 times, and the number of times executed in the mode H6a during the special 2 residual hold digestion, that is, 4 times is left-handed. This is the number of game times executed in H6b. On the other hand, when the game is not performed even once in the mode H6a during the special 2 residual hold digestion, the number obtained by subtracting 5 times, which is the number of times of shortening of time, from 13 times, which is the number of STs, that is, 8 times. Is the number of game times executed in the mode H6b during left-handed strike.

In the left-handed mode H6b executed 4 to 8 times, when a big hit is won by a winning lottery and the distribution result by the distribution determination is a normal big hit, the game is given to the player after the game round is completed. As a privilege, the open / close execution mode is executed. That is, the transition from the high-accuracy low support state H6 to the open / close execution mode H7. Then, after the opening / closing execution mode H7 ends, the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode, and the support mode shifts from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode. As a result, the opening / closing execution mode H7 shifts to the low accuracy high support state H5. At this time, the high frequency support mode will continue until the next big hit is won.

The operation in the low accuracy and high support state H5 is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. That is, in the low accuracy and high support state H5, the player continuously executes right-handed striking to cause the game ball to flow down to the right side of the game area PA and to enter the game ball into the second starting port 34. Since the lottery result of the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 in the low accuracy high support state H5 is limited to either the big hit winning or the time saving grant winning, the big hit in the winning lottery. Even if you don't win, you will win the time saving grant, so the high frequency support mode will continue as the support mode until you win the next big hit. In other words, if you win the time saving grant in the winning lottery, the high frequency support mode will continue until you win the next jackpot, effectively guaranteeing the next jackpot. In addition, since the jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is limited to the 16R probability variation jackpot, in the low accuracy high support state H5, the probability variation jackpot is won and the high accuracy high support. It is guaranteed to re-enter state H4.

Other configurations of the pachinko machine of the second modification are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 2 configured as described above, i) in the high-accuracy high-support state H4, the machine shifts to the high-accuracy high-support state H4 without winning either the winning lottery or the fall lottery. When the number of games played has reached 5 times, it is missed to shift from the high accuracy high support state H4 to the low accuracy high support state H5 where the next big hit is promised, ii) high accuracy low support. Special 2 remaining hold in state H6 In the mode H6a during digestion, the special 2 remaining hold is eliminated without winning either the winning lottery or the fall lottery, so that the high probability low support state H6 to the low probability low support Even if the transition to the low accuracy high support state H5 is missed via the special 2 residual hold digestion aspect H1b in the state H1, the hit in the left-handed aspect H6b in the high accuracy low support state H6. By winning a big hit by lottery and the distribution result by the distribution determination becoming a normal big hit, it is possible to shift from the high accuracy low support state H6 to the low accuracy high support state H5 via the open / close execution mode H7. Therefore, even if the player misses the chances of i) and ii) above and is discouraged, he / she can win the next big hit by hitting the normal big hit in the left-handed mode H6b in the high accuracy low support state H6. You will be given another chance to transition to the promised low-probability high-support state H5. Therefore, the player has both an expectation and a sense of urgency about hitting a normal jackpot in the left-handed mode H6b in the high-accuracy low-support state H6. As a result, according to the pachinko machine of the second modification, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine of this modification 2, when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode given when the normal big hit is won is a type that continues until the next big hit is won. However, instead of this, the high-frequency support mode may be of a type in which the high-frequency support mode is continued only once. Even if the high-frequency support mode is configured to continue only once, it shifts to the low-accuracy high support state H5 after the end of the open / close execution mode H7, and then wins the time saving grant in the low-accuracy high support state H5. This is because the high frequency support mode will continue until the next big hit is won. That is, when the lottery mode is a high probability mode, the high frequency support mode usually given when a big hit is won may be once or many times.

<< 10-8-3 >> Modification 3:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, there is no setting of deviation in the hit / miss table (for low probability mode) for the second starting port, and if the big hit is not won, the time saving is always won. .. On the other hand, as a modification, if the win / fail table for the second start port (for low probability mode) has a big hit win, a time saving grant win, and a loss setting, and the big hit is not won, the time reduction grant win. It may be configured to be divided into the case of deviation and the case of deviation. Hereinafter, it will be described in detail.

FIG. 487 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit / fail table (for low probability mode) for the second starting port in the modified example 3. As shown in FIG. 487, 20 values from 0 to 19 are set as the value of the random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the hit / miss table (for low probability mode) for the second start port, and the time is shortened. 1980 values of 20 to 1999 are set as the value of the hit random number counter C1, and 1980 values of 2000 to 3979 are set as the value of the hit random number counter C1 that is out of order (an event that neither a big hit nor a time saving is won). The value is set. In this case, the number of value groups of the hit random number counter C1 that is a big hit is 20/3980 (= 1/199) with respect to the total number, and the number of value groups of the hit random number counter C1 that is given a time saving is It is 1980/3980 (= 99/199) with respect to the total number, and the number of value groups of the random number counter C1 is 1980/3980 (= 99/199) with respect to the total number. ing. As a result, according to the hit / fail table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), 1/2 of the number of value groups of the hit random number counter C1 that does not become a big hit is given a time saving, and the hit random number counter C1 that does not become a big hit Half of the number of value groups is out of order.

It should be noted that the "time saving grant" won in this modification is a type of time saving grant in which the high frequency support mode is continued only for a predetermined number of game times (for example, 5 times), which is also different from the tenth embodiment. .. That is, in the tenth embodiment, when the time saving grant is won in the winning lottery, the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big hit is won in the winning lottery, whereas in this modification, the winning is achieved. When the time saving grant is won in the lottery, the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode only for a predetermined number of game times (for example, 5 times).

FIG. 488 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game in the pachinko machine of the modified example 3. The flow of the game in the pachinko machine of the third modification is the operation in the low probability high support state H5 and the special feature in the low probability low support state H1 as compared with the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 455). 2 The operation of the aspect H1b during the residual hold digestion is different, and the other operations are the same.

In the pachinko machine of the third modification, in the low accuracy and high support state H5, if the big hit is not won in the winning lottery, there is a 1/2 probability that the pachinko machine is divided into the time saving grant winning and the losing. If the time reduction is won, the high frequency support mode as the support mode is continued only for 5 game times. If you do not win the jackpot or the time saving grant in the winning lottery during the 5 game rounds in which the high frequency support mode is continued (in the case of a loss), after the end of the 5 game rounds, The support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. That is, if neither the big hit nor the time saving grant is won in the winning lottery during the five game times in which the high frequency support mode is continued, the low probability high support state H5 to the low probability low support state H1 Move to. The transition destination in the low probability low support state H1 is the mode H1a during left-handing when the special 2 residual hold disappears, and the mode H1b during the special 2 residual hold digestion when there is a special 2 residual hold. ..

In the low probability high support state H5, if the time saving grant is won again in the winning lottery by the end of the 5 game rounds in which the high frequency support mode is continued, the period of the high frequency support mode is 5 times. Only the game times of are extended. Therefore, in the low accuracy and high support state H5, if it is possible to repeatedly win the time saving grant in the winning lottery by the end of the five game rounds in which the high frequency support mode is continued, the high frequency support is supported. The period of the mode can be extended in sequence until the next big hit is won.

Similarly, in the mode H1b during the special 2 residual hold digestion in the low probability low support state H1, if the big hit is not won in the winning lottery, there is a probability of 1/2 that the time saving is divided into winning and losing. If the time reduction grant is won, the support mode shifts from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode, and as a result, shifts from the low probability low support state H1 to the low probability high support state H5 described above.

Other configurations of the pachinko machine of the third modification are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 3 configured as described above, in the high-accuracy high support state H4, when the fall lottery is won in the game times before the number of times the game times are executed reaches the number of time-saving continuations, it is high. The transition from the high probability support state H4 to the low probability high support state H5 is made, but in this low probability high support state H5, by the end of the five game rounds in which the high frequency support mode is continued, in the winning lottery again. If the winning of the time saving grant can be repeated, the period in which the high frequency support mode is continued can be sequentially extended until the next big hit is won. For this reason, even if the player does not win a big hit in the winning lottery in the low probability high support state H5, the time is shortened in the winning lottery by the end of the five game rounds in which the high frequency support mode is continued. You can repeatedly expect to win the grant. To put it the other way around, by the end of the five game rounds in which the high-frequency support mode is continued, the player is repeatedly urged to win the big hit and the time saving grant in the winning lottery. Can be granted.

Further, in the mode H1b during the special 2 residual hold digestion in the low probability low support state H1, the player can be expected to win the time saving grant even if the big hit is not won in the winning lottery. As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the third modification, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of security.

<< 10-8-4 >> Modification 4:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the number of STs (10 times) corresponds to the number of continuous time reductions (5 times) and the maximum number of game balls to be held in the second starting port 34 (4 times). ) And 1 time for the margin (10 times). On the other hand, the number of STs may be set to exceed the total number. For example, the number of STs may be 11, 12, ..., 15 times, ..., 20 times, and the like. Similar to the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, this modification also corresponds to a game ball that has entered just before the electric accessory 34a closes at the time of transition from the high accuracy high support state H4 to the high accuracy low support state H6. The special 2 residual hold can be used without fail in the aspect H6a during the special 2 residual hold digestion in the high accuracy low support state (state H6), and the high accuracy low support state H6 with the special 2 residual hold remaining. It does not return to the low probability low support state H1. Therefore, even with the pachinko machine of this modification, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, after reaching the ST number of times from the high accuracy high support state H4 and returning to the low accuracy low support state H1, special 2 remains. Since it is possible to eliminate the flow of the game in which the player wins the time saving grant by holding the game, the soundness of the game can be improved.

<< 10-8-5 >> Modification 5:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, a big hit is won by a winning lottery, and even though the type of the winning big hit is a probability variable big hit, the game ball enters the V winning opening 48 opened by the big hit. When the ball is not played, the lottery mode does not shift to the high probability mode, and the support mode does not shift to the high frequency support mode. On the other hand, as a modification, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the type of winning jackpot is a probability variable jackpot, and the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 48 opened by the jackpot. Although the lottery mode does not shift to the high probability mode, the support mode may be configured to shift to the high frequency support mode.

According to this modification, in the low probability low support state H1 (see FIG. 455), a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and the type of winning jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, and the V winning opening 48 opened with the jackpot as an opportunity. When the game ball does not enter the ball, the low probability low support state H1 shifts to the low probability high support state H5 via the open / close execution mode H3. In the low probability high support state H5, since the next big hit (probability change big hit) is practically guaranteed, it is highly advantageous for the player. Therefore, according to this modified example, a jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and the type of the winning jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, and a game operation in which the game ball is not intentionally entered into the V winning opening 48 opened by the jackpot. Can be valid. According to this modification, in the high-accuracy high-support state H4, the number of times the game is executed after shifting to the high-accuracy high-support state H4 reaches 5 times (within 5 times), which is the number of time-saving continuations. If the player wins the fall lottery, it has the game property of being able to move to the low probability high support state H5 where the next probability change jackpot is guaranteed, but the above V winning opening 48 is a game ball. If you dare to perform a game operation that does not allow the ball to enter, it is possible to shift to the low accuracy high support state H5 without having to win the fall lottery within the above 5 times, and the above game characteristics are impaired. There was a problem that ended up. This problem can be solved by the following modification 6.

<< 10-8-6 >> Modification 6:
The pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment is configured to include one variable winning device 36. On the other hand, as a modification, the configuration may include a first variable winning device and a second variable winning device. The first variable winning device is provided with a large winning opening and an opening / closing door for opening and closing the large winning opening, and is not provided with a V winning opening. The second variable winning device includes a large winning opening, an opening / closing door for opening and closing the large winning opening, and a V winning opening provided inside the large winning opening. The second variable winning device is different from the variable winning device 36 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment in that the V winning opening shutter 48a is not provided. In this modification, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the winning jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the opening / closing door of the first variable winning device is opened and closed in the open / close execution mode. Repeat with the state. On the other hand, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the winning jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, the opening / closing door of the second variable winning device is opened and closed in the open / close execution mode. repeat.

According to the above configuration, if a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of winning jackpot is a normal jackpot, a game ball enters the jackpot of the first variable winning device and a game is played in the V winning slot. The ball never enters. On the other hand, if a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of winning jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, a game ball enters the jackpot of the second variable winning device and is equipped with a V winning slot shutter. Since there is no such thing, the game ball that has entered the large winning opening will be 100% likely to be entered into the V winning opening. For this reason, when a jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of the winning jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, the game ball does not enter the V winning opening while the game ball enters the large winning opening. Therefore, according to this modification, it is possible to avoid shifting from the low accuracy low support state H1 to the low accuracy high support state H5 via the open / close execution mode H3. Therefore, in the high accuracy high support state H4, If the player wins the fall lottery until the number of executions of the game times after shifting to the high accuracy high support state H4 reaches 5 times (within 5 times), which is the number of continuous time reductions, the following is virtually the case. It is possible to demonstrate the original game characteristics of being able to shift to the low probability high support state H5 in which the probability change jackpot is guaranteed.

<< 10-8-7 >> Modification 7:
Further, as a configuration that makes it impossible to perform a game operation in which the game ball is not intentionally entered into the V winning opening 48, the following configuration can be used instead of the modification 6. A variable winning device 36 is provided in the area where the game ball can enter by right-handed operation, and only when the gate is passed when the round game based on the big hit winning is executed. The opening / closing door 36b of the above is configured to start the opening / closing operation, and a V winning opening is provided directly under the gate. According to this configuration, in order to start the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, it is necessary to pass the game ball through the gate, and in that case, the game ball always enters the V winning opening. It will be. Therefore, even with this modification, if the jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the type of winning jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, the game ball does not enter the V winning opening while the game ball enters the big winning opening. There is no such thing. Therefore, according to this modification, it is possible to avoid shifting from the low accuracy low support state H1 to the low accuracy high support state H5 via the open / close execution mode H3. Therefore, in the high accuracy high support state H4, If the player wins the fall lottery until the number of executions of the game times after shifting to the high accuracy high support state H4 reaches 5 times (within 5 times), which is the number of continuous time reductions, the following is virtually the case. It is possible to demonstrate the original game characteristics of being able to shift to the low probability high support state H5 in which the probability change jackpot is guaranteed.

<< 10-8-8 >> Modification 8:
In the tenth embodiment and its modification, when a winner is won in the fall lottery using the value of the fall random number counter CF, the lottery mode of the winning lottery is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. On the other hand, as a modification, a fall opening where a game ball can enter is prepared in the game board 30, and when the game ball enters the fall opening, the lottery mode of the winning lottery is low from the high probability mode. It may be configured to be changed to the probability mode. In this configuration, a game ball distribution device that distributes game balls between a flow path leading to the fall opening and a flow path other than the fall opening (for example, an out port or a second starting port) is provided above the fall opening. It can also be provided. According to these configurations, the player can visually recognize whether or not the game ball enters the fall opening, so that the game after the transition to the high accuracy high support state H4 in the high accuracy high support state H4. The player can wait with a sense of urgency and anticipation as to whether or not the game ball enters the fall opening before the number of times of execution reaches the number of continuous time reductions.

<< 10-8-9 >> Modification 9:
In the tenth embodiment, the modified example 1 thereof, and the modified example 2 thereof, when the time saving grant is won in the winning lottery, the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the next big hit is won in the winning lottery. And said. On the other hand, as a modification, the period during which the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode (hereinafter referred to as the high support continuation period) is until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times). You may change to. That is, in the case of winning the winning lottery, the high-frequency support mode may be continued as the support mode until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times). The predetermined number of times is not limited to 5 times, and may be any number of times such as 1 time, 2 times, 3 times, 4 times, and 6 times. Regarding other configurations in this modification, in the winning lottery using the same configuration as the tenth embodiment (particularly, the hit / fail table for the second starting port (for low probability mode: see FIG. 450 (b))). If you do not win the big hit, you will win the time saving grant).

According to the configuration of this modification, by the end of the high support continuation period, the time saving grant is won in the lottery repeatedly, and the high support continuation period is only for the period until the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number of times. Will be extended in sequence, and this extension will be repeated until a big hit is won in the winning lottery. As a result, the high-frequency support mode will be continued as the support mode until the next big hit is won in the winning lottery. Therefore, according to this modification, as in the tenth embodiment, in the low accuracy high support state H5, the lottery mode is set until the next big hit is won in the winning lottery by using the time saving grant that continues only a predetermined number of times. It has the effect of realizing playability that allows the high-frequency support mode to continue. In other words, the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode until the big hit is won in the winning lottery. The high-frequency support mode is continued as the lottery mode until the next big hit is won in the winning lottery without using the time saving grant. Playability can be realized.

<< 10-8-10 >> Modification 10:
In the above embodiment, the special information acquired in the high-probability high-probability mode and the high-accuracy high-support state as the specific game state, which is the high-probability support mode, is the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. As an advantageous gaming state that is guaranteed to shift to the high-probability high-support state as a specific gaming state again when a specific condition such as winning the fall lottery is satisfied by the time the winning lottery for the special information based on is completed. On the other hand, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the high-probability high-support state as the specific game state is the predetermined number of times (ST number) without winning the fall lottery. When it reaches, the probability of re-transitioning to the specific gaming state is lower than the advantageous gaming state. Is an example, and various combinations can be adopted as the types of the lottery mode and the support mode in each game state.

Specifically, for example, as a specific game state, a high-probability mode and a high-probability support mode, a high-probability high-support state, a high-probability mode and a low-probability support mode, a high-probability low-support state, and a low-probability mode. A low-probability high-support state, which is a high-frequency support mode, and a low-probability low-support state, which is a low-probability mode and a low-probability support mode, may be adopted. Further, for example, as an advantageous gaming state, a high probability high support state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a high probability low support state which is a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode, and a high probability low support state which is a low probability mode are high. A low-probability high-support state, which is a frequency support mode, a low-probability low-support state, which is a low-probability mode and a low-probability support mode, and the like may be adopted. Further, for example, as a predetermined game state, a high probability high support state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a high probability low support state which is a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode, and a high probability low support state which is a low probability mode are high. A low-probability high-support state, which is a frequency support mode, a low-probability low-support state, which is a low-probability mode and a low-probability support mode, and the like may be adopted. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game as in the above embodiment.

<< 10-8-11 >> Modification 11:
In the above embodiment, the support mode is determined when a specific condition such as winning the fall lottery is satisfied in the high probability high support state as the first specific gaming state which is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. A first predetermined gaming state in which the game state is maintained in the high-frequency support mode for a period, for example, until the next big hit is won in the winning lottery, which is more advantageous for the player than the high-probability high-support state. On the other hand, in the high-probability high-support state, when the second predetermined condition such that the game times of the short-time continuation number is executed without winning the fall lottery is satisfied. It is configured to shift to the high probability low support state as the second specific game state, and in the high probability low support state, the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is performed. When a specific condition such as winning a fall lottery is satisfied, the player shifts to a low-probability low-support state as a second predetermined gaming state, which is less advantageous to the player than a high-probability low-support state. However, the types of the lottery mode and the support mode in each game state are examples, and various combinations can be adopted as the types of the lottery mode and the support mode in each game state.

Specifically, for example, as the first specific gaming state, a high probability high support state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a high probability low support state which is a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode, and a low A low probability high support state which is a probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a low probability low support state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, and the like may be adopted. Further, for example, as the first predetermined gaming state, in the high probability high support state which is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the high probability low support state which is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and the low probability mode. A low-probability high-support state, which is a high-frequency support mode, and a low-probability, low-support state, which is a low-probability mode and a low-probability support mode, may be adopted. Further, for example, as the second specific game state, in the high probability high support state which is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the high probability low support state which is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and the low probability mode. A low-probability high-support state, which is a high-frequency support mode, and a low-probability, low-support state, which is a low-probability mode and a low-probability support mode, may be adopted. Further, for example, as the second predetermined gaming state, in the high probability high support state which is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the high probability low support state which is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and the low probability mode. A low-probability high-support state, which is a high-frequency support mode, and a low-probability, low-support state, which is a low-probability mode and a low-probability support mode, may be adopted. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game as in the above embodiment.

<< 10-8-12 >> Modification 12:
The configuration of the present modification described below may be applied to the above embodiment and each of the above modifications. Hereinafter, an example in which the configuration of this modification is applied to the above embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 455 described above.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, when the opening / closing execution mode H3 is changed to the high-accuracy high-support state H4, an effect of notifying that the game state has been changed, which is highly advantageous to the player, is executed. In this modified example, an image of a specific character (an image of female character A in this modified example) and a character string such as "Enter the chance zone !!" In addition to displaying the image on the display device 41, an effect (chance zone entry effect) of outputting the sound corresponding to the character string from the speaker 46 is executed. Then, a specific background image (hereinafter, referred to as a first specific background image) meaning that the player has entered the chance zone is displayed on the symbol display device 41. The player recognizes that he / she has entered the highly advantageous chance zone by recognizing the chance zone entry effect and the first specific background image, and expects to win the jackpot or the fall lottery. become.

Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, the fall lottery was won in the game times before (within 5 times) the number of games after the transition to the high accuracy high support state H4 reached 5 times, which is the number of continuous time reductions. In that case, an effect suggesting that an event advantageous to the player has occurred is executed just before the end of the game. In this modification, as the effect, an image of a specific character (an image of an anglerfish character in this modification) and a character string such as "Entering the safe and secure zone !!" are displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the character is displayed. An effect of outputting the sound corresponding to the row from the speaker 46 (an effect of entering the safety zone) is executed. Then, a specific background image (hereinafter, referred to as a second specific background image) meaning that the user has entered the safety zone is displayed on the symbol display device 41. By recognizing the safety zone entry effect and the second specific background image, the player can clearly recognize that an advantageous event such as the safety zone entry has occurred. Then, the pachinko machine 10 shifts from the high-accuracy high support state H4 to the low-accuracy high support state H5, triggered by the fall winning. In this modified example, if a jackpot (probability change jackpot) is also won in the game times won in the fall lottery, it is announced that the probability change jackpot was won without executing the above-mentioned safety zone entry effect. Perform the production to be done.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, the number of times the game is executed after shifting to the high-accuracy high-support state H4 without winning the jackpot or the fall lottery in the high-accuracy high-support state H4 is the number of continuous time reductions ( When the player shifts to the special 2 residual hold digestion mode H6a in the high accuracy low support state H6 by reaching 5 times), the state with high advantage for the player corresponds to the number of special 2 residual hold. Perform an effect that suggests that the game will continue only for a limited number of games. In this modification, as the effect, an image of a specific character (an image of female character B in this modification) and a character string such as "Enter the final chance zone !!" are displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the character string is displayed. The effect of outputting the sound corresponding to the above from the speaker 46 (the effect of entering the final chance zone) is executed. Then, a specific background image (hereinafter referred to as a third specific background image) meaning that the player has entered the final chance zone is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the remaining number of games remaining (specially). Numerical information (special 2 remaining hold countdown information) indicating (2 remaining hold countdown information) is displayed on the symbol display device 41. By recognizing the final chance zone entry effect, the third specific background image, and the special 2 remaining hold countdown information, the player can make a big hit or fall lottery before the value of the special 2 remaining hold countdown information becomes 0. You will have the feeling that you want to be elected.

Then, if the fall lottery is won in the special 2 residual hold digestion mode H6a in the high probability low support state H6, or if the probability change jackpot is won in the winning lottery regardless of whether the fall lottery is successful or not, the middle stage of the game round. In, an effect suggesting that an event advantageous to the player has occurred is executed. In this modified example, as the effect, an image of a specific character (an image of a whale character in this modified example) and a character string such as "Probability change jackpot or entry into the safety zone has been confirmed !!" are displayed as a symbol display device. In addition to displaying the image on the 41, an effect of outputting the sound corresponding to the character string from the speaker 46 (advantageous event occurrence alternative effect) is executed. The player who recognizes the advantageous event occurrence alternative effect can clearly recognize that an advantageous event of either the probabilistic jackpot winning or the entry into the safety zone has occurred.

Then, if the player has won the fall lottery in the game round, the special 2 residual in the high probability low support state H6 is held from the aspect H6a during digestion to the special 2 residual in the low probability low support state H1. On the other hand, if the player has not won the fall lottery in the game round but has won the probable change jackpot, the game state does not change. Then, if the result of the winning lottery in the game round is a probabilistic jackpot (only the probabilistic jackpot because the special 2 is reserved), an effect is executed to announce that the winning lottery has been won just before the end of the game round. On the other hand, if the result of the winning lottery is a time-saving grant winning (that is, the falling lottery is won and the mode is changed to the special 2 residual hold digestion mode H1a in the low probability low support state H1. In the case of winning the time saving grant without winning the probability change jackpot), the above-mentioned safety zone entry effect is executed just before the end of the game round. As a result, the player can confirm which advantageous event has occurred in this game round.

As described above, in this modification, the background image displayed in the high-accuracy high-support state H4 (the first specific background image corresponding to the chance zone) and the high-accuracy high-support state H4 to the high-accuracy low-support state. The background image (third specific background image corresponding to the final chance zone) displayed after the transition to H6 and until the end of the special 2 remaining hold will be different. Therefore, the player can be made to clearly distinguish and recognize both states, and can pay attention to the change in the state of the game.

Further, in this modification, when the fall lottery is won in the high accuracy and high support state H4, an effect suggesting that an advantageous event has occurred (safety mode entry effect) is executed. Here, in a normal pachinko machine, it is not preferable for the player to win the fall lottery. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, unlike a normal pachinko machine, it is preferable for the player to win the fall lottery in the above situation. Therefore, in this modification, when the player wins the fall lottery in the high accuracy and high support state H4, the player is given an effect (safety mode entry effect) that suggests that an advantageous event has occurred. , It is possible to clearly recognize that a favorable event has occurred.

Further, in this modification, after the transition to the high-accuracy high-support state H4 and the number of executions of the game times reaches the time-saving continuation number (5 times), the transition to the high-accuracy low-support state H6 is performed, and then the special 2 remains. When the fall lottery is won by the time the game rounds due to the hold are completed in the high-accuracy low support state H6, an effect suggesting that an advantageous event has occurred (advantageous event occurrence alternative effect) is executed. Here, in a normal pachinko machine, it is not preferable for the player to win the fall lottery. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, unlike a normal pachinko machine, it is preferable for the player to win the fall lottery in the above situation. Therefore, in this modification, an advantageous event occurs when the fall lottery is won by the time the game times due to the special 2 remaining hold are completed in the high accuracy low support state H6 after shifting to the high accuracy low support state H6. By executing an effect suggesting that an advantageous event has occurred (an alternative effect of generating an advantageous event), it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that an advantageous event has occurred.

<< 10-8-13 >> Modification 13:
The configuration of the present modification described below may be applied to the above embodiment and each of the above modifications. In the following description, the symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a of the special symbol unit 37 is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b is "second special symbol". , And the symbol displayed on the normal symbol unit 38 is also referred to as a "normal symbol". In addition, the "first special symbol" and the "second special symbol" are collectively referred to as a "special symbol".

Further, the "winning lottery" in the above embodiment and each of the above modifications is also referred to as a "special drawing lottery", and the special drawing lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is the "first special drawing lottery". It is also referred to as a "drawing lottery", and a special drawing lottery executed based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 is also referred to as a "second special drawing lottery". Further, the "electric accessory opening lottery" in the above-described embodiment and each of the above modifications is also referred to as a "general drawing lottery", and the "electric accessory 34a" is also referred to as a "normal electric accessory 34a".

For convenience of explanation, "variation of the first special symbol" is also referred to as "variation of the first special symbol", "variation of the second special symbol" is also referred to as "variation of the second special symbol", and "variation of the ordinary symbol". "Fluctuation" is also referred to as "normal map fluctuation". In addition, the "first special figure change" and the "second special figure change" are collectively referred to as "special figure change". Further, the number of STs (special time) in the above-described embodiment and each of the above modifications is also referred to as "high probability continuation upper limit number", and "time reduction continuation number" is also referred to as "high support continuation upper limit number".

In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the high probability continuation upper limit number (ST number of times) is the maximum number of special 2 hold (in the above embodiment) in the high support continuation upper limit number of times (time reduction continuation number, 5 times in the above embodiment). 4) are added, and once (or twice or more) is added as a margin (10 times in the above embodiment). The reason for this is that if a configuration is adopted in which the above-mentioned marginal amount of 1 time is not added to the high probability continuation upper limit number (ST number of times), the special figure fluctuation that reaches the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times). If the game ball enters the second starting port 34 after the start of the next (sixth) special figure change and the number of special 2 reserved is four, the fourth special 2 is concerned. The hold will exist as a special 2 remaining hold until after the transition to the low probability low support state H1, and the second special drawing lottery based on the fourth special 2 hold is the special 2 of the low probability low support state H1. It will be executed in the mode H1b during the remaining hold digestion, and it will surely win either the probabilistic jackpot or the time saving grant, and as a result, the game characteristics assumed at the time of designing the pachinko machine 10 will be broken. Because.

Therefore, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, as described above, the high-probability continuation upper limit number (5 times) is reached by adding one time as a margin to the high-probability continuation upper limit number (ST number of times). Even if the game ball enters the second starting port 34 after the start of the next (sixth) special figure change after the special figure change and the number of special 2 reserved is four. The second special drawing lottery based on the fourth special 2 hold (the tenth special drawing lottery after shifting to the high probability high support state H4) is executed in the high probability low support state H6 (that is, the high probability mode). Is executed before the end).

On the other hand, as a modified example, the value obtained by adding the high probability continuation upper limit number, the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times in this modified example), and the maximum number of special 2 hold (4 pieces in this modified example). In the modified example, it is set to 9 times), and it is configured not to add once as a margin, and then the next (sixth) special figure of the special figure fluctuation that has reached the upper limit number of continuous high support (5 times). A configuration may be adopted in which the game ball enters the second starting port 34 after the start of the fluctuation and the number of special 2 reserved balls is reduced to four. Hereinafter, the configuration of this modification will be specifically described.

FIG. 489 is a timing chart showing an example of control when transitioning from the high accuracy high support state H4 to the high accuracy low support state H6 in this modification. In this modification, the high support continuation upper limit number is set to 5 times, and the high probability continuation upper limit number (ST number of times) is set to 9 times.

Then, in this modification, when the number of executions of the special figure change after the transition to the high accuracy high support state H4 reaches the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times), the high accuracy high support state H4 is changed to the high accuracy low support. It shifts to the state H6 (shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode), but the timing when the high frequency support mode flag actually turns from ON to OFF has reached the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times). It is set at the start of fluctuations in the figure fluctuations. As shown in FIG. 489, a special symbol confirmation time Tcs of 0.5 seconds is provided after the fluctuation of the special symbol is completed (after it is stopped). The special symbol confirmation time Tcs is the time (stop display time) in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery, and the next change of the special symbol after the lapse of the special symbol confirmation time Tcs. (Game times) can be started. Further, as in the case of the special symbol, the normal symbol confirmation time Tcn is provided even after the end of the fluctuation of the normal symbol. Hereinafter, the control shown in FIG. 489 will be described with respect to the control in this modification.

As shown in FIG. 489, the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the execution of the fourth special figure change (the second special figure change in the example shown in FIG. 489) after the transition to the high accuracy high support state H4. If so, the regular map lottery is executed and the regular map fluctuation is started (time t1). When the normal map fluctuation time elapses, the normal map fluctuation ends (time t2), and the normal symbol stops in a manner corresponding to the result of the normal map lottery. Since the drawing lottery is executed in the high frequency support mode, it is almost certain that the drawing will be won (with a probability of 231/233). Then, as shown in FIG. 489, as a result of the normal map lottery, when the normal map is won, the ordinary electric accessory 34a is opened when the normal map confirmation time Tcn has elapsed (time t3).

In this modification, the normal map fluctuation time, the normal map confirmation time Tcn in the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, the normal figure winning probability, which is the probability of winning the normal map in the normal map lottery, and the normal map. The number of times the ordinary electric accessory 34a is opened when the normal electric accessory is won, and the number of times the ordinary electric accessory is opened, which is the opening time, are set as follows. To.

[In low frequency support mode]
・ Normal map fluctuation time: 10.0 seconds ・ Normal map confirmation time Tcn: 0.1 seconds ・ General map winning probability: 1/233
・ Number of times the power is opened: 1 time ・ Time when the power is opened: 0.1 seconds [in high frequency support mode]
・ Normal map fluctuation time: 0.2 seconds ・ Normal map confirmation time Tcn: 0.1 seconds ・ General map winning probability: 231/233
・ Number of times of opening the normal power: 1 time ・ Opening time of the normal power: 1.4 seconds Even if the high-frequency support mode flag is turned off after the lottery is executed (for example, during the fluctuation of the normal map), the normal electric accessory 34a is opened once for 1.4 seconds.

Returning to the description of FIG. 489. In the example shown in FIG. 489, the fourth special figure change ends (time t4) while the ordinary electric accessory 34a is open, the special figure confirmation time Tcs elapses, and the fifth special figure change starts (time t4). At time t5), the number of special 2 reservations is from 4 to 3. As described above, in this modification, the high support continuation upper limit number is set to 5, and the timing when the high frequency support mode flag is turned from ON to OFF is the special figure fluctuation that reaches the high support continuation upper limit number. Since it is set at the start of the fluctuation, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off at the start of the fluctuation of the fifth special figure fluctuation (time t5).

In the example shown in FIG. 489, since the normal electric accessory 34a is continuously open even after the start of the change of the special figure change for the fifth time, the game ball can enter the second starting port 34. As shown in FIG. 489, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34 (time t6), the number of special 2 reserved balls increases by one to 3 to 4. After that, the opening time of the general electric power elapses, and the ordinary electric accessory 34a is closed (time t7).

After the time t5 when the high frequency support mode flag is turned off, the probability of winning the normal figure is as low as 1/233, so that the ordinary electric accessory 34a is released based on the normal figure lottery executed after the time t5. There is almost no such thing, and even if the normal electric accessory 34a is opened, the normal electric accessory opening time is extremely short at 0.1 seconds, so that the game ball does not actually enter the second starting port 34. No.

Further, if the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the normal drawing lottery is executed immediately before the start of the change of the fifth special figure change (that is, immediately before the high frequency support mode flag is turned from ON to OFF), the normal figure lottery is executed. Even if the normal electric accessory 34a is opened based on the drawing lottery, the time required from the start of the normal figure fluctuation in the high frequency support mode to the closure of the ordinary electric accessory 34a is 1.7 seconds. In addition, since the fluctuation time of at least the fifth special figure fluctuation is not set to 1.7 seconds or less in this modification, the ordinary electric accessory 34a is used until after the start of the sixth fluctuation of the special map fluctuation. It won't keep opening. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second starting port 34 after the start of the change of the special figure change for the sixth time, and the number of special 2 reserved balls becomes four.

As described above, in this modification, the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) is reached without adding one time as a margin to the high probability continuation upper limit number (ST number of times) as in the above embodiment. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second starting port 34 after the start of the change of the special figure change (sixth time) following the special figure change, and the number of special 2 reserved pieces becomes four. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the existence of the special 2 remaining hold after the transition to the low probability low support state H1. As a result, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of an unexpected second special figure fluctuation in the low probability low support state H1, and it is possible to avoid the game characteristics expected of the pachinko machine 10 from breaking down. ..

<< 10-8-14 >> Modification 14:
In the above modification 13, the timing at which the high frequency support mode flag is turned from ON to OFF is set at the start of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number, but as the modification 14, it is high. The timing at which the frequency support mode flag is turned from ON to OFF may be set at the end of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation that has reached the upper limit of the number of continuous high support. Hereinafter, the configuration of the present modification 14 will be described focusing on the differences from the above modification 13.

FIG. 490 is a timing chart showing an example of control when transitioning from the high accuracy high support state H4 to the high accuracy low support state H6 in this modification. In this modification, similarly to the above-mentioned modification 13, the high support continuation upper limit number is set to 5 times, and the high probability continuation upper limit number is set to 9 times.

As described above, in this modification, the timing at which the high frequency support mode flag is turned from ON to OFF is set at the end of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation when the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) is reached.

Further, in this modification, the length of the special figure confirmation time TcsLast after the end of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation that has reached the upper limit of the number of continuous high support is set to the normal special figure confirmation time Tcs (0.5 seconds in this modification). Set to a different length than. Specifically, the length of the special figure confirmation time TcsLast is set to be longer than the time required from the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol in the high frequency support mode to the closure of the normal electric accessory. In this modification, the length of the special figure confirmation time TcsLast is 1.7 seconds (= 0.2 seconds (normal figure fluctuation time) + 0.1 seconds (normal figure confirmation time Tcn) + 1.4 seconds (normal power open). Time)) Set to 1.8 seconds, which is longer than that. The reason for this will be described with reference to the example shown in FIG. 490. Since the time t1 to the time t7 in FIG. 490 are the same as those in FIG. 489 except that the high frequency support mode flag does not change from ON to OFF at the time t5, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 490, in this modification, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off at the end of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation (time t9) when the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) is reached. Here, in FIG. 490, a case where the game ball passes through the through gate 35 immediately before the end of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation that has reached the upper limit of the number of continuous high support (5 times) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 490, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 immediately before the end of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation that has reached the upper limit of the number of continuous high support (5 times) (time t8), the passage is triggered. The regular map lottery is executed and the regular map fluctuation starts. When the normal map fluctuation time elapses, the normal map fluctuation ends (time t10), and the normal symbol stops in a manner corresponding to the result of the normal map lottery. Since the drawing lottery is executed in the high frequency support mode, it is almost certain that the drawing will be won (with a probability of 231/233). Then, as shown in FIG. 490, as a result of the normal map lottery, when the normal map is won, the ordinary electric accessory 34a is opened when the normal map confirmation time Tcn has elapsed (time t11).

However, as shown in FIG. 490, even when the game ball enters the second starting port 34 before the special figure confirmation time TcsLast ends (time t12), the special figure confirmation time TcsLast ends. Until the next change in the second special figure is started, the number of special 2 holdings remains 4, so the number of special 2 holdings does not increase based on the incoming ball.

Then, in this modification, the length of the special figure confirmation time TcsLast after the end of the change of the special figure change that has reached the upper limit of the number of continuous high support (5 times) is normal from the start of the change of the normal symbol in the high frequency support mode. Since the length is set to be longer than the time required to close the electric accessory (1.7 seconds in this modified example) (1.8 seconds in this modified example), the timing (time) at which the special figure confirmation time TcsLast ends is set. The ordinary electric accessory 34a will be closed before t14) (time t13). In other words, the open state of the normal electric accessory 34a continues until the timing (time t14) when the next (sixth) special figure change after the special figure change that has reached the upper limit of high support continuation (5 times) is started. There is nothing to do. As described above, according to this modification, the opening of the normal electric accessory 34a continues until after the start of the next (sixth) special figure change after the special figure change that has reached the upper limit number of continuous high support (5 times). Since it is possible to avoid this, the next (sixth) special figure change after the special figure change that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) is started, and the number of special 2 hold is from 4 It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second starting port 34 in a state where the number of balls is three, and the number of special 2 reserved balls is four.

Although not shown, if the game ball passes through the through gate 35 after the end of the fluctuation of the special map fluctuation that has reached the upper limit of the number of continuous high support (5 times) (for example, during the special map confirmation time TcsLast). Since the high-frequency support mode has already been turned off, the general drawing lottery based on the passage is executed as the low-frequency support mode. Since the probability of winning a normal figure in the low frequency support mode is as low as 1/233, the ordinary electric accessory 34a is rarely opened based on the ordinary electric accessory 34a, and the ordinary electric accessory 34a is opened. However, since the normal power opening time is as short as 0.1 seconds, the game ball does not substantially enter the second starting port 34.

As described above, according to the present modification, even if one time as a margin is not added to the high probability continuation upper limit number (ST number) as in the above embodiment, the high support continuation upper limit number (5). Avoids the fact that the game ball enters the second starting port 34 after the start of the change of the special figure change (sixth time) after the special figure change that has reached (times), and the number of special 2 reserved pieces becomes four. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the existence of the special 2 remaining hold after the transition to the low probability low support state H1. As a result, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of an unexpected second special figure fluctuation in the low probability low support state H1, and it is possible to avoid the game characteristics expected of the pachinko machine 10 from breaking down. ..

Further, in the above modification 13, since the high frequency support mode flag is turned off at the start of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times), the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) has been reached. There was a problem that it was difficult to open the normal electric accessory 34a and store 4 special 2 holds during the execution of the special figure change, but in this modified example, the maximum number of continuous high support (5 times) was reached. Since the high frequency support mode flag is ON even during the execution of the special figure change that has been reached, the ordinary electric accessory 34a can be easily used even during the execution of the special figure change that has reached the upper limit of the number of continuous high support (5 times). It is possible to open the ball and let the game ball enter the second starting port 34 to store four special 2 hold.

In this modification, only the length of the special figure confirmation time TcsLast after the end of the change of the special figure change that has reached the upper limit of the number of continuous high support (5 times) is set from the start of the change of the normal symbol in the high frequency support mode. The length is set to a predetermined length longer than the time required to close the ordinary electric accessory, but as another modification, not only the length of the special figure fixing time TcsLast but also the normal special figure fixing time Tcs. The length may also be set to a predetermined length equal to or longer than the time required from the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol to the closure of the normal electric accessory in the high frequency support mode. According to this configuration, there is a sense of incongruity that the length of the special figure confirmation time TcsLast after the end of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation that has reached the upper limit of the number of continuous high support (5 times) is different from the length of the normal special figure confirmation time Tcs. It is possible to avoid giving it to the player.

<< 10-8-15 >> Modification 15:
In the above-mentioned modification 13 and the above-mentioned modification 14, the following (sixth time) of the special figure change that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) as an unexpected event that becomes excessively advantageous to the player. ) A configuration was adopted to avoid the occurrence of an event in which the game ball enters the second starting port 34 after the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation starts and the number of special 2 holdings becomes four. A configuration may be adopted in which the occurrence of an event that is excessively advantageous to the player is allowed, and the occurrence of the event is aimed at as an opportunity for the player. Hereinafter, the configuration of the present modification 15 will be described focusing on the differences from the above modification 13.

FIG. 491 is a timing chart showing an example of control when transitioning from the high accuracy high support state H4 to the high accuracy low support state H6 in this modification. In this modification, similarly to the above-mentioned modification 13 and modification 14, the high support continuation upper limit number is set to 5 times, and the high probability continuation upper limit number is set to 9 times.

Then, in this modification, the timing at which the high frequency support mode flag is turned from ON to OFF is when the special figure confirmation time Tcs has elapsed after the end of the change of the special figure change that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) ( It is set at the end of the game round). The reason for this will be described with reference to the example shown in FIG. 491. Since the time t1 to the time t7 in FIG. 491 are the same as those in FIG. 489 except that the high frequency support mode flag does not change from ON to OFF at the time t5, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 491, in this modification, the high frequency support mode flag occurs when the special figure confirmation time Tcs has elapsed (time t12) after the change of the special figure fluctuation that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times) is completed. Is turned off. Here, in FIG. 491, a case where the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the special map determination time Tcs after the end of the fluctuation of the special map fluctuation that has reached the upper limit number of continuous high support (5 times) will be described.

In this modification, the through passage promotion effect, which is an effect of urging the player to pass the game ball through the through gate 35, is executed during the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation that has reached the upper limit number of times of continuous high support (5 times). .. In this modification, as a through-passing promotion effect, an image of a specific character (an image of a female character in this modification) and "a game ball is passed through the through just before the end of the fluctuation and the electric chew is released until after the start of the next fluctuation. A character string such as "Let me do it!" Is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and an effect of outputting the sound corresponding to the character string from the speaker 46 is executed. The player who recognizes the effect adjusts the launch timing and launch intensity of the game ball so that the game ball passes through the through gate 35 immediately before the end of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation that has reached the upper limit of the number of continuous high support (5 times). While playing the game.

As shown in FIG. 491, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the special map confirmation time Tcs after the end of the fluctuation of the special map fluctuation that has reached the upper limit of the number of continuous high support (5 times) (time t9). , The general map lottery will be executed with the passage as an opportunity, and the general map fluctuation will start. When the normal map fluctuation time elapses, the normal map fluctuation ends (time t10), and the normal symbol stops in a manner corresponding to the result of the normal map lottery. Since the drawing lottery is executed in the high frequency support mode, it is almost certain that the drawing will be won (with a probability of 231/233). Then, as shown in FIG. 491, as a result of the normal map lottery, when the normal map is won, the ordinary electric accessory 34a is opened when the normal map confirmation time Tcn has elapsed (time t11).

In this modification, the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the fluctuation of the special map fluctuation that has reached the upper limit of the number of continuous high support (5 times) or during the special map confirmation time Tcs after the fluctuation of the special map fluctuation ends. When it is determined that the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34a, which is opened based on the winning, will continue until after the next change in the special figure changes. Executes an advantageous state start effect, which is an effect suggesting that an advantageous state is started for the player. In this modification, as an advantageous state start effect, an image of a specific character (an image of a female character in this modification) and a character string such as "Super electric chew chance has arrived !!!" are displayed on the symbol display device 41, and at the same time. An effect of outputting the sound corresponding to the character string from the speaker 46 is executed. The player who recognizes the effect will recognize that a state advantageous to the player will be started.

After that, when the special figure confirmation time Tcs of 0.5 seconds elapses (time t12), the high frequency support mode flag is turned off, the sixth special figure change is started, and the number of special 2 reserved is 4 to 3. become. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 491, since the open state of the normal electric accessory 34a continues even after the start of the sixth fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation, the game ball can enter the second starting port 34. During the execution of the sixth special figure change, it is possible to store up to four special 2 hold pieces, which is the maximum number of hold pieces.

In this modification, after the start of the change of the special figure change (sixth time) after the special figure change that has reached the upper limit of the number of continuous high support (5 times), that is, in the high accuracy low support state H6, the normal electric accessory When the 34a is in the open state, the special 2 ball entry promotion effect, which is an effect for urging the player to enter the game ball into the second starting port 34, is executed. In this modified example, as a ball entry promotion effect, an image of a specific character (an image of a female character in this modified example) and a character string such as "Aim at the open electric chew and save 4 holds!" In addition to displaying the image on the display device 41, the effect of outputting the sound corresponding to the character string from the speaker 46 is executed. The player who recognizes the effect inserts the game ball into the second starting port 34 and continuously right-hands the ball so that the number of special 2 reserved balls is four.

Then, as shown in FIG. 491, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34 (time t13), the number of special 2 reserved balls is four. As described above, since the second special drawing lottery based on the fourth special 2 hold is executed in the low probability low support state H1, the result of either winning the jackpot or winning the time saving is given. Will be.

Therefore, in this modification, after the start of the fluctuation of the special map fluctuation following the special map fluctuation that has reached the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times), that is, after the transition to the high accuracy low support state H6. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34 and the number of special 2 holdings reaches 4, which is the maximum number of holdings, it is determined that the player is in a favorable state. Perform the production. In this modification, as an advantageous confirmation effect, an image of a specific character (an image of a male character in this modification) and a character string such as "Congratulations! Good things will happen soon!" Are displayed on the symbol display device 41. An effect of outputting the sound corresponding to the character string from the speaker 46 is executed. The player who recognizes the effect recognizes that it is confirmed that a state advantageous to the player will come.

After that, when the opening time of the general electric power elapses (time t14), the ordinary electric accessory 34a is closed.

As described above, in this modification, the high frequency support mode flag is turned on until the special figure confirmation time Tcs elapses (time t12) after the end of the change of the special figure fluctuation that has reached the upper limit of the number of continuous high support (5 times). Therefore, if the game ball is passed through the through gate 35 immediately before the lapse of the special map confirmation time Tcs, the next (sixth) of the special map fluctuation that has reached the upper limit of the number of continuous high support (5 times). It is possible to continue the open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34a until after the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation starts. As a result, it is possible to generate an event advantageous to the player that the game ball enters the second starting port 34 after the start of the sixth change of the special figure change and the number of special 2 reserved balls becomes four. ..

Then, the closer the timing at which the game ball passes through the through gate 35 (that is, the start timing of the fluctuation of the normal map) is to the elapsed timing of the special figure determination time Tcs, the more the normal electric accessory 34a is opened in the high accuracy low support state H6. The period of time is extended, and it becomes easy to store up to 4 special 2 reserved pieces.

Based on the above, according to this modification, the game ball is gated through the game ball before (preferably immediately before) the lapse of the special figure confirmation time Tcs after the end of the change of the special figure fluctuation that has reached the upper limit of the number of continuous high support (5 times). By passing through, the open state of the normal electric accessory 34a is continued until after the start of the change of the next (sixth) special figure change, and after the change of the next special figure change starts, the game ball is moved to the second starting port. It is possible to create a new game property in which the player is allowed to enter the ball and the number of special 2 reserved pieces is set to 4 to obtain a state advantageous to the player.

Further, in the present modification, since the through-passing promotion effect is executed, the player can be made to recognize the game method according to the new game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in this modification, the next (sixth) special figure of the special figure change in which the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the opening of the normal electric accessory 34a reaches the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times). Since the advantageous state start effect is executed in the situation where the fluctuation continues until after the fluctuation starts, the player is in a state of being advantageous to the player different from the normal pachinko machine by passing the game ball through the through gate 35. It becomes possible to recognize that it is done.

Further, in this modification, in the high accuracy low support state H6, when the normal electric accessory 34a transitions to the open state, the special 2 ball entry promotion effect is executed, so that the player can use the new pachinko machine 10. It is possible to recognize how to play along with the game characteristics of.

Further, in this modification, it is advantageous when a game ball enters the second starting port 34 after shifting to the high-accuracy low support state H6 and the number of special 2 holdings reaches 4, which is the maximum number of holdings. Since the definite effect is executed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special 2 hold number is 4 which is the maximum hold number after shifting to the high accuracy low support state H6, which has a special meaning. Will be.

<< 10-8-16 >> Modification 16:
In the above-mentioned modification 15, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in a situation where a new normal drawing lottery cannot be executed (for example, while the normal electric accessory 34a is being opened or when the normal electric accessory 34a is being opened). A configuration may be adopted that does not have a function of holding a normal drawing lottery based on the passage of the game ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a normal drawing holding function). When a configuration having a normal map holding function is adopted as in the above embodiment and each of the above modified examples, the reserved normal drawing lottery may be automatically executed at a timing not intended by the player. Therefore, it may be difficult to adjust the opening timing of the ordinary electric accessory 34a.

On the other hand, in this modification, a configuration that does not have the normal figure holding function in a specific gaming state (for example, high accuracy and high support state H4) is adopted. According to such a configuration, in the high accuracy and high support state H4, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the normal drawing lottery is not held, so that the held normal drawing lottery is performed at a timing not intended by the player. It is possible to prevent it from being executed automatically. Therefore, by adjusting the timing at which the player passes the game ball through the through gate 35, it is possible to adjust the opening timing of the ordinary electric accessory 34a. As a result, by passing the game ball through the through gate (preferably immediately before) before the elapse of the special map confirmation time Tcs after the end of the fluctuation of the special map fluctuation that has reached the upper limit of the number of continuous high support (5 times), the following The open state of the normal electric accessory 34a is continued until after the change of the (sixth) special figure change, and after the change of the next special figure change starts, the game ball is made to enter the second starting port 34. 2 It is possible to further emphasize the above-mentioned new game characteristics of acquiring a state advantageous to the player by setting the number of reserved pieces to four.

Further, as a further modification, a configuration having no (always) normal drawing holding function may be adopted regardless of the gaming state. According to such a configuration, the reserved normal drawing lottery is not automatically executed at a timing not intended by the player regardless of the game state, so that the player can pass the game ball through the gate 35. By adjusting the timing of passing through the normal electric accessory 34a, it is possible to adjust the opening timing of the ordinary electric accessory 34a. As a result, by passing the game ball through the through gate (preferably immediately before) before the elapse of the special map confirmation time Tcs after the end of the fluctuation of the special map fluctuation that has reached the upper limit of the number of continuous high support (5 times), the following The open state of the normal electric accessory 34a is continued until after the change of the (sixth) special figure change, and after the change of the next special figure change starts, the game ball is made to enter the second starting port 34. 2 It is possible to further emphasize the above-mentioned new game characteristics of acquiring a state advantageous to the player by setting the number of reserved pieces to four.

<< 10-8-17 >> Modification 17:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the high frequency support mode flag is turned from ON to OFF when the number of executions of the special figure change after shifting to the high accuracy high support state H4 reaches the high support continuation upper limit number (5 times). The timing may be different depending on the type of the jackpot symbol that triggered the transition to the high accuracy and high support state H4.

For example, when the high probability high support state H4 is entered by winning the big hit symbol A (probability change big hit A) in the special figure lottery, the high frequency support mode flag is turned from ON to OFF as shown in the above modification 13. When the timing is set at the start of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation that has reached the upper limit of the number of continuous high support, and the state shifts to the high probability high support state H4 by winning the jackpot symbol B (probability change jackpot B) in the special figure lottery. Is set at the end of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation when the timing when the high frequency support mode flag is turned from ON to OFF reaches the maximum number of continuous support continuations as shown in the above modification 14, and the jackpot symbol C ( When the high probability high support state H4 is entered by winning the probability change jackpot C), the timing when the high frequency support mode flag is turned from ON to OFF becomes the high support continuation upper limit number as shown in the above modification 15. It is set when the special map confirmation time elapses after the change of the reached special map change ends. According to such a configuration, the high frequency support mode flag is turned from ON to OFF when the number of executions of the special figure change after the transition to the high accuracy high support state H4 reaches the high support continuation upper limit number. It is possible to have a sense of expectation and tension as to which timing the timing is set (whether the timing is set to be advantageous to the player as in the above-mentioned modification 15).

<< 10-8-18 >> Modification 18:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the configuration may further include a high-probability transition winning slot, which is a ball-entry slot that shifts the lottery mode to the high-probability mode when a game ball enters. Hereinafter, the configuration of this modification will be specifically described.

FIG. 492 is a front view of the game board 30 in this modified example. The difference from the game board 30 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 445 is that the high probability transition winning opening 34e is provided in the right side area of the game area PA. A movable piece 34f is provided at the entrance of the high probability transition winning opening 34e. The movable piece 34f is capable of transitioning from a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the high probability transition winning opening 34e to an open state in which the game ball can enter the high probability transition winning opening 34e, and is low. In the gaming state other than the high accuracy high support state H5, the closed state is in the closed state, and in the low accurate high support state H5, the closed state and the open state are alternately repeated every predetermined time (every 1.0 second in this modification). .. Then, in the low-probability high-support state H5 in which the high-frequency support mode continues until the next big hit, when the game ball enters the high-probability transition winning opening 34e, the lottery mode shifts from the low-probability mode to the high-probability mode. However, both the high-frequency support mode and the high-probability mode will be in a gaming state in which the game continues until the next big hit.

As described above, according to this modification, when the fall lottery is won in the high probability high support state H4, the lottery mode shifts to the low probability high support state H5, which is the low probability mode. If the game ball can be inserted into the high probability transition winning opening 34e in the high support state H5, the determination mode shifts to the second determination mode again. Here, if the time saving grant is won in the low probability high support state H5 and the game ball can be put into the high probability transition winning opening 34e, both the high frequency support mode and the high probability mode will win the next big hit. It will be in a game state that continues until. This gaming state is a very advantageous state for the player. Therefore, according to this modification, the player is provided with a new game property in which the game ball is inserted into the high-accuracy transition winning opening 34e in the low-accuracy high-support state H5 and the game is shifted to a more advantageous gaming state. Can be done.

<< 10-8-19 >> Modification 19:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the outer frame provided in the pachinko machine is not limited to wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, and steel (carbon steel) or cast iron. , Cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel and the like. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., and steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, etc. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , Stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel and the like. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame inaccessibly to the outer frame and a function of locking the front door frame inaccessibly to the inner frame. A cylinder lock is provided, but after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, the first cylinder lock having the function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so as not to be opened, and the front door frame are provided. A configuration may be adopted in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so as not to be opened is provided separately. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above modifications, a background image for a high-accuracy high-support state is displayed as a background image in a high-accuracy high-support state, and a background image for a low-accuracy low-support state is displayed as a background image in a low-accuracy low-support state. A configuration for displaying a background image may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration is adopted in which a rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side in the front view, but the rotation shaft is on the right side in the front view. The provided configuration may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration is adopted in which a rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side in the front view, but this rotation shaft is on the right side in the front view. The configuration provided in may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., and steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, etc. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the pachinko machine adopts a configuration including an upper plate and a lower plate, but a configuration in which the lower plate is omitted and only the upper plate is provided may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side of the front view is adopted, but the configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side of the front view may be adopted. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation handles are provided on both the right side of the front view and the left side of the front view. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, even if a configuration is adopted in which an effect (big hit notification effect) suggesting that an advantageous event has occurred when a big hit is won in a high-accuracy high support state is adopted. good. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is holding the operation handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operation handle) is provided on the operation handle. However, a configuration in which this touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the launching means capable of launching the game ball, for example, a configuration in which the game ball is launched by using an elastic force such as a spring. Alternatively, a configuration in which a game ball is launched by using the wind pressure when the compressed gas is ejected may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modified examples, in a state where the operation handle is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are fired per minute. The configuration may be such that less than 100 (for example, 60) game balls are fired in one minute, or 100 or more (for example, 200) game balls are fired in one minute. good. Further, the game ball may be fired one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, in the low-probability low-supporting state in which the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the high-probability high-supporting state reaches a predetermined number of times, the special 2 residual pending digestion is in progress. In the above-mentioned embodiment, when a big hit is won in the winning lottery, the probability of being distributed to the probabilistic jackpot with a high probability (for example, 100% probability) is configured to shift to the high-probability high support state again with the high probability, while the low-probability low. In the left-handed mode in the support state, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, the probability of being distributed to the probability variation jackpot is lower than the above high probability, so that the configuration may be such that the player shifts to the high probability high support state again with the low probability. .. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration including a speaker is adopted as a means capable of outputting sound, but a configuration including an earphone jack in addition to or in place of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones brought by the player to the earphone jack, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he / she is playing without being disturbed by the sound of the surrounding pachinko machine. It will be possible to enjoy it in minutes. In addition, after shifting to the low probability low support state, if the big hit is won by the time the winning lottery due to the special 2 hold ends in the low probability low support state, an effect suggesting that an advantageous event has occurred (big hit announcement). A configuration for executing the production) may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations may be adopted as display means capable of displaying a special symbol that starts variable display based on the entry of a game ball into various starting ports. Therefore, for example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying a normal symbol that starts variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be adopted. Further, in a situation where the game ball can be passed through the V winning area, a configuration may be adopted in which the player is urged to pass the game ball through the V winning area. Then, in a situation where the game ball can be passed through the V winning area, a configuration for executing an effect suggesting that a state advantageous to the player is started when the game ball passes through the V winning area is configured. It may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , A drum rotary display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the special information stored (held) in the high-probability mode and the high-probability high-support mode, which is the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, is provided to the second starting port 34. In the open / close execution mode that is guaranteed to shift to the high probability high support state again when a specific condition such as winning the probability change jackpot by the end of the winning lottery for special information based on the entry of the game ball is satisfied. The lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is determined to be the high probability mode, while the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the high probability high support state is determined without winning the probability change jackpot. When the number of times (ST number of times) is reached, the probability of shifting to the high probability high support state again may be set to shift to the low probability low support state lower than the opening / closing execution mode based on the probability variation jackpot. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, but various characters, figures, symbols, patterns and the like, and combinations thereof can be adopted. For example, as a decorative pattern, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and the like, and combinations thereof may be adopted. In addition, when a big hit is won in a high-probability high-support state, the game shifts to a big-hit game state in which the high-probability mode flag is turned off, and a V-probability winning opening is provided so that the game ball can enter in the big-hit game state. When a game ball enters the V probability winning opening, a configuration may be adopted in which the lottery mode after the end of the big hit game state is shifted to the high probability mode, triggered by the entry. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. When a configuration in which one symbol row of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration may be used in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative symbol (for example, "7") is stopped. Further, when a configuration in which two or four or more rows of decorative symbols are adopted, for example, when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line, a jackpot may be won. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the support mode is determined when a specific condition such as winning a normal jackpot is satisfied in a low-probability mode and a low-probability low-support state, which is a low-frequency support mode. During the period, for example, the period until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times, the period until the next big hit is won in the winning lottery, the game state is maintained in the high frequency support mode, and compared with the low probability low support state. The configuration is such that the player shifts to the low probability high support state, which is highly advantageous for the player, and in the low probability low support state, when the second predetermined condition such as winning the probability change jackpot instead of winning the normal jackpot is satisfied. It is configured to shift to the high probability high support state, and in the high probability high support state, the normal jackpot is won at the time of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. When a specific condition such as is satisfied, the configuration may be such that the player shifts to a low-probability high-support state or a low-probability low-support state, which is less advantageous to the player than the high-probability high support state. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory, for example, a rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member. A configuration in which the large winning opening can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward around the rotation axis, a configuration in which the large winning opening is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. May be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, for example, a so-called tulip-type ordinary electric accessory in which a pair of movable valves can be opened to the left and right. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member can be rotated forward around the rotation shaft to open the starting port. A configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the direction may be adopted. Further, in the low accuracy and low support state, when the normal electric accessory transitions to the open state, a configuration may be adopted to urge the player to insert the game ball into the second starting port. .. In addition, the above-mentioned meaning of "low probability low support state in which the probability of re-shifting to the high probability high support state is lower than the opening / closing execution mode based on the probability change jackpot" means the high probability high support state from the low probability low support state. Probability of shifting to (probability of being distributed to probabilistic jackpot when winning a lottery in a low probability low support state, probability variation rate, for example, probability variation inrush rate 50%) is surely (in line with the normal game flow) If you are firing a game ball (for example, if you are hitting right), there is a 100% chance that it will be lower than the open / close execution mode based on the probability variation jackpot that is guaranteed to shift to the high probability high support state. This means that the above probability does not mean the high or low of the winning probability in the winning lottery. In addition, when the number of special 2 holds is 4 in the low accuracy and low support state, 4 hold icon images corresponding to the number of special 2 hold is 4 are displayed on the symbol display device (liquid crystal display device). You may adopt the structure to display in. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of prize balls set in each entry port (starting opening, general winning opening, large winning opening, etc.) is an example and is set in each entry opening. By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications.

<< 10-8-20 >> Modification 20:
In the tenth embodiment and its modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices such as a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, but instead of this, the main control It may be configured to include two control devices such as a device and a sub control device. The sub-control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the tenth embodiment. Further, in the tenth embodiment and its modifications, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 do not have to be limited to the division described in the tenth embodiment, and the three control devices need not be limited. As a whole of 60, 90, 100, it suffices if various processes according to the tenth embodiment can be executed.

<< 11 >> 11th Embodiment:
<< 11-1 >> Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 493 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as the eleventh embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a voice emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. Illuminations are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect of the effect by lighting or blinking at each game round performed by the pachinko machine 10, when a big hit is won, when a reach occurs, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two plate glasses is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. The details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls rented from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball stored in the upper plate 20 is supplied to the game ball launch mechanism included in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launch mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores the game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged to the outside from the lower plate 21.

An effect operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game effect reflecting the operation.

An operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “right side”). When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and an operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c that detects the amount of rotation operation by the change in electrical resistance is provided. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes according to the rotation operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball launch button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “left side”). When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined firing intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the player's operation handle 25. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the front view of the game board and flows down to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can make a so-called "right-handed". The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26 to launch the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26. Can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 494 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing. For example, a seal is attached to a place that can be opened and closed, and the characters such as "open" appear when the board box is opened.

The second control unit 52 includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90. The design display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays a design or an image for directing.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The launch control device 80 launches a game ball having a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player when an instruction to launch the game ball is input from the main control device 60. Controls the ball launch mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a slope connected below the tank 54 and gently inclined so that the game balls flow to the downstream side. The game balls are supplied from the tank rail 55, the case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, and the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power supply switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies the electric power required for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85. By the ON / OFF operation of the power switch 88, the supply state as a predetermined gaming state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and the non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 495 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding the game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicular to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, through gates 35a and 35b, and a variable winning device 36. The game balls that have entered each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are placed in the individual openings formed in the game board 30. Be guided. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 has a special figure unit 37, a normal figure unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

As shown in the figure, the general winning opening 32 is an entry opening member that forms an entry opening into which a game ball can enter, and a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 494).

The first starting port 33 is an entry port member that forms an entry port into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is an entry port member that forms an entry port into which a game ball can enter, and is provided below the game board 30. The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a made of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 34. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port 34. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

Each of the two through gates 35a and 35b has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. Each of the through gates 35a and 35b is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to execute a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric service is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric service open state in which the electric service is opened in a predetermined mode. One of the two through gates 35a and 35b is provided on the left side of the symbol display device 41, and the other through gate 35b is provided on the right side of the symbol display device 41. Since the through gates 35a and 35b are located on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the through gate 35. 2 It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34. In the present embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 is provided on the lower right side of the game area PA. The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and also includes an opening / closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening / closing door 36b is normally closed so that the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60, when a big hit is won and the opening / closing execution mode is entered, the opening / closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state. The opening / closing execution mode shifts to the case where a big hit is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by entering the ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and the opening / closing door 36b is in the open state. It is a mode that repeats the closed state and the closed state. That is, as a result of the winning lottery based on the entry into the first starting port 33, if a big hit is won, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 can enter the large winning opening 36a. Similarly, as a result of the winning lottery based on the entry into the second starting port 34, even if a big hit is won, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 can enter the large winning opening 36a. .. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

An out opening 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and a game ball that has not entered the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, or the variable winning device 36 is out. It is discharged from the game area PA through the mouth 43.

The game balls that have entered each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, and the out opening 43 are individually formed on the game board 30. It is configured to be guided to the back side of the game board 30 through the opening and finally join the discharge passage provided on the back side of the game board 30. The discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor that detects a game ball. By detecting the game balls with the discharge passage detection sensor, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls fired on the game board 30.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. The first symbol display unit 37a is used as a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. , The variable display of the first symbol is performed. When the lottery is completed, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to display the stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying the second symbol. The second symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display unit 37b is used as a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. , The second symbol is changed and displayed. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display to display the stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b to the stop display is also referred to as the variable time. Call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a to the stop display is also referred to as the first variable time, and is displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first hold display unit 37c and a second hold display unit 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of holds of the first start port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. For example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 during a big hit game, the display mode of the first hold display unit 37c changes. The first hold display unit 37c also functions as a predetermined suggestion information display means. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second hold display unit 37d displays the number of holds of the second start port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on.

The normal drawing unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, the normal drawing unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode as the display mode of the light emitting display. When the electric accessory opening lottery is completed, the normal drawing unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode, or displays corresponding to the number of round games. The round game opens and closes until either the predetermined upper limit duration elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the open / close execution mode is started, and ends when the open / close execution mode ends and a new game round starts.

The special figure unit 37, the normal figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being composed of a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp, and for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. It may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery result, such as a CRT or a dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The symbol display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. The display surface of the main display unit 45 described above is located on the front side (the side facing the player) with respect to the display surface of the symbol display device 41.

When the first symbol display unit 37a makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. conduct. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the display effect triggered by entering the ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, but also performs a display effect in the open / close execution mode that shifts when a big hit is won. .. Hereinafter, the details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 496 is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol and a display surface 41a that are variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 496 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol that is variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 496 (a), the symbol indicating the numbers 1 to 9 is variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. Each symbol showing the numbers 1 to 9 is classified into three types according to the color. The symbols 1 to 3 are green, the symbols 4 to 6 are red, and the symbols 7 to 9 are gold. As the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol having a pattern such as a character may be adopted for each of the symbols showing the numbers 1 to 9.

FIG. 496 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 9 shown in FIG. 496 (a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row is periodically arranged from top to bottom or from bottom. A variable display that scrolls up is performed. As shown in FIG. 496 (b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a state of being stopped on the effective line L1. Specifically, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity is started. Then, each scrolling symbol switches from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. When the variation display of the symbol is completed and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit winning, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the effective line L1. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L1. The mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, and the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol row, and the symbol of each symbol row. Various modes such as numbers can be adopted as the mode of variable display of the symbol.

Here, the term "game times" means from the start of the variation display of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to the end of the variation display and the stop display until the stop display ends. That is, one unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. be. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display unit is used for each game. After the segment display is variablely displayed on either 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device is used for each game. In 41, after the predetermined symbol string is variablely displayed, the symbol string is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game is also referred to as a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the predetermined lottery result, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496 (b), below the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, a first start port holding area Ds1, a holding digestion area Dm, and a second starting port holding area Ds2 are provided. Is displayed. The reserved digestion area Dm is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a in the left-right direction, the first starting port holding area Ds1 is displayed on the left side of the holding digestion area Dm, and the second starting port holding area Ds2 is the reserved digestion area Dm. It is displayed on the right side. In the first starting port holding area Ds1, the number of holdings based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second starting port holding area Ds2, the number of holdings based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is four, respectively. The details of the operation of the first start port holding area Ds1, the second starting port holding area Ds2, and the holding digestion area Dm will be described in detail later.

<< 11-2 >> Electrical configuration of gaming machines:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 497 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 temporarily stores various data and the like when executing a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a program recorded in the ROM 63. It is provided with a RAM 64 which is a memory for storing. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may have a part of the function which MPU 62 has. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown), respectively. The payout control device 70 and the power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a DC stable 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, the power supply device 85 includes a capacitor (not shown), and when a power failure occurs or the power supply switch 88 (FIG. 494) is turned off, power supply to each device is continued for a predetermined period. do.

Further, various detection sensors 67a to 67e are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. Specifically, it is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided in various entrances such as a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. .. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each entry port based on signals from various detection sensors 67a to 67e, and the game ball is a through gate. It is determined whether or not the vehicle has passed 35. Further, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the second starting opening 34, and also executes an electric accessory opening lottery based on the entry of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

The output port of the main control board 61 includes a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , Is connected to the main display unit 45. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the electric accessory opening is won as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the main display unit 45. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the open / close execution mode and the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode is determined, the display control of the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is executed.

The payout control device 70 and the voice emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry to the general winning opening 32 is specified, the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry to the first starting opening 33 is performed. When is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when the entry to the second starting port 34 is specified, one game ball is paid out. The prize ball command corresponding to is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. Further, the launch control device 80 is connected to the operation handle 25 and the game ball launch button 26.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the voice emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, control of the display control device 100 is performed. Further, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the voice emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 and the type of the combination of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. , Whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the advance notice effect executed in each game round, etc. are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time when the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 498 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 wins a lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, sets the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting jackpot types such as probabilistic jackpot results and normal jackpot results. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate reach when the symbol sequence displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displaced and varied.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. Further, the variation type counter CS is used when determining the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45, and the symbol display device 41. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The hold information storage area 64b is provided with a first hold area Ra and a second hold area Rb. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS at the timing of entering the ball are stored as pending information. It is stored in the first reserved area Ra of the area 64b in chronological order. In the first holding area Ra, there are four areas corresponding to the maximum number of holding balls that have entered the first starting port 33, that is, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth. There is an area. When the game ball enters the first starting port 33, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS at the timing of entering the ball are held information (hereinafter, special 1 hold). Also called), it is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. Which of the first to fourth areas is stored is determined by the order of entering the ball, and the earlier the timing of entering the ball, the higher the area (the first area is the highest area).

Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS at the timing of entering the ball are stored in the reserved information storage area 64b. It is stored in the second holding area Rb in chronological order. In the second holding area Rb, there are four areas corresponding to the maximum number of holding balls that have entered the second starting port 34, that is, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth. There is an area. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS at the timing of entering the ball are held information (hereinafter, special 2 hold). Also called), it is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. Which of the first to fourth areas is stored is determined by the order of entering the ball, and the earlier the timing of entering the ball, the higher the area (the first area is the highest area).

The details of the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The hit random number counter C1 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 1199, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. Further, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is set in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. It is stored, and when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

The value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first hold area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is called a big hit. It is determined whether or not it becomes. Further, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the second hold area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c and collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. Whether or not it will be a big hit is determined.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is the determination processing execution area in the order acquired by the game ball entering the first starting port 33. Move to the execution area AE of 64c. Specifically, a process of moving the data stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra to the determination process execution area 64c and shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first hold area Ra is executed. do. The data shift shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas in order to the upper area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area.

Further, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c in the order acquired by the game ball entering the second starting port 34. .. Specifically, a process of moving the data stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb to the determination process execution area 64c and shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second hold area Rb is executed. do. The data shift shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas in order to the upper area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area.

When the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the second holding area Rb, the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the first holding area Ra regardless of whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the second holding area Rb. The stored value of the random number counter C1 is set as a target for moving to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c. As a result, when the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in both the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb, the hit stored in the second holding area Rb corresponding to the second starting port 34. The value of the random number counter C1 has priority. That is, in the present embodiment, when the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in both the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb, it is stored in the second holding area Rb corresponding to the second starting port 34. The value of the winning random number counter C1 is prioritized, and among the values of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb, the data stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb is determined. The process of moving to the process execution area 64c and shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second hold area Rb is executed. When the value of the random number counter C1 is not stored in the second hold area Rb, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first hold area Ra is stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra. The stored data is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the processing of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed.

In the above description, the order in which the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c will be described. However, the value is not limited to the value of the hit random number counter C1, and counters other than the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb (big hit type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation). Each value of the type counter CS) is also moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c in the same order.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, reach a maximum value, and then return to 0.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a big hit, the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Further, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b by using the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. .. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big hit. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value, for example.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. It is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the ball. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second hold area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. However, when the result of the winning lottery becomes a big hit and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some of the symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 may have a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot for some of the symbols. It is a display state in which the symbols are displayed and the remaining symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 496 (b), the symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. In the situation where the reach line is formed and the reach line is formed, the symbol is varied and displayed in the symbol row Z2 to reach the reach. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, in the state where the reach line is formed, the variable display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. A combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when the reach effect is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to display a notice using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

Reach is classified into three types, normal reach, super reach, and special reach, depending on the content of the reach production. A reach effect is executed in which the expectation of a big hit is higher in the super reach than in the normal reach, and a reach effect is executed in which the expectation of the big hit is higher in the special reach than in the super reach.

Next, the details of the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 62 to determine the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value, for example.

The variation type counter CS is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, and the updated value is stored in the second starting port 34. It is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the ball. The value of the variation type counter CS stored in the first hold area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c and then at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display unit 37a and at the start of the symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. Used in determining the variation pattern in. The value of the variation type counter CS stored in the second hold area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c and then at the start of the variation display on the second symbol display unit 37b and at the start of the symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. Used in determining the variation pattern in. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the content of the reach effect (that is, the type of reach) can be specified according to the type of the fluctuation pattern.

Next, the details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric service holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 64d moves to the electric service execution area 64e, and then the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 in the electric service execution area 64e. A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory opening lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state. Specifically, in the electric service execution area 64e, the winning / failing table (winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery) stored in the accessory lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 are It is collated and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state.

It should be noted that at least one of the acquired value of the hit random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the variable type counter CS, and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is the special information in the present invention. Equivalent to. Further, at least one of the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first hold area Ra and the second hold area Rb, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the variable type counter CS is used. Also called pending information.

Next, the pass / fail table will be described. The winning / failing table is table data for collating with the winning random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the winning random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode set as a lottery mode for the winning lottery. At the time of the winning lottery in the probability mode, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to. The high-probability mode (also called the high-probability gaming state) is a gaming state that is started by winning a probabilistic jackpot, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is relatively higher than that in the low-probability mode. To tell.

FIG. 499 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the pass / fail table. FIG. 499 (a) shows a pass / fail table for the low probability mode (for the low probability mode), and FIG. 499 (b) shows the pass / fail table for the high probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 499 (a), five values 0 to 4 are set as the values of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the hit / fail table for the low probability mode. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values of 0 to 4 are out of the range. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 499 (b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set as the values of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the hit / fail table for the high probability mode. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (16 to 1199) other than the 16 values of 0 to 15 are out of the range. As described above, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the hit random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / miss table for the low probability mode is the value of the hit random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / miss table for the high probability mode. Included in the group. However, as a result of the winning lottery, if the probability of winning the jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary.

Although it is not adopted in the winning / failing table in this embodiment, a "small hit" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

The "small hit" is a result of success or failure that triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode in which the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened / closed, but does not trigger the transition in both the lottery mode and the support mode. .. On the other hand, "off" is a result of success or failure that does not trigger the transition of the open / close execution mode, and also does not trigger the transition of the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three modes or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode of winning lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends (3) The electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (1) open / close execution mode, the occurrence of a ball entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency is relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 sec elapses or to the opening / closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number of balls entered is 10. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed twice from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec elapses or the ball enters the opening / closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening / closing door 36b at one time is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening / closing door 36b once is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode in which the low-frequency winning mode is applied, the game ball does not substantially enter. However, even in the open / close execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the game ball can be entered.

The number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the number of opening limits for one opening are entered into the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the frequency of occurrence of balls is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening / closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is long, or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that the ball does not substantially enter the variable winning device 36.

The pachinko machine 10 has, as a mode of the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the above-mentioned (2) opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a winning / losing table for high probability as a winning / failing table, and a winning / losing table. It is possible to set a low probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a winning / failing table for low probability. As described with reference to FIG. 499, the case where the winning lottery is performed using the high-probability winning / failing table is compared with the case where the winning lottery is performed using the low-probability winning / failing table, and the big hit is won. There is a high probability of doing so.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening / closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 continues to launch the game ball in the same manner with respect to the game area PA. The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are used so that the frequency with which the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the above-mentioned situations. Can be set.

Specifically, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the one-time opening time of the electric accessory 34a may be set longer than that in the low-frequency support mode when the electric combination opening is won.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electric combination open is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode. May be good. Further, the electric accessory 34a may be configured to have a long opening time once. In addition, when the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times in the high frequency support mode, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is It may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory opening lottery to the next electric accessory opening lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. You may.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary gaming state that assists in the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the big hit type counter C2 is used to sort the big hit types. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 500 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 500A shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 500B shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to at the time of a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is to the second start port 34. It is referred to at the time of the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. 500 (a), the distribution table for the first starting port has a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot are set.

The 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot are high-frequency winning modes in which the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is a high-frequency winning mode. (Also called) is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is a high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot is that the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the open / close execution mode is different, the 16R probability variation jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R probability variation jackpot is 8. It is a round (8 rounds).

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the low probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end becomes the high frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot is that the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the open / close execution mode is different, the 16R normal jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R normal jackpot is 8. It is a round (8 rounds).

In the distribution table for the first starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 39" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "40 to 64" corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot. "65-89" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "90-99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the mode of the jackpot is diversified. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the advantage for the player is that the 16R probability variation jackpot is the highest, the 8R probability variation jackpot is the next highest, then the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different advantages for the player in this way, it is possible to suppress the monotonicization of the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 500 (b), the distribution table for the second starting port has a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. 16R probability variation jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 64" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "65 to 99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. It corresponds to.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won is the case where the jackpot is won based on the entry into the first starting port 33 and the second. It is different from the case where the big hit is won based on the entry into the starting port 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player.

In addition, if the result is a loss in the winning lottery, the opening / closing execution mode is not performed, and the lottery mode and the support mode are not changed. In the distribution of the types of jackpots, when 16 probability variation jackpots or 8R probability variation jackpots are obtained, the lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the high probability mode, as described above. The state will continue until the next big hit in the winning lottery.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to perform the jackpot type. Further, the MPU 62 uses the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to cause the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b to stop and display the segment display. Determine the display mode. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

FIG. 501 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a winning / failing table (winning / failing table for electric accessory opening lottery) used when executing an electric accessory opening lottery.

FIG. 501A shows a winning / failing table for electric accessory opening lottery (for low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 501 (a), in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode), the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4, which means that the electric accessory short opening is won, is 0, 1. Two values of 2 and 3 are set as the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4, which means that the electric accessory opening counter C4 is elected to open the electric accessory length. As a value, 462 values of 4 to 465 are set. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory short opening is won with a probability of 1/233, and the probability of 1/233. You will be elected to open the electric director. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory short opening is won in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 0.6 seconds. When the electric accessory length opening is won in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 5.0 seconds.

FIG. 501 (b) shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 501 (b), in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode), the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 to be won during the electric service opening is 0 to 461. 462 values are set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is out of alignment. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the high frequency support mode, it means that the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the opening during electric service is won in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second starting port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. .. Further, according to the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode), when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a is either long or short. Set to get. According to the winning / failing table for opening the electric accessory (for the low frequency support mode), when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a is longer than that of the short opening of the electric role, and the electric role chief It is set to be open during the electric service, which is a shorter time than the opening. In addition, each opening time when winning the short opening of the electric service, winning the opening during the electric service, and winning the opening of the chief electric service does not have to be limited to the above example, and may be another time.

<< 11-3 >> Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 502 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configurations of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Some configurations of the power supply device 85 (FIG. 497) and the like are omitted. The MPU 92 is mounted on the voice emission control board 91 provided in the voice emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element having a built-in CPU, ROM 93, RAM 94, interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data input / output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs, fixed value data, tables, etc. executed by the MPU 92. For example, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the ROM 93. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 60 and an effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and a display control device 100 is connected to the output side.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the voice emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 102.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols and pictures displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores various display symbols, bitmap format image data of the display picture, a color palette table referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The various display drawings also include drawings of petals P1 to P4, which will be described later. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio emission control device 90 are the sound light side MPU 92 and the sound light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound / light side RAM 94 are also referred to, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as a display side MPU 102.

<< 11-4 >> Outline of processing by the gaming machine:
Next, an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

<< 11-4-1 >> Hold display:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, the first start indicating the number of holdings based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 below the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. The mouth holding area Ds1, the second starting port holding area Ds2 indicating the number of holdings based on the number of game balls entering the second starting port 34, the first starting port holding area Ds1 and the second starting port holding area. The reserved digestion region Dm located between the regions Ds2 is displayed.

FIG. 503 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of changes in the first start port holding area Ds1 and the holding digestion area Dm. In the first start port hold area Ds1, up to four hold display icons corresponding to each hold (each of up to four holds) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 are arranged in the left-right direction. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, the hold display icon is circular, and in the example shown in FIG. 503 (a), the first hold (hereinafter, also referred to as special 1 hold 1) and the second hold (hereinafter, special 1). The first hold display icon H1 and the second hold display icon H2 corresponding to (also referred to as hold 2) are shown. In the first start port holding area Ds1, the first holding display icon H1 is displayed at the rightmost position, and the second holding display icon H2 is displayed at the second position from the right side to the left side. That is, in the first start port hold area Ds1, each time the game ball enters the first start port 33, the hold display icon is displayed so as to increase by one from the right side to the left side.

The reserved digestion area Dm has the shape of a container with an open upper side, and in the example shown in FIG. 503 (a), the hold display icon H0 is arranged inside the hold digestion area Dm. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a winning lottery is performed when the ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and a variable display for notifying the result of the winning lottery is performed. At the timing when this variable display is started, the hold display icon is arranged inside the hold digestion area Dm. This variable display is based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the hold display icon H0 arranged inside the hold digestion area Dm. By observing that the hold display icon H0 is arranged inside the hold digestion area Dm, the player can know that the hold corresponding to the hold display icon H0 has been digested.

In the state shown in FIG. 503 (a), when the variable display ends and the stop display is displayed, the hold display icon H0 arranged inside the hold digestion area Dm disappears thereafter. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 503 (b), the first hold display icon H1 located on the far right side in the first start port hold area Ds1 moves inside the hold digestion area Dm. At this time, in the first start port holding area Ds1, the second holding display icon H2 located second from the right side moves (shifts) to the rightmost position. In the example shown in FIG. 503 (b), the hold display icon located at the third and fourth positions from the right side to the left side does not exist, but if it exists, the hold display icon located at the third position does not exist. Moves (shifts) to the second position, and the hold display icon located at the fourth moves (shifts) to the third position.

As a result of the movement shown in FIG. 503 (b), the state shown in FIG. 503 (c) is obtained. That is, the first hold display icon H1 is arranged inside the hold digestion area Dm, and the second hold display icon H2 is displayed at the rightmost position of the first start port hold area Ds1. At this time, a variable display for notifying the result of the winning lottery based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the first hold display icon H1 is executed.

As described above, each hold display icon displayed in the first start port hold area Ds1 shifts from the left side to the right side each time the fluctuation display and the stop display corresponding to one game are executed. Finally, it moves from the rightmost position to the inside of the reserved digestion area Dm. Then, the variable display and the stop display for notifying the result of the winning lottery based on the hold information corresponding to the hold display icon are executed. In this way, in each hold display icon displayed in the first start port hold area Ds1, the hold information corresponding to each hold display icon is displayed in the order from the right side to the left side (that is, the hold order). It is subject to a winning lottery.

FIG. 504 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of changes in the second start port holding area Ds2 and the holding digestion area Dm. In the second start opening hold area Ds2, a maximum of four hold display icons H corresponding to each hold (each of the maximum four holds) based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 are arranged in the left-right direction. It is displayed in. The mode of change of the second start port holding area Ds2 is roughly the same as the mode of change of the first start port hold area Ds1 shown in FIG. 503, and the direction of operation is the first start port hold area. The direction is opposite to that of Ds1. That is, each time the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the hold display icon H is displayed so as to increase by one from the left side to the right side. Each time the game round is executed, the hold display icon H moves one by one from the right side to the left side in the second start opening hold area Ds2, and finally moves to the inside of the hold digestion area Dm to display the hold. The variable display and the stop display for notifying the result of the winning lottery based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the icon H will be executed (digested). In this way, in each hold display icon displayed in the second start port hold area Ds2, the hold information corresponding to each hold display icon is displayed in the order from the left side to the right side (that is, the hold order). It is subject to a winning lottery.

When the hold display icon H exists in the second start port hold area Ds2, the hold display icon H existing in the first start port hold area Ds1 takes precedence over the hold display icon H in the second start port hold area Ds2. The special 2 hold corresponding to the existing hold display icon H is digested.

The hold display icon displayed in the first start port hold area Ds1 and the second start port hold area Ds2 was circular as described above, but instead of this, a triangle, a quadrangle, a pentagon, etc. It may be another polygonal shape. Further, the hold display icon is not limited to the image of the figure, but may be an image of a character or the like. The reserved digestion region Dm is trapezoidal as described above, but instead of this, an image having another shape such as a triangle, a quadrangle, or a circle may be used. Further, the reserved digestion area Dm is not limited to the image of the figure, but may be an image of a character or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, the hold display icon moved from the first start port hold area Ds1 or the second start port hold area Ds2 to the hold digestion area Dm is arranged inside the hold digestion area Dm. However, instead of this, the display mode may be such that it enters the reserved digestion region Dm and disappears.

<< 11-4-2 >> Preliminary notice production:
Recent pachinko machines are included in each hold information in order to raise the player's expectation for the hold information corresponding to each hold display icon (that is, the hold information stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64). The value of the random number counter C1 is confirmed before the target of the lottery, and based on the confirmed result, an effect of giving a sense of expectation to the player, a so-called look-ahead effect, is performed. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has, as one of the look-ahead effects, when the hold information corresponding to each hold display icon contains the hold information that is likely to win the big hit in the winning lottery. When the stop display of the fluctuation of the hold information stored before the hold information that is likely to be performed is displayed, the precursor notice effect, which is a special effect, is executed. The precursory notice production will be described in detail below.

In the normal time when the support mode is the low frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the player executes a left-handed strike, causes the game ball to flow down to the left side of the game area PA, and the game ball to the first starting port 33. To enter the ball. When the game ball enters the first start port 33, the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 is set as a special 1 hold in the first hold area Ra of the hold information storage area 64b. It is stored in order, but here, consider the case where 4 special 1 hold, which is the maximum number (upper limit number), is accumulated.

FIG. 505 is an explanatory diagram showing a case where a jackpot is included in the special 1 hold in the normal time. As shown in the figure, it is assumed that four special 1 holds from special 1 hold 1 to special 1 hold 4 are stored at normal times. The main control device 60 executes a pre-determination process every time a game ball enters the first starting port 33, and determines whether or not the winning lottery is successful based on the hold information of the special 1 hold stored by the current entry. , The determination of the type of the jackpot, the determination of the presence or absence of the occurrence of the reach, the determination of the type of the fluctuation pattern, and the like are performed before the pending information becomes the target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The type of fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation time obtained based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS included in the hold information. After that, the main control device 60 sets the determination result of the prior determination process as a hold command, and transmits the hold command to the voice emission control device 90. The voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command, and specifies the winning / failing result of the winning lottery, the type of the jackpot, the presence / absence of reach occurrence, and the content of the reach effect (type of reach) from the hold command. The content of the reach effect can be specified from the type of fluctuation pattern. In the illustrated example, it is assumed that the lottery result of the winning lottery is the big hit winning in the special 1 holding 4 stored at the end of the four special 1 holdings, and it is determined that the super reach occurs. The voice emission control device 90 executes the hold continuous effect process with the reception of the hold command for the special 1 hold 4 determined to win the big hit from the main control device 60 as a trigger. According to the hold continuous effect process, the precursor notice effect is executed when each special 1 hold stored at the timing before the special 1 hold 4 is exhausted. Specifically, one or a plurality of times (here, three times) of the precursory notice effect is executed across each game time corresponding to the special 1 hold 1 to the special 1 hold 3.

FIGS. 506 to 508, and FIG. 510 show a series of effects from the digestion of the special 1 hold 1 to the digestion of the special 1 hold 4. FIG. 506 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation display and a precursory notice effect (first time) for the special 1 hold 1. As shown in FIG. 506 (a), in the voice emission control device 90, first, a variable display for notifying the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special 1 hold 1 is executed. Specifically, the display icon H1 corresponding to the special 1 hold 1 is arranged inside the hold digestion area Dm, and the result of the winning lottery based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the display icon H1 is notified. The variation for this is displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a.

In the voice emission control device 90, after the variation display for the special 1 hold 1 is executed, the stop display for the special 1 hold 1 is executed as shown in FIG. 506 (b). This stop display constitutes a part of the precursory notice effect. Here, the combination of symbols corresponding to the chance eye is stopped and displayed. That is, with respect to the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, the combination of symbols corresponding to the chance eyes is displayed in a state of being stopped on the effective line L1. In this embodiment, for example, [3.4.1] is set as an opportunity. Note that [3, 4, 1] is an example, and other combinations may be used as chances.

In the voice emission control device 90, after the stop display, as shown in FIG. 506 (c), an effect in which the bubble BL appears is executed. The effect of the appearance of this bubble BL constitutes a part of the precursory notice effect. As an effect in which the bubble BL appears, the bubble BL is displayed in a wide range including the main display area MA of the display surface 41a, and a sound indicating the bubble sound is emitted from the speaker 46.

In summary, when the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special 1 holding 4 is a big hit, when the fluctuation of the special 1 holding 1 is stopped, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the chance eyes in the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect that the bubble BL appears with the bubble sound is executed during the stop display. The effect in which the combination of symbols corresponding to this chance is stopped and displayed, and the bubble BL appears together with the bubble sound during the stop display corresponds to the precursor warning effect (first time).

When the player confirms that a chance eye appears in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a after the variable display of the special 1 hold 1 and the bubble BL appears overlapping with the combination of the symbols of the chance eye. , I expect that there may be hold information that wins a big hit in the winning lottery in the special 1 hold corresponding to each hold display icon.

FIG. 507 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation display and a precursory notice effect (second time) for the special 1 hold 2. After the effect shown in FIG. 506 is executed, as shown in FIG. 507 (a), the voice emission control device 90 executes a variable display for notifying the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special 1 hold 2. Specifically, the display icon H2 corresponding to the special 1 hold 2 is arranged inside the hold digestion area Dm, and the result of the winning lottery based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the display icon H2 is notified. The variation for this is displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a.

In the voice emission control device 90, after the variation display for the special 1 hold 2 is executed, the stop display for the special 1 hold 2 is executed as shown in FIG. 507 (b). This stop display constitutes a part of the precursory notice effect. Here, the combination of symbols corresponding to the chance eye is stopped and displayed. That is, with respect to the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, the combination of symbols corresponding to the chance eyes is displayed in a state of being stopped on the effective line L1. The chance is [3.4.1] as in the case of the precursory notice production (first time).

In the voice emission control device 90, after the stop display, as shown in FIG. 507 (c), an effect in which the bubble BL appears is executed. The effect of the appearance of this bubble BL constitutes a part of the precursory notice effect. The effect in which the bubble BL appears is an effect in which the bubble BL is displayed together with the bubble sound, as in the case of the precursory notice effect (first time).

In summary, when the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special 1 hold 4 is a big hit, when the fluctuation of the special 1 hold 2 is stopped, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the chance eyes in the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect that the bubble BL appears with the bubble sound is executed during the stop display. The effect in which the combination of symbols corresponding to this chance is stopped and displayed, and the bubble BL appears together with the bubble sound during the stop display corresponds to the precursor warning effect (second time). That is, according to this example, following the execution of the precursor warning effect (first time) when the fluctuation of the special 1 hold 1 is stopped, the precursor notice effect (second time) is also executed when the fluctuation of the special 1 hold 2 is stopped. Is executed.

Following the execution of the precursory notice effect (first time) when the fluctuation of the special 1 hold 1 is stopped, the player has a chance to see the main display area MA of the display surface 41a after the fluctuation display of the special 1 hold 2. Appears, and when it is confirmed that the bubble BL appears overlapping with the combination of the symbols of the chance eye, there is hold information that wins the big hit in the winning lottery in the special 1 hold corresponding to each hold display icon. I expect that the possibility of doing so has increased.

FIG. 508 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation display and a precursory notice effect (third time) for the special 1 hold 3. After the effect shown in FIG. 507 is executed, as shown in FIG. 508 (a), the voice emission control device 90 executes a variable display for notifying the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special 1 hold 3. Specifically, the display icon H3 corresponding to the special 1 hold 3 is arranged inside the hold digestion area Dm, and the result of the winning lottery based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the display icon H3 is notified. The variation for this is displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a.

In the voice emission control device 90, after the variation display for the special 1 hold 3 is executed, the stop display for the special 1 hold 3 is executed as shown in FIG. 508 (b). This stop display constitutes a part of the precursory notice effect. Here, the combination of symbols corresponding to the chance eye is stopped and displayed. That is, with respect to the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, the combination of symbols corresponding to the chance eyes is displayed in a state of being stopped on the effective line L1. The chance is [3.4.1] as in the case of the precursory notice production (first time).

In the voice emission control device 90, after the stop display, as shown in FIG. 508 (c), an effect in which the bubble BL appears is executed. The effect of the appearance of this bubble BL constitutes a part of the precursory notice effect. The effect in which the bubble BL appears is an effect in which the bubble BL is displayed together with the bubble sound, as in the case of the precursory notice effect (first time).

In summary, when the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special 1 holding 4 is a big hit, when the fluctuation of the special 1 holding 3 is stopped, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the chance eyes in the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Is stopped and displayed, and the effect that the bubble BL appears with the bubble sound is executed during the stop display. The effect in which the combination of symbols corresponding to this chance is stopped and displayed, and the bubble BL appears together with the bubble sound during the stop display corresponds to the precursor warning effect (third time). That is, according to this example, the precursory notice effect (first time) is executed when the fluctuation of the special 1 hold 1 is stopped, and the precursor notice effect (second time) is executed when the fluctuation of the special 1 hold 2 is stopped. Following that, the precursory notice effect (third time) is executed even when the fluctuation of the special 1 hold 3 is stopped. If the precursory notice effects occur continuously, the expectation of winning a big hit in the winning lottery increases. The degree of expectation means the high probability of winning a big hit.

FIG. 509 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the number of appearances of the precursory notice effect and the scheduled execution effect. As shown in the figure, when the number of appearances of the precursory notice effect is the first and the second, the reach effect equal to or higher than the normal reach is set as the effect to be executed by the hold information in the special 1 hold (that is, the execution scheduled effect). When the number of appearances of the precursory notice effect is the third time, a reach effect equal to or higher than the super reach is set as an effect (scheduled execution effect) to be executed based on the hold information in the special 1 hold. On the other hand, when the number of appearances of the precursory notice effect is the fourth time, the jackpot winning confirmation from the special reach is set as the effect (execution scheduled effect) to be executed by the hold information in the special 1 hold.

Following the execution of the precursory warning effect (second time) when the fluctuation of the special 1 hold 2 is stopped, the player has a chance to see the main display area MA on the display surface 41a after the fluctuation display of the special 1 hold 3 is performed. Appears, and when it is confirmed that the bubble BL appears overlapping with the combination of the symbols of the chance eye, there is hold information that wins the big hit in the winning lottery in the special 1 hold corresponding to each hold display icon. I expect more to do. In particular, since it is confirmed that the reach effect (that is, super reach or special reach) higher than the super reach is executed because the precursor notice effect is performed three times in a row, the player wins a big hit in the winning lottery. I expect that the possibility of doing so has increased further.

FIG. 510 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation display, a reach effect, and a stop display for the special 1 hold 4. After the effect shown in FIG. 508 is executed, as shown in FIG. 510 (a), the voice emission control device 90 executes a variable display for notifying the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special 1 hold 4. Specifically, the display icon H4 corresponding to the special 1 hold 4 is arranged inside the hold digestion area Dm, and the result of the winning lottery based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the display icon H4 is notified. The variation for this is displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a.

In the voice emission control device 90, after the variation display for the special 1 hold 4, the symbol string Z1 and the symbol sequence Z3 are stopped and displayed, and the symbol variation display is displayed in the symbol sequence Z2, as shown in FIG. 510 (b). Reach production is executed by being performed. The reach effect here is an effect indicating that it is a super reach.

In the voice emission control device 90, after the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 510 (c), a combination of symbols for notifying that the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit is stopped and displayed. That is, with respect to the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot winning is displayed in a state of being stopped on the effective line L1.

FIG. 511 is a time chart showing a series of effects of the above-mentioned special 1 hold 1 to special 1 hold 4 on the time axis. As shown in the figure, in the game round U1 for the special 1 hold 1, the variable display A11 is first executed. The variation display A11 is shown in FIG. 506 (a). Subsequently, the stop display A12 that causes the chance eye to appear is executed. The stop display A12 is shown in FIG. 506 (b). Subsequently, the bubble appearance effect A13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect A13 is shown in FIG. 506 (c). With the end of the bubble appearance effect A13, the game round U1 for the special 1 hold 1 ends. The stop display A12 and the bubble appearance effect A13 constitute a precursory notice effect (first time).

In the game times U2 for the special 1 hold 2 following the game times U1 for the special 1 hold 1, the variation display B11 is first executed. The variation display B11 is shown in FIG. 507 (a). Subsequently, the stop display B12 that causes the chance eye to appear is executed. The stop display B12 is shown in FIG. 507 (b). Subsequently, the bubble appearance effect B13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect B13 is shown in FIG. 507 (c). With the end of the bubble appearance effect B13, the game round U2 for the special 1 hold 2 ends. The stop display B12 and the bubble appearance effect B13 constitute a precursory notice effect (second time).

In the game times U3 for the special 1 hold 3 following the game times U2 for the special 1 hold 2, the variation display C11 is first executed. The variation display C11 is shown in FIG. 508 (a). Subsequently, the stop display C12 that causes the chance eye to appear is executed. The stop display C12 is shown in FIG. 508 (b). Subsequently, the bubble appearance effect C13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect C13 is shown in FIG. 508 (c). With the end of the bubble appearance effect C13, the game round U3 for the special 1 hold 3 ends. The stop display C12 and the bubble appearance effect C13 constitute a precursory notice effect (third time).

In the game times U4 for the special 1 hold 4 following the game times U3 for the special 1 hold 3, the variable display D11 is first executed. The variation display D11 is shown in FIG. 510 (a). Subsequently, the super reach effect D12 is executed. The super reach effect D12 is shown in FIG. 510 (b). Subsequently, the stop display D13 corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed. The stop display D13 is shown in FIG. 510 (c). With the end of the stop display D13, the game round U4 for the special 1 hold 4 ends.

As described above, in the execution mode of the precursory notice effect described with reference to FIGS. 506 to 508, FIG. 510, and FIG. 511, the special 1 hold that is the trigger is the special 1 hold 4, and the special 1 hold 4 This is the case when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in addition to the execution mode of the above-mentioned precursory notice effect, which of the special 1 hold 1 to the special 1 hold 4 is the trigger and the special 1 hold that is the trigger are described. Depending on the content of the reach effect to be executed and the presence or absence of a big hit, the precursor notice effect is executed in various ways. Specifically, when the special 1 hold that triggered the trigger is the special 1 hold 4 and the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special 1 hold 4 is out of order, but a super reach occurs, the special 1 hold 1 to special The configuration is such that the precursory notice effect can be executed in each of the game times U1 to the game times U3 for 1 hold 3. If the special 1 hold that triggered the special 1 hold is the special 1 hold 4 and the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special 1 hold 4 is out of order, but a normal reach occurs, the game times U2 and the special 1 for the special 1 hold 2 The precursory notice effect can be executed only by both the game times U3 for the hold 3 or the game times U3 for the special 1 hold 3. In addition, when the special 1 hold that triggered the special 1 hold is the special 1 hold 3 and the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special 1 hold 3 is out of order, but a normal reach occurs, the game times U1 for the special 1 hold 1 and The precursory notice effect can be executed only by both the game times U2 for the special 1 hold 2 or the game times U2 about the special 1 hold 2. In addition, when the special 1 hold that triggered the special 1 hold is the special 1 hold 2 and the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special 1 hold 2 is out of order, but a normal reach occurs, the game times U1 for the special 1 hold 1 The configuration is such that the precursory notice effect can be executed. In addition, when the special 1 hold that triggered the special 1 hold is the special 1 hold 3 and the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special 1 hold 3 is a big hit win, the game times U1 and the special 1 hold 2 for the special 1 hold 1 The precursory notice effect can be executed only by both the game times U2 of the above-mentioned game times U2 or only the game times U2 of the special 1 hold 2. The point is that if there is a special 1 hold that has hold information (to be executed) that executes an effect with a high expectation of big hit winning such as a reach effect in the stored special 1 hold, the special 1 hold Of the game times for the special 1 hold stored earlier, the precursory notice effect may appear in a plurality of consecutive game times or one game time that are continuous with respect to the trigger special 1 hold. The number of appearances may be any number as long as it does not violate the relationship between the number of appearances of the precursory notice effect described with reference to FIG. 509 and the scheduled execution effect.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the execution mode of the precursory notice effect is determined by the special 1 hold continuous effect setting process executed by the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, according to the special 1 hold continuous effect setting process, the hold command sent from the main control device 60 is received every time the game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. , When it is determined from the hold command that it is a special 1 hold that has hold information (to be executed) to execute a reach effect with a high expectation of a big hit such as a reach effect, the content of the reach effect and By associating the number of special 1 hold information existing before the special 1 hold with the table showing the relationship between the number of appearances of the precursor notice effect and the scheduled execution effect shown in FIG. 509, the special 1 hold is held. It is decided which of the special 1 pending information existing in front is used to execute the precursory notice effect. For example, when the triggered special 1 hold is special 1 hold 4 and the lottery result of the winning lottery for special 1 hold 4 is out of order, but normal reach occurs, the game times for special 1 hold 2 If it is possible to adopt two ways, one is to execute the precursory notice effect in the game times U3 for U2 and the special 1 hold 3, and the other is to execute the precursor notice effect in the game times U3 for the special 1 hold 3. For example, a lottery is used to determine which of the two methods is to be adopted or which is not to be adopted.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, when a plurality of precursory warning effects appear, the configuration is such that the special 1 hold that is the trigger is continuous and the plurality of precursory advancement effects are continuous. However, as a modification of this, when a plurality of precursory notice effects are executed, the precursory advance notice effects do not necessarily have to be continuous, and there may be a configuration in which there are game times without the precursory advance notice effects on the way.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 511, it is the game at the second starting port 34 that the effects of the game times U1 to U4 for the special 1 hold 1 to the special 1 hold 4 are continuously continuous. Only when there is no special 2 hold that is stored based on the ball entering. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the special 2 hold is changed in preference to the special 1 hold, the special 1 hold is changing (in the above example, the special 1 hold 1 is changed). (From the start of the game to just before the change of the special 1 hold 4 starts), the electric motor character opening lottery is won, the electric motor character 34a is opened, and the game ball enters the second starting port 34. If this is the case, the change in the special 2 hold acquired by the ball entry is executed in preference to the change in the special 1 hold, and the continuous hold effect of the game times U1 to U4 is interrupted.

As a process when the effects of the game times U1 to U4 are interrupted, after the fluctuation of the special 2 hold is completed, the hold continuous effect of the unexecuted (hereinafter, also referred to as "remaining") special 1 hold is canceled. However, in this configuration, a sense of incongruity is given to the player that the continuous production of the hold is interrupted, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is impaired. In order to solve this problem, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes a hold continuous effect having the following configuration.

FIG. 512 is an explanatory diagram showing the basic concept of the hold continuous effect adopted in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. In FIG. 512, the parts having the same processing contents as those in FIG. 511 are designated by the same reference numerals. Here, in the middle of the game round U2 of the special 1 hold 2 (time t1), the electric accessory opening lottery performed by the game ball passing through the through gates 35a and 35b is won, and the electric accessory 34a is opened. However, it is assumed that a game ball enters the second starting port 34. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the game round U2 of the special 1 hold 2 is completed (time t2), the pachinko machine 10 is stored based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 by the special 2 hold effect process. Execute one or more game times VZ for the special 2 hold. Specifically, according to the special 2 hold effect process executed by the voice emission control device 90, when the hold command for the special 2 hold is received from the main control device 60, the game times U2 of the special 1 hold 2 is set. After the end (time t2), one or more game times VZ for the special 2 hold stored based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is executed.

Subsequently, after the game rounds for the special 2 hold are completed (time t3), the remaining specials that have not been executed because the game round U2 of the special 1 hold 2 is preferentially executed by the hold continuous effect processing. 1 Execute the game times for the hold. That is, in the middle of the game round U2 of the special 1 hold 2, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34 and the special 2 hold is accumulated, the game round VZ for the special 2 hold is set to the remaining special. It is configured to execute the game times U3 and U4 for the remaining special 1 hold in preference to the game times U3 and U4 for the 1 hold, and to execute the game times U3 and U4 for the remaining special 1 hold after the end of the game times VZ for the special 2 hold. However, there is a feature different from the conventional one in the effect displayed in the game times VZ regarding the special 2 hold.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the following effects (i) to (iii) are prepared as predetermined effects included in the effect of the game round VZ for the special 2 hold.
(I) Special 1 continuous production continuation chance eye production (ii) Special 1 continuous production continuation design same color production (iii) Special 2 special production

Which of the above (i) to (iii) is used as the predetermined effect is determined by the following findings by the inventor.

Special 2 When the lottery result of the electric accessory opening lottery that triggered the change of the hold is the electric role short opening, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a is as short as 0.6 seconds. 2 The number of game balls entering the starting port 34 is one, and at most two. Therefore, the game times VZ for the special 2 hold is one game time or two game times. In this case, the player clearly remembers the game times of the special 1 hold (game times U2 in the example of FIG. 512) executed immediately before even when the game times VZ for the special 2 hold is executed. Will be there. Therefore, the inventor wants to maintain the continuity of the production by using the precursory warning effect (chance eye appearance + bubble appearance effect) executed in the special 1 hold game time executed immediately before as it is. I thought. The appearance of the chance eye of the precursory notice effect executed in the game round of the special 1 hold executed immediately before this corresponds to the chance eye effect for the continuation of the special 1 continuous effect of the above (i).

<< 11-4-3 >> Special 1 Chance eye production for continuous production:
The next is a description of the chance eye production for the continuation of the special 1 continuous production. Here, the case 1 will be described.

FIG. 513 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing the state of holding the special 1 in the case 1. As shown in the figure, in case 1, it is assumed that the special 1 hold 1 and the special 1 hold 2 are stored in the normal time. The main control device 60 executes a pre-determination process every time a game ball enters the first starting port 33, and determines whether or not the winning lottery is successful based on the hold information of the special 1 hold stored by the current entry. , The determination of the type of the jackpot, the determination of the presence or absence of the occurrence of the reach, the determination of the type of the fluctuation pattern, and the like are performed before the pending information becomes the target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. After that, the main control device 60 sets the determination result of the prior determination process as a hold command, and transmits the hold command to the voice emission control device 90. The voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command, and specifies the winning / failing result of the winning lottery, the type of the jackpot, the presence / absence of reach occurrence, and the content of the reach effect (type of reach) from the hold command. The content of the reach effect can be specified from the type of fluctuation pattern. In the illustrated example, it is assumed that the result of the winning lottery is out of order in the special 1 hold 2 and it is determined that the normal reach occurs. The voice emission control device 90 executes the hold continuous effect process with the reception of the hold command for the special 1 hold 2 determined to generate the normal reach from the main control device 60 as a trigger.

FIG. 514 shows the effect of the special 1 hold executed by the hold continuous effect process (hereinafter referred to as the special 1 hold continuous effect process) and the special 2 hold executed by the special 2 hold effect process in Case 1. It is a time chart explaining the production. As shown in the figure, first, the game round U11 for the special 1 hold 1 is executed by the special 1 hold continuous effect process. The game times U11 for the special 1 hold 1 are the same as the game times U1 for the special 1 hold 1 described with reference to FIG. 511. In the game round U11 for the special 1 hold 1, the variable display A11 is first executed. The variation display A11 is shown in FIG. 506 (a). Subsequently, the stop display A12 that causes the chance eye to appear is executed. The stop display A12 is shown in FIG. 506 (b). Subsequently, the bubble appearance effect A13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect A13 is shown in FIG. 506 (c). With the end of the bubble appearance effect A13, the game round U11 for the special 1 hold 1 ends. The stop display A12 and the bubble appearance effect A13 constitute a precursory notice effect (first time).

In the middle of the game round U11 for this special 1 hold 1 (time t11), in the electric accessory opening lottery performed by the game ball passing through the through gates 35a and 35b, the electric combination short opening was won and the electric combination was won. It is assumed that the object 34a is opened for 0.6 seconds and one game ball enters the second starting port 34. In this case, after the end of the game round U11 for the special 1 hold 1 (time t12), the game round V11 for the special 2 hold 1 stored based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 Execution starts. The execution of the game round V11 for the special 2 hold 1 is executed by the special 2 hold effect process by the voice emission control device 90. According to the special 2 hold effect processing, which is the lottery result of the electric accessory opening lottery that triggered the execution of the change of the special 2 hold when starting the game round V11 for the special 2 hold 1. The first determination is made, and when it is determined by the first determination that the lottery result of the electric accessory opening lottery is the electric combination short opening, the second determination described later is performed. Then, when the determination result of the second determination is affirmative, in the game round V11 for the special 2 hold 1, the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance eye effect of the above (i) is displayed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance eye effect is a chance of a precursor notice effect executed in the game round (in the case of case 1, the game round U11) for the special 1 hold executed immediately before. It was the same as the production (image) of the appearance of the eyes.

That is, in the game times V11 for the special 2 hold 1 executed following the game times U11 for the special 1 hold 1, the variation display α11 for the special 2 hold 1 is first executed. Subsequently, the stop display A12 that causes the chance eye to appear is executed. The stop display A12 is the same as the stop display A12 executed in the game round U11, and is designated by the same reference numeral. The stop display A12 is shown in FIG. 506 (b). That is, the image shown in FIG. 506 (b) corresponds to the special 1 continuous production continuation chance eye production. Subsequently, the bubble appearance effect A13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect A13 is the same as the stop display executed in the game round U11, and is designated by the same reference numeral. The bubble appearance effect A13 is shown in FIG. 506 (c). With the end of the bubble appearance effect A13, the game round V11 for the special 2 hold 1 ends. From the player's point of view, it is recognized that the precursor notice effect (second time) has appeared by the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance eye effect and the bubble appearance effect A13 that appeared by the stop display A12.

Subsequently, after the end of the game round V11 for the special 2 hold 1 (time t13), the game round U12 for the special 1 hold 2 is started by the special 1 hold continuous effect process. In the game round U12, the variable display E11 is first executed. Subsequently, the normal reach effect E12 is executed. Subsequently, the stop display E13 corresponding to the winning / failing result of the winning lottery is executed. With the end of the stop display E13, the game round U12 for the special 1 hold 2 ends. The content of the game round U12 for the special 1 hold 2 is the same as the case where the game ball does not enter the second starting port 34 in the middle of the game round U11 for the special 1 hold 1. ..

In summary, in case 1 where the result of the winning lottery in the special 1 hold 2 is out of order and the normal reach occurs, the game times U11 for the special 1 hold 1 are first executed, and in the game times U11, the chance eyes and bubbles The precursory notice effect (first time) when BL appears is executed. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34 in the middle of the game times U1 for the special 1 hold 1, the game times V11 for the special 2 hold 1 acquired by the entry follows the game times U11. In the game round V11, the precursory warning effect (second time) in which the chance eye and the bubble BL, which are the chance eye effects for continuing the special 1 continuous effect, appear is executed. Then, following the game times V11 for the special 2 hold 1, the game times U12 for the special 1 hold 2 are executed, and in the game times U12, a normal reach effect and a stop display corresponding to the disconnection are performed. That is, the flow of the effect up to the special 1 hold 2 triggered by this hold continuous effect, in which the precursor notice effect continues twice and finally deviates from the normal reach, is shown in FIG. 509. It does not violate the relationship between the number of appearances and the scheduled production (consistent).

As described above, it is the special 1 hold 1 that the flow of the effect up to the special 1 hold 2 triggered by the hold continuous effect does not violate the relationship between the number of appearances of the precursor notice effect and the scheduled execution effect. Even if the precursor notice effect is increased once by adding the game time V11 for the special 2 hold 1 in the middle of the game time U1, the above special 2 hold 1 is limited to the case where the above relationship is not violated. This is because it is configured so that the precursory notice effect appears in the game times V11 of. Specifically, when the production of the special 2 hold accumulated in the middle of the game round of the special 1 hold is a production including the chance eye production for the continuation of the special 1 continuous production, the special 1 hold that became the trigger It is determined as the second judgment whether or not the series of flow of the continuous production on hold until the production matches the relationship between the number of appearances of the precursory warning production and the scheduled production as shown in FIG. 509, and the second judgment is affirmative. This is because it is configured so that the precursory notice effect appears in the game round V11 for the special 2 hold 1 only when it is done. The second determination is the hold information possessed by the special 1 hold, specifically, which of the special 1 hold 1 to the special 1 hold 4 is the trigger, and the execution schedule effect of the trigger special 1 hold. It can be determined by. For example, as in this case 1, the execution schedule effect for the trigger special 1 hold (special 1 hold 4) is normal reach, and is executed before the trigger special 1 hold (special 1 hold 4). If the precursory notice effect is executed once in the game times, the effect of the game times based on the special 2 hold accumulated in the middle of the special 1 hold game times is displayed as the chance eye effect for the continuation of the special 1 continuous production. Even if the effect is included, the determination result of the second determination is affirmative because it does not violate (match) the relationship between the number of appearances of the precursory notice effect and the effect scheduled to be executed as shown in FIG. 509. On the other hand, the execution scheduled effect for the special 1 hold (special 1 hold 4) that became the trigger is normal reach, and the precursor notice effect is produced by the game times executed before the special 1 hold (special 1 hold 4) that became the trigger. When is executed twice, if the effect of the special 2 hold accumulated in the middle of the game of the special 1 hold is the effect including the chance eye effect for the continuation of the special 1 continuous effect, the special 1 that became the trigger In the hold, three precursory notice effects will be executed before the normal reach effect is performed, which violates the relationship between the number of appearances of the precursor notice effect and the scheduled execution effect shown in FIG. 509. The judgment result of the judgment is negative.

As described above, in the case of Case 1, the precursory warning effect is repeated twice, and finally the effect is out of the normal reach. Therefore, the number of appearances and the execution of the precursory advancement effect shown in FIG. 509. It does not violate the relationship with the scheduled production and does not give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest.

In case 1, one game ball enters the second start opening 34 when the electric service short opening is won, but two game balls enter the second start opening 34. Even when the ball is played, the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance eye effect may be displayed in each game of the special 2 hold 1 and the special 2 hold 2. Also in this case, by making an affirmative judgment in the second determination based on the hold information possessed by the special 1 hold, it is possible to display the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance eye effect.

<< 11-4-4 >> Special 1 Continuous production continuous design same color production:
The special 1 continuous effect continuation pattern same color effect of (ii) above will be described below. Here, the case 2 will be described.

FIG. 515 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing the state of the special 1 hold in the case 2. As shown in the figure, in case 2, it is assumed that four special 1 holds from special 1 hold 1 to special 1 hold 4 are stored in the normal time. The main control device 60 executes a pre-determination process every time a game ball enters the first starting port 33, and determines whether or not the winning lottery is successful based on the hold information of the special 1 hold stored by the current entry. , The determination of the type of the jackpot, the determination of the presence or absence of the occurrence of the reach, the determination of the type of the fluctuation pattern, and the like are performed before the pending information becomes the target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. After that, the main control device 60 sets the determination result of the prior determination process as a hold command, and transmits the hold command to the voice emission control device 90. The voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command, and specifies the winning / failing result of the winning lottery, the type of the jackpot, the presence / absence of reach occurrence, and the content of the reach effect (type of reach) from the hold command. The content of the reach effect can be specified from the type of fluctuation pattern. In the illustrated example, it is assumed that the result of the winning lottery is out of order in the special 1 hold 4 and it is determined that the super reach occurs. The voice emission control device 90 executes the special 1 hold continuous effect process triggered by receiving a hold command for the special 1 hold 4 determined to generate this super reach from the main control device 60.

FIG. 516 is a time chart for explaining the effect of the special 1 hold executed by the special 1 hold continuous effect process and the effect of the special 2 hold executed by the special 2 hold effect process in Case 2. As shown in the figure, first, the game round U21 for the special 1 hold 1 is executed by the special 1 hold continuous effect process. The game times U21 for the special 1 hold 1 are the same as the game times U1 for the special 1 hold 1 described with reference to FIG. 511. In the game round U21 for the special 1 hold 1, the variable display A11 is first executed. The variation display A11 is shown in FIG. 506 (a). Subsequently, the stop display A12 that causes the chance eye to appear is executed. The stop display A12 is shown in FIG. 506 (b). Subsequently, the bubble appearance effect A13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect A13 is shown in FIG. 506 (c). With the end of the bubble appearance effect A13, the game round U21 for the special 1 hold 1 ends. The stop display A12 and the bubble appearance effect A13 constitute a precursory notice effect (first time).

By the special 1 hold continuous effect processing, the game times U21 for the special 1 hold 2 is executed following the game times U21 for the special 1 hold 1. The game times U22 for the special 1 hold 2 is the same as the game times U2 for the special 1 hold 2 described with reference to FIG. 511. In the game round U22 for the special 1 hold 2, the variable display B11 is first executed. The variation display B11 is shown in FIG. 507 (a). Subsequently, the stop display B12 that causes the chance eye to appear is executed. The stop display B12 is shown in FIG. 507 (b). Subsequently, the bubble appearance effect B13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect B13 is shown in FIG. 507 (c). With the end of the bubble appearance effect B13, the game round U22 for the special 1 hold 2 ends. The stop display B12 and the bubble appearance effect B13 constitute a precursory notice effect (second time). In the middle of the game round U22 for this special 1 hold 2 (time t21), in the electric accessory opening lottery performed by the game ball passing through the through gates 35a and 35b, the electric role short opening was won and the electric combination was won. It is assumed that the object 34a is opened for 0.6 seconds and one game ball enters the second starting port 34. In this case, after the end of the game round U22 for the special 1 hold 2 (time t22), the game round V21 for the special 2 hold 1 stored based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 Execution starts. The execution of the game round V21 for the special 2 hold 1 is executed by the special 2 hold effect process by the voice emission control device 90.

According to the special 2 hold effect processing, which is the lottery result of the electric accessory opening lottery that triggered the execution of the change of the special 2 hold when the game round V21 for the special 2 hold 1 is started to be executed. The first determination is made, and when it is determined by the first determination that the lottery result of the electric accessory opening lottery is the electric combination short opening, the second determination described above is performed. Then, when the determination result of the second determination is negative, in the game round V21 for the special 2 hold 1, the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect of the above (ii) is displayed. That is, the lottery result of the electric bonus opening lottery that triggered the change of the special 2 hold is the short open of the electric role, and the effect of the special 2 hold saved in the middle of the game round of the special 1 hold. Is a production that includes a chance eye production for the continuation of the special 1 continuous production, and the flow of the continuous production of the hold until the production for the special 1 hold that triggered (in case 2, the special 1 hold 4 is applicable) , When the relationship between the number of appearances of the precursory notice effect and the scheduled execution effect shown in FIG. 509 is violated, the symbol same color effect for continuing the special 1 continuous effect is displayed in the game times V21 for the special 2 hold 1.

Specifically, in the game times V21 for the special 2 hold 1 executed following the game times U22 for the special 1 hold 2, the variable display β11 for the special 2 hold 1 is first executed. Subsequently, the stop display β12 of the same color as the symbol is executed. The same color of a symbol means a state in which three symbols formed in a state of being stopped on the effective line L1 on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 are different numbers, but the colors of the three symbols are the same color. .. Specifically, since the symbols indicating the numbers 1, 2, and 3 are green, the combination of the symbols indicating the numbers 1, 2, and 3 has the same color. Further, since the symbols indicating the numbers 4, 5 and 6 are red, the combination of the symbols indicating the numbers 4, 5 and 6 can be the same color as the symbols. Since the symbols showing the numbers 7, 8 and 9 are gold, the combination of the symbols showing the numbers 7, 8 and 9 can also have the same color. Then, the color of the same color as the pattern and the effect to be executed are associated in advance.

FIG. 517 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the color of the same color as the symbol and the effect to be executed. As shown in the figure, a reach effect of normal reach or higher is set for green as an execution scheduled effect, a reach effect of super reach or higher is set for red as an execution scheduled effect, and a special execution scheduled effect is set for gold. The jackpot winning confirmation from the reach is set. An image of the same color as the symbol having such a configuration corresponds to the special 1 continuous effect continuation pattern same color effect.

As shown in FIG. 516, according to the special 2 hold effect processing, when the stop display β12 is executed, the game times for the special 1 hold executed immediately before (in the case of case 2, the game times for the special 1 hold 2). Specify the number of appearances of the precursory notice effect executed in U21), and use the same color of the pattern as the execution scheduled effect associated with the specified number of appearances. The table (FIG. 509) showing the relationship between the number of appearances of The same color effect of the special 1 continuous effect continuation pattern is displayed with the color of. Specifically, since the precursory notice effect in the game round (in the case of case 2, the game round U21 for the special 1 hold 2) executed immediately before is the second time, the table shown in FIG. 509. Therefore, it was identified that the execution scheduled effect by the precursor notice effect in the game round was normal reach for the special 1 hold executed immediately before, and from the table shown in FIG. 517, the symbol same color in the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol color effect. The color of is specified to be green corresponding to normal reach. In this green color, the special 1 continuous production continuation symbol same color production is displayed. As a result, the expectation level when the symbol same color effect for continuing the special 1 continuous effect is displayed is the same as the expectation level when the precursor notice effect appears in the game round U22 for the special 1 hold 2 executed immediately before. Will be.

FIG. 518 is an explanatory diagram showing a series of effects executed in the game round V21 for the special 2 hold 1. The hold display icon H11 located in the hold digestion area Dm corresponds to the special 2 hold 1. FIG. 518 (a) is an effect displayed on the display surface 41a at the time of the variable display β11, and FIG. 518 (b) is an effect displayed on the display surface 41a at the time of the stop display β12. As shown in FIG. 518 (b), at the time of the stop display β12, the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect, which is the same color as the green pattern, is executed. Specifically, the three symbols formed in a stopped state on the effective line L1 are a combination of a symbol indicating the number 1, a symbol indicating the number 2, and a symbol indicating the number 3, for example, "312". Become.

Returning to FIG. 516, with the end of the stop display β12, the game round V21 for the special 2 hold 1 ends.

After the end of the game round V21 for the special 2 hold 1 (time t23), the game round U23 for the special 1 hold 3 is executed by the special 1 hold continuous effect process. The game times U23 for the special 1 hold 3 is the same as the game times U3 for the special 1 hold 3 described with reference to FIG. 511. In the game round U23 for the special 1 hold 3, the variable display C11 is first executed. The variation display C11 is shown in FIG. 508 (a). Subsequently, the stop display C12 that causes the chance eye to appear is executed. The stop display C12 is shown in FIG. 508 (b). Subsequently, the bubble appearance effect C13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect C13 is shown in FIG. 508 (c). With the end of the bubble appearance effect C13, the game round U23 for the special 1 hold 3 ends. The stop display C12 and the bubble appearance effect C13 constitute a precursory notice effect (third time).

After the end of the game round U23 for the special 1 hold 3 (time t24), the game round U24 for the special 1 hold 4 is executed by the special 1 hold continuous effect process. The game times U24 for the special 1 hold 4 are the same as the game times U4 for the special 1 hold 4 described with reference to FIG. 511. In the game round U24 for the special 1 hold 4, the variable display F11 is first executed. Subsequently, the super reach effect F12 is executed. Subsequently, the stop display F13 corresponding to the winning / failing result of the winning lottery is executed. With the end of the stop display F13, the game round U24 for the special 1 hold 4 ends. The content of the game round U24 for the special 1 hold 4 is the same as the case where the game ball does not enter the second starting port 34 in the middle of the game round U22 for the special 1 hold 2. ..

In summary, in case 2 where the result of the winning lottery in the special 1 hold 4 is out of order and a super reach occurs, the game round U21 for the special 1 hold 1 is first executed, and the game round U21 is the chance. The precursory notice effect (first time) in which bubble BL appears is executed. Next, the game round U22 for the special 1 hold 2 is executed, and in the game round U22, the precursory warning effect (second time) in which the chance eye and the bubble BL appear is executed. If a game ball enters the second starting port 34 in the middle of the game times U22 for the special 1 hold 2, the game times V21 for the special 2 hold 1 acquired by the entry follows the game times U21. In the game round V21, the stop display β12, which is a special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect, is executed. The color of the symbol same color in the special 1 continuous production continuation symbol same color production is green, and before the execution scheduled production (see FIG. 517) associated with this green and the game round V21 for the special 2 hold 1. It is configured to match the scheduled execution effect (see FIG. 509) associated with the number of appearances of the precursory notice effect including the executed chance eye. After the end of the game round V21 for the special 2 hold 1, the game round U23 for the special 1 hold 3 is executed, and in the game round U23, the sign notice effect (third time) in which the chance eye and the bubble BL appear is executed. To. Next, the game round U24 for the special 1 hold 4 is executed, and in the game round U24, a super reach effect and a stop display corresponding to the disconnection are performed.

As described above, in the case of Case 2, the precursory warning effect including the chance eye is performed twice, then the green pattern same color production is executed, and then the precursory advance notice effect including the chance eye is executed. After one time (three times in total), the production that will eventually be out of the super reach will be executed. When the player saw the series of productions, the precursor notice production including the chance eye appeared twice, and the player recognized that the performance scheduled to be executed was more than the normal reach, and the color of the same color as the pattern became green. So, I reconfirmed that the scheduled production was more than normal reach, and then recognized that the scheduled performance was more than super reach because the precursory notice production including the chance was the third time, and the final I know that I was out of the game with Super Reach. As a result, the player does not feel any discomfort, and the reliability of the advance notice effect is improved. Next, Comparative Example 1 will be described, and the advantages of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment over Comparative Example 1 will be described.

FIG. 519 is a time chart showing Comparative Example 1. Comparative Example 1 differs from the case of Case 2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment (see FIG. 516) in the following points. In case 2 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special 2 hold 1 executed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 34 during the execution of the game round U22 for the special 1 hold 2. In the game round V21, the same color effect of the symbol for continuing the special 1 continuous effect is executed. On the other hand, in the comparative example 1, the second start port 34 is executed during the game round U22 for the special 1 hold 2. In the game round V21X for the special 2 hold 1 executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball, the special 1 continuous production continuation chance eye production is executed.

That is, in the game times V21X for the special 2 hold 1 executed following the game times U22 for the special 1 hold 2, the variable display γ11 for the special 2 hold 1 is first executed. Subsequently, the stop display B12 that causes the chance eye to appear is executed. The stop display B12 is the same as the stop display B12 executed in the game round U22, and is designated by the same reference numeral. The stop display B12 corresponds to the special 1 continuous production continuation chance eye production. Subsequently, the bubble appearance effect B13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect B13 is the same as the effect performed in the game round U22, and is designated by the same reference numeral. From the player's point of view, it is recognized that the precursory notice effect (third time) has appeared by the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance eye effect and the bubble appearance effect B13 that appeared by the stop display B12. After that, it is recognized that the precursory notice effect (fourth time) has appeared in the game round U23 for the special 1 hold 3 executed after the game round V21X for the special 2 hold 1. The game times U24 for the special 1 hold 4 executed after the end of the game times V21X for the special 2 hold 1 is the same as the game times U24 in the case of case 2 (see FIG. 516). According to this Comparative Example 1, which is the lottery result of the electric accessory opening lottery that triggered the execution of the change of the special 2 hold when the game round V21X for the special 2 hold 1 is started to be executed. It is only necessary to execute one judgment (the second judgment is unnecessary), and when the judgment result of the first judgment is the short opening of the electric motor, the special 1 continuous production is uniformly continued in the game times V21X for the special 2 hold 1. It is only necessary to execute the use chance eye production, and the control becomes easy.

However, in Comparative Example 1, after the precursory warning effect including the chance eye appears four times in a row, the effect that deviates from the super reach is executed. This series of effects violates the relationship between the number of appearances of the precursory notice effects and the scheduled execution effects shown in FIG. 509, and gives a sense of discomfort to the player who remembers this relationship. More specifically, a skilled player who recognized that the precursory warning effect including the chance eye appeared four times in a row said, "In this pachinko machine 10, the precursory advance notice effect including the chance eye appeared four times in a row. In some cases, the jackpot will definitely be won after the special reach production is executed, so in this game round U24, the jackpot will definitely be won after the special reach production is executed. " We are looking forward to the result of the game round U24. However, in Comparative Example 1, despite the fact that the precursory notice effect including the chance eye appeared four times in a row, the super reach effect was executed instead of the special reach effect in the game round U24, and the lottery result was out of order. turn into. Therefore, the player will be disappointed and will have the feeling that "the production of this pachinko machine 10 cannot be trusted". As a result, according to Comparative Example 1, the reliability of the advance notice effect is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, the player does not feel any discomfort with respect to the series of effects, so that the reliability of the advance notice effects can be increased.

In case 2, one game ball enters the second start opening 34 when the electric service short opening is won, but two game balls enter the second start opening 34. In this case, the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect may be displayed in each game of the special 2 hold 1 and the special 2 hold 2. It should be noted that the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect in the game times for the special 2 hold 2 is the same as the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect in the game times for the special 2 hold 1. Also in this case, if the determination result of the second determination is negative, it is possible to display the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect. In this modification, one of the game times for the special 2 hold 1 and the special 2 hold 2 may be configured to display the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect.

Further, according to the case 2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game time V21 for the special 2 hold 1 is configured to display the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect, as a modified example. , In the game times V21 for the special 2 hold 1, the chance eye effect for continuing the special 1 continuous effect is displayed, and it is executed in the game times U23 for the special 1 hold that is executed after the end of the game times V21 for the special 2 hold 1. The planned special 1 continuous production continuation chance eye production may be switched to the special 1 continuous production continuation symbol same color production and displayed. In this case, the color of the symbol same color effect for continuing the special 1 continuous effect is the color corresponding to the number of appearances of the effect of the chance eye executed before the start of the game round U23 for the special 1 hold. Specifically, since the number of appearances of the chance eye effect is 3, the color of the same color as the pattern is red. According to this modification, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role short opening is won in the electric accessory opening lottery in the normal time and the game round for the special 2 hold is executed. In the game times for special 1 hold, which is executed consecutively after the end of the game times for special 2 hold, you can reconfirm the expectation of big hit winning such as reach production by hold continuous production, and moreover, a series. Since the player does not feel any discomfort with the production of the above, the reliability of the advance notice production can be increased.

As a further modification of the above modification, the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect is displayed in the game time V21 for the special 2 hold 1, and the special 1 is executed after the game time V21 for the special 2 hold 1. In the game round U23 regarding the hold, the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect may be displayed. In this case, the color of the pattern same color effect for the continuation of the special 1 continuous effect is a precursor notice effect including the chance eye that appeared in the game time for the special 1 hold executed before the start of the game time V21 for the special 2 hold 1. The color is associated with the number of appearances of. Since the execution scheduled effect does not change depending on the number of appearances of the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect, it is permissible to display the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect a plurality of times in succession.

It can be said that both the above (i) special 1 continuous production continuation chance eye production and the above (ii) special 1 continuous production continuation symbol same color production are productions for continuing the special 1 hold continuous production. One of the conditions for executing the special 1 continuous production continuation chance eye production or the special 1 continuous production continuation symbol same color production is that the special 1 continuous production continuation is performed in view of the fact that the judgment result of the first judgment is the short opening of the electric service. Since the period during which the same color effect for the special 1 continuous effect or the special 1 continuous effect continuation is executed for a short period (the number of reserved special 2 is small), the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance eye effect and the special 1 continuous effect continuation It can be said that the pattern same-color production is a production for continuing the special 1 hold continuous production.

<< 11-4-5 >> Special 2 special production:
The special 2 dedicated production of (iii) above will be described below. Here, the case 3 will be described.

FIG. 520 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing the state of the special 1 hold in the case 3. As shown in the figure, in case 3, it is assumed that four special 1 holds from special 1 hold 1 to special 1 hold 4 are stored in the normal time. The main control device 60 executes a pre-determination process every time a game ball enters the first starting port 33, and determines whether or not the winning lottery is successful based on the hold information of the special 1 hold stored by the current entry. , The determination of the type of the jackpot, the determination of the presence or absence of the occurrence of the reach, the determination of the type of the fluctuation pattern, and the like are performed before the pending information becomes the target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. After that, the main control device 60 sets the determination result of the prior determination process as a hold command, and transmits the hold command to the voice emission control device 90. The voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command, and specifies the winning / failing result of the winning lottery, the type of the jackpot, the presence / absence of reach occurrence, and the content of the reach effect (type of reach) from the hold command. The content of the reach effect can be specified from the type of fluctuation pattern. In the illustrated example, it is assumed that the result of the winning lottery is out of order in the special 1 hold 4 and it is determined that the super reach occurs. The voice emission control device 90 executes the special 1 hold continuous effect process triggered by receiving a hold command for the special 1 hold 4 determined to generate this super reach from the main control device 60.

FIG. 521 is a time chart illustrating the effect of the special 1 hold executed by the special 1 hold continuous effect process and the effect of the special 2 hold executed by the special 2 hold effect process in Case 3. As shown in the figure, first, the game round U31 for the special 1 hold 1 is executed by the special 1 hold continuous effect process. The game times U31 for the special 1 hold 1 are the same as the game times U1 for the special 1 hold 1 described with reference to FIG. 511. In the game round U31 for the special 1 hold 1, the variable display A11 is first executed. The variation display A11 is shown in FIG. 506 (a). Subsequently, the stop display A12 that causes the chance eye to appear is executed. The stop display A12 is shown in FIG. 506 (b). Subsequently, the bubble appearance effect A13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect A13 is shown in FIG. 506 (c). With the end of the bubble appearance effect A13, the game round U31 for the special 1 hold 1 ends. The stop display A12 and the bubble appearance effect A13 constitute a precursory notice effect (first time).

By the special 1 hold continuous effect processing, the game times U32 for the special 1 hold 2 are executed following the game times U31 for the special 1 hold 1. The game times U32 for the special 1 hold 2 are the same as the game times U2 for the special 1 hold 2 described with reference to FIG. 511. In the game round U32 for the special 1 hold 2, the variable display B11 is first executed. The variation display B11 is shown in FIG. 507 (a). Subsequently, the stop display B12 that causes the chance eye to appear is executed. The stop display B12 is shown in FIG. 507 (b). Subsequently, the bubble appearance effect B13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect B13 is shown in FIG. 507 (c). With the end of the bubble appearance effect B13, the game round U32 for the special 1 hold 3 ends. The stop display B12 and the bubble appearance effect B13 constitute a precursory notice effect (second time).

In the middle of the game round U32 for this special 1 hold 2 (time t31), when the electric role chief opening is won in the electric accessory opening lottery performed by the game ball passing through the through gates 35a and 35b. The electric accessory 34a is opened for a long time (5 seconds). It is assumed that five or more game balls enter the second starting port 34 while the ball is open for a long time. As described above, since the maximum number (upper limit number) of the special 2 hold is 4, a maximum of 5 special 2 hold can be stored during the opening of the electric accessory 34a for 5 seconds. The reason why the number is not four is that the fifth special 2 hold may be accumulated while the fluctuation of the first ball entered is started. As a result, as the game times based on the special 2 hold, the number of game times equal to or more than the predetermined upper limit number of the special 2 hold (here, 5 pieces are set, but 6 pieces, 7 pieces, etc. may be obtained). It becomes feasible. According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player is instructed to insert as many game balls as possible into the second starting port 34 while the electric accessory 34a is open for a long time (5 seconds). We are performing a special production to encourage them. In the present embodiment, this effect will be referred to as a charge effect.

FIG. 522 is an explanatory diagram showing the content of the charge effect. Here, it is assumed that the timing of winning the electric role chief opening in the electric accessory opening lottery is when the variation display B11 in the game round U32 is executed. As shown in the figure, the charge effect is displayed so as to overlap with the variation display B11. In this embodiment, a female character WM appears as a charge effect, and the female character WM shouts "Charging". The charge effect is executed until the electric accessory 34a is closed.

Note that this charge effect is just an example, and instead of the female character WM, another character such as a male character or an animal character may appear, or instead of the character, a specific background, stage, or It may be configured to display a scene or the like.

Return to FIG. 521. It is assumed that five game balls enter the second starting port 34 while the electric accessory 34a is open for a long time. The special 2 hold corresponding to the five game balls shall be hereinafter referred to as a special 2 hold 1, a special 2 hold 2, a special 2 hold 3, a special 2 hold 4, and a special 2 hold 4+. After the end of the game times U32 for the special 1 hold 2 (time t32), the game times V31 to the game times V35 for the special 2 hold 1 to the special 2 hold 4+ are executed in order. In the game round V31 for the special 2 hold 1, the variation display δ11 is performed, and then the stop display δ12 is performed. Similarly, in the other game times V32 to V35 (in the figure, only the game times V35 is shown), the variation display δ11 is performed, and then the stop display δ12 is performed. The execution of the game times V31 to the game times V35 is executed by the special 2 hold effect process by the voice emission control device 90.

According to the special 2 hold effect processing, which is the lottery result of the electric accessory opening lottery that triggered the execution of the change of the special 2 hold when the game round V31 for the special 2 hold 1 is started to be executed. Judgment When the above-mentioned first judgment is made and it is determined by the first judgment that the lottery result of the electric accessory opening lottery is the opening of the electric power chief, each game for the special 2 hold 1 to the special 2 hold 4+. In the times V31 to the game times V35, the special 2 dedicated effect of (iii) above is executed.

FIG. 523 is an explanatory diagram showing a series of effects executed in the game round V31 for the special 2 hold 1. In the game round V31 for the special 2 hold 1, as shown in FIG. 523 (a), the variation display δ11 for the special 2 hold 1 is first executed. Specifically, the display icon H21 corresponding to the special 2 hold 1 is arranged inside the hold digestion area Dm, and the result of the winning lottery based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the display icon H21 is notified. The variation for this is displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a. A special 2 dedicated effect display area SA is provided between the main display area MA and the second start port holding area Ds2. An image of the special 2 special effect is displayed in the special 2 special effect display area SA. The special 2 dedicated effect display area SA is in a position that does not interfere with the visual recognition of the design displayed in the main display area MA.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, all or one of the images of the precursory notice effect executed in the game times for the special 1 hold executed immediately before (in the case of case 3, the game times U32 for the special 1 hold 2). The part is captured (saved), and the reduced image of the obtained captured image (still image) is displayed in the special 2 dedicated effect display area SA as the special 2 dedicated effect. Specifically, a reduced image of the captured image in which a chance eye (arrangement of [3, 4, 1]) occurs and bubbles appear is displayed in the special 2 dedicated effect display area SA.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the image SH of the shellfish is displayed on the variable display δ11 for the special 2 hold 1. The game times V31 to V35 for the special 2 hold are won in the electric accessory opening lottery to open the electric accessory chief who opens the electric accessory 34a for a long time (5 seconds), and the support mode is also the low frequency support mode. Regardless, it is executed as a result of being able to easily store 4 or 5 special 2 holds. This is surprising and pleasing to the player. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in each game round V31 to V35, only when the electric character opening lottery is won in the electric accessory opening lottery executed in the state where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. The special production was performed to improve the interest of the players. The display of the image SH of the shellfish corresponds to this special production. In the variation display δ11 for the special 2 hold 1, the image SH of the shell is in a state where the two shells are closed. The image SH of the shell is provided between the main display area MA and the first start port holding area Ds1.

After the variation display δ11, the stop display δ12 for the special 2 hold 1 is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 523 (b), the main display of the display surface 41a is a combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the winning lottery for the special 2 hold 1 (for example, 137 which is off in the illustrated example). It is displayed in the area MA. Also at the time of this stop display δ12, a special 2 dedicated effect display area SA is provided between the main display area MA and the second start port holding area Ds2, and the special 2 dedicated effect display area SA is provided. The same image of the special 2 dedicated effect as in the case of the variable display δ11 is displayed.

In the stop display δ12 for the special 2 hold 1, the image SH of the shellfish is continuously displayed from the case of the variable display δ11. In the stop display δ12, the image SH of the shell is in a state where the two shells are slightly opened. Each time the stop display is executed in the game times V31 to V35 for the special 2 hold, the two shells open little by little.

Similarly, the fluctuation display δ11 and the stop display δ12 are performed in the other game times V32 to V35 (only the game times V35 is shown in the figure), but the fluctuation display δ11 and each stop display δ12 are also dedicated to the special 2 in the same manner. The effect display area SA is provided, and the same image of the special 2 dedicated effect as shown in FIG. 523 is displayed in the special 2 dedicated effect display area SA, and the image SH of the shellfish is displayed. If a big hit is won in the winning lottery based on the special 2 hold, the image SH of the shells shows that the two shells are completely opened and the two shells are displayed when the stop display of the game times corresponding to the big hit winning is displayed. For example, a pearl appears from between. In this way, it is produced that the big hit was won.

The shell image SH displayed on the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for the special 2 hold 1 is merely an example, and may be used for a person, another creature, a specific background, a stage, a scene, or other images. You may change it.

After the game rounds for all special 2 holds (special 2 hold 1 to special 2 hold 4+ in case 3) are completed (time t33), the remaining special 1 hold (special 1 hold 3 in case 3) The game times for Special 1 Hold 4) are resumed. The game times U33 for the special 1 hold 3 is the same as the game times U3 for the special 1 hold 3 described with reference to FIG. 511. In the game round U33 for the special 1 hold 3, the variable display C11 is first executed. The variation display C11 is shown in FIG. 508 (a). Subsequently, the stop display C12 that causes the chance eye to appear is executed. The stop display C12 is shown in FIG. 508 (b). Subsequently, the bubble appearance effect C13 is executed. The bubble appearance effect C13 is shown in FIG. 508 (c). With the end of the bubble appearance effect C13, the game round U33 for the special 1 hold 3 ends. The stop display C12 and the bubble appearance effect C13 constitute a precursory notice effect (third time) including a chance eye.

As a modification, the captured image is captured as it is between the last game time V35 for the special 2 hold and the game time of the special 1 hold that is continuously executed after the end of the game time V35. A screen to be displayed in size (full screen size) may be inserted. In this case, the reduced captured image in the special 2 dedicated effect display area SA displayed in the last game round V35 is zoomed up and moved to the above-mentioned full screen size captured image. It is possible to make a visually smooth transition from the special 2 hold game times to the special 1 hold game times in which the hold continuous effect is performed.

In the game times U34 for the special 1 hold 4 executed following the game times U33 for the special 1 hold 3, the variable display G11 is first executed. Subsequently, the super reach effect G12 is executed. Subsequently, the stop display G13 corresponding to the winning / failing result of the winning lottery is executed. With the end of the stop display G13, the game round U34 for the special 1 hold 4 ends. Regarding the contents of the game times U33 for the special 1 hold 3 and the contents of the game times U34 for the special 1 hold 4, the game ball enters the second starting port 34 in the middle of the game times U32 for the special 1 hold 2. The content is the same as when it was not done. It should be noted that the contents do not necessarily have to be the same, and the effect patterns in each of the game times U33 and U34 are reset at the execution timings of the game times U33 and U34 for the special 1 hold 3 and the special 1 hold 4, and the game times are played. It may be configured so that the contents of are changed.

In the case of Case 3, consider a configuration in which the special 2 dedicated effect is not executed in each of the game times V31 to V35 for the special 2 hold. Assuming that this configuration is Comparative Example 2, the Comparative Example 2 has the following problems.

The maximum number of game times executed based on the special 2 hold is five, and the time spent for the five game times is usually a long time (for example, several minutes). In particular, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a dedicated production using the image SH of the shellfish is performed, and the time of the game round is longer. For this reason, in Comparative Example 2, when the continuous effect of holding special 1 hold is interrupted due to the execution of the game times for special 2 hold, the advance notice is given by the game times of special 1 hold that have been executed so far. Some players completely forgot that the production had appeared.

On the other hand, according to the case 3 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in each of the game times V31 to V35 for the special 2 hold, the special 1 hold executed immediately before switching to the game time of the special 2 hold. Since the captured images of all or part of the precursory notice effect that appeared in the game times will continue to be displayed as a special 2 exclusive effect, it will be forgotten for the player that the precursory advance notice effect has appeared. It is possible to remind us that the continuous production of the special 1 hold is continuing.

According to the case 3 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the captured image is displayed in all of the game times V31 to V35 for the special 2 hold, but as a modification of the special 2 The captured image may be displayed only in the last game round (game round V35 in case 3) of each game round V31 to V35 for holding. Further, the game times for the special 1 hold that are continuously executed after the end of each game time V31 to V35 for the special 2 hold without displaying the captured image in each game time V31 to V35 for the special 2 hold. (In case 3, the game round U33) may be configured to display the captured image. According to these modifications, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special 1 hold is executed and the special 2 is won in the electric accessory opening lottery in the normal time. When the game times for the special 2 hold are executed more than the maximum number of holds, the game times for the special 1 hold that are continuously executed after the end of the game times for the special 2 hold. It can be reminded that the hold continuous production of hold is continuing.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a special 2 exclusive production that reminds us that the special 1 hold that was executed immediately before switching to the special 2 hold game times was performed, all of the precursor notice effects or The configuration is such that a reduced image of the captured image captured in part is displayed, but instead of this, the captured image may be displayed in the same size without being reduced. Alternatively, the contour line image of the main portion of the captured image (for example, an image showing the contour line of the bubble) may be displayed in the same size or reduced in size. Alternatively, the density of the captured image may be reduced to display the captured image as it is or in a reduced size. Further, instead of the captured image, information suggesting the situation in the game round of the special 1 hold executed immediately before switching to the special 2 hold game round (for example, information expressed in characters, information represented by an icon). ) May be displayed. Also in these modified examples, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game is that the hold continuous effect is performed in the game times based on the special 1 hold executed immediately before switching to the game times of the special 2 hold. Can be reminded of others.

Further, as the special effect 2 above, an image in which at least a part of the captured image captured in whole or in part of the precursory notice effect is changed may be displayed in the same size or reduced. For example, when the image is reduced and displayed, the image becomes inconspicuous, so that the captured image may be modified to increase the amount of bubbles.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the image SH of the shellfish is provided between the main display area MA and the first start port holding area Ds1. On the other hand, as a modification, the image SH of the shellfish may be made larger than that shown in FIG. 523 so as to overlap with the pattern displayed in the main display area MA. Further, the enlarged image of the shellfish may be configured to overlap with the special 2 dedicated effect display area SA on which the captured image is displayed.

<< 11-5 >> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-mentioned processing in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes will be described below. The MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal in addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, but description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 524 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

In step Sv0101, the reading process of various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main control device 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0102.

In step Sv0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0103.

In step Sv0103, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the electric accessory release counter C4, and the variable type counter CS are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the electric accessory opening counter C4, and the variable type counter CS, and each of these counter values reaches the maximum value. If so, clear to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0104. The value of the variable type counter CS is updated in the normal processing (FIG. 528) described later.

In step Sv0104, a ball entry process for the start port accompanying the entry into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the starting port of step Sv0104 will be described later. After executing step Sv0104, the process proceeds to step Sv0105.

In step Sv0105, a ball entry process for through ball accompanying the entry into the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for through in step Sv0105 will be described later. After executing step Sv0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Incoming ball entry process for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be described. The ball entry process for the start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 524: Sv0104).

FIG. 525 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the starting port. In step Sv0201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33. If it is determined in step Sv0201 that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (Sv0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0202, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set the command. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0203.

In step Sv0203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0204.

In step Sv0204, the start hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold number RaN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra, is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The first start hold number RaN indicates the hold number based on the entry of the ball into the first start port 33. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0209.

If it is determined in step Sv0201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 33 (Sv0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv0205 and whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

If it is determined in step Sv0205 that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sv0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0206, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set the command. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv0205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (Sv0205: NO), the ball entry process for the main starting port is terminated.

In step Sv0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0208.

In step Sv0208, the start hold number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as the second start hold number RbN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb, is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on the entry of the ball into the second start port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0209.

In step Sv0209, it is determined whether or not the start hold number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sv0204 or step Sv0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step Sv0209, if the start hold number N is not less than the upper limit value (Sv0209: NO), the ball entry process for the main start port is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sv0209, if the start hold number N is less than the upper limit value (Sv0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0210, 1 is added to the start hold number N of the corresponding hold area, and then the process proceeds to step Sv0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reserved quantity CRN). The total hold quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first start hold quantity RaN and the second start hold quantity RbN. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0212.

In step Sv0212, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS updated in step Sv0103 (FIG. 524) are stored in the first free storage area of the corresponding hold area. It is stored in the storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the reserved number obtained by adding 1 in step Sv0210. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as the processing target, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sv0103 are set. It is stored in the first storage area in the free storage area of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN to which 1 is added in step Sv0210. When the second start hold number RbN is set as the processing target, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sv0103 are held for the second time. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step Sv0210. After executing step Sv0212, the process proceeds to step Sv0213.

In step Sv0213, the first determination process is executed. The pre-determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, and the winning / failing determination result (lottery result), the jackpot type, and the reach. This is a process for determining whether or not the information has occurred before the pending information is subject to a winning lottery by the main control device 60. The details of the pre-determination process will be described later. After executing step Sv0213, the process proceeds to step Sv0214.

In step Sv0214, a process of setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the prior determination process executed based on the information (holding information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as the hold command.

The hold command determines that a ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 and the determination result (first determination information) by the advance determination process based on the hold information acquired based on the entry. This is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to confirm the hold information before it becomes the target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 528: step Sv0503) of the normal process described later.

Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the entry into the first start port 33, the voice emission control device 90 holds the display in the first start port hold area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing the number in accordance with the increase in the number is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first start port holding area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holdings. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the entry into the second start port 34 is received, the voice emission control device 90 holds the display in the second start port hold area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing the number in accordance with the increase in the number is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second start port holding area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holdings.

After executing step Sv0214, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

<First judgment process>
Next, the prior determination process will be described. The pre-determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 525: Sv0213) for the ball entry process for the start port.

FIG. 526 is a flowchart showing the prior determination process. As described above, in the prior determination process, the winning lottery determination, the determination of the type of jackpot, the determination of the presence or absence of reach, etc. are performed based on the pending information, and the pending information is the winning lottery by the main control device 60. It is a process to be executed before the target of.

In step Sv0301, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting port in the ball entering process for the starting port (FIG. 525) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the determination result of the pre-judgment process executed by the previous entry before the current entry is read from the corresponding storage area, and the presence or absence of the probable change jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery by the current entry. In addition, by grasping whether or not the player has won the fall lottery, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round is determined.

If it is determined in step Sv0302 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round, the process proceeds to step Sv0303 and the winning / failing table is stored. Refer to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode (FIG. 499 (a)) stored in the area 63a. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0305, and as a result of referring to the hit / miss table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the information of the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the big hit.

On the other hand, in step Sv0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round (Sv0302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv0304 and the winning / failing table is stored. Refer to the hit / fail table for the high probability mode (FIG. 499 (b)) stored in the area 63a. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0305, and as a result of referring to the hit / miss table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the big hit.

In step Sv0305, if it is determined that the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a big hit (Sv0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0306, and the ball is stored in the storage area by entering the starting port this time. Grasp the value of the jackpot type counter C2. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0307, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2, which is the target of distribution this time, is acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33, refer to the distribution table for the first starting port. , When the ball is acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 34, the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to. After executing step Sv0307, the process proceeds to step Sv0308.

In step Sv0308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step Sv0308 that the probability variation jackpot is supported (Sv0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0309, and the probability variation jackpot information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the first determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv0308 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (Sv0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv0310, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0315.

If it is determined in step Sv0305 that the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to the big hit (Sv0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv0311, and the ball enters the storage area this time. The value of the stored reach random number counter C3 is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0312, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

If it is determined in step Sv0313 that the reach generation is supported (Sv0313: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0314, and the reach generation information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0315. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv0313 that it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach (Sv0313: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv0315.

In step Sv0315, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting port in the ball entering process for the starting port (FIG. 525) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv0316, and the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the jackpot variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After executing step Sv0316, the process proceeds to step Sv0317.

In step Sv0317, the fluctuation pattern is specified from the fluctuation time information acquired in step Sv0316, and the type of the specified fluctuation pattern is stored in the pre-determination processing result storage area 64h. After executing step Sv0317, the destination determination process is terminated.

<Through ball entry process>
Next, the ball entry process for through will be described. The ball entry process for through is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 524: Sv0105).

FIG. 527 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for thru. In step Sv0401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35. If it is determined in step Sv0401 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sv0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0402, and whether the number of reserved characters SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Judge whether or not. The number of reserved items SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that is reserved for performing the electric accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved items SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sv0401: NO), the entry process for this through is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sv0402 that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the number of reserved items SN (Sv0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0403 and 1 is added to the number of reserved items SN. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0404.

In step Sv0404, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step Sv0103 (FIG. 524) is stored in the first free storage area of the electric service holding area 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the ball entry process for through is completed.

On the other hand, in step Sv0402, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is not less than the upper limit value (Sv0402: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is equal to or more than the upper limit value, The ball entry process for through is completed without storing the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter, also referred to as “power on”). In the normal process, the main process of the game is executed.

FIG. 528 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sv0501, the startup process is executed. Specifically, the initial setting of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0502.

In step Sv0502, a start-up command is set. The start-up command is a command for starting a demo movie for each control device on the sub side when the power is turned on. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0503.

In step Sv0503, output data such as a start-up command set in step Sv0502 and a command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. If commands related to effects such as start-up commands, variable commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After executing step Sv0503, the process proceeds to step Sv0504.

In step Sv0504, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variable type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0505.

In step Sv0505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sv0506. In step Sv0506, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of a symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display unit 37a, the second symbol display unit 37b, and the like are performed. The details of the game times control process will be described later. After executing step Sv0506, the process proceeds to step Sv0507.

In step Sv0507, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. The details of the game state transition process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0508.

In step Sv0508, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is in the open state. The details of the processing for electric service support will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0509.

In step Sv0509, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal process (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process in step Sv0503). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached. If it is determined in step Sv0509 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal process (Sv0509: NO), in step Sv0510 and step Sv0511 until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached. Within the remaining time of, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sv0510, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Sv0511, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv0509 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the current normal process (Sv0509: YES), the process returns to step Sv0503 and each process from step Sv0503 to step Sv0508 is performed. Run.

Since the execution time of each process from step Sv0503 to step Sv0508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process will be described. The game times control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 528: Sv0506) of the normal process.

FIG. 529 is a flowchart showing the game times control process. In step Sv0601, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The open / close execution mode flag is turned on when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is turned off when the open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process.

If it is determined in step Sv0601 that the open / close execution mode is in progress (Sv0601: YES), the game round control process ends without executing any of the processes after step Sv0602. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the game round is not started regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv0601 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (Sv0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv0602.

In step Sv0602, it is determined whether or not the special figure unit 37 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b provided in the special symbol unit 37 is in variable display. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the special map variation display flag in the special map variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special symbol variation display flag is turned on when starting the variation display for either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, and is turned off when the variation display ends.

If it is determined in step Sv0602 that the special figure unit 37 is not in the variable display (Sv0602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv0603.

In step Sv0603, a variation start process for starting the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start processing will be described later. After executing step Sv0603, the game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv0602 that the special figure unit 37 is in the variable display (Sv0602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0604.

In step Sv0604, the variation end processing for terminating the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the variable end processing will be described later. After executing step Sv0604, the game round control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described. The variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 529: Sv0603) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 530 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. In step Sv0701, it is determined whether or not the total reserved quantity CRN exceeds "0". When the total reserved quantity CRN is "0" or less, it means that the starting reserved quantity is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Therefore, if it is determined in step Sv0701 that the total number of reserved pieces CRN is "0" or less (Sv0701: NO), the fluctuation start process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv0701 that the total number of reserved pieces CRN exceeds "0" (Sv0701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0702.

In step Sv0702, the hold information shift process for setting the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sv0703. The details of the hold information shift process will be described later.

In step Sv0703, a hit determination process including a process when a big hit is won in the hit lottery is performed. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Sv0703, the process proceeds to step Sv0704.

In step Sv0704, the variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is to set the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, based on the presence / absence of a big hit, the presence / absence of reach, and the like. It is the processing of. The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sv0704, the process proceeds to step Sv0705.

In step Sv0705, a variable command is set. The variable command is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33, or is acquired based on the entry into the second starting opening 34. It contains information indicating whether or not the information is on hold, information on whether or not reach has occurred, and information on the fluctuation time set in step Sv0706. After executing step Sv0705, the process proceeds to step Sv0706.

In step Sv0706, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence / absence of a big hit and the result of the distribution determination. That is, the type command includes 16R probability variation jackpot information, 8R probability variation jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or loss result information about the winning lottery as the jackpot type information. It has been.

The variable command and the type command set in step Sv0705 and step Sv0706 are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by step Sv0503 in the normal process (FIG. 528). The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variable command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step Sv0706, the process proceeds to step Sv0707.

In step Sv0707, among the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is started to display the variation of the symbol. Specifically, when the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is specified to be the first symbol display unit 37a, and the variable display is started. When the second symbol display unit flag is ON, it is specified that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is the second symbol display unit 37b, and the variable display is started. After executing step Sv0707, the process proceeds to step Sv0708.

In step Sv0708, the special figure change display flag stored in the special figure change display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sv0708, this fluctuation start process ends.

<Hold information shift processing>
Next, the hold information shift process will be described. The hold information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 530: Sv0702) for the variable start process.

FIG. 531 is a flowchart showing the hold information shift process. In step Sv0801, it is determined whether or not the hold area to be processed for executing the hold information shift process is the first hold area Ra. Specifically, among the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 498) in time series, the hold information stored first (hold stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra). Information) is stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb (information), which is the earliest hold information stored in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 498) in time series. If it is stored in the hold area before the hold information), it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra. On the other hand, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb in time series is earlier than the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra in time series. If the stored hold information is stored in the hold area first, it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the second hold area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sv0801, the reserved information can be processed in the order stored in the first reserved area Ra or the second reserved area Rb.

If it is determined in step Sv0801 that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra (step Sv0801: YES), the hold information shift process for the first hold area in steps Sv0802 to step Sv0807 is executed. On the other hand, in step Sv0801, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (step Sv0801: NO). ), Hold information shift processing for the second hold area in steps Sv0808 to Sv0813 is executed.

In step Sv0802, after subtracting 1 from the first start hold number RaN in the first hold area Ra, the process proceeds to step Sv0803 and the total hold number CRN is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0804. In step Sv0804, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0805.

In step Sv0805, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reserved area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step Sv0805, the process proceeds to step Sv0806.

In step Sv0806, when the second symbol display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second symbol display unit flag is information for specifying whether the target for starting the variation display this time is the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0807.

In step Sv0807, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the first hold area Ra, that is, corresponding to the first start port 33. A shift command including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the pending information shift process is terminated. The shift command set in step Sv0807 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Sv0503 in the normal process (FIG. 528).

In step Sv0801, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (Sv0801: NO), the step. Proceed to Sv0808.

In step Sv0808, the second start hold quantity RbN of the second hold area Rb is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0809. In step Sv0809, the total number of reserved pieces CRN is subtracted by 1, the process proceeds to step Sv0810, and the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0811.

In step Sv0811, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reserved area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step Sv0811, the process proceeds to step Sv0812.

In step Sv0812, if the second symbol display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0813.

In step Sv0813, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, the information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the second hold area Rb, that is, corresponding to the second start port 34. A shift command including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the pending information shift process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sv0813 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Sv0503 in the normal process (FIG. 528). The voice emission control device 90 sets a command for changing the display in the second start port hold area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command. Send to 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second start port holding area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holdings.

<Collision detection processing>
Next, the hit determination process will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 530: Sv0703).

FIG. 532 is a flowchart showing the hit determination process. In step Sv0901, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sv0901 that the mode is in the high probability mode (Sv0901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0902, and the pass / fail determination is made with reference to the pass / fail table for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 499 (b). Is determined. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0904.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv0901 that the mode is not in the high probability mode (Sv0901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv0903, and the pass / fail determination is made with reference to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 499 (a). Is determined. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0904.

In step Sv0904, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination (winning lottery) in step Sv0902 or step Sv0903 is a big hit winning. In step Sv0904, if the result of the winning / failing determination is a big hit (Sv0904: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0905.

In step Sv0905, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sv0905 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (Sv0905: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv0906, and the distribution table for the first starting port (see FIG. 500 (a)) is referred to. Then, the distribution is determined. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of 16R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. Determine if it is included in.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv0905 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (Sv0905: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0907, and the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 500 (b)). The distribution is determined with reference to. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 16R probability variation jackpot or the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. After executing the process of step Sv0906 or step Sv0907, the process proceeds to step Sv0908.

In step Sv0908, the flag (big hit flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sv0906 or step Sv0907 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, turn on the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, if it is an 8R probability variation jackpot, turn on the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, and if it is a 16R normal jackpot, turn on the 16R normal jackpot flag. Turn it on, and if it is an 8R normal jackpot, turn on the 8R normal jackpot flag. After executing step Sv0908, the process proceeds to step Sv0909.

In step Sv0909, a process of setting a stop result for a big hit is executed. Specifically, in this game round in which a big hit is won, it is set which stop result is displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to end the variable display. It is a process to do. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63f (FIG. 497), the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot distributed in step Sv0906 or step Sv0907 can be obtained. The address information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sv0909, the hit determination process ends.

In step Sv0904, if the result of the winning lottery in step Sv0902 or step Sv0903 is not a big hit (Sv0904: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv0910, and the reach determination table is referred to to see if a reach occurs in the game round. Judge whether or not. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is set as the reach occurrence in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 497). Determine if it matches the value you have. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv0911.

In step Sv0911, if the result of the reach determination in step Sv0910 is that reach occurs in the game round (Sv0911: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv0912 and the reach generation flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach generation flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sv0912, the process proceeds to step Sv0913.

On the other hand, in step Sv0911, if the result of the reach determination in step Sv0910 is that reach does not occur in the game round (Sv0911: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv0913 without executing step Sv0912.

In step Sv0913, a process of setting a stop result for disconnection is executed. Specifically, in this game round, which is the result of the deviation, the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b is used to set which stop result is displayed to end the variable display. It is a process. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for deviation in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. , The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sv0913, the hit determination process ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 530: Sv0704) of the variation start process.

FIG. 533 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation time setting process. In step Sv1001, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv1002.

In step Sv1002, a process for specifying the fluctuation time table is executed. The fluctuation time table is tabular data in which the fluctuation time information (variation time information), which is the time from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the symbol, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS are used as data elements. In the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63, various types of variable time tables are stored according to the game state, the presence / absence of a jackpot and time reduction, and the presence / absence of reach occurrence. In step S1102, one fluctuation time table is specified from these fluctuation time tables. Specifically, based on the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag, the current gaming state is among the low probability low support state, high probability high support state, low probability high support state, and high probability low support state. The judgment result, the judgment result of the hit / fail judgment to determine whether or not the jackpot or the time reduction is given, and the judgment result of the reach judgment to determine whether or not the reach has occurred, Based on the above, one variable time table is specified from the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. After executing step Sv1002, the process proceeds to step Sv1003.

In step Sv1003, by referring to the fluctuation time table specified in step Sv1002, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step Sv1001 is acquired. After executing step Sv1003, the process proceeds to step Sv1004.

In step Sv1004, the fluctuation time information acquired in step Sv1003 is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

<Variation end processing>
Next, the variable end processing will be described. The variation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 529: Sv0604) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 534 is a flowchart showing the variation end processing. In step Sv1101, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the fluctuation time is the time from the start of fluctuation of the symbol row to the stop of all the symbol rows, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sv1101, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 is "0". The value of the fluctuation time information is set in the above-mentioned fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 533). The value of the set fluctuation time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started.

If it is determined in step Sv1101 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sv1101: NO), the fluctuation end processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sv1101 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (Sv1101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1102, which corresponds to the current game times among the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. Performs processing to end the fluctuation of the symbol in the symbol display unit. Subsequent step Sv1103 turns off the special figure change display flag stored in the special figure change display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64. After executing step Sv1103, the process proceeds to step Sv1104.

In step Sv1104, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is a big hit winning. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sv1104, if none of the above flags is ON, that is, if it is determined that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game round is not a big hit winning (Sv1104: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1105.

In step Sv1105, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sv1105 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Sv1105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1106, and it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter PNC exceeds 0. If it is determined in step Sv1106 that the value of the game count counter PNC exceeds 0 (Sv1106: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1107, and the value of the game count counter PNC is decremented by 1. After executing step Sv1107, the process proceeds to step Sv1108. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1106 that the value of the game count counter PNC is 0 or less (Sv1106: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1108 without executing step Sv1107.

In step Sv1108, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sv1108 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Sv1108: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1109, and it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter PNC exceeds 0.

If it is determined in step Sv1109 that the value of the game count counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sv1109: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1110 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After executing step Sv1110, the variable time end processing is terminated.

When it is determined in step Sv1108 that the high probability mode flag is ON (Sv1108: YES), or when it is determined in step Sv1109 that the value of the game count counter PNC exceeds 0 (step Sv1109: YES). , This variable time end processing is terminated without executing step Sv1110. Further, when it is determined in step Sv1105 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sv1105: NO), the variable time end processing is terminated without executing steps Sv106 to Sv1110.

On the other hand, in step Sv1104, any one of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag is ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery related to this game round is If it is determined that the jackpot is won (Sv1104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1111, and the open / close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sv1111, the variable time end processing is terminated.

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 528: Sv0507) of the normal process.

FIG. 535 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step Sv1201, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the large winning opening opening / closing processing period (at the beginning of the ending period) in the opening / closing execution mode, and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the open / close execution mode.

If it is determined in step Sv1201 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sv1201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1202, and it is determined whether or not the open / close processing period flag is ON. The opening / closing processing period flag is turned on at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening / closing execution mode and the large winning opening opening / closing processing period, which is the period during which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed, is started. , It is turned off at the timing when the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 36b is completed.

If it is determined in step Sv1202 that the open / close processing period flag is not ON (Sv1202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1203, and it is determined whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the beginning of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Sv1203 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sv1203: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1204, and it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sv1204 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (Sv1204: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1205. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1204 that the open / close execution mode flag is OFF (Sv1204: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

In step Sv1205, the high probability mode flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv1206. In step Sv1206, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv1207.

In step Sv1207, an opening / closing scenario setting process for setting an opening / closing scenario is executed. The opening / closing scenario defines a pattern of opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 36b in the round game. In this embodiment, the condition for shifting the opening / closing door 36b from the closed state to the open state (hereinafter, also referred to as “opening condition”) This is a program in which the condition for shifting the opening / closing door 36b from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter, also referred to as “closed condition”) is recorded. The opening / closing scenario is stored in the opening / closing scenario storage area 63h of the ROM 63.

The opening conditions are as follows, for example.
-The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing to start each round game in the open / close execution mode.
When the above one item is satisfied, the opening / closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

The closing conditions are as follows, for example.
-The elapsed time from the start of each round game exceeds the predetermined upper limit duration (for example, 15 seconds).
-The number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening 36a after starting each round game exceeds the predetermined maximum number.
When either of the above two items is satisfied, the opening / closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

After executing step Sv1207, the process proceeds to step Sv1208 described above.

In step Sv1208, the opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period (hereinafter, also referred to as an opening time) in the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, the same constant length of opening time is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sv1208, the process proceeds to step Sv1209.

In step Sv1209, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Sv0503 in the normal process (FIG. 528). This opening command contains information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current open / close execution mode. The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the large winning opening opening / closing processing period based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step Sv1209, the process proceeds to step Sv1210, and the opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sv1203 that the opening period flag is ON (Sv1203: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1211.

In step Sv1211, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Sv1211 that the opening period has ended (Sv1211: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1212 and the opening period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv1213.

In step Sv1213, a round display start process for notifying the type of the opening / closing execution mode this time is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the above address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is specified from the specified stop result data. Confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round display unit 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step Sv1213, the process proceeds to step Sv1214.

In step Sv1214, the open / close processing period flag is turned ON. In the following step Sv1215, an open / close process start command is set. The open / close process start command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the open / close process period has started. The open / close process start command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 528: step Sv0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sv1215, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sv1202 that the open / close processing period flag is ON (Sv1202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1216 to execute the large winning opening opening / closing process. The process of opening and closing the large winning opening will be described later. After executing step Sv1216, the process proceeds to step Sv1217.

In step Sv1217, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed depending on whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened is "0". do. If it is determined in step Sv1217 that the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed (Sv1217: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1218. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1217 that the large winning opening opening / closing process has not been completed (Sv1217: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

In step Sv1218, the open / close processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Sv1219.

In step Sv1219, the round display end process is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is terminated so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step Sv1219, the process proceeds to step Sv1220.

In step Sv1220, the ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the ending period (hereinafter, also referred to as an ending time) in the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set in each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sv1220, the process proceeds to step Sv1221.

In step Sv1221, the ending command is set. This set ending command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Sv0503 in the normal process (FIG. 528). The voice emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on the reception of the ending command. After executing step Sv1221, the process proceeds to step Sv1222.

In step Sv1222, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sv1201 that the ending period flag is ON (Sv1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1223.

In step Sv1223, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sv1220), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0”. If it is determined in step Sv1220 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Sv1223: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1224.

In step Sv1224, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv1225, and the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of the game times after the end of the current ending period. Details of the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sv1225, the process proceeds to step Sv1226 to turn off the open / close execution mode flag. After executing step Sv1226, the process proceeds to step Sv1227.

In step Sv1227, it is determined whether or not the total reserved quantity CRN is “0”. When the total reserved quantity CRN is "0", it means that the starting reserved quantity is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. If it is determined in step Sv1227 that the total number of reserved pieces CRN is "0" (Sv1227: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1228.

In step Sv1228, a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command is for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that no hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 64b at the time when the symbol change (game round) is completed. It is a command that contains the information of. This set customer waiting command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Sv1228 in the normal process (FIG. 528). After executing step Sv1228, the game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1227 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (Sv1227: NO), the game round control process is terminated as it is. If it is determined in step Sv1223 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Sv1223: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

<Large winning opening opening / closing process>
Next, the process of opening and closing the large winning opening will be described. The large winning opening opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 535: Sv1216) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 536 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening / closing process. In step Sv1301, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning driving unit 36c. If it is determined in step Sv1301 that the opening / closing door 36b is not open (Sv1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1302.

In step Sv1302, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening / closing scenario set by the opening / closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the opening / closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sv1302 that the opening condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied (Sv1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1303.

In step Sv1303, the opening / closing door 36b is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv1304.

In step Sv1304, an open / close door open command is set. The opening / closing door opening command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the opening / closing door 36b has been opened. The opening / closing door opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 528: step Sv0503) of the normal processing. After executing step Sv1304, the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed.

If it is determined in step Sv1302 that the opening condition of the opening / closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sv1302: NO), the large winning opening opening / closing process is terminated without executing steps Sv1303 and step Sv1304.

If it is determined in step Sv1301 that the opening / closing door 36b is being opened (Sv1301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1305.

In step Sv1305, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening / closing scenario set by the opening / closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the opening / closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sv1305 that the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied (Sv1305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1306.

In step Sv1306, the opening / closing door 36b is closed. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv1307.

In step Sv1307, an open / close door closing command is set. The opening / closing door closing command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the opening / closing door 36b has been closed. The opening / closing door closing command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 528: step Sv0503) of the normal processing. After executing step Sv1307, the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed.

If it is determined in step Sv1305 that the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sv1305: NO), the large winning opening opening / closing process is terminated without executing steps Sv1306 and step Sv1307.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 535: Sv1225) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 537 is a flowchart showing the transition process at the end of the ending period. In step Sv1401, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probabilistic jackpot is turned ON in the jackpot flag. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sv1401 that the 16R probability variation jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON (Sv1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1402, and among the 16R probability variation jackpot flag and the 8R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64. Turn off the flag that is ON. After executing step Sv1402, the process proceeds to step Sv1403.

In step Sv1403, the high probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step Sv1404, and the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after ending the open / close execution mode, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv1405.

In step Sv1405, 100 is set in the game count counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. The value set in the game count counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv1406.

In step Sv1406, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub-side to recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. .. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv1411.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1401 that the 16R probability variation jackpot flag and the 8R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 are not ON (Sv1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1407 and the 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv1408.

In step Sv1408, after turning on the high frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step Sv1409, and 100 is set in the game count counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv1410.

In step Sv1410, a low-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub-side to recognize that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. .. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv1411.

In step Sv1411, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is used as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Set. After that, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electric service support>
Next, the processing for electric service support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 528: Sv0508) of the normal process.

FIG. 538 is a flowchart showing the electric service support process. In step Sv1501, it is determined whether or not the support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The supporting flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened and turned off when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sv1501 that the supporting flag is not ON (Sv1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1502.

In step Sv1502, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned on when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is ON. Is. If it is determined in step Sv1502 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sv1502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1503.

In step Sv1503, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal diagram unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

If it is determined in step Sv1503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sv1503: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sv1503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1504.

In step Sv1504, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display of the symbol in the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step Sv1504 that it is the end timing of the variable display (Sv1504: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1505, the off display is set, and then the main electric service support process is terminated. By setting the off display, the variable display of the symbol in the normal figure unit 38 is terminated in the state where the off display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1504 that it is not the end timing of the variation display (Sv1504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1506.

In step Sv1506, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0". If it is determined in step Sv1506 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is "0" (Sv1506: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1506 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0" (Sv1506: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1507.

In step Sv1507, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step Sv1508 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If the mode is not the open / close execution mode in step Sv1507 (Sv1507: NO) and the high frequency support mode is in step Sv1508 (Sv1508: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1509 and the electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv1510.

In step Sv1510, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sv1509 is a support winning. If it is determined in step Sv1510 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is the support winning (Sv1510: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1511, the support winning flag is turned ON, and the counter area 64f of the RAM 64 is provided. Set "3" in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. After that, the processing for electric service support is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1510 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not the support winning (Sv1510: NO), the electric service support process is terminated without executing the process of step Sv1511.

If it is determined in step Sv1507 that the open / close execution mode is set (Sv1507: YES), or if it is determined in step Sv1508 that the mode is not in the high frequency support mode (Sv1508: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1512 and the motorized accessory opening lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv1513.

In step Sv1513, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sv1512 is the support winning. If it is determined in step Sv1513 that the support is not won (Sv1513: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1513 that the support is won (Sv1513: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1514, the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , End the processing for main electric service support.

If it is determined in step Sv1502 that the support winning flag is ON (Sv1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1515, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step Sv1515 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sv1515: NO), the pattern variation is being displayed in the normal drawing unit 38, so that the main electric service support process is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1515 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sv1515: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1516.

In step Sv1516, the hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the pattern in the normal drawing unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped and displayed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv1517, the supporting flag is turned ON, and the support winning flag is turned OFF. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sv1501 that the supporting flag is ON (Sv1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1518, and an electric function opening / closing control process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

<Electrical function opening / closing control processing>
Next, the electric function opening / closing control process will be described. The electric service opening / closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 538: Sv1518) of the electric service support process.

FIG. 539 is a flowchart showing the electric function opening / closing control process. In step Sv1601, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in the driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (Sv1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1602.

In step Sv1602, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sv1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sv1602: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. That is, if the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the main electric accessory opening / closing control process ends.

If it is determined in step Sv1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sv1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1603, and a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state is performed. “250” (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sv1603, the process proceeds to step Sv1604.

In step Sv1604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step Sv1605, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step Sv1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sv1605: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Sv1605: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1606 and the supporting flag is turned off. After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sv1601 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sv1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1607, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sv1607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sv1607: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1607 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sv1607: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1608, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state is executed. .. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv1609.

In step Sv1609, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and if it is determined that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (Sv1609: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1610 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step Sv1610 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (Sv1610: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1611, and "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1609 that the open / close execution mode is set (Sv1609: YES), or if it is determined in step Sv1610 that the mode is not in the high frequency support mode (Sv1610: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1612 and the second step is performed. The timer counter area T2 is set to "100" (that is, 0.2 sec). After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

<< 11-6 >> Various processes executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device in order to execute the advance notice effect and the result notification effect will be described. The process executed by the voice emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 540 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed with a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described.

In step Sv1701, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound / light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main MPU 62, and the commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Read sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step Sv1701, the process proceeds to step Sv1702.

In step Sv1702, the pending command correspondence process is executed. In the hold command correspondence process, the process corresponding to the first hold command among the commands stored in step Sv1701 is performed. The details of the pending command support processing will be described later. After executing step Sv1702, the process proceeds to step Sv1703.

In step Sv1703, the game rotation effect setting process is executed. In the game time effect setting process, the effect to be executed in the game time from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the symbol is set. The details of the game time production setting process will be described later. After executing step Sv1703, the process proceeds to step Sv1704.

In step Sv1704, the opening / closing execution mode effect processing is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode production processing, processing related to the production in the opening period, the production in the large winning opening opening / closing processing period, and the production in the ending period is performed. After executing step Sv1704, the process proceeds to step Sv1705.

In step Sv1705, the background effect processing is executed. In the background effect processing, a process of displaying a background moving image determined according to a command indicating a game state received from the main MPU 62 on the symbol display device 41 is performed. For example, processing is performed to display a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode is ongoing, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that the high-probability mode is continuing. .. After executing step Sv1705, the process proceeds to step Sv1706.

In step Sv1706, other processing is executed. The other processing is a process of displaying a demo image (moving image) on the symbol display device 41 when the game is not performed by the player. After executing step Sv1706, the process proceeds to step Sv1707.

In step Sv1707, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the above-mentioned effect processing. After executing step Sv1707, the process proceeds to step Sv1708.

In step Sv1708, the audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read in the above-mentioned BGM process and each effect process. After executing step Sv1708, this timer interrupt process ends.

<Processing for pending commands>
Next, the pending command correspondence process will be described. The hold command correspondence process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 540: Sv1702).

FIG. 541 is a flowchart showing the pending command correspondence process. In step Sv1801, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sv1801 that the hold command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sv1801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1802.

In step Sv1802, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the entry into the first starting port 33. If it is determined in step Sv1802 that the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the entry into the first starting port 33 (Sv1802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1803 and the sound is produced. The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the optical side RAM 94 is executed. The first reserved quantity counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33 in the sound light side MPU 92. In the update process of the first hold quantity counter area, the information of the first hold count counter area is updated to the information of the hold count included in the hold command to be read this time. After executing step Sv1803, the process proceeds to step Sv1804.

In step Sv1804, the special 1 hold continuous effect setting process is executed. The special 1 hold continuous effect setting process is described in detail in the column of "Outline of process by the gaming machine", and determines the execution mode of the precursory notice effect. Specifically, according to the special 1 hold continuous effect setting process, the hold command sent from the main control device 60 is received every time the game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. , When it is determined from the hold command that it is a special 1 hold having hold information (to be executed) to execute a reach effect with a high expectation of a big hit such as a reach effect, the content of the reach effect and By associating the number of special 1 hold information existing before the special 1 hold with the table showing the relationship between the number of appearances of the precursor notice effect and the scheduled execution effect shown in FIG. 509, the special 1 hold is held. It is decided which of the special 1 pending information existing in front is used to execute the precursory notice effect. For example, when the triggered special 1 hold is special 1 hold 4 and the lottery result of the winning lottery for special 1 hold 4 is out of order, but normal reach occurs, the game times for special 1 hold 2 If it is possible to adopt two ways, one is to execute the precursory notice effect in the game times U3 for U2 and the special 1 hold 3, and the other is to execute the precursor notice effect in the game times U3 for the special 1 hold 3. For example, a lottery is used to determine which of the two methods is to be adopted or which is not to be adopted. After executing step Sv1804, the process proceeds to step Sv1806.

In step Sv1802, when it is determined that the hold command to be read this time is not transmitted based on the entry into the first start port 33 (Sv1802: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start. If it is determined that the ball was transmitted based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process proceeds to step Sv1805, and the update process of the second reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94 is performed. Run. The second reserved quantity counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 34 in the sound light side MPU 92. In the second hold quantity counter area update process, the information in the second hold count counter area is updated to the hold count information included in the command to be read this time. After executing step Sv1805, the process proceeds to step Sv1806.

The reason why the processing of step Sv1803 and step Sv1805 is performed as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while the backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the voice emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, if the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information relating to the entry into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the hold information is held in the main control device 60. Is stored and retained, whereas the voice emission control device 90 grasps that the number of reserved information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first hold quantity counter area or the second hold count counter area is counted up each time the voice emission control device 90 receives a hold command, the main control device 60 actually holds the hold storage. There may be an inconvenience that the number of reserved information stored and the number of reserved information grasped by the voice emission control device 90 do not match. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment described above, the main control device 60 transmits the hold command including the information on the number of holds, and the voice emission control device 90 sends the hold command to the command each time the hold command is received. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the number of reserved pieces included is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

In step Sv1806, the update process of the total reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94 is executed. The total number of hold counter areas is the sum of the number of hold information acquired based on the entry into the first start port 33 and the number of hold information acquired based on the entry into the second start port 34. It is a counter area for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92. In the update process, the information of the total reserved quantity counter area is the sum of the information of the reserved quantity measured in the first reserved quantity counter area and the information of the reserved quantity measured in the second reserved quantity counter area. Update to. After executing step Sv1805, the process proceeds to step Sv1807.

If it is determined in step Sv1801 that the hold command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sv1801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sv1807 without executing steps Sv1802 to step Sv1806.

In step Sv1807, the hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display unit 37c (color of the LED lamp to be turned on) based on the number of hold information acquired based on the entry into the first start port 33 specified in step Sv1803. And combination), and the display mode (LED to be turned on) of the second hold display unit 37d based on the number of hold information acquired based on the entry into the second start port 34 specified in step Sv1805. Control the color and combination of lamps). After executing step Sv1807, the process corresponding to this pending command is terminated.

<Game times production setting process>
Next, the game rotation effect setting process will be described. The game rotation effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 540: Sv1703).

FIG. 542 is a flowchart showing the game rotation effect setting process. In step Sv1901, it is determined whether or not the variation command and the type command have been received. If it is determined in step Sv1901 that the change command and the type command have not been received (Sv1901: NO), the game round effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv1901 that the variable command and the type command have been received (Sv1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv1902.

In step Sv1902, the variable command and the type command received this time are read, and from these commands, information on the presence / absence of a big hit, the presence / absence of a time saving grant, the type of a big hit, the presence / absence of a reach, and the fluctuation time is grasped. Then, the grasped information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv1903.

In step Sv1903, the effect pattern setting process is executed. The effect pattern setting process is a process of determining and setting an effect pattern (preliminary effect, content of reach effect, execution timing) to be executed in this game round based on the effect pattern table. The details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sv1903, the process proceeds to step Sv1904.

In step Sv1904, the stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery of this game round is a 16R probability variation jackpot, an 8R probability variation jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, the same symbol is displayed on the effective line L1 (see FIG. 496). The information corresponding to the stop result for which the combination is established is set as the information of the stop symbol this time. Specifically, when the result of the winning lottery of this game round is a 16R probability variation jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot, the same odd-numbered symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, and the same. A combination of even symbols can be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, this selectivity is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the same combination of even-numbered symbols, but instead, the former is selected over the latter. The configuration may have a high rate, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot. Further, when the result of the winning lottery of this game round is an 8R normal jackpot, the same even-numbered symbol combination is selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the big hit lottery of this game is a deviation result, it is determined whether or not reach has occurred from the content of the variable command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of reach, it corresponds to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L1 and the stop result is established in which the combination of reach symbols is established on the effective line L1. The information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L1 and the combination of the reach symbols is not established on the effective line L1. The corresponding information is set as the information of the stop symbol of this time.

In step Sv1905, a process for setting a variation pattern of the current game times is executed. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the current game is specified from the content of the fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information on the stop symbol set in step Sv1904 are combined. Select the corresponding variation pattern. When selecting the variation pattern, the variation pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv1906.

In step Sv1906, the special 1 hold continuous effect process is executed. The special 1 hold continuous production process is described in detail in the column of "Overview of processing by the gaming machine". The process for setting the effect of appearing bubbles, the charge effect, etc. is executed. After executing step Sv1906, the process proceeds to step Sv1907. In step Sv1907, the special 2 hold effect process is executed. The special 2 hold effect processing is described in detail in the column of "Outline of processing by the gaming machine". Executes the process for setting the effect that appears. After executing step Sv1907, the process proceeds to step Sv1908.

In step Sv1908, the effect pattern set in step Sv1903, the stop symbol set in step Sv1904, the information of the fluctuation pattern set in step Sv1905, and various effects obtained in step Sv1906 and step Sv1907 in this game round. Set the information in the production command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv1909, and the effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect content corresponding to the received effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step Sv1909, the process proceeds to step Sv1910.

In step Sv1910, the update process at the start of fluctuation is executed. The update process at the start of the fluctuation is a process for updating the hold display in the first hold display area Ds1 or the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. The details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later. After executing step Sv1910, the game round effect setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 542: Sv1903) of the game turn effect setting process.

FIG. 543 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process. In step Sv2001, a random number RN for the effect pattern is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound / light side RAM 94. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv2002.

In step Sv2002, a process for specifying the effect pattern table is executed. The effect pattern table is three-dimensional tabular data in which the effect pattern to be executed in the game times, the fluctuation time, and the random number RN for the effect pattern are data elements. In the effect pattern table storage area 93a of the ROM 93, various types of effect pattern tables are stored according to the presence / absence of a big hit, the presence / absence of time saving, and the presence / absence of reach. In step Sv2002, one effect pattern table is specified from these effect pattern tables. Specifically, the effect pattern table storage area of the ROM 93 is based on the presence / absence of the jackpot, the presence / absence of the time saving, the type of the jackpot, and the presence / absence of the reach, which are grasped in step Sv1902 of the game rotation effect setting process (FIG. 542). One production pattern table is specified from 93a. After executing step Sv2002, the process proceeds to step Sv2003.

In step Sv2003, with reference to the effect pattern table specified in Sv2002, the fluctuation time grasped in step Sv1902 of the game round effect setting process (FIG. 542) and the value of the random number RN for the current effect pattern obtained by step Sv2001. Acquires the production pattern corresponding to and. After executing step Sv2003, the process proceeds to step Sv2004.

In step Sv2004, the effect pattern acquired in step Sv2003 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in this game round. After executing step Sv2004, the present effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Update process at the start of fluctuation>
Next, the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of the fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 542: Sv1910) of the game rotation effect setting process.

FIG. 544 is a flowchart showing an update process at the start of fluctuation. In step Sv2101, it is determined whether or not the variable command received this time is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33. If it is determined in step Sv2101 that the variable command received this time is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33 (Sv2101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sv2102. The information in the first reserved quantity counter area is updated so that the number stored in the first reserved quantity counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv2104.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sv2101 that the variable command received this time does not relate to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33 (Sv2101: NO), step Sv2103 is performed. The information in the second reserved quantity counter area is updated so that the number stored in the second reserved quantity counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is decremented by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv2104.

In step Sv2104, the information in the total hold quantity counter area is updated so that the total hold count stored in the total hold quantity counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1. After that, the update process at the start of fluctuation is terminated.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, the process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly the main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and the processes that are executed when a command is received from the voice emission control device 90. There is a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes the main process after the power is turned on, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. If the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, the main process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 545 is a flowchart showing the main process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described.

In step Sv2201, the initial setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the character information in the compressed format stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, the information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also, make other settings necessary for initialization. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv2202.

In step Sv2202, the interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process executed every time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 546 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sv2301, the command storage process is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 547 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed by detecting the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105. In the V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute the display instruction.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal generated in VDP105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is performed every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Therefore, since the VDP 105 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image is started or displayed during the drawing of the image. It is possible to suppress the expansion of an image accompanying a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information inside is stored. Hereinafter, the processing details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described.

In step Sv2401, command correspondence processing is executed. In the command correspondence process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 546), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when an effect command is stored, control of drawing and displaying an image is started so that the effect mode specified by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, and when it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of drawing and displaying an image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command correspondence process (Sv2401), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so that there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the voice emission control device 90 and the effect is started, it is highly possible that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop symbol set by the voice emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the mode. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41.

In step Sv2402, the display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command correspondence process (Sv2401) or the like. .. Then, the process proceeds to step Sv2403.

In step Sv2403, task processing is executed. In the task process, the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting process (Sv2402). In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step Sv2404.

In step Sv2404, the drawing process is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character determined by the task process (Sv2403) are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on these information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received at the time of the previous V interrupt processing on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process proceeds to step Sv2405, other processing is executed, and then the V interrupt processing is terminated. As described above, an example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described.

<< 11-7 >> Action / Effect:
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the normal time when the support mode is the low frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the special 1 hold is announced as the special 1 The effect image of the chance eye is displayed consecutively for the predetermined number of game times of the hold. In this normal time, the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed, and when the electric accessory short opening is won, the electric accessory 34a is opened for a short time. As a result, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, a specific number of game times for the special 2 hold, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number (4) of the special 2 hold, will be executed. Even in the game round, the effect image of the chance eye is displayed. Further, the effect image of the chance eye is displayed in the game times of the special 1 hold, which is continuously executed after the end of the game times in which the effect image of the chance eye is executed a specific number of times. For this reason, in the normal state, when there is hold information in the special 1 hold that is scheduled to perform a production with a high expectation of winning a big hit in the lottery, the player can see the effect image of the chance eye. On the other hand, it is possible to give a notice that there is a possibility that the above-mentioned hold information having a high expectation of winning a big hit may exist in the special 1 hold. Further, as described above, when the game times for the special 2 hold are executed a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number (4 pieces) of the special 2 hold, in the middle of the advance notice effect, the game times are also performed. By displaying the effect image of the chance eye, it is possible to digest the special 2 hold without interrupting the flow of the advance notice effect.

On the other hand, when the special 2 hold exists and the effect image of the chance eye is always displayed in the special 2 hold, the effect image of the chance eye is unnecessarily repeated, and the advance notice effect is produced. There was a risk that the reliability of the advance notice production would decrease due to the violation of the relationship between the number of appearances of the image and the production scheduled to be executed. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the determination result of the second determination is negative in the game round for the special 1 hold, the effect image of the chance eye is switched to the effect image of the same color as the symbol. Therefore, when the determination result of the second determination is negative, it is possible to suppress the appearance of an extra production image of the chance eye. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the reliability of the advance notice effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Specifically, in the case 1 (see FIGS. 513 and 514) in which the result of the winning lottery in the special 1 hold 2 is out of order and the normal reach is obtained, the game round U11 for the special 1 hold 1 is first executed. In the game round U11, the precursor notice effect (first time) in which the chance eye and the bubble BL appear is executed. If the electric role short opening is won in the electric accessory opening lottery in the middle of the game round U11 and the game ball enters the second starting port 34 in the middle of the game round U11 for the special 1 hold 1, the ball enters. The game time V11 for the special 2 hold 1 acquired by the above is executed following the game time U11, and in the game time V11, the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance eye effect and the effect that the bubble BL appears are executed. To. These productions will be the second precursory notice production. In the case of Case 1, when the game round for the special 2 hold is executed in the middle of the precursor notice effect, the notice effect is displayed by displaying the effect image of the chance eye even in the game round for the special 2 hold. It is possible to digest the special 2 hold without discomfort without interrupting the flow of.

In case 2 (see FIGS. 515 and 516) in which the result of the winning lottery in the special 1 hold 4 is out of order and a super reach occurs, the game times U21 for the special 1 hold 1 are first executed, and the game times U21 are executed. At U21, the precursory notice effect (first time) in which the chance eye and the bubble BL appear is executed. Next, the game round U22 for the special 1 hold 2 is executed, and in the game round U22, the precursory warning effect (second time) in which the chance eye and the bubble BL appear is executed. If a game ball enters the second starting port 34 in the middle of the game times U22 for the special 1 hold 2, the game times V21 for the special 2 hold 1 acquired by the entry follows the game times U21. In the game round V21, the stop display β12, which is a special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect, is executed. The color of the symbol same color in the special 1 continuous production continuation symbol same color production is green, and before the execution scheduled production (see FIG. 517) associated with this green and the game round V21 for the special 2 hold 1. It is configured to match the scheduled execution effect (see FIG. 509) associated with the number of appearances of the precursory notice effect including the executed chance eye. After the end of the game round V21 for the special 2 hold 1, the game round U23 for the special 1 hold 3 is executed, and in the game round U23, the sign notice effect (third time) in which the chance eye and the bubble BL appear is executed. To. Next, the game round U24 for the special 1 hold 4 is executed, and in the game round U24, a super reach effect and a stop display corresponding to the disconnection are performed.

In the case of Case 2, the precursory warning effect including the chance eye is performed twice, then the effect of the same color as the green pattern is executed, and then the precursory advance notice effect including the chance eye is continued once (3 times in total). Eventually, a production that will be out of the question with Super Reach will be executed. When the player saw a series of productions, the precursor notice production including the chance eye appeared twice, and the player recognized that the scheduled performance was more than the normal reach, and the color of the same color as the pattern became green. So, I reconfirmed that the scheduled production was more than normal reach, and then recognized that the scheduled performance was more than super reach because the precursory notice production including the chance was the third time, and the final I know that I was out of the game with Super Reach. As a result, the player does not feel any discomfort, and the reliability of the advance notice effect is improved.

On the other hand, in Comparative Example 1 shown in FIG. 519, after the precursory warning effect including the chance eye appears four times in a row, the effect of being out of the super reach is executed. This series of effects violates the relationship between the number of appearances of the precursory notice effects and the scheduled execution effects shown in FIG. 509, and gives a sense of discomfort to the player who remembers this relationship. More specifically, a skilled player who recognized that the precursory warning effect including the chance eye appeared four times in a row said, "In this pachinko machine 10, the precursory advance notice effect including the chance eye appeared four times in a row. In some cases, the jackpot will definitely be won after the special reach production is executed, so in this game round U24, the jackpot will definitely be won after the special reach production is executed. " We are looking forward to the result of the game round U24. However, in Comparative Example 1, despite the fact that the precursory notice effect including the chance eye appeared four times in a row, the super reach effect was executed instead of the special reach effect in the game round U24, and the lottery result was out of order. turn into. Therefore, the player will be disappointed and will have the feeling that "the production of this pachinko machine 10 cannot be trusted". As a result, according to Comparative Example 1, the reliability of the advance notice effect is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, the player does not feel any discomfort with respect to the series of effects, so that the reliability of the advance notice effects can be increased.

According to the case 2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game time V21 for the special 2 hold 1 is configured to display the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect. In the game times V21 for the special 2 hold 1, neither the chance eye effect for the continuation of the special 1 continuous effect nor the symbol same color effect for the continuation of the special 1 continuous effect is displayed, and after the end of the game time V21 for the special 2 hold 1. In the game round U23 for the special 1 hold 3 to be executed, the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect may be displayed. According to this modification, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role short opening is won in the electric accessory opening lottery in the normal time and the game round for the special 2 hold is executed. In the game times for special 1 hold, which is executed consecutively after the end of the game times for special 2 hold, you can reconfirm the expectation of big hit winning such as reach production by hold continuous production, and moreover, a series. Since the player does not feel any discomfort with the production of the above, the reliability of the advance notice production can be increased.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect image of the bubbles included in the precursory notice effect is displayed in the predetermined number of game times for the special 1 hold. For this reason, when there is hold information in the special 1 hold that is scheduled to perform a production with a high expectation of winning a big hit in the lottery, the bubble production image report is used to give the player the special 1 hold. It is possible to give a notice that there is a possibility that the above-mentioned pending information with high expectation of winning a big hit may exist. Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the support mode is the low frequency support mode, and the lottery mode is the low probability mode. , A specific game state in which the game times for the special 2 hold can be executed may occur. Then, the image SH of the shellfish is displayed during the occurrence of the specific gaming state. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute the game times for the special 2 hold, and by displaying the image SH of the shellfish in the game times for the special 2 hold for this long time, the player's interest is Can be improved. On the other hand, since the game times for the special 2 hold will be a long time, when the game times for the special 2 hold are completed, the special 1 hold executed before the game times for the special 2 hold is started. There was a risk that some players would completely forget that the notice effect had appeared in the predetermined number of game times. In addition, by displaying the image SH of the shellfish in the game times for the special 2 hold, it becomes easier to forget that the notice effect appeared in the predetermined number of game times for the special 1 hold. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the specific game image is displayed and the game times for the special 2 hold are executed, the pachinko machine 10 appears in the predetermined number of game times for the special 1 hold. Since the captured image including the bubble effect image is continuously displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting that the advance notice effect has appeared, and the advance notice effect regarding the special 1 hold is provided. It can remind you of what's going on. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Specifically, in the normal state, four special 1 holds from special 1 hold 1 to special 1 hold 4 are stored, and in special 1 hold 4, the winning lottery result is out of order and super reach occurs. In 3 (see FIGS. 520 and 521), the electric accessory opening lottery was performed by the game ball passing through the through gates 35a and 35b in the middle of the game round U32 for the special 1 hold 2 (time t31). It is assumed that the electric accessory 34a is opened for a long time (5 seconds) when the electric accessory chief is elected to be released. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, all or a part of the image of the precursory notice effect executed in the game time U32 for the special 1 hold 2 executed immediately before the game times V31 to V35 for the special 2 hold is captured. (Save), and the reduced image of the obtained captured image (still image) is displayed in the special 2 dedicated effect display area SA as the special 2 dedicated effect. In addition, in the game times V31 to V35 for the special 2 hold, the image SH of the shell is displayed, and as the game times V31 to V35 for the special 2 hold progress, the two shells open little by little. ..

Here, in the case of Case 3, consider a configuration in which the special 2 dedicated effect is not executed in each of the game times V31 to V35 for the special 2 hold. Assuming that this configuration is Comparative Example 2, the Comparative Example 2 has the following problems. The maximum number of game times executed based on the special 2 hold is five, and the time spent for the five game times is usually a long time (for example, several minutes). In particular, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a dedicated production using the image SH of the shellfish is performed, and the time of the game round is longer. For this reason, in Comparative Example 2, when the continuous effect of holding special 1 hold is interrupted due to the execution of the game times for special 2 hold, the advance notice is given by the game times of special 1 hold that have been executed so far. Some players completely forgot that the production had appeared.

On the other hand, according to the case 3 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in each of the game times V31 to V35 for the special 2 hold, the special 1 hold executed immediately before switching to the game time of the special 2 hold. Since the captured images of all or part of the precursory notice effect that appeared in the game times will continue to be displayed as a special 2 exclusive effect, it will be forgotten for the player that the precursory advance notice effect has appeared. It is possible to remind us that the continuous production of the special 1 hold is continuing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the case 3 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the captured image is displayed in all of the game times V31 to V35 for the special 2 hold, but as a modification of the special 2 The captured image may be displayed only in the last game round (game round V35 in case 3) of each game round V31 to V35 for holding. Further, the game times for the special 1 hold that are continuously executed after the end of each game time V31 to V35 for the special 2 hold without displaying the captured image in each game time V31 to V35 for the special 2 hold. (In case 3, the game round U33) may be configured to display the captured image. According to these modifications, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special 1 hold is executed and the special 2 is won in the electric accessory opening lottery in the normal time. When the game times for the special 2 hold are executed more than the maximum number of holds, the game times for the special 1 hold that are continuously executed after the end of the game times for the special 2 hold. It can be reminded that the hold continuous production of hold is continuing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<< 11-8 >> Modification example of the eleventh embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be carried out in various embodiments without departing from the gist thereof, and for example, the following modifications are also possible. In the modified examples described below, the description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as those of the above embodiment will be omitted.

<< 11-8-1 >> Modification 1: Modification 1:
As a modification of the eleventh embodiment, the display on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 may be configured by a plurality of layer structures. Specifically, i) the background layer for displaying the background, ii) the main display area MA for displaying the combination of symbols arranged on the upper side (front side) of the background layer, and the first start port hold. A symbol layer for displaying the area Ds1, the reserved digestion area Dm, and the second start port reserved area Ds2 (see FIG. 493), and iii) arranged on the upper side (front side) of the symbol layer to make the bubble BL appear. It may be performed by a layer structure having at least an effect, a special effect 2, a charge effect (female character WM), an upper layer for displaying an image SH of a shell, and the like. According to this configuration, drawing can be controlled independently for each layer, so that control can be simplified.

<< 11-8-2 >> Modification 2:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modification, when displaying the symbol same color effect for continuing the special 1 continuous effect, it was executed in the game round for the special 1 hold that was executed immediately before the game round for the special 2 hold. It is equal to the expectation of big hit winning such as reach production corresponding to the specified number of appearances by specifying the number of appearances of the precursory notice effect (hereinafter, simply referred to as "expectation degree by precursor advance notice effect"). It is configured to display the special 1 continuous production continuation design same color production with the same color of the design corresponding to the degree of expectation. On the other hand, as a modification, when displaying the symbol same color effect for the continuation of the special 1 continuous effect, the precursor notice effect executed in the game time for the special 1 hold executed immediately before the game time for the special 2 hold. Even if a color with the same pattern color (hereinafter referred to as a color with a high degree of expectation) associated with a higher expectation level than the expected degree appears, the execution schedule effect corresponding to the color with the same pattern color is the trigger. As long as the effect scheduled to be executed in the special 1 hold is not exceeded, the same color effect of the symbol for continuing the special 1 continuous effect may be displayed with the color of the above high expectation. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 512, since the precursory notice effect in the game round is the second for the special 1 hold executed immediately before the game round for the special 2 hold, the degree of expectation is normal reach. , It may be configured to display a special 1 continuous production continuation symbol same color production which is red corresponding to a higher expectation than the normal reach, for example, super reach. That is, it may be configured to display a combination of symbols showing numbers 4, 5 and 6, which are red symbols. According to this configuration, since the execution scheduled effect in the special 1 hold 4 that became the trigger is super reach, even if the same color of the red pattern appears in the game round V21 of the special 2 hold 1, the player feels uncomfortable. In addition, even if the third precursory notice effect appears in the game round U23 of the special 1 hold 3 does not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

<< 11-8-3 >> Modification 3:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modification, when the execution schedule effect for the special 1 hold that is the trigger has a sufficiently high expectation of winning a big hit, for example, if it is a special reach, the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol is used. A picture (for example, a specific stage) dedicated to special reach, which is different from the same color effect, may be prepared and the picture may be displayed in the game times for the special 2 hold. Further, as another modification, in the game rounds for the special 2 hold, the advance notice effect is not executed (that is, the effect is not performed), and the game rounds for the special 2 hold are continuously performed. The execution of the special 1 hold continuous effect in the game round for the special 1 hold to be executed may be canceled.

<< 11-8-4 >> Modification 4:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modification, the bubbles are displayed as a part of the precursory notice effect, but instead of the bubbles, other patterns such as petals, confetti, jellyfish, butterflies, etc. may be displayed. good. Further, instead of the floating pattern, a pattern that does not move, a specific background, a stage, a scene, or the like may be displayed. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the chance eyes is stopped and displayed, and the effect that the bubble BL appears during the stop display is set as a precursor warning effect. The combination of is not a chance, and the effect that only the bubble BL appears during the stop display of the symbol may be used as a precursory notice effect. Even in this configuration, the bubble BL can be replaced with another pattern, a specific background, a stage, or a scene as described above.

<< 11-8-5 >> Modification 5:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modification, a chance eye appears as a precursory notice effect in which the execution scheduled effect is determined by the number of appearances. On the other hand, as a modification, the combination of symbols may not be a chance, and a specific character (a symbol in the shape of a real or fictitious person, animal, etc.) may appear. The scheduled production will be determined by the number of appearances of a specific character. Further, in the eleventh embodiment and its modification, the same color as the symbol appears as a notice effect in which the execution scheduled effect is determined regardless of the number of appearances. On the other hand, as a modification, the combination of symbols may not be a combination having the same color as the symbols, but may be configured to execute an effect in which a specific background zone appears. The color (or color tone) of a specific background zone determines the effect to be executed. Further, as a notice effect in which the execution scheduled effect is determined regardless of the number of appearances, a specific character may appear.

<< 11-8-6 >> Modification 6:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modification, the game times for the special 1 hold executed in the normal time and the special 2 hold preferentially executed in the middle of the game times for the special 1 hold. It is possible to display an effect image whose execution schedule is determined by the number of appearances in each of the game times and the game times for the special 1 hold that are continuously executed after the end of the game times for the special 2 hold. However, the effect images whose execution schedule effects are determined by the number of appearances do not necessarily have to be the same image, and may be replaced with images of the same type although they do not completely match. For example, a character image that can be specified by the same attribute, for example, a seafood character image, a female character image, or a specific fellow character image may be used as a specific character image whose execution schedule production is determined by the number of appearances.

<< 11-8-7 >> Modification 7:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modification, the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, and the lottery mode is the low-probability mode. On the other hand, as a modification, a specific effect image may be displayed at any time during normal times, the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the specific effect image is specified. The specific effect image may be displayed only when the conditions are satisfied (hereinafter referred to as a specific normal time). As the above specific conditions, the following i) to v) and the like can be adopted.
i) After a specific effect: After a specific reach effect, etc. is executed, etc.
ii) After the specific game state: After winning a big hit in the winning lottery, the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the lottery mode is the high probability mode, after the high probability high support state is completed, or the support mode is high frequency. After the high support state, which is the support mode, is finished, etc.
iii) After a specific time has passed: After a specific time has passed from a specific timing.
iv) After a certain number of games have passed: After a certain number of games have passed since a specific timing.
v) After winning a specific lottery: After the lottery result of a specific lottery is won.
According to this modification, as in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the player does not feel any discomfort with respect to the series of productions by the continuous holding productions, so that the reliability of the advance notice productions is increased. be able to.

<< 11-8-8 >> Modification 8:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modification, whichever is the lottery result of the electric accessory opening lottery that triggered the change of the special 2 hold when the game round V11 for the special 2 hold 1 is started to be executed. Although the first determination is made, the first determination may be made based on the number of special 2 holds, instead of making the first determination based on the lottery result of the electric accessory opening lottery. Specifically, when the number of special 2 hold is 2 or less, the lottery result of the electric accessory release lottery is regarded as the short open of the electric role, and the special 2 hold is regarded as a special 1 consecutive game. If the chance eye effect for continuation of production or the same color production of the symbol for continuation of special 1 continuous production is displayed and the number of special 2 hold exceeds 2, the lottery result of the electric accessory release lottery is that the electric director is open. Assuming that, the special 2 special effect is displayed in the game times for the special 2 hold. Even with this configuration, it is possible to easily perform an effect according to the number of times the game is executed for the special 2 hold.

<< 11-8-9 >> Modification 9:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modification, when the special 2 hold game times are started to be executed in the middle of the special 1 hold game times by the special 2 hold effect process, the special 1 hold game times are started. When the production of the game times for the special 2 hold accumulated on the way is a production including the chance eye production for the continuation of the special 1 continuous production, a series of hold continuous production until the production for the special 1 hold that became the trigger Whether or not the flow matches the relationship between the number of appearances of the precursory warning effect and the scheduled execution effect (see FIG. 509) was determined as the second determination. On the other hand, as a modification, the second determination is not only when the game round for the special 2 hold stored in the middle of the special 1 hold is started, but also for the special 2 hold. It may be configured to be performed at the start of each game round from the round to the game round for the special 1 hold that triggered the advance notice effect. In this configuration, in the case 2 described above (see FIGS. 515 and 516), the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance eye effect is displayed in the game round V21 for the special 2 hold 1, and the special 2 hold 1 is displayed. The special 1 continuous production continuation chance eye effect scheduled to be executed in the game time U23 for the special 1 hold 3 executed after the end of the game time V21 is switched to the special 1 continuous production continuation symbol same color production and displayed. It can also be applied to the modified example.

<< 11-8-10 >> Modification 10:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modification, when starting the game round for the special 2 hold stored in the middle of the special 1 hold game round, the special 2 saved in the middle of the special 1 hold game round is started. When the production of the game times for the hold is a production that includes the chance eye production for the continuation of the special 1 continuous production, the series of flow of the hold continuous production up to the production for the special 1 hold that became the trigger is the precursor notice production. Whether or not it matches the relationship between the number of appearances and the scheduled production (see FIG. 509) is judged as the second judgment, and if the judgment result of the second judgment is negative, the special 1 continuous production scheduled to be executed is continued. The special 1 continuous production continuation pattern was switched to the same color and displayed. On the other hand, as a modification, in the game times for the special 2 hold accumulated in the middle of the game times of the special 1 hold, originally, the chance eye effect for continuing the special 1 continuous effect is displayed, and the special 2 When the special 1 continuous production continuation chance eye effect is displayed in the game time when the game time for the hold is started to be executed, the number of appearances of the precursor notice effect until the effect of the game time is completed is the trigger. Whether or not it matches the number of appearances of the precursory notice effect corresponding to the execution scheduled effect for the special 1 hold that has become is determined as a new second judgment (hereinafter referred to as a new second judgment), and a new second judgment is made. If the determination result of is negative, the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance eye effect scheduled to be executed in the game round for the special 2 hold may be switched to the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect and displayed. In this case, even in each of the special 1 hold game times that are continuously executed after the end of the special 2 hold game times, the chance eye effect is originally displayed, and each special 1 hold game time is displayed. When the chance eye effect is displayed in the game time when the execution starts, the number of appearances of the precursor notice effect until the effect of the game time ends corresponds to the execution scheduled effect for the special 1 hold that was the trigger. It is judged as the new second judgment whether or not it matches the number of appearances of the precursory notice effect, and if the judgment result of the new second judgment is negative, the chance eye effect scheduled to be executed in the game round for the special 1 hold is produced. Is configured to be displayed by switching to the same color effect of the pattern. Hereinafter, a specific example will be given in detail.

FIG. 548 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing the state of holding the special 1 in the modified example 10. As shown in the figure, it is assumed that four special 1 holds from special 1 hold 1 to special 1 hold 4 are stored, and in special 1 hold 4, it is determined that the winning lottery result is out of order and super reach occurs. .. The voice emission control device 90 executes the special 1 hold continuous effect process triggered by receiving the hold command for the special 1 hold 4 determined to generate the super reach from the main control device 60.

FIG. 549 is a time chart illustrating the effect of the special 1 hold executed by the special 1 hold continuous effect process and the effect of the special 2 hold executed by the special 2 hold effect process in the modification 10. .. As shown in the figure, first, the game round U41 for the special 1 hold 1 is executed by the special 1 hold continuous effect process. The game times U41 for the special 1 hold 1 are the same as the game times U21 for the special 1 hold 1 described with reference to FIG. 516. In the game round U41 for the special 1 hold 1, the variable display A11 is first executed. Subsequently, the stop display A12 that causes the chance eye to appear is executed. Subsequently, the bubble appearance effect A13 is executed. With the end of the bubble appearance effect A13, the game round U41 for the special 1 hold 1 ends. The stop display A12 and the bubble appearance effect A13 constitute a precursory notice effect (first time).

In the middle of the game round U41 for this special 1 hold 1 (time t41), in the electric accessory opening lottery performed by the game ball passing through the through gates 35a and 35b, the electric combination short opening was won and the electric combination was won. It is assumed that the object 34a is opened for 0.6 seconds and one game ball enters the second starting port 34. In this case, after the end of the game round U41 for the special 1 hold 1 (time t42), the game round V41 for the special 2 hold 1 stored based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 Execution starts. The execution of the game round V41 for the special 2 hold 1 is executed by the special 2 hold effect process by the voice emission control device 90.

According to the special 2 hold effect processing, which is the lottery result of the electric accessory opening lottery that triggered the execution of the change of the special 2 hold when starting the execution of the game round V41 for the special 2 hold 1. The first determination is made, and when it is determined by the first determination that the lottery result of the electric accessory opening lottery is the electric combination short opening, the new second determination described above is performed. Then, when the determination result of the new second determination is affirmative, the special 1 continuous production continuation chance eye effect is displayed in the game round V41 for the special 2 hold 1. That is, the lottery result of the electric bonus opening lottery that triggered the change of the special 2 hold is the short open of the electric role, and the effect of the special 2 hold saved in the middle of the game round of the special 1 hold. The number of appearances of the precursor notice effect (here, it is the second time) until the end of the effect of the game time is the trigger. As a new second determination, it is determined whether or not it matches the number of appearances of the precursory notice effect corresponding to the execution scheduled effect (here, deviation from the super reach is applicable) for 1 hold. Here, since the determination result of the new second determination is affirmative, the special 1 continuous effect continuation chance eye effect scheduled to be executed is displayed.

After the end of the game round V41 for the special 2 hold 1 (time t43), the game round U42 for the special 1 hold 2 is executed by the special 1 hold continuous effect process. In addition, when starting the execution of the game round U42, a new second determination is made. Even if the chance eye production is executed in the game round U42, it is the third precursor notice production, and the number of appearances that is the third time is the scheduled execution production for the special 1 hold that triggered it (here, from Super Reach). Since it is consistent with the number of appearances of the precursory notice effect corresponding to (corresponding to the deviation of), the judgment result of the new second judgment here is also affirmative. For this reason, the chance eye effect is displayed in the game round U42 for the special 1 hold 2.

After the end of the game round U42 for the special 1 hold 2 (time t44), the game round U43 for the special 1 hold 3 is executed. In addition, when starting the execution of the game round U43, a new second determination is made. If the chance eye effect is executed in the game round U43, it will be the 4th precursor notice effect, and the number of appearances that is the 4th time will be the execution scheduled effect for the special 1 hold that was the trigger (here, it is out of the super reach). Applicable), which violates the number of appearances of the precursory notice effect. When the number of appearances of the precursor notice effect reaches the 4th time, the jackpot winning from the special reach is confirmed as the execution scheduled effect, and it violates the deviation from the super reach which is the execution scheduled effect for the special 1 hold that triggered it. .. Therefore, the determination result of the new second determination is negative, and the chance eye effect scheduled to be executed in the game round U43 for the special 1 hold 3 is switched to the symbol same color effect and displayed. In this case, the color of the pattern same color effect is the color corresponding to the number of appearances of the effect of the chance eye executed before the start of the game round U43 for the special 1 hold 3. Specifically, since the number of appearances of the chance eye effect is 3, the color of the same color as the pattern is red.

After the end of the game round U43 for the special 1 hold 3 (time t45), the game round U44 for the special 1 hold 4 is executed. The game times U44 for the special 1 hold 4 are the same as the game times U24 for the special 1 hold 4 described with reference to FIG. 516.

According to this modification 10, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role short opening is won in the electric accessory opening lottery in the normal time and the game round for the special 2 hold is executed. In the game rounds for the special 1 hold that are executed consecutively after the end of the game rounds for the special 2 hold, it is possible to reconfirm the expectation of the jackpot winning such as the reach production by the hold continuous production, and moreover. Since the player does not feel any discomfort with the series of effects, it is possible to increase the reliability of the advance notice effects.

<< 11-8-11 >> Modification 11:
In the modified example 10 of the eleventh embodiment, when the chance eye effect to be executed is switched to the symbol same color effect and displayed, the same execution schedule effect is supported for the execution schedule effect corresponding to the number of appearances of the chance eye. It is configured to display the same color as the design of the same color. On the other hand, as a modified example, when the channel effect to be executed is switched to the pattern same color effect and displayed, the color pattern with a higher expectation of winning a big hit is higher than the execution scheduled effect corresponding to the number of appearances of the chance eye. It may be configured to display the same color. Hereinafter, a specific example will be given in detail.

FIG. 550 is a time chart for explaining the effect of the special 1 hold executed by the special 1 hold continuous effect process and the effect of the special 2 hold executed by the special 2 hold effect process in the modification 11. .. In the modified example 11, four special 1 holds from special 1 hold 1 to special 1 hold 4 are stored, and in special 1 hold 4, it is determined that the result of the winning lottery is a big hit and a special reach occurs. do.

Also in the present modification 11, the electric motor short opening is performed in the electric accessory opening lottery performed by the game ball passing through the through gates 35a and 35b in the middle of the game round U41 for the special 1 hold 1 (time t51). It is assumed that the electric accessory 34a is opened for 0.6 seconds and one game ball enters the second starting port 34. In this case, after the end of the game round U41 for the special 1 hold 1 (time t52), the game round V41 for the special 2 hold 1 stored based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 Will be executed. In addition, when starting the execution of the game round V41, the first determination is made as to which is the lottery result of the electric accessory opening lottery that triggered the execution of the change of the special 2 hold, and the electric combination is determined by the first determination. When it is determined that the lottery result of the object opening lottery is the short opening of the electric motor, the third determination is made. In the third determination, the execution scheduled effect (hereinafter referred to as the first execution scheduled effect) corresponding to the number of appearances of the effect of the chance eye executed before the start of the game round V41 and the special 1 hold that became the trigger. Is compared with the execution scheduled production (hereinafter referred to as the second execution scheduled production). When it is determined by the third judgment that the expected degree of the first execution scheduled production is less than or equal to the expected degree of the second execution scheduled production, a lottery is performed between the first execution scheduled production and the second execution scheduled production (hereinafter). , Called a production lottery) to determine the production to be performed. That is, the chance eye effect, the pattern same color effect of the same expected degree as the expected degree when the already executed chance eye effect is displayed, and the expected degree when the already executed chance eye effect is displayed. The effect to be executed is decided by lottery from the same color effect of the color of the color with higher expectation. Here, as a result of the effect lottery, it is assumed that the same game round V41 for the special 2 hold 1 as in the modification 10 is executed.

Then, after the end of the game round V41 for the special 2 hold 1 (time t53), the game round U42 for the special 1 hold 2 is executed. When the third determination is executed when the game round U42 is started to be executed, and it is determined by this third determination that the expected degree of the first execution scheduled effect is equal to or less than the expected degree of the second execution scheduled effect. In addition, the above-mentioned production lottery will be held. As a result of the production lottery, it is assumed that the same game round U42 for the special 1 hold 2 as in the modification 10 is executed.

Then, after the end of the game round U42 for the special 1 hold 2 (time t54), the game round U43 for the special 1 hold 3 is executed. When the third determination is executed when the game round U43 is started to be executed, and it is determined by this third determination that the expected degree of the first execution scheduled effect is equal to or less than the expected degree of the second execution scheduled effect. In addition, the above-mentioned production lottery will be held. As a result of the production lottery, in the game round U43 for Special 1 Hold 3, the chance eye production scheduled to be executed is switched to the same color production of the color with the higher expectation than the expectation when the chance eye production is executed. It shall be displayed. Specifically, since the number of appearances of the effect of the chance eye is three times, the golden pattern same color effect having a higher expectation than the red color corresponding to the three times is displayed. Since the execution scheduled production for the special 1 hold that became the trigger is a big hit confirmation from the special reach, even if the color of the design same color production is gold, the advance notice production will not collapse.

After the end of the game round U43 for the special 1 hold 3 (time t55), the game round U44 for the special 1 hold 4 is executed. In the game round U44 for the special 1 hold 4, the variable display I11 is first executed. Subsequently, the special reach effect I12 is executed. Subsequently, the stop display I13 corresponding to the winning / failing result of the winning lottery being a big hit is executed. With the end of the stop display I13, the game round U44 for the special 1 hold 4 ends.

According to this modification 11, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role short opening is won in the electric accessory opening lottery in the normal time and the game round for the special 2 hold is executed. In the game rounds for the special 1 hold that are executed consecutively after the end of the game rounds for the special 2 hold, it is possible to reconfirm the expectation of the jackpot winning such as the reach production by the hold continuous production, and moreover. Since the player does not feel any discomfort with the series of effects, it is possible to increase the reliability of the advance notice effects.

<< 11-8-12 >> Modification 12:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the outer frame provided in the pachinko machine is not limited to wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, and steel (carbon steel) or cast iron. , Cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel and the like. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., and steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, etc. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , Stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel and the like. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame inaccessibly to the outer frame and a function of locking the front door frame inaccessibly to the inner frame. A cylinder lock is provided, but after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, the first cylinder lock having the function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so as not to be opened, and the front door frame are provided. A configuration may be adopted in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so as not to be opened is provided separately. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modified examples, the image of the chance eye included in the precursory notice effect as a specific effect image in succession to the predetermined number of game times for the special 1 hold in the normal state of the predetermined game state. Was configured to display. On the other hand, as a modification, the specific effect image may be a specific character that can be counted as the number of appearances of the precursory notice effect, or may be a background image to be displayed at normal times. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration is adopted in which a rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side in the front view, but the rotation shaft is on the right side in the front view. The provided configuration may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration is adopted in which a rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side in the front view, but this rotation shaft is on the right side in the front view. The configuration provided in may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., and steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, etc. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the pachinko machine adopts a configuration including an upper plate and a lower plate, but a configuration in which the lower plate is omitted and only the upper plate is provided may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the number of times specified is not less than the upper limit of the special 2 hold based on the fact that the electric accessory 34a is in the open state and the game ball enters the second starting port 34. The above-mentioned specific effect image was displayed in the game times for the special 2 hold. On the other hand, as a modification, the special 2 hold stored in the high support state (hereinafter referred to as the remaining special 2 hold) is executed after the support mode shifts from the high support mode, which is the high frequency support mode, to the normal state. It may be configured to display the above-mentioned specific effect image in the game times for (calling). Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the specific effect image is displayed in the above-mentioned game times for the special 1 hold that is continuously executed after the end of the game times for the special 2 hold for the specific number of times. rice field. On the other hand, as a modification, the specific effect image may be displayed in the game round for the special 1 hold that is continuously executed after the game round of the remaining special 2 hold. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side of the front view is adopted, but the configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side of the front view may be adopted. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation handles are provided on both the right side of the front view and the left side of the front view. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is holding the operation handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operation handle) is provided on the operation handle. However, a configuration in which this touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the launching means capable of launching the game ball, for example, a configuration in which the game ball is launched by using an elastic force such as a spring. Alternatively, a configuration in which a game ball is launched by using the wind pressure when the compressed gas is ejected may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modified examples, in a state where the operation handle is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are fired per minute. The configuration may be such that less than 100 (for example, 60) game balls are fired in one minute, or 100 or more (for example, 200) game balls are fired in one minute. good. Further, the game ball may be fired one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, when it is satisfied that the determination result of the above-mentioned second determination as a specific condition is negative in the game round for the special 1 hold, the predetermined effect image is used. Special 1 The specific effect image is switched to the same color effect of the symbol for continuous effect continuation. On the other hand, as a modification, when it is established that the reach effect as a specific condition is executed in the special 1 hold that is continuously executed after the end of the game round of the remaining special 2 hold, the specific effect It is also possible to switch the image to the background image at the time of reach effect as the predetermined effect image, or to switch the background image A as the specific effect image to the background image B as the predetermined effect image when the condition for switching the background image is satisfied. good. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration including a speaker is adopted as a means capable of outputting sound, but a configuration including an earphone jack in addition to or in place of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones brought by the player to the earphone jack, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he / she is playing without being disturbed by the sound of the surrounding pachinko machine. It will be possible to enjoy it in minutes. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations may be adopted as display means capable of displaying a special symbol that starts variable display based on the entry of a game ball into various starting ports. Therefore, for example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying a normal symbol that starts variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , A drum rotary display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, it is possible to generate a specific gaming state in which a specific number of special 2 holdings, which is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the special 2 holdings that can be stored in the normal state, can be played. As the game state generating means, the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is configured to be capable of generating a long open state capable of storing the special 2 hold which is equal to or more than the upper limit number of the special 2 hold. On the other hand, as a modification, the specific game state generating means is in a state in which the game ball can easily enter the second starting port 34 and is played, for example, a high accuracy and high support state (so-called rush state). ) May be a means that can be transferred. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, but various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, and the like, and combinations thereof can be adopted. For example, as a decorative pattern, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and the like, and combinations thereof may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. When a configuration in which one symbol row of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration may be used in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative symbol (for example, "7") is stopped. Further, when a configuration in which two or four or more rows of decorative symbols are adopted, for example, when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line, a jackpot may be won. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory, for example, a rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member. A configuration in which the large winning opening can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward around the rotation axis, a configuration in which the large winning opening is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. May be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the specific game image corresponding to the specific game displayed during the occurrence of the specific game state is used as the image of the shellfish. On the other hand, as a modification, the specific game image may be used as a background image displayed in the rush state. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, when the image of the shellfish as the specific game image is displayed and the game times for the special 2 hold are executed, the precursory notice effect including bubbles is captured. The configuration is such that a reduced image of the captured image is continuously displayed as predetermined suggestion information. On the other hand, as a modification, the display mode of the first hold display unit of the main display unit may be continuously displayed in the rush state. Further, as a modification of the modification, the first hold of the main display unit displayed in the game round for the special 1 hold executed immediately before the start of the game round for the special 2 hold for displaying the background image in the rush state. The display mode of the display unit may be continuously displayed as it is. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, for example, a so-called tulip-type ordinary electric accessory in which a pair of movable valves can be opened to the left and right. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member can be rotated forward around the rotation shaft to open the starting port. A configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the direction may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of prize balls set in each entry port (starting opening, general winning opening, large winning opening, etc.) is an example and is set in each entry opening. By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications.

<< 11-8-13 >> Modification 13:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices such as a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, but instead of this, the main control It may be configured to include two control devices such as a device and a sub control device. The sub-control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the eleventh embodiment. Further, in the eleventh embodiment and its modifications, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, and 100 do not have to be limited to the division described in the eleventh embodiment, and the three control devices need not be limited. It suffices if various processes according to the eleventh embodiment can be executed as a whole of 60, 90, and 100.

<< 12 >> 12th Embodiment:
<< 12-1 >> Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 551 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a voice emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. Illuminations are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect of the effect by lighting or blinking at each game round performed by the pachinko machine 10, when a big hit is won, when a reach occurs, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two plate glasses is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. The details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls rented from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball stored in the upper plate 20 is supplied to the game ball launch mechanism included in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launch mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores the game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged to the outside from the lower plate 21.

An effect operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game effect reflecting the operation.

An operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “right side”). When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and an operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c that detects the rotation operation amount of the above by the change of the electric resistance is provided. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes according to the rotation operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball launch button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “left side”). When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined firing intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the player's operation handle 25. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the front view of the game board and flows down to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can make a so-called "right-handed". The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26 to launch the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26. Can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 552 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing. For example, a seal is attached to a place that can be opened and closed, and the characters such as "open" appear when the board box is opened.

The second control unit 52 includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90. The design display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays a design or an image for directing.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The launch control device 80 launches a game ball having a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player when an instruction to launch the game ball is input from the main control device 60. Controls the ball launch mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a slope connected below the tank 54 and gently inclined so that the game balls flow to the downstream side. The game balls are supplied from the tank rail 55, the case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, and the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power supply switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies the electric power required for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85. By turning the power switch 88 on and off, the supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and the non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 553 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding the game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicular to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. The game balls that have entered each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are placed in the individual openings formed in the game board 30. Be guided. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 has a special figure unit 37, a normal figure unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

As shown in the figure, the general winning opening 32 is an entry opening member that forms an entry opening into which a game ball can enter, and a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 552).

The first starting port 33 is an entry port member that forms an entry port into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is an entry port member that forms an entry port into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a made of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 34. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port 34. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The through gate 35 is provided with a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to execute a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric service is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric service open state in which the electric service is opened in a predetermined mode. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second starting port 34. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34. In this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and also includes an opening / closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening / closing door 36b is normally closed so that the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60, when a big hit is won and the opening / closing execution mode is entered, the opening / closing door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state. The opening / closing execution mode shifts to the case where a big hit is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by entering the ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and the opening / closing door 36b is in the open state. It is a mode that repeats the closed state and the closed state. That is, as a result of the winning lottery based on the entry into the first starting port 33, if a big hit is won, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 can enter the large winning opening 36a. Similarly, as a result of the winning lottery based on the entry into the second starting port 34, even if a big hit is won, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 can enter the large winning opening 36a. .. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

An out opening 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and a game ball that has not entered the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, or the variable winning device 36 is out. It is discharged from the game area PA through the mouth 43.

The game balls that have entered each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, and the out opening 43 are individually formed on the game board 30. It is configured to be guided to the back side of the game board 30 through the opening and finally join the discharge passage provided on the back side of the game board 30. The discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor that detects a game ball. By detecting the game balls with the discharge passage detection sensor, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls fired on the game board 30.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. The first symbol display unit 37a is used as a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. , The variable display of the first symbol is performed. When the lottery is completed, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to display the stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying the second symbol. The second symbol is a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display unit 37b is used as a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. , The second symbol is changed and displayed. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display to display the stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b to the stop display is also referred to as the variable time. Call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a to the stop display is also referred to as the first variable time, and is displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first hold display unit 37c and a second hold display unit 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of holds of the first start port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second hold display unit 37d displays the number of holds of the second start port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on.

The normal drawing unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, the normal drawing unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode as the display mode of the light emitting display. When the electric accessory opening lottery is completed, the normal drawing unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode, or displays corresponding to the number of round games. The round game opens and closes until either the predetermined upper limit duration elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the open / close execution mode is started, and ends when the open / close execution mode ends and a new game round starts.

The special figure unit 37, the normal figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being composed of a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp, and for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. It may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery result, such as a CRT or a dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The symbol display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. conduct. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the display effect triggered by entering the ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, but also performs a display effect in the open / close execution mode that shifts when a big hit is won. .. Hereinafter, the details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 554 is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol and a display surface 41a that are variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 554 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol that is variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, the symbol indicating the numbers 1 to 8 is variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. As the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol having a pattern such as a character may be adopted for each of the symbols showing the numbers 1 to 8.

FIG. 554 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, the main display area MA and the sub area SA located below the main display area MA are displayed on the display surface 41a. In the main display area MA, three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 554 (a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row is periodically arranged from top to bottom or from bottom. A variable display that scrolls up is performed. As shown in FIG. 554 (b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L. Specifically, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity is started. Then, each scrolling symbol switches from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. When the variation display of the symbol is completed and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit winning, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the effective line L. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L. The mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, and the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol row, and the symbol of each symbol row. Various modes such as numbers can be adopted as the mode of variable display of the symbol.

Here, "game times" means that the variation display of the symbols displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b (and the variation display of various symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41) is started. After that, the variable display ends and becomes a stop display, which is one unit for counting the variable game, which is one game rotation operation until the stop display ends, and goes to the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. It is one unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery about the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one special information for each game round (for each game round operation, one variable game). When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display unit is used for each game. After the segment display is variablely displayed on either 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device is used for each game. In 41, after the predetermined symbol string is variablely displayed, the symbol string is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game is also referred to as a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the predetermined lottery result, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

In the sub-region SA located below the main display region MA, the hold-related information related to the hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 (hereinafter, also referred to as the first hold-related information) or the first hold-related information. The hold-related information related to the hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 (hereinafter, also referred to as the second hold-related information) is displayed. Specifically, in the gaming state (so-called normal state) in which it is substantially impossible for the gaming ball to enter the second starting port 34, the first hold-related information is displayed in the sub-region SA. On the other hand, in the gaming state (during the high frequency support mode described later) in which it is easy for the gaming ball to enter the second starting port 34, the second hold-related information is displayed in the sub-region SA. In the normal state, the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. The specific display contents of the first hold-related information and the second hold-related information will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 553, a pair of nails (so-called life nails and belly button nails) 42 (42a, 42b) are provided above the first starting port 33. The probability of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 changes depending on the distance between the pair of nails 42a and 42b.

<< 12-2 >> Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 555 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 temporarily stores various data and the like when executing a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a program recorded in the ROM 63. It is provided with a RAM 64 which is a memory for storing. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may have a part of the function which MPU 62 has. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown), respectively. The payout control device 70 and the power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a DC stable 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, the power supply device 85 includes a capacitor (not shown), and when a power failure occurs or the power supply switch 88 (FIG. 552) is turned off, power supply to each device is continued for a predetermined period. do.

Further, various detection sensors 67a to 67e are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. Specifically, it is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided in various entrances such as a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. .. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each entry port based on signals from various detection sensors 67a to 67e, and the game ball is a through gate. It is determined whether or not the vehicle has passed 35. Further, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the second starting opening 34, and also executes an electric accessory opening lottery based on the entry of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

The output port of the main control board 61 includes a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , Is connected to the main display unit 45. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the electric accessory opening is won as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the main display unit 45. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the open / close execution mode and the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode is determined, the display control of the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is executed.

The payout control device 70 and the voice emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry to the general winning opening 32 is specified, the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry to the first starting opening 33 is performed. When is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when the entry to the second starting port 34 is specified, one game ball is paid out. The prize ball command corresponding to is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. Further, the launch control device 80 is connected to the operation handle 25 and the game ball launch button 26.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the voice emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, control of the display control device 100 is performed. Further, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the voice emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 and the type of the combination of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. , Whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the advance notice effect executed in each game round, etc. are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time when the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 556 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 wins a lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, sets the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting jackpot types such as probabilistic jackpot results and normal jackpot results. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate reach when the symbol sequence displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displaced and varied.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. Further, the variation type counter CS is used when determining the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45, and the symbol display device 41. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The hold information storage area 64b is provided with a first hold area Ra and a second hold area Rb. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS at the timing of entering the ball are stored as pending information. It is stored in the first reserved area Ra of the area 64b in chronological order. In the first holding area Ra, there are four areas corresponding to the maximum number of holding balls that have entered the first starting port 33, that is, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth. There is an area. When the game ball enters the first starting port 33, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS at the timing of entering the ball are held information (hereinafter, special 1 hold). Also called), it is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. Which of the first to fourth areas is stored is determined by the order of entering the ball, and the earlier the timing of entering the ball, the higher the area (the first area is the highest area).

Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS at the timing of entering the ball are stored in the reserved information storage area 64b. It is stored in the second holding area Rb in chronological order. In the second holding area Rb, there are four areas corresponding to the maximum number of holding balls that have entered the second starting port 34, that is, the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth. There is an area. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS at the timing of entering the ball are held information (hereinafter, special 2 hold). Also called), it is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. Which of the first to fourth areas is stored is determined by the order of entering the ball, and the earlier the timing of entering the ball, the higher the area (the first area is the highest area).

The details of the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The hit random number counter C1 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 1199, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. Further, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is set in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. It is stored, and when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

The value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first hold area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is called a big hit. It is determined whether or not it becomes. Further, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the second hold area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c and collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. Whether or not it will be a big hit is determined.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is the determination processing execution area in the order acquired by the game ball entering the first starting port 33. Move to the execution area AE of 64c. Specifically, a process of moving the data stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra to the determination process execution area 64c and shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first hold area Ra is executed. do. The data shift shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas in order to the upper area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area.

Further, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c in the order acquired by the game ball entering the second starting port 34. .. Specifically, a process of moving the data stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb to the determination process execution area 64c and shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second hold area Rb is executed. do. The data shift shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas in order to the upper area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area.

When the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the second holding area Rb, the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the first holding area Ra regardless of whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in the second holding area Rb. The stored value of the random number counter C1 is set as a target for moving to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c. As a result, when the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in both the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb, the hit stored in the second holding area Rb corresponding to the second starting port 34. The value of the random number counter C1 has priority. That is, in the present embodiment, when the value of the random number counter C1 is stored in both the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb, it is stored in the second holding area Rb corresponding to the second starting port 34. The value of the winning random number counter C1 is prioritized, and among the values of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb, the data stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb is determined. The process of moving to the process execution area 64c and shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second hold area Rb is executed. When the value of the random number counter C1 is not stored in the second hold area Rb, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first hold area Ra is stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra. The stored data is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the processing of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed.

In the above description, the order in which the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c will be described. However, the value is not limited to the value of the hit random number counter C1, and counters other than the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb (big hit type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation). Each value of the type counter CS) is also moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c in the same order.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a big hit, the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Further, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b by using the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. .. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big hit. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value, for example.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. It is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the ball. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second hold area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. However, when the result of the winning lottery becomes a big hit and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach is a combination of some of the symbols displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, which may be a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot. It is a display state in which the display is stopped and the remaining symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 554 (b), the symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. In the situation where the reach line is formed and the reach line is formed, the symbol is varied and displayed in the symbol row Z2 to reach the reach. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, in the state where the reach line is formed, the variable display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. A combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when the reach effect is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to display a notice using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

Reach is classified into three types, normal reach, super reach, and special reach, depending on the content of the reach production. The reach production with a higher expectation (reliability) of the jackpot winning is executed for the super reach than the normal reach, and the reach production with the higher expectation of the jackpot winning is executed for the special reach than the super reach.

Next, the details of the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 62 to determine the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value, for example.

The variation type counter CS is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, and the updated value is stored in the second starting port 34. It is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the ball. The value of the variation type counter CS stored in the first hold area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c and then at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display unit 37a and at the start of the symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. Used in determining the variation pattern in. The value of the variation type counter CS stored in the second hold area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c and then at the start of the variation display on the second symbol display unit 37b and at the start of the symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. Used in determining the variation pattern in. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the content of the reach effect (that is, the type of reach) can be specified according to the type of the fluctuation pattern.

Next, the details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric service holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 64d moves to the electric service execution area 64e, and then the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 in the electric service execution area 64e. A lottery (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory opening lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state. Specifically, in the electric service execution area 64e, the winning / failing table (winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery) stored in the accessory lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 are It is collated and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state.

In addition, at least one of the acquired value of the hit random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the variable type counter CS, and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is special in the present invention. Corresponds to information. Further, at least one of the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first hold area Ra and the second hold area Rb, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the variable type counter CS. Is also called pending information.

Next, the pass / fail table will be described. The winning / failing table is table data for collating with the winning random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the winning random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode set as a lottery mode for the winning lottery. At the time of the winning lottery in the probability mode, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to. The high-probability mode (also called the high-probability gaming state) is a gaming state that is started by winning a probabilistic jackpot, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is relatively higher than that in the low-probability mode. To tell.

FIG. 557 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the pass / fail table. FIG. 557 (a) shows a pass / fail table for the low probability mode (for the low probability mode), and FIG. 557 (b) shows the pass / fail table for the high probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 557 (a), five values 0 to 4 are set as the values of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the hit / fail table for the low probability mode. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values of 0 to 4 are out of the range. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 557 (b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set as the value of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the hit / fail table for the high probability mode. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (16 to 1199) other than the 16 values of 0 to 15 are out of the range. As described above, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the hit random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / miss table for the low probability mode is the value of the hit random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / miss table for the high probability mode. Included in the group. However, as a result of the winning lottery, if the probability of winning the jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary.

Although it is not adopted in the winning / failing table in this embodiment, a "small hit" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

The "small hit" is a result of success or failure that triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode in which the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened / closed, but does not trigger the transition in both the lottery mode and the support mode. .. On the other hand, "off" is a result of success or failure that does not trigger the transition of the open / close execution mode, and also does not trigger the transition of the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three modes or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode of winning lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends (3) The electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (1) open / close execution mode, the occurrence of a ball entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency is relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 sec elapses or to the opening / closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number of balls entered is 10. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed twice from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec elapses or the ball enters the opening / closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening / closing door 36b at one time is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening / closing door 36b once is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode in which the low-frequency winning mode is applied, the game ball does not substantially enter. However, even in the open / close execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the game ball can be entered.

The number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the number of opening limits for one opening are entered into the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the frequency of occurrence of balls is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening / closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is long, or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that the ball does not substantially enter the variable winning device 36.

The pachinko machine 10 has, as a mode of the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the above-mentioned (2) opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a winning / losing table for high probability as a winning / failing table, and a winning / losing table. It is possible to set a low probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a winning / failing table for low probability. As described with reference to FIG. 557, the case where the winning lottery is performed using the high-probability winning / failing table is compared with the case where the winning lottery is performed using the low-probability winning / failing table, and the jackpot is won. There is a high probability of doing so.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening / closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 continues to launch the game ball in the same manner with respect to the game area PA. The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are used so that the frequency with which the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the above-mentioned situations. Can be set.

Specifically, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the one-time opening time of the electric accessory 34a may be set longer than that in the low-frequency support mode when the electric combination opening is won.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electric combination opening is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode. May be good. Further, the electric accessory 34a may be configured to have a long opening time once. In addition, when the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times in the high frequency support mode, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is It may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory opening lottery to the next electric accessory opening lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low frequency support mode. You may.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary gaming state that assists in the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the big hit type counter C2 is used to sort the big hit types. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 558 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 558 (a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 558 (b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to at the time of a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is to the second start port 34. It is referred to at the time of the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. 558 (a), the distribution table for the first starting port has a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot are set.

The 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot are high-frequency winning modes in which the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is a high-frequency winning mode. (Also called) is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is a high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot is that the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the open / close execution mode is different, the 16R probability variation jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R probability variation jackpot is 8. It is a round (8 rounds).

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the low probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end becomes the high frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot is that the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the open / close execution mode is different, the 16R normal jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R normal jackpot is 8. It is a round (8 rounds).

In the distribution table for the first starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 39" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "40 to 64" corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot. "65-89" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "90-99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the mode of the jackpot is diversified. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the advantage for the player is that the 16R probability variation jackpot is the highest, the 8R probability variation jackpot is the next highest, then the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different advantages for the player in this way, it is possible to suppress the monotonicization of the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 558 (b), the distribution table for the second starting port has a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. 16R probability variation jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 64" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "65 to 99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. It corresponds to.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won is the case where the jackpot is won based on the entry into the first starting port 33 and the second. It is different from the case where the big hit is won based on the entry into the starting port 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player.

In addition, if the result is a loss in the winning lottery, the opening / closing execution mode is not performed, and the lottery mode and the support mode are not changed. In the distribution of the types of jackpots, when 16 probability variation jackpots or 8R probability variation jackpots are obtained, the lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the high probability mode, as described above. The state will continue until the next big hit in the winning lottery.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to perform the jackpot type. Further, the MPU 62 uses the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to cause the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b to stop and display the segment display. Determine the display mode. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

FIG. 559 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a winning / failing table (winning / failing table for electric accessory opening lottery) used when executing the electric accessory opening lottery.

FIG. 559 (a) shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 559 (a), in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode), two electric accessory opening counters C4, which are the electric accessory opening winning counters, are 0 and 1. The value is set. 464 values of 2 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 which is out of order. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening is won in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 559 (b) shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 559 (b), in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the high frequency support mode), 462 electric accessory opening counters C4 for winning the electric combination opening are set to 0 to 461. The value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is out of alignment. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening is won in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second starting port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. ..

<< 12-3 >> Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 560 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configurations of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Some configurations of the power supply device 85 (FIG. 555) and the like are omitted. The MPU 92 is mounted on the voice emission control board 91 provided in the voice emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element having a built-in CPU, ROM 93, RAM 94, interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data input / output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs, fixed value data, tables, etc. executed by the MPU 92. For example, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the ROM 93. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 60 and an effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and a display control device 100 is connected to the output side.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the voice emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 102.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols and pictures displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores various display symbols, bitmap format image data of the display picture, a color palette table referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio emission control device 90 are the sound light side MPU 92 and the sound light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound / light side RAM 94 are also referred to, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as a display side MPU 102.

<< 12-4 >> Outline of processing by the gaming machine:
Next, an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

<< 12-4-1 >> Hold display:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-region SA located below the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 is put on hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. The related first hold-related information or the second hold-related information related to the hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is displayed. Specifically, in the gaming state (so-called normal state) in which it is substantially impossible for the gaming ball to enter the second starting port 34, the first hold-related information is displayed in the sub-region SA. On the other hand, in the gaming state (during the high frequency support mode) in which it is easy for the gaming ball to enter the second starting port 34, the second hold-related information is displayed in the sub-region SA.

FIG. 561 is an explanatory diagram showing a display surface 41a in which the first hold-related information is displayed in the sub-region SA. In the normal state, the unexecuted hold display area Dh, the variable execution hold display area Dy, and the already executed hold display area Dz are displayed in the sub area SA as the first hold-related information. The variable execution pending display area Dy is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a in the left-right direction, the unexecuted pending display area Dh is displayed on the right side of the variable execution pending display area Dy, and the already executed pending display area Dz is variable execution. It is displayed on the left side of the hold display area Dy.

The unexecuted hold display area Dh is composed of unit areas Dh1 to Dh4 having a number (that is, four) corresponding to the maximum number of game balls held in the first starting port 33. The unit areas Dh1 to Dh4 are displayed side by side in the left-right direction of the display surface 41a. Hereinafter, the unit area Dh1 located on the leftmost side (the side closer to the variable execution pending display area Dy) is referred to as the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1, and the unit area Dh2 located second from the leftmost side to the right side is referred to. The second unexecuted hold display area Dh2 is called, the unit area Dh3 located third from the leftmost side to the right side is called the third unexecuted hold display area Dh3, and the unit area Dh4 located on the rightmost side is the fourth unexecuted display area Dh4. It is called the execution hold display area Dh4.

Each of the first to fourth unexecuted hold display areas Dh1 to Dh4 has a rectangular icon, and the unexecuted hold corresponding to the hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is provided at the upper part of the icon. The display icon H can be displayed. The unexecuted hold display icon is hold display information corresponding to the hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and which has not yet been transferred to the execution of the winning lottery. In the present embodiment, the unexecuted hold display icon H is circular. Each time a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the unexecuted hold display icon H increases by one from the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 toward the fourth unexecuted hold display area Dh4. Is displayed. The number of unexecuted hold display icons H indicates the number of holds based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33.

The variable execution hold display area Dy has a trapezoidal icon whose upper base is longer than the lower base, and the fluctuation corresponding to the hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 at the upper part of the trapezoidal icon. The running hold display icon Y can be displayed. The variable execution hold display icon Y is a hold based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33, and is hold display information corresponding to the hold during execution of the winning lottery. In the present embodiment, the variable execution pending display icon Y is a hexagon. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a winning lottery is performed when the ball enters the first starting port 33, and a variable display for notifying the result of the winning lottery is performed. This variable display is started. At the same time, the variable execution pending display icon Y is displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy. This variable display is based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the variable execution hold display icon Y displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy. By observing that the variable execution pending display icon Y is displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy, the player knows that the hold corresponding to the variable execution pending display icon Y has been exhausted. be able to.

The already executed hold display area Dz is an area capable of displaying the hold display information corresponding to the game times after the execution of the variable game in the game times is completed, that is, after the game times operation is executed. In the present embodiment, the already executed hold display area Dz is composed of four unit areas Dz1 to Dz4. The unit areas Dz1 to Dz4 are displayed side by side in the left-right direction of the display surface 41a. Hereinafter, the unit area Dz1 located on the far right side (the side closer to the variable execution hold display area Dy) is referred to as the first already executed hold display area Dz1, and the unit area Dz2 located second from the rightmost side to the left side is referred to. The second executed hold display area Dz2 is called, the unit area Dz3 located third from the right side to the left side is called the third executed hold display area Dz3, and the unit area Dz4 located on the leftmost side is called the fourth existing. It is called the execution hold display area Dz4.

Each of the first to fourth execution hold display areas Dz1 to Dz4 has a rectangular icon, and the hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 inside the rectangular icon has already been supported. The execution hold display icon Z can be displayed. According to the first to fourth executed hold display areas Dz1 to Dz4, the already executed hold display icon Z corresponding to the hold for which the variable display and the stop display are completed is shown. The hold corresponding to the already executed hold display icon Z displayed in the first executed hold display area Dz1 is one more than the hold corresponding to the variable executing hold display icon Y displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy. It is a hold (hold information) that was executed before, and the hold (hold information) that is executed one by one as it goes from the first executed hold display area Dz1 to the fourth already executed hold display area Dz4. The already executed hold display icon Z is displayed.

FIG. 562 is an explanatory diagram showing how the unexecuted hold display area Dh, the variable execution pending display area Dy, and the already executed hold display area Dz change with the progress of the game. FIG. 562 (a) shows that the fluctuation is being displayed, FIG. 562 (b) shows after the fluctuation is stopped, and FIG. 562 (c) shows that the next fluctuation is being displayed. It changes in the order of FIG. 562 (a), FIG. 562 (b), and FIG. 562 (c).

In the example shown in FIG. 562 (a), the first unexecuted hold display icon H corresponding to the first hold is displayed in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 in the unexecuted hold display area Dh, and the first unexecuted hold display icon H is displayed. 2 The second unexecuted hold display icon H corresponding to the second hold is displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh2. The variable execution pending display icon Y is displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy. In the already executed hold display area Dz, four already executed hold display icons Z are displayed. As described above, the already executed hold display area Dz is an area in which the hold display information corresponding to the game times after the execution of the variable game in the game times is completed, that is, after the game times operation is executed, can be displayed. be. The variable display is based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the variable execution hold display icon Y displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy.

When the fluctuation is stopped and displayed from the state of the fluctuation display shown in FIG. 562 (a), the fluctuation is displayed at the timing when the fluctuation display of the next game round is started, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 562 (b). The variable running hold display icon Y displayed in the running hold display area Dy moves (shifts) to the first already executed hold display area Dz1 of the already executed hold display area Dz. That is, the variable execution hold display icon Y is displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy until the fluctuation is stopped, and at the timing when the next variable display is started, the first existing execution hold of the existing execution hold display area Dz is started. Move (shift) to the display area Dz1. At this time, the already executed hold display icon Z displayed in the first already executed hold display area Dz1 is moved (shifted) to the second already executed hold display area Dz2 and displayed in the second already executed hold display area Dz2. The already executed hold display icon Z is moved (shifted) to the third already executed hold display area Dz3, and the already executed hold display icon Z displayed in the third already executed hold display area Dz3 is the fourth already executed hold display. It moves (shifts) to the area Dz4, and the already executed hold display icon Z displayed in the fourth already executed hold display area Dz4 disappears. Further, the unexecuted hold display icon H displayed in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 is moved (shifted) to the variable execution pending display area Dy, and is not displayed in the second unexecuted hold display area Dh2. The execution hold display icon H moves (shifts) to the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1. In the example shown in FIG. 562 (b), the unexecuted hold display icon H displayed in the third unexecuted hold display area Dh3 and the fourth unexecuted hold display area Dh4 does not exist, but if it exists, it does not exist. The unexecuted hold display icon H displayed in the third unexecuted hold display area Dh3 moves (shifts) to the second unexecuted hold display area Dh2, and is displayed in the fourth unexecuted hold display area Dh4. The hold display icon H moves (shifts) to the third unexecuted hold display area Dh3.

As a result of the movement shown in FIG. 562 (b), the state shown in FIG. 562 (c) is obtained. That is, only one unexecuted hold display icon H is displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh. In the variable execution hold display area Dy, the unexecuted hold display icon H displayed in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 in the state of FIGS. 562 (a) and 562 (b) is a variable execution hold display icon. It is displayed as Y. In the first executed hold display area Dz1 in the already executed hold display area Dz, the variable execution hold display icon displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy in the state of FIGS. 562 (a) and 562 (b) is displayed. Y is displayed as an already executed hold display icon Z. The second to fourth executed hold display areas Dz2 to Dz4 in the already executed hold display area Dz include the first to third executed hold display areas Dz1 to Dz3 in the states of FIGS. 562 (a) and 562 (b). The already executed hold display icon Z displayed in is displayed. As described above, the already executed hold display area Dz is an area capable of displaying the hold display information corresponding to the game times after the execution of the variable game in the game times is completed, that is, after the game times operation is executed. be.

As described above, each time the variable display and the stop display corresponding to one game are executed, each unexecuted hold display icon H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh moves from the right side to the left side. Then, the leftmost first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 is moved to the variable execution hold display area Dy. Then, the fluctuation display and the stop display for notifying the result of the winning lottery based on the hold information corresponding to the change execution hold display icon Y displayed in the change execution hold display area Dy are executed. After that, the variable execution pending display icon Y displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy moves to the already executed pending display area Dz. In the already executed hold display area Dz, the already executed hold display icon Z moves from the right side to the left side, and disappears after passing the fourth already executed hold display area Dz4.

The unexecuted hold display icon H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh is circular as described above, but instead of this, it has the shape of another polygon such as a triangle, a quadrangle, or a pentagon. May be. Further, the variable execution hold display icon Y displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy and the already executed hold display icon Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are hexagonal as described above. However, instead of this, the shape of another polygon such as a triangle, a quadrangle, a pentagon, an octagon, or a circle may be used. The unexecuted hold display icon H, the variable execution hold display icon Y, and the already executed hold display icon Z have different shapes, but they may have the same shape. Further, the unexecuted hold display icon H, the variable execution hold display icon Y, and the already executed hold display icon Z are not limited to the image of the figure, but may be an image of a character or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, the variable execution pending display icon Y and the already executed pending display icon Z having the same shape are displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy and the already executed pending display area Dz. Instead of this, the variable execution hold display icon Y displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy and the existing execution hold display icon Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz may have different shapes.

FIG. 563 is an explanatory diagram showing a display surface 41a in which the second hold relationship information is displayed in the sub-region SA. In the high-frequency support mode, the unexecuted hold display area Eh and the variable execution hold display area Ey as the second hold-related information are displayed in the sub-area SA. The unexecuted hold display area Eh and the variable execution pending display area Ey are displayed side by side in the left-right direction of the display surface 41a, and the unexecuted hold display area Eh is displayed on the right side of the variable execution pending display area Ey. That is, the second hold-related information does not have a configuration corresponding to the already executed hold display area Dz as compared with the first hold-related information displayed in FIG. 561. However, as the second hold-related information, the already executed hold display area Dz may be displayed on the display surface 41a.

The unexecuted hold display area Eh is composed of unit areas Eh1 to Eh4 having a number (that is, four) corresponding to the maximum number of game balls held in the second starting port 34. The unit areas Eh1 to Eh4 are displayed side by side in the left-right direction of the display surface 41a. Hereinafter, the unit area Eh1 located on the leftmost side (the side closer to the variable execution pending display area Ey) is referred to as the first unexecuted hold display area Eh1, and the unit area Eh2 located second from the leftmost side to the right side is referred to as the first unexecuted hold display area Eh1. The second unexecuted hold display area Eh2 is called, the unit area Eh3 located third from the leftmost side to the right side is called the third unexecuted hold display area Eh3, and the unit area Eh4 located on the rightmost side is the fourth unexecuted. It is called the execution hold display area Eh4.

Each of the first to fourth unexecuted hold display areas Eh1 to Eh4 has a rectangular icon, and the unexecuted hold corresponding to the hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is provided at the upper part of the icon. The display icon HX can be displayed. The unexecuted hold display icon is a hold display icon corresponding to a hold based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 and which has not yet been transferred to the execution of the winning lottery. In the present embodiment, the unexecuted hold display icon HX is circular. Each time a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the unexecuted hold display icon HX increases by one from the first unexecuted hold display area Eh1 toward the fourth unexecuted hold display area Eh4. Is displayed. The number of unexecuted hold display icons HX indicates the number of holds based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34.

The variable execution hold display area Ey has a trapezoidal icon whose upper base is longer than the lower base, and the fluctuation corresponding to the hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 at the upper part of the trapezoidal icon. The running hold display icon YX can be displayed. The variable execution hold display icon YX is a hold based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34, and is a hold display icon corresponding to the hold during execution of the winning lottery. In the present embodiment, the variable execution pending display icon YX is a hexagon. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a winning lottery is performed when the ball enters the second starting port 34, and a variable display for notifying the result of the winning lottery is performed. This variable display is started. At the same time, the variable execution pending display icon YX is displayed in the variable execution pending display area Ey. This variable display is based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the variable execution hold display icon YX displayed in the variable execution hold display area Ey. By observing that the variable execution pending display icon YX is displayed in the variable execution pending display area Ey, the player knows that the hold corresponding to the variable execution pending display icon YX has been exhausted. be able to.

<< 12-4-2 >> Hold change notice production:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to raise the player's expectation for the hold information corresponding to each hold display icon (that is, the hold information stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64), each hold information is included. The value of the included hit random number counter C1 is confirmed before the target of the winning lottery, and based on the confirmed result, an effect of giving a sense of expectation to the player, a so-called look-ahead effect, is performed. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment changes the display color of each hold display icon from the default color (for example, white) to another color as one of the look-ahead effects, so that the display color is changed to the hold display icon. A hold change notice effect (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "hold change notice") that suggests the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot winning for the corresponding hold information is executed. In the present embodiment, the hold change notice is executed by the hold information (hereinafter, also referred to as the special 1 hold information) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the game ball to the second start port 34. It is configured not to execute the hold change notice by the hold information (hereinafter, also referred to as special 2 hold information) based on the entry of the ball. As a modification, a configuration may be configured in which both the hold change notice by the special 1 hold information and the hold change notice by the special 2 hold information are executed. In the present embodiment, the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh is changed by the hold change notice.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display colors of the unexecuted hold display icon H and the variable execution hold display icon Y located in the variable execution hold display area D are white as the default color and blue. , Green and red, and in this order, four stages from low to high expectation (reliability) of winning a big hit in the winning lottery are associated. That is, as the expected degree of jackpot winning to be associated, white as a display color is the lowest, blue is higher than white, green is higher than blue, and red is the highest. In other words, according to the hold change notice, the variable execution hold display icon Y located in the unexecuted hold display icon H or the variable execution hold display area Dy (hereinafter, the unexecuted hold display icon H and the variable execution hold display icon H) If the display color of the hold display icons H and Y is the default color, the expectation of winning the jackpot is low, and if the display color changes to blue, the expectation of winning the jackpot is white. When the display color changes to green, the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than in the case of blue, and when the display color changes to red, the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than in the case of green. The number of times one hold display icon H, Y changes is not limited to once, but can be changed multiple times. The timing of change can be any timing as long as it is between the time when the game ball enters the first start port 33 and the end of the fluctuation display (for example, a predetermined time after the start of the fluctuation display). Is also possible. When the hold display icons H and Y change to the display color with high expectation of the big hit winning due to the holding change notice, the player's expectation for the big hit winning can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved.

Specifically, the pending change notice is executed as follows. The main control device 60 executes a pre-determination process every time a game ball enters the first starting port 33, and determines whether or not the winning lottery is successful based on the hold information of the special 1 hold stored by the current entry. , The determination of the type of the jackpot, the determination of the presence or absence of the occurrence of the reach, the determination of the type of the fluctuation pattern, and the like are performed before the pending information becomes the target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The type of fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation time obtained based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS included in the hold information. After that, the main control device 60 sets the determination result of the prior determination process as a hold command, and transmits the hold command to the voice emission control device 90.

The voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command, and from the hold command, specifies the winning / failing result of the winning lottery, the type of the big hit, the presence / absence of the reach, and the content of the reach effect. The content of the reach effect can be specified from the type of fluctuation pattern. After that, the voice emission control device 90 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the hold change notice based on the winning / fail result of the specified winning lottery and the acquired hold change notice random number. The lottery is performed based on a hold change notice execution lottery table (not shown) in which the winning / failing result of the winning lottery and the hold change notice random number are associated with each other as to whether or not to execute the hold change notice. That is, whether or not to execute the hold change notice is determined based on the winning / failing result of the winning lottery and the acquired hold change notice random number by referring to the hold change notice execution lottery table. In addition to the winning / failing result of the winning lottery, a lottery may be made to determine whether or not the pending change notice is executed for the content of the reach effect. At this time, in the normal reach classified by the content of the reach effect, the execution probability of the hold change notice is set low, and in the super reach classified by the content of the reach effect, the execution probability of the hold change notice is set to the middle, and the reach effect is set. In the special reach classified according to the contents of, it is preferable to set a high execution probability of the pending change notice. By setting in this way, the higher the expectation of winning a big hit, the easier it is for the pending change notice to be executed.

When it is decided to execute the hold change notice based on the above lottery, the voice emission control device 90 changes the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H for the special 1 hold saved by the current entry. (Hereinafter referred to as a pending change pattern) is determined by lottery. The lottery of this hold change pattern is performed in the hold change pattern lottery table in which the hold change pattern random numbers described later are associated with a plurality of hold change patterns prepared in advance for each type of reach classified according to the content of the reach effect. It is done based on. The hold change pattern lottery table is prepared in advance according to the reference conditions specified by the winning / failing result of the winning lottery and the number of special 1 holdings accumulated by this entry, and the voice emission control device 90 is a winning lottery. Based on the winning / failing result of the above and the number of the above-mentioned special 1 hold, the hold change pattern lottery table to be referred to is specified, and the reach type specified from the hold command and the reach type obtained by referring to the specified hold change pattern lottery table are obtained. Hold change pattern Determines the hold change pattern corresponding to the random number.

FIG. 564 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a hold change pattern lottery table for reference conditions such that the number of special 1 holdes accumulated by the current entry is 2 and the winning / failing result of the winning lottery is a big hit winning. As shown in the figure, according to the hold change pattern lottery table, a plurality of hold change patterns (hereinafter, also referred to as hold change scenarios) are prepared in advance for each type of reach, and hold change patterns are prepared for each hold change pattern. Random numbers are associated. The hold change scenario defines the change pattern of the display colors of the hold display icons H and Y corresponding to the special 1 hold, and is displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh to the variable execution hold display area Dy. It shows how to change the display color of the hold display icons H and Y within the range up to. For example, when the reach type is "normal reach" and the hold change pattern random number is "10 to 19", the second hold (special 1 hold 2) corresponding to the second hold (special 1 hold 2) is used as the hold change scenario. White is set as the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H, and blue is set as the display color of the first unexecuted hold display icon H corresponding to the first hold (special 1 hold 1). The display color of the variable execution hold display icon Y corresponding to the pending hold (special 1 hold 0) is defined as blue. When the reach type is "super reach" and the hold change pattern random number is "10 to 19", the second hold (special 1 hold 2) corresponding to the second hold (special 1 hold 2) is used as the hold change scenario. Blue is set as the display color of the execution hold display icon H, and green is set as the display color of the first unexecuted hold display icon H corresponding to the first hold (special 1 hold 1). The display color of the variable execution hold display icon Y corresponding to the hold being executed (special 1 hold 0) is defined as green. When the reach type is "special reach" and the hold change pattern random number is "10 to 19", the second hold (special 1 hold 2) corresponding to the second hold (special 1 hold 2) is used as the hold change scenario. Green is set as the display color of the execution hold display icon H, and red is set as the display color of the first unexecuted hold display icon H corresponding to the first hold (special 1 hold 1). A red color is defined as the display color of the variable execution hold display icon Y corresponding to the hold being executed (special 1 hold 0).

In the mode of setting the display color, the last display color set in each hold change scenario, that is, the display color of special 1 hold 0 is the display color of the hold display icons H and Y described above and the expectation of winning a big hit. It is stipulated to be in line with the relationship between high and low degrees. It should be noted that the final display color set in all the pending change scenarios does not necessarily have to comply with the relevant relationship, but may be based on the relevant relationship as a whole. For example, it does not prevent the existence of a pending change scenario that turns green in the case of normal reach, which is relatively unlikely to win a jackpot.

A pending change pattern lottery table having such a configuration is provided for each reference condition. That is, in addition to the hold change pattern lottery table shown in FIG. 564, a hold change pattern lottery table for the following reference conditions is prepared.
・ For reference conditions where the number of special 1 holds is 2 and the winning / failing result of the winning lottery is wrong. Is 1, and the winning / failing result of the lottery is wrong. The number of holdings for the reference condition / special 1 is 3, and the winning / failing result of the winning lottery is the big hit. The winning / failing result of the lottery is wrong for the reference condition / special 1 hold number is 4, and the winning / failing result of the winning lottery is the big hit winning / special 1 holding number is 4. For reference conditions where

When all the pending change pattern lottery tables for each reference condition are collected and the probability of winning a big hit for each display color of the pending display icons H and Y is calculated, white is the lowest, blue is higher than white, and green is higher than blue. High, red is the highest. In other words, each of the pending change pattern lottery tables by reference condition has the lowest probability of winning a jackpot, higher blue than white, higher green than blue, and highest red when all are collected. The contents of the pending change scenario are set so as to. As a result, when the display color of the hold display icons H and Y is white, the player has a low expectation of winning the jackpot, and when the display color changes to blue, the expectation of winning the jackpot is white. When the display color changes to green, the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than in the case of blue, and when the display color changes to red, the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than in the case of green.

FIG. 565 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a change in display color due to a pending change notice. FIG. 565 (a) shows the variable display of the special 1 hold (hold information) corresponding to the variable execution hold display icon Y displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy, and FIG. 565 (b) shows the next game. The variation display of the times is shown, and FIG. 565 (c) shows the variation display of the next next game round. It changes in the order of FIG. 565 (a), FIG. 565 (b), and FIG. 565 (c).

In the variation display shown in FIG. 565 (a), when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the number of holds for the special 1 hold accumulated by the entry is 2, and the winning lottery is performed. The case where the winning / failing result is a big hit will be described. In this case, when the lottery for whether or not to execute the hold change notice is won, the hold change pattern lottery table shown in FIG. 564 is referred to. Here, assuming that the hold command is specified as super reach and the acquired hold change pattern random number is 10, the lottery result of the hold change pattern is marked with * in the second stage of super reach (in the figure, *). It becomes the pending change scenario described in (1). According to this hold change scenario, since the display color of the second unexecuted hold display icon H corresponding to the special 1 hold 2 is blue, the game ball first enters the first start port 33. When the unexecuted hold display icon H is displayed in the second unexecuted hold display area Dh2, the display color is blue. In addition, "blue", "green", and "white" in the figure are described for convenience to indicate the display color, and are actually "blue" on the unexecuted hold display icon H and the already executed hold display icon Z. , "Green", "white", etc. are not displayed.

Subsequently, during the variation display of the next game round shown in FIG. 565 (b), the unexecuted hold display icon H displayed in the second unexecuted hold display area Dh2 in FIG. 565 (a) is the first. The unexecuted hold display area Dh1 is shifted to, but the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H is obtained by lottery of the pending change pattern at the shift timing (that is, the timing when the variable display is started). The color changes to green according to the recorded contents in the special 1 hold 1 column of the above-mentioned hold change scenario (see the column marked with * in the figure). In this way, the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh changes from blue to green, so that the jackpot winning for the pending information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display icon H is won. It is possible to suggest to the player that the degree of expectation (reliability) is considerably higher among the four stages described above.

Subsequently, during the variation display of the next next game as shown in FIG. 565 (c), the unexecuted hold display icon H displayed in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 in FIG. 565 (b) is displayed. The variable execution hold display icon Y is shifted to the already executed hold display area Dz, but the display color of the already executed hold display icon Z is changed at the timing of the shift (that is, the timing when the variable display is started). It remains green according to the recorded contents in the special 1 hold 0 column of the above-mentioned hold change scenario (see the column marked with * in the figure) obtained by the lottery of the hold change pattern.

The example shown in FIG. 565 is an example, and the number of special 1 hold stored by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the winning / failing result of the winning lottery, the type of reach, and the acquired hold change pattern random number. The display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh and the display color of the variable execution pending display icon Y displayed in the variable execution pending display area D change according to the situation. do. In this way, the high or low possibility (reliability) that the hold information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display icon H and the variable execution hold display icon Y wins the big hit in the winning lottery is set as the expectation of the big hit winning. On the other hand, it is possible to suggest.

The pending change scenarios recorded in the pending change pattern lottery table illustrated in FIG. 564 are those that change from white to blue, green, or red, those that change from blue to green or red, and those that change from green to red. It is limited to those that change the display color in the direction in which the expectation of winning a big hit changes from low to high, such as those that make a big hit. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a notice of pending change, the display color is changed in the direction in which the expectation of the big hit is changed from the low to the high, but there is a possibility that the big hit will be won in the winning lottery. The display color is not changed in the direction in which the degree of change from high to low. Specifically, the configuration was such that the change from red to green, blue, or white, the change from green to blue or white, and the change from blue to white were not performed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H changes at the timing when the unexecuted hold display icon H shifts (that is, the timing when the variable display is started). However, instead of this, the display color may be changed during the variable display. The timing for changing the display color during this variable display may be, for example, the time when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display, such as petals, confetti, and fireballs. It may be triggered when a tangible object or an intangible object such as a light beam, a laser beam, or a radio wave reaches the unexecuted hold display icon H.

<< 12-4-3 >> Notice of execution pending:
The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes an already executed hold notice effect (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “execution hold notice”) in addition to the above-mentioned hold change notice as a look-ahead effect. The already-executed hold notice is a notice effect using the already-executed hold display icon Z displayed in the already-executed hold display area Dz (see FIG. 561) for the special 1 hold. As described above, the already executed hold display area Dz is an area capable of displaying the hold display information corresponding to the game times after the execution of the variable game in the game times is completed, that is, after the game times operation is executed. be. In the present embodiment, when all the display colors of the already executed hold display icon Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are the same color due to the already executed hold display area Dz, the display is displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy. We adopted a configuration that suggests to the player that the result of the winning lottery related to the fluctuation based on the holding information corresponding to the holding display icon Y during the change is that the jackpot winning is confirmed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the already-executed hold notice based on the hold information (special 2 hold information) based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is not executed, but instead of this. , The configuration may be configured to execute both the already executed hold notice by the special 1 hold information and the already executed hold notice by the special 2 hold information.

FIG. 566 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the data structure of the special 1 hold effect storage area. The sound light side RAM 94 included in the voice emission control device 90 is provided with a hold effect storage area 94d (see FIG. 560), and the hold effect storage area 94d is provided with a special 1 hold effect storage area. The storage area for the special 1 hold effect is the unexecuted hold displayed in each of the unexecuted hold display area Dh for the special 1 hold (see FIG. 561), the variable execution hold display area Dy, and the already executed hold display area Dz. This is a storage area for storing the current display color of the display icon H, the variable execution hold display icon Y, or the already executed hold display icon Z (hold display icons H, Y, Z) and the winning / failing result of the winning lottery. As shown in the figure, the current display color and the winning / failing result of the winning lottery by the prior determination processing are associated with each area displaying the hold display icons H, Y, and Z. Specifically, the first to fourth unexecuted hold display areas Dh1 to Dh4 provided in the unexecuted hold display area Dh, the variable execution pending display area Dy, and the first to fourth executed hold display areas Dz provided in the variable execution pending display area Dz. The current display color and the winning / failing result of the winning lottery by the prior determination processing are associated with each of the already executed pending display areas Dz1 to Dz4. The storage content of the display color of the special 1 hold effect storage area exemplified in FIG. 566 specifies the display colors of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z during the variable display shown in FIG. 565 (a). There is.

The game times are executed for each of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh, the variable execution hold display area Dy, and the already executed hold display area Dz. Since it shifts from right to left each time, the display color stored in the special 1 hold effect storage area and the winning / failing result of the winning lottery also shift to the area next to the left each time the game is executed. do. The voice emission control device 90 refers to the special 1 hold effect storage area, and the current display color for the hold display icons H, Y, Z displayed in each area Dh1 to Dh4, Dy, Dz1 to Dz4. And the winning / failing result of the winning lottery by the prior determination processing can be specified.

The voice emission control device 90 executes the already executed hold notice by referring to the stored contents of the special 1 hold effect storage area having the above configuration. Specifically, the already executed hold notice is executed as follows. Each time the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command sent from the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90 executes the process for the hold change notice described above (hereinafter, referred to as the hold change notice process). , Following the process for notifying the pending change, the process for notifying the already executed hold (hereinafter referred to as the process for notifying the already executed hold) is executed. The voice emission control device 90 further executes a process for removing the same color at the time of disconnection as a process for holding effect.

FIG. 567 is a flowchart showing an outline of the process for prioritizing the execution suspension. FIG. 568 is a flowchart showing a process for removing the same color at the time of removal.

The process for notifying the already executed execution shown in FIG. 567 will be described. This process for announcing the already executed hold is executed by the voice emission control device 90, and is executed every time a hold command sent from the main control device 60 is received.

When the process is executed, the voice emission control device 90 is about the special 1 hold added by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, which is the trigger for executing the process for notifying the already executed hold. Winning lottery between the unexecuted hold display icon H for the special 1 hold acquired before the unexecuted hold display icon H and the variable executing hold display icon Y displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy. It is determined whether or not there is a winning / failing result corresponding to the pending information which is a big hit winning (step S1). This determination is made by referring to the special 1 hold effect storage area. For example, assuming that the content of the special 1 hold effect storage area is as shown in FIG. 566, it is added by the entry of a game ball into the first start port 33, which is an opportunity to execute the already executed hold advance notice process. The unexecuted hold display icon H for the special 1 hold that has been made corresponds to the one displayed in the second unexecuted hold display area Dh2 (the part marked with * in the figure), and is before the unexecuted hold display icon H. The unexecuted hold display icon H for the acquired special 1 hold corresponds to the unexecuted hold display icon H displayed in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1. The winning / failing result of the winning lottery is wrong for the unexecuted hold display icon H. Further, the winning / failing result of the winning lottery is also wrong for the variable execution pending display icon Y displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy. In this case, the determination result in step S1 is negative.

In step S1, from the unexecuted hold display icon H for the special 1 hold added by the affirmative determination, that is, the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 that triggered the execution of the already executed hold notice process. In the previously acquired special 1 hold unexecuted hold display icon H and the variable execution hold display icon Y displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy, the winning or failing result of the winning lottery is a big hit. If it is determined that there is something corresponding to a certain hold information, the process for notifying the already executed hold is terminated. According to this already-executed hold notice process, the color change due to the hold change notice may be stopped in step S9 described later. For this reason, for example, there may be a case where a big hit is won in the winning lottery even though the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H is white. In the unexecuted hold display icon H for the special 1 hold and the variable execution hold display icon Y displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy, the winning / failing result of the winning lottery is the holding information that is a big hit. If there is a corresponding one, the process for notifying the already executed hold is terminated immediately.

On the other hand, in step S1, the unexecuted hold display icon for the special 1 hold added by the negative determination, that is, the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 that triggered the execution of the already executed hold notice process. The winning / failing result of the winning lottery is a big hit in the unexecuted hold display icon H for the special 1 hold acquired before H and the variable executing hold display icon Y displayed in the variable executing hold display area Dy. If it is determined that there is no corresponding pending information that has been won, the process proceeds to step S2.

In step S2, the winning / failing result of the winning lottery specified from the hold command by the advance determination process in the hold change notice executed earlier (the game ball to the first start port 33 that triggered the execution of the already executed hold notice process). It is determined whether or not the winning lottery result for the special 1 hold added by entering the ball is a big hit winning (step S2). If it is determined in step S2 that the winning / failing result of the winning lottery is a big hit winning, the process proceeds to step S3, and the type of reach specified by the content of the reach effect specified from the hold command by the hold change notice process is selected. Determine if it is a special reach. This determination is for determining whether or not the content of the reach effect has a high expectation of winning a big hit, and in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not it is a special reach.

If it is determined in step S3 that the type of reach is not special reach, the process proceeds to step S4, and the variable n is set to 4. After executing step S4, the process proceeds to step S5.

In step S5, the unexecuted hold display icon H for the special 1 hold added by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, which triggered the execution of the already executed hold notice process, is traced back to n (=). 4) The hold display icons H, Y, Z for the number are defined as the hold display icon strings to be judged, and the hold display icons H, Y, Z included in the hold display icon row to be judged have the same display color (that is,). It is determined whether or not the color is the same. This determination is made by referring to the special 1 hold effect storage area exemplified in FIG. 566. For example, in the special 1 hold effect storage area shown in FIG. 566, the special 1 hold added by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 that triggered the execution of the already executed hold advance notice process. The unexecuted hold display icon H corresponds to the one displayed in the second unexecuted hold display area Dh2 (the part marked with * in the figure). Here, assuming that the type of reach specified by the content of the reach effect specified from the hold command is special reach and the variable n is 4, the hold display icons for n items that go back from the unexecuted hold display icon H H, Y, Z, that is, the determination target hold display icon column RW is the unexecuted hold display icon H displayed in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1, and the variable execution in progress displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy. The hold display icon Y, the already executed hold display icon Z displayed in the first executed hold display area Dz1, and the already executed hold display icon Z displayed in the second already executed hold display area Dz2 correspond to each other. In step S5, it is determined whether or not each of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z included in the determination target hold display icon column RW has the same color. For example, in the special 1 hold effect storage area shown in FIG. 566, the hold display icons H, Y, and Z included in the determination target hold display icon column RW are green and have the same color. In the determination of whether or not the colors are the same here, the default color, white, is regarded as not being the same color. That is, when each of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z included in the judgment target hold display icon column RW is white, the judgment result in step S5 is negative. When the colors of blue, green, and red are the same, the determination result in step S5 is affirmative.

In step S5, it is determined that the hold display icons H, Y, and Z included in the determination target hold display icon column RW have the same color (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “the determination target hold display icon string RW has the same color”). If so, the process proceeds to step S6.

In step S6, the female character effect setting process for setting the effect in which the female character appears is executed. Specifically, according to the female character effect setting process, any position in the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 at the timing when the entire determination target hold display icon column RW shifts to the already executed hold display area Dz. For example, the effect is set so that the female character appears around the already executed hold display area Dz. For example, as shown in FIG. 569 (d), a female character WM appears. When the judgment target hold display icon column RW has the same color and the entire judgment target hold display icon column RW shifts to the already executed hold display area Dz, the four already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz. Are lined up in the same color, so by making the female character WM appear in the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 at the timing when the entire judgment target hold display icon column RW shifts to the already executed hold display area Dz. , Clearly suggests to the player that the winning or failing result of the winning lottery related to the variation based on the pending information corresponding to the already executed pending display icon Z displayed in the variable executing pending display area Dy is the big hit winning confirmation. be able to. As described above, the already executed hold display area Dz is an area capable of displaying the hold display information corresponding to the game times after the execution of the variable game in the game times is completed, that is, after the game times operation is executed. be.

As a modification of the present embodiment, the female character may be replaced with another character such as a male character or an animal character. Further, instead of the female character, a structure in which floating objects such as petals and fireballs dance, or a structure in which light or light rays are emitted may be used. Further, as a modification of the present embodiment, the configuration may be such that the processing of step S6 for executing the effect in which the female character appears may be omitted. Even in the case of this modification, the player confirms that all the already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in the same color, so that the winning / failing result of the winning lottery is confirmed as a big hit winning. You can know. After executing step S6, the process proceeds to step S7.

In step S7, among the determination target hold display icon column RW, the hold display icons H and Y excluding the already executed hold display icon Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are color-converted by the hold change notice effect. Performs the process of stopping. The hold display icons H and Y for stopping the color conversion are the first start ports that are the triggers for executing the already executed hold notice process, which is the target for determining whether or not there is a big hit in step S1. In the unexecuted hold display icon H for the special 1 hold acquired before the special 1 hold added by the entry of the game ball into 33, and in the variable execution hold display area Dy. Matches the displayed variable execution hold display icon Y. The reason for stopping the color conversion is to prevent the determination target hold display icon string RW in the same color state from becoming the same color due to the display color changing due to the hold change notice effect. After the execution of step S7, the process for notifying the already executed execution is terminated. The already-executed hold notice realized by the processes of steps S1 to S7 described above will be described in detail below. Here, the case 1 will be described.

・ Case 1:
FIG. 569 is an explanatory diagram showing how each of the reserved display areas Dh, Dy, and Dz changes in the case 1. FIG. 569 (a) shows the fluctuation display, FIG. 569 (b) shows the fluctuation display after the fluctuation is stopped, FIG. 569 (c) shows the fluctuation display of the next game round, and FIG. 569 (d) shows the next next. Indicates that the fluctuation of the game times is being displayed. It changes in the order of FIG. 569 (a), FIG. 569 (b), FIG. 569 (c), and FIG. 569 (d).

In the example shown in FIG. 569 (a), the unexecuted hold display icon H is displayed in a green display color in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1, and the variable execution hold display icon Y is displayed in the variable execution hold display area D. Is displayed in green display color, the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in green display color in the first executed hold display area Dz1, and the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in green in the second already executed hold display area Dz2. It is displayed in the display color of. The variable display is based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the variable execution hold display icon Y displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy. When a game ball enters the first start port 33 during this variation display, the unexecuted hold display icon H (blue) corresponding to the hold (hold information) based on this entry is displayed as the second unexecuted hold display. It is additionally displayed in the area Dh2. As a result, the stored contents of the special 1 hold effect storage area are in the state shown in FIG. 566.

In case 1, it was acquired before the unexecuted hold display icon H for the special 1 hold added by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 that triggered the execution of the already executed hold notice process. Special 1 In the unexecuted hold display icon H for hold and the variable execution hold display icon Y displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy, the winning lottery result corresponds to the hold information that is a big hit. (This point is the same for cases 2 to 7 described later), and the second unexecuted hold display area Dh2 additionally displayed by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 this time. It is assumed that the hold information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display icon H indicates that the winning / failing result of the winning lottery is a big hit winning and the type of reach is super reach. Under such a situation, when the process for notifying the already executed execution is executed, a negative determination is made in step S1 of FIG. 567, an affirmative determination is made in step S2, a negative determination is made in step S3, and the variable n is 4 in step S4. Is set, and in step S5, it is determined whether or not the determination target hold display icon column RW has the same color. As can be seen from FIG. 566, the determination target hold display icon column RW has a first unexecuted hold display area Dh1, a variable execution hold display area Dy, a first already executed hold display area Dz1, and a second already executed hold display area. The hold display icons H, Y, and Z displayed on Dz2 correspond to each other and are all green. Therefore, in step S5, it is determined that the determination target hold display icon column RW has the same color, and the female character effect setting process is executed in step S6. According to the female character effect setting process, as described above, the execution has already been performed in the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 at the timing when the entire determination target hold display icon column RW shifts to the already executed hold display area Dz. The production is set so that the female character appears around the hold display area Dz.

From the state in which the fluctuation is displayed in FIG. 569 (a) to the state after the fluctuation is stopped in FIG. 569 (b), as shown in FIG. H, Y, and Z are shifted to the left.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 569 (d), each of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z is further shifted to the left in the next next game round variation display. The timing at which this variation display is started is the timing at which the entire determination target hold display icon column RW shifts to the already executed hold display area Dz, and the determination target hold display icon column RW is as described above. As shown in FIG. 569 (d), the four hold display icons Z are aligned in the same color in the already executed hold display area Dz at the timing of this shift, and the already executed hold display area Dz. A production in which a female character appears around is performed.

By visually recognizing the appearance of the female character WM, the player can clearly know that the four already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in the same color. As a result, the player recognizes that the winning / failing result of the winning lottery related to the fluctuation based on the holding information corresponding to the variable executing hold display icon Y displayed in the variable executing hold display area Dy is the big hit winning confirmation. be able to.

As described in detail above, in Case 1, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 and the unexecuted hold display icon H for the special 1 hold is added to the unexecuted hold display area Dh. The determination target hold display icon strings RW, which are the hold display icons H, Y, and Z for four pending display icons H, which are traced back from the unexecuted hold display icon H, are originally arranged in the same color. Therefore, when the hold information corresponding to the added unexecuted hold display icon H is a big hit result of the winning lottery, the judgment target hold display icon column RW having the same color is displayed in the same display color. By shifting to the already executed hold display area Dz, the four already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz can be aligned in the same color. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the four already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in the same color, they are displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy. It is possible to realize a notice effect that the winning / failing result of the winning lottery related to the fluctuation based on the holding information corresponding to the holding display icon Y during the change is confirmed as the big hit winning. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the four already-executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already-executed hold display area Dz are aligned in the same color by executing the effect in which the female character appears. Can be clearly shown to the player.

Further, in Case 1, as shown in FIG. 569 (a), the game ball enters the first starting port 33, and the unexecuted hold display icon H for the special 1 hold is added to the unexecuted hold display area Dh. When this is done, the player visually recognizes that the four hold display icons H, Y, and Z (determination target hold display icon column RW) that trace back from the unexecuted hold display icon H are aligned in the same color. be able to. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, during the variation display shown in FIG. 569 (a), the determination target hold display icon column RW is shifted to the already executed hold display area Dz with the same display color, and has already been performed. By aligning the four existing execution hold display icons Z displayed in the execution hold display area Dz with the same color, it is possible to make the player expect that the jackpot winning will be confirmed in the future.

Returning to the description of FIG. 567. If it is determined in step S5 that the determination target hold display icon column RW is not the same color, the process proceeds to step S8.

In step S8, it is determined whether or not the n-1 hold display icons H, Y, and Z in the determination target hold display icon column RW have the same display color. As described above, the determination target hold display icon column RW is a hold for four pieces going back from the unexecuted hold display icon H additionally displayed by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 this time. Means a display icon. In step S8, n-1 (= 3) of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z in the determination target hold display icon column RW have the same display color, and only the remaining one hold display icon is displayed. Determine if the colors are different.

If it is determined in step S8 that n-1 of the determination target hold display icon column RWs have the same color, the process proceeds to step S9.

In step S9, an assist setting process for making the display colors of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z displayed in the determination target hold display icon column RW the same is executed. At the time when step S9 is executed, n-1 (= 3) hold display icons in the determination target hold display icon column RW have the same color, and the remaining one hold display icon has the same color. It is a different color from the original color. The n-1 hold display icons are hereinafter referred to as same-color hold display icons, and the remaining one hold display icon is hereinafter referred to as a different color hold display icon. The assist setting process is a process of setting the display color of the different color hold display icon to be converted to the same color as the display color of the same color hold display icon at a predetermined timing.

At the above-mentioned predetermined timing for color conversion, all of the determination target hold display icon column RWs are lined up in the already executed hold display area Dz from the timing when the execution of the already executed hold notice process is started. Any timing may be used as long as it is within the period from the middle of the game round (after the lapse of a predetermined time from the timing at which the game round is started). Therefore, according to the assist setting process, the color conversion of the different color hold display icon is performed at any timing from the unexecuted hold display area Dh to the already executed hold display area Dz via the variable execution hold display area Dy. It is determined by lottery, and the color conversion is performed at the determined timing. Various aspects of the assist setting process in which the predetermined timing is switched will be described in detail later. After executing step S9, the process proceeds to step S6 described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8 that n-1 of the determination target hold display icon column RWs are not the same color, the process for notifying the already executed hold is terminated. Further, in step S2, if it is determined that the winning / failing result of the winning lottery is not a big winning, the process for notifying the already executed execution is terminated. Various aspects of the assist setting process will be described as Cases 2 to 6 below.

・ Case 2:
FIG. 570 is an explanatory diagram showing how each of the reserved display areas Dh, Dy, and Dz changes in the case 2. FIG. 570 (a) shows the fluctuation display, FIG. 570 (b) shows the fluctuation display after the fluctuation is stopped, FIG. 570 (c) shows the fluctuation display of the next game round, and FIG. 570 (d) shows the next next. Indicates that the fluctuation of the game times is being displayed. It changes in the order of FIG. 570 (a), FIG. 570 (b), FIG. 570 (c), and FIG. 570 (d).

In the example shown in FIG. 570 (a), the unexecuted hold display icon H is displayed in a white display color in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1, and the variable execution hold display icon Y is displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy. Is displayed in green display color, the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in green display color in the first executed hold display area Dz1, and the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in green in the second already executed hold display area Dz2. It is displayed in the display color of. The variable display is based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the variable execution hold display icon Y displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy. When a game ball enters the first start port 33 during this variation display, the unexecuted hold display icon H (blue) corresponding to the hold (hold information) based on this entry is displayed as the second unexecuted hold display. It is additionally displayed in the area Dh2.

Here, the hold information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display icon H of the second unexecuted hold display area Dh2 additionally displayed by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 is the winning / failing result of the lottery. It is a big hit and indicates that the type of reach is super reach. Under such a situation, when the process for notifying the already executed execution is executed, a negative determination is made in step S1 of FIG. 567, an affirmative determination is made in step S2, a negative determination is made in step S3, and the variable n is 4 in step S4. Is set, and in step S5, it is determined whether or not the determination target hold display icon column RW has the same color. The determination target hold display icon column RW is a hold display displayed in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1, the variable execution hold display area Dy, the first already executed hold display area Dz1, and the second already executed hold display area Dz2. The icons H, Y, and Z correspond to each other, and one of the four pending display icons H, Y, and Z is white, and the remaining three are green. Therefore, when a negative determination is made in step S5 and an affirmative determination is made in step S8, the process proceeds to step S9 and the assist setting process is executed.

In this case 2, as shown in FIG. 570 (b), due to the assist setting process, the determination target hold display icon string RW is at the timing when the fluctuation of the current game round is stopped and the fluctuation display of the next game round is started. Color conversion is performed to convert the rightmost hold display icon from white to green, and as shown in FIG. 570 (c), during the change display of the next game round, the change execution pending display area Dy The variable execution hold display icon Y turns green, and the determination target hold display icon column RW is aligned in the same color.

Following the state of FIG. 570 (c), as shown in FIG. 570 (d), the hold display icons H, Y, and Z are further shifted to the left during the variable display of the next next game. It becomes. As a result, the determination target hold display icon column RW having the same color by the assist setting process is lined up in the already executed hold display area Dz. Further, as shown in FIG. 570 (d), the female character WM having the content set by the female character effect setting process is displayed during the next variable display of the game times. That is, at the timing of transitioning to the state shown in FIG. 570 (d) (timing at which each hold display icon shifts), the four already executed hold display icons Z are aligned in the same color in the already executed hold display area Dz, and have already been executed. An effect in which a female character appears around the hold display area Dz is executed.

By visually recognizing the appearance of the female character WM, the player can clearly know that the four already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in the same color. As a result, the player recognizes that the winning / failing result of the winning lottery related to the fluctuation based on the holding information corresponding to the variable executing hold display icon Y displayed in the variable executing hold display area Dy is the big hit winning confirmation. be able to.

As described in detail above, in Case 2, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 and the unexecuted hold display icon H for the special 1 hold is added to the unexecuted hold display area Dh. The unexecuted hold display icon H, Y, Z of the four pending display icons H, Y, Z that go back from the unexecuted hold display icon H. When H is a different color hold icon, the unexecuted hold display icon H is converted to the same color as the same color hold icon at the timing when the unexecuted hold display icon H shifts to the variable execution hold display area Dy. As a result, the judgment target hold display icon column RW is aligned in the same color, and the judgment target hold display icon column RW is displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz by shifting to the already executed hold display area Dz with the same display color. It is possible to align the four already executed hold display icons Z to be the same color. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the four already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in the same color, they are displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy. It is possible to realize a notice effect that the winning / failing result of the winning lottery related to the fluctuation based on the holding information corresponding to the holding display icon Y during the change is confirmed as the big hit winning. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the case 2, as in the case 1, the effect in which the female character appears is executed, so that the four already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in the same color. It can be clearly shown to the player.

Further, in case 2, the different color hold icon in the judgment target hold display icon column RW changes to the same color as the same color hold icon at the timing of shifting from the unexecuted hold display area Dh to the variable execution hold display area Dy. , The player can visually recognize that the determination target hold display icon columns RW are aligned in the same color. For this reason, the judgment target hold display icon column RW shifts to the already executed hold display area Dz with the same display color, and the four already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz have the same color. By aligning them, it is possible to make the player expect that the big hit will be confirmed in the end.

・ Case 3:
FIG. 571 is an explanatory diagram showing how each of the reserved display areas Dh, Dy, and Dz changes in the case 3. FIG. 571 (a) shows the fluctuation display, FIG. 571 (b) shows the fluctuation display after the fluctuation is stopped, FIG. 571 (c) shows the fluctuation display of the next game round, and FIG. 571 (d) shows the next next. Indicates that the fluctuation of the game times is being displayed. It changes in the order of FIG. 571 (a), FIG. 571 (b), FIG. 571 (c), and FIG. 571 (d).

In the example shown in FIG. 571 (a), the unexecuted hold display icon H is displayed in a green display color in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1, and the variable execution hold display icon Y is displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy. Is displayed in white display color, the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in green display color in the first executed hold display area Dz1, and the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in green in the second already executed hold display area Dz2. It is displayed in the display color of. The variable display is based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the variable execution hold display icon Y displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy. When a game ball enters the first start port 33 during this variation display, the unexecuted hold display icon H (blue) corresponding to the hold (hold information) based on this entry is displayed as the second unexecuted hold display. It is additionally displayed in the area Dh2. The hold information corresponding to the additionally displayed unexecuted hold display icon H is a big hit winning result of the winning lottery. The determination target hold display icon column RW is a hold display displayed in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1, the variable execution hold display area Dy, the first already executed hold display area Dz1, and the second already executed hold display area Dz2. The icons H, Y, Z correspond.

In this case 3, the second hold display icon from the right in the determination target hold display icon column RW, that is, the change execution displayed in the change execution hold display area Dy during the change display of FIG. 571 (a). The middle hold display icon Y corresponds to the different color hold display icon. As shown in FIG. 571 (b), due to the assist setting process, the timing at which the fluctuation of the current game round is stopped and the next game round is started, that is, the two from the right of the judgment target hold display icon column RW. The hold display icon of the eyes fluctuates At the timing of shifting from the hold display area Dy during execution to the first already executed hold display area Dz1, color conversion is performed to convert the hold display icon from white to green, and FIG. 571 (c) shows. As shown, during the variable display of the next game round, the already executed hold display icon Z in the first already executed hold display area Dz1 turns green, and the determination target hold display icon column RW is aligned in the same color. ..

Following the state of FIG. 571 (c), as shown in FIG. 571 (d), each hold display icon H, Y, Z is further shifted to the left during the variable display of the next next game. It becomes. As a result, the determination target hold display icon column RW having the same color by the assist setting process is lined up in the already executed hold display area Dz. Further, as shown in FIG. 571 (d), the female character WM having the content set by the female character effect setting process is displayed during the next variable display of the game times. That is, at the timing of transitioning to the state of FIG. 571 (d) (timing at which each hold display icon shifts), the four already-executed hold display icons Z are aligned in the same color in the already-executed hold display area Dz, and have already been executed. An effect in which a female character appears around the hold display area Dz is executed.

By visually recognizing the appearance of the female character WM, the player can clearly know that the four already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in the same color. As a result, the player recognizes that the winning / failing result of the winning lottery related to the fluctuation based on the holding information corresponding to the variable executing hold display icon Y displayed in the variable executing hold display area Dy is the big hit winning confirmation. be able to.

As described in detail above, in Case 3, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 and the unexecuted hold display icon H for the special 1 hold is added to the unexecuted hold display area Dh. The four pending display icons H, Y, and Z that go back from the unexecuted pending display icon H are the determination target pending display icons. When the display icon Y is a different color hold icon, the variable execution hold display icon Y is changed at the timing when the variable execution hold display icon Y shifts from the variable execution hold display area D to the already executed hold display area Dz. Convert to the same color as the same color hold icon. As a result, the judgment target hold display icon column RW is aligned in the same color, and the judgment target hold display icon column RW is displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz by shifting to the already executed hold display area Dz with the same display color. It is possible to align the four already executed hold display icons Z to be the same color. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the four already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in the same color, they are displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy. It is possible to realize a notice effect that the winning / failing result of the winning lottery related to the fluctuation based on the holding information corresponding to the holding display icon Y during the change is confirmed as the big hit winning. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the case 3, as in the case 1, the effect in which the female character appears is executed, so that the four already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in the same color. It can be clearly shown to the player.

Further, in Case 3, the different color hold icon in the judgment target hold display icon column RW changes to the same color as the same color hold icon at the timing of shifting from the variable execution hold display area Dy to the already executed hold display area Dz. , The player can visually recognize that the determination target hold display icon columns RW are aligned in the same color. For this reason, the entire determination target hold display icon column RW is shifted to the already executed hold display area Dz with the same display color, and the four already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are displayed. By matching the colors, it is possible to make the player expect that the big hit will be confirmed in the future.

・ Case 4:
FIG. 572 is an explanatory diagram showing how each of the reserved display areas Dh, Dy, and Dz changes in the case 4. 572 (a) shows the fluctuation display, FIG. 572 (b) shows the fluctuation display after the fluctuation is stopped, FIG. 572 (c) shows the fluctuation display of the next game round, and FIG. 572 (d) shows the next next. Indicates that the fluctuation of the game times is being displayed. It changes in the order of FIG. 572 (a), FIG. 572 (b), FIG. 572 (c), and FIG. 572 (d).

In the example shown in FIG. 572 (a), the unexecuted hold display icon H is displayed in a green display color in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1, and the variable execution hold display icon Y is displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy. Is displayed in green display color, the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in green display color in the first executed hold display area Dz1, and the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in blue in the second already executed hold display area Dz2. It is displayed in the display color of. The variable display is based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the variable execution hold display icon Y displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy. When a game ball enters the first start port 33 during this variation display, the unexecuted hold display icon H (blue) corresponding to the hold (hold information) based on this entry is displayed as the second unexecuted hold display. It is additionally displayed in the area Dh2. The hold information corresponding to the additionally displayed unexecuted hold display icon H is a big hit winning result of the winning lottery. The determination target hold display icon column RW is a hold display displayed in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1, the variable execution hold display area Dy, the first already executed hold display area Dz1, and the second already executed hold display area Dz2. The icons H, Y, Z correspond.

In this case 4, the leftmost hold display icon in the determination target hold display icon column RW, that is, the already executed hold display displayed in the second already executed hold display area Dz2 during the variable display of FIG. 572 (a). Icon Z corresponds to a different color hold display icon. As shown in FIG. 572 (d) by the assist setting process, at the timing during the variation display of the game round, which is a predetermined time after the start of the next next game round, the determination target hold display icon column RW Color conversion is performed to convert the leftmost hold display icon, that is, the already executed hold display icon displayed in the fourth already executed hold display area Dz4 from blue to green. As a result, during the variable display of the next next game, the already executed hold display icon Z displayed in the fourth already executed hold display area Dz4 turns green, and the determination target hold display icon column RW is aligned in the same color. It will be. Then, as shown in FIG. 572 (d), the female character WM is displayed around the already executed hold display area Dz.

By visually recognizing the appearance of the female character WM, the player can clearly know that the four already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in the same color. As a result, the player recognizes that the winning / failing result of the winning lottery related to the fluctuation based on the holding information corresponding to the variable executing hold display icon Y displayed in the variable executing hold display area Dy is the big hit winning confirmation. be able to.

As described in detail above, in Case 4, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 and the unexecuted hold display icon H for the special 1 hold is added to the unexecuted hold display area Dh. The hold display icon H (or Z) of one of the determination target hold display icon column RWs, which are the hold display icons H, Y, and Z for four pieces going back from the unexecuted hold display icon H, is a different color hold display icon. In a certain case, a different color hold display icon is displayed during the variable display of the game times (next next game times) started to be executed at the timing when the entire judgment target hold display icon column RW shifts to the already executed hold display area Dz. Convert to the same color as the same color hold display icon. In this way, the four already-executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already-executed hold display area Dz can be aligned in the same color. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the four already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in the same color, they are displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy. It is possible to realize a notice effect that the winning / failing result of the winning lottery related to the fluctuation based on the holding information corresponding to the holding display icon Y during the change is confirmed as the big hit winning. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the case 4, as in the case 1, the effect in which the female character appears is executed, so that the four already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in the same color. It can be clearly shown to the player.

Further, in Case 4, at the start of the variation display of the next next game, the four already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are not aligned in the same color. However, since the colors are suddenly aligned in the same color during the variable display, it is possible to give the player great surprise and joy.

・ Case 5:
FIG. 573 is an explanatory diagram showing how each of the reserved display areas Dh, Dy, and Dz changes in the case 5. FIG. 573 (a) shows the fluctuation display, FIG. 573 (b) shows the fluctuation display after the fluctuation is stopped, FIG. 573 (c) shows the fluctuation display of the next game round, and FIG. 573 (d) shows the next next. Indicates that the fluctuation of the next game round is being displayed. It changes in the order of FIG. 573 (a), FIG. 573 (b), FIG. 573 (c), and FIG. 573 (d).

In the example shown in FIG. 573 (a), the unexecuted hold display icon H is displayed in a white display color in the second unexecuted hold display area Dh2, and the unexecuted hold display icon H is displayed in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1. Is displayed in green display color, the variable execution hold display icon Y is displayed in green display color in the variable execution hold display area Dy, and the existing execution hold display icon Z is green in the first already executed hold display area Dz1. It is displayed in the display color of. The variable display is based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the variable execution hold display icon Y displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy. When a game ball enters the first start port 33 during this variation display, the unexecuted hold display icon H (blue) corresponding to the hold (hold information) based on this entry is displayed as the third unexecuted hold display. It is additionally displayed in the area Dh3. The hold information corresponding to the additionally displayed unexecuted hold display icon H is a big hit winning result of the winning lottery. The determination target hold display icon column RW is a hold display displayed in the second unexecuted hold display area Dh2, the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1, the variable execution hold display area Dy, and the first already executed hold display area Dz1. The icons H, Y, Z correspond.

In this case 5, the rightmost hold display icon in the determination target hold display icon column RW, that is, the unexecuted hold display displayed in the second unexecuted hold display area Dh2 during the variable display of FIG. 573 (a). Icon H corresponds to a different color hold display icon. As shown in FIG. 573 (b) by the assist setting process, at the timing when the fluctuation of the current game round is stopped and the next game round is started, the hold display on the rightmost side of the judgment target hold display icon column RW is displayed. Color conversion is performed to convert the icon from white to green, and as shown in FIG. 573 (c), the unexecuted hold display icon H in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 is displayed during the variable display of the next game round. It turns green and the determination target hold display icon column RW is aligned in the same color.

Following the state of FIG. 573 (c), as shown in FIG. 573 (d), the hold display icons H, Y, and Z are further shifted to the left during the variable display of the next next game round. It will be in the state of. As a result, the determination target hold display icon column RW having the same color by the assist setting process is lined up in the already executed hold display area Dz. Further, as shown in FIG. 573 (d), the female character WM having the content set by the female character effect setting process is displayed during the variable display of the next next game. That is, at the timing of transitioning to the state of FIG. 573 (d) (the timing at which the entire determination target hold display icon column RW shifts to the already executed hold display area Dz), four already executed executions are made in the already executed hold display area Dz. The hold display icons Z are aligned in the same color, and an effect in which a female character appears around the already executed hold display area Dz is executed.

By visually recognizing the appearance of the female character WM, the player can clearly know that the four already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in the same color. As a result, the player recognizes that the winning / failing result of the winning lottery related to the fluctuation based on the holding information corresponding to the variable executing hold display icon Y displayed in the variable executing hold display area Dy is the big hit winning confirmation. be able to.

As described in detail above, in Case 5, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 and the unexecuted hold display icon H for the special 1 hold is added to the unexecuted hold display area Dh. The unexecuted hold display icons H, Y, and Z, which are four pending display icons H, Y, and Z, are displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh of the unexecuted hold display icon column RW. When H is a different color hold icon, the unexecuted hold display icon H is converted to the same color as the same color hold icon at the timing when the unexecuted hold display icon H shifts to the left in the unexecuted hold display area Dh. do. As a result, the judgment target hold display icon column RW is aligned in the same color, and the judgment target hold display icon column RW is displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz by shifting to the already executed hold display area Dz with the same display color. It is possible to align the four already executed hold display icons Z to be the same color. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the four already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in the same color, they are displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy. It is possible to realize a notice effect that the winning / failing result of the winning lottery related to the fluctuation based on the holding information corresponding to the holding display icon Y during the change is confirmed as the big hit winning. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the case 5, as in the case 1, the effect in which the female character appears is executed, so that the four already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in the same color. It can be clearly shown to the player.

Further, in case 5, the different color hold icon in the judgment target hold display icon column RW changes to the same color as the same color hold icon at the timing of shifting to the left in the unexecuted hold display area Dh, and the judgment target hold display is displayed. The player can visually recognize that the icon rows RW are aligned in the same color. For this reason, the entire determination target hold display icon column RW is shifted to the already executed hold display area Dz with the same display color, and the four already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are displayed. By matching the colors, it is possible to make the player expect that the big hit will be confirmed in the future.

・ Case 6:
FIG. 574 is an explanatory diagram showing how each of the reserved display areas Dh, Dy, and Dz changes in the case 6. FIG. 574 (a) shows the fluctuation display, FIG. 574 (b) shows the fluctuation display after the fluctuation is stopped, FIG. 574 (c) shows the fluctuation display of the next game round, and FIG. 574 (d) shows the next next. Indicates that the fluctuation of the game times is being displayed. It changes in the order of FIG. 574 (a), FIG. 574 (b), FIG. 574 (c), and FIG. 574 (d).

In the example shown in FIG. 574 (a), the unexecuted hold display icon H is displayed in a green display color in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1, and the variable execution hold display icon Y is displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy. Is displayed in green display color, the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in green display color in the first executed hold display area Dz1, and the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in blue in the second already executed hold display area Dz2. Is displayed in the display color of, and the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in the green display color in the third already executed hold display area Dz3. The variable display is based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the variable execution hold display icon Y displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy. When a game ball enters the first start port 33 during this variation display, the unexecuted hold display icon H (blue) corresponding to the hold (hold information) based on this entry is displayed as the second unexecuted hold display. It is additionally displayed in the area Dh2. The hold information corresponding to the additionally displayed unexecuted hold display icon H is a big hit winning result of the winning lottery. The determination target hold display icon column RW is a hold display displayed in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1, the variable execution hold display area Dy, the first already executed hold display area Dz1, and the second already executed hold display area Dz2. The icons H, Y, Z correspond.

In this case 6, as in the case of case 4, the leftmost hold display icon in the determination target hold display icon column RW, that is, the second executed hold display area Dz2 during the variable display of FIG. 574 (a). The already executed hold display icon Z displayed in is a different color hold display icon. The display color of this different color hold display icon is converted from blue to green by the assist setting process. In this case 6, the already executed hold display icon Z to the left of the different color hold display icon is the same color hold display icon. Since it is the same green color as the display color, as shown in FIG. 574 (c), the third already executed hold display is displayed at the timing when the variable display of the next game round is stopped and the next next game round is started. By extinguishing the different color hold display icon displayed in the area Dz3, each hold display icon H, Y, Z located on the right side of the second executed hold display area Dz2 is shifted to the left, and FIG. As shown in the above, during the variable display of the next next game, the already executed hold display icon Z in the third already executed hold display area Dz3 turns green, and the determination target hold display icon column RW is aligned in the same color. become. Then, as shown in FIG. 574 (c), the female character WM is displayed around the already executed hold display area Dz.

By visually recognizing the appearance of the female character WM, the player can clearly know that the four already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in the same color. As a result, the player recognizes that the winning / failing result of the winning lottery related to the fluctuation based on the holding information corresponding to the variable executing hold display icon Y displayed in the variable executing hold display area Dy is the big hit winning confirmation. be able to.

As described in detail above, in Case 6, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 and the unexecuted hold display icon H for the special 1 hold is added to the unexecuted hold display area Dh. The leftmost hold display icon in the judgment target hold display icon column RW, which is the hold display icons H, Y, and Z for four pieces going back from the unexecuted hold display icon H, is a different color hold display icon. When the already executed hold display icon Z to the left of the hold display icon has the same display color as the display color of the hold display icon of the same color, by eliminating the different color hold display icon, the judgment target hold display icon column RW becomes the same color. Align. In this way, the four already-executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already-executed hold display area Dz can be aligned in the same color. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the four already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in the same color, they are displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy. It is possible to realize a notice effect that the winning / failing result of the winning lottery related to the fluctuation based on the holding information corresponding to the holding display icon Y during the change is confirmed as the big hit winning. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the case 6, as in the case 1, the effect in which the female character appears is executed, so that the four already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in the same color. It can be clearly shown to the player.

Returning to the description of FIG. 567. If it is determined in step S3 that the type of reach is special reach, the process proceeds to step S10, and the variable n is set to 3. That is, in the case of special reach where the expectation of winning a big hit is high, the variable n is set to 3. After the execution of step S10, the process proceeds to step S11, and it is determined whether or not the determination target hold display icon column RW has the same color. The process of step S11 is almost the same as the process of step S5 described above, and the difference is that the determination target hold display icon column RW to be determined in step S5 is the variable n at the time of execution of step S5. While there are four hold display icons H, Y, and Z corresponding to the above, the judgment target hold display icon string RW to be judged in step S11 is three corresponding to the variable n at the time of execution in step S11. Only the points that are the hold display icons H, Y, and Z of.

If it is determined in step S11 that the determination target hold display icon column RW has the same color, the process proceeds to step S12 to execute the specific symbol display setting process. The specific symbol display setting process is a process for setting a specific symbol sequence (for example, [3, 4, 1]) to be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 when the predetermined game times are stopped and displayed. The above-mentioned predetermined game times are to the left of the unexecuted hold display icon H for the special 1 hold added by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, which triggered the execution of the already executed hold notice process. It is a game time corresponding to the hold display icons H and Y. In the case of Case 7, which will be described later, the game times corresponding to the variable execution hold display icon Y displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy correspond to the predetermined game times. After executing step S12, the process proceeds to step S13.

In step S13, the execution hold display area reduction setting process is executed. In the already executed hold display area reduction setting process, after the above specific symbol column (for example, [3, 4, 1]) is displayed, the leftmost unit area (fourth unexecuted) of the already executed hold display area Dz is displayed. This is a process for setting the hold display area Dh4) to disappear. As a result of this processing, the already executed hold display area Dz is reduced from the size composed of the four unit areas Dh1 to Dh4 to the size composed of the three unit areas Dh1 to Dh3. Each process of step S12 and step S13 will be described in detail later with reference to specific examples. After the execution of step S13, the process proceeds to step S6 described above.

If it is determined in step S11 that the determination target hold display icon column RW is not the same color, the process for notifying the already executed hold is terminated. The already-executed hold notice realized by the processes of steps S1 to S3, steps S10 to S13, step S6, and step S7 described above will be described in detail below. Here, the case 7 will be described.

・ Case 7:
FIG. 575 is an explanatory diagram showing how each of the reserved display areas Dh, Dy, and Dz changes in the case 7. FIG. 575 (a) shows that the fluctuation is being displayed, FIG. 575 (b) is shown after the fluctuation is stopped, and FIG. 575 (c) shows that the fluctuation is being displayed for the next game. It changes in the order of FIG. 575 (a), FIG. 575 (b), and FIG. 575 (c).

In the example shown in FIG. 575 (a), the variable execution hold display icon Y is displayed in the green display color in the variable execution hold display area Dy, and the existing execution hold display icon Z is displayed in the first existing execution hold display area Dz1. Is displayed in green display color, the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in green display color in the second executed hold display area Dz2, and the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in white in the third already executed hold display area Dz3. It is displayed in the display color of. The variable display is based on the hold (hold information) corresponding to the variable execution hold display icon Y displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy. When a game ball enters the first start port 33 during this variation display, the unexecuted hold display icon H (blue) corresponding to the hold (hold information) based on this entry is displayed as the first unexecuted hold. It is additionally displayed in the area Dh1.

Here, the hold information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display icon H of the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 additionally displayed by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 this time is the winning / failing result of the lottery. It is a big hit and indicates that the type of reach is special reach. Under such circumstances, when the process for notifying the already executed execution is executed, a negative determination is made in step S1 of FIG. 567, an affirmative determination is made in step S2, an affirmative determination is made in step S3, and the variable n is 3 in step S10. Is set, and in step S11, it is determined whether or not the determination target hold display icon column RW has the same color. The determination target hold display icon column RW is displayed in the three hold display icons Y and Z, that is, the variable execution hold display area Dy, the first already executed hold display area Dz1, and the second already executed hold display area Dz2. The hold display icons Y and Z correspond to each other, and the three hold display icons Y and Z are green and have the same color. Therefore, if the affirmative determination is made in step S11, the process proceeds to step S12, and the specific symbol display setting process is executed. After the execution of step S12, the process proceeds to step S13, and the already executed hold display area reduction setting process is executed.

After the variation display shown in FIG. 575 (a), at the timing when the variation display is stopped, the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 is set as a specific symbol string [3.4] by the setting by the specific symbol display setting process.・ 1] is displayed. Further, at the timing when the fluctuation display is stopped, as shown in FIG. 575 (b), the fourth unexecuted display area Dz located on the leftmost side of the already executed hold display area Dz is set by the setting by the already executed hold display area reduction setting process. The execution hold display area Dh4 disappears. It should be noted that, in accordance with the timing at which the fourth unexecuted hold display area Dh4 disappears, the effect of the moving body reaching the disappearing fourth unexecuted hold display area Dh4 is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. May be good. Mobile objects include tangible objects such as petals, confetti, and fireballs, and intangible objects such as light rays, laser light, and radio waves. By reaching the moving body, the player can be made to pay attention to the disappearance of the fourth unexecuted hold display area Dh4.

When the fluctuation is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 575 (b), the hold display icons H, Y, and Z are shifted to the left at the timing when the fluctuation display of the next game round is started. As a result, as shown in FIG. 575 (c), three already executed hold display icons having the same color are contained in the already executed hold display area Dz composed of the first to third executed hold display areas Dz1 to Dz3. The determination target hold display icon column RW composed of Z is located. Further, as shown in FIG. 575 (c), the female character WM having the content set by the female character effect setting process is displayed during the variable display of the next game round. That is, at the timing of transitioning to the state of FIG. 575 (c) (timing at which each hold display icon shifts), in the already executed hold display area Dz composed of the first to third already executed hold display areas Dz1 to Dz3. The three already-executed hold display icons Z are aligned in the same color, and an effect in which a female character appears around the already-executed hold display area Dz is executed.

By visually recognizing the appearance of the female character WM, the player displays all the items displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz composed of the three already executed hold display areas Dz1 to Dz3 (three in this case 7). It can be clearly seen that the already executed hold display icons Z are all in the same color. As a result, the player recognizes that the winning / failing result of the winning lottery related to the fluctuation based on the holding information corresponding to the variable executing hold display icon Y displayed in the variable executing hold display area Dy is the big hit winning confirmation. be able to.

As described in detail above, in Case 7, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 and the unexecuted hold display icon H for the special 1 hold is added to the unexecuted hold display area Dh. The determination target hold display icon column RW, which is the hold display icons Y and Z for three pieces going back from the unexecuted hold display icon H, is originally aligned in the same color. Therefore, the hold information corresponding to the added unexecuted hold display icon H indicates that the winning / failing result of the winning lottery is the big hit winning, and the type of reach is the special reach with high expectation of the big hit winning. In a certain case, [3, 4, 1] as a specific symbol string is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the judgment target hold display icon column RW having the same color is already displayed in the same display color. By shifting to the execution hold display area Dz, the three existing execution hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz can be aligned in the same color. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when all the already executed hold display icons Z (three in this case 7) displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in the same color, variable execution is in progress. It is possible to realize a notice effect that the winning / failing result of the winning lottery related to the fluctuation based on the holding information corresponding to the changing holding display icon Y displayed in the holding display area Dy is the big hit winning confirmation. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, all the (three in this case 7) already executed hold display displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are executed by executing the effect in which the female character appears. It is possible to clearly show to the player that the icons Z are aligned in the same color.

Further, in the case 7, when [3.4.1] as a specific symbol sequence is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, as shown in FIG. 575 (b), the already executed hold display area is displayed. Since Dz is reduced to a size composed of three unit areas Dh1 to Dh3, it is expected that the condition that all the already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in the same color will be relaxed. A feeling can be given to the player. In the case of case 7, all the executed hold display icons Z (three in this case 7) displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz composed of the first to third executed hold display areas Dz1 to Dz3. Will be the same color.

As described above, in case 7, the number of already executed hold display icons Z arranged in the same color in the already executed hold display area Dz may be three, and compared with other cases, already executed in the already executed hold display area Dz. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the condition that the hold display icons Z are aligned in the same color is relaxed and it is easy to win a big hit.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of unit areas constituting the already executed hold display area Dz is reduced to two by the already executed hold display area reduction setting process, and 2 in the already executed hold display area Dz. When the existing pending display icons Z are lined up in the same color, the winning / failing result of the lottery related to the variation based on the pending information corresponding to the variable executing pending display icon Y displayed in the variable executing pending display area D is We have realized a configuration that may suggest to the player that the jackpot win is confirmed. In addition, the number of unit areas constituting the already executed hold display area Dz is reduced to one by the already executed hold display area reduction setting process, and one already executed hold display displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz is displayed. When the icon Z has a specific display color (for example, red in the present embodiment), the variation is related to the variation based on the hold information corresponding to the variable execution pending display icon Y displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy. We have realized a configuration that may suggest to the player that the winning / failing result of the winning lottery is a big winning winning decision. In the present execution hold display area reduction setting process, whether the number of unit areas constituting the already executed hold display area Dz is set to 3, 2, or 1 is specified, for example, in the present embodiment. Determined by lottery using random numbers. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the maximum number of the already executed hold display icons Z that can be displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz can be changed from 1 to 4. .. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the condition that all the already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in the same color is relaxed.

<< 12-4-4 >> Processing for removing the same color when detached:
The process for removing the same color at the time of disengagement shown in FIG. 568 will be described. This process for removing the same color at the time of disconnection is executed by the voice emission control device 90, and is executed every time there is a shift of the hold display icon from the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 to the variable execution pending display area Dy. To.

When the process is started, first, whether or not the hold information for the variable execution hold display icon Y, which will be displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy, is the result of winning or failing the lottery. Is determined (step S21). If it is determined in step S21 that the winning / failing result of the winning lottery is out of the pending information, the process proceeds to step S22.

In step S22, it is determined whether or not each of the already executed hold display icons Z to be displayed in the first to fourth executed hold display areas Dz1 to Dz4 has the same color. This determination is made with reference to the special 1 hold effect storage area shown in FIG. 566. If it is determined in step S22 that each of the already executed hold display icons Z has the same color, the process proceeds to step S23 to execute the same color removal process. In the same color removal process, the display color of one of the four already executed hold display icons Z to be displayed in the first to fourth already executed hold display areas Dz1 to Dz4 is changed to the other already executed hold display icon Z. Is a process to change the color to a different color from. For example, when all the executed hold display icons Z to be displayed in the first to fourth executed hold display areas Dz1 to Dz4 are green, one of the four executed hold display icons Z Change the display color from green to red. As a result of executing the same color removal process, each already executed hold display icon Z to be displayed in the first to fourth already executed hold display areas Dz1 to Dz4 is no longer the same color. After the execution of step S23, the process for removing the same color at the time of disengagement is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S21, when it is determined that the hold information for the change execution hold display icon Y to be displayed in the change execution hold display area Dy does not deviate from the winning or failing result of the winning lottery, the same color at the time of disagreement. End the removal process. Further, in step S22, when it is determined that the already executed hold display icons Z to be displayed in the first to fourth already executed hold display areas Dz1 to Dz4 are not the same color, the process for removing the same color at the time of disengagement is terminated. do.

According to this process for removing the same color at the time of deviation, the pending information about the variable execution pending display icon Y that will be displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy is the result of winning or failing the lottery. In this case, it is possible to prevent the four executed hold display icons Z that will be displayed in the first to fourth executed hold display areas Dz1 to Dz4 to have the same color. On the other hand, according to the already-executed hold notice process described above, the hold information about the variable execution hold display icon Y that will be displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy is a big hit for the winning or failing result of the lottery. If the icon is won, the four executed hold display icons Z that will be displayed in the first to fourth executed hold display areas Dz1 to Dz4 may have the same color. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the four already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the first to fourth already executed hold display areas Dz1 to Dz4 have the same color, the variable execution is held. It is possible to guarantee that the winning / failing result of the winning lottery related to the fluctuation based on the holding information for the variable execution pending display icon Y displayed in the display area Dy is the big hit winning confirmation.

<< 12-4-5 >> Execution Hold Display Area Initialization Process The voice emission control device 90 included in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is mainly in a state where the touch sensor 25a provided on the operation handle 25a is in the off state. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the hold command was received from the control device 60, the already-executed hold display area initialization process for deleting the already-executed hold display icon Z displayed in the already-executed hold display area Dz. To execute. When the player is replaced, there is a certain period during which the game is not played after the previous player finishes the game and before the later player starts the game. The predetermined period was determined in consideration of the period during which the game was not played, and was set to, for example, 5 minutes. According to this configuration, when the player is replaced, it is possible to prevent the existing execution hold display icon Z accumulated by the game by the previous player from remaining. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player is replaced, the game can be started without the already executed hold display icon Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz. The already executed hold display icon Z does not remain in the already executed hold display area Dz, and it does not cause annoyance. As the already executed hold display area initialization process, the already executed hold display area Dz is set at the timing when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is in the standby state and the standby screen (for example, the demo screen) is started to be displayed. The configuration may be such that the already executed hold display icon Z displayed in is deleted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player uses a predetermined number of already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz corresponding to the game times after the game round operation is executed. It is possible to realize a new production that has never existed before, such as suggesting the confirmation of the jackpot winning.

Here, consider as a reference example a pachinko machine that has the above-mentioned function of the hold change notice effect but does not have the above-mentioned function of the already executed hold change notice effect. In the pachinko machine of this reference example, the hold change notification is given using the unexecuted hold display icon H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh, but the unexecuted hold display icon H shifts to the variable execution pending display area Dy. However, after the change is executed and the winning / failing result of the lottery related to the change is not correct, the hold display icon Y during the change is lost in meaning, and nothing is done. For example, even if the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H or the variable execution hold display icon Y becomes red, which has the highest expectation of winning a big hit due to the hold change notice, the hold corresponding to the hold display icons H and Y is held. If the result of the winning lottery due to the fluctuation of information is wrong, it means that there was nothing.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fun of the game is improved by giving meaning to the already executed hold display icon Z whose variable display has ended.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, for example, during the next fluctuation display of case 1 shown in FIG. 569 (c), the third already executed hold display area Dz3 to the variable execution hold display area Dy. If the four hold display icons Z and Y are aligned in the same color and the fluctuation ends and each hold display icon Z, Y, H shifts to the left, the already executed hold display area Dz contains the already executed hold display. The situation is such that all the icons Z are in the same color. In this situation, when the variable execution pending display icon Y shifts to the already executed pending display area Dz, the variable execution pending display icon Y is displayed in red rather than red. The case where the expectation of winning the big hit is displayed in green (in the case of FIG. 569 (c)) is more advantageous for the player.

The reason why it is highly advantageous for the player is that during the next variation display shown in FIG. 569 (d), all the already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in the same color, and the winning or not of the lottery This is because the result will be a big hit. For this reason, even if the hold information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display icon H or the variable execution hold display icon Y is green with a lower expectation of winning a big hit than red, the already executed hold display area Dz has already been executed. Under the condition that there is a high possibility that all the display icons Z have the same color, the unexecuted hold display icon H and the variable execution hold display icon Y remain green without changing to red, and are in the already executed hold display area Dz. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that he / she wants to make the transition. In addition, the green display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H and the variable execution hold display icon Y is different from the stage of expectation that the hold information set for the green display color wins the jackpot. It can have a special meaning such as winning confirmation. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when all the already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz are all in the same color, the winning or losing result of the winning lottery is determined to be the big hit winning. For this reason, a greater sense of expectation can be given to the player. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in case 4, for example, the display color of the already executed hold display icon Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz may change. Therefore, for example, in a situation where the display colors of all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are not aligned with the same display color for the player. However, the display color of the already executed hold display icon Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz may change, and the variable execution hold display icon Y displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy may have already been executed. By shifting to the hold display area Dz, it is possible to raise the expectation that all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz may have the same display color. can. Then, the display color of the already executed hold display icon Z actually displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz changes, and the variable execution pending display icon Y shifts to the already executed hold display area Dz, so that the execution has already been executed. When all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the hold display area Dz have the same display color, the player can be greatly delighted.

More specifically, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, one hold display icon (different color hold display icon) H, Y, Z in the determination target hold display icon column RW is displayed by the assist setting process. By converting the colors, the display colors of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z in the determination target hold display icon column RW are all configured to be the same color. For this reason, even when it is not possible to realize that all the already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz have the same color by simply shifting the hold display icons H, Y, and Z, a different color hold display is displayed. By converting the display color of the icon, it is possible to make all the already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz have the same color. Generally, it takes a long game to make all the already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz have the same color only by shifting the hold display icons H, Y, and Z, but it is an assist. By the setting process, it is possible to create a state in which all the already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in the same color even in a game for a short period of time. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the already-executed hold notice effect can be performed at a frequency suitable for practical use.

For example, by changing the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1, all the already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz will be aligned in the same color thereafter. Since there are cases, it is possible to give great joy to the player who expected that all the already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz have the same color.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the unexecuted hold display icon H is a circle, the already executed hold display icon Z is a hexagon, and the shapes of the two are different. Therefore, it is easy to distinguish between the unexecuted hold display icon H and the already executed hold display icon Z, and the unexecuted hold display icon H is changed from the unexecuted hold display area Dh to the variable execution pending display area Dy. It becomes easy to determine that the hold display area Dz has been shifted. Therefore, visibility is improved.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the already-executed hold notice effect is executed in a gaming state (so-called normal state) in which it is substantially impossible for the gaming ball to enter the second starting port 34, and the game is played. It is not executed in the gaming state (during the high frequency support mode) in which the ball can easily enter the second starting port 34. In the high-frequency support mode, the one-time opening time of the electric accessory 34a is set to be long when the electric role opening is won, which is originally a state of high advantage for the player, and the execution has already been suspended. There is little need to perform a notice effect. Moreover, in the high frequency support mode, it is difficult to execute the already executed hold notice effect in the unexecuted hold display area Dh and the variable execution hold display area Dy because the fluctuation time is short. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the control can be simplified by not executing the already executed hold notice effect in the high frequency support mode, and the already executed hold notice effect is executed in the normal state. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as one aspect of changing the display mode of the hold display icons H, Y, Z by the hold change notice effect, the display color of the hold display icons H, Y, Z is changed. Therefore, it is clear at a glance whether or not all the hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz have the same color. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the hold information about the change execution hold display icon Y to be displayed in the change execution hold display area Dy is the information that the winning / failing result of the lottery is wrong. In this case, four existing display areas Dz1 to Dz4 will be displayed in the first to fourth executed hold display areas Dz1 to Dz4 by changing the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H by the same color removal process at the time of disconnection. It is avoided that the execution hold display icon Z has the same color. For this reason, the player expected that all the display colors of the already executed hold display icon Z in the already executed hold display area Dz would be the same color, and the winning or losing result of the winning lottery would be the big hit winning confirmation. However, the display color of the already executed hold display icon Z does not become the same color, and as a result, the jackpot winning is not confirmed, and it becomes disappointing and disappointing. In this way, it is possible to give a feeling of disappointment while giving a feeling of expectation that the winning / failing result of the winning lottery will be confirmed as a big hit by the already executed hold notice effect. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player the ups and downs of contradictory emotions such as a feeling of expectation and a feeling of disappointment, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

For example, in a situation where if each hold display icon shifts as it is, all the already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz are likely to have the same color, the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 is not yet executed. By changing the display color of the execution hold display icon H, all the already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz may not be aligned in the same color. Therefore, it is possible to give a great disappointment to the player who expected that all the already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz have the same color.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the first to fourth unexecuted hold display areas Dh1 to Dh1 by the assist setting process provided in the already executed hold notice process. Of these, in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 on the side closest to the variable execution pending display area Dy, the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H is the same color as the display color of the same color hold display icon (hereinafter). , Called the same color). In this case, immediately before the unexecuted hold display icon H shifts from the unexecuted hold display area Dh to the variable execution pending display area Dy, the display mode of the unexecuted hold display icon H is switched to the same color. Therefore, it is possible to give a great sense of surprise to the player.

<< 12-5 >> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-mentioned processing in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. These processes will be described below. The MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal in addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, but description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 576 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

In step Sw0101, the reading process of various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main control device 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0102.

In step Sw0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0103.

In step Sw0103, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the electric accessory release counter C4, and the variable type counter CS are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the electric accessory opening counter C4, and the variable type counter CS, and each of these counter values reaches the maximum value. If so, clear to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0104. The value of the variable type counter CS is updated in the normal processing (FIG. 580) described later.

In step Sw0104, a ball entry process for the start port accompanying the entry into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the starting port of step Sw0104 will be described later. After executing step Sw0104, the process proceeds to step Sw0105.

In step Sw0105, a ball entry process for through ball accompanying the entry into the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the through of step Sw0105 will be described later. After executing step Sw0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Ball entry process for starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be described. The ball entry process for the start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 576: Sw0104).

FIG. 577 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the starting port. In step Sw0201, whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (starting entry) is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting opening 33. If it is determined in step Sw0201 that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (Sw0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0202, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set the command. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0203.

In step Sw0203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0204.

In step Sw0204, the start hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold number RaN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra, is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The first start hold number RaN indicates the hold number based on the entry of the ball into the first start port 33. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0209.

If it is determined in step Sw0201 that the game ball has not entered the first start port 33 (Sw0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0205 and whether or not the game ball has entered the second start port 34. Is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

If it is determined in step Sw0205 that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sw0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0206, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set the command. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw0205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (Sw0205: NO), the ball entry process for the main starting port is terminated.

In step Sw0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0208.

In step Sw0208, the start hold number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as the second start hold number RbN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb, is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on the entry of the ball into the second start port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0209.

In step Sw0209, it is determined whether or not the start hold number N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sw0204 or step Sw0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step Sw0209, if the start hold number N is not less than the upper limit value (Sw0209: NO), the ball entry process for the main start port is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Sw0209, if the start hold number N is less than the upper limit value (Sw0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0210, 1 is added to the start hold number N of the corresponding hold area, and then the process proceeds to step Sw0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reserved quantity CRN). The total hold quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first start hold quantity RaN and the second start hold quantity RbN. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0212.

In step Sw0212, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS updated in step Sw0103 (FIG. 576) are stored in the first free storage area of the corresponding hold area. It is stored in the storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the reserved number obtained by adding 1 in step Sw0210. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as the processing target, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sw0103 are set. It is stored in the first storage area in the free storage area of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN to which 1 is added in step Sw0210. When the second start hold number RbN is set as the processing target, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sw0103 are held for the second time. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step Sw0210. After executing step Sw0212, the process proceeds to step Sw0213.

In step Sw0213, the first determination process is executed. The pre-determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, and the winning / failing determination result (lottery result), the jackpot type, and the reach. This is a process for determining whether or not the information has occurred before the pending information is subject to a winning lottery by the main control device 60. The details of the pre-determination process will be described later. After executing step Sw0213, the process proceeds to step Sw0214.

In step Sw0214, a process of setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the prior determination process executed based on the information (holding information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as the hold command.

The hold command determines that a ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 and the determination result (first determination information) by the advance determination process based on the hold information acquired based on the entry. This is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to confirm the hold information before it becomes the target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 580: step Sw0503) of the normal process described later.

Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the entry into the first start port 33, the voice emission control device 90 holds the display in the first start port hold area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing the number in accordance with the increase in the number is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first start port holding area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holdings. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the entry into the second start port 34 is received, the voice emission control device 90 holds the display in the second start port hold area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing the number in accordance with the increase in the number is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second start port holding area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holdings.

After executing step Sw0214, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

<First judgment process>
Next, the prior determination process will be described. The pre-determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 577: Sw0213) for the ball entry process for the start port.

FIG. 578 is a flowchart showing the prior determination process. As described above, in the prior determination process, the winning lottery determination, the determination of the type of jackpot, the determination of the presence / absence of reach, etc. are performed based on the pending information, and the pending information is the winning lottery by the main control device 60. It is a process to be executed before the target of.

In step Sw031, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting port in the ball entering process for the starting port (FIG. 577) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the determination result of the pre-judgment process executed by the previous entry before the current entry is read from the corresponding storage area, and the presence or absence of the probability change jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery by the current entry. In addition, by grasping whether or not the player has won the fall lottery, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round is determined.

If it is determined in step Sw0302 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round, the process proceeds to (Sw0302: YES), step Sw0303, and the winning / failing table is stored. Refer to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode (FIG. 557 (a)) stored in the area 63a. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0305, and as a result of referring to the hit / miss table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the information of the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the big hit.

On the other hand, in step Sw0302, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round (Sw0302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0304 and the winning / failing table is stored. Refer to the hit / miss table (FIG. 557 (b)) for the high probability mode stored in the area 63a. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0305, and as a result of referring to the hit / miss table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the big hit.

In step Sw0305, if it is determined that the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a big hit (Sw0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0306, and the ball is stored in the storage area by entering the starting port this time. Grasp the value of the jackpot type counter C2. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0307, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2, which is the target of distribution this time, is acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33, refer to the distribution table for the first starting port. , When the ball is acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 34, the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to. After executing step Sw0307, the process proceeds to step Sw0308.

In step Sw0308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step Sw0308 that the probability variation jackpot is supported (Sw0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0309, and the probability variation jackpot information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the first determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw0308 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (Sw0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0310, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0315.

If it is determined in step Sw0305 that the value of the hit random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to the big hit (Sw0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0311, and the ball enters the storage area this time. The value of the stored reach random number counter C3 is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0312, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

If it is determined in step Sw313 that the reach generation is supported (Sw0313: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0314, and the reach generation information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0315. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw313 that it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach (Sw0313: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0315.

In step Sw0315, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting port in the ball entering process for the starting port (FIG. 577) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw0316, and the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the jackpot variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After executing step Sw0316, the process proceeds to step Sw0317.

In step Sw0317, the fluctuation pattern is specified from the fluctuation time information acquired in step Sw0316, and the type of the specified fluctuation pattern is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. After executing step Sw0317, the destination determination process is terminated.

<Through ball entry process>
Next, the ball entry process for through will be described. The ball entry process for through is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 576: Sw0105).

FIG. 579 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for thru. In step Sw0401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35. If it is determined in step Sw0401 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sw0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0402, and whether the number of reserved characters SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Judge whether or not. The number of reserved items SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that is reserved for performing the electric accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved items SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sw0401: NO), the entry process for this through is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sw0402 that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the number of reserved items SN (Sw0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0403 and 1 is added to the number of reserved items SN. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0404.

In step Sw0404, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step Sw0103 (FIG. 576) is stored in the first free storage area of the electric service holding area 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the ball entry process for through is completed.

On the other hand, in step Sw0402, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is not less than the upper limit value (Sw0402: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is equal to or more than the upper limit value, The ball entry process for through is completed without storing the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter, also referred to as “power on”). In the normal process, the main process of the game is executed.

FIG. 580 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sw0501, the startup process is executed. Specifically, the initial setting of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0502.

In step Sw0502, a start-up command is set. The start-up command is a command for starting a demo movie for each control device on the sub side when the power is turned on. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0503.

In step Sw0503, output data such as a start-up command set in step Sw0502 and a command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. If commands related to effects such as start-up commands, variable commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After executing step Sw0503, the process proceeds to step Sw0504.

In step Sw0504, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variable type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0505.

In step Sw0505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sw0506. In step Sw0506, a game turn control process for controlling the game in each game turn is executed. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of a symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display unit 37a, the second symbol display unit 37b, and the like are performed. The details of the game times control process will be described later. After executing step Sw0506, the process proceeds to step Sw0507.

In step Sw0507, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. The details of the game state transition process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0508.

In step Sw0508, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is in the open state. The details of the processing for electric service support will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0509.

In step Sw0509, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process of step Sw0503). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached. If it is determined in step Sw0509 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal process (Sw0509: NO), in step Sw0510 and step Sw0511 until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached. Within the remaining time of, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sw0510, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Sw0511, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw0509 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (Sw0509: YES), the process returns to step Sw0503 and each process from step Sw0503 to step Sw0508 is performed. Run.

Since the execution time of each process from step Sw0503 to step Sw0508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process will be described. The game times control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 580: Sw0506) of the normal process.

FIG. 581 is a flowchart showing the game times control process. In step Sw0601, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The open / close execution mode flag is turned on when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is turned off when the open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process.

If it is determined in step Sw0601 that the open / close execution mode is in progress (Sw0601: YES), the game round control process ends without executing any of the processes after step Sw0602. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the game round is not started regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw0601 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (Sw0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0602.

In step Sw0602, it is determined whether or not the special figure unit 37 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b provided in the special symbol unit 37 is in variable display. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the special map variation display flag in the special map variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special symbol variation display flag is turned on when starting the variation display for either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, and is turned off when the variation display ends.

If it is determined in step Sw0602 that the special figure unit 37 is not displaying the fluctuation (Sw0602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0603.

In step Sw0603, the fluctuation start processing for starting the fluctuation display in the special figure unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start processing will be described later. After executing step Sw0603, the game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw0602 that the special figure unit 37 is in the variable display (Sw0602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0604.

In step Sw0604, the variation end processing for terminating the variation display in the special figure unit 37 and the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the variable end processing will be described later. After executing step Sw0604, the game round control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described. The variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 581: Sw0603) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 582 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. In step Sw0701, it is determined whether or not the total reserved quantity CRN exceeds "0". When the total reserved quantity CRN is "0" or less, it means that the starting reserved quantity is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Therefore, if it is determined in step Sw0701 that the total number of reserved pieces CRN is "0" or less (Sw0701: NO), the fluctuation start process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw0701 that the total number of reserved pieces CRN exceeds "0" (Sw0701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0702.

In step Sw0702, the hold information shift process for setting the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sw0703. The details of the hold information shift process will be described later.

In step Sw0703, a hit determination process including a process when a big hit is won in the hit lottery is performed. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Sw0703, the process proceeds to step Sw0704.

In step Sw0704, the variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is to set the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, based on the presence / absence of a big hit, the presence / absence of reach, and the like. It is the processing of. The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sw0704, the process proceeds to step Sw0705.

In step Sw0705, a variable command is set. The variable command is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33, or is acquired based on the entry into the second starting opening 34. It contains information indicating whether or not the information is on hold, information on whether or not reach has occurred, and information on the fluctuation time set in step Sw0706. After executing step Sw0705, the process proceeds to step Sw0706.

In step Sw0706, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence / absence of a big hit and the result of the distribution determination. That is, the type command includes 16R probability variation jackpot information, 8R probability variation jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or loss result information about the winning lottery as the jackpot type information. It has been.

The variable command and the type command set in step Sw0705 and step Sw0706 are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by step Sw0503 in the normal process (FIG. 580). The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variable command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step Sw0706, the process proceeds to step Sw0707.

In step Sw0707, among the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is started to display the variation of the symbol. Specifically, when the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is specified to be the first symbol display unit 37a, and the variable display is started. When the second symbol display unit flag is ON, it is specified that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game round is the second symbol display unit 37b, and the variable display is started. After executing step Sw0707, the process proceeds to step Sw0708.

In step Sw0708, the special figure change display flag stored in the special figure change display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sw0708, this fluctuation start process ends.

<Hold information shift processing>
Next, the hold information shift process will be described. The hold information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 582: Sw0702).

FIG. 583 is a flowchart showing the hold information shift process. In step Sw0801, it is determined whether or not the hold area to be processed for executing the hold information shift process is the first hold area Ra. Specifically, among the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 556) in time series, the hold information stored first (hold stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra). Information) is stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb (information), which is the earliest hold information stored in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 556) in time series. If it is stored in the hold area before the hold information), it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra. On the other hand, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb in time series is earlier than the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra in time series. If the stored hold information is stored in the hold area first, it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the second hold area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sw0801, the reserved information can be processed in the order stored in the first reserved area Ra or the second reserved area Rb.

If it is determined in step Sw0801 that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra (step Sw0801: YES), the hold information shift process for the first hold area in steps Sw0802 to step Sw0807 is executed. On the other hand, in step Sw0801, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (step Sw0801: NO). ), Hold information shift processing for the second hold area in steps Sw0808 to Step Sw0813 is executed.

In step Sw0802, after subtracting 1 from the first start hold quantity RaN in the first hold area Ra, the process proceeds to step Sw0803 and the total hold quantity CRN is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0804. In step Sw0804, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0805.

In step Sw0805, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step Sw0805, the process proceeds to step Sw0806.

In step Sw0806, when the second symbol display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second symbol display unit flag is information for specifying whether the target for starting the variation display this time is the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0807.

In step Sw0807, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the first hold area Ra, that is, corresponding to the first start port 33. A shift command including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the pending information shift process is terminated. The shift command set in step Sw0807 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Sw0503 in the normal process (FIG. 580).

In step Sw0801, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (Sw0801: NO), the step. Proceed to Sw0808.

In step Sw0808, the second start hold quantity RbN of the second hold area Rb is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0809. In step Sw0809, the total number of reserved pieces CRN is subtracted by 1, the process proceeds to step Sw0810, and the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0811.

In step Sw0811, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step Sw0811, the process proceeds to step Sw0812.

In step Sw0812, if the second symbol display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0813.

In step Sw0813, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, the information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the second hold area Rb, that is, corresponding to the second start port 34. A shift command including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the pending information shift process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sw0813 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Sw0503 in the normal process (FIG. 580). The voice emission control device 90 sets a command for changing the display in the second start port hold area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command. Send to 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second start port holding area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holdings.

<Collision detection processing>
Next, the hit determination process will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process (FIG. 582: Sw0703).

FIG. 584 is a flowchart showing the hit determination process. In step Sw0901, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sw0901 that the mode is in the high probability mode (Sw0901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0902, and the pass / fail determination is made with reference to the pass / fail table for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 557 (b). Is determined. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0904.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw0901 that the mode is not in the high probability mode (Sw0901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0903, and the pass / fail determination is made with reference to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 557 (a). Is determined. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0904.

In step Sw0904, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination (winning lottery) in step Sw0902 or step Sw0903 is a big hit winning. In step Sw0904, if the result of the winning / failing determination is a big hit (Sw0904: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0905.

In step Sw0905, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sw0905 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (Sw0905: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0906, and the distribution table for the first starting port (see FIG. 558 (a)) is referred to. Then, the distribution is determined. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of 16R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. Determine if it is included in.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw0905 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (Sw0905: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0907, and the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 558 (b)). The distribution is determined with reference to. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 16R probability variation jackpot or the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. After executing the process of step Sw0906 or step Sw0907, the process proceeds to step Sw0908.

In step Sw0908, the flag (big hit flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sw0906 or step Sw0907 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, turn on the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, if it is an 8R probability variation jackpot, turn on the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, and if it is a 16R normal jackpot, turn on the 16R normal jackpot flag. Turn it on, and if it is an 8R normal jackpot, turn on the 8R normal jackpot flag. After executing step Sw0908, the process proceeds to step Sw0909.

In step Sw0909, a process of setting a stop result for a big hit is executed. Specifically, in this game round in which a big hit is won, it is set which stop result is displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to end the variable display. It is a process to do. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63f (FIG. 555), the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot distributed in step Sw0906 or step Sw0907 can be obtained. The address information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sw0909, the hit determination process ends.

In step Sw0904, if the winning / failing result of the winning lottery in step Sw0902 or step Sw0903 is not a big hit winning (Sw0904: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0910, and the reach is generated in the game round with reference to the reach determination table. Judge whether or not. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is set as the reach occurrence in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 555). Determine if it matches the value you have. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw0911.

In step Sw0911, if the result of the reach determination in step Sw0910 is that reach occurs in the game round (Sw0911: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw0912 and the reach generation flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach generation flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sw0912, the process proceeds to step Sw0913.

On the other hand, in step Sw0911, if the result of the reach determination in step Sw0910 is that reach does not occur in the game round (Sw0911: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw0913 without executing step Sw0912.

In step Sw0913, a process of setting a stop result for disconnection is executed. Specifically, in this game round, which is the result of the deviation, the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b is used to set which stop result is displayed to end the variable display. It is a process. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for deviation in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. , The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sw0913, the hit determination process ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 582: Sw0704) of the variation start process.

FIG. 585 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation time setting process. In step Sw1001, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw1002.

In step Sw1002, a process for specifying the fluctuation time table is executed. The fluctuation time table is tabular data in which the fluctuation time information (variation time information), which is the time from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the symbol, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS are used as data elements. In the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63, various types of variable time tables are stored according to the game state, the presence / absence of a jackpot and time reduction, and the presence / absence of reach occurrence. In step Sw1002, one fluctuation time table is specified from these fluctuation time tables. Specifically, based on the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag, the current gaming state is among the low probability low support state, high probability high support state, low probability high support state, and high probability low support state. The judgment result, the judgment result of the hit / fail judgment to determine whether or not the jackpot or the time reduction is given, and the judgment result of the reach judgment to determine whether or not the reach has occurred, Based on the above, one variable time table is specified from the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. After executing step Sw1002, the process proceeds to step Sw1003.

In step Sw1003, by referring to the fluctuation time table specified in step Sw1002, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step Sw1001 is acquired. After executing step Sw1003, the process proceeds to step Sw1004.

In step Sw1004, the fluctuation time information acquired in step Sw1003 is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process is terminated.

<Variation end processing>
Next, the variable end processing will be described. The variation end process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 581: Sw0604) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 586 is a flowchart showing the variation end processing. In step Sw1101, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the fluctuation time is the time from the start of fluctuation of the symbol row to the stop of all the symbol rows, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sw1101, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 is "0". The value of the fluctuation time information is set in the above-mentioned fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 585). The value of the set fluctuation time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started.

If it is determined in step Sw1101 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sw1101: NO), the fluctuation end processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sw1101 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (Sw1101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1102, which corresponds to the current game times among the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. Performs processing to end the fluctuation of the symbol in the symbol display unit. Subsequently, in step Sw1103, the special figure change display flag stored in the special figure change display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing step Sw1103, the process proceeds to step Sw1104.

In step Sw1104, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing result of the winning lottery related to this game round is a big hit winning. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step Sw1104, if none of the above flags is ON, that is, if it is determined that the winning / failing result of the winning lottery related to the current game round is not a big hit winning (Sw1104: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1105.

In step Sw1105, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sw1105 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Sw1105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1106, and it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter PNC exceeds 0. If it is determined in step Sw1106 that the value of the game count counter PNC exceeds 0 (Sw1106: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1107, and the value of the game count counter PNC is decremented by 1. After executing step Sw1107, the process proceeds to step Sw1108. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1106 that the value of the game count counter PNC is 0 or less (Sw1106: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1108 without executing step Sw1107.

In step Sw1108, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sw1108 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Sw1108: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1109, and it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter PNC exceeds 0.

If it is determined in step Sw1109 that the value of the game count counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sw1109: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1110 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After executing step Sw1110, the variable time end processing is terminated.

When it is determined in step Sw1108 that the high probability mode flag is ON (Sw1108: YES), or when it is determined in step Sw1109 that the value of the game count counter PNC exceeds 0 (step Sw1109: YES). , This variable time end processing is terminated without executing step Sw1110. Further, when it is determined in step Sw1105 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sw1105: NO), the variable time end processing is terminated without executing steps Sw106 to Sw1110.

On the other hand, in step Sw1104, any one of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag is ON, that is, the winning / failing result of the winning lottery related to this game round. If it is determined that the jackpot is won (Sw1104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw111, and the open / close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sw111, the end processing of the variable time is terminated.

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 580: Sw0507) of the normal process.

FIG. 587 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step Sw1201, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the large winning opening opening / closing processing period (at the beginning of the ending period) in the opening / closing execution mode, and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the open / close execution mode.

If it is determined in step Sw1201 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sw1201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1202, and it is determined whether or not the open / close processing period flag is ON. The opening / closing processing period flag is turned on at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening / closing execution mode and the large winning opening opening / closing processing period, which is the period during which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed, is started. , It is turned off at the timing when the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 36b is completed.

If it is determined in step Sw1202 that the open / close processing period flag is not ON (Sw1202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1203, and it is determined whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the beginning of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Sw1203 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sw1203: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1204, and it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sw1204 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (Sw1204: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1205. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1204 that the open / close execution mode flag is OFF (Sw1204: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

In step Sw1205, the high probability mode flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw1206. In step Sw1206, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw1207.

In step Sw1207, an opening / closing scenario setting process for setting an opening / closing scenario is executed. The opening / closing scenario defines a pattern of opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 36b in the round game. In this embodiment, the condition for shifting the opening / closing door 36b from the closed state to the open state (hereinafter, also referred to as “opening condition”) This is a program in which the condition for shifting the opening / closing door 36b from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter, also referred to as “closed condition”) is recorded. The opening / closing scenario is stored in the opening / closing scenario storage area 63h of the ROM 63.

The opening conditions are as follows, for example.
-The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing to start each round game in the open / close execution mode.
When the above one item is satisfied, the opening / closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

The closing conditions are as follows, for example.
-The elapsed time from the start of each round game exceeds the predetermined upper limit duration (for example, 15 seconds).
-The number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening 36a after starting each round game exceeds the predetermined maximum number.
When either of the above two items is satisfied, the opening / closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

After executing step Sw1207, the process proceeds to step Sw1208 described above.

In step Sw1208, the opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period (hereinafter, also referred to as an opening time) in the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, the same constant length of opening time is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sw1208, the process proceeds to step Sw1209.

In step Sw1209, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Sw0503 in the normal process (FIG. 580). This opening command contains information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current open / close execution mode. The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the large winning opening opening / closing processing period based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step Sw1209, the process proceeds to step Sw1210, and the opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sw1203 that the opening period flag is ON (Sw1203: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1211.

In step Sw1211, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Sw1211 that the opening period has ended (Sw1211: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1212 and the opening period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw1213.

In step Sw1213, a round display start process for notifying the type of the opening / closing execution mode this time is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the above address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is specified from the specified stop result data. Confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round display unit 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step Sw1213, the process proceeds to step Sw1214.

In step Sw1214, the open / close processing period flag is turned ON. In the following step Sw1215, an open / close process start command is set. The open / close process start command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the open / close process period has started. The open / close process start command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 580: step Sw0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sw1215, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sw1202 that the open / close processing period flag is ON (Sw1202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1216 to execute the large winning opening opening / closing process. The process of opening and closing the large winning opening will be described later. After executing step Sw1216, the process proceeds to step Sw1217.

In step Sw1217, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed depending on whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened is "0". do. If it is determined in step Sw1217 that the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed (Sw1217: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1218. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1217 that the large winning opening opening / closing process has not been completed (Sw1217: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

In step Sw1218, the open / close processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Sw1219.

In step Sw1219, the round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is terminated so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step Sw1219, the process proceeds to step Sw1220.

In step Sw1220, the ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the ending period (hereinafter, also referred to as an ending time) in the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set in each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sw1220, the process proceeds to step Sw1221.

In step Sw1221, the ending command is set. This set ending command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Sw0503 in the normal process (FIG. 580). The voice emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on the reception of the ending command. After executing step Sw1221, the process proceeds to step Sw1222.

In step Sw1222, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sw1201 that the ending period flag is ON (Sw1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1223.

In step Sw1223, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sw1220), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step Sw1220 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (Sw1223: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1224.

In step Sw1224, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw1225, and the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of the game times after the end of the current ending period. Details of the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sw1225, the process proceeds to step Sw1226 to turn off the open / close execution mode flag. After executing step Sw1226, the process proceeds to step Sw1227.

In step Sw1227, it is determined whether or not the total reserved quantity CRN is "0". When the total reserved quantity CRN is "0", it means that the starting reserved quantity is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. If it is determined in step Sw1227 that the total number of reserved pieces CRN is "0" (Sw1227: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1228.

In step Sw1228, a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command is for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that no hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 64b at the time when the symbol change (game round) is completed. It is a command that contains the information of. This set customer waiting command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Sw1228 in the normal process (FIG. 580). After executing step Sw1228, the game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1227 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (Sw1227: NO), the game round control process is terminated as it is. If it is determined in step Sw1223 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Sw1223: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

<Large winning opening opening / closing process>
Next, the process of opening and closing the large winning opening will be described. The large winning opening opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 587: Sw1216) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 588 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening / closing process. In step Sw1301, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning driving unit 36c. If it is determined in step Sw1301 that the opening / closing door 36b is not open (Sw1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1302.

In step Sw1302, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening / closing scenario set by the opening / closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the opening / closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sw1302 that the opening condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied (Sw1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1303.

In step Sw1303, the opening / closing door 36b is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw1304.

In step Sw1304, an open / close door open command is set. The opening / closing door opening command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the opening / closing door 36b has been opened. The opening / closing door opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 580: step Sw0503) of the normal processing. After executing step Sw1304, the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed.

If it is determined in step Sw1302 that the opening condition of the opening / closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sw1302: NO), the large winning opening opening / closing process is terminated without executing steps Sw1303 and step Sw1304.

If it is determined in step Sw1301 that the opening / closing door 36b is being opened (Sw1301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1305.

In step Sw1305, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening / closing scenario set by the opening / closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the opening / closing door 36b. If it is determined in step Sw1305 that the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied (Sw1305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1306.

In step Sw1306, the opening / closing door 36b is closed. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw1307.

In step Sw1307, an open / close door closing command is set. The opening / closing door closing command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the opening / closing door 36b has been closed. The opening / closing door closing command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 580: step Sw0503) of the normal processing. After executing step Sw1307, the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed.

If it is determined in step Sw1305 that the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sw1305: NO), the large winning opening opening / closing process is terminated without executing steps Sw1306 and step Sw1307.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 587: Sw1225) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 589 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of the ending period. In step Sw1401, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probabilistic jackpot is turned ON in the jackpot flag. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sw1401 that the 16R probability variation jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON (Sw1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1402, and among the 16R probability variation jackpot flag and the 8R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64. Turn off the flag that is ON. After executing step Sw1402, the process proceeds to step Sw1403.

In step Sw1403, the high probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step Sw1404, and the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after ending the open / close execution mode, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw1405.

In step Sw1405, 100 is set in the game count counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. The value set in the game count counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw1406.

In step Sw1406, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. .. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw1411.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1401 that the 16R probability variation jackpot flag and the 8R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 are not ON (Sw1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1407 and the 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw1408.

In step Sw1408, after turning on the high frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step Sw1409, and 100 is set in the game count counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw1410.

In step Sw1410, a low-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub-side to recognize that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. .. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw1411.

In step Sw1411, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the control device on the sub-side recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is used as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Set. After that, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electric service support>
Next, the processing for electric service support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 580: Sw0508) of the normal process.

FIG. 590 is a flowchart showing the electric service support process. In step Sw1501, it is determined whether or not the support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The supporting flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened and turned off when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sw1501 that the supporting flag is not ON (Sw1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1502.

In step Sw1502, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned on when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is ON. Is. If it is determined in step Sw1502 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sw1502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1503.

In step Sw1503, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal diagram unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

If it is determined in step Sw1503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sw1503: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sw1503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1504.

In step Sw1504, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuation display of the symbol in the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step Sw1504 that it is the end timing of the variable display (Sw1504: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1505, the off display is set, and then the main electric service support process is terminated. By setting the off display, the variable display of the symbol in the normal figure unit 38 is terminated in the state where the off display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1504 that it is not the end timing of the variation display (Sw1504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1506.

In step Sw1506, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0". If it is determined in step Sw1506 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is "0" (Sw1506: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1506 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0" (Sw1506: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1507.

In step Sw1507, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step Sw1508 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If the step Sw1507 is not in the open / close execution mode (Sw1507: NO) and the step Sw1508 is in the high frequency support mode (Sw1508: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1509 and the electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw1510.

In step Sw1510, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sw1509 is a support winning. If it is determined in step Sw1510 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is the support winning (Sw1510: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1511, the support winning flag is turned ON, and the counter area 64f of the RAM 64 is provided. Set "3" in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. After that, the processing for electric service support is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1510 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not the support winning (Sw1510: NO), the electric service support process is terminated without executing the process of step Sw1511.

If it is determined in step Sw1507 that the open / close execution mode is set (Sw1507: YES), or if it is determined in step Sw1508 that the mode is not in the high frequency support mode (Sw1508: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1512 and the motorized accessory opening lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw1513.

In step Sw1513, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step Sw1512 is the support winning. If it is determined in step Sw1513 that the support is not won (Sw1513: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1513 that the support is won (Sw1513: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1514, the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , End the processing for main electric service support.

If it is determined in step Sw1502 that the support winning flag is ON (Sw1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1515, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step Sw1515 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sw1515: NO), the pattern variation is being displayed in the normal drawing unit 38, so that the main electric service support process is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1515 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sw1515: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1516.

In step Sw1516, the hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the pattern in the normal drawing unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped and displayed. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw1517, the supporting flag is turned ON, and the support winning flag is turned OFF. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sw1501 that the supporting flag is ON (Sw1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1518, and an electric function opening / closing control process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

<Electrical function opening / closing control processing>
Next, the electric function opening / closing control process will be described. The electric service opening / closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 590: Sw1518) of the electric service support process.

FIG. 591 is a flowchart showing the electric function opening / closing control process. In step Sw1601, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in the driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (Sw1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1602.

In step Sw1602, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sw1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sw1602: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. That is, if the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the main electric accessory opening / closing control process ends.

If it is determined in step Sw1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sw1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1603, and a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state is performed. “250” (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sw1603, the process proceeds to step Sw1604.

In step Sw1604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step Sw1605, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step Sw1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sw1605: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (Sw1605: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1606 and the supporting flag is turned off. After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sw1601 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sw1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1607, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step Sw1607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sw1607: NO), the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1607 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sw1607: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1608, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state is executed. .. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw1609.

In step Sw1609, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and if it is determined that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (Sw1609: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1610 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step Sw1610 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (Sw1610: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1611, and "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1609 that the open / close execution mode is set (Sw1609: YES), or if it is determined in step Sw1610 that the mode is not in the high frequency support mode (Sw1610: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1612, and the second step is performed. The timer counter area T2 is set to "100" (that is, 0.2 sec). After that, the main electric function opening / closing control process is terminated.

<< 12-6 >> Various processes executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device in order to execute the advance notice effect and the result notification effect will be described. The process executed by the voice emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 592 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed with a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described.

In step Sw1701, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound / light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main MPU 62, and the commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Read sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step Sw1701, the process proceeds to step Sw1702.

In step Sw1702, the pending command correspondence process is executed. In the hold command correspondence process, the process corresponding to the first hold command among the commands stored in step Sw1701 is performed. The details of the pending command support processing will be described later. After executing step Sw1702, the process proceeds to step Sw1703.

In step Sw1703, the game rotation effect setting process is executed. In the game time effect setting process, the effect to be executed in the game time from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the symbol is set. The details of the game time production setting process will be described later. After executing step Sw1703, the process proceeds to step Sw1704.

In step Sw1704, the opening / closing execution mode effect processing is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode production processing, processing related to the production in the opening period, the production in the large winning opening opening / closing processing period, and the production in the ending period is performed. After executing step Sw1704, the process proceeds to step Sw1705.

In step Sw1705, the background effect processing is executed. In the background effect processing, a process of displaying a background moving image determined according to a command indicating a game state received from the main MPU 62 on the symbol display device 41 is performed. For example, processing is performed to display a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode is ongoing, a background video indicating that the high-frequency support mode has ended, and a background video indicating that the high-probability mode is continuing. .. After executing step Sw1705, the process proceeds to step Sw1706.

In step Sw1706, other processing is executed. The other processing is a process of displaying a demo image (moving image) on the symbol display device 41 when the game is not performed by the player. After executing step Sw1706, the process proceeds to step Sw1707.

In step Sw1707, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in each of the above-mentioned effect processing. After executing step Sw1707, the process proceeds to step Sw1708.

In step Sw1708, the audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read in the above-mentioned BGM process and each effect process. After executing step Sw1708, this timer interrupt process ends.

<Processing for pending commands>
Next, the pending command correspondence process will be described. The hold command correspondence process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 592: Sw1702).

FIG. 593 is a flowchart showing the pending command correspondence process. In step Sw1801, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sw1801 that the hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sw1801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1802.

In step Sw1802, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the entry into the first starting port 33. If it is determined in step Sw1802 that the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the entry into the first starting port 33 (Sw1802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1803 and the sound is produced. The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the optical side RAM 94 is executed. The first reserved quantity counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33 in the sound light side MPU 92. In the update process of the first hold quantity counter area, the information of the first hold count counter area is updated to the information of the hold count included in the hold command to be read this time. After executing step Sw1803, the process proceeds to step Sw1804.

In step Sw1804, the process for notifying the pending change is executed. The pending change notice processing is described in detail in the "pending change notice effect" column included in the "summary of processing by the gaming machine" column, and the display colors of the pending change display icons H, Y, and Z are the default colors. By changing from to another color, a hold change notice that suggests the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot winning for the hold information corresponding to the hold display icons H, Y, and Z whose display color has changed is executed. After executing step Sw1804, the process proceeds to step Sw1805.

In step Sw1805, the process for notifying the already executed hold is executed. The processing for the already-executed hold notice is described in detail in the "already-executed hold notice effect" column included in the "summary of processing by the gaming machine" column, and all displayed in the already-executed hold display area Dz. When the display colors of the already executed hold display icon Z are the same, the result of the lottery related to the change based on the hold information corresponding to the change execution hold display icon Y displayed in the change execution hold display area Dy. Executes the already-executed hold notice that suggests to the player that the jackpot winning is confirmed. Specifically, the process for prioritizing the execution hold is the process shown in FIG. 567. After executing step Sw1805, the process proceeds to step Sw1807.

In step Sw1802, when it is determined that the hold command to be read this time is not transmitted based on the entry into the first start port 33 (Sw1802: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start. If it is determined that the ball was transmitted based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process proceeds to step Sw1806 to update the second reserved number counter area provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94. Run. The second reserved quantity counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 34 in the sound light side MPU 92. In the second hold quantity counter area update process, the information in the second hold count counter area is updated to the hold count information included in the command to be read this time. After executing step Sw1806, the process proceeds to step Sw1807.

The reason why the processing of step Sw1803 and step Sw1806 is performed as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while the backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the voice emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, if the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information relating to the entry into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the hold information is held in the main control device 60. Is stored and retained, whereas the voice emission control device 90 grasps that the number of reserved information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first hold quantity counter area or the second hold count counter area is counted up each time the voice emission control device 90 receives a hold command, the main control device 60 actually holds the hold storage. There may be an inconvenience that the number of reserved information stored and the number of reserved information grasped by the voice emission control device 90 do not match. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment described above, the main control device 60 transmits the hold command including the information on the number of holds, and the voice emission control device 90 sends the hold command to the command each time the hold command is received. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the number of reserved pieces included is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

In step Sw1807, the update process of the total reserved number counter area provided in various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94 is executed. The total number of hold counter areas is the sum of the number of hold information acquired based on the entry into the first start port 33 and the number of hold information acquired based on the entry into the second start port 34. It is a counter area for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92. In the update process, the information of the total reserved quantity counter area is the sum of the information of the reserved quantity measured in the first reserved quantity counter area and the information of the reserved quantity measured in the second reserved quantity counter area. Update to. After executing step Sw1807, the process proceeds to step Sw1808.

If it is determined in step Sw1801 that the hold command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sw1801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sw1808 without executing steps Sw1802 to step Sw1807.

In step Sw1808, the hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display unit 37c (color of the LED lamp to be turned on) based on the number of hold information acquired based on the entry into the first start port 33 specified in step Sw1803. And combination), and based on the number of hold information acquired based on the entry into the second start port 34 specified in step Sw1806, the display mode (LED to be turned on) of the second hold display unit 37d. Control the color and combination of lamps). After executing step Sw1807, the process corresponding to this pending command is terminated.

<Game times production setting process>
Next, the game rotation effect setting process will be described. The game rotation effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 592: Sw1703).

FIG. 594 is a flowchart showing the game rotation effect setting process. In step Sw1901, it is determined whether or not the variation command and the type command have been received. If it is determined in step Sw1901 that the change command and the type command have not been received (Sw1901: NO), the game round effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw1901 that the variable command and the type command have been received (Sw1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw1902.

In step Sw1902, the variable command and the type command received this time are read, and from these commands, information on the presence / absence of a big hit, the presence / absence of a time saving grant, the type of a big hit, the presence / absence of a reach, and the fluctuation time is grasped. Then, the grasped information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw1903.

In step Sw1903, the effect pattern setting process is executed. The effect pattern setting process is the pattern of the effect to be executed in this game (preliminary effect, content of reach effect, timing of execution, timing of change of variable execution pending display icon Y in variable execution pending display area D, etc.). Is a process of determining and setting based on the effect pattern table. The variable execution pending display area Dy is an area capable of displaying the pending display information corresponding to the variation in which the variable game is started, that is, the game times after the game rotation operation is executed. Further, the hold display icon Y during variable execution is a hold display icon corresponding to the change in which the variable game is started, that is, the game times after the game round operation is executed. The details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sw1903, the process proceeds to step Sw1904.

In step Sw1904, the stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the winning / failing result of the winning lottery of this game is 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, or 8R normal jackpot, the same symbol is on the effective line L1 (see FIG. 554). The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of is established is set as the information of the stop symbol of this time. Specifically, when the winning / failing result of the winning lottery of this game round is a 16R probability variation jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot, the same odd-numbered symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, and the same. A combination of even symbols can be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, this selectivity is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the same combination of even-numbered symbols, but instead, the former is selected over the latter. The configuration may have a high rate, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot. Further, when the winning / failing result of the winning lottery of this game round is an 8R normal jackpot, the same even-numbered symbol combination is selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the big hit lottery of this game is a wrong result, it is determined whether or not reach has occurred from the content of the variable command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of reach, it corresponds to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L1 and the stop result is established in which the combination of reach symbols is established on the effective line L1. The information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L1 and the combination of the reach symbols is not established on the effective line L1. The corresponding information is set as the information of the stop symbol of this time.

In step Sw1905, a process for setting a variation pattern of the current game times is executed. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the current game is specified from the content of the fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information on the stop symbol set in step Sw1904 are combined. Select the corresponding variation pattern. When selecting the variation pattern, the variation pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw1906.

In step Sw1906, the same color removal process is executed at the time of removal. The process for removing the same color at the time of disengagement is described in detail in the column of "Process for removing the same color at the time of disengagement" included in the column of "Summary of processing by the gaming machine", and is displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy. When the hold information for the variable execution hold display icon Y is that the result of winning or losing the lottery is wrong, the four already executed executions displayed in the first to fourth already executed holding display areas Dh1 to Dh4. This is a process for preventing the hold display icon Z from having the same color. Specifically, the same color removal process at the time of disengagement performs the process of the content shown in FIG. 568. After executing step Sw1906, the process proceeds to step Sw1907.

In step Sw1907, the effect pattern set in step Sw1903, the stop symbol set in step Sw1904, the variation pattern information set in step Sw1905, and the hold display information obtained in step Sw1906 are produced in this game round. Set in the command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw1908, and the effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect content corresponding to the received effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step Sw1908, the process proceeds to step Sw1909.

In step Sw1909, the update process at the start of fluctuation is executed. The update process at the start of the fluctuation is a process for updating the hold display in the first hold display area Ds1 or the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. The details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later. After executing step Sw1909, the game round effect setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 594: Sw1903) of the game turn effect setting process.

FIG. 595 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process. In step Sw2001, the random number RN for the effect pattern is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound / light side RAM 94. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw2002.

In step Sw2002, a process for specifying the effect pattern table is executed. The effect pattern table is three-dimensional tabular data in which the effect pattern to be executed in the game times, the fluctuation time, and the random number RN for the effect pattern are data elements. In the effect pattern table storage area 93a of the ROM 93, various types of effect pattern tables are stored according to the presence / absence of a big hit, the presence / absence of time saving, and the presence / absence of reach. In step Sw2002, one effect pattern table is specified from these effect pattern tables. Specifically, the effect pattern table storage area of the ROM 93 is based on the presence / absence of the jackpot, the presence / absence of the time saving, the type of the jackpot, and the presence / absence of the reach, which are grasped in step Sw1902 of the game round effect setting process (FIG. 594). One production pattern table is specified from 93a. After executing step Sw2002, the process proceeds to step Sw2003.

In step Sw2003, with reference to the effect pattern table specified in Sw2002, the fluctuation time grasped in step Sw1902 of the game round effect setting process (FIG. 594) and the value of the random number RN for the effect pattern obtained by step Sw2001 this time. Acquires the production pattern corresponding to and. After executing step Sw2003, the process proceeds to step Sw2004.

In step Sw2004, the effect pattern acquired in step Sw2003 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in this game round. After executing step Sw2004, the present effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Update process at the start of fluctuation>
Next, the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of the fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 594: Sw1909) of the game rotation effect setting process.

FIG. 596 is a flowchart showing an update process at the start of fluctuation. In step Sw2101, it is determined whether or not the variable command received this time is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33. If it is determined in step Sw2101 that the variable command received this time is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33 (Sw2101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sw2102. The information in the first reserved quantity counter area is updated so that the number stored in the first reserved quantity counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw2103.

In step Sw2103, a process of shifting the data (display color and winning / failing result of the winning lottery) stored in the special 1 hold effect storage area (see FIG. 566) stored in the sound / light side RAM 94 is executed. This shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the stored area to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data of the 4th already executed hold display area Dz4, the 3rd already executed hold display area Dz3 → the 4th already executed hold display area Dz4, the 2nd already executed hold display area Dz2 → the 3rd already Execution hold display area Dz3, 1st executed hold display area Dz1 → 2nd executed hold display area Dz2, variable execution hold display area Dy → 1st executed hold display area Dz1, 1st unexecuted hold display area Dh1 → Variable execution pending display area Dy, 2nd unexecuted hold display area Dh2 → 1st unexecuted hold display area Dh1, 3rd unexecuted hold display area Dh3 → 2nd unexecuted hold display area Dh2, 4th unexecuted hold display The data in each area is shifted such as area Dh4 → third unexecuted hold display area Dh3. After executing step Sw2103, the process proceeds to step Sw2105.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sw2101 that the variable command received this time does not relate to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33 (Sw2101: NO), step Sw2104 is performed. The information in the second reserved quantity counter area is updated so that the number stored in the second reserved quantity counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is decremented by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw2105.

In step Sw2105, the information in the total hold quantity counter area is updated so that the total hold count stored in the total hold quantity counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1. After that, the update process at the start of fluctuation is terminated.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, the process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly the main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and the processes that are executed when a command is received from the voice emission control device 90. There is a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes the main process after the power is turned on, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. If the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, the main process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 597 is a flowchart showing the main process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described.

In step Sw2201, the initial setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the character information in the compressed format stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, the information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also, make other settings necessary for initialization. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw2202.

In step Sw2202, the interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process executed every time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 598 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sw2301, the command storage process is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 599 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed by detecting the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105. In the V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute the display instruction.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal generated in VDP105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is performed every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Therefore, since the VDP 105 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image is started or displayed during the drawing of the image. It is possible to suppress the expansion of an image accompanying a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information inside is stored. Hereinafter, the processing details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described.

In step Sw2401, command correspondence processing is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt processing (Fig. 598), and the processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when an effect command is stored, control of drawing and displaying an image is started so that the effect mode specified by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, and when it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of drawing and displaying an image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command correspondence process (Sw2401), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so that there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the voice emission control device 90 and the effect is started, it is highly possible that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop symbol set by the voice emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the mode. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41.

In step Sw2402, the display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command correspondence process (Sw2401) or the like. .. Then, the process proceeds to step Sw2403.

In step Sw2403, task processing is executed. In the task process, the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting process (Sw2402). In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step Sw2404.

In step Sw2404, the drawing process is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character determined by the task process (Sw2403) are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on these information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received at the time of the previous V interrupt processing on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process proceeds to step Sw2405, other processing is executed, and then the V interrupt processing is terminated. As described above, an example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described.

<< 12-7 >> Action / Effect:
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present invention, the player can use a predetermined number of already-executed hold display icons Z in the already-executed hold display area Dz corresponding to the game times after the game rotation operation is executed. On the other hand, it is possible to realize a new production that has never existed before, such as suggesting the confirmation of the jackpot winning.

Here, let us consider as a reference example a pachinko machine that has the above-mentioned function of the hold change notice effect but does not have the above-mentioned function of the already executed hold change notice effect. In the pachinko machine of this reference example, the hold change notice is given using the unexecuted hold display icon H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh, but the unexecuted hold display icon H shifts to the variable execution pending display area Dy. However, after the change is executed and the winning / failing result of the lottery related to the change is not correct, the hold display icon Y during the change is meaningless and nothing is done. For example, even if the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H or the variable execution hold display icon Y becomes red, which has the highest expectation of winning a big hit due to the hold change notice, the hold corresponding to the hold display icons H and Y is held. If the result of the winning lottery due to the fluctuation of information is wrong, it means that there was nothing.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fun of the game is improved by giving a meaning to the already executed hold display icon Z whose variable display has ended.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, for example, during the next fluctuation display of case 1 shown in FIG. 569 (c), the third already executed hold display area Dz3 to the variable execution hold display area Dy. If the four hold display icons Z, Y are aligned in the same color and the fluctuation ends and each hold display icon Z, Y, H shifts to the left, the already executed hold display area Dz contains the already executed hold display. The situation is such that all the icons Z are in the same color. In this situation, when the variable execution pending display icon Y shifts to the already executed pending display area Dz, the variable execution pending display icon Y is displayed in red rather than red. The case where the expectation of winning the big hit is displayed in green (in the case of FIG. 569 (c)) is more advantageous for the player.

The reason why it is highly advantageous for the player is that during the next variation display shown in FIG. This is because the result will be a big hit. For this reason, even if the hold information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display icon H or the variable execution hold display icon Y is green with a lower expectation of winning a big hit than red, the already executed hold display area Dz has already been executed. Under the condition that there is a high possibility that all the display icons Z have the same color, the unexecuted hold display icon H and the variable execution hold display icon Y remain green without changing to red, and are in the already executed hold display area Dz. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that he / she wants to make the transition. In addition, the green display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H and the variable execution hold display icon Y is different from the stage of expectation that the hold information set for the green display color wins the jackpot. It can have a special meaning such as winning confirmation. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when all the already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz are all in the same color, the winning or losing result of the winning lottery is determined to be the big hit winning. For this reason, a greater sense of expectation can be given to the player. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in case 4, for example, the display color of the already executed hold display icon Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz may change. Therefore, for example, in a situation where the display colors of all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are not aligned with the same display color for the player. However, the display color of the already executed hold display icon Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz may change, and the variable execution hold display icon Y displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy may have already been executed. By shifting to the hold display area Dz, it is possible to raise the expectation that all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz may have the same display color. can. Then, the display color of the already executed hold display icon Z actually displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz changes, and the variable execution pending display icon Y shifts to the already executed hold display area Dz, so that the execution has already been executed. When all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the hold display area Dz have the same display color, the player can be greatly delighted.

More specifically, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, one hold display icon (different color hold display icon) H, Y, Z in the determination target hold display icon column RW is displayed by the assist setting process. By converting the colors, the display colors of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z in the determination target hold display icon column RW are all configured to be the same color. For this reason, even if it is not possible to realize that all the already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz have the same color by simply shifting the hold display icons H, Y, and Z, a different color hold display is displayed. By converting the display color of the icon, it is possible to make all the already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz have the same color. Generally, it takes a long game to make all the already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz have the same color only by shifting the hold display icons H, Y, and Z, but it is an assist. By the setting process, it is possible to create a state in which all the already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in the same color even in a game for a short period of time. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the already-executed hold notice effect can be performed at a frequency suitable for practical use.

For example, by changing the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1, all the already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz will be aligned in the same color thereafter. Since there are cases, it is possible to give great joy to the player who expected that all the already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz have the same color.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the unexecuted hold display icon H is a circle, the already executed hold display icon Z is a hexagon, and the shapes of the two are different. For this reason, it is easy to distinguish between the unexecuted hold display icon H and the already executed hold display icon Z, and the unexecuted hold display icon H is changed from the unexecuted hold display area Dh to the variable execution pending display area Dy. It becomes easy to determine that the hold display area Dz has been shifted. Therefore, visibility is improved.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the already-executed hold notice effect is executed in a gaming state (so-called normal state) in which it is substantially impossible for the gaming ball to enter the second starting port 34, and the game is played. It is not executed in the gaming state (during the high frequency support mode) in which the ball can easily enter the second starting port 34. In the high-frequency support mode, the one-time opening time of the electric accessory 34a is set to be long when the electric role opening is won, which is originally in a state of high advantage for the player, and the execution has already been suspended. There is little need to perform a notice effect. Moreover, in the high frequency support mode, it is difficult to execute the already executed hold notice effect in the unexecuted hold display area Dh and the variable execution hold display area Dy because the fluctuation time is short. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the control can be simplified by not executing the already executed hold notice effect in the high frequency support mode, and the already executed hold notice effect is executed in the normal state. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as one aspect of changing the display mode of the hold display icons H, Y, Z by the hold change notice effect, the display color of the hold display icons H, Y, Z is changed. Therefore, it is clear at a glance whether or not all the hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz have the same color. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the hold information about the change execution hold display icon Y to be displayed in the change execution hold display area Dy is the information that the winning / failing result of the lottery is wrong. In this case, four existing display areas Dz1 to Dz4 will be displayed in the first to fourth executed hold display areas Dz1 to Dz4 by changing the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H by the same color removal process at the time of disconnection. It is avoided that the execution hold display icon Z has the same color. For this reason, the player expected that all the display colors of the already executed hold display icon Z in the already executed hold display area Dz would be the same color, and the winning or losing result of the winning lottery would be the big hit winning confirmation. However, the display color of the already executed hold display icon Z does not become the same color, and as a result, the jackpot winning is not confirmed, and it becomes disappointing and disappointing. In this way, it is possible to give a feeling of disappointment while giving a feeling of expectation that the winning / failing result of the winning lottery will be confirmed as a big hit by the already executed hold notice effect. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player the ups and downs of contradictory emotions such as a feeling of expectation and a feeling of disappointment, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

For example, in a situation where if each hold display icon shifts as it is, all the already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz are likely to have the same color, the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 is not yet executed. By changing the display color of the execution hold display icon H, all the already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz may not be aligned in the same color. Therefore, it is possible to give a great disappointment to the player who expected that all the already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz have the same color.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the first to fourth unexecuted hold display areas Dh1 to Dh1 by the assist setting process provided in the already executed hold notice process. Of these, in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 on the side closest to the variable execution pending display area Dy, the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H is the same color as the display color of the same color hold display icon (hereinafter). , Called the same color). In this case, immediately before the unexecuted hold display icon H shifts from the unexecuted hold display area Dh to the variable execution pending display area Dy, the display mode of the unexecuted hold display icon H is switched to the same color. Therefore, it is possible to give a great sense of surprise to the player.

<< 12-8 >> Modification example of the twelfth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be carried out in various embodiments without departing from the gist thereof, and for example, the following modifications are also possible. In the modified examples described below, the description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as those of the above embodiment will be omitted.

<< 12-8-1 >> Modification 1: Modification 1:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, as a notice of the already executed hold, when all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are all in the same color, the winning / failing result of the winning lottery Is configured to suggest to the player that the big hit is confirmed. On the other hand, as a modification, when the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are lined up so as to satisfy a specific rule even if they are not all the same color, it is a hit. It may be configured to suggest to the player that the winning / failing result of the lottery is a big hit winning decision. As a specific rule, for example, when all colors (white, blue, green, red) are available, the expectation of winning a big hit is determined in the direction from the first executed pending display area Dz1 to the fourth executed pending display area Dz4. When arranging in the order of display colors (white, blue, green, red) from the low side to the high side, the expectation of winning a big hit in the direction from the 1st executed pending display area Dz1 to the 4th already executed pending display area Dz4. It may be the case that the display colors are arranged in the order of the display colors (red, green, blue, white) from the high degree side to the low degree side. According to these modified examples, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player for the big hit winning and to improve the interest of the game, as in the twelfth embodiment.

<< 12-8-2 >> Modification 2:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, when all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are all in the same color, the advantage for the player is increased. , It is configured to suggest to the player that the winning / failing result of the winning lottery is the big winning winning. The advantage for this player is that the winning / failing result of the winning lottery is confirmed as a big hit winning, and the expectation for the variable display is increased, the actual profit is increased, and the profitability is increased. It may be configured to notify high-level matters. As for the composition that raises the expectation for the variable display, the type of reach develops into the type with high expectation of big hit winning, the advance notice production is replaced with the production with high expectation of big hit winning, and the time until the production and result announcement. Various things can be adopted, such as the one that activates the timer that specifies. As actual profits, various ones can be adopted, such as a configuration in which the electric accessory 34a is opened a plurality of times, a configuration in which a time saving grant is won, a configuration in which a small hit is won in a big hit lottery, and the like. The "time reduction grant" is a result of success or failure that does not trigger a transition to the open / close execution mode in which the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened / closed, although the support mode serves as a transition trigger. As highly useful notification items, various items such as a pachinko machine setting (a setting that determines the probability of winning a big hit) and a base value that indicates a normal payout rate can be adopted. Also with these configurations, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation and improve the interest of the game, as in the twelfth embodiment and its modified examples.

<< 12-8-3 >> Modification 3:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, as a notice of the already executed hold, when all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are all in the same color, the winning / failing result of the winning lottery Is configured to suggest to the player that the big hit is confirmed. This configuration has the same advantage for the player regardless of whether the display color having the same color is blue, green, or red. On the other hand, as a modification, a display color having the same color and a higher degree of difficulty may be configured to be more advantageous to the player. Specifically, it is more advantageous for the player when all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in green than when they are all aligned in green. .. Further, the case where all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in green is more advantageous for the player than the case where all of them are aligned in red. According to this modification, it is possible to give high or low to the advantage given to the player, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<< 12-8-4 >> Modification 4:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, assuming that all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz have the same color, the already executed hold display area Dz is set to four unit areas. There are cases where it is configured by Dh1 to Dh4 and cases where the already executed hold display area Dz is configured by three unit areas Dh1 to Dh3, and in both cases, the advantages for the player are the same. did. On the other hand, as a modification, when all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in the same color, the number of unit areas constituting the already executed hold display area Dz is The larger the number, the higher the advantage for the player. Specifically, it is better to configure the already executed hold display area Dz by four unit areas Dh1 to Dh4 than to configure the already executed hold display area Dz by three unit areas Dh1 to Dh3. It may be a configuration that is highly advantageous to the person. According to this modification, it is possible to give high or low to the advantage given to the player, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<< 12-8-5 >> Modification 5:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, the hold display icons H, Y, Z at various timings exemplified in cases 2 to 7 in the assist setting process (S9 in FIG. 567) in the already executed hold notice process. Although the display color of is changed, the timing of changing this display color in the game times is the timing at which the variable display is started. On the other hand, as a modification, in the assist setting process, the display colors of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z may be changed at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display. According to this modification, since the display colors of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z change during the variable display of the game times, even after the variable display is started, the determination target hold display icon string RW is displayed. The player is expected to see if the display colors of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z are the same, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

In the modification 5, the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 may be configured to display an effect that the moving body reaches the hold display icons H, Y, and Z at the timing when the display color changes. Mobile objects include tangible objects such as petals, confetti, and fireballs, and intangible objects such as light rays, laser light, and radio waves. Further, in this modification 5, the shape of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z is changed from the default circular or hexagonal shape to another shape (for example, a character or a character) at the timing when the display color changes or before the timing. It may be configured to display an effect to be converted into a shape imitating a coat of arms, etc.). According to these configurations, the hold display icons H, Y arrive at the hold display icons H, Y, Z, and the shape of the hold display icons H, Y, Z changes to a special shape. It is possible to make the player pay close attention to the change in the display color of, Z, and further expect that the hold display icons H, Y, and Z displayed in the determination target hold display icon column RW all have the same color.

In the modified example 5, that is, in the modified example 5, in which the display colors of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z are changed at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the variable display is started in the assist setting process. By changing the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1, the display colors of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z can be aligned in the determination target hold display icon column RW. can. According to this configuration, immediately before the transition from the unexecuted hold display area Dh to the variable execution pending display area Dy, the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H is switched to the same color, which is large for the player. Can give joy.

<< 12-8-6 >> Modification 6:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, the display color of one hold display icon H, Y, Z in the determination target hold display icon column RW is converted as the assist setting process in the already executed hold notice processing. Therefore, the display colors of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z in the hold display icon column RW of the determination target are all configured to be the same color. On the other hand, as a modification, by converting the display colors of two or more hold display icons H, Y, Z in the judgment target hold display icon column RW, the hold in the judgment target hold display icon column RW is performed. The display colors of the display icons H, Y, and Z may all be the same. According to this configuration, even if only the different color hold display icons are in the judgment target hold display icon column RW, the player is expected that the hold display icons H, Y, and Z in the judgment target hold display icon row RW are all the same color. Can be made to.

<< 12-8-7 >> Modification 7:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, in the assist setting process in the process for notifying the already executed hold, the different color hold display icon is specified from the judgment target hold display icon column RW, and the display color of the specified different color hold display icon is specified. Was configured to be converted. On the other hand, as a modification, the configuration is such that the different color hold display icon can be specified according to the operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player, and the different color is waited for the different color hold display icon to be specified by the effect operation button 24. The display color of the hold display icon may be converted. Further, the mini-game effect is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the player waits for the different color hold display icon to be designated according to the operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player for the mini-game effect. The display color conversion of the different color hold display icon may be executed. According to these modified examples, since a special operation by the player is required, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<< 12-8-8 >> Modification 8:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, the effect of changing the display color of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z is executed as the hold change notice and the already executed hold change notice, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold change notice is not limited to this. And, as an already executed hold notice, an effect of changing the shape of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z may be executed. As the hold change notice and the already executed hold notice, the effect of changing the size of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z may be executed. As the hold change notice and the already executed hold notice, an effect in which the types of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z change may be executed. As the hold change notice and the already executed hold notice, the effect of changing the image added to the hold display icons H, Y, and Z may be executed. Further, the effect may be executed by any combination of a plurality of color change, shape change, size change, type change, and additional image change. As described above, as the pending change notice and the already executed pending notice, any effect may be executed as long as the display mode changes.

<< 12-8-9 >> Modification 9:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, the variable execution hold display icon Y shifted from the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 to the variable execution hold display area Dy changes in the variable execution hold display area Dy. It was configured to be displayed from the start of to until the fluctuation stopped. On the other hand, as a modification, the variable execution hold display icon Y that has been shifted from the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 to the variable execution hold display area Dy has a variable display in the variable execution hold display area Dy. It may be configured to be displayed until a predetermined period (a period before the suspension of fluctuation, for example, several seconds) elapses from the time when it is started, and disappears after the elapse of the predetermined period. As a general rule, the disappeared variable execution hold display icon Y shifts to the already executed hold display area Dz side and displays the resurrection display at the timing when the fluctuation display ends and the stop display period ends. It may be configured so that it may not shift to the already executed hold display area Dz side.

Here, each of the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the first to third executed hold display areas Dz1 to Dz3 is green, and the variable execution hold display icon displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy is displayed. Consider a case where Y is blue and the unexecuted hold display icon H displayed in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 is green. In this case, the variable execution pending display icon Y displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy disappears after a predetermined period from the time when the variable display is started, and the variable execution pending display icon Y disappears, and the variable execution pending display icon Y is already executed pending display. If the area does not shift to the Dz side, the unexecuted hold display icon H (green) displayed in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 changes at the timing when the change of the next game round starts. By shifting to Dy, the arrangement of the four already executed hold display icons Z from the third executed hold display area Dz3 to the variable execution hold display area Dy is aligned in the same color. For this reason, according to this configuration, the arrangement of the four already executed hold display icons Z is suddenly arranged in the same color, so that the player can be given a sudden sense of surprise. For this reason, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As another modification, the variable execution hold display icon Y that has been shifted from the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 to the variable execution hold display area Dy in the twelfth embodiment is changed to the variable execution hold display area Dy. In the configuration that is displayed from the start of the fluctuation to the stop of the fluctuation, the hold display icon Y during the change may disappear after the end of the change and may not shift to the already executed hold display area Dz side. ..

<< 12-8-10 >> Modification 10:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, when all the display colors of the already executed hold display icon Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are the same color, they are displayed in the variable execution hold display area Dy. A notice effect is realized in which the winning / failing result of the winning lottery related to the fluctuation based on the holding information corresponding to the holding display icon Y during the change is confirmed as the big hit winning. On the other hand, as a modification, all of the already executed hold display icon Z and the variable execution hold display icon Y displayed within the range including the already executed hold display area Dz and the variable execution hold display area Dy (that is,). 5) If the colors are the same, the winning / failing result of the lottery related to the change based on the hold information corresponding to the change execution hold display icon Y displayed in the change execution hold display area Dy is the big hit winning confirmation. It may be configured to realize a notice effect. This configuration will be described by taking Case 8 as an example.

・ Case 8:
FIG. 600 is an explanatory diagram showing how each of the reserved display areas Dh, Dy, and Dz changes in the case 8. FIG. 600 (a) shows that the fluctuation is being displayed, FIG. 600 (b) is shown after the fluctuation is stopped, and FIG. 600 (c) shows that the fluctuation of the next game is being displayed. It changes in the order of FIG. 600 (a), FIG. 600 (b), and FIG. 600 (c).

In the example shown in FIG. 600 (a), the five hold display icons H, Y, and Z from the third executed hold display area Dz3 to the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 are aligned in the same color, and are the same as they are. When the fluctuation ends and each hold display icon Z, Y, H shifts to the left, five hold display icons displayed within the range including the already executed hold display area Dz and the variable execution hold display area Dy. The situation is such that Z and Y are all the same color. Under this circumstance, when the unexecuted hold display icon H of the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 shifts to the variable execution pending display area Dy, the unexecuted hold display icon H is displayed in red. It is more advantageous for the player when it is displayed in green (in the case of FIG. 600 (b)) where the expectation of winning the jackpot is lower than in red.

The reason why the advantage for the player is high is within the range including the already executed hold display area Dz and the variable execution hold display area Dy in the variable display of the next game times shown in FIG. 600 (c). This is because the displayed hold display icons Z and Y are all in the same color, and the winning / failing result of the winning lottery is confirmed as a big hit winning. For this reason, even in this modification, even if the hold information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display icon H and the variable execution hold display icon Y is green, which is lower than red, the expectation that the jackpot will be won is green, but the already executed hold display area. Under conditions where there is a high possibility that the hold display icons Z and Y within the range including Dz and the variable execution hold display area Dy all have the same color, the unexecuted hold display icon H and the variable execution hold display icon Y are displayed. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that he / she wants to move to the variable execution pending display area Dy or the already executed pending display area Dz while remaining green without changing to red. In addition, the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H and the variable execution hold display icon Y is different from the stage of the expectation that the hold information set for green is a big hit, and the big hit is confirmed. It can have a special meaning. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<< 12-8-11 >> Modification 11:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, the number of unit areas constituting the already executed hold display area Dz is switched to any number of 4 to 1, but as a modification, the number of unit areas is switched. The number of unit areas constituting the already executed hold display area Dz may be switched to any number of 4 to 0 including 0.

<< 12-8-12 >> Modification 12:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, the number of unit areas constituting the already-executed hold display area Dz may be changed by lottery. However, as a modification, the already-executed hold display area Dz is used. The number of constituent unit areas may be fixed to a fixed number. For example, the number of unit areas constituting the already executed hold display area Dz may be fixed to any one of 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4. In the case of this configuration, unlike the pachinko machine 10 of the above embodiment, the condition that all the already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in the same color is not relaxed, and the condition is not relaxed. The difficulty level is always constant. Therefore, according to this modification, the difficulty level of the condition that all the already executed hold display icons Z in the already executed hold display area Dz are the same color changes, and an unnecessary feeling of expectation and disappointment is given to the player. It never ends up.

<< 12-8-13 >> Modification 13:
In the twelfth embodiment and the modified example thereof, a notice is provided that the result of the winning lottery will be confirmed as a big hit by the notice of holding the execution. On the other hand, as a modification, a configuration may be configured in which the result of the winning lottery is likely to be a big hit (that is, the expectation of being a big hit is high) by the already executed hold notice. .. The degree of high expectation referred to here is a higher degree of expectation than the degree of expectation associated with red, which has the highest degree of expectation in the pending change notice production. That is, when the display colors of the already executed hold display icon Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are all the same color due to the already executed hold notice, the fluctuation displayed in the running hold display area Dy is changed. The degree of expectation that the result of the lottery related to the change based on the hold information corresponding to the pending display icon Y will be a big hit is higher than the degree of expectation associated with the red color that has the highest expectation in the hold change notice effect. It may be configured to give a notice that the degree of expectation will be high. With this configuration, as in the twelfth embodiment, under specific conditions, the specific hold display icon is displayed in green, which is less expected to win a jackpot than red, as compared to the case where it is displayed in red. In the case, the advantage for the player can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<< 12-8-14 >> Modification 14:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, in the assist setting process in the process for notifying the already executed hold, the different color hold display icon is specified from the judgment target hold display icon column RW, and the display color of the specified different color hold display icon is specified. Is converted to the same color as the display color of the same color hold display icon. On the other hand, as a modification, the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 is configured so that the symbol rows aligned with a specific color can be stopped and displayed, and after the symbol rows aligned with the specific color are displayed, the above The display color of the specified different color hold display icon may be converted to the above specific color (color of the stop symbol column). In this modification, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbols 1 to 9 in a variable manner, and each symbol indicating the numbers 1 to 9 is classified into three types according to the color and indicates the numbers 1 to 3. Each symbol is blue, each symbol indicating the numbers 4 to 6 is green, and each symbol indicating the numbers 7 to 9 is red. According to this configuration, when a lottery using a specific random number is won, the same color as the display color of the same color hold display icon is set as a specific color, and a combination of symbols indicating numbers corresponding to this specific color is used. The symbol string is stopped and displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and after this symbol row is displayed, the display color of the specified different color hold display icon is changed to the above specific color (color of the stopped symbol row). It was configured to be converted. According to this configuration, the colors of the hold display icons H, Y, and Z change according to the color of the stop symbol row, and all the hold display icon rows RW to be determined are changed to the same color, so that the interest of the game can be further improved. ..

<< 12-8-15 >> Modification 15:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, when all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz are aligned in the same display color, the jackpot winning is confirmed or the jackpot winning is won. However, as a modification, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz have the same display color, and the unexecuted hold is not executed. When all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the display area Dh have the same display color, the variable game corresponding to the variable execution pending display icon Y displayed in the variable execution pending display area Dy. In the configuration, the expectation of the jackpot winning is high, and a predetermined premium effect suggesting that the expectation of the jackpot winning is extremely high in the variable game is executed, and a predetermined premium image may be displayed. Hereinafter, a specific configuration of this modification will be described.

In this modification, when the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 detects the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, it acquires special information such as the value of the winning random number counter, and is based on the acquired special information. The first judgment process is executed. Then, the presence / absence of a big hit, the type of the big hit, and the like are determined by the prior determination process, and the result of the prior determination process is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 as a hold command. The voice emission control device 90 corresponds to the presence / absence of execution of the same color control process described later, the display color and change pattern of the hold display icon, and the hold display icon based on the result of the prior determination process included in the hold command. Determine the type of production in the game. In the same color control process, in the situation where the hold display icon targeted for the prior determination process exists in the variable execution hold display area Dy, all the already executed hold displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz The display color of each hold display icon is controlled so that the display icons Z have the same display color and all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh have the same display color. It is a process to do.

Hereinafter, an example of how the hold display icon changes when the same color control process is executed will be described.

・ Case A
601, 602, and 603 are explanatory views illustrating an example of how the hold display icon changes as Case A. In the state A1 shown in FIG. 601, the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in a white display color in the fourth already executed hold display area Dz4, and the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in white in the third already executed hold display area Dz3. Is displayed in the display color of, the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in the blue display color in the second already executed hold display area Dz2, and the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in blue in the first already executed hold display area Dz1. It is displayed in color, and the variable execution pending display icon Y is displayed in the blue display color in the variable execution pending display area Dy, and the game times corresponding to the variable execution pending display icon Y are being executed. be. As described above, the already executed hold display area Dz is an area in which the hold display information corresponding to the game times after the execution of the variable game in the game times is completed, that is, after the game times operation is executed, can be displayed. be.

In this state A1, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, the pachinko machine 10 detects the entry of the game ball and acquires special information based on the entry. Then, the prior determination process is executed for the acquired special information, and it is determined whether or not to execute the same color control process described above based on the result of the prior determination process. In the example shown in this case A, as a result of the prior determination processing, the result of the winning lottery is a big hit winning, and it is determined to execute the same color control processing described above, and the same color control processing is held for the ball entry. The display color of the display icon is determined to be green, and the display color of the four hold display icons before the hold display icon is the display color of the current highest stage among the four hold display icons. Aligns to a certain blue color, aligns the display color of the hold display icon after the hold display icon to white, executes a predetermined premium reach effect in the game times corresponding to the hold display icon, and performs a predetermined premium in the premium reach effect. It is assumed that it is decided to display the image. As a result, the unexecuted hold display icon H having a green display color is displayed in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1, and the state A2 is set.

In the state A2, when the game ball enters the first start port 33 and the pachinko machine 10 detects the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the second unexecuted hold display is performed by the same color control process described above. The unexecuted hold display icon H having a white display color is displayed in the area Dh2. As a result, the state A3 is reached.

In the state A3, when the game ball enters the first start port 33 and the pachinko machine 10 detects the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the third unexecuted hold display is performed by the same color control process described above. The unexecuted hold display icon H having a white display color is displayed in the area Dh3. As a result, the state becomes A4.

In the state A4, the display colors of the three hold display icons before the green display color of the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 are aligned in blue, and the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 Since the display colors of the two hold display icons after the unexecuted hold display icon H of the green display color of are aligned in white, the player may be displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz. The phenomenon that all the executed hold display icons Z are aligned with the same display color and all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh are aligned with the same display color does not occur. You will have expectations such as.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 changes the already-executed hold display icon Z of the white display color displayed in the third already-executed hold display area Dz3 to the blue display color by the same color control process described above. As a result, the state A5 is reached.

In the state A5, the display colors of the four hold display icons before the green display color of the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 are all blue, and the first unexecuted hold display area The display colors of all (two) hold display icons after the unexecuted hold display icon H of the green display color of Dh1 are all white. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz are aligned in the same display color, and all displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh. A player who knows that if the unexecuted hold display icons H have the same display color, the expectation of winning a big hit is high, the currently executing game times are completed, and each hold display icon is displayed. If the color does not change and shifts to the left one by one as it is, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz are aligned with the same display color, and the unexecuted hold is not executed. There is a great expectation that all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the display area Dh will have the same display color. In addition, the player dislikes that the condition that all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh have the same display color is not satisfied, and if the game ball is newly started for the first time. When the ball enters the mouth 33, the feeling that the unexecuted hold display icon H should be added in the white display color, or even if it is a change to the display color of the higher expectation degree, the hold display icon any more You will have the feeling that you do not want the display color to change. As described above, the already executed hold display area Dz is an area in which the hold display information corresponding to the game times after the execution of the variable game in the game times is completed, that is, after the game times operation is executed, can be displayed. be.

After that, when the game rounds executed in the state A5 end without winning the jackpot, each hold display icon shifts to the left side one by one, and the state A6 shown in FIG. 602 is obtained.

In the state A6 shown in FIG. 602, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz are aligned in the blue display color and are displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh. All unexecuted hold display icons H are in a state where they are aligned with the white display color, and the game times corresponding to the change in execution hold display icon Y of the green display color that has been shifted to the variable execution hold display area Dy are executed. It is in a state of being.

In this modification, as shown in the state A6, in the pachinko machine 10, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz are aligned in the same display color and are not executed. When all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the hold display area Dh have the same display color, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz are the same. The condition establishment suggestion effect suggesting that the condition that all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh are aligned with the same display color is satisfied is executed. In this modification, a female character image WM is displayed as a condition establishment suggestion effect, and a character string such as "The already executed hold is aligned with the same color and the unexecuted hold is aligned with the same color! Chance !!" is displayed. Then, the effect of outputting the sound corresponding to the character string is executed. By recognizing the condition suggestion effect, the player aligns all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz with the same display color, and displays the unexecuted hold display. It can be recognized that it has a special meaning that all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the area Dh have the same display color.

After that, as shown in the state A7, the pachinko machine 10 executes a predetermined premium reach effect suggesting that there is an extremely high possibility of winning a big hit in the currently executing game times, and the predetermined premium reach effect is performed. Display premium images. In this modification, the whale character image KL is displayed as a premium image. By executing the premium reach effect and displaying the premium image, the player expects that the possibility of winning the jackpot in the game is extremely high.

After that, as shown in the state A8 of FIG. 603, the pachinko machine 10 stops and displays the changing symbol at "777" corresponding to the jackpot winning, and displays the jackpot winning image notifying that the jackpot has been won. do. In this modification, a close-up image WM2 of a female character is displayed as a jackpot winning image, a character string such as "Big hit !! Congratulations !!" is displayed, and an effect of outputting a voice corresponding to the character string is executed. After that, the pachinko machine 10 starts the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot winning.

・ Case B
604, 605 and 606 are explanatory views illustrating an example of a change in the hold display icon as Case B. In the state B1 shown in FIG. 604, the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in red in the fourth already executed hold display area Dz4, and the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in white in the third already executed hold display area Dz3. Is displayed in the display color of, the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in white in the second executed hold display area Dz2, and the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed in white in the first executed hold display area Dz1. It is displayed in color, and the variable execution pending display icon Y is displayed in white display color in the variable execution pending display area Dy, and the game times corresponding to the variable execution pending display icon Y are being executed. be.

In this state B1, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, the pachinko machine 10 detects the entry of the game ball and acquires special information based on the entry. Then, the prior determination process is executed for the acquired special information, and it is determined whether or not to execute the same color control process described above based on the result of the prior determination process. In the example shown in this case B, as a result of the prior determination processing, the result of the winning lottery is a big hit winning, and it is determined to execute the same color control processing described above, and as the same color control processing, the hold corresponding to the ball entry is held. The display color of the display icon is determined to be green, and the display color of the four hold display icons before the hold display icon is the display color of the current highest stage among the four hold display icons. Aligns to a certain white color (however, in this state B1, all of them are already aligned to white), aligns the display color of the hold display icon after the hold display icon to blue, and determines in the game times corresponding to the hold display icon. It is assumed that the premium reach effect is executed and it is decided to display a predetermined premium image in the premium reach effect. As a result, the unexecuted hold display icon H having a green display color is displayed in the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1, and the state B2 is set.

In the state B2, when the game ball enters the first start port 33 and the pachinko machine 10 detects the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the second unexecuted hold display is performed by the same color control process described above. The unexecuted hold display icon H having a blue display color is displayed in the area Dh2. As a result, the state is B3.

In the state B3, when the game ball enters the first start port 33 and the pachinko machine 10 detects the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the display color is later changed to blue by the same color control process described above. On the premise of changing, the unexecuted hold display icon H having a white display color is displayed in the third unexecuted hold display area Dh3. As a result, the state is B4.

In the state B4, since the display colors of the four hold display icons before the unexecuted hold display icon H of the green display color of the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 are all white, the player may have 4 All the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz have the same display color, and all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh are the same. You will have the expectation that a phenomenon such as matching the display colors of the icon will occur.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 changes the unexecuted hold display icon H of the white display color displayed in the third unexecuted hold display area Dh3 to the blue display color by the same color control process described above. As a result, the state is B5.

In the state B5, the display colors of the four hold display icons before the green display color of the first unexecuted hold display area Dh1 are all white, and the first unexecuted hold display area The display colors of all (two) hold display icons after the unexecuted hold display icon H of the green display color of Dh1 are all in blue. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz are aligned in the same display color, and all displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh. A player who knows that if the unexecuted hold display icons H have the same display color, the expectation of winning a big hit is high, the currently executing game times are completed, and each hold display icon is displayed. If the color does not change and shifts to the left one by one as it is, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz are aligned with the same display color, and the unexecuted hold is not executed. There is a great expectation that all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the display area Dh will have the same display color. In addition, the player dislikes that the condition that all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh have the same display color is not satisfied, and if the game ball is newly started for the first time. When the ball enters the mouth 33, the feeling that the unexecuted hold display icon H should be added in the blue display color, or even if it is a change to the display color of the higher expectation degree, the hold display icon any more You will have the feeling that you do not want the display color to change.

After that, when the game rounds executed in the state B5 end without winning the jackpot, each hold display icon shifts to the left side one by one, and the state B6 shown in FIG. 605 is obtained.

In the state B6 shown in FIG. 605, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz are aligned in the white display color and are displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh. All unexecuted hold display icons H are in the state of being aligned with the blue display color, and the game times corresponding to the change in execution hold display icon Y of the green display color that has been shifted to the variable execution hold display area Dy are executed. It is in a state of being.

In this modification, as shown in the state B6, in the pachinko machine 10, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz are aligned in the same display color and are not executed. When all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the hold display area Dh have the same display color, the above-mentioned condition establishment suggestion effect is executed. In this modification, a female character image WM is displayed as a condition establishment suggestion effect, and a character string such as "The already executed hold is aligned with the same color and the unexecuted hold is aligned with the same color! Chance !!" is displayed. Then, the effect of outputting the sound corresponding to the character string is executed. By recognizing the condition suggestion effect, the player aligns all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz with the same display color, and displays the unexecuted hold display. It can be recognized that it has a special meaning that all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the area Dh have the same display color.

After that, as shown in the state B7, the pachinko machine 10 executes a predetermined premium reach effect suggesting that there is an extremely high possibility of winning a big hit in the currently executing game times, and the predetermined premium reach effect is performed. Display premium images. In this modification, the whale character image KL is displayed as a premium image. By executing the premium reach effect and displaying the premium image, the player expects that the possibility of winning the jackpot in the game is extremely high.

After that, as shown in the state B8 of FIG. 606, the pachinko machine 10 stops and displays the changing symbol at "777" corresponding to the jackpot winning, and displays the jackpot winning image notifying that the jackpot has been won. do. In this modification, a close-up image WM2 of a female character is displayed as a jackpot winning image, a character string such as "Big hit !! Congratulations !!" is displayed, and an effect of outputting a voice corresponding to the character string is executed. After that, the pachinko machine 10 starts the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot winning.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present invention, the player can use a predetermined number of already-executed hold display icons Z in the already-executed hold display area Dz corresponding to the game times after the game rotation operation is executed. On the other hand, it is possible to realize a new production that has never existed before, such as suggesting the degree of expectation of winning a big hit.

Specifically, according to this modification, as shown in Case A, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz have a blue display color and are not yet executed. When all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the execution hold display area Dh are displayed in white, a predetermined premium reach effect is executed as a game round operation and a predetermined premium image is displayed. For the player, all the executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned with the blue display color, and all the unexecuted hold display displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh. It is possible to have a new sense of expectation that has never been seen before, such as wanting the icon H to match the white display color.

In particular, in a conventional pachinko machine, even if the hold display icon corresponding to the game round of the game round operation is displayed in a display color with a high possibility of winning a big hit after the game round operation is executed. If the hold display icon does not win the jackpot and the game round operation ends, the display color loses its meaning.

However, according to this modification, the hold display icon corresponding to the game times after the game times operation is executed is displayed as the already executed hold display icon Z, and all displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz. When the already executed hold display icon Z is a blue display color and all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh are white display colors, a predetermined premium reach is performed as a game round operation. The effect is executed and a predetermined premium image is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already executed hold display icon Z corresponding to the game times in which the game times operation is completed without winning the big hit, and it is possible to attract the attention of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Case A, the player will be greatly delighted because the jackpot will be won after all the pending display icons in the blue display color are consecutive but the result is all off. Can be given.

Further, according to this modification, as shown in Case A, the display color of the already executed hold display icon Z in the already executed hold display area Dz may be changed. Then, even in a situation where all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz do not have the same display color, it may be in the already executed hold display area Dz. The display color of the displayed already executed hold display icon Z changes, and all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz may have the same display color. You can have a sense of expectation that it may be. Then, the display color of the already executed hold display icon Z actually displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz changes, and all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz change. When all of the icons have the same display color, the player can be greatly delighted, and all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh also have the same display color. It is possible to give a further sense of expectation that we want them to be aligned.

Further, according to this modification, as shown in Case B, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz are white display colors, and the unexecuted hold display is displayed. When all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the area Dh have a blue display color, a predetermined premium reach effect is executed, a predetermined premium image is displayed, and then the opening / closing is performed as a result of the game round. Since the jackpot winning image corresponding to the occurrence of the execution mode is displayed, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned with the white display color for the player, and It is possible to give a new sense of expectation that has never existed before, such as wanting all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh to be aligned with the blue display color.

Further, in the example shown in Case B, the hold display icons of the white display color, which has the lowest expectation of winning the jackpot, are continuous, and the jackpot is won after all the results are lost. Hope that it can give great joy to the person, and even if the hold display icon of the white display color with the lowest expectation is continuous, the possibility of winning the jackpot may increase. Can be given to the player.

Further, according to this modification, as shown in Case B, the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H in the unexecuted hold display area Dh may be changed. Then, even if all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh do not have the same display color, they may be displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh. Expectation that the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H may change and all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh may have the same display color. Can be embraced. Then, the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H actually displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh changes, and all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh are the same. When the display colors are aligned, the player can be greatly delighted, and all the executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are also aligned with the same display color. It can give a further sense of expectation such as wanting.

Further, according to this modification, as shown in Case A and Case B, the already executed hold display icon Z in the already executed hold display area Dz is displayed as a hexagon, and the unexecuted hold display area Dh is not executed. The display icon H is displayed in a circle. That is, the already executed hold display icon Z in the already executed hold display area Dz is displayed in a different shape from the unexecuted hold display icon H in the unexecuted hold display area Dh. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the recognition that the already executed hold display icon Z is different from the unexecuted hold display icon H. As a result, in the situation where the already executed hold display icon Z is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that there is an unexecuted hold icon H for which the game times have not been executed yet. ..

Further, in this modification, the existing execution pending display icons Z displayed in the already executed execution pending display area Dz are configured so as not to change by a fixed number (4). Therefore, the difficulty level at which all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz have the same display color is constant. Therefore, it is possible to avoid changing the difficulty level and giving the player an unnecessary feeling of expectation or disappointment.

Further, according to this modification, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz have the same display color, and all displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh. When the unexecuted hold display icon H has the same display color, it is a condition that suggests that all the already executed hold display icons Z are aligned in the same color and all the unexecuted hold display icons H are aligned in the same color. Since the establishment suggestion effect is executed, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz are clearly aligned in the same color for the player, and the unexecuted hold display area is not executed. It is possible to recognize that the condition that all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed on Dh are aligned in the same color is satisfied, and it is possible to recognize that the condition is satisfied has a special meaning. ..

Further, according to the present modification, the blue display color is the display color of the stage one higher than the white display color among the plurality of stages. In other words, the blue display color is the display color of the second lowest stage. In general, even if the hold display icon of the lowest white display color or the second lowest blue display color is displayed, the player does not have a great expectation.

However, in this modification, as shown in Case A and Case B, the number of hold display icons displayed in white display color and blue display color increases, and all displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz. When all the unexecuted hold display icons Z displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh are aligned in the blue display color, and all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh are aligned in the white display color (in the case of case A). Also, all the executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are aligned in white display color, and all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh are blue. When all the display colors are aligned (in the case of case B), a predetermined premium reach effect is executed as a game rotation operation, and a predetermined premium image is displayed.

Therefore, according to this modification, even in a situation where the hold display icon of the white display color or the blue display color, which the player generally does not have a great expectation for, is displayed, the player Possibly, the number of hold display icons of white display color and blue display color is increasing as it is, and as a result, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are displayed in blue or white. There is a sense of expectation that all the unexecuted hold display icons H that are aligned in color and displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh will be aligned in white or blue display colors. As a result, according to this modification, it is possible to give special significance to the hold display icon of the white display color and the blue display color, which the player generally does not have a great expectation. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<< 12-8-16 >> Modification 16:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the voice emission control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 does not have any special information reserved at the end of the game round, and is held after the game round is completed. If a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) has elapsed without receiving a command (without a new gaming ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34), the erase flag is set to ON. The configuration may be such that the already executed hold display icon Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz is erased based on the fact that the erase flag is turned ON.

In the case of adopting such a configuration, the player who was playing the game on the pachinko machine 10 stops the game, and the next player after a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) has elapsed from the end of the last game round. When a game is newly started on the pachinko machine 10, the already executed hold display icon Z accumulated by the game by the previous player is erased at the timing when the next player starts the game. Therefore, the next player does not feel annoyed that the already executed hold display icon Z stored by the game of the previous player remains in the already executed hold display area Dz.

As described above, according to this modification, the next player can start the game in a state where the already executed hold display icon Z by the previous player's game does not exist in the already executed hold display area Dz. Can be provided.

<< 12-8-17 >> Modification 17:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz are aligned in the same display color and are displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh. When all the unexecuted hold display icons H have the same display color, the jackpot is won according to the same display color of the already executed hold display icon Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz. The configuration may have different expectations (possibility of opening / closing execution mode).

Specifically, for example, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz have the same display color, and all displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh. Of the cases where the unexecuted hold display icons H have the same display color, the higher the expectation associated with the same display color of the already executed hold display icon Z, the higher the expectation may be. ..

Specifically, for example, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz have the same display color, and all displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh. When the display color of the already executed hold display icon Z is high among the cases where the unexecuted hold display icon H is aligned with the same display color (for example, the displayed color of the already executed hold display icon Z is all red). The highest expectation is when all the unexecuted hold display icons H are all in white display color, and when the display color of the already executed hold display icon Z is green (for example, the already executed hold display icon Z is all green). The next highest expectation is when the display colors are aligned and the unexecuted hold display icons H are all aligned in white display color, and when the display color of the already executed pending display icon Z is blue (for example, the already executed pending display). When all the icons Z are aligned in the blue display color and all the unexecuted hold display icons H are aligned in the white display color), the next highest expectation is, and when the display color of the already executed pending display icon Z is white (when the display color of the already executed pending display icon Z is white). For example, when all the already executed hold display icons Z are aligned with the white display color and all the unexecuted hold display icons H are aligned with the white display color), the configuration with the lowest expectation may be made.

According to this modification, the expected degree of jackpot winning differs depending on the display color of the already executed hold display icon Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz, so that it is already displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz. Not only whether the unexecuted hold display icon Z and the unexecuted hold display icon H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh have the same display color, but also the display color of the already executed hold display icon Z. It is possible to attract the player's attention to whether or not they are aligned, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<< 12-8-18 >> Modification 18:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz are aligned in the same display color and are displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh. When all the unexecuted hold display icons H are aligned with the same display color, the color of the already executed pending display icon Z aligned with the same display color and the unexecuted pending display icon H aligned with the same display color. Depending on the combination with the color of, the degree of expectation of winning a big hit may be different.

Specifically, for example, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz have the same display color, and all displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh. When the unexecuted hold display icon H has the same display color, the expected degree of the display color of the already executed pending display icon Z is higher than the expected degree of the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H (for example). (When all the executed hold display icons Z are aligned in the blue display color and all the unexecuted hold display icons H are aligned in the white display color) has the highest expectation, and the display color of the already executed hold display icon Z and the unexecuted hold display icon Z are not. When the display color of the execution hold display icon H is the same (for example, when the already executed hold display icon Z and the unexecuted hold display icon H are all aligned in the blue display color), the expectation is the next highest, and , When the expected degree of the display color of the already executed hold display icon Z is lower than the expected degree of the display color of the unexecuted hold display icon H (for example, all the already executed hold display icons Z are aligned with the white display color and are not executed. (When all the hold display icons H are aligned in the blue display color) may be configured with the lowest expectation.

According to this modification, whether or not the already executed hold display icon Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz and the unexecuted hold display icon H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh have the same display color. Not only that, it is possible to attract the player's attention to how many display colors the already executed hold display icon Z and the unexecuted hold display icon H are aligned, further improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

<< 12-8-19 >> Modification 19:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz are aligned in the same display color and are displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh. Even if all the unexecuted hold display icons H are aligned in the same display color, the predetermined premium reach effect may not be executed. Then, the configuration in which the predetermined premium reach effect is executed may have a higher expectation of winning the jackpot than the case where the predetermined premium reach effect is not executed. According to this configuration, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz have the same display color, and all the unexecuted hold display icons Z displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh are not yet executed. When the execution hold display icons H are aligned in the same display color, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation as to whether or not the premium reach effect is executed.

<< 12-8-20 >> Modification 20:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz are aligned in the same display color and are displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh. When all the unexecuted hold display icons H are aligned in the same display color, various images selected by lottery may be displayed. As various images, for example, an image suggesting a lottery setting value of the pachinko machine 10, an image showing the setting value itself, an image suggesting a base value of the pachinko machine 10, an image showing the base value itself, specific Various images that can be displayed in the reach effect of the above, various images that can be displayed in a specific advance notice effect, and the like can be adopted. According to this configuration, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the four already executed hold display areas Dz have the same display color, and all the unexecuted hold display icons Z displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh are not yet executed. When the execution hold display icons H are aligned in the same display color, the player is given a feeling of expectation such as whether or not an image is displayed, and if so, what kind of image is displayed. be able to.

<< 12-8-21 >> Modification 21:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the same-color control process described above (all the already-executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already-executed hold display area Dz have the same color and are displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh. Even in the situation where all the unexecuted hold display icons H are not executed (control process for making all the unexecuted hold display icons H the same color), all the all unexecuted hold display area Dz accidentally displayed by the normal hold change notice. When the already executed hold display icon Z has the same color and all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh have the same color, a predetermined premium reach effect is executed and a predetermined It may be configured so that a premium image can be displayed.

Further, in the situation where the same color control process described above is not executed, all the already executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are accidentally the same color and not yet due to the normal hold change notice. When all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the execution hold display area Dh have the same color, various images selected by lottery may be displayed. As various images, for example, an image suggesting a lottery setting value of the pachinko machine 10, an image showing the setting value itself, an image suggesting a base value of the pachinko machine 10, an image showing the base value itself, specific Various images that can be displayed in the reach effect of the above, various images that can be displayed in a specific advance notice effect, and the like can be adopted. According to this configuration, all the executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are accidentally the same color, and all the unexecuted hold display icons displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh are displayed. Even when H is the same color and, for example, the time (variable time) of the game times for executing the predetermined premium reach effect cannot be secured, the predetermined image can be displayed, so that the game can be displayed. All the executed hold display icons Z displayed in the already executed hold display area Dz are the same color, and all the unexecuted hold display icons H displayed in the unexecuted hold display area Dh are the same color. It is possible to have the feeling that you want them to be aligned, and you can improve the interest of the game.

<< 12-8-22 >> Modification 22:
In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the outer frame provided in the pachinko machine is not limited to wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, and steel (carbon steel) or cast iron. , Cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel and the like. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., and steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, etc. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , Stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel and the like. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame inaccessibly to the outer frame and a function of locking the front door frame inaccessibly to the inner frame. A cylinder lock is provided, but after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, the first cylinder lock having the function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so as not to be opened, and the front door frame are provided. A configuration may be adopted in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so as not to be opened is provided separately. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration is adopted in which a rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side in the front view, but the rotation shaft is on the right side in the front view. The provided configuration may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration is adopted in which a rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side in the front view, but this rotation shaft is on the right side in the front view. The configuration provided in may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., and steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, etc. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the pachinko machine adopts a configuration including an upper plate and a lower plate, but a configuration in which the lower plate is omitted and only the upper plate is provided may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side of the front view is adopted, but the configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side of the front view may be adopted. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation handles are provided on both the right side of the front view and the left side of the front view. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is holding the operation handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operation handle) is provided on the operation handle. However, a configuration in which this touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the launching means capable of launching the game ball, for example, a configuration in which the game ball is launched by using an elastic force such as a spring. Alternatively, a configuration in which a game ball is launched by using the wind pressure when the compressed gas is ejected may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modified examples, in a state where the operation handle is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are fired per minute. The configuration may be such that less than 100 (for example, 60) game balls are fired in one minute, or 100 or more (for example, 200) game balls are fired in one minute. good. Further, the game ball may be fired one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration including a speaker is adopted as a means capable of outputting sound, but a configuration including an earphone jack in addition to or in place of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones brought by the player to the earphone jack, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he / she is playing without being disturbed by the sound of the surrounding pachinko machine. It will be possible to enjoy it in minutes. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations may be adopted as display means capable of displaying a special symbol that starts variable display based on the entry of a game ball into various starting ports. Therefore, for example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying a normal symbol that starts variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , A drum rotary display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, but various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, and the like, and combinations thereof can be adopted. For example, as a decorative pattern, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and the like, and combinations thereof may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. When a configuration in which one symbol row of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration may be used in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative symbol (for example, "7") is stopped. Further, when a configuration in which two or four or more rows of decorative symbols are adopted, for example, when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line, a jackpot may be won. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory, for example, a rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member. A configuration in which the large winning opening can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward around the rotation axis, a configuration in which the large winning opening is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. May be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, for example, a so-called tulip-type ordinary electric accessory in which a pair of movable valves can be opened to the left and right. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member can be rotated forward around the rotation shaft to open the starting port. A configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the direction may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of prize balls set in each entry port (starting opening, general winning opening, large winning opening, etc.) is an example and is set in each entry opening. By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the outer frame provided in the pachinko machine is not limited to wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, and steel (carbon steel) or cast iron. , Cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel and the like. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., and steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, etc. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , Stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel and the like. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame inaccessibly to the outer frame and a function of locking the front door frame inaccessibly to the inner frame. A cylinder lock is provided, but after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, the first cylinder lock having the function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so as not to be opened, and the front door frame are provided. A configuration may be adopted in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so as not to be opened is provided separately. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration is adopted in which a rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side in the front view, but the rotation shaft is on the right side in the front view. The provided configuration may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration is adopted in which a rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side in the front view, but this rotation shaft is on the right side in the front view. The configuration provided in may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., and steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, etc. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the pachinko machine adopts a configuration including an upper plate and a lower plate, but a configuration in which the lower plate is omitted and only the upper plate is provided may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side of the front view is adopted, but the configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side of the front view may be adopted. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation handles are provided on both the right side of the front view and the left side of the front view. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is holding the operation handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operation handle) is provided on the operation handle. However, a configuration in which this touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the launching means capable of launching the game ball, for example, a configuration in which the game ball is launched by using an elastic force such as a spring. Alternatively, a configuration in which a game ball is launched by using the wind pressure when the compressed gas is ejected may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modified examples, in a state where the operation handle is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are fired per minute. The configuration may be such that less than 100 (for example, 60) game balls are fired in one minute, or 100 or more (for example, 200) game balls are fired in one minute. good. Further, the game ball may be fired one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration including a speaker is adopted as a means capable of outputting sound, but a configuration including an earphone jack in addition to or in place of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones brought by the player to the earphone jack, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he / she is playing without being disturbed by the sound of the surrounding pachinko machine. It will be possible to enjoy it in minutes. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations may be adopted as display means capable of displaying a special symbol that starts variable display based on the entry of a game ball into various starting ports. Therefore, for example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying a normal symbol that starts variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, in the configuration in which the number of unit areas constituting the already executed pending area is fixed to 0, a specific color (for example, for example) displayed in the first unexecuted pending area is displayed. The unexecuted hold icon (green) changes to the pending pending area with the specific color.
When the variable execution pending icon is displayed, the winning / failing result of the winning lottery related to the fluctuation based on the pending information corresponding to the variable executing pending icon is confirmed as the jackpot winning (or the expectation of the jackpot winning is from red). It may be a high configuration). That is, when the hold display icon that shifts to the variable execution hold area is displayed in the green display color, it is more advantageous for the player than the hold display icon is displayed in the red display color. May be high. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , A drum rotary display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, but various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, and the like, and combinations thereof can be adopted. For example, as a decorative pattern, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and the like, and combinations thereof may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. When a configuration in which one symbol row of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration may be used in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative symbol (for example, "7") is stopped. Further, when a configuration in which two or four or more rows of decorative symbols are adopted, for example, when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line, a jackpot may be won. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory, for example, a rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member. A configuration in which the large winning opening can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward around the rotation axis, a configuration in which the large winning opening is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. May be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, for example, a so-called tulip-type ordinary electric accessory in which a pair of movable valves can be opened to the left and right. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member can be rotated forward around the rotation shaft to open the starting port. A configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the direction may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of prize balls set in each entry port (starting opening, general winning opening, large winning opening, etc.) is an example and is set in each entry opening. By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the variable execution pending area may be included in the already-executed pending area to execute various effects. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the outer frame provided in the pachinko machine is not limited to wood, but may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or steel (carbon steel). It may be made of metal such as cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., and steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, etc. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , Stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel and the like. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame inaccessibly to the outer frame and a function of locking the front door frame inaccessibly to the inner frame. A cylinder lock is provided, but after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, the first cylinder lock having the function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so as not to be opened, and the front door frame are provided. A configuration may be adopted in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so as not to be opened is provided separately. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration is adopted in which a rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side in the front view, but the rotation shaft is on the right side in the front view. The provided configuration may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration is adopted in which a rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side in the front view, but this rotation shaft is on the right side in the front view. The configuration provided in may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., and steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, etc. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the pachinko machine adopts a configuration including an upper plate and a lower plate, but a configuration in which the lower plate is omitted and only the upper plate is provided may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side of the front view is adopted, but the configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side of the front view may be adopted. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation handles are provided on both the right side of the front view and the left side of the front view. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is holding the operation handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operation handle) is provided on the operation handle. However, a configuration in which this touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the launching means capable of launching the game ball, for example, a configuration in which the game ball is launched by using an elastic force such as a spring. Alternatively, a configuration in which a game ball is launched by using the wind pressure when the compressed gas is ejected may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modified examples, in a state where the operation handle is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are fired per minute. The configuration may be such that less than 100 (for example, 60) game balls are fired in one minute, or 100 or more (for example, 200) game balls are fired in one minute. good. Further, the game ball may be fired one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration including a speaker is adopted as a means capable of outputting sound, but a configuration including an earphone jack in addition to or in place of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones brought by the player to the earphone jack, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he / she is playing without being disturbed by the sound of the surrounding pachinko machine. It will be possible to enjoy it in minutes. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations may be adopted as display means capable of displaying a special symbol that starts variable display based on the entry of a game ball into various starting ports. Therefore, for example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying a normal symbol that starts variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , A drum rotary display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, but various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, and the like, and combinations thereof can be adopted. For example, as a decorative pattern, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and the like, and combinations thereof may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. When a configuration in which one symbol row of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration may be used in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative symbol (for example, "7") is stopped. Further, when a configuration in which two or four or more rows of decorative symbols are adopted, for example, when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line, a jackpot may be won. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory, for example, a rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member. A configuration in which the large winning opening can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward around the rotation axis, a configuration in which the large winning opening is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. May be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, for example, a so-called tulip-type ordinary electric accessory in which a pair of movable valves can be opened to the left and right. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member can be rotated forward around the rotation shaft to open the starting port. A configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the direction may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of prize balls set in each entry port (starting opening, general winning opening, large winning opening, etc.) is an example and is set in each entry opening. By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the outer frame provided in the pachinko machine is not limited to wood, but may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or steel (carbon steel). It may be made of metal such as cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., and steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, etc. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , Stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel and the like. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame inaccessibly to the outer frame and a function of locking the front door frame inaccessibly to the inner frame. A cylinder lock is provided, but after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, the first cylinder lock having the function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so as not to be opened, and the front door frame are provided. A configuration may be adopted in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so as not to be opened is provided separately. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration is adopted in which a rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side in the front view, but the rotation shaft is on the right side in the front view. The provided configuration may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration is adopted in which a rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side in the front view, but this rotation shaft is on the right side in the front view. The configuration provided in may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., and steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, etc. Stainless steel, aluminum
It may be made of a metal such as an alloy, a copper alloy, or an alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the pachinko machine adopts a configuration including an upper plate and a lower plate, but a configuration in which the lower plate is omitted and only the upper plate is provided may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side of the front view is adopted, but the configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side of the front view may be adopted. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation handles are provided on both the right side of the front view and the left side of the front view. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is holding the operation handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operation handle) is provided on the operation handle. However, a configuration in which this touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the launching means capable of launching the game ball, for example, a configuration in which the game ball is launched by using an elastic force such as a spring. Alternatively, a configuration in which a game ball is launched by using the wind pressure when the compressed gas is ejected may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modified examples, in a state where the operation handle is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are fired per minute. The configuration may be such that less than 100 (for example, 60) game balls are fired in one minute, or 100 or more (for example, 200) game balls are fired in one minute. good. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the number of already executed pending areas is not limited to four, and may be fixed, for example, 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4. Further, the game ball may be fired one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration including a speaker is adopted as a means capable of outputting sound, but a configuration including an earphone jack in addition to or in place of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones brought by the player to the earphone jack, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he / she is playing without being disturbed by the sound of the surrounding pachinko machine. It will be possible to enjoy it in minutes. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations may be adopted as display means capable of displaying a special symbol that starts variable display based on the entry of a game ball into various starting ports. Therefore, for example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying a normal symbol that starts variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , A drum rotary display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, but various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, and the like, and combinations thereof can be adopted. For example, as a decorative pattern, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and the like, and combinations thereof may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. When a configuration in which one symbol row of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration may be used in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative symbol (for example, "7") is stopped. Further, when a configuration in which two or four or more rows of decorative symbols are adopted, for example, when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line, a jackpot may be won. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory, for example, a rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member. A configuration in which the large winning opening can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward around the rotation axis, a configuration in which the large winning opening is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. May be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, for example, a so-called tulip-type ordinary electric accessory in which a pair of movable valves can be opened to the left and right. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member can be rotated forward around the rotation shaft to open the starting port. A configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the direction may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of prize balls set in each entry port (starting opening, general winning opening, large winning opening, etc.) is an example and is set in each entry opening. By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, for example, a so-called tulip-type ordinary electric accessory in which a pair of movable valves can be opened to the left and right. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member can be rotated forward around the rotation shaft to open the starting port. A configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the direction may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of prize balls set in each entry port (starting opening, general winning opening, large winning opening, etc.) is an example and is set in each entry opening. By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the configuration does not include the already-executed hold area, and all (one) variable-execution-execution-holding icons displayed in the variable-execution-execution-holding area happen to be blue, for example. When all the unexecuted hold icons displayed in the unexecuted hold area are the display color, for example, the display color is white, a predetermined image may be displayed as a game round operation. In the above embodiment and each of the above modifications, the outer frame provided in the pachinko machine is not limited to wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, and steel (carbon steel) or cast iron. , Cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel and the like. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., and steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, etc. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , Stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel and the like. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame inaccessibly to the outer frame and a function of locking the front door frame inaccessibly to the inner frame. A cylinder lock is provided, but after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, the first cylinder lock having the function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so as not to be opened, and the front door frame are provided. A configuration may be adopted in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so as not to be opened is provided separately. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration is adopted in which a rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side in the front view, but the rotation shaft is on the right side in the front view. The provided configuration may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration is adopted in which a rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side in the front view, but this rotation shaft is on the right side in the front view. The configuration provided in may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., and steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, etc. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the pachinko machine adopts a configuration including an upper plate and a lower plate, but a configuration in which the lower plate is omitted and only the upper plate is provided may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side of the front view is adopted, but the configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side of the front view may be adopted. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation handles are provided on both the right side of the front view and the left side of the front view. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is holding the operation handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operation handle) is provided on the operation handle. However, a configuration in which this touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the launching means capable of launching the game ball, for example, a configuration in which the game ball is launched by using an elastic force such as a spring. Alternatively, a configuration in which a game ball is launched by using the wind pressure when the compressed gas is ejected may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modified examples, in a state where the operation handle is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are fired per minute. The configuration may be such that less than 100 (for example, 60) game balls are fired in one minute, or 100 or more (for example, 200) game balls are fired in one minute. good. Further, the game ball may be fired one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration including a speaker is adopted as a means capable of outputting sound, but a configuration including an earphone jack in addition to or in place of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones brought by the player to the earphone jack, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he / she is playing without being disturbed by the sound of the surrounding pachinko machine. It will be possible to enjoy it in minutes. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations may be adopted as display means capable of displaying a special symbol that starts variable display based on the entry of a game ball into various starting ports. Therefore, for example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying a normal symbol that starts variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , A drum rotary display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, but various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, and the like, and combinations thereof can be adopted. For example, as a decorative pattern, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and the like, and combinations thereof may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. When a configuration in which one symbol row of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration may be used in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative symbol (for example, "7") is stopped. Also, decorative patterns
When a configuration in which two or four or more rows are adopted, for example, a configuration may be used in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory, for example, a rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member. A configuration in which the large winning opening can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward around the rotation axis, a configuration in which the large winning opening is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. May be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, for example, a so-called tulip-type ordinary electric accessory in which a pair of movable valves can be opened to the left and right. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member can be rotated forward around the rotation shaft to open the starting port. A configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the direction may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of prize balls set in each entry port (starting opening, general winning opening, large winning opening, etc.) is an example and is set in each entry opening. By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the outer frame provided in the pachinko machine is not limited to wood, but may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or steel (carbon steel). It may be made of metal such as cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy and alloy steel. In the above-described embodiment, each of the above-mentioned modifications, and the above-mentioned configuration B, all (one) variable-execution-execution-holding icons that happen to be displayed in the variable-execution-execution-holding area have a white display color, for example, and are not executed. When all the unexecuted hold icons displayed in the area are displayed in blue, for example, the image corresponding to the jackpot winning may be displayed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., and steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, etc. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , Stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel and the like. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame inaccessibly to the outer frame and a function of locking the front door frame inaccessibly to the inner frame. A cylinder lock is provided, but after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, the first cylinder lock having the function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so as not to be opened, and the front door frame are provided. A configuration may be adopted in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so as not to be opened is provided separately. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration is adopted in which a rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side in the front view, but the rotation shaft is on the right side in the front view. The provided configuration may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration is adopted in which a rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side in the front view, but this rotation shaft is on the right side in the front view. The configuration provided in may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., and steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, etc. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the pachinko machine adopts a configuration including an upper plate and a lower plate, but a configuration in which the lower plate is omitted and only the upper plate is provided may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side of the front view is adopted, but the configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side of the front view may be adopted. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation handles are provided on both the right side of the front view and the left side of the front view. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is holding the operation handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operation handle) is provided on the operation handle. However, a configuration in which this touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the launching means capable of launching the game ball, for example, a configuration in which the game ball is launched by using an elastic force such as a spring. Alternatively, a configuration in which a game ball is launched by using the wind pressure when the compressed gas is ejected may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modified examples, in a state where the operation handle is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are fired per minute. The configuration may be such that less than 100 (for example, 60) game balls are fired in one minute, or 100 or more (for example, 200) game balls are fired in one minute. good. Further, the game ball may be fired one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the above-mentioned modified examples, and the above-mentioned configuration B, the display color and shape of the variable execution pending icon and the unexecuted pending icon may be changed, and the variable executing pending icon is the unexecuted pending icon. It may be configured to be displayed in a mode different from that of. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration including a speaker is adopted as a means capable of outputting sound, but a configuration including an earphone jack in addition to or in place of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones brought by the player to the earphone jack, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he / she is playing without being disturbed by the sound of the surrounding pachinko machine. It will be possible to enjoy it in minutes. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations may be adopted as display means capable of displaying a special symbol that starts variable display based on the entry of a game ball into various starting ports. Therefore, for example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying a normal symbol that starts variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , A drum rotary display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, but various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, and the like, and combinations thereof can be adopted. For example, as a decorative pattern, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and the like, and combinations thereof may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. When a configuration in which one symbol row of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration may be used in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative symbol (for example, "7") is stopped. Further, when a configuration in which two or four or more rows of decorative symbols are adopted, for example, when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line, a jackpot may be won. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory, for example, a rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member. A configuration in which the large winning opening can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward around the rotation axis, a configuration in which the large winning opening is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. May be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, for example, a so-called tulip-type ordinary electric accessory in which a pair of movable valves can be opened to the left and right. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member can be rotated forward around the rotation shaft to open the starting port. A configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the direction may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of prize balls set in each entry port (starting opening, general winning opening, large winning opening, etc.) is an example and is set in each entry opening. By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, for example, a so-called tulip-type ordinary electric accessory in which a pair of movable valves can be opened to the left and right. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member can be rotated forward around the rotation shaft to open the starting port. A configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the direction may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the above-mentioned modified examples, and the above-mentioned configuration B, the number of variable execution pending icons may be a fixed number, and the variable execution pending icons may be deleted based on the start of a predetermined effect. It may be configured (disappears from the display screen). Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of prize balls set in each entry port (starting opening, general winning opening, large winning opening, etc.) is an example and is set in each entry opening. By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the outer frame provided in the pachinko machine is not limited to wood, but may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or steel (carbon steel). It may be made of metal such as cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., and steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, etc. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , Stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel and the like. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame inaccessibly to the outer frame and a function of locking the front door frame inaccessibly to the inner frame. A cylinder lock is provided, but after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, the first cylinder lock having the function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so as not to be opened, and the front door frame are provided. A configuration may be adopted in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so as not to be opened is provided separately. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration is adopted in which a rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side in the front view, but the rotation shaft is on the right side in the front view. The provided configuration may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration is adopted in which a rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side in the front view, but this rotation shaft is on the right side in the front view. The configuration provided in may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., and steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, etc. Stainless steel, aluminum alloys, copper alloys, alloys
It may be made of metal such as steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the pachinko machine adopts a configuration including an upper plate and a lower plate, but a configuration in which the lower plate is omitted and only the upper plate is provided may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side of the front view is adopted, but the configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side of the front view may be adopted. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation handles are provided on both the right side of the front view and the left side of the front view. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is holding the operation handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operation handle) is provided on the operation handle. However, a configuration in which this touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the launching means capable of launching the game ball, for example, a configuration in which the game ball is launched by using an elastic force such as a spring. Alternatively, a configuration in which a game ball is launched by using the wind pressure when the compressed gas is ejected may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modified examples, in a state where the operation handle is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are fired per minute. The configuration may be such that less than 100 (for example, 60) game balls are fired in one minute, or 100 or more (for example, 200) game balls are fired in one minute. good. Further, the game ball may be fired one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration including a speaker is adopted as a means capable of outputting sound, but a configuration including an earphone jack in addition to or in place of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones brought by the player to the earphone jack, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he / she is playing without being disturbed by the sound of the surrounding pachinko machine. It will be possible to enjoy it in minutes. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations may be adopted as display means capable of displaying a special symbol that starts variable display based on the entry of a game ball into various starting ports. Therefore, for example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the above-mentioned modified examples, and the above-mentioned configuration B, all (one) variable-execution-execution-holding icons that are accidentally displayed in the variable-execution-execution-holding area have a blue display color, for example, and have not yet been displayed. When all the unexecuted hold icons displayed in the execution hold area have a white display color, for example, a suggestion effect corresponding to the variable execution hold icon having a blue display color may be executed. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying a normal symbol that starts variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , A drum rotary display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, but various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, and the like, and combinations thereof can be adopted. For example, as a decorative pattern, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and the like, and combinations thereof may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. When a configuration in which one symbol row of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration may be used in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative symbol (for example, "7") is stopped. Further, when a configuration in which two or four or more rows of decorative symbols are adopted, for example, when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line, a jackpot may be won. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory, for example, a rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member. A configuration in which the large winning opening can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward around the rotation axis, a configuration in which the large winning opening is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. May be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, for example, a so-called tulip-type ordinary electric accessory in which a pair of movable valves can be opened to the left and right. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member can be rotated forward around the rotation shaft to open the starting port. A configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the direction may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of prize balls set in each entry port (starting opening, general winning opening, large winning opening, etc.) is an example and is set in each entry opening. By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, for example, a so-called tulip-type ordinary electric accessory in which a pair of movable valves can be opened to the left and right. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member can be rotated forward around the rotation shaft to open the starting port. A configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the direction may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of prize balls set in each entry port (starting opening, general winning opening, large winning opening, etc.) is an example and is set in each entry opening. By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the outer frame provided in the pachinko machine is not limited to wood, but may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or steel (carbon steel). It may be made of metal such as cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., and steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, etc. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , Stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel and the like. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the above-mentioned modified examples, and the above-mentioned configuration B, the expected degree of jackpot winning may be different depending on the display mode (color and shape) of the variable execution pending icon. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame inaccessibly to the outer frame and a function of locking the front door frame inaccessibly to the inner frame. A cylinder lock is provided, but after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, the first cylinder lock having the function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so as not to be opened, and the front door frame are provided. A configuration may be adopted in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so as not to be opened is provided separately. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration is adopted in which a rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side in the front view, but the rotation shaft is on the right side in the front view. The provided configuration may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration is adopted in which a rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side in the front view, but this rotation shaft is on the right side in the front view. The configuration provided in may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., and steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, etc. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the pachinko machine adopts a configuration including an upper plate and a lower plate, but a configuration in which the lower plate is omitted and only the upper plate is provided may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side of the front view is adopted, but the configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side of the front view may be adopted. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation handles are provided on both the right side of the front view and the left side of the front view. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is holding the operation handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operation handle) is provided on the operation handle. However, a configuration in which this touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the launching means capable of launching the game ball, for example, a configuration in which the game ball is launched by using an elastic force such as a spring. Alternatively, a configuration in which a game ball is launched by using the wind pressure when the compressed gas is ejected may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modified examples, in a state where the operation handle is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are fired per minute. The configuration may be such that less than 100 (for example, 60) game balls are fired in one minute, or 100 or more (for example, 200) game balls are fired in one minute. good. Further, the game ball may be fired one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration including a speaker is adopted as a means capable of outputting sound, but a configuration including an earphone jack in addition to or in place of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones brought by the player to the earphone jack, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he / she is playing without being disturbed by the sound of the surrounding pachinko machine. It will be possible to enjoy it in minutes. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations may be adopted as display means capable of displaying a special symbol that starts variable display based on the entry of a game ball into various starting ports. Therefore, for example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying a normal symbol that starts variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , A drum rotary display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, but various characters, figures, symbols, patterns and the like, and combinations thereof can be adopted. For example, as a decorative pattern, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and the like, and combinations thereof may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. When a configuration in which one symbol row of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration may be used in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative symbol (for example, "7") is stopped. also
When a configuration in which two or four or more rows of decorative symbols are adopted, for example, when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line, a jackpot may be won. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory, for example, a rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member. A configuration in which the large winning opening can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward around the rotation axis, a configuration in which the large winning opening is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. May be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, for example, a so-called tulip-type ordinary electric accessory in which a pair of movable valves can be opened to the left and right. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member can be rotated forward around the rotation shaft to open the starting port. A configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the direction may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of prize balls set in each entry port (starting opening, general winning opening, large winning opening, etc.) is an example and is set in each entry opening. By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the outer frame provided in the pachinko machine is not limited to wood, but may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or steel (carbon steel). It may be made of metal such as cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the inner frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., and steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, etc. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the front door frame provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or steel (carbon steel), cast iron, or cast steel. , Stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel and the like. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the pachinko machine has a function of locking the inner frame inaccessibly to the outer frame and a function of locking the front door frame inaccessibly to the inner frame. A cylinder lock is provided, but after adopting a configuration in which this cylinder lock is omitted, the first cylinder lock having the function of locking the inner frame to the outer frame so as not to be opened, and the front door frame are provided. A configuration may be adopted in which a second cylinder lock having a function of locking the inner frame so as not to be opened is provided separately. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration is adopted in which a rotation shaft for rotating the inner frame with respect to the outer frame is provided on the left side in the front view, but the rotation shaft is on the right side in the front view. The provided configuration may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration is adopted in which a rotation shaft for rotating the front door frame with respect to the inner frame is provided on the left side in the front view, but this rotation shaft is on the right side in the front view. The configuration provided in may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the game board provided in the pachinko machine may be made of a resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., and steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, etc. It may be made of metal such as stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the pachinko machine adopts a configuration including an upper plate and a lower plate, but a configuration in which the lower plate is omitted and only the upper plate is provided may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, the configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the right side of the front view is adopted, but the configuration in which the operation handle is provided on the left side of the front view may be adopted. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation handles are provided on both the right side of the front view and the left side of the front view. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a touch sensor capable of detecting whether or not the player is holding the operation handle (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the operation handle) is provided on the operation handle. However, a configuration in which this touch sensor is omitted may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the launching means capable of launching the game ball, for example, a configuration in which the game ball is launched by using an elastic force such as a spring. Alternatively, a configuration in which a game ball is launched by using the wind pressure when the compressed gas is ejected may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modified examples, in a state where the operation handle is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, about 100 game balls are fired per minute. The configuration may be such that less than 100 (for example, 60) game balls are fired in one minute, or 100 or more (for example, 200) game balls are fired in one minute. good. Further, the game ball may be fired one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, a configuration including a speaker is adopted as a means capable of outputting sound, but a configuration including an earphone jack in addition to or in place of the speaker may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones brought by the player to the earphone jack, the player can hear the sound of the pachinko machine he / she is playing without being disturbed by the sound of the surrounding pachinko machine. It will be possible to enjoy it in minutes. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations may be adopted as display means capable of displaying a special symbol that starts variable display based on the entry of a game ball into various starting ports. Therefore, for example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying a normal symbol that starts variable display based on the passage of the game ball through various gates. For example, an LED lamp, an LED display device, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a halogen lamp, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-described modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means capable of displaying various decorative patterns, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and an LED display device. , A drum rotary display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or the like may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, but various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, and the like, and combinations thereof can be adopted. For example, as a decorative pattern, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and the like, and combinations thereof may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. When a configuration in which one symbol row of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration may be used in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative symbol (for example, "7") is stopped. Further, when a configuration in which two or four or more rows of decorative symbols are adopted, for example, when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line, a jackpot may be won. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory, for example, a rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member. A configuration in which the large winning opening can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward around the rotation axis, a configuration in which the large winning opening is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board, etc. May be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the ordinary electric accessory, for example, a so-called tulip-type ordinary electric accessory in which a pair of movable valves can be opened to the left and right. A rotation shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member can be rotated forward around the rotation shaft to open the starting port. A configuration in which the starting port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the direction may be adopted. Further, in the above-described embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the number of prize balls set in each entry port (starting opening, general winning opening, large winning opening, etc.) is an example and is set in each entry opening. By appropriately changing the number of prize balls, it is possible to realize multiple types of pachinko machines with different specifications.

<< 12-8-23 >> Modification 23:
In the above embodiment and its modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices such as a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100. It may be configured to include two control devices such as a sub control device. The sub-control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the above embodiment. Further, in the above-described embodiment and its modifications, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, 100 need not be limited to the classification described in the above-described embodiment, and the three control devices 60, 90 do not have to be limited. , 100 as a whole, it suffices if various processes in the above embodiment can be executed.

<< Y >> Application to other configurations:
When a pachinko machine of another type different from each of the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball enters a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that becomes a big hit when a right is generated, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. Or, after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as paying out a medal is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the main body of the gaming machine, which is supported to be openable and closable on the outer frame, is equipped with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start rotation of a reel.

Further, a part of the functions realized by the software in the above embodiment may be realized by the hardware, or a part of the functions realized by the hardware may be realized by the software.

<< Z >> About the feature group extracted from each of the above embodiments:
The feature group (feature of the invention group) extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic lA group>
The feature lA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic lA1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
A determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 29 executed by the MPU 62),
State storage means (various flag storage areas) that store state information (high frequency support mode flag) that can identify a plurality of states including at least the first state (low frequency support mode), and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game round execution means is
When the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the stored state information is transferred from the information specifying the state other than the first state to the information specifying the first state. Therefore, as the transition modes in which the timings for transferring the state information are different, the first transition mode (first drop mode) in which the timing is the start time of the game round and the timing is the end time of the game round. It has at least a second transition mode (rear drop mode), and when the first condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the first drop mode), the first transition mode can be executed. , The state information transfer means (step Sl1104 in the hit determination process of FIG. 34) that enables the second transition mode to be executed when the second condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the back-fall mode). Sx111-10 to Sx1116)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature lA1, when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the state information stored in the state storage means is the information for specifying the first state from the information for specifying the state other than the first state. However, the transition timing is switched between the first transition mode at the start of the game round and the second transition mode at the end of the game round. Therefore, according to the feature lA1, in the game times when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the game based on the information for specifying the first state after the state information is transferred and the state information are transferred. The game is played in two ways: a game based on information that identifies a state other than the previous first state. Therefore, according to the feature lA1, it is possible to widen the range of the mode of the game in the game times, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic lA2]
The gaming machine described in the feature lA1.
A means of entering a ball that allows a game ball to enter,
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means and a state in which the game ball can enter the ball entry means easily or easily. State transition means to transition and
As a control mode for controlling the state transition means, the mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is different from that of the first control mode and the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode, which facilitates entry of the game ball into the ball means,
Equipped with
The control means is
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information for specifying a state other than the first state (high frequency support mode), the second control mode can be executed and the state storage is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that the first control mode can be executed when the state information stored in the means is information for specifying the first state (low frequency support mode).

According to the feature lA2, the control mode for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means is switched according to the state information stored in the state storage means. Therefore, according to the feature lA2, the player can infer the current state of the state information by visually observing the state of the assisting means. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic lA3]
The gaming machine described in the feature lA2,
The determination means is
As a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a judgment mode (high probability mode) and
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game round, the determination mode determining means (FIG. 33) for determining whether the determination by the determination means in the game round is executed in the first determination mode or the second determination mode. Fall judgment processing) and
At the start of the game round in which it is determined by the determination mode determining means to execute the determination in the first determination mode, the first state information is obtained from the information for specifying a state other than the first state. (Steps Sl1004, Sx1005, Sx1007 in the fall determination process of FIG. 33) and means for shifting to the information for specifying the state (low frequency support mode).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature lA3, the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined conditions and executed in the first transition mode when the first condition is satisfied, and the first game time by the determination mode determining means. In either case of the game round in which the judgment is determined to be executed in the judgment mode, the state information is the first state from the information specifying the state other than the first state at the start of the game round. It is transferred to the specified information, and the state of the auxiliary means is shifted to the first control mode in conjunction with the change of the state information. Therefore, when the player observes that the state of the assisting means is in the first control mode at the start of the game round, the game round this time corresponds to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition. Of the game times in which the first condition is satisfied and executed in the first transition mode, and the game times in which the determination mode determination means determines to execute the determination in the first determination mode. It is unknown which one it is, but it can be inferred that it was narrowed down to one of the two games. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game times it is from the change in the state of the auxiliary means linked with the change in the state information. Therefore, according to the feature lA3, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic lA4]
The gaming machine according to the feature lA2 or the feature lA3.
The determination means is
As a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a judgment mode (high probability mode) and
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game round, the determination mode determining means (FIG. 33) for determining whether the determination by the determination means in the game round is executed in the first determination mode or the second determination mode. Fall judgment processing) and
In the game round in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and it is determined by the determination mode determining means to execute the determination in the second determination mode, the state information is used as the first. Means for maintaining the information other than the state of (NO determination by step Sl1003 in the fall determination process of FIG. 33, NO determination by step Sl1104 in the hit determination process of FIG. 34).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature lA4, the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined conditions and the game times executed in the second transition mode when the second condition is satisfied, and the special information satisfy the predetermined conditions. In either case, the game times (game times at the time of deviation) in which the judgment is determined to be executed in the second judgment mode by the judgment mode determination means, and the state information in the game times. Is maintained in information that identifies a state other than the first state. Therefore, when the player observes that the state of the assisting means continues the second control mode in the game round, the game round this time corresponds to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition. It is a game time that the second condition is satisfied and executed in the second transition mode, and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the determination mode determination means determines in the second determination mode. It is unclear which of the game times it was decided to perform, but it can be inferred that it was narrowed down to one of the two game times. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game times it is from the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, according to the feature lA4, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lA5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features lA1 to the feature lA4.
The state information transfer means is
After the state information is transferred from the information specifying the first state to the information specifying the state other than the first state, the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number of times. The gaming machine is characterized by comprising means for transferring the state information when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to the feature lA5, the game after the number of executions of the game times after the state information is transferred from the information specifying the first state to the information specifying the state other than the first state reaches a predetermined number of times. When it is a time and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the range of the mode of the game can be expanded.

<Characteristic lB group>
The feature lB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its variants.

[Feature lB1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
A determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 29 executed by the MPU 62),
The effect execution means for executing the effect in the game times, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means is
The first condition (winning a big hit in the winning lottery) is that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and the first result in which the first condition is satisfied and the game more than the first condition. The second result in which the second condition (determined to cause out-of-reach) that is less advantageous to the player is satisfied, and the third condition (fall) that is less advantageous to the player than the second condition. The third result that (winning in the lottery) was established, the result notification effect means for executing the result announcement effect to announce which of them corresponds to, and the result announcement effect means.
A first suggestion effect (life or death) that is a means for executing a predetermined effect before the result notification effect, and suggests that the predetermined effect corresponds to any one of the first result and the third result. (Battle effect) and the second suggestion effect (dominant battle effect) that suggests that one of the first result and the second result is applicable. Means and
A gaming machine equipped with.

According to the feature lB1, in the game times, the first result that the first condition that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the second condition that the degree of advantage to the player is lower than the first condition. A result notification effect is executed to announce which of the second result that is satisfied and the third result that the third condition, which is less advantageous to the player than the second condition, is satisfied. However, as a result, a predetermined effect is executed before the notification effect. As the predetermined effect, the first suggestion effect suggesting that it corresponds to either the first result or the third result, and the suggestion that it corresponds to either the first result or the second result. Either one of the second suggestion effect to be performed is executed. Conventionally, when suggesting and directing three results, it is common to suggest that one of the first result, the second result, and the third result corresponds to, but in this case, Is limited to one type of suggestive effect. On the other hand, according to the feature lB1, the first suggestion effect suggesting that it corresponds to either the first result or the third result, or any of the first result and the second result. It is possible to execute two types of suggestive effects, a second suggestive effect that suggests that the crab corresponds to the crab. Therefore, according to the feature lB1, it is possible to widen the range of the mode of the predetermined effect to be performed before the result notification effect in the game times, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lB2]
The gaming machine described in the feature lB1.
A state storage means (various flag storage areas) for storing state information (high frequency support mode flag) capable of identifying a plurality of states including at least a first state (low frequency support mode) is provided.
The game round execution means is
When the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the stored state information is transferred from the information specifying the state other than the first state to the information specifying the first state. Therefore, as the transition modes in which the timings for transferring the state information are different, the first transition mode (first drop mode) in which the timing is the start time of the game round and the timing is the end time of the game round. It has at least a second transition mode (rear drop mode), and when the first condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the first drop mode), the first transition mode can be executed. , The state information transfer means (step Sl1104 in the hit determination process of FIG. 34) that enables the second transition mode to be executed when the second condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the back-fall mode). Equipped with Sx111-10 to Sx1116)
The predetermined effect executing means is
It is provided with means for executing the first suggestion effect in the game times in which the transition is performed in the first transition mode, and executing the second suggestion effect in the game times in which the transition is performed in the second transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature lB2, when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the state information stored in the state storage means is the information for specifying the first state from the information for specifying the state other than the first state. However, the timing of this transition is switched between the first transition mode, which is the start of the game round, and the second transition mode, which is the end of the game round, and the first transition. The first suggestion effect is executed in the game times in which the transition is performed in the mode, and the second suggestion effect is executed in the game times in which the transition is performed in the second transition mode. Therefore, according to the feature lB2, in the game round when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the first suggestion effect based on the information for specifying the first state after the state information is transferred and the state information are provided. A second suggestion effect based on information that identifies a state other than the first state before the transition is performed, and a suggestion effect is performed in two ways. Therefore, according to the feature lB2, it is possible to widen the range of the mode of the production in the game times when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. ..

[Feature lB3]
Features The gaming machine described in lB2.
A means of entering a ball that allows a game ball to enter,
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means and a state in which the game ball can enter the ball entry means easily or easily. State transition means to transition and
As a control mode for controlling the state transition means, the mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is different from that of the first control mode and the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode, which facilitates entry of the game ball into the ball means,
Equipped with
The control means is
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information for specifying a state other than the first state (high frequency support mode), the second control mode can be executed and the state storage is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that the first control mode can be executed when the state information stored in the means is information for specifying the first state (low frequency support mode).

According to the feature lB3, the control mode for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means is switched according to the state information stored in the state storage means. Therefore, according to the feature lB3, the player can infer the current state of the state information by visually observing the state of the assisting means. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lB4]
Features The gaming machine described in lB3.
The determination means is
As a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a judgment mode (high probability mode) and
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game round, the determination mode determining means (FIG. 33) for determining whether the determination by the determination means in the game round is executed in the first determination mode or the second determination mode. Fall judgment processing) and
At the start of the game round in which it is determined by the determination mode determining means to execute the determination in the first determination mode, the first state information is obtained from the information for specifying a state other than the first state. (Steps Sl1004, Sx1005, Sx1007 in the fall determination process of FIG. 33) and means for shifting to the information for specifying the state (low frequency support mode).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature lB4, the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined conditions and executed in the first transition mode when the first condition is satisfied, and the first game time by the determination mode determining means. In either case of the game round in which the judgment is determined to be executed in the judgment mode, the state information is the first state from the information specifying the state other than the first state at the start of the game round. It is transferred to the specified information, and the state of the auxiliary means is shifted to the first control mode in conjunction with the change of the state information. Therefore, when the player observes that the state of the assisting means is in the first control mode at the start of the game round, the game round this time corresponds to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition. Of the game times in which the first condition is satisfied and executed in the first transition mode, and the game times in which the determination mode determination means determines to execute the determination in the first determination mode. It is unknown which one it is, but it can be inferred that it was narrowed down to one of the two games. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game times it is from the change in the state of the auxiliary means linked with the change in the state information. Therefore, according to the feature lB4, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lB5]
The gaming machine according to feature lB3 or feature lB4.
The determination means is
As a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a judgment mode (high probability mode) and
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game round, the determination mode determining means (FIG. 33) for determining whether the determination by the determination means in the game round is executed in the first determination mode or the second determination mode. Fall judgment processing) and
In the game round in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and it is determined by the determination mode determining means to execute the determination in the second determination mode, the state information is used as the first. Means for maintaining the information other than the state of (NO determination by step Sl1003 in the fall determination process of FIG. 33, NO determination by step Sl1104 in the hit determination process of FIG. 34).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature lB5, the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined conditions and the game times executed in the second transition mode when the second condition is satisfied, and the special information satisfy the predetermined conditions. In either case, the game times (game times at the time of disconnection) in which the judgment is determined to be executed in the second judgment mode by the judgment mode determination means, and the state information in the game times. Is maintained in information that identifies a state other than the first state. Therefore, when the player observes that the state of the assisting means continues the second control mode in the game round, the game round this time corresponds to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition. It is a game time that the second condition is satisfied and executed in the second transition mode, and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the determination mode determination means determines in the second determination mode. It is unclear which of the game times it was decided to perform, but it can be inferred that it was narrowed down to one of the two game times. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game times it is from the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, according to the feature lB5, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lB6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature lB1 to the feature lB5.
The state information transfer means is
After the state information is transferred from the information specifying the first state to the information specifying the state other than the first state, the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number of times. The gaming machine is characterized by comprising means for transferring the state information when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to the feature lB6, the game after the number of executions of the game times after the state information is transferred from the information specifying the first state to the information specifying the state other than the first state reaches a predetermined number of times. When it is a time and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the range of the mode of the production can be expanded.

<Characteristic lC group>
The feature lC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its variants.

[Feature lC1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
A determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 29 executed by the MPU 62),
Predetermined operation execution means (electric accessory 34a, electric accessory drive unit 34b) capable of executing a predetermined operation that can change the degree of advantage for the player, and
The effect execution means for executing the effect in the game times, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game round execution means is
When the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the operation mode for the predetermined operation by the predetermined operation execution means is more advantageous to the player than the second operation mode and the second operation mode. A first transition mode (first drop mode) in which the timing is set as the start of the game round as a transition mode in which the timing for shifting the operation mode is different, which is a means for shifting to the first operation mode having a low degree. A second transition mode (rear drop mode) in which the timing is the end of the game round, and an operation mode transition means (steps Sl1104, Sx111 to Sx1116 in the collision determination process of FIG. 34) having at least the above timing are provided.
The effect executing means is
In the game round in which the transition is performed in the first transition mode, the first effect (life-and-death battle effect) is executed, and in the game round in which the transition is performed in the second transition mode, from the first effect. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a means for executing a second effect (dominant battle effect) that suggests that the degree of advantage for the player is high.

According to the feature lC1, when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the operation mode for the predetermined operation by the predetermined operation execution means is changed from the second operation mode to the second operation mode for the player. The operation mode is shifted to the first operation mode having a low degree of advantage, but the transition timing is the first transition mode at the start of the game round and the second transition mode at the end of the game round. Can be switched between. Then, in the game times in which the transition is performed in the first transition mode, that is, in the game times in which the player quickly moves to the first operation having a low degree of advantage, the first effect on the side with a low degree of advantage for the player is executed. , In the game times in which the transition is performed in the second transition mode, that is, in the game times in which the player moves to the first operation having a low degree of advantage later, the second effect on the side having a high degree of advantage for the player is executed. .. Therefore, according to the feature lC1, in the game times when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the advantage for the player is matched to the degree of advantage that the player can obtain by the predetermined operation by the predetermined operation executing means. It is possible to switch between the first effect and the second effect having different degrees. Therefore, according to the feature lC1, it is possible to widen the range of the mode of the production in the game times when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lC2]
Features The gaming machine described in lC1.
The predetermined operation executing means is
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) that assists the entry of the game ball into the entry means into which the game ball can enter, and
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means and a state in which the game ball can enter the ball entry means easily or easily. State transition means to transition and
Equipped with
The game round execution means is
As a control mode for controlling the state transition means, the mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is different from that of the first control mode and the first control mode. It has at least a second control mode in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the ball means, and by executing the first control mode, the first operation mode is realized, and the second control is performed. A gaming machine comprising a control means for realizing the second operation mode depending on a mode.

According to the feature lC2, by switching the control mode for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means from the second control mode to the first control mode, the operation mode for the predetermined operation by the predetermined operation execution means can be changed to the second operation. From the aspect, it is possible to shift to the first operation mode in which the degree of advantage for the player is lower than that of the second operation mode. Therefore, according to the feature lC2, the controllability is excellent.

[Characteristic lC3]
Features The gaming machine described in lC2.
The determination means is
As a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a judgment mode (high probability mode) and
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game round, the determination mode determining means (FIG. 33) for determining whether the determination by the determination means in the game round is executed in the first determination mode or the second determination mode. Fall judgment processing) and
At the start of the game round in which it is determined by the determination mode determining means to execute the determination in the first determination mode, the operation mode for the predetermined operation by the predetermined operation executing means is described in the second. Means for shifting from the operation mode to the first operation mode (steps Sl1004, Sx1005, Sx1007 in the fall determination process of FIG. 33) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature lC3, the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined conditions and executed in the first transition mode when the first condition is satisfied, and the first game time by the determination mode determining means. In either case of the game times in which the determination is determined to be executed in the determination mode, the operation mode for the predetermined operation by the predetermined operation execution means at the start of the game times is from the second operation mode. , The first operation mode is shifted to the first operation mode, which is less advantageous to the player than the second operation mode. Therefore, when the player observes that the motion mode for the predetermined motion by the predetermined motion execution means becomes the first motion mode at the start of the game round, the game round this time satisfies the predetermined condition. It is determined that the game times corresponding to the special information to be satisfied and the first condition is satisfied and executed in the first transition mode, and the determination mode determination means executes the determination in the first determination mode. It is unknown which of the games was played, but it can be inferred that it was narrowed down to one of the two games. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game times it is from the change in the operation mode of the predetermined operation execution means. Therefore, according to the feature lC3, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic lC4]
The gaming machine according to the feature lC2 or the feature lC3.
The determination means is
As a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a judgment mode (high probability mode) and
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game round, the determination mode determining means (FIG. 33) for determining whether the determination by the determination means in the game round is executed in the first determination mode or the second determination mode. Fall judgment processing) and
In the game round in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the determination mode determination means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode, the predetermined operation execution means performs the determination. Means for maintaining the operation mode for a predetermined operation in the second operation mode (NO determination by step Sl1003 in the fall determination process of FIG. 33, NO determination by step Sl1104 in the hit determination process of FIG. 34).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature lC4, the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined conditions and the game times executed in the second transition mode when the second condition is satisfied, and the special information satisfy the predetermined conditions. In any case, the game times (game times at the time of disconnection) in which the judgment is determined to be executed in the second judgment mode by the judgment mode determination means, and the predetermined operation in the game times. The operation mode for the predetermined operation by the executing means is maintained in the second operation mode. Therefore, when the player observes that the motion mode for the predetermined motion by the predetermined motion execution means continues the second motion mode in the game round, the game round this time is a predetermined condition. The game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the conditions and executed in the second transition mode when the second condition is satisfied, and the game times in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined conditions and the determination mode determination means It is unclear which of the game times it was decided to execute the determination in the second determination mode, but it can be inferred that it was narrowed down to either of the two game times. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game times it is from the operation mode of the predetermined operation execution means. Therefore, according to the feature lC4, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic lD group>
The feature lD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its variants.

[Feature lD1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
A determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 29 executed by the MPU 62),
State storage means (various flag storage areas) that store state information (high frequency support mode flag) that can identify a plurality of states including at least the first state (low frequency support mode), and
The effect execution means for executing the effect in the game times, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The determination means is
As the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a judgment mode (high probability mode) and
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game round, the determination mode determining means (FIG. 33) for determining whether the determination by the determination means in the game round is executed in the first determination mode or the second determination mode. Fall judgment processing) and
The determination mode determination means determines that the determination is to be executed in the second determination mode (not won in the fall lottery), and the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (a big hit in the winning lottery). The first state is specified from the information that specifies the state other than the first state in the stored state information at the start of the game round according to the specific case. The game round start state information transfer means (steps Sl1104, Sx111 to Sx1116 in the hit determination process of FIG. 34), which performs a process of transferring to the information to be performed.
At the end of the game round according to the specific case, the game round end in which the stored state information is transferred from the information specifying the state other than the first state to the information specifying the first state. Time state information transfer means (step Sl1606 in the game state transition process of FIG. 39) and
When the first condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the first drop mode), the process by the state information transfer means at the start of the game round can be executed, and when the second condition is satisfied (mode selection). A transition switching means that enables processing by the state information transfer means at the end of the game round (when the result of the lottery is in the back-fall mode), and
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
In the game times related to the specific case, it is determined by the determination mode determining means to execute the determination in the first determination mode (winning the fall lottery), and the special information is the predetermined condition. The first suggestion production means for executing the suggestion production (life-and-death battle production) that suggests that the condition is satisfied (big win in the winning lottery) and that it corresponds to any of the above.
In the game times related to the specific case, it is determined by the determination mode determining means to execute the determination in the second determination mode, and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. A second suggestion effect means for executing a suggestion effect (dominant battle effect) suggesting that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and that the special information satisfies any of the above conditions.
When the first condition is satisfied, the suggestion effect by the first suggestion effect means can be executed, and when the second condition is satisfied, the suggestion effect by the second suggestion effect means can be executed. Suggestion effect switching means (steps Sl2603 to Sx2608 in the effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games in FIG. 49) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature lD1, at the start of the game round relating to the case where the determination mode determination means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition (= specific case). , The state information is transferred from the information specifying the state other than the first state to the information specifying the first state, and it is decided that the determination is executed in the first determination mode by the determination mode determining means. A suggestion effect suggesting that the special information meets any of the above-mentioned predetermined conditions is executed. The determination by the determination mode determining means to execute the determination in the first determination mode means that the probability that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition is low, so that the degree of advantage for the player is low. turn into. On the other hand, if the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the degree of advantage for the player is high. Therefore, according to the feature lD1, when the timing of shifting the state information to the information for specifying the first state is the start time of the player, the degree of advantage for the player is low and the player is advantageous. A suggestion effect suggesting that the degree is high and that one of them is applicable will be executed. If it is assumed that the transfer of the state information from the information specifying the state other than the first state to the information specifying the first state is disadvantageous to the player, according to the feature lD1. , The player will be disadvantaged at the start of the game round, and before notifying that, the degree of advantage for the player is low and the degree of advantage for the player is high. It is possible to perform a suggestion effect that suggests that any of these applies. Therefore, according to the feature lD1, it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the feature lD1, the game times related to the case where the determination mode determination means determines that the determination is executed in the second determination mode and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition (= specific case). At the end, the state information is transferred from the information specifying the state other than the first state to the information specifying the first state, and it is decided to execute the judgment in the second judgment mode by the judgment mode determining means. And, a suggestion effect suggesting that the special information does not meet the predetermined condition or that the special information meets the predetermined condition is executed. .. It can be said that the fact that the determination mode determination means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the degree of advantage for the player is high. Therefore, according to the feature lD1, when the timing of shifting the state information to the information for specifying the first state is the end time of the player, it is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player, and the player. A suggestion effect suggesting that the degree of advantage is high and that one of them is applicable will be executed. If it is assumed that the transfer of the state information from the information specifying the state other than the first state to the information specifying the first state is disadvantageous to the player, according to the feature lD1. Since the player does not suffer any disadvantage until the end of the game round, either the player is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous in the game round, or the degree of advantage is high for the player. It is possible to perform a suggestion effect that suggests that the information corresponds to the crab. Therefore, according to the feature lD1, it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the feature lD1, in the game times relating to the case where the determination mode determination means determines that the determination is executed in the second determination mode and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition (= specific case). , The suggestion effect by the first suggestion effect means and the suggestion effect by the second suggestion effect means are performed. Therefore, according to the feature lD1, it is possible to widen the range of the mode of the production in the game times according to the specific case, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lD2]
The gaming machine described in the feature lD1.
A means of entering a ball that allows a game ball to enter,
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means and a state in which the game ball can enter the ball entry means easily or easily. State transition means to transition and
As a control mode for controlling the state transition means, the mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is different from that of the first control mode and the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode, which facilitates entry of the game ball into the ball means,
Equipped with
The control means is
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information for specifying a state other than the first state (high frequency support mode), the second control mode can be executed and the state storage is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that the first control mode can be executed when the state information stored in the means is information for specifying the first state (low frequency support mode).

According to the feature lD2, the control mode for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means is switched according to the state information stored in the state storage means. Therefore, according to the feature lD2, the player can infer the current state of the state information by visually observing the state of the assisting means. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lD3]
The gaming machine according to the feature lD1 or the feature lD2.
Each of the game round start state information transfer means and the game round end state information transfer means
After the state information is transferred from the information specifying the first state to the information specifying the state other than the first state, the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number of times. The gaming machine, which is provided with a means for transferring the state information in the specific case.

According to the feature lD3, the game after the number of executions of the game times after the state information is transferred from the information specifying the first state to the information specifying the state other than the first state reaches a predetermined number of times. When it is a time and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the range of the mode of the game can be expanded.

<Characteristic lE group>
The feature lE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its variants.

[Feature lE1]
A means of entering a ball that allows a game ball to enter,
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means,
A first determination mode (low probability mode) and the above-mentioned determination mode (lottery mode) for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition. A determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that of the first determination mode.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 29 executed by the MPU 62),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state in which the entry of the game ball into the entry means is impossible or difficult and a state in which the entry of the game ball into the entry means is possible or easy. State transition means to transition and
As a control mode for controlling the state transition means, the mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is different from that of the first control mode and the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode, which facilitates entry of the game ball into the ball means,
The effect execution means for executing the effect in the game times, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
When the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the determination mode is shifted from the first determination mode to the second determination mode, and the control mode is changed from the first control mode to the second control. Judgment mode / control mode transition means to shift to mode,
At the start of the game round, the determination mode determining means (FIG. 33) for determining whether the determination by the determination means in the game round is executed in the first determination mode or the second determination mode. Fall judgment processing) and
At the start of the game round in which the determination mode determination means determines that the determination is to be executed in the first determination mode, the determination mode is shifted from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. The determination mode transition means (step Sl1004 in the fall determination process of FIG. 33) and
Starting from the time when the determination mode is shifted from the first determination mode to the second determination mode by the determination mode / control mode transition means, the number of times the game is executed from the starting point becomes a predetermined number of times. A predetermined number of preprocessing means for continuing the second control mode as the control mode until the control mode is reached.
After the number of times the game has been executed from the starting point reaches the predetermined number of times, when the determination mode is the second determination mode, the second control mode is continued as the control mode. When the determination mode shifts from the second control mode to the first determination mode, the post-processing means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode a predetermined number of times.
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
When the second control mode continues as the control mode after the number of times the game has been executed from the starting point reaches the predetermined number of times, the first determination is made by the determination mode determining means. In the game times in which it is determined to execute the determination in the mode (game times in which the fall lottery is won), or in the game times in which the special information satisfies the predetermined conditions (game times in which the jackpot is won). The first production means to perform the production of the predetermined content (life and death battle production),
The game times (out-of-game times) or the game times in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the determination is determined to be executed in the second determination mode by the determination mode determining means. A second production means for producing a production (dominant battle production) different from the predetermined content in the game times (game times in which the jackpot is won) for which the special information satisfies the predetermined conditions.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature lE1, the control mode changes to the second control mode after the number of times the game has been executed from the starting point reaches a predetermined number of times, starting from the time when the determination mode is shifted to the second determination mode. When it is continued, the game times in which the judgment mode determination means determines to execute the judgment in the first judgment mode, or the game times in which the special information satisfies the predetermined conditions, the predetermined content The production is executed. On the other hand, the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the game times in which the determination mode determination means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode, or the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. In the game times, the production of contents different from the predetermined contents is executed. Therefore, in the game round after the number of executions of the game round from the starting point reaches a predetermined number of times, it is possible to perform the production in two ways, the production of the predetermined content and the production of the content different from the predetermined content. It has the effect of expanding the range of aspects of the production and improving the interest of the game.

[Feature lE2]
The gaming machine described in the feature lE1.
When the control mode is maintained in the second control mode after the number of times the game has been executed from the starting point reaches the predetermined number of times, the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. (When the jackpot is won) At the start of the game round, the determination mode is provided with a means for shifting from the second determination mode to the first determination mode.
The first production means is
As the effect of the predetermined content, the determination mode determination means determines that the determination is executed in the first determination mode (winning the fall lottery), and the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by performing a suggestion effect (life-and-death battle effect) that suggests that it has become (a big hit in a winning lottery) and that it corresponds to either of them.

According to the feature lE2, the special information satisfies the predetermined condition when the control mode is maintained in the second control mode after the number of times the game has been executed from the starting point reaches a predetermined number of times. At the start of a certain game round and at the start of the game round in which the determination mode determination means determines that the determination is to be executed in the first determination mode, the determination mode shifts from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. At the same time, in the game round, either the determination mode determination means determines that the determination is executed in the first determination mode, or the special information satisfies a predetermined condition. A suggestion effect suggesting that the above is applicable is executed. The determination by the determination mode determining means to execute the determination in the first determination mode means that the probability that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition is low, so that the degree of advantage for the player is low. turn into. On the other hand, if the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the degree of advantage for the player is high. Therefore, according to the feature lE2, a suggestion effect suggesting that it corresponds to either a low degree of advantage for the player or a high degree of advantage for the player is executed. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lE3]
The gaming machine according to the feature lE1 or the feature lE2.
The second production means is
As an effect of contents different from the predetermined contents, it is determined by the determination mode determining means to execute the determination in the second determination mode, and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined conditions. A game characterized by performing a suggestion effect (dominant battle effect) that suggests that the special information meets the predetermined conditions (off) and that the special information meets any of the above conditions. Machine.

According to the feature lE3, the game times in which the special information does not satisfy a predetermined condition and the determination mode determination means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode, or the special information is a predetermined condition. It is possible to perform a suggestion effect suggesting that the game times satisfying the above conditions are neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player and the degree of advantage to the player is high. Therefore, according to the feature lE3, it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic lF group>
The feature lF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its variants.

[Feature lF1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
A determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 29 executed by the MPU 62),
State storage means (various flag storage areas) that store state information (high frequency support mode flag) that can identify a plurality of states including at least the first state (low frequency support mode), and
The effect execution means for executing the effect in the game times, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The determination means is
As a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a judgment mode (high probability mode) and
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game round, the determination mode determining means (FIG. 33) for determining whether the determination by the determination means in the game round is executed in the first determination mode or the second determination mode. Fall judgment processing) and
The determination mode determination means determines that the determination is to be executed in the second determination mode (not won in the fall lottery), and the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (a big hit in the winning lottery). The first state is specified from the information that specifies the state other than the first state in the stored state information at the end of the game round according to the specific case. The state information transfer means at the end of the game round (step Sl1606 in the game state transition process of FIG. 39), which performs the process of transferring to the information to be played.
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
In the game times related to the specific case, it is determined by the determination mode determining means to execute the determination in the second determination mode, and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. It is characterized by having a first suggestion effect means for executing a suggestion effect (dominant battle effect) suggesting that the special information meets the predetermined conditions. A game machine.

According to the feature lF1, at the end of the game round relating to the case where the determination mode determination means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition (= specific case). The state information is transferred from the information specifying the state other than the first state to the information specifying the first state, and it is determined by the determination mode determining means to execute the determination in the second determination mode. A suggestion effect suggesting that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition or that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is executed. It can be said that the fact that the determination mode determination means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the degree of advantage for the player is high. Therefore, according to the feature lF1, when the timing of shifting the state information to the information for specifying the first state is the end time of the player, it is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player, and the player. A suggestion effect suggesting that the degree of advantage is high and that one of them is applicable will be executed. If it is assumed that the transfer of the state information from the information specifying the state other than the first state to the information specifying the first state is disadvantageous to the player, according to the feature lF1. Since the player does not suffer any disadvantage until the end of the game round, either the player is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous in the game round, or the degree of advantage is high for the player. It is possible to perform a suggestion effect that suggests that the information corresponds to the crab. Therefore, according to the feature lF1, it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lF2]
The gaming machine described in the feature lF1.
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game round according to the specific case, the game round start is performed to transfer the stored state information from the information specifying the state other than the first state to the information specifying the first state. The time state information transfer means (steps Sl1104, Sx111 to Sx1116 in the collision determination process of FIG. 34) and
When the first condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the first drop mode), the process by the state information transfer means at the start of the game round can be executed, and when the second condition is satisfied (mode selection). A transition switching means that enables processing by the state information transfer means at the end of the game round (when the result of the lottery is in the back-fall mode), and
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
In the game times related to the specific case, it is determined by the determination mode determining means to execute the determination in the first determination mode (winning the fall lottery), and the special information is the predetermined condition. A second suggestion effect means for executing a suggestion effect (life-and-death battle effect) that suggests that the condition is satisfied (a big hit in the winning lottery) and that it corresponds to any of the above.
When the first condition is satisfied, the suggestion effect by the second suggestion effect means can be executed, and when the second condition is satisfied, the suggestion effect by the first suggestion effect means can be executed. Suggestion effect switching means (steps Sl2603 to Sx2608 in the effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed number of games in FIG. 49) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature lF2, when it is determined by the determination mode determining means to execute the determination in the second determination mode and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition (= specific case), at the start of the game round. The state information is transferred from the information that identifies the state other than the first state to the information that identifies the first state, and it is decided that the determination mode determination means executes the determination in the first determination mode. And, a suggestion effect suggesting that the special information meets any of the above-mentioned predetermined conditions is executed. The determination by the determination mode determining means to execute the determination in the first determination mode means that the probability that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition is low, so that the degree of advantage for the player is low. Will end up. On the other hand, if the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the degree of advantage for the player is high. Therefore, according to the feature lD1, when the timing of shifting the state information to the information for specifying the first state is the start time of the player, the degree of advantage for the player is low and the player is advantageous. A suggestion effect suggesting that the degree is high and that one of them is applicable will be executed. If it is assumed that the transfer of the state information from the information specifying the state other than the first state to the information specifying the first state is disadvantageous to the player, according to the feature lF2. , The player will be disadvantaged at the start of the game round, and before notifying that, the degree of advantage for the player is low and the degree of advantage for the player is high. It is possible to perform a suggestion effect that suggests that any of these applies. Therefore, according to the feature lF2, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic lF3]
The gaming machine according to the feature lF1 or the feature lF2.
A means of entering a ball that allows a game ball to enter,
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state in which the entry of the game ball into the entry means is impossible or difficult and a state in which the entry of the game ball into the entry means is possible or easy. State transition means to transition and
As a control mode for controlling the state transition means, the mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is different from that of the first control mode and the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode, which facilitates entry of the game ball into the ball means,
Equipped with
The control means is
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information for specifying a state other than the first state (high frequency support mode), the second control mode can be executed and the state storage is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that the first control mode can be executed when the state information stored in the means is information for specifying the first state (low frequency support mode).

According to the feature lF3, the control mode for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means is switched according to the state information stored in the state storage means. Therefore, according to the feature lF3, the player can infer the current state of the state information by visually observing the state of the assisting means. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lF4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature lF1 to the feature lF3.
Each of the game round start state information transfer means and the game round end state information transfer means
After the state information is transferred from the information specifying the first state to the information specifying the state other than the first state, the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number of times. The gaming machine, which is provided with a means for transferring the state information in the specific case.

According to the feature lF4, the game after the number of executions of the game times after the state information is transferred from the information specifying the first state to the information specifying the state other than the first state reaches a predetermined number of times. When it is a time and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the range of the mode of the game can be expanded.

<Characteristic lG group>
The feature lG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from variant 2 of the first embodiment.

[Feature lG1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
A determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 29 executed by the MPU 62),
State storage means (various flag storage areas) that store state information (high frequency support mode flag) that can identify a plurality of states including at least the first state (low frequency support mode), and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game round execution means is
When the first condition (a probability change jackpot is won by a winning lottery and the opening / closing execution mode ends) is satisfied, the stored state information is obtained from the information for specifying the first state. A first state information transfer means for migrating to information that specifies a state other than the first state, and
After the transfer by the first state information transfer means is performed, the game times when the second condition (winning a big hit in the winning lottery) is satisfied are set as specific game times, and are stored in the specific game times. A second state information transfer means for transferring the state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state.
Equipped with
The second state information transfer means is
As a transition mode in which the timing for transferring the state information is different, the first transition mode (first drop mode) in which the timing is the start time of the specific game round and the first transition mode in which the timing is the end time of the specific game round. It has at least two transition modes (rear drop mode), and whether the first transition mode or the second transition mode is adopted to transfer the state information is determined by the first. (1) A gaming machine comprising: a transition mode determining means for determining based on the number of executions of the game times executed from the time when the transition is made by the state information transfer means to the specific game times.

According to the feature lG1, the state information stored in the state storage means shifts from the information specifying the first state to the information specifying the state other than the first state when the first condition is satisfied. After that, in the specific game times when the second condition is satisfied, the state information is transferred from the information specifying the state other than the first state to the information specifying the first state. The transition timing is switched between the first transition mode at the start of the game round and the second transition mode at the end of the game round. Therefore, according to the feature lG1, in the specific game times, the game based on the information for specifying the first state after the state information is transferred, and the state other than the first state before the state information is transferred. The game is played in two ways: a game based on information that identifies. Therefore, according to the feature lG1, it is possible to widen the range of the mode of the game in the game times, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, according to the feature lG1, in the specific game times, based on the number of times the game times are executed after the state information is transferred from the information for specifying the first state to the information for specifying the state other than the first state. Since it is determined whether the transition mode to be adopted is the first transition mode or the second transition mode, it is possible to perform a game rich in story, for example, a production rich in story. It is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lG2]
The gaming machine described in the feature lG1.
A means of entering a ball that allows a game ball to enter,
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means and a state in which the game ball can enter the ball entry means easily or easily. State transition means to transition and
As a control mode for controlling the state transition means, the mode in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means is different from that of the first control mode and the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode, which facilitates entry of the game ball into the ball means,
Equipped with
The control means is
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information for specifying a state other than the first state (high frequency support mode), the second control mode can be executed and the state storage is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that the first control mode can be executed when the state information stored in the means is information for specifying the first state (low frequency support mode).

According to the feature lG2, the control mode for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means is switched according to the state information stored in the state storage means. Therefore, according to the feature lG2, the player can infer the current state of the state information by visually observing the state of the assisting means. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lG3]
Features The gaming machine described in lG2.
The second condition is a gaming machine characterized in that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to the feature lG3, the state information is transferred with the game times when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition as the specific game times. Therefore, it is possible to broaden the range of game modes by setting the game times when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lG4]
Feature l The gaming machine described in G3,
The determination means is
As a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a judgment mode (high probability mode) and
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game round, the determination mode determining means (FIG. 33) for determining whether the determination by the determination means in the game round is executed in the first determination mode or the second determination mode. Fall judgment processing) and
At the start of the game round in which it is determined by the determination mode determining means to execute the determination in the first determination mode, the first state information is obtained from the information for specifying a state other than the first state. (Steps Sl1004, Sx1005, Sx1007 in the fall determination process of FIG. 33) and means for shifting to the information for specifying the state of
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature lG4, the game times (= specific game times) in which the state information is transferred by the first transition mode, which is the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined conditions, and the game times by the determination mode determining means. In either case of the game times in which the determination is determined to be executed in the determination mode of 1, the state information is the first from the information specifying the state other than the first state at the start of the game times. The state is shifted to the information for specifying the state, and the state of the auxiliary means is shifted to the first control mode in conjunction with the change of the state information. Therefore, when the player observes that the state of the assisting means is in the first control mode at the start of the game round, the game round this time corresponds to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition. Which of the specific game times in which the state information is transferred by the first transition mode and the game times in which the determination mode determination means determines to execute the determination in the first determination mode? It is unknown, but it can be inferred that it was narrowed down to one of the two games. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game times it is from the change in the state of the auxiliary means linked with the change in the state information. Therefore, according to the feature lG4, it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lG5]
The gaming machine according to the feature lG3 or the feature lG4.
The determination means is
As a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode. It has a judgment mode (high probability mode) and
The game round execution means is
At the start of the game round, the determination mode determining means (FIG. 33) for determining whether the determination by the determination means in the game round is executed in the first determination mode or the second determination mode. Fall judgment processing) and
In the game round in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and it is determined by the determination mode determining means to execute the determination in the second determination mode, the state information is used as the first. Means for maintaining the information other than the state of (NO determination by step Sl1003 in the fall determination process of FIG. 33, NO determination by step Sl1104 in the hit determination process of FIG. 34).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature lG5, the game times (= specific game times) corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined conditions and the state information is transferred by the second transition mode (= specific game times). In either case, the special information does not satisfy a predetermined condition, and the determination mode determination means determines that the determination is to be executed in the second determination mode. , The state information is maintained in the information specifying the state other than the first state in the game round. Therefore, when the player observes that the state of the assisting means continues the second control mode in the game round, the game round this time corresponds to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition. The game times in which the state information is transferred by the second transition mode, and the special information does not satisfy a predetermined condition, and the determination mode determination means executes the determination in the second determination mode. It is unclear which of the determined game times is, but it can be inferred that it was narrowed down to either of the two game times. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game times it is from the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, according to the feature lG5, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic lH group>
The feature lH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic lH1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
A determination means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 29 executed by the MPU 62),
State storage means (various flag storage areas) that store state information (high frequency support mode flag) that can identify a plurality of states including at least the first state (low frequency support mode), and
The effect execution means for executing the effect in the game times, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game round execution means is
When the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the stored state information is transferred from the information specifying the state other than the first state to the information specifying the first state. Therefore, as the transition modes in which the timings for transferring the state information are different, the first transition mode (first drop mode) in which the timing is the start time of the game round and the timing is the end time of the game round. It has at least a second transition mode (rear drop mode), and when the first condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the first drop mode), the first transition mode can be executed. , The state information transfer means (step Sl1104 in the hit determination process of FIG. 34) that enables the second transition mode to be executed when the second condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the back-fall mode). Sx111-10 to Sx1116)
The effect executing means is
In the game times in which the transition is performed in the first transition mode, a predetermined content (life-and-death battle effect) is executed, and in the game times in which the transition is performed in the second transition mode, the predetermined content is A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with means for performing productions with different contents (dominant battle productions).

According to the feature lH1, when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the state information stored in the state storage means is the information for specifying the first state from the information for specifying the state other than the first state. However, the timing of this transition is switched between the first transition mode, which is the start of the game round, and the second transition mode, which is the end of the game round, and the first transition. In the game times in which the transition is performed in the mode, the effect of the predetermined content is executed, and in the game times in which the transition is performed in the second transition mode, the effect of the content different from the predetermined content is executed. Therefore, according to the feature lH1, in the game times when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the game is performed in two ways, that is, the effect of the predetermined content and the effect of the content different from the predetermined content. Therefore, according to the feature lH1, it is possible to widen the range of the mode of the game in the game times, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic mA group>
The feature mA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of the variants.

[Characteristic mA1]
The first means of entering a ball (Public drawing start gate 35), which allows a game ball to enter,
The first predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring the first predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry means.
A first determination means (a function for executing a general drawing lottery) for executing a first determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and
A second ball entry means (special drawing start port 34a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state). The first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) that can transition between the ball-entry state (open state) and
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first transition mode (1st transition mode) in which the first state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the first transition mode). The first transition mode execution means for executing the normal power opening / closing execution mode),
A second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring a second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second entry means (special drawing start port 34a).
A second determination means (a function for executing a special drawing lottery) for executing a second determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, and
A third means of entering a ball (first large winning opening 57a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state). A second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-entryable state (open state) and
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode (2) in which the second state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the second transition mode). The second transition mode execution means for executing the special electric opening / closing execution mode) based on the special figure small hit,
A fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) capable of entering a game ball that has entered the third ball entry means, and
A fifth ball entry means (second large winning opening 58a) in which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means when it is impossible or difficult to enter the fifth ball entry means (closed state) and the game ball can enter the fifth ball entry means. A third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a good ball entry state (open state) and
When the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the third transition mode (V winning jackpot) that causes the third state transition means to transition between the non-enterable state and the enterable state. The third transition mode execution means for executing the special electric opening / closing execution mode) based on
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out the game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entry means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The first transition mode execution means is
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power opening / closing execution mode) is
The time required from the start to the end of the second transition mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit) and the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize). A gaming machine characterized by having a means that can be set to a time longer than the total time (total time: 128.0 seconds).

According to the feature mA1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means and the second transition mode is executed during the execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed. During the execution of, the game ball enters the third entry means, the game ball entered into the third entry means enters the fourth entry means, and the third transition mode is executed. To.

According to this feature, the first transition mode executing means takes the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode, the time required from the start to the end of the second transition mode, and the start of the third transition mode. Since the time required from to the end to the end is provided with a means that can be set to a time longer than the total time, the first transition mode is provided even after the second transition mode ends and then the third transition mode ends. Is continuing, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means may transition to the ball-entry state and the game ball may be able to enter the second ball-entry means.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the second transition mode is executed again, and then the third transition mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode may be executed a plurality of times. When the third transition mode is executed a plurality of times, the player can have an opportunity to acquire a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mA2]
Features The gaming machine described in mA1.
The first transition mode executing means causes the first state transition means to transition from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the third transition mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by having means.

According to the feature mA2, the first transition mode executing means shifts the first state transition means from the non-entry state to the enterable state after the third transition mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. Since the means is provided, the game ball can enter the second ball entry means after the third transition mode is completed. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the third transition mode is completed, the second transition mode is executed again, and then the third transition mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed a plurality of times. When the third transition mode is executed a plurality of times, the player can have an opportunity to acquire a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mA3]
The gaming machine according to the feature mA1 or the feature mA2.
When the gaming ball enters the second ball entry means (special drawing start port 34a) during the execution of the second transition mode or the execution of the third transition mode, the second predetermined information is obtained. A gaming machine comprising means for avoiding acquisition or for avoiding execution of the second determination.

According to the feature mA3, when the game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the second transition mode or the execution of the third transition mode, the acquisition of the second predetermined information is avoided or Since the means for avoiding the execution of the second determination is provided, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the second transition mode or the execution of the third transition mode, the second ball is subsequently entered. The transition mode is not executed, and the third transition mode is not executed, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of tension that the second transition mode and the third transition mode should be completed by the time when the timing at which the game ball can enter the second entry means arrives.

Further, unlike this feature, even if the game ball enters the second entry means during the execution of the second transition mode or the execution of the third transition mode, the second predetermined information is obtained. In the case of adopting a configuration that does not avoid the acquisition and the execution of the second determination, a plurality of game balls have entered the second entry means in one transition of the first state transition means to the enterable state. In this case, a plurality of second predetermined information is reserved, and the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed a plurality of times regardless of the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. There is.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even when a plurality of game balls enter the second entry means in one transition of the first state transition means to the enterable state, the first state It is possible to realize playability in which the number of executions of the second transition mode and the third transition mode is one for each transition of the one state transition means to the ballable state.

[Characteristic mA4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature mA1 to the feature mA3.
The third transition mode execution means is
As the third transition mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot), the time required from the start to the end is predetermined regardless of the launch mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after launch. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means capable of executing a predetermined length third transition mode (fixed length special electric opening / closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) having a predetermined length.

According to the feature mA4, as the third transition mode, the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode is predetermined regardless of the launch mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after the launch. Since a means capable of executing a predetermined length third transition mode having a predetermined length is provided, when the predetermined length third transition mode is executed, the length of the third transition mode is predetermined. No longer than the length of. Therefore, for example, the third transition mode is still finished even at the timing when the first state transition means transitions to the ball-entryable state due to the length of the third transition mode becoming longer than the predetermined length. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations such as no. As a result, the third transition mode is not terminated even at the timing when the game ball enters the second entry means, and the second transition is made even though the game ball has entered the second entry means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, such as the mode is not executed and the third transition mode is not executed.

[Characteristic mA5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature mA1 to the feature mA4.
The first transition mode execution means is
In the first transition mode (normal power opening / closing execution mode), the first state transition means transitions from the ball-entryable state to the ball-impossible state, and then transitions from the ball-impossible state to the ball-entry-possible state. The length of the interval period (normal electric interval period), which is the period until the operation is completed, is longer than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot). A gaming machine characterized by having means that can be set to.

According to the feature mA5, the first transition mode executing means changes from the non-entry state to the non-entry state after the first state transition means transitions from the enterable state to the non-entry state in the first transition mode. Provided is a means capable of setting the length of the interval period, which is the period until the transition, to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is shorter than the time (for example, T) required from the start to the end of the third transition mode (for example, 0.7T). The case where the configuration of the comparative example set to is adopted will be described.

First, in the configuration of the comparative example, the case where the game ball enters the second entry means in the first entry-capable state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode will be described. In this case, the second transition mode is started, and then the third transition mode is started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and the third transition mode is still continued in the second ball-entryable state of the first state transition means. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are not newly started. After that, the second interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the third state transition means capable of entering the ball, the third transition mode has already ended, so that the game ball enters the second state. When the ball enters the ball means, the second transition mode is newly started, and then the third transition mode is started. That is, in this case, in the second transition mode and the third transition mode, the game ball becomes the second entry means in the first and third enterable states of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. It will be started when the ball is entered, but it will not be started even if the game ball enters the second entry means in the state where the ball can be entered for the second time.

Next, in the configuration of the comparative example, the case where the game ball does not enter the second entry means in the first entry-capable state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode will be described. In this case, the second transition mode is not started and the third transition mode is not started either. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second entry-capable state of the first state transition means, the third transition mode is not executed, so that the game ball enters the second ball. If the ball enters the means, the second transition mode is started, and then the third transition mode is started. After that, the second interval period in the first transition mode ends, and the third transition mode is still continued in the third state-capable state of the first state transition means. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are not newly started. After that, the third interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the fourth entry-capable state of the first state transition means, the third transition mode has already ended, so that the game ball enters the second state. When the ball enters the ball means, the second transition mode is newly started, and then the third transition mode is started. That is, in this case, in the second transition mode and the third transition mode, the game ball becomes the second entry means in the second and fourth enterable states of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. It will be started when the ball is entered, but it will not be started even if the game ball enters the second entry means in the state where the ball can be entered for the third time.

As described above, unlike this feature, when the configuration of the comparative example in which the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a time shorter than the length of the third transition mode is adopted, the first transition mode is adopted. There is a problem that the start timings of the second transition mode and the third transition mode during execution are not fixed, the flow of the game becomes complicated, and the control of the game becomes difficult.

Next, the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a time longer (for example, 1.3T) than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode (for example, T). The case where the configuration is adopted will be described.

First, in the configuration of this feature, a case where the game ball enters the second entry means in the first entry-capable state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode will be described. In this case, the second transition mode is started, and then the third transition mode is started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second entry-capable state of the first state transition means, the third transition mode has already ended, so that the game ball enters the second state. When the ball enters the ball means, the second transition mode is newly started, and then the third transition mode is started.

Next, in the configuration of this feature, a case where the game ball does not enter the second entry means in the first entry-capable state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode will be described. In this case, the second transition mode is not started and the third transition mode is not started either. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second entry-capable state of the first state transition means, the third transition mode is not executed, so that the game ball enters the second ball. If the ball enters the means, the second transition mode is started, and then the third transition mode is started.

As described above, according to this feature, the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode, and therefore, in the first transition mode. At the timing when the first state transition means is in the ball enterable state, the third transition mode is executed regardless of the number of times the first state transition means is in the ball enterable state. It will be in a state where it is not present or has already been completed. Therefore, when the first state transition means becomes capable of entering the ball in the first transition mode, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are set even though the game ball has entered the second entry means. It doesn't mean it won't start. That is, according to this feature, it is possible to fix the start timing of the second transition mode and the third transition mode during the execution of the first transition mode, and it is possible to suppress the flow of the game from becoming complicated. By setting the number of times that the first state transition means can enter the ball during the execution of the first transition mode, the execution of the second transition mode and the execution of the third transition mode during the execution of the first transition mode can be performed. It is possible to set an upper limit on the number of possible times.

[Characteristic mA6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature mA1 to the feature mA5.
The first transition mode execution means is
After the first state transition means finally transitions from the ball-entryable state to the ball-impossible state in the first transition mode (general power opening / closing execution mode), the first determination by the first determination means. The length of the standby period (normal electric ending period), which is the period until the execution of the above, is the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot). A gaming machine characterized by having means that can be set for a longer time.

According to the feature mA6, the first transition mode execution means is the first by the first determination means after the first state transition means finally transitions from the ball-entry state to the ball-impossible state in the first transition mode. A means is provided in which the length of the waiting period, which is the period until the determination can be executed, can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. The reason for adopting this configuration will be explained.

First, unlike this feature, a case where the length of the waiting period is set to a shorter time than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode will be described. In this configuration, for example, when the first determination is executed after the end of the waiting period and the first predetermined information is determined to satisfy the first condition, the first transition mode is executed and the first determination is performed. There is a possibility that the game ball enters the second entry means during the execution of the transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed. However, in this configuration, when the third transition mode is executed immediately after the start of the waiting period, the third transition mode continues even after the waiting period ends, and the game ball is the second. The third transition mode may continue even at the timing of entering the ball entering means. In this case, there is a problem that the second transition mode is not executed even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, which is disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the first transition mode executing means makes a first determination after the first state transition means finally transitions from the ball-entry state to the ball-impossible state in the first transition mode. Since the length of the waiting period, which is the period until the first determination by the means can be executed, can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the third transition mode continues even after the waiting period ends, and it is possible to suppress a situation that is disadvantageous to the player.

[Characteristic mA7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature mA1 to the feature mA6.
The first transition mode execution means is
After the first state transition means finally transitions from the ball-entryable state to the ball-impossible state in the first transition mode (normal power opening / closing execution mode), the next determination by the first determination means is executed. The length of the waiting period (Public ending period), which is the period until it is possible,
An interval period (general electric interval period) which is a period from the transition of the first state transition means from the ballable state to the ballless state to the transition from the ballable state to the ballable state. ) (135.0 seconds) or more (140.0 seconds).

According to the feature mA7, the first transition mode executing means makes the next determination by the first determination means after the first state transition means finally transitions from the ball-entry state to the ball-impossible state in the first transition mode. The length of the waiting period, which is the period until the ball can be executed, is changed from the ball-entry state to the ball-impossible state after the first state transition means transitions from the ball-entry state to the ball-impossible state. Since it is provided with a means that can be set to a length equal to or longer than the length of the interval period, which is the period up to, the flow of the series of games realized in the interval period of the first transition mode can be changed even in the waiting period of the first transition mode. It can be realized in the same way. As a result, for example, it becomes possible to realize a new game in which the second transition mode and the third transition mode can be executed in both the interval period and the waiting period in the first transition mode.

<Characteristic mB group>
The feature mB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of the variants.

[Characteristic mB1]
The first ball entry area (normal figure start gate 35) where a game ball can enter, and
The first lottery execution means for executing the first lottery (general drawing lottery) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry area, and
A first variable means for executing variable display and stop display of the first identification information (ordinary symbol) based on the execution of the first lottery, and
The second ball entry area (special drawing start port 34a) where the game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second entry area from the impossible or difficult entry impossible state (closed state) in which the game ball can enter the second entry area. The first transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning to a ball-enabled state (open state), and
When the result of the first lottery is the result of the first predetermined lottery (per normal figure), the first transition mode (Public electric train) for transitioning the first transition means from the non-entry state to the possible entry state. The first transition mode execution means for executing the open / close execution mode),
A second lottery execution means for executing a second lottery (special figure lottery) based on the game ball entering the second entry area (special figure start opening 34a), and
A second variable means for executing variable display and stop display of the second identification information (special symbol) based on the execution of the second lottery, and
The third ball entry area (V winning opening 57av) where a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third entry area from the impossible or difficult entry impossible state (closed state) in which the game ball can enter the third entry area. A second transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning to a ball-enabled state (open state), and
When the result of the second lottery is the result of the second predetermined lottery (special figure small hit), the second transition mode (special) in which the second transition means is changed from the non-entry state to the possible entry state. The second transition mode execution means for executing the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the small hit in the figure, and
A determination means for determining the granting of a specific profit (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize) based on the game ball entering the third entry area.
A means for terminating the granting of the specified profit when the predetermined termination condition is satisfied after the start of the granting of the specific profit.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
When one cycle from the transition of the first transition means to the ballable state (time t3 in FIG. 68) to the end of granting the specific benefit (time t10 in FIG. 68) is defined as one special game. ,
The first transition mode execution means is
Based on the result of the first lottery, a means for at least executing a plurality of transition operations of the first transition means with respect to the result of the first predetermined lottery.
The first special game round is executed based on the transition of the first transition means to the ball-entryable state at the first timing, and the first transition means is executed at the second timing after the one special game round is completed. The means for controlling the transition to the ball-entry state and
The limiting means for limiting the variable display of the first identification information so as not to start,
Equipped with
The limiting means includes means for generating a predetermined limiting period in the period from the first timing to the end of the one special game round that occurs after the second timing.
The predetermined end condition of the specific profit is satisfied by executing the first state (round game) advantageous to the player a plurality of times.
The first state can be changed from the first time with the shortest execution time to the second time with the longest execution time depending on the gaming state.
The first transition mode execution means is a case where the first state of the first special game times executed after the first timing and a plurality of times of the specific benefit are all executed in the second time. Also, a gaming machine characterized in that the first transition means can be transitioned to the ball-entryable state after the end of the one special gaming round.

According to the feature mB1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry area and the first lottery is executed, the result of the first lottery becomes the first predetermined lottery result and the first transition mode is executed. , When the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry area during the execution of the first transition mode, the second lottery is executed, and the second lottery is executed. The result of the lottery becomes the result of the second predetermined lottery, and the second transition mode is executed. Then, during the execution of the second transition mode, the game ball enters the third ball entry area, and the grant of the specific profit is determined.

Then, according to this feature, the first transition mode execution means causes at least a plurality of transition operations of the first transition means to be executed for one first predetermined lottery result based on the result of the first lottery. One special game round is executed based on the means and the first transition means transitioning to the ball enterable state at the first timing, and the first transition means is entered at the second timing after the one special game round is completed. It is provided with a means for controlling the transition to a ball-capable state. Therefore, it is possible to execute one special game times a plurality of times for one first predetermined lottery result in the first lottery.

Further, according to this feature, the first transition mode execution means includes limiting means for limiting the variable display of the first identification information so as not to start, and the limiting means occurs from the first timing to the second timing and thereafter. 1 Provide means for generating a predetermined limited period in the period until the end of the special game round. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the first identification information from starting before the end of the 1 special game round, so that the first lottery can be performed even though the 1 special game round has not ended. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation such as the execution of. As a result, for example, even though the result of the first lottery is the result of the first predetermined lottery that is advantageous to the player, the game ball is not completed because the one special game round that has already been executed has not been completed. It is possible to prevent a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, such as the fact that the second transition mode is not executed even if the ball enters the second ball entry area.

Further, according to this feature, the predetermined end condition of the specific profit is satisfied by executing the first state advantageous to the player a plurality of times, and the first state has the shortest execution time depending on the game state. It is possible to change from time to the longest second time, and the first transition mode execution means is such that the first state of a plurality of specific profits of one special game time executed after the first timing is all second. Even if it is executed in time, the first transition means may be transitioned to the ball-entry state after the end of the one special game round. Therefore, even if the first state of a plurality of specific profits of one special game is executed in the second time, the game ball enters the second entry area after the end of the one special game. It becomes possible to make a ball, and it becomes possible to execute one special game round again. As a result, it is possible to reliably execute the special game times a plurality of times regardless of the length of the first state of the plurality of times of the specific profit.

[Characteristic mB2]
Features The gaming machine described in mB1.
A gaming machine including a number display means for displaying information regarding the number of times in the first state (remaining number of round games).

Feature According to the feature mB2, since the number display means for displaying the information regarding the number of times of the first state is provided, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of times of the first state and to improve the interest of the game. can.

[Characteristic mB3]
The gaming machine according to the feature mb1 or the feature mb2.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a specific image display means for displaying a specific image (ending image) at the end of granting the specific profit (during the special electric ending period of the special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot).

According to the feature mB3, since the specific image display means for displaying a specific image is provided at the end of the granting of the specific profit, the player can be made to recognize that the grant of the specific profit has been completed and the specific profit has been granted. It is possible to give a sense of fulfillment to the fact that the profit has been given and the motivation for the subsequent game.

[Characteristic mB4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature mB1 to the feature mB3.
At the end of the granting of the specific profit (during the special power ending period of the special power opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot), it is provided with a profit information display means for displaying information on the profit acquired by the player by granting the specific profit. A featured gaming machine.

According to the feature mB4, at the end of the granting of the specific profit, the profit information display means for displaying the information regarding the profit acquired by the player by the granting of the specific profit is provided. It is possible to grasp the acquired profit, and to give a sense of fulfillment to the fact that the specific profit is given and a motivation for the subsequent game.

[Characteristic mB5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature mB1 to the feature mB4.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the determination means includes means for determining the granting of one of the specific benefits (special electric opening / closing execution mode A or B based on the V winning jackpot) among a plurality of types of the specific benefits.

According to the feature mB5, since the determination means includes a means for determining the grant of one specific benefit from a plurality of types of specific benefits, the player is only interested in whether or not the specific benefit is granted. Instead, if a specific profit is given, it is possible to have an interest or interest in what kind of specific profit is given.

[Characteristic mB6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature mb1 to the feature mb5.
A gaming machine comprising a predetermined information variation means for executing variation display and stop display of predetermined identification information (decorative symbol) in the first state (round game).

Feature According to the feature mB6, since the predetermined information variable means for executing the variable display and the stop display of the predetermined identification information in the first state is provided, the player is surprised that the variable display of the predetermined identification information is started in the first state. It is possible to give a great expectation as to what the display mode (stop mode) will be when the predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed.

<Characteristic mC group>
The feature mC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of the variants.

[Characteristic mC1]
The first means of entering a ball (Public drawing start gate 35), which allows a game ball to enter,
The first predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring the first predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry means.
A first determination means (a function for executing a general drawing lottery) for executing a first determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and
A second ball entry means (special drawing start port 34a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state). The first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) that can transition between the ball-entry state (open state) and
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first transition mode (1st transition mode) in which the first state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the first transition mode). The first transition mode execution means for executing the normal power opening / closing execution mode),
A second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring a second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second entry means (special drawing start port 34a).
A second determination means (a function for executing a special drawing lottery) for executing a second determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, and
A third means of entering a ball (first large winning opening 57a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state). A second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-entryable state (open state) and
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode (2) in which the second state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the second transition mode). The second transition mode execution means for executing the special electric opening / closing execution mode) based on the special figure small hit,
A fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) capable of entering a game ball that has entered the third ball entry means, and
A fifth ball entry means (second large winning opening 58a) in which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means when it is impossible or difficult to enter the fifth ball entry means (closed state) and the game ball can enter the fifth ball entry means. A third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a good ball entry state (open state) and
When the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the third transition mode (V winning jackpot) that causes the third state transition means to transition between the non-enterable state and the enterable state. The third transition mode execution means for executing the special electric opening / closing execution mode) based on
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out the game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entry means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The game ball enters the first ball entry means (normal drawing start gate 35), and the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode (normal electric opening / closing execution). Mode) is executed, and if the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode,
During the execution of the first transition mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a) and the second transition mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit) is executed. Being done
During the execution of the second transition mode, the game ball enters the third entry means (first large winning opening 57a), and the game ball entering the third entry means is the fourth entry means. The third transition mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot) is executed by entering the ball entering means (V winning opening 57av).
Even after the third transition mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and while the first transition mode continues, the first state transition means transitions to the ball-entryable state and the game ball. Is a gaming machine characterized in that the ball may be able to enter the second ball entry means.

According to the feature mC1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entering means and the second transition mode is executed during the execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed. During the execution of, the game ball enters the third entry means, the game ball entered into the third entry means enters the fourth entry means, and the third transition mode is executed. , Even after the third transition mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the enterable state and the game ball becomes the second. It may be possible to enter the ball into the ball entry means of.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the second transition mode is executed again, and then the third transition mode is executed again. That is, if the first transition mode is executed once, the second transition mode and the third transition mode may be executed a plurality of times. When the third transition mode is executed a plurality of times, the player can have an opportunity to acquire a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mC2]
Features The gaming machine described in mC1.
When the gaming ball enters the second ball entry means (special drawing start port 34a) during the execution of the second transition mode or the execution of the third transition mode, the second predetermined information is obtained. A gaming machine comprising means for avoiding acquisition or for avoiding execution of the second determination.

According to the feature mC2, when the game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the second transition mode or the execution of the third transition mode, the acquisition of the second predetermined information is avoided or Since the means for avoiding the execution of the second determination is provided, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the second transition mode or the execution of the third transition mode, the second ball is subsequently entered. The transition mode is not executed, and the third transition mode is not executed, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of tension that the second transition mode and the third transition mode should be completed by the time when the timing at which the game ball can enter the second entry means arrives.

Further, unlike this feature, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the second transition mode or the execution of the third transition mode, the second predetermined information is obtained. In the case of adopting a configuration that does not avoid the acquisition and the execution of the second determination, a plurality of game balls have entered the second entry means in one transition to the entry-capable state of the first state transition means. In this case, a plurality of second predetermined information is reserved, and the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed a plurality of times regardless of the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. There is.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even when a plurality of game balls enter the second entry means in one transition of the first state transition means to the enterable state, the first state transition means. It is possible to realize playability in which the number of executions of the second transition mode and the third transition mode is one for each transition of the one state transition means to the ballable state.

[Characteristic mC3]
The gaming machine according to the feature mC1 or the feature mC2.
The third transition mode execution means is
As the third transition mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot), the time required from the start to the end is predetermined regardless of the launch mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after launch. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means capable of executing a predetermined length third transition mode (fixed length special electric opening / closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) having a predetermined length.

According to the feature mC3, as the third transition mode, the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode is predetermined regardless of the launch mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after the launch. Since a means capable of executing a predetermined length third transition mode having a predetermined length is provided, when the predetermined length third transition mode is executed, the length of the third transition mode is predetermined. No longer than the length of. Therefore, for example, the third transition mode is still finished even at the timing when the first state transition means transitions to the ball-entryable state due to the length of the third transition mode becoming longer than the predetermined length. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations such as no. As a result, the third transition mode is not terminated even at the timing when the game ball enters the second entry means, and the second transition is made even though the game ball has entered the second entry means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, such as the mode is not executed and the third transition mode is not executed.

<Characteristic mD group>
The feature mD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of the variants.

[Feature mD1]
The first means of entering a ball (Public drawing start gate 35), which allows a game ball to enter,
The first predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring the first predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry means.
A first determination means (a function for executing a general drawing lottery) for executing a first determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and
A second ball entry means (special drawing start port 34a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state). The first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) that can transition between the ball-entry state (open state) and
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first transition mode (1st transition mode) in which the first state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the first transition mode). The first transition mode execution means for executing the normal power opening / closing execution mode),
A second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring a second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second entry means (special drawing start port 34a).
A second determination means (a function for executing a special drawing lottery) for executing a second determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, and
A third means of entering a ball (first large winning opening 57a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state). A second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-entryable state (open state) and
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode (2) in which the second state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the second transition mode). The second transition mode execution means for executing the special electric opening / closing execution mode) based on the special figure small hit,
A fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) capable of entering a game ball that has entered the third ball entry means, and
A fifth ball entry means (second large winning opening 58a) in which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means when it is impossible or difficult to enter the fifth ball entry means (closed state) and the game ball can enter the fifth ball entry means. A third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a good ball entry state (open state) and
When the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the third transition mode (V winning jackpot) that causes the third state transition means to transition between the non-enterable state and the enterable state. The third transition mode execution means for executing the special electric opening / closing execution mode) based on
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out the game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entry means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
In a situation where the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode,
After the first transition mode is started,
When the first transition mode is started, the first state transition means transitions from the non-enterable state to the enterable state.
When the first state transition means transitions from the non-entry state to the enterable state, the game ball enters the first entry means (normal figure start gate 35).
The first predetermined information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means (normal drawing start gate 35) satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode (normal electric opening / closing). Execution mode) is executed,
During the execution of the first transition mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means (special figure start port 34a) and the second transition mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit) is executed. Being done
During the execution of the second transition mode, the game ball enters the third entry means (first large winning opening 57a), and the ball enters the third entry means (first large winning opening 57a).
The game ball that has entered the third entry means enters the fourth entry means (V winning opening 57av), and the third transition mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot) is executed. Being done
When the time required for the third transition mode to end is defined as the specific required time (time from time t2 to time t10 in FIG. 68),
The first transition mode execution means is
A gaming machine comprising a means capable of setting a time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal electric opening / closing execution mode) to a time longer than the specific required time.

According to the feature mD1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entering means and the second transition mode is executed during the execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed. During the execution of, the game ball enters the third entry means, the game ball entered into the third entry means enters the fourth entry means, and the third transition mode is executed. To.

Further, according to this feature, the first transition mode execution means includes means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a time longer than the specific required time, and thus the third transition mode. The first transition mode continues even after the end of the game, and the first state transition means transitions to the ball-entryable state during the continuation of the first transition mode, and the game ball becomes the second ball-entry means. It may be possible to enter the ball.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the second transition mode is executed again, and then the third transition mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode may be executed a plurality of times. When the third transition mode is executed a plurality of times, the player can have an opportunity to acquire a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mD2]
Features The gaming machine described in mD1.
The first transition mode executing means causes the first state transition means to transition from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the third transition mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by having means.

According to the feature mD2, the first transition mode executing means shifts the first state transition means from the non-entry state to the enterable state after the third transition mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. Since the means is provided, the game ball can enter the second ball entry means after the third transition mode is completed. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the third transition mode is completed, the second transition mode is executed again, and then the third transition mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed a plurality of times. When the third transition mode is executed a plurality of times, the player can have an opportunity to acquire a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mD3]
The gaming machine according to the feature mD1 or the feature mD2.
When the gaming ball enters the second ball entry means (special drawing start port 34a) during the execution of the second transition mode or the execution of the third transition mode, the second predetermined information is obtained. A gaming machine comprising means for avoiding acquisition or for avoiding execution of the second determination.

According to the feature mD3, when the game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the second transition mode or the execution of the third transition mode, the acquisition of the second predetermined information is avoided or Since the means for avoiding the execution of the second determination is provided, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the second transition mode or the execution of the third transition mode, the second ball is subsequently entered. The transition mode is not executed, and the third transition mode is not executed, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of tension that the second transition mode and the third transition mode should be completed by the time when the timing at which the game ball can enter the second entry means arrives.

Further, unlike this feature, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the second transition mode or the execution of the third transition mode, the second predetermined information is obtained. In the case of adopting a configuration that does not avoid the acquisition and the execution of the second determination, a plurality of game balls have entered the second entry means in one transition to the entry-capable state of the first state transition means. In this case, a plurality of second predetermined information is reserved, and the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed a plurality of times regardless of the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. There is.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even when a plurality of game balls enter the second entry means in one transition of the first state transition means to the enterable state, the first state transition means. It is possible to realize playability in which the number of executions of the second transition mode and the third transition mode is one for each transition of the one state transition means to the ballable state.

[Feature mD4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature mD1 to the feature mD3.
The third transition mode execution means is
As the third transition mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot), the time required from the start to the end is predetermined regardless of the launch mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after launch. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means capable of executing a predetermined length third transition mode (fixed length special electric opening / closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) having a predetermined length.

According to the feature mD4, as the third transition mode, the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode is predetermined regardless of the launch mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after the launch. Since a means capable of executing a predetermined length third transition mode having a predetermined length is provided, when the predetermined length third transition mode is executed, the length of the third transition mode is predetermined. No longer than the length of. Therefore, for example, the third transition mode is still finished even at the timing when the first state transition means transitions to the ball-entryable state due to the length of the third transition mode becoming longer than the predetermined length. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations such as no. As a result, the third transition mode is not terminated even at the timing when the game ball enters the second entry means, and the second transition is made even though the game ball has entered the second entry means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, such as the mode is not executed and the third transition mode is not executed.

<Characteristic mE group>
The feature mE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of the variants.

[Characteristic mE1]
The first means of entering a ball (Public drawing start gate 35), which allows a game ball to enter,
The first predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring the first predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry means.
A first determination means (a function for executing a general drawing lottery) for determining whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and
A second ball entry means (special drawing start port 34a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state). The first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) that can transition between the ball-entry state (open state) and
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first transition mode (1st transition mode) in which the first state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the first transition mode). The first transition mode execution means for executing the normal power opening / closing execution mode),
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means is satisfied, the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize) for granting the privilege to the player is executed. Benefit grant mode execution means and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The first transition mode execution means is
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power opening / closing execution mode) is
A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means that can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on V prize).

According to the feature mE1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entry means during the execution of the first transition mode, the predetermined privilege granting condition is satisfied, and the privilege granting mode is satisfied. Is executed.

According to this feature, the first transition mode executing means can set the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and while the first transition mode continues, the first state transition means transitions to the enterable state and the game ball It may be possible to enter the second ball entry means.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode may be executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mE2]
Features The gaming machine described in mE1.
The first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature mE1, the first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-entry state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mE3]
The gaming machine according to the feature mE1 or the feature mE2.
The privilege granting mode execution means is
When a game ball enters the second ball entry means (special drawing start port 34a) during the execution of the privilege granting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with means for avoiding the execution of the above-mentioned privilege granting mode.

According to the feature mE3, when the game ball enters the second entry means during the execution of the privilege grant mode, the privilege granting mode execution means enters the second entry means of the game ball. Since the means for avoiding the execution of the privilege granting mode triggered by the ball is provided, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the privilege granting mode, the privilege granting mode is not executed thereafter. This is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of tension that he / she wants the privilege granting mode to end by the time when the game ball can enter the second ball entry means.

[Characteristic mE4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature mE1 to the feature mE3.
A second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring a second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second entry means (special drawing start port 34a).
A second determination means (a function for executing a special drawing lottery) for executing a second determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, and
A third means of entering a ball (first large winning opening 57a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state). A second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-entryable state (open state) and
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode (2) in which the second state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the second transition mode). The second transition mode execution means for executing the special electric opening / closing execution mode) based on the special figure small hit,
A fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) capable of entering a game ball that has entered the third ball entry means, and
A fifth ball entry means (second large winning opening 58a) in which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means when it is impossible or difficult to enter the fifth ball entry means (closed state) and the game ball can enter the fifth ball entry means. A third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a good ball entry state (open state) and
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out the game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entry means.
Equipped with
When the game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, the privilege granting mode executing means sets the third state transition means as the privilege granting mode with the ball entry impossible state and the ball entry enable state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) for transitioning between.

According to the feature mE4, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the first transition mode, the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode is executed. The game ball enters the third entry means during the execution of, and the game ball entered into the third entry means enters the fourth entry means, and the second as a privilege granting mode. 3 Transition mode is executed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is triggered by the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means that has become capable of entering the ball during the execution of the first transition mode. Can be executed.

<Characteristic mF group>
The feature mF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of the variants.

[Characteristic mF1]
The first means of entering a ball (Public drawing start gate 35), which allows a game ball to enter,
The first predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring the first predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry means.
A first determination means (a function for executing a general drawing lottery) for determining whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and
A second ball entry means (special drawing start port 34a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state). The first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) that can transition between the ball-entry state (open state) and
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first transition mode (1st transition mode) in which the first state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the first transition mode). The first transition mode execution means for executing the normal power opening / closing execution mode),
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means is satisfied, the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize) for granting the privilege to the player is executed. Benefit grant mode execution means and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature mF1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entry means during the execution of the first transition mode, the predetermined privilege granting condition is satisfied, and the privilege granting mode is satisfied. Is executed.

Then, according to this feature, the first transition mode executing means transitions the first state transition means from the non-entry state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode ends during the execution of the first transition mode. Since the means for causing the game to be provided is provided, the game ball can enter the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the feature mF1, the first transition mode executing means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-entry state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mF2]
Features The gaming machine described in mF1.
The privilege granting mode execution means is
When a game ball enters the second ball entry means (special drawing start port 34a) during the execution of the privilege granting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with means for avoiding the execution of the above-mentioned privilege granting mode.

According to the feature mF2, when the game ball enters the second entry means during the execution of the privilege grant mode, the privilege granting mode execution means enters the second entry means of the game ball. Since the means for avoiding the execution of the privilege granting mode triggered by the ball is provided, even if the game ball enters the second entry means during the execution of the privilege granting mode, the privilege granting mode is not executed thereafter. This is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of tension that he / she wants the privilege granting mode to end by the time when the game ball can enter the second ball entry means.

[Characteristic mF3]
The gaming machine according to the feature mF1 or the feature mF2.
A second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring a second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second entry means (special drawing start port 34a).
A second determination means (a function for executing a special drawing lottery) for executing a second determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, and
A third means of entering a ball (first large winning opening 57a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state). A second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-entryable state (open state) and
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode (2) in which the second state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the second transition mode). The second transition mode execution means for executing the special electric opening / closing execution mode) based on the special figure small hit,
A fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) capable of entering a game ball that has entered the third ball entry means, and
A fifth ball entry means (second large winning opening 58a) in which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means when it is impossible or difficult to enter the fifth ball entry means (closed state) and the game ball can enter the fifth ball entry means. A third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a good ball entry state (open state) and
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out the game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entry means.
Equipped with
When the game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, the privilege granting mode executing means sets the third state transition means as the privilege granting mode with the ball entry impossible state and the ball entry enable state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) for transitioning between.

According to the feature mF3, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entering means and the second transition mode is executed during the execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed. The game ball enters the third entry means during the execution of, and the game ball entered into the third entry means enters the fourth entry means, and the second as a privilege granting mode. 3 Transition mode is executed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is triggered by the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means that has become capable of entering the ball during the execution of the first transition mode. Can be executed.

<Characteristic mG group>
The feature mG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of the variants.

[Characteristic mG1]
The first means of entering a ball (Public drawing start gate 35), which allows a game ball to enter,
The first predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring the first predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry means.
A first determination means (a function for executing a general drawing lottery) for determining whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and
A second ball entry means (special drawing start port 34a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state). The first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) that can transition between the ball-entry state (open state) and
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first transition mode (1st transition mode) in which the first state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the first transition mode). The first transition mode execution means for executing the normal power opening / closing execution mode),
A privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on V prize), which is a mode for granting a privilege to a player when a predetermined privilege granting condition including the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means is satisfied. ) Is executed in the privilege grant mode execution means,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The privilege granting mode execution means is
When a game ball enters the second ball entry means (special drawing start port 34a) during the execution of the privilege granting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with means for avoiding the execution of the above-mentioned privilege granting mode.

According to the feature mG1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entry means during the execution of the first transition mode, the predetermined privilege granting condition is satisfied, and the privilege granting mode is satisfied. Is executed.

Then, according to this feature, when the game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the privilege grant mode, the privilege granting mode execution means goes to the second ball entry means of the game ball. Since the means for avoiding the execution of the privilege granting mode triggered by the entry of the ball is provided, even if the game ball enters the second entry means during the execution of the privilege granting mode, the privilege granting mode is executed after that. It will not be done, and it will be a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of tension that he / she wants the privilege granting mode to end by the time when the game ball can enter the second ball entry means.

[Characteristic mG2]
Features The gaming machine described in mG1.
The first transition mode execution means is
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power opening / closing execution mode) is
A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means that can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on V prize).

According to the feature mG2, the first transition mode executing means includes means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the enterable state and the game ball becomes the second. It may be possible to enter the ball into the ball entry means of.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode may be executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mG3]
The gaming machine according to the feature mG1 or the feature mG2.
The first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature mG3, the first transition mode executing means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-entry state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mG4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature mG1 to the feature mG3.
A second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring a second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second entry means (special drawing start port 34a).
A second determination means (a function for executing a special drawing lottery) for executing a second determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, and
A third means of entering a ball (first large winning opening 57a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state). A second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-entryable state (open state) and
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode (2) in which the second state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the second transition mode). The second transition mode execution means for executing the special electric opening / closing execution mode) based on the special figure small hit,
A fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) capable of entering a game ball that has entered the third ball entry means, and
A fifth ball entry means (second large winning opening 58a) in which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means when it is impossible or difficult to enter the fifth ball entry means (closed state) and the game ball can enter the fifth ball entry means. A third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a good ball entry state (open state) and
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out the game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entry means.
Equipped with
When the game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, the privilege granting mode executing means sets the third state transition means as the privilege granting mode with the ball entry impossible state and the ball entry enable state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) for transitioning between.

According to the feature mG4, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entering means and the second transition mode is executed during the execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed. The game ball enters the third entry means during the execution of, and the game ball entered into the third entry means enters the fourth entry means, and the second as a privilege granting mode. 3 Transition mode is executed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is triggered by the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means that has become capable of entering the ball during the execution of the first transition mode. Can be executed.

<Characteristic mH group>
The feature mH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of the variants.

[Characteristic mH1]
The first means of entering a ball (Public drawing start gate 35), which allows a game ball to enter,
The first predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring the first predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry means.
A first determination means (a function for executing a general drawing lottery) for determining whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and
A second ball entry means (special drawing start port 34a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state). The first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) that can transition between the ball-entry state (open state) and
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first transition mode (1st transition mode) in which the first state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the first transition mode). The first transition mode execution means for executing the normal power opening / closing execution mode),
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means is satisfied, the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize) for granting the privilege to the player is executed. Benefit grant mode execution means and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The privilege granting mode execution means is
As the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot), the length from the start to the end is predetermined regardless of the launch mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after launch. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means capable of executing a predetermined length privilege granting mode (fixed-length special electric opening / closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot).

According to the feature mH1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entry means during the execution of the first transition mode, the predetermined privilege granting condition is satisfied, and the privilege granting mode is satisfied. Is executed.

According to this feature, in the privilege granting mode execution means, the length from the start to the end is predetermined as the privilege granting mode regardless of the launch mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after launch. Since the means for executing the predetermined length privilege granting mode having a predetermined length is provided, when the predetermined length privilege granting mode is executed, the length of the privilege granting mode is longer than the predetermined length. Does not get long. Therefore, for example, in a gaming machine in which the length of the privilege granting mode becomes longer than a predetermined length, which is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to prevent the situation from becoming disadvantageous to the player. be able to.

Specifically, for example, in a gaming machine that is disadvantageous to the player, for example, even if the gaming ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the privilege granting mode, the privilege granting mode is not executed thereafter. The privilege granting mode becomes longer than the predetermined length, and even when the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode has not yet ended, and the privilege granting mode is not executed thereafter. It is possible to prevent the situation from becoming disadvantageous for the player.

[Characteristic mH2]
Features The gaming machine described in mH1.
The privilege granting mode execution means is
When a game ball enters the second ball entry means (special drawing start port 34a) during the execution of the privilege granting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with means for avoiding the execution of the above-mentioned privilege granting mode.

According to the feature mH2, when the game ball enters the second entry means during the execution of the privilege grant mode, the privilege granting mode execution means enters the second entry means of the game ball. Since the means for avoiding the execution of the privilege granting mode triggered by the ball is provided, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the privilege granting mode, the privilege granting mode is not executed thereafter. This is a disadvantageous situation for the player.

However, according to this feature, as the privilege granting mode, the length from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode is predetermined regardless of the launch mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after launch. Since the means for executing the predetermined length privilege granting mode having a predetermined length is provided, when the predetermined length privilege granting mode is executed, the length of the privilege granting mode is longer than the predetermined length. Does not get long. Therefore, even when the first state transition means transitions to the ball-entryable state due to the length of the privilege granting mode becoming longer than the predetermined length, the privilege granting mode has not yet ended. The occurrence can be suppressed. As a result, it is disadvantageous for the player that the privilege granting mode triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is not executed even though the game ball has entered the second entry means. It is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

[Characteristic mH3]
The gaming machine according to the feature mH1 or the feature mH2.
The first transition mode execution means is
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power opening / closing execution mode) is
A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means that can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on V prize).

According to the feature mH3, the first transition mode executing means includes means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the enterable state and the game ball becomes the second. It may be possible to enter the ball into the ball entry means of.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode may be executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mH4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature mH1 to the feature mH3.
The first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature mH4, the first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-entry state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mH5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features mH1 to the feature mH4.
A second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring a second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second entry means (special drawing start port 34a).
A second determination means (a function for executing a special drawing lottery) for executing a second determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, and
A third means of entering a ball (first large winning opening 57a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state). A second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-entryable state (open state) and
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode (2) in which the second state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the second transition mode). The second transition mode execution means for executing the special electric opening / closing execution mode) based on the special figure small hit,
A fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) capable of entering a game ball that has entered the third ball entry means, and
A fifth ball entry means (second large winning opening 58a) in which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means when it is impossible or difficult to enter the fifth ball entry means (closed state) and the game ball can enter the fifth ball entry means. A third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a good ball entry state (open state) and
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out the game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entry means.
Equipped with
When the game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, the privilege granting mode executing means sets the third state transition means as the privilege granting mode with the ball entry impossible state and the ball entry enable state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) for transitioning between.

According to the feature mH5, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entering means and the second transition mode is executed during the execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed. The game ball enters the third entry means during the execution of, and the game ball entered into the third entry means enters the fourth entry means, and the second as a privilege granting mode. 3 Transition mode is executed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is triggered by the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means that has become capable of entering the ball during the execution of the first transition mode. Can be executed.

<Characteristic mI group>
The feature mI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of the variants.

[Characteristic mI1]
The first means of entering a ball (Public drawing start gate 35), which allows a game ball to enter,
The first predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring the first predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry means.
A first determination means (a function for executing a general drawing lottery) for determining whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and
A second ball entry means (special drawing start port 34a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state). The first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) that can transition between the ball-entry state (open state) and
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first transition mode (1st transition mode) in which the first state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the first transition mode). The first transition mode execution means for executing the normal power opening / closing execution mode),
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means is satisfied, the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize) for granting the privilege to the player is executed. Benefit grant mode execution means and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The first transition mode execution means is
In the first transition mode (normal power opening / closing execution mode), the first state transition means transitions from the ball-entryable state to the ball-impossible state, and then transitions from the ball-impossible state to the ball-entry-possible state. The length of the interval period (normal electric interval period), which is the period until the operation is completed, is set to a longer time than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot). A gaming machine characterized by having configurable means.

According to the feature mI1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entry means during the execution of the first transition mode, the predetermined privilege granting condition is satisfied, and the privilege granting mode is satisfied. Is executed.

Then, according to this feature, the first transition mode execution means can enter the ball from the non-enterable state after the first state transition means transitions from the enterable state to the non-enterable state in the first transition mode. Provided is a means capable of setting the length of the interval period, which is the period until the transition to the state, to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a time shorter (for example, 0.7T) than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (for example, T). A case where the configuration of the comparative example to be set is adopted will be described.

First, in the configuration of the comparative example, the case where the game ball enters the second entry means in the first entry-capable state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode will be described. In this case, the privilege grant mode will be started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second state-capable state of the first state transition means, the privilege granting mode is still continued. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode is not newly started. After that, the second interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the third state transition means capable of entering the ball, the privilege granting mode has already ended, so that the game ball enters the second ball. If you enter the means, a new privilege granting mode will be started. That is, in this case, the privilege granting mode is triggered by the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means in the first and third ball entry enable states of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. However, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means in the state where the ball can be entered for the second time, it is not started.

Next, in the configuration of the comparative example, the case where the game ball does not enter the second entry means in the first entry-capable state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode will be described. In this case, the privilege grant mode is not started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second entry-capable state of the first state transition means, the privilege granting mode is not executed, so that the game ball is the second entry means. If you enter the ball, the privilege grant mode will start. After that, the second interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the third state-capable state of the first state transition means, the privilege granting mode is still continued. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode is not newly started. After that, the third interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the fourth entry-capable state of the first state transition means, the privilege granting mode has already ended, so that the game ball enters the second ball. If you enter the means, a new privilege granting mode will be started. That is, in this case, the privilege granting mode is triggered by the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means in the second and fourth ball entry enable states of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. However, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means in the state where the ball can be entered for the third time, it is not started.

As described above, unlike this feature, when the configuration of the comparative example in which the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a time shorter than the length of the privilege granting mode is adopted, the execution of the first transition mode is executed. There is a problem that the start timing of the privilege granting mode is not fixed, the flow of the game is complicated, and the control of the game becomes difficult.

Next, the configuration of this feature in which the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a time longer (for example, 1.3T) than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (for example, T). Will be described when the above is adopted.

First, in the configuration of this feature, a case where the game ball enters the second entry means in the first entry-capable state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode will be described. In this case, the privilege grant mode will be started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second entry-capable state of the first state transition means, the privilege granting mode has already ended, so that the game ball enters the second ball. If you enter the means, a new privilege granting mode will be started.

Next, in the configuration of this feature, a case where the game ball does not enter the second entry means in the first entry-capable state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode will be described. In this case, the privilege grant mode is not started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second entry-capable state of the first state transition means, the privilege granting mode is not executed, so that the game ball is the second entry means. If you enter the ball, the privilege grant mode will start.

As described above, according to this feature, the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode, so that the first transition mode is the first. At the timing when the 1-state transition means is in the ball-entry state, the privilege granting mode is not executed regardless of the number of times the first state transition means is in the ball-entry state. It will be in a state where it has already ended. Therefore, when the first state transition means becomes ready to enter in the first transition mode, the privilege granting mode is not started even though the game ball has entered the second entry means. .. That is, according to this feature, the timing of starting the privilege granting mode during the execution of the first transition mode can be fixed, the flow of the game can be suppressed from becoming complicated, and the first. By setting the number of times that the first state transition means can enter the ball while the transition mode is being executed, it is possible to set the upper limit of the number of times that the privilege granting mode can be executed while the first transition mode is being executed. Become.

[Characteristic mI2]
Features The gaming machine described in mI1.
The first transition mode execution means is
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power opening / closing execution mode) is
A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means that can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on V prize).

According to the feature mI2, the first transition mode executing means includes means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the enterable state and the game ball becomes the second. It may be possible to enter the ball into the ball entry means of.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode may be executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mI3]
The gaming machine according to the feature mI1 or the feature mI2.
The first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature mI3, the first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-entry state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mI4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature mI1 to the feature mI3.
A second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring a second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second entry means (special drawing start port 34a).
A second determination means (a function for executing a special drawing lottery) for executing a second determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, and
A third means of entering a ball (first large winning opening 57a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state). A second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-entryable state (open state) and
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode (2) in which the second state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the second transition mode). The second transition mode execution means for executing the special electric opening / closing execution mode) based on the special figure small hit,
A fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) capable of entering a game ball that has entered the third ball entry means, and
A fifth ball entry means (second large winning opening 58a) in which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means when it is impossible or difficult to enter the fifth ball entry means (closed state) and the game ball can enter the fifth ball entry means. A third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a good ball entry state (open state) and
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out the game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entry means.
Equipped with
When the game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, the privilege granting mode executing means sets the third state transition means as the privilege granting mode with the ball entry impossible state and the ball entry enable state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) for transitioning between.

According to the feature mI4, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entering means and the second transition mode is executed during the execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed. The game ball enters the third entry means during the execution of, and the game ball entered into the third entry means enters the fourth entry means, and the second as a privilege granting mode. 3 Transition mode is executed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is triggered by the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means that has become capable of entering the ball during the execution of the first transition mode. Can be executed.

<Characteristic mJ group>
The feature mJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of the variants.

[Characteristic mJ1]
The first means of entering a ball (Public drawing start gate 35), which allows a game ball to enter,
The first predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring the first predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry means.
A first determination means (a function for executing a general drawing lottery) for determining whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and
A second ball entry means (special drawing start port 34a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state). The first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) that can transition between the ball-entry state (open state) and
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first transition mode (1st transition mode) in which the first state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the first transition mode). The first transition mode execution means for executing the normal power opening / closing execution mode),
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means is satisfied, the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize) for granting the privilege to the player is executed. Benefit grant mode execution means and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The first transition mode execution means is
After the first state transition means finally transitions from the ball-entryable state to the ball-impossible state in the first transition mode (general power opening / closing execution mode), the first determination by the first determination means. The length of the waiting period (general electric ending period), which is the period until the execution of the above, is set from the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot). A gaming machine characterized by having means that can be set for a long time.

According to the feature mJ1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entry means during the execution of the first transition mode, the predetermined privilege granting condition is satisfied, and the privilege granting mode is satisfied. Is executed.

Then, according to this feature, the first transition mode execution means is the first by the first determination means after the first state transition means finally transitions from the ball-entryable state to the ball-impossible state in the first transition mode. A means is provided in which the length of the waiting period, which is the period until the determination of 1 can be executed, can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. The reason for adopting this configuration will be explained.

First, unlike this feature, a case where the length of the waiting period is set to a shorter time than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode will be described. In this configuration, for example, when the first determination is executed after the end of the waiting period and the first predetermined information is determined to satisfy the first condition, the first transition mode is executed and the first determination is performed. There is a possibility that the game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the transition mode, and the privilege grant mode is executed. However, in this configuration, when the privilege granting mode is executed immediately after the start of the waiting period, the privilege granting mode continues even after the waiting period ends, and the game ball enters the second ball. The privilege granting mode may continue even at the timing of entering the means. In this case, there is a problem that the privilege granting mode is not executed even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, which is disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, according to this feature, in the first transition mode executing means, the first determination is made after the first state transition means finally transitions from the ball-entry state to the ball-impossible state in the first transition mode. Since the means is provided, the length of the waiting period, which is the period until the first determination by the means can be executed, can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the privilege granting mode continues even after the waiting period ends, and it is possible to suppress a situation that is disadvantageous to the player.

[Characteristic mJ2]
Features The gaming machine described in mJ1.
The first transition mode execution means is
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power opening / closing execution mode) is
A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means that can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on V prize).

According to the feature mJ2, the first transition mode executing means includes means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the enterable state and the game ball becomes the second. It may be possible to enter the ball into the ball entry means of.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode may be executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mJ3]
The gaming machine according to the feature mJ1 or the feature mJ2.
The first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature mJ3, the first transition mode executing means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-entry state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mJ4]
The gaming machine described in any one of the feature mJ1 to the feature mJ3.
A second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring a second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second entry means (special drawing start port 34a).
A second determination means (a function for executing a special drawing lottery) for executing a second determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, and
A third means of entering a ball (first large winning opening 57a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state). A second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-entryable state (open state) and
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode (2) in which the second state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the second transition mode). The second transition mode execution means for executing the special electric opening / closing execution mode) based on the special figure small hit,
A fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) capable of entering a game ball that has entered the third ball entry means, and
A fifth ball entry means (second large winning opening 58a) in which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means when it is impossible or difficult to enter the fifth ball entry means (closed state) and the game ball can enter the fifth ball entry means. A third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a good ball entry state (open state) and
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out the game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entry means.
Equipped with
When the game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, the privilege granting mode executing means sets the third state transition means as the privilege granting mode with the ball entry impossible state and the ball entry enable state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) for transitioning between.

According to the feature mJ4, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entering means and the second transition mode is executed during the execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed. The game ball enters the third entry means during the execution of, and the game ball entered into the third entry means enters the fourth entry means, and the second as a privilege granting mode. 3 Transition mode is executed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is triggered by the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means that has become capable of entering the ball during the execution of the first transition mode. Can be executed.

<Characteristic mK group>
The feature mK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of the variants.

[Characteristic mK1]
The first means of entering a ball (Public drawing start gate 35), which allows a game ball to enter,
The first predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring the first predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry means.
A first determination means (a function for executing a general drawing lottery) for determining whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and
A second ball entry means (special drawing start port 34a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state). The first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) that can transition between the ball-entry state (open state) and
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first transition mode (1st transition mode) in which the first state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the first transition mode). The first transition mode execution means for executing the normal power opening / closing execution mode),
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means is satisfied, the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize) for granting the privilege to the player is executed. Benefit grant mode execution means and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The first transition mode execution means is
After the first state transition means finally transitions from the ball-entryable state to the ball-impossible state in the first transition mode (normal power opening / closing execution mode), the next determination by the first determination means is executed. The length of the waiting period (Public ending period), which is the period until it is possible,
An interval period (general electric interval period) which is a period from the transition of the first state transition means from the ballable state to the ballless state to the transition from the ballable state to the ballable state. ) (135.0 seconds) or more (140.0 seconds).

According to the feature mK1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entry means during the execution of the first transition mode, the predetermined privilege granting condition is satisfied, and the privilege granting mode is satisfied. Is executed.

Then, according to this feature, the first transition mode executing means is the next step by the first determination means after the first state transition means finally transitions from the ball-entryable state to the ball-impossible state in the first transition mode. The length of the waiting period, which is the period until the determination of is feasible, is changed from the non-entry state to the non-entry state after the first state transition means transitions from the possible entry state to the impossible entry state. Since a means that can be set to a length equal to or longer than the length of the interval period, which is the period until the transition, is provided, the flow of the series of games realized in the interval period of the first transition mode can be changed to the waiting period of the first transition mode. In the same way, it can be realized. As a result, for example, it becomes possible to realize a new game in which the privilege granting mode can be executed in both the interval period and the waiting period in the first transition mode.

[Characteristic mK2]
Features The gaming machine described in mK1.
The first transition mode execution means is
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power opening / closing execution mode) is
A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means that can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on V prize).

According to the feature mK2, the first transition mode executing means includes means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the enterable state and the game ball becomes the second. It may be possible to enter the ball into the ball entry means of.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode may be executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mK3]
The gaming machine according to the feature mK1 or the feature mK2.
The first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature mK3, the first transition mode executing means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-entry state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mK4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature mK1 to the feature mK3.
A second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring a second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second entry means (special drawing start port 34a).
A second determination means (a function for executing a special drawing lottery) for executing a second determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, and
A third means of entering a ball (first large winning opening 57a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state). A second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-entryable state (open state) and
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode (2) in which the second state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the second transition mode). The second transition mode execution means for executing the special electric opening / closing execution mode) based on the special figure small hit,
A fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) capable of entering a game ball that has entered the third ball entry means, and
A fifth ball entry means (second large winning opening 58a) in which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means when it is impossible or difficult to enter the fifth ball entry means (closed state) and the game ball can enter the fifth ball entry means. A third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a good ball entry state (open state) and
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out the game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entry means.
Equipped with
When the game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, the privilege granting mode executing means sets the third state transition means as the privilege granting mode with the ball entry impossible state and the ball entry enable state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) for transitioning between.

According to the feature mK4, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entering means and the second transition mode is executed during the execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed. The game ball enters the third entry means during the execution of, and the game ball entered into the third entry means enters the fourth entry means, and the second as a privilege granting mode. 3 Transition mode is executed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is triggered by the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means that has become capable of entering the ball during the execution of the first transition mode. Can be executed.

<Characteristic mL group>
The feature mL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of the variants.

[Characteristic mL1]
The first means of entering a ball (Public drawing start gate 35), which allows a game ball to enter,
The first predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring the first predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry means.
A first determination means (a function for executing a general drawing lottery) for determining whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and
A second ball entry means (special drawing start port 34a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state). The first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) that can transition between the ball-entry state (open state) and
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first transition mode (1st transition mode) in which the first state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the first transition mode). The first transition mode execution means for executing the normal power opening / closing execution mode),
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means is satisfied, the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize) for granting the privilege to the player is executed. Benefit grant mode execution means and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The first transition mode (general electric opening / closing execution mode) is based on the transition mode (number of times of opening) in which the first state transition means in the first transition mode transitions from the non-entry state to the possible entry state. A gaming machine characterized in that the maximum number of times (the maximum number of consecutive villas) that can be executed in the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario for V prize jackpot) during execution is determined.

According to the feature mL1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entry means during the execution of the first transition mode, the predetermined privilege granting condition is satisfied, and the privilege granting mode is satisfied. Is executed.

Then, according to this feature, the privilege granting mode during execution of the first transition mode is based on the transition mode in which the first state transition means in the first transition mode transitions from the non-entry state to the enterable state. Since the maximum number of times that can be executed is determined, the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode is a very important factor for the player. Therefore, when the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is executed, the player is interested in or interested in the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mL2]
Features The gaming machine described in mL1
The first transition mode execution means is
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power opening / closing execution mode) is
A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means that can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on V prize).

According to the feature mL2, the first transition mode execution means can set the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the enterable state and the game ball becomes the second. It may be possible to enter the ball into the ball entry means of.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode may be executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mL3]
The gaming machine according to the feature mL1 or the feature mL2.
The first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature mL3, the first transition mode executing means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-entry state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mL4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature mL1 to the feature mL3.
A second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring a second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second entry means (special drawing start port 34a).
A second determination means (a function for executing a special drawing lottery) for executing a second determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, and
A third means of entering a ball (first large winning opening 57a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state). A second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-entryable state (open state) and
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode (2) in which the second state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the second transition mode). The second transition mode execution means for executing the special electric opening / closing execution mode) based on the special figure small hit,
A fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) capable of entering a game ball that has entered the third ball entry means, and
A fifth ball entry means (second large winning opening 58a) in which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means when it is impossible or difficult to enter the fifth ball entry means (closed state) and the game ball can enter the fifth ball entry means. A third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a good ball entry state (open state) and
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out the game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entry means.
Equipped with
When the game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, the privilege granting mode executing means sets the third state transition means as the privilege granting mode with the ball entry impossible state and the ball entry enable state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) for transitioning between.

According to the feature mL4, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entering means and the second transition mode is executed during the execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed. The game ball enters the third entry means during the execution of, and the game ball entered into the third entry means enters the fourth entry means, and the second as a privilege granting mode. 3 Transition mode is executed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is triggered by the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means that has become capable of entering the ball during the execution of the first transition mode. Can be executed.

<Characteristic mM group>
Features The mM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, variants, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic mM1]
The first means of entering a ball (Public drawing start gate 35), which allows a game ball to enter,
The first predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring the first predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry means.
A first determination means (a function for executing a general drawing lottery) for determining whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and
A second ball entry means (special drawing start port 34a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state). The first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) that can transition between the ball-entry state (open state) and
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first transition mode (1st transition mode) in which the first state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the first transition mode). The first transition mode execution means for executing the normal power opening / closing execution mode),
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means is satisfied, the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize) for granting the privilege to the player is executed. Benefit grant mode execution means and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The privilege granting mode execution means is
During the period during which the first transition mode is being executed, the first state transition means transitions from the ball-entryable state to the ball-impossible state, and then transitions from the ball-impossible state to the ball-entryable state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means capable of executing the privilege granting mode in an interval period (normal electric interval period), which is a period until the game is played.

According to the feature mM1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entry means during the execution of the first transition mode, the predetermined privilege granting condition is satisfied, and the privilege granting mode is satisfied. Is executed.

Then, according to this feature, the privilege granting mode executing means enters the ball after the first state transition means transitions from the enterable state to the non-enterable state during the execution period of the first transition mode. The number of interval periods included in the first transition mode is a very important factor for the player because the means for executing the privilege granting mode in the interval period, which is the period from the impossible state to the enterable state, is provided. Will be. Therefore, when the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is executed, the player is asked how many times the interval period is included in the first transition mode. It is possible to get interested and interested, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mM2]
Features The gaming machine described in mM1
The first transition mode execution means is
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power opening / closing execution mode) is
A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means that can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on V prize).

According to the feature mM2, the first transition mode execution means can set the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the enterable state and the game ball becomes the second. It may be possible to enter the ball into the ball entry means of.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode may be executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mM3]
A gaming machine according to feature mM1 or feature mM2.
The first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature mM3, the first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-entry state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mM4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature mM1 to the feature mM3.
A second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring a second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second entry means (special drawing start port 34a).
A second determination means (a function for executing a special drawing lottery) for executing a second determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, and
A third means of entering a ball (first large winning opening 57a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state). A second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-entryable state (open state) and
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode (2) in which the second state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the second transition mode). The second transition mode execution means for executing the special electric opening / closing execution mode) based on the special figure small hit,
A fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) capable of entering a game ball that has entered the third ball entry means, and
A fifth ball entry means (second large winning opening 58a) in which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means when it is impossible or difficult to enter the fifth ball entry means (closed state) and the game ball can enter the fifth ball entry means. A third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a good ball entry state (open state) and
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out the game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entry means.
Equipped with
When the game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, the privilege granting mode executing means sets the third state transition means as the privilege granting mode, the ball not allowed state and the ball entering enabled state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) for transitioning between.

According to the feature mM4, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entering means and the second transition mode is executed during the execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed. The game ball enters the third entry means during the execution of, and the game ball entered into the third entry means enters the fourth entry means, and the second as a privilege granting mode. 3 Transition mode is executed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is triggered by the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means that has become capable of entering the ball during the execution of the first transition mode. Can be executed.

<Characteristic mN group>
The feature mN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of the variants.

[Characteristic mN1]
The first means of entering a ball (Public drawing start gate 35), which allows a game ball to enter,
The first predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring the first predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry means.
A first determination means (a function for executing a general drawing lottery) for determining whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and
A second ball entry means (special drawing start port 34a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state). The first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) that can transition between the ball-entry state (open state) and
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first transition mode (1st transition mode) in which the first state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the first transition mode). The first transition mode execution means for executing the normal power opening / closing execution mode),
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means is satisfied, the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize) for granting the privilege to the player is executed. Benefit grant mode execution means and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The privilege granting mode execution means executes the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on V prize) a plurality of times between the start and the end of the first transition mode (general power opening / closing execution mode). A gaming machine characterized by having possible means.

According to the feature mN1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entry means during the execution of the first transition mode, the predetermined privilege granting condition is satisfied, and the privilege granting mode is satisfied. Is executed.

Further, according to this feature, the privilege granting mode execution means includes means capable of executing the privilege granting mode a plurality of times between the start and the end of the first transition mode, so that the first transition mode is used. Whether or not it is started is a very important factor for the player. Therefore, the player can be interested in whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is started, and the first transition mode is started. If this is the case, the player can be interested in how many times the privilege granting mode is executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic mN2]
Features The gaming machine described in mN1.
The first transition mode execution means is
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power opening / closing execution mode) is
A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means that can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on V prize).

According to the feature mN2, the first transition mode executing means includes means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the enterable state and the game ball becomes the second. It may be possible to enter the ball into the ball entry means of.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode may be executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mN3]
The gaming machine according to feature mN1 or feature 2.
The first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature mN3, the first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-entry state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mN4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature mN1 to the feature mN3.
A second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring a second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second entry means (special drawing start port 34a).
A second determination means (a function for executing a special drawing lottery) for executing a second determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, and
A third means of entering a ball (first large winning opening 57a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state). A second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-entryable state (open state) and
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode (2) in which the second state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the second transition mode). The second transition mode execution means for executing the special electric opening / closing execution mode) based on the special figure small hit,
A fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) capable of entering a game ball that has entered the third ball entry means, and
A fifth ball entry means (second large winning opening 58a) in which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means when it is impossible or difficult to enter the fifth ball entry means (closed state) and the game ball can enter the fifth ball entry means. A third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a good ball entry state (open state) and
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out the game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entry means.
Equipped with
When the game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, the privilege granting mode executing means sets the third state transition means as the privilege granting mode, the ball not allowed state and the ball entering enabled state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) for transitioning between.

According to the feature mN4, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entering means and the second transition mode is executed during the execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed. The game ball enters the third entry means during the execution of, and the game ball entered into the third entry means enters the fourth entry means, and the second as a privilege granting mode. 3 Transition mode is executed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is triggered by the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means that has become capable of entering the ball during the execution of the first transition mode. Can be executed.

<Characteristic mO group>
The feature mO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of the variants.

[Characteristic mO1]
The first means of entering a ball (Public drawing start gate 35), which allows a game ball to enter,
The first predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring the first predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry means.
A first determination means (a function for executing a general drawing lottery) for determining whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and
A second ball entry means (special drawing start port 34a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state). The first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) that can transition between the ball-entry state (open state) and
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first transition mode (1st transition mode) in which the first state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the first transition mode). The first transition mode execution means for executing the normal power opening / closing execution mode),
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means is satisfied, the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize) for granting the privilege to the player is executed. Benefit grant mode execution means and
The production execution means to execute the production and the production execution means
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means is a means for executing an effect (FIG.) suggesting a transition mode (number of times of opening) in which the first state transition means in the first transition mode transitions from the non-enterable state to the enterable state. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature mO1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entry means during the execution of the first transition mode, the predetermined privilege granting condition is satisfied, and the privilege granting mode is satisfied. Is executed.

Further, according to this feature, since the means for executing the effect suggesting the transition mode of transitioning from the non-entry state to the enterable state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode is provided, the first predetermined information is provided. When the first condition is satisfied and the first transition mode is executed, the player can be interested in the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mO2]
Features The gaming machine described in mO1.
The first transition mode (general electric opening / closing execution mode) is based on the transition mode (number of times of opening) in which the first state transition means in the first transition mode transitions from the non-entry state to the possible entry state. A gaming machine characterized in that the maximum number of times (the maximum number of consecutive villas) that can be executed in the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the special electric opening / closing scenario for V prize jackpot) during execution is determined.

According to the feature mO2, the privilege granting mode is executed during the execution of the first transition mode based on the transition mode in which the first state transition means in the first transition mode transitions from the non-entry state to the enterable state. Since the maximum number of possible times is determined, the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode is a very important factor for the player. Therefore, when the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is executed, the player is interested in or interested in the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mO3]
The gaming machine according to the feature mO1 or the feature mO2.
The first transition mode execution means is
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power opening / closing execution mode) is
A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means that can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on V prize).

According to the feature mO3, the first transition mode executing means includes means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the enterable state and the game ball becomes the second. It may be possible to enter the ball into the ball entry means of.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode may be executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mO4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature mO1 to the feature mO3.
The first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature mO4, the first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-entry state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mO5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature mO1 to the feature mO4.
A second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring a second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second entry means (special drawing start port 34a).
A second determination means (a function for executing a special drawing lottery) for executing a second determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, and
A third means of entering a ball (first large winning opening 57a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state). A second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-entryable state (open state) and
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode (2) in which the second state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the second transition mode). The second transition mode execution means for executing the special electric opening / closing execution mode) based on the special figure small hit,
A fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) capable of entering a game ball that has entered the third ball entry means, and
A fifth ball entry means (second large winning opening 58a) in which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means when it is impossible or difficult to enter the fifth ball entry means (closed state) and the game ball can enter the fifth ball entry means. A third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a good ball entry state (open state) and
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out the game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entry means.
Equipped with
When the game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, the privilege granting mode executing means sets the third state transition means as the privilege granting mode with the ball entry impossible state and the ball entry enable state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) for transitioning between.

According to the feature mO5, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entering means and the second transition mode is executed during the execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed. The game ball enters the third entry means during the execution of, and the game ball entered into the third entry means enters the fourth entry means, and the second as a privilege granting mode. 3 Transition mode is executed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is triggered by the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means that has become capable of entering the ball during the execution of the first transition mode. Can be executed.

<Characteristic mP group>
The feature mP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of the variants.

[Characteristic mP1]
The first means of entering a ball (Public drawing start gate 35), which allows a game ball to enter,
The first predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring the first predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry means.
A first determination means (a function for executing a general drawing lottery) for determining whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and
A second ball entry means (special drawing start port 34a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state). The first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) that can transition between the ball-entry state (open state) and
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first transition mode (1st transition mode) in which the first state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the first transition mode). The first transition mode execution means for executing the normal power opening / closing execution mode),
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means is satisfied, the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize) for granting the privilege to the player is executed. Benefit grant mode execution means and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The privilege granting mode execution means is
As the privilege granting mode, the indefinite privilege granting mode (V prize jackpot opening / closing scenario A in the modified example) may not be completed by a predetermined timing (timing when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened) in the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a means capable of executing a special electric opening / closing execution mode (based on).

According to the feature mP1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entry means during the execution of the first transition mode, the predetermined privilege granting condition is satisfied, and the privilege granting mode is satisfied. Is executed.

Further, according to this feature, the privilege granting mode executing means includes means capable of executing an indefinite privilege granting mode which may not be completed by a predetermined timing in the first transition mode as the privilege granting mode.

When the configuration of this feature is applied to a gaming machine that is disadvantageous to the player when the privilege granting mode is not completed by a predetermined timing in the first transition mode, for example, the player is affected by the configuration. , You can feel impatient that you want the indefinite privilege grant mode to end by a predetermined timing.

In particular, in the case of a configuration in which whether or not the indefinite privilege granting mode ends by a predetermined timing depends on the launch mode of the game ball and the behavior of the fired game ball, the player is informed of the launch mode and the launch mode of the game ball. It is possible to make people interested in the behavior of the game ball.

[Characteristic mP2]
Features The gaming machine described in mP1.
The privilege granting mode execution means is
When the privilege granting mode is not completed by the predetermined timing in the first transition mode, it is a case where the gaming ball enters the second ball entry means (special drawing start port 34a). Also, the gaming machine is provided with a means for avoiding the execution of the privilege granting mode triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the second entry means.

According to the feature mP2, the privilege granting mode executing means is a case where the game ball enters the second entering means when the indefinite privilege granting mode is not completed by a predetermined timing in the first transition mode. Even so, since the means for avoiding the execution of the privilege granting mode triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is provided, the game ball enters the second entry during the execution of the privilege grant mode. Even if the ball is entered into the means, the privilege granting mode will not be executed after that, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel impatient that he wants the indefinite privilege granting mode to end by a predetermined timing.

[Characteristics mP3]
The gaming machine according to the feature mP1 or the feature mP2.
The first transition mode execution means is
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power opening / closing execution mode) is
A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means that can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on V prize).

According to the feature mP3, the first transition mode executing means includes means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the enterable state and the game ball becomes the second. It may be possible to enter the ball into the ball entry means of.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode may be executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mP4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature mP1 to the feature mP3.
The first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature mP4, the first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-entry state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mP5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature mP1 to the feature mP4.
A second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring a second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second entry means (special drawing start port 34a).
A second determination means (a function for executing a special drawing lottery) for executing a second determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, and
A third means of entering a ball (first large winning opening 57a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state). A second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-entryable state (open state) and
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode (2) in which the second state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the second transition mode). The second transition mode execution means for executing the special electric opening / closing execution mode) based on the special figure small hit,
A fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) capable of entering a game ball that has entered the third ball entry means, and
A fifth ball entry means (second large winning opening 58a) in which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means when it is impossible or difficult to enter the fifth ball entry means (closed state) and the game ball can enter the fifth ball entry means. A third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a good ball entry state (open state) and
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out the game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entry means.
Equipped with
When the game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, the privilege granting mode executing means sets the third state transition means as the privilege granting mode with the ball entry impossible state and the ball entry enable state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) for transitioning between.

According to the feature mP5, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entering means and the second transition mode is executed during the execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed. The game ball enters the third entry means during the execution of, and the game ball entered into the third entry means enters the fourth entry means, and the second as a privilege granting mode. 3 Transition mode is executed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is triggered by the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means that has become capable of entering the ball during the execution of the first transition mode. Can be executed.

<Characteristic mQ group>
The feature mQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of the variants.

[Characteristic mQ1]
The first means of entering a ball (Public drawing start gate 35), which allows a game ball to enter,
The first predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring the first predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry means.
A first determination means (a function for executing a general drawing lottery) for determining whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and
A second ball entry means (special drawing start port 34a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state). The first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) that can transition between the ball-entry state (open state) and
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first transition mode (1st transition mode) in which the first state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the first transition mode). The first transition mode execution means for executing the normal power opening / closing execution mode),
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means is satisfied, the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize) for granting the privilege to the player is executed. Benefit grant mode execution means and
The privilege-giving ball-entry means (second special electric accessory 58b) that enables the game ball to enter during the execution of the privilege-giving mode, and
The production execution means to execute the production and the production execution means
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means causes the privilege-giving ball-entry means to enter a predetermined number of gaming balls by a predetermined timing (timing when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is next opened) during the execution of the privilege-giving mode. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means capable of performing an effect (the effect of promoting ball entry shown in FIG. 93 (A)).

According to the feature mQ1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball If the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entry means during the execution of the first transition mode, the predetermined privilege granting condition is satisfied, and the privilege granting mode is satisfied. Is executed.

Further, according to this feature, the effect executing means is a means capable of executing an effect of encouraging a predetermined number of game balls to enter the privilege granting entering means by a predetermined timing while the privilege granting mode is being executed. To prepare for.

When the configuration of this feature is applied to a gaming machine that is disadvantageous to the player when the privilege granting mode is not completed by the predetermined timing in the first transition mode, for example, the predetermined timing. By entering a predetermined number of gaming balls into the privilege-giving ball-entry means, the player can be made to understand a new game property such as ending the privilege-giving mode by the predetermined timing, and at the same time, a predetermined number of gaming balls can be entered. It is possible to increase the motivation of the player to put a predetermined number of game balls into the privilege-giving ball entry means by the timing.

[Characteristic mQ2]
Features The gaming machine described in mQ1.
The effect executing means is provided with a means capable of executing a specific effect (disappearing effect shown in FIG. 93 (C)) when the privilege granting mode is not terminated by the predetermined timing. Machine.

According to the feature mQ2, since the effect executing means includes means capable of executing a specific effect when the privilege granting mode is not terminated by a predetermined timing, the privilege granting to the player by the predetermined timing. It is possible to recognize that the mode has not ended, and it is possible to recognize that the subsequent game flow changes due to the fact that the privilege granting mode has not ended.

[Characteristic mQ3]
The gaming machine according to the feature mQ1 or the feature mQ2.
The privilege granting mode execution means is
If the privilege granting mode is not completed by the predetermined timing, the game ball is said to have entered the second ball entry means (special drawing start port 34a) even when the game ball has entered the second ball entry means (special drawing start port 34a). A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for avoiding execution of the privilege granting mode triggered by entering a second ball entry means.

According to the feature mQ3, when the privilege granting mode is not completed by the predetermined timing, the privilege granting mode executing means is the game even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means. Since the means for avoiding the execution of the privilege granting mode triggered by the entry of the ball into the second entry means is provided, the game ball enters the second entry means during the execution of the privilege granting mode. However, the privilege granting mode will not be executed after that, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel impatient that he wants the privilege granting mode to end by a predetermined timing.

[Characteristic mQ4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature mQ1 to the feature mQ3.
The first transition mode execution means is
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power opening / closing execution mode) is
A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means that can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on V prize).

According to the feature mQ4, the first transition mode executing means includes means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to be longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transitions to the enterable state and the game ball becomes the second. It may be possible to enter the ball into the ball entry means of.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode may be executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mQ5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature mQ1 to the feature mQ4.
The first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature mQ5, the first transition mode execution means is a means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-entry state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the privilege granting mode is completed, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mQ6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature mQ1 to the feature mQ5.
A second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring a second predetermined information based on the game ball entering the second entry means (special drawing start port 34a).
A second determination means (a function for executing a special drawing lottery) for executing a second determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, and
A third means of entering a ball (first large winning opening 57a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state). A second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-entryable state (open state) and
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode (2) in which the second state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the second transition mode). The second transition mode execution means for executing the special electric opening / closing execution mode) based on the special figure small hit,
A fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) capable of entering a game ball that has entered the third ball entry means, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the privilege-giving ball-entry means when the game ball cannot enter the privilege-giving ball-entry means (closed state) and the game ball can enter the privilege-giving ball-entry means. A third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a ball-enabled state (open state) and
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out the game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the privilege-giving ball entry means.
Equipped with
When the game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, the privilege granting mode executing means sets the third state transition means as the privilege granting mode with the ball entry impossible state and the ball entry enable state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) for transitioning between.

According to the feature mQ6, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entering means and the second transition mode is executed during the execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed. The game ball enters the third entry means during the execution of, and the game ball entered into the third entry means enters the fourth entry means, and the second as a privilege granting mode. 3 Transition mode is executed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is triggered by the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means that has become capable of entering the ball during the execution of the first transition mode. Can be executed.

<Characteristic mR group>
The feature mR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment and each of the variants.

[Characteristic mR1]
The first means of entering a ball (Public drawing start gate 35), which allows a game ball to enter,
The first predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring the first predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry means.
A first determination means (a function for executing a general drawing lottery) for executing a first determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and
A second ball entry means (special electric start port) that allows a game ball to enter,
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the second entry means (closed state). The first state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) that can transition between the ball-entry state (open state) and
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first transition mode (1st transition mode) in which the first state transition means is transitioned between the non-entry state and the possible entry state (the first transition mode). The first transition mode execution means for executing the normal power opening / closing execution mode),
A third means of entering a ball (first large winning opening 57a) through which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third entry means in a state where the ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state) and in a state where the game ball cannot enter the third entry means (closed state). A second state transition means (first special electric accessory 57b) capable of transitioning between a ball-entryable state (open state) and
A second transition mode in which, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means (special electric starting port), the second state transition means is transitioned between the ball entry impossible state and the ball entry possible state. The second transition mode execution means for executing (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the entry of the game ball into the special electric starting port) and
A fourth ball entry means (V winning opening 57av) capable of entering a game ball that has entered the third ball entry means, and
A fifth ball entry means (second large winning opening 58a) in which a game ball can enter, and
It is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entry means when it is impossible or difficult to enter the fifth ball entry means (closed state) and the game ball can enter the fifth ball entry means. A third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a good ball entry state (open state) and
When the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means, the third transition mode (V winning jackpot) for transitioning the third state transition means between the non-enterable state and the enterable state. The third transition mode execution means for executing the special electric opening / closing execution mode) based on
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out the game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entry means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The first transition mode execution means is
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power opening / closing execution mode) is
The time required from the start to the end of the second transition mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the entry of the game ball into the special electric starting port) and the start of the third transition mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V prize). A gaming machine characterized by having a means that can be set to a time longer than the total time of the time required from to the end.

According to the feature mR1, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball When the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second entering means and the second transition mode is executed during the execution of the first transition mode, and the second transition mode is executed. During the execution of, the game ball enters the third entry means, the game ball entered into the third entry means enters the fourth entry means, and the third transition mode is executed. To.

According to this feature, the first transition mode executing means takes the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode, the time required from the start to the end of the second transition mode, and the start of the third transition mode. Since the time required from to the end to the end is provided with a means that can be set to a time longer than the total time, the first transition mode is provided even after the second transition mode is terminated and the third transition mode is terminated thereafter. Is continuing, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means may transition to the ball-entry state and the game ball may be able to enter the second ball-entry means.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the second transition mode is executed again, and then the third transition mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode may be executed a plurality of times. When the third transition mode is executed a plurality of times, the player can have an opportunity to acquire a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mR2]
Features The gaming machine described in mR1.
The first transition mode executing means causes the first state transition means to transition from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the third transition mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by having means.

According to the feature mR2, the first transition mode executing means shifts the first state transition means from the non-entry state to the enterable state after the third transition mode is completed during the execution of the first transition mode. Since the means is provided, the game ball can enter the second entry means after the third transition mode is completed. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entry means after the third transition mode is completed, the second transition mode is executed again, and then the third transition mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed a plurality of times. When the third transition mode is executed a plurality of times, the player can have an opportunity to acquire a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that the first transition mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mR3]
The gaming machine according to the feature mR1 or the feature mR2.
When the gaming ball enters the second ball entry means (special drawing start port 34a) during the execution of the second transition mode or the execution of the third transition mode, the second predetermined information is obtained. A gaming machine comprising means for avoiding acquisition or for avoiding execution of the second determination.

According to the feature mR3, when the game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the second transition mode or the execution of the third transition mode, the acquisition of the second predetermined information is avoided or Since the means for avoiding the execution of the second determination is provided, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry means during the execution of the second transition mode or the execution of the third transition mode, the second ball is subsequently entered. The transition mode is not executed, and the third transition mode is not executed, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of tension that the second transition mode and the third transition mode should be completed by the time when the timing at which the game ball can enter the second entry means arrives.

Further, unlike this feature, even if the game ball enters the second entry means during the execution of the second transition mode or the execution of the third transition mode, the second predetermined information is obtained. In the case of adopting a configuration that does not avoid the acquisition and the execution of the second determination, a plurality of game balls have entered the second entry means in one transition of the first state transition means to the enterable state. In this case, a plurality of second predetermined information is reserved, and the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed a plurality of times regardless of the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. There is.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even when a plurality of game balls enter the second entry means in one transition of the first state transition means to the enterable state, the first state It is possible to realize playability in which the number of executions of the second transition mode and the third transition mode is one for each transition of the one state transition means to the ballable state.

[Characteristic mR4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature mR1 to the feature mR3.
The third transition mode execution means is
As the third transition mode (special electric opening / closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot), the time required from the start to the end is predetermined regardless of the launch mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after launch. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means capable of executing a predetermined length third transition mode (fixed length special electric opening / closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) having a predetermined length.

According to the feature mR4, as the third transition mode, the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode is predetermined regardless of the launch mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after the launch. Since a means capable of executing a predetermined length third transition mode having a predetermined length is provided, when the predetermined length third transition mode is executed, the length of the third transition mode is predetermined. No longer than the length of. Therefore, for example, the third transition mode is still finished even at the timing when the first state transition means transitions to the ball-entryable state due to the length of the third transition mode becoming longer than the predetermined length. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations such as no. As a result, the third transition mode is not terminated even at the timing when the game ball enters the second ball entry means, and the second transition even though the game ball enters the second ball entry means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, such as the mode is not executed and the third transition mode is not executed.

<Characteristic nA group>
The feature nA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Characteristic nA1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area in which a game ball launched by the launching means is distributed, and
Distribution mode detecting means (detection sensor 205 in the third embodiment) for detecting the distribution mode of the game ball in the game area, and
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and then the game operation is terminated as one game time, the game time execution means for executing the game time and the game time execution means.
The production execution means to execute the production and the production execution means
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means is
A means for executing a specific effect (specific suggestion effect) in a specific lottery result game time, which is a game time for notifying that the result of the lottery is a specific lottery result (small hit c in the third embodiment).
When the distribution mode of the game ball is a specific distribution mode (distribution mode in which the stoppage is performed) before the specific lottery result game round is executed, the specific lottery result game round is described. Means that do not perform a specific effect (specific suggestion),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature nA1, a specific effect is executed in the specific lottery result game times for notifying that the result of the lottery is a specific lottery result, so that the player who recognizes that the specific effect has been executed is , It is possible to give a feeling of expectation about the result of the lottery. Further, when the distribution mode of the game ball before the specific lottery result game round is executed is the specific distribution mode, the specific effect is not executed in the specific lottery result game round, so that the player is specific. When it is desired to execute the effect, it is possible to suppress the player from launching the game ball so as to have a specific distribution mode. As a result, for example, if the player's operation of launching the game ball so as to have a specific distribution mode gives the player a privilege that is not planned for the game machine, the plan is concerned. It is possible to suppress a specific grant to a player who does not.

[Characteristic nA2]
Feature The gaming machine described in nA1.
As the two specific lottery result game times (game times with a small hit c), a first specific lottery result game time and a second specific lottery result executed after the first specific lottery result game time. When the game times are defined,
The effect executing means is
The first distribution mode (distribution frequency), which is the distribution mode during the period in which the first specific lottery result game is executed, and the game times executed before the second specific lottery result game. The second specific lottery result game is based on the second distribution mode (distribution frequency), which is the distribution mode during the period in which the game times other than the first specific lottery result game are executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for determining whether or not to execute the specific effect (specific suggestion effect) at a time.

According to the feature nA2, the distribution mode during the period in which the first specific lottery result game is executed and the game times executed before the second specific lottery result game are the first specific lottery. Result The first specific lottery result because it is determined whether or not to execute a specific effect in the second specific lottery result game based on the distribution mode during the period in which the game times other than the game times are executed. The mode of the launching operation of the game ball by the player who recognizes the specific effect executed in the game times, and the second specific lottery result The game times executed before the game times and the first specific lottery result. By comparing with the mode of the game ball launch operation by the player in the game times other than the game times, it is possible to detect whether the game ball launch operation is switched between the specific lottery result game times and the other game times. .. Therefore, for example, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the player is intentionally trying to obtain a privilege that is not planned by the gaming machine, and whether or not to execute a specific effect based on the determination result. Can be determined.

[Characteristic nA3]
The gaming machine according to the feature nA1 or the feature nA2.
The effect executing means is
The number of first distribution game balls (distribution frequency), which is the number of game balls circulating at a specific position in the game area per unit time during the period in which the first specific lottery result game round is executed.
During the period in which the game times executed before the second specific lottery result game times and the game times other than the first specific lottery result game times are executed, the game area of the game area per unit time. The number of second distribution game balls (distribution frequency), which is the number of game balls distributed at a specific position,
A gaming machine comprising a means for determining whether or not to execute the specific effect (specific suggestion effect) in the second specific lottery result game round based on the above.

According to the feature nA3, it is specified in the second specific lottery result game times based on the number of first distribution games and the number of second distribution games regarding the number of game balls circulating in a specific position in the game area per unit time. Since it is determined whether or not to execute the effect of the above, it is possible to accurately detect the mode of the firing operation by the player regarding the distribution of the game ball at a specific position in the game area.

[Characteristic nA4]
Features The gaming machine described in nA3.
The effect executing means is
When the number of the second distributed game balls is smaller than the number of the first distributed game balls by a predetermined number or more, it is characterized by providing means for not executing the specific effect in the second specific lottery result game times. A game machine to play.

According to the feature nA4, the player makes the game ball circulate at a specific position in the game area during the period when the specific lottery result game times are executed, and the game times other than the specific lottery result game times are executed. It is possible to prevent the player from executing a specific effect when the player performs an operation to launch the game ball so that the game ball does not circulate at a specific position in the game area during the period.

<Characteristic nB group>
The feature nB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nB1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area in which a game ball launched by the launching means is distributed, and
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
Distribution mode detecting means (detection sensor 205 in the third embodiment) for detecting the distribution mode of the game ball in the game area, and
The production execution means to execute the production and the production execution means
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means is
When the specific conditions regarding the special information are satisfied (the result of the winning lottery is a small hit c), and the distribution mode satisfies the predetermined specific distribution conditions (when the stoppage is not performed). ), Means to execute a specific effect (specific suggestion effect),
When the specific condition regarding the special information is satisfied (the result of the winning lottery is a small hit c) and the distribution mode does not satisfy the specific distribution condition (when the stoppage is performed). , A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for not performing the specific effect (specific suggestion effect).

According to the feature nB1, when the distribution mode does not satisfy the predetermined specific distribution conditions, the specific effect is not executed even though the specific conditions are satisfied, so that the specific effect is executed. It is possible to urge the player who desires to launch a game ball so as to satisfy a specific distribution condition.

[Feature nB2]
Feature The gaming machine described in nB1.
The effect executing means is
The specification is based on the distribution mode (distribution frequency of the game times won in the small hit c) in the first period and the distribution mode (distribution frequency of the game times other than the small hit c) in the second period. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a determination means for determining whether or not the distribution conditions of the above are satisfied.

According to the feature nB2, since it is provided with a determination means for determining whether or not a specific distribution condition is satisfied based on the distribution mode in the first period and the distribution mode in the second period, it is provided in at least two periods. It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a specific effect based on the change in the firing operation of the game ball by the player.

[Feature nB3]
The gaming machine according to feature nB1 or feature nB2.
A lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and then the game operation is terminated as one game time, the game time execution means for executing the game time and the game time execution means.
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
As the specific condition, the gaming machine is characterized by comprising means for executing the specific effect (specific suggestion effect) when the result of the lottery is a specific lottery result (small hit c).

According to the feature nB3, since a specific effect is executed when the result is a specific lottery, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation to a player who desires a specific lottery result by executing the specific effect. can. Further, when the distribution mode does not satisfy the predetermined specific distribution conditions, the specific effect is not executed even for the specific lottery result, so that the player who desires to execute the specific effect is specified. It is possible to encourage the player to execute the launching operation of the game ball in a distribution mode that satisfies the distribution conditions of.

[Feature nB4]
Feature The gaming machine described in nB3.
The effect executing means is
A gaming machine comprising a means for determining that the specific distribution condition is not satisfied when the distribution mode changes according to the result of the lottery corresponding to the game times.

According to the feature nB4, when the player performs a game ball launch operation such that the distribution mode changes according to the result of the lottery corresponding to the game times, a specific effect is executed even if the result is a specific lottery. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player who desires to execute a specific effect not to perform the operation of launching the game ball so that the distribution mode changes according to the result of the lottery.

<Characteristic nC group>
The feature nC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nC1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area in which a game ball launched by the launching means is distributed, and
A process execution method that executes a specific process, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The specific processing execution means is
It is provided with means for determining whether or not to execute the specific process (specific suggestion effect in the third embodiment) based on the distribution frequency, which is the frequency at which the game ball is distributed at a specific position in the game area. A featured gaming machine.

According to the feature nC1, it is determined whether or not to execute a specific process based on the distribution frequency. The distribution frequency correlates with the player's operation of launching the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to execute a process that reflects the launching operation of the game ball by the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic nC2]
Features The gaming machine described in nC1.
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and then the game operation is terminated as one game time, the game time execution means for executing the game time and the game time execution means.
Equipped with
The specific processing execution means is
The specific process is executed in the game times,
Whether or not to execute the specific process when an unexecuted game time, which is a game time that has not been executed yet, is executed based on the distribution frequency in the game time that has already executed the specific process. A gaming machine characterized by determining.

According to the feature nC2, it is determined whether or not to execute the specific process when the unexecuted game times are executed, based on the distribution frequency in the game times in which the specific process has already been executed. Therefore, it is determined whether or not to execute the specific process after considering the launch operation of the player due to the execution of the specific process, that is, the reaction of the player due to the execution of the specific process. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic nD group>
The feature nD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nD1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area in which a game ball launched by the launching means is distributed, and
A distribution mode detecting means for detecting a distribution mode of a game ball in the game area, and a distribution mode detecting means.
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and then the game operation is terminated as one game time, the game time execution means for executing the game time and the game time execution means.
For each game round, the result of the lottery corresponding to the game round and the number of distributions, which is the number of game balls circulated at a specific position in the game area during the period in which the game round is executed, correspond to each other. A storage means for storing the attached information (game ball count memory area in the third embodiment) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature nD1, for each game round, the result of the lottery corresponding to the game round and the number of distributions in which the game ball is distributed at a specific position in the game area during the period in which the game round is executed. A storage means for storing information associated with and is provided. The number of distributions correlates with the player's operation of launching the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to execute a process based on the lottery result or the effect during the game rotation that reflects the lottery result, and the operation of launching the game ball by the player (the reaction of the player). For example, it is possible to feed back the reaction of the player to the effect reflecting the specific lottery result, select the effect in the game times to be executed, and the like, and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature nD2]
Feature The gaming machine described in nD1.
When the time from the start of the game operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means to the end of the game operation is set as the variable time.
The storage means
For each game round, the result of the lottery corresponding to the game round, the number of distributions, which is the number of game balls distributed at a specific position in the game area during the period in which the game round is executed, and the said number of distributions. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means (game ball number counting memory area in the third embodiment) for storing information associated with the fluctuation time in a gaming time.

According to the feature nD2, for each game round, the result of the lottery corresponding to the game round and the number of distributions in which the game ball is distributed at a specific position in the game area during the period in which the game round is executed. A means for storing information in which the player and the variable time in the game round are associated with each other is provided. Therefore, for example, it is possible to calculate the frequency (distribution frequency) of the game balls circulating at a specific position in the game area based on the fluctuation time of the game times and the number of distributions, and it is possible to calculate the lottery for each game time. Based on the result and the distribution frequency corresponding to the lottery result, it is possible to determine the processing and the like in the game times to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature nD3]
The gaming machine according to feature nD1 or feature nD2.
Equipped with a specific process execution means to execute a specific process (specific suggestion effect),
The specific processing execution means is characterized by comprising means for determining whether or not to execute the specific processing based on the information stored in the storage means.

According to the feature nD3, for example, a specific effect is executed based on the lottery result or the effect during the game rotation that reflects the lottery result, and the player's firing operation of the game ball (player's reaction). It is possible to decide whether or not to perform a specific effect by feeding back the player's reaction to the effect that reflects a specific lottery result, and determining whether or not to execute a specific effect in the game times to be executed. be able to.

<Characteristic nE group>
The feature nE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nE1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area in which a game ball launched by the launching means is distributed, and
A distribution mode detecting means for detecting a distribution mode of a game ball in the game area, and a distribution mode detecting means.
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and then the game operation is terminated as one game time, the game time execution means for executing the game time and the game time execution means.
A storage means for storing predetermined information and
Equipped with
The storage means
When the time from the start of the game operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means to the end of the game operation is set as the variable time.
For each game round, a means (game ball count memory area in the third embodiment) for storing information in which the result of the lottery corresponding to the game round and the fluctuation time in the game round are associated with each other. A gaming machine characterized by being prepared.

According to the feature nE1, the storage means is provided with a means for storing information in which the result of the lottery corresponding to the game times and the fluctuation time in the game times are associated with each game time, for example. The information can be used for various processes, such as determining the effect of the game to be executed from now on by using the information.

[Feature nE2]
Features The gaming machine described in nE1.
The storage means
For each game round, the game ball was distributed at a specific position in the game area during the game round, the result of the lottery corresponding to the game round, the fluctuation time in the game round, and the period during which the game round was executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means (game ball number counting memory area in the third embodiment) for storing information associated with a distribution number, which is a number.

According to the feature nE2, the storage means is provided with a means for storing information in which the result of the lottery corresponding to the game times, the fluctuation time in the game times, and the number of distributions are associated with each game time. .. Therefore, for example, it is possible to calculate the frequency (distribution frequency) of the game balls circulating at a specific position in the game area based on the fluctuation time of the game times and the number of distributions, and it is possible to calculate the lottery for each game time. Based on the result and the distribution frequency corresponding to the lottery result, it is possible to determine the processing and the like in the game times to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic nE3]
The gaming machine according to feature nE1 or feature nE2.
Equipped with a specific process execution means to execute a specific process (specific suggestion effect),
The specific processing execution means is characterized by comprising means for determining whether or not to execute the specific processing based on the information stored in the storage means.

According to the feature nE3, it is possible to determine, for example, whether or not to execute a specific effect based on the result of the lottery corresponding to the game times and the fluctuation time in the game times, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

<Characteristic nF group>
The feature nF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nF1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area in which a game ball launched by the launching means is distributed, and
A distribution mode detecting means for detecting a distribution mode of a game ball in the game area, and a distribution mode detecting means.
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and then the game operation is terminated as one game time, the game time execution means for executing the game time and the game time execution means.
An effect executing means for executing a specific effect (specific suggestion effect) in the game times, and
A storage means for storing predetermined information and
Equipped with
The storage means
For each game round, the presence or absence of execution of the specific effect in the game round, the number of distributions that is the number of game balls circulated at a specific position in the game area during the period in which the game round is executed, and the number of distributions. A gaming machine comprising a means for storing information associated with the above (a gaming ball number counting memory area in a modification 4 of the third embodiment).

According to the feature nF1, for each game round, the presence or absence of execution of a specific effect in the game round and the number of game balls distributed at a specific position in the game area during the period in which the game round is executed. Since it is provided with a means for storing information associated with the number of distributions, for example, the effect to be executed is determined in consideration of the reaction of the player due to the execution of a specific effect by using the information. Such information can be used for various processes.

[Feature nF2]
Feature The gaming machine described in nF1.
The storage means
When the time from the start of the game operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means to the end of the game operation is set as the variable time.
For each game round, the presence or absence of execution of the specific effect in the game round, the number of distributions that is the number of game balls circulated at a specific position in the game area during the period in which the game round is executed, and the number of distributions. A gaming machine comprising a means (modification example 4 of the third embodiment) for storing information associated with the fluctuation time in the gaming round.

According to the feature nF2, the storage means distributes the game ball at a specific position in the game area during each game time, whether or not a specific effect is executed in the game time, and during the period in which the game time is executed. It is provided with a means for storing information in which the number of distributions, which is the number obtained, and the fluctuation time in the game round are associated with each other. Therefore, for example, it is possible to calculate the frequency (distribution frequency) in which the game ball is distributed at a specific position in the game area based on the fluctuation time of the game times and the number of distributions, and the specific effect is executed. This information can be used for various processes, such as the ability to determine the process in consideration of the player's launch operation of the game ball.

[Feature nF3]
The gaming machine according to feature nF1 or feature nF2.
The specific effect executing means is
A game characterized by comprising means (modification example 4 of the third embodiment) for determining whether or not to execute the specific effect in the game times to be executed based on the information stored in the storage means. Machine.

According to the feature nF3, when deciding whether or not to execute a specific effect, the reaction of the player when the specific effect is previously executed can be taken into consideration, and whether or not the specific effect is executed can be considered. It is possible to control by feeding back the reaction of the player.

<Characteristic nG group>
The feature nG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nG1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area in which a game ball launched by the launching means is distributed, and
Distribution mode detecting means (detection sensor 205 in the third embodiment) for detecting the distribution mode of the game ball at a specific position in the game region, and
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and then the game operation is terminated as one game time, the game time execution means for executing the game time and the game time execution means.
A game state control means for controlling a game state, which is a game state,
The production execution means to execute the production and the production execution means
When the gaming state shifts from the first gaming state (low frequency support mode) to the second gaming state (high frequency support mode), based on the distribution mode of the gaming ball at the specific position detected. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect (specific suggestion effect).

According to the feature nG1, when the player shifts to the second gaming state, it is determined whether or not to execute a specific effect based on the detected distribution mode. Therefore, for a player who desires to execute a specific effect. It is possible to make the player aware of the distribution mode of the game ball at a specific position, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature nG2]
Features The gaming machine described in nG1.
The effect executing means is
The gaming machine, characterized in that, in the first gaming state (low frequency support mode), a means for determining whether or not to execute the specific effect is provided regardless of the detected distribution mode.

According to the feature nG2, in the first gaming state, it is not determined whether or not to execute a specific effect regardless of the detected distribution mode, so that the processing in the first gaming state can be simplified. ..

[Characteristic nG3]
The gaming machine according to the feature nG1 or the feature nG2.
The effect executing means is
The result of the lottery corresponding to the executed game times, which is the game times already executed in the second game state (high frequency support mode), and the distribution mode during the period in which the executed game times were executed ( A gaming machine comprising a means for determining whether or not to execute the specific effect in the second gaming state based on the distribution frequency).

According to the feature nG3, whether to execute a specific effect in the second game state based on the lottery result of the executed game times already executed in the second game state and the distribution mode in the executed game times. Judge whether or not. The distribution mode correlates with the player's operation of launching the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a specific effect according to the correlation between the lottery result of the executed game times and the firing operation of the game ball of the player in the executed game times, and the game for the lottery result. The production can be decided in consideration of the psychology of the person. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic nH group>
The feature nH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Characteristic nH1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area in which a game ball launched by the launching means is distributed, and
A distribution mode detecting means for detecting a distribution mode of a game ball in the game area, and a distribution mode detecting means.
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and then the game operation is terminated as one game time, the game time execution means for executing the game time and the game time execution means.
A driving means (movable accessory MY in the first modification of the third embodiment) that drives the player so as to be visible to the player.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The driving means is
When the distribution mode satisfies a predetermined specific distribution condition (when the player has not stopped), the system is driven based on the result of the lottery (small hit c).
A gaming machine characterized in that it is not driven when the specific distribution conditions are not satisfied (when the player is making a stop).

According to the feature nH1, the driving means is driven based on the result of the lottery when the distribution mode satisfies a predetermined specific distribution condition, and is not driven when the distribution mode does not satisfy the specific distribution condition. Since the player wants to know the result of the lottery, in order to drive the driving means based on the result of the lottery, the game ball is launched so that the distribution mode satisfies a specific distribution condition. That is, according to the feature nH1, it is possible to urge the player to launch a game ball so that the distribution mode satisfies a specific distribution condition predetermined. Further, since the driving means is driven based on the result of the lottery, it is easy for the player to visually recognize it, and it is possible to easily give the player a sense of expectation about the result of the lottery.

[Characteristic nH2]
Features The gaming machine described in nH1.
The driving means is
A means for driving the case where the distribution mode satisfies a predetermined specific distribution condition and the result of the lottery is a specific lottery result.
A means that does not drive when the distribution mode satisfies a predetermined specific distribution condition and the result of the lottery is not a specific lottery result.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature nH2, when the distribution mode satisfies a predetermined specific distribution condition, it is driven when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, and the lottery result is not a specific lottery result. Since it is not driven, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the lottery result is a specific lottery result, depending on whether or not the driving means is driven.

<Characteristic nI group>
The feature nI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nI1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area in which a game ball launched by the launching means is distributed, and
A distribution mode detecting means for detecting a distribution mode of a game ball in the game area, and a distribution mode detecting means.
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
When the game operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and then the game operation is terminated as one game time, the game time execution means for executing the game time and the game time execution means.
A process execution means that executes a predetermined process, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The processing execution means is
Of the executed game times that have already been executed, the game that has not yet been executed based on the distribution mode in the executed game times in which the process executing means has executed a specific process (specific suggestion effect). A means for determining whether or not to execute the specific process when the unexecuted game times, which are times, are executed, is provided (modification example 4 in the third embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature nI1, it is determined whether or not to execute the specific process triggered by the execution of the unexecuted game times based on the distribution mode in the executed game times in which the specific process is executed. In the above, it is possible to determine whether or not the unexecuted game times execute the specific process triggered by the execution, in consideration of the launch operation of the game ball by the player when the specific process is executed. Therefore, for example, when the player performs or may perform an unexpected and unreasonable operation by the gaming machine due to the execution of the specific processing, it is possible to prevent the specific processing from being performed. It can be used for various processes.

[Characteristic nI2]
Features The gaming machine described in nI1.
The processing execution means includes an effect execution means for executing the effect.
The production means
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a specific effect (specific suggestion effect) as the specific process.

According to the feature nI2, it is determined whether or not to execute the specific effect triggered by the execution of the unexecuted game times based on the distribution mode in the executed game times in which the specific effect is executed. In, it is possible to determine whether or not the unexecuted game times execute the specific effect triggered by the execution, in consideration of the launching operation of the game ball by the player when the specific effect is executed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent a specific process from being performed when the player performs or may perform an unexpected and unreasonable operation by performing a specific effect. It can be used for various processes.

[Characteristic nI3]
The gaming machine according to feature nI1 or feature nI2.
The distribution mode is a game machine characterized by a distribution frequency which is the number of game balls circulating at a specific position in the game area per unit time.

The distribution frequency, which is the number of game balls circulating at a specific position in the game area, correlates with the firing intensity when the game balls are launched. Therefore, according to the feature nI3, when the player performs or may perform an unexpected and unreasonable operation by the gaming machine as an operation of the firing intensity of the gaming ball by executing the specific processing, the specific processing is performed. Allows you not to.

<Characteristic nJ group>
The feature nJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nJ1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area in which a game ball launched by the launching means is distributed, and
A distribution mode detecting means for detecting a distribution mode of a game ball in the game area, and a distribution mode detecting means.
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and then the game operation is terminated as one game time, the game time execution means for executing the game time and the game time execution means.
The production execution means to execute the production and the production execution means
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the production in the specific gaming times is determined based on the distribution mode (distribution frequency) in the gaming rounds other than the specific gaming rounds (game rounds that are small hits c in the third embodiment). ..

According to the feature nJ1, the production in the specific game times is determined based on the distribution mode in the game times other than the specific game times. The distribution mode correlates with the player's operation of launching the game ball. Therefore, the content of the effect can be determined based on the mode of the launching operation of the game ball by the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature nJ2]
Features The gaming machine described in nJ1.
The distribution mode is a game machine characterized by a distribution frequency which is the number of game balls circulating at a specific position in the game area per unit time.

According to the feature nJ2, the effect in a specific game time is determined based on the distribution frequency, which is the number of game balls circulating in a specific position in the game area. The distribution frequency, which is the number of game balls circulating at a specific position in the game area, correlates with the firing intensity when the game balls are launched. Therefore, the content of the effect can be determined based on the launch intensity of the game ball that correlates with the launch operation of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic nJ3]
The gaming machine according to feature nJ1 or feature nJ2.
The effect executing means is
A means for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect in the specific game times based on the distribution frequency in the game times other than the specific game times.
When the distribution frequency in the game times other than the specific game times is lower than the predetermined distribution frequency, the means for not executing the specific effect in the specific game times and the means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature nJ3, when the distribution frequency in the game times other than the specific game times is lower than the predetermined distribution frequency, the specific effect is not executed in the specific game times, and therefore the execution of the specific effect is desired. It is possible to encourage the player to perform a game ball launch operation so as to maintain a predetermined or higher distribution frequency in game times other than a specific game time.

<Characteristic nK group>
The feature nK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Characteristic nK1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area in which a game ball launched by the launching means is distributed, and
A distribution mode detecting means for detecting a distribution mode of a game ball in the game area, and a distribution mode detecting means.
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information, and
The first lottery result acquisition means (first determination process in the modification 5 of the third embodiment) for acquiring the result of the lottery before the lottery execution means executes the lottery.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and then the game operation is terminated as one game time, the game time execution means for executing the game time and the game time execution means.
The production execution means to execute the production and the production execution means
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means is
When the result of the lottery acquired by the advance lottery result acquisition means is a specific lottery result, the gaming ball in a predetermined period before the advance lottery result acquisition means acquires the specific lottery result. A gaming machine characterized by comprising an effect determining means (modification 5 in the third embodiment) for determining an effect to be executed before the specific lottery result game is executed based on a distribution mode.

According to the feature nK1, when the result of the lottery acquired by the prior lottery result acquisition means is a specific lottery result, it is based on the distribution mode of the game ball in a predetermined period, that is, the launch operation of the game ball by the player. , Since the effect to be executed before the specific lottery result game round is executed is determined, it is estimated whether or not the specific lottery result is the specific lottery result before the specific lottery result game round is executed. It is possible to make the desired player aware of the operation of launching the game ball.

[Feature nK2]
Features The gaming machine described in nK1.
The production determining means is
A means for determining an effect to be executed before the specific lottery result game round is executed based on the number of game balls circulating in the specific position in the predetermined period is provided (modification example 5 in the third embodiment). )
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature nK2, as a launching operation of a game ball, a predetermined player who wants to guess whether or not the result is a specific lottery result before the specific lottery result game is executed. It is possible to make people aware of the number of game balls that circulate in a specific position during the period.

[Characteristic nK3]
The gaming machine according to feature nK1 or feature nK2.
The effect determining means (modification example 5 in the third embodiment) is
When the result of the lottery acquired by the advance lottery result acquisition means is the specific lottery result, the distribution mode of the game ball in the predetermined period satisfies a predetermined specific distribution condition. In this case, a means for executing the specific effect before the specific lottery result game round is executed, and
When the result of the lottery acquired by the advance lottery result acquisition means is the specific lottery result, and the distribution mode of the game ball in the predetermined period does not satisfy the specific distribution condition. A means of not executing the specific effect before the specific lottery result game round is executed, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature nK3, the specific lottery result game is executed for the player who wants to guess whether or not the result is a specific lottery result before the specific lottery result game is executed. It is possible to make it desired that a specific effect is performed before the above. As a result, it is possible to encourage the player to launch the game ball so that the distribution mode of the game ball in a predetermined period satisfies a specific distribution condition.

<Characteristic nL group>
The feature nL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nL1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area in which a game ball launched by the launching means is distributed, and
A distribution mode detecting means for detecting a distribution mode of a game ball in the game area, and a distribution mode detecting means.
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information, and
The first lottery result acquisition means (first determination process in the third embodiment of the modification 6) for acquiring the result of the lottery before the lottery execution means executes the lottery.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and then the game operation is terminated as one game time, the game time execution means for executing the game time and the game time execution means.
The production execution means to execute the production and the production execution means
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means is
When the result of the lottery acquired by the advance lottery result acquisition means is a specific lottery result, the result of the lottery is the specific lottery after the advance lottery result acquisition means acquires the specific lottery result. Based on the distribution mode of the game ball in a predetermined period before the specific lottery result game time, which is the game time for notifying the result, is executed, before the specific lottery result game time is effective. The effect determining means for determining the effect to be executed is provided (modification example 6 in the third embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature nL1, when the result of the lottery acquired by the prior lottery result acquisition means is a specific lottery result, it is based on the distribution mode of the game ball in a predetermined period, that is, the launch operation of the game ball by the player. , Since the effect to be executed before the specific lottery result game round is executed is determined, it is estimated whether or not the specific lottery result is the specific lottery result before the specific lottery result game round is executed. It is possible to make a desired player aware of the operation of launching a game ball.

[Feature nL2]
Features The gaming machine described in nL1.
The production determining means is
A means for determining an effect to be executed before the specific lottery result game round is effective based on the number of game balls circulating in the specific position in the predetermined period is provided (modification example 6 in the third embodiment). )
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature nL2, as a launching operation of a game ball, a predetermined player who wants to guess whether or not the result is a specific lottery result before the specific lottery result game is executed. It is possible to make people aware of the number of game balls that circulate in a specific position during the period.

[Feature nL3]
The gaming machine according to the feature nL1 or the feature nL2.
The effect determining means (modification example 6 in the third embodiment) is
When the result of the lottery acquired by the advance lottery result acquisition means is the specific lottery result, the distribution mode of the game ball in the predetermined period satisfies a predetermined specific distribution condition. In this case, a means for executing the specific effect before the specific lottery result game round is effective, and
When the result of the lottery acquired by the advance lottery result acquisition means is the specific lottery result, and the distribution mode of the game ball in the predetermined period does not satisfy the specific distribution condition. A means of not executing the specific effect before the specific lottery result game round is effective, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature nL3, the specific lottery result game is executed for the player who wants to guess whether or not the result is a specific lottery result before the specific lottery result game is executed. It is possible to make it desired that a specific effect is performed before the result. As a result, it is possible to encourage the player to launch the game ball so that the distribution mode of the game ball in a predetermined period satisfies a specific distribution condition.

<Characteristic nM group>
The feature nM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nM1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area in which a game ball launched by the launching means is distributed, and
A distribution mode detecting means for detecting a distribution mode of a game ball in the game area, and a distribution mode detecting means.
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information, and
The first lottery result acquisition means (first determination process in the modification 7 of the third embodiment) for acquiring the result of the lottery before the lottery execution means executes the lottery.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and then the game operation is terminated as one game time, the game time execution means for executing the game time and the game time execution means.
The production execution means to execute the production and the production execution means
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means is
When the result of the lottery acquired by the advance lottery result acquisition means is a specific lottery result, the result of the lottery is the specific lottery after the advance lottery result acquisition means acquires the specific lottery result. The effect to be executed in the specific lottery result game is determined based on the distribution mode of the game ball in a predetermined period before the specific lottery result game is executed, which is the game to notify the result. A means for determining the effect is provided (modification example 7 of the third embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature nM1, when the result of the lottery acquired by the prior lottery result acquisition means is a specific lottery result, it is based on the distribution mode of the game ball in a predetermined period, that is, the launch operation of the game ball by the player. , Since the effect to be executed in the specific lottery result game is determined, the game is for a player who wants to guess whether or not it is a specific lottery result by the effect executed in the specific lottery result game. You can be aware of the ball launch operation. In addition, it is possible to determine the effect to be executed in the specific lottery result game times in consideration of the psychological situation that can be inferred from the player's launch operation of the game ball in a predetermined period.

[Feature nM2]
Features The gaming machine described in nM1.
The production determining means is
A means for determining an effect to be executed in the specific lottery result game times based on the number of game balls circulating in the specific position in the predetermined period is provided (modification example 7 of the third embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature nM2, for a player who wants to guess whether or not the result is a specific lottery result by the effect executed in the specific lottery result game times, the game ball is launched in a predetermined period. It is possible to make people aware of the number of game balls circulating in a specific position.

[Feature nM3]
The gaming machine according to the feature nM1 or the feature nM2.
The effect determining means (modification example 7 of the third embodiment) is
When the result of the lottery acquired by the advance lottery result acquisition means is the specific lottery result, the distribution mode of the game ball in the predetermined period satisfies a predetermined specific distribution condition. In this case, a means for executing a specific effect in the specific lottery result game times, and
When the result of the lottery acquired by the advance lottery result acquisition means is the specific lottery result, and the distribution mode of the game ball in the predetermined period does not satisfy the specific distribution condition. A means of not executing the specific effect in the specific lottery result game times, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature nM3, for a player who wants to guess whether or not the result is a specific lottery result by the effect executed in the specific lottery result game time, the specific effect is provided in the specific lottery result game time. It can be desired to be performed. As a result, it is possible to encourage the player to launch the game ball so that the distribution mode of the game ball in a predetermined period satisfies a specific distribution condition.

<Characteristic nN group>
The feature nN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature nN1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area in which a game ball launched by the launching means is distributed, and
A specific entry port (second large winning opening 212a in the third embodiment) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball, and
Between the first state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the specific entry port and the second state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the specific entry port. The state transition means (second opening / closing door 212b in the third embodiment) and the state transition means in which the state changes in
A first guide flow path (flow path 215 in the third embodiment) for guiding the game ball that has entered the specific entry port, and
A second guide flow path (flow path 217 in the third embodiment) for guiding the game ball that has entered the specific entry port, and
Distribution means (first distribution valve 218, second distribution valve 219) for distributing the game ball that has entered the specific entry port to the first guide flow path or the second guide flow path.
A first entry port (1st V winning opening V1) into which a game ball that has entered the specific entry opening can be entered, and
A second entry port (second V winning opening V2) in which only a game ball that has entered the specific entry opening can be entered, and
Equipped with
The game ball distributed to the first guide flow path by the distribution means can enter the first ball entry port more than the game ball distributed to the second guide flow path by the distribution means. Highly sexual
The game ball distributed to the second guide flow path by the distribution means can enter the second entry port more than the game ball distributed to the first guide flow path by the distribution means. Highly sexual
It is more advantageous for the player that the game ball enters the first entrance, than that the game ball enters the second entrance.
The first time, which is the time from the time when the game ball enters the specific entry port to the time when the game ball reaches the first entry port, is the time when the game ball enters the specific entry port. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be longer than the second time, which is the time from the time point to the time point at which the second ball entrance is reached.

According to the feature nN1, it is more advantageous for the player that the game ball enters the first entrance, than the game ball enters the second entrance, and the game ball is specified. The first time, which is the time from the time when the ball enters the ball entrance to the time when the ball reaches the first entrance, is the second time from the time when the game ball enters the specific entrance. Since it is longer than the second time, which is the time to reach the point, when the game ball is distributed to the first guide flow path by the distribution means, the game ball enters the first entrance. The expectation for playing a ball can be continuously given to the player for a long period of time. On the other hand, when the game ball is distributed to the second guide flow path by the distribution means, there is a negative sense of urgency (sense of crisis) that the game ball enters the second entrance. , Can be given to the player for a short period of time. As a result, a gaming machine that gives the player a well-balanced inflection of expectation is realized, in which the sense of expectation is given to the player for a long time and the sense of crisis is given to the player for a short time. be able to.

[Feature nN2]
The gaming machine according to the feature nN1.
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
A lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the acquired special information, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is started and then the game operation is terminated as one game time, the game time execution means for executing the game time and the game time execution means.
Equipped with
The state transition means is
When the result of the lottery is the first lottery result (small hit c in the third embodiment), after the end of the game round for notifying the result of the lottery, the first from the second state for a predetermined period. Means to transition to the state of
When the result of the lottery is the result of the second lottery (a small hit other than the small hit c in the third embodiment), the second state for a predetermined period after the end of the game round for notifying the result of the lottery. And the means to transition to the first state from
Equipped with
The sorting means is
When the result of the lottery is the result of the first lottery, the game ball that has entered from the specific entry slot and reached the distribution means after the end of the game round for notifying the result of the lottery is said. Means to distribute to the first guide flow path,
When the result of the lottery is the result of the second lottery, the game ball that has entered from the specific entry slot and reached the distribution means after the end of the game round for notifying the result of the lottery is said. Means to distribute to the second guide flow path,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature nN2, since the guide flow path to which the game balls entered from the specific entry port is distributed differs depending on the lottery result, the player can pay more attention to the lottery result. Further, in addition to the lottery result, the player can be attracted to the method of distributing the game balls by the distribution means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic nN3]
Features The gaming machine described in nN2.
In the game times in which the result of the lottery is the result of the first lottery or the result of the second lottery, the game ball launched by the launching means before the result of the lottery is notified is the first. It is possible to reach the specific entry port during the period in which the state transition means is transitioning to the first state, triggered by the lottery result of the above or the second lottery result.
In a game in which the result of the lottery is the result of the first lottery or the result of the second lottery, the game ball launched by the launching means after the result of the lottery is notified is the result of the first lottery. Alternatively, it is configured so that the state transition means cannot reach the specific entry port during the period in which the state transition means is transitioning to the first state, triggered by the second lottery result (third). The delay mechanism 202 in the embodiment is provided).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature nN3, when it is recognized by the notification of the lottery result that the result of the lottery is the first lottery result, the game ball is fired and the game ball is put into the specific entrance, and the result of the lottery. When it is recognized by the notification of the lottery result that is the second lottery result, the game is not fired and the game ball is not allowed to enter the specific entrance. It is possible to suppress the intentional switching of the firing mode of the ball.

<Characteristic oA group>
The feature oA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic oA1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
An information storage means for storing the acquired special information, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
Specific identification information display means for displaying the specific identification information (hold display icon, symbol string) corresponding to the stored special information, and
The production execution means to execute the production and the production execution means
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means is
A first mobile body display means for displaying a moving first mobile body (type 1 petal P1 or type 2 petal P2), and
It is a means for displaying a second mobile body (type 3 petal P3) composed of a picture substantially the same as the first mobile body, and is a period of movement toward the specific identification information (target pending arrival trajectory). The second mobile display means (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 and the first start of FIG. 187 executed by the second mobile display means (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90) for displaying the second mobile body so as to have at least a period of movement along the line). 3rd type petal effect setting process for mouth hold and 2nd start type 3 petal effect setting process for mouth hold in FIG. 193),
When the second moving body reaches the specific identification information, the display mode changing means (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 and the second movement of FIG. 195 executed by the display mode changing means) for changing the display mode of the specific identification information. 1 Start port hold display change setting process and 2nd start port hold display change setting process in FIG. 196)
A gaming machine equipped with.

According to the feature oA1, when the second mobile body having substantially the same picture as the first mobile body reaches the specific identification information, the display mode of the specific identification information is changed. In a conventional pachinko machine that does not have such a configuration, the display mode of the specific identification information is changed at a predetermined timing, so that the player can predict the timing at which the display mode changes. Therefore, there was a problem that the player lacked a sense of expectation and urgency. On the other hand, according to the feature oA1, even if the first mobile body is displayed and the first mobile body reaches the specific identification information, it does not affect the specific identification information. When the second moving body composed of substantially the same picture as the moving body of 1 reaches the specific identification information, an effect of changing the display mode of the specific identification information is executed. Therefore, according to the feature oA1, by displaying the first mobile body and the second mobile body, the player is expected and tense that the display mode of the specific identification information will be changed. Can be granted. In addition, since it is possible to give a feeling of disappointment that the moving object has reached the specific identification information but the display mode of the specific identification information has not changed, the player is further given a sense of expectation and urgency. can do. Therefore, in the feature oA1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic oA2]
Feature oA1 is the gaming machine described in
The display mode changing means is
Switching generation determination means (first in FIG. 195) for determining whether or not switching of the specific identification information has occurred in a predetermined predetermined period starting from the time when the second moving body reaches the reserved identification information. Step So3305 in the start port hold display change setting process and step So3405 in the second start port hold display change setting process in FIG. 196).
When it is determined by the switching generation determination means that the switching of the specific identification information does not occur in the predetermined period, the display mode of the specific identification information is changed after the predetermined period, and the specific identification information is changed in the predetermined period. When it is determined that the switching of the specific identification information occurs, the means for not changing the display mode of the specific identification information (step So3310, step So3311, and FIG. 196 in the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195). Step So3410, step So3411) in the second start port hold display change setting process,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature oA2, even if the second mobile body reaches the specific identification information, the display mode of the specific identification information is changed when the specific identification information is switched within a predetermined period starting from the time when the second mobile body reaches the specific identification information. While it does not change, if the switching of the specific identification information does not occur in the predetermined period, an effect of changing the display mode of the specific identification information is executed. Therefore, according to the feature oA2, even if the second moving object reaches the specific identification information, the player is given a sense of expectation and urgency that the display mode of the specific identification information will change. be able to. Furthermore, since it is possible to give a feeling of disappointment that the display mode of the specific identification information has not changed even though the second moving object has reached the specific identification information, the player has a sense of expectation and urgency. It can be given even more.

[Characteristic oA3]
The gaming machine according to feature oA1 or feature oA2.
The specific identification information is hold identification information for identifying a hold corresponding to the stored special information.
For the pending identification information
As the display mode of the hold identification information, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the hold identification information may satisfy the predetermined condition, and a plurality of stages from upper to lower depending on the high or low of the possibility. With display level and
When the display mode of the reserved identification information is changed, the upper limit value as the upper limit in which the display level can be changed and the upper limit value.
Is set,
The display mode changing means is
When the second moving body reaches the hold identification information, it is determined whether or not the display level set for the hold identification information is lower than the upper limit value, and the display level sets the upper limit value. Means for changing the display level to the upper side when the value is lower than the above value and not changing the display level when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (first start port hold display change setting process in FIG. 195). Steps So3307 to So3311 in, and steps So3407 to So3411 in the second start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 196).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature oA3, even if the second mobile body reaches the hold identification information, if the display level set for the hold identification information is equal to or higher than the upper limit, the display level as the display mode of the hold identification information. Does not change, but if the display level set for the hold identification information is below the upper limit, the effect of changing the display level is executed. Therefore, according to the feature oA3, even if the second moving body reaches the hold identification information, the player is given a sense of expectation and urgency that the display mode of the hold identification information will change. be able to. Furthermore, since it is possible to give a feeling of disappointment that the display mode of the hold identification information has not changed even though the second moving object has reached the hold identification information, the player has a sense of expectation and urgency. It can be given even more.

<Characteristic oB group>
The feature oB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic oB1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
An information storage means for storing the acquired special information, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
Specific identification information display means for displaying the specific identification information (hold display icon, symbol string) corresponding to the stored special information, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 165 executed by the MPU 62).
The production execution means to execute the production and the production execution means
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means is
The moving body display means (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 and the second unit of FIG. 187 executed by the moving body displaying means (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90) for displaying the moving body (type 3 petal P3, type 4 petal P4) moving toward the specific identification information. 1 Type 3 petal effect setting process for holding the start port and Type 3 petal effect setting process for holding the second start port in FIG. 193),
Display mode changing means (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 and the first starting port of FIG. 195 executed by the display mode changing means (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90) that changes the display mode of the specific identification information when the moving body reaches the hold identification information. Hold display change setting process and second start port hold display change setting process in FIG. 196),
Equipped with
The display mode changing means is
A means for changing the display mode of the specific identification information after the predetermined period when the end of the game round does not occur in a predetermined predetermined period starting from the time when the moving body reaches the specific identification information. (Step So3305, step So3310, step So3311 in the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195, and step So3405, step So3410, step So3411 in the second start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 196).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature oB1, when the moving body reaches the specific identification information, it is possible to change the display mode of the specific identification information. When the end does not occur, the display mode of the specific identification information is changed after a predetermined period. Therefore, according to the feature oB1, even if the moving body reaches the specific identification information, the display mode of the specific identification information may or may not change. Therefore, according to the feature oB1, even if the moving body reaches the specific identification information, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and urgency that the display mode of the specific identification information will change. Furthermore, since it is possible to give a feeling of disappointment that the moving object has reached the specific identification information but the display mode of the specific identification information has not changed, the player is further given a sense of expectation and urgency. can do. Therefore, in the feature oB1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic oB2]
Feature The gaming machine described in oB1.
The specific identification information is hold identification information for identifying a hold corresponding to the stored special information.
The moving object display means is
A game characterized by comprising means for displaying the moving body moving toward the display position regardless of whether or not the hold identification information is present at a predetermined display position for displaying the hold identification information. Machine.

In a conventional pachinko machine, the display mode of the hold identification information changes when the variable display is started, when the hold identification information is shifted, or when special information is acquired (when the game ball enters the start opening). It is common to execute an effect of suggesting a hold change (holding change suggestion effect), and then executing an effect of changing the display mode of the hold identification information. Therefore, unless the hold change suggestion effect is executed, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold identification information does not appear. Therefore, the player can use the hold identification information only when the hold change suggestion effect is executed. There was little expectation or urgency for the player without paying attention to. On the other hand, according to the feature oB2, since the moving body that can serve as the hold change suggestion effect is displayed regardless of whether or not the hold identification information exists at the display position, the hold identification information is displayed. It is possible to increase the chances for the player to have a sense of expectation that a production that changes the appearance of the game will appear. Therefore, it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

[Characteristic oB3]
Features The gaming machine described in oB2.
The information storage means is
A means for storing the special information up to a predetermined number is provided.
The hold display means is
Hold identification information corresponding to each of the stored special information is displayed at the same number of display positions as the specified number, and among the stored special information each time the game round is completed. A means for using the first stored special information in the above-mentioned determination means for determination by the determination means, excluding the hold identification information corresponding to the special information from the arrangement of the display positions, and shifting each of the remaining hold identification information. A gaming machine characterized by being prepared.

According to the feature oB3, the player can accurately know how much special information has been acquired by observing the displayed sequence of the pending identification information. Further, since the display mode of the hold identification information changes when the shift of the hold identification information does not occur in a predetermined period starting from the time when the moving body reaches the hold identification information, the display mode of the hold identification information is changed. It is possible to display it accurately.

[Characteristic oB4]
The gaming machine according to feature oB2 or feature oB3.
For each of the pending identification information
As the display mode of the hold identification information, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the hold identification information may satisfy the predetermined condition, and a plurality of stages from upper to lower depending on the high or low of the possibility. With display level and
When changing the display mode of the hold identification information, the upper limit value as the upper limit that can change the display level and
Is set,
The display mode changing means is
When the moving body reaches the hold identification information, it is determined whether or not the display level set for the hold identification information is below the upper limit value, and when the display level is lower than the upper limit value. A means for changing the display level to a higher level and not changing the display level when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step So3307 in the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195). ~ So3311 and steps So07 to So3411 in the second start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 196).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature oB4, even if the moving body reaches the hold identification information, the display level as the display mode of the hold identification information does not change if the display level set for the hold identification information is equal to or higher than the upper limit value. On the other hand, when the display level set for the hold identification information is lower than the upper limit value, the effect of changing the display level is executed. Therefore, according to the feature oB4, even when the moving body reaches the hold identification information and the end of the game round does not occur in the predetermined period, the display mode of the hold identification information may be changed for the player. It is possible to give a sense of expectation and urgency. Furthermore, since it is possible to give a feeling of disappointment that the display mode of the hold identification information has not changed even though the moving body has reached the hold identification information and the game has not ended after a predetermined period of time has passed, the game can be played. It is possible to give a person a feeling of expectation and urgency even more.

<Characteristic oC group>
The feature oC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic oC1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
An information storage means for storing the acquired special information, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
A hold display means for displaying the stored identification information (hold display icon) corresponding to the special information at a predetermined display position, and a hold display means.
The production execution means to execute the production and the production execution means
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means is
A mobile body display means (MPU 92 of a voice emission control device 90) that displays a mobile body (type 3 petal P3) that moves toward the display position regardless of whether or not the hold identification information is present at the display position. , The third type petal effect setting process for holding the first starting port in FIG. 187 and the third type petal effect setting process for holding the second starting port in FIG. 193).
When the moving body reaches the display position, if the hold identification information is present at the reached display position, the display mode changing means (voice emission control device 90) that changes the display mode of the hold identification information. The MPU 92 and the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195 and the second start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 196), which are executed by the MPU 92, and
Equipped with
For each of the pending identification information
As the display mode of the hold identification information, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the hold identification information may satisfy the predetermined condition, and a plurality of stages from upper to lower depending on the high or low of the possibility. With display level and
When changing the display mode of the hold identification information, the upper limit value as the upper limit that can change the display level and
Is set,
The display mode changing means is
When the moving body reaches the hold identification information, it is determined whether or not the display level set for the hold identification information is below the upper limit value, and when the display level is lower than the upper limit value. A means for changing the display level to a higher level and not changing the display level when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step So3307 in the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195). ~ So3311 and steps So3407 to So3411 in the second start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 196).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In a conventional pachinko machine, the display mode of the hold identification information changes when the variable display is started, when the hold identification information is shifted, or when special information is acquired (when the game ball enters the start opening). It is common to execute an effect of suggesting a hold change (holding change suggestion effect), and then executing an effect of changing the display mode of the hold identification information. Therefore, unless the hold change suggestion effect is executed, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold identification information does not appear. Therefore, the player can use the hold identification information only when the hold change suggestion effect is executed. There was little expectation or urgency for the player without paying attention to. On the other hand, according to the feature oC1, the moving body that can play a role of the hold change suggestion effect is displayed regardless of whether or not the hold identification information exists at the display position. It is possible to increase the chances for the player to have a sense of expectation that a production that changes the appearance of the game will appear. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Further, according to the feature oC1, it is possible to change the display mode of the hold identification information when the moving body reaches the hold identification information, but in particular, the display level of the hold identification information as the display mode is When the value is below the upper limit, the display level is changed to the upper side, and when the display level is above the upper limit, the display level is not changed. Therefore, according to the feature oC1, even if the moving body reaches the hold identification information, the display mode of the hold identification information may or may not change. Therefore, according to the feature oC1, the player has a sense of anticipation and urgency that even if the moving body reaches the hold identification information, the display mode of the hold identification information will change. Can be granted. Furthermore, since it is possible to give a feeling of disappointment that the moving object has reached the hold identification information but the display mode of the hold identification information has not changed, the player is further given a sense of expectation and urgency. can do. As a result, in the feature oC1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic oC2]
Features The gaming machine described in oC1.
The information storage means is
A means for storing the special information up to a predetermined number is provided.
The hold display means is
Hold identification information corresponding to each of the stored special information is displayed at the same number of display positions as the specified number, and among the stored special information each time the game round is completed. A means for using the first stored special information in the above-mentioned determination means for determination by the determination means, excluding the hold identification information corresponding to the special information from the arrangement of the display positions, and shifting each of the remaining hold identification information. A gaming machine characterized by being prepared.

According to the feature oC2, the player can accurately know how much special information has been acquired by observing the sequence of the displayed pending identification information.

[Characteristic oC3]
Features The gaming machine described in oC2.
The display mode changing means is
A shift generation determining means (first start in FIG. 195) for determining whether or not the shift of the reserved identification information has occurred in a predetermined predetermined period starting from the time when the moving body reaches the reserved identification information. Step So3305 in the mouth hold display change setting process and step So3405 in the second start port hold display change setting process in FIG. 196).
When it is determined by the shift generation determination means that the shift does not occur in the predetermined period, the display level of the hold identification information is changed after the predetermined period, and it is determined that the shift occurs in the predetermined period. If this is the case, means that do not change the display level of the hold identification information (step So3310, step So3311, and the second start port hold display in FIG. 196 in the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195). Step So3410, step So3411) in the change setting process,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature oC3, even if the mobile body reaches the hold identification information, the display mode of the hold identification information does not change when the hold identification information shift occurs in a predetermined period starting from the arrival time. On the other hand, if the shift of the hold identification information does not occur in the predetermined period, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold identification information is executed. Therefore, according to the feature oC3, even if the moving body reaches the hold identification information, the player is further given a sense of expectation and urgency that the display mode of the hold identification information will change. be able to.

<Characteristic oD group>
The feature oD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its variants.

[Feature oD1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
An information storage means for storing the acquired special information up to a predetermined number of limits.
A determination means for determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
The hold identification information (hold display icon) corresponding to each of the stored special information is displayed at the same number of display positions as the specified number, and is stored each time the determination by the determination means is completed. The earliest stored special information among the special information is subjected to the determination by the determination means, the reserved identification information corresponding to the special information is excluded from the arrangement of the display positions, and the remaining reserved identification information is used. Hold display means to shift each,
The production execution means to execute the production and the production execution means
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means is
A mobile body display means (voice emission control device) that displays a plurality of moving bodies (type 3 petals P3) that move toward each display position regardless of whether or not the hold identification information exists at each display position. 90 MPU 92 and the third type petal effect setting process for holding the first starting port and the third type petal effect setting process for holding the second starting port of FIG. 187, which are executed by the MPU 92).
When the moving body reaches each display position, if the hold identification information is present at the reached display position, the display mode changing means (voice emission control device) that changes the display mode of the hold identification information. 90 MPU 92, the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195 and the second start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 196), which are executed by the MPU 92.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In a conventional pachinko machine, the display mode of the hold identification information changes when the variable display is started, when the hold identification information is shifted, or when special information is acquired (when the game ball enters the start opening). It is common to execute an effect of suggesting a hold change (holding change suggestion effect), and then executing an effect of changing the display mode of the hold identification information. Therefore, unless the hold change suggestion effect is executed, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold identification information does not appear. Therefore, the player can use the hold identification information only when the hold change suggestion effect is executed. There was little expectation or urgency for the player without paying attention to. On the other hand, according to the feature oD1, each moving body that can serve as a hold change suggestion effect is displayed regardless of whether or not the hold identification information exists at each display position. It is possible to increase the chances for the player to have a sense of expectation that an effect that changes the display mode will appear. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

[Feature oD2]
Features The gaming machine described in oD1.
The display mode changing means is
A shift generation determining means (first start in FIG. 195) for determining whether or not the shift of the reserved identification information has occurred in a predetermined predetermined period starting from the time when the moving body reaches the reserved identification information. Step So3305 in the mouth hold display change setting process and step So3405 in the second start port hold display change setting process in FIG. 196).
When it is determined by the shift generation determination means that the shift does not occur in the predetermined period, the display mode of the hold identification information is changed after the predetermined period, and it is determined that the shift occurs in the predetermined period. In this case, means that do not change the display mode of the hold identification information (step So3310, step So3311 in the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195, and the second start port hold display change setting of FIG. 196). Step So3410, step So3411) in the process,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature oD2, even if the mobile body reaches the hold identification information, the display mode of the hold identification information does not change when the hold identification information shift occurs in a predetermined period starting from the arrival time. On the other hand, if the shift of the hold identification information does not occur in the predetermined period, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold identification information is executed. Therefore, according to the feature oD2, even if the moving body reaches the hold identification information, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and urgency that the display mode of the hold identification information will change. .. Furthermore, since it is possible to give a feeling of disappointment that the moving object has reached the hold identification information but the display mode of the hold identification information has not changed, the player is further given a sense of expectation and urgency. can do.

[Characteristic oD3]
The gaming machine according to feature oD1 or feature oD2.
For each of the pending identification information
As the display mode of the hold identification information, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the hold identification information may satisfy the predetermined condition, and a plurality of stages from upper to lower depending on the high or low of the possibility. With display level and
When changing the display mode of the hold identification information, the upper limit value as the upper limit that can change the display level and
Is set,
The display mode changing means is
When the moving body reaches the hold identification information, it is determined whether or not the display level set for the hold identification information is below the upper limit value, and when the display level is lower than the upper limit value. A means for changing the display level to a higher level and not changing the display level when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step So3307 in the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195). ~ So3311 and steps So3407 to So3411 in the second start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 196).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature oD3, even if the moving body reaches the hold identification information, the display level as the display mode of the hold identification information does not change if the display level set for the hold identification information is equal to or higher than the upper limit value. On the other hand, when the display level set for the hold identification information is lower than the upper limit value, the effect of changing the display level is executed. Therefore, according to the feature oD3, even if the moving body reaches the hold identification information, the player is further given a sense of expectation and urgency that the display mode of the hold identification information will change. Can be done.

<Characteristic oE group>
The feature oE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic oE1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
An information storage means for storing the acquired special information, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
Specific identification information display means for displaying the stored specific identification information (hold display icon, symbol string) corresponding to the special information at a predetermined display position, and
The production execution means to execute the production and the production execution means
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means is
A mobile body display means (MPU 92 of a voice emission control device 90) that displays a mobile body (type 3 petal P3) that moves toward the display position regardless of whether or not the specific identification information is present at the display position. , The third type petal effect setting process for holding the first starting port in FIG. 187 and the third type petal effect setting process for holding the second starting port in FIG. 193).
Display mode changing means (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 and the first starting port of FIG. 195 executed by the display mode changing means (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90) that changes the display mode of the specific identification information when the moving body reaches the specific identification information. Hold display change setting process and second start port hold display change setting process in FIG. 196),
Equipped with
The moving object display means is
It is a means for specifying the trajectory of the moving body at the time of movement, and is the same as the target arrival trajectory (target hold arrival trajectory) reaching the display position and the target arrival trajectory from the start point to the middle, and the display from the middle. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a moving body trajectory specifying means for specifying one of an off-target orbit (target-held out-of-target orbit) that reaches a position deviated from the position.

In a conventional pachinko machine, the display mode of the hold identification information changes when the variable display is started, when the hold identification information is shifted, or when special information is acquired (when the game ball enters the start opening). It is common to execute an effect of suggesting a hold change (holding change suggestion effect), and then executing an effect of changing the display mode of the hold identification information. Therefore, unless the hold change suggestion effect is executed, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold identification information does not appear. Therefore, the player can use the hold identification information only when the hold change suggestion effect is executed. There was little expectation or urgency for the player without paying attention to. On the other hand, according to the feature oE1, the moving body that can play a role of the hold change suggestion effect is displayed regardless of whether or not the hold identification information as the specific identification information exists at the display position. It is possible to increase the chances for the player to have a sense of expectation that an effect that changes the display mode of the identification information will appear. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Further, according to the feature oE1, when the moving body reaches the specific identification information, it is possible to change the display mode of the specific identification information, but the trajectory of the moving body at the time of movement is set to the display position. It can take either a target arrival trajectory to reach or an untargeted trajectory to reach a position outside the displayed position. Therefore, according to the feature oE1, even if the moving body is displayed, the display mode of the specific identification information may or may not change. Therefore, according to the feature oE1, the player can give the player a sense of anticipation and urgency that the display mode of the specific identification information will change even if the moving object is displayed. can. Furthermore, since it is possible to give a feeling of disappointment that the display mode of the specific identification information has not changed even though the moving object is displayed, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation and urgency. can. As a result, in the feature oE1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic oE2]
Feature oE1 is the gaming machine described in
The display mode changing means is
Switching generation determination means (first start port hold in FIG. 195) for determining whether or not switching of the specific identification information has occurred in a predetermined predetermined period starting from the time when the moving body reaches the hold identification information. Step So3305 in the display change setting process and step So3405 in the second start port hold display change setting process in FIG. 196).
When it is determined by the switching generation determination means that the switching of the specific identification information does not occur in the predetermined period, the display mode of the specific identification information is changed after the predetermined period, and the specific identification information is changed in the predetermined period. When it is determined that the switching of the specific identification information occurs, the means for not changing the display mode of the specific identification information (step So3310, step So3311, and FIG. 196 in the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195). Step So3410, step So3411) in the second start port hold display change setting process,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature oE2, even if the moving body reaches the specific identification information, the display mode of the specific identification information does not change when the specific identification information is switched within a predetermined period starting from the time of arrival. On the other hand, when the switching of the specific identification information does not occur in the predetermined period, an effect of changing the display mode of the specific identification information is executed. Therefore, according to the feature oE2, even if the moving body reaches the specific identification information, the player is further given a sense of expectation and urgency that the display mode of the specific identification information will change. be able to.

[Characteristic oE3]
The gaming machine according to feature oE1 or feature oE2.
The specific identification information is hold identification information for identifying a hold corresponding to the stored special information.
For each of the pending identification information
As the display mode of the hold identification information, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the hold identification information may satisfy the predetermined condition, and a plurality of stages from upper to lower depending on the high or low of the possibility. With display level and
When changing the display mode of the hold identification information, the upper limit value as the upper limit that can change the display level and
Is set,
The display mode changing means is
When the moving body reaches the hold identification information, it is determined whether or not the display level set for the hold identification information is below the upper limit value, and when the display level is lower than the upper limit value. A means for changing the display level to a higher level and not changing the display level when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step So3307 in the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195). ~ So3311 and steps So3407 to So3411 in the second start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 196).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature oE3, even if the moving body reaches the hold identification information, the display level as the display mode of the hold identification information does not change if the display level set for the hold identification information is equal to or higher than the upper limit value. On the other hand, when the display level set for the hold identification information is lower than the upper limit value, the effect of changing the display level is executed. Therefore, according to the feature oE3, even if the moving body reaches the hold identification information, the player is further given a sense of expectation and urgency that the display mode of the hold identification information will change. Can be done.

<Characteristic oF group>
The feature oF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from variant 1 of the fourth embodiment.

[Characteristic oF1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
An information storage means for storing the acquired special information, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
A hold display means for displaying the stored identification information (hold display icon) corresponding to the special information at a predetermined display position, and a hold display means.
The production execution means to execute the production and the production execution means
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means is
A mobile body display means (MPU 92 of a voice emission control device 90) that displays a mobile body (type 3 petal P3) that moves toward the display position regardless of whether or not the hold identification information is present at the display position. , The third type petal effect setting process for holding the first starting port in FIG. 187 and the third type petal effect setting process for holding the second starting port in FIG. 193).
When the moving body reaches the display position, if the holding identification information is present at the reached display position, the moving body passes through or disappears from the display position, and the display mode of the holding identification information is displayed. The first mode in which the movement is not changed, the second mode in which the moving body is continuously displayed at the display position for a predetermined period, and the display mode of the hold identification information is not changed, and the movement. The body has a third mode in which the body is continuously displayed at the display position for a predetermined period to change the display mode of the hold identification information, and one of the first to third modes is executed. Means (first start port hold display change setting process (FIG. 200) and petal display change process (FIG. 201) of modification 1),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In a conventional pachinko machine, the display mode of the hold identification information changes when the variable display is started, when the hold identification information is shifted, or when special information is acquired (when the game ball enters the start opening). It is common to execute an effect of suggesting a hold change (holding change suggestion effect), and then executing an effect of changing the display mode of the hold identification information. Therefore, unless the hold change suggestion effect is executed, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold identification information does not appear. Therefore, the player can use the hold identification information only when the hold change suggestion effect is executed. There was little expectation or urgency for the player without paying attention to. On the other hand, according to the feature oF1, the moving body that can play a role of the hold change suggestion effect is displayed regardless of whether or not the hold identification information exists at the display position. It is possible to increase the chances for the player to have a sense of expectation that a production that changes the appearance of the game will appear. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Further, according to the feature oF1, when the moving body reaches the display position, if the holding identification information exists at the reached display position, the moving body passes through or disappears from the display position, and the holding identification information is displayed. The first mode in which the mobile body stays in the display position for a predetermined period and the second mode in which the display mode of the hold identification information is not changed, and the mobile body stays in the display position for a predetermined period. It is possible to take any one of a third mode of changing the display mode of the staying hold identification information. Therefore, according to the feature oF1, even if the moving body is displayed, there may be three modes, the first to the third modes. Therefore, according to the feature oF1, even if the moving body is displayed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and urgency that the display mode of the hold identification information will change. Further, since the moving body has reached the display position, but has passed through or disappeared from the display position, it is possible to give the player a feeling of disappointment that the display mode of the hold identification information has not changed. It is possible to further give a sense of expectation and urgency. As a result, in the feature oF1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic oF2]
Features The gaming machine described in oF1.
The information storage means is
A means for storing the special information up to a predetermined number is provided.
The hold display means is
Hold identification information corresponding to each of the stored special information is displayed at the same number of display positions as the specified number, and each time the determination by the determination means is completed, the stored special information is stored. The earliest stored special information is used for determination by the determination means, the reserved identification information corresponding to the special information is excluded from the display position arrangement, and each of the remaining reserved identification information is shifted. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with means.

According to the feature oF2, the player can accurately know how much special information has been acquired by observing the displayed sequence of the pending identification information.

[Characteristic oF3]
Features The gaming machine described in oF2.
The display mode changing means is
A shift generation determining means (first start in FIG. 195) for determining whether or not the shift of the reserved identification information has occurred in a predetermined predetermined period starting from the time when the moving body reaches the reserved identification information. Step So3305 in the mouth hold display change setting process and step So3405 in the second start port hold display change setting process in FIG. 196).
When it is determined by the shift generation determination means that the shift does not occur in the predetermined period, the display level of the hold identification information is changed after the predetermined period, and it is determined that the shift occurs in the predetermined period. If this is the case, means that do not change the display level of the hold identification information (step So3310, step So3311, and the second start port hold display in FIG. 196 in the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195). Step So3410, step So3411) in the change setting process,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature oF3, even if the mobile body reaches the hold identification information, the display mode of the hold identification information does not change when the hold identification information shift occurs in a predetermined period starting from the arrival time. On the other hand, if the shift of the hold identification information does not occur in the predetermined period, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold identification information is executed. Therefore, according to the feature oF3, even if the moving body reaches the hold identification information, the player is further given a sense of expectation and urgency that the display mode of the hold identification information will change. be able to.

[Characteristic oF4]
The gaming machine described in any of the features oF1 to feature oF3.
For each of the pending identification information
As the display mode of the hold identification information, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the hold identification information may satisfy the predetermined condition, and a plurality of stages from upper to lower depending on the high or low of the possibility. With display level and
When changing the display mode of the hold identification information, the upper limit value as the upper limit that can change the display level and
Is set,
The display mode changing means is
When the moving body reaches the hold identification information, it is determined whether or not the display level set for the hold identification information is below the upper limit value, and when the display level is lower than the upper limit value. A means for changing the display level to a higher level and not changing the display level when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step So3307 in the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195). ~ So3311 and steps So3407 to So3411 in the second start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 196).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature oF4, even if the moving body reaches the hold identification information, the display level as the display mode of the hold identification information does not change if the display level set for the hold identification information is equal to or higher than the upper limit value. On the other hand, when the display level set for the hold identification information is lower than the upper limit value, the effect of changing the display level is executed. Therefore, according to the feature oF4, even if the moving body reaches the hold identification information, the player is further given a sense of expectation and urgency that the display mode of the hold identification information will change. Can be done.

<Characteristic oG group>
The feature oG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic oG1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
An information storage means for storing the acquired special information, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
A hold display means for displaying the stored identification information (hold display icon) corresponding to the special information at a predetermined display position, and a hold display means.
The production execution means to execute the production and the production execution means
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means is
A mobile body display means (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 and a third start port holding third in FIG. 187 executed by the mobile body display means (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90) for displaying the moving body (type 3 petals P3) moving toward the display position. Seed petal effect setting process and type 3 petal effect setting process for holding the second start port in FIG. 193),
Display mode changing means (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 and the first starting port of FIG. 195 executed by the display mode changing means (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90) that changes the display mode of the hold identification information when the moving body reaches the hold identification information. Hold display change setting process and second start port hold display change setting process in FIG. 196),
Equipped with
The hold display means is
When the hold identification information is not displayed at the display position at the timing when the display of the moving body is started, and the hold identification information is displayed at the display position by the time the moving body reaches the display position. A gaming machine characterized by having.

In a conventional pachinko machine, the display mode of the hold identification information changes when the variable display is started, when the hold identification information is shifted, or when special information is acquired (when the game ball enters the start opening). It is common to execute an effect of suggesting a hold change (holding change suggestion effect), and then executing an effect of changing the display mode of the hold identification information. Therefore, unless the hold change suggestion effect is executed, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold identification information does not appear. Therefore, the player can use the hold identification information only when the hold change suggestion effect is executed. There was little expectation or urgency for the player without paying attention to. On the other hand, according to the feature oG1, the moving body that can play the role of the holding change suggestion effect displays the moving body even if the holding identification information does not exist at the display position at the timing when the display of the moving body is started. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances for the player to have a sense of expectation that an effect of changing the display mode of the hold identification information will appear. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Further, according to the feature oG1, the hold identification information is not displayed at the display position at the timing when the display of the moving body is started, and the hold identification information is displayed at the display position by the time the moving body reaches the display position. Since there are cases, the expectation for the moving body is given to the player after the fact when the display of the reserved information identification information is started. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a further sense of expectation. As a result, in the feature oG1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic oG2]
Features The gaming machine described in oG1.
The information storage means is
A means for storing the special information up to a predetermined number is provided.
The hold display means is
Hold identification information corresponding to each of the stored special information is displayed at the same number of display positions as the specified number, and each time the determination by the determination means is completed, the stored special information is stored. The earliest stored special information is used for determination by the determination means, the reserved identification information corresponding to the special information is excluded from the display position arrangement, and each of the remaining reserved identification information is shifted. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with means.

According to the feature oG2, the player can accurately know how much special information has been acquired by observing the displayed sequence of the pending identification information.

[Characteristic oG3]
Features The gaming machine described in oG2.
The display mode changing means is
A shift generation determining means (first start in FIG. 195) for determining whether or not the shift of the reserved identification information has occurred in a predetermined predetermined period starting from the time when the moving body reaches the reserved identification information. Step So3305 in the mouth hold display change setting process and step So3405 in the second start port hold display change setting process in FIG. 196).
When it is determined by the shift generation determination means that the shift does not occur in the predetermined period, the display level of the hold identification information is changed after the predetermined period, and it is determined that the shift occurs in the predetermined period. If this is the case, means that do not change the display level of the hold identification information (step So3310, step So3311, and the second start port hold display in FIG. 196 in the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195). Step So3410, step So3411) in the change setting process,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature oG3, even if the mobile body reaches the hold identification information, the display mode of the hold identification information does not change when the hold identification information shift occurs in a predetermined period starting from the arrival time. On the other hand, if the shift of the hold identification information does not occur in the predetermined period, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold identification information is executed. Therefore, according to the feature oG3, even if the moving body reaches the hold identification information, the player is further given a sense of expectation and urgency that the display mode of the hold identification information will change. be able to.

[Features oG4]
The gaming machine described in any of the features oG1 to feature oG3.
For each of the pending identification information
As the display mode of the hold identification information, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the hold identification information may satisfy the predetermined condition, and a plurality of stages from upper to lower depending on the high or low of the possibility. With display level and
When changing the display mode of the hold identification information, the upper limit value as the upper limit that can change the display level and
Is set,
The display mode changing means is
When the moving body reaches the hold identification information, it is determined whether or not the display level set for the hold identification information is below the upper limit value, and when the display level is lower than the upper limit value. A means for changing the display level to a higher level and not changing the display level when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step So3307 in the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195). ~ So3311 and steps So3407 to So3411 in the second start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 196).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature oG4, even if the moving body reaches the hold identification information, the display level as the display mode of the hold identification information does not change if the display level set for the hold identification information is equal to or higher than the upper limit value. On the other hand, when the display level set for the hold identification information is lower than the upper limit value, the effect of changing the display level is executed. Therefore, according to the feature oG4, even if the moving body reaches the hold identification information, the player is further given a sense of expectation and urgency that the display mode of the hold identification information will change. Can be done.

<Characteristic oH group>
The feature oH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic oH1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
An information storage means for storing the acquired special information, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
The determination result notification means (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90, and thereby the determination result notification means (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90) that notifies the result of the determination by the determination means by a game operation such as starting the variable display of the symbol and stopping and displaying the variable displayed symbol. The game rotation effect setting process of FIG. 183 to be executed) and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is terminated as one game time, the game time execution means (mainly) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the control board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 165 executed by the MPU 62).
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The determination result notification means is
When the first moving body (type 4 petal P4) that moves toward the display position is displayed, and the first moving body reaches the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the middle of one game round. In addition, the variation resuming means for resuming the variation display of the symbol (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 and the step So2305 of the effect pattern setting process of FIG. 184 executed by the MPU 92).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature oH1, when the first moving body reaches the symbol that has been stopped and displayed from the state of the variable display, the effect of restarting the variable display of the symbol is executed. In a conventional pachinko machine that does not have such a configuration, since the first moving body does not affect the variable display of the symbol, if the symbol is a symbol that does not win the big hit, the player is given a disappointment. I just did. On the other hand, according to the feature oH1, when the first moving body reaches the symbol that has been stopped and displayed from the variable display state, it is possible to execute an effect of restarting the variable display of the symbol. However, it is possible to give the player who was once discouraged the surprise that the variable display has resumed and the expectation for the big hit again. Therefore, according to the feature oH1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic oH2]
Features The gaming machine described in oH1.
A hold display means for displaying the stored identification information (hold display icon) corresponding to the special information at a predetermined display position, and a hold display means.
The production execution means to execute the production and the production execution means
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
A second mobile body display means (voice emission control device) that is composed of a picture substantially the same as that of the first mobile body and displays a second mobile body (type 3 petal P3) that moves toward the hold identification information. 90 MPU 92, and the third type petal effect setting process for holding the first starting port of FIG. 187 and the third type petal effect setting process for holding the second starting port of FIG. 193).
When the second moving body reaches the hold identification information, the display mode changing means (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 and the second movement of FIG. 195 executed by the display mode changing means) for changing the display mode of the hold identification information. 1 Start port hold display change setting process and 2nd start port hold display change setting process in FIG. 196)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature oH2, even if the first mobile body acting on the symbol reaches the hold identification information, it does not act on the hold identification information, whereas the picture is substantially the same as that of the first mobile body. When the configured second mobile body reaches the hold identification information, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold identification information is executed. Therefore, according to the feature oH2, by displaying the first mobile body and the second mobile body, whether the variable display of the symbol is restarted for the player, or the display mode of the hold identification information is changed. It is possible to give a sense of anticipation and urgency, such as whether to do it.

In the conventional pachinko machine, the display mode of the hold identification information changes when the variable display is started, when the hold identification information is shifted, or when special information is acquired (when the game ball enters the start opening). It is common to execute an effect of suggesting a hold change (hold change suggestion effect), and then execute an effect of changing the display mode of the hold identification information. Therefore, unless the hold change suggestion effect is executed, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold identification information does not appear. Therefore, the player can use the hold identification information only when the hold change suggestion effect is executed. There was little expectation or urgency for the player without paying attention to. On the other hand, according to the feature oH2, the second moving body that can serve as a hold change suggestion effect and the first moving body having substantially the same pattern as the second moving body are displayed. Since it is possible to increase the chances for the player to have the expectation that the effect of changing the display mode of the hold identification information will appear, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation and urgency. can. As a result, according to the feature oH2, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic oH3]
Features The gaming machine described in oH2.
The display mode changing means is
A shift generation determining means (FIG. 195) for determining whether or not the shift of the reserved identification information has occurred in a predetermined predetermined period starting from the time when the second moving body reaches the reserved identification information. Step So3305 in the first start port hold display change setting process, and step So3405 in the second start port hold display change setting process in FIG. 196).
When it is determined by the shift generation determination means that the shift does not occur in the predetermined period, the display level of the hold identification information is changed after the predetermined period, and it is determined that the shift occurs in the predetermined period. If this is the case, means that do not change the display level of the hold identification information (step So3310, step So3311, and the second start port hold display in FIG. 196 in the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195). Step So3410, step So3411) in the change setting process,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature oH3, even if the mobile body reaches the hold identification information, the display mode of the hold identification information does not change when the hold identification information shift occurs in a predetermined period starting from the arrival time. On the other hand, if the shift of the hold identification information does not occur in the predetermined period, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold identification information is executed. Therefore, according to the feature oH3, even if the moving body reaches the hold identification information, the player is further given a sense of expectation and urgency that the display mode of the hold identification information will change. be able to.

[Characteristic oH4]
The gaming machine according to feature oH2 or feature oH3.
For each of the pending identification information
As the display mode of the hold identification information, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the hold identification information may satisfy the predetermined condition, and a plurality of stages from upper to lower depending on the high or low of the possibility. With display level and
When changing the display mode of the hold identification information, the upper limit value as the upper limit that can change the display level and
Is set,
The display mode changing means is
When the second moving body reaches the hold identification information, it is determined whether or not the display level set for the hold identification information is lower than the upper limit value, and the display level sets the upper limit value. Means for changing the display level to the upper side when the value is lower than the above value and not changing the display level when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (first start port hold display change setting process in FIG. 195). Steps So3307 to So3311 in, and steps So3407 to So3411 in the second start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 196).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature oH4, when the moving body reaches the hold identification information, it is possible to change the display mode of the hold identification information, and in particular, the display level of the hold identification information as the display mode is the upper limit value. When the value is lower than the above, the display level is changed to the upper side, and when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit, the display level is not changed. Therefore, according to the feature oH4, even if the moving body reaches the hold identification information, the display mode of the hold identification information may or may not change. Therefore, according to the feature oH4, the player has a sense of anticipation and urgency that even if the moving body reaches the hold identification information, the display mode of the hold identification information will change. Can be granted. Furthermore, since it is possible to give a feeling of disappointment that the moving object has reached the hold identification information but the display mode of the hold identification information has not changed, the player is further given a sense of expectation and urgency. can do.

<Characteristic oI group>
The feature oI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic oI1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
An information storage means for storing the acquired special information, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
Specific identification information display means for displaying the specific identification information (hold display icon, symbol string) corresponding to the stored special information, and
The production execution means to execute the production and the production execution means
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means is
A means for constantly displaying one or more agents (types 1 to 4 petals P1 to P4) for a predetermined period of time, at least one of the agents toward the specific identification information. (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 and FIG. 187 executed by the action body display means (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90) for displaying the action body so as to have at least a period of progress (a period of movement along the target hold arrival trajectory). 3rd type petal effect setting process for holding the 1st starting port and the 3rd type petal effect setting process for holding the 2nd starting port in FIG. 193)
The display mode changing means (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 and the first starting port of FIG. 195 executed by the display mode changing means (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90) that changes the display mode of the specific identification information when the action body reaches the specific identification information. Hold display change setting process and second start port hold display change setting process in FIG. 196),
A gaming machine equipped with.

According to the feature oI1, one or a plurality of agents are always displayed for a predetermined period, and when at least one of the agents reaches the specific identification information, the display mode of the specific identification information is displayed. Change. In a conventional pachinko machine that does not have such a configuration, the display mode of the specific identification information is changed at a predetermined timing, so that the player can predict the timing at which the display mode changes. Therefore, there was a problem that the player lacked a sense of expectation and urgency. On the other hand, according to the feature oI1, since the action body is always displayed for a predetermined period, it is difficult for the player to determine when the action body reaches the specific identification information. Therefore, according to the feature oI1, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, such as when the display mode of the specific identification information changes. Therefore, in the feature oI1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic oI2]
Feature oI1 is the gaming machine described in
The action body display means is
A gaming machine comprising a means for repeatedly displaying a plurality of the above-mentioned action bodies (petals P1 to P4).

According to the feature oI2, since a plurality of agents are repeatedly displayed, the player is expected to repeatedly reach the specific identification information and change the display mode of the specific identification information. And can give a sense of urgency.
[Characteristic oI3]
Feature oI1 is the gaming machine described in
The action body display means is
The display of the action body is displayed so that the action body (butterfly) is always present in the predetermined display area (display surface 41a) including the display position of the specific identification information for the predetermined period. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with means for performing.

According to the feature oI3, since the action body is displayed so that the action body is always present in the display area for a predetermined period, the specific identification information is always given to the player for a predetermined period. It is possible to give a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency that the action body arrives at the site and the display mode of the specific identification information does not change.

[Characteristic oI4]
The gaming machine described in any of the features oI1 to feature oI3.
The specific identification information is a game machine, characterized in that it is hold identification information for identifying a hold corresponding to the stored special information.

According to the feature oI4, it is possible to give an expectation and a sense of urgency that the agent reaches the hold identification information and the display mode of the hold identification information does not change.

[Characteristic oI5]
The gaming machine described in any of the features oI1 to feature oI3.
The determination result notification means (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90, and thereby the determination result notification means (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90) that notifies the result of the determination by the determination means by a game operation such as starting the variable display of the symbol and stopping and displaying the variable display symbol. The game rotation effect setting process of FIG. 183 to be executed)
Equipped with
The specific identification information is a gaming machine characterized by having the symbol.

According to the feature oI5, it is possible to give a sense of anticipation and urgency that the display mode of the symbol does not change, for example, when the action body reaches the symbol and the variable display of the symbol is restarted. ..

<Characteristic oJ group>
The feature oJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic oJ1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
An information storage means for storing the acquired special information, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
Specific identification information display means for displaying the specific identification information (hold display icon, symbol string) corresponding to the stored special information, and
The production execution means to execute the production and the production execution means
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means is
An activator display means (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 and the th-order of FIG. 187 executed by the activator display means (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90) for displaying the activator (type 3 petal P3, type 4 petal P4) advancing toward the specific identification information. 1 Type 3 petal effect setting process for holding the start port and Type 3 petal effect setting process for holding the second start port in FIG. 193),
One of the first aspect in which the display mode of the specific identification information is changed when the activator reaches the specific identification information and the second aspect in which the specific identification information is not changed. The effect mode selection means (first start port hold display change setting process (FIG. 200) and petal display change process (FIG. 201) of modification 1), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature oJ1, when the agent reaches the specific identification information, the display mode of the specific identification information may be changed. In a conventional pachinko machine that does not have such a configuration, the display mode of the specific identification information is always changed at a predetermined timing, so that the player can predict the timing at which the display mode changes. There was a problem that the player lacked a sense of anticipation and urgency. On the other hand, according to the feature oJ1, it is difficult for the player to determine when the action body reaches the specific identification information, so that when the display mode of the specific identification information changes for the player. It is possible to give a sense of anticipation and urgency such as kana.

Further, according to the feature oJ1, when the agent reaches the specific identification information, the specific identification information may not be changed. Therefore, according to the feature oJ1, although the action body has reached the specific identification information, it is possible to give the player a feeling of disappointment, so that the player can be further given a feeling of expectation and urgency. Can be done. As a result, in the feature oJ1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic oJ2]
Features The gaming machine described in oJ1.
The effect mode selection means is
A gaming machine comprising a means for displaying a second action body as the action body, which is composed of substantially the same picture as the action body and advances toward a position deviating from the specific identification information.

According to the feature oJ2, by displaying the second agent, when the agent reaches the specific identification information, the second aspect is performed in which the specific identification information is not changed. Therefore, with a simple configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and urgency such as when the display mode of the specific identification information will change.

[Characteristic oJ3]
The gaming machine according to feature oJ1 or feature oJ2.
The specific identification information is hold identification information for identifying a hold corresponding to the stored special information.
For the pending identification information
As the display mode of the hold identification information, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the hold identification information may satisfy the predetermined condition, and a plurality of stages from upper to lower depending on the high or low of the possibility. With display level and
When the display mode of the reserved identification information is changed, the upper limit value as the upper limit in which the display level can be changed and the upper limit value.
Is set,
The effect mode selection means is
When the agent reaches the hold identification information, it is determined whether or not the display level set for the hold identification information is below the upper limit value, and when the display level is lower than the upper limit value. A means for changing the display level to a higher level and not changing the display level when the display level is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step So3307 in the first start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 195). ~ So3311 and steps So3407 to So3411 in the second start port hold display change setting process of FIG. 196).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature oJ3, even if the agent reaches the hold identification information, the display level as the display mode of the hold identification information does not change if the display level set for the hold identification information is equal to or higher than the upper limit value. On the other hand, when the display level set for the hold identification information is lower than the upper limit value, the effect of changing the display level is executed. Therefore, according to the feature oJ3, when the agent reaches the specific identification information, the second aspect is performed in which the specific identification information is not changed. Therefore, with a simple configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and urgency such as when the display mode of the specific identification information will change.

<Characteristic pA group>
The feature pA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic pA1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
An information storage means for storing a plurality of acquired special information, and
A determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
Production mode setting that can set any one of a plurality of types of production modes including at least a first production mode (character stage) and a second production mode (non-character stage), each of which has a different production mode, as the production mode. Means and
In the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once in the game times. A game round execution means for executing the game round at least once, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect mode setting means is
After the specific condition including at least that the determination means determines (disappears) that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition is satisfied in the state where the first effect mode is set (special reach / disengagement). In addition, the effect mode transition means (“principle” in FIG. 219) for shifting the set effect mode to the second effect mode,
After the end of the game round in which the specific condition is satisfied, among the special information stored in the information storage means, the special information (reserved information) that has not been determined by the determination means is included. 1 The effect mode continuation means for continuing the first effect mode without shifting to the second effect mode by the effect mode transition means when the special information satisfying the special condition exists (“Exception” in FIG. 219. 1 ") and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature pA1, in the state where the first effect mode is set, the effect mode set after the specific condition including at least the determination by the determination means that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition is satisfied is satisfied. Is shifted to the second production mode. In the conventional gaming machine that does not have the effect mode transition means, the first effect mode is set even though the specific condition including at least the determination that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition is satisfied. Since it will be continued, there is a problem that the player cannot be given a sense of urgency that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition by the production according to the production mode. On the other hand, according to the feature pA1, by shifting the effect mode from the first effect mode to the second effect mode, the sense of urgency that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition is expressed by the effect according to the effect mode. It can be given to the player.

Further, according to the feature pA1, among the special information stored in the information storage means after the end of the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, the first special information is included in the special information that has not been determined by the determination means. When there is special information satisfying the conditions, the first effect mode is continued without shifting to the second effect mode by the effect mode transition means. For this reason, the effect mode that is originally set is transferred from the first effect mode to the second effect mode by the effect mode transition means, but the first effect mode is continued (maintained). When the person recognizes that the first effect mode is continued, there is a feeling of expectation that some change will occur in the gaming state and an advantageous result will come. Therefore, according to the feature pA1, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pA2]
Features The gaming machine described in pA1.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a predetermined effect (screen effect when a special reach occurs) in the game times when the specific condition is satisfied.

According to the feature pA2, when a specific condition is satisfied, a predetermined effect is executed in the game round. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the specific condition has been satisfied by a predetermined effect. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pA3]
Features The gaming machine described in pA2.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing the predetermined effect in the gaming times corresponding to the special information satisfying the first special condition.

According to the feature pA3, the predetermined effect is executed in the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the first special condition. For this reason, after the predetermined effect is executed in the game times when the specific condition is satisfied, the predetermined effect is executed again when the special information satisfying the first special condition is digested. For the player, the effect seen when the specific condition is satisfied can be seen once again. When the specific condition is satisfied, the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Therefore, the player plays the humiliation that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition (special information). Can meet certain conditions). Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pA4]
Features The gaming machine described in pA3.
As the first effect mode, there are a plurality of individual effect modes (stage in the room of Warrior A, stage in the room of Warrior B, etc.) having different modes of effect.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined effects having different effect modes are defined for each of the plurality of individual effect modes.

According to the feature pA4, the predetermined effect executed in the game times when the specific condition is satisfied or the game times corresponding to the special information corresponding to the first special condition is individually set as the first effect mode. It can be a production corresponding to the production mode. Therefore, according to the feature pA4, the content of the predetermined effect can be controlled by switching the individual effect mode included in the first effect mode, and various effects can be provided to the player. Therefore, according to the feature pA3, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pA5]
Features The gaming machine described in pA4.
The predetermined effect is composed of a moving image in which a character corresponding to the set effect mode appears.
A gaming machine characterized in that when the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the character has a disadvantageous result in the predetermined effect.

According to the feature pA5, a predetermined effect in which the character appears in the game when a specific condition is satisfied is executed, and the first special condition is satisfied after the result unfavorable to the character is announced in the predetermined effect. When the special information is digested, the predetermined effect in which the character appears is executed again. For this reason, the player is more likely to embrace a predetermined effect due to the character that results in a disadvantage. Therefore, according to the feature pA5, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pA6]
Features The gaming machine described in pA5.
The effect mode setting means is
Among the special information stored in the information storage means after the end of the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, the special information (reserved information) that has not been determined by the determination means is included. 2 When the special information satisfying the special condition exists, the set effect mode is set to the individual character in the first effect mode corresponding to the character other than the character appearing in the predetermined effect. Means for shifting to the production mode (“Exception 2” in FIG. 219)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature pA6, the second special condition is set in the special information stored in the information storage means that has not been determined by the determination means after the end of the game in which the specific condition is satisfied. When there is special information to be satisfied, the set effect mode is shifted to the individual effect mode in the first effect mode corresponding to the characters other than the characters appearing in the moving image constituting the predetermined effect. .. For this reason, the effect mode that is originally set by the effect mode transition means is transferred from the first effect mode to the second effect mode, but is transferred to another individual effect mode in the same first effect mode. Therefore, the player has a feeling of expectation that an advantageous result will come when he / she recognizes the transition to another individual effect mode in the same first effect mode. Therefore, according to the feature pA6, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pA7]
Features The gaming machine described in pA6.
The first special condition is that the degree of possibility that the predetermined condition is satisfied is equal to or higher than the first degree (special reach).
The second special condition is that the degree of possibility that the predetermined condition is satisfied is less than the first degree and is equal to or higher than the second degree lower than the first degree (super reach). A gaming machine featuring.

According to the feature pA7, among the special information stored in the information storage means, the special information that is not determined by the determination means is set when the special information satisfying the second special condition exists. The effect mode is shifted to the individual effect mode in the first effect mode, which corresponds to a character other than the characters appearing in the moving image constituting the predetermined effect. On the other hand, when there is special information that satisfies the first special condition, which is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition than the second special condition, the first effect mode is continued without shifting to the second effect mode. do. Therefore, after the end of the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, the mode of transition of the effect mode can be changed by the special information stored in the information storage means that has not been determined by the determination means. .. Therefore, according to the feature pA7, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come depending on the mode of transition of the production mode, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. ..

<Characteristic pB group>
The feature pB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic pB1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
An information storage means for storing a plurality of acquired special information, and
A determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
A production mode setting means that can set any one of a plurality of types of production modes including at least the first production mode (character stage) as the production mode, and a production mode setting means.
In the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once in the game times. A game round execution means for executing the game round at least once, and
In the game round, when the first effect mode is set by the effect mode setting means, a predetermined effect (combat effect + result notification effect) corresponding to the first effect mode can be executed. Means and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect mode setting means is
In a state where the first effect mode is set, after the result of the predetermined effect satisfies a specific condition (execution of the defeat effect), the set effect mode is set to a mode other than the first effect mode. Production mode transition means (“principle” in FIG. 219)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature pB1, in the state where the first effect mode is set, after the result of the predetermined effect satisfies the specific condition, the set effect mode shifts to the effect mode other than the first effect mode. Will be done. In a conventional gaming machine that does not have a production mode transition means, a state in which a first production mode is set when the result of a predetermined production is a production in which a result that is disadvantageous to a character is announced as a specific condition, for example. In the first production mode, if a character that matches the character for which a disadvantageous result has been announced for the character appears in the first production mode, the player announces the disadvantageous result. There was a risk of feeling uncomfortable when I saw the production of the production mode in which the character that was killed (for example, died) appeared as if nothing had happened. On the other hand, according to the feature pB1, after the result of the predetermined effect satisfies the specific condition, the set effect mode is shifted from the first effect mode to the effect mode other than the first effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a character having a disadvantageous result from appearing in the production mode. Therefore, according to the feature pB1, the story of the production in which the character appears is guaranteed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of discomfort in the production. As a result, according to the feature pB1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pB2]
Features The gaming machine described in pB1.
The plurality of production modes are a character-type production mode (character-type stage) having a plurality of production modes in which a corresponding character is set, and a non-character-type production mode (non-character-type stage) in which a corresponding character is not set. ) And
The first effect mode is a gaming machine characterized in that it is one effect mode in the character system effect mode (character system stage).

According to the feature pB2, the transition from the effect mode in the character-based effect mode having a plurality of effect modes in which the corresponding character is set to the effect mode other than the effect mode is made. For example, by shifting from the character-based effect mode to the non-character-based effect mode, it is possible to easily shift to an effect mode other than the first effect mode.

[Characteristic pB3]
Features The gaming machine described in pB2.
The predetermined effect is a gaming machine characterized in that a character corresponding to the set effect mode appears and is composed of a moving image including at least a scene in which a disadvantageous result is announced for the character.

According to the feature pB3, as the predetermined effect, a character corresponding to the set effect mode appears, and a moving image including at least a scene in which a disadvantageous result is announced for the character is displayed. Therefore, the player can also be notified of the suggestion that the game result will be a disadvantageous result. Therefore, a sense of expectation and a sense of disappointment are given to the player, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pB4]
Features The gaming machine described in pB3.
The effect mode transition means is
It is characterized by providing a means for shifting the set effect mode to the non-character effect mode after the result of the predetermined effect satisfies a specific condition in the state where the character effect mode is set. A gaming machine.

According to the feature pB4, by shifting from the character-based effect mode to the non-character-based effect mode, it is possible to easily shift to the effect mode other than the first effect mode.

[Characteristic pB5]
Features The gaming machine described in pB3.
The effect mode transition means is
In a state where the character-based effect mode is set, after the result of the predetermined effect satisfies a specific condition, the set effect mode is set to the character other than the character that appeared in the predetermined effect. A gaming machine comprising a means for shifting to the effect mode in the corresponding character-based effect mode.

According to the feature pB5, by shifting the set effect mode to the effect mode in the character system effect mode corresponding to the character other than the character that appeared in the predetermined effect, the first 1 It is possible to easily shift to an effect mode other than the effect mode.

[Characteristic pB6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature pB1 to the feature pB5.
The effect mode setting means is
After the end of the game round in which the specific condition is satisfied, among the special information stored in the information storage means, the special information (reserved information) that has not been determined by the determination means is included. 1 Effect mode continuation means for continuing the first effect mode without shifting to an effect mode other than the first effect mode by the effect mode transition means when the special information satisfying the special condition exists (FIG. FIG. "Exception 1" in 219)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature pB6, among the special information stored in the information storage means after the end of the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, the first special condition is set in the special information that has not been determined by the determination means. When the special information to be satisfied exists, the first effect mode is continued without shifting to the effect mode other than the first effect mode by the effect mode transition means. For this reason, the effect mode that is originally set is transferred from the first effect mode to the effect mode other than the first effect mode by the effect mode transition means, but the first effect mode is continued (maintained). Therefore, when the player recognizes that the first effect mode is continued, there is a sense of expectation that some change will occur in the game state and an advantageous result will come. Therefore, according to the feature pB6, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic pC group>
The feature pC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic pC1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
An information storage means for storing a plurality of acquired special information, and
A determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
One of a plurality of types of production modes including at least a first production mode (character stage) in which a corresponding character is set and a second production mode (non-character stage) in which a corresponding character is not set. A production mode setting means that can set the character as the production mode,
In the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once in the game times. A game round execution means for executing the game round at least once, and
In the game times, when the first effect mode is set by the effect mode setting means, a predetermined effect (battle effect) in which the character corresponding to the first effect mode appears can be executed. The means of execution and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect mode setting means is
In the state where the first effect mode is set, the second effect mode that is set is set after a specific condition including at least that a disadvantageous result for the character is notified in the predetermined effect is satisfied. Production mode transition means (“principle” in FIG. 219)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature pC1, in the state where the first effect mode is set, it is set by the effect mode transition means after a specific condition including at least that a disadvantageous result for the character is announced in a predetermined effect is satisfied. The effect mode is shifted to the second effect mode. In a conventional gaming machine that does not have a production mode transition means, a state in which the first production mode is set even though specific conditions including at least that a disadvantageous result for the character is notified in a predetermined production are satisfied. In the continuing first production mode, if a character that matches the character for which a disadvantageous result has been announced for the character appears in the predetermined production, the player is disadvantaged. There was a risk of feeling uncomfortable when I saw the production of the production mode in which the character whose result was announced (for example, died) appeared as if nothing had happened. On the other hand, according to the feature pC1, the corresponding character is set in the set effect mode after a specific condition including at least that a disadvantageous result for the character is announced in a predetermined effect is satisfied. By shifting to the second effect mode, it is possible to prevent a character having a disadvantageous result from appearing in the effect mode. Therefore, according to the feature pC1, the story of the production in which the character appears is guaranteed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of discomfort in the production. As a result, according to the feature pC1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pC2]
Features The gaming machine described in pC1.
The effect mode setting means is
After the end of the game round in which the specific condition is satisfied, among the special information stored in the information storage means, the special information (reserved information) that has not been determined by the determination means is included. 1 The effect mode continuation means for continuing the first effect mode without shifting to the second effect mode by the effect mode transition means when the special information satisfying the special condition exists (“Exception” in FIG. 219. 1 "))
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature pC2, among the special information stored in the information storage means after the end of the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, the first special condition is set in the special information that has not been determined by the determination means. When the special information to be satisfied exists, the first effect mode is continued without shifting to the second effect mode by the effect mode transition means. For this reason, the effect mode that is originally set is transferred from the first effect mode to the second effect mode by the effect mode transition means, but the first effect mode is continued (maintained). When the person recognizes that the first effect mode is continued, he / she has a feeling of expectation that some change will occur in the gaming state and an advantageous result will come. Therefore, according to the feature pC2, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pC3]
Features The gaming machine described in pC2.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing the predetermined effect in the gaming times corresponding to the special information satisfying the first special condition.

According to the feature pC3, a predetermined effect is executed in the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the first special condition. For this reason, after the predetermined effect is executed in the game times when the specific condition is satisfied, the predetermined effect is executed again when the special information satisfying the first special condition is digested. For the player, the effect seen when the specific condition is satisfied can be seen once again. When the specific condition is satisfied, the player is notified of the disadvantageous result for the character in the predetermined effect because the case includes the notification of the disadvantageous result for the character in the predetermined effect. It can also fulfill the humiliation of including. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pC4]
Features The gaming machine described in pC3.
As the first effect mode, there are a plurality of individual effect modes (stage in the room of Warrior A, stage in the room of Warrior B, etc.) having different modes of effect.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined effects having different effect modes are defined for each of the plurality of individual effect modes.

According to the feature pC4, the predetermined effect executed in the game times when the specific condition is satisfied or the game times corresponding to the special information corresponding to the first special condition is individually set as the first effect mode. The effect can be set to correspond to the effect mode. Therefore, according to the feature pC4, the content of the predetermined effect can be controlled by switching the individual effect mode included in the first effect mode, and various effects can be provided to the player. Therefore, according to the feature pA3, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pC5]
Features The gaming machine described in pC4.
The effect mode setting means is
Among the special information stored in the information storage means after the end of the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, the special information (reserved information) that has not been determined by the determination means is included. 2 When the special information satisfying the special condition exists, the set effect mode is set to the individual character in the first effect mode corresponding to the character other than the character appearing in the predetermined effect. Means for shifting to the production mode (“Exception 2” in FIG. 219)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature pC5, the second special condition is set in the special information stored in the information storage means that has not been determined by the determination means after the end of the game in which the specific condition is satisfied. When the special information to be satisfied exists, the set effect mode is shifted to the individual effect mode in the first effect mode corresponding to the character other than the character appearing in the predetermined effect. For this reason, the effect mode that is originally set by the effect mode transition means is transferred from the first effect mode to the second effect mode, but is transferred to another individual effect mode in the same first effect mode. Therefore, the player has a feeling of expectation that an advantageous result will come when he / she recognizes the transition to another individual effect mode in the same first effect mode. Therefore, according to the feature pC5, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pC6]
Features The gaming machine described in pC5.
The first special condition is that the degree of possibility that the predetermined condition is satisfied is equal to or higher than the first degree (special reach).
The second special condition is that the degree of possibility that the predetermined condition is satisfied is less than the first degree and is equal to or higher than the second degree lower than the first degree (super reach). A gaming machine featuring.

According to the feature pC6, among the special information stored in the information storage means, the special information that is not determined by the determination means is set when the special information satisfying the second special condition exists. The existing production mode is shifted to the individual production mode in the first production mode corresponding to the characters other than the characters appearing in the predetermined production. On the other hand, when there is a first special condition in which the degree of possibility of satisfying a predetermined condition is higher than that of the second special condition, the first effect mode is continued without shifting to the second effect mode. Therefore, after the end of the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, the mode of transition of the effect mode can be changed by the special information stored in the information storage means that has not been determined by the determination means. .. Therefore, according to the feature pC5, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come depending on the mode of transition of the production mode, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. ..

<Characteristic pD group>
The feature pD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its variants.

[Feature pD1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
An information storage means for storing a plurality of acquired special information, and
A determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
Multiple including at least a first production mode (character stage) having a plurality of production modes in which the corresponding characters are individually set, and a second production mode (non-character stage) in which the corresponding characters are not set. A production mode setting means that can set any one of the types of production modes as a production mode, and
In the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once in the game times. A game round execution means for executing the game round at least once, and
In the game times, when the first effect mode is set by the effect mode setting means, a predetermined effect (battle effect) in which the character corresponding to the first effect mode appears can be executed. The means of execution and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect mode setting means is
In the state where the second effect mode is set, after a specific condition including at least that a disadvantageous result for the character is notified in the predetermined effect is satisfied, the set effect mode is set to the predetermined effect mode. A production mode transition means for shifting to the production mode in the first production mode corresponding to the character other than the character that appeared in the production (“principle” in FIG. 220).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature pD1, in the state where the second effect mode is set, it is set by the effect mode transition means after at least a specific condition including the notification of a disadvantageous result for the character in a predetermined effect is satisfied. The effect mode is shifted to the effect mode in the first effect mode, which corresponds to a character other than the character that appeared in the predetermined effect. If the configuration is such that the transition to the production mode in the first production mode corresponding to the character appearing in the predetermined production is performed, the player is notified of the disadvantageous result (for example, the character who died). However, I had to see the production of the production mode that appeared as if nothing had happened, and there was a risk of feeling uncomfortable. On the other hand, according to the feature pD1, in the state where the second effect mode is set, it is set after a specific condition including at least that a disadvantageous result for the character is announced in a predetermined effect is satisfied. By shifting the effect mode to the effect mode in the first effect mode, which corresponds to a character other than the character that appeared in the predetermined effect, the character whose disadvantageous result is announced (for example, dead) It is possible to avoid appearing in the production mode. Therefore, according to the feature pD1, the story of the production in which the character appears is guaranteed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of discomfort in the production. As a result, according to the feature pD1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pD2]
Features The gaming machine described in pD1.
The effect mode transition means is
After the end of the game round in which the specific condition is satisfied, among the special information stored in the information storage means, the special information (reserved information) that has not been determined by the determination means is included. 1 When the special information satisfying the special condition exists, the set effect mode is shifted to the effect mode in the first effect mode corresponding to the character appearing in the predetermined effect. Means (“Exception A” in FIG. 220)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature pD2, among the special information stored in the information storage means after the end of the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, the first special condition is set in the special information that has not been determined by the determination means. When the special information to be satisfied exists, the set effect mode is shifted to the effect mode in the first effect mode corresponding to the character appearing in the predetermined effect. For this reason, the effect mode originally set by the effect mode transition means shifts from the second effect mode to the effect mode in the first effect mode corresponding to the character other than the character that appeared in the predetermined effect. However, the mode shifts to the production mode in the first production mode, which corresponds to a character other than the character that appeared in the predetermined production. The player can know that the above transition can be expected to have a favorable result by recognizing the transition and then recognizing the effect that is expected to have a favorable result when the pending information is digested. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a favorable result will come. Further, according to the feature pD2, by shifting to the effect mode in the first effect mode corresponding to the character appearing in the predetermined effect, the character whose adverse result is announced (for example, dead) is Since the effect is to appear in the effect of the effect mode, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that an advantageous result will come. As a result, according to the feature pD2, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature pD3]
The gaming machine according to the feature pD1 or the feature pD2.
The effect executing means is
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the character appearing in the predetermined effect gives an advantageous result, and the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. In some cases, a gaming machine characterized in that the character appearing in the predetermined effect is provided with a means for producing a disadvantageous result.

According to the feature pD3, the specific condition is equivalent to at least a condition that the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Therefore, according to the feature pD3, it is set after the specific condition including at least the determination by the determination means that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition is satisfied in the state where the second effect mode is set. The effect mode is shifted to the effect mode in the first effect mode, which corresponds to a character other than the character in which the disadvantageous result is announced. Therefore, according to the feature pD3, the player can be given a sense of urgency that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition by the effect according to the effect mode.

[Feature pD4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature pD1 to the feature pD3.
The specific condition is that the character has a disadvantageous result in the predetermined effect, and the degree of possibility that the predetermined condition is satisfied is equal to or higher than the first degree (special reach / deviation).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature pD4, the character has a disadvantageous result in the predetermined production, and the degree of possibility that the predetermined condition is satisfied is equal to or higher than the first degree. Therefore, the transition to the effect mode in the first effect mode corresponding to the character having a disadvantageous result in the predetermined effect is performed. Here, regardless of the degree of possibility that a predetermined condition is satisfied, when the game machine in which the transition of the above-mentioned production mode is performed whenever the character has a disadvantageous result in the predetermined production, the above-mentioned production mode is considered. Since the transition occurs frequently, there is a problem that the player feels annoyed. On the other hand, according to the feature pD4, since the transition of the above-mentioned effect mode is performed only when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to solve the problem that the effect mode is frequently switched. Therefore, according to the feature pD4, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic pE group>
The feature pE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic pE1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
An information storage means for storing a plurality of acquired special information, and
A determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
Multiple including at least a first production mode (character stage) having a plurality of production modes in which the corresponding characters are individually set, and a second production mode (non-character stage) in which the corresponding characters are not set. A production mode setting means that can set any of the types of production modes as the production mode, and
In the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once in the game times. A game round execution means for executing the game round at least once, and
In the game round, the means for executing the effect for suggesting the result of the determination by the determination means, the first special effect in which the character corresponding to the first effect mode appears, and the determination means. It is possible to execute any one of a plurality of types of effects including at least a second special effect in which a disadvantageous result is not notified even when the result of the determination does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the special information is the predetermined. When the determination means determines that the condition of the above is not satisfied, the effect execution means that causes the character to have a disadvantageous result in the first special effect.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect mode setting means is
In the state where the first effect mode is set, the determination means determines (disappears) that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the effect execution means executes the first special effect. In this case, the effect mode transition means for shifting the set effect mode to the second effect mode after the end of the game round in which the first special effect is executed (“principle” in FIG. 219). ,
In the state where the first effect mode is set, the determination means determines (disappears) that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the effect execution means executes the second special effect. In that case, after the end of the game round in which the second effect is executed, the effect mode continuation means for continuing the set first effect mode and the effect mode continuation means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature pE1, when the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy a predetermined condition in the state where the first effect mode is set, the effect executed by the effect execution means is referred to as the first special effect. Depending on which of the second special effects is used, the set effect mode is divided into whether to shift to the second effect mode or to continue in the first effect mode. In the conventional gaming machine, even if the same character is used for the character appearing in the first special production and the character appearing in the production mode, both are individually controlled, and in a predetermined production. A character whose adverse result was announced (for example, died) could appear as if nothing had happened in the production of the production mode of the next game. For this reason, in the conventional gaming machine, the player sees the production of the production mode in which the character in which the unfavorable result is announced (for example, dead) appears as if nothing happened, and there is a risk of feeling uncomfortable. was there. On the other hand, according to the feature pE1, in the state where the first effect mode is set, the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy a predetermined condition, and the effect execution means performs the first special effect. When executed, a disadvantageous result is announced by shifting the set effect mode to the second effect mode after the end of the game in which the first special effect is executed (for example,). It is possible to prevent the (dead) character from appearing in the production mode. On the other hand, since no disadvantageous result is announced in the second special effect, the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition in the state where the first effect mode is set. Moreover, when the second special effect is executed by the effect executing means, even if the set first effect mode is continued after the end of the game in which the second special effect is executed, the player Does not feel the above discomfort. Therefore, according to the feature pE1, the story of the production in which the character appears is guaranteed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of discomfort in the production. Therefore, according to the feature pE1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pE2]
Features The gaming machine described in pE1.
The effect executing means is
When suggesting the result of the determination by the determination means, when the degree of possibility that the predetermined condition is satisfied is equal to or higher than the first degree (special reach), the first special effect is executed and the predetermined. When the degree of possibility of satisfying the above-mentioned condition is less than the first degree and is greater than or equal to the second degree lower than the first degree (super reach), the means for executing the second special effect is provided. A gaming machine characterized by being prepared.

According to the feature pE2, the first special effect is executed when the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is equal to or higher than the first degree, and the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is less than the first degree. And when it is a second degree or more lower than the first degree, the second special effect is executed. Therefore, when the degree of advantage for the player is higher, the player can be given a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency by the first special effect. Therefore, according to the feature pE2, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pE3]
Features The gaming machine described in pE2.
The effect mode transition means is
When the special information satisfying the first special condition is present in the special information (reserved information) that has not been determined by the determination means among the special information stored in the information storage means. The effect mode continuation means for continuing the first effect mode without shifting to the second effect mode by the effect mode transition means (“Exception 1” in FIG. 219).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature pE3, when the special information that satisfies the first special condition exists among the special information stored in the information storage means that has not been determined by the determination means, the effect mode shifts. The first effect mode is continued without shifting to the second effect mode by means. For this reason, the effect mode that is originally set is transferred from the first effect mode to the second effect mode by the effect mode transition means, but the first effect mode is continued (maintained). When the person recognizes that the first effect mode is continued, he / she has a feeling of expectation that some change will occur in the gaming state and an advantageous result will come. Therefore, according to the feature pE3, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pE4]
Features The gaming machine described in pE3.
A gaming machine comprising a means for executing the first special effect in the gaming times corresponding to the special information satisfying the first special condition.

According to the feature pE4, a predetermined effect is executed in the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the first special condition. Therefore, after the first special effect is executed in the game when the specific condition is satisfied, the first special effect is executed again when the special information satisfying the first special condition is digested. For the player, the effect seen when the specific condition is satisfied can be seen once again. When the specific condition is satisfied, the player is notified of the unfavorable result for the character in the predetermined effect because the first special effect includes the announcement of the unfavorable result for the character. It is also possible to fulfill the humiliation of including things. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pE5]
Features The gaming machine described in pE4.
The effect mode transition means is
When the special information satisfying the second special condition is present in the special information (reserved information) that has not been determined by the determination means among the special information stored in the information storage means. Means for shifting the set effect mode to the effect mode in the first effect mode corresponding to the character other than the character that appeared in the first special effect (“Exception 2” in FIG. 219”. )
Equipped with
The second special condition is that the degree of possibility that the predetermined condition is satisfied is less than the third degree and is equal to or higher than the fourth degree lower than the third degree (super reach). A gaming machine featuring.

According to the feature pE5, the second special condition is set in the special information stored in the information storage means that has not been determined by the determination means after the end of the game in which the specific condition is satisfied. When the special information to be satisfied exists, the set effect mode is shifted to the effect mode in the first effect mode corresponding to the character other than the character appearing in the first special effect. For this reason, the effect mode that is originally set by the effect mode transition means is transferred from the first effect mode to the second effect mode, but is transferred to another effect mode in the same first effect mode. Therefore, the player has a feeling of expectation that an advantageous result will come when he / she recognizes the transition to another effect mode in the same first effect mode. Therefore, according to the feature pE5, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. The fourth degree may or may not be the same as the second degree in the feature pE2.

<Characteristic pF group>
The feature pF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic pF1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
An information storage means for storing a plurality of acquired special information, and
A determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
Multiple including at least a first production mode (character stage) having a plurality of production modes in which the corresponding characters are individually set, and a second production mode (non-character stage) in which the corresponding characters are not set. A production mode setting means that can set any of the types of production modes as the production mode, and
In the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once in the game times. A game round execution means for executing the game round at least once, and
In the game round, the means for executing the effect for suggesting the result of the determination by the determination means, the first special effect in which the character corresponding to the first effect mode appears, and the determination means. It is possible to execute any one of a plurality of types of effects including at least a second special effect in which a disadvantageous result is not notified even when the result of the determination does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the special information is predetermined. When the determination means determines that the condition is not satisfied, the effect execution means that causes the character to have a disadvantageous result in the first special effect.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect mode setting means is
In the state where the second effect mode is set, the determination means determines (disappears) that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the effect execution means executes the first special effect. If this is the case, the effect mode that has been set after the end of the game round in which the first special effect is executed corresponds to the character other than the character that has a disadvantageous result in the first special effect. The first effect mode transition means for shifting to the effect mode in the first effect mode (“principle” in FIG. 220),
In the state where the second effect mode is set, the determination means determines (disappears) that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the effect execution means executes the second special effect. In this case, the effect mode set after the end of the game round in which the second special effect is executed is changed to the first effect mode corresponding to the character appearing in the second special effect. The second effect mode transition means for shifting to the effect mode inside, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature pF1, when the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy a predetermined condition in the state where the second effect mode is set, the effect executed by the effect execution means is referred to as the first special effect. Depending on which of the second special effects, the set effect mode shifts to the effect mode in the first effect mode, which corresponds to the character other than the character who confronted in the first special effect. It is divided into whether to shift to the production mode in the first production mode corresponding to the character that appeared in the second special production. In the conventional gaming machine, even if the same character is used for the character appearing in the first special production and the character appearing in the production mode, both are controlled individually, and a predetermined character is assumed. When the configuration is such that the transition to the production mode in the first production mode corresponding to the character appearing in the production is performed, the character to which a disadvantageous result is announced (for example, dead) in the predetermined production is the next character. It could have appeared as if nothing had happened in the production of the production mode of the game times. For this reason, in the conventional gaming machine, the player sees the production of the production mode in which the character in which the unfavorable result is announced (for example, dead) appears as if nothing happened, and there is a risk of feeling uncomfortable. was there.

On the other hand, according to the feature pF1, in the state where the second effect mode is set, the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy a predetermined condition, and the effect execution means performs the first special effect. When executed, the above-mentioned first effect mode corresponds to a character other than the character whose first special effect has a disadvantageous result after the end of the game in which the first special effect is executed. By shifting to the effect mode in one effect mode, it is possible to prevent a character whose adverse result is announced (for example, dead) from appearing in the effect mode. On the other hand, since the character does not have a disadvantageous result in the second special effect, the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition in the state where the second effect mode is set. In addition, when the second special effect is executed by the effect execution means, the effect mode set after the end of the game in which the second special effect is executed corresponds to the character appearing in the second special effect. However, even if the player shifts to the effect mode in the first effect mode, the player does not feel the above-mentioned discomfort. Therefore, according to the feature pF1, the story of the production in which the character appears is guaranteed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of discomfort in the production. Therefore, according to the feature pF1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pF2]
Features The gaming machine described in pF1.
The effect executing means is
When suggesting the result of the determination by the determination means, when the degree of possibility that the predetermined condition is satisfied is equal to or higher than the first degree (special reach), the first special effect is executed. , The second special effect is executed when the degree of possibility that the predetermined condition is satisfied is less than the first degree and is greater than or equal to the second degree lower than the first degree (super reach). A gaming machine characterized by being provided with means for playing pachinko and pachislot machines.

According to the feature pF2, the first special effect is executed when the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is equal to or higher than the first degree, and the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is less than the first degree. And when it is a second degree or more lower than the first degree, the second special effect is executed. For this reason, when the degree of advantage for the player is higher, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency by confronting the characters. Therefore, according to the feature pF2, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pF3]
Features The gaming machine described in pF2.
The first effect mode transition means is
After the end of the game round in which the specific condition is satisfied, among the special information stored in the information storage means, the special information (reserved information) that has not been determined by the determination means is included. When the special information satisfying one special condition exists, the set effect mode is transferred to the effect mode in the first effect mode corresponding to the character appearing in the first special effect. Means to cause (“Exception A” in FIG. 220)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature pF3, among the special information stored in the information storage means after the end of the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, the first special condition is set in the special information that has not been determined by the determination means. When the special information to be satisfied exists, the set effect mode is shifted to the effect mode in the first effect mode corresponding to the character appearing in the first special effect. Therefore, the originally set production mode is shifted from the second production mode to the production mode in the first production mode corresponding to the characters other than the characters appearing in the predetermined production. Since the transition to the production mode in the first production mode corresponding to the characters other than the characters appearing in the production is performed, the player recognizes the transition, and some change occurs in the game state. , You will have the expectation that favorable results will come. Therefore, according to the feature pF3, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pF4]
Features The gaming machine described in pF3.
The first special condition is that the degree of possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is the third degree or more (special reach).
The first transition limiting means is
By shifting the set effect mode to the effect mode in the first effect mode corresponding to the character having a disadvantageous result in the first special effect, the effect mode transitioning means is used. A gaming machine characterized by having means for limiting migration.

According to the feature pF4, among the special information stored in the information storage means, the degree of possibility that a predetermined condition is satisfied in the special information (hereinafter, also referred to as reserved information) that has not been determined by the determination means. When there is special information that is equal to or higher than the third degree, the set effect mode shifts to the effect mode in the first effect mode corresponding to the character that has a disadvantageous result in the first special effect. Will be migrated. According to feature pF4, the above transition can be expected to have a favorable result by the player recognizing the transition and then recognizing the effect that is expected to have a favorable result when the pending information is digested. Can be known. Therefore, according to the feature pF4, it is possible to surely give the player a feeling of expectation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. The third degree may or may not be the same as the first degree in the feature pF2.

<Characteristic pG group>
The feature pG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic pG1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
An information storage means for storing a plurality of acquired special information, and
A determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
The determination result notification means (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90, and thereby the determination result notification means (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90) that notifies the result of the determination by the determination means by a game operation such as starting the variable display of the symbol and stopping and displaying the variable display symbol. The game rotation effect setting process of FIG. 244 to be executed) and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is terminated as one game time, the game time execution means (mainly) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the control board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 226 executed by the MPU 62).
It is a gaming machine equipped with
A means for setting an effect mode for an effect that is the background of the variable display from among a plurality of types of effect modes, and the special item stored in the information storage means after the end of the specific game round. A gaming machine characterized by comprising an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode based on the special information that has not been determined by the determination unit among the information.

According to the feature pG1, the effect mode for the effect that is the background of the variable display is set by the effect mode setting means from among a plurality of types of effect modes, but the details are stored in the information storage means. Among the information, the effect mode is set based on the special information that has not been determined by the determination means. Among the special information stored in the information storage means, the special information that has not been determined by the determination means (hereinafter, also referred to as reserved information) can be used to measure the future advantage for the player. For this reason, according to the feature pG1, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency regarding the degree of advantage in the future by the effect of the background of the variable display. Therefore, according to the feature pG1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pG2]
Features The gaming machine described in pG1.
The plurality of types of production modes are a character-type production mode (character-type stage) having a plurality of production modes in which corresponding characters are set, and a non-character-type production mode (non-character-type) in which the corresponding character is not set. Including stage)
When it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (combat effect) in which a character corresponding to the set effect mode appears in the game times, and the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. In addition, the gaming machine is provided with an effect executing means that causes the character to have a disadvantageous result in the predetermined effect.

According to the feature pG2, the setting of the production mode for the production that is the background of the variable display is set to a plurality of types of production modes including at least a character-type production mode corresponding to the character and a non-character-type production mode not corresponding to the character. You can set it from our house. In addition, the result of the determination by the determination means can be notified to the player by a predetermined effect. Therefore, according to the feature pG2, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency by the effect according to the effect mode and the effect in which the characters confront each other. Therefore, according to the feature pG2, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pG3]
Features The gaming machine described in pG2.
The effect mode setting means is
After the specific condition including at least that the determination means determines (disappearance) that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition is satisfied in the state where the character-based effect mode is set (special reach / disengagement). In addition, the effect mode transition means (“principle” in FIG. 219) for shifting the set effect mode to the non-character type effect mode, and
After the end of the game round in which the specific condition is satisfied, among the special information stored in the information storage means, the special information (reserved information) that has not been determined by the determination means is included. 1 When the special information satisfying the special condition exists, the effect mode continuation means for continuing the character system effect mode without performing the transition to the non-character system effect mode by the effect mode transition means ("" in FIG. 219. Exception 1 "),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature pG3, in a state where the character-based effect mode is set, after a specific condition including at least a determination by the determination means that the special information does not satisfy a predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect mode transition means The set production mode is transferred to the non-character production mode. In a conventional gaming machine that does not have a production mode transition means, a character-based production mode is set even though a specific condition including at least a determination that special information does not satisfy a predetermined condition is satisfied. Since it will be continued, there is a problem that it is not possible to give the player a sense of urgency that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition by the production according to the production mode. On the other hand, according to the feature pG3, by shifting the production mode from the character-type production mode to the non-character-type production mode, the urgency that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition is produced according to the production mode. Can be given to the player.

Further, according to the feature pG3, among the special information stored in the information storage means after the end of the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, the first special information is included in the special information that has not been determined by the determination means. When the special information satisfying the conditions exists, the non-character type production mode is continued without shifting to the non-character type production mode by the effect mode transition means. For this reason, the character-based production mode is originally changed from the character-based production mode to the non-character-based production mode by the production mode transition means, but the character-based production mode is continued. When recognizing that the character-based production mode continues, there is a sense of expectation that some change will occur in the gaming state and an advantageous result will come. Therefore, according to the feature pG3, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pG4]
Features The gaming machine described in pG3.
The effect mode setting means is
Among the special information stored in the information storage means after the end of the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, the special information (reserved information) that has not been determined by the determination means is included. 2 When the special information satisfying the special condition exists, the set effect mode is set to the effect in the character-based effect mode corresponding to the character other than the character appearing in the predetermined effect. Means of transitioning to mode (“Exception 2” in FIG. 219),
Equipped with
The first special condition is that the degree of possibility that the predetermined condition is satisfied is equal to or higher than the first degree (special reach).
The second special condition is that the degree of possibility that the predetermined condition is satisfied is less than the first degree and is equal to or higher than the second degree lower than the first degree (super reach). A gaming machine featuring.

According to the feature pG4, the second special condition is set in the special information stored in the information storage means that has not been determined by the determination means after the end of the game in which the specific condition is satisfied. When there is special information to be satisfied, the effect mode transition means by shifting the set effect mode to the effect mode in the character-based effect mode corresponding to the character other than the character that appeared in the predetermined effect. The transition to the non-character production mode is restricted. For this reason, the effect mode that is originally set is transferred from the character-type effect mode to the non-character-type effect mode by the effect mode transition means, but is transferred to another effect mode in the same character-type effect mode. Therefore, the player has a feeling of expectation that an advantageous result will come when he / she recognizes the transition to another production mode in the same character-type production mode. Therefore, according to the feature pG4, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pG5]
Features The gaming machine described in pG2.
The effect mode setting means is
After the specific condition including at least that the determination means determines (disappears) that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition is satisfied in the state where the non-character-based effect mode is set (special reach / disengagement). ), The effect mode transition means (FIG. 220) for shifting the effect mode set to the effect mode in the character system effect mode corresponding to the character other than the character appearing in the predetermined effect. "Principle") and
Among the special information stored in the information storage means after the end of the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, the special information (reserved information) that has not been determined by the determination means is included. 2 When the special information satisfying the special condition exists, the set effect mode is transferred to the effect mode in the first effect mode corresponding to the character appearing in the first special effect. Means to cause (“exception A” in FIG. 220) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature pG5, the effect set after the specific condition including at least the determination by the determination means that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition is satisfied in the state where the non-character type effect mode is set. The mode is shifted to the production mode in the character-based production mode corresponding to the character other than the character that appeared in the predetermined production. If the configuration is such that the transition to the production mode in the character-based production mode corresponding to the character appearing in the predetermined production is performed, the player is notified of the disadvantageous result (for example, the dead character). However, I had to see the production of the production mode that appeared as if nothing had happened, and there was a risk of feeling uncomfortable. On the other hand, according to the feature pG5, after the specific condition including at least the determination by the determination means that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition is satisfied in the state where the non-character production mode is set, By shifting the set production mode to the production mode in the character-based production mode that corresponds to characters other than the characters that appeared in the predetermined production, a disadvantageous result was announced (for example, died). ) It is possible to prevent the character from appearing in the production mode. Therefore, according to the feature pG5, the story of the production in which the character appears is guaranteed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of discomfort in the production.

Further, according to the feature pG5, among the special information stored in the information storage means after the end of the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, the second special is included in the special information that has not been determined by the determination means. When the special information satisfying the conditions exists, the set effect mode is shifted to the effect mode in the character-based effect mode corresponding to the character appearing in the predetermined effect. The player can know that the above transition can be expected to have a favorable result by recognizing the transition and then recognizing the effect that is expected to have a favorable result when the pending information is digested. For this reason, it is possible to surely give the player a sense of expectation that a favorable result will come. Further, according to the feature pG5, by shifting to the effect mode in the character system effect mode corresponding to the character appearing in the predetermined effect, a disadvantageous result is announced (for example, a dead character). Since the character will appear in the effect of the effect mode, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the above-mentioned advantageous result will come. As a result, according to the feature pG5, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic pH group>
The characteristic pH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic pH1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
An information storage means for storing a plurality of acquired special information, and
A determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 226 executed by the MPU 62).
A production mode setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of production modes including at least a plurality of individual production modes corresponding to each of a plurality of characters individually.
An effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect (combat effect) in which any one of the plurality of characters appears in the game times.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect mode setting means is
When an unfavorable result for the character is announced in the predetermined effect, the unfavorable result is announced in the effect mode set in the next game round of the game round in which the predetermined effect is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for shifting to the effect mode corresponding to a character other than the character.

According to the feature pH 1, when a result unfavorable to the character is announced in the predetermined effect, the character other than the character who has the unfavorable result in the next game round after the game round in which the predetermined effect is executed is notified. The corresponding production mode is set. In a conventional gaming machine that does not have such a configuration, although a disadvantageous result is announced for the character in a predetermined production, it is disadvantageous in the next game round after the confrontation / result notification production is executed. Since the production mode corresponding to the character other than the character whose result was announced may be set, the player appears as if the character whose adverse result was announced (for example, died) did not happen. There was a risk of feeling uncomfortable when I saw the production in the production mode. On the other hand, according to the feature pH 1, when a disadvantageous result is announced for the character in a predetermined effect, the effect corresponding to the character whose disadvantageous result is the same as the announced character in the next game round. By not setting the mode, it is possible to prevent a character whose adverse result is announced (for example, dead) from appearing in the production mode. Therefore, according to the feature pH 1, the story of the effect in which the character appears is guaranteed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of discomfort in the effect. As a result, according to the feature pH 1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pH2]
Features The gaming machine described in pH 1
The plurality of types of production modes are a character-type production mode (character-type stage) having a plurality of production modes in which corresponding characters are set, and a non-character-type production mode (non-character-type) in which the corresponding character is not set. Including stage)
The effect mode setting means is
In the state where the character-based effect mode is set, after a specific condition including at least that a disadvantageous result for the character is notified in the predetermined effect is satisfied, the set effect mode is set to the non-character. Production mode transition means for transitioning to the system production mode (“principle” in FIG. 219)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature pH2, in a state where the character-based effect mode is set, it is set by the effect mode transition means after a specific condition including at least that a disadvantageous result for the character is notified in a predetermined effect is satisfied. The production mode is changed to the non-character production mode. In a conventional gaming machine that does not have a production mode transition means, a character-based production mode is set even though specific conditions including at least that a disadvantageous result for the character is notified in a predetermined production are satisfied. In the continuous character-based production mode, if a character that matches the character that had a disadvantageous result in the predetermined intellectual production appears, the player will get a disadvantageous result. There was a risk of feeling uncomfortable when I saw the production of the production mode in which the announced (for example, dead) character appeared as if nothing had happened. On the other hand, according to the feature pH2, the set effect mode is shifted to the non-character type effect mode after a specific condition including at least that a disadvantageous result for the character is announced in a predetermined effect is satisfied. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the character whose adverse result is announced (for example, dead) from appearing in the production mode. Therefore, according to the feature pH 2, the story of the production in which the character appears is guaranteed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of discomfort in the production. As a result, according to the feature pH 2, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pH3]
The gaming machine according to the feature pH 1 or the feature pH 2.
The plurality of production modes are a character-type production mode (character-type stage) having a plurality of production modes in which a corresponding character is set, and a non-character-type production mode (non-character-type stage) in which a corresponding character is not set. ) And
The effect mode setting means is
In the state where the non-character type effect mode is set, the effect mode that is set is set after a specific condition including at least that a disadvantageous result for the character is notified in the predetermined effect is satisfied. Production mode transition means for shifting to the production mode in the character-based production mode corresponding to the character other than the character that appeared in the predetermined production (“principle” in FIG. 220).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature pH3, in a state where the non-character type effect mode is set, it is set by the effect mode transition means after at least a specific condition including the notification of a disadvantageous result for the character is satisfied in a predetermined effect. The effect mode being set is shifted to the effect mode in the character system effect mode corresponding to the characters other than the characters appearing in the predetermined effect. If the configuration is such that the transition to the production mode in the character-based production mode corresponding to the character appearing in the predetermined production is performed, the player is notified of the disadvantageous result (for example, the dead character). However, I had to see the production of the production mode that appeared as if nothing had happened, and there was a risk of feeling uncomfortable. On the other hand, according to the feature pH3, it is set after a specific condition including at least that a disadvantageous result for the character is announced in a predetermined effect is satisfied in a state where the non-character type effect mode is set. The unfavorable result was announced by shifting the effect mode to the effect mode in the character-based effect mode, which corresponds to a character other than the character who had an unfavorable result in the predetermined effect (for example). It is possible to prevent the (dead) character from appearing in the production mode. Therefore, according to the feature pH 3, the story of the production in which the character appears is guaranteed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of discomfort in the production. As a result, according to the feature pH 3, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic pI group>
The feature pI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic pI1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
An information storage means for storing a plurality of acquired special information, and
A determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 226 executed by the MPU 62).
A production mode setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of production modes including at least a plurality of production modes corresponding to each of a plurality of characters individually.
In the game round, it is a means for executing a special effect (super reach effect, special reach effect) indicating the degree of possibility that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and is one of the plurality of characters. A special effect execution means for executing a special effect for the corresponding character,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The special production execution means is
When any one of the plurality of characters corresponds to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, the means for executing the special effect for the character matching the corresponding character (voice emission). The MPU 92 of the control device 90 and the effect pattern table reference process for super reach / disconnection in FIG. 245 or the special reach / effect pattern table reference process for disconnection in FIG. 248 executed by the MPU 92).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature pI1, when any one of the plurality of characters corresponds to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, the special effect for the character matching the corresponding character is produced by the special effect execution means. Will be executed. For this reason, the character corresponding to the special effect executed in the game round matches the character corresponding to the set effect mode. In a conventional gaming machine that does not have such a configuration, the degree of connection between the special effect and the set effect mode is low, so that the player may feel a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, according to the feature pI1, the character corresponding to the special effect executed in the game times matches the character corresponding to the set effect mode, which gives the player a sense of discomfort in the effect. You can prevent it from being felt. As a result, according to the feature pI1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pI2]
Features The gaming machine described in pI1.
The plurality of production modes are a character-type production mode (character-type stage) having a plurality of production modes in which a corresponding character is set, and a non-character-type production mode (non-character-type stage) in which a corresponding character is not set. ) And
The special effect is composed of a moving image in which a character corresponding to the set effect mode appears.
The effect mode setting means is
In the state where the non-character type effect mode is set, the effect mode that is set is set to the special effect after a specific condition including at least that a disadvantageous result for the character is announced in the special effect is satisfied. Production mode transition means for shifting to the production mode in the character-based production mode corresponding to the character other than the character that appeared in the production (“principle” in FIG. 220).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature pI2, it is set by the effect mode transition means after a specific condition including at least that a disadvantageous result for the character is announced in the special effect is satisfied in the state where the non-character type effect mode is set. The production mode is shifted to the production mode in the character-based production mode corresponding to the characters other than the characters that appeared in the special production. If the configuration is such that the transition to the production mode in the character-based production mode corresponding to the character appearing in the special production is performed, the player is notified of the disadvantageous result (for example, the dead character). There was a risk of feeling uncomfortable when I saw the production in the production mode that appeared as if nothing had happened. On the other hand, according to the feature pI2, it is set after a specific condition including at least that a disadvantageous result for the character is announced in the special effect is satisfied in the state where the non-character type effect mode is set. By shifting the current production mode to the production mode in the character-based production mode that corresponds to characters other than the characters that appeared in the special production, the character whose disadvantageous result was announced (for example, died) is directing. You can avoid appearing in the mode. Therefore, according to the feature pI2, the story of the production in which the character appears is guaranteed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of discomfort in the production. In addition, since the character corresponding to the production mode in the transferred character-based production mode and the character corresponding to the special production executed in the game times match, the connection between the productions becomes higher. As a result, according to the feature pI2, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pI3]
Features The gaming machine described in pI2.
The effect mode transition means is
In the state where the non-character-based effect mode is set, after the end of the game round in which the specific condition is satisfied, a determination is made by the determination means among the special information stored in the information storage means. When the special information satisfying the first special condition is present in the special information (pending information) that has not been set, the set effect mode corresponds to the character appearing in the special effect. Means for shifting to the effect mode in the character mode (“Exception A” in FIG. 220)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature pI3, among the special information stored in the information storage means after the end of the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, the first special condition is set in the special information that has not been determined by the determination means. When the special information to be satisfied exists, the set production mode is shifted to the production mode in the character-based production mode corresponding to the character appearing in the special production. For this reason, the production mode originally set by the production mode transition means shifts from the non-character production mode to the production mode in the character production mode corresponding to the characters other than the characters that appeared in the special production. However, it shifts to the production mode in the character-based production mode corresponding to the character that appeared in the special production. The player can know that the above transition can be expected to have a favorable result by recognizing the transition and then recognizing the effect that is expected to have a favorable result when the pending information is digested. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a favorable result will come. Further, according to the feature pI3, by shifting to the above-mentioned effect mode in the character-based effect mode corresponding to the character appearing in the special effect, the character whose disadvantageous result is announced (for example, dead) is produced. Since the effect is to appear in the effect of the mode, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the above-mentioned advantageous result will come. As a result, according to the feature pI3, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic pJ group>
The feature pJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic pJ1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
An information storage means for storing a plurality of acquired special information, and
A determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 226 executed by the MPU 62).
In the game round, it is a means for executing a special effect (super reach effect, special reach effect) indicating the degree of possibility that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and is one of the plurality of characters. A special effect execution means for executing a special effect for the corresponding character,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The special production execution means is
From the plurality of characters, the determination result of the determination means related to the previous game round (a loss in the winning lottery) and the special information indicated by the special effect executed in the previous game round are the predetermined information. The character (character specified by the warrior character determination value VC) is specified based on the degree of possibility that the condition is satisfied (special reach occurs) (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 and FIG. 254 executed by the MPU 92). (Stage transition processing in the non-character stage), means for executing the special effect for the character matching the specified character (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90, and the super reach of FIG. 245 executed by the MPU 92). Disengagement effect pattern table reference process or special reach / disengagement effect pattern table reference process in Fig. 248)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature pJ1, the character is specified based on the judgment result of the judgment means related to the previous game round and the degree of possibility that the special information indicated by the special effect executed in the previous game round satisfies a predetermined condition. And a special effect for the character that matches the identified character is performed. For this reason, the character corresponding to the special effect executed in the game round is determined by the judgment result of the determination means related to the previous game round and the degree of possibility that the special information in the previous game round satisfies a predetermined condition. It will be the corresponding one. In a conventional gaming machine that does not have such a configuration, the special effect performed in the gaming round has a low degree of connection with the gaming result of the previous gaming round, so that the player may feel a sense of discomfort. .. On the other hand, according to the feature pJ1, the character corresponding to the special effect executed in the game round matches the character specified based on the game result of the previous game round, and thus the player. It is possible to prevent the character from feeling uncomfortable. As a result, according to the feature pJ1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pJ2]
Features The gaming machine described in pJ1.
It is equipped with a production mode setting means that can set any one of a plurality of production modes including at least a plurality of production modes corresponding to each of a plurality of characters individually.
The plurality of production modes are a character-type production mode (character-type stage) having a plurality of production modes in which a corresponding character is set, and a non-character-type production mode (non-character-type stage) in which a corresponding character is not set. ) And
The special effect is composed of a moving image in which a character corresponding to the set effect mode appears.
The effect mode setting means is
In the state where the non-character type effect mode is set, the effect mode that is set is set to the special effect after a specific condition including at least that a disadvantageous result for the character is announced in the special effect is satisfied. Production mode transition means for shifting to the production mode in the character-based production mode corresponding to the character other than the character that appeared in the production (“principle” in FIG. 220).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature pJ2, it is set by the effect mode transition means after a specific condition including at least that a disadvantageous result for the character is announced in the special effect is satisfied in the state where the non-character type effect mode is set. The production mode is shifted to the production mode in the character-based production mode corresponding to the characters other than the characters that appeared in the special production. If the configuration is such that the transition to the production mode in the character-based production mode corresponding to the character appearing in the special production is performed, the player is notified of the disadvantageous result (for example, the dead character). There was a risk of feeling uncomfortable when I saw the production in the production mode that appeared as if nothing had happened. On the other hand, according to the feature pJ2, it is set after a specific condition including at least that a disadvantageous result for the character is announced in the special effect is satisfied in the state where the non-character type effect mode is set. By shifting the current production mode to the production mode in the character-based production mode that corresponds to characters other than the characters that appeared in the special production, the character whose disadvantageous result was announced (for example, died) is directing. You can avoid appearing in the mode. Therefore, according to the feature pJ2, the story of the production in which the character appears is guaranteed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of discomfort in the production. Further, since the character corresponding to the game result of the previous game times and the character corresponding to the special effect executed in the game times match, the connection between each effect becomes higher. As a result, according to the feature pJ2, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pJ3]
Features The gaming machine described in pJ2.
The effect mode transition means is
In the state where the non-character-based effect mode is set, after the end of the game round in which the specific condition is satisfied, a determination is made by the determination means among the special information stored in the information storage means. When the special information satisfying the first special condition is present in the special information (pending information) that has not been set, the set effect mode corresponds to the character appearing in the special effect. Means for shifting to the effect mode in the character mode (“Exception A” in FIG. 220)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature pJ3, among the special information stored in the information storage means after the end of the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, the first special condition is set in the special information that has not been determined by the determination means. When the special information to be satisfied exists, the set production mode is shifted to the production mode in the character-based production mode corresponding to the character appearing in the special production. For this reason, the production mode originally set by the production mode transition means shifts from the non-character production mode to the production mode in the character production mode corresponding to the characters other than the characters that appeared in the special production. However, it shifts to the production mode in the character-based production mode corresponding to the character that appeared in the special production. The player can know that the above transition can be expected to have a favorable result by recognizing the transition and then recognizing the effect that is expected to have a favorable result when the pending information is digested. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a favorable result will come. Further, according to the feature pJ3, by shifting to the above-mentioned effect mode in the character-based effect mode corresponding to the character appearing in the special effect, the character whose disadvantageous result is announced (for example, dead) is produced. Since the effect is to appear in the effect of the mode, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the above-mentioned advantageous result will come. As a result, according to the feature pJ3, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic pK group>
The feature pK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic pK1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
An information storage means for storing a plurality of acquired special information, and
A determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 226 executed by the MPU 62).
In the game round, it is a means for executing a special effect (super reach effect, special reach effect) indicating the degree of possibility that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and is one of the plurality of characters. A special effect execution means for executing a special effect for the corresponding character,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The special production execution means is
Among the plurality of characters, among the special information stored in the information storage means, the character (warrior character determination value VC) is based on the special information (holding information) that has not been determined by the determination means. The special for the character that matches the identified character) by identifying (the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 and the stage transition process in the non-character stage of FIG. 254 executed by it). Means for executing the effect (MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 and the super reach / detached effect pattern table reference process of FIG. 245 or the special reach / detached effect pattern table reference process of FIG. 248) executed by the MPU 92.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature pK1, among the special information stored in the information storage means, the character is specified based on the special information (hereinafter referred to as reserved information) that has not been determined by the determination means, and the specified character. A special production for matching characters is performed. For this reason, the character corresponding to the special effect executed in the game round has the judgment result of the judgment means related to the previous game round and the degree of possibility that the judgment means in the previous game round satisfies a predetermined condition. It will be the corresponding one. In a conventional gaming machine that does not have such a configuration, the special effect performed in the gaming round has a low degree of connection with the reserved information, so that the player may feel a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, according to the feature pK1, the character corresponding to the special effect executed in the game round matches the character specified based on the hold information, which gives the player a sense of discomfort in the effect. You can prevent it from being felt. As a result, according to the feature pK1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pK2]
Features The gaming machine described in pK1.
It is equipped with a production mode setting means that can set any one of a plurality of production modes including at least a plurality of production modes corresponding to each of a plurality of characters individually.
Among the plurality of production modes, a character-type production mode (character-type stage) having a plurality of production modes individually corresponding to each of a plurality of characters having different production modes, and a non-character-type production that does not correspond to a character. Including at least modes (non-character stage)
The special effect is composed of a moving image in which a character corresponding to the set effect mode appears.
The effect mode setting means is
In the state where the non-character type effect mode is set, the effect mode that is set is set to the special effect after a specific condition including at least that a disadvantageous result for the character is announced in the special effect is satisfied. Production mode transition means for shifting to the production mode in the character-based production mode corresponding to the character other than the character that appeared in the production (“principle” in FIG. 220).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature pK2, it is set by the effect mode transition means after a specific condition including at least that a disadvantageous result for the character is announced in the special effect is satisfied in the state where the non-character type effect mode is set. The production mode is shifted to the production mode in the character-based production mode corresponding to the characters other than the characters that appeared in the special production. If the configuration is such that the transition to the production mode in the character-based production mode corresponding to the character appearing in the special production is performed, the player is notified of the disadvantageous result (for example, the dead character). There was a risk of feeling uncomfortable when I saw the production in the production mode that appeared as if nothing had happened. On the other hand, according to the feature pK2, it is set after a specific condition including at least that a disadvantageous result for the character is announced in the special effect is satisfied in the state where the non-character type effect mode is set. By shifting the current production mode to the production mode in the character-based production mode that corresponds to characters other than the characters that appeared in the special production, the character whose disadvantageous result was announced (for example, died) is directing. You can avoid appearing in the mode. Therefore, according to the feature pK2, the story of the production in which the character appears is guaranteed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of discomfort in the production. Further, since the character corresponding to the hold information and the character corresponding to the special effect executed in the game round match, the connection between each effect becomes higher. As a result, according to the feature pK2, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pK3]
Features The gaming machine described in pK2.
The effect mode transition means is
Among the special information stored in the information storage means after the end of the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, the special information (reserved information) that has not been determined by the determination means is included. 1 Means for shifting the set effect mode to the effect mode in the character-based effect mode corresponding to the character appearing in the special effect when the special information satisfying the special condition exists. (“Exception A” in FIG. 220)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature pK3, among the special information stored in the information storage means after the end of the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, the first special condition is set in the special information that has not been determined by the determination means. When the special information to be satisfied exists, the set production mode is shifted to the production mode in the character-based production mode corresponding to the character appearing in the special production. For this reason, the production mode originally set by the production mode transition means shifts from the non-character production mode to the production mode in the character production mode corresponding to the characters other than the characters that appeared in the special production. However, it shifts to the production mode in the character-based production mode corresponding to the character that appeared in the special production. The player can know that the above transition can be expected to have a favorable result by recognizing the transition and then recognizing the effect that is expected to have a favorable result when the pending information is digested. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a favorable result will come. Further, according to the feature pK4, by shifting to the above-mentioned effect mode in the character-based effect mode corresponding to the character appearing in the special effect, the character whose disadvantageous result is announced (for example, dead) is produced. Since the effect is to appear in the effect of the mode, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the above-mentioned advantageous result will come. As a result, according to the feature pK3, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic pL group>
The feature pL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment and its variants.

[Feature pL1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition conditions are met,
An information storage means for storing a plurality of acquired special information, and
A determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the stored special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and
A production mode setting means that can set any one of a plurality of types of production modes including at least the first production mode (character stage) as the production mode, and a production mode setting means.
In the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once in the game times. A game round execution means for executing the game round at least once, and
In the game round, when the first effect mode is set by the effect mode setting means, a predetermined effect (combat effect + result notification effect) corresponding to the first effect mode can be executed. Means and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect mode setting means is
In a state where the first effect mode is set, after the result of the predetermined effect satisfies a specific condition (execution of the defeat effect), the set effect mode is set to a mode other than the first effect mode. The effect mode transition means (“principle” in FIG. 219) for shifting to the effect mode, and
After the end of the game round in which the specific condition is satisfied, among the special information stored in the information storage means, the special information (reserved information) that has not been determined by the determination means is included. 1 Effect mode continuation means for continuing the first effect mode without shifting to an effect mode other than the first effect mode by the effect mode transition means when the special information satisfying the special condition exists (FIG. FIG. "Exception 1" in 219) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature pL1, in the state where the first effect mode is set, after the result of the predetermined effect satisfies the specific condition, the set effect mode shifts to the effect mode other than the first effect mode. Will be done. In a conventional gaming machine that does not have a production mode transition means, a state in which a first production mode is set when the result of a predetermined production is a production in which a result that is disadvantageous to a character is announced as a specific condition, for example. In the first production mode, if a character that matches the character for which a disadvantageous result has been announced for the character appears in the first production mode, the player announces the disadvantageous result. There was a risk of feeling uncomfortable when I saw the production of the production mode in which the character that was killed (for example, died) appeared as if nothing had happened. On the other hand, according to the feature pL1, after the result of the predetermined effect satisfies the specific condition, the set effect mode is shifted from the first effect mode to the effect mode other than the first effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a character having a disadvantageous result from appearing in the production mode. Therefore, according to the feature pL1, the story of the production in which the character appears is guaranteed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of discomfort in the production. As a result, according to the feature pL1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the feature pL1, among the special information stored in the information storage means after the end of the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, the first special information is included in the special information that has not been determined by the determination means. When the special information satisfying the conditions exists, the first effect mode is continued without shifting to the effect mode other than the first effect mode by the effect mode transition means. For this reason, the effect mode that is originally set is transferred from the first effect mode to the effect mode other than the first effect mode by the effect mode transition means, but the first effect mode is continued (maintained). Therefore, when the player recognizes that the first effect mode is continued, there is a sense of expectation that some change will occur in the game state and an advantageous result will come. Therefore, according to the feature pL1, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that an advantageous result will come, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pL2]
Features The gaming machine described in pL1.
The plurality of production modes are a character-type production mode (character-type stage) having a plurality of production modes in which a corresponding character is set, and a non-character-type production mode (non-character-type stage) in which a corresponding character is not set. ) And
The first effect mode is a gaming machine characterized in that it is one effect mode in the character system effect mode (character system stage).

According to the feature pL2, the transition from the effect mode in the character-based effect mode having a plurality of effect modes in which the corresponding character is set to the effect mode other than the effect mode is made. For example, by shifting from the character-based effect mode to the non-character-based effect mode, it is possible to easily shift to an effect mode other than the first effect mode.

[Characteristic pL3]
Features The gaming machine described in pL2.
The predetermined effect is a gaming machine characterized in that a character corresponding to the set effect mode appears and is composed of a moving image including at least a scene in which a disadvantageous result is announced for the character.

According to the feature pL3, as the predetermined effect, a character corresponding to the set effect mode appears, and a moving image including at least a scene in which a disadvantageous result is announced for the character is displayed. Therefore, the player can also be notified of the suggestion that the game result will be a disadvantageous result. Therefore, a sense of expectation and a sense of disappointment are given to the player, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic pL4]
Features The gaming machine described in pL3.
The effect mode transition means is
It is characterized by providing a means for shifting the set effect mode to the non-character effect mode after the result of the predetermined effect satisfies a specific condition in the state where the character effect mode is set. A gaming machine.

According to the feature pL4, by shifting from the character-based effect mode to the non-character-based effect mode, it is possible to easily shift to the effect mode other than the first effect mode.

[Feature pL5]
Features The gaming machine described in pL3.
The effect mode transition means is
In a state where the character-based effect mode is set, after the result of the predetermined effect satisfies a specific condition, the set effect mode is set to the character other than the character that appeared in the predetermined effect. A gaming machine comprising a means for shifting to the effect mode in the corresponding character-based effect mode.

According to the feature pL5, by shifting the set effect mode to the effect mode in the character-based effect mode corresponding to the character other than the character that appeared in the predetermined effect, the first 1 It is possible to easily shift to an effect mode other than the effect mode.

<Characteristic qA group>
The feature qA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and the modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Characteristic qA1]
A main control means for performing a winning / failing lottery (winning lottery) as to whether or not to generate a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous for the player, and
An effect control means (MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) that controls at least the sound effect based on the control signal from the main control means, and
A production data storage means for storing the first production data (music A first data A1) and the second production data (music A second data A2),
An effect executing means (sound output LSI 97) capable of using the first effect data and the second effect data to execute the effect, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The first production data includes a first part (music A first data_main part A12) and a second part (music A first data_afterglow part A13) continuous with respect to the first part in the time axis direction. And, at least
The effect control means is
A first instruction means (means for transmitting the music A first data reproduction start command CA1) for instructing the effect execution means to execute the first effect data, and
Within a predetermined period including the timing when the execution position of the first effect data in the effect executing means reaches the end of the first portion (time t2 in FIG. 263), the second effect is given to the effect executing means. A second instruction means for instructing data execution (means for transmitting music A second data reproduction start command CA2) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature qA1, the first instruction means provided in the effect control means gives an instruction to execute the first effect data to the effect execution means, and the execution position of the first effect data in the effect execution means is the first portion. Within a predetermined period including the timing of reaching the end of the second effect data, the second effect control means provided with the effect control means gives an instruction to execute the second effect data to the effect execution means. The effect executing means receives an instruction to execute the first effect data and starts executing the first effect data, and receives an instruction to execute the second effect data and starts executing the second effect data. However, in the effect executing means, a delay of a predetermined period (this period is also referred to as "delay period" hereafter) between receiving the instruction to execute the second effect data and starting the execution of the second effect data. Call) may occur. According to the feature qA1, since the first effect data includes the second part continuous in the time axis direction with respect to the first part, the second part of the first effect data is executed in the delay period, and the effect is produced. There is no break. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the production is interrupted. Therefore, according to the feature qA1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic qA2]
The gaming machine described in the feature qA1.
The first part is a part in which the main part of a specific production is recorded.
The second part is a gaming machine characterized in that the effect accompanying the main part is recorded.

According to the feature qA2, since the delay period described above can be filled with the effect accompanying the main part of the specific effect, it is possible to eliminate the discomfort that the effect is interrupted without impairing the flow of the specific effect.

[Characteristic qA3]
The gaming machine described in the feature qA2,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the second effect data is the same as the data recorded in the first portion.

According to the feature qA3, the main part of a specific effect, for example, the melody part of a musical piece, can be repeatedly executed (reproduced).

[Characteristic qA4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features qA1 to the feature qA3.
The effect executing means is
It is provided with a plurality of execution means for executing the above-mentioned effect, and has a plurality of execution means.
The first instruction means is
A means for instructing the execution of the first effect data by a specific execution means (voice channel 1) among the plurality of execution means is provided.
The second instruction means is
A gaming machine comprising means for instructing the execution of the second effect data by the specific execution means (voice channel 1).

According to the feature qA4, in the above-mentioned delay period, the second part of the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, the second effect data is first executed by the specific execution means. It is executed by switching to the second part of the production data. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the effect from the first effect data to the second effect data without interruption.

[Characteristic qA5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features qA1 to the feature qA3.
The effect executing means is
It is provided with a plurality of execution means for executing the above-mentioned effect, and has a plurality of execution means.
The first instruction means is
A means for instructing the execution of the first effect data by a specific execution means (voice channel 1) among the plurality of execution means is provided.
The second instruction means is
A gaming machine comprising a means for instructing execution of the second effect data by an execution means (voice channel 2) different from the specific execution means.

According to the feature qA5, in the above-mentioned delay period, the second part of the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, the execution means different from the specific execution means is the first. 2 Production data is executed. When the delay period elapses, the unexecuted part in the second part of the first effect data is continuously executed by the specific execution means. Therefore, the period in which this unexecuted part is executed is the specific execution means. The second effect data is also executed by the execution means different from the above. As a result, immediately after the production is switched from the first production data to the second production data, the production of the first production data and the production of the second production data are mixed, and the switching of the production is smooth. It can be carried out.

<Characteristic qB group>
The feature qB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and the modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qB1]
A main control means for performing a winning / failing lottery (winning lottery) as to whether or not to generate a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous for the player, and
An effect control means (MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) that controls at least the sound effect based on the control signal from the main control means, and
A production data storage means for storing production data (music A second data A2),
An effect executing means (sound output LSI97) for executing an effect using the effect data, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect data includes a first part (music A second data_main part A21), a second part continuous with respect to the first part in the time axis direction (music A second data_afterglow part A22), and At least prepare
The effect control means is
A first instruction means (means for transmitting the music A second data reproduction start command CA2) for instructing the effect execution means to execute the effect data, and
Within a predetermined period including the timing when the execution position of the effect data in the effect execution means reaches the end of the second portion (time t3 in FIG. 263), the effect data is executed for the effect execution means. The second instruction means for instructing (means for transmitting the music A second data reproduction start command CA2) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature qB1, the first instruction means provided in the effect control means gives an instruction to execute the effect data (hereinafter, also referred to as a first instruction) to the effect execution means, and the effect data in the effect execution means is instructed. Within a predetermined period including the timing when the execution position reaches the end of the first portion, the instruction for executing the effect data (hereinafter, also referred to as the second instruction) is executed by the second instruction means provided in the effect control means. Made for means. In the effect execution means, the execution of the effect data (hereinafter, also referred to as the first effect data) is started in response to the first instruction, and the same effect data as the first effect data (hereinafter, also referred to as the first effect data) is received in response to the second instruction. Hereinafter, the execution of the second production data) is started. However, in the effect execution means, there is a delay of a predetermined period from the time when the instruction for executing the second effect data is received until the execution of the second effect data is started (this period is referred to as "hereinafter". Also called "delay period") may occur. According to the feature qB1, since the effect data includes the second part continuous in the time axis direction with respect to the first part, the second part of the effect data is executed in the delay period, and the effect is not interrupted. .. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the production is interrupted. Therefore, according to the feature qB1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature qB2]
The gaming machine described in the feature qB1.
The first part is a part in which the main part of a specific production is recorded.
The second part is a gaming machine characterized in that the effect accompanying the main part is recorded.

According to the feature qB2, since the delay period described above can be filled with the effect accompanying the main part of the specific effect, it is possible to eliminate the discomfort that the effect is interrupted without impairing the flow of the specific effect.

[Feature qB3]
The gaming machine according to the feature qB1 or the feature qB2.
The effect executing means is
It is provided with a plurality of execution means for executing the above-mentioned effect, and has a plurality of execution means.
The first instruction means is
A means for instructing the execution of the effect data by a specific execution means (voice channel 1) among the plurality of execution means is provided.
The second instruction means is
A gaming machine comprising means for instructing the execution of the effect data by the specific execution means (voice channel 1).

According to the feature qB3, in the above-mentioned delay period, the second part of the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, the second effect data is executed by the specific execution means. It is executed by switching to the second part of the first production data. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the effect from the first effect data to the second effect data without interruption.

[Feature qB4]
The gaming machine according to the feature qB1 or the feature qB2.
The effect executing means is
It is provided with a plurality of execution means for executing the above-mentioned effect, and has a plurality of execution means.
The first instruction means is
A means for instructing the execution of the effect data by a specific execution means (voice channel 2) among the plurality of execution means is provided.
The second instruction means is
A gaming machine comprising a means for instructing execution of the second effect data by an execution means (voice channel 1) different from the specific execution means.

According to the feature qB4, in the above-mentioned delay period, the second part of the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, the execution means is different from the specific execution means. The second production data is executed. When the delay period elapses, the unexecuted part in the second part of the first effect data is continuously executed by the specific execution means. Therefore, the period in which this unexecuted part is executed is the specific execution. In the means, the second production data is also executed. As a result, immediately after the production is switched from the first production data to the second production data, the production of the first production data and the production of the second production data are mixed to produce the production. Switching can be done smoothly.

<Characteristic QC group>
The feature qC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and the modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Characteristic qC1]
A main control means for performing a winning / failing lottery (winning lottery) as to whether or not to generate a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous for the player, and
An effect control means (MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) that controls at least the sound effect based on the control signal from the main control means, and
A production data storage means for storing the first production data (music A first data A1) and the second production data (music A second data A2),
An effect executing means (sound output LSI 97) capable of using the first effect data and the second effect data to execute the effect, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect control means is
A first instruction means (means for transmitting the music A first data reproduction start command CA1) for instructing the effect execution means to execute the first effect data, and
A second instruction means (music A) instructing the effect execution means to execute the second effect data while the first effect data is being executed by the effect execution means (time t2 in FIG. 263). (Means for transmitting the second data reproduction start command CA2) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature qC1, the first instruction means provided in the effect control means gives an instruction to execute the first effect data to the effect execution means, and the effect execution means is executing the first effect data. Then, the second instruction means provided in the effect control means gives an instruction to execute the second effect data to the effect execution means. The effect executing means receives an instruction to execute the first effect data and starts executing the first effect data, and receives an instruction to execute the second effect data and starts executing the second effect data. However, in the effect executing means, a delay of a predetermined period (this period is also referred to as "delay period" hereafter) between receiving the instruction to execute the second effect data and starting the execution of the second effect data. Call) may occur. According to the feature qC1, since the timing at which the execution of the second effect data is instructed is in the middle of the execution of the first effect data, an unexecuted portion remains in the first effect data, which is delayed. During the period, the unexecuted part is executed, and the production is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the production is interrupted. Therefore, according to the feature qC1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic qC2]
The gaming machine described in the feature qC1.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first effect data and the second effect data each include a portion in which a common effect is recorded.

According to the feature qC2, it is possible to repeatedly execute (reproduce) a portion in which a common effect is recorded, for example, a melody portion of a musical piece.

[Characteristic qC3]
The gaming machine according to the feature qC1 or the feature qC2.
The effect executing means is
It is provided with a plurality of execution means for executing the above-mentioned effect, and has a plurality of execution means.
The first instruction means is
A means for instructing the execution of the first effect data by a specific execution means (voice channel 1) among the plurality of execution means is provided.
The second instruction means is
A gaming machine comprising means for instructing the execution of the second effect data by the specific execution means (voice channel 1).

According to the feature qC3, in the above-mentioned delay period, the above-mentioned unexecuted portion of the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, the second effect data is executed by the specific execution means. Is switched to the first production data and executed. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the effect from the first effect data to the second effect data without interruption.

[Characteristic qC4]
The gaming machine according to the feature qC1 or the feature qC2.
The effect executing means is
It is provided with a plurality of execution means for executing the above-mentioned effect, and has a plurality of execution means.
The first instruction means is
A means for instructing the execution of the first effect data by a specific execution means (voice channel 1) among the plurality of execution means is provided.
The second instruction means is
A gaming machine comprising a means for instructing execution of the second effect data by an execution means (voice channel 2) different from the specific execution means.

According to the feature qC4, in the above-mentioned delay period, the above-mentioned unexecuted portion of the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, the execution means different from the above-mentioned specific execution means. Then, the second effect data is executed. When the delay period elapses, the continuous portion is executed because the portion continuous with the portion executed in the delay period (hereinafter, also referred to as the continuous portion) in the first effect data is continuously executed by the specific execution means. During the period, the second effect data is also executed by the execution means different from the specific execution means. As a result, immediately after the production is switched from the first production data to the second production data, the production of the first production data and the production of the second production data are mixed, and the switching of the production is smooth. It can be carried out.

<Characteristic qD group>
The feature qD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and the modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qD1]
A main control means for performing a winning / failing lottery (winning lottery) as to whether or not to generate a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous for the player, and
An effect control means (MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) that controls at least the sound effect based on the control signal from the main control means, and
A production data storage means for storing production data (music A second data A2),
An effect executing means (sound output LSI97) for executing an effect using the effect data, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect control means is
A first instruction means (means for transmitting the music A second data reproduction start command CA2) for instructing the effect execution means to execute the effect data, and
While the effect data is being executed by the effect execution means (time t3 in FIG. 263), the second instruction means (music A second data reproduction start) instructing the effect means to execute the effect data. Means of sending command CA2) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature qD1, an instruction to execute the effect data (hereinafter, also referred to as a first instruction) is given to the effect execution means by the first instruction means provided in the effect control means, and the effect data is generated in the effect execution means. During the execution, the second instruction means provided in the effect control means gives an instruction to execute the effect data (hereinafter, also referred to as a second instruction) to the effect execution means. In the effect execution means, the execution of the effect data (hereinafter, also referred to as the first effect data) is started in response to the first instruction, and the same effect as the effect data executed in the first time in response to the second instruction is received. Execution of the data (hereinafter, also referred to as the second production data) is started. However, in the effect execution means, there is a delay of a predetermined period from the time when the instruction for executing the second effect data is received until the execution of the second effect data is started (this period is referred to as "hereinafter". Also called "delay period") may occur. According to the feature qD1, since the timing at which the second instruction is given is during the execution of the first effect data, an unexecuted portion remains in the first effect data, and in the delay period. , The effect of the unexecuted part is executed, and the effect is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the production is interrupted. Therefore, according to the feature qD1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature qD2]
The gaming machine described in the feature qD1.
The effect executing means is
It is provided with a plurality of execution means for executing the above-mentioned effect, and has a plurality of execution means.
The first instruction means is
A means for instructing the execution of the effect data by a specific execution means (voice channel 1) among the plurality of execution means is provided.
The second instruction means is
A gaming machine comprising a means for instructing the execution of the effect data by the specific execution means (voice channel 1).

According to the feature qD2, in the above-mentioned delay period, the above-mentioned unexecuted portion of the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, the second time by the specific execution means. The production data is switched to the first production data and executed. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the effect from the first effect data to the second effect data without interruption.

[Feature qD3]
The gaming machine described in the feature qD1.
The effect executing means is
It is provided with a plurality of execution means for executing the above-mentioned effect, and has a plurality of execution means.
The first instruction means is
A means for instructing the execution of the effect data by a specific execution means (voice channel 2) among the plurality of execution means is provided.
The second instruction means is
A gaming machine comprising a means for instructing execution of the second effect data by an execution means (voice channel 1) different from the specific execution means.

According to the feature qD3, in the above-mentioned delay period, the above-mentioned unexecuted portion of the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, the effect different from the above-mentioned specific effect means. By means, the second production data is executed. When the delay period elapses, the portion continuous with the portion executed in the delay period (hereinafter, also referred to as the continuous portion) in the first effect data is continuously executed by the specific effect means, so that the effect of the continuous part is produced. During the period in which is being executed, the second effect data is also executed in the effect means different from the specific effect means. As a result, immediately after the production is switched from the first production data to the second production data, the production of the first production data and the production of the second production data are mixed to produce the production. Switching can be done smoothly.

<Characteristic qE group>
The feature qE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and the modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Characteristic qE1]
A main control means for performing a winning / failing lottery (winning lottery) as to whether or not to generate a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous for the player, and
An effect control means (MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) that controls at least the sound effect based on the control signal from the main control means, and
A production data storage means for storing the first production data (music A first data A1) and the second production data (music A second data A2),
An effect executing means (sound output LSI 97) capable of using the first effect data and the second effect data to execute the effect, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The first production data includes a first part (music A first data_main part A12) and a second part (music A first data_afterglow part A13) continuous with respect to the first part in the time axis direction. And, at least
The effect executing means is
The first effect data execution means for executing the first effect data,
The second effect data is executed at a predetermined timing within the range from the end of the first portion to the end of the second portion (time t2 + Δt in FIG. 263). The second production data execution means to be performed,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature qE1, the execution of the first effect data is started by the first effect data execution means provided in the effect execution means, and the execution position of the first effect data is from the end of the first part to the end of the second part. The execution of the second effect data is started by the second effect data execution means provided in the effect execution means at a predetermined timing within the range until reaching. In the effect execution means, when the execution of the second effect data is started in response to the instruction from the effect control means, between the time when the instruction from the effect control means is received and the execution of the second effect data is started. , A delay of a predetermined period (this period is also referred to as a "delay period" below) may occur. According to the feature qE1, the first effect data includes a second portion continuous with respect to the first portion in the time axis direction, and the execution position of the first effect data is from the end of the first portion or later in the effect execution means. Since the execution of the second effect data is started at a predetermined timing within the range until the end of the second part is reached, the second part of the first effect data is executed in the delay period. Here, as a comparative example, consider a case where the first effect data does not include the second portion and the end of the first portion coincides with the end of the first effect data. According to the comparative example, in the delay period, the execution has already been completed up to the end of the first effect data, and the effect is not executed and no effect is produced. Therefore, according to the configuration of the comparative example, the effect may be interrupted between the end of the execution of the first effect data and the start of the execution of the second effect data. On the other hand, according to the feature qE1, the second part of the first effect data is executed in the delay period, and the effect is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the production is interrupted. Therefore, according to the feature qE1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic qE2]
The gaming machine described in the feature qE1.
The first part is a part in which the main part of a specific production is recorded.
The second part is a gaming machine characterized in that the effect accompanying the main part is recorded.

According to the feature qE2, since the delay period described above can be filled with the effect accompanying the main part of the specific effect, it is possible to eliminate the discomfort that the effect is interrupted without impairing the flow of the specific effect.

[Characteristic qE3]
The gaming machine described in the feature qE2.
The gaming machine, characterized in that the second effect data is the same as the data recorded in the first portion.

According to the feature qE3, the main part of a specific effect, for example, the melody part of a musical piece, can be repeatedly executed (reproduced).

[Characteristic qE4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature qE1 to the feature qE3.
The effect executing means is
It is provided with a plurality of execution means for executing the above-mentioned effect, and has a plurality of execution means.
The first effect data execution means is
A means for executing the first effect data by a specific execution means (voice channel 1) among the plurality of execution means is provided.
The second effect data execution means is
A gaming machine comprising means for executing the second effect data by the specific execution means (voice channel 1).

According to the feature qE4, in the above-mentioned delay period, the second part of the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, the second effect data is first executed by the specific execution means. It is executed by switching to the second part of the production data. As a result, the switching from the first effect data to the second effect data can be reliably performed without interruption of the effect.

[Characteristic qE5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature qE1 to the feature qE3.
The effect executing means is
It is provided with a plurality of execution means for executing the above-mentioned effect, and has a plurality of execution means.
The first effect data execution means is
A means for executing the first effect data by a specific execution means (voice channel 1) among the plurality of execution means is provided.
The second effect data execution means is
A gaming machine comprising means for executing the second effect data by an execution means (voice channel 2) different from the specific execution means.

According to the feature qE5, in the above-mentioned delay period, the second part of the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, the execution means different from the specific execution means is the first. 2 Production data is executed. When the delay period elapses, the unexecuted part in the second part of the first effect data is continuously executed by the specific execution means. Therefore, the period in which this unexecuted part is executed is the specific execution means. The second effect data is also executed by the execution means different from the above. As a result, immediately after the production is switched from the first production data to the second production data, the production of the first production data and the production of the second production data are mixed, and the switching of the production is smooth. It can be carried out.

<Characteristic qF group>
The feature qF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and the modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qF1]
A main control means for performing a winning / failing lottery (winning lottery) as to whether or not to generate a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous for the player, and
An effect control means (MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) that controls at least the sound effect based on the control signal from the main control means, and
A production data storage means for storing production data (music A second data A2),
An effect executing means (sound output LSI97) for executing an effect using the effect data, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect data includes a first part (music A second data_main part A21), a second part continuous with respect to the first part in the time axis direction (music A second data_afterglow part A22), and At least prepare
The effect executing means is
The first effect data execution means for executing the effect data,
The second effect of executing the effect data at a predetermined timing within the range from the end of the first portion to the end of the second portion (time t3 + Δt in FIG. 263). Data execution method and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature qF1, the execution of the effect data (hereinafter, also referred to as the first effect data) is started by the first effect data execution means provided in the effect execution means, and the execution position of the effect data is the end of the first part. The same effect data as the effect data executed the first time by the second effect data execution means provided in the effect execution means at a predetermined timing within the range from the subsequent time to the end of the second part (hereinafter, the second time). (Also called the production data of) is started. In the effect execution means, when the execution of the second effect data is started in response to the instruction from the effect control means, from the time when the instruction from the effect control means is received until the execution of the second effect data is started. In the meantime, a delay of a predetermined period (this period is also referred to as a "delay period") may occur. According to the feature qF1, the effect data includes a second portion continuous with respect to the first portion in the time axis direction, and the execution position of the first effect data is the first from the end of the first portion onward in the effect execution means. Since the execution of the second effect data is started at a predetermined timing within the range until the end of the second part is reached, the second part of the first effect data is executed in the delay period. .. Here, as a comparative example, consider a case where the effect data does not include the second part and the end of the first part coincides with the end of the effect data. According to the comparative example, in the delay period, the execution has already been completed up to the end of the effect data, and the effect is not executed and no effect is produced. Therefore, according to the configuration of the comparative example, the effect may be interrupted between the end of the execution of the first effect data and the start of the execution of the second effect data. On the other hand, according to the feature qF1, the second part of the first effect data is executed during the delay period, and the effect is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the production is interrupted. Therefore, according to the feature qF1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature qF2]
The gaming machine described in the feature qF1.
The first part is a part in which the main part of a specific production is recorded.
The second part is a gaming machine characterized in that the effect accompanying the main part is recorded.

According to the feature qF2, since the delay period described above can be filled with the effect accompanying the main part of the specific effect, it is possible to eliminate the discomfort that the effect is interrupted without impairing the flow of the specific effect.

[Characteristic qF3]
The gaming machine according to the feature qF1 or the feature qF2.
The effect executing means is
It is provided with a plurality of execution means for executing the above-mentioned effect, and has a plurality of execution means.
The first effect data execution means is
A means for executing the effect data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means is provided.
The second effect data execution means is
A gaming machine comprising means for executing the effect data by the specific execution means (voice channel 1).

According to the feature qF3, in the above-mentioned delay period, the second part of the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, the second effect data is executed by the specific execution means. It is executed by switching to the second part of the first production data. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the effect from the first effect data to the second effect data without interruption.

[Feature qF4]
The gaming machine according to the feature qF1 or the feature qF2.
The effect executing means is
It is provided with a plurality of execution means for executing the above-mentioned effect, and has a plurality of execution means.
The first effect data execution means is
A means for executing the effect data by a specific execution means (audio channel 2) among the plurality of execution means is provided.
The second effect data execution means is
A gaming machine comprising a means for executing the effect data by an execution means (voice channel 1) different from the specific execution means.

According to the feature qF4, in the above-mentioned delay period, the second part of the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, the execution means is different from the specific execution means. The second production data is executed. When the delay period elapses, the unexecuted part in the second part of the first effect data is continuously executed by the specific execution means. Therefore, the period in which the unexecuted part is executed is the specific execution. The second effect data will be executed together with the execution means different from the means. As a result, immediately after the production is switched from the first production data to the second production data, the production of the first production data and the production of the second production data are mixed to produce the production. Switching can be done smoothly.

<Characteristic qG>
The feature qG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and the modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Characteristic qG1]
A main control means for performing a winning / failing lottery (winning lottery) as to whether or not to generate a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous for the player, and
An effect control means (MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) that controls at least the sound effect based on the control signal from the main control means, and
A production data storage means for storing the first production data (music A first data A1) and the second production data (music A second data A2),
An effect executing means (sound output LSI 97) capable of using the first effect data and the second effect data to execute the effect, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means is
The first effect data execution means for executing the first effect data,
While the first effect data is being executed (time t2 + Δt in FIG. 263), the second effect data executing means for executing the second effect data and the second effect data execution means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature qG1, the execution of the first effect data is started by the first effect data execution means provided in the effect execution means, and the second effect execution means is provided while the first effect data is being executed. Execution of the second effect data is started by the effect data execution means. In the effect execution means, when the execution of the second effect data is started in response to a command from the effect control means, between the time when the instruction from the effect control means is received and the execution of the second effect data is started. , A delay of a predetermined period (this period is also referred to as a "delay period" below) may occur. Therefore, after the execution of the first effect data is completed, a configuration in which a command for executing the second effect data is received from the effect control means and the execution of the second effect data is started (hereinafter, referred to as a comparative example configuration) is provided. When considered, according to the configuration of the comparative example, there is a problem that the execution of the first effect data has already been completed in the delay period, and the effect is not executed and the effect is not produced. On the other hand, according to the feature qG1, in the effect executing means, the execution of the second effect data is started at the timing during the execution of the first effect data, and the execution of the second effect data is performed. The execution of the first effect data is continuously performed until the start. Therefore, according to the feature qG1, even if the delay period occurs, the effect is not interrupted because the execution of the first effect data is continuously performed in the delay period. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the production is interrupted. Therefore, according to the feature qG1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic qG2]
The gaming machine described in the feature qG1.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first effect data and the second effect data each include a portion in which a common effect is recorded.

According to the feature qG2, it is possible to repeatedly execute (reproduce) a portion in which a common effect is recorded, for example, a melody portion of a musical piece.

[Characteristic qG3]
The gaming machine according to the feature qG1 or the feature qG2.
The effect executing means is
It is provided with a plurality of execution means for executing the above-mentioned effect, and has a plurality of execution means.
The first effect data execution means is
A means for executing the first effect data by a specific execution means (voice channel 1) among the plurality of execution means is provided.
The second effect data execution means is
A gaming machine comprising means for executing the second effect data by the specific execution means (voice channel 1).

According to the feature qG3, in the above-mentioned delay period, the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, the second effect data is executed by the specific execution means. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the effect from the first effect data to the second effect data without interruption.

[Characteristic qG4]
The gaming machine according to the feature qG1 or the feature qG2.
The effect executing means is
It is provided with a plurality of execution means for executing the above-mentioned effect, and has a plurality of execution means.
The first effect data execution means is
A means for executing the first effect data by a specific execution means (voice channel 1) among the plurality of execution means is provided.
The second effect data execution means is
A gaming machine comprising means for executing the second effect data by an execution means (voice channel 2) different from the specific execution means.

According to the feature qG4, in the above-mentioned delay period, the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, the second effect data is generated by the effect means different from the specific effect means. Will be executed. When the delay period elapses, the continuous portion is executed because the portion continuous with the portion executed in the delay period (hereinafter, also referred to as the continuous portion) in the first effect data is continuously executed by the specific effect means. During this period, the second effect data is also executed in the effect means different from the specific effect means. As a result, immediately after the production is switched from the first production data to the second production data, the production of the first production data and the production of the second production data are mixed, and the switching of the production is smooth. It can be carried out.

<Characteristic qH group>
The feature qH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and the modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Characteristic qH1]
A main control means for performing a winning / failing lottery (winning lottery) as to whether or not to generate a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous for the player, and
An effect control means (MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) that controls at least the sound effect based on the control signal from the main control means, and
A production data storage means for storing production data (music A second data A2),
An effect executing means (sound output LSI97) for executing an effect using the effect data, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means is
The first effect data execution means for executing the effect data,
In the middle of executing the effect data (time t3 + Δt in FIG. 263), a second effect data executing means for executing the effect data, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature qH1, execution of the effect data (hereinafter, also referred to as the first effect data) is started by the effect execution means, and the same effect as the effect data executed for the first time is performed while the effect data is being executed. Execution of the data (hereinafter, also referred to as the second production data) is started. In the effect execution means, when the execution of the second effect data is started in response to the instruction from the effect control means, from the time when the instruction from the effect control means is received until the execution of the second effect data is started. In the meantime, a delay of a predetermined period (this period is also referred to as a "delay period") may occur. Therefore, after the execution of the first effect data is completed, the instruction for executing the second effect data is received from the effect control means and the execution of the second effect data is started (hereinafter, the configuration of the comparative example). According to the configuration of the comparative example, the execution has already been completed up to the end of the first production data in the delay period, and there is a problem that the production is not executed and no production is performed. there were. On the other hand, according to the feature qH1, in the effect executing means, the execution of the second effect data is started at the timing during the execution of the first effect data, and the second effect data is executed. The execution of the first effect data is continuously performed until the execution of the first effect data is started. Therefore, according to the feature qH1, even if the delay period occurs, the effect is not interrupted because the first effect data is continuously executed in the delay period. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the production is interrupted. Therefore, according to the feature qH1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic qH2]
The gaming machine described in the feature qH1.
The effect executing means is
It is provided with a plurality of execution means for executing the above-mentioned effect, and has a plurality of execution means.
The first effect data execution means is
A means for executing the effect data by a specific execution means (audio channel 1) among the plurality of execution means is provided.
The second effect data execution means is
A gaming machine comprising means for executing the effect data by the specific execution means (voice channel 1).

According to the feature qH2, in the above-mentioned delay period, the execution of the first effect data is continuously performed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, the second effect data is executed by the specific execution means. Is switched to the first production data and executed. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the effect from the first effect data to the second effect data without interruption.

[Characteristic qH3]
The gaming machine described in the feature qH1.
The effect executing means is
It is provided with a plurality of execution means for executing the above-mentioned effect, and has a plurality of execution means.
The first effect data execution means is
A means for executing the effect data by a specific execution means (audio channel 2) among the plurality of execution means is provided.
The second effect data execution means is
A gaming machine comprising a means for executing the effect data by an execution means (voice channel 1) different from the specific execution means.

According to the feature qH3, in the above-mentioned delay period, the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, the second effect is performed by the execution means different from the specific execution means. The data is executed. When the delay period elapses, the unexecuted portion of the first effect data is continuously executed by the specific execution means, so that the period during which the unexecuted portion is executed is different from the specific execution means. The second effect data is also executed in the execution means. As a result, immediately after the production is switched from the first production data to the second production data, the production of the first production data and the production of the second production data are mixed to produce the production. Switching can be done smoothly.

<Characteristic qI group>
The feature qI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and the modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Characteristic qI1]
A main control means for performing a winning / failing lottery (winning lottery) as to whether or not to generate a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous for the player, and
An effect control means (MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) that controls at least the sound effect based on the control signal from the main control means, and
The effect execution means (for sound output LSI97 + audio data) in which the first effect data (music A first data_main part A12) and the second effect data (music A second data_main part A21) can be used to execute the effect. ROM98) and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect control means is
A first instruction means (means for transmitting the music A first data reproduction start command CA1) for instructing the effect execution means to execute the first effect data, and
A second instruction means (means for transmitting the music A second data reproduction start command CA2) that instructs the effect execution means to execute the second effect data following the first effect data.
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
Upon receiving an instruction to execute the first effect data from the effect control means, the first effect data execution means for executing the first effect data and the first effect data execution means.
When the execution of the first effect data is completed, the specific effect data execution means for executing the specific effect data (music A first data_afterglow part A13) following the first effect data, and
Upon receiving an instruction to execute the second effect data from the effect control means, the second effect data execution means for executing the second effect data and the second effect data execution means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature qI1, the execution of the first effect data is started when the first effect data execution means provided in the effect execution means receives an instruction to execute the first effect data from the effect control means. When the execution of the first effect data is completed by the specific effect data execution means provided in the effect execution means, the execution of the specific effect data is started following the first effect data. Then, when the second effect data execution means provided in the effect execution means receives an instruction to execute the second effect data from the effect control means, the execution of the second effect data is started. In the effect execution means, when the execution of the second effect data is started in response to the instruction from the effect control means, between the time when the instruction from the effect control means is received and the execution of the second effect data is started. , A delay of a predetermined period (this period is also referred to as a "delay period" below) may occur. According to the feature qI1, when the execution of the first effect data is completed, the specific effect data is executed following the first effect data, so that the second instruction means provided in the effect control means is the first effect data. If the configuration is such that the execution of the second effect data is instructed when the execution of the second effect data is completed, the specific effect data will be executed in the delay period. Here, as a comparative example, consider a configuration in which the effect execution means does not execute the specific effect data when the execution of the first effect data is completed. According to the comparative example, when the execution of the second effect data is executed after the execution of the first effect data is completed, the effect is not executed and the effect is not produced in the delay period. Therefore, according to the configuration of the comparative example, the effect may be interrupted between the end of the execution of the first effect data and the start of the execution of the second effect data. On the other hand, according to the feature qI1, the specific effect data is executed during the delay period, and the effect is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the production is interrupted. Therefore, according to the feature qI1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic qI2]
The gaming machine described in the feature qI1.
The specific effect data is a gaming machine characterized by being effect data (music A first data_afterglow portion A13) representing an effect that continues from the end effect represented by the end portion of the first effect data. ..

According to the feature qI2, the delay period described above can be filled with the effect that continues from the end effect represented by the end part of the first effect data, so that the effect is interrupted without impairing the flow of the effect. It can be further resolved.

[Characteristic qI3]
The gaming machine according to the feature qI1 or the feature qI2.
The effect executing means is
It is provided with a plurality of execution means for executing the above-mentioned effect, and has a plurality of execution means.
The first effect data execution means is
A means for executing the first effect data by a specific execution means (voice channel 1) among the plurality of execution means is provided.
The specific effect data execution means is
A means for executing the specific effect data by the specific execution means (audio channel 1) is provided.
The second effect data execution means is
A gaming machine comprising means for executing the second effect data by the specific execution means (voice channel 1).

According to the feature qI3, the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, the specific effect data is executed by the specific execution means in the above-mentioned delay period, and the specific execution means elapses after the delay period. , The second effect data is executed. As a result, the switching from the first effect data to the second effect data can be reliably performed without interruption of the effect.

[Characteristic qI4]
The gaming machine according to the feature qI1 or the feature qI2.
The effect executing means is
It is provided with a plurality of execution means for executing the above-mentioned effect, and has a plurality of execution means.
The first effect data execution means is
A means for executing the first effect data by a specific execution means (voice channel 1) among the plurality of execution means is provided.
The specific effect data execution means is
A means for executing the specific effect data by the specific execution means (audio channel 1) is provided.
The second effect data execution means is
A gaming machine comprising means for executing the second effect data by an execution means (voice channel 2) different from the specific execution means.

According to the feature qI4, the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, the specific effect data is executed by the specific execution means in the above-mentioned delay period, and when the delay period elapses, the specific effect data is executed with the specific execution means. The second effect data is executed by different execution means. When the delay period elapses, the unexecuted part of the specific effect data is continuously executed by the specific execution means. Therefore, the period during which the unexecuted part is executed is different from the specific execution means. The second effect data will be executed at the same time. As a result, immediately after the production is switched from the first production data to the second production data, the production of the specific production data and the production of the second production data are mixed to smoothly switch the production. be able to.

<Characteristic qJ group>
The feature qJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and the modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Characteristic qJ1]
A main control means for performing a winning / failing lottery (winning lottery) as to whether or not to generate a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous for the player, and
An effect control means (MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) that controls at least the sound effect based on the control signal from the main control means, and
Production execution means (sound output LSI97 + ROM98 for audio data) that executes production using production data (music A second data_main part A21), and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect control means is
A first instruction means (means for transmitting the music A second data reproduction start command CA2) that gives a first instruction to execute the effect to the effect execution means.
A second instruction means (means for transmitting the music A second data reproduction start command CA2) that gives a second instruction to execute the effect when the effect executed according to the first instruction ends.
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
An effect data executing means that executes the effect data when the first instruction or the second instruction is received from the effect control means.
When the execution of the effect data is completed, the specific effect data execution means for executing the specific effect data (music A second data_afterglow part A22) following the effect data, and the specific effect data execution means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature qJ1, the first instruction means provided in the effect control means gives a first instruction to execute the effect to the effect execution means, and then the second instruction means provided in the effect control means gives the effect. A second instruction is given to the effect executing means. The effect execution means starts the execution of the effect data when the first instruction is received, and starts the execution of the specific effect data following the effect data when the execution of the effect data is completed. Then, the effect execution means starts the execution of the effect data when the second instruction is received, and starts the execution of the specific effect data following the effect data when the execution of the effect data is completed. In the effect execution means, a delay of a predetermined period (this period is also referred to as "delay period") occurs between the time when the instruction to execute the effect is received and the time when the execution of the effect data is started. There is. According to the feature qJ1, when the effect data is repeatedly executed, the specific effect data is started to be executed following the effect data, so that the specific effect data is executed during the delay period and the effect is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the production is interrupted. Therefore, according to the feature qJ1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic qJ2]
Features The gaming machine described in qJ1.
The specific effect data is a gaming machine characterized in that it is effect data representing an effect that continues from the end effect represented by a portion of the effect data at the end.

According to the feature qJ2, the delay period described above can be filled with the effect that continues from the end effect represented by the end part of the effect data, so that the discomfort that the effect is interrupted is further eliminated without impairing the flow of the effect. can do.

[Characteristic qJ3]
The gaming machine according to feature qJ1 or feature qJ2.
The effect executing means is
It is provided with a plurality of execution means for executing the above-mentioned effect, and has a plurality of execution means.
The effect data execution means is
A gaming machine comprising a means for executing the effect data by a specific execution means (voice channel 1) among the plurality of execution means.

According to the feature qJ3, the repeated execution of the effect data is performed by the same specific execution means. As a result, the effect data can be easily and repeatedly executed.

[Characteristic qJ4]
The gaming machine according to feature qJ1 or feature qJ2.
The effect executing means is
It is provided with a plurality of execution means for executing the above-mentioned effect, and has a plurality of execution means.
The effect data execution means is
The nth (n is a positive integer) execution of the effect data is performed by a specific execution means (voice channel 2) among the plurality of execution means, and the n + 1th execution of the effect data is performed by the specific execution means. It is provided with a means to be performed by an execution means (audio channel 1) different from that of the above.
The specific effect data execution means is
A gaming machine comprising means for executing the specific effect data by the specific execution means.

According to the feature qJ4, the nth effect data (n is a positive integer) is executed by the specific execution means, and the specific effect data is executed by the specific execution means in the above-mentioned delay period, and the delay period elapses. Occasionally, the n + 1th effect data is executed by an execution means different from the specific execution means. When the delay period elapses, the unexecuted part of the specific effect data is continuously executed by the specific execution means. Therefore, the period during which the unexecuted part is executed is different from the specific execution means. In, the n + 1th effect data is also executed. As a result, immediately after the production is switched from the nth production data to the n + 1th production data, the production of the specific production data and the production of the n + 1th production data are mixed to switch the production. It can be done smoothly.

<Characteristic qK group>
The feature qK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and the modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Characteristic qK1]
A main control means for performing a winning / failing lottery (winning lottery) as to whether or not to generate a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous for the player, and
An effect control means (MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) that controls at least the sound effect based on the control signal from the main control means, and
The first production data (music A first data A1) including the specific part (music A first data_main part A12) and the related part (music A first data_intro part A11) related to the specific part, and A production data storage means for storing the second production data (music A second data A2) including the specific portion (music A second data_main unit A21), and
An effect executing means (sound output LSI 97) capable of using the first effect data and the second effect data to execute the effect, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect control means is
A first instruction means (means for transmitting the music A first data reproduction start command CA1) for instructing the effect execution means to execute the first effect data, and
A second instruction means (means for transmitting the music A second data reproduction start command CA2) for instructing the execution of the second effect data when the execution of the first effect data is completed in the effect execution means.
When the execution of the second effect data is completed in the effect execution means, the third instruction means (music A second data reproduction start command CA2) instructing the effect execution means to execute the second effect data. Means to send) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature qK1, the first instruction means provided in the effect control means gives an instruction to execute the first effect data to the effect execution means, and the effect execution means ends the execution of the first effect data. In addition, the second instruction means provided in the effect control means gives an instruction to execute the second effect data to the effect execution means. Further, when the execution of the second effect data is completed in the effect execution means, the effect execution means is instructed to execute the second effect data by the third instruction means provided in the effect control means. The effect executing means repeatedly executes the second effect data by receiving an instruction to execute the first effect data, executing the first effect data, and repeatedly receiving an instruction to execute the second effect data. As a result, the first effect data is executed once and the second effect data is executed a plurality of times. As a result, the specific portion provided in both the first effect data and the second effect data can be repeatedly executed three times or more. For example, when the related part of the first production data is the intro part of the music and the specific part of the first production data is the melody part of the music, according to the feature qK1, the intro part is reproduced, and then the melody part. Can be played repeatedly three times or more, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic qK2]
The gaming machine described in the feature qK1.
The first effect data is further located on the most terminal side of the first effect data, and includes an additional part (music A first data_afterglow part A13) that is neither the specific part nor the related part.
The second effect data is further continuous with respect to the specific portion of the second effect data in the time axis direction, and includes an additional portion (music A second data_afterglow portion A22) that is not the specific portion.
The second instruction means is
Within a predetermined period (time t2 in FIG. 263) including the timing when the execution position of the first effect data in the effect execution means reaches the start end of the additional portion included in the first effect data, the effect execution means is used. A means for instructing the execution of the second effect data is provided.
The third instruction means is
Within a predetermined period (time t3 in FIG. 263) including the timing when the execution position of the second effect data in the effect execution means reaches the end of the additional portion included in the second effect data, the effect execution means is used. As a means for instructing the execution of the second effect data,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature qK2, in the effect executing means, there is a delay of a predetermined period between receiving the instruction to execute the second effect data for the first time and starting the execution of the second effect data for the first time. This period may also be referred to below as the "delay period"). According to the feature qK2, since the first effect data includes the additional part on the most terminal side, the additional part of the first effect data is executed in the delay period, and the effect is not interrupted. Further, a delay period may occur between the time when the instruction to execute the second effect data is received at the n (multiple) times and the time when the execution of the second effect data is started at the nth time. According to the feature qK2, since the second effect data includes an additional portion continuous in the time axis direction with respect to the specific portion, the additional portion of the second effect data is executed during the delay period, and the effect may be interrupted. No. As a result, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the production is interrupted. Therefore, according to the feature qK2, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic qK3]
Features The gaming machine described in qK2.
The specific part is a part in which the main part of the specific production is recorded.
The additional portion included in the first effect data is a portion in which an effect accompanying the main part of the specific effect is recorded.
The gaming machine characterized in that the additional portion included in the second effect data is a portion in which an effect associated with the main part of the specific effect is recorded.

According to the feature qK3, since the delay period described above can be filled with the effect accompanying the main part of the specific effect, it is possible to eliminate the discomfort that the effect is interrupted without impairing the flow of the specific effect. Further, according to the feature qK3, the main part of a specific effect, for example, the melody part of a musical piece, can be repeatedly executed (reproduced).

<Characteristic qL group>
The feature qL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and the modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qL1]
A main control means for performing a winning / failing lottery (winning lottery) as to whether or not to generate a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous for the player, and
An effect control means (MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) that controls at least the sound effect based on the control signal from the main control means, and
A production data storage means for storing the first production data (music A first data A1) and the second production data (music A second data A2),
An effect executing means (sound output LSI 97) that is means for executing an effect based on a control signal from the effect control means, and can use the first effect data and the second effect data to execute the effect. ,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The first production data includes a first part (music A first data_main part A12) and a second part (music A first data_afterglow part A13) continuous with respect to the first part in the time axis direction. And, at least
The effect executing means is
A first effect executing means for executing the first effect data is provided.
The period (delay period Δt) from the timing when the execution position of the first effect data reaches the end of the first portion to the start of execution of the second effect data in the effect execution means exceeds a predetermined time. In this case, when both the first effect data and the second effect data are not executed in a specific state (silence state) and the period is equal to or less than the predetermined time, the first effect without configuring the specific state. 2 Production data can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature qL1, the period from the timing when the execution position of the first effect data in the effect execution means reaches the end of the first portion to the start of the execution of the second effect data in the effect execution means is predetermined. When the time is exceeded, both the first effect data and the second effect data may be in a specific state in which they are not executed. On the other hand, when the period is equal to or less than the predetermined time, the second effect data can be executed without configuring the specific state. Therefore, when the above-mentioned period becomes a predetermined time, for example, a long time corresponding to the second part, the specific state is reached, and when the above-mentioned period is not more than the predetermined time, the above-mentioned specification is made. It does not become a state. Thereby, the appearance of the specific state can be controlled by adjusting the timing at which the execution of the second effect data is started. For example, when there is a high possibility (expectation) of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery, the timing for starting the execution of the second production data is delayed so that the period exceeds the predetermined time, and the jackpot is won. When the degree of expectation is not high, the timing for starting the execution of the second effect data is advanced so that the period is equal to or less than the predetermined time, so that the player can experience a specific state. You can have the expectation that you won the jackpot. Therefore, according to the feature qL1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature qL2]
The gaming machine described in the feature qL1.
The effect control means is
A first instruction means (means for transmitting the music A first data reproduction start command CA1) for instructing the effect execution means to execute the first effect data, and
Within a predetermined period (time t2 in FIG. 263) including the timing when the execution position of the first effect data in the effect executing means reaches the end of the first portion, the second effect is given to the effect executing means. A second instruction means for instructing data execution (means for transmitting music A second data reproduction start command CA2) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature qL2, the first instruction means provided in the effect control means gives an instruction to execute the first effect data to the effect execution means, and the execution position of the first effect data in the effect execution means is the first portion. Within a predetermined period including the timing of reaching the end of the second effect data, the second effect control means provided with the effect control means gives an instruction to execute the second effect data to the effect execution means. In the effect execution means, there is a delay of a predetermined period between receiving the instruction to execute the second effect data and starting the execution of the second effect data (this period is also referred to as "delay period" below). May occur. According to the feature qL2, since the first effect data includes the second part continuous in the time axis direction with respect to the first part, the second part of the first effect data is executed in the delay period, and the effect is produced. There is no break. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the production is interrupted. Therefore, according to the feature qL2, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature qL3]
The gaming machine described in the feature qL2,
The first part is a part in which the main part of a specific production is recorded.
The second part is a gaming machine characterized in that the effect accompanying the main part is recorded.

According to the feature qL3, since the delay period described above can be filled with the effect accompanying the main part of the specific effect, it is possible to eliminate the discomfort that the effect is interrupted without impairing the flow of the specific effect.

[Feature qL4]
The gaming machine described in the feature qL3,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the second effect data is the same as the data recorded in the first portion.

According to the feature qL4, the main part of a specific effect, for example, the melody part of a musical piece, can be repeatedly executed (reproduced).

[Feature qL5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features qL2 to the feature qL4.
The effect executing means is
It is provided with a plurality of execution means for executing the above-mentioned effect, and has a plurality of execution means.
The first instruction means is
A means for instructing the execution of the first effect data by a specific execution means (voice channel 1) among the plurality of execution means is provided.
The second instruction means is
A gaming machine comprising means for instructing the execution of the second effect data by the specific execution means (voice channel 1).

According to the feature qL5, in the above-mentioned delay period, the second part of the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, the second effect data is first executed by the specific execution means. It is executed by switching to the second part of the production data. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the effect from the first effect data to the second effect data without interruption.

[Feature qL6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features qL2 to the feature qL4.
The effect executing means is
It is provided with a plurality of execution means for executing the above-mentioned effect, and has a plurality of execution means.
The first instruction means is
A means for instructing the execution of the first effect data by a specific execution means (voice channel 1) among the plurality of execution means is provided.
The second instruction means is
A gaming machine comprising a means for instructing execution of the second effect data by an execution means (voice channel 2) different from the specific execution means.

According to the feature qL6, in the above-mentioned delay period, the second part of the first effect data is executed by the specific execution means, and when the delay period elapses, the execution means different from the specific execution means is the first. 2 Production data is executed. When the delay period elapses, the unexecuted part in the second part of the first effect data is continuously executed by the specific execution means. Therefore, the period in which this unexecuted part is executed is the specific execution means. The second effect data is also executed by the execution means different from the above. As a result, immediately after the production is switched from the first production data to the second production data, the production of the first production data and the production of the second production data are mixed, and the switching of the production is smooth. It can be carried out.

<Characteristic qM group>
The feature qM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and the modifications of the sixth embodiment.

[Feature qM1]
A main control means for performing a winning / failing lottery (winning lottery) as to whether or not to generate a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous for the player, and
An effect control means (MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) that controls at least the sound effect based on the control signal from the main control means, and
A production data storage means for storing the first production data (music A first data A1) and the second production data (music A second data A2),
An effect executing means (sound output LSI 97) capable of using the first effect data and the second effect data to execute the effect, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The effect executing means is
A first execution means (audio channel 1) and a second execution means (audio channel 2) for executing the effect are provided.
The effect control means is
A first instruction means (means for transmitting the music A first data reproduction start command CA1) for instructing the effect execution means to execute the first effect data using the first execution means.
While the first effect data is being executed by the effect executing means (time t2 in FIG. 263), the second effect data is executed for the effect executing means by using the second execution means. 2nd instruction means (means for transmitting music A second data reproduction start command CA2) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature qM1, the first instruction means provided in the effect control means gives an instruction to execute the first effect data to the effect execution means, and the effect execution means is in the middle of executing the first effect data. Then, the second instruction means provided in the effect control means gives an instruction to execute the second effect data to the effect execution means. In the effect execution means, the execution of the first effect data is started in response to the instruction to execute the first effect data, and the execution of the second effect data is started in response to the instruction to execute the second effect data. However, in the effect execution means, there is a delay of a predetermined period between receiving the instruction to execute the second effect data and the start of the execution of the second effect data (this period is hereinafter referred to as "delay period"). Also called) may occur. According to the feature qM1, since the timing at which the execution of the second effect data is instructed is in the middle of the execution of the first effect data, an unexecuted portion remains in the first effect data, which is delayed. During the period, the unexecuted part is executed, and the production is not interrupted. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort that the production is interrupted. Therefore, according to the feature qM1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the feature qM1, in the above-mentioned delay period, the above-mentioned unexecuted portion of the first effect data is executed by the first execution means, and when the delay period elapses, the first execution means is different from the first execution means. The second effect data is executed by the second execution means. When the delay period elapses, a portion continuous with the portion executed in the delay period (hereinafter, also referred to as a continuous portion) in the first effect data is continuously executed in the first execution means, so that the continuous portion is executed. During this period, the second effect data is also executed by the second execution means. As a result, immediately after the production is switched from the first production data to the second production data, the production of the first production data and the production of the second production data are mixed, and the switching of the production is smooth. It can be carried out.

[Feature qM2]
The gaming machine described in the feature qM1.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first effect data and the second effect data each include a portion in which a common effect is recorded.

According to the feature qM2, it is possible to repeatedly execute (reproduce) a portion in which a common effect is recorded, for example, a melody portion of a musical piece.

<Characteristic rA group>
The feature rA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment and its variants 1 to 11.

[Feature rA1]
Displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced to the first position (OFF position) and the second position (ON position),
A state determining means capable of determining the state of the displacement means and
When power is supplied to the gaming machine, if it is determined by the state determination means that it is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state), the first process (RTC effect). When the execution permission flag is executed (the process of turning off the execution permission flag) and it is determined that the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state), the second process (RTC effect execution permission flag is set) is set. Process execution means to execute (process to turn on) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, if it is determined by the state determining means that it is in the first state, the first process is executed and if it is determined that it is in the second state. Since the processing execution means for executing the second processing is provided, the content of the processing to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, it is possible to execute appropriate processing according to the state of the displacement means.

[Feature rA2]
Feature The gaming machine described in rA1.
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect (RTC effect) based on the elapsed time since the gaming machine is activated is provided.
When the state determination means determines that the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is an OFF state), the process execution means executes the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect execution means. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means for setting an impossible state (turning off the RTC effect execution permission flag).

According to this feature, since a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the elapsed time (starting elapsed time) since the gaming machine is activated is provided, a plurality of gaming machines are installed in the island facility. When the plurality of gaming machines are started all at once (simultaneously) by turning on the island power switch of the island equipment in the gaming hall, the activation progress of each gaming machine installed in the island equipment. Since the time is the same, it is possible to start the predetermined effects all at once (at the same time).

However, after turning on the island power switch to start multiple gaming machines installed in the island equipment all at once (simultaneously), the displacement of one gaming machine for the purpose of changing the setting information, for example. The means (power switch 85a) are individually displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to cut off the power supply, and the displacement means (power switch 85a) is again displaced to the first position (OFF position). When the pachinko machine is displaced from the position) to the second position (ON position) and started, the elapsed start time of the one gaming machine deviates from the elapsed start time of the other gaming machines installed in the island facility. Therefore, there arises a problem that the timing of starting the predetermined effect in the one gaming machine is different from that of the other gaming machines. In particular, since it takes about 1 minute to change the setting information, the one gaming machine whose setting information has been changed starts the predetermined effect about 1 minute later than the other gaming machines. become. In general, the time of the predetermined effect is about 5 minutes, so that the predetermined effect of the one gaming machine whose setting information is changed is duplicated and executed in a state of being deviated from the predetermined effect of the other gaming machine. This causes problems such as causing discomfort to the player.

Therefore, in this feature, the processing execution means includes means for setting the predetermined effect execution means to a state in which the predetermined effect execution means cannot execute the predetermined effect when the state determination means determines that the first state is set. Therefore, the displacement means. (Power switch 85a) is displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to cut off the power supply, and then the displacement means (power switch 85a) is displaced from the first position (OFF position). When the game machine is displaced to the second position (ON position) and started, the game machine is set to a state in which a predetermined effect cannot be executed. As a result, since the predetermined effect is not executed in the one gaming machine activated by operating the displacement means (power switch 85a), the predetermined effect in the one game machine is the predetermined effect in the other gaming machine. It is possible to prevent the players from being duplicated and interfering with each other in a state of being displaced from each other, and it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable.

On the other hand, while the displacement means (power switch 85a) of the gaming machine remains in the second position (ON position), the island power switch is displaced from ON to OFF, so that the power supply is cut off, and then the island power switch is turned OFF. When it is started by being displaced from to ON, the game machine is set to a state in which a predetermined effect can be executed, so that it is the same as (or substantially the same as) other game machines installed in the island facility. It is possible to execute a predetermined effect at the timing.

[Feature rA3]
The gaming machine according to the feature rA1 or the feature rA2.
Prescribed information changing means that can change predetermined information (setting information) that is information that determines one privilege grant condition from among multiple privilege grant conditions,
A means of entering a ball that allows a game ball to enter,
A special information acquisition means capable of acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means,
A privilege grant determination means capable of executing a privilege grant determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege grant condition corresponding to the predetermined information.
A privilege granting means capable of executing a privilege granting mode (opening / closing execution mode) in which a privilege is granted to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition,
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (deferred suggestion effect), which is an effect suggesting that the predetermined information has not been changed, and
Equipped with
When the state determining means determines that the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is OFF), the processing executing means executes the suggestion effect by the suggestion effect executing means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for setting an impossible state (turning off the deferred suggestion effect execution permission flag).

Multiple gaming machines are installed in the island equipment, and the gaming machines are individually started and stopped at the same time by the island power switch of the island equipment. When the power supply is cut off or the power supply is started by the operation of the displacement means (power switch 85a), there is a high possibility that the predetermined information has been changed from the previous day (or the previous business day).

According to this feature, the processing execution means includes means for setting the suggestion effect execution means to a state in which the suggestion effect execution means cannot execute the suggestion effect when the state determination means determines that the state is the first state. When it is determined by the means that it is in the first state (when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state), that is, the occurrence of the previous power failure is the displacement means (power switch). In the case of the operation of 85a), the suggestion effect is not executed in the gaming machine after the next activation. Therefore, even though the predetermined information is actually changed from the previous day (or the previous business day), the suggestion effect is executed on the gaming machine, so that the player changes the predetermined information on the gaming machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user mistakenly thinks that the machine has been deferred without being used.

[Feature rA4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features rA1 to the feature rA3.
Equipped with movable means (movable object 99 for production) that can move within a predetermined range,
The process executing means causes the movable means to execute a predetermined operation when the state determining means determines that the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is an ON state). A gaming machine characterized by being provided with means to perform.

According to this feature, the processing execution means includes means for causing the movable means to execute a predetermined operation when it is determined by the state determination means to be in the second state. By visually confirming whether or not the movable means has executed a predetermined operation, it is possible to easily confirm whether the displacement means is determined to be in the first state or the second state. Can be done.

Then, when the administrator or the like notices that the displacement means is determined to be in the second state, the administrator or the like performs work corresponding to the determination that the displacement means is in the second state in the gaming machine. be able to.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of game machines is started and stopped at the same time by an island power switch of an island facility, a displacement means at the time of the previous power interruption. The fact that the state of (power switch 85a) remains ON means that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Goto. Therefore, in such a gaming hall, the manager or the like of the gaming hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect the gaming machine.

[Feature rA5]
Features The gaming machine described in rA4.
A gaming machine characterized in that a process of causing the movable means to execute the predetermined operation includes a process for moving the movable means in a predetermined direction by a predetermined amount.

According to this feature, the process of causing the movable means to execute the predetermined operation includes the process of moving the movable means by a predetermined amount in a predetermined direction, so that the manager or the like of the game hall is executing the predetermined operation. Even if the movable means of the above cannot be visually confirmed, the displacement means is in the first state by visually confirming whether or not the movable means in the state where the predetermined operation has been completed has moved by a predetermined amount. It can be more easily confirmed whether it is determined to be in the second state or in the second state.

[Feature rA6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features rA1 to the feature rA5.
Equipped with a notification means that can execute notification processing
The processing execution means causes the notification means to execute a predetermined notification process when the state determination means determines that the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is an ON state). A gaming machine characterized by having means.

According to this feature, the processing execution means includes means for causing the notification means to execute a predetermined notification process when it is determined by the state determination means to be in the second state. Therefore, it is possible to notice that the displacement means is determined to be in the second state. As a result, the manager or the like can perform work corresponding to the determination that the displacement means is in the second state in the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of game machines is started and stopped at the same time by an island power switch of an island facility, a displacement means at the time of the previous power interruption. The fact that the state of (power switch 85a) remains ON means that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Goto. Therefore, in such a gaming hall, the manager or the like of the gaming hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect the gaming machine.

[Feature rA7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features rA1 to the feature rA6.
Equipped with an information output means (external output terminal) that can output information to an external device (hall computer)
The processing execution means causes the information output means to output predetermined information when the state determination means determines that the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is an ON state). A gaming machine characterized by having means.

According to this feature, the processing execution means includes means for causing the information output means to output predetermined information when it is determined by the state determination means to be in the second state. Therefore, it is possible to notice that the displacement means is determined to be in the second state. As a result, the manager or the like can perform work corresponding to the determination that the displacement means is in the second state in the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of game machines is started and stopped at the same time by an island power switch of an island facility, a displacement means at the time of the previous power interruption. The fact that the state of (power switch 85a) remains ON means that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Goto. Therefore, in such a gaming hall, the manager or the like of the gaming hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect the gaming machine.

[Feature rA8]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features rA1 to the feature rA7.
When the state determining means determines that the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is ON), the processing executing means sets the displacement means (power switch 85a) to the second state. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with means for displacing to one position (OFF position).

According to this feature, since the processing execution means includes means for displacing the displacement means to the first position when the state determination means determines that the second state is reached, the state determination means determines that the second state is reached. If it is determined, the displacement means is displaced to the first position, and the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the displacement means is determined to be in the second state.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of game machines is started and stopped at the same time by an island power switch of an island facility, a displacement means at the time of the previous power interruption. The fact that the state of (power switch 85a) remains ON means that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Goto. According to this feature, when the state of the displacement means (power switch 85a) at the time of the previous power failure is an abnormal ON state, the displacement means (power switch 85a) is forcibly changed at the next start-up. It is displaced to one position (OFF state), and the power supply to the gaming machine is forcibly cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of abnormality.

[Feature rA9]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features rA1 to the feature rA8.
Equipped with an image display means that can display images
The processing execution means displays a predetermined image (startup demo image) when the state determination means determines that the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is an OFF state). A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means for displaying on the means.

According to this feature, the processing execution means includes means for displaying a predetermined image on the image display means when the state determination means determines that the state is the first state, so that the manager of the game hall or the like can display the image. By confirming whether or not the predetermined image is displayed on the means, it is possible to confirm whether the displacement means is determined to be in the first state or the second state.

Then, when the administrator or the like notices that the displacement means is determined to be in the second state, the administrator or the like performs work corresponding to the determination that the displacement means is in the second state in the gaming machine. be able to.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of game machines is started and stopped at the same time by an island power switch of an island facility, a displacement means at the time of the previous power interruption. The fact that the state of (power switch 85a) remains ON means that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Goto. Therefore, in such a gaming hall, the manager or the like of the gaming hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect the gaming machine.

[Feature rA10]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features rA1 to the feature rA9.
Equipped with a launching means that can launch a game ball,
The processing executing means can launch the gaming ball by the launching means when the state determining means determines that the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is an OFF state). A gaming machine characterized by having a means to make it.

According to this feature, since the processing execution means includes means for enabling the launching means to launch the game ball when the state determining means determines that the first state is determined, the player can use the state determining means. When it is determined that the game is in the first state, it is possible to play a game on the gaming machine. On the other hand, when it is determined by the state determining means that the gaming ball is in the second state, the processing that enables the gaming ball to be launched is not executed in the gaming machine, so that the player is in the second state by the state determining means. If it is determined, the game cannot be played on the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state determining means has determined that the second state is present.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of game machines is started and stopped at the same time by an island power switch of an island facility, a displacement means at the time of the previous power interruption. The fact that the state of (power switch 85a) remains ON means that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Goto. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determination means determines that the second state is reached, the gaming machine does not execute the process of enabling the launch of the gaming ball. Therefore, the state determination means determines the second state. It is possible to prevent the gaming machine from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that it is determined to be in two states.

[Feature rA11]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features rA1 to the feature rA10.
A ball entry means (first starting port 33, etc.) through which a game ball can enter, and
A detection means (ball entry detection sensor) capable of detecting the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, and
Equipped with
The processing execution means can detect the game ball by the detection means when the state determination means determines that the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is an OFF state). A gaming machine characterized by having a means to make it.

According to this feature, the processing execution means includes means for enabling the detection means to detect the game ball when the state determination means determines that the first state is reached, so that the player can use the state determination means. When it is determined that the first state is reached, it is possible to play a game on the gaming machine. On the other hand, when the state determination means determines that the second state is reached, the gaming machine does not execute the process that enables the detection means to detect the gaming ball, so that the player can perform the second state by the state determination means. If it is determined that the above is the case, the game cannot be played on the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state determining means has determined that the second state is present.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of game machines is started and stopped at the same time by an island power switch of an island facility, a displacement means at the time of the previous power interruption. The fact that the state of (power switch 85a) remains ON means that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Goto. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determination means determines that the second state is reached, the gaming machine does not execute the process that enables the detection means to detect the gaming ball, so that the state determination is performed. It is possible to prevent the gaming machine from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the second state is determined by the means.

[Feature rA12]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features rA1 to the feature rA11.
Equipped with special information acquisition means that can acquire special information
When the state determination means determines that the process execution means is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is an OFF state), the special information acquisition means acquires the special information. A gaming machine characterized by having means to enable the game.

According to this feature, the processing execution means includes means for enabling the special information acquisition means to acquire special information when the state determination means determines that the first state is determined, so that the player can determine the state. When it is determined by the means that it is in the first state, it is possible to play a game on the gaming machine. On the other hand, when the state determination means determines that the second state is reached, the gaming machine does not execute the process that enables the special information acquisition means to acquire the special information, so that the player can use the state determination means to perform the second state. If it is determined that there are two states, the game cannot be played on the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state determining means has determined that the second state is present.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of game machines is started and stopped at the same time by an island power switch of an island facility, a displacement means at the time of the previous power interruption. The fact that the state of (power switch 85a) remains ON means that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Goto. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determination means determines that the second state is reached, the gaming machine does not execute a process that enables the special information acquisition means to acquire special information. It is possible to prevent the gaming machine from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state determination means has determined that the second state is present.

[Feature rA13]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features rA1 to the feature rA12.
Equipped with a variable display means that can execute variable display of identification information (special symbol)
When the state determination means determines that the process execution means is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is an OFF state), the change display means changes the identification information. A gaming machine characterized by having a means for enabling the execution of.

According to this feature, the processing execution means includes means for enabling the variable display means to execute the variable display of the identification information when the state determination means determines that the first state is set. When the state determination means determines that the first state is reached, the gaming machine can play a game. On the other hand, when the state determination means determines that the second state is reached, the gaming machine does not execute the process that enables the variable display means to execute the variable display of the identification information, so that the player can perform the state determination means. If it is determined to be in the second state, the gaming machine cannot play the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state determining means has determined that the second state is present.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of game machines is started and stopped at the same time by an island power switch of an island facility, a displacement means at the time of the previous power interruption. The fact that the state of (power switch 85a) remains ON means that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Goto. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determination means determines that the second state is reached, the gaming machine does not execute the process that enables the variable display means to execute the variable display of the identification information. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state determining means has determined that the second state is present.

[Feature rA14]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features rA1 to the feature rA13.
It is equipped with a privilege grant determination means that can execute a privilege grant determination, which is a determination as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player.
When the state determination means determines that the process execution means is in the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is an OFF state), the privilege grant determination means determines the privilege grant. A gaming machine characterized by having means to enable execution.

According to this feature, the processing execution means includes means for enabling the privilege grant determination means to execute the privilege grant determination when the state determination means determines that the first state is determined, so that the player can perform the state. When the determination means determines that the first state is reached, the gaming machine can play a game. On the other hand, when the state determination means determines that the second state is reached, the gaming machine does not execute the process that enables the privilege grant determination means to execute the privilege grant determination, so that the player can use the status determination means to execute the process. If it is determined to be in the second state, the gaming machine cannot play a game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state determining means has determined that the second state is present.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of game machines is started and stopped at the same time by an island power switch of an island facility, a displacement means at the time of the previous power interruption. The fact that the state of (power switch 85a) remains ON means that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Goto. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determination means determines that the second state is reached, the gaming machine does not execute the process that enables the privilege grant determination means to execute the privilege grant determination. , It is possible to prevent the gaming machine from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state determination means has determined that the second state is present.

[Feature rA15]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features rA1 to the feature rA14.
Equipped with a privilege granting means that can execute a privilege granting mode (opening / closing execution mode) that grants a privilege to a player.
When the state determining means determines that the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is OFF), the processing executing means executes the privilege granting mode by the privilege granting means. A gaming machine characterized by having means to enable the game.

According to this feature, since the processing execution means includes means for enabling the privilege granting means to execute the privilege granting mode when the state determination means determines that the first state is determined, the player can determine the status. When it is determined by the means that it is in the first state, it is possible to play a game on the gaming machine. On the other hand, when the state determination means determines that the second state is reached, the gaming machine does not execute the process that enables the privilege granting means to execute the privilege granting mode. If it is determined that there are two states, the game cannot be played on the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state determining means has determined that the second state is present.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of game machines is started and stopped at the same time by an island power switch of an island facility, a displacement means at the time of the previous power interruption. The fact that the state of (power switch 85a) remains ON means that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Goto. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determination means determines that the second state is reached, the gaming machine does not execute the process that enables the privilege granting means to execute the privilege granting mode. It is possible to prevent the gaming machine from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state determination means has determined that the second state is present.

<Characteristic rB group>
The feature rB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rB1]
Displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced to the first position (OFF position) and the second position (ON position),
A state determining means capable of determining the state of the displacement means and
When power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determination means determines that the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is OFF), the first process is executed. , A process execution means for executing the second process when it is determined to be in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state).
A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect (RTC effect),
When the process executing means executes the second process, a means for causing the predetermined effect executing means to execute the predetermined effect (RTC effect) based on the elapse of a predetermined period after the start of power supply, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, if it is determined by the state determining means that it is in the first state, the first process is executed and if it is determined that it is in the second state. Since the processing execution means for executing the second processing is provided, the content of the processing to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, it is possible to execute appropriate processing according to the state of the displacement means.

Further, according to this feature, since a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the elapse of a predetermined period after the start of power supply is provided, a game in which a plurality of gaming machines are installed in the island equipment. In the hall, when the plurality of gaming machines are started all at once (simultaneously) by turning on the island power switch of the island equipment, the elapsed activation time of each gaming machine installed in the island equipment is Since they are the same, it is possible to start predetermined effects all at once (at the same time).

However, after turning on the island power switch to start multiple gaming machines installed in the island facility all at once (simultaneously), the displacement of one gaming machine for the purpose of changing the setting information, for example. The means (power switch 85a) are individually displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to cut off the power supply, and the displacement means (power switch 85a) is again displaced to the first position (OFF position). When the pachinko machine is displaced from the position) to the second position (ON position) and started, the elapsed start time of the one gaming machine deviates from the elapsed start time of the other gaming machines installed in the island facility. Therefore, there arises a problem that the timing of starting the predetermined effect in the one gaming machine is different from that of the other gaming machine. In particular, since it takes about 1 minute to change the setting information, the one gaming machine whose setting information has been changed starts the predetermined effect about 1 minute later than the other gaming machines. become. In general, the time of the predetermined effect is about 5 minutes, so that the predetermined effect of the one gaming machine whose setting information is changed is duplicated and executed in a state of being deviated from the predetermined effect of the other gaming machine. This causes problems such as causing discomfort to the player.

Therefore, in this feature, when the process executing means executes the second process, the predetermined effect (RTC effect) is applied to the predetermined effect executing means based on the elapse of a predetermined period after the start of power supply. Since the means for executing the game is provided, the power supply is cut off due to the displacement of the island power switch from ON to OFF while the displacement means (power switch 85a) of the gaming machine remains in the second position (ON position). When the island power switch is started by being displaced from OFF to ON, the game machine is set to a state in which a predetermined effect can be executed, and when a predetermined period elapses after the start of power supply, the predetermined effect is performed. Since it is executed, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect at the same timing (or substantially the same) as other game machines installed in the island facility.

On the other hand, the displacement means (power switch 85a) is displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to cut off the power supply, and then the displacement means (power switch 85a) is displaced to the first position (power switch 85a). When the game machine is displaced from the OFF position) to the second position (ON position) and started, the game machine is set to a state in which the predetermined effect cannot be executed. As a result, since the predetermined effect is not executed in the one gaming machine activated by operating the displacement means (power switch 85a), the predetermined effect in the one game machine is the predetermined effect in the other gaming machine. It is possible to prevent the players from being duplicated and interfering with each other in a state of being displaced from each other, and it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable.

<Characteristic rC group>
The feature rC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rC1]
Displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced to the first position (OFF position) and the second position (ON position),
A state determining means capable of determining the state of the displacement means and
When power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determination means determines that the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is OFF), the first process is executed. , A process execution means for executing the second process when it is determined to be in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state).
Prescribed information changing means that can change predetermined information (setting information) that is information that determines one privilege grant condition from among multiple privilege grant conditions,
A means of entering a ball that allows a game ball to enter,
A special information acquisition means capable of acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means,
A privilege grant determination means capable of executing a privilege grant determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege grant condition corresponding to the predetermined information.
A privilege granting means capable of executing a privilege granting mode (opening / closing execution mode) in which a privilege is granted to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition,
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (deferred suggestion effect), which is an effect suggesting that the predetermined information has not been changed, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
When the state determining means determines that the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is OFF), the processing executing means executes the suggestion effect by the suggestion effect executing means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for setting an impossible state (turning off the deferred suggestion effect execution permission flag).

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, if it is determined by the state determining means that it is in the first state, the first process is executed and if it is determined that it is in the second state. Since the processing execution means for executing the second processing is provided, the content of the processing to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, it is possible to execute appropriate processing according to the state of the displacement means.

In addition, in a gaming hall where a plurality of gaming machines are installed in the island equipment and the power supply to the plurality of gaming machines is started and stopped all at once by the island power switch of the island equipment, the gaming machines are used. However, if the power supply is cut off or the power supply is started by the operation of the individual displacement means (power switch 85a), it is highly possible that the predetermined information has been changed from the previous day (or the previous business day). ..

According to this feature, the processing execution means includes means for setting the suggestion effect execution means to a state in which the suggestion effect execution means cannot execute the suggestion effect when the state determination means determines that the state is the first state. When it is determined by the means that it is in the first state (when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state), that is, the occurrence of the previous power failure is the displacement means (power switch). In the case of the operation of 85a), the suggestion effect is not executed in the gaming machine after the next activation. Therefore, even though the predetermined information is actually changed from the previous day (or the previous business day), the suggestion effect is executed on the gaming machine, so that the player changes the predetermined information on the gaming machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user mistakenly thinks that the machine has been deferred without being used.

<Characteristic rD group>
The feature rD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from variant 1 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rD1]
Displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced to the first position (OFF position) and the second position (ON position),
A state determining means capable of determining the state of the displacement means and
When power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determination means determines that the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is OFF), the first process is executed. , A process execution means for executing the second process when it is determined to be in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state).
Movable means (movable object 99 for production) that can move within a predetermined range,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
When the power is cut off under the first condition (when the power is cut off when the power switch 85a is OFF), the movable means is set to a predetermined position (origin position).
In the case of power cutoff under the second condition (when the power supply is cut off while the power switch 85a is ON), the movable means is configured to be located at a specific position (maximum position) different from the predetermined position. A featured gaming machine.

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, if it is determined by the state determining means that it is in the first state, the first process is executed and if it is determined that it is in the second state. Since the processing execution means for executing the second processing is provided, the content of the processing to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, it is possible to execute appropriate processing according to the state of the displacement means.

According to this feature, in the case of power cutoff under the first condition, the movable means is positioned at a predetermined position, and in the case of power cutoff under the second condition, the movable means is different from the predetermined position. Since it is configured to be located at a specific position, has the manager of the game hall determined that the displacement means is in the first state by visually confirming whether or not the movable means is in the predetermined position? , Or it can be easily confirmed whether it is determined to be the second state.

Then, when the administrator or the like notices that the displacement means is determined to be in the second state, the administrator or the like performs work corresponding to the determination that the displacement means is in the second state in the gaming machine. be able to.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of game machines is started and stopped at the same time by an island power switch of an island facility, a displacement means at the time of the previous power interruption. The fact that the state of (power switch 85a) remains ON means that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Goto. Therefore, in such a gaming hall, the manager or the like of the gaming hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect the gaming machine.

[Feature rD2]
Feature The gaming machine described in rD1.
The predetermined position is an origin position which is one end of the predetermined range.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific position is the other end of the predetermined range and is the position most moved from the origin position (maximum position).

According to this feature, the predetermined position is the origin position which is one end of the predetermined range, and the specific position is the other end of the predetermined range and is the position most moved from the origin position. The manager or the like can easily confirm at a glance whether the movable means is in a predetermined position or a specific position.

<Characteristic rE group>
The feature rE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from variant 2 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rE1]
Displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced to the first position (OFF position) and the second position (ON position),
A state determining means capable of determining the state of the displacement means and
When power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determination means determines that the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is OFF), the first process is executed. , A process execution means for executing the second process when it is determined to be in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state).
Notification means that can execute notification processing and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The processing execution means causes the notification means to execute a predetermined notification process when the state determination means determines that the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is an ON state). A gaming machine characterized by having means.

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, if it is determined by the state determining means that it is in the first state, the first process is executed and if it is determined that it is in the second state. Since the processing execution means for executing the second processing is provided, the content of the processing to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, it is possible to execute appropriate processing according to the state of the displacement means.

Further, according to this feature, the processing execution means includes means for causing the notification means to execute a predetermined notification process when the state determination means determines that the second state is reached, so that the manager of the gaming machine or the like is provided. On the other hand, it is possible to notice that the displacement means is determined to be in the second state. As a result, the manager or the like can perform work corresponding to the determination that the displacement means is in the second state in the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of game machines is started and stopped at the same time by an island power switch of an island facility, a displacement means at the time of the previous power interruption. The fact that the state of (power switch 85a) remains ON means that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Goto. Therefore, in such a gaming hall, the manager or the like of the gaming hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect the gaming machine.

<Characteristic rF group>
The feature rF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from variant 3 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rF1]
Displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced to the first position (OFF position) and the second position (ON position),
A state determining means capable of determining the state of the displacement means and
When power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determination means determines that the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is OFF), the first process is executed. , A process execution means for executing the second process when it is determined to be in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state).
Information output means (external output terminal) that can output information to an external device (hall computer),
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The processing execution means causes the information output means to output predetermined information when the state determination means determines that the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is an ON state). A gaming machine characterized by having means.

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, if it is determined by the state determining means that it is in the first state, the first process is executed and if it is determined that it is in the second state. Since the processing execution means for executing the second processing is provided, the content of the processing to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, it is possible to execute appropriate processing according to the state of the displacement means.

Further, according to this feature, the processing execution means includes means for outputting predetermined information to the information output means when the state determination means determines that the second state is reached, so that the manager of the gaming machine or the like is provided. On the other hand, it is possible to notice that the displacement means is determined to be in the second state. As a result, the manager or the like can perform work corresponding to the determination that the displacement means is in the second state in the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of game machines is started and stopped at the same time by an island power switch of an island facility, a displacement means at the time of the previous power interruption. The fact that the state of (power switch 85a) remains ON means that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Goto. Therefore, in such a gaming hall, the manager or the like of the gaming hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect the gaming machine.

<Characteristic rG group>
The feature rG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from variant 4 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rG1]
Displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced to the first position (OFF position) and the second position (ON position),
A state determining means capable of determining the state of the displacement means and
When power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determination means determines that the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is OFF), the first process is executed. , A process execution means for executing the second process when it is determined to be in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state).
It is a gaming machine equipped with
When the state determining means determines that the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is ON), the processing executing means sets the displacement means (power switch 85a) to the second state. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with means for displacing to one position (OFF position).

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, if it is determined by the state determining means that it is in the first state, the first process is executed and if it is determined that it is in the second state. Since the processing execution means for executing the second processing is provided, the content of the processing to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, it is possible to execute appropriate processing according to the state of the displacement means.

Then, according to this feature, since the processing execution means includes means for displacing the displacement means to the first position when it is determined by the state determination means to be in the second state, the state determination means sets the displacement means in the second state. If it is determined to be present, the displacement means is displaced to the first position, and the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is cut off.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the displacement means is determined to be in the second state.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of game machines is started and stopped at the same time by an island power switch of an island facility, a displacement means at the time of the previous power interruption. The fact that the state of (power switch 85a) remains ON means that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Goto. According to this feature, when the state of the displacement means (power switch 85a) at the time of the previous power failure is an abnormal ON state, the displacement means (power switch 85a) is forcibly changed at the next start-up. It is displaced to one position (OFF state), and the power supply to the gaming machine is forcibly cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of abnormality.

<Characteristic rH group>
The feature rH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from variant 5 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rH1]
Displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced to the first position (OFF position) and the second position (ON position),
A state determining means capable of determining the state of the displacement means and
When power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determination means determines that the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is OFF), the first process is executed. , A process execution means for executing the second process when it is determined to be in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state).
Image display means that can display images and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The processing execution means displays a predetermined image (startup demo image) when the state determination means determines that the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is an OFF state). A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means for displaying on the means.

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, if it is determined by the state determining means that it is in the first state, the first process is executed and if it is determined that it is in the second state. Since the processing execution means for executing the second processing is provided, the content of the processing to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, it is possible to execute appropriate processing according to the state of the displacement means.

Further, according to this feature, the processing execution means includes means for displaying a predetermined image on the image display means when the state determination means determines that the state is the first state, so that the manager of the game hall or the like can use the means. By confirming whether or not the predetermined image is displayed on the image display means, it is possible to confirm whether the displacement means is determined to be in the first state or the second state. ..

Then, when the administrator or the like notices that the displacement means is determined to be in the second state, the administrator or the like performs work corresponding to the determination that the displacement means is in the second state in the gaming machine. be able to.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of game machines is started and stopped at the same time by an island power switch of an island facility, a displacement means at the time of the previous power interruption. The fact that the state of (power switch 85a) remains ON means that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Goto. Therefore, in such a gaming hall, the manager or the like of the gaming hall can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect the gaming machine.

<Characteristic rI group>
The feature rI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the modification 6 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rI1]
Displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced to the first position (OFF position) and the second position (ON position),
A state determining means capable of determining the state of the displacement means and
When power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determination means determines that the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is OFF), the first process is executed. , A process execution means for executing the second process when it is determined to be in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state).
A launching means that can launch a game ball,
When the process executing means executes the second process, a predetermined condition is satisfied in a predetermined period after the power supply is started (the game permission switch is pressed by the manager of the game hall or the like). A means for enabling the launching means to launch the game ball based on what has been done), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, if it is determined by the state determining means that it is in the first state, the first process is executed and if it is determined that it is in the second state. Since the processing execution means for executing the second processing is provided, the content of the processing to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, it is possible to execute appropriate processing according to the state of the displacement means.

Then, according to this feature, when the processing execution means executes the second processing, the gaming ball by the launching means is based on the fact that a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied in a predetermined period after the power supply is started. Since the player is provided with a means for enabling the firing of the power, the player is predetermined for a predetermined period after the power supply is started even if the state determination means determines that the second state is provided. If the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the game can be played on the gaming machine. On the other hand, when the state determination means determines that the second state is reached and the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the predetermined period after the power supply is started, the gaming machine is used. Since the process that enables the launch of the gaming ball is not executed, the player cannot play the game on the gaming machine. Therefore, it is said that the possibility of abnormality has been eliminated while suppressing the game from being played in the gaming machine while the state determining means has determined that the gaming machine is in the second state. If the manager or the like of the hall recognizes that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the player can play the game on the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of game machines is started and stopped at the same time by an island power switch of an island facility, a displacement means at the time of the previous power interruption. The fact that the state of (power switch 85a) remains ON means that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Goto. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determination means determines that the second state is reached, the gaming machine does not execute the process of enabling the launch of the gaming ball. Therefore, the state determination means determines the second state. It is possible to prevent the gaming machine from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that it is determined to be in two states. Then, when the manager or the like of the game hall recognizes that the possibility of abnormality has been eliminated and the manager or the like satisfies the predetermined conditions, the player can play the game on the game machine. It becomes.

<Characteristic rJ group>
The feature rJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the variants 7 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rJ1]
Displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced to the first position (OFF position) and the second position (ON position),
A state determining means capable of determining the state of the displacement means and
When power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determination means determines that the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is OFF), the first process is executed. , A process execution means for executing the second process when it is determined to be in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state).
A ball entry means (first starting port 33, etc.) through which a game ball can enter, and
A detection means (ball entry detection sensor) capable of detecting the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, and
When the process executing means executes the second process, a predetermined condition is satisfied in a predetermined period after the power supply is started (the game permission switch is pressed by the manager of the game hall or the like). A means that enables the detection means to detect the game ball based on what has been done), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, if it is determined by the state determining means that it is in the first state, the first process is executed and if it is determined that it is in the second state. Since the processing execution means for executing the second processing is provided, the content of the processing to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, it is possible to execute appropriate processing according to the state of the displacement means.

Then, according to this feature, when the processing execution means executes the second processing, the gaming ball by the detection means is based on the fact that a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied in a predetermined period after the power supply is started. Since the player is provided with a means for enabling the detection of the above, the player is predetermined for a predetermined period after the power supply is started even when the state determination means determines that the second state is reached. If the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the game can be played on the gaming machine. On the other hand, when the state determination means determines that the second state is reached and the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the predetermined period after the power supply is started, the gaming machine is used. Since the process that enables the detection of the gaming ball by the detecting means is not executed, the player cannot play the game on the gaming machine. Therefore, it is said that the possibility of abnormality has been eliminated while suppressing the game from being played in the gaming machine while the state determining means has determined that the gaming machine is in the second state. If the manager or the like of the hall recognizes that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the player can play the game on the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of game machines is started and stopped at the same time by an island power switch of an island facility, a displacement means at the time of the previous power interruption. The fact that the state of (power switch 85a) remains ON means that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Goto. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determination means determines that the second state is reached, the gaming machine does not execute the process that enables the detection means to detect the gaming ball, so that the state determination is performed. It is possible to prevent the gaming machine from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the second state is determined by the means. Then, when the manager or the like of the game hall recognizes that the possibility of abnormality has been eliminated and the manager or the like satisfies the predetermined conditions, the player can play the game on the game machine. It becomes.

<Characteristic rK group>
The feature rK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the modifications 8 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rK1]
Displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced to the first position (OFF position) and the second position (ON position),
A state determining means capable of determining the state of the displacement means and
When power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determination means determines that the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is OFF), the first process is executed. , A process execution means for executing the second process when it is determined to be in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state).
Special information acquisition means that can acquire special information,
When the process executing means executes the second process, a predetermined condition is satisfied in a predetermined period after the power supply is started (the game permission switch is pressed by the manager of the game hall or the like). A means that enables the special information acquisition means to acquire the special information based on what has been done), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, if it is determined by the state determining means that it is in the first state, the first process is executed and if it is determined that it is in the second state. Since the processing execution means for executing the second processing is provided, the content of the processing to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, it is possible to execute appropriate processing according to the state of the displacement means.

Then, according to this feature, when the processing execution means executes the second processing, the special information acquisition means is used based on the fact that a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied in a predetermined period after the power supply is started. Since the player is provided with means for enabling acquisition of special information, the player determines in advance a predetermined period after the power supply is started even if the state determination means determines that the second state is reached. If the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the game can be played on the gaming machine. On the other hand, when the state determination means determines that the second state is reached and the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the predetermined period after the power supply is started, the gaming machine is used. Since the process that enables the acquisition of special information by the special information acquisition means is not executed, the player cannot play the game on the gaming machine. Therefore, it is said that the possibility of abnormality has been eliminated while suppressing the game from being played in the gaming machine while the state determining means has determined that the gaming machine is in the second state. If the manager or the like of the hall recognizes that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the player can play the game on the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of game machines is started and stopped at the same time by an island power switch of an island facility, a displacement means at the time of the previous power interruption. The fact that the state of (power switch 85a) remains ON means that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Goto. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determination means determines that the second state is reached, the gaming machine does not execute a process that enables the special information acquisition means to acquire special information. It is possible to prevent the gaming machine from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state determination means has determined that the second state is present. Then, when the manager or the like of the game hall recognizes that the possibility of abnormality has been eliminated and the manager or the like satisfies the predetermined conditions, the player can play the game on the game machine. It becomes.

<Characteristic rL group>
The feature rL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from variants 9 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rL1]
Displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced to the first position (OFF position) and the second position (ON position),
A state determining means capable of determining the state of the displacement means and
When power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determination means determines that the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is OFF), the first process is executed. , A process execution means for executing the second process when it is determined to be in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state).
A variable display means that can execute variable display of identification information (special symbol),
When the process executing means executes the second process, a predetermined condition is satisfied in a predetermined period after the power supply is started (the game permission switch is pressed by the manager of the game hall or the like). A means for enabling the variable display means to execute the variable display of the identification information based on what has been done), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, if it is determined by the state determining means that it is in the first state, the first process is executed and if it is determined that it is in the second state. Since the processing execution means for executing the second processing is provided, the content of the processing to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, it is possible to execute appropriate processing according to the state of the displacement means.

Then, according to this feature, when the process executing means executes the second process, the variable display means identifies based on the fact that a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied in a predetermined period after the power supply is started. Since the player is provided with a means for enabling the execution of the variable display of the information, the player can perform the power supply in a predetermined period after the power supply is started even if the state determination means determines that the state is the second state. If a predetermined condition is satisfied, the game can be played on the gaming machine. On the other hand, when the state determination means determines that the second state is reached and the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the predetermined period after the power supply is started, the gaming machine is used. Since the process that enables the variable display of the identification information to be executed by the variable display means is not executed, the player cannot play the game on the gaming machine. Therefore, it is said that the possibility of abnormality has been eliminated while suppressing the game from being played in the gaming machine while the state determining means has determined that the gaming machine is in the second state. If the manager or the like of the hall recognizes that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the player can play the game on the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of game machines is started and stopped at the same time by an island power switch of an island facility, a displacement means at the time of the previous power interruption. The fact that the state of (power switch 85a) remains ON means that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Goto. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determination means determines that the second state is reached, the gaming machine does not execute the process that enables the variable display means to execute the variable display of the identification information. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state determining means has determined that the second state is present. Then, when the manager or the like of the game hall recognizes that the possibility of abnormality has been eliminated and the manager or the like satisfies the predetermined conditions, the player can play the game on the game machine. It becomes.

<Characteristic rM group>
The feature rM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the variants 10 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rM1]
Displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced to the first position (OFF position) and the second position (ON position),
A state determining means capable of determining the state of the displacement means and
When power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determination means determines that the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is OFF), the first process is executed. , A process execution means for executing the second process when it is determined to be in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state).
A privilege grant determination means that can execute a privilege grant determination, which is a determination as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player,
When the process executing means executes the second process, a predetermined condition is satisfied in a predetermined period after the power supply is started (the game permission switch is pressed by the manager of the game hall or the like). A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for enabling the privilege grant determination means to execute the privilege grant determination based on what has been done).

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, if it is determined by the state determining means that it is in the first state, the first process is executed and if it is determined that it is in the second state. Since the processing execution means for executing the second processing is provided, the content of the processing to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, it is possible to execute appropriate processing according to the state of the displacement means.

Then, according to this feature, when the processing execution means executes the second processing, the privilege granting determination means is based on the fact that a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied in a predetermined period after the power supply is started. Since the player is provided with means for enabling the execution of the privilege grant determination, even if the state determination means determines that the player is in the second state, the player can advance the power supply in a predetermined period after the power supply is started. If the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the game can be played on the gaming machine. On the other hand, when the state determination means determines that the second state is reached and the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the predetermined period after the power supply is started, the gaming machine is used. Since the process that enables the privilege grant determination means to execute the privilege grant determination is not executed, the player cannot play the game on the gaming machine. Therefore, it is said that the possibility of abnormality has been eliminated while suppressing the game from being played in the gaming machine while the state determining means has determined that the gaming machine is in the second state. If the manager or the like of the hall recognizes that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the player can play the game on the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of game machines is started and stopped at the same time by an island power switch of an island facility, a displacement means at the time of the previous power interruption. The fact that the state of (power switch 85a) remains ON means that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Goto. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determination means determines that the second state is reached, the gaming machine does not execute the process that enables the privilege grant determination means to execute the privilege grant determination. , It is possible to prevent the gaming machine from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state determination means has determined that the second state is present. Then, when the manager or the like of the game hall recognizes that the possibility of abnormality has been eliminated and the manager or the like satisfies the predetermined conditions, the player can play the game on the game machine. It becomes.

<Characteristic rN group>
The feature rN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the modifications 11 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rN1]
Displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced to the first position (OFF position) and the second position (ON position),
A state determining means capable of determining the state of the displacement means and
When power is supplied to the gaming machine, if the state determination means determines that the first state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is OFF), the first process is executed. , A process execution means for executing the second process when it is determined to be in the second state (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the ON state).
A privilege granting means that can execute a privilege granting mode (opening / closing execution mode) that grants a privilege to a player,
When the process executing means executes the second process, a predetermined condition is satisfied in a predetermined period after the power supply is started (the game permission switch is pressed by the manager of the game hall or the like). A means for enabling the privilege granting means to execute the privilege granting mode based on what has been done), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to this feature, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, if it is determined by the state determining means that it is in the first state, the first process is executed and if it is determined that it is in the second state. Since the processing execution means for executing the second processing is provided, the content of the processing to be executed can be switched according to the state of the displacement means. As a result, it is possible to execute appropriate processing according to the state of the displacement means.

Then, according to this feature, when the process executing means executes the second process, the privilege given by the privilege granting means is based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied in a predetermined period after the power supply is started. Since the player is provided with a means for enabling the execution of the grant mode, the player determines in advance a predetermined period after the power supply is started even if the state determination means determines that the second state is reached. If the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the game can be played on the gaming machine. On the other hand, when the state determination means determines that the second state is reached and the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the predetermined period after the power supply is started, the gaming machine is used. Since the process that enables the privilege granting mode to be executed by the privilege granting means is not executed, the player cannot play the game on the gaming machine. Therefore, it is said that the possibility of abnormality has been eliminated while suppressing the game from being played in the gaming machine while the state determining means has determined that the gaming machine is in the second state. If the manager or the like of the hall recognizes that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the player can play the game on the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a game hall that is not a game hall in which power supply to a plurality of game machines is started and stopped at the same time by an island power switch of an island facility, a displacement means at the time of the previous power interruption. The fact that the state of (power switch 85a) remains ON means that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Goto. As described above, according to this feature, when the state determination means determines that the second state is reached, the gaming machine does not execute the process that enables the privilege granting means to execute the privilege granting mode. It is possible to prevent the gaming machine from playing a game in a state where there is a possibility of an abnormality that the state determination means has determined that the second state is present. Then, when the manager or the like of the game hall recognizes that the possibility of abnormality has been eliminated and the manager or the like satisfies the predetermined conditions, the player can play the game on the game machine. It becomes.

<Characteristic rO group>
The feature rO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the modifications 12 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rO1]
Displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced to the first position (OFF position) and the second position (ON position),
Movable means (movable object 99 for production) that can move within a predetermined range including a predetermined position (origin position),
The first determination means for determining the position of the displacement means when the supply of electric power from the outside is cut off, and
A means for moving the movable means to a position (maximum position) other than the predetermined position (origin position) when the displacement means is determined to be the second position by the first determination means.
A second determination means for determining the position of the movable means when power is supplied to the gaming machine, and a second determination means.
When the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position, the first process is executed, and when it is determined that the movable means is not in the predetermined position, the second process is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to this feature, when the displacement means is determined to be in the second position by the first determination means, the movable means is provided with a means for moving the movable means to a position other than the predetermined position, so that the power supply from the outside is cut off. When the displacement means is in the first position, the movable means stays in a predetermined position, while when the external power supply is cut off, the movable means is in the second position. Move to a position other than the specified position. That is, the position of the displacement means in the gaming machine when the power supply from the outside is cut off is indicated by the position of the movable means. Therefore, the manager of the gaming hall or the like can easily determine the position of the displacement means in the gaming machine when the power supply from the outside is cut off by visually confirming whether or not the movable means is in the predetermined position. Can be confirmed in.

Then, according to this feature, when it is determined by the second determination means that the movable means is in a predetermined position, the first process is executed, and when it is determined that the movable means is not in a predetermined position, the second process is executed. Since the execution means is provided, the content of the processing to be executed can be switched according to the position of the displacement means when the power supply from the outside is cut off. As a result, it is possible to perform appropriate processing according to the position of the displacement means.

[Feature rO2]
Feature The gaming machine described in rO1.
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect (RTC effect) based on the elapsed time since the gaming machine is activated is provided.
When the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is OFF state), the process execution means is the predetermined effect execution means. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means for setting a state in which execution of a predetermined effect is impossible (turning off the RTC effect execution permission flag).

According to this feature, since a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the elapsed time (starting elapsed time) since the gaming machine is activated is provided, a plurality of gaming machines are installed in the island facility. When the plurality of gaming machines are started all at once (simultaneously) by turning on the island power switch of the island equipment in the gaming hall, the activation progress of each gaming machine installed in the island equipment. Since the time is the same, it is possible to start the predetermined effects all at once (at the same time).

However, after turning on the island power switch to start multiple gaming machines installed in the island equipment all at once (simultaneously), the displacement of one gaming machine for the purpose of changing the setting information, for example. The means (power switch 85a) are individually displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to cut off the power supply, and the displacement means (power switch 85a) is again displaced to the first position (OFF position). When the pachinko machine is displaced from the position) to the second position (ON position) and started, the elapsed start time of the one gaming machine deviates from the elapsed start time of the other gaming machines installed in the island facility. Therefore, there arises a problem that the timing of starting the predetermined effect in the one gaming machine is different from that of the other gaming machine. In particular, since it takes about 1 minute to change the setting information, the one gaming machine whose setting information has been changed starts the predetermined effect about 1 minute later than the other gaming machines. become. In general, the time of the predetermined effect is about 5 minutes, so that the predetermined effect of the one gaming machine whose setting information is changed is duplicated and executed in a state of being deviated from the predetermined effect of the other gaming machine. This causes problems such as causing discomfort to the player.

Therefore, in the present feature, the processing execution means includes means for setting the predetermined effect execution means to a state in which the predetermined effect execution means cannot execute the predetermined effect when the movable means is determined to be in the predetermined position by the second determination unit. , The displacement means (power switch 85a) is displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) and the power supply is cut off, and then the displacement means (power switch 85a) is displaced to the first position (OFF position). When the game machine is displaced from the position) to the second position (ON position) and started, the game machine is set to a state in which the predetermined effect cannot be executed. As a result, since the predetermined effect is not executed in the one gaming machine activated by operating the displacement means (power switch 85a), the predetermined effect in the one game machine is the predetermined effect in the other gaming machine. It is possible to prevent the players from being duplicated and interfering with each other in a state of being displaced from each other, and it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable.

On the other hand, while the displacement means (power switch 85a) of the gaming machine remains in the second position (ON position), the island power switch is displaced from ON to OFF, so that the power supply is cut off, and then the island power switch is turned OFF. When it is started by being displaced from to ON, the game machine is set to a state in which a predetermined effect can be executed, so that it is the same as (or substantially the same as) other game machines installed in the island facility. It is possible to execute a predetermined effect at the timing.

[Feature rO3]
The gaming machine according to feature rO1 or feature rO2.
Prescribed information changing means that can change predetermined information (setting information) that is information that determines one privilege grant condition from among multiple privilege grant conditions,
A means of entering a ball that allows a game ball to enter,
A special information acquisition means capable of acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means,
A privilege grant determination means capable of executing a privilege grant determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege grant condition corresponding to the predetermined information.
A privilege granting means capable of executing a privilege granting mode (opening / closing execution mode) in which a privilege is granted to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition,
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (deferred suggestion effect), which is an effect suggesting that the predetermined information has not been changed, and
Equipped with
When the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is OFF state), the process execution means is the suggestion effect execution means. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means for setting a state in which execution of a suggestion effect is impossible (turning off the deferred suggestion effect execution permission flag).

In a gaming hall where a plurality of gaming machines are installed in the island equipment and the power supply to the plurality of gaming machines is started and stopped all at once by the island power switch of the island equipment, the gaming machines are installed. When the power supply is cut off or the power supply is started by the operation of the individual displacement means (power switch 85a), it is highly possible that the predetermined information has been changed from the previous day (or the previous business day).

According to this feature, the processing execution means includes means for setting the suggestion effect execution means to a state in which the suggestion effect execution means cannot execute the suggestion effect when the movable means is determined to be in a predetermined position by the second determination unit. , When it is determined by the second determination means that the movable means is in a predetermined position (when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state), that is, the occurrence of the previous power failure. When is due to the operation of the displacement means (power switch 85a), the suggestion effect is not executed in the gaming machine after the next activation. Therefore, even though the predetermined information is actually changed from the previous day (or the previous business day), the suggestion effect is executed on the gaming machine, so that the player changes the predetermined information on the gaming machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user mistakenly thinks that the machine has been deferred without being used.

<Characteristic rP group>
The feature rP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the modifications 12 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rP1]
Displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced to the first position (OFF position) and the second position (ON position),
Movable means (movable object 99 for production) that can move within a predetermined range including a predetermined position (origin position),
The first determination means for determining the position of the displacement means when the supply of electric power from the outside is cut off, and
A means for moving the movable means to a position (maximum position) other than the predetermined position (origin position) when the displacement means is determined to be the second position by the first determination means.
A second determination means for determining the position of the movable means when power is supplied to the gaming machine, and a second determination means.
When the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position, the first process is executed, and when it is determined that the movable means is not in the predetermined position, the second process is executed.
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect (RTC effect) based on the elapsed time since the gaming machine is activated, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
When the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is OFF state), the process execution means is the predetermined effect execution means. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means for setting a state in which execution of a predetermined effect is impossible (turning off the RTC effect execution permission flag).

According to this feature, when the displacement means is determined to be in the second position by the first determination means, the movable means is provided with a means for moving the movable means to a position other than the predetermined position, so that the power supply from the outside is cut off. When the displacement means is in the first position, the movable means stays in a predetermined position, while when the external power supply is cut off, the movable means is in the second position. Move to a position other than the specified position. That is, the position of the displacement means in the gaming machine when the power supply from the outside is cut off is indicated by the position of the movable means. Therefore, the manager of the gaming hall or the like can easily determine the position of the displacement means in the gaming machine when the power supply from the outside is cut off by visually confirming whether or not the movable means is in the predetermined position. Can be confirmed in.

Then, according to this feature, when it is determined by the second determination means that the movable means is in a predetermined position, the first process is executed, and when it is determined that the movable means is not in a predetermined position, the second process is executed. Since the execution means is provided, the content of the processing to be executed can be switched according to the position of the displacement means when the power supply from the outside is cut off. As a result, it is possible to perform appropriate processing according to the position of the displacement means.

Further, according to this feature, since a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the elapsed time (starting elapsed time) since the gaming machine is activated is provided, a plurality of gaming machines are installed in the island facility. When the plurality of gaming machines are started all at once (simultaneously) by turning on the island power switch of the island equipment in the gaming hall, the gaming machines installed in the island equipment are used. Since the activation elapsed time is the same, it is possible to start predetermined effects all at once (at the same time).

However, after turning on the island power switch to start multiple gaming machines installed in the island facility all at once (simultaneously), the displacement of one gaming machine for the purpose of changing the setting information, for example. The means (power switch 85a) are individually displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to cut off the power supply, and the displacement means (power switch 85a) is again displaced to the first position (OFF position). When the pachinko machine is displaced from the position) to the second position (ON position) and started, the elapsed start time of the one gaming machine deviates from the elapsed start time of the other gaming machines installed in the island facility. Therefore, there arises a problem that the timing of starting the predetermined effect in the one gaming machine is different from that of the other gaming machine. In particular, since it takes about 1 minute to change the setting information, the one gaming machine whose setting information has been changed starts the predetermined effect about 1 minute later than the other gaming machines. become. In general, the time of the predetermined effect is about 5 minutes, so that the predetermined effect of the one gaming machine whose setting information is changed is duplicated and executed in a state of being deviated from the predetermined effect of the other gaming machine. This causes problems such as causing discomfort to the player.

Therefore, in the present feature, the processing execution means includes means for setting the predetermined effect execution means to a state in which the predetermined effect execution means cannot execute the predetermined effect when the movable means is determined to be in the predetermined position by the second determination unit. , The displacement means (power switch 85a) is displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) and the power supply is cut off, and then the displacement means (power switch 85a) is displaced to the first position (OFF position). When the game machine is displaced from the position) to the second position (ON position) and started, the game machine is set to a state in which the predetermined effect cannot be executed. As a result, since the predetermined effect is not executed in the one gaming machine activated by operating the displacement means (power switch 85a), the predetermined effect in the one game machine is the predetermined effect in the other gaming machine. It is possible to prevent the players from being duplicated and interfering with each other in a state of being displaced from each other, and it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable.

On the other hand, while the displacement means (power switch 85a) of the gaming machine remains in the second position (ON position), the island power switch is displaced from ON to OFF, so that the power supply is cut off, and then the island power switch is turned OFF. When it is started by being displaced from to ON, the game machine is set to a state in which a predetermined effect can be executed, so that it is the same as (or substantially the same as) other game machines installed in the island facility. It is possible to execute a predetermined effect at the timing.

<Characteristic rQ group>
The feature rQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the modifications 12 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rQ1]
Displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced to the first position (OFF position) and the second position (ON position),
Movable means (movable object 99 for production) that can move within a predetermined range including a predetermined position (origin position),
The first determination means for determining the position of the displacement means when the supply of electric power from the outside is cut off, and
A means for moving the movable means to a position (maximum position) other than the predetermined position (origin position) when the displacement means is determined to be the second position by the first determination means.
A second determination means for determining the position of the movable means when power is supplied to the gaming machine, and a second determination means.
When the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position, the first process is executed, and when it is determined that the movable means is not in the predetermined position, the second process is executed.
Prescribed information changing means that can change predetermined information (setting information) that is information that determines one privilege grant condition from among multiple privilege grant conditions,
A means of entering a ball that allows a game ball to enter,
A special information acquisition means capable of acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means,
A privilege grant determination means capable of executing a privilege grant determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege grant condition corresponding to the predetermined information.
A privilege granting means capable of executing a privilege granting mode (opening / closing execution mode) in which a privilege is granted to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition,
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (deferred suggestion effect), which is an effect suggesting that the predetermined information has not been changed, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
When the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position (the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is OFF state), the process execution means is the suggestion effect execution means. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means for setting a state in which execution of a suggestion effect is impossible (turning off the deferred suggestion effect execution permission flag).

According to this feature, when the displacement means is determined to be in the second position by the first determination means, the movable means is provided with a means for moving the movable means to a position other than the predetermined position, so that the power supply from the outside is cut off. When the displacement means is in the first position, the movable means stays in a predetermined position, while when the external power supply is cut off, the movable means is in the second position. Move to a position other than the specified position. That is, the position of the displacement means in the gaming machine when the power supply from the outside is cut off is indicated by the position of the movable means. Therefore, the manager of the gaming hall or the like can easily determine the position of the displacement means in the gaming machine when the power supply from the outside is cut off by visually confirming whether or not the movable means is in the predetermined position. Can be confirmed in.

Then, according to this feature, when it is determined by the second determination means that the movable means is in a predetermined position, the first process is executed, and when it is determined that the movable means is not in a predetermined position, the second process is executed. Since the execution means is provided, the content of the processing to be executed can be switched according to the position of the displacement means when the power supply from the outside is cut off. As a result, it is possible to perform appropriate processing according to the position of the displacement means.

In addition, in a gaming hall where a plurality of gaming machines are installed in the island equipment and the power supply to the plurality of gaming machines is started and stopped all at once by the island power switch of the island equipment, the gaming machines are used. However, if the power supply is cut off or the power supply is started by the operation of the individual displacement means (power switch 85a), it is highly possible that the predetermined information has been changed from the previous day (or the previous business day). ..

According to this feature, the processing execution means includes means for setting the suggestion effect execution means to a state in which the suggestion effect execution means cannot execute the suggestion effect when the movable means is determined to be in a predetermined position by the second determination unit. , When it is determined by the second determination means that the movable means is in a predetermined position (when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state), that is, the occurrence of the previous power failure. When is due to the operation of the displacement means (power switch 85a), the suggestion effect is not executed in the gaming machine after the next activation. Therefore, even though the predetermined information is actually changed from the previous day (or the previous business day), the suggestion effect is executed on the gaming machine, so that the player changes the predetermined information on the gaming machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user mistakenly thinks that the machine has been deferred without being used.

<Characteristic rR group>
The feature rR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the modifications 13 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rR1]
Displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced to the first position (OFF position) and the second position (ON position),
Movable means (movable object 99 for production) that can move within a predetermined range including a predetermined position (origin position),
The first determination means for determining the position of the displacement means when the supply of electric power from the outside is cut off, and
A means for moving the movable means to a position (maximum position) other than the predetermined position (origin position) when the displacement means is determined to be the second position by the first determination means.
A second determination means for determining the position of the movable means when power is supplied to the gaming machine, and a second determination means.
When the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position, the first process is executed. When the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the second position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not in the predetermined position, a process of executing the second process is performed. A gaming machine characterized by having a means of execution.

According to this feature, when the displacement means is determined to be in the second position by the first determination means, the movable means is provided with a means for moving the movable means to a position other than the predetermined position, so that the power supply from the outside is cut off. When the displacement means is in the first position, the movable means stays in a predetermined position, while when the external power supply is cut off, the movable means is in the second position. Move to a position other than the specified position. Therefore, the manager of the gaming hall or the like can easily determine the position of the displacement means in the gaming machine when the power supply from the outside is cut off by visually confirming whether or not the movable means is in the predetermined position. Can be confirmed in.

Then, according to this feature, when the displacement means is determined to be the first position by the first determination means and the movable means is determined to be the predetermined position by the second determination means, the first process is executed. Then, when the displacement means is determined to be in the second position by the first determination means and the movable means is determined not to be in the predetermined position by the second determination means, the process execution means for executing the second process is provided. Therefore, the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the position of the displacement means when the power supply from the outside is cut off. As a result, it is possible to perform appropriate processing according to the position of the displacement means. According to this feature, the position of the displacement means when the power supply from the outside is cut off is determined by the dual system of the first determination means and the second determination means, so that the determination result is reliable. It is possible to improve the sex.

[Feature rR2]
Feature The gaming machine described in rR1.
When the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not in the predetermined position, a predetermined notification process (FIG. 6). A gaming machine comprising a notification means for executing the abnormality notification process (abnormality notification process of step Sx4304b2 in step 325).

According to this feature, when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not in the predetermined position, a predetermined notification process is executed. Since the game hall manager or the like is provided with the notification means for the game, the manager or the like of the gaming hall is in an abnormal state in which the determination results of the first determination means and the second determination means in the game machine are inconsistent. It is possible to notice that the gaming machine may have been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person. Then, the manager or the like can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect the gaming machine.

[Feature rR3]
The gaming machine according to the feature rR1 or the feature rR2.
The notification means is predetermined when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the second position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position. A gaming machine comprising means for executing the notification process (abnormality notification process of step Sx4303b2 in FIG. 325).

According to this feature, the notification means is predetermined when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the second position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is in a predetermined position. Since the means for executing the notification process is provided, the manager of the gaming hall or the like is in an abnormal state in which the determination results of the first determination means and the second determination means in the game machine are inconsistent, for example, Master Goto. It is possible to notice that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as. Then, the manager or the like can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect the gaming machine.

[Feature rR4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature rR1 to the feature rR3.
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect (RTC effect) based on the elapsed time since the gaming machine is activated is provided.
When the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the first position, and the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position (previous time). When the main control device 60 and the voice emission control device 90 determine that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of power failure is OFF), the predetermined effect cannot be executed by the predetermined effect executing means. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means for setting (turning off the RTC effect execution permission flag).

According to this feature, since a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the elapsed time (starting elapsed time) since the gaming machine is activated is provided, a plurality of gaming machines are installed in the island facility. When the plurality of gaming machines are started all at once (simultaneously) by turning on the island power switch of the island equipment in the gaming hall, the activation progress of each gaming machine installed in the island equipment. Since the time is the same, it is possible to start the predetermined effects all at once (at the same time).

However, after turning on the island power switch to start multiple gaming machines installed in the island facility all at once (simultaneously), the displacement of one gaming machine for the purpose of changing the setting information, for example. The means (power switch 85a) are individually displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to cut off the power supply, and the displacement means (power switch 85a) is again displaced to the first position (OFF position). When the pachinko machine is displaced from the position) to the second position (ON position) and started, the elapsed start time of the one gaming machine deviates from the elapsed start time of the other gaming machines installed in the island facility. Therefore, there arises a problem that the timing of starting the predetermined effect in the one gaming machine is different from that of the other gaming machine. In particular, since it takes about 1 minute to change the setting information, the one gaming machine whose setting information has been changed starts the predetermined effect about 1 minute later than the other gaming machines. become. In general, the time of the predetermined effect is about 5 minutes, so that the predetermined effect of the one gaming machine whose setting information is changed is duplicated and executed in a state of being deviated from the predetermined effect of the other gaming machine. This causes problems such as causing discomfort to the player.

Therefore, in this feature, when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is in a predetermined position, the processing execution means has a predetermined effect. Since the means for setting the predetermined effect to be unexecutable by the executing means is provided, the displacement means (power switch 85a) is displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to supply power. If the displacement means (power switch 85a) is subsequently displaced from the first position (OFF position) to the second position (ON position) and started, the gaming machine cannot execute the predetermined effect. It will be set to the state. As a result, since the predetermined effect is not executed in the one gaming machine activated by operating the displacement means (power switch 85a), the predetermined effect in the one game machine is the predetermined effect in the other gaming machine. It is possible to prevent the players from being duplicated and interfering with each other in a state of being displaced from each other, and it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable.

On the other hand, while the displacement means (power switch 85a) of the gaming machine remains in the second position (ON position), the island power switch is displaced from ON to OFF, so that the power supply is cut off, and then the island power switch is turned OFF. When it is started by being displaced from to ON, the game machine is set to a state in which a predetermined effect can be executed, so that it is the same as (or substantially the same as) other game machines installed in the island facility. It is possible to execute a predetermined effect at the timing.

[Feature rR5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features rR1 to the feature rR4.
Prescribed information changing means that can change predetermined information (setting information) that is information that determines one privilege grant condition from among multiple privilege grant conditions,
A means of entering a ball that allows a game ball to enter,
A special information acquisition means capable of acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means,
A privilege grant determination means capable of executing a privilege grant determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege grant condition corresponding to the predetermined information.
A privilege granting means capable of executing a privilege granting mode (opening / closing execution mode) in which a privilege is granted to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition,
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (deferred suggestion effect), which is an effect suggesting that the predetermined information has not been changed, and
Equipped with
When the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position (previous time). When the main control device 60 and the voice emission control device 90 determine that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of power failure is OFF), the suggestion effect cannot be executed by the suggestion effect execution means. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means for setting (turning off the deferred suggestion effect execution permission flag).

Multiple gaming machines are installed in the island equipment, and the gaming machines are individually started and stopped at the same time by the island power switch of the island equipment. When the power supply is cut off or the power supply is started by the operation of the displacement means (power switch 85a), there is a high possibility that the predetermined information has been changed from the previous day (or the previous business day).

According to this feature, the processing execution means suggests when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is in a predetermined position. Since the means for setting the suggestion effect to be impossible to be executed by the executing means is provided, the displacement means is determined to be the first position by the first determination means, and the movable means is set to the predetermined position by the second determination means. When it is determined that there is (when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state), that is, the occurrence of the previous power failure is due to the operation of the displacement means (power switch 85a). In the case of, the suggestion effect is not executed in the game machine after the next activation. Therefore, even though the predetermined information is actually changed from the previous day (or the previous business day), the suggestion effect is executed on the gaming machine, so that the player changes the predetermined information on the gaming machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user mistakenly thinks that the machine has been deferred without being used.

<Characteristic rS group>
The feature rS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the modifications 13 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rS1]
Displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced to the first position (OFF position) and the second position (ON position),
Movable means (movable object 99 for production) that can move within a predetermined range including a predetermined position (origin position),
The first determination means for determining the position of the displacement means when the supply of electric power from the outside is cut off, and
A means for moving the movable means to a position (maximum position) other than the predetermined position (origin position) when the displacement means is determined to be the second position by the first determination means.
A second determination means for determining the position of the movable means when power is supplied to the gaming machine, and a second determination means.
When the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position, the first process is executed. When the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the second position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not in the predetermined position, a process of executing the second process. The means of execution and
When the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not in the predetermined position, a predetermined notification process (FIG. 6). The notification means for executing the abnormality notification process (abnormality notification process in step Sx4304b2) of step 325, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to this feature, when the displacement means is determined to be in the second position by the first determination means, the movable means is provided with a means for moving the movable means to a position other than the predetermined position, so that the power supply from the outside is cut off. When the displacement means is in the first position, the movable means stays in a predetermined position, while when the external power supply is cut off, the movable means is in the second position. Move to a position other than the specified position. Therefore, the manager of the gaming hall or the like can easily determine the position of the displacement means in the gaming machine when the power supply from the outside is cut off by visually confirming whether or not the movable means is in the predetermined position. Can be confirmed in.

Then, according to this feature, when the displacement means is determined to be the first position by the first determination means and the movable means is determined to be the predetermined position by the second determination means, the first process is executed. Then, when the displacement means is determined to be in the second position by the first determination means and the movable means is determined not to be in the predetermined position by the second determination means, the process execution means for executing the second process is provided. Therefore, the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the position of the displacement means when the power supply from the outside is cut off. As a result, it is possible to perform appropriate processing according to the position of the displacement means. According to this feature, the position of the displacement means when the power supply from the outside is cut off is determined by the dual system of the first determination means and the second determination means, so that the determination result is reliable. It is possible to improve the sex.

Then, according to this feature, when the displacement means is determined to be the first position by the first determination means and the movable means is determined not to be the predetermined position by the second determination means, a predetermined notification process is performed. Since the notification means for executing the above is provided, the manager of the gaming hall or the like is in an abnormal state in which the determination results of the first determination means and the second determination means in the game machine are inconsistent, for example, the Goto teacher or the like. It is possible to notice that the gaming machine may have been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person. Then, the manager or the like can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect the gaming machine.

<Characteristic rT group>
The feature rT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the modifications 13 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rT1]
Displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced to the first position (OFF position) and the second position (ON position),
Movable means (movable object 99 for production) that can move within a predetermined range including a predetermined position (origin position),
The first determination means for determining the position of the displacement means when the supply of electric power from the outside is cut off, and
A means for moving the movable means to a position (maximum position) other than the predetermined position (origin position) when the displacement means is determined to be the second position by the first determination means.
A second determination means for determining the position of the movable means when power is supplied to the gaming machine, and a second determination means.
When the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position, the first process is executed. When the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the second position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not in the predetermined position, a process of executing the second process. The means of execution and
When the displacement means is determined to be in the second position by the first determination means and the movable means is determined to be in the predetermined position by the second determination means, a predetermined notification process (FIG. 6). The notification means for executing the abnormality notification process (abnormality notification process in step Sx4303b2) of step 325,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to this feature, when the displacement means is determined to be in the second position by the first determination means, the movable means is provided with a means for moving the movable means to a position other than the predetermined position, so that the power supply from the outside is cut off. When the displacement means is in the first position, the movable means stays in a predetermined position, while when the external power supply is cut off, the movable means is in the second position. Move to a position other than the specified position. Therefore, the manager of the gaming hall or the like can easily determine the position of the displacement means in the gaming machine when the power supply from the outside is cut off by visually confirming whether or not the movable means is in the predetermined position. Can be confirmed in.

Then, according to this feature, when the displacement means is determined to be the first position by the first determination means and the movable means is determined to be the predetermined position by the second determination means, the first process is executed. Then, when the displacement means is determined to be in the second position by the first determination means and the movable means is determined not to be in the predetermined position by the second determination means, the process execution means for executing the second process is provided. Therefore, the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the position of the displacement means when the power supply from the outside is cut off. As a result, it is possible to perform appropriate processing according to the position of the displacement means. According to this feature, the position of the displacement means when the power supply from the outside is cut off is determined by the dual system of the first determination means and the second determination means, so that the determination result is reliable. It is possible to improve the sex.

Then, according to this feature, when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the second position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is in a predetermined position, the notification means determines. Since the means for executing the predetermined notification process is provided, the manager of the gaming hall or the like is in an abnormal state in which the determination results of the first determination means and the second determination means in the gaming machine are inconsistent, for example. It is possible to notice that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been illegally operated or modified by an unauthorized person such as Goto. Then, the manager or the like can temporarily suspend the operation of the gaming machine and inspect the gaming machine.

<Characteristic rU group>
The feature rU group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the modifications 13 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rU1]
Displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced to the first position (OFF position) and the second position (ON position),
Movable means (movable object 99 for production) that can move within a predetermined range including a predetermined position (origin position),
The first determination means for determining the position of the displacement means when the supply of electric power from the outside is cut off, and
A means for moving the movable means to a position (maximum position) other than the predetermined position (origin position) when the displacement means is determined to be the second position by the first determination means.
A second determination means for determining the position of the movable means when power is supplied to the gaming machine, and a second determination means.
When the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position, the first process is executed. When the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the second position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not in the predetermined position, a process of executing the second process. The means of execution and
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect (RTC effect) based on the elapsed time since the gaming machine is activated, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
When the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the first position, and the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position (previous time). When the main control device 60 and the voice emission control device 90 determine that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of power failure is OFF), the predetermined effect cannot be executed by the predetermined effect executing means. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means for setting (turning off the RTC effect execution permission flag).

According to this feature, when the displacement means is determined to be in the second position by the first determination means, the movable means is provided with a means for moving the movable means to a position other than the predetermined position, so that the power supply from the outside is cut off. When the displacement means is in the first position, the movable means stays in a predetermined position, while when the external power supply is cut off, the movable means is in the second position. Move to a position other than the specified position. Therefore, the manager of the gaming hall or the like can easily determine the position of the displacement means in the gaming machine when the power supply from the outside is cut off by visually confirming whether or not the movable means is in the predetermined position. Can be confirmed in.

Then, according to this feature, when the displacement means is determined to be the first position by the first determination means and the movable means is determined to be the predetermined position by the second determination means, the first process is executed. Then, when the displacement means is determined to be in the second position by the first determination means and the movable means is determined not to be in the predetermined position by the second determination means, the process execution means for executing the second process is provided. Therefore, the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the position of the displacement means when the power supply from the outside is cut off. As a result, it is possible to perform appropriate processing according to the position of the displacement means. According to this feature, the position of the displacement means when the power supply from the outside is cut off is determined by the dual system of the first determination means and the second determination means, so that the determination result is reliable. It is possible to improve the sex.

Further, according to this feature, since a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the elapsed time (starting elapsed time) since the gaming machine is activated is provided, a plurality of gaming machines are installed in the island facility. When the plurality of gaming machines are started all at once (simultaneously) by turning on the island power switch of the island equipment in the gaming hall, the gaming machines installed in the island equipment are used. Since the activation elapsed time is the same, it is possible to start predetermined effects all at once (at the same time).

However, after turning on the island power switch to start multiple gaming machines installed in the island facility all at once (simultaneously), the displacement of one gaming machine for the purpose of changing the setting information, for example. The means (power switch 85a) are individually displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to cut off the power supply, and the displacement means (power switch 85a) is again displaced to the first position (OFF position). When the pachinko machine is displaced from the position) to the second position (ON position) and started, the elapsed start time of the one gaming machine deviates from the elapsed start time of the other gaming machines installed in the island facility. Therefore, there arises a problem that the timing of starting the predetermined effect in the one gaming machine is different from that of the other gaming machines. In particular, since it takes about 1 minute to change the setting information, the one gaming machine whose setting information has been changed starts the predetermined effect about 1 minute later than the other gaming machines. become. In general, the time of the predetermined effect is about 5 minutes, so that the predetermined effect of the one gaming machine whose setting information is changed is duplicated and executed in a state of being deviated from the predetermined effect of the other gaming machine. This causes problems such as causing discomfort to the player.

Therefore, in this feature, when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is in a predetermined position, the processing execution means has a predetermined effect. Since the means for setting the predetermined effect to be unexecutable by the executing means is provided, the displacement means (power switch 85a) is displaced from the second position (ON position) to the first position (OFF position) to supply power. If the displacement means (power switch 85a) is subsequently displaced from the first position (OFF position) to the second position (ON position) and activated, the gaming machine cannot execute the predetermined effect. It will be set to the state. As a result, since the predetermined effect is not executed in the one gaming machine activated by operating the displacement means (power switch 85a), the predetermined effect in the one game machine is the predetermined effect in the other gaming machine. It is possible to prevent the players from being duplicated and interfering with each other in a state of being displaced from each other, and it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable.

On the other hand, while the displacement means (power switch 85a) of the gaming machine remains in the second position (ON position), the island power switch is displaced from ON to OFF, so that the power supply is cut off, and then the island power switch is turned OFF. When it is started by being displaced from to ON, the game machine is set to a state in which a predetermined effect can be executed, so that it is the same as (or substantially the same as) other game machines installed in the island facility. It is possible to execute a predetermined effect at the timing.

<Characteristic rV group>
The feature rV group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the embodiments 13 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature rV1]
Displacement means (power switch 85a) that can be displaced to the first position (OFF position) and the second position (ON position),
Movable means (movable object 99 for production) that can move within a predetermined range including a predetermined position (origin position),
The first determination means for determining the position of the displacement means when the supply of electric power from the outside is cut off, and
A means for moving the movable means to a position (maximum position) other than the predetermined position (origin position) when the displacement means is determined to be the second position by the first determination means.
A second determination means for determining the position of the movable means when power is supplied to the gaming machine, and a second determination means.
When the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position, the first process is executed. When the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the second position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is not in the predetermined position, a process of executing the second process. The means of execution and
Prescribed information changing means that can change predetermined information (setting information) that is information that determines one privilege grant condition from among multiple privilege grant conditions,
A means of entering a ball that allows a game ball to enter,
A special information acquisition means capable of acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means,
A privilege grant determination means capable of executing a privilege grant determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the special information satisfies the privilege grant condition corresponding to the predetermined information.
A privilege granting means capable of executing a privilege granting mode (opening / closing execution mode) in which a privilege is granted to a player when it is determined that the special information satisfies the privilege granting condition,
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (deferred suggestion effect), which is an effect suggesting that the predetermined information has not been changed, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
When the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is in the predetermined position (previous time). When the main control device 60 and the voice emission control device 90 determine that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of power failure is OFF), the suggestion effect cannot be executed by the suggestion effect execution means. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means for setting (turning off the deferred suggestion effect execution permission flag).

According to this feature, when the displacement means is determined to be in the second position by the first determination means, the movable means is provided with a means for moving the movable means to a position other than the predetermined position, so that the power supply from the outside is cut off. When the displacement means is in the first position, the movable means stays in a predetermined position, while when the external power supply is cut off, the movable means is in the second position. Move to a position other than the specified position. Therefore, the manager of the gaming hall or the like can easily determine the position of the displacement means in the gaming machine when the power supply from the outside is cut off by visually confirming whether or not the movable means is in the predetermined position. Can be confirmed in.

Then, according to this feature, when the displacement means is determined to be the first position by the first determination means and the movable means is determined to be the predetermined position by the second determination means, the first process is executed. Then, when the displacement means is determined to be in the second position by the first determination means and the movable means is determined not to be in the predetermined position by the second determination means, the process execution means for executing the second process is provided. Therefore, the content of the process to be executed can be switched according to the position of the displacement means when the power supply from the outside is cut off. As a result, it is possible to perform appropriate processing according to the position of the displacement means. According to this feature, the position of the displacement means when the power supply from the outside is cut off is determined by the dual system of the first determination means and the second determination means, so that the determination result is reliable. It is possible to improve the sex.

In addition, in a gaming hall where a plurality of gaming machines are installed in the island equipment and the power supply to the plurality of gaming machines is started and stopped all at once by the island power switch of the island equipment, the gaming machines are used. However, if the power supply is cut off or the power supply is started by the operation of the individual displacement means (power switch 85a), it is highly possible that the predetermined information has been changed from the previous day (or the previous business day). ..

According to this feature, the processing execution means suggests when the first determination means determines that the displacement means is in the first position and the second determination means determines that the movable means is in a predetermined position. Since the means for setting the suggestion effect to be impossible to be executed by the executing means is provided, the displacement means is determined to be the first position by the first determination means, and the movable means is set to the predetermined position by the second determination means. When it is determined that there is (when it is determined that the state of the power switch 85a at the time of the previous power failure is the OFF state), that is, the occurrence of the previous power failure is due to the operation of the displacement means (power switch 85a). In the case of, the suggestion effect is not executed in the game machine after the next activation. Therefore, even though the predetermined information is actually changed from the previous day (or the previous business day), the suggestion effect is executed on the gaming machine, so that the player changes the predetermined information on the gaming machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user mistakenly thinks that the machine has been deferred without being used.

<Characteristic sA group>
The feature sA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its variants.

[Features sA1]
Distribution area (game area PA) where game balls are distributed,
A first passage (main line passage portion 210) provided in the distribution area for distributing game balls, and
A second passage (first branch passage portion 220) that is provided in the distribution area and is for distributing game balls and branches from the middle of the first passage.
A first ball entry means (right side first starting port 44) provided in the second passage and capable of entering a game ball, and
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) through which the game ball circulated in the first passage can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into each of a plurality of entry means including at least the first entry means and the second entry means.
A first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode (low probability mode) as a determination mode (lottery mode) for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition. A determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that of the determination mode.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 351 executed by the MPU 62).
In a gaming machine equipped with
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) provided at a branch point to the second passage in the first passage and assisting the entry of a game ball into the second passage.
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second passage, and a state in which the game ball can enter the second passage easily or easily. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state and a second state
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second passage.
A determination mode switching means capable of switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode with a predetermined probability when the game ball enters the first entry means in the second passage (the determination mode switching means). The game ball distribution device 240, the fall opening 252, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the game ball distribution control process of FIG. 380 executed by the MPU 62).
Equipped with
The control means is
When the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times after the control mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control. Means for shifting to the mode (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the first fluctuation stop process of FIG. 360 executed by the MPU 62).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature sA1, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second passage than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and the game ball enters the first passage with a high probability. Enter the ball means. However, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the determination mode is changed from the second determination mode to the first with a predetermined probability by the determination mode switching means. Since the mode can be switched to the determination mode, it may be disadvantageous for the player. Then, when the control mode is the second control mode and the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control. You can switch to the mode. In the state where the control mode is the first control mode, the game ball is easily distributed downstream from the branch point to the second passage in the first passage, and the game ball enters the second entry means with a high probability. do. In this case, unlike the second passage side, the determination mode is not switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, so that there is no possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state. It is possible to continuously perform the game times executed when the game ball enters the ball means.

As a result, according to the feature sA1, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times for the player. During the period, there is a sense of urgency that the judgment mode should not be switched from the second judgment mode to the disadvantageous first judgment mode (do not fall) by the judgment mode switching means, and the judgment mode is changed to the first judgment mode by the judgment mode switching means. Before switching to, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times. Then, if the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without the determination mode being switched to the first determination mode by the determination mode switching means, the determination mode is set to the first determination mode for the player. A special state (for example, the eighth implementation) in which the game times executed by the game ball entering the second ball entry means can be continuously performed without the risk of being switched to the second ball entry means and becoming a disadvantageous state. A state in which the control mode is the second control mode by continuously performing the game times executed when the game ball enters the second ball entry means and the relief feeling of being able to shift to the invincible zone in the form). In the near future, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the special information acquired by the entry of the game ball into the second entry means will satisfy a predetermined condition. As described above, according to the feature sA1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a feeling of expectation, a feeling of urgency, and a feeling of relief.

As conventional pachinko machines, there are loop type pachinko machines and ST type pachinko machines. The loop type pachinko machine is a model in which the state of the high probability mode continues until the next big hit in the winning lottery. The ST type pachinko machine is a model in which the number of games played in the high probability mode is limited. In the loop type pachinko machine, a big hit is won in the winning lottery, and it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the type of the winning big hit is usually a big hit. On the other hand, in the ST type pachinko machine, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency that the jackpot may not be won within the limited number of times. On the other hand, according to the feature sA1, as described above, with a sense of urgency, the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times before the determination mode is switched to the first determination mode by the determination mode switching means. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation that you want it. Further, when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without the determination mode being switched to the first determination mode by the determination mode switching means, the determination mode is changed to the first determination mode for the player. A special state (for example, the eighth embodiment) in which a game round executed by a game ball entering the second ball entry means can be continuously performed without the risk of being switched to a disadvantageous state. In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, by continuously performing the game times executed when the game ball enters the second ball entry means and the relief feeling that the player can move to the invincible zone). It is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the special information acquired by the entry of the game ball into the second entry means will satisfy a predetermined condition in the near future. Such a sense of relief and anticipation is an effect peculiar to the feature sA1, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features sA2]
Features The gaming machine described in sA1.
The determination mode switching means is
A third passage (second branch passage portion 230) that is provided in the distribution area and is for distributing game balls and branches from the middle of the second passage.
A third ball entry means (falling opening 252) through which a game ball circulated in the third passage can enter, and
A determination mode control means capable of switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode when the game ball enters the third entry means.
A game ball distribution means (game ball) provided at a branch point to the third passage in the second passage and distributing a game ball between a portion downstream of the branch point in the second passage and the third passage. Sorting device 240) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature sA2, a part of the determination mode switching means can be configured by a hardware-like configuration including the third passage and the game ball distribution means. For this reason, by making the state in which the game ball distribution means distributes the game balls visible to the player from the outside, the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, which is disadvantageous. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency that it may end up. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Features sA3]
Features The gaming machine described in sA2.
The game ball distribution means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of distributing a game ball to the third passage is lower than the probability of distributing the game ball to a portion downstream of the branch point in the second passage.

According to the feature sA3, the probability that the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode can be set to be relatively low. For this reason, the probability that the player suffers a disadvantage can be made relatively low.

[Features sA4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features sA1 to the feature sA3.
Equipped with a privilege granting means to grant benefits
The privilege granting means
When the special information corresponding to the game to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (when the jackpot is won), the privilege granting means when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the privilege granting means.
When the special information corresponding to the game to be executed meets a specific condition (when a special small hit is won), the privilege granting means when the specific condition is satisfied and the privilege granting means.
Equipped with
The control means is
When the control mode is the second control mode, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the special information corresponding to the game to be executed satisfies the specific condition, the control mode is used. A gaming machine comprising means for shifting from the second control mode to the first control mode.

According to the feature sA4, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode, the number of times the game is executed after the control mode is changed from the first control mode to the second control mode. The control mode is shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of times the game reaches a predetermined number of times and the special information corresponding to the game times to be executed satisfies a specific condition. As described above, in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, the game is executed when the game ball enters the second ball entry means without the possibility of being disadvantageous to the player. The game times can be performed continuously. Therefore, according to the feature sA4, it is possible to further give the player a feeling of expectation to shift to the special state described above, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Features sA5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features sA1 to the feature sA4.
A fourth ball entry means (through gate 35) provided above the entry port of the first passage and capable of entering a game ball is provided.
The state transition means is
A means for performing a predetermined lottery triggered by passing through the fourth ball entry means, and
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result, the means for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means to the second state and the means.
Equipped with
When the control mode is the second control mode, the gaming ball that has entered the fourth ball entry means (through gate 35) is configured to circulate from the first passage to the second passage. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature sA5, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball that has entered the fourth entry means is configured to circulate from the first passage to the second passage. In one passage, the game ball does not circulate on the downstream side of the branch point to the second passage. Therefore, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball that has entered the fourth entry means can always be entered into the first entry means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the accuracy of entering the game ball into the first ball entry means.

[Features sA6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features sA1 to the feature sA5.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the special information acquired when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. The second special information, which is, and the acquired information storage means for storing the information are provided.
The game round execution means is
The first special information game time, which is a game time for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means for the first special information, and the game time for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means for the second special information. The second special information game times, which is, and the means to execute in parallel,
When the time of the second special information game is set as the second game time, the second game time in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode. With a means for setting the time longer than the time that can be set as the second gaming time in the state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature sA6, in the state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode, that is, in the normal state, the player launches the game ball toward the entrance of the first passage. If this is the case, the game ball can be entered into the second entry means. However, according to the feature sA6, the time of the second special information game in the state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode is set to a relatively long time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the determination by the determination means triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second entry means from being repeatedly executed in a short period of time. As a result, according to the feature sA6, the player is made to shoot the game ball aiming at the second ball entry means in the state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode. You can give up on that.

<Characteristic sB group>
The feature sB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its variants.

[Features sB1]
Distribution area (game area PA) where game balls are distributed,
A first passage (main line passage portion 210) provided in the distribution area for distributing game balls, and
A second passage (first branch passage portion 220) that is provided in the distribution area and is for distributing game balls and branches from the middle of the first passage.
A first ball entry means (right side first starting port 44) provided in the second passage and capable of entering a game ball, and
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) through which the game ball circulated in the first passage can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into each of a plurality of entry means including at least the first entry means and the second entry means.
A first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode (low probability mode) as a determination mode (lottery mode) for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition. A determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that of the determination mode.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 351 executed by the MPU 62).
In a gaming machine equipped with
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) provided at a branch point to the second passage in the first passage and assisting the entry of a game ball into the second passage.
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second passage, and a state in which the game ball can enter the second passage easily or easily. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state and a second state
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second passage.
A determination mode switching means capable of switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode with a predetermined probability when the game ball enters the first entry means in the second passage (the determination mode switching means). The game ball distribution device 240, the fall opening 252, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the game ball distribution control process of FIG. 380 executed by the MPU 62).
Benefit granting means to grant benefits and
Equipped with
The privilege granting means
When the special information corresponding to the game to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (when the jackpot is won), the privilege granting means when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the privilege granting means.
When the special information corresponding to the game to be executed meets a specific condition (when a special small hit is won), the privilege granting means when the specific condition is satisfied and the privilege granting means.
Equipped with
The control means is
When the control mode is the second control mode, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the special information corresponding to the game to be executed satisfies the specific condition, the control mode is used. A gaming machine comprising means for shifting from the second control mode to the first control mode.

According to the feature sB1, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second passage than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and the game ball enters the first passage with a high probability. Enter the ball means. However, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the determination mode is changed from the second determination mode to the first with a predetermined probability by the determination mode switching means. Since the mode can be switched to the determination mode, it may be disadvantageous for the player. Then, when the control mode is the second control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode and the special information corresponding to the game times to be executed satisfies a specific condition, the control mode is the second control mode. Can be switched to the first control mode. In the state where the control mode is the first control mode, the game ball is easily distributed downstream from the branch point to the second passage in the first passage, and the game ball enters the second entry means with a high probability. do. In this case, unlike the second passage side, the determination mode is not switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, so that there is no possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state. It is possible to continuously perform the game times executed when the game ball enters the ball means. Therefore, according to the feature sB1, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is executed with the entry of the game ball into the second entry means without the possibility of being disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation to shift to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game times can be continuously performed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features sB2]
Features The gaming machine described in sB1.
The determination mode switching means is
A third passage (second branch passage portion 230) that is provided in the distribution area and is for distributing game balls and branches from the middle of the second passage.
A third ball entry means (falling opening 252) through which a game ball circulated in the third passage can enter, and
A determination mode control means capable of switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode when the game ball enters the third entry means.
A game ball distribution means (game ball) provided at a branch point to the third passage in the second passage and distributing a game ball between a portion downstream of the branch point in the second passage and the third passage. Sorting device 240) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature sB2, a part of the determination mode switching means can be configured by a hardware-like configuration including the third passage and the game ball distribution means. For this reason, by making the state in which the game ball distribution means distributes the game balls visible to the player from the outside, the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, which is disadvantageous. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency that it may end up. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Features sB3]
Features The gaming machine described in sB2.
The game ball distribution means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of distributing a game ball to the third passage is lower than the probability of distributing the game ball to a portion downstream of the branch point in the second passage.

According to the feature sB3, the probability that the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode can be set to be relatively low. For this reason, the probability that the player suffers a disadvantage can be made relatively low.

[Features sB4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features sB1 to the feature sB3.
The control means is
When the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times after the control mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control. Means for shifting to the mode (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the first fluctuation stop process of FIG. 360 executed by the MPU 62).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature sB4, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode, the control is performed in addition to the case where the special information corresponding to the game times to be executed satisfies a specific condition. The control mode is also shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of executions of the game rounds after the mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times. As described above, in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, the game is executed when the game ball enters the second ball entry means without the possibility of being disadvantageous to the player. The game times can be performed continuously. Therefore, according to the feature sB4, it is possible to further give the player a feeling of expectation to shift to the special state described above, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Features sB5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features sB1 to the feature sB4.
A fourth ball entry means (through gate 35) provided above the entry port of the first passage and capable of entering a game ball is provided.
The state transition means is
A means for performing a predetermined lottery triggered by passing through the fourth ball entry means, and
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result, the means for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means to the second state and the means.
Equipped with
When the control mode is the second control mode, the gaming ball that has entered the fourth ball entry means (through gate 35) is configured to circulate from the first passage to the second passage. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature sB5, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball that has entered the fourth entry means is configured to circulate from the first passage to the second passage. In one passage, the game ball does not circulate on the downstream side of the branch point to the second passage. Therefore, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball that has entered the fourth entry means can always be entered into the first entry means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the accuracy of entering the game ball into the first ball entry means.

[Features sB6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features sB1 to the feature sB5.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the special information acquired when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. The second special information, which is, and the acquired information storage means for storing the information are provided.
The game round execution means is
The first special information game time, which is a game time for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means for the first special information, and the game time for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means for the second special information. The second special information game times, which is, and the means to execute in parallel,
When the time of the second special information game is set as the second game time, the second game time in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode. With a means for setting the time longer than the time that can be set as the second gaming time in the state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature sB6, in the state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode, that is, in the normal state, the player launches the game ball toward the entrance of the first passage. If this is the case, the game ball can be entered into the second entry means. However, according to the feature sB6, the time of the second special information game in the state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode is set to a relatively long time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the determination by the determination means triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second entry means from being repeatedly executed in a short period of time. As a result, according to the feature sB6, the player is made to shoot the game ball aiming at the second ball entry means in the state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode. You can give up on that.

<Characteristic sC group>
The feature sC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its variants.

[Features sC1]
Distribution area (game area PA) where game balls are distributed,
A first passage (main line passage portion 210) provided in the distribution area for distributing game balls, and
A second passage (first branch passage portion 220) that is provided in the distribution area and is for distributing game balls and branches from the middle of the first passage.
A first ball entry means (right side first starting port 44) provided in the second passage and capable of entering a game ball, and
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) through which the game ball circulated in the first passage can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into each of a plurality of entry means including at least the first entry means and the second entry means.
A first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode (low probability mode) as a determination mode (lottery mode) for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition. A determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that of the determination mode.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 351 executed by the MPU 62).
In a gaming machine equipped with
A third passage (second branch passage portion 230) that is provided in the distribution area and is for distributing game balls and branches from the middle of the second passage.
A third ball entry means (falling opening 252) through which a game ball circulated in the third passage can enter, and
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) provided at a branch point to the second passage in the first passage and assisting the entry of a game ball into the second passage.
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second passage, and a state in which the game ball can enter the second passage easily or easily. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state and a second state
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second passage.
A determination mode control means capable of switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode when the game ball enters the third entry means.
A game ball distribution means (game ball) provided at a branch point to the third passage in the second passage and distributing a game ball between a portion downstream of the branch point in the second passage and the third passage. Sorting device 240) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature sC1, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second passage than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and the game ball enters the first passage with a high probability. Enter the ball means. However, the game ball that has entered the first ball entry means may then be distributed from the second passage to the third passage by the game ball distribution device and enter the third entry means. When a game ball enters the third ball entry means, the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, which is disadvantageous to the player. That is, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it may be a disadvantageous state for the player. On the other hand, in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, the game ball is easily distributed downstream from the branch point to the second passage in the first passage, and the game ball becomes the second entry means with a high probability. Enter the ball. In this case, since there is no configuration corresponding to the third ball entry means such as the second passage side, the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, which is disadvantageous to the player. There is no such thing. Therefore, according to the feature sC1, it is possible to switch between an advantageous state and a disadvantageous state for the player by controlling whether the control mode is in the first control mode or the second control mode. Will be. Therefore, a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency can be given to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature sC1, the state in which the game ball distribution means distributes the game ball is configured to be visible to the player from the outside, so that the game ball enters the third ball entry means and the determination mode is set. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency that switching from the second determination mode to the first determination mode may result in a disadvantage. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Features sC2]
Features The gaming machine described in sC1.
The game ball distribution means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of distributing a game ball to the third passage is lower than the probability of distributing the game ball to a portion downstream of the branch point in the second passage.

According to the feature sC2, the probability that the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode can be set to be relatively low. For this reason, the probability that the player will be in a disadvantageous state can be relatively low.

[Features sC3]
The gaming machine according to feature sC1 or feature sC2.
The control means is
When the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times after the control mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control. Means for shifting to the mode (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the first fluctuation stop process of FIG. 360 executed by the MPU 62).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature sC3, when the number of times the game is executed after the control mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control mode. Will be migrated to. When the control mode is the first control mode, the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode because there is no possibility of entering the third ball entry means as described above. Therefore, it does not become a disadvantageous state for the player, and on top of that, it is possible to continuously perform the game times executed when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. Therefore, according to the feature sC3, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is executed with the entry of the game ball into the second entry means without the possibility of being disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation to shift to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game times can be continuously performed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Features sC4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features sC1 to the feature sC3.
Equipped with a privilege granting means to grant benefits
The privilege granting means
When the special information corresponding to the game to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (when the jackpot is won), the privilege granting means when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the privilege granting means.
When the special information corresponding to the game to be executed satisfies a specific condition (when a special small hit is won), the privilege granting means when the specific condition is satisfied and the privilege granting means.
Equipped with
The control means is
When the control mode is the second control mode, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the special information corresponding to the game to be executed satisfies the specific condition, the control mode is used. A gaming machine comprising means for shifting from the second control mode to the first control mode.

According to the feature sC4, when the control mode is the second control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the special information corresponding to the game times to be executed satisfies a specific condition, the control mode is set. The mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control mode. When the control mode is the first control mode, the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode because there is no possibility of entering the third ball entry means as described above. Therefore, it does not become a disadvantageous state for the player, and on top of that, it is possible to continuously perform the game times executed when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. Therefore, according to the feature sC4, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is executed with the entry of the game ball into the second entry means without the possibility of being disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation to shift to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game times can be continuously performed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Features sC5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features sC1 to the feature sC4.
A fourth ball entry means (through gate 35) provided above the entry port of the first passage and capable of entering a game ball is provided.
The state transition means is
A means for performing a predetermined lottery triggered by passing through the fourth ball entry means, and
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result, the means for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means to the second state and the means.
Equipped with
When the control mode is the second control mode, the gaming ball that has entered the fourth ball entry means (through gate 35) is configured to circulate from the first passage to the second passage. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature sC5, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball that has entered the fourth entry means is configured to circulate from the first passage to the second passage. In one passage, the game ball does not circulate on the downstream side of the branch point to the second passage. Therefore, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball that has entered the fourth entry means can always be entered into the first entry means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the accuracy of entering the game ball into the first ball entry means.

[Features sC6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features sC1 to the feature sC5.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the special information acquired when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. The second special information, which is, and the acquired information storage means for storing the information are provided.
The game round execution means is
The first special information game time, which is a game time for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means for the first special information, and the game time for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means for the second special information. The second special information game times, which is, and the means to execute in parallel,
When the time of the second special information game is set as the second game time, the second game time in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode. With a means for setting the time longer than the time that can be set as the second gaming time in the state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature sC6, in the state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode, that is, in the normal state, the player launches the game ball toward the entrance of the first passage. If this is the case, the game ball can be entered into the second entry means. However, according to the feature sC6, the time of the second special information game in the state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode is set to a relatively long time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the determination by the determination means triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second entry means from being repeatedly executed in a short period of time. As a result, according to the feature sC6, the player is made to shoot the game ball aiming at the second ball entry means in the state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode. You can give up on that.

<Characteristic sD group>
The feature sD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its variants.

[Features sD1]
Distribution area (game area PA) where game balls are distributed,
A first passage (main line passage portion 210) provided in the distribution area for distributing game balls, and
A second passage (first branch passage portion 220) that is provided in the distribution area and is for distributing game balls and branches from the middle of the first passage.
A first ball entry means (right side first starting port 44) provided in the second passage and capable of entering a game ball, and
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) through which the game ball circulated in the first passage can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into each of a plurality of entry means including at least the first entry means and the second entry means.
A first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode (low probability mode) as a determination mode (lottery mode) for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition. A determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that of the determination mode.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 351 executed by the MPU 62).
In a gaming machine equipped with
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) provided at a branch point to the second passage in the first passage and assisting the entry of a game ball into the second passage.
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second passage, and a state in which the game ball can enter the second passage easily or easily. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state and a second state
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second passage.
A determination mode switching means capable of switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode with a predetermined probability when the game ball enters the first entry means in the second passage (the determination mode switching means). The game ball distribution device 240, the fall opening 252, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the game ball distribution control process of FIG. 380 executed by the MPU 62).
A fourth ball entry means (through gate 35) provided above the ball entry port of the first passage and capable of entering a game ball, and a fourth ball entry means (through gate 35).
Equipped with
The state transition means is
A means for performing a predetermined lottery triggered by passing through the fourth ball entry means, and
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result, the means for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means to the second state and the means.
Equipped with
When the control mode is the second control mode, the gaming ball that has entered the fourth ball entry means is configured to circulate from the first passage to the second passage. Gaming machine.

According to the feature sD1, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball that has entered the fourth entry means is configured to circulate from the first passage to the second passage. In one passage, the game ball does not circulate on the downstream side of the branch point to the second passage. Therefore, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball that has entered the fourth entry means can always be entered into the first entry means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the accuracy of entering the game ball into the first ball entry means.

Further, according to the feature sD1, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball always enters the first ball entry means, but the determination mode is set with a predetermined probability by the determination mode switching means. Since the 2 determination mode can be switched to the 1st determination mode, there is a possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state. On the other hand, in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, the game ball is easily distributed downstream from the branch point to the second passage in the first passage, and the game ball becomes the second entry means with a high probability. Enter the ball. In this case, unlike the second passage side, the determination mode is not switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, so that there is no possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state. It is possible to continuously perform the game times executed when the game ball enters the ball means. Therefore, according to the feature sD1, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is executed with the entry of the game ball into the second entry means without the possibility of being disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation to shift to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game times can be continuously performed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features sD2]
Features The gaming machine described in sD1.
The determination mode switching means is
A third passage (second branch passage portion 230) that is provided in the distribution area and is for distributing game balls and branches from the middle of the second passage.
A third ball entry means (falling opening 252) through which a game ball circulated in the third passage can enter, and
A determination mode control means capable of switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode when the game ball enters the third entry means.
A game ball distribution means (game ball) provided at a branch point to the third passage in the second passage and distributing a game ball between a portion downstream of the branch point in the second passage and the third passage. Sorting device 240) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature sD2, a part of the determination mode switching means can be configured by a hardware-like configuration including the third passage and the game ball distribution means. For this reason, by making the state in which the game ball distribution means distributes the game balls visible to the player from the outside, the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, which is disadvantageous. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency that it may end up. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Features sD3]
Features The gaming machine described in sD2.
The game ball distribution means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of distributing a game ball to the third passage is lower than the probability of distributing the game ball to a portion downstream of the branch point in the second passage.

According to the feature sD3, the probability that the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode can be set to be relatively low. For this reason, the probability that the player suffers a disadvantage can be made relatively low.

[Features sD4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features sD1 to the feature sD3.
The control means is
When the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times after the control mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control. Means for shifting to the mode (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the first fluctuation stop process of FIG. 360 executed by the MPU 62).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature sD4, when the number of times the game is executed after the control mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control mode. Will be migrated to. As described above, in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, the game is executed when the game ball enters the second ball entry means without the possibility of being disadvantageous to the player. The game times can be performed continuously. Therefore, according to the feature sD4, it is possible to further give the player a feeling of expectation to shift to the special state described above, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Features sD5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features sD1 to the feature sD4.
Equipped with a privilege granting means to grant benefits
The privilege granting means
When the special information corresponding to the game to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (when the jackpot is won), the privilege granting means when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the privilege granting means.
When the special information corresponding to the game to be executed satisfies a specific condition (when a special small hit is won), the privilege granting means when the specific condition is satisfied and the privilege granting means.
Equipped with
The control means is
When the control mode is the second control mode, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the special information corresponding to the game to be executed satisfies the specific condition, the control mode is used. A gaming machine comprising means for shifting from the second control mode to the first control mode.

According to the feature sD5, when the control mode is the second control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the special information corresponding to the game times to be executed satisfies a specific condition, the control mode is set. The mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control mode. As described above, in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, the game is executed when the game ball enters the second ball entry means without the possibility of being disadvantageous to the player. The game times can be performed continuously. Therefore, according to the feature sD5, it is possible to further give the player a feeling of expectation to shift to the special state described above, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Features sD6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features sD1 to the feature sD5.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the special information acquired when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. The second special information, which is, and the acquired information storage means for storing the information are provided.
The game round execution means is
The first special information game time, which is a game time for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means for the first special information, and the game time for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means for the second special information. The second special information game times, which is, and the means to execute in parallel,
When the time of the second special information game is set as the second game time, the second game time in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode. With a means for setting the time longer than the time that can be set as the second gaming time in the state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature sD6, in the state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode, that is, in the normal state, the player launches the game ball toward the entrance of the first passage. If this is the case, the game ball can be entered into the second entry means. However, according to the feature sD6, the time of the second special information game in the state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode is set to a relatively long time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the determination by the determination means triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second entry means from being repeatedly executed in a short period of time. As a result, according to the feature sD6, the player is made to shoot the game ball aiming at the second ball entry means in the state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode. You can give up on that.

<Characteristic sE group>
The feature sE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its variants.

[Features sE1]
Distribution area (game area PA) where game balls are distributed,
A first passage (main line passage portion 210) provided in the distribution area for distributing game balls, and
A second passage (first branch passage portion 220) that is provided in the distribution area and is for distributing game balls and branches from the middle of the first passage.
A first ball entry means (right side first starting port 44) provided in the second passage and capable of entering a game ball, and
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) through which the game ball circulated in the first passage can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into each of a plurality of entry means including at least the first entry means and the second entry means.
A first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode (low probability mode) as a determination mode (lottery mode) for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition. A determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that of the determination mode.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 351 executed by the MPU 62).
In a gaming machine equipped with
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) provided at a branch point to the second passage in the first passage and assisting the entry of a game ball into the second passage.
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second passage, and a state in which the game ball can enter the second passage easily or easily. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state and a second state
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second passage.
A determination mode switching means that can switch the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode with a predetermined probability when the game ball enters the first entry means in the second passage (the determination mode switching means). The game ball distribution device 240, the fall opening 252, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the game ball distribution control process of FIG. 380 executed by the MPU 62).
The first special information, which is the special information acquired when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the special information acquired when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. The second special information, the acquired information storage means for storing, and
Equipped with
The control means is
When a specific condition is satisfied, the means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the first fluctuation stop process of FIG. 360 executed by the MPU 62). )
The game round execution means is
The first special information game time, which is a game time for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means for the first special information, and the game time for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means for the second special information. The second special information game times, which is, and the means to execute in parallel,
When the time of the second special information game is set as the second game time, the second game time in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode. With a means for setting the time longer than the time that can be set as the second gaming time in the state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature sE1, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second passage than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and the game ball enters the first passage with a high probability. Enter the ball means. However, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the determination mode is changed from the second determination mode to the first with a predetermined probability by the determination mode switching means. Since the mode can be switched to the determination mode, it may be disadvantageous for the player. Then, when the specific condition is satisfied, the control mode is switched from the second control mode to the first control mode. In the state where the control mode is the first control mode, the game ball is easily distributed downstream from the branch point to the second passage in the first passage, and the game ball enters the second entry means with a high probability. do. In this case, unlike the second passage side, the determination mode is not switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, so that there is no possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state. It is possible to continuously perform the game times executed when the game ball enters the ball means. Therefore, according to the feature sE1, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is executed with the entry of the game ball into the second entry means without the possibility of being disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation to shift to a state in which the game times can be continuously performed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the feature sE1, in a state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode, that is, in a normal state, the player plays a game ball toward the entrance of the first passage. When the ball is fired, the game ball can be entered into the second entry means. However, according to the feature sE1, the time of the second special information game in the state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode is set to a relatively long time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the determination by the determination means triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second entry means from being repeatedly executed in a short period of time. As a result, according to the feature sE1, the player is made to shoot the game ball aiming at the second ball entry means in the state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode. You can give up on that.

[Features sE2]
Features The gaming machine described in sE1.
The determination mode switching means is
A third passage (second branch passage portion 230) that is provided in the distribution area and is for distributing game balls and branches from the middle of the second passage.
A third ball entry means (falling opening 252) through which a game ball circulated in the third passage can enter, and
A determination mode control means capable of switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode when the game ball enters the third entry means.
A game ball distribution means (game ball) provided at a branch point to the third passage in the second passage and distributing a game ball between a portion downstream of the branch point in the second passage and the third passage. Sorting device 240) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature sE2, a part of the determination mode switching means can be configured by a hardware-like configuration including the third passage and the game ball distribution means. For this reason, by making the state in which the game ball distribution means distributes the game balls visible to the player from the outside, the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, which is disadvantageous. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency that it may end up. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Features sE3]
Features The gaming machine described in sE2.
The game ball distribution means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of distributing a game ball to the third passage is lower than the probability of distributing the game ball to a portion downstream of the branch point in the second passage.

According to the feature sE3, the probability that the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode can be set to be relatively low. For this reason, the probability that the player suffers a disadvantage can be made relatively low.

[Features sE4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features sE1 to the feature sE3.
The control means is
When the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times after the control mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control. Means for shifting to the mode (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the first fluctuation stop process of FIG. 360 executed by the MPU 62).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature sE4, when the number of times the game is executed after the control mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control mode. Will be migrated to. As described above, in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, the game is executed when the game ball enters the second ball entry means without the possibility of being disadvantageous to the player. The game times can be performed continuously. Therefore, according to the feature sE4, it is possible to further give the player a feeling of expectation to shift to the special state described above, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Features sE5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features sE1 to the feature sE4.
Equipped with a privilege granting means to grant benefits
The privilege granting means
When the special information corresponding to the game to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (when the jackpot is won), the privilege granting means when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the privilege granting means.
When the special information corresponding to the game to be executed satisfies a specific condition (when a special small hit is won), the privilege granting means when the specific condition is satisfied and the privilege granting means.
Equipped with
The control means is
When the control mode is the second control mode, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the special information corresponding to the game to be executed satisfies the specific condition, the control mode is used. A gaming machine comprising means for shifting from the second control mode to the first control mode.

According to the feature sE5, when the control mode is the second control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the special information corresponding to the game times to be executed satisfies a specific condition, the player can use it. The player is expected to shift to a state in which the game times executed by the entry of the game ball into the second entry means can be continuously performed without the possibility of being in a disadvantageous state. Can be granted. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Features sE6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features sE1 to the feature sE5.
A fourth ball entry means (through gate 35) provided above the entry port of the first passage and capable of entering a game ball is provided.
The state transition means is
A means for performing a predetermined lottery triggered by passing through the fourth ball entry means, and
When the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result, the means for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means to the second state and the means.
Equipped with
When the control mode is the second control mode, the gaming ball that has entered the fourth ball entry means (through gate 35) is configured to circulate from the first passage to the second passage. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature sE6, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball that has entered the fourth entry means is configured to circulate from the first passage to the second passage. In one passage, the game ball does not circulate on the downstream side of the branch point to the second passage. Therefore, when the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball that has entered the fourth entry means can always be entered into the first entry means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the accuracy of entering the game ball into the first ball entry means.

<Characteristic sF group>
The feature sF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment.

[Features sF1]
Distribution area (game area PA) where game balls are distributed,
A first ball entry means (first starting port 44 on the right side) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
A third ball entry means (falling port 252) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the first entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is a state in which the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means is impossible or difficult, and a state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry means is possible or easy. State transition means to transition between and
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the first ball entry means.
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into each of a plurality of entry means including at least the first entry means and the second entry means.
A first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode (low probability mode) as a determination mode (lottery mode) for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition. A determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that of the determination mode.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 351 executed by the MPU 62).
Judgment mode switching means (falling port 252, main control board 61 side) capable of switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode when the game ball enters the third entry means. MPU62, the ball entry process of the fall opening of FIG. 349 performed by MPU62), and
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the second determination second control state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball to the second ball entry means It is impossible or difficult to enter the ball, and it becomes possible or easy to enter the game ball into the third entry means.
In the second determination first control state (high accuracy and low support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode, the game ball to the second ball entry means It is possible or easy to enter the ball, and it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the third entry means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature sF1, in the second determination second control state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the state of the auxiliary means is the entry of the game ball into the first entry means. Since the ball is in a state of being possible or easy, it is easy to enter the game ball into the first ball entry means which can be an opportunity to execute the game round. However, in the second determination second control state, since it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third entry means, the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, and the player It can be a disadvantage for you. On the other hand, in the second determination first control state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode, the gaming ball enters the second entry means that can trigger the execution of the game round. However, since it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means, the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, which is disadvantageous for the player. There is no possibility of a state. Therefore, according to the feature sF1, in the second determination second control state, the game is executed when the game ball enters the second ball entry means without the possibility of being in a disadvantageous state for the player. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation to shift to the second determination first control state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the above can be continuously performed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features sF2]
Features The gaming machine described in sF1.
The control means is
When the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times after the control mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control. Means for shifting to the mode (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the first fluctuation stop process of FIG. 360 executed by the MPU 62).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature sF2, when the number of times the game is executed after the control mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control mode. Will be migrated to. Therefore, in the second determination second control state, when the number of times the game is executed after the control mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the second determination first control The transition to the state is made. The second determination first control state, as described above, is a game round executed when the game ball enters the second ball entry means without the possibility of being disadvantageous to the player. It can be done continuously. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the number of times the game is executed after the control mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, and the interest of the game is enjoyed. Further improvement can be achieved.

[Features sF3]
The gaming machine according to the feature sF1 or the feature sF2.
Equipped with a privilege granting means to grant benefits
The privilege granting means
When the special information corresponding to the game to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (when the jackpot is won), the privilege granting means when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the privilege granting means.
When the special information corresponding to the game to be executed satisfies a specific condition (when a special small hit is won), the privilege granting means when the specific condition is satisfied and the privilege granting means.
Equipped with
The control means is
Means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the special information corresponding to the game times executed in the second determination second control state satisfies the specific condition. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature sF3, in the second determination second control state, when the special information corresponding to the game times to be executed satisfies a specific condition, the control mode shifts from the second control mode to the first control mode, that is, , Second determination Transition to the first control state is made. The second determination first control state, as described above, is a game round executed when the game ball enters the second ball entry means without the possibility of being disadvantageous to the player. It can be done continuously. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the special information corresponding to the game to be executed satisfies a specific condition, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Features sF4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features sF1 to the feature sF3.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the special information acquired when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. The second special information, which is, and the acquired information storage means for storing the information are provided.
The game round execution means is
The first special information game time, which is a game time for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means for the first special information, and the game time for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means for the second special information. The second special information game times, which is, and the means to execute in parallel,
When the time of the second special information game is set as the second game time, the second game time in the state where the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode is set. , A means for setting a time longer than the time that can be set as the second game time in the second determination first control state,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature sF4, in the state where the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the first determination mode, that is, in the normal state, the player launches the game ball toward the entrance of the first passage. If this is the case, the game ball can be entered into the second entry means. However, according to the feature sF4, the time of the second special information game round in the normal state where the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode is set to a relatively long time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the determination by the determination means triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second entry means from being repeatedly executed in a short period of time. As a result, according to the feature sF4, it is possible to make the player give up firing the game ball aiming at the second ball entry means in the normal state.

<Characteristic sG group>
The feature sG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment.

[Features sG1]
Distribution area (game area PA) where game balls are distributed,
A first ball entry means (first starting port 44 on the right side) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the first entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is a state in which the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means is impossible or difficult, and a state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry means is possible or easy. State transition means to transition between and
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the first ball entry means.
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball that is refused to enter the first ball entry means by the auxiliary means.
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into each of a plurality of entry means including at least the first entry means and the second entry means.
A first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode (low probability mode) as a determination mode (lottery mode) for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition. A determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that of the determination mode.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 351 executed by the MPU 62).
In a gaming machine equipped with
The first special information, which is the special information acquired when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the special information acquired when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. The second special information, which is, and the acquired information storage means for storing the information are provided.
The game round execution means is
The first special information game time, which is a game time for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means for the first special information, and the game time for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means for the second special information. The second special information game times, and the parallel execution means for executing in parallel,
When the time of the second special information game is set as the second game time, the second game time in the state where the control mode is the second control mode is the second game time, and the determination mode is the second determination mode. A second game time setting means for setting a time longer than the time that can be set as the second game time in the second determination first control state (high accuracy and low support state) in which the control mode is the first control mode. ,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature sG1, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, the state of the auxiliary means is a state that enables or facilitates the entry of the game ball into the first entry means. It is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the ball means. However, in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, the second special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means is held in the acquired information storage means, which is the first control mode. In the state of the second control mode shifted from the state, it is possible that the determination by the determination means is executed based on the reserved second special information. Since the determination by the determination means based on the second special information is generally more advantageous to the player than the determination by the determination means based on the second special information, the determination by the determination means based on the reserved second special information is performed. If it is performed continuously, it will be in an excessively advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, according to the feature sG1, when the time of the second special information game is set as the second game time, the second game time in the state where the control mode is the second control mode is the second determination second. Since it is set to a time longer than the time that can be set as the second game time in one control state, it is possible to prevent the second special information held in the acquired information storage means from being repeatedly digested in a short period of time. , It is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous.

[Features sG2]
Features The gaming machine described in sG1.
The second game time setting means is
The second game time in the second determination second control state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode is the second in the second determination first control state. A gaming machine characterized in that a means for setting a time longer than a time that can be set as a gaming time is provided.

According to the feature sG2, the second game time in the second determination second control state is set to a time longer than the time that can be set as the second game time in the second determination first control state. Therefore, in the game state before the second determination second control state is reached, the second special information acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means is held in the acquisition information storage means, and after the transition. In the second determination second control state of the above, it is possible that the determination by the determination means is executed based on the reserved second special information. On the other hand, according to the feature sG2, the second game time in the second determination second control state is set to a time longer than the time that can be set as the second game time in the second determination first control state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second special information held in the acquired information storage means from being repeatedly digested in a short period of time, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous.

[Features sG3]
The gaming machine according to the feature sG1 or the feature sG2.
The second game time setting means is
The second gaming time in the first determination first control state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode is the second in the second determination first control state. A gaming machine characterized by providing a means for setting a time longer than a time that can be set as a gaming time.

According to the feature sG3, in the first judgment first control state where the judgment mode is the first judgment mode and the control mode is the first control mode, the player fires the game ball toward the first entrance. In this case, the game ball can be entered into the second entry means. However, according to the feature sG3, the time of the second special information game in the state where the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode is set to a relatively long time. , It is possible to prevent the determination by the determination means triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second entry means from being repeatedly executed in a short period of time. As a result, according to the feature sG3, in the first determination first control state, it is possible to give up firing the game ball aiming at the second ball entry means.

<Characteristic sH group>
The feature sh group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic sH1]
Distribution area (game area PA) where game balls are distributed,
A first ball entry means (through gate 35) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
A second ball entry means (right side first starting port 44) provided in the distribution area, located below the first ball entry means, and capable of entering a game ball.
A third ball entry means (out port 251 in the starting port unit) provided in the distribution area, located below the second ball entry means, and capable of entering a game ball.
A fourth ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area, located below the first ball entry means, and capable of entering a game ball.
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the first gaming state (high accuracy and high support state), which is a specific gaming state, each of the plurality of gaming balls that have continuously entered the first ball entry means has the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means. When the ball enters both of the ball entry means, one or a plurality of game balls that have entered the first ball entry means following the plurality of game balls can enter the fourth ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a gaming state transition means for transitioning to a gaming state (high accuracy and low support state).

According to the feature sH1, in the first gaming state, which is a specific gaming state, each of the plurality of gaming balls that have entered the first ball entry means of the second entry means and the third entry means. When the ball enters both sides (when 50 game balls enter both the right first start port 44 and the out port 251 in the start port unit and the game rounds are executed 50 times), the game state. Shifts from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. In the second game state, one or a plurality of game balls that have entered the first ball entry means are the fourth ball, following a plurality of game balls that have continuously entered the first ball entry means in the first game state. It is in a state where it is possible to enter the means. Therefore, in the first game state, each of the plurality of game balls that have continuously entered the first ball entry means has completed entering both the second entry means and the third entry means. In this case, the player enters into a second game state in which the game times executed by the ball entering the second ball entry means can be continuously performed. The second gaming state is an advantageous state for the player because it is possible to continuously perform the game times executed with the entry of the gaming ball into the fourth entry means. Therefore, according to the feature sH1, there is a sense of expectation and urgency that the game ball that has entered the first ball entry means does not enter both the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means in the first game state. A feeling can be given to the player, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Characteristics SH2]
Features The gaming machine described in sH1.
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a possible or facilitating state,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
Equipped with
The fourth ball entry means is a gaming machine characterized in that a gaming ball whose entry into the second entry means is refused by an auxiliary means can enter the ball.

According to the feature sH2, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and the game ball cannot enter the fourth ball entry means. It will be possible or difficult. Further, in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, it becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fourth ball entry means. Become. Therefore, by switching the control mode between the first control mode and the second control mode, the ball can enter the second ball entry means and the game ball can enter the fourth ball entry means. Can be easily controlled. Therefore, it is excellent in controllability.

[Features sH3]
Features The gaming machine described in sH2.
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into each of a plurality of entry means including at least the second entry means and the fourth entry means.
A first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode (low probability mode) as a determination mode (lottery mode) for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition. A determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that of the determination mode.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 351 executed by the MPU 62).
A fifth ball entry means (falling port 252) provided in the distribution area, located below the second ball entry means, and capable of entering a game ball.
Judgment mode switching means (game ball distribution device 240, fall opening 252) capable of switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode when the game ball enters the fifth entry means. , MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game ball distribution control process of FIG. 380 executed by MPU 62)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature sH3, the game ball that has entered the second entry means can enter either the third entry means or the fifth entry means. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the first ball entry means enters the fifth ball entry means after entering the second ball entry means, and the determination mode does not switch from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. It is possible to give a sense of urgency to the player. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic sH4]
Features The gaming machine described in sH3.
The control means is
When the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times after the control mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control. Means for shifting to the mode (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the first fluctuation stop process of FIG. 360 executed by the MPU 62).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature sH4, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, the game ball enters the second ball entry means with a higher probability than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode. However, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, there is a possibility that the game ball enters the fifth ball entry means after the game ball enters the second ball entry means. When a game ball enters the fifth ball entry means, the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, which may be disadvantageous to the player. Then, when the control mode is the second control mode and the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control. You can switch to the mode. In the state where the control mode is the first control mode, the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means with a high probability. In this case, since the game ball that has entered the second ball entry means does not enter the fifth ball entry means, there is no possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state, and the fourth ball entry means. It is possible to continuously perform the game times that are executed when the game ball enters the ball. Therefore, according to the feature sH4, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is executed with the entry of the game ball into the fourth entry means without the possibility of being disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation to shift to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game times can be continuously performed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic sH5]
The gaming machine according to the feature sH3 or the feature sH4.
Equipped with a privilege granting means to grant benefits
The privilege granting means
When the special information corresponding to the game to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (when the jackpot is won), the privilege granting means when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the privilege granting means.
When the special information corresponding to the game to be executed satisfies a specific condition (when a special small hit is won), the privilege granting means when the specific condition is satisfied and the privilege granting means.
Equipped with
The control means is
When the control mode is the second control mode, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the special information corresponding to the game to be executed satisfies the specific condition, the control mode is used. A gaming machine comprising means for shifting from the second control mode to the first control mode.

According to the feature sH5, in a state where the control mode is the second control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode, the number of times the game is executed after the control mode is changed from the first control mode to the second control mode. The control mode is shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of times the game reaches a predetermined number of times and the special information corresponding to the game times to be executed satisfies a specific condition. As described above, in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, the game is executed when the game ball enters the fourth ball entry means without the possibility of being disadvantageous to the player. The game times can be performed continuously. Therefore, according to the feature sH5, it is possible to further give the player a feeling of expectation to shift to the special state described above, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic sI group>
The feature sI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its variants.

[Features sI1]
Distribution area (game area PA) where game balls are distributed,
A first ball entry means (first starting port 44 on the right side) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into each of a plurality of entry means including at least the first entry means.
A first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode (low probability mode) as a determination mode (lottery mode) for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition. A determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that of the determination mode.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 351 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the first entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is a state in which the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means is impossible or difficult, and a state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry means is possible or easy. State transition means to transition between and
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the second control mode (high) are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the states of the auxiliary means. A control means that has at least a frequency support mode),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means changes the control mode to the second control mode when the number of executions of the game times after the control mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times. The control mode transition means (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the first fluctuation stop process of FIG. 360 executed by the MPU 62) for shifting from the first control mode to the first control mode is provided.
In the second determination second control state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the control mode is changed to the control mode by the control mode transition means. The second determination first control state (high) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode, triggered by the transition from the second control mode to the first control mode. Equipped with a game state transition means to shift the game state to (probability low support state)
The second determination first control state is a gaming machine characterized in that the advantage for the player is higher than that of the second determination second control state.

According to the feature sI1, in the second determination second control state, when the number of executions of the game times after the control mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the game state Is transferred from the second determination second control state to the second determination first control state. The second determination first control state is more advantageous to the player than the second determination second control state. Therefore, according to the feature sI1, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation to shift to the second determination first control state, which has a high advantage, in the second determination second control state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features sI2]
Features The gaming machine described in sI1.
A determination mode switching means (game ball distribution device) capable of switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode with a predetermined probability when the game ball enters the first entry means. 240, the fall opening 252, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the game ball distribution control process of FIG. 380 executed by the MPU 62).
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
Equipped with
In the second determination second control state, it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means, and it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. Next,
In the second determination first control state, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means, and the game ball can or easily enter the second ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the feature sI2, in the second determination second control state, the game ball enters the first ball entry means with a higher probability than in the state of the second determination first control state. However, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the determination mode switching means switches the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode with a predetermined probability, so that the player can use the determination mode. It can be a disadvantage. On the other hand, in the second determination first control state, the game ball enters the second ball entry means with a high probability. In this case, unlike the case where the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the determination mode is not switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to continuously perform the game times executed when the game ball enters the second ball entry means without the possibility of becoming a ball. Therefore, according to the feature sI2, in the second determination second control state, the game is executed when the game ball enters the second ball entry means without the possibility of being in a disadvantageous state for the player. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation to shift to the second determination first control state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the above can be continuously performed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic sI3]
The gaming machine according to feature sI1 or feature sI2.
Equipped with a privilege granting means to grant benefits
The privilege granting means
When the special information corresponding to the game to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (when the jackpot is won), the privilege granting means when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the privilege granting means.
When the special information corresponding to the game to be executed satisfies a specific condition (when a special small hit is won), the privilege granting means when the specific condition is satisfied and the privilege granting means.
Equipped with
The control means is
When the control mode is the second control mode, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the special information corresponding to the game to be executed satisfies the specific condition, the control mode is used. A gaming machine comprising means for shifting from the second control mode to the first control mode.

According to the feature sI3, in the second determination second control state, in addition to the case where the number of times the game is executed after the control mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the execution is performed. Even when the special information corresponding to the game times to be played satisfies a specific condition, the control mode is shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode, and is shifted to the second determination first control state. As described above, in the second determination first control state, the game times executed when the game ball enters the second ball entry means without the possibility of being in a disadvantageous state for the player. It can be done continuously. Therefore, according to the feature sI3, the player can be further given the expectation of shifting to the second determination first control state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) described above. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristics sJ group>
The feature sJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its variants.

[Features sJ1]
Distribution area (game area PA) where game balls are distributed,
A first ball entry means (first starting port 44 on the right side) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into each of a plurality of entry means including at least the first entry means.
A first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode (low probability mode) as a determination mode (lottery mode) for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition. A determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that of the determination mode.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 351 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the first entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is a state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry means is impossible or difficult, and a state in which the entry of the game ball into the first entry means is possible or easy. State transition means to transition between and
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the second control mode (high) are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the states of the auxiliary means. A control means that has at least a frequency support mode),
Benefit granting means to grant benefits and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The privilege granting means
When the special information corresponding to the game to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (when the jackpot is won), the privilege granting means when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the privilege granting means.
When the special information corresponding to the game to be executed meets a specific condition (when a special small hit is won), the privilege granting means when the specific condition is satisfied and the privilege granting means.
Equipped with
The control means is
When the control mode is the second control mode, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the special information corresponding to the game times to be executed satisfies the specific condition, the control mode is used. The second control mode is shifted to the first control mode (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the game state transition process of FIG. 370 executed by the MPU 62).
In the second determination second control state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the control mode is changed to the control mode by the control mode transition means. The second determination first control state (high) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode, triggered by the transition from the second control mode to the first control mode. Equipped with a game state transition means to shift the game state to (probability low support state)
The second determination first control state is a gaming machine characterized in that the advantage for the player is higher than that of the second determination second control state.

According to the feature sJ1, when the special information corresponding to the game times to be executed in the second determination second control state satisfies a specific condition, the game state is changed from the second determination second control state to the second determination second. 1 The control state is entered. The second determination first control state is more advantageous to the player than the second determination second control state. Therefore, according to the feature sJ1, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation to shift to the second determination first control state, which has a high advantage, in the second determination second control state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features sJ2]
Features The gaming machine described in sJ1.
A determination mode switching means (game ball distribution device) capable of switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode with a predetermined probability when the game ball enters the first entry means. 240, the fall opening 252, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the game ball distribution control process of FIG. 380 executed by the MPU 62).
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
Equipped with
In the second determination second control state, it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means, and it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. Next,
In the second determination first control state, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means, and the game ball can or easily enter the second ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the feature sJ2, in the second determination second control state, the game ball enters the first ball entry means with a higher probability than in the state of the second determination first control state. However, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the determination mode switching means switches the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode with a predetermined probability, so that the player can use the determination mode. It can be a disadvantage. On the other hand, in the second determination first control state, the game ball enters the second ball entry means with a high probability. In this case, unlike the case where the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the determination mode is not switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to continuously perform the game times executed when the game ball enters the second ball entry means without the possibility of becoming a ball. Therefore, according to the feature sJ2, in the second determination second control state, the game is executed when the game ball enters the second ball entry means without the possibility of being in a disadvantageous state for the player. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation to shift to the second determination first control state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the above can be continuously performed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features sJ3]
The gaming machine according to feature sJ1 or feature sJ2.
The control means is
When the number of times the game is executed after the control mode shifts from the first control mode to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control. A gaming machine characterized by having a means for shifting to a mode.

According to the feature sJ3, in the second determination second control state, the control mode is changed from the first control mode to the second control mode, in addition to the case where the special information corresponding to the game times to be executed satisfies a specific condition. Even when the number of times the game is executed after the transition reaches a predetermined number of times, the control mode is shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode, and the second determination is shifted to the first control state. As described above, in the second determination first control state, the game times executed when the game ball enters the second ball entry means without the possibility of being in a disadvantageous state for the player. It can be done continuously. Therefore, according to the feature sJ3, the player can be further given the expectation of shifting to the second determination first control state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) described above. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic sK group>
The feature sK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its variants.

[Features sK1]
Distribution area (game area PA) where game balls are distributed,
An entry means (first starting port 44 on the right side) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means,
A first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode (low probability mode) as a determination mode (lottery mode) for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition. A determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that of the determination mode.
When the specific condition is satisfied, the determination mode transition means (ball entry process for the fall opening), which shifts the determination executed by the determination means from the second determination mode to the first determination mode,
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 351 executed by the MPU 62).
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the specific condition can be satisfied, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state is the specific. A gaming state transition means for shifting from the specific gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (high accuracy and low support state) in which the specific condition cannot be satisfied when the predetermined number of times is reached without satisfying the condition.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature sK1, in the specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, when the specific condition is satisfied, the determination executed by the determination means shifts from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. On the other hand, in the specific gaming state, if the specific condition is not satisfied for a period until the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number after the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific condition is satisfied from the specific gaming state. It shifts to a predetermined gaming state that cannot be done. In this predetermined gaming state, since the specific condition cannot be satisfied, the transition from the second determination mode to the first determination mode for the determination mode is not performed. In the predetermined gaming state, it is possible to repeatedly execute the game times triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the entry means.

For this reason, according to the feature sK1, in the specific gaming state, the player is requested not to satisfy the specific condition during the period in which the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state is less than or equal to the predetermined number of times. It is possible to give a sense of urgency (don't fall) and a sense of expectation that the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times before the specific condition is satisfied. Then, when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific condition being satisfied, the player is in a predetermined gaming state (for example, in which the specific condition cannot be satisfied from the specific gaming state). By continuously performing the game times that are executed with the relief feeling that the player can move to the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment and the game ball entering the ball entry means, the player enters the ball in the predetermined game state in the near future. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the special information acquired when the game ball enters the means satisfies a predetermined condition. As described above, according to the feature sK1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a feeling of expectation, a feeling of urgency, and a feeling of relief.

[Features sK2]
Features The gaming machine described in sK1.
The determination mode transition means is
A ball entry means for transition to a judgment mode in which a game ball can enter,
When the game ball enters the determination mode transition entry means, the means for determining that the specific condition is satisfied and the means for determining that the specific condition is satisfied.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature sK2, when the game ball enters the ball entry means for shifting to the determination mode, it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied, and the determination executed by the determination means is changed from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. Will be migrated. Therefore, according to the feature sK2, it is possible to make the player recognize whether or not the specific condition is satisfied from whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means for shifting to the determination mode. It can give a more tense feeling.

[Features sK3]
The gaming machine according to the feature sK1 or the feature sK2.
A first passage (main line passage portion 210) provided in the distribution area for distributing game balls, and
A second passage (first branch passage portion 220) that is provided in the distribution area and is for distributing game balls and branches from the middle of the first passage.
A first ball entry means (right side first starting port 44) as the ball entry means provided in the second passage, and
A second ball entry means (second starting port 34) as the ball entry means, to which a game ball circulated in the first passage can enter.
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) provided at a branch point to the second passage in the first passage and assisting the entry of a game ball into the second passage.
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second passage, and a state in which the game ball can enter the second passage easily or easily. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state and a second state
Equipped with
The determination mode transition means is
A means (game ball swing) capable of switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode with a predetermined probability when the game ball enters the first ball entry means in the second passage. The distribution device 240, the fall port 252, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the game ball distribution control process of FIG. 380 executed by the MPU 62) are provided.
The game state transition means is
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. It has at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier for the game ball to enter the second passage, and the control mode changes from the first control mode to the second control mode. When the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times after the transition, the control means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode. First fluctuation stop processing of FIG. 360 executed by the MPU 62)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature sK3, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second passage than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and the game ball enters the first passage with a high probability. Enter the ball means. However, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the determination mode is changed from the second determination mode to the first with a predetermined probability by the determination mode switching means. Since the mode can be switched to the determination mode, it may be disadvantageous for the player. Then, when the control mode is the second control mode and the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control. You can switch to the mode. In the state where the control mode is the first control mode, the game ball is easily distributed downstream from the branch point to the second passage in the first passage, and the game ball enters the second entry means with a high probability. do. In this case, unlike the second passage side, the determination mode is not switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, so that there is no possibility that the player will be in a disadvantageous state. It is possible to continuously perform the game times executed when the game ball enters the ball means.

As a result, according to the feature sK3, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the second control mode reaches a predetermined number of times for the player. During the period, there is a sense of urgency that the judgment mode should not be switched from the second judgment mode to the disadvantageous first judgment mode (do not fall) by the judgment mode switching means, and the judgment mode is changed to the first judgment mode by the judgment mode switching means. Before switching to, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times. Then, if the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without the determination mode being switched to the first determination mode by the determination mode switching means, the determination mode is set to the first determination mode for the player. A special state (for example, the eighth implementation) in which the game times executed when the game ball enters the second ball entry means can be continuously performed without the risk of being switched to the second ball entry means and becoming a disadvantageous state. A state in which the control mode is the second control mode by continuously performing the game times executed when the game ball enters the second ball entry means and the relief feeling of being able to shift to the invincible zone in the form). In the near future, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the special information acquired by the entry of the game ball into the second entry means will satisfy a predetermined condition. As described above, according to the feature sK3, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a feeling of expectation, a feeling of urgency, and a feeling of relief.

[Features sK4]
Features The gaming machine described in sK3.
The determination mode transition means is
A third passage (second branch passage portion 230) that is provided in the distribution area and is for distributing game balls and branches from the middle of the second passage.
A third ball entry means (falling opening 252) through which a game ball circulated in the third passage can enter, and
A determination mode control means capable of switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode when the game ball enters the third entry means.
A game ball distribution means (game ball) provided at a branch point to the third passage in the second passage and distributing a game ball between a portion downstream of the branch point in the second passage and the third passage. Sorting device 240) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature sK4, a part of the determination mode transition means can be configured by a hardware-like configuration including the third passage and the game ball distribution means. For this reason, by making the state in which the game ball distribution means distributes the game balls visible to the player from the outside, the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, which is disadvantageous. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency that it may end up. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristics sL group>
The feature sL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, variants, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its variants.

[Features sL1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
The distribution area (game area PA) where the launched game balls are distributed,
An entry means (center side first starting port 33) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
A predetermined area (entrance port 210a of the starting port unit 200) provided in the distribution area and through which a game ball can pass, and
The game state in which the game shifts after satisfying a predetermined condition in the condition determination executed when the game ball enters the ball entry means, and the game ball enters the ball entry means. A specific game state (high accuracy and high support state) in which a game ball can enter the predetermined area by a launch mode (weak right-hand launch mode) different from the launch mode by the launch means (left-handed launch mode). ), When the game ball passes through the predetermined area, a plurality of types of result information (signal from the detection sensor for the second start port 34, signal from the detection sensor for the right first start port 44, start port). An information acquisition means for acquiring one result information from the signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the unit and the signal from the detection sensor for the fall port 252).
Of the first result (route that can enter the second starting port 34) and the second result (route that can enter the first right starting port 44) when the game ball passes through the predetermined area. The first distribution means (electric accessory 34a) to distribute to either,
When the ball is distributed to the second result by the first sorting means, the third result (route that can enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) and the fourth result (ball entering the falling port 252) are performed at a predetermined ratio. A second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) that distributes to one of the possible routes), and
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information (signal from the detection sensor for the fall opening 252) corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state is specified from the specific gaming state. A game state transition means for shifting to a predetermined game state (low accuracy and high support state) different from the game state, and
Equipped with
The specific gaming state has a higher advantage for the player as compared with the predetermined gaming state.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the game is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game, the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times (guaranteed game number). A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined gaming situation of 50 times or less.

According to the feature sL1, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, one result information is acquired from a plurality of types of result information. Further, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, it is distributed to either the first result or the second result, and when it is distributed to the second result, the third result and the fourth result are distributed at a predetermined ratio. It will be distributed to one of them. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state shifts from the specific gaming state having a high advantage to the player to the predetermined gaming state having a low advantage. Will be done. Further, according to the feature sL1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times or less. When the fourth result information is acquired, it shifts to a predetermined gaming state in which the advantage for the player is low as described above. Therefore, according to the feature sL1, if the number of times the game is executed can be continued until the predetermined number of times is reached without acquiring the information corresponding to the fourth result in the specific game state, the fourth. Information corresponding to the result is not acquired, and there is no possibility of being disadvantageous to the player.

As a result, according to the feature sL1, in the specific game state, the player is in a predetermined game state in which the advantage for the player is low during the period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times or less. I want you to have a sense of urgency that you do not want to acquire the 4th result information that will trigger the transition (do not fall), and you want the number of executions of the game to reach the predetermined number before the 4th result information is acquired. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation such as. Then, if the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without acquiring the fourth result information, the game state is shifted to the predetermined game state and the player is in a disadvantageous state. It is possible to give a sense of relief and a sense of expectation that can be transferred to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game rounds can be continuously performed without risk. As described above, according to the feature sL1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a feeling of expectation, a feeling of urgency, and a feeling of relief.

[Features sL2]
Features The gaming machine described in sL1.
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the third result information (signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the start port unit) corresponding to the third result, the third result information is used. A gaming machine comprising a means for maintaining the gaming state of the next gaming round of the corresponding gaming round in the specific gaming state.

According to the feature sL2, when the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the third result information corresponding to the third result, the gaming state of the next gaming round is maintained in the specific gaming state. For this reason, in the specific game state, depending on the distribution result of the second distribution means, there are cases where the player shifts to a predetermined gaming state, which is less advantageous to the player, and cases where the specific gaming state is maintained. .. Therefore, according to the feature sL2, there is a urgency that the second distribution means does not want to acquire the fourth result information that triggers the transition to the predetermined gaming state, which is less advantageous for the player (do not fall). You can give a feeling even more.

[Features sL3]
Features The gaming machine described in sL1.
The first result information (for the second starting port 34) corresponding to the first result in the specific game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state exceeds the predetermined number of times (the guaranteed number of games is 50). A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to acquire signals from the detection sensor of.

According to the feature sL3, the first result information corresponding to the first result can be acquired in the specific game situation in which the number of times the game is executed exceeds the predetermined number of times. Therefore, according to the feature sL3, when acquiring the first result information, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times. ..

[Features sL4]
Features The gaming machine described in sL1.
In a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times (the guaranteed number of games is 50), the third result information corresponding to the third result (out port in the start port unit). A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to acquire a signal from a detection sensor for 251).

According to the feature sL4, the third result information corresponding to the third result can be acquired in the predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is the predetermined number of times or less. Therefore, according to the feature sL4, the fourth result information that triggers the transition to the predetermined gaming state, which is less advantageous for the player, during the period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific gaming state is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that he / she wants the third result information to be acquired.

[Features sL5]
Features The gaming machine described in sL1.
In a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times (the guaranteed number of games is 50), the second result information corresponding to the second result (right side first start port 44). A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to acquire signals from detection sensors for pachinko and pachislot machines.

According to the feature sL5, the second result information corresponding to the second result can be acquired in the predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is the predetermined number of times or less. Therefore, during the period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific gaming state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, the second result information corresponding to the second result that triggers the distribution by the second distribution means can be acquired. The second result is an opportunity for distribution to be performed in the second distribution means, and the fourth result to be distributed by the second distribution means is an opportunity to shift to a predetermined gaming state in which the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to the feature sL5, the fourth result information that triggers the transition to the predetermined gaming state, which is less advantageous for the player, is not acquired during the period when the number of times the game is executed in the specific gaming state is less than or equal to the predetermined number of times. It is possible to surely give the player a sense of urgency that he wants it (do not fall).

[Features sL6]
Features The gaming machine described in sL1.
In a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times (the guaranteed number of games is 50), the second result information corresponding to the second result (right side first start port 44). (Signal from the detection sensor for) and the third result information (signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the start port unit) corresponding to the third result can be acquired. A game machine.

According to the feature sL6, the second result information corresponding to the second result that triggers the distribution by the second distribution means and the third result during the period when the number of times the game is executed in the specific gaming state is a predetermined number or less. The third result information corresponding to the result can be acquired. The second result serves as an opportunity for distribution to be performed in the second distribution means. The third result is one of the two results distributed by the second distribution means, and is not the fourth result that triggers the transition to the predetermined gaming state, which is less advantageous for the player. be. Therefore, according to the feature sL6, it is not the fourth result information that triggers the transition to the predetermined gaming state, which is less advantageous for the player, during the period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific gaming state is less than or equal to the predetermined number of times. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the third result information should be acquired.

[Features sL7]
Features The gaming machine described in sL1.
At least the first mode (low frequency support mode) and the second mode (high frequency support mode) are defined as modes in which the distribution ratio between the first result and the second result in the first distribution means is different. A gaming machine characterized by having.

According to the feature sL7, the distribution ratio between the first result and the second result in the first distribution means can be changed depending on the first mode and the second mode. Therefore, it is possible to change the distribution ratio between the first result and the second result with good controllability. When the second mode is set to a mode in which the ratio of distribution to the first result by the first distribution means is higher than that of the first mode, switching to the second mode has a low advantage for the player. It is possible to reduce the possibility of acquiring the fourth result information that triggers the transition to the gaming state. As a result, according to the feature sL7, by switching between the first mode and the second mode, it is possible to switch the degree of expectation and urgency given to the player.

[Features sL8]
Features The gaming machine described in sL1.
When the distribution result of the second distribution means becomes the third result (route capable of entering the out port 251 in the starting port unit), the next game times of the corresponding game times are the predetermined game states. A gaming machine characterized in that it is a gaming time that has a high advantage for the player as compared with the above.

According to the feature sL8, when the distribution result of the second distribution means becomes the fourth result, the gaming state is shifted from the specific gaming state to the predetermined gaming state. On the other hand, the game times following the game times corresponding to the case where the distribution result of the second distribution means becomes the third result are the game times that are more advantageous to the player as compared with the predetermined game state. ing. Therefore, depending on the distribution result of the second distribution means, the game state can be switched between a game time having a high advantage for the player and a game time having a low advantage. Therefore, it is possible to easily give a sense of urgency and expectation to the player.

[Features sL9]
Features The gaming machine described in sL1.
When the distribution result of the second distribution means becomes the fourth result (route capable of entering the falling opening 252), the effect in the game round corresponding to the case where the distribution result of the second distribution means is used. An effect including a content indicating that the advantage for the player is low as compared with the effect in the game times corresponding to the case where the third result (route capable of entering the out port 251 in the start port unit) is obtained. A gaming machine characterized by being content.

Feature According to sL9, it is possible to notify the player by directing whether the distribution result of the second distribution means is the third result or the fourth result, so that the interest of the game is further improved. be able to.

[Features sL10]
Features The gaming machine described in sL1.
In the specific gaming state, the number of times the distribution result of the second distribution means becomes the third result (route capable of entering the out port 251 in the starting port unit) is the predetermined number of times (guaranteed game number 50). If the distribution result of the second distribution means does not become the fourth result (route that can enter the falling opening 252) in the period until the time is reached, the game shifts to the specific gaming state again. A gaming machine characterized by shifting to a gaming state in which it is guaranteed (high accuracy and low support state (invincible zone) H6).

According to the feature sL10, in the specific game state, if the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without the distribution result of the second distribution means becoming the fourth result, the specific game state is again performed. It is possible to give the player a sense of relief and a sense of expectation that the player can shift to the gaming state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) that is guaranteed to shift to.

[Features sL11]
Features The gaming machine described in sL1.
The launch mode by the launching means, which has the highest advantage for the player in the specific gaming state, is a launch mode in which the game ball is easier to enter the predetermined area than the ball entry means (weak right-handed launch mode). can be,
The launch mode by the launching means, which has the highest advantage for the player in the predetermined gaming state, is a launch mode in which the game ball is more likely to enter the ball entry means than the predetermined area (falls in a highly accurate and high support state). A gaming machine characterized in that it is a left-handed launch mode in the low-accuracy low-support state in the modified example 14 in which the low-accuracy low-support state is achieved.

According to the feature sL11, the player operates the launching means so that the gaming ball can easily enter the predetermined area in the predetermined gaming state in the specific gaming state, thereby allowing the player to enter the specific gaming state. Can increase the advantage for. Further, the player operates the launching means so that the gaming ball is more likely to enter the ball entering means than the predetermined area in the predetermined gaming state, which is advantageous for the player in the predetermined gaming state. Can be enhanced. Therefore, in the specific gaming state, it is possible to recommend the player to operate the launching means in a launching mode in which the gaming ball can easily enter the predetermined area, and in the predetermined gaming state, the gaming means can be used for the game. It is possible to recommend to the player the operation of the launching means in a launching mode in which the ball is easy to enter. Therefore, according to the feature sL11, the player can launch the gaming ball in the launch mode of the launching means intended by the designer of the gaming machine. As a result, according to the feature sL11, it is possible to realize the flow of the game assumed by the designer side of the player.

<Characteristic sM group>
The feature sM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its variants.

[Features sM1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
The distribution area (game area PA) where the launched game balls are distributed,
An entry means (center side first starting port 33) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
A predetermined area (entrance port 210a of the starting port unit 200) provided in the distribution area and through which a game ball can pass, and
The game state in which the game shifts after satisfying a predetermined condition in the condition determination executed when the game ball enters the ball entry means, and the game ball enters the ball entry means. A specific game state (high accuracy and high support state) in which a game ball can enter the predetermined area by a launch mode (weak right-hand launch mode) different from the launch mode by the launch means (left-handed launch mode). ), When the game ball passes through the predetermined area, a plurality of types of result information (signal from the detection sensor for the second start port 34, signal from the detection sensor for the right first start port 44, start port). An information acquisition means for acquiring one result information from the signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the unit and the signal from the detection sensor for the fall port 252).
Of the first result (route that can enter the second starting port 34) and the second result (route that can enter the first right starting port 44) when the game ball passes through the predetermined area. The first distribution means (electric accessory 34a) for distribution to either, and
When the ball is distributed to the second result by the first sorting means, the third result (route that can enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) and the fourth result (ball entering the falling port 252) are performed at a predetermined ratio. A second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) that distributes to one of the possible routes), and
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information (signal from the detection sensor for the fall opening 252) corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state is specified from the specific gaming state. A game state transition means for shifting to a predetermined game state (low accuracy and high support state) different from the game state, and
Equipped with
The specific gaming state has a higher advantage for the player as compared with the predetermined gaming state.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the game is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game, the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times (guaranteed game number). It is configured so that the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation of 50 times or less.
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the third result information (signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the start port unit) corresponding to the third result, the third result information is used. A gaming machine comprising a means for maintaining the gaming state of the next gaming round of the corresponding gaming round in the specific gaming state.

According to the feature sM1, when the game ball passes through a predetermined area, one result information is acquired from a plurality of types of result information. Further, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, it is distributed to either the first result or the second result, and when it is distributed to the second result, the third result and the fourth result are distributed at a predetermined ratio. It will be distributed to one of them. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state shifts from the specific gaming state having a high advantage to the player to the predetermined gaming state having a low advantage. Will be done. Further, according to the feature sM1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times or less. When the fourth result information is acquired, it shifts to a predetermined gaming state in which the advantage for the player is low as described above. Therefore, according to the feature sM1, if the number of times the game is executed can be continued until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without acquiring the information corresponding to the fourth result in the specific game state, the fourth. Information corresponding to the result is not acquired, and there is no possibility of being disadvantageous to the player.

As a result, according to the feature sM1, in the specific game state, the player is in a predetermined game state in which the advantage for the player is low during the period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times or less. I want you to have a sense of urgency that you do not want to acquire the 4th result information that will trigger the transition (do not fall), and you want the number of executions of the game to reach the predetermined number before the 4th result information is acquired. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation such as. Then, if the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without acquiring the fourth result information, the game state is shifted to the predetermined game state and the player is in a disadvantageous state. It is possible to give a sense of relief and a sense of expectation that can be transferred to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game rounds can be continuously performed without risk. As described above, according to the feature sM1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a feeling of expectation, a feeling of urgency, and a feeling of relief.

Further, according to the feature sM1, when the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the third result information corresponding to the third result, the gaming state of the next gaming round is maintained in the specific gaming state. For this reason, in the specific game state, depending on the distribution result of the second distribution means, there are cases where the player shifts to a predetermined gaming state, which is less advantageous to the player, and cases where the specific gaming state is maintained. .. Therefore, according to the feature sM1, there is a urgency that the second distribution means does not want to acquire the fourth result information that triggers the transition to the predetermined gaming state, which is less advantageous for the player (do not fall). You can give a feeling even more.

<Characteristic sN group>
The feature sN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its variants.

[Features sN1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
The distribution area (game area PA) where the launched game balls are distributed,
An entry means (center side first starting port 33) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
A predetermined area (entrance port 210a of the starting port unit 200) provided in the distribution area and through which a game ball can pass, and
The game state in which the game shifts after satisfying a predetermined condition in the condition determination executed when the game ball enters the ball entry means, and the game ball enters the ball entry means. A specific game state (high accuracy and high support state) in which a game ball can enter the predetermined area by a launch mode (weak right-hand launch mode) different from the launch mode by the launch means (left-handed launch mode). ), When the game ball passes through the predetermined area, a plurality of types of result information (signal from the detection sensor for the second start port 34, signal from the detection sensor for the right first start port 44, start port). An information acquisition means for acquiring one result information from the signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the unit and the signal from the detection sensor for the fall port 252).
Of the first result (route that can enter the second starting port 34) and the second result (route that can enter the first right starting port 44) when the game ball passes through the predetermined area. The first distribution means (electric accessory 34a) to distribute to either,
When the ball is distributed to the second result by the first sorting means, the third result (route that can enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) and the fourth result (ball entering the falling port 252) are performed at a predetermined ratio. A second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) that distributes to one of the possible routes), and
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information (signal from the detection sensor for the fall opening 252) corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state is specified from the specific gaming state. A game state transition means for shifting to a predetermined game state (low accuracy and high support state) different from the game state, and
Equipped with
The specific gaming state has a higher advantage for the player as compared with the predetermined gaming state.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the game is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game, the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times (guaranteed game number). It is configured so that the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation of 50 times or less.
The first result information (for the second starting port 34) corresponding to the first result in the specific game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state exceeds the predetermined number of times (the guaranteed number of games is 50). A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to acquire signals from the detection sensor of.

According to the feature sN1, when the game ball passes through a predetermined area, one result information is acquired from a plurality of types of result information. Further, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, it is distributed to either the first result or the second result, and when it is distributed to the second result, the third result and the fourth result are distributed at a predetermined ratio. It will be distributed to one of them. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state shifts from the specific gaming state having a high advantage to the player to the predetermined gaming state having a low advantage. Will be done. Further, according to the feature sN1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times or less. When the fourth result information is acquired, it shifts to a predetermined gaming state in which the advantage for the player is low as described above. Therefore, according to the feature sN1, if the number of times the game is executed can be continued until the predetermined number of times is reached without acquiring the information corresponding to the fourth result in the specific game state, the fourth. Information corresponding to the result is not acquired, and there is no possibility of being disadvantageous to the player.

As a result, according to the feature sN1, in the specific game state, the player is in a predetermined game state in which the advantage for the player is low during the period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times or less. I want you to have a sense of urgency that you do not want to acquire the 4th result information that will trigger the transition (do not fall), and you want the number of executions of the game to reach a predetermined number before the 4th result information is acquired. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation such as. Then, if the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without acquiring the fourth result information, the game state is shifted to the predetermined game state and the player is in a disadvantageous state. It is possible to give a sense of relief and a sense of expectation that can be transferred to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game rounds can be continuously performed without risk. As described above, according to the feature sN1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a feeling of expectation, a feeling of urgency, and a feeling of relief.

Further, according to the feature sN1, the first result information corresponding to the first result can be acquired in the specific game situation in which the number of times the game is executed exceeds the predetermined number of times. Therefore, according to the feature sN1, when acquiring the first result information, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times. ..

<Characteristic so group>
The feature so group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic so1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
The distribution area (game area PA) where the launched game balls are distributed,
An entry means (center side first starting port 33) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
A predetermined area (entrance port 210a of the starting port unit 200) provided in the distribution area and through which a game ball can pass, and
The game state in which the game shifts after satisfying a predetermined condition in the condition determination executed when the game ball enters the ball entry means, and the game ball enters the ball entry means. A specific game state (high accuracy and high support state) in which a game ball can enter the predetermined area by a launch mode (weak right-hand launch mode) different from the launch mode by the launch means (left-handed launch mode). ), When the game ball passes through the predetermined area, a plurality of types of result information (signal from the detection sensor for the second start port 34, signal from the detection sensor for the right first start port 44, start port). An information acquisition means for acquiring one result information from the signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the unit and the signal from the detection sensor for the fall port 252).
Of the first result (route that can enter the second starting port 34) and the second result (route that can enter the first right starting port 44) when the game ball passes through the predetermined area. The first distribution means (electric accessory 34a) for distribution to either, and
When the ball is distributed to the second result by the first sorting means, the third result (route that can enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) and the fourth result (ball entering the falling port 252) are performed at a predetermined ratio. A second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) that distributes to one of the possible routes), and
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information (signal from the detection sensor for the fall opening 252) corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state is specified from the specific gaming state. A game state transition means for shifting to a predetermined game state (low accuracy and high support state) different from the game state, and
Equipped with
The specific gaming state has a higher advantage for the player as compared with the predetermined gaming state.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the game is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game, the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times (guaranteed game number). It is configured so that the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation of 50 times or less.
In a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times (the guaranteed number of games is 50), the third result information corresponding to the third result (out port in the start port unit). A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to acquire a signal from a detection sensor for 251).

According to the feature sO1, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, one result information is acquired from a plurality of types of result information. Further, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, it is distributed to either the first result or the second result, and when it is distributed to the second result, the third result and the fourth result are distributed at a predetermined ratio. It will be distributed to one of them. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state shifts from the specific gaming state having a high advantage to the player to the predetermined gaming state having a low advantage. Will be done. Further, according to the feature sO1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times or less. When the fourth result information is acquired, it shifts to a predetermined gaming state in which the advantage for the player is low as described above. Therefore, according to the feature sO1, if the number of times the game is executed can be continued until the predetermined number of times is reached without acquiring the information corresponding to the fourth result in the specific game state, the fourth. Information corresponding to the result is not acquired, and there is no possibility of being disadvantageous to the player.

As a result, according to the feature sO1, in the specific game state, the player is in a predetermined game state in which the advantage for the player is low during the period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times or less. I want you to have a sense of urgency that you do not want to acquire the 4th result information that will trigger the transition (do not fall), and you want the number of executions of the game to reach the predetermined number before the 4th result information is acquired. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation such as. Then, if the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without acquiring the fourth result information, the game state is shifted to the predetermined game state and the player is in a disadvantageous state. It is possible to give a sense of relief and a sense of expectation that can be transferred to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game rounds can be continuously performed without risk. As described above, according to the feature sO1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a feeling of expectation, a feeling of urgency, and a feeling of relief.

Further, according to the feature sO1, the third result information corresponding to the third result can be acquired in the predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is the predetermined number of times or less. Therefore, according to the feature sO1, the fourth result information that triggers the transition to the predetermined gaming state, which is less advantageous for the player, during the period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific gaming state is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that he / she wants the third result information to be acquired.

<Characteristic sP group>
The feature sP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its variants.

[Features sP1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
The distribution area (game area PA) where the launched game balls are distributed,
An entry means (center side first starting port 33) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
A predetermined area (entrance port 210a of the starting port unit 200) provided in the distribution area and through which a game ball can pass, and
The game state in which the game shifts after satisfying a predetermined condition in the condition determination executed when the game ball enters the ball entry means, and the game ball enters the ball entry means. A specific game state (high accuracy and high support state) in which a game ball can enter the predetermined area by a launch mode (weak right-hand launch mode) different from the launch mode by the launch means (left-handed launch mode). ), When the game ball passes through the predetermined area, a plurality of types of result information (signal from the detection sensor for the second start port 34, signal from the detection sensor for the right first start port 44, start port). An information acquisition means for acquiring one result information from the signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the unit and the signal from the detection sensor for the fall port 252).
Of the first result (route that can enter the second starting port 34) and the second result (route that can enter the first right starting port 44) when the game ball passes through the predetermined area. The first distribution means (electric accessory 34a) to distribute to either,
When the ball is distributed to the second result by the first sorting means, the third result (route that can enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) and the fourth result (ball entering the falling port 252) are performed at a predetermined ratio. A second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) that distributes to one of the possible routes), and
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information (signal from the detection sensor for the fall opening 252) corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state is specified from the specific gaming state. A game state transition means for shifting to a predetermined game state (low accuracy and high support state) different from the game state, and
Equipped with
The specific gaming state has a higher advantage for the player as compared with the predetermined gaming state.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the game is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game, the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times (guaranteed game number). It is configured so that the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation of 50 times or less.
In a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times (the guaranteed number of games is 50), the second result information corresponding to the second result (right side first start port 44). A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to acquire signals from detection sensors for pachinko and pachislot machines.

According to the feature sP1, when the game ball passes through a predetermined area, one result information is acquired from a plurality of types of result information. Further, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, it is distributed to either the first result or the second result, and when it is distributed to the second result, the third result and the fourth result are distributed at a predetermined ratio. It will be distributed to one of them. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state shifts from the specific gaming state having a high advantage to the player to the predetermined gaming state having a low advantage. Will be done. Further, according to the feature sP1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times or less. When the fourth result information is acquired, it shifts to a predetermined gaming state in which the advantage for the player is low as described above. Therefore, according to the feature sP1, if the number of times the game is executed can be continued until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without acquiring the information corresponding to the fourth result in the specific game state, the fourth. Information corresponding to the result is not acquired, and there is no possibility of being disadvantageous to the player.

As a result, according to the feature sP1, in the specific game state, the player is in a predetermined game state in which the advantage for the player is low during the period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times or less. I want you to have a sense of urgency that you do not want to acquire the 4th result information that will trigger the transition (do not fall), and you want the number of executions of the game to reach the predetermined number before the 4th result information is acquired. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation such as. Then, if the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without acquiring the fourth result information, the game state is shifted to the predetermined game state and the player is in a disadvantageous state. It is possible to give a sense of relief and a sense of expectation that can be transferred to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game rounds can be continuously performed without risk. As described above, according to the feature sP1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a feeling of expectation, a feeling of urgency, and a feeling of relief.

Further, according to the feature sP1, the second result information corresponding to the second result can be acquired in the predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is the predetermined number of times or less. Therefore, during the period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific gaming state is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, the second result information corresponding to the second result that triggers the distribution by the second distribution means can be acquired. The second result is an opportunity for distribution to be performed in the second distribution means, and the fourth result to be distributed by the second distribution means is an opportunity to shift to a predetermined gaming state in which the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to the feature sP1, the fourth result information that triggers the transition to the predetermined gaming state, which is less advantageous for the player, is not acquired during the period when the number of times the game is executed in the specific gaming state is less than or equal to the predetermined number of times. It is possible to surely give the player a sense of urgency that he wants it (do not fall).

<Characteristic sQ group>
The feature sQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its variants.

[Features sQ1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
The distribution area (game area PA) where the launched game balls are distributed,
An entry means (center side first starting port 33) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
A predetermined area (entrance port 210a of the starting port unit 200) provided in the distribution area and through which a game ball can pass, and
The game state in which the game shifts after satisfying a predetermined condition in the condition determination executed when the game ball enters the ball entry means, and the game ball enters the ball entry means. A specific game state (high accuracy and high support state) in which a game ball can enter the predetermined area by a launch mode (weak right-hand launch mode) different from the launch mode by the launch means (left-handed launch mode). ), When the game ball passes through the predetermined area, a plurality of types of result information (signal from the detection sensor for the second start port 34, signal from the detection sensor for the right first start port 44, start port). An information acquisition means for acquiring one result information from the signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the unit and the signal from the detection sensor for the fall port 252).
Of the first result (route that can enter the second starting port 34) and the second result (route that can enter the first right starting port 44) when the game ball passes through the predetermined area. The first distribution means (electric accessory 34a) to distribute to either,
When the ball is distributed to the second result by the first sorting means, the third result (route that can enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) and the fourth result (ball entering the falling port 252) are performed at a predetermined ratio. A second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) that distributes to one of the possible routes), and
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information (signal from the detection sensor for the fall opening 252) corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state is specified from the specific gaming state. A game state transition means for shifting to a predetermined game state (low accuracy and high support state) different from the game state, and
Equipped with
The specific gaming state has a higher advantage for the player as compared with the predetermined gaming state.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the game is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game, the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times (guaranteed game number). It is configured so that the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation of 50 times or less.
In a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times (the guaranteed number of games is 50), the second result information corresponding to the second result (right side first start port 44). (Signal from the detection sensor for) and the third result information (signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the start port unit) corresponding to the third result can be acquired. A game machine.

According to the feature sQ1, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, one result information is acquired from a plurality of types of result information. Further, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, it is distributed to either the first result or the second result, and when it is distributed to the second result, the third result and the fourth result are distributed at a predetermined ratio. It will be distributed to one of them. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state shifts from the specific gaming state having a high advantage to the player to the predetermined gaming state having a low advantage. Will be done. Further, according to the feature sQ1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times or less. When the fourth result information is acquired, it shifts to a predetermined gaming state in which the advantage for the player is low as described above. Therefore, according to the feature sQ1, if the number of times the game is executed can be continued until the predetermined number of times is reached without acquiring the information corresponding to the fourth result in the specific game state, the fourth. Information corresponding to the result is not acquired, and there is no possibility of being disadvantageous to the player.

As a result, according to the feature sQ1, in the specific game state, the player is in a predetermined game state in which the advantage for the player is low during the period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times or less. I want you to have a sense of urgency that you do not want to acquire the 4th result information that will trigger the transition (do not fall), and you want the number of executions of the game to reach the predetermined number before the 4th result information is acquired. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation such as. Then, if the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without acquiring the fourth result information, the game state is shifted to the predetermined game state and the player is in a disadvantageous state. It is possible to give a sense of relief and a sense of expectation that can be transferred to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game rounds can be continuously performed without risk. As described above, according to the feature sQ1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a feeling of expectation, a feeling of urgency, and a feeling of relief.

Further, according to the feature sQ1, the second result information corresponding to the second result that triggers the distribution by the second distribution means during the period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific gaming state is a predetermined number or less, and the second result information. The third result information corresponding to the third result can be acquired. The second result serves as an opportunity for distribution to be performed in the second distribution means. The third result is one of the two results distributed by the second distribution means, and is not the fourth result that triggers the transition to the predetermined gaming state, which is less advantageous for the player. be. Therefore, according to the feature sQ1, it is not the fourth result information that triggers the transition to the predetermined gaming state, which is less advantageous for the player, during the period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific gaming state is less than or equal to the predetermined number of times. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the third result information should be acquired.

<Characteristic sR group>
The feature sR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its variants.

[Features sR1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
The distribution area (game area PA) where the launched game balls are distributed,
An entry means (center side first starting port 33) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
A predetermined area (entrance port 210a of the starting port unit 200) provided in the distribution area and through which a game ball can pass, and
The game state in which the game shifts after satisfying a predetermined condition in the condition determination executed when the game ball enters the ball entry means, and the game ball enters the ball entry means. A specific game state (high accuracy and high support state) in which a game ball can enter the predetermined area by a launch mode (weak right-hand launch mode) different from the launch mode by the launch means (left-handed launch mode). ), When the game ball passes through the predetermined area, a plurality of types of result information (signal from the detection sensor for the second start port 34, signal from the detection sensor for the right first start port 44, start port). An information acquisition means for acquiring one result information from the signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the unit and the signal from the detection sensor for the fall port 252).
Of the first result (route that can enter the second starting port 34) and the second result (route that can enter the first right starting port 44) when the game ball passes through the predetermined area. The first distribution means (electric accessory 34a) to distribute to either,
When the ball is distributed to the second result by the first sorting means, the third result (route that can enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) and the fourth result (ball entering the falling port 252) are performed at a predetermined ratio. A second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) that distributes to one of the possible routes), and
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information (signal from the detection sensor for the fall opening 252) corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state is specified from the specific gaming state. A game state transition means for shifting to a predetermined game state (low accuracy and high support state) different from the game state, and
Equipped with
The specific gaming state has a higher advantage for the player as compared with the predetermined gaming state.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the game is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game, the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times (guaranteed game number). It is configured so that the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation of 50 times or less.
At least the first mode (low frequency support mode) and the second mode (high frequency support mode) are defined as modes in which the distribution ratio between the first result and the second result in the first distribution means is different. A gaming machine characterized by having.

According to the feature sR1, when the game ball passes through a predetermined area, one result information is acquired from a plurality of types of result information. Further, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, it is distributed to either the first result or the second result, and when it is distributed to the second result, the third result and the fourth result are distributed at a predetermined ratio. It will be distributed to one of them. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state shifts from the specific gaming state having a high advantage to the player to the predetermined gaming state having a low advantage. Will be done. Further, according to the feature sR1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times or less. When the fourth result information is acquired, it shifts to a predetermined gaming state in which the advantage for the player is low as described above. Therefore, according to the feature sR1, if the number of times the game is executed can be continued until the predetermined number of times is reached without acquiring the information corresponding to the fourth result in the specific game state, the fourth. Information corresponding to the result is not acquired, and there is no possibility of being disadvantageous to the player.

As a result, according to the feature sR1, in the specific game state, the player is in a predetermined game state in which the advantage for the player is low during the period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times or less. I want you to have a sense of urgency that you do not want to acquire the 4th result information that will trigger the transition (do not fall), and you want the number of executions of the game to reach the predetermined number before the 4th result information is acquired. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation such as. Then, if the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without acquiring the fourth result information, the game state is shifted to the predetermined game state and the player is in a disadvantageous state. It is possible to give a sense of relief and a sense of expectation that can be transferred to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game rounds can be continuously performed without risk. As described above, according to the feature sR1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a feeling of expectation, a feeling of urgency, and a feeling of relief.

Further, according to the feature sR1, the distribution ratio between the first result and the second result in the first distribution means can be changed depending on the first mode and the second mode. Therefore, it is possible to change the distribution ratio between the first result and the second result with good controllability. When the second mode is set to a mode in which the ratio of distribution to the first result by the first distribution means is higher than that of the first mode, switching to the second mode has a low advantage for the player. It is possible to reduce the possibility of acquiring the fourth result information that triggers the transition to the gaming state. As a result, according to the feature sR1, by switching between the first mode and the second mode, it is possible to switch the degree of expectation and urgency given to the player.

<Characteristic sS group>
The feature sS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its variants.

[Features sS1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
The distribution area (game area PA) where the launched game balls are distributed,
An entry means (center side first starting port 33) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
A predetermined area (entrance port 210a of the starting port unit 200) provided in the distribution area and through which a game ball can pass, and
The game state in which the game shifts after satisfying a predetermined condition in the condition determination executed when the game ball enters the ball entry means, and the game ball enters the ball entry means. A specific game state (high accuracy and high support state) in which a game ball can enter the predetermined area by a launch mode (weak right-hand launch mode) different from the launch mode by the launch means (left-handed launch mode). ), When the game ball passes through the predetermined area, a plurality of types of result information (signal from the detection sensor for the second start port 34, signal from the detection sensor for the right first start port 44, start port). An information acquisition means for acquiring one result information from the signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the unit and the signal from the detection sensor for the fall port 252).
Of the first result (route that can enter the second starting port 34) and the second result (route that can enter the first right starting port 44) when the game ball passes through the predetermined area. The first distribution means (electric accessory 34a) to distribute to either,
When the ball is distributed to the second result by the first sorting means, the third result (route that can enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) and the fourth result (ball entering the falling port 252) are performed at a predetermined ratio. A second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) that distributes to one of the possible routes), and
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information (signal from the detection sensor for the fall opening 252) corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state is specified from the specific gaming state. A game state transition means for shifting to a predetermined game state (low accuracy and high support state) different from the game state, and
Equipped with
The specific gaming state has a higher advantage for the player as compared with the predetermined gaming state.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the game is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game, the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times (guaranteed game number). It is configured so that the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation of 50 times or less.
When the distribution result of the second distribution means becomes the third result (route capable of entering the out port 251 in the starting port unit), the next game times of the corresponding game times are the predetermined game states. A gaming machine characterized in that it is a gaming time that has a high advantage for the player as compared with the above.

According to the feature sS1, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, one result information is acquired from a plurality of types of result information. Further, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, it is distributed to either the first result or the second result, and when it is distributed to the second result, the third result and the fourth result are distributed at a predetermined ratio. It will be distributed to one of them. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state shifts from the specific gaming state having a high advantage to the player to the predetermined gaming state having a low advantage. Will be done. Further, according to the feature sS1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times or less. When the fourth result information is acquired, it shifts to a predetermined gaming state in which the advantage for the player is low as described above. Therefore, according to the feature sS1, if the number of times the game is executed can be continued until the predetermined number of times is reached without acquiring the information corresponding to the fourth result in the specific game state, the fourth. Information corresponding to the result is not acquired, and there is no possibility of being disadvantageous to the player.

As a result, according to the feature sS1, in the specific game state, the player is in a predetermined game state in which the advantage for the player is low during the period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times or less. I want you to have a sense of urgency that you do not want to acquire the 4th result information that will trigger the transition (do not fall), and you want the number of executions of the game to reach the predetermined number before the 4th result information is acquired. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation such as. Then, if the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without acquiring the fourth result information, the game state is shifted to the predetermined game state and the player is in a disadvantageous state. It is possible to give a sense of relief and a sense of expectation that can be transferred to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game rounds can be continuously performed without risk. As described above, according to the feature sS1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a feeling of expectation, a feeling of urgency, and a feeling of relief.

Further, according to the feature sS1, when the distribution result of the second distribution means becomes the fourth result, the gaming state is shifted from the specific gaming state to the predetermined gaming state. On the other hand, the game times following the game times corresponding to the case where the distribution result of the second distribution means becomes the third result are the game times that are more advantageous to the player as compared with the predetermined game state. ing. Therefore, depending on the distribution result of the second distribution means, the game state can be switched between a game time having a high advantage for the player and a game time having a low advantage. Therefore, it is possible to easily give a sense of urgency and expectation to the player.

<Characteristic sT group>
The feature sT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic sT1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
The distribution area (game area PA) where the launched game balls are distributed,
An entry means (center side first starting port 33) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
A predetermined area (entrance port 210a of the starting port unit 200) provided in the distribution area and through which a game ball can pass, and
The game state in which the game shifts after satisfying a predetermined condition in the condition determination executed when the game ball enters the ball entry means, and the game ball enters the ball entry means. A specific game state (high accuracy and high support state) in which a game ball can enter the predetermined area by a launch mode (weak right-hand launch mode) different from the launch mode by the launch means (left-handed launch mode). ), When the game ball passes through the predetermined area, a plurality of types of result information (signal from the detection sensor for the second start port 34, signal from the detection sensor for the right first start port 44, start port). An information acquisition means for acquiring one result information from the signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the unit and the signal from the detection sensor for the fall port 252).
Of the first result (route that can enter the second starting port 34) and the second result (route that can enter the first right starting port 44) when the game ball passes through the predetermined area. The first distribution means (electric accessory 34a) to distribute to either,
When the ball is distributed to the second result by the first sorting means, the third result (route that can enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) and the fourth result (ball entering the falling port 252) are performed at a predetermined ratio. A second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) that distributes to one of the possible routes), and
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information (signal from the detection sensor for the fall opening 252) corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state is specified from the specific gaming state. A game state transition means for shifting to a predetermined game state (low accuracy and high support state) different from the game state, and
Equipped with
The specific gaming state has a higher advantage for the player as compared with the predetermined gaming state.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the game is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game, the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times (guaranteed game number). It is configured so that the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation of 50 times or less.
When the distribution result of the second distribution means becomes the fourth result (route capable of entering the falling opening 252), the effect in the game round corresponding to the case where the distribution result of the second distribution means is used. A production including a content indicating that the advantage for the player is low as compared with the production in the corresponding game times when the third result (route that can enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) is obtained. A gaming machine characterized by being content.

According to the feature sT1, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, one result information is acquired from a plurality of types of result information. Further, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, it is distributed to either the first result or the second result, and when it is distributed to the second result, the third result and the fourth result are distributed at a predetermined ratio. It will be distributed to one of them. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state shifts from the specific gaming state having a high advantage to the player to the predetermined gaming state having a low advantage. Will be done. Further, according to the feature sT1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times or less. When the fourth result information is acquired, it shifts to a predetermined gaming state in which the advantage for the player is low as described above. Therefore, according to the feature sT1, if the number of times the game is executed can be continued until the predetermined number of times is reached without acquiring the information corresponding to the fourth result in the specific game state, the fourth. Information corresponding to the result is not acquired, and there is no possibility of being disadvantageous to the player.

As a result, according to the feature sT1, in the specific game state, the player is in a predetermined game state in which the advantage for the player is low during the period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times or less. I want you to have a sense of urgency that you do not want to acquire the 4th result information that will trigger the transition (do not fall), and you want the number of executions of the game to reach the predetermined number before the 4th result information is acquired. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation such as. Then, if the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without acquiring the fourth result information, the game state is shifted to the predetermined game state and the player is in a disadvantageous state. It is possible to give a sense of relief and a sense of expectation that can be transferred to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game rounds can be continuously performed without risk. As described above, according to the feature sT1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a feeling of expectation, a feeling of urgency, and a feeling of relief. Further, according to the feature sT1, it is possible to notify the player by directing whether the distribution result of the second distribution means is the third result or the fourth result, so that the interest of the game can be improved. You can do more.

<Characteristic sU group>
The feature sU group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its variants.

[Features sU1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
The distribution area (game area PA) where the launched game balls are distributed,
An entry means (center side first starting port 33) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
A predetermined area (entrance port 210a of the starting port unit 200) provided in the distribution area and through which a game ball can pass, and
The game state in which the game shifts after satisfying a predetermined condition in the condition determination executed when the game ball enters the ball entry means, and the game ball enters the ball entry means. A specific game state (high accuracy and high support state) in which a game ball can enter the predetermined area by a launch mode (weak right-hand launch mode) different from the launch mode by the launch means (left-handed launch mode). ), When the game ball passes through the predetermined area, a plurality of types of result information (signal from the detection sensor for the second start port 34, signal from the detection sensor for the right first start port 44, start port). An information acquisition means for acquiring one result information from the signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the unit and the signal from the detection sensor for the fall port 252).
Of the first result (route that can enter the second starting port 34) and the second result (route that can enter the first right starting port 44) when the game ball passes through the predetermined area. The first distribution means (electric accessory 34a) for distribution to either, and
When the ball is distributed to the second result by the first sorting means, the third result (route that can enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) and the fourth result (ball entering the falling port 252) are performed at a predetermined ratio. A second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) that distributes to one of the possible routes), and
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information (signal from the detection sensor for the fall opening 252) corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state is specified from the specific gaming state. A game state transition means for shifting to a predetermined game state (low accuracy and high support state) different from the game state, and
Equipped with
The specific gaming state has a higher advantage for the player as compared with the predetermined gaming state.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the game is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game, the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times (guaranteed game number). It is configured so that the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation of 50 times or less.
In the specific gaming state, the number of times the distribution result of the second distribution means becomes the third result (route capable of entering the out port 251 in the starting port unit) is the predetermined number of times (guaranteed game number 50). If the distribution result of the second distribution means does not become the fourth result (route that can enter the fall opening 252) in the period until the time is reached, the game shifts to the specific gaming state again. A gaming machine characterized by shifting to a gaming state in which it is guaranteed (high accuracy and low support state (invincible zone) H6).

According to the feature sU1, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, one result information is acquired from a plurality of types of result information. Further, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, it is distributed to either the first result or the second result, and when it is distributed to the second result, the third result and the fourth result are distributed at a predetermined ratio. It will be distributed to one of them. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state shifts from the specific gaming state having a high advantage to the player to the predetermined gaming state having a low advantage. Will be done. Further, according to the feature sU1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times or less. When the fourth result information is acquired, it shifts to a predetermined gaming state in which the advantage for the player is low as described above. Therefore, according to the feature sU1, if the number of times the game is executed can be continued until the predetermined number of times is reached without acquiring the information corresponding to the fourth result in the specific game state, the fourth. Information corresponding to the result is not acquired, and there is no possibility of being disadvantageous to the player.

As a result, according to the feature sU1, in the specific game state, the player is in a predetermined game state in which the advantage for the player is low during the period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times or less. I want you to feel the urgency that you do not want to acquire the 4th result information that triggers the transition (do not fall), and you want the number of executions of the game to reach the predetermined number before the 4th result information is acquired. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation such as. Then, if the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without acquiring the fourth result information, the game state is shifted to the predetermined game state and the player is in a disadvantageous state. It is possible to give a sense of relief and a sense of expectation that can be transferred to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game rounds can be continuously performed without risk. As described above, according to the feature sU1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation, a sense of urgency, and a sense of relief.

Further, according to the feature sU1, in the specific game state, if the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without the distribution result of the second distribution means becoming the fourth result, the specific game is again performed. It is possible to give the player a sense of relief and a sense of expectation that the player can shift to the gaming state guaranteed to shift to the state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment).

<Characteristic sV group>
The feature sV group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment and its variants.

[Features sV1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
The distribution area (game area PA) where the launched game balls are distributed,
An entry means (center side first starting port 33) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
A predetermined area (entrance port 210a of the starting port unit 200) provided in the distribution area and through which a game ball can pass, and
The game state in which the game shifts after satisfying a predetermined condition in the condition determination executed when the game ball enters the ball entry means, and the game ball enters the ball entry means. A specific game state (high accuracy and high support state) in which a game ball can enter the predetermined area by a launch mode (weak right-hand launch mode) different from the launch mode by the launch means (left-handed launch mode). ), When the game ball passes through the predetermined area, a plurality of types of result information (signal from the detection sensor for the second start port 34, signal from the detection sensor for the right first start port 44, start port). An information acquisition means for acquiring one result information from the signal from the detection sensor for the out port 251 in the unit and the signal from the detection sensor for the fall port 252).
Of the first result (route that can enter the second starting port 34) and the second result (route that can enter the first right starting port 44) when the game ball passes through the predetermined area. The first distribution means (electric accessory 34a) to distribute to either,
When the ball is distributed to the second result by the first sorting means, the third result (route that can enter the out port 251 in the starting port unit) and the fourth result (ball entering the falling port 252) are performed at a predetermined ratio. A second distribution means (game ball distribution device 240) that distributes to one of the possible routes), and
When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information (signal from the detection sensor for the fall opening 252) corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state is specified from the specific gaming state. A game state transition means for shifting to a predetermined game state (low accuracy and high support state) different from the game state, and
Equipped with
The specific gaming state has a higher advantage for the player as compared with the predetermined gaming state.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the game is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game, the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times (guaranteed game number). It is configured so that the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation of 50 times or less.
The launch mode by the launching means, which has the highest advantage for the player in the specific gaming state, is a launch mode in which the game ball is easier to enter the predetermined area than the ball entry means (weak right-handed launch mode). can be,
The launch mode by the launching means, which has the highest advantage for the player in the predetermined gaming state, is a launch mode in which the game ball is more likely to enter the ball entry means than the predetermined area (falls in a highly accurate and high support state). A gaming machine characterized in that it is a left-handed launch mode in the low-accuracy low-support state in the modified example 14 in which the low-accuracy low-support state is achieved.

According to the feature sV1, when the game ball passes through a predetermined area, one result information is acquired from a plurality of types of result information. Further, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, it is distributed to either the first result or the second result, and when it is distributed to the second result, the third result and the fourth result are distributed at a predetermined ratio. It will be distributed to one of them. When the result information acquired by the information acquisition means is the fourth result information corresponding to the fourth result, the gaming state shifts from the specific gaming state having a high advantage to the player to the predetermined gaming state having a low advantage. Will be done. Further, according to the feature sV1, the fourth result information can be acquired in a predetermined game situation in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times or less. When the fourth result information is acquired, it shifts to a predetermined gaming state in which the advantage for the player is low as described above. Therefore, according to the feature sV1, if the number of times the game is executed can be continued until the predetermined number of times is reached without acquiring the information corresponding to the fourth result in the specific game state, the fourth. Information corresponding to the result is not acquired, and there is no possibility of being disadvantageous to the player.

As a result, according to the feature sV1, in the specific game state, the player is in a predetermined game state in which the advantage for the player is low during the period in which the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state is a predetermined number of times or less. I want you to have a sense of urgency that you do not want to acquire the 4th result information that will trigger the transition (do not fall), and you want the number of executions of the game to reach the predetermined number before the 4th result information is acquired. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation such as. Then, if the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without acquiring the fourth result information, the game state is shifted to the predetermined game state and the player is in a disadvantageous state. It is possible to give a sense of relief and a sense of expectation that can be transferred to a special state (for example, the invincible zone in the eighth embodiment) in which the game rounds can be continuously performed without risk. As described above, according to the feature sV1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a feeling of expectation, a feeling of urgency, and a feeling of relief.

Further, according to the feature sV1, the player operates the launching means so that the gaming ball can easily enter the predetermined area in the predetermined gaming state in the specific gaming state, thereby in the specific gaming state. It is possible to increase the advantage for the player. Further, the player operates the launching means so that the gaming ball is more likely to enter the ball entering means than the predetermined area in the predetermined gaming state, which is advantageous for the player in the predetermined gaming state. Can be enhanced. Therefore, in the specific gaming state, it is possible to recommend the player to operate the launching means in a launching mode in which the gaming ball can easily enter the predetermined area, and in the predetermined gaming state, the gaming means can be used for the game. It is possible to recommend to the player the operation of the launching means in a launching mode in which the ball is easy to enter. Therefore, according to the feature sV1, the player can launch the gaming ball in the launch mode of the launching means intended by the designer of the gaming machine. As a result, according to the feature sV1, the flow of the game assumed by the designer of the player can be realized.

<Characteristic tA group>
The feature tA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic tA1]
Distribution area (game area PA) where game balls are distributed,
An entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
It is a means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning a big hit), and is a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination. A determination means having one determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 420 executed by the MPU 62),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state in which the entry of the game ball into the entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the entry means is possible or easy. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state and a second state
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the specific game state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, until the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation number). When a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is satisfied, the game state in which the determination mode shifts from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state (low accuracy high support state), which is the first determination mode. Transition method and
In the first predetermined gaming state, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (value corresponding to the time saving grant), the advantageous state continuation means for continuing the advantageous state for the player for a predetermined period.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature tA1, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, when the specific condition is satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. The determination mode is shifted to the first predetermined gaming state, which is the first determination mode. Then, in the first predetermined gaming state, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the advantageous state for the player is continued for a predetermined period. Therefore, according to the feature tA1, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times for the player. It is possible to expect that the specific condition is satisfied and the state shifts from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state which can be advantageous to the player. That is, according to the feature tA1, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. Can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but further, the specific condition is satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times, and the specific game state is changed from the specific game state. , It can be expected to shift to the first predetermined gaming state which can be an advantageous state for the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic tA2]
Feature The gaming machine described in tA1.
The advantageous state continuation means is
In the first predetermined gaming state, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (value corresponding to the time saving grant), the control mode by the control means until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. The gaming machine is provided with a control mode continuation means for continuing the second control mode.

According to the feature tA2, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition in the first predetermined gaming state, the control mode by the control means until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until the big hit is won). The second control mode is continued. In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls to be held. It is possible to frequently determine the special information acquired by the entry of the game ball into the means by the determination means. Therefore, if it is possible to shift to the first predetermined gaming state, it is possible to surely realize that the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball entry means satisfies the first predetermined condition. Become.

Therefore, according to the feature tA2, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is specified by the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. It is possible to expect that the condition is satisfied and the transition from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state is achieved. That is, according to the feature tA2, in the specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. Can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but further, the specific condition is satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times, and the specific game state is changed from the specific game state. , It can be expected to shift to the first predetermined gaming state in which the special information can surely realize that the first predetermined condition is satisfied.

On the other hand, in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition, the player is in a state where the number of balls held is difficult to decrease, and the next time, until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition by the determination means (for example, until the jackpot is won). It is possible to give a sense of security that the second control mode, which facilitates the entry of the game ball into the entry means, does not end. As described above, according to the feature tA2, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of security.

[Characteristic tA3]
Features The gaming machine described in tA2.
The specific game in which the determination mode is the second determination mode when the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition. A means for shifting from the specific gaming state to a second predetermined gaming state (high accuracy and low support state) different from the state is provided.
The second predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the advantage for the player is lower than that of the first predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature tA3, when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition, the second predetermined game in which the determination mode is the second determination mode It is transferred to the state. The second predetermined gaming state is less advantageous to the player than the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, even though the determination mode is the second determination mode. Therefore, according to the feature tA3, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is not satisfied, and the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state is determined. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the predetermined number of times is reached. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic tA4]
Features The gaming machine described in tA3.
From the second predetermined gaming state to a normal state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode when the specific condition is satisfied in the second predetermined gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having a means for transition.

According to the feature tA4, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied and the state is shifted to the normal state in the second predetermined gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic tA5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features tA1 to the feature tA4.
When the number of executions of the game times after the determination mode becomes the second determination mode and the game shifts to the specific gaming state reaches a specific number of times (ST number of times) which is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times. , A gaming machine comprising means for shifting the determination mode to the first determination mode.

According to the feature tA5, the player feels a sense of urgency that the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a specific number and the determination mode shifts to the first determination mode. You can have it against it. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic tB group>
The feature tB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic tB1]
Distribution area (game area PA) where game balls are distributed,
A ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
It is a means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning a big hit), and is a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination. A determination means having one determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that of the first determination mode.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 420 executed by the MPU 62),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state in which the entry of the game ball into the entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the entry means is possible or easy. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state and a second state
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the specific game state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, until the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation number). When the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) is satisfied, the determination mode is shifted from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state (low accuracy high support state) which is the first determination mode, and the above. When the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the specific game state. The game state transition means for shifting from the specific game state to the second predetermined game state (high accuracy and low support state) different from the above is provided.
The second predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the advantage for the player is lower than that of the first predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature tB1, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, when the specific condition is satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. The determination mode is shifted to the first predetermined gaming state, which is the first determination mode. Further, in the specific game state, when the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition, the determination mode is the second determination mode, and the specific game It shifts to the second predetermined gaming state different from the state. The second predetermined gaming state is less advantageous to the player than the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, even though the determination mode is the second determination mode. Therefore, according to the feature tB1, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times for the player. It is possible to expect that the specific condition is satisfied and the transition from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state is achieved. That is, according to the feature tB1, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. Can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but further, the specific condition is satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times, and the specific game state is changed from the specific game state. It can be expected to shift to the first predetermined gaming state.

Further, according to the feature tB1, when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition, the second predetermined number has a low advantage for the player. Since the game state is shifted to the game state, in the specific game state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is not satisfied. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the number of times of execution of is reached a predetermined number of times. As described above, according to the feature tB1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

[Characteristic tB2]
Feature The gaming machine described in tB1.
In the first predetermined gaming state, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (value corresponding to the time saving grant), the control mode by the control means until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. The gaming machine is provided with a control mode continuation means for continuing the second control mode.

According to the feature tB2, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition in the first predetermined gaming state, the control mode by the control means until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until the jackpot is won). The second control mode is continued. In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and the player can enter the ball in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held. It is possible to frequently determine the special information acquired by the ball entering the ball means by the determination means. Therefore, if it is possible to shift to the first predetermined gaming state, it is possible to surely realize that the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball entry means satisfies the first predetermined condition. Become.

Therefore, according to the feature tB2, in the specific gaming state, the specific condition is satisfied for the player by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number, and the specific gaming state is satisfied. It is possible to further expect the transition from the first predetermined gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state. Further, in the first predetermined gaming state shifted from the specific gaming state, the player is in a state where the number of balls held is difficult to decrease, and the next time, the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition by the determination means (for example, a big hit is won). It is possible to give a sense of security that the second control mode, which facilitates the entry of the game ball into the entry means, does not end. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic tB3]
Feature The gaming machine described in tB2.
From the second predetermined gaming state to a normal state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode when the specific condition is satisfied in the second predetermined gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having a means for transition.

According to the feature tB3, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied and the state is shifted to the normal state in the second predetermined gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic tB4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features tB1 to the feature tB3.
When the number of executions of the game times after the determination mode becomes the second determination mode and the game shifts to the specific gaming state reaches a specific number of times (ST number of times) which is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times. , A gaming machine comprising means for shifting the determination mode to the first determination mode.

According to the feature tB4, the player feels a sense of urgency that the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a specific number and the determination mode shifts to the first determination mode. You can have it against you. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic tC group>
The feature tC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic tC1]
Distribution area (game area PA) where game balls are distributed,
An entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
It is a means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning a big hit), and is a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination. A determination means having one determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 420 executed by the MPU 62),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state in which the entry of the game ball into the entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the entry means is possible or easy. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state and a second state
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The special information is different from the first predetermined condition in the first predetermined gaming state (low accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode. A control mode in which the second control mode is continued as the control mode by the control means until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition when the second predetermined condition (value corresponding to the time saving grant) is satisfied. Means of continuation and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature tC1, in the first predetermined gaming state where the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition different from the first predetermined condition. In that case, the second control mode is continued as the control mode by the control means until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until the big hit is won). In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and the player can enter the ball in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held. It is possible to frequently determine the special information acquired by the ball entering the ball means by the determination means. Therefore, according to the feature tC1, if it is possible to shift to the first predetermined gaming state, it is certain that the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball entry means satisfies the first predetermined game state. It will be possible to realize it.

Therefore, according to the feature tC1, the player can be expected to shift to the first predetermined gaming state. Further, in the first predetermined game state, the game ball to the ball entry means is reached until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until the big hit is won) next time by the determination means in a state where the number of balls held is difficult to decrease. It is possible to give the player a sense of security that the second control mode, which facilitates the entry of the ball, does not end. As described above, according to the feature tC1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of security.

[Characteristic tC2]
Features The gaming machine described in tC1.
In the first predetermined gaming state, when the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition, the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition. Gaming machine.

According to the feature tC2, when the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition in the first predetermined gaming state, the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition. Therefore, in the first predetermined gaming state, the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition before the special information is determined to satisfy the second predetermined condition, or the special information is determined to satisfy the second predetermined condition. If it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the second control mode is continued, and finally it is determined that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. Therefore, in the first predetermined gaming state, it is guaranteed that the special information is substantially determined to satisfy the first predetermined condition. Therefore, according to the feature tC2, the player can be further expected to shift to the first predetermined gaming state.

If, in the first predetermined gaming state, the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition, the special information may not satisfy the second predetermined condition. Although the player is expected to move to the first predetermined gaming state as described above, even if the player betrays that expectation and shifts to the first predetermined gaming state, it is special forever. It is possible that the information does not meet the second predetermined condition. According to the feature tC2, this problem can be avoided and the trust of the player can be obtained.

[Characteristic tC3]
The gaming machine according to the feature tC1 or the feature tC2.
In the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the execution of the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state. When a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is satisfied by the time the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation number), the state shifts from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state (low accuracy high support state). A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a gaming state transition means.

According to the feature tC3, in the specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state becomes a predetermined number of times. When the specific condition is satisfied by the time the specific condition is reached, the state is changed from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state. In the first predetermined game state, as described above, it is possible to surely realize that the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball entry means satisfies the first predetermined condition. .. Therefore, according to the feature tC3, in the specific gaming state, the specific condition is satisfied for the player by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number, and the specific gaming state is satisfied. It can be expected to shift to the first predetermined gaming state. That is, according to the feature tC3, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. Can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but further, the specific condition is satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times, and the specific game state is changed from the specific game state. , It can be expected to shift to the first predetermined gaming state in which the special information can surely realize that the first predetermined condition is satisfied.

[Characteristic tC4]
Features The gaming machine described in tC3.
When the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition, the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second. A means for shifting from the specific gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state (high accuracy and low support state), which is one control mode, is provided.
The second predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the advantage for the player is lower than that of the first predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature tC4, when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number without satisfying the specific condition, the transition to the second predetermined gaming state is performed. The second predetermined gaming state is less advantageous to the player than the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, even though the determination mode is the second determination mode. Therefore, according to the feature tC4, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is not satisfied, and the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state is determined. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the predetermined number of times is reached. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic tD group>
The feature tD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its variants.

[Feature tD1]
Distribution area (game area PA) where game balls are distributed,
An entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
It is a means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning a big hit), and is a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination. A determination means having one determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode.
When the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) is satisfied, the determination mode transition means (fall determination process) for shifting the determination executed by the determination means from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. ,
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 420 executed by the MPU 62),
In the specific game state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, until the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation number). When the specific condition is satisfied, the determination mode is transferred to the first determination mode by the determination mode transition means, so that the specific gaming state is changed to the first predetermined gaming state (low accuracy high support state). The game state transition means to shift,
Equipped with
The first predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that it is more advantageous to the player than the specific gaming state.

According to the feature tD1, the determination mode transition means shifts the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, and thus originally reduces the advantage for the player. On the other hand, according to the feature tD1, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the determination mode is reached until the number of executions of the game rounds after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. When the specific condition for operating the transition means is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state, which is highly advantageous to the player. Therefore, according to the feature tD1, the gaming state is shifted to the first predetermined gaming state, which is highly advantageous for the player, although the operation is originally performed by the determination mode shifting means that discourages the player. Unexpected joy can be given to the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature tD2]
Feature The gaming machine described in tD1.
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state in which the entry of the game ball into the entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the entry means is possible or easy. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state and a second state
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means.
In the first predetermined gaming state, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (value corresponding to the time saving grant), the control mode by the control means until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. As a control mode continuation means for continuing the second control mode,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature tD2, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and the number of balls held by the player is reduced. In a difficult state, it is possible to frequently perform a determination by the determination means for the special information acquired when the game ball enters the entry means. Therefore, if it is possible to shift to the first predetermined gaming state, it is possible to surely realize that the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball entry means satisfies the first predetermined condition. Become.

Therefore, according to the feature tD2, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is specified by the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. It is possible to expect that the condition is satisfied and the transition from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state is achieved. That is, according to the feature tD2, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. Can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but further, the specific condition is satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times, and the specific game state is started. , It can be expected to shift to the first predetermined gaming state in which the special information can surely realize that the first predetermined condition is satisfied.

On the other hand, in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition, the player is in a state where the number of balls held is difficult to decrease, and the next time, until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition by the determination means (for example, until the big hit is won). It is possible to give a sense of security that the second control mode, which facilitates the entry of the game ball into the entry means, does not end. As described above, according to the feature tD2, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of security.

[Characteristic tD3]
The gaming machine according to the feature tD1 or the feature tD2.
The specific game in which the determination mode is the second determination mode when the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition. A means for shifting from the specific gaming state to a second predetermined gaming state (high accuracy and low support state) different from the state is provided.
The second predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the advantage for the player is lower than that of the first predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature tD3, when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition, the second predetermined game in which the determination mode is the second determination mode It is transferred to the state. The second predetermined gaming state is less advantageous to the player than the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, even though the determination mode is the second determination mode. Therefore, according to the feature tD3, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is not satisfied, and the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state is determined. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the predetermined number of times is reached. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature tD4]
Features The gaming machine described in tD3.
From the second predetermined gaming state to a normal state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode when the specific condition is satisfied in the second predetermined gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having a means for transition.

According to the feature tD4, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied and the state is shifted to the normal state in the second predetermined gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature tD5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features tA1 to the feature tA4.
When the number of executions of the game times after the determination mode becomes the second determination mode and the game shifts to the specific gaming state reaches a specific number of times (ST number of times) which is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times. , A gaming machine comprising means for shifting the determination mode to the first determination mode.

According to the feature tD5, the player feels a sense of urgency that the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a specific number and the determination mode shifts to the first determination mode. You can have it against you. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic tE group>
The feature tE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic tE1]
Distribution area (game area PA) where game balls are distributed,
An entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
It is a means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning a big hit), and is a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination. A determination means having one determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode.
When the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) is satisfied, the determination mode transition means (fall determination process) for shifting the determination executed by the determination means from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. ,
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 420 executed by the MPU 62),
A production execution means that can execute a production, and
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
In the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, until the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation number). A gaming machine, characterized in that, when the specific condition is satisfied, a means for executing an effect corresponding to a predetermined advantageous state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is provided.

According to the feature tE1, since the determination mode transition means shifts the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, it originally reduces the advantage for the player. On the other hand, according to the feature tE1, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the determination mode is reached until the number of executions of the game rounds after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. When a specific condition for operating the transition means is satisfied, an effect corresponding to a predetermined advantageous state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is executed. Therefore, according to the feature tE1, the operation corresponding to the predetermined advantageous state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is executed while the operation is originally performed by the determination mode transition means that discourages the player. The range of the effect can be expanded without being limited to the operation by the determination mode transition means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic tE2]
Feature The gaming machine described in tE1.
In the specific game state (high accuracy and high support state), when the specific condition is satisfied by the time the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation number). A gaming state transition means for shifting from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state (low accuracy and high support state) by shifting the determination mode to the first determination mode by the determination mode transition means is provided.
The first predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that it is more advantageous to the player than the specific gaming state.

According to the feature tE2, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the determination mode transition means is operated until the number of executions of the game rounds after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. When the specific condition is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state, which is highly advantageous to the player. Therefore, according to the feature tE2, the gaming state is shifted to the first predetermined gaming state, which is highly advantageous for the player, although the operation is originally performed by the determination mode shifting means that discourages the player. Unexpected joy can be given to the player. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic tE3]
Features The gaming machine described in tE2.
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state in which the entry of the game ball into the entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the entry means is possible or easy. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state and a second state
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means.
In the first predetermined gaming state, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (value corresponding to the time saving grant), the control mode by the control means until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. As a control mode continuation means for continuing the second control mode,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature tE3, in the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and the number of balls held by the player is reduced. In a difficult state, it is possible to frequently perform a determination by the determination means for the special information acquired when the game ball enters the entry means. Therefore, if it is possible to shift to the first predetermined gaming state, it is possible to surely realize that the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball entry means satisfies the first predetermined condition. Become.

Therefore, according to the feature tE3, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is specified by the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. It is possible to expect that the condition is satisfied and the transition from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state is achieved. That is, according to the feature tE3, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. Can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but further, the specific condition is satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times, and the specific game state is changed from the specific game state. , It can be expected to shift to the first predetermined gaming state in which the special information can surely realize that the first predetermined condition is satisfied.

On the other hand, in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition, the player is in a state where the number of balls held is difficult to decrease, and the next time, until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition by the determination means (for example, until the jackpot is won). It is possible to give a sense of security that the second control mode, which facilitates the entry of the game ball into the entry means, does not end. As described above, according to the feature tE3, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of security.

[Characteristic tE4]
The gaming machine according to the feature tE2 or the feature tE3.
The specific game in which the determination mode is the second determination mode when the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition. A means for shifting from the specific gaming state to a second predetermined gaming state (high accuracy and low support state) different from the state is provided.
The second predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the advantage for the player is lower than that of the first predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature tE4, when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition, the second predetermined game in which the determination mode is the second determination mode It is transferred to the state. The second predetermined gaming state is less advantageous to the player than the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, even though the determination mode is the second determination mode. Therefore, according to the feature tE4, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is not satisfied, and the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state is determined. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the predetermined number of times is reached. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic tE5]
Features The gaming machine described in tE4.
From the second predetermined gaming state to a normal state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode when the specific condition is satisfied in the second predetermined gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having a means for transition.

According to the feature tE5, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied and the state is shifted to the normal state in the second predetermined gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic tE6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features tE1 to the feature tE5.
When the number of executions of the game times after the determination mode becomes the second determination mode and the game shifts to the specific gaming state reaches a specific number of times (ST number of times) which is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times. , A gaming machine comprising means for shifting the determination mode to the first determination mode.

According to the feature tE6, the player feels a sense of urgency that the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a specific number and the determination mode shifts to the first determination mode. You can have it against it. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic tF group>
The feature tF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic tF1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
The distribution area (game area PA) where the launched game balls are distributed,
A ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
It is a means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning a big hit), and is a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination. A determination means having one determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that of the first determination mode.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 420 executed by the MPU 62),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state in which the entry of the game ball into the entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the entry means is possible or easy. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state and a second state
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the first predetermined gaming state (low accuracy high support state) in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, the second predetermined condition (value corresponding to the time saving grant) in which the special information is different from the first predetermined condition. When the above conditions are satisfied, a control mode continuation means for continuing the second control mode as the control mode by the control means is provided for a period until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times.
After the start of the second control mode in a situation where the game ball is launched by a predetermined launch mode (right-handed launch mode) by the launch means that enables the game ball to enter the ball entry means. By repeating that the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition until the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number of times, the second control mode is set until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to continue.

According to the feature tF1, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, the number of times the game is executed is predetermined when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition different from the first predetermined condition. The second control mode is continued as the control mode by the control means until the number of times is reached. In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and the player can enter the ball in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held. It is possible to frequently determine the special information acquired by the ball entering the ball means by the determination means. Moreover, according to the feature tF1, the execution of the game round after the start of the second control mode in the situation where the game ball is launched by a predetermined launch mode that allows the game ball to enter the ball entry means. By repeating that the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition until the number of times reaches the predetermined number of times, the second control mode is continued until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. Therefore, according to the feature tF1, if it is possible to shift to the first predetermined gaming state, it is certain that the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball entry means satisfies the first predetermined game state. It will be possible to realize.

Therefore, according to the feature tF1, the player can be expected to shift to the first predetermined gaming state. Further, according to the feature tF1, in the first predetermined gaming state, the second control mode is continued until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition by using the control mode continuation means that continues the second control mode only a predetermined number of times. It also has the effect of achieving playability. In other words, the playability of continuing the second control mode until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is realized next time without using the means for continuing the second control mode until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. can.

[Characteristic tF2]
Feature The gaming machine described in tF1.
In the first predetermined gaming state, when the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition, the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition. Gaming machine.

According to the feature tF2, when the determination means determines that the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition in the first predetermined gaming state, the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition. Therefore, in the first predetermined gaming state, the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition before the special information is determined to satisfy the second predetermined condition, or the special information is determined to satisfy the second predetermined condition. If it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the second control mode is continued, and finally it is determined that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. Therefore, in the first predetermined gaming state, it is guaranteed that the special information is substantially determined to satisfy the first predetermined condition. Therefore, according to the feature tF2, the player can be further expected to shift to the first predetermined gaming state.

[Characteristic tF3]
The gaming machine according to feature tF1 or feature tF2.
In the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the execution of the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state. When a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is satisfied by the time the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation number), the state shifts from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state (low accuracy high support state). A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a gaming state transition means.

According to the feature tF3, in the specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state becomes a predetermined number of times. When the specific condition is satisfied by the time the specific condition is reached, the state is changed from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state. In the first predetermined game state, as described above, it is possible to surely realize that the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball entry means satisfies the first predetermined condition. .. Therefore, according to the feature tF3, in the specific gaming state, the specific condition is satisfied for the player by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number, and the specific gaming state is satisfied. Can be expected to shift to the first predetermined gaming state. That is, according to the feature tF3, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. Can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but further, the specific condition is satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times, and the specific game state is changed from the specific game state. , It can be expected to shift to the first predetermined gaming state in which the special information can surely realize that the first predetermined condition is satisfied.

[Characteristic tF4]
Features The gaming machine described in tF3.
When the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition, the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second. A means for shifting from the specific gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state (high accuracy and low support state), which is one control mode, is provided.
The second predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the advantage for the player is lower than that of the first predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature tF4, when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number without satisfying the specific condition, the transition to the second predetermined gaming state is performed. The second predetermined gaming state is less advantageous to the player than the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, even though the determination mode is the second determination mode. Therefore, according to the feature tF4, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is not satisfied, and the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state is determined. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the predetermined number of times is reached. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic tG group>
The feature tG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic tG1]
Distribution area (game area PA) where game balls are distributed,
An entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
It is a means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning a big hit), and is a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination. A determination means having one determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that of the first determination mode.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 420 executed by the MPU 62),
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the specific gaming state (high probability high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, until the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation number). When the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) is satisfied, the state is changed from the specific game state to the first predetermined game state (low probability and high support state) which is guaranteed to shift to the specific game state again. When the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches the predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition, the probability of shifting to the specific gaming state again is the first predetermined. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a gaming state transition means for shifting from the specific gaming state to a second predetermined gaming state (low probability low support state H1 in the modified example 1) lower than the gaming state.

According to the feature tG1, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, when the specific condition is satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. The transition from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state in which the transition to the specific gaming state is guaranteed again is performed. Further, in the specific gaming state, if the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number without satisfying the specific condition, the probability of re-transitioning to the specific gaming state is the first predetermined. The transition from the specific gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state lower than the gaming state. Therefore, according to the feature tG1, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times for the player. It is possible to expect that the specific condition is satisfied and the transition from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state is achieved. That is, according to the feature tG1, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. Can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but further, the specific condition is satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times, and the specific game state is started. It can be expected to shift to the first predetermined gaming state.

Further, according to the feature tG1, when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition, the probability of shifting to the specific gaming state again is the first. Since the transition to the second predetermined gaming state lower than the predetermined gaming state is performed, in the specific gaming state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is not satisfied. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency that the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the game state does not reach a predetermined number of times. As described above, according to the feature tG1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

[Characteristic tG2]
Features The gaming machine described in tG1.
The game state transition means is
When the specific condition is satisfied, the gaming state is transferred by switching the determination executed by the determination means between the first determination mode and the second determination mode (fall determination process). A gaming machine characterized by having means.

According to the feature tG2, the game state is transferred in the game state transition means by switching the determination executed by the determination means between the first determination mode and the second determination mode. Therefore, according to the feature tG2, the controllability is excellent.

[Characteristic tG3]
The gaming machine described in the feature tG1.
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state in which the entry of the game ball into the entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the entry means is possible or easy. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state and a second state
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means.
Equipped with
The second predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the control mode is a gaming state in which the first control mode is the first control mode.

According to the feature tG3, in the second predetermined gaming state, since the control mode is the first control mode, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entry means. Therefore, in the second predetermined gaming state, the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to the feature tG3, in the specific gaming state, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state may reach a predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition. It can be given more to the person.

[Characteristic tG4]
The gaming machine described in the feature tG1.
The second predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the determination mode is a gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to the feature tG4, in the second predetermined gaming state, since the determination mode is the first determination mode, the advantage for the player is low. For this reason, according to the feature tG4, in the specific gaming state, there is a sense of urgency that the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state does not reach a predetermined number without satisfying the specific condition. , Can be further granted to the player.

<Characteristic TH group>
The feature tH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic tH1]
Distribution area (game area PA) where game balls are distributed,
A ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
It is a means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning a big hit), and is a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination. A determination means having one determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that of the first determination mode.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 420 executed by the MPU 62),
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, until the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation number). When the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) is satisfied, the state is changed from the specific game state to the first predetermined game state (low probability high support state) which is guaranteed to shift to the specific game state again. When the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches the predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition, the probability of shifting to the specific gaming state again is the first predetermined. A gaming state transition means for shifting from the specific gaming state to a second predetermined gaming state (low probability low support state H1 in the modification 1) lower than the gaming state is provided.
The game state transition means is
When the specific condition is satisfied, the gaming state is transferred by switching the determination executed by the determination means between the first determination mode and the second determination mode (fall determination process). A gaming machine characterized by being provided with means.

According to the feature tH1, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, when the specific condition is satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. The transition from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state in which the transition to the specific gaming state is guaranteed again is performed. Further, in the specific gaming state, if the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number without satisfying the specific condition, the probability of re-transitioning to the specific gaming state is the first predetermined. The transition from the specific gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state lower than the gaming state. Therefore, according to the feature tH1, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times for the player. It is possible to expect that the specific condition is satisfied and the transition from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state is achieved. That is, according to the feature tH1, in the specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. Can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but further, the specific condition is satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times, and the specific game state is started. It can be expected to shift to the first predetermined gaming state.

Further, according to the feature tH1, when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition, the probability of shifting to the specific gaming state again is the first. Since the transition to the second predetermined gaming state lower than the predetermined gaming state is performed, in the specific gaming state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is not satisfied. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency that the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the game state does not reach a predetermined number of times. As described above, according to the feature tH1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Further, according to the feature tH1, the game state is transferred in the game state transition means by switching the determination executed by the determination means between the first determination mode and the second determination mode. Therefore, according to the feature tH1, the controllability is excellent.

<Characteristic tI group>
The feature tI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic tI1]
Distribution area (game area PA) where game balls are distributed,
A ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
It is a means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning a big hit), and is a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination. A determination means having one determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 420 executed by the MPU 62),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state in which the entry of the game ball into the entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the entry means is possible or easy. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state and a second state
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, until the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation number). When the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) is satisfied, the state is changed from the specific game state to the first predetermined game state (low probability high support state) which is guaranteed to shift to the specific game state again. When the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches the predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition, the probability of shifting to the specific gaming state again is the first predetermined. A gaming state transition means for shifting from the specific gaming state to a second predetermined gaming state (low probability low support state H1 in the modification 1) lower than the gaming state is provided.
The second predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the control mode is a gaming state in which the first control mode is the first control mode.

According to the feature tI1, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, when the specific condition is satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. The transition from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state in which the transition to the specific gaming state is guaranteed again is performed. Further, in the specific gaming state, if the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number without satisfying the specific condition, the probability of re-transitioning to the specific gaming state is the first predetermined. The transition from the specific gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state lower than the gaming state. Therefore, according to the feature tI1, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times for the player. It is possible to expect that the specific condition is satisfied and the transition from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state is achieved. That is, according to the feature tI1, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. Can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but further, the specific condition is satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times, and the specific game state is changed from the specific game state. It can be expected to shift to the first predetermined gaming state.

Further, according to the feature tI1, when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition, the probability of shifting to the specific gaming state again is the first. Since the transition to the second predetermined gaming state lower than the predetermined gaming state is performed, in the specific gaming state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is not satisfied. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency that the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the game state does not reach a predetermined number of times. As described above, according to the feature tI1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Further, according to the feature tI1, in the second predetermined gaming state, since the control mode is the first control mode, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entry means. Therefore, in the second predetermined gaming state, the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to the feature tI1, in the specific gaming state, the game feels tense as to whether the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number without satisfying the specific condition. It can be given more to the person.

<Characteristic tJ group>
The feature tJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic tJ1]
Distribution area (game area PA) where game balls are distributed,
An entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
It is a means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning a big hit), and is a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination. A determination means having one determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 420 executed by the MPU 62),
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the specific game state (high probability high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, until the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation number). When the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) is satisfied, the state is changed from the specific game state to the first predetermined game state (low probability high support state) which is guaranteed to shift to the specific game state again. When the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches the predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition, the probability of shifting to the specific gaming state again is the first predetermined. A gaming state transition means for shifting from the specific gaming state to a second predetermined gaming state (low probability low support state H1 in the modification 1) lower than the gaming state is provided.
The second predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the determination mode is a gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to the feature tJ1, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, when the specific condition is satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. The transition from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state in which the transition to the specific gaming state is guaranteed again is performed. Further, in the specific gaming state, if the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number without satisfying the specific condition, the probability of re-transitioning to the specific gaming state is the first predetermined. The transition from the specific gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state lower than the gaming state. Therefore, according to the feature tJ1, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times for the player. It is possible to expect that the specific condition is satisfied and the transition from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state is achieved. That is, according to the feature tJ1, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. Can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but further, the specific condition is satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times, and the specific game state is changed from the specific game state. It can be expected to shift to the first predetermined gaming state.

Further, according to the feature tJ1, when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition, the probability of shifting to the specific gaming state again is the first. Since the transition to the second predetermined gaming state lower than the predetermined gaming state is performed, in the specific gaming state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is not satisfied. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency that the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the game state does not reach a predetermined number of times. As described above, according to the feature tJ1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Further, according to the feature tJ1, in the second predetermined gaming state, since the determination mode is the first determination mode, the advantage for the player is low. For this reason, according to the feature tJ1, in the specific gaming state, there is a sense of urgency that the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state does not reach a predetermined number without satisfying the specific condition. , Can be further granted to the player.

<Characteristic tK group>
The feature tK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic tK1]
Distribution area (game area PA) where game balls are distributed,
An entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
It is a means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning a big hit), and is a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination. A determination means having one determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that of the first determination mode.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 420 executed by the MPU 62),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state in which the entry of the game ball into the entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the entry means is possible or easy. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state and a second state
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means.
A game state transition means for shifting the game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode, and
Equipped with
The game state transition means is
In the first specific game state (high accuracy and high support state), when the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) is satisfied, the control mode is set to the predetermined period (the period until the next big hit is won) and the second control mode. By maintaining the above, the first transition means for shifting to the first predetermined gaming state (low accuracy and high support state), which is more advantageous for the player than the first specific gaming state, and
In the first specific game state, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (the game times of the time reduction continuation number are executed) without the specific condition being satisfied (without winning in the fall lottery), the second specific game state is executed. The second transition method to shift to (high accuracy and low support state),
In the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the second predetermined gaming state (low probability and low support state), which is less advantageous to the player than the second specific gaming state, is shifted to. 3 Transition means and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature tK1, even when the same specific condition is satisfied, the function is different between the case of the first specific gaming state and the case of the second specific gaming state. In the first specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the transition of the gaming state is performed so as to increase the advantage for the player, and in the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the transition of the gaming state is performed. , The transition of the gaming state is performed so as to reduce the advantage for the player. That is, according to the feature tK1, the establishment of the specific condition triggers the transition to two different gaming states having different advantages for the player, so that the playability of the gaming machine can be diversified.

[Characteristic tK2]
Features The gaming machine described in tK1.
The game state transition means is
A determination mode determining means (fall determination process) for selectively determining the determination executed by the determination means between the first determination mode and the second determination mode when the specific condition is satisfied. Prepare,
The third transition means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming state is changed by switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode by the determination mode determining means.

According to the feature tK2, the game state in the third transition means is transferred by switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode by the determination mode determining means. Therefore, according to the feature tK2, the controllability is excellent.

[Characteristic tK3]
Features The gaming machine described in tK1.
The gaming machine characterized in that the first predetermined gaming state is a state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to the feature tK3, the determination mode is the first determination mode in the first predetermined gaming state, but it is surprising to the player because it is more advantageous to the player than the first specific gaming state. Can be granted.

[Characteristic tK4]
Features The gaming machine described in tK1.
The gaming machine characterized in that the second predetermined gaming state is a state in which the control mode is the first control mode.

According to the feature tK4, in the second predetermined gaming state, since the control mode is the first control mode, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entry means. Therefore, in the second predetermined gaming state, the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to the feature tK4, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the specific condition that triggers the transition to the second predetermined gaming state is satisfied in the second specific gaming state. ..

[Characteristic tK5]
Features The gaming machine described in tK1.
The second specific gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the determination mode is the second determination mode.

According to the feature tK5, in the second specific gaming state, since the determination mode is the second determination mode, it is highly advantageous for the player. For this reason, according to the feature tK5, since it is not desirable for the player to shift the gaming state from the second specific gaming state, which has a high advantage, is it possible that a specific condition is satisfied in the second specific gaming state? It is possible to give a sense of urgency to the player.

[Characteristic tK6]
Features The gaming machine described in tK1.
The gaming machine characterized in that the second predetermined gaming state is a state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to the feature tK6, in the second predetermined gaming state, since the determination mode is the first determination mode, the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to the feature tK6, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency that the specific condition that triggers the transition to the second predetermined gaming state may be satisfied in the second specific gaming state. can.

<Characteristic tL group>
The feature tL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic tL1]
Distribution area (game area PA) where game balls are distributed,
A ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
It is a means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning a big hit), and is a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination. A determination means having one determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that of the first determination mode.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 420 executed by the MPU 62),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state in which the entry of the game ball into the entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the entry means is possible or easy. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state and a second state
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means.
A game state transition means for shifting the game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode, and
Equipped with
The game state transition means is
With the determination mode determination means (fall determination process) in which the determination executed by the determination means is selectively determined between the first determination mode and the second determination mode when the specific condition is satisfied. ,
In the first specific game state (high accuracy and high support state), when a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is satisfied, the control mode is set for a predetermined period (the period until the next big hit is won) by the determination mode determining means. ), The first transition means for shifting to the first predetermined gaming state (low accuracy and high support state), which is more advantageous for the player than the first specific gaming state, by maintaining the second control mode.
In the first specific game state, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (the game times of the time reduction continuation number are executed) without the specific condition being satisfied (without winning in the fall lottery), the second specific game state is executed. The second transition method to shift to (high accuracy and low support state),
In the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the determination mode is switched by the determination mode determining means, so that the advantage for the player is lower than that of the second specific gaming state. 2 A third transition means for shifting from the second specific gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (low probability low support state), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature tL1, even when the same specific condition is satisfied, the function is different between the case of the first specific gaming state and the case of the second specific gaming state. In the first specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the transition of the gaming state is performed so as to increase the advantage for the player, and in the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the transition of the gaming state is performed. , The transition of the gaming state is performed so as to reduce the advantage for the player. That is, according to the feature tL1, the establishment of the specific condition triggers the transition to two different gaming states having different advantages for the player, so that the playability of the gaming machine can be diversified. Further, according to the feature tL1, by switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode by the determination mode determining means, the gaming state in the third transition means is transferred. Therefore, according to the feature tL1, the controllability is excellent.

<Characteristic tM group>
The feature tM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic tM1]
Distribution area (game area PA) where game balls are distributed,
An entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
It is a means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning a big hit), and is a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination. A determination means having one determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that of the first determination mode.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 420 executed by the MPU 62),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state in which the entry of the game ball into the entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the entry means is possible or easy. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state and a second state
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means.
A game state transition means for shifting the game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode, and
Equipped with
The game state transition means is
In the first specific game state (high accuracy and high support state), when the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) is satisfied, the control mode is set to the predetermined period (the period until the next big hit is won) and the second control mode. By maintaining the above, the first transition means for shifting to the first predetermined gaming state (low accuracy and high support state), which is more advantageous for the player than the first specific gaming state, and
In the first specific game state, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (the game times of the time reduction continuation number are executed) without the specific condition being satisfied (without winning in the fall lottery), the second specific game state is executed. The second transition method to shift to (high accuracy and low support state),
In the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the second predetermined gaming state (low probability and low support state), which is less advantageous to the player than the second specific gaming state, is shifted to. 3 Transition means and
Equipped with
The gaming machine characterized in that the first predetermined gaming state is a state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to the feature tM1, even when the same specific condition is satisfied, the function is different between the case of the first specific gaming state and the case of the second specific gaming state. In the first specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the transition of the gaming state is performed so as to increase the advantage for the player, and in the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the transition of the gaming state is performed. , The transition of the gaming state is performed so as to reduce the advantage for the player. That is, according to the feature tM1, the establishment of the specific condition triggers the transition to two different gaming states having different advantages for the player, so that the playability of the gaming machine can be diversified.

Further, according to the feature tM1, in the first predetermined gaming state, the determination mode is the first determination mode, but since it is more advantageous for the player than the first specific gaming state, it is suitable for the player. Surprisingness can be given.

<Characteristic tN group>
The feature tN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic tN1]
Distribution area (game area PA) where game balls are distributed,
An entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
It is a means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning a big hit), and is a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination. A determination means having one determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 420 executed by the MPU 62),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state in which the entry of the game ball into the entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the entry means is possible or easy. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state and a second state
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means.
A game state transition means for shifting the game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode, and
Equipped with
The game state transition means is
In the first specific game state (high accuracy and high support state), when the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) is satisfied, the control mode is set to the predetermined period (the period until the next big hit is won) and the second control mode. By maintaining the above, the first transition means for shifting to the first predetermined gaming state (low accuracy and high support state), which is more advantageous for the player than the first specific gaming state, and
In the first specific game state, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (the game times of the time reduction continuation number are executed) without the specific condition being satisfied (without winning in the fall lottery), the second specific game state is executed. The second transition method to shift to (high accuracy and low support state),
In the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the second predetermined gaming state (low probability and low support state), which is less advantageous to the player than the second specific gaming state, is shifted to. 3 Transition means and
Equipped with
The gaming machine characterized in that the second predetermined gaming state is a state in which the control mode is the first control mode.

According to the feature tN1, even when the same specific condition is satisfied, the function is different between the case of the first specific gaming state and the case of the second specific gaming state. In the first specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the transition of the gaming state is performed so as to increase the advantage for the player, and in the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the transition of the gaming state is performed. , The transition of the gaming state is performed so as to reduce the advantage for the player. That is, according to the feature tN1, the establishment of the specific condition triggers the transition to two types of gaming states in which the advantages for the player are different, so that the playability of the gaming machine can be diversified.

Further, according to the feature tN1, in the second predetermined gaming state, since the control mode is the first control mode, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entry means. Therefore, in the second predetermined gaming state, the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to the feature tN1, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the specific condition that triggers the transition to the second predetermined gaming state is satisfied in the second specific gaming state. ..

<Characteristic tO group>
The feature tO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic toO1]
Distribution area (game area PA) where game balls are distributed,
A ball entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
It is a means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning a big hit), and is a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination. A determination means having one determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that of the first determination mode.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 420 executed by the MPU 62),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state in which the entry of the game ball into the entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the entry means is possible or easy. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state and a second state
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means.
A game state transition means for shifting the game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode, and
Equipped with
The game state transition means is
In the first specific game state (high accuracy and high support state), when the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) is satisfied, the control mode is set to the predetermined period (the period until the next big hit is won) and the second control mode. By maintaining the above, the first transition means for shifting to the first predetermined gaming state (low accuracy and high support state), which is more advantageous for the player than the first specific gaming state, and
In the first specific game state, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (the game times of the time reduction continuation number are executed) without the specific condition being satisfied (without winning in the fall lottery), the second specific game state is executed. The second transition method to shift to (high accuracy and low support state),
In the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the second predetermined gaming state (low probability and low support state), which is less advantageous to the player than the second specific gaming state, is shifted to. 3 Transition means and
Equipped with
The second specific gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the determination mode is the second determination mode.

According to the feature tO1, even when the same specific condition is satisfied, the function is different between the case of the first specific gaming state and the case of the second specific gaming state. In the first specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the transition of the gaming state is performed so as to increase the advantage for the player, and in the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the transition of the gaming state is performed. , The transition of the gaming state is performed so as to reduce the advantage for the player. That is, according to the feature tO1, the establishment of the specific condition triggers the transition to two different gaming states having different advantages for the player, so that the playability of the gaming machine can be diversified.

Further, according to the feature tO1, in the second specific gaming state, the determination mode is the second determination mode, which is highly advantageous for the player. For this reason, according to the feature tO1, since it is not desirable for the player to shift the gaming state from the second specific gaming state, which has a high advantage, is it possible that a specific condition is satisfied in the second specific gaming state? It is possible to give a sense of urgency to the player.

<Characteristic tP group>
The feature tP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic tP1]
Distribution area (game area PA) where game balls are distributed,
An entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
It is a means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning a big hit), and is a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination. A determination means having one determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is higher than that of the first determination mode.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 420 executed by the MPU 62),
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state in which the entry of the game ball into the entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the entry means is possible or easy. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state and a second state
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means.
A game state transition means for shifting the game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode, and
Equipped with
The game state transition means is
In the first specific game state (high accuracy and high support state), when the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) is satisfied, the control mode is set to the predetermined period (the period until the next big hit is won) and the second control mode. By maintaining the above, the first transition means for shifting to the first predetermined gaming state (low accuracy and high support state), which is more advantageous for the player than the first specific gaming state, and
In the first specific game state, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (the game times of the time reduction continuation number are executed) without the specific condition being satisfied (without winning in the fall lottery), the second specific game state is executed. The second transition method to shift to (high accuracy and low support state),
In the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the second predetermined gaming state (low probability and low support state), which is less advantageous to the player than the second specific gaming state, is shifted to. 3 Transition means and
Equipped with
The gaming machine characterized in that the second predetermined gaming state is a state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to the feature tP1, even when the same specific condition is satisfied, the function is different between the case of the first specific gaming state and the case of the second specific gaming state. In the first specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the transition of the gaming state is performed so as to increase the advantage for the player, and in the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the transition of the gaming state is performed. , The transition of the gaming state is performed so as to reduce the advantage for the player. That is, according to the feature tP1, the establishment of the specific condition triggers the transition to two different gaming states having different advantages for the player, so that the playability of the gaming machine can be diversified.

Further, according to the feature tP1, in the second predetermined gaming state, since the determination mode is the first determination mode, the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to the feature tP1, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the specific condition that triggers the transition to the second predetermined gaming state is satisfied in the second specific gaming state. can.

<Characteristic uA group>
Features The uA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic uA1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
A means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information. Is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. Also, a determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the specific game state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state has reached a predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation number). In this case, a game state transition means for shifting from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state (high accuracy and low support state) in which the determination mode is the same as the specific gaming state, which is the second determination mode.
By the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state ends in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) When the above is established, the advantageous state continuation means for continuing the advantageous state for the player for a predetermined period,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature uA1, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the determination mode is the specific gaming state when the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. It shifts to the first predetermined gaming state which is the same second determination mode as above. Immediately after the transition to the first predetermined gaming state, the second special information acquired in the specific gaming state may remain in the acquired information storage means, and in this case, in the first predetermined gaming state, the second special information may remain. The determination by the determination means for the remaining second special information is prioritized over the determination by the determination means for the first special information. Then, if a specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination by the determination means for the remaining second special information ends in the first predetermined gaming state, the advantageous state for the player is continued for a predetermined period. .. Therefore, according to the feature uA1, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the determination by the second determination mode has a high probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition for the player. , It can be expected that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, but further, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made from the specific gaming state. By the time the specific condition is satisfied, the player can be expected to execute the state advantageous to the player for a predetermined period by the time the transitioned first predetermined gaming state ends. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic uA2]
Features The gaming machine described in uA1.
The advantageous state continuation means is
By the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery). When the determination mode is established, the first predetermined gaming state is set to the second predetermined gaming state (the aspect H1b during the special 2 residual hold digestion in the low probability low support state H1) in which the determination mode is the first determination mode. As a means of migrating from
In the second predetermined gaming state, when the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (value corresponding to the time saving grant), the control means is used until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. A control mode execution means for executing the second control mode as the control mode,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature uA2, when the specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. The determination mode is shifted to the second predetermined gaming state, which is the first determination mode. Then, in the second predetermined gaming state, when the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (value corresponding to the time saving grant), until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until the jackpot is won). ), The second control mode is executed as the control mode by the control means. In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls held. , The determination by the determination means for the second special information acquired by the entry of the game ball into the second entry means can be executed with high frequency. Therefore, if the player shifts to the second predetermined gaming state and the second special information can satisfy the second predetermined condition, it is possible to realize that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition.

Therefore, according to the feature uA2, a specific condition is satisfied for the player by the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information ends in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode. Then, it is possible to expect the transition from the first predetermined gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state. That is, according to the feature uA2, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It can be expected that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, but further, the specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information is completed, and the first predetermined gaming state is changed to the first. 2 It can be expected to shift to a predetermined gaming state.

On the other hand, if the player shifts to the second predetermined gaming state and the second special information can satisfy the second predetermined condition, the special information is given to the player by the determination means next time in a state where the number of balls held is difficult to decrease. (1) Until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until a big hit is won), it is possible to give a sense of security that the second control mode, which facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second entry means, does not end. As described above, according to the feature uA2, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of security.

[Characteristic uA3]
Features The gaming machine described in uA2.
In the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) is satisfied when the determination by the determination means is performed for the first special information stored in the acquisition information storage means. A gaming machine comprising a means for shifting from the first predetermined gaming state to a normal state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode.

Feature uA3 According to the first predetermined game, when a specific condition is satisfied when the determination means determines the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the first predetermined game state. It is possible to shift from the state to the normal state. On the other hand, as described above, in the first predetermined gaming state, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state before shifting to the first predetermined gaming state. If the same specific conditions as above are satisfied by the end of the above, the advantageous state for the player is continued for a predetermined period. Therefore, even if the same specific condition is satisfied, if the determination based on the second special information is performed, the state shifts to an advantageous state for the player, whereas the determination regarding the second special information is made. Is completed, and when the determination for the first special information is performed, the normal state is entered. Therefore, in the first predetermined gaming state, the player feels a sense of urgency that the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means may end without satisfying the specific condition. Can be given to. As described above, according to the feature uA3, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

[Characteristic uA4]
Features The gaming machine described in uA1.
In the specific game state (high accuracy and high support state), the specific condition (in the fall lottery) is reached until the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation number). A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for maintaining an advantageous state (low accuracy and high support state H5) for a player for a predetermined period when (winning) is established.

According to the feature uA4, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, when the specific condition is satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. , A state favorable to the player is executed for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, according to the feature uA4, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the specific condition is satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. That can be expected from the player. On the other hand, as described above, in the specific gaming state, when the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number, the game shifts to the first predetermined gaming state and the second special It is possible to expect the player to satisfy the specific condition by the time the determination by the determination means for the information is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. Therefore, even if the specific condition is not satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode. It is possible to expect the player to satisfy the specific condition by the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information is completed in the first predetermined gaming state without giving the player a disappointing feeling. .. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic uB group>
Features The uB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic uB1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
A means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information. Is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. Also, a determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control mode shifts from the first specific gaming state (high accuracy high support state) in which the control mode is the second control mode to the first predetermined gaming state (low accuracy low support state) in which the control mode is the first control mode. Game state transition means and
In the first specific game state, the second predetermined condition (value corresponding to the time saving grant) in which the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means is different from the first predetermined condition is applied to the first predetermined game. A control mode execution means for executing the second control mode as the control mode by the control means for a predetermined period when the state is satisfied.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature uB1, the control mode is shifted from the first specific gaming state in which the control mode is the second control mode to the first predetermined gaming state in which the control mode is the first control mode. Immediately after the transition to the first predetermined gaming state, the second special information acquired by the first specific gaming state may remain in the acquired information storage means. In this case, in the first predetermined gaming state. , The determination by the determination means for the remaining second special information is given priority over the determination by the determination means for the first special information. Then, in the first predetermined gaming state, when the remaining second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (for example, the value corresponding to the time saving grant), the second control is performed as the control mode by the control means for a predetermined period. The mode is executed. In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls held. Therefore, it is possible to frequently perform a determination by the determination means for the second special information acquired when the game ball enters the second entry means, and as a result, the second special information is obtained. It is possible to easily realize that the first predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, winning a big hit). Therefore, according to the feature uB1, if the second special information can be stored in the acquired information storage means and the state can be shifted to the first predetermined gaming state, the second special information is the second predetermined condition (for example,). It is possible to obtain an opportunity to satisfy the value corresponding to the time saving grant), and as a result, the second special information acquired when the game ball enters the second entry means satisfies the first predetermined condition. That (for example, winning a big hit) can be easily realized. As a result, according to the feature uB1, it is possible to expect the player to shift to the first predetermined gaming state in the state where the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, and the interest of the game is improved. Can be planned.

[Characteristic uB2]
Features The gaming machine described in uB1.
The predetermined period is a period until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature uB2, it is possible to shift to the first predetermined gaming state in the state where the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, and the second special information is the second predetermined in the first predetermined gaming state. If the conditions can be satisfied, it is possible to surely realize that the second special information acquired by the entry of the game ball into the second entry means satisfies the first predetermined condition.

[Characteristic uB3]
Features The gaming machine described in uB2.
The game state transition means is
In the first specific game state (high accuracy and high support state), when the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the first specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation number), the control mode Is a means for shifting from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state (high accuracy and low support state), which is the first control mode.
By the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the first specific gaming state is completed in the second specific gaming state, specific conditions (in the fall lottery). When the winning) is established, the means for shifting from the second specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature uB3, in the first specific gaming state, when the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the first specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation number), the control mode is the first. It shifts to the second specific gaming state which is a control mode. Immediately after the transition to the second specific gaming state, the second special information acquired in the first specific gaming state may remain in the acquired information storage means, and in this case, in the second specific gaming state. , The determination by the determination means for the remaining second special information is given priority over the determination by the determination means for the first special information. Then, if the specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination by the determination means for the remaining second special information ends in the second specific gaming state, the transition from the second specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state is made. Will be done. For this reason, as described above, if the second special information can satisfy the second predetermined condition in the first predetermined gaming state, the acquisition is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. Since it is possible to surely realize that the second special information is satisfied with the first predetermined condition, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the first specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number and the second is specified. In the case of shifting to the gaming state, the specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the first specific gaming state ends in the second specific gaming state. That can be expected from the player. As a result, according to the feature uB3, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic uC group>
Features The uC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic uC1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
A means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information. Is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. Also, a determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the execution of the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state is performed. A control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of times reaches the first predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation number).
In the first predetermined gaming state (high accuracy and low support state) after the transition to the first control mode is made, the number of executions of the gaming round after the transition to the specific gaming state is the second predetermined number of times (ST number of times). ), The determination mode transition means for shifting the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, and
Equipped with
When the first predetermined number of times is N1, the second predetermined number of times is N2, and the maximum number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means is N3, the following equation (1) A gaming machine characterized by satisfying.
N2 ≧ N1 + N3 + 1 ... (1)

Feature According to uC1, in the specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state is the first predetermined number of times. When is reached, the control mode is shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode. As a result, the control mode is shifted from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state, which is the first control mode. Immediately after the transition to the first predetermined gaming state, the second special information acquired in the specific gaming state may remain in the acquired information storage means, and in this case, in the first predetermined gaming state, the second special information may remain. The determination by the determination means for the remaining second special information is prioritized over the determination by the determination means for the first special information. Then, in the first predetermined gaming state, when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches the second predetermined number, the determination mode is shifted from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. According to the formula (1), the second predetermined number of times N2 is a value larger than the sum of the first predetermined number of times N1 and the maximum number N3 of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means. Therefore, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is terminated in the first predetermined gaming state.

When transitioning from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state, that is, when the number of games after shifting to the specific gaming state reaches the first predetermined number N1 in the specific gaming state, it is stored in the acquired information storage means. Consider the case where the maximum number of second special information is N3. When the number of games reaches the first predetermined number of times N1, the control mode shifts to the first control mode, and it becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. The game ball may enter the second ball entry means immediately before. The second predetermined number of times N2 is configured to match the number of sums of the first predetermined number of times N1 and the maximum number N3 of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means (hereinafter, referred to as a comparative example configuration). ), Corresponds to the game ball (hereinafter referred to as "excessive game ball") that was entered immediately before the entry of the game ball into the second entry means became impossible or difficult. The determination by the determination means is not executed in the first predetermined gaming state, but is executed in the state after the determination mode is shifted from the second determination mode to the first determination mode (hereinafter, referred to as a normal state). When the designer of the gaming machine shifts from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state, all the determinations by the determination means corresponding to the gaming ball that has entered the second predetermined gaming state are completed in the first predetermined gaming state. If the configuration of the comparative example is adopted, the game is not originally assumed by the designer because the judgment by the judgment means corresponding to the excessive amount of the game ball is executed in the normal state. There was a risk of exhibiting sex.

On the other hand, according to the feature uC1, due to the relationship of the equation (1), the second predetermined number of times N2 is the maximum of the first predetermined number of times N1 and the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means. Since the number is equal to or greater than the sum of the sum of the numbers N3 and 1 added, the determination by the determination means corresponding to the excessive number of game balls is always executed in the first predetermined gaming state. Therefore, according to the feature uC1, the determination by the determination means corresponding to the game ball that has entered the second ball entry means when the specific game state is changed to the first predetermined game state is the above-mentioned excess game ball. Including the above, all the games are completed in the first predetermined gaming state, and the game can be exhibited as originally expected by the designer. As a result, according to the feature uC1, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic uC2]
Features The gaming machine described in uC1.
A gaming machine characterized by satisfying the following formula (2).
N2 = N1 + N3 + 1 ... (2)

According to the feature uC2, from the relationship of the equation (2), the second predetermined number of times N2 is the sum of the first predetermined number of times N1 and the maximum number N3 of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means. Since 1 is added to the number, the determination by the determination means corresponding to the excess game ball is always executed in the first predetermined gaming state, as in the feature uC1. Therefore, according to the feature uC2, the same effect as that of the feature uC1 is obtained. That is, according to the feature uC2, when the specific game state is changed to the first predetermined game state, the determination by the determination means corresponding to the game ball that has entered the second ball entry means is the above-mentioned excess game ball. Including the above, all the games will be completed in the first predetermined game state, and the game characteristics originally expected by the designer can be exhibited, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved. Play.

[Characteristic uC3]
The gaming machine according to the feature uC1 or the feature uC2.
By the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state ends in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) A gaming machine characterized by being provided with an advantageous state continuation means for continuing an advantageous state for a player for a predetermined period when the condition is established.

Feature According to uC3, in the first predetermined gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode, there is a probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition for the player. The determination by the high second determination mode can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but further, the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state. By the time the determination by is completed in the first predetermined gaming state shifted from the specific gaming state, the player is informed that the advantageous state for the player is continued for a predetermined period by the establishment of the specific condition. You can expect it. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic uC4]
Features The gaming machine described in uC3.
The advantageous state continuation means is
By the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state ends in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) When the determination mode is established, the second predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode (the aspect H1b during the special 2 residual hold digestion in the low probability low support state H1) is entered from the first predetermined gaming state. The means of migration and
In the second predetermined gaming state, when the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (value corresponding to the time saving grant), the control means is used until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. A control mode execution means for executing the second control mode as the control mode,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature uC4, when the specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. The determination mode is shifted to the second predetermined gaming state, which is the first determination mode. Then, in the second predetermined gaming state, when the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (value corresponding to the time saving grant), until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until the jackpot is won). ), The second control mode is executed as the control mode by the control means. In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls held. , The determination by the determination means for the second special information acquired by the entry of the game ball into the second entry means can be executed with high frequency. Therefore, if the player shifts to the second predetermined gaming state and the second special information can satisfy the second predetermined condition, it is possible to realize that the second special information satisfies the first predetermined condition.

Therefore, according to the feature uC4, a specific condition is satisfied for the player by the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information ends in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode. Then, it is possible to expect the transition from the first predetermined gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state. That is, according to the feature uC4, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It can be expected that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, but further, the specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information is completed, and the first predetermined gaming state is changed to the first. 2 It can be expected to shift to a predetermined gaming state.

On the other hand, if the player shifts to the second predetermined gaming state and the second special information can satisfy the second predetermined condition, the special information is given to the player by the determination means next time in a state where the number of balls held is difficult to decrease. (1) Until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until a big hit is won), it is possible to give a sense of security that the second control mode, which facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second entry means, does not end. As described above, according to the feature uC4, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of security.

[Characteristic uC5]
Features The gaming machine described in uC4.
In the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) is satisfied when the determination by the determination means is performed for the first special information stored in the acquisition information storage means. A gaming machine comprising a means for shifting from the first predetermined gaming state to a normal state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode.

Feature uC5 According to the first predetermined game, when a specific condition is satisfied when the determination means determines the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the first predetermined game state. It is possible to shift from the state to the normal state. On the other hand, as described above, in the first predetermined gaming state, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state before shifting to the first predetermined gaming state. If the same specific conditions as above are satisfied by the end of the above, the advantageous state for the player is continued for a predetermined period. Therefore, even if the same specific condition is satisfied, if the determination based on the second special information is performed, the state shifts to an advantageous state for the player, whereas the determination regarding the second special information is made. Is completed, and when the determination for the first special information is performed, the normal state is entered. Therefore, in the first predetermined gaming state, the player feels a sense of urgency that the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means may end without satisfying the specific condition. Can be given to. As described above, according to the feature uC5, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

[Characteristic uC6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features uC1 to the feature uC5.
In the specific game state (high accuracy and high support state), the specific condition (fall lottery) is reached until the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches the first predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation number). A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for continuing a state advantageous for the player (low accuracy and high support state H5) for a predetermined period when the winning is established.

Feature According to uC6, in the specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state is the first predetermined number of times. By the time it reaches, if a specific condition is met, the player's advantageous state will continue for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, according to the feature uC6, in the specific gaming state, the player is informed that the specific condition is satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches the first predetermined number of times. You can expect it. On the other hand, as described above, in the specific gaming state, when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches the first predetermined number of times, the game shifts to the first predetermined gaming state and the second It is possible to expect the player to satisfy the specific condition by the time the determination by the determination means for the special information is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. Therefore, even if the specific condition is not satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches the first predetermined number in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode. It is possible to expect the player to satisfy the specific condition by the time the judgment by the judgment means for the second special information is completed in the first predetermined gaming state without giving the player a disappointing feeling. can. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic uD group>
The feature uD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic uD1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
A means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information. Is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. Also, a determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
From the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the determination mode is the second determination mode and the said. A first game state transition means for shifting the control mode to the first predetermined gaming state (high accuracy and low support state), which is the first control mode, and
By the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state ends in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) When the above-mentioned first predetermined gaming state is established, the second gaming state transition means for shifting from the first predetermined gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state (the aspect H1b during the special 2 residual hold digestion in the low probability low support state H1).
After the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) The third game state transition means for shifting from the first predetermined gaming state to the third predetermined gaming state (low probability low support state H1) when the above-mentioned first predetermined gaming state is established.
Equipped with
The second predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the advantage for the player is higher than that of the third predetermined gaming state.

Feature According to uD1, the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode from the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode. It shifts to a certain first predetermined gaming state. Then, when the specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, it is advantageous for the player. It shifts to the second predetermined gaming state with high sex. If the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the second predetermined gaming state is higher than the determination. It shifts to the third predetermined gaming state, which is not highly advantageous to the player. Therefore, according to the feature uD1, in the first predetermined gaming state shifted from the specific gaming state, the determination means for the player regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is used. By the time the determination is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, it can be expected that the specific condition will be satisfied. That is, according to the feature uD1, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It can be expected that the special information satisfies the first predetermined game state, but further, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made in the first predetermined gaming state. By the end, it can be expected that certain conditions will be met.

Further, according to the feature uD1, when the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. Since the transition to the third predetermined gaming state, which is less advantageous to the player than the second predetermined gaming state, is performed, in the first predetermined gaming state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and , A sense of urgency that the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state may end in the first predetermined gaming state without the specific condition being satisfied. , Can be given to the player. As described above, according to the feature uD1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

[Characteristic uD2]
Features The gaming machine described in uD1.
The second game state transition means is
By the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery). When the determination mode is established, the first predetermined game is entered in the second predetermined gaming state (the aspect H1b during the special 2 residual hold digestion in the low probability low support state H1) in which the determination mode is the first determination mode. The means to move from the state,
After the transition to the second predetermined gaming state, when the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (value corresponding to the time saving grant), until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. A means for executing the second control mode as the control mode by the control means,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature uD2, when the specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. The determination mode is shifted to the second predetermined gaming state, which is the first determination mode. Then, in the second predetermined gaming state, when the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (value corresponding to the time saving grant), until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until the jackpot is won). ), The second control mode is executed as the control mode by the control means. In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls held. , The determination by the determination means for the second special information acquired by the entry of the game ball into the second entry means can be executed with high frequency. Therefore, if the game shifts to the second predetermined gaming state and the second special information can satisfy the second predetermined condition, it is possible to surely realize that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition.

Therefore, according to the feature uD2, a specific condition is satisfied for the player by the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information ends in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode. Then, it is possible to expect the transition from the first predetermined gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state. That is, according to the feature uD2, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It can be expected that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, but further, the specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information is completed, and the first predetermined gaming state is changed to the first. 2 It can be expected to shift to a predetermined gaming state.

On the other hand, if the player shifts to the second predetermined gaming state and the second special information can satisfy the second predetermined condition, the special information is given to the player by the determination means next time in a state where the number of balls held is difficult to decrease. (1) Until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until a big hit is won), it is possible to give a sense of security that the second control mode, which facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second entry means, does not end. As described above, according to the feature uD2, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of security.

[Characteristic uD3]
Features The gaming machine described in uD2.
The third game state transition means is
In the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) is satisfied when the determination by the determination means is performed for the first special information stored in the acquisition information storage means. In this case, the determination mode is the first determination mode, and the control mode is the first control mode. The means for shifting from the first predetermined gaming state to the normal state as the third predetermined gaming state is provided. A gaming machine characterized by that.

Feature uD3 According to the first predetermined game, when a specific condition is satisfied when the determination means determines the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the first predetermined game state. It is possible to shift from the state to the normal state. On the other hand, as described above, in the first predetermined gaming state, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state before shifting to the first predetermined gaming state. If the same specific conditions as above are satisfied by the end of the above, the advantageous state for the player is continued for a predetermined period. Therefore, even if the same specific condition is satisfied, if the determination based on the second special information is performed, the state shifts to an advantageous state for the player, whereas the determination regarding the second special information is made. Is completed, and when the determination for the first special information is performed, the normal state is entered. Therefore, in the first predetermined gaming state, the player feels a sense of urgency that the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means may end without satisfying the specific condition. Can be given to. As described above, according to the feature uD3, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

[Characteristic uD4]
Features The gaming machine described in uD3.
The first game state transition means is
In the specific game state (high accuracy and high support state), when the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation number), the first predetermined game state is reached. A means for transitioning from the specific gaming state is provided.
In the specific game state (high accuracy and high support state), the specific condition (in the fall lottery) is reached until the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation number). A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for maintaining an advantageous state (low accuracy and high support state H5) for a player for a predetermined period when (winning) is established.

According to the feature uD4, in the specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state becomes a predetermined number of times. By the time it is reached, if certain conditions are met, the player will continue to be in a favorable condition for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, according to the feature uD4, it is expected that the specific condition will be satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number in the specific game state. Can be made to. On the other hand, as described above, in the specific gaming state, when the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number, the game shifts to the first predetermined gaming state and the second special It is possible to expect the player to satisfy the specific condition by the time the determination by the determination means for the information is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. Therefore, in the specific game state, even if the specific condition is not satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times, the player is given a disappointed feeling. Without this, the player can be expected that the specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic uE group>
Features The uE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic uE1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
A means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information. Is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. Also, a determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, and
When the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) is satisfied, the determination mode transition means (fall determination process) for shifting the determination executed by the determination means from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. ,
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
In the specific game state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state has reached a predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation number). In this case, a game state transition means for shifting from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state (high accuracy and low support state) in which the determination mode is the same as the specific gaming state, which is the second determination mode.
A production execution means that can execute a production, and
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
When the specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. , A gaming machine characterized by providing means for performing an effect corresponding to a predetermined advantageous state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

According to the feature uE1, since the determination mode transition means shifts the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, it originally reduces the advantage for the player. On the other hand, according to the feature uE1, the specific condition is set until the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. If it is established, the effect corresponding to the predetermined advantageous state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is executed. Therefore, according to the feature uE1, the operation corresponding to the predetermined advantageous state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is executed while the operation is originally performed by the determination mode transition means that discourages the player. The range of the effect can be expanded without being limited to the operation by the determination mode transition means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic uE2]
Features The gaming machine described in uE1.
When the specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. , Advantageous state continuation means to maintain advantageous state for the player for a predetermined period,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature uE2, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. Can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but further, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state has shifted from the specific gaming state. (1) By the time the specific condition is satisfied by the end of the predetermined gaming state, the player can be expected to continue the advantageous state for the player for a predetermined period. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic uE3]
Features The gaming machine described in uE2.
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state in which the entry of the game ball into the entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the entry means is possible or easy. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state and a second state
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means.
Equipped with
The advantageous state continuation means is
When the specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. A means for shifting from the first predetermined gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode (aspect H1b during special 2 residual hold digestion in the low probability low support state H1).
In the second predetermined gaming state, when the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (value corresponding to the time saving grant), the control means is used until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. A control mode execution means for executing the second control mode as the control mode,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature uE3, when the specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. The determination mode is shifted to the second predetermined gaming state, which is the first determination mode. Then, in the second predetermined gaming state, when the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (value corresponding to the time saving grant), until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until the jackpot is won). ), The second control mode is executed as the control mode by the control means. In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls held. , The determination by the determination means for the second special information acquired by the entry of the game ball into the second entry means can be executed with high frequency. Therefore, if the player shifts to the second predetermined gaming state and the second special information can satisfy the second predetermined condition, it is possible to surely realize that the second special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. Become.

Therefore, according to the feature uE3, a specific condition is satisfied for the player by the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information ends in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode. Then, it is possible to expect the transition from the first predetermined gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state. That is, according to the feature uE3, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It can be expected that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, but further, the specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information is completed, and the first predetermined gaming state is changed to the first. 2 It can be expected to shift to a predetermined gaming state.

On the other hand, if the player shifts to the second predetermined gaming state and the second special information can satisfy the second predetermined condition, the special information is given to the player by the determination means next time in a state where the number of balls held is difficult to decrease. (1) Until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until a big hit is won), it is possible to give a sense of security that the second control mode, which facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second entry means, does not end. As described above, according to the feature uE3, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of security.

[Characteristic uE4]
Features The gaming machine described in uE3.
In the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) is satisfied when the determination by the determination means is performed for the first special information stored in the acquisition information storage means. A gaming machine comprising a means for shifting from the first predetermined gaming state to a normal state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode.

Feature uE4 According to the first predetermined game, when a specific condition is satisfied when the determination means determines the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the first predetermined game state. It is possible to shift from the state to the normal state. On the other hand, as described above, in the first predetermined gaming state, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state before shifting to the first predetermined gaming state. If the same specific conditions as above are satisfied by the end of the above, the advantageous state for the player is continued for a predetermined period. Therefore, even if the same specific condition is satisfied, if the determination based on the second special information is performed, the state shifts to an advantageous state for the player, whereas the determination regarding the second special information is made. Is completed, and when the determination for the first special information is performed, the normal state is entered. Therefore, in the first predetermined gaming state, the player feels a sense of urgency that the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means may end without satisfying the specific condition. Can be given to. As described above, according to the feature uE4, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

[Characteristic uE5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features uE1 to the feature uE4.
In the specific game state (high accuracy and high support state), the specific condition (fall lottery) is reached until the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches the first predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation number). A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for continuing a state advantageous for the player (low accuracy and high support state H5) for a predetermined period when the winning is established.

According to the feature uE5, in the specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state is the first predetermined number of times. By the time it reaches, if a specific condition is met, the player's advantageous state will continue for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, according to the feature uE5, in the specific game state, the player is informed that the specific condition is satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches the first predetermined number of times. You can expect it. On the other hand, as described above, in the specific gaming state, when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches the first predetermined number of times, the game shifts to the first predetermined gaming state and the second It is possible to expect the player to satisfy the specific condition by the time the determination by the determination means for the special information is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. Therefore, even if the specific condition is not satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches the first predetermined number in the specific game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode. It is possible to expect the player to satisfy the specific condition by the time the judgment by the judgment means for the second special information is completed in the first predetermined gaming state without giving the player a disappointing feeling. can. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic uF group>
Features The uF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants 1.

[Characteristic uF1]
Distribution area (game area PA) where game balls are distributed,
An entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
It is a means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning a big hit), and is a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination. A determination means having one determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, the privilege granting means (opening / closing execution mode) for granting the privilege to the player after the end of the game round corresponding to the determination. ,
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state in which the entry of the game ball into the entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the entry means is possible or easy. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state and a second state
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means.
In a situation where the second determination mode continues as the determination mode, when the number of times a predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting means reaches a predetermined number of times, the determination mode is changed to the first determination mode. Judgment mode transition means to shift,
When the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (value corresponding to the time saving grant) in the predetermined gaming state (low accuracy high support state) in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, the special information is said. A control mode executing means for executing the second control mode as the control mode by the control means until the first predetermined condition is satisfied.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

Feature According to uF1, in a situation where the second determination mode continues as the determination mode, the determination mode is the first determination mode when the number of times a predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting means reaches a predetermined number of times. In the predetermined gaming state where the determination mode is the first determination mode, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until the jackpot is won). The second control mode is executed as the control mode by the control means. In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and the player can enter the ball in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held. It is possible to frequently determine the special information acquired by the ball entering the ball means by the determination means. Therefore, in a situation where the second determination mode continues as the determination mode, the determination mode shifts to the first determination mode when the number of times the predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting means reaches the predetermined number of times. When the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition in the predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, the second is acquired with the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. It becomes possible to surely realize that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, and the privilege is granted once more by the privilege granting means.

Therefore, according to the feature uF1, in the situation where the second determination mode is continued as the determination mode, when the number of times that the predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting means reaches the specified number of times, the privilege by the privilege granting means is reached. Will be granted once more. As a result, according to the feature uF1, the player can be given great joy by giving the above-mentioned another privilege. Further, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the number of times the predetermined privilege has been granted by the privilege granting means continues for a predetermined number of times. In particular, since it is very important that the number of times a predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting means continues for a specified number of times, after the predetermined privilege is granted one less than the specified number of times, Once again, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation that the awarding of benefits will continue.

[Characteristic uF2]
Features The gaming machine described in uF1.
In the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, until the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation number). A gaming machine comprising a gaming state transition means for shifting from the specific gaming state to the predetermined gaming state (low accuracy and high support state) when a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is satisfied.

According to the feature uF2, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, when the specific condition is satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. The determination mode is shifted to the predetermined gaming state, which is the first determination mode. In the predetermined gaming state, as described above, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the control mode by the control means is the first until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until the big hit is won). Since the two control modes are executed, it is possible to surely realize that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. Therefore, if the player shifts to the predetermined gaming state and the special information can satisfy the second predetermined condition, the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball entry means satisfies the first predetermined condition. It will be possible to realize it with certainty.

Therefore, according to the feature uF2, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is specified by the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. It is possible to expect that the condition is satisfied and the transition from the specific gaming state to the predetermined gaming state is achieved. That is, according to the feature uF2, in the specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. Can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but further, the specific condition is satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times, and the specific game state is changed from the specific game state. , It can be expected to shift to a predetermined gaming state in which the special information can surely realize that the first predetermined condition is satisfied.

On the other hand, if the special information can satisfy the second predetermined condition in the predetermined gaming state after the transition, the special information will satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means next time in a state where it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls held. Until it is satisfied (for example, until a big hit is won), it is possible to give a sense of security that the second control mode, which facilitates the entry of the game ball into the entry means, does not end. As described above, according to the feature uF2, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of security.

[Characteristic uF3]
The gaming machine according to the feature uF1 or the feature uF2.
A privilege type determining means for determining the privilege type of the privilege given by the privilege granting means is provided.
The determination mode transition means is
In a situation where the second determination mode continues as the determination mode, the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the privilege type determining means causes the said. A means for incrementing the value of the predetermined counter each time it is determined that the determination mode after the predetermined privilege is granted is the privilege type (probability variation jackpot) that can be the second determination mode.
Means for shifting the determination mode to the first determination mode when the value of the predetermined counter reaches the specified number of times (probability variation limit number of times) in a situation where the second determination mode continues as the determination mode. When,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature uF3, in the situation where the second determination mode continues as the determination mode, the determination after the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition and the predetermined privilege is given by the privilege type determining means. The predetermined counter is updated every time it is determined that the mode is a privilege type that can be the second determination mode. Then, in a situation where the second determination mode continues as the determination mode, when the value of the predetermined counter reaches the predetermined number of times, the determination mode is shifted to the first determination mode. As described above, in the predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the game ball is entered into the second entry means. It becomes possible to realize that the second special information acquired as an opportunity satisfies the first predetermined condition, and the privilege is granted once more by the privilege granting means. Therefore, in the situation where the second determination mode continues as the determination mode, the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition until the value of the predetermined counter reaches the specified number of times, and the special information is predetermined by the privilege type determining means. If it is possible to repeat the determination that the judgment mode after the privilege is granted is the privilege type that can be the second judgment mode, the privilege is granted once more by the privilege granting means. Become. Therefore, in the situation where the second determination mode continues as the determination mode, the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition until the value of the predetermined counter reaches the predetermined number of times, and the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition and is predetermined by the privilege type determining means. It is possible to further expect the player to repeat the determination that the determination mode after the privilege is granted is the privilege type that can be the second determination mode. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic uG group>
Features The uG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants 2.

[Characteristic uG1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
It is a means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning a big hit), and is a determination mode (lottery mode) for making the determination. A determination means having one determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state in which the entry of the game ball into the entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the entry means is possible or easy. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state and a second state
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means.
The special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means in the first predetermined gaming state (high accuracy and low support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode. When the special information of 1 satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value of winning the jackpot) and does not satisfy the other conditions (matching the value of winning the big hit) (sorting result). Is a normal jackpot), the mode transition means for shifting the determination mode to the first determination mode and the control mode to the second control mode, and
In the second predetermined gaming state (low accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the special information is applied to the second predetermined condition (time saving). A control mode executing means for executing the second control mode as the control mode by the control means until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition when the corresponding value) is satisfied.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature uG1, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the first special information acquired by the gaming ball entering the first entry means is the first predetermined condition. When is satisfied and other conditions are not satisfied, the determination mode shifts to the first determination mode, and the control mode shifts to the second control mode. Then, in the second predetermined gaming state where the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. Until the condition is satisfied (for example, until the jackpot is won), the second control mode is executed as the control mode by the control means. In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and the player can enter the ball in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held. It is possible to frequently determine the special information acquired by the ball entering the ball means by the determination means. Therefore, according to the feature uG1, in the first predetermined gaming state, when the first special information satisfies the first predetermined condition and does not satisfy the other conditions, the transition to the second predetermined gaming state is performed. This makes it possible to reliably realize that the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball entry means again satisfies the first predetermined condition.

Therefore, according to the feature uG1, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the first special information satisfies the first predetermined condition and does not satisfy the other conditions, so that the second predetermined information is satisfied. When the game state is entered, the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball entry means satisfies the first predetermined condition once more. As a result, according to the feature uG1, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the game that the first special information satisfies the first predetermined condition and does not satisfy the other conditions. It is possible to give a sense of expectation to a person. As a result, according to the feature uG1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the second predetermined gaming state in which the special information is transferred from the first predetermined gaming state by satisfying the first predetermined condition, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the player has a ball. Next time, the second control mode that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the entry means ends until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until the big hit is won). You can have a sense of security. As described above, according to the feature uG1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of security.

[Characteristic uG2]
Features The gaming machine described in uG1.
The determination mode is the second determination mode, and in a specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state) different from the first predetermined gaming state, the number of executions of the gaming times after the transition to the specific gaming state is When a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is satisfied by the time a predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation number) is reached, a game that shifts from the specific game state to the second predetermined game state (low accuracy high support state). A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a state transition means.

According to the feature uG2, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, when the specific condition is satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. The determination mode is the first determination mode, and the control mode is shifted to the second predetermined gaming state, which is the second control mode. In the second predetermined gaming state, as described above, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the control mode by the control means until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (for example, until the big hit is won). Since the second control mode is executed, it is possible to surely realize that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. Therefore, if it is possible to shift to the second predetermined gaming state, it is possible to surely realize that the special information acquired when the game ball enters the ball entry means satisfies the first predetermined condition. Become.

Therefore, according to the feature uG2, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is specified by the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. It is possible to expect that the condition is satisfied and the transition from the specific gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state is achieved. That is, according to the feature uG2, in the specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. Can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but further, the specific condition is satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times, and the specific game state is changed from the specific game state. , It can be expected to shift to the second predetermined gaming state in which the special information can surely realize that the first predetermined condition is satisfied.

[Characteristic uG3]
Features The gaming machine described in uG2.
When the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition, the first predetermined game state (high accuracy and low support state) is entered. Equipped with a means to transition from a specific game state,
The first predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the advantage for the player is lower than that of the second predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature uG3, when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number without satisfying the specific condition, the determination mode is the second determination mode, the first predetermined game. It is transferred to the state. The first predetermined gaming state is less advantageous to the player than the second predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, even though the determination mode is the second determination mode. Therefore, according to the feature uG3, in the specific gaming state, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is not satisfied, and the game after the transition to the specific gaming state is performed. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined number of times. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic uG4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features uG1 to the feature uG3.
A privilege type determining means for determining the privilege type of the privilege given by the privilege granting means is provided.
The mode transition means is
In the first predetermined gaming state, the first special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the privilege is granted by the privilege type determining means. When it is determined that the subsequent determination mode is the privilege type (normal jackpot) that becomes the first determination mode, the determination mode is shifted to the first determination mode and the control mode is changed to the first determination mode. 2 A gaming machine characterized by being provided with means for shifting to a control mode.

According to the feature uG4, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, after the first special information satisfies the first predetermined condition and the privilege is granted by the privilege type determining means. When it is determined that the determination mode is the privilege type to be the first determination mode, the determination mode is shifted to the first determination mode and the control mode is shifted to the second control mode. As described above, in the second predetermined gaming state where the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the special information is when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition. The second control mode is executed as the control mode by the control means until the first predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, according to the feature uG4, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the first special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, and the privilege is given by the privilege type determining means. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the determination mode is determined to be the privilege type to be the first determination mode after the determination is made. Therefore, according to the feature uG4, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic uH group>
Features The uH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants 3.

[Characteristic uH1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
The distribution area (game area PA) where the launched game balls are distributed,
An entry means (second starting port 34) provided in the distribution area and capable of entering a game ball, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
It is a means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value that wins the jackpot) or the second predetermined condition (matching the value that gives the time saving). As a determination mode (lottery mode) for making a determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the first predetermined condition than the first determination mode (a second determination mode). High probability mode), and a determination means having
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state in which the entry of the game ball into the entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the entry means is possible or easy. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state and a second state
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means.
In the first predetermined gaming state (low accuracy high support state) in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, it is determined by the determination means that the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (value corresponding to the time saving grant). In this case, the control mode execution means for executing the second control mode as the control mode by the control means for a period until the number of executions of the game times reaches a predetermined number of times.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature uH1, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the number of times the game is executed becomes the predetermined number of times. The second control mode is executed as the control mode by the control means until it is reached. Judgment by the determination means is performed when the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, when the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, and when the special information does not satisfy both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition. Since the information is distributed, even if the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition, if the special information can satisfy the second predetermined condition, the control mode is limited to the period until the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number of times. The second control mode can be executed. In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls held. , It is possible to frequently determine the special information acquired by the entry of the game ball into the entry means by the determination means. Therefore, according to the feature uH1, it is possible to repeat that the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition in the determination means again until the number of times the game is executed after the start of the second control mode reaches the predetermined number of times. It is possible to sequentially extend the period for executing the second control mode as the control mode until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition without reducing the number of balls held.

Therefore, according to the feature uH1, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number of times even if the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition in the determination means. By then, the player can be repeatedly expected that the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition in the determination means. On the flip side, the player feels a sense of urgency that the period until the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number of times without satisfying the second predetermined condition in the determination means. Can be granted. As described above, according to the feature uH1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

[Characteristic uH2]
Features The gaming machine described in uH1.
In the first predetermined gaming state (low probability high support state), the special information is the first predetermined condition (value for winning a big hit) by the end of the period until the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number of times. When it is not determined that the above-mentioned special information satisfies the second predetermined condition (matching with the value for which the time saving is given), the control is performed. A gaming machine comprising means for shifting a mode from the second control mode to the first control mode.

According to the feature uH2, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, when the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the second predetermined condition, the number of times the game is executed becomes the predetermined number of times. The second control mode is executed as the control mode by the control means until it reaches the limit, but if the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value that wins the big hit) by the end of this period. The control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first control mode when the determination is not made and the special information is not determined to satisfy the second predetermined condition (matching the value that gives the time reduction). Is migrated to. As a result, the determination mode is shifted from the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode to the normal state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode and the control mode is the first control mode. Since the normal state is not advantageous for the player, the execution of the game times is not determined that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, and the special information is not determined to satisfy the second predetermined condition. It is possible to give the player a greater sense of urgency, such as whether or not the period until the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times is over.

[Characteristic uH3]
The gaming machine according to the feature uH1 or the feature uH2.
In the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the execution of the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state. When a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is satisfied by the time the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (time reduction continuation number), the state shifts from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state (low accuracy high support state). A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a gaming state transition means.

Feature According to uH3, in the specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state becomes a predetermined number of times. When the specific condition is satisfied by the time the specific condition is reached, the state is changed from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state. In the first predetermined gaming state, as described above, if the determination means can repeatedly satisfy the second predetermined condition, the second control mode is executed as the control mode without reducing the number of balls held. The period can be sequentially extended until the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition. Therefore, according to the feature uH3, in the specific gaming state, the specific condition is satisfied for the player by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number, and the specific gaming state is satisfied. It can be expected to shift to the first predetermined gaming state. That is, according to the feature uH3, in the specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high for the player. Can be expected to satisfy the first predetermined condition, but further, the specific condition is satisfied by the time the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times, and the specific game state is started. , It can be expected that the special information shifts to the first predetermined gaming state in which it is highly possible that the first predetermined condition can be satisfied.

[Characteristic uH4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features uH1 to the feature uH3.
When the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the specific game state reaches the predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition, the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second. A means for shifting from the specific gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state (high accuracy and low support state), which is one control mode, is provided.
The second predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the advantage for the player is lower than that of the first predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature uH4, when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number without satisfying the specific condition, the transition to the second predetermined gaming state is performed. The second predetermined gaming state is less advantageous to the player than the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode, even though the determination mode is the second determination mode. Therefore, according to the feature uH4, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means, and the specific condition is not satisfied, and the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state is determined. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the predetermined number of times is reached. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic uI group>
Features The uI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic uI1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
A means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information. Is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. Also, a determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state. The control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of times of execution reaches the number of time reduction continuations) is established.
The first predetermined gaming state (high) after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made to shift to the first control mode. If a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is satisfied by the time it ends in the low probability support state), the player shifts to the specific game state again with a specific probability (100% probability again to the specific game state). (Migrate) The first re-migration means and
After the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) When (that) is established, the player shifts to the specific gaming state again with a probability lower than the specific probability (the jackpot is won in the low probability low support state and the probability is distributed to the probability change jackpot again. (Make) the second re-migration means,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature uI1, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first. It shifts to the control mode. Then, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is specified by the time it ends in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition to the first control mode is made. When the condition is satisfied, the player is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a specific probability. On the other hand, if the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific probability. It will be transferred to the specific gaming state again with a lower probability. Therefore, according to the feature uI1, in the first predetermined gaming state shifted from the specific gaming state, the determination means for the player regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is used. By the time the determination is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, it can be expected that the specific condition will be satisfied. That is, according to the feature uI1, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It can be expected that the special information satisfies the first predetermined game state, but further, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made in the first predetermined gaming state. By the end, it can be expected that certain conditions will be met.

Further, according to the feature uI1, when the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. Since the game is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means in the first predetermined gaming state, and the specific condition is satisfied. There is no sense of urgency for the player as to whether the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state ends in the first predetermined gaming state. Can be made. As described above, according to the feature uI1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

[Characteristic uI2]
Features The gaming machine described in uI1.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific probability is 100%.

According to the feature uI2, in the first predetermined gaming state, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is specified by the end in the first predetermined gaming state. When the condition is satisfied, there is a 100% probability that the game will be re-entered to the specific gaming state. That is, when the specific condition is satisfied, it is guaranteed to shift to the specific gaming state again. Therefore, it is possible to give a greater sense of expectation to the player.

[Characteristic uI3]
The gaming machine according to the feature uI1 or the feature uI2.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined condition is that the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches the predetermined number of times.

According to the feature uI3, in the specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. Until then, the control mode is maintained in the second control mode. In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls held. , The determination by the determination means for the second special information acquired by the entry of the game ball into the second entry means can be executed with high frequency. Therefore, in the period until the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times, the second special information acquired when the game ball enters the second ball entry means is the first. It is possible to make the player more expect to meet the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic uJ group>
Features The uJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic uJ1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
A means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information. Is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. Also, a determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state. The control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of times of execution reaches the number of time reduction continuations) is established.
The first predetermined gaming state (high) after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made to shift to the first control mode. If a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is satisfied by the time it ends in the low probability support state), the player shifts to the specific game state again with a specific probability (100% probability again to the specific game state). (Migrate) The first re-migration means and
After the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) If this is true, the player will re-enter the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability (the jackpot will be won in the low-probability low-support state and will be distributed to the probabilistic jackpot again). (Make) the second re-migration means and
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific probability is 100%.

Feature According to uJ1, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first. It shifts to the control mode. Then, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is specified by the time it ends in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition to the first control mode is made. When the condition is satisfied, the player is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a specific probability. On the other hand, if the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific probability. It will be transferred to the specific gaming state again with a lower probability. Therefore, according to the feature uJ1, in the first predetermined gaming state shifted from the specific gaming state, the determination means for the player regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is used. By the time the determination is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, it can be expected that the specific condition will be satisfied. That is, according to the feature uJ1, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It can be expected that the special information satisfies the first predetermined game state, but further, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made in the first predetermined gaming state. By the end, it can be expected that certain conditions will be met.

Further, according to the feature uJ1, when the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. Since the game is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means in the first predetermined gaming state, and the specific condition is satisfied. There is no sense of urgency for the player as to whether the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state ends in the first predetermined gaming state. Can be made. As described above, according to the feature uJ1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Further, according to the feature uJ1, in the first predetermined gaming state, by the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. , When the specific condition is satisfied, there is a 100% probability that the game will be re-shifted to the specific gaming state. That is, when the specific condition is satisfied, it is guaranteed to shift to the specific gaming state again. Therefore, it is possible to give a greater sense of expectation to the player.

<Characteristic uK group>
Features The uK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic uK1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
A means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information. Is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. Also, a determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state. The control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of times of execution reaches the number of time reduction continuations) is established.
The first predetermined gaming state (high) after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made to shift to the first control mode. If a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is satisfied by the time it ends in the low probability support state), the player shifts to the specific game state again with a specific probability (100% probability again to the specific game state). (Migrate) The first re-migration means and
After the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) When (that) is established, the player shifts to the specific gaming state again with a probability lower than the specific probability (the jackpot is won in the low probability low support state and the probability is distributed to the probability change jackpot again. (Make) the second re-migration means and
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined condition is that the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches the predetermined number of times.

Feature According to uK1, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first. It shifts to the control mode. Then, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is specified by the time it ends in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition to the first control mode is made. When the condition is satisfied, the player is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a specific probability. On the other hand, if the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific probability. It will be transferred to the specific gaming state again with a lower probability. Therefore, according to the feature uK1, in the first predetermined gaming state shifted from the specific gaming state, the determination means for the player regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is used. By the time the determination is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, it can be expected that the specific condition will be satisfied. That is, according to the feature uK1, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It can be expected that the special information satisfies the first predetermined game state, but further, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made in the first predetermined gaming state. By the end, it can be expected that certain conditions will be met.

Further, according to the feature uK1, when the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. Since the game is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means in the first predetermined gaming state, and the specific condition is satisfied. There is no sense of urgency for the player as to whether the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state ends in the first predetermined gaming state. Can be made. As described above, according to the feature uK1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Further, according to the feature uK1, in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state is a predetermined number of times. The control mode is maintained in the second control mode until it reaches. In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls held. , The determination by the determination means for the second special information acquired by the entry of the game ball into the second entry means can be executed with high frequency. Therefore, in the period until the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times, the second special information acquired when the game ball enters the second ball entry means is the first. It is possible to make the player more expect to meet the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic uL group>
Features The uL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, variants, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic uL1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
It is a means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information is performed. The determination is prioritized over the determination regarding the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the determination mode over the first determination mode. A determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
A game state transition means for shifting the game state, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The game state transition means is
All the second items stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state H4) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode. When the specific condition is satisfied by the time when the judgment by the judgment means regarding the special information of the above is completed (by the time when the aspect H6a during the special 2 residual hold digestion of the high accuracy low support state H6 is completed), the fall lottery is performed. (If won), the first transition means for transitioning to the advantageous gaming state (low accuracy and high support state H5) guaranteed to transition to the specific gaming state again, and
When the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times (ST number) without satisfying the specific condition, the probability of shifting to the specific gaming state again is advantageous. A second transition means for transitioning to a predetermined gaming state (low probability low support state H1) lower than the gaming state, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to this feature, it depends on the determination means for all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode. If the specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination is completed, the game is shifted to the advantageous gaming state in which the transition to the specific gaming state is guaranteed again. In addition, when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition, the probability of re-transitioning to the specific gaming state is lower than that of the advantageous gaming state. It is transferred to the state.

Therefore, according to this feature, for the player, all the first stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode. By the time the determination by the determination means for the special information of 2 is completed, it can be expected that the specific condition is satisfied and the game shifts to the advantageous gaming state. That is, according to this feature, in the specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is predetermined by the determination by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is high for the player. It can be expected that the condition is satisfied, but further, the specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination by the determination means for all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means is completed in the specific gaming state. , It can be expected to shift to an advantageous gaming state. Conventionally, the player is only expected that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition by the time the determination by the determination means for all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific game state is completed. However, according to this feature, the specific condition is satisfied and the game shifts to the advantageous gaming state by the time the determination by the determination means for all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means is completed in the specific gaming state. You can also expect the player to do it. Then, the advantageous gaming state is continued until the special information satisfies the predetermined condition and the jackpot game is started, and the player is guaranteed to shift to the specific gaming state again after the jackpot game is completed. On the other hand, even if the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition by the time when the determination by the determination means for all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed, the information is acquired in the specific gaming state. If a specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination by the determination means for all the second special information stored in the information storage means is completed, the jackpot game is guaranteed and the player can shift to the specific game state again. It can give a sense of security such as being guaranteed.

Further, according to this feature, when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition, the probability of shifting to the specific gaming state again is advantageous. Since the state is shifted to a predetermined gaming state lower than the state, the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition by the determination means in the specific gaming state, and all the second information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state. The specific condition is not satisfied by the time the judgment by the judgment means for the special information is completed, and there is a sense of urgency that the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state may reach the predetermined number of times. , Can be given to the player. As described above, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

[Characteristic uL2]
Features The gaming machine described in uL1.
The game state transition means is
A means for shifting the gaming state by selectively determining the determination mode between the first determination mode and the second determination mode (fall determination process) when the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by being prepared.

According to this feature, when a specific condition is satisfied, the game state is changed by selectively determining the determination mode between the first determination mode and the second determination mode. Switching the determination mode has a great influence on the advantage for the player. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to make the player have a strong interest in whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic uL3]
The gaming machine according to the feature uL1 or the feature uL2.
The predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the control mode is a gaming state in which the first control mode is the first control mode.

According to this feature, since the control mode is the first control mode in the predetermined gaming state, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, which is less advantageous for the player. Therefore, according to this feature, the player feels more tense as to whether or not the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number without satisfying the specific condition. Can be granted.

[Characteristic uL4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features uL1 to the feature uL3.
The predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the determination mode is a gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to this feature, in the predetermined gaming state, since the determination mode is the first determination mode, the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to this feature, the player feels a sense of urgency that the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state does not reach a predetermined number without satisfying the specific condition. It can be given even more.

<Characteristic uM group>
Features The uM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic uM1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
It is a means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information is performed. The determination is prioritized over the determination regarding the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the determination mode over the first determination mode. A determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
A game state transition means for shifting the game state, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The game state transition means is
All the second items stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state H4) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode. When the specific condition is satisfied by the time when the judgment by the judgment means regarding the special information of the above is completed (by the time when the aspect H6a during the special 2 residual hold digestion of the high accuracy low support state H6 is completed), the fall lottery is performed. (If won), the first transition means for transitioning to the advantageous gaming state (low accuracy and high support state H5) guaranteed to transition to the specific gaming state again, and
When the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times (ST number) without satisfying the specific condition, the probability of shifting to the specific gaming state again is advantageous. A second transition means for transitioning to a predetermined gaming state (low probability low support state H1) lower than the gaming state, and
Equipped with
The game state transition means is
A means for shifting the gaming state by selectively determining the determination mode between the first determination mode and the second determination mode (fall determination process) when the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by being prepared.

According to this feature, it depends on the determination means for all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode. If the specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination is completed, the game is shifted to the advantageous gaming state in which the transition to the specific gaming state is guaranteed again. In addition, when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition, the probability of re-transitioning to the specific gaming state is lower than that of the advantageous gaming state. It is transferred to the state.

Therefore, according to this feature, for the player, all the first stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode. By the time the determination by the determination means for the special information of 2 is completed, it can be expected that the specific condition is satisfied and the game shifts to the advantageous gaming state. That is, according to this feature, in the specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is predetermined by the determination by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is high for the player. It can be expected that the condition is satisfied, but further, the specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination by the determination means for all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means is completed in the specific gaming state. , It can be expected to shift to an advantageous gaming state.

Further, according to this feature, when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition, the probability of shifting to the specific gaming state again is advantageous. Since the state is shifted to a predetermined gaming state lower than the state, the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition by the determination means in the specific gaming state, and all the second information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state. The specific condition is not satisfied by the time the judgment by the judgment means for the special information is completed, and there is a sense of urgency that the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state may reach the predetermined number of times. , Can be given to the player. As described above, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Further, according to this feature, when a specific condition is satisfied, the game state is changed by selectively determining the determination mode between the first determination mode and the second determination mode. Switching the determination mode has a great influence on the advantage for the player. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to make the player have a strong interest in whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic uN group>
Features The uN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic uN1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
It is a means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information is performed. The determination is prioritized over the determination regarding the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the determination mode over the first determination mode. A determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
A game state transition means for shifting the game state, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The game state transition means is
All the second items stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state H4) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode. When the specific condition is satisfied by the time when the judgment by the judgment means regarding the special information of the above is completed (by the time when the aspect H6a during the special 2 residual hold digestion of the high accuracy low support state H6 is completed), the fall lottery is performed. (If won), the first transition means for transitioning to the advantageous gaming state (low accuracy and high support state H5) guaranteed to transition to the specific gaming state again, and
When the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times (ST number of times) without satisfying the specific condition, the probability of shifting to the specific gaming state again is advantageous. A second transition means for transitioning to a predetermined gaming state (low probability low support state H1) lower than the gaming state, and
Equipped with
The predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the control mode is a gaming state in which the first control mode is the first control mode.

According to this feature, it depends on the determination means for all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode. If the specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination is completed, the game is shifted to the advantageous gaming state in which the transition to the specific gaming state is guaranteed again. In addition, when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition, the probability of re-transitioning to the specific gaming state is lower than that of the advantageous gaming state. It is transferred to the state.

Therefore, according to this feature, for the player, all the first stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode. By the time the determination by the determination means for the special information of 2 is completed, it can be expected that the specific condition is satisfied and the game shifts to the advantageous gaming state. That is, according to this feature, in the specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is predetermined by the determination by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is high for the player. It can be expected that the condition is satisfied, but further, the specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination by the determination means for all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means is completed in the specific gaming state. , It can be expected to shift to an advantageous gaming state.

Further, according to this feature, when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition, the probability of shifting to the specific gaming state again is advantageous. Since the state is shifted to a predetermined gaming state lower than the state, the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition by the determination means in the specific gaming state, and all the second information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state. The specific condition is not satisfied by the time the judgment by the judgment means for the special information is completed, and there is a sense of urgency that the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state may reach the predetermined number of times. , Can be given to the player. As described above, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Further, according to this feature, since the control mode is the first control mode in the predetermined gaming state, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, which is advantageous for the player. Low. Therefore, according to this feature, the player feels more tense as to whether or not the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined number without satisfying the specific condition. Can be granted.

<Characteristic uO group>
Features The uO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic uO1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
It is a means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information is performed. The determination is prioritized over the determination regarding the first special information, and the determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination is the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the determination mode over the first determination mode. A determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
A game state transition means for shifting the game state, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The game state transition means is
All the second items stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state H4) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode. When the specific condition is satisfied by the time when the judgment by the judgment means regarding the special information of the above is completed (by the time when the aspect H6a during the special 2 residual hold digestion of the high accuracy low support state H6 is completed), the fall lottery is performed. (If won), the first transition means for transitioning to the advantageous gaming state (low accuracy and high support state H5) guaranteed to transition to the specific gaming state again, and
When the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times (ST number) without satisfying the specific condition, the probability of shifting to the specific gaming state again is advantageous. A second transition means for transitioning to a predetermined gaming state (low probability low support state H1) lower than the gaming state, and
Equipped with
The predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the determination mode is a gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to this feature, it depends on the determination means for all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode. If the specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination is completed, the game is shifted to the advantageous gaming state in which the transition to the specific gaming state is guaranteed again. In addition, when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition, the probability of re-transitioning to the specific gaming state is lower than that of the advantageous gaming state. It is transferred to the state.

Therefore, according to this feature, for the player, all the first stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode. By the time the determination by the determination means for the special information of 2 is completed, it can be expected that the specific condition is satisfied and the game shifts to the advantageous gaming state. That is, according to this feature, in the specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode, the special information is predetermined by the determination by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is high for the player. It can be expected that the condition is satisfied, but further, the specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination by the determination means for all the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means is completed in the specific gaming state. , It can be expected to shift to an advantageous gaming state.

Further, according to this feature, when the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times without satisfying the specific condition, the probability of shifting to the specific gaming state again is advantageous. Since the state is shifted to a predetermined gaming state lower than the state, the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition by the determination means in the specific gaming state, and all the second information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state. The specific condition is not satisfied by the time the judgment by the judgment means for the special information is completed, and there is a sense of urgency that the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state may reach the predetermined number of times. , Can be given to the player. As described above, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Further, according to this feature, in the predetermined gaming state, since the determination mode is the first determination mode, the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to this feature, the player feels a sense of urgency that the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific game state does not reach a predetermined number without satisfying the specific condition. It can be given even more.

<Characteristic uP group>
The feature uP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic uP1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
A means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information. Is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. Also, a determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
A game state transition means for shifting the game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The game state transition means is
In the first specific game state (high accuracy high support state H4), when the specific condition is satisfied (when winning in the fall lottery), the control mode is set for a predetermined period (the period until the next big hit is won). 2 As a first transition means for shifting to a first predetermined gaming state (low accuracy and high support state H5), which is a gaming state maintained in the control mode and has a higher advantage for the player than the first specific gaming state. ,
In the first specific gaming state, when the specific condition is not satisfied (without winning the fall lottery) and the second predetermined condition is satisfied (when the game rounds of the number of continuous time reductions are executed), the first 2 A second transition means for transitioning to a specific game state (high accuracy and low support state H6), and
In the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied at the time of the determination by the determination means for the first special information (when the winning lottery for the special 1 in the left-handed aspect H6b). (When the fall lottery is won), the third transition means for shifting to the second predetermined gaming state (low probability low support state H1), which is less advantageous for the player than the second specific gaming state, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to this feature, even when the same specific condition is satisfied, the function is different between the case where the first specific gaming state is satisfied and the case where the second specific gaming state is satisfied. Specifically, in the first specific gaming state, when a specific condition is satisfied, the transition of the gaming state so as to increase the advantage for the player (from the first specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state). (Transition) is performed, on the other hand, in the second specific game state, if a specific condition is satisfied when the determination means for the first special information is determined, the game is less advantageous to the player. The state transition (transition from the second specific gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state) is performed. That is, according to this feature, the establishment of a specific condition triggers a transition of a gaming state in which the advantage for the player is improved, and also a trigger for the transition of the gaming state in which the advantage for the player is reduced. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the design of the gaming machine can be improved, and the diversification of the playability can be facilitated.

Then, according to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state, the transition of the gaming state is performed so as to increase the advantage for the player. 1 It is possible to expect that a specific condition is satisfied in a specific game state. On the other hand, in the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied when the determination means for the first special information is determined, the transition of the gaming state is performed so as to reduce the advantage for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that he / she does not want the specific condition to be satisfied in the second specific gaming state. That is, it is possible to make the player expect that the specific condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state, and then make the player think that the specific condition is not satisfied after the transition to the second specific gaming state. .. In this way, with the transition of the gaming state, it is possible to make the player feel the opposite emotion to the establishment of the specific condition, so that inflection can be added to the game.

[Characteristic uP2]
Features The gaming machine described in uP1.
The game state transition means is
A means for shifting the gaming state by selectively determining the determination mode between the first determination mode and the second determination mode (fall determination process) when the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by being prepared.

According to this feature, when a specific condition is satisfied, the game state is changed by selectively determining the determination mode between the first determination mode and the second determination mode. Switching the determination mode has a great influence on the advantage for the player. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to make the player have a strong interest in whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic uP3]
The gaming machine according to the feature uP1 or the feature uP2.
The first predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the determination mode is a gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state, the determination mode is the first determination mode, but it is surprising to the player because it is more advantageous to the player than the first specific gaming state. Can be given.

[Characteristic uP4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features uP1 to the feature uP3.
The second predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the control mode is a gaming state in which the first control mode is the first control mode.

According to this feature, in the second predetermined gaming state, since the control mode is the first control mode, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, which is advantageous for the player. Low. Therefore, according to this feature, in the second specific gaming state, isn't the specific condition that triggers the transition to the second predetermined gaming state satisfied when the determination means for the first special information is determined? It is possible to give a sense of urgency to the player.

[Characteristic uP5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features uP1 to the feature uP4.
The second predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the determination mode is a gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to this feature, in the second predetermined gaming state, since the determination mode is the first determination mode, the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to this feature, in the second specific gaming state, isn't the specific condition that triggers the transition to the second predetermined gaming state satisfied when the determination means for the first special information is determined? It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency.

[Characteristic uP6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features uP1 to the feature uP5.
The second specific gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the determination mode is a gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode.

According to this feature, in the second specific gaming state, since the determination mode is the second determination mode, it is highly advantageous for the player. Therefore, according to this feature, it is not desirable for the player to shift the gaming state from the second specific gaming state, which is highly advantageous. Therefore, in the second specific gaming state, the determination means for the first special information is used. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at the time of determination.

<Characteristic uQ group>
Features The uQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic uQ1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
A means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information. Is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. Also, a determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
A game state transition means for shifting the game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The game state transition means is
In the first specific game state (high accuracy high support state H4), when the specific condition is satisfied (when winning in the fall lottery), the control mode is set for a predetermined period (the period until the next big hit is won). 2 As a first transition means for shifting to a first predetermined gaming state (low accuracy and high support state H5), which is a gaming state maintained in the control mode and has a higher advantage for the player than the first specific gaming state. ,
In the first specific gaming state, when the specific condition is not satisfied (without winning the fall lottery) and the second predetermined condition is satisfied (when the game rounds of the number of continuous time reductions are executed), the first 2 A second transition means for transitioning to a specific game state (high accuracy and low support state H6), and
In the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied at the time of the determination by the determination means regarding the first special information (when the winning lottery for the special 1 in the left-handed aspect H6b). (When the fall lottery is won), the third transition means for shifting to the second predetermined gaming state (low probability low support state H1), which is less advantageous for the player than the second specific gaming state, and
Equipped with
The game state transition means is
A means for shifting the gaming state by selectively determining the determination mode between the first determination mode and the second determination mode (fall determination process) when the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by being prepared.

According to this feature, even when the same specific condition is satisfied, the function is different between the case where the first specific gaming state is satisfied and the case where the second specific gaming state is satisfied. Specifically, in the first specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the transition of the gaming state is performed so as to increase the advantage for the player, while in the second specific gaming state, the second is performed. When a specific condition is satisfied when the determination means for the special information of 1 is determined, the game state is changed so as to reduce the advantage for the player. That is, according to this feature, the establishment of a specific condition triggers a transition of a gaming state in which the advantage for the player is improved, and also a trigger for the transition of the gaming state in which the advantage for the player is reduced. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the design of the gaming machine can be improved, and the diversification of the playability can be facilitated.

Then, according to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state, the transition of the gaming state is performed so as to increase the advantage for the player. 1 It is possible to expect that a specific condition is satisfied in a specific game state. On the other hand, in the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied when the determination means for the first special information is determined, the transition of the gaming state is performed so as to reduce the advantage for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that he / she does not want the specific condition to be satisfied in the second specific gaming state. That is, since it is possible to make the player have the opposite emotions according to the type of the game state at the timing when the specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to add intonation to the game.

Further, according to this feature, when a specific condition is satisfied, the game state is changed by selectively determining the determination mode between the first determination mode and the second determination mode. Switching the determination mode has a great influence on the advantage for the player. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to make the player have a strong interest in whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic uR group>
Features The uR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic uR1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
A means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information. Is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. Also, a determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
A game state transition means for shifting the game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The game state transition means is
In the first specific game state (high accuracy high support state H4), when the specific condition is satisfied (when winning in the fall lottery), the control mode is set for a predetermined period (the period until the next big hit is won). 2 As a first transition means for shifting to a first predetermined gaming state (low accuracy and high support state H5), which is a gaming state maintained in the control mode and has a higher advantage for the player than the first specific gaming state. ,
In the first specific gaming state, when the specific condition is not satisfied (without winning the fall lottery) and the second predetermined condition is satisfied (when the game rounds of the number of continuous time reductions are executed), the first 2 A second transition means for transitioning to a specific game state (high accuracy and low support state H6), and
In the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied at the time of the determination by the determination means regarding the first special information (when the winning lottery for the special 1 in the left-handed aspect H6b). (When the fall lottery is won), the third transition means for shifting to the second predetermined gaming state (low probability low support state H1), which is less advantageous for the player than the second specific gaming state, and
Equipped with
The first predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the determination mode is a gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to this feature, even when the same specific condition is satisfied, the function is different between the case where the first specific gaming state is satisfied and the case where the second specific gaming state is satisfied. Specifically, in the first specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the transition of the gaming state is performed so as to increase the advantage for the player, while in the second specific gaming state, the second is performed. When a specific condition is satisfied when the determination means for the special information of 1 is determined, the game state is changed so as to reduce the advantage for the player. That is, according to this feature, the establishment of a specific condition triggers a transition of a gaming state in which the advantage for the player is improved, and also a trigger for the transition of the gaming state in which the advantage for the player is reduced. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the design of the gaming machine can be improved, and the diversification of the playability can be facilitated.

Then, according to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state, the transition of the gaming state is performed so as to increase the advantage for the player. 1 It is possible to expect that a specific condition is satisfied in a specific game state. On the other hand, in the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied when the determination means for the first special information is determined, the transition of the gaming state is performed so as to reduce the advantage for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that he / she does not want the specific condition to be satisfied in the second specific gaming state. That is, since it is possible to make the player have the opposite emotions according to the type of the game state at the timing when the specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to add intonation to the game.

Further, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state, the determination mode is the first determination mode, but since it is more advantageous for the player than the first specific gaming state, it is suitable for the player. Surprisingness can be given.

<Characteristic uS group>
Features The uS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic uS1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
A means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information. Is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. Also, a determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
A game state transition means for shifting the game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The game state transition means is
In the first specific game state (high accuracy high support state H4), when the specific condition is satisfied (when winning in the fall lottery), the control mode is set for a predetermined period (the period until the next big hit is won). 2 As a first transition means for shifting to a first predetermined gaming state (low accuracy and high support state H5), which is a gaming state maintained in the control mode and has a higher advantage for the player than the first specific gaming state. ,
In the first specific gaming state, when the specific condition is not satisfied (without winning the fall lottery) and the second predetermined condition is satisfied (when the game rounds of the number of continuous time reductions are executed), the first 2 A second transition means for transitioning to a specific game state (high accuracy and low support state H6), and
In the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied at the time of the determination by the determination means for the first special information (when the winning lottery for the special 1 in the left-handed aspect H6b). (When the fall lottery is won), the third transition means for shifting to the second predetermined gaming state (low probability low support state H1), which is less advantageous for the player than the second specific gaming state, and
Equipped with
The second predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the control mode is a gaming state in which the first control mode is the first control mode.

According to this feature, even when the same specific condition is satisfied, the function is different between the case where the first specific gaming state is satisfied and the case where the second specific gaming state is satisfied. Specifically, in the first specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the transition of the gaming state is performed so as to increase the advantage for the player, while in the second specific gaming state, the second is performed. When a specific condition is satisfied when the determination means for the special information of 1 is determined, the game state is changed so as to reduce the advantage for the player. That is, according to this feature, the establishment of a specific condition triggers a transition of a gaming state in which the advantage for the player is improved, and also a trigger for the transition of the gaming state in which the advantage for the player is reduced. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the design of the gaming machine can be improved, and the diversification of the playability can be facilitated.

Then, according to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state, the transition of the gaming state is performed so as to increase the advantage for the player. 1 It is possible to expect that a specific condition is satisfied in a specific game state. On the other hand, in the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied when the determination means for the first special information is determined, the transition of the gaming state is performed so as to reduce the advantage for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that he / she does not want the specific condition to be satisfied in the second specific gaming state. That is, since it is possible to make the player have the opposite emotions according to the type of the game state at the timing when the specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to add intonation to the game.

Further, according to this feature, in the second predetermined gaming state, since the control mode is the first control mode, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entry means, which is advantageous for the player. The sex is low. Therefore, according to this feature, in the second specific gaming state, isn't the specific condition that triggers the transition to the second predetermined gaming state satisfied when the determination means for the first special information is determined? It is possible to give a sense of urgency to the player.

<Characteristic uT group>
The feature uT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic uT1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
A means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information. Is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. Also, a determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
A game state transition means for shifting the game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The game state transition means is
In the first specific game state (high accuracy high support state H4), when the specific condition is satisfied (when winning in the fall lottery), the control mode is set for a predetermined period (the period until the next big hit is won). 2 As a first transition means for shifting to a first predetermined gaming state (low accuracy and high support state H5), which is a gaming state maintained in the control mode and has a higher advantage for the player than the first specific gaming state. ,
In the first specific gaming state, when the specific condition is not satisfied (without winning the fall lottery) and the second predetermined condition is satisfied (when the game rounds of the number of continuous time reductions are executed), the first 2 A second transition means for transitioning to a specific game state (high accuracy and low support state H6), and
In the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied at the time of the determination by the determination means regarding the first special information (when the winning lottery for the special 1 in the left-handed aspect H6b). (When the fall lottery is won), the third transition means for shifting to the second predetermined gaming state (low probability low support state H1), which is less advantageous for the player than the second specific gaming state, and
Equipped with
The second predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the determination mode is a gaming state in which the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to this feature, even when the same specific condition is satisfied, the function is different between the case where the first specific gaming state is satisfied and the case where the second specific gaming state is satisfied. Specifically, in the first specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the transition of the gaming state is performed so as to increase the advantage for the player, while in the second specific gaming state, the second is performed. When a specific condition is satisfied when the determination means for the special information of 1 is determined, the game state is changed so as to reduce the advantage for the player. That is, according to this feature, the establishment of a specific condition triggers a transition of a gaming state in which the advantage for the player is improved, and also a trigger for the transition of the gaming state in which the advantage for the player is reduced. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the design of the gaming machine can be improved, and the diversification of the playability can be facilitated.

Then, according to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state, the transition of the gaming state is performed so as to increase the advantage for the player. 1 It is possible to expect that a specific condition is satisfied in a specific game state. On the other hand, in the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied when the determination means for the first special information is determined, the transition of the gaming state is performed so as to reduce the advantage for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that he / she does not want the specific condition to be satisfied in the second specific gaming state. That is, since it is possible to make the player have the opposite emotions according to the type of the game state at the timing when the specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to add intonation to the game.

Further, according to this feature, in the second predetermined gaming state, since the determination mode is the first determination mode, the advantage for the player is low. Therefore, according to this feature, in the second specific gaming state, isn't the specific condition that triggers the transition to the second predetermined gaming state satisfied when the determination means for the first special information is determined? It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency.

<Characteristic uU group>
Features The uU group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic uU1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
A means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information. Is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. Also, a determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
A game state transition means for shifting the game state specified by the determination mode and the control mode, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The game state transition means is
In the first specific game state (high accuracy high support state H4), when the specific condition is satisfied (when winning in the fall lottery), the control mode is set for a predetermined period (the period until the next big hit is won). 2 As a first transition means for shifting to a first predetermined gaming state (low accuracy and high support state H5), which is a gaming state maintained in the control mode and has a higher advantage for the player than the first specific gaming state. ,
In the first specific gaming state, when the specific condition is not satisfied (without winning the fall lottery) and the second predetermined condition is satisfied (when the game rounds of the number of continuous time reductions are executed), the first 2 A second transition means for transitioning to a specific game state (high accuracy and low support state H6), and
In the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied at the time of the determination by the determination means for the first special information (when the winning lottery for the special 1 in the left-handed aspect H6b). (When the fall lottery is won), the third transition means for shifting to the second predetermined gaming state (low probability low support state H1), which is less advantageous for the player than the second specific gaming state, and
Equipped with
The second specific gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the determination mode is a gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode.

According to this feature, even when the same specific condition is satisfied, the function is different between the case where the first specific gaming state is satisfied and the case where the second specific gaming state is satisfied. Specifically, in the first specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the transition of the gaming state is performed so as to increase the advantage for the player, while in the second specific gaming state, the second is performed. When a specific condition is satisfied when the determination means for the special information of 1 is determined, the game state is changed so as to reduce the advantage for the player. That is, according to this feature, the establishment of a specific condition triggers a transition of a gaming state in which the advantage for the player is improved, and also a trigger for the transition of the gaming state in which the advantage for the player is reduced. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the design of the gaming machine can be improved, and the diversification of the playability can be facilitated.

Then, according to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state, the transition of the gaming state is performed so as to increase the advantage for the player. 1 It is possible to expect that a specific condition is satisfied in a specific game state. On the other hand, in the second specific gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied when the determination means for the first special information is determined, the transition of the gaming state is performed so as to reduce the advantage for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that he / she does not want the specific condition to be satisfied in the second specific gaming state. That is, since it is possible to make the player have the opposite emotions according to the type of the game state at the timing when the specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to add intonation to the game.

Further, according to this feature, in the second specific gaming state, the determination mode is the second determination mode, which is highly advantageous for the player. Therefore, according to this feature, it is not desirable for the player to shift the gaming state from the second specific gaming state, which is highly advantageous. Therefore, in the second specific gaming state, the determination means for the first special information is used. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at the time of determination.

<Characteristic uIA group>
Features The uIA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, variants, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic uIA1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
A means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information. Is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. Also, a determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state. The control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of times of execution reaches the number of time reduction continuations) is established.
The first predetermined gaming state (high) after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made to shift to the first control mode. If a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is satisfied by the time it ends in the low probability support state), the player shifts to the specific game state again with a specific probability (100% probability again to the specific game state). (Migrate) The first re-migration means and
After the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) If this is true, the player will re-enter the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability (the jackpot will be won in the low-probability low-support state and will be distributed to the probabilistic jackpot again). (Make) the second re-migration means,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to this feature, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first. It shifts to the control mode. Then, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is specified by the time it ends in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition to the first control mode is made. When the condition is satisfied, the player is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a specific probability. On the other hand, if the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific probability. It will be transferred to the specific gaming state again with a lower probability. Therefore, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state shifted from the specific gaming state, the determination means for the player regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is used. By the time the determination is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, it can be expected that the specific condition will be satisfied. That is, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It can be expected that the special information satisfies the first predetermined game state, but further, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made in the first predetermined gaming state. By the time it ends, it can be expected that certain conditions will be met.

Further, according to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. Since the game is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means in the first predetermined gaming state, and the specific condition is satisfied. There is no sense of urgency for the player as to whether the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state ends in the first predetermined gaming state. Can be made. As described above, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

[Characteristic uIA2]
Features The gaming machine described in uIA1
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific probability is a 100% probability.

According to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is specified by the end in the first predetermined gaming state. When the condition is satisfied, there is a 100% chance that the game will be re-entered to the specific gaming state. That is, when the specific condition is satisfied, it is guaranteed to shift to the specific gaming state again. Therefore, it is possible to give a greater sense of expectation to the player.

[Characteristic uIA3]
The gaming machine according to the feature uIA1 or the feature uIA2.
The predetermined condition is a gaming machine characterized in that the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times.

According to this feature, in the specific gaming state where the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the number of times the game is executed after the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. Until then, the control mode is maintained in the second control mode. In the state where the control mode is the second control mode, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the state where the control mode is the first control mode, and it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls held. , The determination by the determination means for the second special information acquired by the entry of the game ball into the second entry means can be executed with high frequency. Therefore, in the period until the number of times the game is executed in the specific game state reaches a predetermined number of times, the second special information acquired when the game ball enters the second ball entry means is the first. It is possible to make the player more expect to meet the predetermined condition.

[Characteristic uIA4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature uIA1 to the feature uIA3.
A means capable of displaying a first image (a first specific background image corresponding to a chance zone in the modification 12) as a background image in the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state H4).
The period (special 2 remaining) after the transition from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state (high accuracy low support state H6) until the determination by the determination means for the second special information is completed. A means capable of displaying a second image (a third specific background image corresponding to the final chance zone in the modification 12) different from the first image as a background image in the pending digestion H6a).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to this feature, the background image displayed in the specific gaming state and after the transition from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state until the determination by the determination means for the second special information is completed. It will be different from the background image displayed during the period. Therefore, the player can be made to clearly distinguish and recognize both states, and can pay attention to the change in the state of the game.

[Characteristic uIA5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature uIA1 to the feature uIA4.
When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state H4) (when the fall is won in the fall lottery), an effect suggesting that an advantageous event has occurred (safety in the modified example 12). A gaming machine characterized by having a means for executing a mode entry effect).

In a normal gaming machine, it is not preferable for the player that a specific condition is satisfied (winning a fall in a fall lottery). However, in the gaming machine of this feature, unlike a normal gaming machine, it is preferable for the player that the specific conditions are satisfied in the above situation.

According to this feature, when a specific condition is satisfied in a specific gaming state, an effect suggesting that an advantageous event has occurred is executed, so that a clearly advantageous event has occurred for the player. Can be recognized.

[Characteristic uIA6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features uIA1 to the feature uIA5.
After the predetermined condition is satisfied and the state shifts to the first predetermined gaming state, the determination by the determination means for the second special information ends in the first predetermined gaming state (high accuracy low support state H6). When the specific condition is satisfied (when the fall is won in the fall lottery), a means for executing an effect suggesting that an advantageous event has occurred (advantageous event occurrence alternative effect in the modification 12). A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In a normal gaming machine, it is not preferable for the player that a specific condition is satisfied (winning a fall in a fall lottery). However, in the gaming machine of this feature, unlike a normal gaming machine, it is preferable for the player that the specific conditions are satisfied in the above situation.

According to this feature, after the predetermined condition is satisfied and the transition to the first predetermined gaming state is performed, the specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. In this case, since the effect suggesting that an advantageous event has occurred is executed, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the advantageous event has occurred.

[Characteristic uIA7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features uIA1 to the feature uIA6.
The game times are composed of a variable display period in which the predetermined symbol is variablely displayed, and a stop display period in which the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the result of the determination.
The control mode transition means is a means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode (time t5 in FIG. 489) at the start of the variation display period in the game times in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with (control).

According to this feature, the control mode is shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode at the start of the variation display period in the game times in which the predetermined conditions are satisfied, so that the game times in which the predetermined conditions are satisfied are next. It is possible to prevent the auxiliary means from transitioning to the second state and the game ball entering the second entry means during the execution of the game round. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the failure of the game characteristics of the gaming machine due to the gaming ball entering the second entry means during the execution of the next gaming round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. It becomes.

[Characteristic uIA8]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature uIA1 to the feature uIA7.
The game round is composed of a variable display period in which the predetermined symbol is variablely displayed, and a stop display period in which the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the result of the determination.
The control mode transition means is a means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode (time t9 in FIG. 490) at the end of the variation display period in the game times in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with (control).

According to this feature, at the end of the variation display period in the game times in which the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the control mode is shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode, so that the game is stopped in the game times in which the predetermined conditions are satisfied. By setting the display period to a predetermined length or longer, the auxiliary means transitions to the second state during the execution of the next game round of the game round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the game ball enters the second game. It is possible to avoid entering the ball means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the failure of the game characteristics of the gaming machine due to the gaming ball entering the second entry means during the execution of the next gaming round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. It becomes.

[Characteristic uIA9]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature uIA1 to the feature uIA8.
The game round is composed of a variable display period in which the predetermined symbol is variablely displayed, and a stop display period in which the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the result of the determination.
The control mode transition means is a means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode (time t12 in FIG. 491) when the stop display period elapses in a game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with (control).

According to this feature, the control mode is shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode when the stop display period has elapsed in the game times in which the predetermined conditions are satisfied, so that the game times in which the predetermined conditions are satisfied are next. It is possible to shift the auxiliary means to the second state and allow the game ball to enter the second entry means during the execution of the game round. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a new game property in which the game ball is entered into the second ball entry means during the execution of the next game round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied.

[Characteristic uIA10]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features uIA1 to the feature uIA9.
A game characterized by comprising means for executing an effect (through passage promotion effect in the modification 15) for urging a player to pass a game ball through a predetermined entry area (through gate 35) in a predetermined situation. Machine.

According to this feature, in a predetermined situation, an effect of urging the player to pass the game ball through the predetermined entry area is executed, so that the player is given a new game machine different from the normal game machine. It is possible to recognize how to play along with the game characteristics of.

[Characteristic uIA11]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature uIA1 to the feature uIA10.
An effect suggesting that an advantageous state for the player is started when the game ball passes through a predetermined entry area (through gate 35) in a predetermined situation (advantageous state start effect in the modified example 15). A gaming machine characterized by having a means of execution.

According to this feature, in a predetermined situation, when the game ball passes through a predetermined entry area, an effect suggesting that a state advantageous to the player is started is executed, so that the player can play the game. When the ball passes through a predetermined entry area, it is possible to make a player different from a normal gaming machine recognize that an advantageous state is started.

[Characteristic uIA12]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature uIA1 to the feature uIA11.
In the first predetermined gaming state (high accuracy and low support state H6), when the state of the auxiliary means transitions to the second state, the game is to allow the gaming ball to enter the second entering means. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means for executing an effect that urges a person (special 2 ball entry promotion effect in the modified example 15).

According to this feature, when the state of the auxiliary means transitions to the second state in the first predetermined gaming state, an effect of urging the player to enter the game ball into the second entry means is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware of the game method according to the new game characteristics of the main game machine, which is different from the normal game machine.

[Characteristic uIA13]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature uIA1 to the feature uIA12.
When the number of stored second special information reaches a predetermined number (4) in the first predetermined gaming state (high accuracy low support state H6), the number of stored second special information is the predetermined number. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for displaying information corresponding to the fact (advantage determination effect in the modified example 15).

According to this feature, when the number of stored second special information reaches a predetermined number in the first predetermined gaming state, the information corresponding to the predetermined number of stored second special information is displayed. Therefore, unlike a normal gaming machine, it is possible to make the player recognize that the number of stored second special information is a predetermined number in the first predetermined gaming state, which has a special meaning. It becomes.

[Characteristic uIA14]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature uIA1 to the feature uIA13.
A gaming machine characterized in that it does not have a means for holding and storing a predetermined lottery (general drawing lottery) that triggers the transition of the auxiliary means from the first state to the second state.

According to this feature, since there is no means for holding and storing a predetermined lottery (general drawing lottery) that triggers the transition of the auxiliary means from the first state to the second state, the reserved predetermined lottery is held. It is possible to prevent the player from being automatically executed at an unintended timing. Therefore, by adjusting the timing at which the game ball enters the ball-entry means that triggers the transition of the state of the auxiliary means, a new game property of adjusting the timing at which the auxiliary means transitions to the second state is achieved. Can be provided to the person.

[Characteristic uIA15]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature uIA1 to the feature uIA14.
When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific gaming state (high accuracy high support state H4) (when the fall is won in the fall lottery), the determination mode is the first determination mode, the second predetermined gaming state ( Means to shift to low accuracy and high support state H5),
A predetermined entry port (high probability transition winning opening 34e in the modified example 18) capable of entering a game ball in the second predetermined gaming state, and
A means for shifting the determination mode to the second determination mode when the game ball enters the predetermined entry port.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to this feature, when a specific condition is satisfied in a specific gaming state (when a fall is won in a fall lottery), a second predetermined gaming state (low probability high support state H5) in which the determination mode is the first determination mode. ), But if the game ball can be inserted into the predetermined entry slot in the second predetermined gaming state, the determination mode will shift to the second determination mode again. Here, when a configuration is adopted in which the second control mode continues until the next big hit winning when the time saving grant is won in the second predetermined gaming state, the time saving grant is won and predetermined in the second predetermined gaming state. If the game ball can be inserted into the entrance, the second control mode continues until the next big hit winning, and the determination mode is the second determination mode. This gaming state is a very advantageous state for the player. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to provide the player with a new game in which the game ball is inserted into the predetermined ball opening in the second predetermined game state and the game is shifted to a more advantageous game state.

<Characteristic uIB group>
Features The uIB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants 12.

[Characteristic uIB1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
A means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information. Is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. Also, a determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state. The control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of times of execution reaches the number of time reduction continuations) is established.
The first predetermined gaming state (high) after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made to shift to the first control mode. If a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is satisfied by the time it ends in the low probability support state), the player shifts to the specific game state again with a specific probability (100% probability again to the specific game state). (Migrate) The first re-migration means and
After the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) When (that) is established, the player shifts to the specific gaming state again with a probability lower than the specific probability (the jackpot is won in the low probability low support state and the probability is distributed to the probability change jackpot again. (Make) the second re-migration means,
And more
A means capable of displaying a first image (a first specific background image corresponding to a chance zone in the modification 12) as a background image in the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state H4).
The period (special 2 remaining) after the transition from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state (high accuracy low support state H6) until the determination by the determination means for the second special information is completed. A means capable of displaying a second image (a third specific background image corresponding to the final chance zone in the modification 12) different from the first image as a background image in the pending digestion H6a).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to this feature, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first. It shifts to the control mode. Then, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is specified by the time it ends in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition to the first control mode is made. When the condition is satisfied, the player is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a specific probability. On the other hand, if the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific probability. It will be transferred to the specific gaming state again with a lower probability. Therefore, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state shifted from the specific gaming state, the determination means for the player regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is used. By the time the determination is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, it can be expected that the specific condition will be satisfied. That is, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It can be expected that the special information satisfies the first predetermined game state, but further, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made in the first predetermined gaming state. By the time it ends, it can be expected that certain conditions will be met.

Further, according to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. Since the game is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means in the first predetermined gaming state, and the specific condition is satisfied. There is no sense of urgency for the player as to whether the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state ends in the first predetermined gaming state. Can be made. As described above, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Further, according to this feature, the background image displayed in the specific gaming state and the determination by the determination means for the second special information after the transition from the specific gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state are completed. It will be different from the background image displayed in the period up to. Therefore, the player can be made to clearly distinguish and recognize both states, and can pay attention to the change in the state of the game.

<Characteristic uIC group>
Features The uIC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants 12.

[Characteristic uIC1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
A means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information. Is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. Also, a determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state. The control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of times of execution reaches the number of time reduction continuations) is established.
The first predetermined gaming state (high) after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made to shift to the first control mode. If a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is satisfied by the time it ends in the low probability support state), the player shifts to the specific game state again with a specific probability (100% probability again to the specific game state). (Migrate) The first re-migration means and
After the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) If this is true, the player will re-enter the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability (the jackpot will be won in the low-probability low-support state and will be distributed to the probabilistic jackpot again). (Make) the second re-migration means and
And more
When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state H4) (when the fall is won in the fall lottery), an effect suggesting that an advantageous event has occurred (safety in the modified example 12). A gaming machine characterized by having a means for executing a mode entry effect).

According to this feature, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first. It shifts to the control mode. Then, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is specified by the time it ends in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition to the first control mode is made. When the condition is satisfied, the player is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a specific probability. On the other hand, if the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific probability. It will be transferred to the specific gaming state again with a lower probability. Therefore, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state shifted from the specific gaming state, the determination means for the player regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is used. By the time the determination is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, it can be expected that the specific condition will be satisfied. That is, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It can be expected that the special information satisfies the first predetermined game state, but further, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made in the first predetermined gaming state. By the time it ends, it can be expected that certain conditions will be met.

Further, according to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. Since the game is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means in the first predetermined gaming state, and the specific condition is satisfied. There is no sense of urgency for the player as to whether the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state ends in the first predetermined gaming state. Can be made. As described above, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Further, in a normal gaming machine, it is not preferable for the player that a specific condition is satisfied (winning a fall in a fall lottery). However, in the gaming machine of this feature, unlike a normal gaming machine, it is preferable for the player that the specific conditions are satisfied in the above situation.

According to this feature, when a specific condition is satisfied in a specific gaming state, an effect suggesting that an advantageous event has occurred is executed, so that a clearly advantageous event has occurred for the player. Can be recognized.

<Characteristic uID group>
The feature uID group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants 12.

[Feature uID1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
A means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information. Is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. Also, a determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state. The control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of times of execution reaches the number of time reduction continuations) is established.
The first predetermined gaming state (high) after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made to shift to the first control mode. If a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is satisfied by the time it ends in the low probability support state), the player shifts to the specific game state again with a specific probability (100% probability again to the specific game state). (Migrate) The first re-migration means and
After the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) If this is true, the player will re-enter the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability (the jackpot will be won in the low-probability low-support state and will be distributed to the probabilistic jackpot again). (Make) the second re-migration means and
And more
After the predetermined condition is satisfied and the state shifts to the first predetermined gaming state, the determination by the determination means for the second special information ends in the first predetermined gaming state (high accuracy low support state H6). When the specific condition is satisfied (when the fall is won in the fall lottery), a means for executing an effect suggesting that an advantageous event has occurred (advantageous event occurrence alternative effect in the modification 12). A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to this feature, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first. It shifts to the control mode. Then, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is specified by the time it ends in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition to the first control mode is made. When the condition is satisfied, the player is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a specific probability. On the other hand, if the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific probability. It will be transferred to the specific gaming state again with a lower probability. Therefore, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state shifted from the specific gaming state, the determination means for the player regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is used. By the time the determination is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, it can be expected that the specific condition will be satisfied. That is, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It can be expected that the special information satisfies the first predetermined game state, but further, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made in the first predetermined gaming state. By the time it ends, it can be expected that certain conditions will be met.

Further, according to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. Since the game is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means in the first predetermined gaming state, and the specific condition is satisfied. There is no sense of urgency for the player as to whether the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state ends in the first predetermined gaming state. Can be made. As described above, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Further, in a normal gaming machine, it is not preferable for the player that a specific condition is satisfied (winning a fall in a fall lottery). However, in the gaming machine of this feature, unlike a normal gaming machine, it is preferable for the player that the specific conditions are satisfied in the above situation.

According to this feature, after the predetermined condition is satisfied and the transition to the first predetermined gaming state is performed, the specific condition is satisfied by the time the determination by the determination means for the second special information is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. In this case, since the effect suggesting that an advantageous event has occurred is executed, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the advantageous event has occurred.

<Characteristic uIE group>
Features The uIE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, variants, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants 13.

[Characteristic uIE1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
A means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information. Is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. Also, a determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state. The control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of times of execution reaches the number of time reduction continuations) is established.
The first predetermined gaming state (high) after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made to shift to the first control mode. If a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is satisfied by the time it ends in the low probability support state), the player shifts to the specific game state again with a specific probability (100% probability again to the specific game state). (Migrate) The first re-migration means and
After the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) If this is true, the player will re-enter the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability (the jackpot will be won in the low-probability low-support state and will be distributed to the probabilistic jackpot again). (Make) the second re-migration means,
Equipped with
The game round is composed of a variable display period in which the predetermined symbol is variablely displayed, and a stop display period in which the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the result of the determination.
The control mode transition means is a means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode (time t5 in FIG. 489) at the start of the variation display period in the game times in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with (control).

According to this feature, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first. It shifts to the control mode. Then, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is specified by the time it ends in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition to the first control mode is made. When the condition is satisfied, the player is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a specific probability. On the other hand, if the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific probability. It will be transferred to the specific gaming state again with a lower probability. Therefore, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state shifted from the specific gaming state, the determination means for the player regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is used. By the time the determination is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, it can be expected that the specific condition will be satisfied. That is, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It can be expected that the special information satisfies the first predetermined game state, but further, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made in the first predetermined gaming state. By the time it ends, it can be expected that certain conditions will be met.

Further, according to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. Since the game is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means in the first predetermined gaming state, and the specific condition is satisfied. There is no sense of urgency for the player as to whether the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state ends in the first predetermined gaming state. Can be made. As described above, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Further, according to this feature, the control mode is shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode at the start of the variation display period in the game times in which the predetermined conditions are satisfied, so that the game times in which the predetermined conditions are satisfied. It is possible to prevent the auxiliary means from transitioning to the second state and the game ball entering the second ball entry means during the execution of the next game round. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the failure of the game characteristics of the gaming machine due to the gaming ball entering the second entry means during the execution of the next gaming round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. It becomes.

<Characteristic uIF group>
Features The uIF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants 14.

[Characteristic uIF1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
A means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information. Is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. Also, a determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state. The control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of times of execution reaches the number of time reduction continuations) is established.
The first predetermined gaming state (high) after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made to shift to the first control mode. If a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is satisfied by the time it ends in the low probability support state), the player shifts to the specific game state again with a specific probability (100% probability again to the specific game state). (Migrate) The first re-migration means and
After the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) When (that) is established, the player shifts to the specific gaming state again with a probability lower than the specific probability (the jackpot is won in the low probability low support state and the probability is distributed to the probability change jackpot again. (Make) the second re-migration means,
Equipped with
The game round is composed of a variable display period in which the predetermined symbol is variablely displayed, and a stop display period in which the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the result of the determination.
The control mode transition means is a means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode (time t9 in FIG. 490) at the end of the variation display period in the game times in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with (control).

According to this feature, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first. It shifts to the control mode. Then, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is specified by the time it ends in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition to the first control mode is made. When the condition is satisfied, the player is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a specific probability. On the other hand, if the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific probability. It will be transferred to the specific gaming state again with a lower probability. Therefore, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state shifted from the specific gaming state, the determination means for the player regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is used. By the time the determination is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, it can be expected that the specific condition will be satisfied. That is, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It can be expected that the special information satisfies the first predetermined game state, but further, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made in the first predetermined gaming state. By the time it ends, it can be expected that certain conditions will be met.

Further, according to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. Since the game is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means in the first predetermined gaming state, and the specific condition is satisfied. There is no sense of urgency for the player as to whether the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state ends in the first predetermined gaming state. Can be made. As described above, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Further, according to this feature, at the end of the variation display period in the game times in which the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the control mode is shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode, so that the game times in which the predetermined conditions are satisfied. By setting the stop display period in the above to a predetermined length or longer, the auxiliary means transitions to the second state during the execution of the next game round of the game round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the game ball becomes the second game round. It is possible to avoid entering the ball into the ball entry means of. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the failure of the game characteristics of the gaming machine due to the gaming ball entering the second entry means during the execution of the next gaming round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. It becomes.

<Characteristic uIG group>
Features The uIG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants 15.

[Characteristic uIG1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
A means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information. Is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. Also, a determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state. The control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of times of execution reaches the number of time reduction continuations) is established.
The first predetermined gaming state (high) after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made to shift to the first control mode. If a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is satisfied by the time it ends in the low probability support state), the player shifts to the specific game state again with a specific probability (100% probability again to the specific game state). (Migrate) The first re-migration means and
After the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) If this is true, the player will re-enter the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability (the jackpot will be won in the low-probability low-support state and will be distributed to the probabilistic jackpot again). (Make) the second re-migration means,
Equipped with
The game times are composed of a variable display period in which the predetermined symbol is variablely displayed, and a stop display period in which the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the result of the determination.
The control mode transition means is a means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode (time t12 in FIG. 491) when the stop display period elapses in a game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with (control).

According to this feature, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first. It shifts to the control mode. Then, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is specified by the time it ends in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition to the first control mode is made. When the condition is satisfied, the player is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a specific probability. On the other hand, if the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific probability. It will be transferred to the specific gaming state again with a lower probability. Therefore, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state shifted from the specific gaming state, the determination means for the player regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is used. By the time the determination is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, it can be expected that the specific condition will be satisfied. That is, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It can be expected that the special information satisfies the first predetermined game state, but further, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made in the first predetermined gaming state. By the time it ends, it can be expected that certain conditions will be met.

Further, according to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. Since the game is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means in the first predetermined gaming state, and the specific condition is satisfied. There is no sense of urgency for the player as to whether the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state ends in the first predetermined gaming state. Can be made. As described above, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Further, according to this feature, the control mode is shifted from the second control mode to the first control mode when the stop display period has elapsed in the game times in which the predetermined conditions are satisfied, so that the game times in which the predetermined conditions are satisfied. It is possible to shift the auxiliary means to the second state and allow the game ball to enter the second ball entry means during the execution of the next game round. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a new game property in which the game ball is entered into the second ball entry means during the execution of the next game round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied.

<Characteristic uIH group>
Features The uIH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants 15.

[Characteristic uIH1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
A means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information. Is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. Also, a determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state. The control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of times of execution reaches the number of time reduction continuations) is established.
The first predetermined gaming state (high) after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made to shift to the first control mode. If a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is satisfied by the time it ends in the low probability support state), the player shifts to the specific game state again with a specific probability (100% probability again to the specific game state). (Migrate) The first re-migration means and
After the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) If this is true, the player will re-enter the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability (the jackpot will be won in the low-probability low-support state and will be distributed to the probabilistic jackpot again). (Make) the second re-migration means,
And more
A game characterized by comprising means for executing an effect (through passage promotion effect in the modification 15) for urging a player to pass a game ball through a predetermined entry area (through gate 35) in a predetermined situation. Machine.

According to this feature, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first. It shifts to the control mode. Then, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is specified by the time it ends in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition to the first control mode is made. When the condition is satisfied, the player is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a specific probability. On the other hand, if the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific probability. It will be transferred to the specific gaming state again with a lower probability. Therefore, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state shifted from the specific gaming state, the determination means for the player regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is used. By the time the determination is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, it can be expected that the specific condition will be satisfied. That is, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It can be expected that the special information satisfies the first predetermined game state, but further, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made in the first predetermined gaming state. By the time it ends, it can be expected that certain conditions will be met.

Further, according to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. Since the game is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means in the first predetermined gaming state, and the specific condition is satisfied. There is no sense of urgency for the player as to whether the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state ends in the first predetermined gaming state. Can be made. As described above, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Further, according to this feature, in a predetermined situation, an effect of urging the player to pass the game ball through the predetermined entry area is executed, so that the player is given a game machine different from the normal game machine. It is possible to recognize how to play along with the new game characteristics of.

<Characteristic uII group>
Features The uII group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants 15.

[Characteristic uII1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
A means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information. Is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. Also, a determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state. The control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of times of execution reaches the number of time reduction continuations) is established.
The first predetermined gaming state (high) after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made to shift to the first control mode. If a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is satisfied by the time it ends in the low probability support state), the player shifts to the specific game state again with a specific probability (100% probability again to the specific game state). (Migrate) The first re-migration means and
After the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) When (that) is established, the player shifts to the specific gaming state again with a probability lower than the specific probability (the jackpot is won in the low probability low support state and the probability is distributed to the probability change jackpot again. (Make) the second re-migration means,
And more
An effect suggesting that an advantageous state for the player is started when the game ball passes through a predetermined entry area (through gate 35) in a predetermined situation (advantageous state start effect in the modified example 15). A gaming machine characterized by having a means of execution.

According to this feature, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first. It shifts to the control mode. Then, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is specified by the time it ends in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition to the first control mode is made. When the condition is satisfied, the player is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a specific probability. On the other hand, if the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific probability. It will be transferred to the specific gaming state again with a lower probability. Therefore, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state shifted from the specific gaming state, the determination means for the player regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is used. By the time the determination is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, it can be expected that the specific condition will be satisfied. That is, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It can be expected that the special information satisfies the first predetermined game state, but further, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made in the first predetermined gaming state. By the time it ends, it can be expected that certain conditions will be met.

Further, according to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. Since the game is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means in the first predetermined gaming state, and the specific condition is satisfied. There is no sense of urgency for the player as to whether the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state ends in the first predetermined gaming state. Can be made. As described above, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Further, according to this feature, in a predetermined situation, when the game ball passes through a predetermined entry area, an effect suggesting that a state advantageous to the player is started is executed, so that the player is informed. It is possible to make a player different from a normal gaming machine recognize that an advantageous state is started when the gaming ball passes through a predetermined entry area.

<Characteristic uIJ group>
Features The uIJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants 15.

[Characteristic uIJ1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
A means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information. Is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. Also, a determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state. The control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of times of execution reaches the number of time reduction continuations) is established.
The first predetermined gaming state (high) after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made to shift to the first control mode. If a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is satisfied by the time it ends in the low probability support state), the player shifts to the specific game state again with a specific probability (100% probability again to the specific game state). (Migrate) The first re-migration means and
After the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) When (that) is established, the player shifts to the specific gaming state again with a probability lower than the specific probability (the jackpot is won in the low probability low support state and the probability is distributed to the probability change jackpot again. (Make) the second re-migration means and
And more
In the first predetermined gaming state (high accuracy and low support state H6), when the state of the auxiliary means transitions to the second state, the game is to allow the gaming ball to enter the second entering means. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a means for executing an effect that urges a person (special 2 ball entry promotion effect in the modified example 15).

According to this feature, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first. It shifts to the control mode. Then, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is specified by the time it ends in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition to the first control mode is made. When the condition is satisfied, the player is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a specific probability. On the other hand, if the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific probability. It will be transferred to the specific gaming state again with a lower probability. Therefore, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state shifted from the specific gaming state, the determination means for the player regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is used. By the time the determination is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, it can be expected that the specific condition will be satisfied. That is, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It can be expected that the special information satisfies the first predetermined game state, but further, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made in the first predetermined gaming state. By the time it ends, it can be expected that certain conditions will be met.

Further, according to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. Since the game is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means in the first predetermined gaming state, and the specific condition is satisfied. There is no sense of urgency for the player as to whether the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state ends in the first predetermined gaming state. Can be made. As described above, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Further, according to this feature, when the state of the auxiliary means transitions to the second state in the first predetermined gaming state, the effect of urging the player to insert the game ball into the second entering means. Is executed, so that the player can be made aware of how to play the game according to the new game characteristics of the main game machine, which is different from the normal game machine.

<Characteristic uIK group>
Features The uIK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants 15.

[Characteristic uIK1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
A means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information. Is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. Also, a determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state. The control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of times of execution reaches the number of time reduction continuations) is established.
The first predetermined gaming state (high) after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made to shift to the first control mode. If a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is satisfied by the time it ends in the low probability support state), the player shifts to the specific game state again with a specific probability (100% probability again to the specific game state). (Migrate) The first re-migration means and
After the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) If this is true, the player will re-enter the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability (the jackpot will be won in the low-probability low-support state and will be distributed to the probabilistic jackpot again). (Make) the second re-migration means,
And more
When the number of stored second special information reaches a predetermined number (4) in the first predetermined gaming state (high accuracy low support state H6), the number of stored second special information is the predetermined number. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for displaying information corresponding to the fact (advantage determination effect in the modified example 15).

According to this feature, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first. It shifts to the control mode. Then, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is specified by the time it ends in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition to the first control mode is made. When the condition is satisfied, the player is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a specific probability. On the other hand, if the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific probability. It will be transferred to the specific gaming state again with a lower probability. Therefore, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state shifted from the specific gaming state, the determination means for the player regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is used. By the time the determination is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, it can be expected that the specific condition will be satisfied. That is, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It can be expected that the special information satisfies the first predetermined game state, but further, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made in the first predetermined gaming state. By the time it ends, it can be expected that certain conditions will be met.

Further, according to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. Since the game is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means in the first predetermined gaming state, and the specific condition is satisfied. There is no sense of urgency for the player as to whether the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state ends in the first predetermined gaming state. Can be made. As described above, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Further, according to this feature, when the number of stored second special information becomes a predetermined number in the first predetermined gaming state, the information corresponding to the number of stored second special information becomes a predetermined number. Is displayed, so that the player recognizes that, unlike a normal gaming machine, the number of stored second special information is a predetermined number in the first predetermined gaming state, which has a special meaning. Is possible.

<Characteristic uIL group>
Features The uIL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants 16.

[Characteristic uIL1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
A means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information. Is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. Also, a determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state. The control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of times of execution reaches the number of time reduction continuations) is established.
The first predetermined gaming state (high) after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made to shift to the first control mode. If a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is satisfied by the time it ends in the low probability support state), the player shifts to the specific game state again with a specific probability (100% probability again to the specific game state). (Migrate) The first re-migration means and
After the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) If this is true, the player will re-enter the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability (the jackpot will be won in the low-probability low-support state and will be distributed to the probabilistic jackpot again). (Make) the second re-migration means,
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that it does not have a means for holding and storing a predetermined lottery (general drawing lottery) that triggers the transition of the auxiliary means from the first state to the second state.

According to this feature, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first. It shifts to the control mode. Then, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is specified by the time it ends in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition to the first control mode is made. When the condition is satisfied, the player is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a specific probability. On the other hand, if the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific probability. It will be transferred to the specific gaming state again with a lower probability. Therefore, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state shifted from the specific gaming state, the determination means for the player regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is used. By the time the determination is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, it can be expected that the specific condition will be satisfied. That is, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It can be expected that the special information satisfies the first predetermined game state, but further, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made in the first predetermined gaming state. By the time it ends, it can be expected that certain conditions will be met.

Further, according to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. Since the game is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means in the first predetermined gaming state, and the specific condition is satisfied. There is no sense of urgency for the player as to whether the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state ends in the first predetermined gaming state. Can be made. As described above, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Further, according to this feature, since there is no means for holding and storing a predetermined lottery (general drawing lottery) that triggers the transition of the auxiliary means from the first state to the second state, the reserved predetermined lottery is held. It is possible to prevent the lottery from being automatically executed at a timing not intended by the player. Therefore, by adjusting the timing at which the game ball enters the ball-entry means that triggers the transition of the state of the auxiliary means, a new game property of adjusting the timing at which the auxiliary means transitions to the second state is achieved. Can be provided to the person.

<Characteristic uIM group>
Features The uIM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its variants 18.

[Characteristic uIM1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
A means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit), and the determination for the second special information. Is performed with priority over the determination regarding the first special information, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, the first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination mode. Also, a determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high, and
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 461 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the specific gaming state (high accuracy and high support state) in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the game times after the transition to the specific gaming state. The control mode transition means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the number of times of execution reaches the number of time reduction continuations) is established.
The first predetermined gaming state (high) after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made to shift to the first control mode. If a specific condition (winning in a fall lottery) is satisfied by the time it ends in the low probability support state), the player shifts to the specific game state again with a specific probability (100% probability again to the specific game state). (Migrate) The first re-migration means and
After the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific condition (winning in the fall lottery) If this is true, the player will re-enter the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability (the jackpot will be won in the low-probability low-support state and will be distributed to the probabilistic jackpot again). (Make) the second re-migration means,
And more
When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific gaming state (high accuracy high support state H4) (when the fall is won in the fall lottery), the determination mode is the first determination mode, the second predetermined gaming state ( Means to shift to low accuracy and high support state H5),
A predetermined ball entry port (high probability transition winning opening 34e in the modified example 18) capable of entering the game ball in the second predetermined gaming state, and
A means for shifting the determination mode to the second determination mode when the game ball enters the predetermined entry port.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to this feature, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode and the control mode is the second control mode, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the first. It shifts to the control mode. Then, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is specified by the time it ends in the first predetermined gaming state after the transition to the first control mode is made. When the condition is satisfied, the player is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a specific probability. On the other hand, if the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, the specific probability. It will be transferred to the specific gaming state again with a lower probability. Therefore, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state shifted from the specific gaming state, the determination means for the player regarding the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is used. By the time the determination is completed in the first predetermined gaming state, it can be expected that the specific condition will be satisfied. That is, according to this feature, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, the player is determined by the second determination mode in which the probability that the special information satisfies the first predetermined condition is high. It can be expected that the special information satisfies the first predetermined game state, but further, the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is made in the first predetermined gaming state. By the time it ends, it can be expected that certain conditions will be met.

Further, according to this feature, when the specific condition is satisfied after the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state is completed in the first predetermined gaming state. Since the game is re-shifted to the specific gaming state with a probability lower than the specific probability, the special information does not satisfy the first predetermined condition by the determination means in the first predetermined gaming state, and the specific condition is satisfied. There is no sense of urgency for the player as to whether the determination by the determination means for the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the specific gaming state ends in the first predetermined gaming state. Can be made. As described above, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player feelings such as a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Further, according to this feature, when a specific condition is satisfied in a specific gaming state (when a fall is won in a fall lottery), a second predetermined gaming state (low probability high support) in which the determination mode is the first determination mode. The state H5) shifts, but if the game ball can be inserted into the predetermined entry port in the second predetermined gaming state, the determination mode shifts to the second determination mode again. Here, when a configuration is adopted in which the second control mode continues until the next big hit winning when the time saving grant is won in the second predetermined gaming state, the time saving grant is won and predetermined in the second predetermined gaming state. If the game ball can be inserted into the entrance, the second control mode continues until the next big hit winning, and the determination mode is the second determination mode. This gaming state is a very advantageous state for the player. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to provide the player with a new game in which the game ball is inserted into the predetermined ball opening in the second predetermined game state and the game is shifted to a more advantageous game state.

<Characteristic vA group>
The feature vA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its variants. In particular, the modified example 10 of the eleventh embodiment corresponds to it.

[Feature vA1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
It is a means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning the jackpot), and the determination for the second special information. With a determination means that gives priority to the determination regarding the first special information.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 511 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means assists with a predetermined probability (probability of winning a short opening of electric service) when a predetermined condition (a game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is satisfied in a predetermined gaming state. A means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state is provided.
In the predetermined gaming state, the gaming machine can display a specific effect image (chance eye included in the precursory notice effect) continuously for the predetermined number of times of the game for the first special information.
The specific effect image can be displayed in the game times for the second special information, which is a specific number of times equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. 1st display means (production of game times V21 in FIG. 516) and
A second display means capable of displaying the specific effect image in the game round of the first special information, which is continuously executed after the end of the game round of the second special information of the specified number of times. (Direction of the game round U23 in FIG. 516) and
In the game round of the first special information, which is continuously executed after the end of the game round of the second special information of the specific number of times, the specific condition (the determination result of the second determination is negative). When the above-mentioned specific effect image is established, the effect image switching means capable of switching the specific effect image to a predetermined effect image (special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature vA1, in the predetermined gaming state, the specific effect image is displayed continuously for the predetermined number of gaming times for the first special information. Regarding the second special information of a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined gaming state when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. In the game times, a specific effect image is displayed. Then, the specific effect image is displayed in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information of the specific number of times are completed. For this reason, in the predetermined gaming state, there is special information scheduled to be produced with high expectation that the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means. In this case, by displaying the specific effect image, the player is informed that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition may exist in the first special information. Can be done. In addition, when the game rounds for the second special information are executed a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect is also performed in the game rounds. By displaying the image, it is possible to digest the game times regarding the second special information without interrupting the flow of the advance notice effect and without feeling uncomfortable. Further, by repeating displaying the specific effect image for each game, it is possible to expect the player to increase the possibility that the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists. On the other hand, even if the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, if the specific effect image is always displayed, the specific effect image will be repeated unnecessarily, and the advance notice effect will be produced. There was a risk that the reliability of the product would decrease. On the other hand, according to the feature vA1, when the specific condition is satisfied in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the end of the game rounds for the second special information a specific number of times. In addition, since the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, it is possible to suppress the appearance of an extra specific effect image when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, according to the feature vA1, the reliability of the advance notice production can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature vA2]
Features The gaming machine described in vA1.
The effect image switching means is
A means capable of switching an image to be displayed from the specific effect image displayed by the first display means (modification example 10, special 1 which is continuously executed after the end of the game round V21 for the special 2 hold 1). In the game round U23 about hold, the chance eye effect is switched to the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect and displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature vA2, it is possible to switch the image to be displayed from the specific effect image displayed in the game round for the first special information that is continuously executed after the end of the game round for the second special information. If the image to be displayed is a predetermined effect image, the specific effect is continuously displayed in a predetermined number of game times for the first special information executed before the game times for the second special information are started. It is possible to maintain the expectation that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition by the image exists. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the expectation that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition is present unnecessarily. Therefore, according to the feature vA2, the reliability of the advance notice effect is further increased. Can be improved.

[Feature vA3]
The gaming machine according to the feature vA1 or the feature VA2.
The predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the control mode is a gaming state in which the first control mode is the first control mode.

According to the feature vA3, in the predetermined gaming state in which the control mode is the first control mode, the advance notice effect of the first special information can be performed.

[Feature vA4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature vA1 to the feature vA3.
The effect image switching means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for displaying the predetermined effect image having substantially the same expectation as the expectation when the specific effect image is displayed.

According to the feature vA4, the degree of expectation when the specific effect image is displayed and the degree of expectation when the predetermined effect image is displayed are substantially the same, so that the first special condition satisfying the first predetermined condition is satisfied. It can be surely suppressed that the expectation of the existence of information is unnecessarily increased. Therefore, according to the feature vA4, the reliability of the advance notice effect can be further improved.

[Feature vA5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature vA1 to the feature vA4.
The effect image switching means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for displaying the predetermined effect image having a higher expectation than the expectation when the specific effect image is displayed.

According to the feature vA5, the expectation when the predetermined effect image is displayed exceeds the expectation that the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means. If the predetermined effect image is displayed while the relationship is not maintained, the expectation when the predetermined effect image is displayed is compared with the expectation when the specific effect image is displayed. By increasing the value, it becomes possible to give a higher degree of expectation to the player. Therefore, according to the feature vA5, the reliability of the advance notice effect can be further improved.

[Feature vA6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature vA1 to the feature vA5.
The configuration that enables the specific effect image to be displayed continuously in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information is
Means that can display the specific effect image at a position shifted back and forth with respect to the display surface of the symbol for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means displayed in the game round (in the modified example 5). When the display of the effect in which a specific character appears is applied to the layer structure of the first modification, the effect in which the specific character appears is located in front of the symbol layer). ..

According to the feature vA6, in a predetermined gaming state, when displaying a specific effect image continuously for a predetermined number of game times for the first special information, a display surface of a symbol for notifying the result of determination by the determination means. Since the specific effect image is displayed at a position shifted back and forth with respect to the above, drawing can be controlled independently in each of the layer in which the specific effect image is displayed and the layer in which the symbol is displayed. Therefore, according to the feature vA6, control can be simplified.

[Feature vA7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature vA1 to the feature vA6.
The first display means is
Means that can display the specific effect image at a position shifted back and forth with respect to the display surface of the symbol for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means displayed in the game round (in the modified example 5). A gaming machine characterized in that when the display of an effect in which a specific character appears is applied to the layer structure of the first modification, the effect in which a specific character appears is located in front of the design layer).

According to the feature vA7, the specific effect image is displayed in the game times for the second special information, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. At that time, since the specific effect image is displayed at a position shifted back and forth with respect to the display surface of the symbol for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means, the hierarchy and the symbol on which the specific effect image is displayed are displayed. Drawing can be controlled independently for each of the layers. Therefore, according to the feature vA7, control can be simplified.

[Feature vA8]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature vA1 to the feature vA7.
The second display means is
Means that can display the specific effect image at a position shifted back and forth with respect to the display surface of the symbol for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means displayed in the game round (in the modified example 5). A gaming machine characterized in that, when the display of the effect in which a specific character appears is applied to the layer structure of the first modification, the effect in which the specific character appears is located in front of the symbol layer).

According to the feature vA8, when displaying the specific effect image in the game rounds for the first special information, which is continuously executed after the end of the game rounds for the second special information a specific number of times, it depends on the determination means. Since the specific effect image is displayed at a position shifted back and forth with respect to the display surface of the symbol for notifying the result of the determination, the layer in which the specific effect image is displayed and the layer in which the symbol is displayed are displayed. You can control the drawing independently. Therefore, according to the feature vA8, control can be simplified.

[Feature vA9]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature vA1 to the feature vA8.
The effect image switching means is
Means that can display the predetermined effect image at a position shifted back and forth with respect to the display surface of the symbol for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means displayed in the game round (in the modified example 5). When the display of the effect in which a specific background zone appears is applied to the layer structure of the first modification, the effect in which the specific background zone appears is located in front of the symbol layer). Game machine.

According to the feature vA9, when displaying a predetermined effect image when a specific condition is satisfied in the game round of the first special information stored by the acquired information storage means, the result of the determination by the determination means is notified. Since the predetermined effect image is displayed at a position shifted back and forth with respect to the display surface of the symbol, drawing is controlled independently in each of the layer in which the predetermined effect image is displayed and the layer in which the symbol is displayed. be able to. Therefore, according to the feature vA9, control can be simplified.

<Characteristic vB group>
The feature vB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its variants. In particular, Case 2 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to it.

[Feature vB1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
It is a means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning the jackpot), and the determination for the second special information. With a determination means that gives priority to the determination regarding the first special information.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 511 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means assists with a predetermined probability (probability of winning a short opening of electric service) when a predetermined condition (a game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is satisfied in a predetermined gaming state. A means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state is provided.
In the predetermined gaming state, the gaming machine can display a specific effect image (chance eye included in the precursory notice effect) continuously for the predetermined number of times of the game for the first special information.
The specific effect image can be displayed in the game times for the second special information, which is a specific number of times equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. 1st display means (production of game times V21 in FIG. 516) and
A second display means capable of displaying the specific effect image in the game round of the first special information, which is continuously executed after the end of the game round of the second special information of the specified number of times. (Direction of the game round U23 in FIG. 516) and
In the game round of the first special information, which is continuously executed after the end of the game round of the second special information of the specific number of times, the specific condition (the determination result of the second determination is negative). When the above-mentioned specific effect image is established, the effect image switching means capable of switching the specific effect image to a predetermined effect image (special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect) and
Equipped with
The effect image switching means is
A means capable of switching an image to be displayed from the specific effect image displayed by the first display means (modification example 10, special 1 which is continuously executed after the end of the game round V21 for the special 2 hold 1). In the game round U23 about hold, the chance eye effect is switched to the special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect and displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature vB1, in the predetermined gaming state, the specific effect image is displayed continuously for the predetermined number of gaming times for the first special information. Regarding the second special information of a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined gaming state when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. In the game times, a specific effect image is displayed. Then, the specific effect image is displayed in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information of the specific number of times are completed. For this reason, in the predetermined gaming state, there is special information scheduled to be produced with high expectation that the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means. In this case, by displaying the specific effect image, the player is informed that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition may exist in the first special information. Can be done. In addition, when the game rounds for the second special information are executed a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect is also performed in the game rounds. By displaying the image, it is possible to digest the game times regarding the second special information without interrupting the flow of the advance notice effect and without feeling uncomfortable. Further, by repeating displaying the specific effect image for each game, it is possible to expect the player to increase the possibility that special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists. On the other hand, even if the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, if the specific effect image is always displayed, the specific effect image will be repeated unnecessarily, and the advance notice effect will be produced. There was a risk that the reliability of the product would decrease. On the other hand, according to the feature vB1, when the specific condition is satisfied in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the end of the game rounds for the second special information a specific number of times. In addition, since the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, it is possible to suppress the appearance of an extra specific effect image when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, according to the feature vB1, the reliability of the advance notice production can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature vB1, it is possible to switch the image to be displayed from the specific effect image displayed in the game round for the first special information that is continuously executed after the end of the game round for the second special information. Therefore, if the image to be displayed is a predetermined effect image, it is continuously displayed in a predetermined number of game times for the first special information executed before the game times for the second special information are started. It is possible to maintain the expectation that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition is present by the specific effect image. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the expectation that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition is present unnecessarily. Therefore, according to the feature vB1, the reliability of the advance notice effect is further increased. Can be improved.

<Characteristic vC group>
The feature vC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its variants. In particular, Case 2 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to it.

[Feature vC1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
It is a means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning the jackpot), and the determination for the second special information. With a determination means that gives priority to the determination regarding the first special information.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 511 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means assists with a predetermined probability (probability of winning a short opening of electric service) when a predetermined condition (a game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is satisfied in a predetermined gaming state. A means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state is provided.
In the predetermined gaming state, the gaming machine can display a specific effect image (chance eye included in the precursory notice effect) continuously for the predetermined number of times of the game for the first special information.
The specific effect image can be displayed in the game times for the second special information, which is a specific number of times equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. 1st display means (production of game times V21 in FIG. 516) and
A second display means capable of displaying the specific effect image in the game round of the first special information, which is continuously executed after the end of the game round of the second special information of the specific number of times. (Direction of the game round U23 in FIG. 516) and
In the game round of the first special information, which is continuously executed after the end of the game round of the second special information of the specific number of times, the specific condition (the determination result of the second determination is negative). When the above-mentioned specific effect image is established, the effect image switching means capable of switching the specific effect image to a predetermined effect image (special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect) and
Equipped with
The predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the control mode is a gaming state in which the first control mode is the first control mode.

According to the feature vC1, in the predetermined gaming state, the specific effect image is displayed continuously for the predetermined number of gaming times for the first special information. Regarding the second special information of a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined gaming state when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. In the game times, a specific effect image is displayed. Then, the specific effect image is displayed in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information of the specific number of times are completed. For this reason, in the predetermined gaming state, there is special information scheduled to be produced with high expectation that the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means. In this case, by displaying the specific effect image, the player is informed that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition may exist in the first special information. Can be done. In addition, when the game rounds for the second special information are executed a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect is also performed in the game rounds. By displaying the image, it is possible to digest the game times regarding the second special information without interrupting the flow of the advance notice effect and without feeling uncomfortable. Further, by repeating displaying the specific effect image for each game, it is possible to expect the player to increase the possibility that the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists. On the other hand, even if the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, if the specific effect image is always displayed, the specific effect image will be repeated unnecessarily, and the advance notice effect will be produced. There was a risk that the reliability of the product would decrease. On the other hand, according to the feature vC1, when the specific condition is satisfied in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the end of the game rounds for the second special information a specific number of times. In addition, since the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, it is possible to suppress the appearance of an extra specific effect image when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, according to the feature vC1, the reliability of the advance notice effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature vC1, in the predetermined gaming state in which the control mode is the first control mode, it is possible to perform the advance notice effect on the first special information.

<Characteristic vD group>
The feature vD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its variants. In particular, Case 2 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to it.

[Feature vD1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
It is a means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning the jackpot), and the determination for the second special information. With a determination means that gives priority to the determination regarding the first special information.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 511 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means assists with a predetermined probability (probability of winning a short opening of electric service) when a predetermined condition (a game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is satisfied in a predetermined gaming state. A means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state is provided.
In the predetermined gaming state, the gaming machine can display a specific effect image (chance eye included in the precursory notice effect) continuously for the predetermined number of times of the game for the first special information.
The specific effect image can be displayed in the game times for the second special information, which is a specific number of times equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. 1st display means (production of game times V21 in FIG. 516) and
A second display means capable of displaying the specific effect image in the game round of the first special information, which is continuously executed after the end of the game round of the second special information of the specific number of times. (Direction of the game round U23 in FIG. 516) and
In the game round of the first special information, which is continuously executed after the end of the game round of the second special information of the specific number of times, the specific condition (the determination result of the second determination is negative). When the above-mentioned specific effect image is established, the effect image switching means capable of switching the specific effect image to a predetermined effect image (special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect) and
Equipped with
The effect image switching means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for displaying the predetermined effect image having substantially the same expectation as the expectation when the specific effect image is displayed.

According to the feature vD1, in the predetermined gaming state, the specific effect image is displayed continuously for the predetermined number of gaming times for the first special information. Regarding the second special information of a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined gaming state when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. In the game times, a specific effect image is displayed. Then, the specific effect image is displayed in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information of the specific number of times are completed. For this reason, in the predetermined gaming state, there is special information scheduled to be produced with high expectation that the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means. In this case, by displaying the specific effect image, the player is informed that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition may exist in the first special information. Can be done. In addition, when the game rounds for the second special information are executed a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect is also performed in the game rounds. By displaying the image, it is possible to digest the game times regarding the second special information without interrupting the flow of the advance notice effect and without feeling uncomfortable. Further, by repeating displaying the specific effect image for each game, it is possible to expect the player to increase the possibility that special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists. On the other hand, even if the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, if the specific effect image is always displayed, the specific effect image will be repeated unnecessarily, and the advance notice effect will be produced. There was a risk that the reliability of the product would decrease. On the other hand, according to the feature vD1, when the specific condition is satisfied in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the end of the game rounds for the second special information a specific number of times. In addition, since the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, it is possible to suppress the appearance of an extra specific effect image when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, according to the feature vD1, the reliability of the advance notice effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature vD1, the degree of expectation when the specific effect image is displayed and the degree of expectation when the predetermined effect image is displayed are substantially the same, so that the first predetermined condition is satisfied. It is possible to surely prevent the expectation of the existence of the special information of the above from being unnecessarily increased. Therefore, according to the feature vD1, the reliability of the advance notice effect can be further improved.

<Characteristic vE group>
The feature vE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its variants. In particular, Case 2 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to it.

[Feature vE1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
It is a means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning the jackpot), and the determination for the second special information. With a determination means that gives priority to the determination regarding the first special information.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 511 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means assists with a predetermined probability (probability of winning a short opening of electric service) when a predetermined condition (a game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is satisfied in a predetermined gaming state. A means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state is provided.
In the predetermined gaming state, the gaming machine can display a specific effect image (chance eye included in the precursory notice effect) continuously for the predetermined number of times of the game for the first special information.
The specific effect image can be displayed in the game times for the second special information, which is a specific number of times equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. 1st display means (production of game times V21 in FIG. 516) and
A second display means capable of displaying the specific effect image in the game round of the first special information, which is continuously executed after the end of the game round of the second special information of the specific number of times. (Direction of the game round U23 in FIG. 516) and
In the game round of the first special information, which is continuously executed after the end of the game round of the second special information of the specific number of times, the specific condition (the determination result of the second determination is negative). When the above-mentioned specific effect image is established, the effect image switching means capable of switching the specific effect image to a predetermined effect image (special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect) and
Equipped with
The effect image switching means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for displaying the predetermined effect image having a higher expectation than the expectation when the specific effect image is displayed.

According to the feature vE1, in the predetermined gaming state, the specific effect image is displayed continuously for the predetermined number of gaming times for the first special information. Regarding the second special information of a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined gaming state when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. In the game times, a specific effect image is displayed. Then, the specific effect image is displayed in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information of the specific number of times are completed. For this reason, in the predetermined gaming state, there is special information scheduled to be produced with high expectation that the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means. In this case, by displaying the specific effect image, the player is informed that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition may exist in the first special information. Can be done. In addition, when the game rounds for the second special information are executed a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect is also performed in the game rounds. By displaying the image, it is possible to digest the game times regarding the second special information without interrupting the flow of the advance notice effect and without feeling uncomfortable. Further, by repeating displaying the specific effect image for each game, it is possible to expect the player to increase the possibility that the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists. On the other hand, even if the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, if the specific effect image is always displayed, the specific effect image will be repeated unnecessarily, and the advance notice effect will be produced. There was a risk that the reliability of the product would decrease. On the other hand, according to the feature vE1, when the specific condition is satisfied in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the end of the game rounds for the second special information a specific number of times. In addition, since the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, it is possible to suppress the appearance of an extra specific effect image when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, according to the feature vE1, the reliability of the advance notice effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature vE1, the expectation degree when the predetermined effect image is displayed is the expectation degree that the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means. If the predetermined effect image is displayed in a state where the relationship does not exceed the above, when the predetermined effect image is displayed as compared with the expected degree when the specific effect image is displayed. By increasing the degree of expectation, it becomes possible to give a higher degree of expectation to the player. Therefore, according to the feature vE1, the reliability of the advance notice effect can be further improved.

<Characteristic vF group>
The feature vF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its variants. In particular, Case 2 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to it.

[Feature vF1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
It is a means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning the jackpot), and the determination for the second special information. With a determination means that gives priority to the determination regarding the first special information.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 511 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means assists with a predetermined probability (probability of winning a short opening of electric service) when a predetermined condition (a game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is satisfied in a predetermined gaming state. A means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state is provided.
In the predetermined gaming state, the gaming machine can display a specific effect image (chance eye included in the precursory notice effect) continuously for the predetermined number of times of the game for the first special information.
The specific effect image can be displayed in the game times for the second special information, which is a specific number of times equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. 1st display means (production of game times V21 in FIG. 516) and
A second display means capable of displaying the specific effect image in the game round of the first special information, which is continuously executed after the end of the game round of the second special information of the specified number of times. (Direction of the game round U23 in FIG. 516) and
In the game round of the first special information, which is continuously executed after the end of the game round of the second special information of the specific number of times, the specific condition (the determination result of the second determination is negative). When the above-mentioned specific effect image is established, the effect image switching means capable of switching the specific effect image to a predetermined effect image (special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect) and
Equipped with
The configuration that enables the specific effect image to be displayed continuously in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information is
Means that can display the specific effect image at a position shifted back and forth with respect to the display surface of the symbol for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means displayed in the game round (in the modified example 5). When the display of the effect in which a specific character appears is applied to the layer structure of the first modification, the effect in which the specific character appears is located in front of the symbol layer). ..

According to the feature vF1, in the predetermined gaming state, the specific effect image is displayed continuously for the predetermined number of gaming times for the first special information. Regarding the second special information of a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined gaming state when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. In the game times, a specific effect image is displayed. Then, the specific effect image is displayed in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information of the specific number of times are completed. For this reason, in the predetermined gaming state, there is special information scheduled to be produced with high expectation that the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means. In this case, by displaying the specific effect image, the player is informed that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition may exist in the first special information. Can be done. In addition, when the game rounds for the second special information are executed a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect is also performed in the game rounds. By displaying the image, it is possible to digest the game times regarding the second special information without interrupting the flow of the advance notice effect and without feeling uncomfortable. Further, by repeating displaying the specific effect image for each game, it is possible to expect the player to increase the possibility that the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists. On the other hand, even if the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, if the specific effect image is always displayed, the specific effect image will be repeated unnecessarily, and the advance notice effect will be produced. There was a risk that the reliability of the product would decrease. On the other hand, according to the feature vF1, when the specific condition is satisfied in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the end of the game rounds for the second special information a specific number of times. In addition, since the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, it is possible to suppress the appearance of an extra specific effect image when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, according to the feature vF1, the reliability of the advance notice production can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature vF1, in a predetermined gaming state, when displaying a specific effect image continuously for a predetermined number of game times for the first special information, a symbol for notifying the result of determination by the determination means. Since the specific effect image is displayed at a position shifted back and forth with respect to the display surface, it is possible to control drawing independently in each of the layer in which the specific effect image is displayed and the layer in which the design is displayed. can. Therefore, according to the feature vF1, control can be simplified.

<Characteristic vG group>
The feature vG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its variants. In particular, Case 2 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to it.

[Feature vG1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
It is a means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning the jackpot), and the determination for the second special information. With a determination means that gives priority to the determination regarding the first special information.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 511 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means assists with a predetermined probability (probability of winning a short opening of electric service) when a predetermined condition (a game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is satisfied in a predetermined gaming state. A means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state is provided.
In the predetermined gaming state, the gaming machine can display a specific effect image (chance eye included in the precursory notice effect) continuously for the predetermined number of times of the game for the first special information.
The specific effect image can be displayed in the game times for the second special information, which is a specific number of times equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. 1st display means (production of game times V21 in FIG. 516) and
A second display means capable of displaying the specific effect image in the game round of the first special information, which is continuously executed after the end of the game round of the second special information of the specified number of times. (Direction of the game round U23 in FIG. 516) and
In the game round of the first special information, which is continuously executed after the end of the game round of the second special information of the specific number of times, the specific condition (the determination result of the second determination is negative). When the above-mentioned specific effect image is established, the effect image switching means capable of switching the specific effect image to a predetermined effect image (special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect) and
Equipped with
The first display means is
Means that can display the specific effect image at a position shifted back and forth with respect to the display surface of the symbol for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means displayed in the game round (in the modified example 5). A gaming machine characterized in that when the display of an effect in which a specific character appears is applied to the layer structure of the first modification, the effect in which a specific character appears is located in front of the design layer).

According to the feature vG1, in the predetermined gaming state, the specific effect image is displayed continuously for the predetermined number of gaming times for the first special information. Regarding the second special information of a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined gaming state when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. In the game times, a specific effect image is displayed. Then, the specific effect image is displayed in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information of the specific number of times are completed. For this reason, in the predetermined gaming state, there is special information scheduled to be produced with high expectation that the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means. In this case, by displaying the specific effect image, the player is informed that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition may exist in the first special information. Can be done. In addition, when the game rounds for the second special information are executed a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect is also performed in the game rounds. By displaying the image, it is possible to digest the game times regarding the second special information without interrupting the flow of the advance notice effect and without feeling uncomfortable. Further, by repeating displaying the specific effect image for each game, it is possible to expect the player to increase the possibility that the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists. On the other hand, even if the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, if the specific effect image is always displayed, the specific effect image will be repeated unnecessarily, and the advance notice effect will be produced. There was a risk that the reliability of the product would decrease. On the other hand, according to the feature vG1, when the specific condition is satisfied in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the end of the game rounds for the second special information a specific number of times. In addition, since the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, it is possible to suppress the appearance of an extra specific effect image when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, according to the feature vG1, the reliability of the advance notice production can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature vG1, the specific effect image is displayed in the game times for the second special information, which is a specific number of times equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. When displaying, since the specific effect image is displayed at a position shifted back and forth with respect to the display surface of the symbol for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means, the hierarchy and the symbol on which the specific effect image is displayed are displayed. Drawing can be controlled independently for each displayed hierarchy. Therefore, according to the feature vG7, control can be simplified.

<Characteristic vH group>
The feature vH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its variants. In particular, Case 2 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to it.

[Characteristic vH1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
It is a means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning the jackpot), and the determination for the second special information. With a determination means that gives priority to the determination regarding the first special information.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 511 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means assists with a predetermined probability (probability of winning a short opening of electric service) when a predetermined condition (a game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is satisfied in a predetermined gaming state. A means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state is provided.
In the predetermined gaming state, the gaming machine can display a specific effect image (chance eye included in the precursory notice effect) continuously for the predetermined number of times of the game for the first special information.
The specific effect image can be displayed in the game times for the second special information, which is a specific number of times equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. 1st display means (production of game times V21 in FIG. 516) and
A second display means capable of displaying the specific effect image in the game round of the first special information, which is continuously executed after the end of the game round of the second special information of the specified number of times. (Direction of the game round U23 in FIG. 516) and
In the game round of the first special information, which is continuously executed after the end of the game round of the second special information of the specific number of times, the specific condition (the determination result of the second determination is negative). When the above-mentioned specific effect image is established, the effect image switching means capable of switching the specific effect image to a predetermined effect image (special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect) and
Equipped with
The second display means is
Means that can display the specific effect image at a position shifted back and forth with respect to the display surface of the symbol for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means displayed in the game round (in the modified example 5). A gaming machine characterized in that, when the display of the effect in which a specific character appears is applied to the layer structure of the first modification, the effect in which the specific character appears is located in front of the symbol layer).

According to the feature vH1, in the predetermined gaming state, the specific effect image is displayed continuously for the predetermined number of gaming times for the first special information. Regarding the second special information of a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined gaming state when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. In the game times, a specific effect image is displayed. Then, the specific effect image is displayed in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information of the specific number of times are completed. For this reason, in the predetermined gaming state, there is special information scheduled to be produced with high expectation that the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means. In this case, by displaying the specific effect image, the player is informed that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition may exist in the first special information. Can be done. In addition, when the game rounds for the second special information are executed a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect is also performed in the game rounds. By displaying the image, it is possible to digest the game times regarding the second special information without interrupting the flow of the advance notice effect and without feeling uncomfortable. Further, by repeating displaying the specific effect image for each game, it is possible to expect the player to increase the possibility that the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists. On the other hand, even if the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, if the specific effect image is always displayed, the specific effect image will be repeated unnecessarily, and the advance notice effect will be produced. There was a risk that the reliability of the product would decrease. On the other hand, according to the feature vH1, when the specific condition is satisfied in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the end of the game rounds for the second special information a specific number of times. In addition, since the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, it is possible to suppress the appearance of an extra specific effect image when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, according to the feature vH, the reliability of the advance notice production can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature vH1, it is determined when displaying the specific effect image in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information of the specific number of times are completed. Since the specific effect image is displayed at a position shifted back and forth with respect to the display surface of the symbol for notifying the result of the determination by the means, the hierarchy in which the specific effect image is displayed and the hierarchy in which the symbol is displayed are displayed. Drawing can be controlled independently for each. Therefore, according to the feature vH1, control can be simplified.

<Characteristic vI group>
The feature vI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its variants. In particular, Case 2 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to it.

[Feature vI1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
It is a means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning the jackpot), and the determination for the second special information. With a determination means that gives priority to the determination regarding the first special information.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 511 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means assists with a predetermined probability (probability of winning a short opening of electric service) when a predetermined condition (a game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is satisfied in a predetermined gaming state. A means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state is provided.
In the predetermined gaming state, the gaming machine can display a specific effect image (chance eye included in the precursory notice effect) continuously for the predetermined number of times of the game for the first special information.
The specific effect image can be displayed in the game times for the second special information, which is a specific number of times equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. 1st display means (production of game times V21 in FIG. 516) and
A second display means capable of displaying the specific effect image in the game round of the first special information, which is continuously executed after the end of the game round of the second special information of the specified number of times. (Direction of the game round U23 in FIG. 516) and
In the game round of the first special information, which is continuously executed after the end of the game round of the second special information of the specific number of times, the specific condition (the determination result of the second determination is negative). When the above-mentioned specific effect image is established, the effect image switching means capable of switching the specific effect image to a predetermined effect image (special 1 continuous effect continuation symbol same color effect) and
Equipped with
The effect image switching means is
Means that can display the predetermined effect image at a position shifted back and forth with respect to the display surface of the symbol for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means displayed in the game round (in the modified example 5). When the display of the effect in which a specific background zone appears is applied to the layer structure of the first modification, the effect in which the specific background zone appears is located in front of the symbol layer). Game machine.

According to the feature vI1, in the predetermined gaming state, the specific effect image is displayed continuously for the predetermined number of gaming times for the first special information. Regarding the second special information of a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined gaming state when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. In the game times, a specific effect image is displayed. Then, the specific effect image is displayed in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the game rounds for the second special information of the specific number of times are completed. For this reason, in the predetermined gaming state, there is special information scheduled to be produced with high expectation that the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means. In this case, by displaying the specific effect image, the player is informed that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition may exist in the first special information. Can be done. In addition, when the game rounds for the second special information are executed a specific number of times, which is equal to or less than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means, the specific effect is also performed in the game rounds. By displaying the image, it is possible to digest the game times regarding the second special information without interrupting the flow of the advance notice effect and without feeling uncomfortable. Further, by repeating displaying the specific effect image for each game, it is possible to expect the player to increase the possibility that the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists. On the other hand, even if the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, if the specific effect image is always displayed, the specific effect image will be repeated unnecessarily, and the advance notice effect will be produced. There was a risk that the reliability of the product would decrease. On the other hand, according to the feature vI1, when the specific condition is satisfied in the game rounds for the first special information, which are continuously executed after the end of the game rounds for the second special information a specific number of times. In addition, since the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, it is possible to suppress the appearance of an extra specific effect image when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, according to the feature vI1, the reliability of the advance notice effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature vI1, when a predetermined effect image is displayed when a specific condition is satisfied in the game round of the first special information stored by the acquired information storage means, the result of the determination by the determination means is announced. Since the predetermined effect image is displayed at a position shifted back and forth with respect to the display surface of the symbol for the purpose, drawing is performed independently in each of the layer in which the predetermined effect image is displayed and the layer in which the symbol is displayed. Can be controlled. Therefore, according to the feature vI1, control can be simplified.

<Characteristic vJ group>
The feature vJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its variants. In particular, Case 3 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to it.

[Feature vJ1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
It is a means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning the jackpot), and the determination for the second special information. With a determination means that gives priority to the determination regarding the first special information.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 511 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means assists with a predetermined probability (probability of winning the electric service chief opening) when a predetermined condition (a game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is satisfied in a predetermined gaming state. A means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state is provided.
A predetermined suggestion information display means (the effect of the game time U32 in FIG. 521) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (an image of a bubble included in the precursory notice effect) in the game times of the predetermined number of times regarding the first special information.
A specific gaming state (specially) in which the gaming times for the second special information can be executed a specific number of times that is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined gaming state. (2) A specific game state generating means (a state in which the electric accessory 34a is normally open) that can generate a game state (a game state in which the game times for holding can be executed) and
A specific game image display means for displaying a specific game image corresponding to the specific game (shellfish image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for the special 2 hold 1) while the specific game state is generated.
When the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the continuous display means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information and (the image obtained by reducing the captured image is dedicated to the special 2). Means to display in the production display area SA),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature vJ1, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information. For this reason, when the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means contains the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition and the special information to be produced with high expectation is present, the predetermined suggestion is made. With the information, it is possible to give a notice to the player that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. Further, according to the feature vJ1, a specific game in which a specific number of times of a game about the second special information, which is equal to or more than the upper limit of the number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state, can be executed. A condition can occur. Then, while the specific game state is occurring, the specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute the game round for the second special information, and by displaying the specific game image in the game round for the second special information for this long time, the game is played. It is possible to improve the interest of the person. On the other hand, since the game round for the second special information takes a long time, when the game round for the second special information is completed, it is executed before the game round for the second special information is started. There was a risk that some players would completely forget that the advance notice effect had appeared in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information. In addition, by displaying the specific game image in the game times for the second special information, it becomes easier to forget that the advance notice effect appeared in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information. .. On the other hand, according to the feature vJ1, when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, so that the player can see it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress forgetting that the advance notice effect has appeared, and to remind the user that the advance notice effect regarding the first special information is continuing. Therefore, according to the feature vJ1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature vJ2]
Features The gaming machine described in vJ1.
The continuous display means
As the predetermined suggestion information to be continuously displayed, the game of the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round of the second special information executed by displaying the specific game image. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for displaying predetermined suggestion information (a reduced image of a captured image) including a state as it is displayed at a time.

According to the feature vJ2, in the specific game state in which the game round for the second special information can be executed, the state as displayed in the game round for the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round. Since the predetermined suggestion information including the above is continuously displayed, it can be more certainly reminded that the advance notice of the first special information is continuing.

[Feature vJ3]
The gaming machine according to feature vJ1 or feature vJ2.
The continuous display means
As the predetermined suggestion information to be continuously displayed, the game of the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round of the second special information executed by displaying the specific game image. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for displaying predetermined suggestion information (an image in which a change in which the amount of bubbles is increased with respect to a captured image in a modified example) obtained by changing the information displayed in the times.

According to the feature vJ3, in the specific game state in which the game round for the second special information can be executed, the information displayed in the game round for the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round is changed. The predetermined suggestion information that has been made will be continuously displayed. For this reason, it is possible to provide predetermined suggestion information by various methods, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature vJ4]
The gaming machine described in any one of the feature vJ1 to the feature vJ3.
The predetermined suggestion information display means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for displaying the predetermined suggestion information at a position displayed in the game times and not hindering the visual recognition of a symbol for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means.

According to the feature vJ4, it is possible to prevent the symbol for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means from becoming difficult to see due to the predetermined suggestion information. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature vJ5]
The gaming machine described in any one of the feature vJ1 to the feature vJ4.
The predetermined suggestion information display means is
A means for displaying the predetermined suggestion information at a position shifted back and forth with respect to the display surface of the symbol for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means (layer in the modification 1) displayed in the game round. A gaming machine characterized by having a display using).

According to the feature vJ5, when displaying the predetermined suggestion information in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information, the position shifted back and forth with respect to the display surface of the symbol for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means. Since the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, the display can be controlled independently in each of the hierarchy in which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed and the hierarchy in which the symbol is displayed. Therefore, according to the feature vJ5, control can be simplified.

[Feature vJ6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature vJ1 to the feature vJ5.
The continuous display means
A means for displaying the predetermined suggestion information at a position shifted back and forth with respect to the display surface of the symbol for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means (layer in the modification 1) displayed in the game round. A gaming machine characterized by having a display using).

According to the feature vJ6, when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the position shifted back and forth with respect to the display surface of the symbol for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means. Since the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, the display can be controlled independently in each of the hierarchy in which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed and the hierarchy in which the symbol is displayed. Therefore, according to the feature vJ6, control can be simplified.

[Feature vJ7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature vJ1 to the feature vJ6.
The specific game image display means is
A means for displaying the specific game image at a position shifted back and forth with respect to the display surface of the symbol for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means (layer of the modification 1) displayed in the game times. In the structure, the upper layer for displaying the image SH of the shellfish is located in front of the design layer).

According to the feature vJ7, when displaying the specific game image corresponding to the specific game during the occurrence of the specific game state, the position shifted back and forth with respect to the display surface of the symbol for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means. Since the specific effect image is displayed, the drawing can be controlled independently in the layer in which the specific effect image is displayed and the layer in which the symbol is displayed. Therefore, according to the feature vJ7, control can be simplified.

[Feature vJ8]
The gaming machine described in any one of the feature vJ1 to the feature vJ7.
The predetermined suggestion information suggests a situation in the game round of the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round of the second special information executed by displaying the specific game image. A gaming machine characterized by including information to be executed (information expressing a captured image described as a modification in characters).

According to the feature vJ8, in the specific game state in which the game round for the second special information can be executed, the information suggesting the situation in the game round for the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round is available. It will be displayed continuously. For this reason, it is possible to provide predetermined suggestion information by various methods, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature vJ9]
The gaming machine described in any one of the feature vJ1 to the feature vJ8.
The predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the control mode is a gaming state in which the first control mode is the first control mode.

According to the feature vJ9, in the predetermined gaming state in which the control mode is the first control mode, the advance notice effect of the first special information can be performed.

<Characteristic vK group>
The feature vK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its variants. In particular, Case 3 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to it.

[Feature vK1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
It is a means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning the jackpot), and the determination for the second special information. With a determination means that gives priority to the determination regarding the first special information.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 511 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means assists with a predetermined probability (probability of winning the electric service chief opening) when a predetermined condition (a game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is satisfied in a predetermined gaming state. A means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state is provided.
A predetermined suggestion information display means (the effect of the game time U32 in FIG. 521) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (an image of a bubble included in the precursory notice effect) in the game times of the predetermined number of times regarding the first special information.
A specific gaming state (specially) in which the gaming times for the second special information can be executed a specific number of times that is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined gaming state. (2) A specific game state generating means (a state in which the electric accessory 34a is normally open) that can generate a game state (a game state in which the game times for holding can be executed) and
A specific game image display means for displaying a specific game image corresponding to the specific game (shellfish image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for the special 2 hold 1) while the specific game state is generated.
When the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the continuous display means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information and (the image obtained by reducing the captured image is dedicated to the special 2). Means to display in the production display area SA),
Equipped with
The continuous display means
As the predetermined suggestion information to be continuously displayed, the game of the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round of the second special information executed by displaying the specific game image. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for displaying predetermined suggestion information (a reduced image of a captured image) including a state as it is displayed at a time.

According to the feature vK1, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information. For this reason, when the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means includes the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition and the special information to be produced with high expectation is present, the predetermined suggestion is made. With the information, it is possible to give a notice to the player that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. Further, according to the feature vK1, a specific game in which a specific number of times of a game about the second special information, which is equal to or more than the upper limit of the number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state, can be executed. A condition can occur. Then, while the specific game state is occurring, the specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute the game round for the second special information, and by displaying the specific game image in the game round for the second special information for this long time, the game is played. It is possible to improve the interest of the person. On the other hand, since the game round for the second special information takes a long time, when the game round for the second special information is completed, it is executed before the game round for the second special information is started. There was a risk that some players would completely forget that the advance notice effect had appeared in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information. In addition, by displaying the specific game image in the game times for the second special information, it becomes easier to forget that the advance notice effect appeared in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information. .. On the other hand, according to the feature vK1, when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, so that the player can see it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress forgetting that the advance notice effect has appeared, and to remind the user that the advance notice effect for the first special information is continuing. Therefore, according to the feature vK1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the feature vK1, in the specific game state in which the game round for the second special information can be executed, it remains displayed in the game round for the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round. Since the predetermined suggestion information including the state of is continuously displayed, it can be more certainly reminded that the advance notice of the first special information is continuing.

<Characteristic vL group>
The feature vL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its variants. In particular, Case 3 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to it.

[Feature vL1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
It is a means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning the jackpot), and the determination for the second special information. With a determination means that gives priority to the determination regarding the first special information.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 511 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means assists with a predetermined probability (probability of winning the electric service chief opening) when a predetermined condition (a game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is satisfied in a predetermined gaming state. A means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state is provided.
A predetermined suggestion information display means (the effect of the game time U32 in FIG. 521) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (an image of a bubble included in the precursory notice effect) in the game times of the predetermined number of times regarding the first special information.
A specific gaming state (specially) in which the gaming times for the second special information can be executed a specific number of times that is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined gaming state. (2) A specific game state generating means (a state in which the electric accessory 34a is normally open) that can generate a game state (a game state in which the game times for holding can be executed) and
A specific game image display means for displaying a specific game image corresponding to the specific game (shellfish image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for the special 2 hold 1) while the specific game state is generated.
When the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the continuous display means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information and (the image obtained by reducing the captured image is dedicated to the special 2). Means to display in the production display area SA),
Equipped with
The continuous display means
As the predetermined suggestion information to be continuously displayed, the game of the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round of the second special information executed by displaying the specific game image. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for displaying predetermined suggestion information (an image in which a change in which the amount of bubbles is increased with respect to a captured image in a modified example) obtained by changing the information displayed in the times.

According to the feature vL1, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information. For this reason, when the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means contains the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition and the special information to be produced with high expectation is present, the predetermined suggestion is made. With the information, it is possible to give a notice to the player that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. Further, according to the feature vL1, the specific game in which the game times for the second special information can be executed a specific number of times, which is equal to or more than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. A condition can occur. Then, while the specific game state is occurring, the specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute the game round for the second special information, and by displaying the specific game image in the game round for the second special information for this long time, the game is played. It is possible to improve the interest of the person. On the other hand, since the game round for the second special information takes a long time, when the game round for the second special information is completed, it is executed before the game round for the second special information is started. There was a risk that some players would completely forget that the advance notice effect had appeared in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information. In addition, by displaying the specific game image in the game times for the second special information, it becomes easier to forget that the advance notice effect appeared in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information. .. On the other hand, according to the feature vL1, when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, so that the player can see it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress forgetting that the advance notice effect has appeared, and to remind the user that the advance notice effect for the first special information is continuing. Therefore, according to the feature vL1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the feature vL1, the information displayed in the game round of the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round in the specific game state in which the game round of the second special information can be executed. The predetermined suggestion information in which is changed will be continuously displayed. For this reason, it is possible to provide predetermined suggestion information by various methods, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic vM group>
The feature vM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its variants. In particular, Case 3 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to it.

[Feature vM1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
It is a means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning the jackpot), and the determination for the second special information. With a determination means that gives priority to the determination regarding the first special information.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 511 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means assists with a predetermined probability (probability of winning the electric service chief opening) when a predetermined condition (a game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is satisfied in a predetermined gaming state. A means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state is provided.
A predetermined suggestion information display means (the effect of the game time U32 in FIG. 521) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (an image of a bubble included in the precursory notice effect) in the game times of the predetermined number of times regarding the first special information.
A specific gaming state (specially) in which the gaming times for the second special information can be executed a specific number of times that is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined gaming state. (2) A specific game state generating means (a state in which the electric accessory 34a is normally open) that can generate a game state (a game state in which the game times for holding can be executed) and
A specific game image display means for displaying a specific game image corresponding to the specific game (shellfish image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for the special 2 hold 1) while the specific game state is generated.
When the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the continuous display means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information and (the image obtained by reducing the captured image is dedicated to the special 2). Means to display in the production display area SA),
Equipped with
The predetermined suggestion information display means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for displaying the predetermined suggestion information at a position displayed in the game times and not hindering the visual recognition of a symbol for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means.

According to the feature vM1, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information. For this reason, when the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means contains the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition and the special information to be produced with high expectation is present, the predetermined suggestion is made. With the information, it is possible to give a notice to the player that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. Further, according to the feature vM1, a specific game in which a specific number of times of a game about the second special information, which is equal to or more than the upper limit of the number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state, can be executed. A condition can occur. Then, while the specific game state is occurring, the specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute the game round for the second special information, and by displaying the specific game image in the game round for the second special information for this long time, the game is played. It is possible to improve the interest of the person. On the other hand, since the game round for the second special information takes a long time, when the game round for the second special information is completed, it is executed before the game round for the second special information is started. There was a risk that some players would completely forget that the advance notice effect had appeared in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information. In addition, by displaying the specific game image in the game times for the second special information, it becomes easier to forget that the advance notice effect appeared in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information. .. On the other hand, according to the feature vM1, when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, so that the player can see it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress forgetting that the advance notice effect has appeared, and to remind the user that the advance notice effect for the first special information is continuing. Therefore, according to the feature vM1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the feature vM1, it is possible to prevent the symbol for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means from becoming difficult to see due to the predetermined suggestion information. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic vN group>
The feature vN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its variants. In particular, Case 3 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to it.

[Feature vN1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
It is a means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning the jackpot), and the determination for the second special information. With a determination means that gives priority to the determination regarding the first special information.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 511 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means assists with a predetermined probability (probability of winning the electric service chief opening) when a predetermined condition (a game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is satisfied in a predetermined gaming state. A means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state is provided.
A predetermined suggestion information display means (the effect of the game time U32 in FIG. 521) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (an image of a bubble included in the precursory notice effect) in the game times of the predetermined number of times regarding the first special information.
A specific gaming state (specially) in which the gaming times for the second special information can be executed a specific number of times that is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined gaming state. 2 Specific game state generating means (normally long open state of the electric accessory 34a) capable of generating a game state in which the game times for holding can be executed), and
A specific game image display means for displaying a specific game image corresponding to the specific game (shellfish image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for the special 2 hold 1) while the specific game state is generated.
When the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the continuous display means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information and (the image obtained by reducing the captured image is dedicated to the special 2). Means to display in the production display area SA),
Equipped with
The predetermined suggestion information display means is
A means for displaying the predetermined suggestion information at a position shifted back and forth with respect to the display surface of the symbol for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means (layer in the modification 1) displayed in the game round. A gaming machine characterized by having a display using).

According to the feature vN1, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information. For this reason, when the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means contains the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition and the special information to be produced with high expectation is present, the predetermined suggestion is made. With the information, it is possible to give a notice to the player that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. Further, according to the feature vN1, the specific game in which the game times for the second special information can be executed a specific number of times, which is equal to or more than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state. A condition can occur. Then, while the specific game state is occurring, the specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute the game round for the second special information, and by displaying the specific game image in the game round for the second special information for this long time, the game is played. It is possible to improve the interest of the person. On the other hand, since the game round for the second special information takes a long time, when the game round for the second special information is completed, it is executed before the game round for the second special information is started. There was a risk that some players would completely forget that the advance notice effect had appeared in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information. In addition, by displaying the specific game image in the game times for the second special information, it becomes easier to forget that the advance notice effect appeared in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information. .. On the other hand, according to the feature vN1, when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, so that the player can see it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress forgetting that the advance notice effect has appeared, and to remind the user that the advance notice effect for the first special information is continuing. Therefore, according to the feature vN1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the feature vN1, when displaying the predetermined suggestion information in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information, the front and back are shifted with respect to the display surface of the symbol for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means. Since the predetermined suggestion information is displayed at the position, the display can be controlled independently in each of the layer in which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed and the layer in which the symbol is displayed. Therefore, according to the feature vN1, control can be simplified.

<Characteristic vO group>
The feature vO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its variants. In particular, Case 3 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to it.

[Feature vO1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
It is a means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning the jackpot), and the determination for the second special information. With a determination means that gives priority to the determination regarding the first special information.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 511 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means assists with a predetermined probability (probability of winning the electric service chief opening) when a predetermined condition (a game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is satisfied in a predetermined gaming state. A means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state is provided.
A predetermined suggestion information display means (the effect of the game time U32 in FIG. 521) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (an image of a bubble included in the precursory notice effect) in the game times of the predetermined number of times regarding the first special information.
A specific gaming state (specially) in which the gaming times for the second special information can be executed a specific number of times that is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined gaming state. (2) A specific game state generating means (a state in which the electric accessory 34a is normally open) that can generate a game state (a game state in which the game times for holding can be executed) and
A specific game image display means for displaying a specific game image corresponding to the specific game (shellfish image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for the special 2 hold 1) while the specific game state is generated.
When the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the continuous display means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information and (the image obtained by reducing the captured image is dedicated to the special 2). Means to display in the production display area SA),
Equipped with
The continuous display means
A means for displaying the predetermined suggestion information at a position shifted back and forth with respect to the display surface of the symbol for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means (layer in the modification 1) displayed in the game round. A gaming machine characterized by having a display using).

According to the feature vO1, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information. For this reason, when the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means contains the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition and the special information to be produced with high expectation is present, the predetermined suggestion is made. With the information, it is possible to give a notice to the player that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. Further, according to the feature vO1, a specific game in which a specific number of times, which is equal to or more than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state, can be played for the second special information can be executed. A condition can occur. Then, while the specific game state is occurring, the specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute the game round for the second special information, and by displaying the specific game image in the game round for the second special information for this long time, the game is played. It is possible to improve the interest of the person. On the other hand, since the game round for the second special information takes a long time, when the game round for the second special information is completed, it is executed before the game round for the second special information is started. There was a risk that some players would completely forget that the advance notice effect had appeared in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information. In addition, by displaying the specific game image in the game times for the second special information, it becomes easier to forget that the advance notice effect appeared in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information. .. On the other hand, according to the feature vO1, when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, so that the player can see it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress forgetting that the advance notice effect has appeared, and to remind the user that the advance notice effect regarding the first special information is continuing. Therefore, according to the feature vO1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the feature vO1, when displaying the specific game image and executing the game round for the second special information, the front and back are shifted with respect to the display surface of the symbol for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means. Since the predetermined suggestion information is displayed at the position, the display can be controlled independently in each of the layer in which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed and the layer in which the symbol is displayed. Therefore, according to the feature vO1, control can be simplified.

<Characteristic vP group>
The feature vP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its variants. In particular, Case 3 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to it.

[Feature vP1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
It is a means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning the jackpot), and the determination for the second special information. With a determination means that gives priority to the determination regarding the first special information.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 511 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means assists with a predetermined probability (probability of winning the electric service chief opening) when a predetermined condition (a game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is satisfied in a predetermined gaming state. A means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state is provided.
A predetermined suggestion information display means (the effect of the game time U32 in FIG. 521) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (an image of a bubble included in the precursory notice effect) in the game times of the predetermined number of times regarding the first special information.
A specific gaming state (specially) in which the gaming times for the second special information can be executed a specific number of times that is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined gaming state. (2) A specific game state generating means (a state in which the electric accessory 34a is normally open) that can generate a game state (a game state in which the game times for holding can be executed) and
A specific game image display means for displaying a specific game image corresponding to the specific game (shellfish image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for the special 2 hold 1) while the specific game state is generated.
When the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the continuous display means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information and (the image obtained by reducing the captured image is dedicated to the special 2). Means to display in the production display area SA),
Equipped with
The specific game image display means is
A means for displaying the specific game image at a position shifted back and forth with respect to the display surface of the symbol for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means (layer of the modification 1) displayed in the game times. In the structure, the upper layer for displaying the image SH of the shellfish is located in front of the design layer).

According to the feature vP1, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information. For this reason, when the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means contains the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition and the special information to be produced with high expectation is present, the predetermined suggestion is made. With the information, it is possible to give a notice to the player that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. Further, according to the feature vP1, a specific game in which a specific number of times of a game about the second special information, which is equal to or more than the upper limit of the number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state, can be executed. A condition can occur. Then, while the specific game state is occurring, the specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute the game round for the second special information, and by displaying the specific game image in the game round for the second special information for this long time, the game is played. It is possible to improve the interest of the person. On the other hand, since the game round for the second special information takes a long time, when the game round for the second special information is completed, it is executed before the game round for the second special information is started. There was a risk that some players would completely forget that the advance notice effect had appeared in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information. In addition, by displaying the specific game image in the game times for the second special information, it becomes easier to forget that the advance notice effect appeared in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information. .. On the other hand, according to the feature vP1, when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, so that the player can see it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress forgetting that the advance notice effect has appeared, and to remind the user that the advance notice effect for the first special information is continuing. Therefore, according to the feature vP1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the feature vP1, when displaying the specific game image corresponding to the specific game during the occurrence of the fixed game state, the front and back are shifted with respect to the display surface of the symbol for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means. Since the specific effect image is displayed at the position, the drawing can be controlled independently in each of the layer in which the specific effect image is displayed and the layer in which the symbol is displayed. Therefore, according to the feature vP1, control can be simplified.

<Characteristic vQ group>
The feature vQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its variants. In particular, Case 3 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to it.

[Feature vQ1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
It is a means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning the jackpot), and the determination for the second special information. With a determination means that gives priority to the determination regarding the first special information.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 511 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means assists with a predetermined probability (probability of winning the electric service chief opening) when a predetermined condition (a game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is satisfied in a predetermined gaming state. A means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state is provided.
A predetermined suggestion information display means (the effect of the game time U32 in FIG. 521) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (an image of a bubble included in the precursory notice effect) in the game times of the predetermined number of times regarding the first special information.
A specific gaming state (specially) in which the gaming times for the second special information can be executed a specific number of times that is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined gaming state. (2) A specific game state generating means (a state in which the electric accessory 34a is normally open) that can generate a game state (a game state in which the game times for holding can be executed) and
A specific game image display means for displaying a specific game image corresponding to the specific game (shellfish image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for the special 2 hold 1) while the specific game state is generated.
When the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the continuous display means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information and (the image obtained by reducing the captured image is dedicated to the special 2). Means to display in the production display area SA),
Equipped with
The predetermined suggestion information suggests a situation in the game round of the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round of the second special information executed by displaying the specific game image. A gaming machine characterized by including information to be executed (information expressing a captured image described as a modification in characters).

According to the feature vQ1, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information. For this reason, when the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means contains the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition and the special information to be produced with high expectation is present, the predetermined suggestion is made. With the information, it is possible to give a notice to the player that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. Further, according to the feature vQ1, a specific game in which a specific number of times of the game for the second special information, which is equal to or more than the upper limit of the number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined game state, can be executed. A condition can occur. Then, while the specific game state is occurring, the specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute the game round for the second special information, and by displaying the specific game image in the game round for the second special information for this long time, the game is played. It is possible to improve the interest of the person. On the other hand, since the game round for the second special information takes a long time, when the game round for the second special information is completed, it is executed before the game round for the second special information is started. There was a risk that some players would completely forget that the advance notice effect had appeared in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information. In addition, by displaying the specific game image in the game times for the second special information, it becomes easier to forget that the advance notice effect appeared in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information. .. On the other hand, according to the feature vQ1, when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, so that the player can see it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the forgetting that the advance notice effect has appeared, and to remind the user that the advance notice effect regarding the first special information is continuing. Therefore, according to the feature vQ1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the feature vQ1 suggests a situation in the game round of the first special information executed immediately before the start of the game round in the specific game state in which the game round of the second special information can be executed. The information will continue to be displayed. For this reason, it is possible to provide predetermined suggestion information by various methods, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic vR group>
The feature vR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and its variants. In particular, Case 3 in the eleventh embodiment corresponds to it.

[Feature vR1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry means (second start port 34) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first entry means or the second entry means.
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Acquired information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, and
It is a means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the first predetermined condition (matching the value for winning the jackpot), and the determination for the second special information. With a determination means that gives priority to the determination regarding the first special information.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended once as one game time, the game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time. The MPU 62 on the board 61 side and the game times control process of FIG. 511 executed by the MPU 62).
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the second entry means, and
The states of the auxiliary means are the first state in which the entry of the game ball into the second entry means is impossible or difficult, and the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state, which is a state that enables or facilitates a sphere,
The first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode are control modes that control the state transition means and have different modes in which the state transition means transitions the state of the auxiliary means. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means assists with a predetermined probability (probability of winning the electric service chief opening) when a predetermined condition (a game ball passes through the through gates 35a and 35b) is satisfied in a predetermined gaming state. A means for switching the state of the means from the first state to the second state is provided.
A predetermined suggestion information display means (the effect of the game time U32 in FIG. 521) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (an image of a bubble included in the precursory notice effect) in the game times of the predetermined number of times regarding the first special information.
A specific gaming state (specially) in which the gaming times for the second special information can be executed a specific number of times that is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in the predetermined gaming state. (2) A specific game state generating means (a state in which the electric accessory 34a is normally open) that can generate a game state (a game state in which the game times for holding can be executed) and
A specific game image display means for displaying a specific game image corresponding to the specific game (shellfish image SH displayed in the variable display δ11 and the stop display δ12 for the special 2 hold 1) while the specific game state is generated.
When the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the continuous display means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information and (the image obtained by reducing the captured image is dedicated to the special 2). Means to display in the production display area SA),
Equipped with
The predetermined gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the control mode is a gaming state in which the first control mode is the first control mode.

According to the feature vR1, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information. For this reason, when the first special information stored in the acquired information storage means includes the special information satisfying the first predetermined condition and the special information to be produced with high expectation is present, the predetermined suggestion is made. With the information, it is possible to give a notice to the player that the first special information satisfying the first predetermined condition exists in the first special information. Further, according to the feature vR1, a specific game in which a specific number of times of games for the second special information, which is equal to or more than the upper limit number of the second special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined game state, can be executed. A condition can occur. Then, while the specific game state is occurring, the specific game image corresponding to the specific game is displayed. For this reason, it takes a long time to execute the game round for the second special information, and by displaying the specific game image in the game round for the second special information for this long time, the game is played. It is possible to improve the interest of the person. On the other hand, since the game round for the second special information takes a long time, when the game round for the second special information is completed, it is executed before the game round for the second special information is started. There was a risk that some players would completely forget that the advance notice effect had appeared in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information. In addition, by displaying the specific game image in the game times for the second special information, it becomes easier to forget that the advance notice effect appeared in the predetermined number of game times for the first special information. .. On the other hand, according to the feature vR1, when the specific game image is displayed and the game round for the second special information is executed, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, so that the player can see it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress forgetting that the advance notice effect has appeared, and to remind the user that the advance notice effect for the first special information is continuing. Therefore, according to the feature vR1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the feature vR1, in the predetermined gaming state in which the control mode is the first control mode, the advance notice effect of the first special information can be performed.

<Characteristic wA group>
The feature wA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its variants.

[Characteristic wA1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
Acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number, and
An unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Unexecuted hold display means to display and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value that wins a big hit) for each game.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is terminated as one of the game rotation operations, the game rotation control means for controlling the game rotation operation. ,
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition is set from high to low according to the high or low of the possibility. The pending change means suggested by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages, and
A means for limiting the direction of change in the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in one direction from the lower side to the upper side.
A predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game turn after the game turn operation by the game turn control means can be displayed as the already executed hold display information (already executed hold display icon Z) (already executed). Already executed hold display means to display the hold display area Dz),
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information, a first display mode (for example, a green display color) and a second display mode (for example, a stage higher than the first display mode among the plurality of stages). For example, the display color of red), and has at least
When specific hold display information moves to the already executed hold display area, under specific conditions (by moving the variable execution hold display icon Y to the already executed hold display area, a predetermined number of already executed hold displays are displayed. (In a situation where all the executed hold display icons Z displayed in the area Dz are aligned in the same display color), when the specific hold display information is displayed in the second display mode. The case where the display is performed in the first display mode is more advantageous for the player (notice of pending execution).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to this feature, the number of unexecuted hold display information corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is displayed in the unexecuted hold display area, and the game times control means is displayed in the already executed hold display area. The hold display information corresponding to the game times after the game times operation by is displayed as the already executed hold display information. Then, when the specific hold display information shifts to the already executed hold display area, under the specific conditions, the specific hold display information is displayed in the first display mode as compared with the case where the specific hold display information is displayed in the second display mode. When it is displayed, it is more advantageous for the player. Therefore, even in the first display mode in which the possibility that the special information corresponding to the hold display information satisfies the predetermined condition is lower than that in the second display mode, the hold display information is the second display mode under specific conditions. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that he / she wants to move to the already executed hold display area while keeping the first display mode without changing to the display mode. Further, in the first display mode of the reserved display information, the special information set for the first display mode is different from the stage of the possibility that a predetermined condition is satisfied, which is a special advantage for the player. It can be meaningful. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic wA2]
Features The gaming machine described in wA1.
It is provided with means for changing the display mode of the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area (the assist setting process in step S9 of FIG. 567, and cases 3 and 4 are applicable). A featured gaming machine.

According to this feature, the display mode of the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area may change. Here, the fact that the specific conditions are met means that, for example, when the specific hold display information shifts to the already executed hold display area, the display modes of the already executed hold display information in the already executed hold display area are all the same. Assuming that the display modes are aligned with each other, for example, all the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is displayed to the player in the same display mode. Even in a situation where the modes are not aligned, the display mode of the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area may change, and specific hold display information may be displayed in the already executed hold display area. By migrating, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that all the already executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas may be aligned in the same display mode. Then, the display mode of the already executed hold display information actually displayed in the already executed hold display area changes, and the specific hold display information shifts to the already executed hold display area, so that a predetermined number of already executed hold displays are displayed. When all the already executed hold display information displayed in the area is aligned in the same display mode, it is possible to give great joy to the player.

[Characteristic wA3]
The gaming machine according to the feature wA1 or the feature wA2.
A gaming machine characterized in that the display shape of the already executed hold display information is different from the display shape of the unexecuted hold display information.

According to this feature, since the display shape of the already executed hold display information is different from the display shape of the unexecuted hold display information, it is easy to distinguish between the unexecuted hold display information and the already executed hold display information. Therefore, it becomes easy to determine that the specific hold display information has moved from the unexecuted hold display area to the already executed hold display area via the variable execution hold display area. Therefore, by improving the visibility, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic wA4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features wA1 to the feature wA3.
A gaming state transition means capable of shifting the gaming state of the gaming machine from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
In the second gaming state, when the specific hold display information shifts to the already executed hold display area, the first hold display information is displayed in the second display mode. A means of not performing control that is more advantageous to the player when it is displayed in the display mode of
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to this feature, in the second game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, when the specific hold display information shifts to the already executed hold display area, the specific hold display information is second. The control that is more advantageous to the player is not executed when the information is displayed in the first display mode than when the display mode is displayed. The second gaming state is already more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the need for the new control described above is lower than that of the first gaming state. Therefore, in this feature, in the second game state, the control can be simplified by not performing the above-mentioned new control, and in the first game state, the specific hold display information is already executed in the hold display area. In the case of shifting to, the above-mentioned case where the specific reserved display information is displayed in the first display mode is more advantageous to the player than the case where the specific hold display information is displayed in the second display mode. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing the new control.

[Characteristic wA5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features wA1 to the feature wA4.
The predetermined number of displayable execution hold display information in the already executed hold display area is constant (configuration of modification 13).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to this feature, since the predetermined number of the already executed hold display information that can be displayed in the already executed hold display area is constant, the display modes of the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area are all the same. The difficulty level is constant. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the change in the difficulty level from giving the player an unnecessary feeling of expectation or disappointment.

[Feature wA6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features wA1 to the feature wA5.
The already-executed hold display information displayed in the already-executed hold display area is deleted based on the establishment of the deletion condition (the already-executed hold display icon Z is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the determination that the game has not been performed. A gaming machine characterized by having a means (to erase).

According to this feature, by erasing the already-executed hold display information displayed in the already-executed hold display area based on the establishment of the erasing condition, when the player is replaced, the information is accumulated by the game by the previous player. It is possible to suppress the remaining of the already executed hold display information. Therefore, when the player is replaced, the game can be started without the already executed hold display information in the already executed hold display area, and the already executed hold display information remains in the already executed hold display area. It does not make the player feel annoyed.

[Feature wA7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features wA1 to the feature wA6.
An effect (female character effect setting process) showing that the player is highly advantageous when the specific hold display information shifts to the already executed hold display area in the first display mode under the specific conditions. A gaming machine characterized by having a means of performing.

According to this feature, when a specific hold display information is transferred to the already executed hold display area in the first display mode under a specific condition, an effect showing that the player has a high advantage is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give a greater sense of expectation to the player.

[Feature wA8]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features wA1 to the feature wA7.
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the end of the gaming rotation operation is provided. ,
A gaming machine characterized in that the occurrence of the special gaming state is determined to be highly advantageous to the player.

According to this feature, when a specific hold display information shifts to an already executed hold display area, a special game is performed when the specific hold display information is displayed in the first display mode under specific conditions. The occurrence of the state is confirmed. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a greater expectation that the hold display information that shifts to the already executed hold display area is displayed in the first display mode under specific conditions. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic wA9]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features wA1 to the feature wA8.
The holding change means is characterized by comprising means for changing the display color of the unexecuted hold display information as one aspect of changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information.

According to this feature, by changing the display color of the unexecuted hold display information, it is possible to suggest the high or low possibility that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition. Further, since the display mode is the display color, it is clear at a glance whether or not all the colors are the same. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature wA10]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features wA1 to the feature wA9.
Means for changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area from the first display mode to the second display mode (process for removing the same color at the time of disengagement in FIG. 568). ) Is provided as a gaming machine.

According to this feature, the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area can be changed from the first display mode to the second display mode. Then, when the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, the unexecuted hold display information is specific. When the information is moved to the already executed hold display area as the hold display information, the first display mode is not used. For this reason, the player has already displayed the specific hold display information in the first display mode in the unexecuted hold display area, and the specific hold display information remains in the first display mode under the specific conditions. We were expecting to move to the execution hold display area and increase the advantage for the player, but it changed to the second display mode, and the expected advantage was not given. I am disappointed and disappointed. On the other hand, there remains an expectation only for the second display mode in which the special information corresponding to the unexecuted pending display information is more likely to satisfy a predetermined condition than the first display mode. As described above, according to this feature, it is possible to give the player the ups and downs of contradictory emotions such as a feeling of expectation and a feeling of disappointment, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature wA11]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature wA1 to the feature wA10.
Of the plurality of unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area, the unexecuted hold display information on the side closest to the already executed hold display area is displayed in a mode other than the first display mode. The gaming machine is characterized by comprising means for changing from the display mode of the above to the first display mode (assist setting process in the process for notifying the already executed execution in FIG. 567).

According to this feature, among a plurality of unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area, one of the unexecuted hold display information on the side closest to the already executed hold display area is displayed in the first display mode. Since the display mode other than the above may be changed to the first display mode, the specific hold display information that shifts to the already executed hold display area is displayed in the first display mode under specific conditions for the player. It is possible to give great joy to the player who expected the phenomenon that the advantage of the game is high.

[Feature wA12]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature wA1 to the feature wA11.
Of the plurality of unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area, the unexecuted hold display information on the side closest to the already executed hold display area is displayed from the first display mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for changing to a display mode other than the first display mode (processing for removing the same color at the time of disengagement).

According to this feature, among a plurality of unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area, one of the unexecuted hold display information on the side closest to the already executed hold display area is displayed in the first display mode. Since the display mode may be changed to a display mode other than the first display mode, the specific hold display information that shifts to the already executed hold display area is displayed in the first display mode under specific conditions for the player. It is possible to give a great disappointment to a player who has expected that a phenomenon such as high advantage will occur.

[Characteristic wA13]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature wA1 to the feature wA12.
The first display mode is the first display color of the unexecuted hold display information.
The second display mode is the second display color of the unexecuted hold display information.
A first display color changing means (already executed in FIG. 567) that changes the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area from a display color other than the first display color to the first display color. Assist setting process in hold notice process) and
When the display color is changed by the first display color changing means, the shape of the unexecuted hold display information to be changed is displayed in the unexecuted hold display area, and the display color is changed. A means for changing the shape of the unexecuted hold display information other than the unexecuted hold display information to be made to a shape different from the shape of the unexecuted hold display information (modification example 5)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to this feature, when changing the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area from a display color other than the first display color to the first display color, the display color is changed. The shape of the unexecuted hold display information for which the display color is to be changed is different from the shape of the unexecuted hold display information other than the unexecuted hold display information for which the display color is to be changed, which is displayed in the unexecuted hold display area. Since the display color is changed to the first display color, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change of the unexecuted hold display information of the target whose display color is to be changed to the first display color, which gives the player a further sense of expectation. can do.

[Feature wA14]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature wA1 to the feature wA13.
Display mode changing means for changing the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area from a display mode other than the first display mode to the first display mode (for notice of already executed hold in FIG. 567). Assist setting processing in processing) and
When the display mode is changed by the display mode changing means, the unexecuted pending display information of the object for which the display mode is changed includes a moving object (a tangible object such as a petal, a paper wipe, a fireball, or an intangible object such as a light beam, a laser beam, or a radio wave. Means to reach (object) and (modification example 5)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to this feature, when the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is changed from the display mode other than the first display mode to the first display mode, the moving body is changed to the unexecuted hold display information. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the fact that the unexecuted hold display information of the target whose display mode is changed changes to the first display mode, and to give the player a further sense of expectation. Can be done.

<Characteristic wB group>
The feature wB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its variants.

[Feature wB1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
Acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number, and
An unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Unexecuted hold display means to display and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit) for each game.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is terminated as one of the game rotation operations, the game rotation control means for controlling the game rotation operation. ,
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition is set from high to low according to the high or low of the possibility. The pending change means suggested by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages, and
A means for limiting the direction of change in the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in one direction from the lower side to the upper side.
A predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game turn after the game turn operation by the game turn control means can be displayed as the already executed hold display information (already executed hold display icon Z) (already executed). Already executed hold display means to display the hold display area Dz),
Means for changing the display mode of the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area (the assist setting process in step S9 of FIG. 567, cases 3 and 4 are applicable).
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information, a first display mode (for example, a green display color) and a second display mode (for example, a stage higher than the first display mode among the plurality of stages). For example, the display color of red), and has at least
When specific hold display information moves to the already executed hold display area, under specific conditions (by moving the variable execution hold display icon Y to the already executed hold display area, a predetermined number of already executed hold displays are displayed. (In a situation where all the executed hold display icons Z displayed in the area Dz are aligned in the same display color), when the specific hold display information is displayed in the second display mode. The case where the display is performed in the first display mode is more advantageous for the player (notice of pending execution).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to this feature, the number of unexecuted hold display information corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is displayed in the unexecuted hold display area, and the game times control means is displayed in the already executed hold display area. The hold display information corresponding to the game times after the game times operation by is displayed as the already executed hold display information. Then, when the specific hold display information shifts to the already executed hold display area, under the specific conditions, the specific hold display information is displayed in the first display mode as compared with the case where the specific hold display information is displayed in the second display mode. When it is displayed, it is more advantageous for the player. Therefore, even in the first display mode in which the possibility that the special information corresponding to the hold display information satisfies the predetermined condition is lower than that in the second display mode, the hold display information is the second display mode under specific conditions. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that he / she wants to move to the already executed hold display area while keeping the first display mode without changing to the display mode. Further, in the first display mode of the reserved display information, the special information set for the first display mode is different from the stage of the possibility that a predetermined condition is satisfied, which is a special advantage for the player. It can be meaningful. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, the display mode of the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area may change. Here, the fact that the specific conditions are met means that, for example, when the specific hold display information shifts to the already executed hold display area, the display modes of the already executed hold display information in the already executed hold display area are all the same. Assuming that the display modes are aligned with each other, for example, all the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is displayed to the player in the same display mode. Even in a situation where the modes are not aligned, the display mode of the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area may change, and specific hold display information may be displayed in the already executed hold display area. By migrating, it is possible to have a feeling of expectation that all the already executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas may be aligned in the same display mode. Then, the display mode of the already executed hold display information actually displayed in the already executed hold display area changes, and the specific hold display information shifts to the already executed hold display area, so that a predetermined number of already executed hold displays are displayed. When all the already executed hold display information displayed in the area is aligned in the same display mode, it is possible to give great joy to the player.

<Characteristic wC group>
The feature wC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its variants.

[Feature wC1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
Acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number, and
An unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Unexecuted hold display means to display and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit) for each game.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is terminated as one of the game rotation operations, the game rotation control means for controlling the game rotation operation is used. ,
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition is set from high to low according to the high or low of the possibility. The pending change means suggested by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages, and
A means for limiting the direction of change in the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in one direction from the lower side to the upper side.
A predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game turn after the game turn operation by the game turn control means can be displayed as the already executed hold display information (already executed hold display icon Z) (already executed). Already executed hold display means to display the hold display area Dz),
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information, a first display mode (for example, a green display color) and a second display mode (for example, a stage higher than the first display mode among the plurality of stages). For example, the display color of red), and has at least
The display shape of the already executed hold display information is different from the display shape of the unexecuted hold display information.
When specific hold display information moves to the already executed hold display area, under specific conditions (by moving the variable execution hold display icon Y to the already executed hold display area, a predetermined number of already executed hold displays are displayed. (In a situation where all the executed hold display icons Z displayed in the area Dz are aligned in the same display color), when the specific hold display information is displayed in the second display mode. The case where the display is performed in the first display mode is more advantageous for the player (notice of pending execution).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to this feature, the number of unexecuted hold display information corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is displayed in the unexecuted hold display area, and the game times control means is displayed in the already executed hold display area. The hold display information corresponding to the game times after the game times operation by is displayed as the already executed hold display information. Then, when the specific hold display information shifts to the already executed hold display area, under the specific conditions, the specific hold display information is displayed in the first display mode as compared with the case where the specific hold display information is displayed in the second display mode. When it is displayed, it is more advantageous for the player. Therefore, even in the first display mode in which the possibility that the special information corresponding to the hold display information satisfies the predetermined condition is lower than that in the second display mode, the hold display information is the second display mode under specific conditions. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that he / she wants to move to the already executed hold display area while keeping the first display mode without changing to the display mode. Further, in the first display mode of the reserved display information, the special information set for the first display mode is different from the stage of the possibility that a predetermined condition is satisfied, which is a special advantage for the player. It can be meaningful. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since the display shape of the already executed hold display information is different from the display shape of the unexecuted hold display information, it becomes easy to distinguish between the unexecuted hold display information and the already executed hold display information. Therefore, it becomes easy to determine that the specific hold display information has moved from the unexecuted hold display area to the already executed hold display area via the variable execution hold display area. Therefore, by improving the visibility, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic wD group>
The feature wD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its variants.

[Feature wD1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
Acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number, and
An unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Unexecuted hold display means to display and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit) for each game.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is terminated as one of the game rotation operations, the game rotation control means for controlling the game rotation operation is used. ,
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition is set from high to low according to the high or low of the possibility. The pending change means suggested by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages, and
A means for limiting the direction of change in the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in one direction from the lower side to the upper side.
A predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game turn after the game turn operation by the game turn control means can be displayed as the already executed hold display information (already executed hold display icon Z) (already executed). Already executed hold display means to display the hold display area Dz),
A gaming state transition means capable of shifting the gaming state of the gaming machine from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information, a first display mode (for example, a green display color) and a second display mode (for example, a stage higher than the first display mode among the plurality of stages). For example, the display color of red), and has at least
When specific hold display information moves to the already executed hold display area, under specific conditions (by moving the variable execution hold display icon Y to the already executed hold display area, a predetermined number of already executed hold displays are displayed. (In a situation where all the executed hold display icons Z displayed in the area Dz are aligned in the same display color), when the specific hold display information is displayed in the second display mode. The case where the display is performed in the first display mode is more advantageous for the player (notice of pending execution).
In the second gaming state, when the specific hold display information shifts to the already executed hold display area, the first hold display information is displayed in the second display mode. A gaming machine characterized in that a means for not performing control is provided, which is more advantageous to the player when the information is displayed in the display mode of.

According to this feature, the number of unexecuted hold display information corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is displayed in the unexecuted hold display area, and the game times control means is displayed in the already executed hold display area. The hold display information corresponding to the game times after the game times operation by is displayed as the already executed hold display information. Then, when the specific hold display information shifts to the already executed hold display area, under the specific conditions, the specific hold display information is displayed in the first display mode as compared with the case where the specific hold display information is displayed in the second display mode. When it is displayed, it is more advantageous for the player. Therefore, even in the first display mode in which the possibility that the special information corresponding to the hold display information satisfies the predetermined condition is lower than that in the second display mode, the hold display information is the second display mode under specific conditions. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that he / she wants to move to the already executed hold display area while keeping the first display mode without changing to the display mode. Further, in the first display mode of the reserved display information, the special information set for the first display mode is different from the stage of the possibility that a predetermined condition is satisfied, which is a special advantage for the player. It can be meaningful. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, in the second gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, when the specific hold display information shifts to the already executed hold display area, the specific hold display information becomes the first. The control that is more advantageous to the player is not executed when the information is displayed in the first display mode than when it is displayed in the second display mode. The second gaming state is already more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the need for the new control described above is lower than that of the first gaming state. Therefore, in this feature, in the second game state, the control can be simplified by not performing the above-mentioned new control, and in the first game state, the specific hold display information is already executed in the hold display area. In the case of shifting to, the above-mentioned case where the specific reserved display information is displayed in the first display mode is more advantageous to the player than the case where the specific hold display information is displayed in the second display mode. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing the new control.

<Characteristic wE group>
The feature wE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its variants.

[Feature wE1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
Acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number, and
An unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Unexecuted hold display means to display and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value that wins a big hit) for each game.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is terminated as one of the game rotation operations, the game rotation control means for controlling the game rotation operation is used. ,
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition is set from high to low according to the high or low of the possibility. The pending change means suggested by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages, and
A means for limiting the direction of change in the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in one direction from the lower side to the upper side.
A predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game turn after the game turn operation by the game turn control means can be displayed as the already executed hold display information (already executed hold display icon Z) (already executed). Already executed hold display means to display the hold display area Dz),
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information, a first display mode (for example, a green display color) and a second display mode (for example, a stage higher than the first display mode among the plurality of stages). For example, the display color of red), and has at least
The predetermined number of pieces that can display the already-executed hold display information in the already-executed hold display area is constant.
When specific hold display information moves to the already executed hold display area, under specific conditions (by moving the variable execution hold display icon Y to the already executed hold display area, a predetermined number of already executed hold displays are displayed. (In a situation where all the executed hold display icons Z displayed in the area Dz are aligned in the same display color), when the specific hold display information is displayed in the second display mode. The case where the display is performed in the first display mode is more advantageous for the player (notice of pending execution).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to this feature, the number of unexecuted hold display information corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is displayed in the unexecuted hold display area, and the game times control means is displayed in the already executed hold display area. The hold display information corresponding to the game times after the game times operation by is displayed as the already executed hold display information. Then, when the specific hold display information shifts to the already executed hold display area, under the specific conditions, the specific hold display information is displayed in the first display mode as compared with the case where the specific hold display information is displayed in the second display mode. When it is displayed, it is more advantageous for the player. Therefore, even in the first display mode in which the possibility that the special information corresponding to the hold display information satisfies the predetermined condition is lower than that in the second display mode, the hold display information is the second display mode under specific conditions. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that he / she wants to move to the already executed hold display area while keeping the first display mode without changing to the display mode. Further, in the first display mode of the reserved display information, the special information set for the first display mode is different from the stage of the possibility that a predetermined condition is satisfied, which is a special advantage for the player. It can be meaningful. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since the predetermined number of the already executed hold display information that can be displayed in the already executed hold display area is constant, the display mode of the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area is different. The difficulty level for all the same is constant. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the change in the difficulty level from giving the player an unnecessary feeling of expectation or disappointment.

<Characteristic wF group>
The feature wF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its variants.

[Feature wF1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
Acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number, and
An unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Unexecuted hold display means to display and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value that wins a big hit) for each game.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is terminated as one of the game rotation operations, the game rotation control means for controlling the game rotation operation is used. ,
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition is set from high to low according to the high or low of the possibility. The pending change means suggested by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages, and
A means for limiting the direction of change in the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in one direction from the lower side to the upper side.
A predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game turn after the game turn operation by the game turn control means can be displayed as the already executed hold display information (already executed hold display icon Z) (already executed). Already executed hold display means to display the hold display area Dz),
The already-executed hold display information displayed in the already-executed hold display area is deleted based on the establishment of the deletion condition (the already-executed hold display icon Z is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the determination that the game has not been performed. (Erase) means and
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information, a first display mode (for example, a green display color) and a second display mode (for example, a stage higher than the first display mode among the plurality of stages). For example, the display color of red), and has at least
When specific hold display information moves to the already executed hold display area, under specific conditions (by moving the variable execution hold display icon Y to the already executed hold display area, a predetermined number of already executed hold displays are displayed. (In a situation where all the executed hold display icons Z displayed in the area Dz are aligned in the same display color), when the specific hold display information is displayed in the second display mode. The case where the display is performed in the first display mode is more advantageous for the player (notice of pending execution).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to this feature, the number of unexecuted hold display information corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is displayed in the unexecuted hold display area, and the game times control means is displayed in the already executed hold display area. The hold display information corresponding to the game times after the game times operation by is displayed as the already executed hold display information. Then, when the specific hold display information shifts to the already executed hold display area, under the specific conditions, the specific hold display information is displayed in the first display mode as compared with the case where the specific hold display information is displayed in the second display mode. When it is displayed, it is more advantageous for the player. Therefore, even in the first display mode in which the possibility that the special information corresponding to the hold display information satisfies the predetermined condition is lower than that in the second display mode, the hold display information is the second display mode under specific conditions. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that he / she wants to move to the already executed hold display area while keeping the first display mode without changing to the display mode. Further, in the first display mode of the reserved display information, the special information set for the first display mode is different from the stage of the possibility that a predetermined condition is satisfied, which is a special advantage for the player. It can be meaningful. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, when the player is replaced by erasing the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area based on the establishment of the erasing condition, the game by the previous player is performed. It is possible to suppress the remaining of the already executed hold display information stored by. Therefore, when the player is replaced, the game can be started without the already executed hold display information in the already executed hold display area, and the already executed hold display information remains in the already executed hold display area. It does not make the player feel annoyed.

<Characteristic wG group>
The feature wG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its variants.

[Feature wG1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
Acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number, and
An unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Unexecuted hold display means to display and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit) for each game.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is terminated as one of the game rotation operations, the game rotation control means for controlling the game rotation operation is used. ,
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition is set from high to low according to the high or low of the possibility. The pending change means suggested by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages, and
A means for limiting the direction of change in the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in one direction from the lower side to the upper side.
A predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game turn after the game turn operation by the game turn control means can be displayed as the already executed hold display information (already executed hold display icon Z) (already executed). Already executed hold display means to display the hold display area Dz),
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information, a first display mode (for example, a green display color) and a second display mode (for example, a stage higher than the first display mode among the plurality of stages). For example, the display color of red), and has at least
When specific hold display information moves to the already executed hold display area, under specific conditions (by moving the variable execution hold display icon Y to the already executed hold display area, a predetermined number of already executed hold displays are displayed. (In a situation where all the executed hold display icons Z displayed in the area Dz are aligned in the same display color), when the specific hold display information is displayed in the second display mode. The case where the display is performed in the first display mode is more advantageous for the player (notice of pending execution).
An effect (female character effect setting process) showing that when the specific hold display information shifts to the already executed hold display area in the first display mode under the specific conditions, it is highly advantageous for the player. A gaming machine characterized by having a means of performing.

According to this feature, the number of unexecuted hold display information corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is displayed in the unexecuted hold display area, and the game times control means is displayed in the already executed hold display area. The hold display information corresponding to the game times after the game times operation by is displayed as the already executed hold display information. Then, when the specific hold display information shifts to the already executed hold display area, under the specific conditions, the specific hold display information is displayed in the first display mode as compared with the case where the specific hold display information is displayed in the second display mode. When it is displayed, it is more advantageous for the player. Therefore, even in the first display mode in which the possibility that the special information corresponding to the hold display information satisfies the predetermined condition is lower than that in the second display mode, the hold display information is the second display mode under specific conditions. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that he / she wants to move to the already executed hold display area while keeping the first display mode without changing to the display mode. Further, in the first display mode of the reserved display information, the special information set for the first display mode is different from the stage of the possibility that a predetermined condition is satisfied, which is a special advantage for the player. It can be meaningful. Therefore, according to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, when a specific hold display information is transferred to the already executed hold display area in the first display mode under a specific condition, an effect showing that the player has a high advantage is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation.

<Characteristic WH group>
The feature wH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its variants 15.

[Characteristic wH1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
Acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number, and
An unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Unexecuted hold display means to display and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value that wins a big hit) for each game.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended as one of the game rotation operations, the game rotation operation (variable game that changes the symbol). And the game time control means to control
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the end of the gaming rotation operation, and the special gaming state generating means.
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition is set from high to low according to the high or low of the possibility. The pending change means suggested by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages, and
A means for limiting the direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in one direction from the lower side to the upper side.
A predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game turn after the game turn operation by the game turn control means can be displayed as the already executed hold display information (already executed hold display icon Z) (already executed). Already executed hold display means to display the hold display area Dz),
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information, the first display mode (white) on the lowermost side among the plurality of stages and the second display mode (white) which is a higher stage than the first display mode (the first display mode). Have at least a color above white, such as blue),
All the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the second display mode, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first. In the case of the display mode of 1, the game motion of a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion (a predetermined premium reach effect can be executed to display a predetermined premium image).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to this feature, all the already executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted displayed in the unexecuted hold display area. When the hold display information is the first display mode (white), the game motion of a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion, so that all the existing games displayed in the already executed hold display area for the player can be displayed. A new expectation that has never existed before, such as wanting the execution hold display information to be aligned with the second display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area to be aligned with the first display mode. Can be embraced.

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the game rotation operation is executed, the hold display information corresponding to the game rotation of the game rotation operation is displayed in a display mode with a high possibility of satisfying a predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game round operation is completed, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the hold display information corresponding to the game times after the game times operation is executed is displayed as the already executed hold display information, and all the already executed hold displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas. When the display information is the second display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first display mode, the game operation of the predetermined mode is displayed as the game rotation operation. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already executed hold display information corresponding to the game times in which the game times operation is completed without satisfying the predetermined condition, and it is possible to attract the attention of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature wH2]
The gaming machine described in the feature wH1.
All the executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of the executed hold display areas is the first display mode (white), and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area. Is the second display mode (blue), the gaming machine is characterized in that the result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state (the image notifying the jackpot winning) can be displayed as the result of the gaming round. ..

According to this feature, all the executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of the executed hold display areas is the first display mode, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area. Is the second display mode, since the result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state can be displayed as the result of the game round, all the already executed executions displayed in the already executed execution hold display area are displayed to the player. There is a new expectation that has never been seen before, such as wanting the hold display information to be aligned in the first display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area to be aligned in the second display mode. Can be embraced.

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the game rotation operation is executed, the hold display information corresponding to the game rotation of the game rotation operation is displayed in a display mode with a high possibility of satisfying a predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game round operation is completed, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the hold display information corresponding to the game times after the game times operation is executed is displayed as the already executed hold display information, and all the already executed hold displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas. When the display information is the first display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the second display mode, it corresponds to the occurrence of a special gaming state as a result of the game times. The result can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already executed hold display information corresponding to the game times in which the game times operation is completed without satisfying the predetermined condition, and it is possible to attract the attention of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic wH3]
The gaming machine according to the feature wH1 or the feature wH2.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for changing the display mode of the already executed hold display information in the already executed hold display area (changing the display mode of the already executed hold display icon Z in the already executed hold display area Dz). ..

According to this feature, since the means for changing the display mode of the already executed hold display information in the already executed hold display area is provided, the player is displayed, for example, in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas as it is. Even in a situation where all the display modes of the already executed hold display information are not aligned in the same display mode, the display mode of the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area may be different. It is possible to have a feeling of expectation that all the already executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas may be aligned in the same display mode. Then, the display mode of the already executed hold display information actually displayed in the already executed hold display area changes, and all the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is displayed in the same manner. If the modes are aligned, the player can be greatly delighted, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area should be aligned in the same display mode. It can give a sense of expectation.

[Characteristic wH4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature wH1 to the feature wH3.
A gaming machine characterized in that the already executed hold display information in the already executed hold display area is displayed in a display mode different from the unexecuted hold display information in the unexecuted hold display area.

According to this feature, the already executed hold display information in the already executed hold display area is displayed in a display mode different from the unexecuted hold display information in the unexecuted hold display area. It is possible to give recognition that the displayed information is different from the unexecuted pending display information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that there is unexecuted hold information for which the game times have not been executed yet in the situation where the already executed hold display information is displayed.

[Feature wH5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features wH1 to the feature wH4.
A gaming machine characterized in that the number of the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area is a certain number.

According to this feature, since the number of the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area is a certain number, it is difficult to arrange all the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area in the same display mode. The degree becomes constant. Therefore, it is possible to avoid changing the difficulty level and giving the player an unnecessary feeling of expectation or disappointment.

[Feature wH6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features wH1 to the feature wH5.
It is characterized by comprising means for erasing the already-executed hold display information displayed in the already-executed hold display area based on the establishment of the erasing condition (erasing based on the establishment of the erasing condition that a predetermined time has elapsed). A game machine.

According to this feature, the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area is deleted based on the establishment of the deletion condition. Therefore, for example, the previous player's game has already been performed in the already executed hold display area. It is possible to prevent the next player from feeling annoyed because the execution hold display information remains.

Specifically, for example, a case where a configuration in which the erasing condition is satisfied when the game has not been played for a predetermined time in the game machine will be described. In the case of adopting this configuration, if the player who was playing the game on the game machine stops the game and the next player newly starts the game on the game machine after a predetermined time has elapsed, the previous game is played. The already executed hold display information stored by the game by the player is deleted at the timing when the next player starts the game. Therefore, the next player does not feel annoyed that the already-executed hold display information stored by the previous player's game remains in the already-executed hold display area.

That is, according to this feature, the next player is provided with a situation in which the game can be started in a state where the already executed hold display information by the previous player's game does not exist in the already executed hold display area. Can be done.

[Feature wH7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features wH1 to the feature wH6.
All the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the second display mode, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first. A gaming machine comprising a means for executing a predetermined suggestion effect (effect in which a female character WM appears) in the display mode of 1.

According to this feature, all the executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of the executed hold display areas is the second display mode, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area. Is the first display mode, since the means for executing a predetermined suggestion effect is provided, all the already executed hold displays clearly displayed to the player in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas. It is possible to recognize that the condition that the information is the second display mode and that all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first display mode is satisfied, and that the condition is satisfied. It is possible to recognize that the fact that is established has a special meaning.

[Feature wH8]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features wH1 to the feature wH7.
The second display mode (blue) is a gaming machine characterized in that the display mode is one higher than the first display mode (white) among the plurality of stages.

According to this feature, the second display mode is a display mode one higher than the first display mode among the plurality of stages. In other words, the second display mode is the display mode of the second lowest stage. In general, even if the reserved display information of the lowest first display mode or the second lowest display mode is displayed, the player does not have a great expectation.

However, in this feature, the hold display information displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode increases, and all the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area is displayed in the second display. When all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is aligned in the first display aspect, the game operation of the predetermined aspect can be displayed as the game rotation operation.

Therefore, according to this feature, even in a situation where the reserved display information of the first display mode and the second display mode, which the player generally does not have a great expectation of, is displayed, the game is played. Perhaps the person has increased the hold display information of the first display mode and the second display mode as it is, and as a result, all the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area is displayed in the second display. There is a sense of expectation that all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area will be aligned in the first display aspect. As a result, according to this feature, the reserved display information of the first display mode and the second display mode, which the player generally does not have a great expectation of, is given special significance. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature wH9]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features wH1 to the feature wH8.
A gaming machine characterized in that the possibility that the special gaming state may occur differs depending on the type of display mode of the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas.

According to this feature, since the possibility that a special gaming state may occur differs depending on the type of display mode of the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas, a predetermined number of already executed hold is held. Not only whether or not all the already executed hold display information displayed in the display area is aligned in the same display mode, but also in what kind of display mode the already executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is displayed. It is possible to attract the player's attention to whether or not they are aligned, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic wH10]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features wH1 to the feature wH9.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in the unexecuted hold display area (changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display icon H in the unexecuted hold display area Dh). ..

According to this feature, since the means for changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in the unexecuted hold display area is provided, for example, all the information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area as it is is provided to the player. Even in a situation where the display modes of the unexecuted hold display information do not match the same display mode, the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area may change. , It is possible to have a feeling of expectation that all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area may be aligned in the same display mode. Then, the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information actually displayed in the unexecuted hold display area changes, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area are aligned in the same display mode. In that case, it is possible to give great joy to the player, and further expectation that all the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area should be aligned in the same display mode. Can be given.

<Characteristic wI group>
The feature wI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its variants 15.

[Feature wI1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
Acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number, and
An unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Unexecuted hold display means to display and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit) for each game.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended as one of the game rotation operations, the game rotation operation (variable game that changes the symbol). And the game time control means to control
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the end of the gaming rotation operation, and the special gaming state generating means.
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition is set from high to low according to the high or low of the possibility. The pending change means suggested by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages, and
A means for limiting the direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in one direction from the lower side to the upper side.
A predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game turn after the game turn operation by the game turn control means can be displayed as the already executed hold display information (already executed hold display icon Z) (already executed). Already executed hold display means to display the hold display area Dz),
Means for changing the display mode of the already executed hold display information in the already executed hold display area (changing the display mode of the already executed hold display icon Z in the already executed hold display area Dz) and
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information, the first display mode (white) on the lowermost side among the plurality of stages and the second display mode (white) which is a higher stage than the first display mode (the first display mode). Have at least a color above white, such as blue),
All the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the second display mode, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first. In the case of the display mode of 1, the game motion of a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion (a predetermined premium reach effect can be executed to display a predetermined premium image).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to this feature, all the already executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted displayed in the unexecuted hold display area. When the hold display information is the first display mode (white), the game motion of a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion, so that all the existing games displayed in the already executed hold display area for the player can be displayed. A new expectation that has never existed before, such as wanting the execution hold display information to be aligned with the second display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area to be aligned with the first display mode. Can be embraced.

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the game rotation operation is executed, the hold display information corresponding to the game rotation of the game rotation operation is displayed in a display mode with a high possibility of satisfying a predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game round operation is completed, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the hold display information corresponding to the game times after the game times operation is executed is displayed as the already executed hold display information, and all the already executed hold displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas. When the display information is the second display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first display mode, the game operation of the predetermined mode is displayed as the game rotation operation. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already executed hold display information corresponding to the game times in which the game times operation is completed without satisfying the predetermined condition, and it is possible to attract the attention of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since the means for changing the display mode of the already executed hold display information in the already executed hold display area is provided, for example, the player is displayed in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas as it is. Even in a situation where the display modes of all the already executed hold display information are not aligned in the same display mode, the display of the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area may be displayed. It is possible to have a feeling of expectation that the mode may change and all the already executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of the already executed hold display areas may be aligned in the same display mode. Then, the display mode of the already executed hold display information actually displayed in the already executed hold display area changes, and all the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is displayed in the same manner. If the modes are aligned, the player can be greatly delighted, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area should be aligned in the same display mode. It can give a sense of expectation.

<Characteristic wJ group>
The feature wJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its variants 15.

[Feature wJ1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
Acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number, and
An unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Unexecuted hold display means to display and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value that wins a big hit) for each game.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended as one of the game rotation operations, the game rotation operation (variable game that changes the symbol). And the game time control means to control
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the end of the gaming rotation operation, and the special gaming state generating means.
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition is set from high to low according to the high or low of the possibility. The pending change means suggested by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages, and
A means for limiting the direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in one direction from the lower side to the upper side.
A predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game turn after the game turn operation by the game turn control means can be displayed as the already executed hold display information (already executed hold display icon Z) (already executed). Already executed hold display means to display the hold display area Dz),
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information, the first display mode (white) on the lowermost side among the plurality of stages and the second display mode (white) which is a higher stage than the first display mode (the first display mode). Have at least a color above white, such as blue),
The already executed hold display information in the already executed hold display area is displayed in a display mode different from the unexecuted hold display information in the unexecuted hold display area.
All the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the second display mode, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first. In the case of the display mode of 1, the game motion of a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion (a predetermined premium reach effect can be executed to display a predetermined premium image).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to this feature, all the already executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted displayed in the unexecuted hold display area. When the hold display information is the first display mode (white), the game motion of a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion, so that all the existing games displayed in the already executed hold display area for the player can be displayed. A new expectation that has never existed before, such as wanting the execution hold display information to be aligned with the second display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area to be aligned with the first display mode. Can be embraced.

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the game rotation operation is executed, the hold display information corresponding to the game rotation of the game rotation operation is displayed in a display mode with a high possibility of satisfying a predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game round operation is completed, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the hold display information corresponding to the game times after the game times operation is executed is displayed as the already executed hold display information, and all the already executed hold displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas. When the display information is the second display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first display mode, the game operation of the predetermined mode is displayed as the game rotation operation. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already executed hold display information corresponding to the game times in which the game times operation is completed without satisfying the predetermined condition, and it is possible to attract the attention of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, the already executed hold display information in the already executed hold display area is displayed in a display mode different from the unexecuted hold display information in the unexecuted hold display area. It is possible to give recognition that the execution hold display information is different from the unexecuted hold display information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that there is unexecuted hold information for which the game times have not been executed yet in the situation where the already executed hold display information is displayed.

<Characteristic wK group>
The feature wK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its variants 15.

[Feature wK1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
Acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number, and
An unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Unexecuted hold display means to display and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit) for each game.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended as one of the game rotation operations, the game rotation operation (variable game that changes the symbol). And the game time control means to control
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the end of the gaming rotation operation, and the special gaming state generating means.
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition is set from high to low according to the high or low of the possibility. The pending change means suggested by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages, and
A means for limiting the direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in one direction from the lower side to the upper side.
A predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game turn after the game turn operation by the game turn control means can be displayed as the already executed hold display information (already executed hold display icon Z) (already executed). Already executed hold display means to display the hold display area Dz),
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information, the first display mode (white) on the lowermost side among the plurality of stages and the second display mode (white) which is a higher stage than the first display mode (the first display mode). Have at least a color above white, such as blue),
The number of the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area is a certain number, and the number of the already executed hold display information is fixed.
All the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the second display mode, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first. In the case of the display mode of 1, the game motion of a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion (a predetermined premium reach effect can be executed to display a predetermined premium image).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to this feature, all the already executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted displayed in the unexecuted hold display area. When the hold display information is the first display mode (white), the game motion of a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion, so that all the existing games displayed in the already executed hold display area for the player can be displayed. A new expectation that has never existed before, such as wanting the execution hold display information to be aligned with the second display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area to be aligned with the first display mode. Can be embraced.

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the game rotation operation is executed, the hold display information corresponding to the game rotation of the game rotation operation is displayed in a display mode with a high possibility of satisfying a predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game round operation is completed, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the hold display information corresponding to the game times after the game times operation is executed is displayed as the already executed hold display information, and all the already executed hold displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas. When the display information is the second display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first display mode, the game operation of the predetermined mode is displayed as the game rotation operation. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already executed hold display information corresponding to the game times in which the game times operation is completed without satisfying the predetermined condition, and it is possible to attract the attention of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since the number of the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area is a certain number, all the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area have the same display mode. The difficulty level is constant. Therefore, it is possible to avoid changing the difficulty level and giving the player an unnecessary feeling of expectation or disappointment.

<Characteristic wL group>
The feature wL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its variants 15.

[Feature wL1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
Acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number, and
An unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Unexecuted hold display means to display and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit) for each game.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended as one of the game rotation operations, the game rotation operation (variable game that changes the symbol). And the game time control means to control
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the end of the gaming rotation operation, and the special gaming state generating means.
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition is set from high to low according to the high or low of the possibility. The pending change means suggested by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages, and
A means for limiting the direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in one direction from the lower side to the upper side.
A predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game turn after the game turn operation by the game turn control means can be displayed as the already executed hold display information (already executed hold display icon Z) (already executed). Already executed hold display means to display the hold display area Dz),
A means for erasing the already-executed hold display information displayed in the already-executed hold display area based on the establishment of the erasure condition (erasing based on the establishment of the erasure condition that a predetermined time has elapsed).
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information, the first display mode (white) on the lowermost side among the plurality of stages and the second display mode (white) which is a higher stage than the first display mode (the first display mode). Have at least a color above white, such as blue),
All the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the second display mode, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first. In the case of the display mode of 1, the game motion of a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion (a predetermined premium reach effect can be executed to display a predetermined premium image).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to this feature, all the already executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted displayed in the unexecuted hold display area. When the hold display information is the first display mode (white), the game motion of a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion, so that all the existing games displayed in the already executed hold display area for the player can be displayed. A new expectation that has never existed before, such as wanting the execution hold display information to be aligned with the second display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area to be aligned with the first display mode. Can be embraced.

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the game rotation operation is executed, the hold display information corresponding to the game rotation of the game rotation operation is displayed in a display mode with a high possibility of satisfying a predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game round operation is completed, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the hold display information corresponding to the game times after the game times operation is executed is displayed as the already executed hold display information, and all the already executed hold displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas. When the display information is the second display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first display mode, the game operation of the predetermined mode is displayed as the game rotation operation. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already executed hold display information corresponding to the game times in which the game times operation is completed without satisfying the predetermined condition, and it is possible to attract the attention of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area is deleted based on the establishment of the deletion condition. Therefore, for example, the game of the previous player in the already executed hold display area. It is possible to prevent the next player from being annoyed by the fact that the already executed hold display information remains.

Specifically, for example, a case where a configuration in which the erasing condition is satisfied when the game has not been played for a predetermined time in the game machine will be described. In the case of adopting this configuration, if the player who was playing the game on the game machine stops the game and the next player newly starts the game on the game machine after a predetermined time has elapsed, the previous game is played. The already executed hold display information stored by the game by the player is deleted at the timing when the next player starts the game. Therefore, the next player does not feel annoyed that the already-executed hold display information stored by the previous player's game remains in the already-executed hold display area.

That is, according to this feature, the next player is provided with a situation in which the game can be started in a state where the already executed hold display information by the previous player's game does not exist in the already executed hold display area. Can be done.

<Characteristic wM group>
The feature wM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its variants 15.

[Feature wM1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
Acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number, and
An unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Unexecuted hold display means to display and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit) for each game.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended as one of the game rotation operations, the game rotation operation (variable game that changes the symbol). And the game time control means to control
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the end of the gaming rotation operation, and the special gaming state generating means.
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition is set from high to low according to the high or low of the possibility. The pending change means suggested by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages, and
A means for limiting the direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in one direction from the lower side to the upper side.
A predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game turn after the game turn operation by the game turn control means can be displayed as the already executed hold display information (already executed hold display icon Z) (already executed). Already executed hold display means to display the hold display area Dz),
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information, the first display mode (white) on the lowermost side among the plurality of stages and the second display mode (white) which is a higher stage than the first display mode (the first display mode). Have at least a color above white, such as blue),
All the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the second display mode, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first. In the case of the display mode of 1, the game motion of a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion (a predetermined premium reach effect can be executed and a predetermined premium image can be displayed).
All the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the second display mode, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first. A gaming machine comprising a means for executing a predetermined suggestion effect (effect in which a female character WM appears) in the display mode of 1.

According to this feature, all the already executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted displayed in the unexecuted hold display area. When the hold display information is the first display mode (white), the game motion of a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion, so that all the existing games displayed in the already executed hold display area for the player can be displayed. A new expectation that has never existed before, such as wanting the execution hold display information to be aligned with the second display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area to be aligned with the first display mode. Can be embraced.

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the game rotation operation is executed, the hold display information corresponding to the game rotation of the game rotation operation is displayed in a display mode with a high possibility of satisfying a predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game round operation is completed, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the hold display information corresponding to the game times after the game times operation is executed is displayed as the already executed hold display information, and all the already executed hold displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas. When the display information is the second display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first display mode, the game operation of the predetermined mode is displayed as the game rotation operation. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already executed hold display information corresponding to the game times in which the game times operation is completed without satisfying the predetermined condition, and it is possible to attract the attention of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, all the already executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the second display mode, and all the unexecuted hold displayed in the unexecuted hold display area. Since the means for executing a predetermined suggestion effect is provided when the display information is the first display mode, all the already executed executions displayed in the predetermined number of already executed pending display areas are clearly shown to the player. It is possible to recognize that the condition that the hold display information is the second display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first display mode is satisfied. It is possible to recognize that the fulfillment of the condition has a special meaning.

<Characteristic wN group>
The feature wN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its variants 15.

[Feature wN1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
Acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number, and
An unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Unexecuted hold display means to display and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value that wins a big hit) for each game.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended as one of the game rotation operations, the game rotation operation (variable game that changes the symbol). And the game time control means to control
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the end of the gaming rotation operation, and the special gaming state generating means.
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition is set from high to low according to the high or low of the possibility. The pending change means suggested by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages, and
A means for limiting the direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in one direction from the lower side to the upper side.
A predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game turn after the game turn operation by the game turn control means can be displayed as the already executed hold display information (already executed hold display icon Z) (already executed). Already executed hold display means to display the hold display area Dz),
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information, the first display mode (white) on the lowermost side among the plurality of stages and the second display mode (white) which is a higher stage than the first display mode (the first display mode). Have at least a color above white, such as blue),
The second display mode (blue) is a display mode one higher than the first display mode (white) among the plurality of stages.
All the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the second display mode, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first. In the case of the display mode of 1, the game motion of a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion (a predetermined premium reach effect can be executed to display a predetermined premium image).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to this feature, all the already executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted displayed in the unexecuted hold display area. When the hold display information is the first display mode (white), the game motion of a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion, so that all the existing games displayed in the already executed hold display area for the player can be displayed. A new expectation that has never existed before, such as wanting the execution hold display information to be aligned with the second display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area to be aligned with the first display mode. Can be embraced.

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the game rotation operation is executed, the hold display information corresponding to the game rotation of the game rotation operation is displayed in a display mode with a high possibility of satisfying a predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game round operation is completed, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the hold display information corresponding to the game times after the game times operation is executed is displayed as the already executed hold display information, and all the already executed hold displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas. When the display information is the second display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first display mode, the game operation of the predetermined mode is displayed as the game rotation operation. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already executed hold display information corresponding to the game times in which the game times operation is completed without satisfying the predetermined condition, and it is possible to attract the attention of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, the second display mode is a display mode one higher than the first display mode among the plurality of stages. In other words, the second display mode is the display mode of the second lowest stage. In general, even if the reserved display information of the lowest first display mode or the second lowest display mode is displayed, the player does not have a great expectation.

However, in this feature, the hold display information displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode increases, and all the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area is displayed in the second display. When all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is aligned in the first display aspect, the game operation of the predetermined aspect can be displayed as the game rotation operation.

Therefore, according to this feature, even in a situation where the reserved display information of the first display mode and the second display mode, which the player generally does not have a great expectation of, is displayed, the game is played. Perhaps the person has increased the hold display information of the first display mode and the second display mode as it is, and as a result, all the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area is displayed in the second display. There is a sense of expectation that all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area will be aligned in the first display aspect. As a result, according to this feature, the reserved display information of the first display mode and the second display mode, which the player generally does not have a great expectation of, is given special significance. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic wO group>
The feature wO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its variants 15.

[Characteristic wO1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
Acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number, and
An unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Unexecuted hold display means to display and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit) for each game.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended as one of the game rotation operations, the game rotation operation (variable game that changes the symbol). And the game time control means to control
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the end of the gaming rotation operation, and the special gaming state generating means.
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition is set from high to low according to the high or low of the possibility. The pending change means suggested by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages, and
A means for limiting the direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in one direction from the lower side to the upper side.
A predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game turn after the game turn operation by the game turn control means can be displayed as the already executed hold display information (already executed hold display icon Z) (already executed). Already executed hold display means to display the hold display area Dz),
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information, the first display mode (white) on the lowermost side among the plurality of stages and the second display mode (white) which is a higher stage than the first display mode (the first display mode). Have at least a color above white, such as blue),
All the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the second display mode, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first. In the case of the display mode of 1, the game motion of a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion (a predetermined premium reach effect can be executed and a predetermined premium image can be displayed).
A gaming machine characterized in that the possibility that the special gaming state may occur differs depending on the type of display mode of the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas.

According to this feature, all the already executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted displayed in the unexecuted hold display area. When the hold display information is the first display mode (white), the game motion of a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion, so that all the existing games displayed in the already executed hold display area for the player can be displayed. A new expectation that has never existed before, such as wanting the execution hold display information to be aligned with the second display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area to be aligned with the first display mode. Can be embraced.

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the game rotation operation is executed, the hold display information corresponding to the game rotation of the game rotation operation is displayed in a display mode with a high possibility of satisfying a predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game round operation is completed, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the hold display information corresponding to the game times after the game times operation is executed is displayed as the already executed hold display information, and all the already executed hold displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas. When the display information is the second display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first display mode, the game operation of the predetermined mode is displayed as the game rotation operation. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already executed hold display information corresponding to the game times in which the game times operation is completed without satisfying the predetermined condition, and it is possible to attract the attention of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, the possibility that a special gaming state may occur differs depending on the type of display mode of the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas. Not only whether or not all the already executed hold display information displayed in the execution hold display area is aligned in the same display mode, but also what kind of display is the already executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas. It is possible to attract the player's attention to whether or not they are aligned according to the mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic wP group>
The feature wP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its variants 15.

[Feature wP1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
Acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number, and
An unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Unexecuted hold display means to display and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit) for each game.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended as one of the game rotation operations, the game rotation operation (variable game that changes the symbol). And the game time control means to control
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the end of the gaming rotation operation, and the special gaming state generating means.
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition is set from high to low according to the high or low of the possibility. The pending change means suggested by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages, and
A means for limiting the direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in one direction from the lower side to the upper side.
A predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game turn after the game turn operation by the game turn control means can be displayed as the already executed hold display information (already executed hold display icon Z) (already executed). Already executed hold display means to display the hold display area Dz),
Means for changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in the unexecuted hold display area (changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display icon H in the unexecuted hold display area Dh) and
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information, the first display mode (white) on the lowermost side among the plurality of stages and the second display mode (white) which is a higher stage than the first display mode (the first display mode). Have at least a color above white, such as blue),
All the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the second display mode, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first. In the case of the display mode of 1, the game motion of a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion (a predetermined premium reach effect can be executed to display a predetermined premium image).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to this feature, all the already executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted displayed in the unexecuted hold display area. When the hold display information is the first display mode (white), the game motion of a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion, so that all the existing games displayed in the already executed hold display area for the player can be displayed. A new expectation that has never existed before, such as wanting the execution hold display information to be aligned with the second display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area to be aligned with the first display mode. Can be embraced.

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the game rotation operation is executed, the hold display information corresponding to the game rotation of the game rotation operation is displayed in a display mode with a high possibility of satisfying a predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game round operation is completed, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the hold display information corresponding to the game times after the game times operation is executed is displayed as the already executed hold display information, and all the already executed hold displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas. When the display information is the second display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first display mode, the game operation of the predetermined mode is displayed as the game rotation operation. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already executed hold display information corresponding to the game times in which the game times operation is completed without satisfying the predetermined condition, and it is possible to attract the attention of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since the means for changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in the unexecuted hold display area is provided, the player is displayed, for example, in the unexecuted hold display area as it is. Even in a situation where the display modes of all unexecuted hold display information do not match the same display mode, the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area may change. Then, it is possible to have a feeling of expectation that all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area may be aligned in the same display mode. Then, the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information actually displayed in the unexecuted hold display area changes, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area are aligned in the same display mode. In that case, it is possible to give great joy to the player, and further expectation that all the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area should be aligned in the same display mode. Can be given.

<Characteristic wQ group>
The feature wQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its variants 15.

[Feature wQ1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
Acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number, and
An unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Unexecuted hold display means to display and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit) for each game.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended as one of the game rotation operations, the game rotation operation (variable game that changes the symbol). And the game time control means to control
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the end of the gaming rotation operation, and the special gaming state generating means.
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition is set from high to low according to the high or low of the possibility. The pending change means suggested by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages, and
A means for limiting the direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in one direction from the lower side to the upper side.
A predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game turn after the game turn operation by the game turn control means can be displayed as the already executed hold display information (already executed hold display icon Z) (already executed). Already executed hold display means to display the hold display area Dz),
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information, the first display mode (white) on the lowermost side among the plurality of stages and the second display mode (white) which is a higher stage than the first display mode (the first display mode). Have at least a color above white, such as blue),
All the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the second display mode, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first. In the case of the display mode of 1, the game motion of a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion (a predetermined premium reach effect can be executed and a predetermined premium image can be displayed).
All the executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of the executed hold display areas is the first display mode (white), and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area. Is the second display mode (blue), the gaming machine is characterized in that the result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state (the image notifying the jackpot winning) can be displayed as the result of the gaming round. ..

According to this feature, all the already executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the second display mode (blue), and all the unexecuted displayed in the unexecuted hold display area. When the hold display information is the first display mode (white), the game motion of a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion, so that all the existing games displayed in the already executed hold display area for the player can be displayed. A new expectation that has never existed before, such as wanting the execution hold display information to be aligned with the second display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area to be aligned with the first display mode. Can be embraced.

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the game rotation operation is executed, the hold display information corresponding to the game rotation of the game rotation operation is displayed in a display mode with a high possibility of satisfying a predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game round operation is completed, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the hold display information corresponding to the game times after the game times operation is executed is displayed as the already executed hold display information, and all the already executed hold displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas. When the display information is the second display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first display mode, the game operation of the predetermined mode is displayed as the game rotation operation. obtain. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already executed hold display information corresponding to the game times in which the game times operation is completed without satisfying the predetermined condition, and it is possible to attract the attention of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, all the already executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the first display mode, and all the unexecuted hold displayed in the unexecuted hold display area. When the display information is the second display mode, the result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state can be displayed as the result of the game round, so that all the results displayed in the already executed hold display area for the player can be displayed. An unprecedented new expectation that the already executed hold display information is aligned with the first display mode, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is aligned with the second display mode. You can feel it.

<Characteristic wR group>
The feature wR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its variants 15.

[Feature wR1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
Acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number, and
An unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Unexecuted hold display means to display and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit) for each game.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended as one of the game rotation operations, the game rotation operation (variable game that changes the symbol). And the game time control means to control
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the end of the gaming rotation operation, and the special gaming state generating means.
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition is set from high to low according to the high or low of the possibility. The pending change means suggested by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages, and
A means for limiting the direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in one direction from the lower side to the upper side.
A predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game turn after the game turn operation by the game turn control means can be displayed as the already executed hold display information (already executed hold display icon Z) (already executed). Already executed hold display means to display the hold display area Dz),
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information, the first display mode (white) on the lowermost side among the plurality of stages and the second display mode (white) which is a higher stage than the first display mode (the first display mode). Have at least a color above white, such as blue),
All the executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of the executed hold display areas is the first display mode (white), and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area. Is the second display mode (blue), the gaming machine is characterized in that the result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state (the image notifying the jackpot winning) can be displayed as the result of the gaming round. ..

According to this feature, all the executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of the executed hold display areas is the first display mode, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area. Is the second display mode, since the result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state can be displayed as the result of the game round, all the already executed executions displayed in the already executed execution hold display area are displayed to the player. There is a new expectation that has never been seen before, such as wanting the hold display information to be aligned in the first display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area to be aligned in the second display mode. Can be embraced.

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the game rotation operation is executed, the hold display information corresponding to the game rotation of the game rotation operation is displayed in a display mode with a high possibility of satisfying a predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game round operation is completed, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the hold display information corresponding to the game times after the game times operation is executed is displayed as the already executed hold display information, and all the already executed hold displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas. When the display information is the first display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the second display mode, it corresponds to the occurrence of a special gaming state as a result of the game times. The result can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already executed hold display information corresponding to the game times in which the game times operation is completed without satisfying the predetermined condition, and it is possible to attract the attention of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature wR2]
The gaming machine described in the feature wR1.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for changing the display mode of the already executed hold display information in the already executed hold display area (changing the display mode of the already executed hold display icon Z in the already executed hold display area Dz). ..

According to this feature, since the means for changing the display mode of the already executed hold display information in the already executed hold display area is provided, the player is displayed, for example, in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas as it is. Even in a situation where all the display modes of the already executed hold display information are not aligned in the same display mode, the display mode of the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area may be different. It is possible to have a feeling of expectation that all the already executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas may be aligned in the same display mode. Then, the display mode of the already executed hold display information actually displayed in the already executed hold display area changes, and all the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is displayed in the same manner. If the modes are aligned, the player can be greatly delighted, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area should be aligned in the same display mode. It can give a sense of expectation.

[Feature wR3]
The gaming machine according to the feature wR1 or the feature wR2.
A gaming machine characterized in that the already executed hold display information in the already executed hold display area is displayed in a display mode different from the unexecuted hold display information in the unexecuted hold display area.

According to this feature, the already executed hold display information in the already executed hold display area is displayed in a display mode different from the unexecuted hold display information in the unexecuted hold display area. It is possible to give recognition that the displayed information is different from the unexecuted pending display information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that there is unexecuted hold information for which the game times have not been executed yet in the situation where the already executed hold display information is displayed.

[Feature wR4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature wR1 to the feature wR3.
A gaming machine characterized in that the number of the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area is a certain number.

According to this feature, since the number of the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area is a certain number, it is difficult to arrange all the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area in the same display mode. The degree becomes constant. Therefore, it is possible to avoid changing the difficulty level and giving the player an unnecessary feeling of expectation or disappointment.

[Feature wR5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature wR1 to the feature wR4.
It is characterized by comprising means for erasing the already-executed hold display information displayed in the already-executed hold display area based on the establishment of the erasing condition (erasing based on the establishment of the erasing condition that a predetermined time has elapsed). A game machine.

According to this feature, the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area is deleted based on the establishment of the deletion condition. Therefore, for example, the previous player's game has already been performed in the already executed hold display area. It is possible to prevent the next player from feeling annoyed because the execution hold display information remains.

Specifically, for example, a case where a configuration in which the erasing condition is satisfied when the game has not been played for a predetermined time in the game machine will be described. In the case of adopting this configuration, if the player who was playing the game on the game machine stops the game and the next player newly starts the game on the game machine after a predetermined time has elapsed, the previous game is played. The already executed hold display information stored by the game by the player is deleted at the timing when the next player starts the game. Therefore, the next player does not feel annoyed that the already-executed hold display information stored by the previous player's game remains in the already-executed hold display area.

That is, according to this feature, the next player is provided with a situation in which the game can be started in a state where the already executed hold display information by the previous player's game does not exist in the already executed hold display area. Can be done.

[Feature wR6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature wR1 to the feature wR5.
All the executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of the executed hold display areas is the first display mode, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first display mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a predetermined suggestion effect (effect in which a female character WM appears) in the display mode of 2.

According to this feature, all the already executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the first display mode, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area. Is the second display mode, since the means for executing a predetermined suggestion effect is provided, all the already executed hold displays clearly displayed to the player in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas. It is possible to recognize that the condition that the information is the first display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the second display mode is satisfied, and the condition is satisfied. It is possible to recognize that the fact that is established has a special meaning.

[Feature wR7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature wR1 to the feature wR6.
The second display mode (blue) is a gaming machine characterized in that the display mode is one higher than the first display mode (white) among the plurality of stages.

According to this feature, the second display mode is a display mode one higher than the first display mode among the plurality of stages. In other words, the second display mode is the display mode of the second lowest stage. In general, even if the reserved display information of the lowest first display mode or the second lowest display mode is displayed, the player does not have a great expectation.

However, in this feature, the hold display information displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode increases, and all the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area is displayed in the first display. When all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is aligned in the second display aspect, the result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state can be displayed as the result of the game times. ..

Therefore, according to this feature, even in a situation where the reserved display information of the first display mode and the second display mode, which the player generally does not have a great expectation of, is displayed, the game is played. Perhaps the person has increased the hold display information of the first display mode and the second display mode as it is, and as a result, all the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area is displayed in the first display. There is a sense of expectation that all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area will be aligned in the second display aspect. As a result, according to this feature, the reserved display information of the first display mode and the second display mode, which the player generally does not have a great expectation of, is given special significance. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature wR8]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature wR1 to the feature wR7.
A gaming machine characterized in that the possibility that the special gaming state may occur differs depending on the type of display mode of the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas.

According to this feature, since the possibility that a special gaming state may occur differs depending on the type of display mode of the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas, a predetermined number of already executed hold is held. Not only whether or not all the already executed hold display information displayed in the display area is aligned in the same display mode, but also in what kind of display mode the already executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is displayed. It is possible to attract the player's attention to whether or not they are aligned, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature wR9]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature wR1 to the feature wR8.
A gaming machine comprising means for changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in the unexecuted hold display area (changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display icon H in the unexecuted hold display area Dh). ..

According to this feature, since the means for changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in the unexecuted hold display area is provided, for example, all the information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area as it is is provided to the player. Even in a situation where the display modes of the unexecuted hold display information do not match the same display mode, the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area may change. , It is possible to have a feeling of expectation that all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area may be aligned in the same display mode. Then, the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information actually displayed in the unexecuted hold display area changes, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area are aligned in the same display mode. In that case, it is possible to give great joy to the player, and further expectation that all the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area should be aligned in the same display mode. Can be given.

<Characteristic wS group>
The feature wS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its variants 15.

[Feature wS1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
Acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number, and
An unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Unexecuted hold display means to display and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit) for each game.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended as one of the game rotation operations, the game rotation operation (variable game that changes the symbol). And the game time control means to control
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the end of the gaming rotation operation, and the special gaming state generating means.
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition is set from high to low according to the high or low of the possibility. The pending change means suggested by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages, and
A means for limiting the direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in one direction from the lower side to the upper side.
A predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game turn after the game turn operation by the game turn control means can be displayed as the already executed hold display information (already executed hold display icon Z) (already executed). Already executed hold display means to display the hold display area Dz),
Means for changing the display mode of the already executed hold display information in the already executed hold display area (changing the display mode of the already executed hold display icon Z in the already executed hold display area Dz) and
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information, the first display mode (white) on the lowermost side among the plurality of stages and the second display mode (white) which is a higher stage than the first display mode (the first display mode). Have at least a color above white, such as blue),
All the executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of the executed hold display areas is the first display mode (white), and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area. Is the second display mode (blue), the gaming machine is characterized in that the result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state (the image notifying the jackpot winning) can be displayed as the result of the gaming round. ..

According to this feature, all the executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of the executed hold display areas is the first display mode, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area. Is the second display mode, since the result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state can be displayed as the result of the game round, all the already executed executions displayed in the already executed execution hold display area are displayed to the player. There is a new expectation that has never been seen before, such as wanting the hold display information to be aligned in the first display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area to be aligned in the second display mode. Can be embraced.

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the game rotation operation is executed, the hold display information corresponding to the game rotation of the game rotation operation is displayed in a display mode with a high possibility of satisfying a predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game round operation is completed, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the hold display information corresponding to the game times after the game times operation is executed is displayed as the already executed hold display information, and all the already executed hold displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas. When the display information is the first display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the second display mode, it corresponds to the occurrence of a special gaming state as a result of the game times. The result can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already executed hold display information corresponding to the game times in which the game times operation is completed without satisfying the predetermined condition, and it is possible to attract the attention of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, since the means for changing the display mode of the already executed hold display information in the already executed hold display area is provided, for example, the player is displayed in a predetermined number of already executed hold display areas as it is. Even in a situation where the display modes of all the already executed hold display information are not aligned in the same display mode, the display of the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area may be displayed. It is possible to have a feeling of expectation that the mode may change and all the already executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of the already executed hold display areas may be aligned in the same display mode. Then, the display mode of the already executed hold display information actually displayed in the already executed hold display area changes, and all the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is displayed in the same manner. If the modes are aligned, the player can be greatly delighted, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area should be aligned in the same display mode. It can give a sense of expectation.

<Characteristic wT group>
The feature wT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its variants 15.

[Feature wT1]
A ball entry means (first starting port 33) through which a game ball can enter, and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (value of the winning random number counter C1) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means.
Acquired information storage means (first holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means up to a specific upper limit number, and
An unexecuted hold display area (unexecuted hold display area Dh) capable of displaying a number of unexecuted hold display information (unexecuted hold display icon H) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Unexecuted hold display means to display and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (matching a value for winning a big hit) for each game.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended as one of the game rotation operations, the game rotation operation (variable game that changes the symbol). And the game time control means to control
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player after the end of the gaming rotation operation, and the special gaming state generating means.
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition is set from high to low according to the high or low of the possibility. The pending change means suggested by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages, and
A means for limiting the direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in one direction from the lower side to the upper side.
A predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game turn after the game turn operation by the game turn control means can be displayed as the already executed hold display information (already executed hold display icon Z) (already executed). Already executed hold display means to display the hold display area Dz),
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information, the first display mode (white) on the lowermost side among the plurality of stages and the second display mode (white) which is a higher stage than the first display mode (the first display mode). Have at least a color above white, such as blue),
The already executed hold display information in the already executed hold display area is displayed in a display mode different from the unexecuted hold display information in the unexecuted hold display area.
All the executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of the executed hold display areas is the first display mode (white), and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area. Is the second display mode (blue), the gaming machine is characterized in that the result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state (the image notifying the jackpot winning) can be displayed as the result of the gaming round. ..

According to this feature, all the executed hold display information displayed in a predetermined number of the executed hold display areas is the first display mode, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area. Is the second display mode, since the result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state can be displayed as the result of the game round, all the already executed executions displayed in the already executed execution hold display area are displayed to the player. There is a new expectation that has never been seen before, such as wanting the hold display information to be aligned in the first display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area to be aligned in the second display mode. Can be embraced.

In particular, in the conventional gaming machine, after the game rotation operation is executed, the hold display information corresponding to the game rotation of the game rotation operation is displayed in a display mode with a high possibility of satisfying a predetermined condition. However, if the reserved display information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the game round operation is completed, the display mode loses its meaning.

However, according to this feature, the hold display information corresponding to the game times after the game times operation is executed is displayed as the already executed hold display information, and all the already executed hold displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas. When the display information is the first display mode and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the second display mode, it corresponds to the occurrence of a special gaming state as a result of the game times. The result can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give meaning to the already executed hold display information corresponding to the game times in which the game times operation is completed without satisfying the predetermined condition, and it is possible to attract the attention of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this feature, the already executed hold display information in the already executed hold display area is displayed in a display mode different from the unexecuted hold display information in the unexecuted hold display area. It is possible to give recognition that the execution hold display information is different from the unexecuted hold display information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that there is unexecuted hold information for which the game times have not been executed yet in the situation where the already executed hold display information is displayed.

The invention of each of the above feature groups solves the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, there are various structures, controls, productions, etc. for the purpose of improving the interest of games, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, and simplifying control. Technical improvements have been made from the point of view.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as finding and deterring illegal acts by the player and unauthorized modification of the gaming machine.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further technical improvements are desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, and providing sounder games. It is rare.

It should be noted that a configuration in which one or a plurality of configurations included in each of the above feature groups are appropriately combined may be adopted. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The following shows the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above feature groups can be applied or is applied to each feature group.

Pachinko gaming machine: A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player, and a ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area. An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a pachinko ball has entered the ball entry means, an acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the acquisition information. A gaming machine including a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the special information stored in the storage means satisfies a predetermined condition.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: Operation of a pattern display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, a start means for starting the variable display of the plurality of patterns due to the operation of the start operation means, and an operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine including a stopping means for stopping the variable display of the plurality of symbols due to the above or due to the passage of a predetermined time, and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be realized with various configurations within a range not deviating from the gist thereof. The technical features included in the above embodiments, modifications, and feature groups are appropriate to solve some or all of the above-mentioned problems, or to achieve some or all of the above-mentioned effects. , Can be replaced or combined. Further, if the technical feature is not described as essential in the present specification, it can be appropriately deleted.

10 ... Pachinko machine 11 ... Outer frame 12 ... Pachinko machine body 13 ... Inner frame 14 ... Front door frame 15 ... Hinge 16 ... Hinge 17 ... Cylinder lock 18. .. Window 19 ... Glass unit 20 ... Upper plate 21 ... Lower plate 22 ... Discharge port 23 ... Lever 24 ... Direction operation button 25 ... Operation handle 30 ... Game board 31 ... Induction rail 31a ... Inner rail part 31b ... Outer rail part 60 ... Main control device 70 ... Payout control device 71 ... Payout device 80 ... Launch control device 81 ... Game ball launch mechanism 85 ... Power supply device 90 ... Voice emission control device 100 ... Display control device

[form]
A game processing execution means capable of executing a predetermined game processing when a predetermined power is supplied, and a game processing execution means.
A power failure processing execution means capable of executing a predetermined power interruption process when it is determined that the predetermined power is cut off in a predetermined state.
Equipped with
A gaming machine that can be in a playable state when the predetermined power is supplied by a predetermined method after a power failure.
Displacement means that can be displaced to the first position and the second position, can be in a predetermined non-energized state when located in the first position, and can be in a predetermined energized state when located in the second position.
A storage means that can hold predetermined information during a power failure,
A means for determining the predetermined information stored in the storage means when the predetermined power is supplied after the power failure, and a means for determining the predetermined information.
A state determining means capable of determining the state of the displacement means when the predetermined electric power is supplied to the gaming machine, and a state determining means.
At a predetermined timing after the predetermined power is supplied to the gaming machine, the state determination means determines information corresponding to the position of the displacement means, and the displacement means is positioned at the first position by the determination. The first process is executed in the first case where it is determined that the information corresponding to the above is set, and the information corresponding to the position of the displacement means at the first position is set by the determination. A process execution means for executing a second process, which is a process different from the first process in the second case determined to be none.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

Claims (10)

A means of entering a ball that allows a game ball to enter,
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of a game ball into the entry means,
An acquisition information storage means that can store up to a specific upper limit number of the special information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means.
The unexecuted hold display means for displaying the unexecuted hold display area capable of displaying the number of unexecuted hold display information corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and the unexecuted hold display means.
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition for each game.
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is terminated as one of the game rotation operations, the game rotation control means for controlling the game rotation operation is used. ,
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player after the end of the gaming rotation operation, and the special gaming state generating means.
The possibility that the special information corresponding to the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area satisfies the predetermined condition is set from high to low according to the high or low of the possibility. The pending change means suggested by changing the display mode of the unexecuted pending display information according to a plurality of stages, and
A means for limiting the direction of change of the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in one direction from the lower side to the upper side.
A pre-execution hold display means that displays a pre-execution hold display area capable of displaying a predetermined number of hold display information corresponding to the game replay operation by the game replay control means as pre-execution hold display information, and a pre-execution hold display means.
Equipped with
As the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information, at least a first display mode on the lowermost side among the plurality of stages and a second display mode which is a stage higher than the first display mode are at least. Have and
All the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the second display mode, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first. A gaming machine characterized in that, in the case of the display mode of 1, the game motion of a predetermined mode can be displayed as the game rotation motion. The gaming machine according to claim 1.
All the executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of the executed hold display areas is the first display mode, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first display mode. A gaming machine characterized in that, in the case of the display mode of 2, the result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state can be displayed as the result of the gaming round. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.
A gaming machine comprising means for changing the display mode of the already-executed hold display information in the already-executed hold display area. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
A gaming machine characterized in that the already executed hold display information in the already executed hold display area is displayed in a display mode different from the unexecuted hold display information in the unexecuted hold display area. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
A gaming machine characterized in that the number of the already executed hold display information displayed in the already executed hold display area is a certain number. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
A gaming machine comprising means for erasing the already-executed hold display information displayed in the already-executed hold display area based on the establishment of an erasing condition. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6.
All the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas is the second display mode, and all the unexecuted hold display information displayed in the unexecuted hold display area is the first. A gaming machine comprising means for executing a predetermined suggestion effect in the case of the display mode of 1. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7.
The second display mode is a gaming machine characterized in that the display mode is one higher than the first display mode among the plurality of stages. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 8.
A gaming machine characterized in that the possibility that the special gaming state may occur differs depending on the type of display mode of the already executed hold display information displayed in the predetermined number of already executed hold display areas. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 9.
A gaming machine comprising means for changing the display mode of the unexecuted hold display information in the unexecuted hold display area.

Images